Skip to main content

Full text of "New and nonofficial remedies, 1937"

See other formats 


^ONOFFICIAL 
EEMEBIES 


l&37i!  I      1 


£iis~- 


3  ■'ISa  0003b3?S  b 


This  book  may  be  kept 

FOURTEEN  DAYS 


A  fine 
the  book  U 

of  TWO  CENTS 

kept  over  time. 

will  be  charged  for  each  day 

NEW   AND   NONOFFICIAL    ^^ 
REMEDIES,    1937  ^^^ 


Containing  Descriptions  of  the 


Articles  Which    Stand    Accepted  by  the   Council 

on   Pharmacy  and  Chemistry  of  the 

American   Medical    Association 

on  January  1,  1937 


American    Medical    Association 

535    North    Dearborn    Street 

CHICAGO 


Copyright,   1937,   by 

American    Medical    Association 

535    North    Dearborn    Street 

CHICAGO 


PREFACE 


New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  is  a  book  in  which  are  listed 
and  described  the  articles  that  stand  accepted  by  the  Council 
on  Pharmacy  and  Chemistry  of  the  American  Medical  Associa- 
tion on  January  1  of  the  year  of  publication.  The  descriptions 
of  accepted  articles  are  based  in  part  on  investigations  made 
by,  or  under  the  direction  of  the  Council  and  in  part  on  evidence 
or  information  supplied  by  the  manufacturer  or  his  agents. 
Statements  made  by  those  commercially  interested  are  examined 
critically  and  admitted  only  when  they  are  supported  by  other 
evidence  or  when  they   conform  t(j  known   facts. 

The  following  articles  which  appeared  in  New  and  Non- 
official  Remedies  for  1936  have  been  omitted  by  action  of  the 
Council  because  they  conflict  with  the  rules  that  govern  the 
recognition  of  articles  or  because  their  distributors  did  not 
present  evidence  to  demonstrate  their  continued  eligibility  : 
Flumerin-H.  W.  &  D. ;  Mercuric  Biniodidc  Oil  Solution  in 
Ampules.  H.  W.  &  D. 

The  following  articles  have  been  omitted  as  being  off  the 
market :  Ampule  Glucose  (U.  S.  P.  Dextrose)  Solution,  20  cc. 
size.  50  cc.  size  and  100  cc.  size  (Lederle)  ;  Ampules  Lipoiodine- 
Ciba  Diagnostic.  5  cc. ;  Ampuls  Oleo-Bi-Roche,  2  cc. ;  Anti- 
anthrax  Serum-Mulford,  packages  of  2  syringes  (10  cc.  each)  ; 
Bouillon  Filtrate  Tuberculin,  "B.  F."  (Gilliland)  ;  Butesin  Pic- 
rate  Ointment;  Capsules  Ipral-Sodium,  2  grains;  Ipral  Sodium 
Tablets,  •>4  and  2  grains;  Cholera  Vaccine  (Prophylactic) 
(Lederle),  packages  of  two  10  cc.  vials;  Cymarin ;  Diphtheria 
Toxin-Antitoxin  Alixture,  0.1  L+  (Goat)  (Lederle)  ;  Diph- 
theria Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test  (Gilliland)  ;  Diphtheria  Toxin 
for  Schick  Test  in  Peptone  Solution  (Lederle),  one  vial  (20 
tests)  ;  Diphtheria  Toxoid  (Lederle).  packages  of  two  1  cc. 
syringes  (immunization  treatment).  1  syringe  (one  sensitivity 
test),  and  1  vial  (five  sensitivity  tests);  lopax ;  Liver  Extract- 
Fairchild ;  Lunosol  Capsules,  6  grains ;  Normal  Horse-Serum 
(Lederle).  100  cc.  vial  and  30  cc.  vial;  Papaverine  Sulfate; 
Oscodal  Tablets  (Winthrop  Chemical  Co.)  ;  Papaverine  Sul- 
phate-Roche, Ampuls ;  Papaverine  Sulphate  Tablets-Roche,  0.04 
Gm. ;  Pirquet  Test  for  Tuberculosis  (Bovine  Type)  (S.  &  D.)  ; 
Quinidine  Sulphate  Capsules  (Lederle),  5  grains  (0.325  Gm.) 
and  3  grains  (0.2  Gm.)  ;  Rabies  Vaccine-Lederle  (Semple 
Method),  packages  of  14  syringes;  Rabies  Vaccine,  Semple 
Method  (Lee);  Soluble  Stomach  Extract-Fairchild ;  Sterine 
Ampoules  Mercury  Salicylate  0.097  Gm.  (1^  grain)  (Abbott)  ; 
Tuberculin  B.  F.  (Bouillon  Filtrate)  (Cutter)  ;  Tuberculin  B.  F. 
(Bovine)  (Cutter)  ;  Tuberculin  Intracutaneous  for  Mantoux 
Test  (N.  D.  Co.),  packages  of  two  5  cc.  ampules;  Tuberculin 
O.  T.  Bovine  (Cutter)  ;  Typhoid  Bacterin  (Prophylactic) 
(Abbott);  Typhoid  Combined  Vaccine  (Prophylactic)   (Lederle). 


4  PREFACE 

packages  of  30  vials,  and  one  20  cc.  vial;  Typiioid  Prophylactic 
(Cutter),   1   syringe. 

The  grouping  together  of  articles  having  similar  composition 
or  actions  is  continued  in  this  edition,  each  group  being  pre- 
ceded by  a  general  discussion.  These  general  articles  have 
been  revised  when  necessary  to  bring  them  up  to  date.  Such 
revisions  have  been  made  this  year  in  the  articles :  Arsenic 
Compounds ;  Compounds  Containing  Trivalent  Arsenic ;  Com- 
pounds Containing  Pentavalent  Arsenic ;  Bismuth  Compounds ; 
Epinephrine  and  Related  Praparations ;  Iodine  Compounds ; 
Iodine  Compounds  for  Systemic  Use;  Mercury  and  Mercury 
Compounds ;  Pituitary  Gland ;  Salicylic  Acid  Compounds ; 
Serums  and  Vaccines ;  Antipneumococcic  Serums ;  Silver  Prep- 
arations ;   Tannic  Acid  Derivatives. 

Last  year  the  section  of  Vitamin  Foods  was  taken  out  of  the 
chapter  Medicinal  Foods  and  set  up  as  an  independent  category. 
This  year  the  chapter  name  "Medicinal  Foods"  is  being  aban- 
doned and  is  replaced  by  a  chapter  describing  Carbohydrate 
Foods  chiefly  Dextrose.  A  rearrangement  has  been  made  in 
the  chapter  "Organs  of  Animals"  by  including  under  that  head 
Insulin,  Epinephrine,   Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

The  "List  of  Articles  and  Brands  Accepted  but  not 
Described  in  N.  N.  R.,"  which  was  formerly  the  "List  of 
Exempted  Articles"  was  originally  intended  primarily  for  offi- 
cial articles  marketed  under  the  official  name  with  no  unusual 
or  extraordinary  claims.  Official  articles  still  marketed  under 
proprietary  names  were  therefore  described  in  the  body  of  the 
book.  The  Council  recently  decided,  tentatively,  to_  set  up  in 
the  body  of  the  book  descriptions  of  accepted  official  articles 
in  those  cases  in  which  there  is  a  brand  marketed  under 
a  proprietary  name.  This  revision  has  been  made  in  the 
present  volume,  products  marketed  under  proprietary  names 
appearing  in  bold  face  type  and  those  marketed  under  the 
official  (nonproprietary)  names,  or  an  unessential  modification 
of  the  names,  appearing  in  light  face  capitals.  Its  continuance 
will  depend  in  the  further  action  of  the  council. 

The  statements  concerning  the  actions,  uses,  or  dosage  of 
the  following  have  been  revised:  Aminoacetic  Acid;  Antimony 
Thioglycollamide  ;  Arsphenamine :  Cevitamic  Acid ;  Digifoline- 
Ciba ;  Diluted  Erythrityl  Tetranitrate :  Diodrast ;  Diphtheria 
Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test ;  Diphtheria  Toxoid ;  Hippuran ; 
locamfen  ;  lodobismitol  with  Saligenin  ;  Mapharsen  ;  Merbaphen  ; 
Neoarsphenamine  Poison  Ivy  Extract-Lederle  (In  Almond  Oil)  ; 
Psyllium  Seed:  Rabies  Vaccine-Gilliland  (Semple  Method); 
Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate:  Salyrgan ;  Spirosal ;  Staphylococcus 
Toxoid;  Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Combined)  (Prophy- 
lactic) Refined  and  Concentrated-P.  D.  &  Co.;  Thio-Bismol; 
Thyroxine ;  Sodium  lodobismuthite ;  Soluble  lodophthalein ; 
Tryparsamide. 

The  statement  of  composition,  of  standard  of  purity,  identity, 
or  strength,  or  of  physical  qualities  has  been  revised  in  the 
cases    of   the    following:      Allergenic    Extracts-Mulford    (S,    & 


PREFACE  5 

D.)  ;  Alurate;  Apothesine  and  Adrenalin  Hypodermic  Tablets; 
Arheol ;  Azochloramid ;  Brometone ;  Brucella  Melitensis  Vac- 
cine-Lederle ;  Butyn  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co. ;  Chloretone  Inhal- 
ant;  Copper  Citrate  Ointment  (5  per  cent)-M.  E.  S.  Co.; 
Copper  Citrate  Ointment  (10  per  cent)-M.  E.  S.  Co.;  Diodrast ; 
Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined)  ;  Erysipelas 
Streptococcus  Antitoxin,  Globulin-Lederle-Modified ;  Glaseptic 
Ampoules  Mercury  Succinimide-P,  D.  &  Co..  0.01  Gm.;  Holo- 
caine  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co. ;  Holocaine  and  Adrenalin  Oint- 
ment-M. E.  S.  Co. ;  Isacen ;  Mead's  Newfoundland  Cod  Liver 
Oil ;  Mead's  Newfoundland  Cod  Liver  Oil.  Flavored ;  Nason's 
Palatable  Cod  Liver  Oil;  Pollen  Extracts-Mulford  (S.  &  D.)  ; 
Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin,  Prophylactic  (Tetanus-Gas  Gangrene 
Antitoxin)  (Cutter)  ;  Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin,  Therapeutic 
(Gas  Gangrene  Antitoxin)  (Cutter);  Silver  Lactate;  Sodium 
Cacodylate ;  Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil ;  Squibb's  Mineral  Oil  with 
Agar ;  Squibb's  Mineral  Oil  with  Agar  and  Phenolphthalein ; 
Surgical  Maggots-Lederle ;  Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin 
(Combined)  (Prophylactic)  Refined  and  Concentrated-P.  D. 
&  Co. 

The  actions  and  uses  of  many  of  the  pharmacopeial  drugs 
may  be  found  in  Useful  Drugs,  where  they  are  listed  under 
the  Latin  names. 

Solutions  referred  to  in  the  descriptions  of  qualitative  and 
quantitative  tests  are,  unless  otherwise  stated,  of  the  strength 
described  in  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia-XL 

In  the  description  of  an  article,  the  statement,  "No  U.  S. 
patent."  means  that  the  manufacturer  of  that  article  has  trans- 
mitted to  the  Council  no  claim  of  patent  protection  for  it ;  and 
the  statement.  "No  U.  S.  trademark,"  signifies  that  the  manu- 
facturer has  claimed  no  trademark  registration  in  connection 
with  the  name  of  the  article. 

In  the  descriptions  of  solutions  in  ampules,  it  is  understood 
that  the  ampule  contains  a  sufficient  excess  to  permit  with- 
drawal and  administration  of  the  stated  content;  market  pack- 
ages of  accepted  ampule  solutions  are  required  to  bear  a 
statement  to  this  effect.  This  does  not  apply  to  ampules  con- 
taining multiple  doses,  as,  for  instance,  vaccines. 

During  the  year  1937  descriptions  of  such  other  medicinal 
substances  as  are  accepted  by  the  Council  for  New  and  Non- 
official  Remedies  will  be  published  from  time  to  time  in  The 
Journal  A.  M.  A.,  and  will  be  reprinted  in  the  form  of  supple- 
ments,  which   will   be   sent   to   those    who   purchase   this   book. 

Paul  Nicholas  Leech,  Secretary. 


MEMBERS     OF     THE     COUNCIL 
E.  M.  Bailey,  Ph.D.     ------     New  Haven,  Conn. 

Chemist   in   Charge,    Connecticut   Agricultural   Experiment   Station 

David  P.  Barr,  A.B.,  M.D.,  LL.D.    -    -    -     St.  Louis,  Mo. 

Professor  of   Medicine,   Washington   University 

J.  Howard  Brown,  Ph.D.,  Sc.D.     -     -     -     -     Baltimore,  Md. 

Associate  Professor  of  Bacteriology,  Johns  Hopkins  University 
School  of   Medicine 

S.  W.  Clausen,  M.D.     -------     Rochester,  N.  Y. 

Professor  of  Pediatrics,  School  of  Medicine,  University  of  Rochester 

H.   N.   Cole,   PhB.,  M.D.     --------     Cleveland 

Associate   Clinical    Professor   of    Dermatology,    Western    Reserve 
School  of  Medicine 

C.  W.  Edmunds,  M.D.     ------    Ann  Arbor,  Mich. 

Professor  of  Materia   Medica  and  Therapeutics,   University 
of  Michigan   Medical   School 

Morris   Fishbein,   M.D.     ---------     Chicago 

Editor   of   The  Journal   of   the   American    Medical   Association 

R.  A.   Hatcher,  Phar.M.,  M.D.,  Sc.D.     -     -     -     New  York 

Professor  of  Pharmacology,  Cornell  University  Medical  College 

Ernest  E.  Irons,  M.D.,  Ph.D.    -------    Chicago 

Clinical   Professor   of   Medicine,    Rush    Medical    College 

Paul  Nicholas  Leech,  Ph.D.    -------    Chicago 

Secretary  of  the  Council,   Director  of    the   Chemical  Laboratory  of 
the   American    Medical   Association 

G.  W.  McCoy,  ALD.     -------    Washington,  D.  C. 

Director  of  the  National  Institute  of   Health,  United   States 
Public    Health    Service 

E.  M.  Nelson,  Ph.D.     ------    Washington,  D.  C. 

Chief,    Vitamin    Division,    Food    and    Drug    Administration, 
U.    S.  Department  of  Agriculture 

W.  W.  Palmer.  B.S..  ALD.     -------     New  York 

Bard   Professor   of   Medicine,   Columbia   University   College   of 
Physicians  and  Surgeons 

Wm.  C.  Rose,  Ph.D.     ---------     Urbana,  III. 

Professor    of    Biochemistry,    University    of    Illinois 

G.   H.    Simmons,   M.D.,   LL.D.     -------    Chicago 

Editor  Emeritus  of  The  Journal  of  the  American 
Medical   Association 

Torald    Sollmann,    M.D.     --------     Cleveland 

Vice-Chairman  of  the  Council;    Professor  of   Pharmacology  and  Materia 
Medica,   Western   Reserve   University    School   of   Medicine 


LIST     OF     CONSULTANTS 

Allen,   Edgar,   Ph.D New   Haven,    Conn. 

Allen,   W.    M.,    M.D Rochester,    N.    Y. 

Anderson,  W.   E.,   B.S.,    M.A New   Haven,   Conn. 

Bacon,   Asa   S Chicago,   111. 

Bayne-Jones,    S.,    M.D New    Haven,    Conn. 

Binkley,    George   W.,    M.D Cleveland,    Ohio. 

Blackfan,    Kenneth    D.,    M.D Boston,    Mass. 

Bowers,   Ralph,   M.D New  York,   N.    Y. 

Boynton,   V.    R.,    M.D Denver,    Colo. 

Branham,   Sarah  E.,   M.D Washington,   D.   C. 

Braasch,   William  F.,   M.D Rochester,   Minn. 

Brewer,   John   H.,   B.A.,    M.A Baltimore,   Md. 

Bullowa,   Jesse   G.    M.,    M.D New  York,  N.   Y. 

Burdick.   Carl    G.,    M.D New  York,  N.   Y. 

Burlingham,   Louis  H.,   M.D St.    Louis,    Mo. 

Cecil,   Russell   L.,   M.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Chamberlain,   George   W.,    M.D Philadelphia,   Pa. 

Chandler,    Earl    R Milwaukee,    Wis. 

Christian,   Henry   A Boston,    Mass. 

CoUip,   J.    B.,    M.D Montreal,    Quebec 

Cook,   E.    Fullerton.    Ph.M Philadelphia,    Pa. 

Cori,   Carl,   M.D St.    Louis,   Mo. 

Corner,   G.   W.,   M.D Rochester,   N.    Y. 

Cowgill,   George   R..   Ph.D New   Haven,    Conn. 

Crafts,    Grace.    R.N Madison,    Wis. 

Crane,  E.  J.,  B.A Columbus,   Ohio 

Crohn,   Nathan   N.,    M.D Chicago,    111. 

Cutler,   E.   C,    M.D Boston,    Mass. 

Davis,    Loyal,    M.D Chicago,  111. 

Dick,    Gladys,    M.D Chicago,  111. 

Doisy,   Edward   A.,   Ph.D St.   Louis,   Mo. 

Douglass,    Marion.    M.D Cleveland,    Ohio 

DuBois,  Eugene  F.,  M.D New  York,  N.  Y. 

Dunstan,   E.    M.,   M.D Dallas,    Tex. 

Dutcher,   R.   Adams,   M.S.,   A.M State  College,   Pa. 

Dyer,    R.   E.,    M.D Washington,    D.    C. 

Ecker,   E.   E.,   Ph.D Cleveland,    Ohio 

Eddy,  Nathan  B.,  M.D Ann  Arbor,  Mich. 

Elvehjem,    C.    A.,    Ph.D Madison,    Wis. 

Engle,   E.  T.,   Ph.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Evans,    H.    M.,    M.D Berkeley,    Calif. 

Ewing,  James   E.,   M.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Fallis,  L.   S.,  M.D Detroit,   Mich. 

Faxon,    N.    W.,    M.D Boston,    Mass. 

Fisher,   Harry   J.,   Ph.D New   Haven,    Conn. 

Frank.   R.  T.,   M.D New   York,   N.    Y. 

Furstenburg,    Albert    Carl,    M.D Ann    Arbor,    Mich. 

Garber,   F.   W.,    M.D.. Muskegon,    Mich. 

Gold,    Harry.    M.D New    York,    N.    Y. 

Goldblatt.    Harry,    M.D Cleveland,    Ohio 

Gordon,    Samuel    M.,   Ph.D Chicago,    111. 

Graham,   Evarts  A.,   M.D St.   I^ouis,    Mo. 

Hanzlik,   P.   J.,   M.D San    Francisco,    Calif. 

Hart,    E.   B.,    B.S Madison,    Wis. 

Harvey,  Samuel   C,   M.D New   Haven,   Conn. 

Hayman,   Joseph   M.,   M.D Cleveland,   Ohio 

Hines,   J.    H.,   M.D Atlanta,    Ga. 


8  LIST     OF     CONSULTANTS 

Hisaw,  F.   L.,   Ph.D Cambridge,    Mass. 

Hodges,  Paul  C,   M.D.,  Ph.D Chicago,   111. 

Hudson,  C.  W.,  Ph.D Washington,   D.   C. 

King,   C.    G.,    Ph.D Pittsburgh,    Pa. 

Kneeland,  Yale,  Jr.,   M.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Koch,  F.   C,   Ph.D Chicago,   111. 

Lahey,    Frank   H.,    M.D Boston,    Mass. 

Lenhart,  Carl  H.,  M.D Cleveland,   Ohio 

Levene,  P.   A.,   M.D New   York,   N.   Y. 

Lewis,    Dean,     M.D Baltimore,     Md. 

Lewis,    J.    M.,    M.D New  York,  N.  Y. 

Lewis,    Howard   B.,    Ph.D Ann   Arbor,    Mich. 

Loeb,   Leo,   M.D St.   Louis,    Mo. 

Luckhardt,   Arno   B.,    M.D.,    Ph.D Chicago,    111. 

Lundy,  John  S.,  M.D Rochester,  Minn. 

Marrian,  G.  F.,  M.D Toronto,   Ontario 

Martin,   Kirby  A.,   M.D New   York,    N.    Y. 

Mattill,   Henry  A.,   Ph.D Iowa   City,   la. 

McCollum,    E.    v.,    Ph.D Baltimore,    Md. 

McLester,   James    S.,    M.D Birmingham,    Ala. 

McMillan,   Parker   J Baltimore,    Md. 

Meleney,    Frank   L.,    M.D New   York,    N.   Y. 

Milhorat,  Ade  T.,  M.D New  York,  N.  Y. 

Miller,    Franklin   R.,    M.D Cleveland,    Ohio 

Moore,    C.    R.,    Ph.D Chicago,    111. 

Moore,    J.    J.,    M.D Chicago,    III. 

Moyer,    Carl   Alfred,   A.B.,    M.S Ann   Arbor,    Mich. 

Naffziger,    Howard   C,    M.D San   Francisco,    Calif. 

Nelson,   E,    E.,   M.D.,   Ph.D Ann   Arbor,    Mich. 

Orr,   Thomas  G.,    M.D Kansas   City,    Kans. 

Pendergrass,   E.   P.,    M.D Philadelphia,   Pa. 

Plummer,    Norman   H.,    M.D New   York,    N.    Y. 

Powers,  Grover  F.,   M.D New   Haven,   Conn. 

Probey,   T.   F.,   B.A Washington,   D.    C. 

Rees,   Maurice  H.,    M.D Denver,   Colo. 

Riddle,  Oscar,  Ph.D.... Cold  Spring  Harbor,  Long  Island,  N.  Y. 

Rose,   Mary  Swartz,   Ph.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Rowntree,    L.   G.,    M.D Philadelphia,   Pa. 

Sargeant,    H.    W.,    M.D Milwaukee,    Wis. 

Schmidt,   Erwin  R.,    M.D Madison,  Wis. 

Sherman,  H.   C,  Ph.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Smith,  A.    H.,    Ph.D New    Haven,    Conn. 

Smith,  P.  E.,   Ph.D New  York,   N.   Y. 

Smith,  Ralph   G.,    M.D.,   Ph.D Ann   Arbor,    Mich. 

Stainsby,   W.   J.,    M.D New   York,    N.    Y. 

Stevens,  Franklin  A.,   M.D New   York,    N.   Y. 

Sullivan,   Maurice,    M.D Cleveland,    Ohio 

Templeton,    F.    E.,    M.D Chicago,    111. 

Thornton,    E.    S.,    M.D Muskegon,    Mich. 

Turnbull,   W.    G.,   M.D Philadelphia,    Pa. 

Turner,   C.   W.,   Ph.D Columbia,    Mo. 

Veldee,    Milton   V.,    M.D Washington,    D.    C. 

Vidrine,    Arthur,    M.D New    Orleans,    La. 

Vos,  B.  J.,  Jr.,  Ph.D Chicago,  III. 

Wangensteen,    Owen   H.,    M.D Minneapolis,    Minn. 

Webster,  Bruce,   M.D. New   York.   N.   Y. 

Widmann,    Bernard    P.,    M.D Philadelphia.    Pa. 

Wood,    Francis   Carter.   M.D New   York,    N.   Y. 

Workman.  W.  G..   M.D Washington,   D.   C. 


OFFICIAL  RULES  OF  THE  COUNCIL  ON  PHARMACY 
AND  CHEMISTRY 


Introduction 
Object  of  the  Rules. — The  following  rules  have  been 
adopted  by  the  Council  primarily  with  the  object  of  protecting 
the  medical  profession  and  the  public  against  fraud,  undesirable 
secrecy  and  objectionable  advertising  in  connection  with  pro- 
prietary medicinal  articles. 

Contents  of  N.  N.  R. — The  book  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  con- 
tains a  description  of  proprietary  articles  which  have  been  accepted  as 
conforming  to  the  rules  of  the  Council;  of  such  simple  nonproprietary 
and  nonofficial  substances  as  seem  of  sufficient  importance  to  warrant 
their  inclusion,  and  of  simple  pharmaceutical  preparations,  the  inclusion 
of    which   is   believed   to   give    useful    information   to   physicians. 

Attitude  on  Mixtures. — For  admission  to  N.  N.  R.,  proprietary  phar- 
maceutic mixtures  must  comply  with  the  rules;  and,  to  determine  such 
compliance,  they  will  be  investigated  by  the  Council.  The  Council,  how- 
ever, endorses  the  principle  that  prescriptions  should  be  written  on  the 
basis  of  the  therapeutic  effects  of  the  individual  ingredients.  For  this 
reason,  it  includes  in  this  book  only  those  mixtures  that  present  some 
real  advantage. 

Rules    Governing   the   Admission   of    Proprietary 

Articles  to  the  Book  New  and  Nonofficial 

Remedies 

Definition  of  Proprietary  Articles. — The  term  "pro- 
prietary article,"  in  this  place,  shall  mean  any  chemical,  drug 
or  similar  preparation  used  in  the  treatment  of  diseases,  if  such 
article  is  protected  against  free  competition,  as  to  name,  product, 
composition  or  process  of  manufacture,  by  secrecy,  patent  or 
copyright,  or  by  any  other  means. 

Rule  1. — Composition. — No  article  will  be  accepted  _  for 
inclusion  in  the  book  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  or  retained 
therein  unless  its  composition  is  published.  For  simple  sub- 
stances, the  scientific  name  and  the  chemical  formula,  rational 
or  structural,  if  known,  should  be  supplied.  For  mixtures,  the 
ainount  of  each  active  medicinal  ingredient  in  a  given  quantity 
of  the  article  must  be  stated.  The  general  composition  of  the 
vehicle,  its  alcoholic  percentage  and  the  identity  of  the  preser- 
vatives must  be  furnished. 

Rule  2.  —  Identification.  —  No  article  will  be  accepted  or 
retained  unless  suitable  tests  for  determining  its  composition 
are  furnished  to  the  Council.  In  the  case  of  chemical  com- 
pounds, these  shall  consist  of  tests  for  identity  and  purity.  In 
the  case  of  mixtures,  description  of  methods  for  determining 
the  amount  and  strength  of  the  potent  ingredients  shall  be 
furnished,  if  practicable. 

Rule  3. — Direct  Advertising. — No  article  that  is  advertised 
to  the  public  will  be  accepted  or  retained;  but  this  rule  shall 


10       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIA]^     REMEDIES 

not  apply  to  (a)  disinfectants,  germicides  and  antiseptics,  pro- 
vided the  advertising  is  limited  to  conservative  recommendations 
for  their  use  as  prophylactic  applications  to  superficial  cuts  and 
abrasions  of  the  skin  and  to  the  mucous  surfaces  of  the  mouth, 
pharynx  and  nose  (but  not  to  those  of  the  eye,  and  the  gastro- 
intestinal and  genito-urinary  tracts)  and  provided  they  are  not 
advertised  as  curative  agents  (see  comments  to  Rule  3) ;  (b) 
liquid  petrolatum  and  simple  preparations  of  liquid  petrolatum, 
agar  and  simple  preparations  of  agar,  and  similar  preparations 
which  act  because  of  their  bulk,  provided  that  such  lay  adver- 
tising carries  a  warning  that  agar  and  similar  preparations  may 
be  harmful  in  colitis ;  (c)  other  agents  about  which  the  public 
should  be  informed  and  which  would  not  lead  to  harmful  self- 
medication  provided  (1)  that  they  are  not  advertised  as  curative 
agents  and  provided  (2)  that  the  advertising  to  the  public 
does  not  go  beyond  that  passed  by  the  Council  for  physicians 
(Rule  6). 

Rule  4. — Indirect  Advertising. — No  article  will  be  accepted 
or  retained  if  the  label,  package  or  circular  accompanying  the 
package  contains  the  names  of  diseases  in  the  treatment  of 
which  the  article  is  said  to  be  indicated.  The  therapeutic  indi- 
cations and  properties  may  be  stated,  provided  such  statements 
do  not  suggest  self -medication.  Dosage  may  be  indicated. 
(This  rule  shall  not  apply  to  remedies  with  which  self- 
medication  is  altogether  improbable,  to  vaccines  and  antitoxins, 
or  to  directions  for  administering  or  applying  remedies  when 
similar  immediate,  heroic  treatment  is  indicated.) 

Rule  5. — False  Claiais  as  to  Origin. — No  article  will  be 
accepted  or  retained  concerning  which  the  manufacturer  or  his 
agents  make  false  or  misleading  statements  as  to  source,  raw 
material  from  which  made  or  method  of  collection  or  prepa- 
ration. 

Rule  6. — Unwarranted  Therapeutic  Claims. — No  article 
will  be  accepted  or  retained  concerning  which  the  manufacturer 
or  his  agents  make  unwarranted,  exaggerated  or  misleading 
statements  as  to  the  therapeutic  value. 

Rule  7. — Poisonous  Substances. — The  principal  label  on  an 
article  containing  "poisonous"  or  "potent"  substances  must  state 
plainly  the  amount  of  each  of  such  ingredients  in  a  given  quan- 
tity of  the  product. 

Rule  8. — Objectionable  Names.  —  Proprietary  names  for 
medicinal  articles  will  be  recognized  only  when  the  Council 
shall  deem  the  use  of  such  exclusive  names  to  be  in  the  interest 
of  public  welfare.  Names  which  are  misleading  or  which  sug- 
gest diseases,  pathologic  conditions  or  therapeutic  indications 
will  not  be  recognized  (the  provision  against  therapeutically 
suggestive  names  does  not  apply  to  serums,  vaccines  and  anti- 
toxins). In  the  case  of  pharmaceutic  preparations  or  mix- 
tures, the  name  must  be  so  framed  as  to  indicate  clearly  the 
most   potent   ingredients.     Coined   names   for   salts   will   not  be 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE     COUNCIL       11 

accepted  unless  such  names  indicate  the  components  of  the  salt ; 
coined  names  for  new  substances  marketed  as  pharmaceutic 
preparations  will  not  be  accepted  unless  such  names  indicate 
definitely  the  type  or  dosage  form  of  the  article. 

Ride  9.  —  Patented  Products  and  Protected  Names.  —  If 
the  article  is  patented — either  process  or  product,  or  both — the 
number  of  such  patent  or  patents  must  be  furnished  to  the 
Council.  Furthermore,  if  the  name  of  an  article  is  registered, 
or  the  label  copyrighted,  the  registration  (trademark)  number 
and  a  copy  of  the  protected  label  should  be  furnished  the 
Council.  In  case  of  registration  in  foreign  countries,  the  name 
under  which  the  article  is  registered  should  be  supplied. 

Rule  10. — Unscientific  and  Useless  Articles. — No  article 
will  be  accepted  or  retained  which,  because  of  its  unscientific 
composition,  is  useless  or  inimical  to  the  best  interests  of  the 
public  or  of  the  medical  profession. 

Rule  11. — Policies  of  Firms  Detrimental  to  Rational 
Therapeutics. — The  Council  will  not  accept  or  retain,  if 
already  accepted,  the  articles  of  a  firm  if  in  the  opinion  of  the 
Council  the  policies  of  such  a  firm  are  clearly  detrimental  to 
the  welfare  of  the  public  and  to  medicine. 

Explanatory   Comments  on   the   Rules 

Purpose  and  Methods  of  the  Council. — The  Council  on 
Pharmacy  and  Chemistry  was  established  in  1905  by  the  Amer- 
ican Medical  Association,  primarily  for  the  purpose  of  gathering 
and  disseminating  such  information  as  will  protect  the  medical 
profession  in  the  prescribing  of  proprietary  medicinal  articles. 
In  pursuance  of  this  object,  the  Council  examines  the  articles  on 
the  market  as  to  their  compliance  with  definite  rules  designed 
to  prevent  fraud,  undesirable  secrecy  and  the  abuses  which  arise 
from  advertising  directly  or  indirectly  to  the  laity.  Such 
articles  as  appear  to  conform  to  the  rules  are  accepted,  and  their 
essential  features  are  described  in  the  annual  publication  of  the 
Council,  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  if  they  come  within 
the  scope  of  this  book. 

Submitted  Evidence. — These  descriptions  are  based  in  part 
on  investigations  made  by,  or  under  the  direction  of,  the  Coun- 
cil, but  in  part  also  on  evidence  or  information  supplied  by  the 
manufacturer  or  his  agents.  Such  interested  statements  are 
examined  critically,  and  are  admitted  only  if  they  appear  to  be 
in  conformity  with  the  evidence.  It  is,  however,  manifestly 
impossible  for  the  Council  to  investigate  the  composition  of 
every  complex  pharmaceutic  mixture,  or  to  check  thoroughly 
every  therapeutic  claim;  it  can  give  only  unbiased  judgment 
on  the  available  evidence.  Criticisms  and  corrections  of  the 
descriptions  which  may  aid  in  the  revision  of  the  matter  will 
be  appreciated. 

Previous  Noncompliance  and  Fraud. — The  Council  judges 
an  article  entirely  by  the  facts  in  evidence  at  the  time  of  its 


12       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

admission.  Previous  noncompliance  with  the  rules  (short  of 
intentional  fraud)  does  not  prevent  the  favorable  consideration 
of  an  article  which  is  in  accord  with  existing  rules. 

Reconsideration. — Infringements  of  the  rules  after  accept- 
ance of  an  article  for  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  or  the 
discovery  that  the  Council's  information  was  incorrect,  will 
cause  the  acceptance  to  be  reconsidered.  An  article  is  accepted 
for  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  and  will  continue  to  be 
included  in  the  book,  with  the  understanding  that  serious  viola- 
tions of  the  rules,  after  acceptance,  will  be  followed  by  the 
omission  of  the  article  and  publication  of  the  reasons  for  such 
omission. 

Acceptance  Not  an  Indorsement. — The  Council  desires  physi- 
cians to  understand  that  the  admission  of  an  article  does  not 
imply  a  recommendation.  Acceptance  simply  means  that  no 
conflict  with  the  rules  has  been  found  by  the  Council. 

Seal  of  Acceptance.  —  For  articles  which  are  accepted  for 
inclusion  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  or  in  the  List  of 
Articles  and  Brands  Accepted  by  the  Council  but  Not  Described 
in  N.  N.  R.,  the  Council  permits  the  use  of  its  official  seal  of 
acceptance,  with  the  following  stipulations:  (1)  The  seal  may 
be  used  on  the  packages  of  an  article  and  in  the  advertising 
for  it.  (2)  The  seal,  if  used,  must  be  the  only  seal  of  such 
character  to  appear.  No  objection  is  made,  however,  to  any 
statement  or  device  required  or  permitted  by  the  government 
indicating  compliance  with  regulations  of  a  government  bureau 
or  department.  (3)  If  the  seal  is  used  in  price  lists  and  cata- 
logs which  also  feature  unaccepted  articles,  it  must  be  used  for 
accepted  articles  in  such  a  manner  that  there  can  be  no  impli- 
cation that  the  seal  applies  to  the  unaccepted  articles.  (4)  The 
following  statement  in  reference  to  the  significance  of  the  seal 
may  be  used  in  connection  with  the  seal:  "The  'accepted' 
seal  denotes  that  [name  of  article]  has  been  accepted  for  New 
and  Nonofficial  Remedies  by  the  Council  on  Pharmacy  and 
Chemistry  of  the  American  Medical  Association."  Further 
statements  in  regard  to  the  seal  must  be  submitted  to  the 
Council  and  found  acceptable  before  they  may  be  used.  (5) 
The  size  of  the  seal  on  the  package  shall  not  be  greater  than 
one  inch  in  height  or  diameter,  and  in  advertising  it  shall  be 
in  proportion  to  the  dimensions  of  the  advertisement  so  as  to 
afford  ready  recognition ;  but  undue  size,  giving  greater  promi- 
nence to  the  seal  than  to  other  important  features  of  the  adver- 
tisement or  detracting  from  the  dignity  of  the  seal  in  the 
opinion  of  the  Council,  will  not  be  permitted.  (6)  When  for  any 
reason  the  acceptance  of  an  article  is  rescinded,  the  seal  must 
not  appear  on  new  labels  or  in  new  advertising  for  such  article ; 
and  old  labels  and  advertising  which  feature  the  seal  must  not 
be  in  circulation,  in  evidence,  or  before  the  public  longer  than 
six  months  subsequent  to  notification  of  the  revocation. 

Duration  of  Acceptance. — Unless  otherwise  determined  at 
the  time  of  acceptance,  articles  admitted  to  New  and  Nonofficial 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE     COUNCIL       13 

Remedies  will  be  retained  for  a  period  of  three  years,  provided 
that  during  that  period  they  comply  with  the  rules  and  regula- 
tions which  were  in  force  at  the  time  of  their  acceptance.  New 
evidence  indicating  that  compliance  with  the  rules  no  longer 
exists,  for  instance,  with  regard  to  unwarranted  therapeutic 
claims,  will  be  considered  the  basis  for  reconsidering  the 
acceptance  before  the  end  of  a  period  of  three  years.  At  the 
end  of  this  period,  all  articles  will  be  carefully  reexamined  for 
compliance  with  existing  rules.  Particular  weight  will  be  given 
to  the  question  as  to  whether  recent  evidence  has  substantiated 
claims  as  to  the  therapeutic  value  of  any  preparation,  this  evi- 
dence to  consist  partly  of  recent  statements  in  the  literature  and 
partly  of  the  general  esteem  in  which  the  preparation  is  held  by 
clinical  consultants  of  the  Council.  The  reacceptance  of  articles 
after  such  reexamination  shall  be  for  three  years  unless  a 
shorter  period  is  specified. 

Any  amendments  to  the  rules,  by  specific  requirements  or 
by  interpretation,  which  may  be  made  after  the  acceptance  of 
an  article,  shall  not  apply  to  such  article  until  the  period  of 
acceptance  has  elapsed.  At  the  end  of  this  period  the  article, 
if  it  is  not  eligible  under  the  amended  rules,  will  be  omitted. 

The  Scope  of  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies. — To  aid 

physicians  and  manufacturers  in  deciding  which  articles  come 
within  the  scope  of  this  book,  or,  in  other  words,  to  enable 
physicians  to  recognize  whether  an  article  which  is  not  described 
in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  has  not  been  included  because 
it  has  been  held  not  to  come  within  the  scope  of  N.  N.  R.  or 
because  it  has  been  rejected,  the  Council  furnishes  the  following 
more  detailed  definitions : 

Official  Articles.— Articles  official  in  the  U.  S.  P.  or  N.  F. 
are  exempted  from  consideration  by  the  Council  if  they  are 
marketed  under  the  official  name  or  a  name  which  makes  their 
official  status  evident,  and  if  no  unestablished  therapeutic  claims 
are  made  for  them. 

These  do  not  require  consideration  by  the  Council,  since 
standards  for  them  are  provided  in  these  books,  and  enforced 
under  the  provisions  of  the  federal  Food  and  Drugs  Act,  except 
that  they  may  be  mentioned  for  information. 

If  a  U.  S.  P.  or  N.  F.  product  is  offered  for  sale  under  a 
name  which  does  not  make  its  official  status  evident,  or  if  the 
proprietors  or  their  agents  advance  claims  that  the  product 
possesses  therapeutic  properties  other  than  those  properly 
accredited  to  it,  it  becomes  subject  to  consideration  by  the 
Council. 

Simple  preparations  or  mixtures  of  official  articles  may  be 
considered  to  have  the  status  of  official  articles  if  they  are 
marketed  under  descriptive,  nonproprietary  names  and  if  unes- 
tablished claims  are  not  made  for  them.  At  the  request  of  the 
distributors  of  such  products  the  Council  will  determine  whether 
they  meet  these  provisions,  and  if  they  are  found  not  to  require 


14       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

inclusion  in  N.  N.  R.  they  will  be  included  in  a  list  of 
articles  and  brands  accepted  by  the  Council  but  not  described 
in  N.  N.  R. 

Modifications  of  U.  S.  P.  and  N.  F.  Products. — A  Pharma- 
copeial  or  National  Formulary  product  which  is  marketed  under 
the  official  title  or  synonym,  but  with  well-founded  claims  that 
its  purity,  permanence,  palatability  or  other  physical  properties 
excel  the  official  standard,  may,  if  no  extraordinary  therapeutic 
properties  are  asserted,  be  considered  as  an  official  article  and 
held  not  to  be  within  the  scope  of  New  and  Nonofficial 
Remedies. 

When  such  products  are  marketed  under  the  claim  that  they 
possess  therapeutic  properties  other  than  those  commonly 
accredited  to  the  U.  S.  P.  or  N.  F.  products  of  which  they  are 
modifications,  they  become  subject  to  the  consideration  of  the 
Council. 

The  burden  of  proof  in  establishing  claims  for  therapeutic 
properties  of  products  considered  by  the  Council  shall  lie  with 
the  proprietor  or,  in  the  case  of  a  foreign-made  product,  with 
the  agent  who  markets  the  product  in  the  United  States. 

Substances  Described  in  Nezv  and  Nonojficial  Remedies. — In 
the  book  will  be  described  simple  proprietary  substances  and 
their  preparations ;  proprietary  mixtures  if  they  have  originality 
or  other  important  qualities  which,  in  the  judgment  of  the 
Council,  entitle  them  to  such  place ;  important  nonproprietary 
nonofficial  articles ;  simple  pharmaceutic  preparations ;  or  any 
other  article,  the  inclusion  of  which  is  believed  to  give  useful 
information  to  the  physician.  An  article  will  not  be  accepted 
or  retained  unless  it  is  found  in  the  open  market  under  the  name 
of  the  firm  under  which  it  is  submitted  or  accepted.  The  term 
"open  market"  contemplates  both  the  wholesale  and  retail  mer- 
chandizing of  drugs. 

Proprietary  Mixtures. — A  mixture  will  be  considered  as  pro- 
prietary, and  therefore  requiring  consideration  by  the  Council 
for  admission  to  the  book,  if  it  contains  any  proprietary  articles, 
if  it  is  marketed  under  a  name  which  is  in  any  way  protected 
or  if  its  manufacturer  claims  for  it  any  unusual  therapeutic 
qualities. 

Diagnostic  Reagents. — Reagents  and  other  drug  preparations 
which  are  not  used  in  or  on  the  human  body,  and  protein  prepa- 
rations used  for  diagnosis  only  shall  not  be  considered  for 
inclusion  in  N.  N.  R.  At  the  request  of  the  distributor  the 
Council  will  determine  the  status  of  such  products  individually, 
and  if  the  product  is  found  not  to  require  inclusion  in  N.  N.  R. 
it  will  be  included  in  a  list  of  Articles  and  Brands  Accepted 
by  the  Council  but  Not  Described  in  N.  N.  R. 

Suffix  N.  N.  R. — When  nonproprietary  articles  included  in 
New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  are  prescribed,  the  Council  rec- 
ommends that  they  be  indicated  by  the  abbreviation  "N.  N.  R.," 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE     COUNCIL       15 

thus  insuring  to  the  prescriber  the  quahty  of  these  articles  laid 
down  in  the  book. 

Rule  1. — Composition — Secrecy  Objectionable. — It  is  not 
only  the  right  but  also  the  duty  of  the  physician  to  know  the 
essential  composition  of  what  he  prescribes ;  the  Council  cannot 
compromise  on  this  proposition. 

Statement  of  Composition. — In  the  case  of  a  definite  "chem- 
ical substance,  a  descriptive  name,  satisfactory  to  the  Council, 
must  appear  on  the  label  and  in  the  advertising.  For  mixtures, 
the  label  and  advertising  must  contain  a  statement  of  the 
amount  of  each  potent  or  important  ingredient  in  a  given  quan- 
tity of  the  mixture.  In  the  case  of  solutions  marketed  in  the 
form  of  ampules  the  term  "..  cc.  size"  will  be  accepted  as  a 
proper  indication  of  the  volume  of  contents,  the  significance  of 
the  term  being  understood  to  be  that  the  ampule  contains  a  suffi- 
cient excess  of  the  medicament  to  permit  the  withdrawal  and 
administration  of  the  dosage  indicated  by  the  size  denomina- 
tion. Individual  ampules,  or  unit  packages  thereof,  must  bear 
a  statement  explaining  the  significance  of  the  term  "..  cc.  size" 
as  it  applies  in  a  given  instance.  For  example,  if  ampules  are 
labeled  "2  cc.  size,"  a  satisfactory  statement  will  be:  "Each 
ampule  contains  a  sufficient  amount  (or  excess)  to  permit 
withdrawal  and  administration  of  2  cc." 

Vehicles  and  Preservatives. — In  the  case  of  mixtures,  not 
only  the  potent  ingredient,  but  also  the  general  character  of  the 
vehicle,  the  presence  of  alcohol  and  the  identity  of  preserva- 
tives, or  of  any  other  substance,  whether  added  or  present  as  an 
impurity,  must  be  stated  if  these  can  under  any  circumstances 
afifect  the  therapeutic  action  of  the  article.  This,  as  a  rule,  does 
not  mean  the  publication  of  trade  secrets,  such  as  flavors  or 
the  details  of  the  working  formula. 

Trade  Secrets. — Furthermore,  trade  secrets  will  not  be 
received  as  confidential  by  the  Council,  since  it  accepts  infor- 
mation only  with  the  distinct  understanding  that  this  may  be 
freely  published,  at  its  discretion. 

Inspection  of  Factories. — The  Council  does  not  accept  invi- 
tations to  inspect  factories ;  its  concern  is  with  the  finished 
products. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  Council  requires  that  the  informa- 
tion be  complete  and  accurate  as  to  medicinal  ingredients. 

Nonofficial  Constituents. — Nonofficial  constituents  of  proprie- 
tary mixtures  must  be  presented  by  the  manufacturer  in  the 
regular  way  and  must  be  acted  on  by  the  Council  before  the 
preparations  containing  them  can  be  accepted. 

Fraud. — When  it  appears  that  a  manufacturer  has  made  a 
delibei'ately  false  statement  concerning  a  product,  he  is  asked 
to  furnish  an  explanation ;  and  if  this  is  not  satisfactory,  the 
product  will  not  be  accepted,  even  if  the  false  statement  is 
subsequently  corrected  or  omitted. 


16       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Testimonials. — The  foregoing  paragraph  apphes  not  only  to 
statements  made  to  the  Council,  but  also  to  statements  fur- 
nished to  physicians  by  the  manufacturer  or  his  agents,  even 
when  these  statements  are  in  the  guise  of  testimonials. 

Rule  2. — Identification. — In  order  to  avoid  errors  in  the 
case  of  chemical  compounds,  and  to  guard  against  adultera- 
tions, .  lack  of  potency  or  strength  and  the  mistaking  of  one 
chemical  for  another,  it  is  necessary  to  have  at  hand  suitable 
tests. 

Tests,  etc. — If  these  facts  have  appeared  in  the  literature, 
or  in  standard  textbooks,  reference  to  them  will  be  sufficient ; 
but  with  new  chemicals,  especially  synthetics,  the  manufacturer 
or  his  representatives  will  be  required  to  supply  such  tests  for 
publication  as  will  assure  an  intelligent  opinion  of  these  products. 

Physiologic  Standardization.  —  In  cases  in  which  chemical 
methods  of  identification  are  unknown  or  unreliable,  physio- 
logic standardization  should  be  employed.  The  Council  con- 
siders the  phrase  "physiologically  standardized"  or  "assayed" 
as  misleading  unless  the  standard  and  method  are  published  in 
sufficient  detail  to  permit  of  their  control  by  independent  inves- 
tigators. 

It  is  evident  that  when  no  standard  is  published,  it  is  impos- 
sible to  know  whether  the  quality  is  high  or  low,  and  the  con- 
scientious manufacturer  who  sets  for  himself  a  high  standard 
is  placed  on  a  level  with  the  dishonest  or  careless  one  who 
adopts  a  low  standard.  Again,  if  the  process  of  standardization 
is  not  published,  it  is  impossible  to  learn,  without  actual  trial, 
the  relative  value  of  one  preparation  as  compared  with  that  of 
another  manufacturer  or  to  confirm  or  disprove  the  statements 
of  the  manufacturer  as  to  the  quality  of  his  product. 

Standardisation  of  Disinfectants  and  Germicides. — No  disin- 
fectant or  germicide  of  the  phenol  type  will  be  accepted  for 
inclusion  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  whose  phenol 
coefficient,  determined  by  the  U.  S.  Food  and  Drug  Administra- 
tion method  of  testing  antiseptics  and  disinfectants,  as  given  in 
Circular  No.  198,  U.  S.  Dept.  of  Agriculture,  is  not  stated  on 
the  label  of  the  preparation. 

Rule  3.  —  Direct  Advertising.  —  Lay  Advertising.  —  The 
impossibility  of  controlling  the  irresponsible  claims  which  arc 
usually  made  in  advertisements  to  the  public,  the  well-known 
dangers  of  suggesting  by  descriptions  of  symptoms  to  the  minds 
of  the  people  that  they  are  suffering  from  the  many  diseases 
described,  the  dangers  of  the  unconscious  and  innocent  forma- 
tion of  a  drug  habit,  and  the  evils  of  harmful  self-medication, 
including  the  dangers  of  the  spread  of  many  infections  and 
contagious  diseases  when  hidden  from  the  physician,  and  similar 
well-known  considerations,  are  the  reasons  for  discouraging, 
in  the  interest,  and  for  the  safety,  of  the  public,  this  repre- 
hensible form  of  exploitation.  Advertising  in  medical  journals, 
and   other   publications   distributed   solely   to   physicians,   or   in 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE     COUNCIL       17 

journals  for  dentists,  pharmacists,  nurses  and  veterinarians,  does 
not  come  within  the  scope  of  this  rule,  provided  such  advertis- 
ing does  not  invite  or  encourage  use  by  unqualified  persons. 

Exceptions. — In  the  case  of  subjects  on  which  the  public 
should  be  instructed,  as  in  the  use  of  certain  disinfectants, 
germicides,  antiseptics,  laxatives  and  such  other  articles  as 
the  Council  may  specify,  advertisements  to  the  public,  if 
not  in  objectionable  forms,  are  considered  admissible.  In  no 
case  shall  such  advertisements  include  recommendations  for 
use  as  curative  agents,  nor  shall  the  names  of  any  diseases 
appear  on  or  in  the  trade  package,  except  in  connection  with 
prophylactic  recommendations.  ■  If  the  preparation  is  sufificiently 
toxic  to  require  caution  in  its  use  to  prevent  poisoning,  this 
fact  shall  be  stated  on  the  label.  On  account  of  the  deplorable 
results  which  would  follow  any  abuse  of  this  privilege  the  con- 
scientious cooperation  of  manufacturers  and  their  agents  in 
adhering  strictly  to  the  limitations  laid  down  is  asked;  and 
for  the  same  reason  the  acceptance  of  an  article  which  is  so 
advertised  as  to  infringe  on  these  limitations  in  any  essential 
way  (as  by  naming  diseases  or  by  making  false  and  exaggerated 
claims)  shall  be  summarily  rescinded,  and  the  reasons  for  such 
action  may  be  published  without  notice  to  manufacturer  or 
agent.  A  disinfectant,  germicide  or  antiseptic  will  be  accepted 
for  description  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  and  an  article 
of  this  class  which  has  already  been  accepted  will  continue  to 
be  included  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  only  on  the 
explicit  understanding  by  the  manufacturer  and  agent  that  such 
infringements  of  the  rule  will  be  followed  by  deletion  of  the 
article  and  by  publication  of  the  facts  as  described. 

Advertisements  in  Foreign  Countries. — The  Council  deals 
primarily,  in  the  interest  of  the  public  and  of  the  medical  pro- 
fession, with  articles  proposed  for  admission  to  New  and  Non- 
official  Remedies,  and,  in  determining  the  status  of  any  article, 
must  take  into  consideration  any  statements  made  regarding  it 
or  any  method  of  advertising  it  employed  by  the  manufacturer 
or  his  authorized  agents  or  representatives,  whether  in  this 
country  or  abroad.  The  Council  will  not  regard  as  within  its 
scope,  however,  questions  concerning  the  marketing  of  articles 
(except  the  matter  of  direct  advertising  to  the  laity  and  unwar- 
ranted claims  or  misrepresentations)  outside  the  United  States. 

Rule  4. — Indirect  Advertising. — It  should  be  remembered 
that  the  sole  intent  of  this  rule  is  to  protect  the  physician,  so 
that  in  prescribing  a  proprietary  medicine  he  shall  not  uncon- 
sciously advertise  proprietary  preparations.  The  rule  imposes 
no  restriction  on  the  legitimate  methods  of  bringing  a  remedy 
to  the  attention  of  the  profession,  such  as  advertising  in  medical 
journals,  circulars  and  other  printed  matter  distributed  solely 
to  physicians.  The  rule  applies  only  to  the  package  as  it  may 
reach  the  patient. 

Naming  Diseases  on  Label. — The  naming  of  diseases  on  the 
label   or   package   is   not   necessary,   as   is   shown  by   the  very 


18       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

large  number  of  proprietary  products  which  have  been  success- 
fully introduced  without  resorting  to  this  expedient.  This 
method  of  popularizing  a  proprietary  remedy  with  the  laity  is 
most  objectionable,  and  should  not  be  tolerated  in  any  form. 

Therapeutic  Indications. — In  general,  therapeutic  indications 
should  be  omitted  from  the  label  and  package.  The  Council 
will  not  insist  on  this  point,  however,  when  such  indications 
are  so  given  as  not  to  promote  self-medication,  particularly  in 
diseases  which  require  expert  diagnosis  and  supervision. 

Permanently  Affixed  Names. — It  will  be  considered  an 
infringement  of  the  rule  if  an  article  is  marketed  in  bottles 
which  have  the  name  of  the  article  blown  into  the  glass,  or 
if  otherwise  the  name  or  initials  or  other  distinctive  mark  of 
the  article  is  permanently  stamped  on  the  container,  on  the 
article  itself,  or  is  on  the  stoppers  or  seals.  Articles  which  are 
marketed  in  any  of  these  ways  are  not  accepted  for  New  and 
Nonofficial  Remedies.  Readily  removable  labels  are  not  objec- 
tionable nor  is  the  permanent  affixing  of  the  firm's  initials  or 
name  to  the  trade  package  if  such  initials  or  name  is  not  sug- 
gestive of  the  article. 

Use  of  Articles  for  Advertising. — The  Council  does  not  coun- 
tenance the  use  of  an  accepted  article  for  advertising  other 
articles  which  have  not  been  accepted  by  the  Council,  nor  the 
inclusion  of  advertisements  for  accepted  articles  in  packages  of 
nonaccepted  products  ;  this  applies  to  circular  matter  dealing  with 
such  accepted  articles  whether  included  with  the  trade  packages 
or  otherwise,  but  does  not  apply  to  price  lists  and  catalogues. 
Nor  will  the  Council  accept  an  article  or  continue  the  acceptance 
of  an  article  if  the  same  article  or  an  essentially  similar  one  is 
marketed  by  the  same  firm  under  another  name  which  has  not 
been  recognized.  When,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Council,  a  firm 
secures  the  acceptance  of  one  or  more  articles  and  employs  the 
acceptance  in  a  way  that  promotes  the  exploitation  of  articles 
that  are  opposed  to  the  principles  of  the  rules  of  the  Council,  the 
preparations  of  the  firm  will  be  dismissed  summarily  and  no 
preparations  of  that  firm  will  be  accepted  by  the  Council. 

Rule  5. — False  Claims  as  to  Origin. — No  false  or  mis- 
leading statement  in  regard  to  an  article  can  be  permitted  con- 
cerning the  source  or  material  from  which  it  is  made,  or  the 
persons  by  whom  it  is  made.  Some  glaring  frauds  of  this 
nature  have  been  perpetrated  in  the  past,  and  this  rule  is 
intended  to  prevent  such  imposition. 

Rule  6. — Unwarranted  Therapeutic  Claims. — This  rule 
insists  that  the  claims  of  manufacturers  or  agents  concerning 
the  therapeutic  properties  of  their  products  must  be  compatible 
with  demonstrable  facts.  Manufacturers  will  be  held  respon- 
sible for  all  statements  made  or  quoted  in  their  advertising 
''literature"  regarding  their  products.  The  use  of  the  personal 
signature  of  a  physician,  or  the  facsimile  of  such  signature  on 
the  label,  or  in  advertising  of  products  is  objectionable  because 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE     COUNCIL       19 

it  tends  to  create,  through  the  implication  of  personal  super- 
vision, an  exaggerated  or  misleading  impression  of  therapeutic 
value,  and  articles  so  labeled  or  advertised  are  therefore  not 
acceptable.  Therapeutic  claims  made  subsequent  to  the  accept- 
ance of  an  article  must  be  submitted  to  the  Council  for  review, 
provided  such  claims  exceed,  or  substantially  modify,  those 
made  at  the  time  of  acceptance.  Recognizing  the  existence 
of  honest  differences  of  opinion  on  many  therapeutic  questions, 
the  Council  desires  to  be  liberal  in  the  application  of  this 
rule.  It  is  natural  that  a  manufacturer  should  be  partial 
toward  his  own  product,  and  a  moderate  degree  of  emphasis 
in  advertising  ma}'  not  be  objectionable.  The  Council,  how- 
ever, will  not  admit  claims  which  are  neither  in  harmonv 
with  already  accepted  facts  nor  supported  by  acceptable  evidence. 
In  doubtful  cases  the  Council  considers  these  questions  with  the 
advice  and  cooperation  of  its  staff  of  clinical  consultants. 

Therapeutic  claims  that  do  not  exceed  the  statements  in  the 
current  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  will  not  be  challenged  as 
a  rule;  but  if  the  Council  finds  reason  to  doubt  the  validity  of 
any  description  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  it  may  require 
the  manufacturer  to  submit  further  evidence  if  he  desires  to 
continue  such  claims.  Since  the  claims  of  the  manufacturers 
are  judged  largeFy  by  their  advertising,  noncompliance  of  the 
manufacturers  with  the  Council's  request  for  copies  of  the  cur- 
rent advertising  may  be  sufficient  ground  for  the  rejection  of 
an  article,  unless  in  individual  cases  the  Council  deems  such 
submission  unnecessary.  The  Council  holds  that  the  terms 
"advertising"  and  "advertising  literature"  include  films  and 
similar  devices  for  informing  the  public  or  the  profession. 

Clinical  Evidence. — To  be  acceptable,  the  clinical  evidence 
must  offer  objective  data  with  such  citation  of  authority  as 
will  enable  the  Council  to  confirm  the  facts  and  establish  the 
scientific  value  of  the  conclusions  drawn.  The  amount  and 
character  of  the  evidence  which  is  required  depends  on  the 
inherent  probability  of  the  claims :  No  evidence  is  needed  for  a 
self-evident  claim ;  very  strong  evidence  is  needed  when  the 
claim  is  contrary  to  the  accepted  data  of  science.  The  accepta- 
bility of  evidence  is  determined  mainly  by  its  quality.  The 
mere  multiplication  of  inaccurate  observations  does  not  render 
them  accurate.  The  evidence  must  be  furnished  in  sufficient 
detail  to  permit  judgment  as  to  the  care  with  which  it  was 
gathered  and  the  legitimacy  of  the  deductions.  Comparative 
trials  facilitate  and  are  often  necessary  for  such  judgment. 
Observations  that  are  not  described  with  sufficient  detail  to 
permit  verification  are  subject  to  suspicion.  The  credibility  of 
the  data  and  the  justification  of  the  deductions  is  influenced  by 
the  reputation  and  experience  of  the  investigators,  as  to  disin- 
terestedness, technical  ability  and  critical  sense.  Anonymous 
communications  and  observations  gathered  without  adequate 
facilities  are  usually  worthless  as  evidence. 


20       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Rule  7. — Poisonous  Substances. — For  the  information  of 
the  pharmacist  or  dispenser,  and  to  enable  him  to  safeguard 
the  interests  of  the  patient  and  the  physician,  all  articles  con- 
taining such  potent  agents  as  the  poisonous  alkaloids  and  other 
organic  substances  and  the  salts  of  some  of  the  metals  should 
have  the  exact  amount  of  these  ingredients  which  is  contained 
in  the  average  adult  dose  stated  on  the  label. 

Rule  8. — Objectionable  Names. — Many  of  the  abuses  con- 
nected with  proprietary  medicines  arise  from  "coined"  pro- 
prietary trade  names.  Such  names  will  not  be  recognized  by 
the  Council  unless  in  particular  instances  the  Council  j-hall 
deem  their  use  to  be  in  the  interest  of  public  welfare.  In 
every  such  exception  the  burden  of  proof,  both  for  establish- 
ing and  for  continuing  the  exception,  lies  with  those  who 
market  the  product. 

Proprietary  ("Trade")  Names;  When  Permitted. — In  con- 
sideration of  the  benefits  which  may  come  from  the  discovery 
of  a  therapeutic  agent,  the  Council  concedes  to  the  person  or 
firm  which,  by  right  of  discovery,  controls  such  a  product  the 
right  to  name  it.  The  Council  will  offer  no  opposition  to  an 
arbitrary  name  for  such  a  new  product,  provided  it  is  not 
misleading,  therapeutically  suggestive  or  otherwise  subversive 
of  scientific  pharmacy  and  therapeutics.  If  the  discovery  that 
a  previously  known  substance  has  therapeutic  value  is  deemed 
of  sufificient  importance,  the  Council  may  recognize  a  name  for 
such  a  substance  if  the  name  is  applied  by  the  person  who 
makes  the  discovery;  or,  with  the  consent  of  the  discoverer  or 
in  the  absence  of  any  protest  on  his  part,  the  Council  may 
recognize  a  name  applied  by  the  firm  which  first  makes  such 
a  product  available  to  physicians.  Under  these  conditions  the 
Council  may  also  recognize  proprietary  names  when  new  uses 
or  actions  of  exceptional  novelty  and  importance  are  discovered 
for  substances  previously  used  in  medicine,  but  which  had 
become  practically  obsolete.  In  the  interest  of  rational  drug 
therapy,  the  Council  recommends  that  trade  names  be  coined 
so  as  to  indicate  the  potent  element  or  constituent.  Since  the 
use  of  numeral  or  alphabetical  designations  in  connection  with 
drug  names  tends  to  take  the  emphasis  away  from  the  name 
and  to  displace  the  name,  thus  leading  to  confusion,  the  Council 
will  not  recognize  the  name  of  a  drug  in  which  the  numeral  or 
letter  is  an  integral  part  of  the  name,  except  in  special  cases 
in  which  the  use  of  a  numeral  or  letter  seems  desirable  because 
further  improvement  of  the  product  is  anticipated,  in  which 
case  the  Council  may  grant  a  special  exemption  from  the  rule. 
Under  this  rule  the  use  of  numerals  or  letters  in  connection 
with  the  name  of  a  product  will  not  be  permitted  on  labels  or  in 
advertising,  unless  the  numeral  or  letter  is  clearly  separated 
from  and  subordinated  to  the  name  by  type,  and  if  feasible  by 
position.     This  rule  shall  not  apply  to  price  lists  and  catalogs. 

When  the  proprietary  or  trade  name  for  an  article  is  con- 
sidered insufficiently  descriptive  of  its  chemical  composition  or 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE"    COUNCIL      21 

pharmaceutic  character,  the  Council  may  require  as  a  condi- 
tion for  the  acceptance  of  such  articles  that  a  descriptive 
scientific  name  satisfactory  to  the  Council  appear  on  the  labels, 
circulars  and  advertisements  for  such  an  article.  For  all  defi- 
nite chemical  substances  it  is  required  that  the  scientific 
(chemical)  name  be  given  prominence  on  the  labels,  in  circulars 
and  in  advertisements ;  provided  that  for  those  substances  for 
which  there  are  recognized  Council  or  pharmacopeial  names, 
such  names  shall  be  used  and  the  scientific  (chemical)  name 
need  not  appear. 

Proprietary  Names  for  Unoriguml  Articles.  —  Proprietary 
names  will  not  be  recognized  for  articles  which  are  included 
in  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  or  National  Formulary  or  for  articles 
which  are  already  accepted  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  or 
for  unessential  modifications  of  such  articles.  Neither  will  pro- 
prietary names  be  recognized  for  substances  or  mixtures  which 
are  described  in  medical  or  pharmaceutic  publications,  except 
in  connection  with  fundamentally  important  discoveries  relating 
to  articles  the  use  of  which  had  become  practically  obsolete. 

In  the  marketing  of  unoriginal  articles,  the  legitimate  inter- 
ests of  the  producer  are  fully  served  by  identifying  such  prod- 
ucts by  appending  the  name  or  initials  of  the  manufacturer  or 
agent,  or  by  the  use  of  a  general  brand  mark.  No  objection 
will  be  made  by  the  Council  to  the  use  of  such  brand  marks, 
provided  that  in  no  case  shall  such  mark  be  used  as  a  designa- 
tion for  an  individual  article.  Names,  initials  or  brand  marks 
of  manufacturers  or  agents  when  used  to  denote  proprietorship 
shall  not  be  of  such  character  as  to  cause  any  misunderstanding 
or  confusion  as  to  their  significance. 

For  any  product  which,  by  reason  of  the  absence  or  lapse 
of  patent  rights  or  for  other  reasons,  is  open  to  manufacture 
by  more  than  one  firm,  the  Council  reserves  the  right  to  select 
a  common  name  and  to  provide  standards  of  identity,  purity 
and  strength.  The  Council  then  will  accept  such  article  only  if 
it  is  marketed  under  the  title  adopted  as  the  N.  N.  R.  name  or 
the  name  under  which  such  article  was  introduced  (to  which 
may  be  appended  the  firm's  identifying  mark). 

When  an  article  which  has  been  accepted  for  New  and  Non- 
official  Remedies  is  admitted  to  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  or 
National  Formulary,  it  will  be  omitted  from  New  and  Non- 
official  Remedies  one  year  after  such  standardization  if  the 
name  of  such  article  is  used  in  these  standards  either  as  the 
main  title  for  the  product  or  as  a  synonym.  If  the  name 
under  which  the  article  is  described  in  New  and  Nonofficial 
Remedies  is  not  used  in  these  books  of  standards,  the  pro- 
prietary preparation  will  be  retained  provided  the  official  name 
is  given  prominence  on  the  labels  and  in  the  circulars  and 
advertisements  of  such  article. 

When  the  Council  adopts  a  common  name  for  an  article 
that   has   been   admitted    under   another   name,    it   will   be   con- 


22       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

tinued  under  the  older  name  only  on  condition  that  the  Council 
name  be  given  prominence  on  the  label  and  in  the  circulars 
and  advertisements  for  such  article. 

Pharmaceutic  Preparations  and  Mixtures. — These,  with  rare 
exceptions,  are  not  original  in  composition  and  should  not  be 
endowed  with  uninforming  names.  It  is  important  that  they 
be  so  named  as  to  remind  the  prescriber  constantly  of  their 
potent  ingredients.  When,  in  the  rare  exception,  a  pharma- 
ceutic preparation  or  mixture  is  accepted  with  a  coined  name 
on  the  ground  of  originality  because  it  presents  a  distinct 
improvement  over  available  preparations,  only  the  first  prepa- 
ration of  this  kind  which  is  placed  on  the  market  shall  be 
recognized  under  a  coined  name  (which,  however,  must  clearly 
indicate  the  potent  constituent  of  the  preparation).  The  Coun- 
cil may  also  recognize  coined  names  for  pharmaceutic  prepara- 
tions or  mixtures  that  were  in  actual  use  before  the  establishment 
of  the  Council  and  that  have  been  used  continuously  since  that 
time,  and  names  for  mixtures  that  were  named  under  the 
reasonably  justified  bona  fide  belief  that  they  were  chemical 
compounds,  provided  that  such  coined  names  indicate  the  potent 
ingredient  or  ingredients  of  the  preparation,  are  not  misleading, 
and  do  not  suggest  diseases,  pathologic  conditions  or  therapeutic 
indications. 

Difficulty  frequently  arises  from  the  application  of  coined 
names  to  salts.  For  example,  a  firm  introduces  the  hydro- 
chloride of  a  synthetic  base  under  the  name  "Artificialin." 
Subsequently  the  firm  decides  to  introduce  the  lactate  of  the 
same  base.  If  this  is  called  "Artificialin  lactate"  the  name 
"Artificialin"  will  now  mean  the  base  instead  of  the  hydro- 
chloride which  is  being  marketed  under  that  name.  In  order  to 
avoid  this  confusion  the  Council  holds  that  coined  names  for 
salts  will  not  be  accepted  unless  such  names  indicate  the  com- 
ponents of  such  salts,  thus  "Artificialin  hydrochloride" ;  the 
name  "Artificialin,"  unqualified,  is  acceptable  only  for  the  base. 
A  similar  difficulty  may  arise  when  a  product  is  marketed  first 
only  as  a  pharmaceutic  preparation  to  which  the  manufacturer 
wishes  to  apply  a  short  coined  name,  for  example,  an  elixir  of  a 
new  hypnotic  under  the  name  "Aliphal."  If  later,  the  manu- 
facturer elects  to  market  the  substance  also  in  powder  form, 
an  entirely  new  name  would  become  necessary  and  this  would 
cause  confusion  both  to  the  profession  and  to  the  trade.  The 
Council  therefore  holds  that  coined  names  for  new  substances 
marketed  as  pharmaceutic  preparations  will  not  be  accepted 
unless  such  names  indicate  the  type  or  dosage  form  of  the 
preparation;  thus  "Elixir  of  Aliphal,"  "Aliphal  Powder,"  not 
"Aliphal"  unqualified. 

Mineral  Waters. — The  commercial  names  of  natural  mineral 
waters  will  be  accepted,  provided  that  they  are  not  misleading, 
therapeutically  suggestive  or  otherwise  objectionable. 

Therapeutically  Suggestive  Names. — Names  which  carry  the 
suggestion  of  a  therapeutic  indication,  pathologic  condition,  dis- 


OFFICIAL     RULES     OF     THE     COUNCIL      23 

ease  or  organism  causing  a  disease  shall  be  considered  thera- 
peutically suggestive.  Articles  bearing  such  names  will  not  be 
accepted  for  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  first,  because  they 
are  likely  to  lead  physicians  into  prescribing  names  instead  of 
remedies,  and  second,  because  they  tend  to  encourage  unwar- 
ranted self-medication  by  the  laity.  Even  if  the  name  is  at 
first  apparently  meaningless  to  the  public,  its  meaning  will 
soon  be  understood  because  patients  soon  learn  the  technical 
names  applied  to  their  diseases  and  symptoms. 

The  prohibition  against  therapeutically  suggestive  names  is 
not  applied  to  serums,  vaccines  and  antitoxins,  because  the 
accepted  nomenclature  of  the  specific  organisms  used  in  their 
preparation  makes  this  unavoidable  and  because  self-medication 
with  them  is   improbable. 

Rule  9. — Patents,  Trademarks,  Copyrights,  Etc. — This 
information  is  important  as  a  means  of  determining  the  legal 
status  of  medicinal  articles  and  as  an  aid  to  their  ready  recog- 
nition in  current  publications. 

Rule  10. — Unscientific  and  Useless  Articles. — The  use 
of  articles  which  are  unessential  modifications  of  official  or 
established  nonproprietary  articles  is  unscientific  and  serves  no 
useful  purpose.  The  Council  will  not  accept  products  which 
are  scientifically  unsound  and  which,  therefore,  must  be  con- 
sidered useless  or  inimical  to  the  best  interests  of  the  medical 
profession  and  the  public.  This  class  includes  compounds  or 
mixtures  containing  an  excessive  number  of  active  ingredients ; 
those  compounds  or  mixtures  the  components  of  which  are  of 
no  probable  assistance  to  one  another,  and  those  articles  which 
are  of  no  therapeutic  value. 

Unessential  Modefications  of  Official  Substances. — 
Imitations. — The  subterfuge  of  obtaining  proprietary  rights  over 
an  official  or  established  nonproprietary  product  by  introducing 
unessential  modifications  also  tends  to  confusion  and  abuses. 
and  such  articles  will  not  be  admitted  by  the  Council.  Essential 
and  important  modifications,  however,  will  receive  recognition. 
(The  Council  interprets  the  term  "established  nonproprietary 
product"  as  applying  to  a  preparation  of  any  formula  which 
has  been  published  through  any  recognized  or  reasonably  acces- 
sible channel  of  publication,  prior  to  its  appropriation  or 
modification  by  a  manufacturer.)  Duplicates  of  biologic  prod- 
ucts accepted  under  the  names  of  the  manufacturers  will  not 
be  accepted  under  the  names  of  the  distributors. 

Rule  11. — Policies  of  Firms  Detrimental  to  Rational 
Therapeutics. — The  evidence  on  which  the  Council  may  refuse 
recognition  to  the  products  of  a  firm  shall  be:  (1)  the  fact 
that  but  a  small  proportion  of  the  firm's  proprietary  products 
are  acceptable  for  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies ;  (2)  that 
a   large  proportion   of  the  business  of  the   firm  is   in  products 


24       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

that  are  in  conflict  with  the  rules  of  the  Council ;  (3)  that 
physicians  who  reply  to  the  firm's  advertisements  of  accepted 
products  are  supplied  with  advertising  which  features  the  use 
of  products  that  are  in  conflict  with  the  Rules  of  the  Council, 
or  (4)  that  the  firm  makes  claims  that  are  seriously  misleading, 
especially  if  these  claims  tend  to  promote  the  use  of  products 
in    any   manner   that    would    seriously   endanger   public    health. 


NEW  AND  NONOFFICIAL  REMEDIES 


AGAR     AND     AGAR     PREPARATIONS 

AGAR.  —  Agar-Agar.  —  "The  dried  mucilaginous  substance 
extracted  from  Gclidmm  corneiim  (Hudson)  Lamouroux  and 
other  species  of  Gclidmm  (Fam.  GeUdiaceae)  and  closely  related 
algae  (Class  Rhodophyccac).  Agar  contains  not  more  than 
1  per  cent  of  foreign  organic  matter,  and  yields  not  more  than 
1  per  cent  of  acid-insoluble  ash,  and  not  more  than  18  per  cent 
of  moisture."-U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the   U.   S.   Pharmacopeia  under  Agar. 

Agar  Agar-Merck. — A  brand  of  agar-U.   S.  P. 

Prepared  by  Merck  &   Co.,   Railway,   N.  J. 
Agar  Agar  Powder-Merck. 
Agar  Agar   Shreds-Merck. 

Agar-Agar  Shreds-Reinschild. — A  brand  of  agar-U.  S.  P. 

Prepared  by   Reinschild   Chemical   Co.,   New   Roclielle,    N.   Y. 

PHENOLPHTHALEIN-AGAR.— Agar  impregnated  with 
phenolphthalein,   100  Gm.  containing  3  Gm.  of  phenolphthalein. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Phenolphthalein-agar  is  claimed  to  have 
the  properties  of  agar  augmented  by  the  action  of  phenol- 
phthalein. 

Dosage. — 1  Gm,  (15  grains),  twice  daily,  after  breakfast  and 
supper,  increased  or  diminished  according  to  requirements. 

Manufactured  by  The  Reinschild  Chemical  Company,  New  Rochelle, 
New  York,  U.  S.  patent  943,163  (Dec.  14,  1909,  expired).  No  U.  S. 
trademark. 

Phenolphthalein-agar     is     prepared     by     impregnating     1,000     Gm.     of 

agar  with   a   solution  obtained   by   dissolving   30   Gm.   of   phenolphthalein 

in   a   mixture   of   2,000   cc.   of    water   and   700   cc.   of  alcohol   and   slowly 

drying   the   impregnated   agar. 


ALLERGENIC  PROTEIN  PREPARATIONS 

Allergenic  protein  preparations  are  extracts  prepared  from 
the  proteins  of  various  substances  believed  to  be  responsible 
for  sensitization  of  patients  suffering  from  various  affections. 
These  preparations  are  used  for  diagnosis,  prophylaxis  or 
desensitization  in  conditions  due  to  hypersensitiveness  (allergy). 
They  are  made  from  the  proteins  of  pollens  believed  to  be 
the  cause  of  hay-fever ;  from  the  proteins  obtained  from  the 
hair  or  epidermis  of  animals  or  the  feathers  of  fowls ;  from 
the  purified  proteins  of  various  biologically  reactive  foods ; 
from  the  proteins  extracted  from  bacterial  cells,  and  from 
proteins  derived  from  other  sources  and  believed  to  be  respon- 
sible for  cases  of  allergy.  In  general,  only  proteins  from  a 
single  source  are  accepted — that  is,  from  a  single  species  if  an 


26       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

extract  from  the  pollen  of  plants,  the  hair  or  epidermis  of 
animals  or  the  feathers  of  fowls  is  employed;  from  a  single 
strain  of  bacteria,  or  from  a  single  food.  However,  the  Council 
has  accepted  extracts  of  grass  or  ragweed  mixtures  or  mixtures 
of  other  closely  related  pollens  when  their  use  has  appeared 
rational. 

Practically  all  observers  agree  that  the  majority  of  cases  of 
hay  fever  may  be  traced  to  the  pollens  from  the  following 
sources :  timothy,  which  is  the  cause  of  spring  hay  fever  in 
the  East ;  certain  grasses  which  are  the  causes  of  spring  hay 
fever  in  the  Middle  West,  and  ragweed,  which  is  the  common 
cause  of  autumn  hay  fever  throughout  the  Middle  West  and 
the  East.  For  practical  purposes,  in  the  East,  at  least  90  per 
cent  of  the  patients  can  be  treated  by  two  extracts  alone.  In  the 
other  cases,  the  sensitiveness  of  the  patient  must  be  determined 
by  a  series  of  tests  with  pollens  indigenous  to  the  locality  in 
which  the  patient  lives.  It  is  often  more  convenient  and  satis- 
factory to  prepare  extemporaneously  the  pollen  or  the  epi- 
dermal extracts  to  meet  the  needs  of  the  individual  case. 

Since  liquid  pollen  and  epidermal  extracts  deteriorate  with 
age,  it  is  necessary,  in  order  to  insure  their  potency,  that  they 
be  used  before  the  expiration  of  a  given  time  (determined  by 
the  regulations  of  the  U.  S.  Treasury  Department).  Pollen 
extracts  containing  at  least  50  per  cent  of  glycerin  should  be 
used  within  two  years  of  the  date  of  their  preparation,  while 
those  containing  less  glycerin  or  which  are  supplied  in  aqueous 
saline  solutions  should  be  used  within  one  year  of  the  date  of 
preparation.  Alcoholic  epidermal  extracts  should  be  used  within 
two  years  of  the  date  of  their  preparation,  while  aqueous 
extracts  should  be  employed  within  one  year  of  the  date  of 
their  preparation.  All  pollen  and  epidermal  extract  prepara- 
tions should  be  kept  at  low  temperature.  Attention  is  called 
to  the  fact  that,  even  under  these  circumstances,  extracts  in 
high  dilutions  are  more  liable  to  deterioration  than  more  con- 
centrated solutions.  To  insure  sterility,  the  Council  requires 
that  liquid  extracts  intended  for  purposes  other  than  diagnostic 
shall  be  put  up  in  such  a  way  as  to  avoid  contamination  and 
that  their  sale  shall  be  authorized  by  the  U.  S.  Treasury 
Department  under  the  law  governing  the  sale  of  biologic 
products.  The  Council  requires  that  the  identity  of  any  pre- 
servative used  in  accepted  allergenic  protein  preparations  be 
declared  on  the  label. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Pollen  extract  is  employed  for  the  diag- 
nosis, prophylaxis,  or  relief  of  a  common  type  of  hay  fever — 
pollinosis.  A  pollen  extract  prepared  from  the  pollen  of  one 
plant  is  not  intended  for  use  in  pollinosis  caused  by  the  pollen 
from  other  plants,  though  persons  suffering  from  hay  fever 
frequently  react  to  the  pollen  of  more  than  one  species. 

The  patient's  susceptibility  may  be  tested  by  rubbing  a  small 
quantity  of  the  pollen  extraci  into  a  scratch  of  the  skin ;  if  the 
patient  is  sensitive  to  that  particular  pollen,  an  urticarial  wheal 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     27 

results.  To  avoid  systemic  disturbance,  it  is  recommended  that 
no  therapeutic  injections  be  made  until  the  reaction  from  this 
cutaneous  test  has  subsided  completely.  When  treatment  with 
pollen  extract  is  carefully  and  systematically  pursued,  it  gives 
complete  relief  from  symptoms  in  a  few  instances  and  consider- 
able relief  from  symptoms  in  a  large  proportion  of  cases,  and 
fails  to  give  any  relief  in  a  small  number  of  cases.  The  immunity 
from  symptoms  resulting  from  treatment  is  apparently  not 
permanent,  and  in  most  cases  does  not  last  longer  than  a  year. 

Epidermic  protein  extracts  are  employed  for  the  diagnosis 
and  relief  of  asthma  or  perennial  rhinitis.  The  patient's  sus- 
ceptibility may  be  tested  in  the  same  manner  as  with  the  pollen 
extracts.  Therapeutic  injections  have  been  employed  in  an 
attempt  to  relieve  the  paroxysms  of  asthma,  but  the  results  of 
treatment  have  not  seemed  so  satisfactory  or  so  lasting  as  those 
obtained  from  the  use  of  pollen  extracts  in  hay  fever. 

The  food  protein  extracts  are  used  in  cases  in  which  persons 
show  a  peculiar  hypersensitiveness  toward  certain  articles  of 
the  dietary.  Their  purpose  is  twofold :  to  identify  the  food 
which  produces  the  untoward  symptoms,  and,  to  a  lesser  extent, 
to  immunize  the  patient  by  their  proper  application  against  the 
ill  effect  of  this  food. 

The  bacterial  protein  extracts  are  used  cutaneously  for  the 
diagnosis  of  anaphylaxis  to  the  metabolic  products  from  specific 
bacteria.    Their  utility  is  debatable. 

In  order  that  the  number  of  skin  tests  to  determine  sensi- 
tiveness to  proteins  may  be  reduced,  it  has  been  proposed  to 
employ  mixtures  of  protein  preparations,  and  if  sensitiveness  to 
a  given  mixture  is  found,  then  to  make  tests  with  the  indi- 
vidual proteins  contained  in  this  mixture.  There  is  the  objec- 
tion to  this  procedure  that  with  patients  who  react  very  slightly 
to  one  member  of  a  mixture,  the  dilution  which  has  occurred 
on  account  of  the  presence  of  other  proteins  may  render  a 
reaction  negative.  On  the  ot-lier  hand,  if  a  patient  is  highly 
sensitive  to  all  the  proteins  of  a  mixture,  cutaneous  reactions 
may   give   rise  to   systemic  disturbances. 

Dosage. — It  is  regarded  as  important  that  the  individual 
dosage  be  determined  by  testing  each  patient's  susceptibility  to 
the  specific  protein  extract,  as  sensitiveness  varies  greatly  and 
an  overdose  may  cause  disagreeable  or  alarming  symptoms  or 
even  death.  A  method  used  for  such  a  test  is  to  make  a  series 
of  scratches  on  the  patient's  skin  (it  is  important  that  these 
should  be  made  at  some  distance  from  the  scratches  of  the  first 
test)  and  to  apply  to  these  scratches  25  per  cent,  10  per  cent, 
1  per  cent,  or  even  weaker  dilutions  of  the  protein  extract. 
From  2  to  5  drops  of  the  dilution  which  fails  to  produce  a 
definite  skin  reaction  may  be  injected  subcutaneously  as  the 
first  dose.  Injections,  increased  by  a  few  drops  at  first,  and 
later  by  the  use  of  a  stronger  dilution,  may  then  be  given  at 
intervals  of  a  few  days  or  a  week. 


28       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Owing  to  the  relative  insolubility  of  most  of  the  food  pro- 
tein preparations  and  the  difficulty  of  preparing  them  in  sterile 
form,  they  cannot  with  safety  be  injected  intradermally,  and, 
therefore,  the  tests  for  hypersensitiveness  must  be  made  by  the 
cutaneous  or  scarification  method.  The  intensity  of  the  reaction 
will  depend  somewhat  on  the  concentration  of  the  protein  solu- 
tion.    No  systemic  effect  should  be  produced. 

When  the  identity  of  the  particular  food  protein  causing  the 
symptoms  is  thus  established,  it  has  been  found  that  the  patient 
may  be  desensitized  by  the  administration  of  gradually  increas- 
ing amounts  of  food  containing  the  offending  protein  or  of  the 
isolated  food  protein  itself.  If  the  isolated  food  proteins  are 
used,  they  are  best  administered  mixed  with  the  ordinary  foods. 
The  dose  at  first  should  not  exceed  from  0.005  Gm.  to  0.01  Gm., 
and,  in  highly  sensitive  individuals  and  children,  it  is  best  to 
start  with  a  dose  not  larger  than  from  0.0005  Gm.  to  0.001  Gm. 
In  some  cases,  the  skin  reaction  serves  as  an  indication  of  the 
effect  being  produced  by  the  dosage  employed.  Occasionally, 
the  skin  reaction  decreases  in  intensity  or  disappears  as  the 
dosage  is  increased,  but,  in  most  instances,  the  skin  reaction 
persists  even  though  the  patient  is  able  to  withstand  fair 
amounts  of  the  food  to  which  he  had  previously  been  sensitive. 
The  efficiency  of  the  treatment  can  be  judged  by  the  patient's 
ability  to  ingest,  without  ill  effects,  large  quantities  of  the 
food  protein  which  previously  produced  the  untoward  symptoms. 

Simple  Protein  Preparations 

ALLERGENIC  EXTRACTS-LEDERLE.  —  Liquids 
obtained  by  extracting  the  protein  of  substances  believed  to  be 
the  cause  of  specific  sensitization. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,'  Allergenic  Protein  Prepara- 
tions. 

Allergenic  Extracts-Lederle  are  marketed  in  6  cc.  vials. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 
No  U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Undiluted  Extracts:  Alfalfa  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^ ;  Apple 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Apricot  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Black- 
berry Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Blueberry  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  "; 
Cantaloupe  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Cherry  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ■*;  Cranberry  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Currant  (Red)  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^;  Date  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Fig  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^;  Gooseberry  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  °;  Grape  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^;  Grapefruit  Juice  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^; 
Grapefruit  Peel  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Huckleberry  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle^;  Juniper  Berry  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^ ;  Lemon 
Juice  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Lemon  Peel  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  S;  Lime  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ";  Melon  (Honey  Dew)  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Melon  (Casaba)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^; 
Peach  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Peach  Skin  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^;  Pear  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Pineapple  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^;  Plum  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Pomegranate  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle'^ :    Prune    Allergenic    Extract-Lederle^;    Quince   Allergenic 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     29 

Extract-Lederls  ^;  Raisin  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Raspberry  (Red) 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Rhubarb  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Straw- 
berry Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Tangerine  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^; 
Watermelon  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^ 

Undiluted  and  1:10  Dilution:  Alligator  Pear  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^;  Allspice  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Anchovy  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle^;  Artichoke  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Artichoke 
(Jerusalem)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Asparagus  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  '";  Banana  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ';  Barley  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  2;  Bass  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Bay  Leaf  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ';  Bean  (Kidney)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Bean  (Mexican) 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle-;  Bean  (Naz-y)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle-; 
Bean  (Pea)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  -;  Bean  (String)  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ^;  Beef  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Beet  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ^ ;  Bluefish  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Broccoli  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle^;  Brussels  Sprouts  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Butter- 
fish  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Cabbage  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ 
Carp  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Carrot  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^; 
Catfish  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Cauliflower  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ^;  Caviar  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  -;  Celery  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^^;  Chicken  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Chicory  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^;  Chive  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ';  Cinnamon  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle^;  Citron  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Clam  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle'^;  Clove  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle''' ;  Codfish  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Coffee  Bean  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Coinmeal 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Corn  (Sweet)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^; 
Cucumber  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Dandelion  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  '';  Deer  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Dill  Leaves  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle'' ;  Duck  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Eel  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle^;  Egg  Plant  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Endive  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle^;  Flounder  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'^;  Fluke 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'-^;  Frog's  Legs  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^  Gar- 
lic Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Ginger  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ";  Goat 
Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Goat  Milk  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle*^; 
Goose  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Green  Pea  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  2;  Guinea  Hen  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Haddock  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^;  Halibut  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Henna 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'^;  Herring  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^ ;  Hops 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'';  Horse  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'"; 
Horseradish  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Horse  Serum  Allergenic 
Extract  Lederle^;  House  Dust  (New  York  Apartment  .House) 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle ";  Kale  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^^ ;  Lamb 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Leek  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Lentil 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Lettuce  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^; 
Lima  Bean  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Lobster  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  2;  Mace  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Mackerel  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^;  Milk  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Mushroom  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^;  Nutmeg  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Oat 
(Meal)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Okra  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *; 
Olive  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Onion  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle '' ; 
Orange  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Oyster  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^; 
Oyster  Plant  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle ";  Paprika  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^;  Parsley  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Parsnip  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ^;  Pea  (Black-Eyed)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Pepper  (Green) 
Allerffenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Peppermint  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'' ; 
Perch  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Pickerel  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^; 
Pike  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Pompano  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^; 
Pork  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Potato  (Sweet)  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  ^;  Pumpkin  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Pyrethrum  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle'' ;  Quail  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Rabbit  Meat  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Rabbit  Serum  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ®;  Radish 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Rice  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Rye 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Sage  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  '' ;  Salmon 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Sardine  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Scallion 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Scallop  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle*;  Senna 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'' ;  Shad  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Shad  Roe 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^ ;  Shrimp  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^:  Smelt 
Allergenic      Extract-Lederle^ ;      Sole      Allergenic      Extract-Lederle^ ;      Soy 


30       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Bean  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  - ;  Spinach  Allergenic  E.vtract-Lederle  ^ ; 
Squab  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'^;  Squash  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^; 
Squid  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Sturgeon  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle''^; 
Sugar  Cane  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  °;  Szmss  Chard  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  5;  Tapioca  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  -;  Tea  Leaf  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ";  Terrapin  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^  Thyme  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^;  Tobacco  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  "' ;  Tomato  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle^;  Trout  (Lake)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^ ; 
Trout  (Sea)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^ ;  Tuna  Fish  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^;  Turkey  Meat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Turnip  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^;  Vanilla  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle'' ;  Watercress 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Weakfish  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^; 
Wheat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle-;  Whitefish  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  " : 
White  Potato  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  '" ;  Whiting  (Fish)  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle.^ 

Marketed  in  vials  containing,  respectively  6  cc.  of  undiluted  and  diluted 
1:  10  extract  of  New  York  apartment  house  dust.  Undiluted,  1:  10  dilu- 
tion and  1:  100  dilution:  Horse  Serum  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^  0.5  mg. 
of  nitrogen  per  cc.  and  0.05  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc:  Chocolate  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle.'^  0.2  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc.  and  0.1  mg.  of  nitrogen 
per  cc:  Sheep  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.*  0.2.  0.1,  0.01,  and 
0.001  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc. :  Horse  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  * 
Orris  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.''  0.2  and  0.01  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc. : 
Cow  Dander  Allergenic  E.rtract-Lederle*  0.2,  0.01,  and  0.001  mg.  of 
nitrogen  per  cc:  Flaxseed  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^  0.2  and  0.001  mg. 
of  nitrogen  per  cc:  Cottonseed  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^  0.1  mg. 
of  nitrogen  per  cc. :  Feathers  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.'^  Goat  Dander 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.*  0.1  and  0.01  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc: 
Bnckivheat  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.'-  0.1  and  0.005  mg.  of  nitrogen 
per  cc:  Almond  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle,'*  Peanut  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle.'^  0.1  and  0.001  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc. :  Dog  Dander  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  *  Egg  JVhite  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle,^  Kapok  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle,^  Mustard  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle. '•*  0.05  and 
0.001  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc. :  Cat  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle,^ 
Rabbit  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.*  0.0005  mg.,  0.005  mg.,  and 
0.2  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc:     Fish  Glue  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^'' 

1:10  Dilutions:  Cow  Serum  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Jack  Bean 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.'' 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  1  mg.  and  0.001  mg.  of 
nitrogen   per  cc. :      Silk    (Silkzvorm)    Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^'-^ 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.2,  0.1  and  0.001  mg.  of 
nitrogen  per  cc. :  Millet  Seed  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^ ;  Mule  Dander 
Allergenic    Extract-Lederle.* 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.2  mg.  and  0.001  mg.  of 
nitrogen  per  cc:  Anise  Seed  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Canary  Seed 
Allergenic   Extract-Lederle.^ 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.1  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  cc: 
Canary  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle*;  Chicken  Feathers  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle*;  Duck  Feathers  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Goose 
Feathers  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Parrot  Feathers  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle  *;  Pigeon  Feathers  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Turkey  Feathers 
Allergenic   Extract-Lederle.* 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.1  mg.  and  0.01  mg.  of 
nitrogen  per  cc. :  Brazil  Nut  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Cashew  Nut 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Chestnut  (Spanish)  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle^;  Coconut  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Hazel  Nut  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle^;  Hickory  Nut  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Pecan  Aller- 
genic Extract-Lederle  ^;  Pepper  (Black)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  •; 
Pepper  (Red)  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Pignolia  Nut  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle  ^;  Pistachio  Nut  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  ^;  Walnut 
(Black)  Allergenic  E.rtract-Lederle  *;  Walnut  (English)  Allergenic 
Extract-Lederle.^ 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.1  mg.  and  0.001  mg.  of 
nitrogen  per  cc:'  Caraway  Seed  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle^;  Lycopodium 
Allergenic   Extract-Lederle  '' ;    Poppy    Seed   Allergenic   Evtract-Lederle.^ 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     31 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.1.  0.01  and  0.001  mg.  ot 
nitrogen  per  cc:  Camel  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  * ;  Cuttlefish 
Allergenic  Extract-Lederle*;  Deer  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle*; 
Hog  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.* 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.1  mg.  and  0.00001  mg. 
of  nitrogen  per  cc. :    Castor  Bean  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^' 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.05  mg.  and  0.001  mg.  tif 
nitrogen   per   cc. :     Guinea   Pig  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.* 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.01  mg.  of  nitrogen 
per  cc:    Ascaris  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle.^ 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.01  mg.  and  0.001  mg.  of 
nitrogen  per  cc:  Mink  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Muskrat 
Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Raccoon  Dander  Allergenic  Extract- 
Lederle.* 

Products  marketed  in  dilutions  representing  0.001  mg.  of  nitrogen 
per  cc. :  Fox  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Lederle  *;  Mouse  Dander  Aller- 
genic  Extract-Lederle.* 

Allergenic  extracts-Lederle  are  prepared  from  various  substances  by 
extraction  with  a  buffered  saline  solution  composed  of  sodium  chloride 
0.5  Gm.,  potassium  dihydrogen  phosphate  (KH2PO4)  0.0363  Gm., 
sodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04.12H20)  0.1431  Gm.,  Phenol  0.4  Gm., 
distilled  water  to  make  100  cc.  Certain  of  these  products  are  standard- 
ized on  the  basis  of  their  nitrogen  content  per  unit  volume.  Certain 
others,  however,  do  not  lend  themselves  to  such  standardization  and  are 
marketed  with  the  designations  "Undiluted,"  "1:10  Dilution,"  "1:100 
Dilution,"  etc.  These  "Undiluted  Extracts"  are  ten  times  the  strength 
of  extracts  found  safe  and  effective  in  known  sensitive  individuals  by 
the   dermal   test. 

Products  marked  1  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
material  is  shelled  and  ground,  treated  with  toluene,  alcohol  and  ether. 
The  dry  and  oil-free  flour  is  extracted  with  the  buffere'd  solution.  The 
extract  is  dialyzed  and  sterilized  by  filtration. 

Products  marked  2  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
powdered  whole  grains  are  washed  with  toluene,  alcohol  and  ether. 
The  buffered  saline  extract  of  the  defatted  flour  is  dialyzed,  concen- 
trated   and    sterilized   by    filtration. 

Products  marked  3  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
ground  material  is  treated  with  toluene  and  then  placed  immediately 
in  the  buffered  extracting  fluid.  The  extract  is  dialyzed  and  sterilized 
by   filtration. 

Products  marked  4  are  prepared  by  the  following  method.  The 
material  is  ground  in  a  mortar  and  washed  with  ether  and  alcohol. 
The  dry  residue  is  extracted  with  buffered  extracting  fluid.  The 
dialyzed  extract  is  concentrated  and  the  amount  of  nitrogen  per  cubic 
centimeter  of  the  filtered  extract  is  determined  by  the  Kjeldahl  method. 

Products  marked  5  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
material  is  prepared  by  dialyzing  the  pressed  juice  at  once  against 
the  buffered  solution  diluted  (1-2)  until  nonirritating  to  normal  skins. 
The  dialyzed  extract  is  concentrated  and  sterilized  by  filtration.  If 
the  ground  material  contains  very  little  juice,  it  is  mixed  with  the 
extracting  fluid  and  the  pressed  extract  is  handled  the  same  as  an 
original  juice. 

Products  marked  6  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  These 
extracts  are  merely  dilutions  of  _  the  original  substance  in  the  buffered 
saline  solution.  Milk  is  decaseinated  with  rennin.  The  whey  is  dia- 
lyzed against  a  slightly  alkaline  buffered  solution,  concentrated  and 
sterilized  by  filtration. 

Products  marked  7  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
powdered  material  is  washed  with  toluene,  alcohol  and  ether.  The 
buffered  saline  extract  of  the  defatted  flour  is  dialyzed,  concentrated 
and  sterilized  by  filtration.  The  alcohol-ether  treatment  is  exhaustive 
and  the  dialysis  continued  for  a  long  time  in  order  to  insure  stability 
of  the  extract  and  complete  removal  of  toxic  fractions  present. 


32       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

The  product  marked  8  is  prepared  by  the  following  method:  Raw 
unroasted  cacao  beans  are  ground  and  treated  with  toluene  and  ether 
until  practically  oil  free.  The  resulting  powder  is  extracted  with  the 
buffered  solution.  The  extract  is  sterilized  by  filtration  and  standard- 
ized on  the  nitrogen  basis  per  cubic  centimeter. 

The  product  marked  9  is  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
powdered  material  is  washed  with  toluene,  alcohol  and  ether.  After 
evaporation  of  the  fat  solvent,  it  is  extracted  with  the  buffered  solution. 
The  extract  is  dialyzed  until  skin  tests  prove  it  to  be  no  longer  irri- 
tating. The  final  product  is  sterilized  by  filtration  and  standardized 
on  the  basis  of  its  nitrogen  content  per   cubic  centimeter. 

The  product  marked  10  is  prepared  by  boiling  the  heads  of  any  com- 
mon fish  for  one  hour  in  acidified  distilled  water;  for  example,  40 
pounds  of  fish  heads  in  30  liters  of  water  with  45  cc.  of  glacial  acetic 
acid.  The  resulting  extract  is  filtered  while  hot  through  cloth  yielding 
25  liters  of  fluid  of  pH  5.0.  The  extract  is  evaporated  on  a  steam 
bath  to  2  liters  of  thick  residue,  representing  the  stock  material  from 
which  simple  saline  dilutions  are  made. 

The  product  marked  11  is  prepared  in  the  following  manner:  vacuum 
cleaner  collections  from  New  York  apartment  houses  are  dried,  sifted 
and  extracted  with  toluene,  alcohol  and  ether.  The  dry  powder  is  then 
extracted  under  toluene  with  the  buffered  solution.  After  dialysis,  the 
extract   is   concentrated   and   sterilized. 

The  product  marked  "12"  is  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
ground  material  is  washed  with  toluol,  alcohol  and  ether  until  practically 
oil  free.  The  resulting  residue  is  dried  and  extracted  with  the  buft'ered 
solution.  The  extract  is  boiled  for  three  minutes  for  detoxification. 
The  coagulum  formed  is  separated  at  once  from  the  extract  by  filtra- 
tion. The  toxin  free  extract  is  sterilized  by  filtration  and  standardized 
on  the  basis  of  its  nitrogen  content. 

The  product  marked  "13"  is  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
dried  worms  are  ground  and  treated  with  toluol  and  ether  until  prac- 
tically fat  free.  The  residue  is  extracted  with  the  buffered  solution. 
The  dialyzed  extract  is  sterilized  by  Berkefeld  filtration  and  standardized 
according  to  its  nitrogen   content. 

ALLERGENIC  EXTRACTS-MULFORD.  —  Liquids 
obtained  by  extracting"  the  protein  of  substances  believed  to 
be  the  cause  of  specific  sensitization. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  general  article  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  general  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Preparations. 

Allergenic  Extracts-Mulford  are  marketed  in  2  cc,  ampule 
vials  containing  1,500  nitrogen  units  per  cubic  centimeter,  except 
allergenic  preparations  marked  (*),  which  contain  100  nitrogen 
units  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Manufactured  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Almond  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Apple  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,- 
Apricot  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Artichoke  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,^  Asparagus  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,"^  Banana  Allergenic 
Extract-Mnlford,^  Barley  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Bass  (Sea)  Aller- 
genic Extract-Mulford,^  Bean  (Kidney)  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^ 
Bean  (Lima)  Allergenic  Extract-Midjford,^  Bean  (Navy)  Allergenic 
Extract-Mtilford,^  Bean  (Soy)  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Bean 
(String)  Allergenic  Extract-Miilford,^  Beef  Allergenic  Extract-Mulfard,^ 
Beet  Allergenic  Extract-Miilford,^  Blackberry  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^ 
Bluefish  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Brazilntit  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford}  Brussels  Sprouts  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  *  Buckwheat 
Allergenic  Extract-Mulford}  Butternut  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^ 
Cabbage  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Cantaloupe  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,^    Carp    Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^    Carrot    Allergenic    Extract- 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     33 

Mulford,^     Cauliflower    Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,^     Celery     Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^  Cheese  (American)  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Cheese 
(Sztnss)   Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Cherry  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,- 
Chestniit     Allergenic     Extract-Mulford}      Chicken     Allergenic     Extract- 
Miilford,^      Cinnamon      Allergenic      Extract-Mulford}      Clam      Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Clove    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford}    *Cocoa    Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Coconut    Allergenic    Extract-Mulfard,^    Codfish    Aller- 
genic   Extract-Mulford,^    Coffee   Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^    Corn   Aller- 
genic   Extract-Mulford,^     Crab     Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,^     Cranberry 
Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Cucumber  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Duck 
Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Egg  Plant  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  *Egg 
White    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    *Egg    (Whole)    Allergenic    Extract- 
Mulford,^  *Egg  Yolk  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Fig  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,'^      Garlic      Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,'^      *Ginger      Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Goose    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Grape    Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^  Grapefruit  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Haddock  Aller- 
genic   Extract-Mulford,^    Halibut    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Herring 
Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Hickory    Nut    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^ 
Honey  Dew  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Huckleberry  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,'^    *Lactalbumen    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Lamb    Allergetiic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Lemon    Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^    Lentil    Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,'^    Lettuce    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Lobster    Alley 
genie    Extract-Mulford,^     Mackerel    Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,'^     *Milk 
(Cow)    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,''    Mushrooms   Allergenic   Extract-Mul- 
ford,'^ *Mustard  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Nutmeg  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,^    Oats    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Okra    Allergenic    Extract- 
Mulford,"^       Olive       Allergenic       Extract-Mulford,'^       Onion       Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,"^   Orange   Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^   Oyster  Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Parsley    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,"^    Parsnip    Aller- 
genic Extract-Mulford,^  Paprika  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Pea  (Green) 
Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,"^     Pea      (Black-Eyed)      Allergenic     Extract- 
Mulford,'^  Peach  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Peanut  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,^       Pear       Allergenic       Extract-Mulford,'^       Pecan        Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    *Pepper    (Black)    Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^    Pepper 
(Red)    Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^   Pepper    (Szveet)    Allergenic   Extract- 
Mulford,^     Perch      Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,^      Pineapple     Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,'^     Plum     Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,'^    Pork     Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Potato     (White)    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,"    Potato 
(Sweet)  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Prune  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford, '^ 
Pumpkin  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^  Radish  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,' 
Raisin      Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,"      Raspberry      Allergenic     Extract- 
Mulford,"       Rhubarb      Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,"      Rice      Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^    Rye    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Salmon    Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^     Scallop     Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,^     Shad     Aller- 
genic   Extract-Mulford,^   Shad   Roe   Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^   Shrimp 
Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,^    Smelt     Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Sole 
Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,^      Spinach       Allergenic      Extract-Mulford," 
Squash     Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,"     Strawberry     Allergenic     Extract- 
Mulford,"     Swiss     Chard     Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,"     Tea     Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^  Tomato  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,"  Trout  (Sea)  Aller- 
genic  Extract-Mulford,'^    Tuna   Fish   Allergenic   Extract-Mulford,^   Turkey 
Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^   Turnip  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,'^   Vanilla 
Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,'^    Veal    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    Walnut 
(Black)      Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,'^      Walnut      (English)      Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^  Watermelon  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,"  *  Wheat  Aller- 
genic Extract-Mulford,^    'Yeast  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,"  *Camel  Hair 
Allergenic      Extract-Mulford,'^     *Cat     Hair    Allergenic     Extract-Mulford,* 
*Cattle  Dander  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,*  *Chicken  Feathers  Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,*  *Dog  Hair  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,*  *Duck  Feathers 
Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,*    *Goat    Hair    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,* 
*Goose  Feathers  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,*  *Guinea-Pig  Hair  Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,*  Hog  Hair  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,*  *Horse  Dander 
Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,*    *Rabbit    Hair    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,* 
*Sheep  Wool  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,*  ^Cottonseed  Allergenic  Extract- 
Mulford,'^  Dust,  House,  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  *Flaxseed  Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,'^     *Glue     (Fish)     Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^^     *Horse 
Serum    Allergenic    Extract-Mulford,^    *Kapok    Seed    Allergenic    Extract- 


34      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Miilford,^  *Orris  Root  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  *Pyrethrum  Allergenic 
Extract-Mulford,^  *Rice  Polish  Allergenic  Extract-Mulford,^  Silk  Aller- 
genic  Extract-Mulford,^   Tobacco   Allergenic   Extract-Mulford.^ 

Allergenic  Extracts-Mulford  are  prepared  by  extracting  various  sub- 
stances with  buffered  salt  solution,  consisting  of  monobasic  potassium 
phosphate  (KH2PO4)  0.363  Gm.,  dibasic  sodium  phosphate  (NasHPO*) 
1.43  Gm,,  and  sodium  chloride  (NaCl)  5  Gm.,  in  1  liter  of  distilled 
water  containing  0.4  per  cent  of  phenol. 

Products  marked  1  are  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The  crude 
material  is  ground  as  fine  as  possible.  The  powder,  or  flour,  is  placed  in 
a  Buchner  funnel  and  washed  with  carbon  tetrachloride  until  the  wash- 
ings are  clear  and  colorless.  The  caibon  tetrachloride  is  removed  with 
ether.  The  washings  are  discarded  and  the  residue  is  dried.  The  dried 
residue  is  extracted  under  toluene  with  buffered  salt  solution  from  one 
to  three  days  at  room  temperature. 

Products  marked  2  are  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The  fruits 
or  vegetables  are  ground  as  fine  as  possible.  Buffered  salt  solution  is 
added  to  the  ground  pulp  and  allowed  to  extract  under  toluene  from  one 
to   three   days   at    room   temperature. 

Products  marked  3  are  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The 
muscle  fibers,  after  the  removal  of  fat  and  tendons,  are  ground  as  fine 
as  possible.  The  ground  muscle  is  washed  with  toluene  until  free  from 
fats  and  oils.  The  toluene  washings  are  discarded.  The  ground  meat 
is  extracted  under  toluene  with  buffered  salt  solution  from  one  to  three 
days  at  room  temperature. 

Products  marked  4  are  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The 
feathers  or  hair  are  washed  with  ether  and  the  suspended  particles  of 
dander  are  collected  by  filtration.  The  dried  material  is  extracted  under 
toluene  with  buffered  salt  solution  from  one  to  three  days  at  room 
temperature. 

Preparations  marked  5  are  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The 
yolk  of  an  egg  is  separated  from  the  white  in  a  sterile  manner.  One 
part  of  egg  white,  or  egg  yolk,  is  diluted  with  four  parts  of  sterile 
buffered  salt  solution. 

Lactalbumen,  marked  6,  is  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The 
fat  from  1  liter  of  milk  is  removed  by  centrifugation.  The  fat-free  milk 
is  saturated  at  30  C.  with  magnesium  sulfate,  which  precipitates  the 
caseinogen  and  lactoglobulin.  The  filtrate  is  acidified  with  acetic  acid 
so  that  the  content  of  the  acid  is  1  per  cent.  The  precipitate  is  filtered 
off,  pressed  out,  and  dissolved  in  water;  the  solution  is  neutralized  and 
dialyzed.  (Practical  Organic  and  Bio-Chemistry,  R,  H,  A,  Plimmer, 
p.    446). 

Milk,  marked  7,  is  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  One  liter  of 
fresh  nonheated  milk,  from  which  the  fat  has  been  removed  by  cen- 
trifugation, is  mixed  with  3  cc,  of  1  per  cent  rennin  solution  and  placed 
in  a  water  bath  at  27  C,  for  one-half  hour.  The  precipitated  casein  is 
removed  by  straining  through  a  sterile  towel.  The  filtrate  is  neutralized 
with  saturated  solution  of  sodium  bicarbonate,  and  sterilized  by  filtra- 
tion  (J.  Immunol.   15:2,  1928). 

Dust,  marked  8,  is  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  The  dust  is 
washed  with  ether  and  extracted  under  toluene  with  a  mixture  of  two 
parts  of  alkaline  extracting  fluid  (2.5  Gm.  of  sodium  bicarbonate  and 
5  Gm.  of  sodium  chloride  in  1  liter  of  distilled  water)  and  one  part  of 
buffered  salt  solution  saturated  with  carbon  dioxide.  The  extract  is 
dialyzed  against  the  same  fluid,  passing  carbon  dioxide  constantly  during 
the  period  of  dialysis.  After  dialysis,  the  extract  is  evaporated  (electric 
fan)  and,  during  the  process  carbon  dioxide  is  kept  constantly  bubbling 
through  the  fluid   (/.  Immunol.   15:2,   1928). 

Horse  serum,  marked  9,  is  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  Normal 
horse  serum  containing  0.4  per  cent  of  phenol  as  a  preservative  is  used. 

Glue,  marked  10,  is  prepared  for  extraction  as  follows:  Glue  is 
extracted  with  buffered  salt  solution. 

Allergenic  Extracts-Mulford  are  tested  and  standardized  in  terms  of 
"nitrogen  units."  The  nitrogen  unit  has  been  arbitrarily  chosen  as 
0.00016  mg.  of  nitrogen. 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     35 

CONCENTRATED  POLLEN  ANTIGENS- 
LEDERLE. — Liquids  obtained  by  extracting  the  protein  from 
the  pollen  of  plants  with  a  liquid  consisting  of  67  per  cent  of 
glycerin  and  33  per  cent  of  a  buffered  saline  solution. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Concentrated  pollen  antigens-Lederle  are  marketed  in  the 
following  packages :  Complete  Scries :  fifteen  syringes  contain- 
ing, respectively,  2.5,  5,  10,  20.  35,  60,  100,  165,  275,  450,  750, 
1,200,  1,800,  2,400  and  3,000  pollen  units. 

Series  A :  five  syringes  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(1  to  5,  inclusive)  2.5,  5,  10,  20  and  35  pollen  units,  respectively. 

Series  B  :  five  syringes  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(6  to  10,  inclusive)  60,  100,  165,  275  and  450  pollen  units, 
respectively. 

Series  C :  five  syringes  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(11  to  15,  inclusive)  750,  1,200,  1,800,  2,400  and  3,000  pollen 
units,   respectively. 

Series   D :    five  syringes,  each   containing  3,000  units. 

Scries   E :    five   syringes,   each  containing  6,000  units. 

Series  F :  five  syringes  containing,  respectivelv,  3,600,  4,200, 
4,800,  5,400  and  6,000  pollen  units. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River.  New 
York.      No   U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Concentrated  Pollen  Antigen  (Lederle)  Ragweed  Combined  (Conunon 
and  Giant  Ragweed  in    equal  parts). 

The  following  product  is  supplied  in  five  syringe  packages 
representing  series  A,  D,  C  and  F : 

Mixed  Grasses,  Concentrated  Pollen  Antigen-Ledcrlc  (June  Grass, 
Orchard  Grass,  Sweet  Vernal  Grass,  Red  Top  and  Timothy,  in  equal 
parts). 

Concentrated  pollen  antigens-Lederle  are  prepared  by  grinding  the 
dried  pollen  with  glass  dust  for  six  hours,  using  a  diluent  composed 
of  67  per  cent  glycerin  and  33  per  cent  of  a  solution  containing  0.5 
per  cent  sodium  chloride,  0.27  per  cent  sodium  bicarbonate  and  0.4  per 
cent  phenol,  to  moisten  the  pollen.  The  material  is  shaken  in  a 
mechanical  shaker,  incubated  for  eighteen  hours,  shaken  again,  paper- 
pulped,  and  Berkefeld  filtered.  The  finished  stock  extract  contains 
.10.000  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter,  the  pollen  unit  having  been 
arbitrarily   chosen   as  the  equivalent  of   0.00001   mg.  of  total   nitrogen. 

Concentrated  pollen  antigens-Lederle  are  standardized  by  the  com- 
plement fixation  method  to  determine  the  active  antigenic  power  of 
their  protein  content.  Immune  serum  is  obtained  from  rabbits  which 
have  been  immunized  with  a  gradually  increasing  number  of  units  of 
pollen.  Using  the  same  technic  for  complement  fixation  as  that 
adopted  by  the  Research  Laboratories  for  the  Department  of  Health. 
New  York,  one  pollen  unit  is  found  to  be  equivalent  approximately  to 
one-twentieth  unit  of  antigen,  a  unit  of  antigen  being  taken  as  the 
smallest  amount  that  gives  complete  fixation  in  the  hemolytic  series. 

CONCENTRATED  POLLEN  EXTRACTS-ABBOTT. 

—Liquids  obtained  by  extracting  the  dried  pollen  of  plants  with 
a  liquid  consisting  of  5  per  cent  of  dextrose  and  0.5  per  cent  of 
phenol  in  distilled  water. 


36      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepara- 
tions. 

Concentrated  pollen  extracts  are  marketed  in  2  cc.  and  5  cc. 
vials. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  U.  S. 
patent  applied   for.      No   U.    S.    trademark. 

Annual  Sage  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Arizona  Ash  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Ash  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Bermuda  Grass  Con- 
centrated Pollen  Extract;  Black  Walnut  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract; 
Biennial  Sage  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Blue  Grass  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Box  Elder  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Burweed  Marsh 
Elder  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Canada  Blue  Grass  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Cocklebur  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Corn  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Cosmos  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Costal  Sagebrush 
Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Cottonwood  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract; 
Crab  Grass  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Dandelion  Concentrated  Pollen 
Extract;  English  Plantain  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Elm  Con- 
centrated Pollen  Extract;  False  Ragzveed  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract- 
Giant  Ragzveed  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Goldenrod  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Goose  Grass  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Hemp  Concen- 
trated Pollen  Extract;  Hickory  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Johnson 
Grass  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Lamb's  Quarters  Concentrated  Pollen 
Extract;  Marsh  Elder  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Mixed  Ragzveed 
(Ambrosia  elatior  and  Ambrosia  trifida)  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract; 
Mountain  Cedar  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Mugwort  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Oak  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Orchard  Grass  Con- 
centrated Pollen  Extract;  Ox-Eye  Daisy  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract; 
Palmer's  Amaranth  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Plantain  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Prairie  Sage  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Quailbrush 
Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Redroot  Pigzveed  Concentrated  Pollen 
Extract;  Red  Sorrel  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Redtop  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Russian  Thistle  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Sage-brush 
Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Short  Ragzveed  Concentrated  Pollen 
Extract;  Slender  False  Ragzveed  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Southern 
Ragweed  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Spiny  Amaranth  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract:  Sudan  Grass  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Sunflozver 
Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Szveet  Vernal  Grass  Concentrated  Pollen 
Extract;  Sycamore  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Timothy  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;  Western  Ragzveed  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Western 
Water  Hemp  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract;  Yellozv  Dock  Concentrated 
Pollen  Extract;   Yellozv  Fox-Tail  Concentrated  Pollen  Extract. 

Concentrated  pollen  extracts-Abbott  are  prepared  by  grinding  dried  pollen 
with  a  menstruum  composed  of  5  per  cent  of  dextrose  and  0.5  per  cent 
of  phenol  in  distilled  water.  The  extract  is  clarified  by  filtration  and 
sterilized  by  passing  the  filtrate  through  Handler  filters.  The  finished 
liquid  is  a  3  per  cent  extract  of  the  dried  pollen,  each  cubic  centimeter 
representing    0.03    Gm.    of    dried    pollen    (30,000    units). 

POLLEN   ALLERGEN   SOLUTIONS-SQUIBB.  — 

Solutions  containing  the  sodium  chloride-soluble  protein  from 
the  isolated  pollen  of  various  species  of  plants.  Pollen  allergen 
solutions-Squibb  are  intended  for  the  prevention  and  treatment 
of  hay  fever. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein. 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article.  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

The  following  pollen  allergen  solutions-Squibb  are  marketed 
in  treatment  set  packages  of  three  3.5  cc.  vials,  the  first  con- 
taining   100    protein    nitrogen    units    per    cubic    centimeter,    the 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     2>7 

second  containing  1,000  protein  nitrogen  units  per  cubic  centi- 
meter, and  the  third  containing  10,000  protein  nitrogen  units 
per  cubic  centimeter ;  and  in  treatment  sets  consisting  of : 

Set  A :  fifteen  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(1  to  15,  inclusive)  10,  20,  40,  70,  100,  200,  350,  500,  750, 
1,000,  1,000,  1,500,  2,500,  4,000  and  5,000  protein  nitrogen  units, 
respectively,  and  15  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which  to  make 
the  proper  dilution  of  each  dose. 

Set  D :  five  vials  (dose  15)  each  containing  5,000  protein 
nitrogen  units,  and  five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which  to 
make  the  proper  dihition  of  each  dose. 

Grasses  Combined  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Stjidbb  (Bermuda  Grass, 
June  Grass,  Orchard  Grass,  Red  Top  and  Timothy,  in  equal  parts);  Rag- 
zveed  Combined  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb. 

The  following  products  are  marketed  in  5  cc.  vials  containing 
10,000  protein  nitrogen  units  per  cubic  centimeter: 

Ash  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Bermuda  Grass  Pollen  Allergen 
Solution-Squibb;  Black  Walnut  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  Cali- 
fornia Black  IValnut  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  Cocklebur  Pollen 
Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  Corn  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Cot- 
tonwood (Necklace  Poplar)  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Sqtiibb ;  Dandelion 
Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  English  Plantain  Pollen  Allergen 
Solution-Squibb;  False  Ragiveeds  Combined  Pollen  Allergen  Solution- 
Squibb  (False  Ragweed  and  Slender  Ragzvecd  in  equal  parts)  ;  Goldenrod 
Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Grasses  Combined  Pollen  Allergen 
Solution-Squibb  (Bermuda  Grass,  June  Grass,  Orchard  Grass,  Red  Top 
and  Timothy  in  equal  parts);  Johnson  Grass  Pollen  Allergen  Solution- 
Squibb;  June  Grass  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Marsh  Elder 
Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Oak  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb; 
Orachs  (Shadscales)  Combined  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb  (Red- 
scale,  Shadscale  and  Wingscale  in  equal  parts) ;  Orchard  Grass  Pollen 
Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  Oregon  Ash  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb; 
Ragweed  Combined  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb  (Giant  Ragweed  and 
Dzvarf  Ragzveed  in  equal  parts);  Ragweed  (Dwarf)  Pollen  Allergen 
Solution-Squibb ;  Ragweed  (Giant)  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ; 
Red  Top  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Rye  Grasses  Combined  Pollen 
Allergen  Solution-Squibb  (Perennial  Rye  Grass  and  Italian  Rye  Grass  in 
equal  parts);  Russian  Thistle  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb ;  Sagebrush 
Combined  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb  (Pasture  Sage  and  Sage- 
brush in  equal  parts);  Sweet  Vernal  Grass  Pollen  Allergen  Solution- 
Squibb;  Timothy  Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  Western  Ragweed 
Pollen  Allergen  Solution-Squibb;  Woru\woods  Combined  Pollen  Allergen 
Solution-Squibb  (Biennial  Wormwood,  Dark  Leaved  Mugwort,  Dragon 
Sagewort  and  Mugwort  in  equal  parts). 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Pollen  allergen  solutions-Squibb  are  prepared  by  the  following  method  : 
The  pollen  is  weighed  and  extracted  with  1  per  cent  sodium  chloride 
solution  for  twelve  hours.  The  protein  nitrogen  in  the  extract  is 
determined  by  the  Kjeldahl  method  after  phosphotungstic  acid  pre- 
cipitation of  the  protein  fraction  and  the  extract  is  diluted  with  glycerin 
and  1  per  cent  sodium  chloride  solution  until  the  final  volume  contains 
50  per  cent  of  glycejin.  The  solution  is  then  filtered  through  a  Berke- 
feld  filter,  and  the  filtrate  is  tested  for  sterility  and  diluted  so  that 
each  dosage  form  contains  the  declared  quantity  of  pollen  nitrogen 
units.  The  protein  nitrogen  fraction  of  0.00001  mg.  is  one  protein 
nitrogen  unit. 

POLLEN  ANTIGENS-LEDERLE.  — Liquids  obtained 
by  extracting  the  protein  from  the  pollen  of  plants  with  a 
liquid  consisting  of  67  per  cent  glycerin  and  33  per  cent  of  a 
buffered  saline  solution. 


38      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Pollen  antigens-Lederle  are  marketed  in  the  following  forms : 

Series  A:  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(1  to  5,  inclusive)  2.5,  5,  10,  20  and  35  pollen  units,  respectively, 
and  five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which  to  make  the  proper 
dilution  of  each  dose. 

Series  B :  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(6  to  10,  inclusive)  60,  100,  165,  275  and  450  pollen  units, 
respectively,  and  five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which  to 
make  the  proper  dilution  of  each  dose. 

Series  C :  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(11  to  15,  inclusive)  750,  1,200,  1,800,  2,400  and  3,000  pollen 
units,  respectively,  and  five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which 
to  make  the  proper  dilution  of  each  dose. 

Series  D :  five  vials  each  containing  3,000  pollen  units  and 
five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which  to  make  the  proper 
dilution  of  each  dose. 

Complete  Series:  packages  containing  the  15  doses  described 
in  Series  A,  B  and  C. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 
No  U.   S.    patent  or   trademark. 

Annual  Salt  Bush  Pollen  Antigcn-Lederle;  Arizona  Ash  Pollen  Antigen- 
Lcdcrle;  Arizona  IValnut  Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle ;  Ash  Pollen  Antigen- 
Lederle;  Beech  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ;  Bermuda  Grass  Pollen 
Antigen-Lederle ;  Birch  Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle;  Black  W^alnut  Pollen 
Antigen-Lederle ;  Careless  Weed  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ;  Cocklebur 
Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Cottonwood  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ;  Giant 
Ragweed  Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle ;  Green  Sage  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ; 
Hickory  Pollen  Antigcn-Lederle :  Johnson  Grass  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle; 
June  Grass  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle  (Poa  pratensis) ;  Lamb's  Quarters 
Pollen  Antigcn-Lederle;  Marsh  Elder  Pollen  Antigen-L.ederle;  Mountain 
Cedar  Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle;  Mugwort  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Oak 
Pollen  Antigcn-Lederle;  OHz'e  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle :  Orchard  Grass 
Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Pasture  Sage  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Perennial 
Rye  Grass  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Poplar  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle:  Rabbit 
Bush  Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle;  Ragweed  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle  (Ambrosia 
elatior) ;  Ragzvccd  Combined  Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle  (Common  and  Giant 
Ragweed,  in  equal  parts);  Redroot  Pigweed  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle; 
Prostrate  Pigweed  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ;  Plantain  Pollen  Antigen- 
Lederle;  Redtop  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Russian  Thistle  Pollen  Antigen- 
Lederle;  Sage-brush  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ;  Shad  Scale  Pollen 
Antigen-Lederle:  Sheep  Sorrel  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Slender  Ragweed 
Pollen  Antigen-Lederle:  Southwestern  Ragweed  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle; 
Spiny  Amaranth  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Summer  Cypress  Pollen 
Antigen-Lcderle ;  Sweei  Vernal  Grass  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Sycamore 
Pollen  Antigen-Lcderle;  Timothy  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle;  Western 
Water  Hemp  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle ;  Western  Ragweed  Pollen  Antigen- 
Lederle;  Yellow  Dock  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle. 

The  following  product  is  marketed  in  package  forms 
designated : 

Series  E:  five  vials  each  containing  6,000  pollen  units  and 
five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which  to  make  the  proper 
dilution  of  each  dose. 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     39 

Series  F:  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(16  to  20,  inclusive)  3,600,  4,200,  4,800,  5,400  and  6,000  pollen 
units,  respectively,  and  five  vials  of  sterile  diluent  with  which 
to  make  the  proper  dilution  of  each  dose. 

Also  in  packages  of  three  3  cc.  vials  containing  100,  1,500  and 
20,000  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter,   respectively. 

Ragweed  Combined  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle :  also  marketed  in  packages 
of  three  3  cc.  vials  containing  100,  1,500,  and  20,000  pollen  units  per 
cubic  centimeter,   respectively. 

The  following  product  is  supplied  in  five  vial  packages  repre- 
senting series  A,  B,  C  and  F,  and  in  packages  of  three  3  cc. 
vials  containing  100,  1,500  and  20,000  pollen  units  per  cubic 
centimeter,   respectively. 

Mixed  Grasses  Pollen  Antigen-Lederle  (June  Grass,  Orchard  Grass, 
Sweet    Vernal   Grass,  Red   Top  and   Timothy,  in  equal  parts). 

Pollen  antigens-Lederle  are  prepared  by  grinding  the  dried  pollen 
with  glass  dust  in  a  mortar  for  six  hours,  using  a  diluent  composed 
of  67  per  cent  of  glycerin  and  33  per  cent  of  a  solution  containing 
0.5  per  cent  sodium  chloride,  0.27  per  cent  sodium  bicarbonate  arid 
0.45  per  cent  phenol  to  moisten  the  pollen.  The  material  is  shaken  in 
a  mechanical  shaker,  incubated  for  eighteen  hours,  shaken  again,  paper 
pulped,  and  Berkefeld  filtered.  The  finished  stock  extract  contains 
30,000  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter,  the  pollen  unit  having  been 
arbitrarily  chosen  as  the  equivalent  of  0.00001  mg.  of  total  nitrogen. 

Pollen  antigens-Lederle  are  standardized  by  the  complement  fixation 
method  to  determine  the  active  antigenic  power  of  their  protein  content. 
Immune  serum  is  obtained  from  rabbits  which  have  been  immunized 
with  a  gradually  increasing  number  of  units  of  pollen.  Using  the 
same  technic  for  complement  fixation  as  that  adopted  by  the  Research 
Laboratories  for  the  Department  of  Health,  New  York,  one  pollen 
unit  is  found  to  be  equivalent  approximately  to  one  twentieth  of  a 
unit  of  antigen,  taking  a  unit  of  antigen  as  the  smallest  amount  that 
gives  complete  fixation  in  the  hemolytic  series. 

POLLEN    ANTIGENS-"NATI  ON  AL."— Liquids 

obtained  by  extracting  the  dried  pollen  of  plants  with  a  0.5  per 
cent  sodium  chloride  solution  containing  approximately  0.28  per 
cent  of  sodium  bicarbonate,  and  0.4  per  cent  of  phenol. 

Actions  and  Uses— See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage— See  preceding  article.  Allergenic  Protein  Prepara- 
tions. 

Pollen  antigens-"National"  are  marketed  in  packages  of  one 
5  cc.  vial  containing  25  units  per  cubic  centimeter ;  in  packages 
of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  50  units  per  cubic  centimeter;  in 
packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  100  units  per  cubic  centi- 
meter; in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  250  units  per 
cubic  centimeter;  in  packages  of  four  1  cc.  syringes,  containing 
150units  per  cubic  centimeter;  and  in  packages  of  sixteen  1  cc. 
syringes  containing,  respectively,  2.5,  5,  10,  15,  22.5,  30,  40,  50, 
50,  50,  50,  75,  75,  75,  100,  and  100  units  per  cubic  centimeter. 
The  unit  represents  approximately  0.001  mg.  of  nitrogen. 

Manufactured  by  the  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia.  No  U.  S. 
patent   or   trademark. 


40       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Ragzveed  Pollen  Antigen-" National"  (Ambrosia  elatior  and  Ambrosia 
trifida) ;   Timothy   Pollen   Antigen-" National"    (Phleum   pratense). 

Pollen  antigens  "National"  are  prepared  by  the  following  method:  The 
pollen  is  weighed  and  extracted  with  ether.  After  removal  of  the  ether 
the  pollen  is  mixed  with  the  extracting  liquid  consisting  of  a  0.5  per  cent 
sodium  chloride  solution  containing  approximately  0.28  per  cent  of 
sodium  bicarbonate  and  0.4  per  cent  of  phenol  and  then  covered  with 
toluene.  After  four  days,  during  which  time  the  mixture  is  shaken 
once  or  twice  daily,  the  supernatant  fluid  is  decanted  and  the  sediment 
mixed  with  a  second  portion  of  extracting  fluid.  As  soon  as  the  sedi- 
ment has  settled,  the  supernatant  fluid  is  decanted  and  mixed  with  the 
first  portion.  The  combined  decanted  fluid  is  then  subjected  to  Berke- 
feld  filtration  and  tested  for  sterility.  A  Kjeldahl  test  is  made  on  the 
concentrated  extract  to  determine  the  nitrogen.  Dilutions  are  prepared 
on  a  basis  of   0.001  mg.  of  nitrogen  per  unit. 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS-ARLCO.— Liquids  obtained  by 
extracting-  the  proteins  from  the  pollen  of  various  species  of 
plants. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Pollen  extracts-Arlco  are  marketed  in  sets  of  five  vials 
representing  graduated  concentrations,  namely,  1  in  10,000,  1  in 
5,000,  1  in  1,000,  1  in  500  and  1  in  100,  respectively." 

Manufactured  by  the  Arlington  Chemical  Co.,  Yonkers,  N.  Y.  No 
U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Acacia  (Scap.)  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Alfalfa  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Arizona  Ash  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Arizona  Cottonwood  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Arizona  Walnut  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Ash  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Aster  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Bermuda  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Birch 
Mixture  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (White  Birch,  Black  Birch  and  Yellozv 
Birch,  in  equal  parts);  Birch  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Box  Elder  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco ;  Burning  Bush  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Burr  Ragweed  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Burrowecd  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Califortiia  Mugwort 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  California  Walnut  (Black)  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Carlessiveed  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Carpet  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Cherry  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Cocklebur  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Cosmos 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Clover  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Corn  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Dahlia  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Daisy  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Dande- 
lion Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Dock  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Elm  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Fleabane  (Common)  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Golden  Glow  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Golden  Rod  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Goosefoot  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Grass  Mixture  No.  1  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (Timothy, 
June  Grass,  Orchard  Grass  ajid  Red  Top,  in  equal  parts);  Grass  Mixture 
No.  2  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (Timothy,  40  per  cent;  June  Grass,  Orchard 
Grass,  Red  Top  and  Sweet  Vernal  Grass,  each  15  per  cent);  Grass  Mix- 
ture No.  3  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (Bermuda  Grass  and  Johnson  Grass,  in 
equal  parts);  Greasezvood  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Hemp  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Hickory  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Hill  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Indian  Rice  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Indian  Wormzvood  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Johnson  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  June  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco  (Poa  pratensis):  Live  Oak  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Locust  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Maple  Mixture  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (Red  Maple,  Ash- 
Leaved  Maple;  Norzvay  Maple  and  Sugar  Maple,  in  equal  parts);  Maple 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Marsh  Elder  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Meadozv  Fescue 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Mexican  Tea  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Mountain  Cedar 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Mugzvort  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Narcissus  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Oak  Mixture  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (White  Oak,  Red  Oak, 
Black  Oak  and  Szvamp  Oak,  in  equal  parts);  Oak  Pollen  Extract-Arlco: 
Oat  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Olive  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Orach 
Pollen     Extract-Arlco;     Orchard     Grass    Pollen     Extract-Arlco;     Pigzveed 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     41 

Pollen  Extract- Arlco;  Pine  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Plantain  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Poplar  Pollen  Extract-Arlco ;  Prairie  Ragweed  Pollen  Extract-Arlco ; 
Prairie  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Privet  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Rag- 
iveed  Dzvarf  and  Giant  Mixture  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (equal  parts  of 
each);  Ragweed  Mixture  Plus  Burzveed  Marsh  Elder  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Ragweed  Pollen  Extract-Arlco  (Ambrosia  trifida) ;  Ragweed  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco  (Ambrosia  artemisaefolia) ;  Red  Fescue  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Redtop  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Rose  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Russian 
Thistle  Pollen  Extract-Arlco ;  Rye  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Rye  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Sage-brush  Pollen  Extract-Arlco ;  Sea  Elite  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Shad  Scale  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Slender  Ragweed  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Spiny  Amaranth  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Sunflower  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Szveet  Clover  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Sweet  Vernal  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco;  Sycamore  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Thistle  Pollen  Extract- 
Arlco;  Timothy  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Velvet  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Walnut  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Western  Cottonwood  Pollen  Extract-Arlco; 
Western  Ragzveed  (Giant)  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Western  Water  Hemp 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Wild  Sunflower  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Winter  Fat 
Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Willow  Pollen  Extract-Arlco;  Yellow  Daisy  Pollen 
Extract-Arlco. 

Pollen  extracts-Arlco  are  prepared  by  the  method  of  Walker  (.Am. 
J.  M.  Sc.  157:409  [March]  1919):  To  0.5  Gm.  of  the  dry  pollen 
is  added  44  cc.  of  sterile  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and 
the  mixture  is  shaken  thoroughly  at  frequent  intervals  for  twenty- 
four  hours.  Sufficient  absolute  alcohol  (7  cc.)  is  then  added  to  make 
the  alcohol  content  14  per  cent.  The  mixture  is  thoroughly  shaken 
at  frequent  intervals  for  twrenty-four  hours,  after  which  it  is  cen- 
trifugalized  at  high  speed  and  the  supernatant  fluid  is  drawn  off  with 
a  pipette.  This  liquid,  therefore,  consists  of  the  pollen  protein  dis- 
solved in  a  14  per  cent  alcoholic  physiologic  solution  of  sodium 
chloride,  and  it  represents  by  weight,  1  part  of  pollen  in  100  parts  of 
solvent.  This  1  in  100  solution  is  used  as  stock  and  from  it  other  dilu- 
tions, such  as  1  in  500,  1  in  1,000,  \  in  5,000  and  1  in  10,000  are 
made.      Cresol   is  added   as  a   preservative. 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS-CUTTER.— Liquids  obtained  by 
extracting  the  dried  pollen  of  plants  with  a  liquid  consisting 
of  67  per  cent  of  glycerin  and  2)2)  per  cent  of  a  buffered  saline 
solution. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Pollen  extracts-Cutter  are  marketed  in  complete  treatment 
set  packages  consisting  of  three  vials  representing  graduated 
concentrations,  namely,  1  in  10,000,  1  in  1,000  and  1  in  100, 
respectively ;  and  in  single  vial  packages  containing  5  cc.  of  a 
1:100  solution. 

Manufactured  by  the  Cutter  Laboratory,  Berkeley,  Calif.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Alkali  Weed  Pollen  Extract-Cutter ;  All  Scale  Pollen  Extract-Cutter; 
Annual  Salt  Bush  Pollen  E.itract-Cutter;  Arizona  Ash  Pollen  Extract- 
Cutter;  Bermuda  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Black  Walnut  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter;  Box  Elder  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Burning  Bush  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter;  Canary  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Careless  Weed  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter ;  Coast  Sagebrush  Pollen  Extract-Cutter ;  Cocklebur  Pollen 
Extract-Ctitter;  Common  Raazveed  Pollen  Extract-Cutter :  Cam  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter;  Cottonzvood  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  False  Ragweed  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter;  Foxtail  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Giant  Ragweed  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter ;  Johnson  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Cutter ;  June  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter :  Lamb's  Quarters  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Mountain  Cedar 
Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Marsh  Elder  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Mugzvort  Pol- 
len   Extract-Cutter;    Oak    Pollen    Extract-Cutter;    Olive    Pollen    Extract- 


42       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Cutter;  Orchard  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Plantain  Pollen  Extract- 
Cutter;  Red  Root  Pigweed  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Red  Top  Pollen  Extract- 
Cutter;  Russian  Thistle  Pollen  Extract-Cutter ;  Rye  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Cutter;  Sagebrush  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Shad  Scale  Pollen  Extract- 
Cutter;  Timothy  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Tumbleweed  Pollen  Extract- 
Cutter;  Velvet  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Cutter;  Western  Ragweed  Pollen 
Extract-Cutter;  Western  Water  Hemp  Pollen  Extract-Cutter ;  Wild  Oat 
Pollen  Extract-Cutter. 

Pollen  extracts-Cutter  are  prepared  by  extracting  the  dried  pollen 
with  a  menstruum  composed  of  67  per  cent  of  glycerin  and  33  per  cent 
of  an  aqueous  solution  containing  potassium  dihydrogen  phosphate 
(KH2PO4),  0.0908  per  cent;  sodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04.12H20), 
0.238  per  cent;  and  sodium  chloride,  0.85  per  cent.  The  extract  is 
clarified  by  Berkefeld  filtration.  The  finished  liquid  is  a  1  per  cent 
extract  of  the  dried  pollen,  each  cc.  representing  0.01  Gm.  of  dried 
pollen. 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS  CONCENTRATED-CUTTER. 

— Liquids  obtained  by  extracting  the  dried  pollen  of  plants 
with  a  liquid  consisting  of  67  per  cent  of  glycerin  and  33  per 
cent  of  a  buffered  saline  solution. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Pollen  extracts  concentrated-Cutter  are  marketed  in  single 
vial  packages  containing  5  cc. 

Manufactured  by  the  Cutter  Laboratory,  Berkeley,  Calif.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Alkali  Weed  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Allscale  Pollen  Extract 
Concentrated-Cutter ;  Annual  Saltbush  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated- 
Cutter;  Arizona  Ash  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Bermuda  Grass 
Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Black  Walnut  Pollen  Extract  Concen- 
trated-Cutter; Box  Elder  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Burning 
Bush  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Canary  Grass  Pollen  Extract 
Concentrated-Cutter ;  Careless  Weed  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ; 
Coast  Sagebrush  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Cocklebur  Pollen 
Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Common  Ragweed  Pollen  Extract  Concen- 
trated-Cutter; Corn  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter;  Cottonwood 
Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cuttter ;  False  Ragweed  Pollen  Extract  Con- 
centrated-Cutter; Foxtail  Grass  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Giant 
Ragweed  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter-  Johnson  Grass  Pollen 
Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  June  Grass  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated- 
Cutter;  Lamb's  Quarters  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter;  Marsh 
Elder  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Mountain  Cedar  Pollen  Extract 
Concentrated-Cutter;  Mugwort  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Oak 
Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Olive  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated- 
Cutter;  Orchard  Grass  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Plantain 
Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Red  Root  Pigweed  Pollen  Extract 
Concentrated-Cutter ;  Redtop  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Ciitter ;  Russian 
Thistle  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Rye  Grass  Pollen  Extract 
Concentrated-Cutter;  Sage-brush  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Shad 
Scale  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Timothy  Pollen  Extract  Con- 
centrated-Cutter; Tumbleweed  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Velvet 
Grass  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter;  Western  Ragweed  Pollen 
Extract  Concentrated-Cutter ;  Western  Water  Hemp  Pollen  Extract  Con- 
centrated-Cutter; Wild  Oat  Pollen  Extract  Concentrated-Cutter. 

Pollen  extracts  concentrated-Cutter  are  prepared  by  extracting  the 
dried  pollen  with  a  menstruum  composed  of  67  per  cent  of  glycerin  and 
33  per  cent  of  an  aqueous  solution  containing  potassium  dihydrogen 
phosphate  (KHaPOi),  0.0908  per  cent;  sodium  phosphate  (Na2HP04. 
12H20)j  0.238  per  cent,  and  sodium  chloride,  0.85  per_  cent.  The 
extract  is  clarified  by  Berkefeld  filtration.  The  finished  liquid  is  a  3  per 
cent  extract  of  the  dried  pollen,  each  cubic  centimeter  representing 
0.03  Gm.  of  dried  pollen. 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     43 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS-HOLLISTER-STIER.— Liquids 

obtained  by  extracting  the  dried  pollen  of  plants  with  a  liquid 
consisting  of  48  per  cent  of  glycerin,  3  per  cent  of  sodium 
chloride  and  49  per  cent  distilled  water. 

Actions  and  Uses.— Sec  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage.— Sec  preceding  article.  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Pollen  extracts-Hollistcr-Stier  are  marketed  in  treatment  sets 
of  five  vials  containing,  respectively,  20,  100,  1,000,  5,000  and 
10,000  units  per  cubic  centimeter  accompanied  by  three  vials 
of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  for  diluting  the 
extract;  in  treatment  sets  of  thirty  vials,  twenty  containing 
1,  3,  5.  7,  10,  15,  30,  50,  70,  100,  150,  200,  300,  400,  500,  600, 
700,  800,  900,  1,000,  and  ten  each  containing  1,000  units,  accom- 
panied by  thirty  vials  of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride 
for  diluting  the  extract. 

Manufactured  by  the  Hollister-Stier  Laboratories,  Spokane,  Wash. 
No  U.    S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Alder  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Aspen  Pollen  Extract-Hollister- 
Stier;  Atriplex  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Awnless  Brome  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Hollister-Stier;  Blue  Bunch  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ; 
Box  Elder  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Canada  Blue  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Cheat  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier;  Common 
Sagebrush  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Crested  Koeleria  Pollen  Extract- 
Hollister-Stier;  Dandelion  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Eastern  Ragweed 
Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  English  Plantain  Pollen  Extract-Hollister- 
Stier;  Giant  Poverty  Weed  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Kentucky  Blue 
Grass  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Lamb's  Quarters  Pollen  Extract- 
Hollister-Stier;  Mugwort  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Orchard  Grass 
Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier;  Perennial  Rye  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Hollister-Stier;  Quack  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Redtop  Pollen 
Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Redroot  Pigweed  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ; 
Russian  Thistle  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Sandberg's  June  Grass 
Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Sheep  Sorrel  Pollen  Extract-Hollister  Stier; 
Spring  Birch  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Timothy  Pollen  Extract- 
Hollister-Stier;  Velvet  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;  Western  Rag- 
weed Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier ;   Willow  Pollen  Extract-Hollister-Stier. 

Pollen  extracts-Hollister-Stier  are  prepared  by  extracting  the  dried 
pollen  with  a  menstruum  composed  of  48  per  cent  of  glycerin,  3  per 
cent  of  sodium  chloride  and  49  per  cent  distilled  water.  The  extract  is 
clarified  by  Berkefeld  filtration.  The  finished  liquid  is  a  1  per  cent 
extract  of  the  dried  pollen,  each  cubic  centimeter  representing  10,000 
pollen   units,    1    unit  corresponding  to  0.001    mg.   of   dried   pollen. 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS-MULFORD.— Liquids  obtained 
by  extracting  the  dried  pollens  of  plants  with  a  liquid  contain- 
ing 0.5  per  cent  sodium  chloride,  0.25  per  cent  sodium  bicar- 
bonate, and  0.4  per  cent  phenol  and  standardized  in  terms  of 
pollen  units.  The  pollen  unit  is  that  commonly  used,  being  the 
equivalent  of  0.000016  mg.  of  nitrogen. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 


44       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

The  following  pollen  extracts-Mulford  are  marketed  in  5  cc. 
vials  containing  2,000  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter,  and,  on 
special  order,  in  5  cc.  vials  containing  20,000  pollen  units  per 
cubic  centimeter;  those  indicated  by  an  asterisk  are  also 
marketed  in  syringe  treatment  packages  containing  graduated 
doses  in  the  Alulford  miniature  syringe  (^  cc.)  and  consist- 
ing of : 

First  series  :  five  syringes  (doses  1  to  5,  inclusive)  containing, 
respectively,  5,  10,  20,  40  and  60  pollen  units. 

Second  series:  five  syringes  (doses  6  to  10,  inclusive)  con- 
taining, respectively,  100,  200,  400,  700  and  1,000  pollen  units. 

Third  series:  five  syringes  (doses  11  to  15,  inclusive)  con- 
taining, respectively,  1,500,  2,000,  3,000,  4,000  and  5,000  pollen 
units. 

Fourth  series  :  five  syringes  (doses  16  to  20,  inclusive)  con- 
taining, respectively,  6,000,  7,000,  8,000,  9,000  and  10,000  pollen 
units. 

Fifteen  dose  series:  fifteen  syringes  containing  doses  1  to  15, 
inclusive,  described  in  the  First,  Second  and  Third  series. 

Alder  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Alfalfa  Pollen  Extract-Mulford; 
Annual  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Apple  Pollen  Extract-Mulford; 
Arizona  Ash  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Arizona  Walnut  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Ash  Tree  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Aster  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Barnyard  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Bermuda 
Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford*;  Birch  Pollen  Extract  Mulford; 
Blue  Beech  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Boneset  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford;  Box  Elder  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Brome  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Burning  Bush  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Burweed  Marsh 
Elder  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Buttercup  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Cali- 
fornia Mugwort  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Canary  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford;  Careless  Weed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Cedar  Tree  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford ;  Chrysanthemum  Pollen  Extract-Mulford ;  Clover  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Coast  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Cocklebur  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford* ;  Corn  Pollen  Extract-Mulford:  Cosmos  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford;  Cottonwood  Tree  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Crab  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford ;  Dahlia  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Daisy  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford:  Dandelion  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Dock  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford*;  Dragon  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Elm  Tree  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford* ;  English  Plantain  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  False 
Ragweed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Fescue  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford*;  Golden  Glow  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Goldenrod  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Hemp  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Hickory  Tree  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  High  Ragzveed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Johnson  Grass 
Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  June  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Lamb's 
Quarters  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Live  Oak  Pollen  Extract-Mulford ;  Low 
Ragweed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Maple  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Marsh 
Elder  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Mesquite  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Mexican 
Tea  Pollen  Extract-Mulford ;  Milo  Maize  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Mock 
Orange  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Mountain  Cedar  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford* ;  Mugwort  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Oak  Tree  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford*;  Oat  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Olive  Pollen  Extract-Mulford; 
Orchard  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Papaw  Pollen  Extract-Mulford; 
Pasture  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Mulford ;  Peach  Tree  Pollen  Extrad--Mulford ; 
Pecan  Tree  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Perennial  Rye  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford*;  Pine  Tree  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Plantain  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford;  Poverty  Weed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Prairie  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford ;  Prairie  Sage  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Primrose  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Privet  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Quack  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Rabbit  Brush  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Red  Clover 
Pollen  Extract-Mulford ;  Redroot  Pigweed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Red- 


ALLERGENIC     PROTEIN     PREPARATIONS     45 

top  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Rose  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Russian 
Thistle  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Rye  Pollen  Extract-Mulford*;  Sage- 
brush Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Sagezvort  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Salt 
Bush  Pollen  Extract-Mulford*;  Saw  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Shad 
Scale  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Sheep  Sorrel  Pollen  Extract-Mulford*; 
Slender  Ragzvccd  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Spiny  Amaranth  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford* ;  Southern  Ragzveed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Sudan 
Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Sugar  Beet  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Sun- 
ftozver  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Szveet  Clover  Pollen  Extract-Mulford : 
Szveet  Vernal  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Sycamore  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford*;  Timothv  Pollen  Extract-Mulford*;  Velvet  Grass  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford* ;  Walnut  Tree  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Water  Hemp 
Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Western  Giant  Ragzveed  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford;  Western  Ragweed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford* ;  Wheat  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford ;  Wild  Oats  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Willozv  Tree  Pollen 
Extract-Mulford;  Winter  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford;  Wormzvood  Pol- 
len Extract-Mulford* ;   Yellozv  Foxtail   Grass  Pollen  Extract-Mulford. 

The  following  pollen  extracts-Mulford  are  supplied  in  pack- 
ages of  three  5  cc.  vials  containing,  respectively,  100,  2,000  and 
20,000  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Ragzveed  Pollen  Extract-Mulford ;  Timothy  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
Mulford. 

The  following  products  are  marketed  in  vial  and  syringe  treat- 
ment packages  containing  graduated  doses,  representing  respec- 
tively 5,  10,  20,  40,  60,  100,  200,  400,  700,  1,000,  1,500,  2,000, 
3,000,  4,000,  5,000,  6,000,  7,000,  8,000,  9,000  and  10.000  pollen 
units.  Also  in  packages  of  three  5  cc.  vials  containing  respec- 
tively  100,  2,000  and  20,000  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter : 

Grass  Mixture  Pollen  Extract-Mulford  (Timothy,  June,  Orchard, 
Szveet  Vernal,  and  Red  Top  Grass  Pollen  in  equal  proportion) ;  Grass 
Mixture  Pollen  Extract-Mulford  (Pollens  of  Southzvestern  Grasses: 
Bermuda  Grass  and  Johnson  Grass  30  per  cent  each,  June  Grass  and 
Timothy  Grass  20  per  cent  each). 

Manufactured  by  the  Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme, 
Philadelphia,  Baltimore.     No  U.  S.   patent  or  trademarks. 

Mature  pollen  is  thoroughly  dried  and  extraneous  material  separated 
by  various  methods.  The  purified  pollen  is  ground  in  a  ball  mill  to 
break  cell  membranes.  It  is  then  extracted  with  a  fluid  containing  0.5 
per  cent  sodium  chloride,  0.25  per  cent  sodium  bicarbonate,  and  0.4 
per  cent  phenol.  Extraction  is  continued  for  twenty-four  hours  at  room 
temperature,  with  the  extracts  saturated  with  carbon  dioxide  gas  during 
the  process.  The  extracts  are  then  standardized  in  terms  of  pollen 
units,  a  pollen  unit  being  the  equivalent  of  0.000016  mg.  of  nitrogen. 
They  are  sterilized  by  Berkefeld  filtration  and  subjected  to  tests  for 
sterility. 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS-ABBOTT.— Liquids  obtained  by 
extracting  the  protein  from  the  pollen  of  plants  with  a  liquid 
consisting  of  5  per  cent  of  dextrose  and  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol 
in  distilled  water. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

Pollen  extracts-Abbott  are  marketed  in  the  following  forms : 

Series  I :  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(1  to  5,  inclusive)  5,  10,  20,  40  and  70  pollen  units,  respectively. 


46      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

accompanied  by  a  vial  containing  three  0.025  Gm.  (^  grain) 
capsules  ephedrine  hydrochloride. 

Series  II :  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(6  to  10,  inclusive)  100,  200,  400,  700  and  1,000  pollen  units, 
respectively,  accompanied  by  a  vial  containing  three  0.025  Gm. 
(^  grain)   capsules  ephedrine  hydrochloride. 

Series  III :  five  vials  containing  for  each  consecutive  dose 
(11  to  15,  inclusive)  1,500,  2,000,  3,000,  3,500  and  4,000  pollen 
units,  respectively,  accompanied  by  a  vial  containing  three  0.025 
Gm.   m  grain)   capsules  ephedrine  hydrochloride. 

Complete  series :  packages  containing  the  15  doses,  described 
in  Series  I,  II  and  III. 

Packages  of  one  vial  containing  4,000  pollen  units. 

Mixed  Grass  Pollen  Extract-Abbott  (Timothy,  June  Grass,  Orchard 
Grass,  Red  Top  and  Sweet  Vernal  Grass  in  equal  proportions) ;  Ragweed 
Pollen   (Ambrosia  elatior  and  Ambrosia  trifida)  Extract — Abbott. 

The  following  is  marketed  in  special  dilution  sets : 

Mixed  Ragzveed  Pollen  Extract  Decimal  Dilution  Set:  A  mixture  of 
equal  parts  of  short  and  giant  ragweed  pollen  extract,  marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  five  vials  containing  respectively,  5  cc.  of  a  1 :  1 00,000 _  dilution 
(10  pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter),  5  cc.  of  a  1 :  10,000  dilution  (100 
pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter),  5  cc.  of  a  1:1,000  dilution  (1,000 
pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter),  5  cc.  of  a  1 :  100  dilution  (10,000  pollen 
units  per  cubic  centimeter),  and  0.5  cc.  of  a  3  per  cent  dilution  (30,000 
pollen  units  per  cubic  centimeter). 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  III.  U.  S. 
patent  applied  for.     No  U.  S.  trademark. 

Pollen  extracts-Abbott  are  prepared  by  grinding  dried  pollen  in  a  ball 
mill  with  a  liquid  composed  of  5  per  cent  of  dextrose  and  0.5  per  cent 
of  phenol  in  distilled  water.  Sufficient  of  the  menstruum  is  added  so 
that  the  total  volume  is  such  that  each  cc.  represents  20,000  units,  1 
unit  corresponding  to  0.001  mg.  of  dried  pollen.  This  mixture  is 
filtered  through  paper  pulp  and  then  through  a  Berkefeld  filter.  It  is 
tested  for  sterility  before  diluting,  after  dilution  and  after  filling. 

POLLEN  EXTRACTS-U.  S.  STANDARD  PROD- 
UCTS CO. — Solutions  prepared  by  extracting  the  dried  pol- 
len of  various  species  of  plants  with  a  buffered  glycerosaline 
solution. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Allergenic  Protein  Prepa- 
rations. 

All  of  the  pollen  extracts-U.  S.  Standard  Products  Co.  are 
supplied  in  5  cc.  vials  containing  20,000  units  per  cubic  centi- 
meter. In  addition,  two  of  the  products  (Grasses  Combined 
and  Ragweed  Combined)  are  marketed  in  single  treatment  set 
packages  of  three  vials,  containing  respectively  100,  1,000  and 
10,000  units  per  cubic  centimeter  and  accompanied  by  a  vial 
containing  2  cc.  of  epinephrine  hydrochloride  solution  1 :  1,000. 

Prepared  by  the  United  States  Standard  Products  Company, 
Woodworth,  Wis.    No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 


ALUMINUM     COMPOUNDS  47 

Bermuda  Grass  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Box  Elder  Pollen 
Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Burweed  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.; 
Careless  Weed  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Cocklebur  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Corn  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Cosmos  Pollen 
Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Cottonwood  (Poplar)  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P. 
Co.;  Dandelion  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Elm  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  English  Plantain  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.; 
Goldenrod  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Grasses  Combined  Pollen 
Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.  (Bermuda  Grass,  June  Grass,  Orchard  Grass, 
Red  Top,  Sweet  Vernal  Grass  and  Timothy  in  equal  parts);  Johnson 
Grass  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  June  Grass  Pollen  Extract-U.  S. 
S.  P.  Co.;  Lamb's  Quarters  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Maple  Pollen 
Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Marsh  Elder  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.; 
Mugwort  (Wormwood)  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Orchard  Grass 
Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Pigweed  (Redroot)  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Ragweed  (Common)  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.; 
Ragweed  (False)  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Ragweed  (Giant) 
Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Ragweed  (Western)  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Ragweed  Combined  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co. 
(Giant  and  Common  Ragweed  in  equal  parts);  Red  Oak  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Red  Top  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Russian 
Thistle  Pollen  E.vtract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Rye  Grass  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  Sweet  Vernal  Grass  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.; 
Timothy  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  White  Ash  Pollen  Extract- 
U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.;  White  Oak  Pollen  Extract-U.  S.  S.  P.   Co. 

Prepared  by  extracting  the  dried  pollen  with  a  menstruum  con- 
taining 67  per  cent  glycerin  and  33  per  cent  of  a  physiologic  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  containing  0.0908  per  cent  potassium  dihydrogen 
phosphate  and  0.238  per  cent  dibasic  sodium  phosphate.  The  pollen  is 
extracted  for  twenty-two  hours  in  a  ball  mill,  pulped  and  clarified  by 
Berkefeld  filtration.  The  finished  liquid  is  a  3  per  cent  extract  of  dried 
pollen.  Each  cubic  centimeter  represents  30,000  pollen  units,  one 
pollen  unit  being  the  equivalent  of  0.001  mg.  of  dried  pollen.  The 
marketed  products  represent  appropriate  dilutions  of  this  stock  solu- 
tion and  are  preserved  with  0.35  per  cent  of  phenol. 


ALUMINUM     COMPOUNDS 

Several  of  the  compounds  of  aluminum  are  official,  including 
the  ordinary  alum  or  alumen,  U.  S.  P.  Aluminum  acetate  and 
aluminum  subacetate  are  used  in  the  form  of  solutions  and  are 
described  in  the  National  Formulary  as  Solution  of  Aluminum 
Acetate  and  Solution  of  Aluminum  Subacetate. 

The  aluminum  compounds  are  used  for  their  astringent  action. 
Since  they  are  but  little  absorbed,  they  are  relatively  nontoxic. 

Compounds  of  aluminum  are  astringent  because  of  their 
property  of  precipitating  albumin.  The  exsiccated  alum  is  more 
energetic,  not  only  because  it  contains  a  larger  proportion  of 
alum  than  the  crystalline  form,  but  because  it  absorbs  water 
from  the  tissue  at  the  same  time.  The  acetate  is  milder  than 
the  sulfate,  as  is  usual  with  metallic  salts. 

The  aluminum  compounds  are  not  so  astringent  as  the  corre- 
sponding lead  salts,  but  they  may  exert  an  irritant  and  even 
caustic  action  when  used  in  concentrated  solutions  or  in  the 
form  of  the  exsiccated  (burnt)  alum.  When  swallowed  in  over- 
doses in  such  concentrated  form,  they  may  cause  gastritis  and 
diarrhea.     Alum  is  sometimes  used  as  an  emetic. 

^  The  aluminum  compounds  are  slightly  antiseptic,  a  property 
which    goes    with    their    astringency.      Some    of    the    organic 


48       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

compounds  are  said  to  be  more  actively  antiseptic  than  the 
inorganic  ones. 

Several  proprietary  preparations,  consisting  of  aluminum  com- 
bined with  organic  acids,  have  been  introduced  with  a  view  to 
utilizing  the  astringent  and  antiseptic  properties  of  their  com- 
ponents. Many  of  these  possess  no  special  advantages  and  have 
fallen  into  disuse,  or  have  been  largely  replaced  by  others  of  a 
more  or  less  similar  nature. 

ALUM. — ''Contains  not  less  than  99.5  per  cent  of  Ammonium 
Alum  [AlNH4(S04)2.12HoO]  or  of  Potassium  Alum  [AlK 
(S04)2.12H20].  The  label  of  the  container  must  indicate 
whether  the  salt  is  Ammonium  Alum  or  Potassium  Alum."- 
U .  S.  P.    For  standards  see  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Alumen. 

For  actions,  uses  and  dosage  see  Useful  Drugs  under  Alumen. 

ALUMNOL.  —  Alumini    Naphtholsulfonas.  —  Aluminum 

Betanaphthol-Disulfonate.  —  Alo(CioH5.0H.(S03)2)3.  —  The 
aluminum   salt  of  betanaphthol-disulfonic   acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Alumnol  is  used  as  a  mild  antiseptic  and 
in  concentrated  solutions  as  an  irritant  or  caustic.  It  is  used 
for  the  destruction  of  the  gonococcus,  especially  in  cases  of 
gonorrhea  in  women  in  which  the  endometrium  is  affected. 

Dosage. — As  a  surgical  antiseptic,  in  from  0.5  to  3  per  cent 
solutions ;  in  gynecology,  in  from  2  to  5  per  cent  solutions ;  in 
otology  and  laryngology,  either  as  a  powder  or  in  from  0.25  to 
1  per  cent  solution  as  douches,  washes  or  gargles ;  as  a  cautery, 
in  from  10  to  20  per  cent  solution. 

Manufactured  by  Farbwerke,  vorm.  Meister,  Lucius  &  Bruening, 
Hoechst  a.M.,  Germany  (the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York, 
distributor).      U.   S.  trademark   173,434. 

Alumnol  is  a  fine,  nearly  white,  nonhygroscopic  powder.  It  js 
soluble  in  1.5  parts  of  water,  soluble  in  glycerin,  sparingly  soluble  in 
alcohol  and  insoluble  in  ether.  An  aqueous  solution  is  slightly  fluo- 
rescent and  produces  a  faintly  acid  reaction.  When  dried,  it  loses 
about  9  per  cent  of  water,  and,  when  exposed  to  the  air,  it  is  dark- 
ened in  consequence  of  its  reducing  properties.  It  is  precipitated 
from  solution  by  albuminous  and  gelatinous  bodies;  but  these  pre- 
cipitates are  redissolved  in  excess  of  the  latter  bodies.  It  is  decom- 
posed by  salts  of  silver  or  other  reducible  salts,  by  alkalis  and  by 
ammoniacal  compounds. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  alumnol  in  10  cc.  of  water:  The  solution 
is  clear.  Acidulate  with  hydrochloric  acid:  The  liquid  becomes  at  most 
only  slightly  turbid.  Add  a  few  drops  of  potassium  ferrocyanide  solu- 
tion:  The  liquid  is  tinted  slightly  bluish.  On  the  addition  of  diluted  sul- 
phuric acid  or  of  ammonium  oxalate  solution  to  an  aqueous  solution 
of  alumnol,  no  precipitate  is  formed. 

Incinerate  about  2  Gm.  of  alumnol,  accurately  weighed:  the  amount 
of  ash    (alumina)    is   12.7  per  cent. 


AMINOACETIC  ACID.— Glycocoll.— Glycine.— CH2NH2 
COOH. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Observations  of  a  number  of  workers 
have   shown  aminoacetic   acid    (glycocoll,  glycine)   to   exert  an 


AMINOACETIC     ACID  49 

appreciable  effect  on  muscle  creatine  retention  in  certain  cases  of 
myasthenia  gravis,  and  progressive  or  pseudohypertrophic  mus- 
cular dystrophy.  Coincident  with  the  altered  creatine  metabo- 
lism clinical  improvement  has  been  reported. 

Dosage. — Aminoacetic  acid  is  administered  in  an  average 
dosage  of  from  20  to  30  Gm.  daily,  usually  in  some  palatable 
liquid  vehicle  such  as  milk.  Some  workers  have  employed 
ephedrine  in  %6  to  ^  grain  dosage  three  or  four  times  daily, 
conjointly  with  aminoacetic  acid.  Evidence  for  or  against  such 
use  is  controversial  and  the  decision  must  depend  on  the  indi- 
vidual case  until  more  convincing  studies  are  reported. 

Aminoacetic  acid  occurs  as  a  light,  white,  odorless,  crystalline 
powder,  possessing  a  sweetish  taste.  It  is  freely  soluble  in  water, 
very  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol,  and  practically  insoluble  _  in  ether. 
Aminoacetic  acid  turns  brown  at  about  228  C,  and  melts  with  decom- 
position (foaming)  at  232-236  C.    (U.  S.  P.  XI  method). 

Treat  separately  2  cc.  portions  of  an  aqueous  solution  of  aminoacetic 
acid  (1:  10)  as  follows:  Add.  0.3  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and 
0.3  cc.  of  sodium  nitrite  solution  (1  in  2)  :  a  vigorous  evolution  of  gas 
occurs.  Add.  1  cc.  of  ferric  chloride  solution:  a  deep  wine  color  forms, 
which  disappears  after  addition  of  excess  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  solu- 
tion, and  reappears  on  addition  of  excess  stronger  ammonia  water.  Add 
0.1  cc.  liquefied  phenol  solution  and  5  cc.  sodium  hypochlorite  solution 
(2   per  cent  active  chlorine) :   a  blue  color  forms. 

Ten  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution  (1  in  10)  conforms  to  the  U.  S.  P.  XT 
test  for  heavy  metals.  Dissolve  3  Gm.  of  aminoacetic  acid  in  from  30 
to  40  cc.  of  water  and  treat  according  to  the  U.  S.  P.  XI  turbimetric  test 
for  chlorides:  the  turbidity  is  not  more  than  that  produced  in  a  control 
test  made  with  0.25  cc.  of  fiftieth-normal  hydrochloric  acid.  Dissolve 
3  Gm.  of  aminoacetic  acid  in  water  and  treat  according  to  the  U.  S. 
P.  XI  turbimetric  test  for  sulfates:  the  turbidity  is  less  than  that  pro- 
duced in  a  control  test  made  with  0.2  cc.  of  fiftieth-normal  sulfuric 
acid.  Boil  10  cc.  of  an  aqueous  aminoacetic  acid  solution  (1  in  10) 
for  one  minute,  and  set  aside  two  hours:  the  solution  appears  as  limpid 
and  mobile  as  before  boiling. 

Heat  about  1.0  Gm.  of  aminoacetic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  for 
four  hours  at  100  C.:  the  change  in  weight  is  not  more  than  0.0005 
Gm.  The  ash  from  1.0  Gm.  weighs  not  more  than  0.001  Gm.  Treat 
from  0.26  to  0.32  Gm.  of  aminoacetic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  accord- 
ing to  the  procedure  for  nitrogen  determination  in  Medical  War  Manual 
No.  6,  Laboratory  Methods  of  United  States  Army.  1919,  p.  222;  the 
nitrogen  content  is  not  less  than  18.4  per  cent  nor  more  than  18.8 
per   cent. 

Aminoacetic    Acid-Calco. — A   brand   of   aminoacetic   acid- 

N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Calco  Chemical  Co.,  Bound  Brook,  N.  J.  No 
U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Aminoacetic  Acid-Merck. — A  brand  of  aminoacetic  acid- 

N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Aminoacetic  Acid-Pfanstiehl. — A  brand  of  aminoacetic 
acid-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Pfanstiehl  Chemical  Co.,  Waukegan,  111.  No 
U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 


50       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

ANESTHETICS 
Anesthetics,  General 

ETHYL  CHLORIDE.— "Monochlorethaiie."—C/.  5'.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Aethylis 
Chloridum;  for  actions  and  uses  see  Useful  Drugs  under 
Aethylis  Chloridum. 

Kelene. — A  brand  of  ethyl  chloride-U.  S.  P.,  supplied  in  a 
special  form  of  container. 

Manufactured  by  Fries  Bros.,  New  York  (Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway, 
N.    J.,  distributor). 

ETHYLENE.— 'Contains   not  less   than   99.0   per   cent   by 
volume  of  C2H4."-U.  S.  P. 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Aethylenum. 

Caution. — Ethylene  is  inflammable,  and  its  mixture  with  oxygen  or  air 
will  explode  when  brought  in  contact  ztnth  a  flame  or  an  electric  spark. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Animal  experiments  by  W.  E.  Brown 
(Canad.  M,  A.  J.,  March  1923,  p.  210)  and  Luckhardt  and 
Carter  (J.  A.  M.  A.  80:765  [March  17]  1923)  indicated  that 
ethylene  has  a  direct  action  on  the  nervous  system  when  a  con- 
centration of  90  per  cent  ethylene  and  10  per  cent  oxygen  or  less 
is  used,  that  the  motor  reflexes  are  abolished  with  this  concen- 
tration and  that  the  phenomena  produced  by  the  undiluted  gas 
are  partly  asphyxial,  which  effect  can  be  removed  by  addition  of 
oxygen  to  the  ethylene  itself. 

Trials  on  human  subjects  have  confirmed  the  anesthetic  and 
analgesic  value  of  ethylene  as  demonstrated  on  animals.  Deep 
surgical  anesthesia  is  stated  to  be  produced  easily,  and  anal- 
gesia comes  on  readily  and  apparently  long  before  surgical 
anesthesia  is  established.  Given  with  oxygen,  it  has  been  found 
more  powerful  than  nitrogen  monoxide  and  in  most  instances 
as  effective  as  ether ;  unlike  ether  it  causes  no  respiratory  irri- 
tation and  does  not  promote  salivary  secretion. 

Extensive  use  of  ethylene  in  a  wide  variety  of  conditions 
failed  to  show  it  to  be  more  explosive  than  ether-oxygen  or 
ether-nitrous  oxide-oxygen  under  comparable  precautions. 

Under  average  conditions  of  ventilation  ethylene,  because  of 
its  rapid  diffusibility,  exists  in  explosive  concentration  (3.2  per 
cent)  no  further  than  two  feet  from  the  mask.  Adequate 
ventilation  of  this  area  should  eliminate  largely  the  danger 
of  explosion.  No  electrical  devices  should  be  employed  within 
three  or  four  feet  of  the  mask.  The  ordinary  operating  room 
technique  guarding  against  the  presence  of  open  flames,  cautery 
and  sparks  should  be  observed. 

The  advantages  of  ethylene  consist  in  the  production  of  an 
equally  rapid  but  more  pleasant  induction;  satisfactory  relaxa- 
tion without  cyanosis  or  sweating ;  rapid  recovery  and  decreased 
or  absent  post-operative  nausea. 


ANESTHETICS  51 

Dosage. — Ethylene  is  supplied  in  compressed  state  in  metal 
containers.  For  use  the  gas  is  passed  into  an  inhalation  appa- 
ratus and  is  then  inhaled  with  or  without  admixture  of  oxygen. 
The  concentration  employed  for  surgical  anesthesia  is  generally 
90  per  cent  ethylene  and  10  per  cent  oxygen,  though  after  a 
prolonged  period  of  anesthesia,  a  deep  anesthetic  state  may  be 
maintained  on  80  per  cent  ethylene.  If  the  patient  has  been 
premedicated  (morphine,  barbital)  less  ethylene  and  more  oxygen 
can  be  given. 

Ethylene-Cheney.— A  brand  of  ethylene-U.  S.  P. 

The  Cheney  Chemical  Co.,  Cleveland,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Ethylene  (Puritan  Compressed  Gas  Corp.). — A  brand  of 
ethylene-U.  S.  P. 

Puritan  Compressed  Gas  Corp.,  Kansas  City,  Mo.,  distributor.  No 
U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Ohio  Ethylene.— A  brand  of  ethylene-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Ohio  Chemical  and  Manufacturing  Co.,  Cleveland. 
No  U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Walco  Ethylene  for  Anesthesia. — A  brand  of  ethylene- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   Wall  Chemicals,  Inc..  Detroit. 

METHYL  CHLORIDE.—Methylis  Chloridum.— CH3CI. 

— The  hydrochloric  acid  ester  of  methyl  alcohol.  In  the  com- 
pressed state,  methyl  chloride  is  a  colorless  liquid,  having  an 
ethereal  odor,  and  a  sweet  taste. 

Actions  and  Uses. — By  its  evaporation  a  temperature  of  — 23 
C.  is  produced,  while  if  evaporation  is  accelerated  by  means 
of  a  current  of  air  a  temperature  of  — 55  C.  may  easily  be 
reached.  On  account  of  this  property  its  use  requires  caution, 
since  it  is  liable  to  produce  blisters.  The  diluted  vapor  is  said 
to  be  nonpoisonous.  Alethyl  chloride  is  said  to  be  an  efficient 
general  anesthetic,  which  has  practically  no  influence  on  the 
circulation,  but  fails  to  produce  complete  muscular  relaxation. 
It  is  used  as  a  general  anesthetic  mixed  with  ethyl  chloride 
and  ethyl  bromide. 

Dosage. — When  methyl  chloride  is  sprayed  on  the  skin,  the 
part  should  be  somewhat  protected  by  a  thin  layer  of  cotton 
wool.  When  the  anesthetic  is  used  locally,  cotton  wool  soaked 
in  liquid  methyl  chloride  may  be  applied  to  the  skin  over  the 
painful  area,  but  care  should  be  taken  that  blisters  are  not 
formed.  In  order  to  avoid  this,  a  mixture  with  ethyl  chloride 
has  been  recommended. 

Methyl  chloride  is  insoluble  in  water,  more  readily  soluble  in 
alcohol,  freely  soluble  in  ether  and  chloroform,  and  also  in  acetic  acid. 
It  should  be  neutral  to  litmus  paper.  Pure  methyl  chloride  has  a 
specific  gravity  of  0.99145  at  — 23.7  C.  It  burns  in  air  with  a  greenish 
flame,  though  it  is  not  highly  inflammable.  The  neutral  solution  is 
not   precipitated   by   solution    of    silver   nitrate,    nor   is   there    any    reac- 


52       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

tion  with  potassium  iodide  and  starch  paste.  In  the  liquid  condi- 
tion, it  is  a  powerful  refrigerating  agent.  At  very  low  temperatures, 
it  forms  with  water  a  hydrate,  CH3C1,9H20.  It  should  give  an 
alkaline  reaction  to  litmus  (ammonia  and  methylated  ammonia — methyl- 
aminej.  It  should  not  immediately  form  a  precipitate  with  silver 
nitrate  solution.  On  evaporating  it  should  leave  no  residue  and  emit 
no   odor   of   methylamine. 

TRICHLOROETHYLENE.  —  Trichloroethylenum. — 

Trichlorethylene. — CHCl : CCI2. — 1  -chloro-2-dichloro-ethylene. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  of  trichloroethylene  have  not 
been  investigated  comprehensively,  and  it  was  introduced  into 
therapeutics  following  some  observations  on  man.  Trichloro- 
ethylene appears  to  have  a  selective  action  on  the  sensory  endings 
of  the  trigeminal  nerve,  whereby  it  affords  relief  in  trigeminal 
neuralgia,  but  it  is  not  clear  that  the  action  even  of  therapeutic 
doses  is  limited  to  these  endings,  and  different  individuals  seem 
to  show  rather  wide  differences  in  susceptibility  to  this  action ; 
hence  the  dose  necessary  to  afford  relief  varies  correspondingly. 
Therapeutic  doses  sometimes  cause  transitory  giddiness,  with 
lassitude,  distress,  palpitation  and  nausea.  Large  doses  cause 
narcosis,  and  excessive  doses  cause  death.  There  was  no  per- 
ceptible injury  to  the  lungs,  heart  or  liver  after  narcosis  repeated 
several  times  in  the  dog,  but  there  was  slight  hyperemia  of  the 
gastric  mucous  membrane  and  marked  reddening  of  the  duo- 
denum. The  liquid  is  irritant ;  hence  it  should  not  be  allowed 
to  come  in  contact  with  the  nose  when  the  vapor  is  inhaled. 

Dosage. — Fifteen  minims  by  inhalation,  to  be  repeated  after 
a  few  minutes  if  necessary ;  but  it  appears  probable  that  not 
more  than  60  minims  should  be  inhaled  within  twenty-four  hours 
when  it  is  used  for  any  considerable  period  of  time. 

Trichloroethylene  accurs  as  a  clear,  colorless,  mobile  and  volatile 
liquid,  possessing  an  odor  similar  to  that  of  chloroform.  It  is  miscible 
with  ether  and  very  soluble  in  alcohol;  it  is  practically  insoluble  in 
water.  The  specific  gravity  is  from  1.458  to  1.460  at  25  C.  The 
refractive  index   is    from   1.4770   to  1.4780  at  20   C. 

Transfer  25  cc.  of  trichloroethylene  to  a  distilling  flask.  Determine 
the  distillation  range  according  to  Method  I  of  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  XI. 
Ninety-five  per  cent  distils  over  at  from  86  to  88  C.  (corrected)  at 
760  mm.  The  refractive  index  of  the  distillate  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the    material    before    distillation. 

Transfer  5  cc.  of  trichloroethylene  to  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add 
5  cc.  bromine  water  and  shake  the  mixture  vigorously  at  intervals  of 
fifteen  minutes:  at  the  end  of  an  hour  a  white  turbid  solution  forms  in 
the  lower  layer.  Agitate  gently  5  cc.  of  trichloroethylene  with  2  cc.  of 
silver  ammonium  nitrate  solution  in  a  narrow  glass  stoppered  cylinder 
of  from  10  to  15  cc.  capacity:  no  turbidity  is  observed  in  either  layer 
at  the  end  of  ten  minutes   (acetylene). 

Agitate  20  cc.  of  trichloroethylene  with  a  50  cc.  portion  of  water  and 
repeat,  using  a  25  cc.  portion  of  water;  transfer  the  combined  aqueous 
layer  to  a  flask  and  add  to  the  aqueous  solution  two  drops  of  methyl 
red  indicator  solution:  if  the  color  of  the  solution  is  yellow,  not  more 
than  0.1  cc.  of  tenth  normal  hydrochloric  acid  is  required  to  assume  a 
pink  color;  if  the  color  of  the  solution  is  pink,  not  more  than  0.1  cc. 
of  tenth  normal   sodium  hydroxide  is  required  to  assume  a  yellow  color. 

Agitate  10  cc.  of  trichloroethylene  with  25  cc.  of  water  and  allow  the 
liquid  to  separate  completely.  Separate  10  cc.  portions  of  the  aqueous 
layer  are  affected  as  follows:  No  turbidity  is  noted  five  minutes  after 
the  addition  of  0.1  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and  0.1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution 


ANESTHETICS  53 

(chlorides) ;  no  blue  color  is  observed  after  the  addition  of  0.1  cc.  of 
potassium  iodide  test  solution  and  0.1  cc.  of  starch  test  solution  (readily 
oxidizing  substances  such  as  free  chlorine). 

Add  0.1  cc.  of  alcohol  to  5  cc.  of  trichloroethylene:  a  turbid  solution 
is   formed   {distinction  from  chloroform). 

Evaporate  25  cc.  of  trichloroethylene  in  a  platinum  or  porcelain  dish 
on  a  steam  bath  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C:  No  weighable 
residue   is  obtained. 

Trichlorethylene-Calco.  —  A  brand  of  trichloroethylene- 
N.  N.  R.,  marketed  only  in  sealed  frangible  tubes.  The  prepa- 
ration contains  in  each  cc.  not  more  than  0.2  mg.  of  ammonium 
carbonate  to  prevent  the  thermal  decomposition  of  trichloroethy- 
lene vapor  which  occurs  during  the  sealing  of  the  glass  tubes. 

Manufactured  by  Calco  Chemical   Co.,  Inc.    (a  division  of  the  American 
Cyanamid  Co.),  Bound  Brook,  N.  J.    No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 
Tubes  Trichlorethylene-Calco,    1   cc. 

Anesthetics,  Local 

There  are  three  general  groups  of  drugs  used  for  the  pro- 
duction of  local  anesthesia:  (1)  those  which  cause  anesthesia 
through  the  production  of  cold,  such  as  ether,  ethyl  chloride 
and  methyl  chloride ;  (2)  certain  protoplasmic  poisons,  as  quin- 
ine, and  (3)  those  having  a  specific  effect  on  sensory  nerves 
or  their  endings,  cocaine  being  the  type  of  this  class. 

The  drugs  listed  below  belong,  in  general,  to  the  third  class. 
They  have  been  introduced  with  the  object  of  finding  substances 
less  toxic  and  more  stable  and  less  injurious  to  the  tissues 
than  cocaine.  Their  anesthetic  power  is  also  as  a  rule  some- 
what less  than  that  of  cocaine  and  most  of  them  present  the 
usually  undesirable  effect  of  dilating  the  blood  vessels  or  at 
least  of  not  constricting  them  as  does  cocaine,  and  are  there- 
fore almost  always  employed  in  conjunction  with  epinephrine. 
The  most  important  are  based  on  the  discovery  that  the  local 
anesthetic  action  of  cocaine  is  due  to  the  radical  of  benzoic 
acid  in  combination  with  a  nitrogen-containing  basic  group. 
The  simplest  of  these  compounds,  ethylaminobenzoate  (benzo- 
caine,  anesthesine),  is  the  ethyl  ester  of  para-aminobenzoic  acid, 
C6H4(NH2)COOH  ;  orthoform  is  the  methyl  ester  of  oxyamino- 
benzoic  acid,  NH2C6H3(OH)COOH.  These  are  too  weak  or 
too  slightly  soluble  in  water  to  be  useful  for  hypodermic  injec- 
tion; they  are  used  for  local  application  (See  "Anesthetics, 
Local,  Slightly  Soluble").  Procaine  hydrochloride  is  the  hydro- 
chloride of  a  compound  of  para-aminobenzoic  acid  with  diethyl- 
aminoethyl  alcohol ;  its  salts  are  readily  soluble  in  water.  Only 
those  local  anesthetics  of  relatively  low  toxicity  should  be 
injected  where  very  small  amounts  are  required. 

ALYPIN.— Alypin  Hydrochloride.— The  hydrochloride  of 
2-benzoxy-2-dimethylaminomethvl-l-dimethylaminobutane. —  CHa 
CH^CCCeHsCOO)  [CH^N (CH3)o]  .CH.N  :  (CHa)...HCl. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Alypin  is  a  local  anesthetic,  claimed  to 
be  equal  to  cocaine,  but  is  not  a  mydriatic.     It  is  said  not  to 


54      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

produce  disturbance  of  accommodation  and  to  be  less  toxic 
than  cocaine,  but  the  evidence  as  to  the  relative  toxicity  of 
alypin  and  cocaine  is  rather  conflicting.  Death  was  reported 
in  one  case  from  the  injection  of  about  3  drachms  of  a  4  per 
cent  solution  into  the  urethra;  severe  poisoning  has  resulted 
from  smaller  amounts. 

Dosage. — Alypin  is  used  in  solutions  the  strength  of  which 
is  about  the  same  as  that  of  cocaine  hydrochloride :  in  ophthal- 
mology, 2  to  4  per  cent ;  in  rhinolaryngology,  5  to  10  per  cent ; 
in  urology,  1  to  4  per  cent ;  in  minor  surgery,  0.5  to  2  per  cent, 
and  in  dentistry,  2  per  cent. 

Alypin  solutions  may  be  sterilized  by  boiling  the  required 
amount  of  water  for  10  minutes  in  a  test  tube  stoppered  with 
cotton;  the  drug  is  then  added  and  the  boiling  continued  over 
a  small  flame  for  another  minute.  Solutions  should  be  freshly 
prepared.  Epinephrine  preparations  may  be  added  when  a  vaso- 
constrictor effect  is  desired. 

Manufactured   by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    Inc.  U.    S.    patent   808,748 
(Jan.   2,    1906;    expired).     U.    S.   trademark   44,608, 
Tablets  Alypin,    H    grain. 

Alypin  is  a  white,  crystalline  powder,  odorless,  bitter  and  hygro- 
scopic. It  is  very  soluble  in  water;  freely  soluble  in  alcohol  and 
chloroform;  insoluble  in  ether.  Its  aqueous  solutions  are  neutral  and 
are  not  rendered  turbid  on  the  addition  of  sodium  bicarbonate  solution 
in  moderate  quantities.  Its  aqueous  solutions  may  be  sterilized  by 
boiling  for  a  period  not  exceeding  live  minutes  without  decomposition. 
Two  and  four  per  cent  aqueous  solutions  are  quite  stable,  but  weaker 
solutions  are  likely  to  become  moldy.  It  should  be  protected  from 
the  air  in  well  stoppered  containers.  With  the  aqueous  solution 
(1  in  100)  potassium  dichromate  solution  produces  an  orange-yellow, 
crystalline  precipitate,  which  is  soluble  in  hydrochloric  acid.  Potassium 
permanganate  solution  produces  a  violet  crystalline  precipitate,  which 
turns  brown  on  standing.  The  aqueous  solution  of  alypin  (1  in  100) 
gives  precipitates  with  potassium  mercuric  iodide  solution,  iodine 
solution,  picric  acid  solution,  gold  chloride  solution  and  many  other 
alkaloidal  reagents;  it  also  gives  precipitates  with  potassium  iodide 
solution  and  mercuric  chloride  solution.      Mix   0.1    Gm.  of  alypin  with 

1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  warm  the  mixture  to  100  C.  for  five  minutes 
and  carefully  add  2  cc.  of  water:  the  odor  of  ethylbenzoate  is  developed. 
On  cooling  the  mixture,  crystals  separate  which  are  dissolved  on  adding 

2  cc.  of  alcohol. 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  alypin,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight 
at  100  C:  the  loss  should  not  exceed  2  per  cent. 

Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  alypin,  accurately  weighed:  the  ash  does 
not    exceed   0.1    per   cent. 

APOTHESINE.  —  Apothesine  Hydrochloride.  —  7-diethyl- 
aminopropyl  cinnamate  hydrochloride.  (GH5)2N.CH2.CH2CH2. 
COO.CH  :  CH.CeH5.HCl.  The  hydrochloride  of  a  condensa- 
tion product  prepared  by  the  action  of  cinnamoyl  chloride  on 
7-diethylaminopropylalcohol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Apothesine  is  a  local  anesthetic  of  the 
procaine  rather  than  the  cocaine  type,  that  is,  it  belongs  to  that 
type  which  while  effective  for  injection  anesthesia  (especially 
when  combined  with  epinephrine),  is  relatively  inefficient  when 
applied  to  mucous  membranes.  It  is  rather  slower  in  action 
than  procaine  hydrochloride.    Its  absolute  toxicity  is  about  equal 


ANESTHETICS  55 

to  that  of  cocaine  but  about  twice  that  of  procaine  hydrochloride 
(as  20  is  to  40).  When  injected,  somewhat  stronger  solutions 
are  required  than  are  necessary  with  procaine  hydrochloride,  or 
especially  with  cocaine,  but  with  adequate  concentrations  the 
anesthesia  is  just  as  complete.  It  is  employed  for  infiltration 
injection,  nerve  blocking,  intraspinal  injection,  pressure  anes- 
thesia and  oral  administration  as  a  palliative  measure  for  its 
local  anesthetic  effect.  Apothesine  solutions  are  not  injured  by 
boiling. 

Dosage. — As  a  local  anesthetic  0.5  to  2  per  cent  solution 
generally  with  epinephrine  in  sterile  water  or  physiologic  solu- 
tion of  sodium  chloride.  For  spinal  anesthesia  2  cc.  of  a  4  per 
cent  solution. 

Manufactured   by    Parke,    Davis    &    Company,    Detroit.      U.    S.    patents 

1,193,634;    1,193,649;    1,193,650,   and    1,193,651    (Aug.   8,    1916;   expired). 
Apothesine    Solution:      Each    100    cc.    contains    1.5    Gm.    of    apothesine 

and  0.5  Gm.  of  chloretone   (the  latter  is  used  as  a  preservative). 
Apothesine  Hypodermic  Tablets  0.08  Gm.   (lH  grains). 
Apothesine    and    Adrenalin    Hypodermic    Tablets:    Each    tablet    contains 

apothesine    0.3    (jUI.    (44-5   prains)    and   adrenalin    0.0003    Gm.   VijOO   grain), 

and  not  more  than  l/'^oo  grain   of  sodium  bisulphite. 

Apothesine   and   Adrenalin    Hypodermic    Tablets:   Each    tablet    contains 

apothesine  0.039  Gm.   (%  grain)   and  adrenalin  0.00004  Gm.   (Vieoo  grain), 

and  not  more  than  y^OO  grain  of  sodium  bisulphite. 

Apothesine  occurs  in  white  masses  which  are  composed  of  small  white 
crystals,  practically  odorless  and  faintly  bitter,  but  producing  a  sense  of 
numbness  of  the  tongue  and  permanent  in  the  air.  It  is  soluble  in  water 
and  alcohol  and  slightly  soluble  in  acetone  or  ether.  Its  aqueous  solu- 
tion is  neutral  to  litmus  paper.  The  solution  is  stable.  Aqueous  solu- 
tions of  apothesine  produce  precipitates  with  the  alkali  hydroxides  and 
their  carbonates  (the  precipitate  formed  with  sodium  bicarbonate  is  solu- 
ble in  an  excess  of  the  reagent)  and  with  the  usual  alkaloidal  reagents. 
The  free  base  of  apothesine  occurs  as  an  oil;  when  heated  with  strong 
sodium  hydroxide,  it  is  decomposed  to  diethylaminopropylalcohol  and 
sodium  cinnamate. 

Apothesine  melts  at   136   C. 

An  aqueous  solution  of  apothesine  gives,  with  silver  nitrate  solution, 
a  white   precipitate  which  is  insoluble  in  nitric  acid. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  apothesine  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  2  drops 
of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  2  drops  of  sodium  nitrite  solution 
(10  per  cent)  and  mix  with  a  solution  of  0.2  Gm.  of  betanaphthol  in 
10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  (10  per  cent):  a  white  precipitate 
is  formed  (distinction  from  ethyl  aminobenzoate,  which  gives  a  cherry- 
red  color  in  a  solution  containing  undissolved  benzocaine  and  from 
procaine  hydrochloride,  which  gives  a  scarlet  precipitate). 

Add  a  few  drops  of  gold  chloride  solution  to  an  aqueous  solution  of 
apothesine  (1  in  100):  a  lemon-yellow  precipitate  is  produced  (distinc- 
tion from  ethyl  aminobenzoate  and  procaine  hydrochloride  which  form 
brown  precipitates). 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  apothesine  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  3  drops 
of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  and  5  drops  of  potassium  permanganate 
solution:  the  violet  color  of  the  latter  disappears  immediately  (distinc- 
tion from  cocaine  which  gives  a   violet  precipitate). 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  apothesine  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution 
remains  colorless    (organic  impurities). 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  apothesine  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  saturate  the 
solution  with  hydrogen  sulfide:  no  coloration  or  precipitation  is  pro- 
duced  (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  apothesine,  accurately  weighed:  not  more 
than  0.1   per  cent  of  residue  remains. 


56       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

BENZYL  ALCOHOL.  — Alcohol  Benzylicum.  —  Phen- 

methylol. — CeHs.CHoOH. — An  aromatic  alcohol  occurring  as  an 
ester  in  tolu  and  other  balsams ;  the  product  on  the  market  is 
produced  synthetically. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Benzyl  alcohol  is  used  as  a  local  anes- 
thetic by  injection  and  by  application  to  mucous  membranes. 
It  is  practically  nonirritant  and  nontoxic  in  the  ordinary  con- 
centrations and  doses. 

Dosage. — Benzyl  alcohol  is  usually  used  in  the  form  of  a  1 
to  4  per  cent  solution  in  water  or  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride.  Such  solutions  may  be  sterilized  by  boiling, 
without  danger  of  decomposition.  Pure  benzyl  alcohol  is 
markedly  antiseptic.  The  technic  of  injection  is  the  same  as 
for  other  local  anesthetics.  It  is  applied  against  pruritus  as  a 
10  per  cent  ointment,  in  lard;  or  as  a  lotion  of  equal  parts  of 
benzyl  alcohol,  alcohol  and  water. 

Benzyl  alcohol  is  a  colorless  liquid  with  a  faint  aromatic  odor  and 
a  sharp  burning  taste.  When  placed  on  the  tongue,  it  produces  numb- 
ness, even  if  only  a  small  quantity  is  used.  It  is  soluble,  1  cc.  in 
25  cc.  of  water,  and  miscible  in  all  proportions  with  alcohol,  ether 
and  chloroform.  One  volume  of  benzyl  alcohol  should  dissolve  in  1.5 
volumes  of  50  per  cent  alcohol.  Benzyl  alcohol  boils  without  decom- 
position between  200  and  206  C.  When  ignited  it  burns  with  a 
smoky  flame.  It  has  a  specific  gravity  of  from  1.040  to  1.050  at  15  C. 
and   1.032  to  1.042  at  25   C. 

Benzyl  alcohol  is  neutral  to  litmus.  If  2  or  3  drops  are  added  to 
a  strong  solution  of  potassium  permanganate  acidulated  with  sulfuric 
acid,  rapid  oxidation  takes  place  and  the  odor  of  benzaldehyde  is 
plainly  evident.  On  heating  the  mixture,  further  oxidation  takes 
place,  and  then  by  adding  dilute  sulfuric  acid  and  decolorizing  the 
mixture  with  hydrogen  dioxide,  benzoic  acid  may  be  obtained  by 
extraction  with  ether.  Wind  the  end  of  a  copper  wire  to  a  spiral 
about  6.3  mm.  (one-fourth  inch)  in  diameter  and  length,  and  hold  this 
spiral  in  a  nonluminous  flame  until  no  green  coloration  is  imparted 
to  the  flame;  dip  the  spiral  into  the  benzyl  alcohol  to  be  tested  and 
burn  off  the  adhering  liquid  outside  the  flame;  place  the  nonluminous 
flame  against  a  dark  background  and  hold  the  loop  in  the  right  or 
left  margin  of  the  flame;  not  even  a  transient  green  coloration  should 
be  imparted  to  the  flame  (limit  of  chlorine  compounds).  If  5  cc. 
is  shaken  with  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  (5  per  cent)  and 
allowed  to  stand  one  hour,  no  yellow  color  should  appear  in  the 
aqueous   layer    (aldehyde). 

Ten  cc.  of  benzyl  alcohol  should  leave  no  weighable  residue  on 
evaporation    and   heating    until   all   carbon   is   burned   away. 

Benzyl    Alcohol-Seydel.  —  A    brand    of    benzyl    alcohol- 

N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  The  Seydel  Chemical  Company,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. 
No  U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

BUTYN.  —  Butyn  Sulfate.  —  />-Aminobenzoyl-7-dinormalbu- 
tylaminopropanol  sulfate.  —  7-dibutylaminopropvl-p-aminoben- 
zoate-A^-sulfate.  —  [NHo.aH4.COO(CH2)3.N(CH9)2.]2H2S04. 
Butyn  is  the  normal  sulfate  of  a  base  resembling  the  base 
of  procaine  hydrochloride  (/'-aminobenzoyl-diethylaminoethanol 
hydrochloride)  ;  but  it  differs  in  that  butyn  possesses  a  butyl 
group  in  place  of  the  ethyl  group  of  procaine  base,  and  a  pro- 
panol  group  in  place  of  the  ethanol  group. 


ANESTHETICS  57 

Actions  a)id  Uses. — Butyn  is  a  local  anesthetic  proposed  as 
a  substitute  for  cocaine,  particularly  in  surface  anesthesia,  as 
for  the  eye,  nose  and  throat.  It  has  the  special  advantage  of 
acting  through  intact  mucosae  about  as  effectively  as  cocaine. 
On  the  normal  human  eye,  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  butyn  sulfate 
is  as  effective  as  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  phenacaine  hydro- 
chloride (holocaine),  and  more  efficient  than  a  1  per  cent  solution 
of  cocaine  hydrochloride  or  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  eucaine. 
The  instillation  of  butyn  solutions  often  produces  congestion 
of  the  conjunctiva,  but  this  does  not  appear  to  be  of  practical 
significance. 

When  butyn  is  injected  hypodermically  into  albino  rats,  the 
toxicity  is  two  and  one-half  times  that  of  cocaine,  but  the 
lethal  dose  (injected  intravenously  into  cats)  is  about  equal  to 
that  of  cocaine.  Pharmacologic  study  indicates  that  butyn  may 
take  the  place  of  cocaine,  in  whole  or  in  part,  for  surface  anes- 
thesia of  mucous  membranes  and  that  it  may  be  superior  for 
tiiis  purpose,  especially  for  use  in  the  eye,  to  other  anesthetics, 
for  the  reason  that  it  can  be  used  in  materially  lower  concen- 
trations (presumably  because  of  more  prompt  absorption).  On 
the  other  hand,  it  does  not  appear  promising  for  injection 
anesthesia  or  for  spinal  anesthesia,  since  its  toxicity  is  materi- 
ally greater  than  that  of  procaine  hydrochloride ;  but  butyn  is 
used  for  injection  anesthesia,  in  concentrations  of  0.1  to  0.4 
per  cent. 

A  committee  of  the  Section  of  Ophthalmology  of  the  Ameri- 
can Medical  Association  (/.  A.  M.  A.  78:343  [Feb.  4]  1922) 
reported  the  successful  use  of  butyn  in  practically  all  operations 
on  the  eye  and  in  some  operations  on  the  nose  and  throat.  The 
committee  concluded  that  butyn  is  more  powerful  than  cocaine, 
a  smaller  quantity  being  required ;  that  it  acts  more  rapidly 
than  cocaine,  and  that  the  action  is  more  prolonged.  So  far 
as  the  experiences  of  the  committee  go,  butyn  in  the  quantity 
required  is  less  toxic  than  cocaine.  The  committee  found  butyn 
superior  to  cocaine  in  that  it  produces  no  drying  of  the  tissues 
and  no  change  in  the  size  of  the  pupil  and  that  it  has  no 
ischemic  effect. 

Dosage. — For  ophthalmologic  work,  butyn  is  generally  used 
in  2  per  cent  solutions.  A  single  application  produces,  within 
one  minute,  an  anesthesia  sufficient  to  permit  the  removal  of 
superficially  placed  foreign  bodies,  the  application  of  irritant 
astringents  and  the  use  of  the  tonometer.  Four  instillations, 
three  minutes  apart,  permit  operative  work  within  five  minutes 
after  the  last  instillation,  producing  an  anesthesia  sufficient  to 
perform  all  of  the  commoner  operations  on  the  eye.  For  topical 
use  in  nose  and  throat  work,  a  2  per  cent  solution  is  usually 
employed.     Butyn  solutions  may  be  sterilized  by  boiling. 

Manufactured  by   the   Abbott   Laboratories,    North   Chicago,   111.      U.    S. 
patent  1,358,751  (Nov.  16,  1920;  expires  1937).     U.  S.  trademark  147,893. 
Butyn  Solution,  2  per  cent. 
Butyn  Tablets,  0.2  Gm.   (3  grains). 


58      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Butyn  and  Epinephrin  Hypodermic  Tablets:  Butyn  0.01  Gm,  (^  grain), 
epinephrin-Abbott,  0.032  mg.   (V^oo  grain). 

Ophthalmic  Ointment  Butyn  2%  and  Metaphen  1:3,000:  Contains 
2  per  cent  of  butyn  with  metaphen  1 :  3,000  in  a  base  of  petrolatum. 

Butyn  is  a   colorless,   odorless,   solid   which   rapidly   produces  a   sense 
of  numbness  when  placed  upon  the  tongue. 
It  melts  at  from  98  to  100  C. 

Butyn  is  soluble  in  less  than  its  own  weight  of  water  at  20  C.  It 
dissolves  slowly  in  cold  water,  but  rapidly  in  hot  water.  It  is  very 
soluble  in  warm  alcohol  and  in  acetone,  from  which  it  does  not  readily 
separate  on  cooling.  It  is  slightly  soluble  in  chloroform,  and  insoluble 
in  ether. 

From  aqueous  solutions  of  butyn,  alkali  hydroxides  and  carbonates, 
precipitate  the  free  base  as  a  colorless  oil :  the  soluble  bicarbonates  pre- 
cipitate a  crystalline  butyn  carbonate.  When  the  separated  base  is 
exactly  neutralized  with  hydrochloric  acid,  the  white  hydrochloride 
crystallizes  out;  after  drying  at  100  C,  these  crystals  melt  at  151  C. 

Dissolve  one  gram  of  butyn  in  10  cc.  of  water:  separate  portions  of 
the  solution  yield  a  white  precipitate  with  potassium  mercuric  iodide 
solution;  a  brown  precipitate  with  iodine  solution;  a  brown  precipitate 
with  gold  chloride  solution  and  a  yellow  precipitate  with  picric  acid 
solution;  a  portion  to  which  barium  chloride  solution  is  added  gives  a 
white    precipitate    (distinction  from   procaine   hydrochloride). 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  butyn  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  2  drops  of 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  2  drops  of  sodium  nitrite  solution  (10  per 
cent)  and  mix  with  a  solution  of  0.2  Gm.  of  betanaphthol  in  10  cc. 
of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  (10  per  cent):  a  scarlet  red  precipitate 
is  formed  (distinction  from  phcnacaine,  which  gives  a  white  precipitate). 

To  a  solution  of  about  0.1  Gm.  of  butyn  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add 
3  drops  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  and  mix  with  5  drops  of  potassium 
permanganate  solution:  the  violet  color  of  the  latter  disappears  immedi- 
ately   {distinction  from  cocaine). 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  butyn  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the 
solution  is  colorless  (organic  impurities). 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  the  salt  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  saturate  with 
hydrogen  sulfide:  no  coloration  or  precipitation  occurs  (salts  of  heavy 
metals). 

Incinerate  about  0.5   Gm.   of  butyn,  accurately  weighed:   there  is  not 

more   than   0.2   per   cent   residue. 

Butyn  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co.:  Butyn,  1  per  cent;  water,  1  per  cent; 
wool  fat  5  per  cent  and  petrolatum,  sterile,  93  per  cent.  Put  up  in 
collapsible  tubes  for  application  to  the  eye. 

Prepared  by  Manhattan  Eye  Salve  Co.,  Louisville,  Ky. 

DIOTHANE   HYDROCHLORIDE.— Diothaiie.—Piperi- 

dinopropanediol-cf/-phenvIurethane  hydrochloride. — C5H10N.CH2 
CHCOCONHCeHs)  CH2(OCONHC6H5).HCl.  —  The  hydro- 
chloride of  the  base  piperidino-propanediol-(f/-phenylurethane, 
obtained  by  combining  piperidine  and  glycerol  monochlorohy- 
drin  in  the  presence  of  an  alkali,  and  reacting  the  piperidinopro- 
panediol  with  phenyl  uocyanate. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Nearly  similar  to  those  of  cocaine,  but  it 
is  claimed  that  the  anesthesia  lasts  somewhat  longer  than  that 
induced  by  corresponding  doses  of  cocaine  hydrochloride  or 
procaine  hydrochloride.  Its  toxicity  by  intravenous  injection 
is  about  three  times  that  of  procaine  hydrochloride  and  hence 
it  should  not  be  injected  except  in  very  small  amounts. 


ANESTHETICS  59 

Solutions  of  diothane  hydrochloride  prepared  extemporaneously 
should  be  used  promptly,  since  such  solutions  usually  contain 
traces  of  alkali  and  are  thereby  subject  to  precipitation. 

Manufactured  by  the  Wm.  S.  Merrell  Company,  Cincinnati,  U.  S. 
patent  2,004,132  (June  11,  1935;  expires  1952).  U.  S.  trademark 
296,850. 

Ampules  Diothane  Hydrochloride  Solution  in  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride  0.6%,  6  cc. 

Diothane  Ointment,  1% :  An  aqueous  solution  of  diothane  hydro- 
chloride,   1   per  cent,   in  an  oxycholesterin  base. 

Diothane  Ointment  1%  in  Ophthalmic  Tube:  Collapsible  tubes  con- 
taining an  aqueous  solution  of  diothane  hydrochloride,  1  per  cent,  in  an 
oxycholesterin  base. 

Diothane  Solution,  1% :  A  solution  of  diothane  hydrochloride,  1  per 
cent,  in  distilled  water. 

Diothane  hydrochloride  occurs  as  a  fine,  white  crystalline,  odorless 
powder;  when  applied  to  the  tongue,  it  possesses  a  bitter  taste  followed 
by  a  sense  of  numbness;  permanent  in  the  air  at  ordinary  tempera- 
tures; slightly  soluble  in  water,  acetone  and  ethyl  acetate;  soluble  in 
alcohol;  insoluble  in  benzene  and  ether.  Its  aqueous  solution  (1  in  100) 
is  faintly  acid  to  litmus.  Diothane  hydrochloride  melts  at  195  to 
200  C.,  with  decomposition.  From  aqueous  solutions,  alkali  carbonates 
and  hydroxides  precipitate  the  free  base  as  a  colorless  oil,  which  does 
not   solidify    under   ordinary   conditions. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  diothane  hydrochloride  in  50  cc.  of  water; 
separate  portions  of  5  cc.  each:  to  one  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate 
solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia 
water;  to  another  portion  add  0.2  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid.  0.2 
cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of  sodium  nitrite  and  gradually  mix  with 
a  solution  of  0.2  Gm.  of  betanaphthol  in  10  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  sodium 
hydroxide  solution:  a  white,  changing  to  a  yellowish  and  finally  to 
an  orange  color  appears,  increasing  in  intensity  as  the  concentration 
of  the  betanaphthol  becomes  greater  (distinction  from  the  anesthetics 
responding  to  the  diazo-reaction) ;  to  another  portion  add  5  drops  of 
gold  chloride  solution:  an  orange-yellow  precipitate  appears  {distinc- 
tion from  alypin,  apothesine,  cocaine,  metycaine  and  nupercaine,  which 
give  a  lemon-yellow  precipitate  and  butyn,  procaine  and  tutocaine, 
which  yield  brown  precipitates).  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  diothane 
hydrochloride  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution  is  colorless 
(readily  carbonizable  substances).  Saturate  about  0.1  Gm.  of  diothane 
hydrochloride  dissolved  in  10  cc.  of  water  with  hydrogen  sulfide:  no 
coloration  or  precipitation  results   {salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Dry  about  0.5  Gm.  of  diothane  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed, 
at  100  C.  for  six  hours:  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  0.5  per 
cent.  Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  diothane  hydrochloride,  accurately 
weighed:  the  residue  is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about 
0.3  Gm.  of  diothane  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500  cc. 
Kjeldahl  flask,  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the 
official  method  described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of  Analysis 
of  the  Association  of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third  edition,  page 
20,  chapter  2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds 
to  not  less  than  9.5  per  cent,  nor  more  than  9.8  per  cent  when  calcu- 
lated to  the  dried  substance.  Dissolve  about  0.25  Gm.  of  diothane 
hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  water,  by  warming,  and 
transfer  to  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel,  rinse  twice  using 
about  10  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of  3  cc.  of  a  diluted 
ammonia  water  (one  part  of  ammonia  water  and  ten  parts  of  water), 
extract  with  four  successive  portions  of  ether  using  20  cc.  each;  filter 
through  a  pledget  of  cotton  and  evaporate  to  a  thick  oil  in  a  stream 
of  warm  air;  dissolve  the  oily  residue  in  about  25  cc.  of  previously 
neutralized  alcohol;  warm  slightly;  add  10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  hydro- 
chloric acid  solution,  followed  by  the  addition  of  10  cc.  of  water; 
determine  the  excess  of  acid  by  titration  with  tenth-normal  sodiu  n 
hydroxide  solution,  using  bromphenol  blue  as  an  indicator:  the  amount 
of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  90.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  92  per  cent  of  piperidinopropanediol- 
dt-phenylurethane  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.     Transfer  the 


60       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

ammoniacal  aqueous  portion  from  the  foregoing  immiscible  solvent 
extraction  to  a  400  cc.  beaker  and  place  on  the  steam-bath  for  three 
hours;  add  100  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of  10  cc.  of  nitric 
acid  and  25  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution;  subsequently  boil  with  con- 
tinuous stirring  and  allow  to  cool  in  a  dark  place.  Collect  the  pre- 
cipitate of  silver  chloride  on  a  Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  diluted 
nitric  acid  and  water,  followed  by  alcohol  and  ether;  finally  dry  to 
constant  weight  at  105  C;  the  amount  of  hydrogen  chloride  calculated 
from  the  silver  chloride  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  8.35  per 
cent,  nor  more  than  8.45  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance. 

LAROCAINE    HYDROCHLORIDE. —  ^aminobenzoyl- 

2-2-dimethyl-3-diethylaminopropanol  hydrochloride.  —  7-diethyl- 
amino-i3-i3-dimethylpropyl-/'-aminobenzoate  hydrochoride.  — 
NH2(C6H4CO)OCHoC(CH3).CH2N(C2H5)2.HCl.  The  base  of 
larocaine  belongs  to  the  procaine  type.  It  differs  from  pro- 
caine in  having  a  propanol  group  instead  of  the  ethanol  group 
and  has  two  methyl  groups  attached  to  the  former. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Larocaine  hydrochloride  acts  as  a  surface 
as  well  as  a  conduction  (infiltration)  anesthetic  and  compares 
quite  favorably  in  both  fields  with  either  cocaine  or  procaine. 
Larocaine  hydrochloride  is  quick  in  action  and  produces  anes- 
thesia of  a  somewhat  longer  duration  than  cocaine  or  procaine. 
The  average  duration  of  conduction  anesthesia  is  from  three 
to  five  hours,  Larocaine  hydrochloride  is  non-narcotic  and 
non-habit  forming. 

Dosage. — For  corneal  and  conjunctival  anesthesia,  from  2  to 
5  per  cent  solutions  may  be  used.  In  otorhinolaryngology,  5 
to  10  per  cent  solutions  have  been  employed.  From  0.75  to  1 
per  cent  solutions  are  used  in  urology.  For  conduction  anes- 
thesia, 0.25  to  2  per  cent  solutions  may  be  used.  Solutions 
of  larocaine  hydrochloride  may  be  sterilized  by  boiling  for  ten 
minutes.  Epinephrine  when  desired  may  be  added  just  prior 
to  administration.  Stock  solutions  should  be  kept  in  dark- 
bottles.  The  product  is  supplied  in  vials  containing  %,  ^/i,  y2 
and  1  ounce  of  larocaine  hydrochloride  in  powder  form. 

Manufactured    by     F.     Hoffmann-LaRoche    &    Co.,     Basle,     Switzerland 
(Hoffmann-LaRoche,    Inc.,    Nutley,    N.    J.,    distributor).       U.    S.    patent 
1,824,676   (Sept.  22,   1931;   expires,   1948).     U.   S.  trademark  283,775. 
Larocaine   hydrochloride   occurs   as  a   fine   white,   odorless,   crystalline 
powder;  when  applied  to  the  tongue,  it  possesses  a  bitter  taste  followed 
by    a    sense    of    numbness;    permanent    in    the    air    at    ordinary    tempera- 
tures;   freely   soluble   in   water;    soluble   in   alcohol:    sparingly   soluble   in 
chloroform,    insoluble    in    ether.      Its    aqueous    solution    is    faintly    acid 
to   litmus.      Larocaine    hydrochloride   melts    at    196-197    C,    with   decom- 
position.      From    aqueous    solutions,    alkali    carbonates    and    hydroxides 
precipitate  the  free  base  as  a  colorless  oil,  which  solidifies  after  a  time 
at  ordinary   temperature. 

Dissolve  about  0.05  Gm.  of  larocaine  hydrochloride  in  50  cc.  of 
water;  separate  portions  of  5  cc.  each;  to  one  portion  add  5  cc.  of 
silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an  excess 
of  ammonia  water;  to  another  portion  add  0.2  cc.  of  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid,  0.2  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of  sodium  nitrite  and 
gradually  mix  with  a  solution  containing  0.2  Gm.  of  betanaphthol  dis- 
solved in  10  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  a  red 
precipitate  is  formed  (distinction  from  the  anesthetics  not  responding 
to  the  diazo  reaction);  to  another  portion  add  0.3  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric 


ANESTHETICS  61 

acid,  followed  by  the  addition  of  0.5  cc.  of  tenth-normal  potassium 
permanganate  solution:  the  red  coloration  disappears  immediately  (dis- 
tinction from  cocaine  and  some  other  local  anesthetics) .  Dissolve  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  larocaine  hydrochloride  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the 
solution  is  colorless  {readily  carbonisable  substances).  Saturate  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  larocaine  hydrochloride  dissolved  in  10  cc.  of  water  with 
hydrogen  sulfide:  no  coloration  or  precipitation  results  (salts  of  heavy 
metals). 

Dry  about  0.5  Gm.  of  larocaine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  at 
100  C.,  for  six  hours:  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  1  per  cent. 
Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  larocaine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed: 
the  residue  is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of 
larocaine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500  cc.  Kjeldahl  flask 
and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the  official  method 
described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of  Analysis  of  the 
Association  of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third  edition,  page  20, 
chapter  2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not 
less  than  8.8  per  cent,  nor  more  than  9  per  cent  when  calculated  to 
the  dried  substance.  Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of  larocaine  hydro- 
chloride, accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel. 
add  25  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of  5  cc.  of  ammonia 
water;  extract  with  seven  successive  portions  of  ether  using  35  cc, 
30  cc,  25  cc,  25  cc,  20  cc,  15  cc.  and  10  cc,  respectively;  wash  the 
combined  ethereal  solution  with  15  cc.  of  water,  filter  through  a  pledget 
of  cotton  and  evaporate  to  a  thick  oil  in  a  stream  of  warm  air;  expose 
over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator;  dissolve  the 
oily  residue  in  about  20  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alcohol;  warm 
slightly;  add  12.5  cc.  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution, 
followed  by  the  addition  of  an  equal  volume  of  water;  determine  the 
excess  of  acid  by  titration  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion, usin^  methyl  red  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normal 
hydrochloric  acid  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  87 
per  cent  nor  more  than  89  per  cent  aminobenzoyldimethyldiethylamino 
propanol,  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  the 
ammoniacal  aqueous  portion  from  the  immiscible  solvent  extraction  to 
a  400  cc.  beaker  and  place  on  the  steam  bath  for  three  hours,  add 
100  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of  10  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and 
25  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution,  subsequently  boil,  with  continuous 
stirring  and  allow  to  cool  in  a  dark  place.  Collect  the  precipitate  of 
silver  chloride  on  a  Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  a  diluted  nitric  acid 
and  water,  followed  by  alcohol  and  ether;  finally  dry  to  constant  weight 
at  105  C. :  the  amount  of  hydrogen  chloride  calculated  from  the 
silver  chloride  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  11.5  per  cent  nor 
more  than    11,7  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance, 

METYCAINE.— Metycaine  Hydrochloride.— Benzoy  1-7- (2- 
methylpiperidino)  -propanol  hydrochloride.  — 7  -  (2-methylpiperi- 
dino)-propylbenzoate  hydrochloride. — C6H4.COO(CH2)3.NC8Hio. 
HCl. — The  base  of  metycaine  differs  from  the  base  of  procaine 
hydrochloride  in  having  the  basic  nitrogen  in  a  methylpiperidino 
ring  instead  of  the  dimethylamine,  a  propanol  group  in  place 
of  the  ethanol  group  and  in  not  having  an  amino  group  attached 
to  the  benzene  ring.  In  addition,  it  possesses  an  asymmetric 
carbon  atom  and  is  optically  inactive.  Metycaine  is  therefore 
a  racemic  mixture  of  the  hydrochlorides. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Metycaine  is  a  local  anesthetic  which 
produces  prompt  anesthesia  either  by  subcutaneous  injection  or 
topical  application  to  mucous  membranes  and  similar  surfaces. 
Pharmacologic  studies  on  animals  indicate  that  the  toxicity  of 
metycaine  following  subcutaneous  injection  is  lower  than  that 
of  cocaine  and  comparable  to  that  of  procaine ;  intravenously,  it 
was  found  to  be  approximately  three  times  as  toxic  as  procaine. 


62      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — For  application  to  the  eye  metycaine  is  used  in  2  per 
cent  solutions ;  for  nose  and  throat,  2  to  10  per  cent  solutions 
are  used ;  1  to  4  per  cent  solutions  have  been  used  for  urethral 
anesthesia ;  for  infiltrative  anesthesia  in  small  areas,  solutions 
of  0.5  to  1  per  cent  are  generally  used. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis,  Ind.  U.  S.  patent 
1,784,903   (Dec.   16,  1930;  expires  1947).     U.  S.  trademark  305,894. 

Ampoules  Metycaine  1%,  1  cc:  Each  cc.  contains  metycaine  0.01  Gm. 
(J^    gr.),  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride. 

Ampoules  Metycaine  2%  and  Epinephrine  (1:  25,000),  1  cc:  Each  cc. 
contains  metycaine  0.01  Gm.  {]/(,  gr.),  epinephrine  0.04  mg.  (Vieoo  gr.), 
and  thiourea  0.3%,  in  Ringer's  solution.  The  thiourea,  which  is  added 
to  the  dosage  forms  containing  epinephrine  in  order  to  prevent  oxidation, 
complies  with  the  following  standards:  It  is  a  white,  crystalline,  almost 
odorless  solid;  soluble  in  water  and  hot  alcohol  and  slightly  soluble  in 
cold  alcohol,  chloroform,  and  ether.  When  0.05  Gm.  is  dissolved  in  10  cc. 
of  water  to  which  2  drops  of  ferric  chloride  solution  have  been  added, 
the  color  is  only  slightly  augmented  (sulfocyanates).  Warm  0.05  Gm. 
of  thiourea  in  a  test  tube  until  it  melts,  cool,  add  10  cc.  of  water  and 
2  drops  of  ferric  chloride  solution:  a  blood  red  color  results.  Add  10  cc. 
of  water  and  4  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  to  a  mixture  of  0.1  Gm.  bismuth 
nitrate  and  0.3  Gm.  of  thiourea,  and  warm;  an  orange  colored  solution 
results,  which  upon  evaporation  yields  crystals  of  an  orange  color.  The 
melting  point  of  thiourea  ranges  from   176   to   180   C. 

Ampoules  Metycaine  2%  and  Epinephrine  (1:50,000),  2.5  cc. :  Each  cc. 
contains  metycaine  0.02  Gm.  (^  gr.),  epinephrine  0.02  mg.  (^^200  gr.), 
and   thiourea   0.15%    in   Ringer's  solution. 

Metycaine  Ophthalmic  Ointment  4  per  cent:  Metycaine  4  per  cent,  in 
a  base  consisting  of  liquid  petrolatum  and  wool  fat,  with  small  amounts  of 
paraffin,  white  petrolatum  and  ceresin. 

Solution  Metycaine  2%:  Metycaine  2%  in  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  containing  chlorbutanol    0.5%   as  preservative. 

Tablets  Metycaine,  0.15   Gm. 

Tablets  Metycaine,   J/^   grain. 

Metycaine  occurs  as  a  fine,  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder;  when 
applied  to  the  tongue,  it  possesses  a  slightly  bitter  taste  followed  by 
a  sense  of  numbness;  permanent  in  the  air;  freely  soluble  in  water, 
about  1  in  1 ;  soluble  in  alcohol  and  chloroform;  insoluble  in  ether  and 
olive  oil.  Its  aqueous  solution  (1  in  10)  is  faintly  acid  to  litmus. 
It  is  optically  inactive.  Metycaine  melts  at  from  171  to  173  C.  From 
aqueous  solutions,  alkali  carbonates  and  hydroxides  precipitate  the  free 
base  as  a  water-white  to  a  light  yellowish  oil  which  does  not  solidify 
at  ordinary  temperatures. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  Metycaine  in  10  cc.  of  water;  divide  into 
portions  of  2  cc;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid 
and  1  cc.  of  potassium  permanganate  solution:  the  color  is  discharged 
(distinction  from  alypin,  which  gives  a  violet  crystalline  precipitate 
and  soon  disappears) ;  to  a  second  portion  add  1  cc.  of  gold  chloride 
solution:  a  yellow  precipitate  appears  (distinction  from  apothesine, 
which  gives  a  lemon-yellow  precipitate) ;  to  a  third  portion  add  2  drops 
of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  2  drops  of  a  10  per  cent  sodium  nitrite 
solution  and  gradually  mix  with  a  solution  of  0.2  Gm.  of  beta-naphthol 
in  10  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  a  white,  changing 
to  a  yellowish,  and  finally  to  a  greenish  yellow  color  appears,  increasing 
in  intensity  as  the  concentration  of  the  beta-naphthol  becomes  greater 
(distinction  from  the  anesthetics  responding  to  the  diasoreaction, 
Warren,  L.  E.,  The  Identification  of  Some  Local  Anesthetics,  Jour. 
Amer.  Phar.  Assn.,  13:512).  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  metycaine 
in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution  is  colorless  (readily  carbonizable 
substances) .  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  metycaine  in  50  cc.  of  water: 
separate  portions  of  5  cc.  each  yield  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution  (sulfate); 
no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts 
of  heavy  metals). 


ANESTHETICS  63 

Dry  about  0.5  Gm.  of  metycaine,  accurately  weighed,  over  sulfuric 
acid  in  a  desiccator  for  48  hours:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  0.25  per 
cent.  Incinerate  about  0.5  Gra.  of  metycaine,  accurately  weighed:  the 
residue  is  not  more  than  0.2  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.25  Gm.  of 
metycaine  to  a  400  cc.  beaker,  add  100  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the 
addition  of  25  cc.  of  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  solution  and  10  cc.  of 
nitric  acid,  boil  with  continuous  stirring  and  allow  to  cool  in  a  dark 
place.  Collect  the  precipitate  of  silver  chloride  on  a  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  with  nitric  acid  and  water,  followed  by  alcohol  and  ether;  finally 
dry  to  constant  weight  at  105  C.:  the  amount  of  hydrogen  chloride 
talculated  from  the  silver  chloride  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than 
12  per  cent,  nor  more  than  12.35  per  cent  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance.  Transfer  about  0.25  Gm.  of  metycaine,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel,  add  50  cc.  of  water,  followed 
by  the  addition  of  5  cc.  of  ammonia  water,  extract  with  seven  suc- 
cessive portions  of  chloroform,  using  35  cc,  30  cc,  25  cc,  20  cc, 
15  cc,  10  cc,  and  10  cc,  respectively;  wash  the  combined  chloroformic 
solution  with  15  cc.  of  water,  filter  through  a  pledget  of  cotton  and 
evaporate  to  a  thick  oil  in  a  stream  of  warm  air;  expose  over  sulfuric 
acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator;  dissolve  the  oily  residue  in 
about  10  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alcohol;  warm  slightly;  add 
10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution,  followed  by  the 
addition  of  an  equal  volume  of  water;  determine  the  excess  of  acid 
by  titration  with  twentieth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  using 
methyl-red  as  an  indicator :  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric 
acid  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  86.5  per  cent,  nor 
more  than  88  per  cent  benzoyl-7-(2-methylpiperidino)   propanol. 

NUPERCAINE-CIBA.  —  Nupercaine  Hydrochloride.  — 
a-butyloxycinchoninic  acid,  7-diethylethylenediamide  hydro- 
chloride. —  2-butyloxyquinolinecarboxylic  acid-4-diethylethylene- 
diamide  hydrochloride.  C9H5N.OC4H9(2).CONH(CH2)2N 
(C2H5)2HC1(4). — The  hydrochloride  of  the  base  a-butyloxycin- 
choninic acid  7-diethylethylenediamide  obtained  by  chlorination 
of  a-chlor-cinchoninic  acid  chloride  and  conversion  of  the  latter 
with  asymmetric  diethylethylenediamine  into  a-chlor-cinchoninic 
acid  diethylethylenediamine  and  subsequent  heating  with  sodium 
butylate.     Nupercaine  was  introduced  as  percaine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Nupercaine  is  a  local  anesthetic,  acting 
like  cocaine  when  applied  to  mucous  surfaces  and  like  procaine 
or  cocaine  when  injected,  the  action  being  relatively  prolonged. 
Nupercaine  is  about  five  times  as  toxic  as  cocaine  when  it  is 
injected  intravenously  into  animals,  and  its  anesthetic  activity  is 
correspondingly  greater  than  that  of  cocaine  when  it  is  applied 
to  a  mucous  surface ;  it  is  many  times  more  active  than  procaine 
hydrochloride  when  it  is  injected  subcutaneously.  It  is  reported 
to  have  caused  necrosis  of  tissue  in  one  case  and  a  condition 
resembling  gangrene  with  recovery  in  another.  Death  has  been 
reported  after  the  subcutaneous  injection  of  135  cc.  of  a  solution 
of  1  in  1,000.  Weak  solutions  (1  in  2,000)  cause  slight  tem- 
porary vascular  dilatation  (avoided  by  the  addition  of  epi- 
nephrine hydrochloride),  followed  by  constriction.  The  usual 
precautions  should  be  observed  when  it  is  injected  into  the  spinal 
canal  or  into  the  urethra. 

Dosage. — For  infiltration  anesthesia  solutions  of  from  1  in  2,000 
to  1  in  1,000,  with  the  addition  of  0.1  cc.  of  epinephrine  hydro- 
chloride solution  (1  in  1,000)  to  100  cc.  of  the  solution.  Not  more 
than  100  cc.  of  1  in  1,000  solution  should  be  injected.   For  spinal 


64       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

anesthesia,  a  total  of  from  7.5  to  10  mg.  (Ys  to  ^  grain)  in  1 
in  200  solution;  for  sacral  anesthesia,  25  to  35  cc.  (about  1 
fluidounce)  of  1  in  1,000  solution  or  a  correspondingly  smaller 
volume  of  1  in  500  solution.  The  details  of  dosage  should  be 
learned  with  reference  to  various  modifications  for  different 
applications.  Aqueous  solutions  of  nupercaine  should  be  pre- 
pared with  distilled  water,  as  the  salts  present  in  tap  water  of 
many  localities  may  precipitate  the  free  base,  butyloxycincho- 
ninic  acid  diethylethylenediamide.  Alkali-free  glass  should  be 
used  in  the  preparation  of  its  solutions. 

Manufactured   by   the   Society   of   Chemical   Industry   in   Basle,    Switzei 
land     (Ciba     Company,     Inc.,     New     York,     distributor).       U.     S.     paten 
1.825,623.     U.   S.  trademark  266,366. 
Ampules  Buffered  Solution  of  Nupercainc-Ciba  2  cc,  1 :  200. 
Ampules  Solution  of  Nupercaine-Ciba  5  cc,  1:1,000. 
Ampules  Solution  of  Nupercaine-Ciba  25  cc,   1 :  1,000. 
Solution   of  Nupercaine-Ciba,   2%. 
Tablets  Nupercaine-Ciba,   50   mg. 

Nupercaine  occurs  as  fine,  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder;  hygro- 
scopic; very  soluble  in  water,  about  2  in  1,  freely  soluble  in  alcohol, 
soluble  in  acetone  and  chloroform,  slightly  soluble  in  benzene,  ethyl 
acetate  and  toluene  on  warming,  but  with  difficulty  in  the  cold,  its 
aqueous  solution,  about  1  in  20,  is  faintly  alkaline  to  litmus,  producing 
a  definite  anesthesia  on  the  tongue.     Nupercaine  "melts"  at  90  to  98  C. 

Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  nupercaine  to  a  suitable  Squibb  separate  ry 
funnel,  add  25  cc  of  vyater,  followed  by  the  addition  of  2  cc.  normal 
sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  extract  with  three  successive  portions 
of  purified  petroleum  benzin,  using  25  cc,  20  cc.  and  10  cc,  respec- 
tively; evaporate  the  combined  petroleum  benzin  extractions  to  dryness: 
the  crystals  melt  at  not  less  than  64  C.  Nupercaine-base  fluoresces 
with  the  more  common  oxygen  containing  acids.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm. 
of  nupercaine  in  50  cc.  of  water,  add  0.2  Gm.  of  potassium  perchlorate 
previously  dissolved  in  25  cc.  of  water  and  allow  to  stand  several 
hours:  the  crystals  of  nupercaine  perchlorate  crystallized  from  water 
melt  at  130  to  132  C.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  nupercaine  in  50  cc. 
of  water:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  yield  a  white  precipitate  on 
the  addition  of  1  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and  2  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  which 
after  decantation  of  the  supernatant  is  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia 
water;  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc. 
of  barium  chloride  solution  (sulfate) ;  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on 
saturation    with   hydrogen    sulfide    (salts   of  heavy   metals). 

Dry  about  0.5  Gm.  of  nupercaine,  accurately  weighed,  over  sulfuric 
acid  in  a  desiccator  for  forty-eight  hours:  the  loss  does  not  exceed 
2.5  per  cent.  Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  nupercaine 
to  a  400  cc.  beaker,  add  75  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of 
25  cc.  of  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  solution  and  10  cc.  of  nitric  acid, 
subsequently  boil,  with  continuous  stirring  and  allow  to  cool  in  a  dark 
place.  Collect  the  precipitate  of  silver  chloride  in  a  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  with  nitric  acid  and  water,  followed  by  alcohol  and  ether;  finally 
dry  to  constant  weight  at  105  C:  the  amcmnt  of  hydrogen  chloride 
calculated  from  the  silver  chloride  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than 
9.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  9.7  per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried  sub- 
stance. Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of  nupercaine-Ciba,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel,  add  50  cc  of  water,  followed  by 
the  addition  of  2  cc.  of  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  extract  with 
six  successive  portions  of  chloroform,  using  50  cc,  25  cc,  20  cc,  15cc., 
10  cc.  and  10  cc,  respectively,  wash  the  combined  chloroformic  solution 
with  15  cc.  of  water  and  evaporate  to  a  thick  oil  in  a  stream  of  warm 
air;  expose  over  sulfuiic  acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator; 
dissolve  the  oily  residue  in  about  10  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alco- 
hol; warm  slightly;  add  10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution, 
followed    by   the  addition   of   an    equal   volume   of    water;    determine   the 


ANESTHETICS  65 

excess  of  acid  by  titration  with  fiftieth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution, 
using  methyl  red  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  hydro- 
chloric acid  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  notless  than  88.5  per  cent 
nor  more  than  90.5  per  cent  butyloxycinchoninic  acid  diethylethylene- 
diamide,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 

PHENACAINE    HYDROCHLORIDE.— CH3C  :(NC6H4 

OC2H5).(NH.GH40GHo).HCl+H,0.  "The  hydrochloride  of 
ethenyl-p-diethoxydiphenylamidine."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Phenacainae 
Hydrochloridum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Phenacaine  hydrochloride  is  a  local  anes- 
thetic like  cocaine  but  having  the  advantage  of  a  quicker  effect. 
Five  minims  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  when  instilled  into  the 
eye  is  usually  sufficient  to  cause  anesthesia  in  from  one  to  ten 
minutes.     This  is  preceded  by  temporary  smarting. 

Dosage. — It  is  applied  in  a  1  per  cent  aqueous  solution. 
Phenacaine  hydrochloride  is  incompatible  with  alkalis  and  their 
carbonates  and  the  usual  alkaloidal  reagents.  Glass  vessels 
should  be  avoided  in  preparing  the  solution,  porcelain  being 
used  instead.  The  solutions  are  permanent,  as  the  drug  is 
itself  antiseptic.     They  are  not  injured  by  boiling. 

Holocaine  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co.:  Holocaine,  1  per  cent;  water,  1  per 
cent;  wool  fat,  5  per  cent  and  petrolatum,  sterile,  93  per  cent.  Put  tip 
in   collapsible  tubes,   for  application  to  the   eye. 

Prepared  by  Manhattan  Eye  Salve  Co.,  Louisville,  Ky. 

Holocaine  and  Adrenalin  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co.:  Composed  of  holo- 
caine, 1  per  cent;  adrenalin  chloride  solution,  2  per  cent;  water,  1  per 
cent;  wool  fat,  10  per  cent;  white  petrolatum,  sterile,  86  per  cent. 
Put  up  in   collapsible   tubes,   for  application   to  the   eye. 

Prepared  by   Manhattan   Eye    Salve   Co.,   Louisville,   Ky. 

Holocaine. — Holocaine  Hydrochloride. — A  brand  of  phena- 
caine hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  No  U.  S. 
patent. 

Holocaine  Solution,  1  per  cent:  An  aqueous  solution  containing  holo- 
caine hydrochloride  1  per  cent,  for  ocular  anesthesia  by  instillation.  The 
product  is  not  to  be  used  for  injection. 

Phenacaine-Werner. — Phenacaine  Hydrochloride. — A  brand 
of  phenacaine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Werner  Drug  and  Chemical  Company,  Cincinnati, 
Ohio.      No  U.    S.   patent  or  trademark. 

PROCAINE  BORATE.  —  l-amino-benzoyl-2-diethylamino 
ethanol-penta-;n-borate ;  ^-diethylaminoethvl-/5-amino-benzoate 
penta  7«-borate.  C6H.NH2COO.GH4N(C2H5)2.5HBO..  —  A 
borate  formed  by  the  interaction  of  />-aminobenzoyl-diethylamino- 
ethanol  (procaine  base)  and  boric  acid  in  the  same  organic 
solvent.  Procaine  borate  contains  51.8  per  cent  of  /^-amino- 
benzoyl-diethylaminoethanol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Procaine  borate  closely  resembles  pro- 
caine  hydrochloride   in   its  actions  and  uses.     The  molecule  is 


66      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

heavier  than  that  of  procaine  hydrochloride,  but  the  toxicity 
and  the  anesthetic  activity  are  closely  proportional  to  the  pro- 
caine base  which  they  contain.  When  injected  subcutaneously, 
procaine  borate  exerts  a  prompt  and  powerful  anesthetic  action. 
It  is  nonirritant.  The  testimony  concerning  its  activity  when 
applied  to  mucous  membranes  lacks  uniformity. 

Dosage. — For  infiltration  anesthesia,  solutions  of  0.5  to  1  per 
cent;  for  blocking  nerves,  from  1  to  2  per  cent;  for  tonsillec- 
tomy, 0.5  to  1  per  cent;  mucous  surfaces,  2  to  20  per  cent, 
dependent  on  the  location  and  the  depth  of  anesthesia  required. 
Its  action  is  enhanced  by  the  addition  of  a  small  amount  of 
epinephrine,  as  in  the  case  of  procaine  hydrochloride.  Owing 
to  the  smaller  content  of  the  base  in  procaine  borate,  the  total 
dose  may  exceed  that  of  procaine  hydrochloride  by  about  50 
per  cent. 

Procaine  borate  occurs  as  a  fine,  white,  odorless,  crystalline  powder; 
when  applied  to  the  tongue,  it  possesses  a  slightly  bitter  taste,  followed 
by  a  sense  of  numbness;  permanent  in  air;  freely  soluble  in  water, 
about  1  in  4,  soluble  in  alcohol;  insoluble  in  acetone,  benzene,  chloro- 
form and  ether.  Its  aqueous  solution  (1  in  10)  is  alkaline  to  litmus, 
dissociating   hydrolytically.     Procaine  borate   "melts"   at   163   to   166   C. 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  procaine  borate  to  a  suitable  Squibb  sepa- 
ratory  funnel,  add  25  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of  5  cc. 
of  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  extract  with  3  successive 
portions  of  chloroform  using  25  cc,  20  cc.  and  10  cc,  respectively; 
evaporate  the  combined  chloroformic  solutions  to  dryness,  dissolve  the 
oily  semisolid  base  in  25  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  hydrochloric 
acid:  portions  of  the  solution  respond  to  the  tests  for  procaine  hydro- 
chloride, U.  S.  P.  XI,  p.  306.  Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  procaine  borate  in 
2  cc  of  methyl  alcohol,  add  5  drops  of  sulfuric  acid  and  ignite  the 
mixture:  a  green  mantle  is  imparted  to  the  flame.  Dissolve  0.5  Gm. 
of  procaine  borate  in  50  cc.  of  water:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each 
yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of 
silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride) ;  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution  (sulfate) ;  no 
coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  {salts 
of  heavy  metals).  When  tested  for  arsenic  according  to  the  U.  S. 
Pharmacopeia  XI,  the  product  should  meet  requirements  for  the  arsenic 
(p.  436,  Arsenic  Test).  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.,  procaine  borate, 
accurately  weighed,  to  a  50  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  25  cc.  of 
chloroform  and  shake  the  cylinder  and  contents  for  five  minutes;  allow 
to  stand  until  the  insoluble  portion  separates;  filter,  wash  the  cylinder 
and  the  insoluble  material  onto  the  filter  with  two  portions  of  chloro- 
forrn,  using  15  cc.  and  10  cc,  respectively,  adding  the  washings  to  the 
original  filtrate;  evaporate  the  combined  filtrates  to  dryness  in  a 
tared  beaker  and  dry  to  constant  weight  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  par- 
tially exhausted  desiccator:  the  oily  residue  should  not  exceed  2  per  cent 
(limit  of  uncombined  p-aminobenzoyl-diethylaminoethanol). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  procaine  borate,  accurately  weighed,  over  sul- 
furic acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator  for  forty-eight  hours: 
the  loss  does  not  exceed  2  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.4  Gm.  of  pro- 
caine borate,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel, 
add  25  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of  2  cc.  of  normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  extract  with  six  successive  portions  of  chloroform, 
using  25  cc,  20  cc,  15  cc,  10  cc,  10  cc  and  10  cc,  respectively, 
evaporate  the  combined  chloroformic  solutions  to  dryness  in  a  stream 
of  warm  air,  and  dry  to  constant  weight  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  par- 
tially exhausted  desiccator;  dissolve  the  oily  residue  in  about  10  cc.  of 
previously  neutralized  alcohol,  add  10  cc  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric 
acid  solution,  followed  by  the  addition  of  an  equal  volume  of  water; 
determine  the  excess  of  acid  by  titration  with  fiftieth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide   solution,   using  methyl    red    as   an   indicator:    the   amount   of 


ANESTHETICS  67 

lenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not 
less  than  50.0  per  cent  nor  more  than  52.0  per  cent,  /'-amino-benzoyl- 
diethylamino-ethanol,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer 
about  0.4  Gm.  of  procaine  borate  to  a  steam  distillation  apparatus  and 
determine  the  »)?-boric  acid  according  to  the  Gladding  method  of  distil- 
lation and  subsequent  titration  (See  Leach,  Food  Inspection  and 
Analysis,  ed.  4,  p.  884) :  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  47.0  per  cent  nor  more 
than  48.5  per  cent,  «i-boric  acid  (HBO2),  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance. 

Procaine  Borate-Searle.  —  A  brand  of  procaine  borate- 
N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  G,  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Tablets  Procaine  Borate  and  Epinephrine:  Each  tablet  contains  pro- 
caine borate-Searle  0.05  Gm.  (^  grain)  and  epinephrine  0.0001  Gm. 
('/640  grain). 

Tablets  Procaine  Borate  without  Epinephrine:  Each  tablet  contains 
procaine  borate-Searle  0.05  Gm.   (M  grain). 

PROCAINE  HYDROCHLORIDE.  —  Procaine.— "Para- 
aminobenzoyl-diethylaminoethanol  hydrochloride."-f/.  5*.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Procainae 
Hydrochloridum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Procaine  hydrochloride  is  a  local  anes- 
thetic, less  toxic  than  cocaine  and  most  other  cocaine  sub- 
stitutes. When  injected  subcutaneously  it  exerts  a  prompt  and 
powerful  anesthetic  action,  but  the  effect  is  not  sustained.  This 
may  be  remedied  by  the  simultaneous  injection  of  epinephrine. 
Procaine  hydrochloride  is  only  slightly  irritant. 

It  is  relatively  ineffective  w^hen  applied  to  intact  mucous 
membranes. 

Dosage. — For  infiltration  anesthesia,  solutions  of  0.25  Gm. 
(4  grains)  procaine  hydrochloride  in  50  or  100  cc.  (1.6  or  3.2 
ounces)  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  with  0.3  or 
0.6  cc.  (5  or  10  minims)  of  epinephrine  solution  (1  in  1,000)  ; 
for  instillations  and  injections,  solutions  of  0.1  Gm,  (1^  grains) 
procaine  hydrochloride  in  10  or  5  cc.  (160  or  80  minims) 
physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  with  or  without  0.6 
cc.  (10  minims)  of  epinephrine  solution  (1  in  1,000).  In  oph- 
thalmology, 1  to  5  or  even  up  to  10  per  cent  solutions,  and  in 
rhinolaryngology  5  to  20  per  cent  solutions  are  recommended, 
with  the  addition  of  0.4  to  0,5  cc.  (6  to  8  minims)  of  epinephrine 
solution  (1  in  1,000)   to  each  10  cc.  (160  minims). 

Ampule  Solution  Procaine  Hydrochloride  2%,  1  cc:  Each  cubic  centi- 
meter contains  procaine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P.  0.02  Gm.  (J^  grain)  in 
aqueous  solution. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
No   U.    S.   patent  or   trademark. 

Ampule  Solution  Procaine  Hydrochloride  and  Epinephrine,  3  cc: 
Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  procaine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P.  0.02  Gm. 
(.yi  grain),  epinephrine  0.04  mg.  (Vieoo  grain)  and  sodium  bisulfite  0.001 
Gm.,  in  an  aqueous  solution  containing  less  than  0.5  per  cent  of 
chlorobutanol. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
No  U.  S,  patent  or  trademark. 


68       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Procainc-Nco-Synephrin  Hydrochloride  Hypodermic  Tablets:  Each  tab- 
let contains  prcK:aine  hydrochloride  0.02  Gm.,  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride 
0.0003  Gm.,  sodium  chloride  0.007  Gm..  and  potassium  sulfate  0.004 
Gm.  One  tablet  dissolved  in  1  cc.  of  distilled  water  yields  a  solution 
containing  procaine  hydrochloride  2  per  cent,  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride 
0.03  per  cent,  sodium  chloride  0.7  per  cent,  and  potassium  sulfate  0.4 
per  cent. 

Prepared  by   Frederick   Stearns   &  Co.,   Detroit. 

Ampul  Solution  Procaine  Hydrochloride  with  Epinephrine,  1  cc :  Each 
cubic  centimeter  contains  procaine  hydrochloride  U.  S.  P.  0.02  Gm. 
(J4  grain),  epinephrine  hydrochloride  0.04  mg.  (1/1,600  grain)  and 
sodium   bisulfite  0.45   mg.    (1/144  grain)    in  aqueous  solution. 

Prepared  by  the  U.  S.  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth.  Wis.  No 
U.    S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Novocain. — Novocain  Hydrochloride. — A  brand  of  procaine 
hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  under 
U.  S.  patent  812,554  (Feb.  13,  1906;  expired)  by  license  of  the  U.  S. 
Federal  Trade  Commission.     U.   S.   trademark  53,072. 

Ampules    Sterile    Crystals    Novocain    for    Spinal    Anesthesia,    50    mg. 

Ampules    Sterile    Crystals    Novocain    for    Spinal    Anesthesia,    100    mg. 

Ampules    Sterile    Crystals    Novocain    for    Spinal    Anesthesia,    120    mg. 

Ampules    Sterile    Crystals    Noz'ocain    for    Spinal    Anesthesia,    150    mg. 

Ampules    Sterile    Crystals    Novocain    for    Spinal    Anesthesia,    200    mg. 

Ampules  Sterile  Solution  Novocain  20  per  cent,  1.5  cc:  This  solution 
must  be  diluted  before  it  is  used. 

Ampules  Sterile  Solution  Novocain  20  per  cent,  5  cc:  This  solution 
must  be  diluted  before  it  is  used. 

Ampules  Sterile  Solution  Novocain  20  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin 
Synthetic  Bitartrate  1:9,000,  1.5  cc:  Novocain  0.3  Gm.  and  /-suprarenin 
synthetic  bitartrate  0.165  mg.  in  distilled  water  to  make  1.5  cc.  This 
solution   must  be   diluted  before  it  is  used. 

Ampules  Sterile  Solution  Novocain  20  per  cent  with  l-Suprareniii. 
Synthetic  Bitartrate  1:  9,000,  5  cc. :  Novocain  1  Gm.  and  /-suprarenin 
synthetic  bitartrate,  0.55  mg.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  5  cc.  This 
solution   must  be  diluted  before  it  is  used. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  1  per  cent,  2  cc:  Novocain  0.02  Gm., 
sodium  chloride  0.012  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  2  cc. 

Ampules  Solution  Novocain,  2  per  cent,  3  cc:  Novocain  0.06  Gm., 
sodium   chloride   0.012    Gm.,    in   distilled   water   to   make    3   cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution,  10  per  cent,  2  cc.  (For  Spinal  Anesthesia) : 
Novocain  0.2  Gm.  in  distilled  water  to  make  2  cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  1  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:50,000,  2  cc. :  Novocain  0.02  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate  0.04  mg.,  sodium  chloride  0.009  Gm.,  potassium  sulfate  0.008 
Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  2  cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  1  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:50,000,  6  cc:  Novocain  0.06  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate  0.12  mg.,  sodium  chloride  0.027  Gm.,  potassium  sulfate  0.024 
Gm.  in  distilled  water  to  make  6  cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  2  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:50,000,  1  cc:  Novocain  0.02  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate   0.02   mg.,   in  distilled  water  to  make   1   cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  2  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1 :  20,000,  1  cc. :  Novocain  0.02  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate   0.05    mg.,   in   distilled   water   to  make    1    cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  2  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:50,000,  3  cc:  Novocain  0.06  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate  0.06  mg.,  sodium  chloride  0.0135  Gm.,  potassium  sulfate  0,012 
Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  3  cc, 


ANESTHETICS  69 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  2  per  cent  zvith  l-Suprarcnin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:20,000,  3  cc:  Novocain  0.06  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate  0.15  mg.,  sodium  chloride  0.0135  Gm.,  potassium  sulfate  0.012 
Gm.,   in  distilled  water  to  make  3   cc. 

Ampules  Novocain  Solution  2  per  cent  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:20,000,  6  cc:  Novocain  0.12  Gm.,  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate  0.3  mg.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  6  cc. 

Ampules  Ephedrine-Novocain  Solution,  1  cc:  Novocain  1  per  cent  and 
ephedrine   hydrochloride — U.    S.    P.    5    per   cent. 

Ampules  Ephedrine-Novocain  Solution,  2  cc:  Novocain  1  per  cent  and 
ephedrine   hydrochloride — U.    S.    P.    5    per   cent. 

Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets,  0.2  Gm.:  Each  tablet  contains  novocain 
0.2  Gm.    (3   grains)   and  sodium   chloride,   0.06  Gm.    (1   grain). 

Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets,  0.05  Gm.:  Novocain  0.05  Gm.  (% 
grain). 

Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets,  0.02  Gm.  with  l-Suprarenin  Syncthetic 
Bitartrate,  0.0'2  mg.:  Novocain  0.02  Gm.  (J/^  grain)  and  I-suprarenin 
synthetic  bitartrate  0.00002   Gm.    (V^OOO  grain). 

Novocain  (0.125  Gm.)  and  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.125 
mg.)  Hypodermic  Tablets:  Novocain  0.125  Gm.  (2  grains)  and  1-supra- 
renin  synthetic  bitartrate  0.000125   Gm.    (i/^oo   grain). 

Novocain  (0.1  Gm.)  and  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.25  mg.) 
Hypodermic  Tablets:  Novocain  0.1  Gm.  (1/^  grains)  and  1-suprarenin 
synthetic  bitartrate   0.00025   Gm.    (V250  grain). 

Novocain  (0.05  Gm.)'and  l-Suprarmin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.083 
mg.)  Hypodermic  Tablets:  Novocain  0.05  Gm.  (%  grain)  and  1-supra- 
renin synthetic  bitartrate  0.000083  Gm.   (Vrso   grain). 

Novocain  (0.02  Gm.)  and  l-Siiprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.05  mg.) 
Hypodermic  Tablets:  Novocain  0.02  Gm.  (J<3  grain)  and  1-suprarenin 
synthetic  bitartrate  0.00005   Gm.   (1/1200  grain). 

Novocain  (0.06  Gm.)  and  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.06  mg.) 
Hypodermic  Tablets:  Each  contains  novocain  0.06  Gm.  (1  grain),  and 
/-suprarenin   synthetic  bitartrate  0.00006  Gm.    (Viooo  grain). 

Novocain  Solution  1  Per  Cent  Ampules:  Each  contains  novocaine,  0.06 
Gm.  (1  grain),  sodium  chloride,  0.036  Gm.  (^2  grain)  and  distilled  water, 
6  cc.    (90    minims). 

Novocain  (0.08  Gm.)  and  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.06  mg.) 
Hypodermic  Tablets:  Novocain  0.08  Gm.  and  /-suprarenin  synthetic 
bitartrate   0.06   mg. 

Sterile  Ampules  Novocain   Crystals   for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  300   mg. 

Sterile  Ampules   Novocain   Crystals  for  Local   Anesthesia,   500   mg. 

Tablets  Novocain,  1  grain. 

Tablets  Novocain  0.01  Gm.  with  l-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  0.2 
mg. 

Procaine-Abbott.  —  A  brand  of  procaine  hydrochloride- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.  U.  S.  patent 
812,554    (Feb.   13,    1906;   expired). 

U.  S.  patent  1,260,289    (March  26,   1918;   expired). 

Ampoules  Procaane  Hydrochloride  Solution  10%,  2cc.,  For  Spinal 
Anesthesia:  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  procaine  hydrochloride,  0.1 
Gm.,   dissolved   in   distilled   water. 

Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Solution  2%,  5  cc:  Each  cubic 
centimeter  contains  procaine  hydrochloride  0.02  Gm.,  dissolved  in  physio- 
logic  solution   of   sodium    chloride. 

Procaine-Epinephrine  Ampules  1  cc:  Procaine-Abbott  0.02  Gm.  (^ 
grain),  epinephrine  0.00004  Gm.    (Vieoo  grain)    in  Ringer's  solution   1   cc. 

Procaine-Epinephrine  Solution,  100  cc  Bottle:  Each  cubic  centimeter 
contains  procaine  hydrochloride,  2%,  epinephrine  0.04  mg.  (Vieoo  grain), 
sodium  bisulfite  0.001  Gm.,  in  isotonic  solution. 


70      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Procaine-Epinephrine  Hypodermic  Tablets:  Each  contains  procaine- 
Abbott  0.02  Gm.  (^  grain)  epinephrine  chloride  0.00002  Gm.  (i/^5oo 
grain)  and  sufficient  sodium  chloride  to  cause  the  resulting  solution  to 
be  approximately   isotonic  when  the  tablet  is  dissolved   in   1    cc.  of  water. 

Procaine-Epinephrine  Hypodermic  Tablets:  Procaine- Abbott  0.02  Gm. 
(Vs  grain),  epinephrine  0.00004  Gm.  (Visoo  grain)  and  sodium  chloride 
sufficient  so  that  when  the  tablet  is  dissolved  in  1  cc.  of  water,  the 
resulting   solution   is   approximately   isotonic. 

Procaine  Hydrochloride  Hypodermic  Tablets   Vs  grain. 

Procaine  Hydrochloride- Abbott  Tablets,  1.14  grains  (0.07  Gm.) :  One 
tablet  dissolved  in  1  fluidrachm  of  distilled  water  makes  a  2  per  cent 
solution   of   procaine   hydrochloride. 

Procaine  Hydrochloride-Abbott  Tablets,  2.28  grains  (0.15  Gm.) :  One 
tablet  dissolved  in  2  fluidrachms  of  distilled  water  makes  a  2  per  cent 
solution  of   procaine  hydrochloride. 

Procaine  Hydrochloride  Hypodermic   Tablets,   3  grains. 

Procaine  Hypodermic  Tablets,   iyi  grain. 

Sterile  Ampojdes  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Crystals  For  Spinal  .4ncs 
thesia,    50   mg. 

Sterile  Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Crystals  For  Spinal  Anes- 
thesia, 100  mg. 

Sterile  Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Crystals  For  Spinal  Anes- 
thesia, 120  mg. 

Sterile  Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Crystals  For  Spinal  Anes- 
thesia, 150   mg. 

Sterile  Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Crystals  For  Spinal  Anes- 
thesia, 200  mg. 

Procaine  Hydrochloride-Merck.  —  A  brand  of  procaine 
hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   ]Merck  8c   Co.,   Rahway.   N.  J. 

Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb.  —  A  brand  of  procaine 
hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Sterile  Ampules  Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb  (Crystals)  for  Spinal 
Anesthesia,   50  mg. 

Sterile  Ampules  Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb  (Crystals)  for  Spinal 
Anesthesia,  100  mg. 

Sterile  Ampules  Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb  (Crystals)  for  Spinal 
Anesthesia,  120  mg. 

Sterile  Ampules  Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb  (Crystals)  for  Spinal 
Anesthesia,  150  mg. 

Sterile  Ampules  Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb  (Crystals)  for  Spinal 
Anesthesia,   200  mg. 

PROCAINE  NITRATE.— Procainae  Nitras.— GH4NH. 
COO.C2H4.N(C2H5)2.HN03.  — l-^-aminobenzoyl-2-diethylamino- 
ethanol  mononitrate ;  /'-aminobenzoxydiethylaminoethane  mono- 
nitrate ;  /3-diethylaminoethyl-/'-amino  benzoate  mononitrate. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  procaine  hydro- 
chloride. It  may  be  prescribed  in  combination  with  silver  salts, 
with  which  it  forms  no  precipitate. 

Dosage. — Used  in  3  per  cent  solutions. 

Procaine  nitrate  occurs  in  small  colorless  and  odorless  crystals, 
soluble  in  water  and  alcohol.  The  aqueous  solution  is  neutral  in 
reaction.     The  melting-point   is  from   100  to  102  C. 


ANESTHETICS  71 

If  0.1  Gm.  of  procaine  nitrate  is  dissolved  in  1  cc.  of  concentrated 
sulfuric  acid  and  a  solution  of  ferrous  sulfate  carefully  floated 
above  it,  a  brown  zone  is  formed  at  the  surface  of  contact  of  the  two 
solutions.  One  part  of  procaine  nitrate  dissolved  in  10  parts  of  water 
and  acidified  with  nitric  acid  should  yield  no  precipitate  on  the  addition 
of  silver  nitrate  solution.  It  also  yields  the  general  tests  described 
under  procaine  hydrochloride. 

TUTOCAIN.  —  Tutocaine  Hydrochloride.  —  Butamin.  — 
/'-amino-benzoyldimethylaminomethyl-butanol  hydrochloride.  — 
7-dimethylamino-ct,  /S-dimethylproply-ZJ-aminobenzoate  hydro- 
chloride.— /)-aminobenzoyldimethylamino  1  :2  dimethyl-propanol 
hydrochloride.— (CH3)2N.CH2.CH(CH3)CH(CH3)(O.CO.C6H4. 
NH2)HC1. — The  base  of  tutocain  belongs  to  the  procaine  type, 
but  in  addition  possesses  two  asymmetric  carbon  atoms ;  it  is 
optically  inactive.  Tutocain  is  therefore  a  racemic  mixture  of 
the  hydrochlorides. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tutocain  is  used  by  subcutaneous  injec- 
tion, but  more  especially  for  surface  anesthesia.  When  cor- 
rectly used,  tutocain  rapidly  produces  complete  and  prolonged 
anesthesia  and  is  effective  even  in  relatively  low  concentration. 

It  is  reported  that  complete  anesthesia  of  the  cornea  occurs 
four  minutes  after  the  application  of  0.25  to  1  per  cent  solu- 
tions in  tutocain;  surface  anesthesia  in  the  nose,  throat  and 
eyes  is  reported  to  develop  more  slowly  than  with  cocaine,  but 
to  be  equally  intense.  When  tutocain  is  used  by  injection,  the 
effects  are  very  prompt. 

In  wheal  tests  on  human  beings,  a  1  per  cent  tutocain  solu- 
tion produced  an  anesthesia  that  lasted  for  from  fifteen  to 
twenty  minutes ;  a  0.125  per  cent  solution  containing  epinephrine 
gave  an  anesthesia  that  lasted  for  about  two  hours.  In  experi- 
ments made  for  the  Council,  tutocain  in  3  per  cent  solution  was 
found  to  be  about  four  times  as  toxic  as  procaine  hydrochloride 
by  rapid  intravenous  injection  into  the  cat.  A  fatality  has  been 
reported  following  the  injection  of  8  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solu- 
tion into  the  urethra.  On  the  other  hand,  experiments  and 
clinical  trials  have  been  reported  in  support  of  the  claim  that 
tutocain  is  relatively  safe  for  use  in  surface  anesthesia  and  by 
hypodermic  injection. 

Dosage. — For  application  to  the  eye,  nose  and  throat,  2  to 
5  per  cent  solutions  of  tutocain  are  used;  for  applications  to 
the  urethra,  0.5  to  1  per  cent  solutions,  increased  to  2  per  cent 
in  very  painful  procedures;  for  infiltration  anesthesia,  0.2  per 
cent  solutions  are  generally  used. 

Tutocain  solutions  may  be  sterilized  by  boiling  for  a  short 
time. 

Manufactured    by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    Inc.,    New    York.      U     S. 
patent  1,474,567  (Nov.  20,  1923;  expires  1940).     U.  S.  trademark  180,610. 
Tablets  Tutocain,  0.03  Gm.  with  Suprarenin  0.15  mg. 
Tablets  Tutocain,  0.03  Cm.  with  Suprarenin  0.06  mg. 
Tablets  Tutocain,  0.03  Gm. 

Tablets  Tutocain,  0.05  Gm.  with  Suprarenin  0.125  mg. 
Tablets  Tutocain,  0.1   Gm. 
Tablets  Tutocain,  0.05  Gm. 


72       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Tutocain  occurs  as  a  light,  ivory  colored  crystalline  powder.  It  is 
practically  odorless;  when  applied  on  the  tongue,  it  possesses  a  faintly 
bitter  taste  followed  by  a  sense  of  numbness;  it  is  permanent  in  the  air. 
It  is  easily  soluble  in  water  (about  1  in  4),  and  difficultly  soluble  in 
alcohol  (1  in  50).  Its  aqueous  solution  (1  in  10)  is  neutral  to  litmus 
paper.  It  is  optically  inactive.  It  melts  at  from  212  to  215  C.  From 
aqueous  solutions,  alkali  hydroxides  and  carbonates  precipitate  the  free 
base  as  a  light  j^ellowish  oil  which  solidifies  after  some  time  and  melts 
at  not  less  than  81   C. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  2  drops  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  and  2  drops  of  sodium  nitrite  solution  (10  per  cent) 
and  mix  with  a  solution  of  0.2  Gm.  of  betanaphthol  in  10  cc.  of 
sodium  hydroxide  solution  (10  per  cent):  a  scarlet  red  precipitate  is 
formed  (distinction  from  phenacaine,  which  gives  a  white  precipitate). 
Dissolve  1  Gm.  in  10  cc.  of  water:  to  separate  portions  of  2  cc.  each 
the  solutions  yield  a  white  precipitate  with  1  cc.  of  potassium  mercuric 
iodide  solution;  a  brown  precipitate  with  1  cc.  of  iodine  solution;  a 
brown  precipitate  with  1  cc.  of  gold  chloride  solution  {distinction  from 
apothesine,  which  gives  a  lemon  yellow  precipitate) ;  a  yellow  precipi- 
tate with  1  cc.  of  picric  acid  solution;  a  white  curdy  precipitate  with 
1  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution.  Dissolve 
0.1  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  2  drops  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and 
1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution:  no  precipitate  forms  (distinction  from 
butyn).  To  a  solution  of  about  0.1  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  3  drops 
of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  and  mix  with  5  drops  of  potassium  perman- 
ganate solution :  the  violet  color  of  the  latter  disappears  immediately 
(distinction  from  cocaine).  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid:  the  solution  is  colorless  (organic  impurities).  Dissolve  0.1  Gm. 
in  10  cc.  of  water  and  saturate  with  hydrogen  sulfide:  no  coloration  or 
precipitation  occurs   (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  accurately  weighed  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.: 
the  loss  does  not  exceed  1  per  cent.  Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  accu- 
rately weighed:   there  is  not  more  than  0.2  per  cent  residue. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  previously  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100  C., 
weigh  accurately,  add  a  few  pieces  of  ice  and  15  cc.  of  hydrochloric 
acid  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  nitrite  solution  using  starch 
iodide  paper  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  sodium  nitrite 
consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  99  per  cent  nor  more  than 
101   per  cent. 

Anesthetics,  Local,  Slightly  Soluble 

The  slight  solubiHty  of  these  anesthetics  renders  them  unsuit- 
able for  injection,  but  the  slow  absorption  renders  them  safer, 
especially  for  ulcers,  wounds,  and  mucous  surfaces.  The  anes- 
thesia which  they  induce  is  usually  not  so  complete  as  that 
induced  by  the  soluble  local  anesthetics ;  but  it  is  more  lasting. 
As  a  group  they  are  practically  nonirritant  and  nontoxic. 
Ethyl  aminobenzoate  (benzocaine,  anesthesin)  and  orthoform 
are  about  equally  effective  through  intact  mucous  membranes ; 
butesin  is  claimed  to  be  more  effective  than  ethyl  aminobenzoate. 

They  are  used  for  painful  wounds,  ulcers,  etc.,  of  the  skin 
and  accessible  mucous  membranes ;  for  instance,  after  dental 
operations. 

ETHYL  AMINOBENZOATE.  —  Anesthesin.  —  Benzo- 
caine.— For  standards  set  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under 
Aethylis  Aminobenzoas. 

Actions  mid  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Anesthetics,  Local, 
Slightly  Soluble. 


ANESTHETICS  7?> 

Dosage. — Internally,  from  0.3  to  0.5  Gm.  (5  to  8  grains). 
Externally,  it  is  applied  as  a  dusting  powder,  either  pure  or 
diluted.  It  may  be  applied  in  ointment  or  in  the  form  of 
suppositories. 

Anaesthesine. — A  brand  of  ethyl  aminobenzoate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  No 
U.   S.  patent.     U.  S.  trademark  55,744   (Anasthesin). 

Anesthesin-Abbott.  —  A  brand  of  ethyl  aminobenzoate- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.  S.  trademark  55,744   (Anasthesin). 

BUTESIN.  —  iz-butyl-Z'-aminobenzoate.  —  CcHiNHo.COO 
(C4H9). — ^The  normal  butyl  ester  of  4-aminobenzoic  acid, 
C6H4NH0.COOH. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Anesthetics,  Local, 
Slightly  Soluble.  The  actions  and  uses  of  butesin  are  similar 
to  those  of  ethyl  aminobenzoate-U.  S.  P.,  but  it  is  claimed  to 
be  more  effective. 

Dosage. — Butesin  is  used  as  a  dusting  powder,  either  pure  or 
diluted.  It  may  be  used  in  the  form  of  troches,  ointment,  or 
suppositories  or  dissolved  in  a  fatty  oil.  Its  oil  solutions  may 
be  sterilized  by  heat. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  U.  S. 
patent  1,440,652   (Jan.  2,  1923;  expires  1940).     U.  S.  trademark  175,095. 

Butesin  is  a  white,  crystalline  powder,  odorless  and  tasteless.  It  is 
almost  insoluble  in  water  (about  1  in  7,000),  soluble  in  dilute  acids, 
alcohol,  chloroform,  ether  and  benzene  and  also  soluble  in  fatty  oils. 
Butesin  is  slowly  hydrolyzed  when  boiled  with  water.  It  melts  at  from 
56  to  57  C.  and  boils  at  147  C.  under  2  mm.  pressure.  Butesin  yields 
colorless  solutions  in  alcohol  and  ether.  The  addition  of  silver  nitrate 
solution  to  its  alcoholic  solution  acidified  with  nitric  acid  produces  no 
precipitate.  A  solution  of  butesin  in  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  is  not 
affected  by   saturation   with   hydrogen  sulfide. 

Add  a  few  drops  of  sodium  nitrite  solution  (1  in  10)  to  2  cc.  of  a 
solution  of  butesin  (1  in  100)  in  very  dilute  hydrochloric  acid  and 
mix  with  0.2  Gm.  of  betanaphthol  in  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion (10  per  cent):  a  scarlet  red  precipitate  is  given  at  once.  To 
about  1  cc.  of  a  solution  of  butesin  (1  in  100)  in  very  dilute  hydro- 
chloric acid,  add  a  few  drops  of  iodine  solution,  shake  the  mixture 
and  allow  to  stand  for  10  minutes  with  occasional  agitation:  a  dark 
brown  precipitate  is  formed  which  changes  into  large,  reddish-brown 
prisms  (distinction  from  ethyl  aminobenzoate  which  gives  lustrous 
scales). 

BUTESIN  PICRATE.  —  Dinormalbutyl-/j-aminobenzoate- 
trinitrophenol.  (C6H4NH2.COO.C4H9)2.C6H2(N02)30H.  —  A 
compound  consisting  of  one  molecule  of  trinitrophenol  (picric 
acid)  and  two  molecules  of  the  normal  butyl  ester  of  4-amino- 
benzoic acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Butesin  picrate  combines  the  anesthetic 
action  of  butesin  with  the  antiseptic  properties  of  trinitro- 
phenol (picric  acid).  An  aqueous  solution  of  1  in  2,000  pro- 
duces immediate  and  complete  anesthesia  of  the  eye  which  lasts 
from  ten  to  twenty  minutes.  Butesin  picrate  is  used  in  the 
treatment  of  burns,  ulcers  and  other  denuded  painful  lesions 
of  the  skin. 


74       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — For  use,  a  1  per  cent  butesin  picrate  ointment  is 
proposed. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.  U.  S.  patent 
1,596,259    (Aug.    17,    1926;   expires   1943).     U.   S.    trademark  175,095. 

Butesin  Picrate  Ointment  with  Metaphen:  Butesin  picrate  1  per  cent, 
and  metaphen  1:5,000,  incorporated  in  an  ointment  base  composed  of  white 
wax,   paraffin,   petrolatum,   sodium  borate  and  water,  99   per  cent. 

Ophthalmic  Ointment  Butesin  Picrate  1%  and  Butesin  1% :  Butesin 
picrate,  1  per  cent;  butesin,  1  per  cent  and  soft  petrolatum,  98  per  cent. 
Butesin  picrate  is  a  yellow,  amorphous  powder;  odorless;  taste  slightly 
bitter.  One  part  of  butesin  picrate  is  soluble  in  2,000  parts  of  water; 
also  soluble  in  100  parts  of  cottonseed  oil;  soluble  in  alcohol,  chloroform, 
ether  and  benzene.     It  melts  at  109  to  110  C. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  butesin  picrate  is  greenish  yellow;  the 
color  is  intensified  by  the  addition  of  alkali  and  is  decreased  by  acid. 
A  saturated,  aqueous  solution  of  butesin  picrate  is  not  affected  by  the 
addition  of  mercuric  potassium  iodide  solution,  of  silver  nitrate  solution 
or  of  hydrogen  sulfide  solution.  A  few  drops  of  sodium  nitrate  solu- 
tion added  to  the  acidulated  solution  of  butesin  picrate  followed  by 
a  few  drops  of  a  slightly  alkaline  solution  of  betanaphthol  produces  a 
salmon-colored  precipitate  which  quickly  darkens.  A  purplish-red  color 
is  produced  if  a  1  per  cent  potassium  cyanide  solution  be  added  to 
an  aqueous   solution  of    butesin   picrate. 

Incinerate  0.5  Gm.  of  butesin  picrate,  accurately  weighed:  the  ash 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent. 

ORTHOFORM.  —  Orthoform-New.  —  Methyl  m-amino-/>- 
oxybenzoate.  —  CeHa.NH^.OH.CO.O.CCHa),  3:4:1.  —  The 
m-amino-/>-oxybenzoic  acid  ester  of  methyl  alcohol. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  Orthoform  is  a  local  anesthetic,  but 
penetrates  the  tissues  very  slowly  on  account  of  its  insolubility. 
It  has  no  action  on  the  unbroken  skin.  It  is  practically  non- 
toxic in  the  usual  doses. 

It  has  been  applied  locally  as  an  analgesic  to  wounds  of  every 
description.  It  has  been  used  in  dentistry  and  in  nasal  catarrh, 
hay  fever,  etc. 

Dosage. — Internally,  from  0.5  to  1  Gm.  (8  to  15  grains)  in 
emulsion;  locally,  in  substance  as  a  dusting-powder  or  mixed 
with  milk  sugar  for  insufflation,  dissolved  in  ether  and  mixed 
with  oil  for  pencilings,  or  as  an  ointment  with  wool  fat,  etc. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  610,348  (Sept.  6,  1898;  expired),  and  625,158  (May  16,  1899; 
expired). 

Orthoform  occurs  in  a  fine,  white,  crystalline  powder,  neutral  in 
reaction,  melting  at  from  141  to  143  C,  odorless  and  tasteless.  It  is 
almost  insoluble  in  water,  freely  soluble  in  alcohol  and  soluble  in  ether. 
It  is  decomposed,  by  boiling  with  water  or  by  warming  with  alkalis  or 
their  carbonates,  into  methyl  alcohol  and  paroxybenzoic  acid  or  the 
alkali  salt  of  it.  When  crystallized  from  chloroform  it  sometimes  as- 
sumes the  form  of  white  crystals,  melting  at  from  110  to  111  C.  and 
returning  on  melting  to  the  ordinary  form. 

The  filtrate  obtained  after  shaking  a  small  quantity  of  the  ortho- 
form  with  water  produces  a  transient  color  with  ferric  chloride  and 
should  not  give  a  reaction  with  silver  nitrate.  A  solution  of  0.1  Gm.  of 
orthoform  dissolved  in  2  cc.  of  water  by  the  aid  of  hydrochloric  acid 
is  colored  yellowish  red  on  the  addition  of  sodium  nitrite  and  then 
deposits  a  yellow   precipitate,  deepening  to  red  on    exposure  to  the  air. 


ANTIMONY     COMPOUNDS  75 

ANTIMONY     COMPOUNDS 

ANTIMONY  THIOGLYCOLLAMIDE.— The  triamide 
of  antimony  thioglycollic  acid  Sb(S.CH2CO.NH2)3.  It  contains 
not  less  than  30  per  cent  of  antimony. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Antimony  thioglycollamide  and  antimony 
sodium  thioglycollate  are  used  in  the  treatment  of  granuloma 
inguinale,  and  are  proposed  for  use  in  the  treatment  of  lympho- 
pathia  inguinale,  kala  azar  and  filariasis.  These  substances  have 
been  found  to  be  less  toxic  and  less  irritating  than  antimony  and 
potassium  tartrate.  The  thioglycollamide  has  proved  to  be 
somewhat  more  toxic  than  the  thioglycollate.  The  former  is 
also  less  soluble  but  it  has  the  advantage  of  being  more  stable. 
The  drugs  are  used  intramuscularly  or  intravenously. 

Dosage.  —  The  usual  intramuscular  or  intravenous  dose 
employed  by  Randall  is  0.08  Gm.,  dissolved  in  20  cc.  of  sterile 
water  every  second  day  until  from  15  to  25  injections  have 
been  given.  He  recommends  that  at  least  12  injections  be 
given  after  the  first  healing  has  taken  place  to  insure  permanent 
cure.  Its  solutions  are  incompatible  with  solutions  of  the  fixed 
alkalis. 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  and  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Ampules  Solution   Antimony   Thioglycollamide,   0.4  per  cent,   10   cc. 
Ampules  Solution  Antimony  Thioglycollamide,   0.4  per  cent,  20  cc. 

Antimony  thioglycollamide  is  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder. 
It  is  soluble  in  about  200  parts  of  water,  somewhat  soluble  in  alcohol 
and  insoluble  in  ether.     It  melts  at  about   139   C.    (uncorrected). 

Dissolve  a  few  crystals  of  antimony  thioglycollamide  in  5  cc.  of 
water  and  add  a  drop  of  ferric  chloride  solution;  a  transient  blue  color 
appears.  Boil  about  0.1  Gm.  of  antimony  thioglycollamide  with  5  cc. 
of  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  ammonia  is  evolved.  Dissolve  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  antimony  thioglycollamide  in  25  cc.  of  warm  water,  add  a 
few  drops  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  pass  in  hydrogen  sulfide: 
an    orange  precipitate  is  produced. 

Dissolve  0.2  Gm.  of  antimony  thioglycollamide  in  5  cc.  of  hydro- 
chloric acid,  add  10  cc.  of  freshly  prepared  stannous  chloride  solution 
and  allow  to  stand  30  minutes:  no  brownish  tint  or  precipitate  is  visible 
if  viewed  from  above  over  a  white  surface  (arsenic).  A  blank  test 
should  be  carried  out,  using  the  same  quantities  of  reagents. 

Weigh  accurately  from  0.2  to  0.3  Gm.  of  antimony  thioglycollamide, 
dissolve  it  in  about  100  cc.  of  warm  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid,  pass  in  hydrogen  sulfide  until  precipitation  is  complete 
and  allow  to  stand  30  minutes.  Collect  the  antimony  sulfide  in  a 
weighed  Gooch  crucible,  wash  it  successively  with  water  containing 
hydrogen  sulfide,  alcohol,  ether,  carbon  disulfide,  alcohol  and  ether, 
dry  the  residue  at  110  C.  and  weigh.  The  antimony  sulfide  obtained 
corresponds  to  not  less  than  30   per  cent  of  antimony. 

ANTIMONY    SODIUM    THIOGLYCOLLATE.— The 

compound  formed  by  dissolving  antimony  trioxide  in  a  solution 
of  a  mixture  of  sodium  thioglycollate  and  thioglycollic  acid. 

/  S.CH.CGONa 
St,/                                It  contains  not  less  than  Z/  per  cent 
I      \  S.CH2COO  ,  of  antimony. 


Id      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  for  antimony  thioglycolla- 
mide.  It  is  more  soluble  than  antimony  thioglycollamide,  and 
in  higher  dosages  it  appears  to  be  less  toxic. 

Dosage. — From  0.05  to  0.1  Gm.  (1  to  2  grains)  dissolved 
in  10  to  20  cc.  of  sterile  water  every  third  or  fourth  day  until 
from  15  to  25  injections  have  been  given.  Its  solutions  are 
incompatible  with  solutions  of  the  fixed  alkalis. 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  and  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent   or   trademark. 

Ampules  Solution  Antimony  Sodium  Thiogly  collate,  0.5  per  cent, 
10  cc. 

Ampules    Solution  Antimony  Sodium  Thioglycollate,  0.5  per  cent,  20  cc. 

Antimony  sodium  thioglycollate  is  a  white  or  faintly  pinkish  powder; 
odorless  or  having  a  faint  odor  of  mercaptan;  very  soluble  in  water; 
insoluble  in  alcohol. 

Add  a  drop  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  3  cc.  of  a  dilute  solution 
of  antimony  sodium  thioglycollate  (1  in  100)  and  add  two  drops  of  1  per 
cent  ferric  chloride  solution:  a  transient  blue  color  results.  Add  a 
drop  of  1  per  cent  ammonia  water  to  this  mixture  and  shake:  a 
Burgundy  red  color  results.  Add  a  few  drops  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  to  a  dilute  solution  of  antimony  sodium  thioglycollate  (1  in 
100):  a  white  precipitate  is  produced.  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of 
antimony  sodium  thioglycollate  in  2  cc.  of  water,  add  a  few  drops  of 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  pass  in  hydrogen  sulfide:  an  orange-colored 
precipitate  is   produced. 

Weigh  accurately  from  0.2  to  0.3  Gm.  of  antimony  sodium  thiogly- 
collate, dissolve  it  in  about  100  cc.  of  warm  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid,  pass  in  hydrogen  sulfide  until  precipitation  is  com- 
plete and  allow  to  stand  30  minutes.  Collect  the  antimony  sulfide^  in 
a  weighed  Gooch  crucible,  wash  it  successively  with  water  containing 
hydrogen  sulfide,  alcohol,  ether,  carbon  disulfide,  alcohol  and  ether, 
dry  the  residue  at  110  C.  and  weigh.  The  antimony  sulfide  corres- 
ponds to  not  less  than  2,7  per  cent  of  antimony. 


ARBUTIN.— Arbutinum.— CioHkOt.+^H^O.-— Aglucoside 
occurring  in  the  leaves  of  Arctostaphylos  uva-ursi,  Vaccinium 
vitis-idaea  and  many  other  genera  of  the  family  Ericaceae. 

Actions  'and  Uses. — Arbutin  probably  owes  its  effect,  at  least 
in  part,  to  the  antiseptic  action  of  hydroquinone,  formed  by  its 
decomposition  in  the  urinary  tract.  It  has  been  used  as  a 
urinary  antiseptic  and  diuretic. 

Dosage. — From  0.2  to  0.5  Gm.  (3  to  8  grains)  three  or  four 
times  a  day. 

Arbutin  occurs  in  long,  glistening,  colorless  needles,  or  as  a  fine, 
white  crystalline,  odorless  powder  having  a  bitter  taste.  It  is  solu- 
ble in  8  parts  of  water  and  16  parts  of  alcohol;  very  soluble  in  hot 
water  and  hot  alcohol;  insoluble  in  chloroform,  ether  and  carbon 
disulfide.  _  Its  aqueous  solution  is  neutral  to  litmus  paper  and  is 
not  precipitated  by  solutions  of  the  metallic  salts  or  by  solutions  of 
tannin.  Its  aqueous  solution  is  colored  blue  by  ferric  chloride  test 
solution.  By  boiling  with  diluted  sulfuric  acid  or  by  treatment  with 
emulsion,  arbutin  is  converted  into  glucose  and  hydroquinone. 

When  heated  to  100  C.  arbutin  loses  its  water  of  hydration.  At 
195  C.  the  anhydrous  glucoside  melts.  It  should  leave  no  residue  on 
ignition.  An  aqueous  solution  of  arbutin  (1  in  20)  should  not  be 
affected  by  hydrogen  sulfide  (lead). 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  11 

Arbutin-Abbott. — A  brand  of  arbutin-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.     No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark, 

Arbutin-Merck. — A  brand  of  arbutin-N,  N,  R. 

Merck   &    Co.,    Inc.,    Rahway,   N,   J.,   distributor.      No   U.    S.   patent   or 
trademark. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS 

In  some  of  the  compounds  listed  in  this  chapter,  the  arsenic 
is  pentavalent;  in  others  it  is  trivalent.  A  typical  arsenic 
reaction  results  only  from  the  trivalent  arsenic,  and  in  order 
to  secure  this  action  from  those  compounds  containing  penta- 
valent arsenic,  their  arsenic  must  be  reduced  to  the  trivalent 
form ;  this  is  done  by  the  body,  but  the  rate  at  which  the 
reduction  occurs  varies  greatly  with  the  different  compounds. 
In  some  cases,  the  desirable,  as  well  as  the  undesirable,  effects 
produced  by  these  compounds  are  due  to  the  arsenic  which  is 
slowly  rendered  active ;  in  others  the  therapeutic  effects  may 
be  due,  at  least  in  part,  to  the  unaltered  molecules.  The  dis- 
eases in  which  arsenic  therapy  has  proved  useful  are  particu- 
larly those  caused  by  protozoa.  Inorganic  arsenic  will  kill 
protozoa,  but  it  cannot  be  administered  so  as  to  reach  the 
protozoa  in  fatal  quantity.  In  the  body,  the  organic  compounds 
are  less  toxic  to  mammals  and  more  toxic  to  protozoan  para- 
sites. In  this  way  they  become  available  for  combating  trypano- 
somiasis, treponematosis,  spirillosis  and  other  protozoan  infec- 
tions. 

Among  the  advantages  claimed  for,  or  known  to  be  possessed 
by,  these  compounds,  the  following  may  be  mentioned:  In 
those  known  to  produce  their  effects  through  the  liberation  of 
arsenic,  the  arsenic  is  liberated  slowly ;  some  remain  in  the 
circulating  blood  for  a  much  longer  period  than  do  inorganic 
arsenic  compounds  and  thus  remain  longer  in  contact  with 
parasites  which  it  is  desired  to  kill;  some  are  specifically  etio- 
tropic,  that  is,  they  have  a  much  greater  affinity  for  the  para- 
sites causing  the  disease  than  they  have  for  the  tissues  of  the 
host. 

Arsphenamine  and  analogous  preparations  of  arsenic  used 
intravenously  come  under  the  federal  law  covering  serums, 
viruses,  toxins  and  analogous  products,  and  are  subject  to  the 
same  control. 

COMPOUNDS     CONTAINING     TRIVALENT     ARSENIC 

According  to  Ehrlich's  view,  only  trivalent  arsenic  is 
markedly  toxic  to  spirochetes,  trypanosomes,  etc, ;  hence  he 
introduced  a  number  of  such  compounds.  Of  these  only  the 
compounds  in  which  the  toxicity  is  reduced  or  modified  by 
the  introduction  into  the  molecules  of  certain  groups,  are  listed 


78      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

below.  These  compounds  have,  according  to  Ehrlich,  a  special 
affinity  for  certain  organisms,  particularly  spirochetes,  while 
their  toxicity  for  the  higher  animals  is  comparatively  low.  The 
exact  fields  of  usefulness  of  these  compounds  and  their  limita- 
tions, and  also  the  best  methods  of  administering  them,  are 
still  under  discussion. 

The  toxic  actions  of  arsphenamine  are  ascribed  to  the  arsenic 
component  in  some  cases.  In  other  cases  the  decomposition  of 
the  solution  has  been  assigned  as  a  cause.  Undoubtedly  some 
reactions  are  due  to  idiosyncrasies  on  the  part  of  the  patient. 
However,  there  is  seen  a  large  group  of  these  cases  which 
must  be  explained  otherwise.  Certainly,  improper  technique  in 
the  preparation  of  the  drug,  as  well  as  the  improper  (for 
example,  too  rapid)  administration  may  add  to  the  inherent 
toxicity.  The  administrator  should  always  observe  the  direc- 
tions supplied  by  the  manufacturers  to  the  letter.  If  this  be 
done  and  there  are  still  reactions,  then  only  can  we  look  else- 
where for  the  causation. 

The  water  used  should  be,  if  possible,  freshly  distilled  and 
freshly  sterilized.  All  chemicals  should  be  pure.  Any  rubber 
tubing  employed  for  the  first  time  should  be  soaked  over  night 
in  5  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  then  boiled  in  distilled 
water  and  thoroughly  washed  with  the  same.  Some  reactions 
are  undoubtedly  due  to  administration  of  the  drug  to  a  patient 
on  a  full  stomach  or  to  one  not  properly  prepared  by  previous 
catharsis.  It  is  always  well  to  start  the  use  of  arsenical  with 
a  small  dose — because  of  possible  idiosyncrasies. 

One  should  not  be  too  much  alarmed  in  a  fresh  case  of 
syphilis  by  the  reaction  seen  after  the  first  injection  of  the 
arsphenamines — the  Herxheimer  reaction.  It  is  that  phenome- 
non of  the  reaction  of  the  disease  to  the  arsphenamine  in  which 
there  is  a  rise  of  temperature,  headache,  possible  nausea,  malaise, 
and  marked  accentuation  of  the  cutaneous  and  mucous  mem- 
brane symptoms.  One  should  be  concerned,  however,  if  with 
succeeding  injections  there  are  promptly  recurring  reactions  in 
the  form  of  gastritis,  itching  of  the  skin,  urticaria,  fixed  areas 
of  dermatitis  that  flare  up  with  each  new  injection,  more  or 
less  generalized  dermatitis  or  jaundice.  In  addition,  there  are 
sometimes  noted  generalized  exfoliative  dermatitis,  purpura 
hemorrhagica,  aplastic  anemias,  acute  yellow  atrophy  and 
encephalitis. 

The  best  treatment  of  these  conditions  is  prophylaxis,  and 
these  drugs  should  never  be  readministered  without  inquiry  of 
the  patient  and  examination  of  the  skin  as  to  possible  pruritus, 
jaundice,  cutaneous  eruptions,  or  other  symptoms.  Moreover, 
a  urine  examination  should  always  be  a  preliminary.  Sodium 
thiosulfate  has  been  employed  to  combat  these  manifestations. 
While  its  greatest  usefulness  appears  to  be  in  its  early  employ- 
ment in  the  case  of  jaundice  and  exfoliative  dermatitis,  it  may 
also  have  a  definite  value  in  clearing  up  other  early  reactions. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  79 

Evidence  of  its  value  in  combating  purpura  hemorrhagica  and 
encephaHtis  is  not  so  clear,  but  it  is  sufficient  to  indicate  its  trial. 
Arsphenamines  are  contraindicated  or  should  be  used  with 
special  caution  in  diseases  of  the  eye  of  a  nonsyphilitic  char- 
acter, in  severe  affections  of  the  heart  and  blood  vessels,  the 
lungs  and  the  kidneys  and  in  advanced  degenerative  processes  in 
the  central  nervous  system.  They  should  also  be  used  with 
caution  in  infants.  Arsphenamine  should  not  be  used  in  begin- 
ning luetic  optic  neuritis  until  after  some  preliminary  antiluetic 
therapy  with  either  bismuth  or  mercury  salts. 

COMPOUNDS     CONTAINING     PENTAVALENT     ARSENIC 

CH3  CfiN4Nno 

O  =  As— CH3  O  =  As— OH 
\  \ 

ONa  ONa 

Sodium    cacodylate  Sodium    arsanilate 

C6H4NHCH2CONH2 
O  =  As— OH 

ONa  . 

Tryparsamide 

In  one  of  the  compounds  listed  above,  the  arsenic  is  iti  com- 
bination with  an  alkyl  group  and  is  thus  analogous  to  the 
cacodylates ;  in  the  others  the  arsenic  is  in  combination  with 
aniline,  and  is  thus  analogous  to  arsanilic  acid. 

Arsanilic  acid  is  derived  from  arsenic  acid,  AsO.(OH)3  by 
replacing  one  hydroxyl  by  aniline  (phenylamine)  CeHsNHs; 
related  compounds  are  made  by  substituting  derivatives  of 
aniline. 

The  compounds  containing  pentavalent  arsenic  are  compara- 
tively nontoxic  when  introduced  into  the  animal  system  until 
changes  take  place  that  liberate  the  arsenic.  When  they  are 
slowly  decomposed,  they  produce  favorable  effects.  If  the 
reduction  takes  place  with  greater  rapidity,  they  may  produce 
ordinary  arsenic  poisoning. 

Sodium  cacodylate  is  excreted  partly  unchanged  and  partly 
as  cacodylic  oxide,  which  gives  a  foul  odor  to  the  breath,  per- 
spiration, etc.  Further  changes  yield  products  containing  inor- 
'  ganic,  trivalent  arsenic,  by  which  the  therapeutic  effects  are 
produced. 

Sodium  arsanilate  has  been  used  chiefly  against  trypanosomes. 
This  salt  has  no  direct  action  on  these  parasites,  but  owes  its 
effects  to  the  products  resulting  from  its  reduction  in  the  sys- 
tem. These  products  appear  to  be  organic  compounds  contain- 
ing the  arsenic  in  the  trivalent  form.  Artificial  reduction 
products,  which  vary  according  to  conditions,  are  much  more 
active  than  the  arsanilate. 


80       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Sodium  arsanilate  has  also  been  recommended  for  the  con- 
ditions which  are  influenced  favorably  by  other  forms  of  arsenic, 
but  this  salt  seems  to  have  no  advantages  over  the  official 
preparations  of  arsenic. 

In  poisonous  doses  or  when  excessive  reduction  occurs,  sodium 
arsanilate  may  produce  the  ordinary  toxic  effects  of  arsenic. 
It  acts  with  especial  violence  on  the  optic  nerve,  producing 
optic  atrophy,  frequently  resulting  in  permanent  blindness.  This 
may  occur  unfortunately  even  with  therapeutic  doses. 

Tryparsamide  is  a  powerful  trypanocide  and  only  slightly 
treponemacidal.  The  drug,  according  to  studies  of  Voegtlin 
and  co-workers,  when  injected  intravenously  results  in  pro- 
nounced penetration  of  the  nervous  system  tissue.  This  may 
explain  its  great  value  in  the  treatment  of  resistant  syphilis  of 
the  central  nervous  system.  It  seems  to  be  particularly  valuable 
following  malaria  therapy.  The  suggestion  has  been  made  by 
Young  and  Loevenhart  that  the  effect  on  the  optic  nerve  fre- 
quently seen  after  tryparsamide  is  due  to  the  presence  of  the 
amino  group  in  the  para  position  to  the  arsenic  (Stokes). 
Because  of  this  fact  the  physician  should  exercise  great  caution 
in  the  use  of  this  drug. 

Compounds  Containing  Trivalent  Arsenic 

ARSPHENAMINE.  —  Diaminodihydroxyarsenobenzene 
Hydrochloride. — "Arsphenamine  or  3,3'  diamino  4,4'  dihydroxy- 
arsenobenzene  dihydrochloride,  contains  not  less  than  30  per 
cent  of  arsenic  (As),  and  complies  with  the  requirements  of 
the  National  Institute  of  Health,  United  States  Public  Health 
Service."-?7.  6^.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Arsphen- 
amina. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Arsphenamine  is  useful  as  a  specific 
remedy  for  syphilis  in  all  stages.  According  to  available  data, 
in  incipient  tabes,  early  paralysis,  epilepsy  and  cerebrospinal 
syphilis  the  drug  can  be  employed  with  the  prospect  of  most 
benefit  in  those  cases  in  which  its  use  is  begun  early. 

The  drug  is  used  in  the  spirillum  affections,  such  as  relapsing 
fever  and  frambesia ;  it  is  also  said  to  be  an  available  substitute 
for  arsenic  in  the  treatment  of  diseases  of  the  skin  and  nerves 
and  in  the  anemias. 

The  remedy  is  contraindicated  in  severe  disturbances  of  the 
circulatory  organs,  advanced  degenerations  of  the  central  ner- 
vous system  and  cachexias,  unless  these  are  a  direct  result  of 
syphilis ;  it  is  also  contraindicated  in  patients  who  have  pro- 
nounced  idiosyncrasy  against  arsenic. 

_  It  has  been  employed  successfully  in  various  types  of  syphi- 
litic diseases  of  the  eyes.  As  a  rule  in  such  cases  it  is  well 
to  give  a  preliminary  course  of  mercury  or  bismuth  injections 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  81 

in  order  to  obviate  the  danger  of  a  Herxheimer  reaction. 
Repeated  injections  should  be  given.  It  may  be  used  up  to 
0.01  Gm.  per  kilogram  of  body  weight,  but  it  is  better  to  keep 
under  this  dose. 

Dosage. — Usually  from  0.2  to  0.4  Gm.  (3  to  6  grains)  ; 
though  0.6  Gm.  (9  grains)  may  be  given,  the  smaller  doses  are 
more  extensively  used. 

For  children  from  0.1  to  0.2  (1^  to  3  grains).  In  infants 
doses  of  from  0.02  to  0.1  Gm.  (^^  to  1^  grains)  may  be  used. 
The  dose  should  be  varied  according  to  the  strength  and  con- 
dition of  the  patient.  The  intravenous  method  is  preferable  and 
is  to  be  recommended. 

For  intravenous  injection  one  should  proceed  thus: 

The  ampule  containing  the  drug  is  immersed  in  alcohol,  in 
order  to  be  sure  that  a  cracked  tube  is  not  being  used ;  then  the 
tube  is  carefully  wiped  off,  the  neck  filed  across  and  broken  ofif, 
and  the  contents  sprinkled  on  sterile  distilled  water  (10  cc.  for 
each  0.1  gram  of  the  drug  used),  contained  in  a  sterile  Erlen- 
meyer  flask.  The  drug  is  allowed  to  dissolve  with  little  or  no 
agitation.  Normal  sodium  hydroxide  is  then  added  to  the  solu- 
tion, using  0.85  cc.  to  every  0.1  Gm.  of  the  drug.  Thus  0.6  Gm. 
of  the  drug  would  require  5.1  cc.  of  normal  alkali.  A  precipitate 
of  the  base  is  first  formed,  which,  after  the  contents  are  care- 
fully agitated,  is  again  brought  into  solution,  the  fluid  being 
strongly  alkaline.  Filter  the  alkalinized  solution  through  sterile 
gauze,  4  ply,  and  dilute  the  filtrate  with  sterile  distilled  water 
to  make  25  cc.  for  each  0.1  Gm.  of  the  drug.  It  should  stand 
30  minutes  before  using.  At  least  one  minute  should  be  allowed 
for  each  25  cc.  of  the  solution  to  flow  into  the  vein,  using  the 
gravity  method.  The  directions  accompanying  the  drug  as  to 
temperature  of  the  water,  etc.,  should  be  followed.  The  con- 
tents of  a  tube  should  be  used  at  once  after  opening,  and  under 
no  circumstances  should  the  contents  of  a  tube  damaged  in 
transportation  or  any  remnants  of  the  powder  from  previously 
opened  tubes  be  used.  In  all  cases  the  skin  should  be  disinfected 
with  tincture  of  iodine  or  with  alcohol. 

In  the  treatment  of  syphilis  of  the  central  nervous  system, 
the  Swift-Ellis  method  of  intraspinal  treatment  is  utilized  at 
times.  This  is  a  very  delicate  procedure,  and  should  be  employed 
only  by  physicians  proficient  in  its  use. 

Arsphenamine-D.  R.  L.— A  brand  of  arsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 
Manufactured  by   Abbott   Laboratories,   North   Chicago,   111. 

Arsphenamine-AIallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  arsphenamine- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,   St.  Louis. 

Arsphenamine-Searle. — A  brand  of  arsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Prepared  by   G.   D.    Searle   &   Co.,   Inc.,   Chicago. 

Arsphenamine-Squibb. — A  brand  of  arsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   E.   R.   Squibb   &   Sons,   New   York. 


J 


82      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 
Arsphenamine-Merck. — A  brand  of  arsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 
Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.1  Gni.  Ampules. 
Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.2  Gm.  Ampules. 
Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.3  Cm.  Ampules. 
Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.4  Gm.  Ampules. 
Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.5  Gm.  Ampules. 
Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.6  Gm.  Ampules. 

Diarsenol. — A  brand  of  arsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Diarsenol    Company,  Inc.,  Buffalo,   N.  Y. 

Diarsenol,  0.1  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  0.2  Gm.  Anjpotilcs. 

Diarsenol,  0.3  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  0.4  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  0.5  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  0.6  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  1.0  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  2.0  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Diarsenol,  3.0  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Salvarsan. — A  brand  of  arsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
trademark  40,734. 

Salvarsan,  0.1  Gm.   Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  0.2  Gm..  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  0.3  Gm.  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  0.4  Gm.  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  0.5  Gm.  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  0.6  Gm.  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  1       Gm.   T..bes. 

Salvarsan,  1.2  Gm.  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  2      Gm.  Tubes. 

Salvarsan,  3      Gm.   Tubes. 

BISMARSEN.  —  Sulfarsphenamine  Bismuth.  —  Bismuth 
Arsphenamine  Sulfonate. — The  sodium  salt  of  a  bismuth  deriva- 
tive of  arsphenamine  methylene  sulfonic  acid  (the  exact  struc- 
tural formula  of  which  has  not  been  established)  with  inorganic 
salts.  It  contains  approximately  13  per  cent  of  arsenic  and 
24  per  cent  of  bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — For  the  treatment  of  syphilis.  The  drug 
is  said  to  be  somewhat  slower  in  its  action  than  intramuscu- 
larly administered  sulfarsphenamine  or  intravenously  admin- 
istered neoarsphenamine.  More  or  less  severe  pains  at  the  site 
of  injection  have  been  reported. 

Dosage.  —  Bismarsen  is  administered  intramuscularly.  The 
initial  dose  is  0.1  Gm. ;  for  succeeding  doses  0.2  Gm.  of  the 
drug  dissolved  in  an  ampule  with  1  cc.  of  sterile  distilled  water 
at  the  time  of  administration,  adding  to  the  solution  2  to  3 
drops  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  butyn.  Weekly  doses  may  be 
later  increased  to  biweekly  doses  in  courses  of  treatment  of 
twenty  doses,  or  more. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  U.  S. 
patent  1,605,691   (Nov.  2,  1926;  expires  1943).     U.  S.  trademark  230,625. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  83 

Bismarsen  is  prepared  by  adding  a  solution  of  potassium  bismuth 
tartrate  in  water  to  an  aqueous  solution  of  3,3'  diamino  4,4'  dihydrox- 
arsenobenzene  N,N'  dimethylene  sulfonate,  dissolving  the  precipitate 
with  a  measured  quantity  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  precipitating  by 
pouring  the  clear  solutiofl  into  a  methyl  alcohol-ether  mixture  and 
filtering  off  the  precipitate  and  drying  it  in  vacuo. 

Bismarsen  is  a  brownish-yellow  amorphous  powder  readily  soluble  in 
water,   yielding  a  yellow   solution   which   is   slightly    alkaline   to   litmus. 

Add  2  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solu- 
tion of  bismarsen:  a  white  opalescence  appears  and  dissolves  almost 
immediately;  a  heavy  white  gelatinous  precipitate  develops  in  two  min- 
utes. Add  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solution 
of  bismarsen:  the  solution  gradually  turns  brown  and  yields  a  precipi- 
tate. Add  1  cc.  of  trinitrophenol  solution  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent 
solution  of  bismarsen:  no  apparent  reaction  takes  place  (distinction 
from  silver  arsphenamine  and  potassium  bismuth  tai-trate).  Bubble 
hydrogen  sulfide  through  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bismarsen:  the 
solution  darkens  immediately  but  no  precipitate  is  formed.  Add  5  cc. 
of  hydrogen  peroxide  solution  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of 
bismarsen:  the  solution  is  at  first  turbid,  then  becomes  a  deep  reddish 
brown  with  formation  of  a  precipitate.  Add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  potassium 
iodide  solution  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bismarsen:  the 
solution  yields  a  greenish-yellow  opalescence,  which  in  turn  assumes  a 
dirty  green  color  on  standing.  Add  drop  by  drop  2  cc.  of  a  40  per  cent 
sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bis- 
marsen: the  solution  gradually  darkens  without  any  formation  of  pre- 
cipitate. Add  0.5  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  silver  nitrate  solution  to  5  cc.  of 
a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bismarsen:  a  dark  red  solution  is  produced 
(distinction  from  arsphenamine).  Add  1  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of 
bromine  in  water  to  5  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bismarsen:  The 
solution  yields  a  greenish-brown  precipitate  (distinction  from  siilf- 
arsphenamine,  neoarsphenamine  and  arsphenamine).  Add.  0.5_  Gm.  of 
zinc  dust  and  5  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  0.1  Gm.  of  bismarsen 
in  a  test  tube  and  at  the  mouth  of  the  tube  hold  a  strip  of  filter  paper 
moistened  with  5  per  cent  cadmium  chloride  solution:  the  paper  turns 
yellow  in  four  minutes. 

Transfer  about  0.4  Gm.  of  bismarsen,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
Kjeldahl  flask,  add  2  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  and  heat  carefully;  add  2  cc. 
of  nitric  acid  a  drop  at  a  time,  continue  heating  until  brown  fumes 
cease  to  be  given  off.  cool  and  add  water  to  make  120  cc;  if  a  white 
crystalline  precipitate  appears,  dissolve  it  with  a  few  drops  of  hydro- 
chloric acid;  transfer  to  a  250  cc.  beaker,  add  7  Gm.  of  tartaric  acid, 
neutralize  with  strong  ammonia  water  and  add  10  cc.  of  magnesia  mix- 
ture followed  by  20  cc.  stronger  ammonia  water,  allow  to  stand 
twelve  hours,  filter  through  a  hard  surface  filter  paper  and  wash  the 
precipitate  with  50  cc.  of  2.5  per  cent  ammonia  water,  puncture  the 
filter,  transfer  the  precipitate  into  a  250  cc.  beaker  with  washings,  then 
add  just  sufficient  hydrochloric  acid  to  dissolve  the  precipitate,  filter, 
wash  the  filter  well  with  water,  neutralize  the  filtrate  with  stronger 
ammonia  water;  add  1  cc.  of  magnesia  mixture  and  20  cc.  of  stronger 
ammonia  water;  allow  to  stand  twelve  hours;  filter,  using  a  prepared 
Gooch  crucible;  wash  with  2.5  per  cent  ammonia  water;  dry  at  100  C. ; 
ignite  at  700  C.  for  three  hours;  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh  as 
magnesium  pyroarsenate  and  calculate  to  arsenic:  the  arsenic  content 
is  not  less  than  12.50  per  cent  nor  more  than  13.50  per  cent.  Transfer 
about  0.25  Gm.  of  bismarsen  accurately  weighed  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask. 
Add  5  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  followed  by  1  Gm.  of  powdered 
potassium  permanganate,  and  10  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  in  small  portions; 
add  just  sufficient  hydrogen  peroxide  to  dissolve  the  brown  precipitate; 
add  50  cc.  of  water;  boil  for  twenty  minutes;  cool  to  70  C.;  saturate 
with  hydrogen  sulfide  for  twelve  hours;  filter,  using  a  prepared  Gooch 
crucible;  wash  the  precipitate  with  water,  warm  ammonium  polysulfide, 
methyl  alcohol,  carbon  bisulfide  and  acetone  in  the  order  named;  dry 
at  100  C.;  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh  as  bismuth  sulfide  (Bi2S3) ; 
calculate  to  bismuth:  the  percentage  of  bismuth  found  corresponds  with 
the  percentage  of  arsenic  found  multiplied  by  1.86  (factor  As  to  Bi  in 
C2iH2iOi2As3Na3S3N3Bi2)    plus   or    minus    0.5    per   cent. 


84       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

MAPHARSEN.— The  hemialcoholate  of  3-ammo-4-hydroxy 
phenylarsine  oxide  hydrochloride.— HC1.(NH0  C6H3(OH)AsO. 
^C2H50H.  It  contains  approximately  29  per  cent  of  trivalent 
arsenic. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mapharsen  is  proposed  for  the  treatment 
of  syphilis.  It  is  stated  to  exhibit  a  relatively  constant  para- 
siticidal  value.  It  is  claimed  to  have  a  rapidly  beneficial  effect, 
particularly  on  early  syphilis,  with  disappearance  of  spirochetes, 
healing  of  lesions,  and  reversal  of  positive  Wassermann  reac- 
tions in  a  large  percentage  of  cases.  The  reactions  following 
the  use  of  mapharsen  have  on  the  whole  been  less  severe  than 
those  observed  after  the  use  of  arsphenamine  or  neoarsphen- 
amine. 

Dosage. — Intravenously,  0.03  Gm.  for  women  and  0.04  Gm. 
for  men,  initially.  The  dose  may  be  increased  at  the  second 
injection  to  0.04  Gm.  for  women  and  0.06  Gm,  for  men.  The 
maximum  weekly  dose,  which  should  not  be  given  any  patient 
at  the  first  injection,  may  be  regarded  as  0.06  Gm.  For  chil- 
dren, the  initial  dose  should  not  exceed  0.0005  Gm.  (0.5  mg.) 
per  kilogram  of  body  weight;  the  total  weekly  dose  should 
average  between  0.0005  and  0.001  Gm.  (between  0.5  and  1  mg.) 
per  kilogram  of  body  weight. 

It  should  be  noted  that  the  dosage  of  mapharsen  is  much 
lower  than  that  of  the  arsphenamines. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  U.  S.  Patent  applied 
for.     U.  S.  trademark  299,173. 

Ampoules  Mapharsen  0.04  Gm.:  Each  ampule  contains  mapharsen 
0.04  Gm.,  anhydrous  sodium  carbonate  0.008  Gm.  and  anhydrous  purified 
sucrose   0.152    Gm. 

Ampoules  Mapharsen  0.06  Gm.:  Each  ampule  contains  mapharsen 
0.06  Gm.,  anhydrous  sodium  carbonate  0.012  Gm.  and  anhydrous  puri- 
fied sucrose  0.228  Gm. 

Ampoules  Mapharsen  0.4  Gm. :  Each  ampule  contains  mapharsen  0.4 
Gm.,  anhydrous  sodium  carbonate  0.08  Gm.  and  anhydrous  purified  sucrose 
1.52  Gm.  Caution:  This  ampule  is  a  hospital  package  and  represents 
ten  doses  of  0.04  Gm.  each. 

Ampoules  Mapharsen  0.6  Gm.:  Each  ampule  contains  mapharsen  0.6 
Gm.,  anhydrous  sodium  carbonate  0.12  Gm.  and  anhydrous  purified 
sucrose  2.28  Gm.  Caution:  This  ampule  is  a  hospital  package  and 
represents  ten  doses  of  0.06  Gm.  each. 

Mapharsen  occurs  as  a  white  amorphous,  odorless  powder.  It  is 
soluble  in  water,  alcohols,  acids,  alkalis  and  alkali  carbonates.  The 
aqueous  solution  is   acid  to  methyl  red  but  alkaline  to  congo  red. 

Add  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite  to  about  0.1  Gm.  of  mapharsen 
dissolved  in  10  cc.  of  water;  a  yellow  precipitate  separates.  Add  sodium 
carbonate  solution  drop  by  drop  to  a  1  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of 
mapharsen:  no  precipitate  is  formed  (distinction  from  arsphenamine). 
Add  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  a  1  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of 
mapharsen:  no  precipitate  is  formed  (distinction  from  neoarsphenamine). 
Add  2  cc.  of  colorless  20  per  cent  hydriodic  acid  to  about  0.02  Gm. 
of  mapharsen:  a  color  not  deeper  than  a  lemon  yellow  is  produced 
(3  ammo  4  hydroxy  phenyl  ar sonic  acid). 

Transfer  about  0.15  Gm.  of  mapharsen  accurately  weighed  to  a  wide 
mouth  weighing  bottle  and  dry  to  constant  weight  in  a  vacuum  desic- 
cator over  phosphorus  pentoxide:  the  sample  loses  not  more  than  2 
per  cent. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  85 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  mapharsen  accurately  weighed  in  25  cc. 
of  distilled  water,  titrate  with  tenth  normal  iodine  solution  using  a 
starch  indicator:  the  trivalent  arsenic  is  not  less  than  28.2  per  cent 
nor  more  than   29.5   per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  mapharsen  accurately  weighed  in  5  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid  in  a  250  cc.  Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  1  cc.  of  nitric  acid, 
heat  on  the  hot  plate  for  an  hour,  add  1  cc.  of  nitric  acid,  heat  on  the 
hot  plate  until  the  solution  is  clear  and  colorless;  cool,  add  10  cc.  of 
water,  heat  on  the  hot  plate  until  white  fumes  appear;  cool,  transfer  to  a 
600  cc.  beaker,  dilute  to  about  100  cc,  make  the  solution  alkaline  to 
litmus  paper  by  adding  stronger  ammonia  water,  add  stronger  ammonia 
to  the  amount  of  one  third  of  the  volume,  add  20  cc.  of  ammonium 
chloride  and  25  cc.  of  magnesia  mixture.  Allow  to  stand  over  night, 
collect  the  precipitate  in  a  tared  Gooch  crucible,  wash  the  precipitate 
with  dilute  ammonia  water  (1  volume  of  stronger  ammonia  water 
with  2  volumes  of  water)  dry  at  100  C.,  heat  in  a  muffle  furnace  at 
400  C.  for  four  hours,  then  gradually  raise  the  temperature  to  800  C.; 
cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh:  the  arsenic  calculated  on  the  dry  basis 
is  less  than  30  per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  mapharsen  accurately  weighed  in  about 
25  cc.  of  distilled  water;  titrate  to  the  green  color  of  bromthymol 
blue  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  hydrogen 
chloride  calculated  on  the  dry  basis  is  not  less  than  14.0  per  cent  nor 
more  than  14.7  per  cent. 

NEOARSPHENAMINE.— "Consists  chiefly  of  sodium  3,3'- 
diamino-4,4'-dihydroxyarsenobenzene  methanal  sulfoxylate.  It 
contains  not  less  than  19  per  cent  and  not  more  than  22  per 
cent  of  As  and  complies  with  the  requirements  of  the  National 
Institute  of  Health,  United  States  Public  Health  Service. "- 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Neoars- 
phenamina. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Neoarsphenamine  is  a  modified  soluble 
compound  of  arsphenamine ;  its  actions  and  uses  are  those  of 
arsphenamine. 

Dosage. — Neoarsphenamine  is  probably  less  toxic  than  ars- 
phenamine and,  since  it  contains  less  arsenic,  it  is  given  in 
larger  doses  than  arsphenamine.  The  average  dose  for  a  man 
is  0.45  to  0.60  Gm.  (7  to  10  grains),  with  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains) 
as  the  minimum  and  possibly  0.75  Gm.  (12  grains)  for  very 
large  men.  For  women,  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains)  is  the  average  if 
the  patient  is  about  the  normal  in  weight;  0.3  Gm.  (5.0  grains) 
would  be  the  minimum,  and  0.6  Gm.  (10  grains)  the  maximum, 
the  latter  dose  being  given  only  to  large  women.  Children  may 
be  given  0.1  to  0.2  Gm.  (1.5  to  3  grains).  The  limit  dose  is 
15  mg.  (%  grain)  per  kilogram  of  body  weight.  Here  again 
a  smaller  dose  is  preferable. 

Neoarsphenamine  may  be  administered  by  intravenous  or 
intramuscular  injection,  the  former  being  considered  decidedly 
preferable;  the  drug  must  not  be  administered  subcutaneously. 
In  babies  with  congenital  syphilis,  some  physicians  administer 
it  under  the  fascia  of  the  scalp.  For  intravenous  injection, 
12.5  cc.  of  freshly  distilled  water  should  be  used  for  each  0.1 
Gm.  of  neoarsphenamine.     For  the  intramuscular  or  subfascial 


86      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

injections,  3  cc.  of  freshly  distilled  water  should  be  used  for 
each  0.15  Gm.  of  neoarsphenamine,  this  yielding  an  approxi- 
mately isotonic  solution. 

Neoarsphenamine  may  be  employed  intravenously  in  concen- 
trated solutions.  For  this  purpose  as  much  as  0.1  Gm.  may  be 
dissolved  in  0.5  cc.  of  sterile  freshly  distilled  water;  the  injec- 
tion is  made  with  a  syringe  instead  of  by  gravity.  It  is  well 
to  draw  out  an  equal  amount  of  blood  into  the  syringe  con- 
taining the  neoarsphenamine  solution  before  reinjecting  into  the 
blood  stream.     It  should  be  injected  very  slowly. 

The  ampule  containing  the  drug  is  immersed  in  alcohol  to 
detect  a  possible  crack,  then  carefully  wiped  off;  the  neck  filed 
across  and  broken  off,  and  the  contents  sprinkled  on  the  surface 
of  cool,  sterile  distilled  water  and  allowed  to  dissolve  without 
shaking  the  solution.  Any  product  incompletely  soluble  should 
be  discarded.  Solutions  of  neoarsphenamine  must  be  injected 
immediately  after  their  preparation.  Neoarsphenamine  must 
not  be  warmed  and  the  temperature  of  the  injected  fluid  should 
not  be  more  than  20  to  22  C.  (68  to  71.6  F.). 

Neoarsphenamine  may  undergo  deterioration  in  the  ampule, 
and  care  should  be  exercised  to  use  a  drug  of  normal  color  and 
free  solubility.  The  drug  in  fresh  solution  should  be  of  canary 
yellow  color.  This  drug  should  preferably  be  kept  in  a  cool 
dark  room  or  ice  box  and  be  not  more  than  6  months  old. 

Neoarsphenamine-D.  R.  L. — A  brand  of  neoarsphenamine- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,   North  Chicago,  111. 

Neoarsphenamine-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  neoarsphen- 
amine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck. — A  brand  of  neoarsphenamine- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   Merck   &   Co.,  Inc.,   Rahway,   N.   J. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.15  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.3  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.45  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.6  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.75  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.9  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neoarsphenamine-Searle. — A  brand  of  neoarsphenamine- 
U.  S.  P. 

Prepared  by  G.   D.   Searle  &   Co.,   Inc.,   Chicago. 

Neoarsphenamine-Squibb. — A  brand  of  neoarsphenamine- 
U.  S.  P 

Manufactured  by  E.   R.   Squibb  &   Sons,   New  York. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  87 

Neodiarsenol. — A   brand  of  neoarsphenamine-U.   S.   P. 

Manufactured  by  the   Diarsenol   Company,   Inc.,   Buffalo,   N.  Y. 

Neodiarsenol,  0.15  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  0..^  Gtn.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  0.45  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol.  0.6  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  0.75  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol.  0.9  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  1.5  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  1.8  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  3  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neodiarsenol,  4.5  Gm.  Ampoules. 

Neosalvarsan. — A  brand  of  ncoarsphenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
trademark  88,862. 

Neosalvarsan,  0.15  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosah'arsan,   0.3  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosalvarsan,  0.45  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosah'arsan,  0.6  Gm.  Atnpules. 

Neosalvarsan,  0.75  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosalvarsan,  0.9  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosalvarsan,  1.5  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosalvarsan.  1.8  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosalvarsan,  3.0  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neosalvarsan,  4.5  Gm.  Ampules. 

SILVER  ARSPHENAMINE.  — Argentum  Arsphen- 
amina. — Sodium  Silver  Arspbenamine. — The  sodium  salt  of 
silver-diamino-dihydroxy-arseno-benzene  (the  exact  molecular 
formula  has  not  been  established).  Silver  arspbenamine  con- 
tains not  less  than  19  per  cent  of  arsenic  and  from  12  to  14 
per  cent  of  silver. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Silver  arspbenamine  has  practically  the 
same  uses  as  those  of  arspbenamine.  Its  claimed  advantage 
over  other  arspbenamine  preparations  is  said  to  be  due  to  the 
introduction  of  the  silver  (nonionizable  form)  as  a  component, 
thereby  improving  the  chemo-therapeutic  index,  presumably 
because  of  the  fact  that  silver  and  its  compounds  have  a  decided 
antisyphilitic  influence. 

In  the  presence  of  organic  diseases  of  the  heart,  such  as 
aneurysm  and  aortitis,  as  well  as  in  other  parenchymatous  dis- 
eased conditions  of  the  glandular  structures  (liver  and  kidney), 
silver  arspbenamine  should  be  used  only  with  great  caution 
and  in  small  doses,  the  patient  and  all  functions  being  observed 
most  carefully. 

Untoward  symptoms  noted  after  the  use  of  arspbenamine  and 
of  neoarsphenamine  have  likewise  been  seen  after  the  use  of 
silver  arspbenamine.  Argyria  may  occur  rarely  as  a  sequel  to 
the  use  of  this  preparation. 

Dosage. — From  0.1  Gm.  to  0.3  Gm.  for  adults.  The  treat- 
ment should  begin  with  an  injection  of  0.1  Gm.,  gradually 
increasing  the  dosage,  at  intervals  of  not  less  than  four  days, 
to  0.2  Gm.  maximum  in  women  and  0.3  Gm.  in  men.  The 
larger  doses  are  indicated  only  if  the  preparation  is  well  toler- 
ated by  the  patient.    The  doses  of  0.2  to  0.25  Gm.  may  be  given 


88      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

at  regular  intervals  of  7  days  and  repeated  until  the  desired 
therapeutic  results  have  been  achieved.  Patients  with  disorders 
of  the  nervous  S3^stem  or  those  suffering  from  severe  headaches 
should  be  given  smaller  initial  doses,  0.05  and  0.075  Gm.  When 
these  amounts  are  well  tolerated,  larger  doses  may  be  employed, 
increasing  very  gradually. 

In  preparing  the  solution  for  injection,  the  ampule  is  first 
sterilized  and  tested  for  cracks,  by  immersion  in  alcohol  for  15 
minutes ;  after  opening  the  ampule,  the  contents  are  sprinkled 
on  the  surface  of  5  cc.  of  cool  (20-22  C),  sterile,  distilled 
water,  contained  in  a  small  sterile  flask.  The  silver  arsphen- 
amine  will  go  into  solution  rapidly ;  heating  and  shaking  must 
be  avoided.  A  quantity  of  cool  sterile  solution  of  sodium 
chloride,  0.4  per  cent,  is  then  added  so  that  the  final  solution 
will  approximate  20  cc.  of  liquid  per  decigram  (0.1  Gm.)  of 
the  drug.     The  solution  must   he  administered  promptly. 

Silver  arsphenamine  is  prepared  by  treating  the  dihydrochloride  of 
3-diamino-4-dihydroxy-l-arsenobenzene  (arsphenamine)  with  silver  salts, 
converting  the  resulting  compound  to  the  disodium  salt  and  precipitating 
ijy  means  of  alcohol,  ether  or  acetone.  The  silver  is  not  in  an  ionizable 
form. 

Silver  arsphenamine  is  a  brownish-black  powder,  unstable  in  air; 
when  properly  dried  it  is  free  from  lumps.  It  is  readily  soluble  in 
water,  yielding  a  dark  brown  solution  (distinction  from  arsphenamine, 
sodium  arsphenamine  and  ncoarsphenaminc) ;  the  solution  has  an 
alkaline  reaction   (distinction  from   arsplienaminc). 

The  addition  of  dilute  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  3  cc.  of  an 
aqueous  solution  of  silver  arsphenamine  (1  in  500)  produces  no  pre- 
cipitate (distinction  from  arsphenatnine).  On  the  addition  of  1  cc.  of 
sodium  carbonate  test  solution  to  1  cc.  of  silver  arsphenamine  solution 
(1  in  20)  no  precipitate  is  formed  (distinction  from  arsphenamine). 
The  addition  of  1  cc.  of  saturated  solution  of  sodium  bicarbonate  to 
1   cc.   of   silver  arsphenamine  solution   produces  a  precipitate. 

One  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution  of  silver  arsphenamine  solution  (1  in 
20)  when  slightly  acidulated  with  dilute  hydrochloric  acid  yields  a 
precipitate  (distinction  from  arsphenamine).  This  precipitate  dissolves 
on  the  very  careful  addition  of  more  acid;  on  heating  no  irritating  odor 
of  sulfur  dioxide  should  be  detected  (distinction  from  ncoarsphenatnine). 
However,  a  large  excess  of  hydrochloric  acid  yields  a  precipitate.  The 
careful  addition  of  3  cc.  of  acetic  acid  test  solution  to  3  cc.  of  silver 
arsphenamine  solution  (1  in  20)  produces  a  precipitate  (distinction 
from  arsphenamine),  a  portion  of  which  dissolves  on  further  addition  of 
the  acetic  acid  test  solution.  When  3  cc.  of  silver  arsphenamine  solution 
(1  in  20)  is  heated  with  a  few  crystals  of  potassium  permanganate 
(witliout  addition  of  alkali;  distinction  from  arsphenamine),  the  per- 
manganate is  reduced  and  ammonia  is  evolved  which  may  be  tested 
by  placing  a  moistened  piece  of  red  litmus  paper  in  the  vapors:  the 
litmus  paper  will  turn  blue.  The  precipitate  thus  formed  may  be  treated 
with  hot  nitric  acid  test  solution;  the  mixture  is  boiled  for  a  few  min- 
utes and  then  cooled,  diluted  and  filtered:  the  filtrate  will  yield  a  pre- 
cipitate of  silver  chloride  on  the  addition  of  hydrochloric  acid  (distinc- 
tion from  arsphenamine,  neoarsphenamine  and  sodium  arsphenamine). 
The  addition  of  1  cc.  of  trinitrophenol  (picric  acid)  test  solution  to  1  cc. 
of  silver  arsphenamine  solution  produces  a  yellow  precipitate  (distinc- 
tion from  neoarsphenamine ) .  The  addition  of  1  drop  of  ferric  chloride 
test  solution  to  1  cc.  of  silver  arsphenamine  solution  (1  in  500)  produces  a 
deepening  of  the  brown  color,  with  a  slightly  purplish  tint  (distinction 
from  sodium  arsphenamine) ,  the  liquid  finally  becoming  turbid;  if  a 
more  concentrated  solution  of  silver  arsphenamine  (1  in  20)  is 
employed,  an  immediate  precipitate  is  formed.  The  careful  addition, 
drop  by  drop,  of  bromine  water  to  3  cc.  of  silver  arsphenamine  solution 
(1    in   250)    produces   a   reddish   coloration,   which    is   discharged   by   an 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  89 

excess  of  the  reagent;  there  is  also  formed  a  precipitate  which  dissolves 
on  addition  of  a  large  excess  of  concentrated  ammonia  water  (distinc- 
tion from  arsphcnamine,  neoarsphenamine  and  sodium  arsphenamine). 
To  1  cc.  of  silver  arsphenamine  solution  (1  in  20)  add  1  cc.  of  hydrogen 
peroxide  test  solution:  a  brown  precipitate  resembling  silver  oxide  is 
formed  and  the  supernatant  liquid  is  almost  colorless  (distinction  from 
arsphenamine,  neoarsphenamine  and  sodium  arsphenamine).  To  1  cc. 
of  silver  arsphenamine  solution  (1  in  20)  add  1  cc.  of  sodium  chloride 
test  solution:  no  precipitate  forms  (absence  of  ionizable  silver).  (A 
concentrated  sodium  chloride  solution  added  to  a  strong  solution  of 
silver  arsphenamine  causes  a  precipitate  to  form,  due  to  a  "salting  out" 
action.) 

Place  about  0.2  Gm.  of  silver  arsphenamine,  accurately  weighed, 
in  an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  and  carry  out  the  Lehman  process  (described 
in  Pub.  Health  Rep.  33:1003  [June  21]  1918)  through  the  point  of 
digestion.  While  the  solution  is  hot,  add  cautiously  dilute  hydrochloric 
acid  solution  in  order  to  obtain  the  precipitation  of  silver  chloride. 
Filter  off  the  silver  chloride  through  a  tared  asbestos  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  well  and  weigh:  From  the  weight  of  silver  chloride,  the  per- 
centage of  silver  may  be  calculated.  The  filtrate  from  the  silver  chloride 
is  carried  on  in  the  usual  manner  according  to  the  Lehman  method, 
thereby  determining  the  arsenic  content.  The  total  silver  content  of 
the  drug  shall  be  from  12  to  14  per  cent  and  the  total  arsenic  content 
shall  be  not  less  than  19  per  cent. 

To  determine  the  toxicity,  select  not  less  than  five  healthy  albino 
rats  weighing  between  100  and  150  Gm.  (pregnant  animals  shall  not  be 
used) ;  prepare  a  2  per  cent  silver  arsphenamine  solution  and  inject 
the  solution  into  the  saphenous  vein  of  each  rat  at  a  rate  of  not 
more  than  0.5  cc.  per  minute.  The  rats  shall  not  be  anesthetized  for 
the  injection.  At  least  60  per  cent  of  the  series  of  animals  injected 
with  the  maximum  tolerated  dose  should  survive  forty-eight  hours 
from  the  time  of  injection:  The  maximum  tolerated  dose  shall  not  be 
below   0.14   Gm.    per   kilogram   of   body   weight. 

Silver-Salvarsan. — A  brand  of  silver  arsphenamine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  1,127,603  (Feb.  9,  1915;  expired).  U.  S,  trademark  161,232. 
Licensed  for  interstate  sale  by  the  U.  S.  Treasury  Department  under  the 
"act  to  regulate  the  sale  of  viruses,  serums,  toxins  and  analogous 
products"  as  conforming  to  the  regulations  for  the  control,  sale  and  manu- 
facture   of   silver   arsphenamine. 

Silver-Salvarsan,  0.1  Gm.  Ampules. 

Silver-Salvarsan,  0.15  Gm.  Ampules. 

Silver-Salvarsan,  0.2  Gm.  Ampules. 

Silver-Salvarsan,  0.25  Gm.  Ampules. 

Silver-Salvarsan,  0.3  Gm.  Ampules. 

Silver-Salvarsan,  0.6  Gm.  Ampules. 

SULFARSPHENAMINE.  —  Sulfarsphenamina.  —  The 

salt,  disodium  3,3'-diamino-4,4'-dihydroxyarsenobenzene-A''- 
dimethylenesulfonate,  NaOSO2CH2NH.OH.C6H3.As  :  As.CeHs 
OH.NH,CH202SONa,  with  inert  salt.  Sulfarsphenamine  con- 
tains not  less  than  19  per  cent  of  arsenic  (As).  According  to 
claims,  it  differs  from  neoarsphenamine  in  having  two  side  chains 
instead  of  one,  and  in  that  the  sulfur  has  a  valence  of  four 
(with  an  extra  oxygen  atom)  and  not  two  as  in  neoarsphenamine. 
Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  neoarsphenamine; 
it  is  probably  somewhat  more  stable  in  solution  in  the  presence 
of  air,  and  it  permits  of  intramuscular  injection.  In  terms  of 
percentages  there  seems  to  be  a  higher  incidence  of  reactions 


90       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

following  the  use  of  sulfarsphenamine,  far  more,  in  fact,  than 
after  the  use  of  the  other  arsenicals  employed  in  the  treatment 
of  syphilis.  These  reactions  consist  in  (a)  dermatitis,  (b) 
hemorrhagic  eruptions,  (c)  meningo-vascular  reactions,  (d) 
aplastic  anemias,  some  of  them  even  of  agranulocytic  angina 
and  often  with  lethal  exitus.  All  patients  under  treatment  with 
sulfarsphenamine  should  be  followed  closely  by  the  physician 
for  evidence  of  reaction.  The  drug  probably  has  a  place,  how- 
ever, and  occasionally  can  be  used  by  the  intramuscular  route 
in  the  treatment  of  heredosyphilis  and  in  certain  cases  where 
the  patient  has  such  poor  veins  that  intravenous  therapy  is  out 
of  the  question. 

Dosage. — The  maximum  dosage  by  any  route  should  probably 
not  exceed  0.4  Gm.,  or  at  most  0.5  Gm.  of  the  dry  substance. 

For  intramuscular  or  subcutaneous  use  the  drug  is  dissolved 
in  sterile,  freshly  distilled  water  in  the  proportion  of  about 
0.1  Gm.  to  0.3  cc,  the  total  volume  being  not  more  than  1.0  to 
2.0  cc.  There  is  probably  less  local  reaction  where  a  minimum 
of  diluent  is  employed.  For  intravenous  use  the  drug  should 
be  diluted  in  the  proportion  of  0.1  Gm.  to  not  less  than  1.0  and 
preferably,  4.0  cc,  or  more,  the  total  volume  amounting  to  5.0 
to  20.0  cc.  or  more. 

Sulfarsphenamine  is  an  orange-yellow  powder  possessing  an  odor 
resembling  that  of  sulfur  dioxide  and  arsine.  It  is  readily  soluble  in 
water  yielding  a  yellow  solution  which  is  acid  to  litmus  (distinction 
from  neoarsphenamine,  which  is  neutral,  and  sodium  arsphenamine, 
zvhich  is  alkaline).  On  standing  over  night,  the  solution  darkens  and 
a  precipitate  is  formed. 

A  freshly  prepared  solution  of  sulfarsphenamine  (1  in  100)  yields  no 
immediate  precipitate  on  the  addition  of  diluted  acetic  acid,  whereas 
neoarsphenamine  yields  a  precipitate  sooner  (distinction  from  arsphen- 
amine). The  general  reactions  with  silver  nitrate  and  ferric  chloride, 
the  qualitative  tests  for  the  presence  of  sulfur,  are  the  same  as  those 
described   under   neoarsphenamine. 

The  arsenic  content  of  sulfarsphenamine  may  be  estimated  according 
to  the  Lehman  m&H\o6.  {Public  Health  Reports  33:1003  [June  21] 
1918).  The  total  arsenic  content  of  the  drug  shall  not  be  less  than 
19  per  cent. 

When  tested  by  the  method  used  for  arsphenamine  but  omitting  the 
use  of  sodium  hydroxide  in  preparing  this  solution,  60  per  cent  of  the 
albino  rats  should  survive  0.3  Gm.  per  kilogram  of  body  weight  for 
three  days  when  the  drug  is  administered  intravenously  as  a  4  per  cent 
solution. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott.  —  A  brand  of  sulfarsphen- 
amine-N.   N.   R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Dermatological  Research  Laboratories,  branch  ot 
the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.,  under  U.  S.  patent  1,024,993 
(April  30,   1912;   expired)   by  license  of   the  Chemical  Foundation,  Inc. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,   0.1   Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  0.2  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott ,  0.3  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  0.4  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  0.5  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  0.6  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  0.8  Gm.  Ampules. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  91 

Sulpharsphenamine-Merck.  —  A  brand  of  sulfarsphen- 
amine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,024,993  (April  30,  1912;  expired)  by  license  of  the  Chemical  Founda- 
tion, Inc. 

Sulpharsphcnamine-Merck,  0.1   Cm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenainine-Merck,   0.2  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Merck,  0.3   Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Merck,  0.4  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Merck,  0.5  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Merck,  0.6  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt.  —  A  brand  of  sulfars- 
phenamine-N.    N.   R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis,  under 
U,  S.  patent  1,024,993  (April  30,  1912;  expired)  by  license  from  the 
Chemical  Foundation,   Inc. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  0.1  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  0.2  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  0.3  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  0.4  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  0.5  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  0.6  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop.  —  A  brand  of  sulfarsphen- 
amine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  under 
U.  S.  patent  1,024,993  (April  30,  1912;  expired)  by  license  from  the 
Chemical  Foundation,   Inc. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,  0.1     Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,  0.15   Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-WintJirop,   0.3     Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,   0.45  Gm.   Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,   0.6     Gm..  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,  0.75  Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,   0.9     Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Winthrop,  3.0     Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle.  —  A  brand  of  sulfarsphen- 
amine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Chicago,  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,024,993  (April  30,  1912;  expired)  by  license  of  the  Chemical  Founda- 
tion,  Inc. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle,    0.1    Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle,    0.2    Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle,    0.3    Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle,    0.4    Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle,    0.5    Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Searle,    0.6    Gm.  Ampules. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb.  —  A  brand  of  sulfarsphen- 
amine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured    by    E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons,    New    York,    under    U.    S. 

patent  1,024,993  (April  30,  1912;  expired)  by  license  of  the  Chemical 
Foundation,   Inc. 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.1 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.2 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.3 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.4 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.5 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.6 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  0.9 

Sulpharsphenamine-Squibb,  3.0 


Gm. 

Ampules. 

Gm. 

Amptdes. 

Gm. 

Ampules. 

Gm. 

Ampules. 

Gm. 

Ampules. 

Gm. 

Ampules. 

Gm. 

Ampules. 

Gm. 

.    Ampules. 

92       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 
Compounds  Containing  Pentavalent  Arsenic 

ACETARSONE.— Acetylaminohydroxyphenylarsonic  Acid. 
— HO.CH3CONH.C6H3.As:0:(OH)2.— The  acetyl  derivative 
of  3-amino-4-hydroxyphenyl-l-arsonic  acid.  —  Acetarsone  con- 
tains from  27.1  to  27.4  per  cent  of  arsenic  (As). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Acetarsone  has  been  reported  to  produce 
favorable  effects  in  the  treatment  of  amebic  dysentery.  It  is 
claimed  to  yield  satisfactory  results  in  the  eradication  both  of 
dysenteriae  cysts  and  encysted  flagellates,  and  for  general 
amebic  dysentery.  Acetarsone  is  useful  as  a  means  of  medica- 
tion of  the  vagina  in  the  treatment  of  Trichomonas  vaginitis. 
Its  use  in  the  treatment  of  sarcoid  has  been  recommended  by 
various  dermatologists.  Acetarsone  has  been  proposed  for  use 
both  in  prophylaxis  and  in  treatment  in  certain  cases  of  syphilis, 
but  the  evidence  is  thus  far  inconclusive.  Its  use  in  amebic 
infections  undoubtedly  is  of  value,  though  still  in  the  experi- 
mental stage.  In  using  acetarsone,  the  physician  should  remem- 
ber that  he  is  working  with  a  rather  toxic  arsenical  preparation, 
which  may  give  rise  to  gastro-intestinal  symptoms  and  hepatitis 
as  well  as  to  the  same  cutaneous  disturbances  that  are  found 
with  the  arsphenamines,  for  example,  urticaria,  erythema  of 
various  types  and  even  hemorrhagic  eruptions.  At  the  least 
sign  of  intolerance  the  physician  should  discontinue  the  use  of 
the  drug  for  the  time  being. 

Dosage. — Orally,  0.25  Gm.  for  adults ;  two  or  three  doses  a 
day  for  a  period  of  seven  days  have  been  reported  to  give  satis- 
factory results.  For  Trichomonas  vaginitis,  use  locally  in  the 
vagina  a  powder  containing  12^^  per  cent  acetarsone  in  a 
mixture  of  equal  parts  of  kaolin  and  sodium  bicarbonate. 
Single  dose  4  Gm. — 1  teaspoonful  of  the  mixture  containing 
0.5  Gm.  Acetarsone. 

Acetarsone  is  a  white,  odorless  powder,  having  a  slightly  acid'  taste. 
It  is  slightly  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol  and  readily  soluble  in  solu- 
tions of  alkalis  or  alkaline  carbonates.  It  is  stable  at  ordinary  tempera- 
tures. 

To  a  solution  of  1  Gm.  of  acetarsone  in  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  and  10  cc.  of  water,  add  2  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite  and 
warm  the  mixture  to  about  50  C. :  a  light  yellow  precipitate  is  formed, 
which  is  soluble  in  an  excess  of  sodium  hydroxide.  To  a  solution  of 
0.5  Gm.  of  acetarsone  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  a  slight  excess  of  ammonia 
water,  add  magnesia  mixture:  no  precipitate  forms  (absence  of  inor- 
ganic arsenates) ;  but  on  heating  the  mixture  for  some  time,  a  pre- 
cipitate is  produced.  Dissolve  1  Gm.  of  acetarsone  in  10  cc.  of  sodium 
carbonate  solution:  no  undissolved  residue  remains.  To  1  Gm.  of 
acetarsone  add  10  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  (5  per  cent),  shake  well 
and  filter.  To  the  filtrate  add  two  drops  of  solution  of  potassium 
bichromate  (3  per  cent)  :  no  red  or  brown  color  is  produced  (unacetyl- 
ized  amino-acids).  Shake  0.5  Gm.  of  acetarsone  with  10  cc.  of  diluted 
nitric  acid  for  five  minutes  and  then  filter:  the  filtrate  becomes  at  most 
slightly  turbid  on  the  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  silver  nitrate  solution. 
Incinerate  0.5  Gm.  of  acetarsone:  not  more  than  0.2  per  cent  of  residue 
remains.  Dry  a  weighed  quantity  of  acetarsone  to  constant  weight  at 
100   C.:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  0.5  per  cent. 

Determine  the  arsenic  of  acetarsone  by  Lehmann's  method:  the 
arsenic  content  corresponds  to  from  27.1   to  27.4  per  cent. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  93 

Acetarsone-Abbott. — A  brand  of  acetarsone-N.   N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No 
U.   S.   patent   or   trademark. 

Tablets  Acetarsone-Abbott,   0.25   Gm. 

Stovarsol. — A  brand  of  acetarsone-N.   N.   R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck   &   Co.   Inc.,   Rahway,   N.   J.,   under   license   of 

Les  Etablisseraents  Poulenc  Freres,  Paris.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark    177,082. 

Stovarsol   Tablets  0.25    Gm. 

CARBARSONE. — /j-Carbamido-phenylarsonic  acid.— A-Car- 
bamido-benzenearsonic  acid.— NH2CONH.C6H4AS  :  O  :(OH)o.— 
The  A^-carbamyl  derivative  of  [p]  arsanilic  acid.  Carbarsone 
contains   from  28.1  to  28.8  per  cent  arsenic   (As). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Carbarsone  is  proposed  for  the  treatment 
of  intestinal  amebiasis.  It  is  administered  usually  by  mouth ; 
in  acute  amebic  dysentery  or  in  resistant  cases  with  motile 
amebas  in  the  stools,  retention  enemas  may  be  employed.  While 
carbarsone  is  said  to  be  less  toxic  than  acetarsone  and  serious 
untoward  effects  appear  to  be  uncommon,  cutaneous  distur- 
bances and  other  reactions  common  to  arsenic  compounds  have 
been  observed.  It  has  been  suggested  that  owing  to  its  chemical 
structure  (in  which  a  modified  amido  group  is  in  para  position 
to  the  arsenic  atom,  similar  to  the  arrangement  in  tryparsamide) 
the  administration  of  carbarsone  may  lead  to  injury  of  the  optic 
nerve.  While  visual  disturbances  appear  to  be  quite  rare,  the 
possibility  of  their  occurrence  should  nevertheless  be  kept  in 
mind  during  the  therapeutic  use  of  the  drug.  A  moderate 
increase  in  intestinal  activity  may  be  observed.  Carbarsone, 
in  common  with  other  arsenicals,  should  ordinarily  not  be 
employed  in  the  presence  of  hepatitis  or  kidney  damage.  Excre- 
tion of  the  administered  arsenic  is  relatively  slow ;  suitable  rest 
periods  must  therefore  be  interposed  in  the  treatment  to  prevent 
cumulative  effects. 

The  diagnosis  of  amebiasis  depends  on  the  observation  of 
motile  forms  or  cysts  of  Endamoeba  histolytica  in  stool  speci- 
mens (repeated  examinations  are  often  necessary)  or  their 
recovery  by  means  of  the  proctoscope  from  the  intestinal 
mucosa ;  positive  diagnosis  can  often  be  made  by  the  latter 
procedure  when  stool  examinations  are  negative,  and  this  is 
considered  to  be  the  more  satisfactory  as  well  as  the  more 
rapid  method  of  diagnosis  in  many  cases. 

In  view  of  the  frequency  of  persistent  infection  in  the  absence 
of  marked  symptoms,  adequate  therapy  includes  reexaminations 
and  repetitions  of  courses  of  treatment. 

Dosage. — Orally,  for  adults,  the  usual  dose  is  0.25  Gm.  twice 
a  day  for  ten  days.  If  necessary  this  may  be  repeated  following 
a  ten  day  rest  period.  For  children,  the  dosage  may  be  reduced 
according  to  weight.  As  retention  enemas,  for  adults,  2  Gm. 
of  the  drug  dissolved  in  200  cc.  of  warm  2  per  cent  sodium 
bicarbonate  solution  may  be  administered  following  a  cleansing 


94       NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

alkaline  enema  every  other  night  for  a  maximum  of  five  doses, 
if  necessary.  Because  of  the  large  dosage  employed  (a  total  of 
10  Gm.  over  a  period  of  nine  days)  oral  administration  should 
be  interrupted  during  this  interval. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis.     No  U.  S.  patent. 
"Carbarsone"   is  a  registered   U.    S.   trademark    but  the   firm   disclaims 
proprietary  rights  to  the  name. 

Vials  Carbarsone,  2  Gm.   (31  grains). 
Pulvules  Carbarsone,   0.25   Gm.   (3H  grains). 

Carbarsone  is  a  white,  almost  odorless  powder,  having  a  slightly  acid 
taste.  It  is  slightly  soluble  in  water,  and  in  alcohol  and  nearly 
insoluble  in  ether  and  chloroform;  freely  soluble  in  alkalis  and  alkaline 
carbonates.     The  water  solution  yields  an  acid  reaction  to  litmus  paper. 

Transfer  1  Gm.  of  carbarsone  to  a  suitable  test  tube,  dissolve  in 
a  solution  containing  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  10  cc. 
of  water;  add  2  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite  and  warm  the  mixture 
to  50  C. :  a  light  yellow  precipitate  is  formed  in  an  excess  of  sodium 
hydroxide  solution    (distinction  from  acetarsone). 

Dissolve  0.50  Gm.  of  carbarsone  in  2  cc.  of  amrnonia  water,  dilute 
to  5  cc.  with  water  and  add  3  cc.  of  magnesia  mixture  solution:  no 
precipitate  forms  within  one  half  hour  {absence  of  inorganic  arsen- 
ates); allow  the  solution  to  stand  for  some  time  longer  or  heat  the  solu- 
tion for  some  time:  a  precipitate  is  produced.  Add  10  cc.  of  sodium 
carbonate  solution  to  1  Gm.  of  carbarsone  in  a  test  tube  and  gently 
agitate  the  mixture:  a  complete  solution  results  in  five  minutes.  Shake 
0.5  Gm'.  of  carbarsone  for  five  minutes  with  10  cc.  of  diluted  nitric 
acid,  filter  the  mixture,  and  add  a  few  drops  of  silver  nitrate  solution 
to  the  filtrate:  at  most  only  a  very  slight  turbidity  is  produced  within 
five  minutes.  Carbarsone  melts  with  decomposition  at  169  to  171  C. 
(the  U.  S.  P.  melting  point  determination  method  is  to  be  used). 
Transfer  0.4  Gm.  of  carbarsone  to  a  test  tube,  add  5  cc.  of_  20  per  cent 
sodium  hydroxide,  stopper  with  a  slotted  cork  from  which  is  suspended 
a  strip  of  moist  red  litmus  paper,  and  heat  gently:  the  litmus  paper 
turns  blue. 

Dissolve  0.50  Gm.  of  carbarsone  in  2  cc.  of  ammonia  water  and 
dilute  to  10  cc.  with  water.  This  solution  conforms  to  the  test  for 
heavy  metals  when  treated  according  to  U.  S.  P.  XI,  p.  447,  beginning 
with  "warm  it  to  about  50  C,  etc."  [The  test  for  absence  of  arsanilic 
acid  as  described  for  tryparsamide,  N.  N.  R.,  1934,  is  not  applicable 
to  this   compound.] 

Incinerate  0.5  Gm.  of  carbasone:  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent  residue 
remains.  Heat  about  0.4  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  of  carbarsone  for 
twenty-four  hours  at  80  C. :  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  1.1  per 
cent. 

Determine  the  arsenic  of  carbarsone  by  the  method  for  arsenic  in 
arsphenamine  U.  S.  P.  XI,  p.  74:  the  arsenic  (As)  content  corresponds 
to  from   28.1   to  28.8  per  cent  of  the  weight  of  the  sample. 

Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  carbarsone,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500  cc. 
Kjeldahl  flask.  Determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the  method 
of  Medical  War  Manual  No.  6  Laboratory  Methods  of  the  U.  S. 
Army,  Second  Edition  Revised,  page  222,  beginning  with  "Add  20  cc. 
of  concentrated  H2SO4.  .  .  ."  The  nitrogen  content  is  not  less 
than  10.7  per  cent,  nor  more  than  11  per  cent  of  the  weight  of  the 
sample. 

SODIUM  CACODYLATE.— "Contains  not  less  than  72 
per  cent  and  not  more  than  75  per  cent  of  Na(CH3)2As02,  the 
remainder  consisting  chiefly  of  water." — U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Sodii  Caco- 
dylas. 

Cheplin's  Sodium  Cacodylate  0.05  Gm.  (^  grain),  1  cc:  Benzyl 
alcohol  1   per  cent  is  added  for  its  local  anesthetic  effect. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,   Syracuse,  N.  Y. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS 


95 


Benzyl 


Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
1    cc. :     Benzyl 

Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
1     cc. :     Benzyl 

Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
1    cc. :     Benzyl 


Cheplin's    Sodium    Cacodylate    0.1    Gm.    (1^2    grains),    1    cc. 
alcohol   1   per  cent  is  added  for  its  local  anesthetic  effect 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc., 

Cheplin's    Sodium    Cacodylate    0.2    Gm.     (3    grains), 
alcohol  1  per  cent  is  added  for  its  local  anesthetic  effect. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc., 

Cheplin's    Sodium    Cacodylate    0.3    Gm.     (5    grains), 
alcohol  1  per  cent  is  added  for  its  local  anesthetic  effect. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc., 

Cheplin's    Sodium    Cacodylate    0.5    Gm.    (ly^    grains), 
alcohol  1  per  cent  is  added  for  its  local  anesthetic  effect. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,   Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

Cheplin's   Sodium    Cacodylate    1.0    Gm.    (15y2    grains),    2    cc:     Benzyl 
alcohol  1  per  cent  is  added  for  its  local  anesthetic  effect. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,   Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

Ampoule   Solution   Sodium   Cacodylate   0.19    Gm.    (3   grains),    1   cc. 

Prepared  by  the   Lakeside   Laboratories,   Inc.,   Milwaukee. 

Ampoule  Sodiiim   Cacodylate   0.243   Gm.    (3}i   grains),  5   cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Lakeside  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Milwaukee,  Wis. 

D.     &    Co.,    0.2    Gm.    (3 


D.    &    Co.,    0.3    Gm.    (5 


Glaseptic    Ampoules 

Sodium 

Cacodylate-P. 

grains),  1   cc. 

Prepared  by  Parke, 

Davis   & 

Co.,   Detroit. 

Glaseptic    Ampoules 

Sodium 

Cacodylate-P. 

grains),  1   cc. 

Prepared   by   Parke, 

Davis   & 

Co.,   Detroit. 

Glaseptic    Ampoules 

Sodium 

Cacodylate-P. 

grains),   1   cc. 

Prepared  by   Parke, 

Davis   & 

Co.,   Detroit. 

Glaseptic    Ampoules 

Sodium 

Cacodylate-P. 

grains),  1   cc. 

Prepared   by   Parke, 
Glaseptic    A»ipoulcs 

grains),   1   cc. 

Prepared   by   Parke, 
Glaseptic    Ampoules 

grains),  2  cc. 

Prepared  by  Parke, 


Davis   &   Co.,   Detroit. 
Sodium    Cacodylate-P. 

Davis   &  Co.,   Detroit. 

Sodium    Cacodylatc-P. 


D.    &    Co.,    0.45    Gm.    (7 


D.    &■    Co.,    0.1    Gm.    (VA 


D.    &■    Co.,    0.13    Gm.    (2 


D.    &    Co.,    1    G> 


(15] 


Davis   &   Co.,   Detroit. 

Ampules,    Sodium   Cacodylate-Miilford,    ^4   grain,    1    cc. 

Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia. 

Ampules  Sodium  Cacodylatc-Mulford,   lYi   grains,  1  cc. 

Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia. 

Ampules  Sodium  Cacodylate-Mulford,   2  grains,   1   cc. 

Prepared  by   Sharp  &  Dohme,   Philadelphia. 

Ampules   Sodium  Cacodylate-Mulford,  3  grains,  1  cc. 

Prepared  by   Sharp   &   Dohme,  Philadelphia. 

Ampules  Sodium  Cacodylate-Mulford,  5  grains,  1  cc. 

Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia. 

Ampule's  Sodium    Cacodylate-Mulford,    7    grains,    1    cc. 

Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia. 

Ampules  Sodium  Cacodylate-Mulford,  151/2  grains,  2  cc. 

Prepared  by   Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia. 

Ampul  Solution  Sodium   Cacodylate  0.2  Gm.   (3  grains),  1  cc. 

Prepared   by   the   U.    S.    Standard    Products   Co.,    Woodworth,    Wis. 

Ampul  Solution  Sodium  Cacodylate  0.32  Gm.   (5  grains),  1   cc. 

Prepared  by   the  U.   S.    Standard   Products   Co.,   Woodworth,   Wis. 

Ampul  Solution  Sodium   Cacodylate   0.45   Gm.    (7  grains),   1   cc. 

Prepared   by   the   U.    S.    Standard    Products   Co.,    Woodworth,   Wis. 

Ampul  Solution  Sodium   Cacodylate  0.2   Gm.    (3   grains),   5   cc. 

Prepared  by   the   U.    S.    Standard   Products   Co.,   Woodworth,   Wis. 

Ampul  Solution  Sodium   Cacodylate   0.32   Gm.    (5   grains),   5   cc. 

Prepared  by  the   U.    S.    Standard   Products   Co.,   Woodworth,   Wis. 

Ampul  Solution  Sodium  Cacodylate  0.45  Gm.   (7  grains),  5  cc. 

Prepared   by   the   U.    S.    Standard   Products   Co.,   Woodworth,   Wis. 


96      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

SOLARSON. — Solution  Chlorarsenol,  1  per  cent. — A  1  per 
cent  solution  of  ammonium  heptenchlorarsonate  CH3(CH2)4CC1 : 
CH.AsO.OH.ONH4,  rendered  isotonic  by  the  addition  of  sodium 
chloride.  Solarson  contains  from  0.255  to  0.275  Gm.  of  arsenic 
(As)  in  100  cc. 

Actions  and  Uses. — In  experiments  on  rabbits  the  toxicity  of 
solarson,  computed  on  the  basis  of  its  arsenic  content,  was  found 
to  be  somewhat  less  than  that  of  arsenic  acid  (H3ASO4)  when 
given  intravenously  or  subcutaneously :  In  dogs  it  was  about 
the  same.  Repeated  daily  subcutaneous  injections  of  an  amount 
of  solarson  equivalent  to  0.002  Gm.  arsenic  per  kilogram  was 
well  tolerated  by  rabbits.  An  experiment  on  a  dog  showed 
that  after  the  subcutaneous  administration  of  a  dose  of  solarson 
corresponding  to  0.02  Gm.  arsenic,  the  urine  collected  for 
twenty-four  hours  after  the  injection  contained  0.0052  Gm.  of 
arsenic  and  the  feces  in  forty-eight  hours  0.0012  Gm. ;  this  is 
taken  to  show  that  the  arsenic  of  solarson  is  readily  liberated 
in  the  system  and  is  well  utilized.  It  is  claimed  that  solarson 
has  an  advantage  over  the  cacodylates,  in  that  its  arsenic  is 
better  utilized,  and  over  the  arsenilates  in  that  subcutaneous 
and  intramuscular  injections  produce  less  pain  and  are  less 
liable  to  produce  toxic  effects. 

Solarson  is  used  as  a  means  of  obtaining  arsenic  effects  in 
the  treatment  of  anemia,  chlorosis,  malaria,  neuroses  and 
dermatoses. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  2  cc.  subcutaneously  or  intramuscularly. 

Manufactured    by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    Inc.,    New    York.      U.    S. 
patent    1,201,692    (Ausr.    17,    1916;    expired).      U.    S.   trademark   110,626. 
Solarson  Ampules,  1  cc. 

Solarson  is  prepared  by  neutralization  of  heptenchlorarsonic  acid 
with  ammonium  hydroxide  and  dilution  with  sufficient  water  to  produce 
a  1  per  cent  solution  of  ammonium  heptenchlorarsonic  acid;  sufficient 
sodium   chloride   is   added   to   render   the   solution   isotonic. 

The  heptenchlorarsonic  acid  used  in  the  preparation  of  solarson 
responds  to  the  following  tests:  It  melts  at  114  to  115  C.  and  contains 
29.21   per  cent  of  arsenic   (As). 

To  determine  the  arsenic  content  of  solarson,  treat  about  1  Gm.  of 
solarson,  accurately  weighed,  with  5  cc.  of  arsenic-free  nitric  acid 
and  5  cc.  of  arsenic-free  sulfuric  acid.  Boil  the  mixture  until  white 
fumes  appear;  allow  to  cool  and  add  50  cc.  of  water  and  boil  for  five 
minutes.  Allow  the  liquid  to  cool  and  bring  the  quantity  up  to  100  cc. 
with  distilled  water.  Add  50  cc.  of  this  liquid  in  portions  to  a  generat- 
ing Marsh  apparatus.  Collect  the  arsenic  in  a  weighed  arsenic  tube 
15  cm.  long,  heated  to  redness  in  two  places  and  cooled  in  two  other 
places  by  water-soaked  wicks.  Continue  the  collection  of  the  arsenic 
for  six  hours,  cool  the  arsenic  tube  and  weigh  it.  The  arsenic  found  in 
the  solarson  is  not  less  than  0.255  Gm.  nor  more  than  0.275  Gm.  per 
hundred  cubic  centimeters. 

TRYPARSAMIDE.  —  "Sodium  A^-phenylglycinamide-/'- 
arsonate,  containing,  when  dried  to  constant  weight  at  110  C., 
not  less  than  25.1  per  cent  and  not  more  than  25.5  per  cent 
of  arsenic  (As)."-[/.  S.  P. 


ARSENIC     COMPOUNDS  97 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Trypars- 
amidum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tryparsamide  was  first  used  as  a  tryp- 
anocidal agent  especially  in  the  treatment  of  trypanosomiasis 
due  to  T.  gamhiense  but  is  now  used  as  well  in  certain  cases 
of  syphilis  of  the  central  nervous   system. 

Tryparsamide  has  some  spirocheticidal  activity  and  has  an 
unusual  power  of  therapeutic  penetration,  especially  in  case 
of  the  central  nervous  system.  The  best  results  seem  to  have 
been  obtained  in  patients  with  early  dementia  paralytica;  it  is 
estimated  that  perhaps  from  40  to  50  per  cent  of  such  cases  have 
shown  varying  degrees  of  symptomatic  improvement.  Tabetic 
affections  have  responded  less  satisfactorily,  and  patients  with 
dementia  paralytica  with  advanced  mental  and  physical  deteri- 
oration have  shown  little  or  no  improvement ;  on  the  other 
hand,  the  drug  may  hasten  the  progress  of  the  disease  in  such 
cases.  Its  use  is  considered  inadvisable  in  forms  of  syphilis 
other  than  that  of  the  central  nervous  system,  and  it  is  held 
by  som,e  that  it  should  be  used  in  cerebrospinal  syphilis 
only  in  cases  that  have  failed  to  respond  favorably  to  the 
arsphenamines.  It  is  being  used  quite  extensively  as  one  of 
the  follow  up  treatments  after  malaria  therapy  in  syphilis  of 
the  central  nervous  system. 

The  toxic  effects  of  tryparsamide  resemble  those  of  other 
pentavalent  arsenic  compounds ;  the  worst  of  these  is  the  ten- 
dency to  produce  amblyopia,  but  cases  of  jaundice,  of  agranulo- 
cytosis, and  of  toxic  hepatitis  have  also  been  reported.  Before 
using  the  drug,  careful  consideration  should  be  given  to  the 
frequent  production  of  visual  injury,  which  may  be  serious  and 
permanent.  This  caution  is  especially  important  if  the  neuro- 
syphilis has  involved  the  optic  nerve.  The  eyeground  fields, 
including  color  fields,  should  always  be  mapped  out  before  its 
use  is  made.  Sometimes  after  one  or  two  injections  the  patient 
will  complain  of  blurred  vision  for  a  few  days.  Generally  if 
treatment  is  discontinued  for  a  week  or  so  and  then  the  injec- 
tions are  reinstituted,  there  will  be  no  further  difficulty.  The 
drug  is  said  to  "have  no  virtues  in  ophthalmic  syphilis." 

Dosage. — From  1.0  to  3.0  Gm.  for  adults,  depending  on  the 
purpose  for  which  the  drug  is  used.  In  general,  the  dose 
should  not  exceed  0.04  to  0.05  Gm.  per  kilogram  of  body 
weight,  and  such  doses  should  not  be  repeated  at  intervals  of 
less  than  one  week.  Tryparsamide  may  be  administered  sub- 
cutaneously,  intramuscularly  or  intravenously,  though  the  intra- 
venous administration  is  generally  employed.  The  drug  is 
dissolved  in  sterile  water  or  physiologic  solution  of  sodium 
chloride.    Tryparsamide  should  never  be  administered  by  mouth. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  under  U.  S. 
patents  1,280,119,  1,280,120,  1,280,121,  1,280,122,  1,280,123,  1,280,124  and 
1,280,126  (Sept.  24,  1918;  expired)  by  license  of  the  Rockefeller  Institute 
for  Medical  Research.     U.    S.  trademark  186.022. 


98      NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

ATROPINE  DERIVATIVES  AND  ANALOGUES 

Synthetic  Mydriatics 

The  usefulness  of  atropine  is  somewhat  diminished  by  the 
fact  that  it  affects,  simultaneously,  so  many  organs ;  on  the 
eye  its  effects  continue  much  longer  than  is  in  many  cases 
desirable.  Many  attempts  have  been  made  to  secure  drugs 
of  the  atropine  type  with  more  specific  actions  or  drugs  that 
have  a  more  transitory  effect  upon  the  eye.  One  of  these 
drugs  (homatropine)  is  a  synthetic  alkaloid  analogous  to 
atropine,  the  only  difference  being  that  it  contains  mandelic 
acid  instead  of  tropic  acid  in  combination  with  atropine;  euca- 
tropine  is  a  combination  of  mandelic  acid  and  a  base  similar 
to  that  contained  in  beta-eucaine. 

EUCATROPINE.  —  Eucatropina.  —  Eucatropine  Hydro- 
chloride. —  Euphthalmine.  —  Phenylglycolymethylvinyldiaceton- 
alkamine  Hydrochloride.  —  C5H6N(CH3)4(C6H5CHOH.COO) 
HCl  =  the  l,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-mandeloxypiperidine  hydro- 
chloride.    Eucatropine  was  first  introduced  as  euphthalmine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Eucatropine  produces  prompt  mydriasis 
free  from  anesthetic  action,  pain,  corneal  irritation  or  increase 
in  intra-ocular  tension.  It  has  little  or  no  eft'ect  on  accom- 
modation, and  such  effect  as  it  has  disappears  more  rapidly 
than  that  of  atropine,  cocaine,  homatropine,  etc.  In  its  effects 
on  the  general  system,  eucatropine,  very  closely  resembles  atro- 
pine. It  is  useful  as  an  aid  in  ophthalmoscopic  examinations 
in  place  of  atropine,  homatropine,  etc. 

Dosage. — From  2  to  3  drops  of  from  a  5  to  10  per  cent 
solution,  according  to  the  age  of  the  patient  and  the  nature 
of  the  case,  are  instilled  into  the  eye. 

Eucatropine  is  a  white,  granular,  odorless  powder;  permanent  in  the 
air.  It  is  very  soluble  in  water;  freely  soluble  in  alcohol  and  chloro- 
form; insoluble  in  ether.  Eucatropine  does  not  melt  below  183  C. 
The  aqueous  solution  of  eucatropine  (1  in  50)  is  clear  and  colorless 
and  is  neutral  to  litmus. 

Aqueous  solutions  of  eucatropine  (1  in  50)  are  precipitated  by  sodium 
carbonate  solution,  potassium  mercuric  iodide  solution,  iodine  solution, 
picric  acid  solution  and  many  other  reagents  for  the  alkaloids.  Add  a 
few  drops  of  nitric  acid  to  about  0.05  Gm.  of  eucatropine,  evaporate 
the  mixture  to  dryness  on  a  water  bath,  cool  the  residue  and  add  a 
few  drops  of  alcoholic  potassium  hydroxide  solution  together  with  a 
fragment  of  potassium  hydroxide:  no  violet  color  results  (distinction 
from  atropine,   scopolamine  or  hyoscyamine). 

Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  eucatropine,  accurately  weighed:  the^ 
ash  amounts  to  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  eucatropine,  accurately  weighed,  in  10  cc. 
of  water,  make  alkaline  with  ammonia  water  and  shake  with  successive 
portions  of  ether  until  extraction  is  complete,  washing  the  ether  layer 
each  time  with  water  and  adding  the  washings  to  the  original  solution 
before  the  next  extraction;  allow  the  solvent  to  evaporate  spontaneously, 
dry  the  residue  to  constant  weight  at  80  C.  and  weigh:  the  residue 
of  eucatropine  base  is  not  less  than  86  per  cent. 

Recrystallize  the  free  base  obtained  as  above  from  petroleum  ether: 
The  crystals  do   not  melt  below   111    C. 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  99 

Euphthalmine  Hydrochloride. — A  brand  of  eucatropine- 
N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Schering-Kahlbaum  A.  G..  Berlin,  Germany  (Scherinj; 
&  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent  663,754  (expired). 
U.    S.    trademark  35,541. 

HOMATROPINE  HYDROCHLORIDE.  —  Homatro- 
pinae  Hydrochloridum. — CwHaiOsNHCl. — The  hydrochloride 
of  the  alkaloid  homatropine,  obtained  by  the  condensation  of 
tropine  and  mandelic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Homatropine  hydrochloride  is  given  for 
the  same  indications  as  the  hydrobromide. 

Dosage. — It  is  applied  to  the  eye  in   1   per  cent  solution. 

Homatropine  hydrochloride  occurs  as  small  white  crystals,  solujjle 
in   water  and  alcohol  and  melting  at  from  216  to  217  C. 

The  color  test  for  the  identification  of  homatropine  hydrochloride 
and  the  tests  showing  the  absence  of  impurities  should  agree  with  those 
described   in  the   U.   S.   Pharmacopeia  under   homatropine   hydrobromide. 

Homatropine  Hydrochloride-Merck. — A  brand  of  homa- 
tropine hydrochloride-N.   N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Homatropine  Hydrochloride-Roche. — A  brand  of  lioma- 
tropine  hydrochloride-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hoffmann-LaRoche  &  Co.,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(Hofifmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.).     No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 


BARBITAL  AND  BARBITAL  COMPOUNDS 

Barbital  (diethylbarbituric  acid),  which  was  introduced  under 
the  name  of  "veronal,"  is  chemically  related  to  urea  and  the 
carbamate  hypnotics  : 

NHo  NH2  NH-CO  C2H., 

y  /  /  \  / 

oc  oc  oc  c 

\  \  \        /-  \ 

NH2  OQH5  NH-CO  C.oHr, 

Urea  Ethyl  carbamate     Diethylbarbituric  acid 

(Urethane)  (Barbital) 

The  ethyl  groups  may  be  replaced  by  other  alkyl  or  aryl 
radicals  tc  form  a  large  number  of  derivatives.  Compounds 
in  which  one  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  diethylbarbituric  acid  is 
replaced  by  an  isoamyl  group  (amytal),  a  normal  butyl  group 
(neonal),  an  wo-propyl  group  (ipral),  a  cyclo-hexenyl  group 
(phanodorn),    an    n-hexyl    group     (ortal),    a     1-methyl    butyl 


100     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

group  (pentobarbital),  and  a  phenyl  group  (phenobarbital,  lumi- 
nal), and  those  in  which  both  of  the  ethyl  groups  are  replaced 
by  two  allyl  groups  (dial),  in  which  one  ethyl  group  is  replaced 
by  uo-propyl  and  the  other  by  a  brom-allyl  group  (nostal), 
and  in  which  one  ethyl  group  is  replaced  by  an  iso-huty\  and 
the  other  by  an  allyl  group  (sandoptal),  are  accepted  for 
N.  N.  R.  These  "acids"  are  only  sparingly  soluble  in  water ; 
but  freely  soluble  compounds  are  formed  by  substitution  of 
sodium  for  the  hydrogen  of  one  of  the  NH  groups  of  such 
acids  to  make  sodium  barbital  (soluble  barbital-U.  S.  P.). 
sodium  phenobarbital  (soluble  phenobarbital-U,  S.  P.),  pento- 
barbital sodium,  and  others  described  in  N.  N.  R. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Barbital  and  its  derivatives  are  effective 
sedatives  and  hypnotics,  and  are  used  as  such  in  simple  insomnia, 
hysteria,  neurasthenia,  thyroid  disease  and  chorea,  in  epilepsy 
in  the  intervals  between  the  seizures,  in  mental  disturbances 
and  in  impending  delirium  tremens.  They  also  augment  the 
action  of  analgesics  such  as  aminopyrine,  acetophenetidin  and 
acetylsalicylic  acid,  and  they  are  used  in  combination  with 
these  analgetics  for  the  relief  of  pain,  especially  of  neuralgic 
character. 

They  are  decidedly  more  actively  hypnotic,  and  somewhat 
more  analgetic  than  chloral  hydrate ;  they  do  not  produce  local 
irritation  and  the  taste  is  not  disagreeable.  The  margin 
between  the  ordinary  therapeutic  dose  and  the  toxic  dose  is 
somewhat  wider  than  that  with  chloral  hydrate,  and  small 
therapeutic  doses  have  little  effect  on  the  blood  pressure  and 
respiration.  Several  of  the  derivatives  of  barbital  are  more 
actively  hypnotic  than  the  parent  substance  and  may  be  pre- 
ferred, especially  as  a  sedative;  but  there  is  no  satisfactory 
evidence  that  the  margin  between  the  therapeutic  and  toxic 
doses  of  these  derivatives  is  wider  than  in  the  case  of  barbital 
itself.  The  action  is  somewhat  slower  than  with  chloral 
hydrate,  but  more  rapid  than  with  sulfonmethane.  In  the 
absence  of  pain,  small  doses  usually  induce  sleep  within  half 
an  hour.  The  sleep  lasts  for  four  to  eight  hours,  varying 
with  individuals,  with  the  drug  used  and  with  the  dose.  The 
patient  generally  wakens  refreshed,  but  occasionally  there  are 
lassitude,  vertigo,  headache,  nausea  and  diarrhea  on  the  fol- 
lowing day  even  after  moderate  doses.  Skin  eruptions  are 
sometimes  observed.  Fatal  collapse  (by  peripheral  paralysis  of 
the  blood  vessels)  has  occurred  after  relatively  small  doses. 
Toxic  doses  cause  lowered  body  temperature,  depression  of  the 
respiration  and  circulation,  and  feeble  heart  beat.  There  is 
long-continued  stupor,  sometimes  interrupted  by  excitement. 
The  condition  has  been  confused  with  uremia,  epidemic  enceph- 
alitis and  opium  poisoning.  The  slower  the  excretion  of  the 
various  members  of  this  group,  the  more  lasting  is  the  action, 
and  with  very  slow  excretion  ordinary  doses  may  produce 
cumulative  toxic  effects  after  some  time.  It  is  therefore  safer 
to  intermit  the  administration  at  least  weekly.     Continued  use 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  101 

may  lead  to  habitual  addiction.  Barbital  preparations  are 
usually  administered  orally  or  rectally.  In  rare  instances  intra- 
venous injections  may  be  used  (/.  A.  M.  A.  97:1886  [Dec.  19] 
1931;  101:208  [July  15]  1933),  but  this  method  does  not  offer 
any  advantages  except  when  oral  administration  is  not  feasible 
or  when  unusually  prompt  action  is  imperative.  Recent  experi- 
mental work  indicates  that  fairly  large  doses  are  effective 
against  poisoning  by  the  local  anesthetics  like  cocaine  and  pro- 
caine, and  their  salts,  and  against  strychnine  and  picrotoxin. 

ALURATE. — Allylisopropylbarbituric  acid. — Allylisopropyl- 
malonyl   urea.  —  (C3H5)(C3H7)C-CONHCONH-CO.     Alurate 

differs  from  barbital  (diethylbarbituric  acid)  in  that  both  of  the 
ethyl  groups  of  the  latter  are  replaced,  one  by  an  allyl  group 
and  the  other  by  an  isopropyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  alurate  are  essen- 
tially similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  alurate  is  more  active 
than  barbital  and  is  used  in  correspondingly  smaller  doses. 
Fractional  doses  are  used  as  a  sedative  and  larger  doses  as  a 
hypnotic.  Therapeutic  doses  act  on  the  higher  centers  of  the 
brain  and  are  claimed  not  to  exert  any  apparent  injurious 
effect  on  the  heart,  circulation  or  kidneys. 

Dosage. — For  mild  cases  of  insomnia,  0.065  Gm.  (1  grain) 
may  be  administered  at  bedtime.  In  obstinate  cases,  0.13  Gm. 
(2  grains)   may  be  given. 

Manufactured  by  Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.     U.  S.  patent 
1,444,802    (Feb.    13,    1923;    expires   1940).     U.    S.   trademark    230,059. 
Alurate    Tablets,    1   gr. 

Elixir  Alurate:  Each  fluidrachm  contains  alurate  J4  grain  (approxi- 
mately 0.9  Gm.  per  hundred  cubic  centimeters)  in  a  palatable  elixir  con- 
taining alcohol,  20  per  cent. 

Alurate  occurs  as  a  fine,  white,  odorless,  crystalline  powder,  with  a 
slightly  bitter  taste;  completely  soluble  in  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether; 
very  slightly  soluble  in  cold  water;  insoluble  in  the  paraffin  hydrocar- 
bons. A  saturated  aqueous  solution  is  acid  to  litmus  paper.  Alurate 
melts  at  140  to  141.5   C. 

Place  about  0.3  Gm.  of  alurate  in  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  a 
mixture  of  1  cc.  of  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  5  cc.  of 
water,  shake  the  contents  for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper  and 
divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride 
solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia 
water;  to  the  other  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white 
precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia  water.  Boil  about 
0.5  (jm.  of  alurate  with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion: it  is  decomposed  with  the  evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  alurate  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  not  more  than  a  slight 
yellow  color  results.  Place  about  1  Gm.  of  alurate  in  a  25  cc.  glass 
stoppered  cylinder,  add  10  cc.  of  water,  shake  the  mixture  for  one 
minute,  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion 
add  1  cc.  of  acetic  acid  and  0.5  cc.  of  a  saturated  bromine  water:  an 
immediate  discoloration  occurs;  to  the  other  portion  add  0.1  cc.  of  tenth- 
normal potassium  permanganate  solution:  a  yellow  color  appears  imme- 
diately, turning  to  brown. 

Boil  about  0.5  Gm.  of  alurate  with  SO  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes: 
no  odor  develops;  cool  and  filter:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of  the 
filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  1   cc.  of   diluted  nitric  acid  and   1  cc. 


102     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride)  f  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted 
nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate);  no  colora- 
tion or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of 
heavy  metals).  Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  alurate,  accurately  weighed: 
there  is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent  residue.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of 
alurate,  accurately  weighed  in  25  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alcohol, 
dilute  with  an  equal  volume  of  water  previously  boiled  to  remove 
carbon  dioxide  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution, 
using  thymolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normal 
sodium  hydroxide  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  98.5 
per   cent  nor   more  than   101.5   per   cent  allylisopropylbarbituric  acid. 

AMYTAL.  —  Isoamylethylbarbituric  acid.  —  Isoamylethyl- 
malonylurea.  —  2,4,6-trioxy-5-isoamylethylpyrimidin.  —  (CsHn) 
(GH5)CC0NHC0NHC0.     Amytal    differs    from    barbital 

(diethylbarbituric  acid)   in  that  one  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  the 
latter  is  replaced  by  an  iso-amyl  group  in  the  former. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  amytal  resemble 
those  of  barbital.  It  is  proposed  as  a  sedative  and  hypnotic 
in  the  control  of  insomnia  and  as  a  preliminary  to  surgical 
anesthesia. 

Dosage. — It  is  given  orally  in  tablet  form  with  water  or  hot 
milk.  As  a  sedative:  0.02  to  0.04  Gm.  (J/^  to  ^  grain)  two 
or  three  times  daily.  As  a  hypnotic:  0.1  to  0.3  Gm.  (lJ/2  to 
5  grains)  one-half  to  one  hour  before  sleep  is  desired.  For 
use  before  local  or  general  anesthesia  the  dosage  ranges 
between  0.2  and  0.6  Gm.  (3  to  10  grains),  being  determined 
by  a  large  number  of  factors  (age,  etc.).  It  can  be  used  safely 
for  such  purposes  only  by  those  who  have  had  much  experience 
and  are  familiar  with  the  literature  concerning  such  use.  As 
an  antispasmodic  in  tetanus,  0.4  to  0.8  Gm.  (6  to  12  grains) 
may  be  required  to  control  convulsions.  In  some  patients  bar- 
bital derivatives  produce  restlessness  and  excitement,  and  to 
these   patients  amytal   should  not  be   administered. 

Manufactured    by    Eli    Lilly    &    Co.,    Indianapolis,    Ind.      U.    S.    patent 
1,514,573    (Nov.  4,   1924;  expires   1941).     U.   S.  trademark  161,125. 
Tablets  Amytal,    y^    grain. 
Tablets  Amytal,    }4    Grain. 
Tablets  Amytal,    ^    grain. 
Tablets  Amytal,   li/2    grains. 

Amytal  occurs  as  a  white  crystalline,  odorless  powder,  with  a  slightly 
bitter  taste;  completely  soluble  in  alcohol  and  ether;  very  slightly  soluble 
in  cold  water  and  insoluble  in  the  paraffin  hydrocarbons.  A  saturated 
aqueous  solution  is  acid  to  litmus  paper.     It  melts  at   153-155   C. 

Place  0.3  Gm,  of  amytal  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  a 
mixture  of  1  cc.  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  5  cc.  of  water, 
shake  the  contents  for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into 
two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution:  a 
white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  10  cc,  of  ammonia  water;  to  the 
other  portion  add  5  cc,  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate 
results,  soluble  in  5  cc,  of  ammonia  water.  Boil  0.5  Gm.  of  amytal 
with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is  decomposed 
with   the  evolution   of  ammonia. 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  amytal  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution  is 
colorless  {readily  carbonizable  substances).  Boil  0.5  Gm.  of  amytal 
with  50  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes:   no  odor  develops;  cool  and  filter: 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  103 

separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with 
1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution 
{chloride)-,  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of 
barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate);  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on 
saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide   (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  amytal,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  amytal  accu- 
rately weighed  in  25  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alcohol;  dilute  with 
an  equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  using  thymolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount 
of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  consumed  corresponds  to 
not  less  than  98.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  101.5  per  cent  of  isoamyl- 
ethylbarbituric   acid. 

BARBITAL.— Diethylbarbituric  Acid  Barbitone.— Diethyl- 
nialonylurea.— For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under 
Barbitalum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  the  preceding  article,  Barbital  and 
Barbital  Compounds.  Barbital  is  quickly  absorbed,  especially 
when  it  is  given  in  solution.  Small  doses  induce  sleep,  appar- 
ently with  little  other  effect,  and  are  relatively  safe ;  but  fatali- 
ties have  followed  its  indiscriminate  use. 

Dosage. — As  hypnotic,  0.5  Gm.  (8  grains),  best  prescribed 
in  the  form  of  powder  to  be  given  in  hot  fluid,  such  as  hot 
milk,  half  an  hour  or  an  hour  before  bed  time.  Pills  or  tablets 
should  be  crushed  before  swallowing,  to  insure  absorption. 
From  0.1  to  0.15  Gm.  (ly^  to  2  grains)  are  used  with  anal- 
getics for  the  relief  of  pain. 

Barbital-Abbott. — A  brand  of  barbital-U.  S.  P. 
Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Barital-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  barbital-U.   S.   P. 
Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

Barbital-Merck. — A  brand  of  barbital-U.  S.  P. 

Prepared  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

Veronal.— A  brand  of  barbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  782,739    (Feb.   14,   1905;   expired).     U.   S.  trademark  40,115. 

Veronal  Tablets,  5  grains. 

Elixir  of  Veronal:  Each  fluid  drachm  contains  veronal  2  grains  in  a 
menstruum   containing   alcohol    33.5   per   cent. 

DIAL-CIBA.  —  Diallylbarbituric  acid. — Diallylmalonylurea. 
— 2,4,6-trioxy-5-diallylpyrimidin. — 

(C3H5)2CCONHCONHCO.     Dial-Ciba  differs  from  barbital 

(diethylbarbituric  acid)   in  that  both  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  the 
latter  are  replaced  by  allyl  groups. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  dial-Ciba  are 
essentially  similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  dial-Ciba  is  more 
active  than  barbital  and  it  is  used  in  correspondingly  smaller 
doses.     Fractional  doses  are  used  as  a  sedative  and  larger  doses 


104     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

as  a  hypnotic.  Therapeutic  doses  act  on  the  higher  centers 
of  the  brain  and  exert  no  injurious  action  on  respiration  or 
circulation.  The  hypnotic  action  is  induced  within  from  one- 
half  to  one  hour. 

Dosage. — As  a  sedative :  0.03  Gm.  (^  grain)  three  or  four 
times  daily.  As  a  hypnotic:  0.1  to  0.3  Gm.  (1^  to  4j/2  grains) 
one-half  to  one  hour  before  sleep  is  desired. 

Manufactured  by  the  Society  of  Chemical  Industry  in  Basle,  Switzer- 
land (Ciba  Company,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent 
1,042,265    (Oct.  22,   1912;  expired).     U.   S.  trademark  98204  and  126088. 

Elixir  Dial-Ciba:  Each  4  cc.  (1  fluidrachm)  contains  0.05  Gm.  (3/^ 
grain)    in  a   menstruum   containing  alcohol   25    per   cent. 

Solution  Dial-Ciba  imth  Urethane,  Sterile  Ampules,  1  cc:  Each 
cubic  centimeter  contains  dial-Ciba  0.1  Gm.  (1^  grains),  ethyl  carbamate 
(urethane)  0.4  Gm.  (6  grains),  monoethylurea  0.4  Gm.  (6  grains)  and 
water   q.    s. 

Actions  and  Uses. -^The  same  as  those  of  dial-Ciba;  it  is  claimed  that 
the  ethyl  carbamate  and  monoethylurea  are  used  as  solvents,  and,  in  the 
amounts  present,  do  not  greatly  affect  the  action  of  the  dial-Ciba  content. 
Solution  dial-Ciba  with  urethane  is  proposed  for  intramuscular  adminis- 
tration and,  only  when  pressing  emergency  exists,  for  intravenous 
injection. 

The  solution  being  strongly  hypertonic,  subcutaneous  injection  should 
never    be    employed. 

Solution  Dial-Ciba  with  Urethane,  Sterile  Ampules,  2  cc:  Each  cubic 
centimeter  contains  dial-Ciba  0.1  Gm.  (1^  grains),  ethyl  carbamate 
(urethane)  0.4  Gm.  (6  grains),  monoethylurea  0.4  Gm.  (6  grains)  and 
water  q.    s. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  dial-Ciba;  it  is  claimed  that 
the  ethyl  carbamate  and  monoethylurea  are  used  as  solvents,  and,  in  the 
amounts  present,  do  not  greatly  affect  the  action  of  the  dial-Ciba  content. 
Solution  dial-Ciba  with  urethane  is  proposed  for  intramuscular  adminis- 
tration and,  only  when  pressing  emergency  exists,  for  intravenous 
injection. 

The  solution  being  strongly  hypertonic,  subcutaneous  injections  should 
never  be  employed. 

Tablets  Dial-Ciba,   0.1   Gm.   (VA   grains). 

Dial-Ciba  occurs  as  a  fine,  white,  crystalline  powder,  with  a  slightly 
bitter  taste;  completely  soluble  in  alcohol  and  ether;  very  slightly 
soluble  in  cold  water;  insoluble  in  the  paraffin  hydrocarbons.  A  satu- 
rated aqueous  solution  is  acid  to  litmus  paper.  Dial-Ciba  melts  at 
171-173  C. 

Place  approximately  0.3  Gm.  dial-Ciba  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered 
cylinder,  add  a  mixture  of  1  cc.  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution 
and  5  cc.  of  water,  shake  the  contents  for  one  minute,  filter  through 
paper  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  mer- 
curic chloride  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  10  cc. 
of  ammonia  water;  to  the  other  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solu- 
tion :  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  5  cc.  of  ammonia  water. 
Boil  0.5  Gm.  with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution: 
it  is  decomposed  with  the  evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  in 
1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  liquid  assumes  a  yellow  color,  changing 
slowly  to  a  brownish-red,  finally  to  a  dark  red.  Place  1  Gm.  in  a 
25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  10  cc.  of  water,  shake  for  one 
rninute,  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  por- 
tion add  0.5  cc.  of  a  saturated  bromine  water:  an  immediate  discolora- 
tion occurs;  to  the  other  portion  add  0.1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  potassium 
permanganate:   a  yellow  color  appears  immediately. 

Boil  0.5  Gm.  of  dial-Ciba  with  SO  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes:  no 
odor  develops;  cool  and  filter:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of  the 
filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc. 
of  silver  nitrate  solution   (chloride);  no  turbidity  with  1   cc.  of  diluted 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  105 


nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate);  no  coloration 
or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy 
metals). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  dial-Ciba,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately 
weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  previously  neutralised  alcohol;  dilute  with  an 
equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide 
solution,  using  thymolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth- 
normal sodium  hydroxide  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  98.5  per  cent,  nor  more  than  101.5  per  cent  of  diallylbarbituric 
acid. 

IPRAL    CALCIUM.— Calcium   ethylisopropylbarbiturate.— 


Ca[(C2H5)(C3HT)CCONHCO:  NCO]2-3H20.  The  calcium  salt 
of  ethylisopropylmalonyl  urea. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ipral  calcium  has  the  therapeutic  proper- 
ties of  barbituric  acid.  It  is  soluble  in  water  and  is  absorbed 
promptly.  It  is  claimed  that  it  is  excreted  rapidly,  but  some 
action  commonly  persists  for  twenty-four  hours.  In  therapeutic 
doses  it  affects  the  higher  cerebral  centers  almost  exclusively, 
and  such  doses  exert  no  perceptible  effect  on  the  heart  or  cir- 
culation directly. 

Ipral  calcium  is  used  as  a  hypnotic  to  combat  restlessness, 
irritability  and  sleeplessness.  It  is  claimed  that  tolerance  to 
ipral  calcium  is  not  developed  readily,  but  that  its  action  is  so 
persistent  that  a  patient  frequently  sleeps  on  the  night  succeed- 
ing that  when  the  hypnotic  was   administered. 

Dosage. — From  0.12  to  0.25  Gm.  (2  to  4  grains)  followed 
by  a  cupful  of  hot  water,  tea  or  milk. 

Manufactured    by    E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons,    New    York.      U.    S.    patent 
1,255,951    (Feb.    12,    1918;    expired);    1,576,014    (March   9,    1926;   expires 
1943).     U.  S.  trademark  208,813. 
Ipral  Calcium  Tablets,  ^  grain. 
Ipral  Calcium  Tablets,  2   grains. 

Ipral  calcium  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder,  with  a 
slightly  bitter  taste.  It  is  soluble  in  about  40  parts  of  water  at  25  C.; 
insoluble  in  alcohol.  An  aqueous  solution  is  alkaline  in  reaction  to 
litmus.  Add.  0.2  Gm.  to  20  cc.  of  water,  acidify  with  5  cc.  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid,  filter,  make  filtrate  ammoniacal,  then  add  2  cc.  of 
ammonium  oxalate  solution:  a  precipitate  forms,  insoluble  on  addition 
of_  acetic  acid  in  excess,  but  soluble  on  the  addition  of  hydrochloric 
acid.  Wash  well  the  residue  from  the  foregoing  with  water,  dry  at 
100  C.:  the  melting  point  should  be  from  200  to  203  C.  To  0.05  Gm. 
of  residue  add  2  cc.  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  residue  dissolves. 
Place  2  Gm.  in  a  glass  stoppered  flask,  treat  with  25  cc.  of  carbon 
dioxide-free  water  and  agitate  occasionally  over  a  period  of  two  hours; 
by  decantation  separate  the  insoluble  material,  transfer  the  insoluble 
residue  to  a  test  tube,  treat  with  diluted  sulfuric  acid  and  pass  the 
emitted  gases  into  20  cc.  of  barium  hydroxide  solution :  not  more  than 
a  barely  perceptible  turbidity  should  result  (limit  of  carbonate).  Dry 
about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.:  the  loss 
does  not  exceed  12  per  cent.  Transfer  about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  50  cc.  of  ether,  stopper  and  shake  the 
contents  for  five  minutes;  decant  the  supernatant  liquid  through  filter 
paper  and  repeat,  using  25  cc.  and  15  cc.  portions,  respectively,  of 
ether;  evaporate  the  filtrate  to  dryness  in  a  tared  beaker  and  dry  to 
constant    weight    at    100    C:    the    residue    should    not    weigh    more   than 


106     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


4  per  cent  (limit  of  uncombined  ethyliso propyl  barbituric  acid).  Dis- 
solve about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  in  water,  acidify  with  10  cc. 
of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  extract  with  five  successive  portions  of 
ether,  allow  the  solvent  to  evaporate  spontaneously,  dry  the  residue  to 
constant  weight  at  100  C,  and  weigh:  the  weight  of  ethylisopropyl 
barbituric  acid  is  not  less  than  78.5  per  cent,  nor  more  than  83.0  per 
cent.  Ignite  about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  cool,  treat  the  residue 
with  5  cc.  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  transfer  to  a  250  cc.  beaker,  add 
25  cc.  water  and  ammonia  water  until  ammoniacal,  warm,  add  20  cc. 
boiling  ammonium  oxalate  solution,  boil  and  allow  to  stand  over  night; 
collect  the  precipitate  on  an  ashless  filter  paper,  wash  with  diluted 
ammonia  water  (1  part  of  ammonia  water  to  5  parts  of  water),  transfer 
the  precipitate  to  a  platinum  crucible,  and  ignite  to  constant  weight: 
the  weight  of  calcium  oxide  corresponds  to  not  less  than  8.0  per  cent 
nor  more  than  8.5  per  cent  calcium. 

IPRAL    SODIUM.  — Sodium    ethylisopropylbarbiturate. — 


Na(C2H5)(C3H0C-CONH-CO:NCO.     The     sodium     salt     of 
ethylisopropylmalonyl  urea. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ipral  sodium  has  the  therapeutic  proper- 
ties of  barbituric  acid.  It  is  soluble  in  water  and  is  absorbed 
promptly.  It  is  claimed  that  it  is  excreted  rapidly,  but  some 
action  commonly  persists  for  twenty-four  hours.  In  therapeutic 
doses  it  affects  the  higher  cerebral  centers  almost  exclusively, 
and  such  doses  exert  no  perceptible  effect  on  the  heart  or 
circulation  directly. 

Ipral  sodium  is  used  as  a  hypnotic  to  combat  restlessness, 
irritability  and  sleepnessness.  It  is  claimed  that  tolerance  to 
ipral  sodium  is  not  developed  readily,  and  that  its  action  is 
persistent. 

Dosage. — From  0.12  to  0.25  Gm.  (2  to  4  grains)  followed  by 
a  cupful  of  hot  water,  tea  or  milk. 

Manufactured   by    E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons,    New   York.      U.    S.    patents 
1,255,951     (Feb.    12,     1918;    expired);    and    1,576,014    (March    9,     1926; 
expires    1943).      U.    S.    trademark    208,813. 
Ipral  Sodium  Tablets,  4  grains. 

Ipral-Aminopyrine    Tablets,    4.33    grains:     Each    tablet    contains    ipral 
(ethylisopropyl-barbituric    acid)    2    grains,    and    aminopyrine    2.33    grains. 
Caution:  Aqueous  solutions  of  ipral  sodium  are  not  stable  but  decom- 
pose on   standing;   on  boiling,   a   precipitation  occurs. 

Ipral  sodium  is  a  white  hydroscopic  powder,  soluble  in  water, 
slightly  soluble  in  alcohol  and  practically  insoluble  in  ether  and 
chloroform.  An  aqueous  solution  of  ipral  sodium  has  an  alkaline 
reaction  to  litmus. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add  an 
excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  collect  the  resultant  ethylisopropyl 
barbituric  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry  at  100  C.:  it  melts  at  200-205 
C.  Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium:  the  residue  responds  to 
tests  for  sodium  carbonate.  Boil  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium 
with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is  decom- 
posed with  evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  about  0.3  Gm.  of  ipral 
sodium  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  por- 
tion add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution:  a  white  precipitate 
results,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia;  to  the  other  portion  add 
5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble 
in  an  excess  of  ammonia. 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  107 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium  in  50  cc.  of  water,  add  5  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  filter  through  paper:  separate  portions  of 
10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  on  the  addition  of 
1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride) ;  no  turbidity  on  the  addi- 
tion of  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate).  To  about  0.2  Grn. 
of  ipral  sodium  in  25  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid,  filter  through  paper:  the  filtrate  yields  no  coloration  or  precipi- 
tation on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy  metals). 
Add  about  0.1  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium  to  1  cc.  of  surf  uric  acid:  the 
solution    is    colorless    (readily    carbonizahle  substances). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  50  cc.  of  anhydrous  ether,  stopper  and 
shake  for  ten  minutes;  decant  the  supernatant  liquid  through  filter 
paper  and  repeat  twice,  using  25  cc.  and  15  cc.  portions,  respec- 
tively, of  ether,  utilizing  the  same  filter;  evaporate  the  combined 
filtrates  to  dryness  in  a  tared  beaker  and  dry  to  constant  weight 
at  90  C. :  the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.2  per  cent  (uncombined 
ethylisopropyl  barbituric  acid). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant 
weight  at  100  C.:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  2  per  cent.  Transfer 
about  0.5  Gm.  of  ipral  sodium,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable 
Squibb  separatory  funnel,  add  50  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  addition 
of  10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  extract  with  eight  successive 
portions  of  ether  of  25  cc.  each,  evaporate  the  combined  ethereal 
extractions  to  dryness  in  a  stream  of  warm  air  and  dry  to  constant 
weight  at  100  C. :  the  amount  of  ethylisopropyl  barbituric  acid  cor- 
responds to  not  less  than  88.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  90.5  per  cent, 
calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  the  acidulated  aqueous 
portion  from  the  foregoing  immiscible  solvent  extraction  to  a  tared 
platinum  dish  and  evaporate  to  dryness  on  a  steam  bath;  to  the 
residue  obtained,  add  5  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid;  heat  cautiously  until  the 
excess  of  sulfuric  acid  has  been  volatilized;  repeat  twice,  using  por- 
tions of  1  cc.  each  of  sulfuric  acid  each  time;  add  about  0.5  Gm.  of 
ammonium  carbonate;  ignite  to  constant  weight,  and  weigh  as  sodium 
sulfate:  the  percentage  of  sodium  corresponds  to  not  less  than  9.5 
per  cent  nor  more  than  11.5  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance. 

NEONAL.  —  n-Butylethylbarbituric  acid.  —  «-Butylethyl- 
maloiiylurea.  —  2,4.6-trioxv-5-H-Butylethylpyrimidin  —  (C4H9) 
(QHOC-CONHCONHCO.  — Neonal    differs    from    barbital- 


U.  S.  P.  (diethylbarbituric  acid)  in  that  one  of  the  ethyl  groups 
of  the  former  is  replaced  by  a  normal  butyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  neonal  are 
essentially  similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  it  is  about  three 
times  as  active  as  the  latter ;  hence  it  is  used  in  correspond- 
ingly smaller  doses.  It  is  claimed  that  it  exerts  a  sedative 
action  to  an  exceptional  degree,  and  that  it  is  useful  there- 
fore in  high  nervous  tension,  neuroses  and  other  conditions 
in  which  a  sedative  is  required. 

Dosage. — From  0.05  to  0.4  Gm.  (^^  to  6  grains).  For  mild 
insomnias  0.05  to  0.1  Gm.  (%  to  1^  grains)  is  stated  ordi- 
narily to  produce  sleep.  A  dose  of  0.4  Gm.  (6  grains)  is  the 
maximum  dose  which  should  be  required  in  the  course  of 
twenty-four  hours,  administered  in  divided  doses. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.,  under 
U.  S.  patent  1,609,520  (Dec.  7,  1926;  expires  1943)  by  license  of  Les 
fitablissements  Poulenc  Freres.   Paris.     U.   S.  trademark  175,580. 

Neonal  Tablets,   0.1   Gm. 


108     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Neonal  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder,  with  a  slightly 
bitter  taste;  readily  soluble  in  alcohol,  about  1  in  5,  and  ether  about 
1  in  10;  very  slightly  soluble  in  cold  water;  insoluble  in  the  paraffin 
hydrocarbons.  A  saturated  aqueous  solution  is  acid  to  litmus  paper. 
It  melts  at  124-127  C.     It  is  stable  in  air. 

Place  0.3  Gm.  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  a  mixture  of 
1  cc.  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  5  cc.  of  water,  shake  the 
contents  for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  por- 
tions; to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution:  a  white 
precipitate  results,  soluble  in  10  cc.  of  ammonia  water;  to  the  other 
portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results, 
soluble  in  5  cc.  of  ammonia  water.  Boil  0.5  Gm.  with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per 
cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is  decomposed  with  the  evolution  of 
ammonia. 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution  is  colorless 
(readily  carhcmizable  substances).  Boil  0.5  Gm.  with  SO  cc.  water  for 
two  minutes:  no  odor  develops;  cool  and  filter:  separate  portions  of 
10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted 
nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride) ,  no  turbidity 
with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution 
(sulfate);  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen 
sulfide   (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue  does  not 
exceed  0.1   per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  previously 
neutralized  alcohol,  dilute  with  an  equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate 
with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  using  thymolphthalein  as 
an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution 
consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  98.5  per  cent  nor  more  than 
101.5   per   cent  of   butylethylbarbituric  acid. 

NOSTAL.  —  Isopropyl  bromallyl  barbituric  acid.  —  5-iso- 
propyl-5-i3-bromallyl  barbituric  acid. —  (C3H7)  [CHoCBr  :  CH2] 
C-CONH-CONHCO.— Nostal  differs  from  barbital-U.   S.   P. 


(diethylbarbituric  acid)  in  that  both  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  the 
former  have  been  replaced,  one  by  an  isopropyl  group  and  the 
other  by  a  substituted  brominated  allyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  nostal  are  essen- 
tially similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  nostal  is  more  active  than 
barbital  and  is  used  in  correspondingly  smaller  doses.  Frac- 
tional doses  are  used  as  a  sedative  and  larger  doses  as  an 
hypnotic.  Therapeutic  doses  act  on  the  higher  centers  of  the 
brain  and  are  claimed  not  to  exert  any  apparent  injurious  effect 
on  the  heart,  circulation  or  kidneys. 

Dosage. — As  a  sedative:  0.05  to  0.1  Gm.  (^  to  1^  grains). 
As  an  hypnotic:  0.1  to  0.3  Gm.  (1^  to  4>^  grains);  for  chil- 
dren, 0.05  to  0.1  Gm.  (%  to  1^^  grains)  according  to  age. 
Nostal  should  be  administered  preferably  with  a  hot  drink. 

Manufactured   by    J.    D.    Riedel-E.    de    Haen,   A.    G.    Berlin,    Germany 
(Riedel-de  Haen,   Inc.,   New  York,   distributor).     U.   S.   patent    1,622,129 
(March   22,   1927;   expires   1944).     U.   S.  trademark  270,750. 
Nostal  Tablets,   0.1   Gm.   ^i^   grains). 

Nostal  occurs  as  a  colorless,  .crystalline,  odorless  powder,  with  a 
slightly  bitter  taste;  readily  soluble  in  alcohol,  glacial  acetic  acid  and 
acetone;  sparingy  soluble  in  ether,  chloroform,  benzene  and  water.  A 
saturated  aqueous  solution  is  acid  to  litmus  paper.  Nostal  melts  at 
177-179   C. 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  109 

Fuse  about  0.1  Gm.  of  nostal  and  1  Gm.  of  crushed  potassium 
hydroxide  previously  moistened  with  1  cc.  of  alcohol  in  a  nickel 
crucible:  it  is  decomposed  with  the  evolution  of  ammonia;  cool,  dis- 
solve the  residue  in  10  cc.  of  water,  add  10  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid, 
filter  through  paper;  to  the  filtrate  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution: 
a  cftrdy,  dirty  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  a  large  excess  of 
stronger  ammonia  water.  Place  approximately  0.3  Gm.  of  nostal  in  a 
25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  a  mixture  of  1  cc.  normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution  and  5  cc.  of  water,  shake  the  contents  for  one 
minute,  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one 
portion  add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution:  a  white  precipitate 
results,  soluble  in  10  cc.  of  ammonia  water;  to  the  other  portion  add 
5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in 
5   cc.  of  ammonia  water. 

Boil  about  0.5  Gm.  of  nostal  with  50  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes: 
no  odor  develops;  cool  and  filter:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of 
the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and 
1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (soluble  halides);  no  turbidity  with 
1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution 
(sulfate);  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen 
sulfide    (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  nostal,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately 
weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alcohol,  dilute  with  an 
equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide 
solution,  using  thymolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth- 
normal sodium  hydroxide  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  98.5  per  cent,  nor  more  than  101.5  per  cent,  5-isopropyl-5-(fl) 
bromallyl-barbituric  acid.  Transfer  about  0.25  Gm.,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  bomb  tube;  determine  the  bromine  content  by  the  Carius  method: 
the  amount  of  bromine  found  should  be  not  less  than  27.5  per  cent, 
nor  more  than  27.9  per  cent. 

ORTAL-SODIUM.  — Sodium  ?z-hexylethyl  barbiturate.— 
Sodium  ;z-hexylethyl  malonylurea. — 

Na(CH3CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2)(aH5)CCONHc6:NCO.  The 

monosodium  salt  of  n-hexylethyl  barbituric  acid.  Ortal-sodium 
differs  from  soluble  barbital-U.  S.  P.  (sodium  diethylbarbitu- 
rate),  in  that  one  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  the  latter  is  replaced 
in  the  former  by  a  w-hexyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  ortal  sodium  are 
essentially  similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  ortal  sodium  is 
more  active  than  barbital  and  it  is  used  in  correspondingly 
smaller  doses. 

Dosage. — From  0.2  to  0.4  Gm.  (3  to  6  grains)  followed  by  a 
glass  of  water.  It  is  rarely  necessary  to  give  more  than  1  Gm. 
(15  grains)  in  twenty-four  hours.  When  oral  administration 
is  contraindicated,  ortal  sodium  may  be  administered  rectally. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company.  Detroit.  U.  S.  patent 
1,624,546    (April   12,   1927;   expires   1944).     U.   S.  trademark  302,616. 

Capsules  Ortal  Sodium,  54  grain  (0.05  Gm.). 

Capsules  Ortal  Sodium,  3  grains   (0.2  Gm.). 

Capsules  Ortal  Sodium,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.). 

Kapseals  Ortal  Sodium  with  Amidopyrine :  Each  kapseal  (hermetically 
sealed  capsule)  contains  ortal  sodium  lJ/$  grains  (0.1  Gm.)  and  amido- 
pyrine   1^    grains    (0.1    Gm.). 


110     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Kapseals  Ortal  Sodium  with  Phenacetin :  Each  kapseal  (hermetically 
sealed  capsule)  contains  ortal  sodium  IJ/^  grains  (0.1  Gm.)  and  aceto- 
phenetidin    (phenacetin)    3   grains   (0.2  Gm.). 

Caution:  Aqueous  solutions  of  ortal-sodium  are  not  stable  but  decom- 
pose on  standing;  on  boiling,  a  precipitation  ocurs  with  evolution  of 
ammonia. 

Ortal-sodium  is  an  odorless,  white  or  slightly  yellowish  powder,  with 
a  bitter  taste;  very  soluble  in  water;  soluble  in  alcohol;  practically 
insoluble  in  ether  and  benzine.  An  aqueous  solution  of  ortal-sodium 
has  an  alkaline  reaction  to  litmus. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add  an 
excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  collect  the  resultant  hexylethyl 
barbituric  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry  at  90  C.:_it  melts  at  122-125  C. 
Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium:  the  residue  responds  to  tests 
for  sodium  carbonate.  Boil  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  with  5  cc. 
of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is  decomposed  with 
evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  about  0.3  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  in  10  cc. 
of  water  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of 
mercuric  chloride  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an 
excess  of  ammonia;  to  the  other  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate 
solution:   a  white  precipitate   results,   soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  in  50  cc.  of  water,  add  5  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  filter  through  paper:  separate  portions  of 
10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  greater  opalescence  on  the  addition 
of  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  than  that  produced  by  0.25  cc.  of 
tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  in  50  cc.  of  water  (chloride);  no  tur- 
bidity on  the  addition  of  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate). 
To  about  0.2  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  in  25  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filter  through  paper:  the  filtrate  yields  no 
coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts 
of  heavy  metals).  Add  about  0.1  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  to  1  cc.  of  sul- 
furic  acid:    the   solution    is   colorless    (readily    carbonizable   substances). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  glass 
stoppered  cylinder,  add  50  cc.  of  anhydrous  ether,  stopper  and  shake 
for  ten  minutes;  decant  the  supernatant  liquid  through  filter  paper  and 
repeat  twice,  using  25  cc.  and  15  cc.  portions,  respectively,  of  ether, 
utilizing  the  same  filter;  evaporate  the  combined  filtrates  to  dryness 
in  a  tared  beaker  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  90  C.:  the  residue  does 
not  exceed   0.5    per   cent   (iincombined  hexylethyl  barbituric  acid). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant 
weight  at  100  C.:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  2.5  per  cent.  Transfer  about 
0.5  Gm.  of  ortal-sodium  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable  Squibb 
separatory  funnel,  add  50  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  10  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid;  extract  with  eight  successive  portions  of  ether  of 
25  cc.  each,  evaporate  the  combined  ethereal  extractions  to  dryness  in 
a  stream  of  warm  air  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  90  C.r  the  amount 
of  hexyl  barbituric  acid  corresponds  to  not  less  than  90.8  per  cent 
nor  more  than  91.6  per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Trans- 
fer the  acidulated  aqueous  portion  from  the  foregoing  immiscible  sol- 
vent extraction  to  a  tared  platinum  dish  and  evaporate  to  dryness  on  a 
steam  bath;  to  "the  residue  obtained  add  5  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid;  hqat 
cautiously  until  the  excess  of  sulfuric  acid  has  been  volatilized;  repeat 
twice,  using  portions  of  1  cc.  each  of  sulfuric  acid  each  time;  add 
about  0.5  Gm.  of  ammonium  carbonate;  ignite  to  constant  weight,  and 
weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  the  percentage  of  sodium  corresponds  to  not 
less  than  8.5  per  cent,  nor  more  than  9  per  cent  when  calculated  to 
the  dried  substance. 

PENTOBARBITAL-SODIUM.— Sodium  ethyl  (1-methyl- 
butyl)  barbiturate. — Sodium  ethyl  (methylpropyl  carbinyl)  bar- 
biturate.— 

NaCCsHs)  [CH3CH.CH2(CH3)CH]  CCONHCO  :  NCO.      The 

I I 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  111 

monosodium  salt  of  ethyl- (1-methylbutyl)  barbituric  acid. 
Pentobarbital-sodium  differs  from  soluble  barbital,  U.  S.  P. 
(sodium  diethylbarbiturate),  in  that  one  of  the  ethyl  groups  of 
the  latter  is  replaced  in  the  former  by  a  1-methylbutyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  pentobarbital- 
sodium  are  essentially  similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  it  is 
effective  in  smaller  doses.  The  action  is  of  relatively  brief 
duration,  which  may  constitute  an  advantage,  especially  when 
relatively  large  doses  are  administered.  It  is  used  as  a  seda- 
tive, particularly  prior  to  local,  general  or  spinal  anesthesia. 
It  can  be  used  safely  for  such  purposes  only  by  those  who  have 
had  adequate  experience  and  who  are  familiar  with  the  litera- 
ture concerning  such  use.  It  may  be  administered  by  mouth 
or  by  rectum;  it  may  be  administered  intravenously  only  in 
conditions  in  which  oral  administration  is  not  feasible  either 
because  the  patient  is  unconscious,  as  in  cerebral  hemorrhage, 
eclampsia  or  status  epilepticus,  or  because  he  resists,  as  in 
delirium,  or  because  a  very  prompt  action  is  imperative,  as  in 
convulsions  from  local  anesthetics :  but  great  caution  is  neces- 
sary when  this  product  is  given  by  vein. 

Dosage. — Orally,  as  hypnotic,  0.1  Gm.  (1^  grains)  ;  as  pre- 
anesthetic sedative,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains).  Rectally,  for  analgesia: 
for  infants  up  to  1  year,  0.03  Gm.  (^  grain),  up  to  3  years, 
0.06  Gm.  (1  grain)  ;  for  adults,  0.32  to  0.38  Gm.  (5  to  6  grains) 
dissolved  in  a  few  cubic  centimeters  of  water. 

Caution:  Aqueous  solutions  of  pentobarbital-sodium  are  not 
stable  but  decompose  on  standing;  on  boiling,  a  precipitation 
occurs  with  evolution  of  ammonia. 

Pentobarbital-sodium  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder, 
with  a  slightly  bitter  taste;  very  soluble  in  water;  freely  soluble  in 
alcohol;  practically  insoluble  in  ether.  An  aqueous  solution  of 
pentobarbital-sodium   is   alkaline   to   litmus. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium  in  100  cc.  of  water, 
add  an  excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  collect  the  resultant  ethyl 
(1-methylbutyl)  barbituric  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry  at  90  C:  it 
melts  at  127-130  C.  Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium: 
the  residue  responds  to  tests  for  sodium  carbonate.  Boil  about  O.S  Gm. 
of  pentobarbital-sodium  with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide 
solution :  it  is  decomposed  with  evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  about 
0.3  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  divide  into 
two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  Ice.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution:  a 
white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia;  to  the 
other  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate 
results,  soluble  in  an   excess  of  ammonia. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium  in  50  cc.  of  water, 
add  5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  filter  through  paper:  separate  por- 
tions of  10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  on  the  addition 
of  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride) ;  no  turbidity  on  the 
addition  of  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate).  To  about 
0.2  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium  in  25  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filter  through  paper:  the  filtrate  yields  no 
coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts 
of  heavy  metals).  Add  about  0.1  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium  to  1  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution  is  colorless  (readily  carbonisable  sub- 
stances). Transfer  about  1  Gni.  of  pentobarbital-sodium,  accurately 
weighed,  to  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  50  cc.  of  anhydrous  ether, 
stopper    and    shake    for    ten    minutes;    decant    the    supernatant    liquid 


112     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

through  filter  paper  and  repeat  twice,  using  25  cc.  and  15  cc.  portions, 
respectively,  of  ether,  utilizing  the  same  filter;  evaporate  the  combined 
filtrates  to  dryness  in  a  tared  beaker  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at 
90  C. :  the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.2  per  cent  (nncombined  ethyl 
[l-methylbutyl]    barbituric   acid). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodiura,  accurately  weighed,  to 
constant  weight  at  90  C. :  the  loss  does  not  exceed  2  per  cent.  Trans- 
fer about  0.5  Gm.  of  pentobarbital-sodium,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel,  add  SO  cc.  of  water,  followed  by 
addition  of  10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid:  extract  with  eight  suc- 
cessive portions  of  ether  of  25  cc.  each,  evaporate  the  combined 
ethereal  extractions  to  dryness  in  a  stream  of  warm  air  and  dry  to 
constant  weight  at  90  C.:  the  amount  of  ethyl  (1-methylbutyl)  barbi- 
turic acid  corresponds  to  not  less  than  90  per  cent  nor  more  than  91 
per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  the  acidulated 
aqueous  portion  from  the  foregoing  immiscible  solvent  extraction  to  a 
tared  platinum  dish  and  evaporate  to  dryness  on  a  steam  bath;  to  the 
residue  obtained  add  5  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid;  heat  cautiously  until  the 
excess  of  sulfuric  acid  has  been  volatilized;  repeated  twice,  using  por- 
tions of  1  cc.  each  of  sulfuric  acid  each  time;  add  about  0.5  Gm.  of 
ammonium  carbonate;  ignite  to  constant  weight,  and  weigh  as  sodium 
sulfate:  the  per  cent  of  sodium  corresponds  to  not  less  than  8.9  per 
cent,  nor  more  than  9.4  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 

Pentobarbital-S odium-Lilly.  —  A  brand  of  pentobarbital- 
sodium-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly    &  Co.,   Indianapolis,  Ind. 

Ampoules  Pentobarbital  Sodium-Lilly,  0.5  Gm.  (JVi  grains):  Each 
ampule  contains  the  stated  amount  of  pentobarbital  sodium  and  is  accom- 
panied by  a  10  cc.   size  ampule  of  distilled  water. 

Pulvules  Pentobarbital-SodiiimrLilly,  lYz  grains:  Pentobarbital-sodium- 
N,  N.  R.,  0.1  Gm.   (1^   grains)   and  starch,  0.13  Gm. 

PERNOSTON.  — Butyl-i3-bromallyl     barbituric     acid.  —  5- 

(butyl-2)-5-/3-brompropenyl    malonylurea. —  [CH(CH3)CH2CH3] 

(CH.CBr :  CH2)  C-CONHCONHCO.    Pernoston  differs  from 
I I 

barbital  (diethylbarbituric  acid)  in  that  both  of  the  ethyl  groups 
of  the  latter  are  replaced,  one  by  a  (normal)  secondary  butyl 
group,  and  the  other  by  a  substituted  brominated  allyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  pernoston  are 
essentially  similar  to  those  of  barbital,  but  pernoston  is  more 
active  than  barbital  and  is  used  in  correspondingly  smaller 
doses.  It  is  promptly  absorbed  and  is  rapidly  changed  and 
destroyed  within  the  body.  It  is  used  in  combating  insomnia 
due  to  emotional  strain  and  nervous  instability.  In  therapeutic 
doses  it  is  said  to  produce  no  demonstrable  toxic  effects  on 
the  heart,  lungs,  blood  vessels  and  kidneys ;  it  does  not  inter- 
fere with  the  physiologic  activities  of  these  organs. 

Dosage:  One  tablet  (3  grains)  given  one-half  hour  before 
sleep  is  desired,  preferably  foUow^ed  by  a  glass  of  warm  milk 
or  lemonade.  For  hypnosis  in  the  presence  of  pain :  one  tablet 
given  in   conjunction  with   aminopyrine   or  acetylsalicylic  acid. 

Manufactured  by  J.  D.  Riedel-E.  de  Haen,  A.  G.  Berlin,  Germany 
(Riedel-de  Haen,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent  1,739,662 
(December  17,  1929,  expires  1946).     U.  S.  trademark  266,216. 

Pernoston    Tablets,    3   grains. 

Pernoston  occurs  as  a  fine,  white,  crystalline  powder,  with  a  slightly 

bitter    taste;     completely    soluble    in    alcohol    and    ether;    very    slightly 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  113 

soluble  in  cold  water;  insoluble  in  the  paraffin  hydrocarl)ons.  A 
saturated  aqueous  solution  is  acid  to  litmus  paper.  Pernoston  melts 
at  130  to  133  C. 

Place  approximately  1  Gm.  of  Pernoston  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered 
cylinder,  add  10  cc.  of  water  and  1  cc.  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and 
shake  for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions; 
to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  mercury  bichloride  solution:  a  white 
precipitate  results,  soluble  in  10  cc  of  ammonia  water;  to  the  other 
portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results, 
soluble   in    5    cc.    of   ammonia   water. 

Fuse  about  0.1  Gm.  of  pernoston  and  1  Gm.  of  crushed  potassium 
hydroxide,  previously  moistened  with  1  cc.  _  of  alcoholic  potassium 
hydroxide  solution,  in  a  nickel  crucible:  it  is  decomposed  with  the 
evolution  of  ammonia;  cool,  dissolve  the  residue  in  10  cc.  of  water,  add 
10  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid,  filter  through  paper;  to  the_  filtrate  add 
5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  curdy  dirty  white  precipitate  results, 
soluble  in   excess   of  stronger  ammonia  water. 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  pernoston  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  liquid 
assumes  a  yellow  color,  changing  slowly  to  a  brownish  red,  finally  to 
a  dark  red.  Place  1  Gm.  of  pernoston  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered 
cylinder,  add  10  cc.  of  water,  shake  for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper 
and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  0.5  cc.  of  a  saturated 
bromine  water:  an  immediate  discoloration  occurs;  to  the  other  portion 
add  0.1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  potassium  permanganate:  a  yellow  color 
appears  immediately. 

Boil  0.5  Gm.  of  pernoston  with  50  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes:  no 
odor  develops;  cool  and  filter;  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of  the 
filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of 
silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride)  ;  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted 
nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate);  no  colora- 
tion or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy 
metals) . 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  pernoston,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.25  Gm._  of  pernoston, 
accurately  weighed,  to  a  bomb  tube;  determine  the  bromine  content  by 
the  Carius  method:  the  amount  of  bromine  found  should  be  not  less 
than  26.1  per  cent  nor  more  than  26.6  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.5 
Gm.  of  pernoston,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  previously  neu- 
tralized alcohol;  dilute  with  an  equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate  with 
tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  using  thymolnhthalein  as  an 
indicator;  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  con- 
sumed corresponds  to  not  less  than  98. 5  per  cent  nor  more  than  101.5 
per   cent   of  sec.  butyl-bromallyl   barbituric  acid. 

PHANODORN.— Cyclobarbital.— Cyclohexenyl    ethyl    bar- 
bituric    acid.  —  Ai-cyclohexenyl     ethyl     malonyl-urea.  —  2,4,6, 
trioxy-5-cyclo-hexenyl-ethyl-pyrimidin. — 
CH.CH.CH2CH2CH :  C(C2H5)C-CONHCONH-CO.       Phano- 

dorn  differs  from  barbital-U.  S.  P.  (diethyl-barbituric  acid)  in 
that  one  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  barbital  is  replaced  by  a  cyclo- 
hexenyl group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  phanodorn 
resemble  those  of  barbital.  It  is  eliminated  more  rapidly  than 
barbital ;  hence  the  action  is  not  so  lasting.  This  is  an  advan- 
tage when  it  is  used  merely  to  put  one  to  sleep  and  sleep  will 
then  continue  without  its  further  action.  It  is  used  mainly  for 
its  sedative  action  in  nervous  insomnia,  neurasthenia,  psychoses, 
and  various  types  of  insomnia. 

Dosage. — For  the  mildest  type  of  simple  insomnia,  0.1  Gm. 
(1^  grains)  or  %  tablet.  In  intractable  or  obstinate  insomnia, 
from  0.2  to  0.4  Gm.  (3  to  6  grains)  or  one  to  two  tablets.    The 


114     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

larger  dose  should  not  be  repeated  within  less  than  twelve  hours. 
The  average  dose  is  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains),  or  one  tablet. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  applied   for. 

Phanodorn   Tablets,   3   grains. 

Phanodorn  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder,  with  a 
bitter   taste;    readily   soluble   in  alcohol,    about    1    in   5,   and   ether,   about 

1  in  10;  very  slightly  soluble  in  benzene  and  cold  water.  A  saturated 
aqueous  solution  is   acid  to  litmus  paper.     It  melts  at  171-174  C. 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  liquid  assumes  a 
yellow  color,  changing  quickly  to  orange,  and  finally  to  red.  Place 
0.3  Gm.  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  1  cc.  normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution  and  5  cc.  water,  shake  the  contents  for  one  minute, 
filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions:  the  solutions  yield  a 
white  precipitate  with  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution,  soluble  in 
5    cc.    of   ammonia   water;    the    solution   yields    a    white    precipitate   with 

2  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution,  soluble  in  5  cc.  of  ammonia  water.  Boil 
0.5  Gm.  with  5  cc.  of  a  20  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is 
decomposed  with  the  evolution  of  ammonia. 

Boil  0.5  Gm.  with  50  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes;  no  odor  develops; 
cool  and  filter:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no 
opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate 
solution  (chloride) ;  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and 
1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate) ;  no  coloration  or  precipitation 
on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide    (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  accurately  weighed:  there  is  not  more  than 
0.01   per  cent  residue. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  previously 
neutralized  alcohol,  dilute  with  an  equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate  with 
tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  using  thymolphthalein  as  an 
indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  con- 
sumed corresponds  to  not  less  than  98.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  101.5 
per   cent. 

PHENOBARBITAL.  —  Phenylethylmalonylurea.— Pheno- 
barbitone. — Phenylethylbarbituric  acid. — For  standards  see  the 
U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Phenobarbitalum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  introduction  of  the  phenyl  group 
increases  the  hypnotic  and  sedative  action  of  phenobarbital 
over  that  of  barbital.  The  toxicity  appears  to  be  increased 
in  about  the  same  ratio.  The  sleep  may  be  preceded  by  a 
period  of  excitement.  Moderately  large  therapeutic  doses 
sometimes  cause  severe  circulatory  depression.  The  formation 
of  a  habit  has  been  reported. 

Phenobarbital  has  a  sedative  action  on  respiration,  lessen- 
ing the  frequency  of  breathing.  It  kills  by  respiratory  paralysis. 
It  is  eliminated  by  the  kidneys,  a  certain  portion  being  probably 
decomposed  in  the  organism.  No  gastric  disturbances  have 
been  observed. 

Phenobarbital  is  used  as  a  useful  hypnotic  in  nervous 
insomnia  and  conditions  of  excitement  of  the  nervous  system ; 
its  chief  use  in  this  field  is  as  a  sedative  and  antispasmodic 
in  the  treatment  of  epilepsy,  in  which  it  lessens  the  frequency 
and  severity  of  seizures.  Its  use  as  a  sedative  has  also  been 
proposed  in  chorea,  neurasthenia,  cardiac  and  gastric  neuroses, 
climacteric  disorders,   dysmenorrhea,   exophthalmic  goiter,  and 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  115 

preoperative  and  postoperative  cases ;  but  it  should  be  remem- 
bered that  the  drug  has  no  curative  action  in  such  conditions. 

Dosage. — From  0.015  to  0.2  Gm.  (^  to  3  grains)  increased 
if  necessary  to  0.6  Gm.  (10  grains).  The  average  dose  is 
0.1  Gm.  (1^  grain).  A  maximum  dose  of  0.6  Gm.  (10  grains) 
should  not  be  exceeded. 

Phenobarbital  Tablets,    J4    grain. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,   North   Chicago,  111. 

Phenobarbital    Tablets,    Y2    grain. 

Prepared  by   the  Abbott  Laboratories,   North   Chicago,   111. 

Phenobarbital  Tablets,  11/2   grains. 

Prepared  by   the  Abbott   Laboratories,  North  Chicago,   111. 

Phenobarbital. — A  brand  of  phenobarbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   Cane  &  Ingram,   Inc.,  New  York. 
Phenobarbital-Merck. — A  brand  of  phenobarbital-U.  S.   P. 

Manufactured  by   Merck  &   Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

Luminal. — A  brand  of  phenobarbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent   1,025,872    (May   7,   1912;   expired).     U.   S.  trademark  87,327. 

Elixir  of  Luminal:  Each  4  cc.  (one  fluidrachm)  contains  0.0162  Gm. 
(J4   grain)    in  a  menstruum  containing  alcohol  26  per  cent. 

Luminal  Capsules^   lYz   grains. 

Luminal  Tablets,   J4  grain. 

Luminal  Tablets,  Y^.   grain. 

Luminal  Tablets,  lYz    "rains. 

PHENOBARBITAL  SODIUM.— Soluble  Phenobarbital, 
Soluble  Phenobarbitone. — "When  dried  at  140°C.  for  six  hours, 
contains  not  less  than  90.4  per  cent  and  not  more  than  91.4  per 
cent  of  Phenobarbital   (Ci2Hu"03N2)."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Phenobar- 
bitalum  Solubile. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  phenobarbital. 

Dosage. — For  hypodermic  injection,  phenobarbital  sodium  is 
used  in  the  form  of  20  per  cent  solution,  prepared  by  dissolving 
the  salt  in  boiled  and  cooled  distilled  water ;  2  cc.  (30  minims) 
of  the  solution  contains  0.4  Gm.  (6  grains)  of  phenobarbital 
sodium.  The  dose  of  phenobarbital  sodium  is  10  per  cent  greater 
than  that  of  phenobarbital. 

Phenobarbital  sodium  may  be  given  hypodermically  in  doses 
of  0.1  to  0.3  Gm.  (1^  to  5  grains). 

Caution:  Aqueous  solutions  of  phenobarbital  sodium  are  not 
stable  but  decompose  on  standing;  on  boiling,  a  precipitation 
occurs. 

Luminal  Sodium. — A  brand  of  soluble  phenobarbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York. 
U.  S.  patent  1,025,872  (May  7,  1912;  expired).  U.  S.  trademark 
87,327. 


116     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Ampules  Luminal  Sodium  Solution  in  Ethylene  Glycol,  2  cc:  Each 
cubic  centimeter  contains  luminal  sodium  2.5  grains,  dissolved  in  ethylene 
glycol.  The  solution  may  be  administered  intramuscularly  or  subcu- 
taneously  but  not  intravenously. 

Ampules  Luminal-Sodium  (Powder),  2  grains. 
Ampules  Luminal-Sodium  (Powder),  5  grains. 
Capsules  Luminal-Sodium,  5  grains. 
Luminal-Sodium  Tablets,   J4  grain. 
Luminal-Sodium  Tablets,   Yz  grain. 
Luminal  Sodium  Tablets,  lYz  grains. 

Phenobarbital  Sodium-Abbott. — A  brand  of  soluble  pheno- 
barbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No 
U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Ampoules  Phenobarbital  Sodium  (Powder) -Abbott,  0.13  Gm.    (2  grains). 
Tablets  Phenobarbital  Sodium- Abbott,  0.1   Gm.   HVa   grains). 

Phenobarbital  Sodium-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  soluble 
phenobarbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis.  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Phenobarbital  Sodium-Merck. — A  brand  of  soluble  pheno- 
barbital-U. S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Phenobarbital  Sodium-Gane  and  Ingram. — A  brand  of 
soluble  phenobarbital-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Gane  and  Ingram,  Inc.,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Tablets  Phenobarbital  Sodium-Gane  and   Ingram,   i^    grains. 

SANDOPTAL.— Isobutylallyl  barbituric  acid.— Isobutylallyl 
malonylurea.  —  2,4,6-trioxy-5-isobutylallyl  pyrimidin.  —  (C4H9) 
(C3H5)C-CONHCONHCO.   Sandoptal  differs  from  barbital- 

U.  S.  P.  (diethylbarbituric  acid)  in  that  both  of  the  ethyl  groups 
of  the  latter  are  replaced,  one  by  an  uo-butyl  group  and  the 
other  by  an  allyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  barbital  and  its 
therapeutically  useful  derivatives. 

Dosage. — For  mild  insomnia,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains)  ;  for  use  in 
obstinate  cases  of  insomnia,  0.4  to  0.8  Gm.  (6  to  12  grains). 

Manufactured  by  Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Basle,   Switzerland   (Sandoz 
Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  New  York,  N.  Y.,  distributor).     No  U.   S.  patent. 
U.  S.  trademark  applied  for. 
Tablets  Sandoptal,  0.2  Gm. 

Sandoptal  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder,  with  a 
slightly  bitter  taste;  completely  soluble  in  ethyl  alcohol,  acetone,  chloro- 
form, ether,  ethyl  acetate  and  glacial  acetic  acid;  slightly  soluble  in 
cold  water;  sparingly  soluble  in  boiling  water  and  petroleum  ether; 
insoluble  in  the  paraffin  hydrocarbons.  A  saturated  aqueous  solution 
is  acid  to  litmus  paper.  It  melts  at  138-139  C.  It  is  stable  in  air. 
Place  about  0.3  Gm.  of  sandoptal  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder, 
add  a  mixture  of  1  cc.  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  5  cc. 
of  water,   shake  the  contents    for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper  and 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  117 

divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride 
solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  10  cc.  of  ammonia 
water;  to  the  other  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white 
precipitate  results,  soluble  in  5  cc.  of  ammonia  water.  Boil  about 
0.5  Gm.  of  sandoptal  with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide 
solution:  it  is  decomposed  with  the  evolution  of  strongly  alkaline  vapors. 
Place  about  1  Gm.  of  sandoptal  in  a  25  cc.  glass  stoppered  cylinder, 
add  10  cc.  of  water,  shake  for  one  minute,  filter  through  paper  and 
divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  acetic  acid  and 
0.5  of  a  saturated  bromine  water;  an  immediate  discoloration  occurs; 
to  the  other  portion  add  0.1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  potassium  permanganate 
solution:  a  yellow  color  appears  immediately,  turning  to  brown. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  sandoptal  in  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the 
solution  is  colorless  (readily  carhonizable  substances).  Boil  about 
0.5  Gm.  of  sandoptal  with  50  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes:  no  odor 
develops;  cool  and  filter:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate 
yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver 
nitrate  solution  (chloride);  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric 
acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate);  no  coloration  or 
precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy 
metals). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  sandoptal,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sandoptal, 
accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of  previously  neutralized  alcohol;  dilute 
with  an  equal  volume  of  water  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  using  thymol-phthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount 
of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  consumed  corresponds  to 
not  less  than  98.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  101.5  per  cent  of  uobutylallyl 
barbituric  acid. 

SODIUM  ALURATE.— Sodium  allylisopropyl  barbiturate. 

— Na(C3H5)(C3H7)CCONH-c6:NCO.— The  monosodium  salt 

of  allyl  isopropyl  barbituric  acid.  Sodium  alurate  differs  from 
soluble  barbital  U.  S.  P.  (sodium  diethylbarbiturate),  in  that 
both  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  the  latter  are  replaced,  one  by  an 
allyl  group  and  the  other  by  an  isopropyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  for  alurate.  The 
soluble  sodium  salt  is  intended  for  oral  or  rectal  administration, 
particularly  as  preanesthesia  medication.  Sodium  alurate  may 
also  be  used  in  other  cases  in  which  large  individual  doses  are 
required. 

Dosage. — The  average  preoperative  dose  is  1  grain  for  each 
15  pounds  of  body  weight  (10  mg.  per  kilogram).  One  third 
of  the  calculated  dose  is  given  ten  or  twelve  hours  prior  to 
operation,  (usually  the  evening  before) ;  the  remainder,  two 
hours  before  operation.  Experience  is  necessary  in  the  use  of 
these  large  dosages,  as  the  amount  of  the  drug  must  be  adjusted 
to  the  individual  patient  in  order  to  avoid  undesirable  reactions. 

Manufactured  by  Hoffmann-La  Roche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.  U.  S.  patent 
1,444,802   (Feb.  13,  1923;  expires  1940).     U.  S.  trademark  230,059. 

Capsules  Sodium  Alurate,  31/2  grains:  The  content  of  each  capsule  is 
equivalent  in  potency   to  approximately   3  grains  of  alurate. 

Sodium  alurate  is  a  white  microcrystalline,  hydroscopic,  odorless 
powder,  with  a  slightly  bitter  taste;  very  soluble  in  water;  very  slightly 
soluble  in  alcohol;  practically  insoluble  in  ether.  An  aqueous  solution 
of  sodium  alurate  is  alkaline  to  litmus. 


118     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  alurate  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add  an 
excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  collect  the  resultant  allyl  isopropyl 
barbituric  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry  at  90  C:  it  melts  at  139  to 
140  C.  Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  alurate:  the  residue  responds 
to  tests  for  sodium  carbonate.  Boil  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  alurate 
with  5  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is  decomposed 
with  the  evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  about  0.3  Gm.  of  sodium 
alurate  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion 
add  1  cc.  of  mercuric  chloride  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results, 
soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia  water;  to  the  other  portion  add  5  cc. 
of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an 
excess   of   ammonia   water. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  alurate  in  50  cc.  of  water,  add  5  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  filter  through  paper:  separate  portions  of  10 
cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  on  the  addition  of  1  cc.  of 
silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride) ;  no  turbidity  on  the  addition  of  1  cc. 
of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sjilfate).  To  about  0.2  Gm.  of  sodium 
alurate  in  25  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filter 
through  paper:  the  filtrate  yields  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  satura- 
tion with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy  metals).  Add  about  1  Gm. 
of  sodium  alurate  to  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution  is  colorless 
(readily  carbonizable  substance).  Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium 
alurate,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  50  cc. 
of  anhydrous  ether,  stopper  and  shake  for  ten  minutes;  decant  the 
supernatant  liquid  through  filter  paper  and  repeat  twice,  using  25  cc. 
and  15  cc.  portions,  respectively,  of  ether,  utilizing  the  same  filter; 
evaporate  the  combined  filtrates  to  dryness  in  a  tared  beaker  and  dry 
to  constant  weight  at  90  C.:  the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.2  per  cent 
(uncombined   allylisopropyl    barbituric   acid). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  alurate,  accurately  weighed,  at  90  C. 
for  forty-eight  hours:  the  loss  in  weight  should  not  be  less  than  4.5 
per  cent  nor  more  than  7.5  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of 
sodium  alurate,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory 
funnel,  add  50  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  addition  of  10  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid;  extract  with  eight  successive  portions  of  ether  of 
25  cc.  each,  evaporate  the  combined  ethereal  extractions  to  dryness  in 
a  stream  of  warm  air  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  90  C. :  the  amount 
of  allylisopropyl  barbituric  acid  corresponds  to  not  less  than  90  per 
cent  nor  more  than  91  per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 
Transfer  the  acidulated  aqueous  portion  from  the  foregoing  immiscible 
solvent  extraction  to  a  tared  platinurn  dish  and  evaporate  to  dryness 
on  a  steam  bath;  to  the  residue  obtained  add  5  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid; 
heat  cautiously  until  the  excess  of  sulfuric  acid  has  been  volatilized; 
repeat  twice,  using  portions  of  1  cc.  each  of  sulfuric  acid  each  time; 
add  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ammonium  carbonate;  ignite  to  constant  weight, 
and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  the  precentage  of  sodium  corresponds 
to  not  less  than  9  per  cent  nor  more  than  10  per  cent  when  calculated 
to  the  dried   substance. 

SODIUM    AMYTAL.— Sodium    Isoamylethylbarbiturate.— 

Ni(C5Hii)(C2H.0CCONHc6:NCO.— The    monosodium    salt 

of  isoamylethylbarbituric  acid.  Sodium  amytal  differs  from 
soluble  barbital-U.  S.  P.  (sodium  diethylbarbiturate)  in  that 
one  of  the  ethyl  groups  of  the  latter  is  replaced  in  the  former 
by  an  isoamyl  group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  and  uses  of  sodium  amytal 
resemble  those  of  barbital.  The  product  is  proposed  as  a 
sedative  and  hypnotic  in  the  control  of  insomnia  and  as  a 
preliminary  to  surgical  anesthesia. 

Dosage. — As  a  potent  sedative  or  hypnotic  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains), 
repeated  if  necessary  at  intervals  of  six  hours.  For  use  before 
local  or  general  anesthesia  the  dosage  ranges  between  0.2  and 


BARBITAL     COMPOUNDS  119 

0.6  Gm.  (3  to  9  grains),  being  determined  by  a  large  number 
of  factors  (age,  etc.).  As  an  antispasmodic  in  tetanus,  from  0.4 
to  0.8  Gm.  (6  to  12  grains)  may  be  required  to  control  con- 
vulsions. It  can  be  used  safely  for  such  purposes  only  by  those 
who  have  had  much  experience  and  are  familiar  with  the  litera- 
ture concerning  such  use.  In  some  patients  barbital  derivatives 
produce  restlessness  and  excitement,  and  to  these  patients 
sodium  amytal  should  not  be  administered.  It  may  be  admin- 
istered by  mouth,  or,  if  necessary,  the  same  dose  may  be  given 
rectally,  in  the  form  of  capsules  inserted  as  suppositories  or 
as  powder  placed  in  a  little  water ;  it  may  be  administered 
intravenously  only  in  conditions  in  which  oral  administration  is 
not  feasible  either  because  the  patient  is  unconscious,  as  in 
cerebral  hemorrhage,  eclampsia  or  status  epilepticus,  or  because 
he  resists,  as  in  delirium,  or  because  a  very  prompt  action  is 
imperative,  as  in  convulsions  from  local  anesthetics :  but  great 
caution  is  necessary  when  this  product  is  given  by  vein. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co..  Indianapolis,  Ind.  U.  S.  patent 
1,514,573    (Nov.  4,   1924;  expires   1941).     U.   S.  trademark   161,125. 

Ampoule  Sodium  Amytal   0.065   Gm.   (1   grain). 

Ampoule  Sodium  Amytal,  0.125   Gm.   (17/$   grains). 

Ampoule  Sodium  Amytal,  0.25  Gm.  (3^A  grains):  Each  ampule  con- 
tains the  stated  amount  of  sodium  amytal  and  is  accompanied  by  a 
2.5  cc.  size  ampule  of  distilled  water. 

Ampoules  Sodium  Amytal,  0.5  Gm.  (lYi  grains):  Each  ampule  con- 
tains the  stated  amount  of  sodium  amytal  and  is  accompanied  by  a  5  cc. 
size  ampule  of  distilled  water. 

Ampoule  Sodium  Amytal,  1.0  Gm.  (15  grains):  Each  ampule  con- 
tains the  stated  amount  of  sodium  amytal  and  is  accompanied  by  a  10  cc. 
size  ampule  of  distilled  water. 

Pulvules  Sodium  Amytal,  1   grain. 

Pulvules  Sodium  Amytal,   3  grains. 

Sodium  amytal  occurs  as  a  white,  friable,  hygroscopic  odorless  gran- 
ular powder  with  a  slightly  bitter  taste;  very  soluble  in  water;  freely 
soluble  in  alcohol  about   1   part  in   1   part;  practically  insoluble  in  ether. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add 
an  excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  collect  the  resultant  isoamyl- 
ethylbarbituric  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry:  it  melts  at  152-155  C. 
Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal:  the  residue  responds  to  tests 
for  sodium  carbonate.  Boil  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal  with  5  cc. 
of  a  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  it  is  decomposed  with  the 
evolution  of  ammonia.  Dissolve  about  0.3  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal  in 
10  cc.  of  water  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc. 
of  mercuric  chloridfe  solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an 
excess  of  ammonia;  to  the  other  portion  add  5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate 
solution:  a  white  precipitate  results,  soluble  in  5  cc.  of  ammonia  water. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal  in  50  cc.  of  water,  add 
5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  filter  through  paper:  separate  portions 
of  10  cc.  each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  on  the  addition  of 
1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride);  no  turbidity  on  the  addition 
of  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate).  To  about  0.2  Gm.  of 
sodium  amytal  in  25  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid,  filter  through  paper:  the  filtrate  yields  no  coloration  or  precipita- 
tion on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy  metals).  Add 
about  0.2  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal  to  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  the  solution 
is  colorless  (readily  carbonizable  substances).  Transfer  about  1  Gm. 
of  sodium  amytal,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder, 
add  50  cc.  of  anhydrous  ether,  stopper  and  shake  the  contents  for  ten 
minutes;   decant  the  supernatant  liquid  through  filter   paper,  and  repeat 


120     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

twice,  using  first  25  cc.  and  second  15  cc.  of  ether  and  utilizing  the 
same  filter;  evaporate  the  combined  filtrate  to  dryness  in  a  tared  beaker 
and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C:  the  residue  does  not  exceed 
0.2  per  cent  (uncombined  isoamyleihylbarbituric  acid). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant 
weight  at  90  C. :  The  loss  does  not  exceed  1  per  cent.  Transfer  about 
0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  amytal,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable  Squibb 
separatory  funnel,  add  SO  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the  addition  of 
10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  extract  with  eight  successive  por- 
tions of  ether,  using  25  cc.  each,  evaporate  the  combined  ethereal 
extractions  to  dryness  in  a  stream  of  warm  air  and  dry  to  constant 
weight  at  90  C.:  The  amount  of  isoamylethylbarbituric  acid  corresponds 
to  not_  less  than  90  per  cent  nor  more  than  91  per  cent,  calculated  to 
the  dried  substance.  Transfer  the  acidulated  aqueous  portion  from  the 
foregoing  immiscible  extraction  to  a  tared  platinum  dish  and  evaporate 
to  dryness  on  a  steam  bath;  to  the  residue  obtained  add  5_cc.  of  sul- 
furic acid  and  heat  cautiously  until  the  excess  of  sulfuric  acid  has 
been  volatilized;  repeat  twice,  using  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  each  time, 
add  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ammonium  carbonate,  ignite  to  constant  weight 
and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  The  percentage  of  sodium  corresponds 
to  not  less  than  8.9  per  cent  nor  more  than  9.5  per  cent  when  calcu- 
lated to  the  dried  substance. 

BARBITAL  SODIUM.  —  Soluble  Barbital.  —  Sodium 
Diethylbarbiturate. — Soluble  Barbitone. — Sodium  DiethA^mal- 
onyurea. — "It  yields,  when  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100  C, 
not  less  than  88  per  cent,  and  not  more  than  90  per  cent  of 
barbital  (CsHi^OaNs)."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Barbitalum 
Solubile. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  barbital.  It  is 
claimed,  however,  that  this  drug  acts  more  rapidly  on  account 
of  its  greater  solubility.  Because  of  its  solubility,  administra- 
tion by  rectal  injection  and  also  subcutaneous  injection  has 
been  proposed. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  barbital.  It  should  be  admin- 
istered in  aqueous  solution. 

Barbital  Sodium-Abbott. — A  brand  of  barbital  sodium 
(soluble  barbital) -U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Barbital  Sodium-Merck.  —  A  brand  of  barbital  sodium 
(soluble  barbital)-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

Medina!. — A  brand  of  barbital  sodium  (soluble  barbital) - 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S.  patent 
780,241  (Jan.  17,  1905;  expired)  and  879,499  (Feb.  18,  1908;  expired). 
U.    S.    trademark  269,753. 

Medinal   Tablets,   5   grs. 

Medinal  Suppositories,  10  grs. 

Veronal-Sodium. — A  brand  of  barbital  sodium  (soluble  bar- 
bital)-U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.     U.  S. 
patent  782,739   (Feb.   14,   1905;  expired).     U.   S.  trademark  40,115. 
Veronal-Sodium    Tablets,   5  grains. 


BARIUM     SULFATE  121 

BARIUM  SULFATE.— For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Phar- 
macopeia under  Barii  Sulfas. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Barium  sulfate  for  roentgen 
examination,  being  freed  from  soluble  barium  and  other  salts, 
passes  through  the  system  unchanged  and  because  of  this  is 
used  in  taking  roentgenograms  of  the  stomach  and  of  the 
intestines. 

For  Roentgen  Examination  of  the  Stomach. — The  evening 
before  the  examination,  the  patient  receives  1  fluidounce  of 
castor  oil.  In  the  morning  an  ordinary  portion  of  wheat-meal 
porridge,  with  which  2  ounces  of  barium  sulfate  has  been  well 
mixed,  together  with  a  little  sugar  and  cream,  is  administered 
by  mouth.  The  patient  is  then  directed  to  abstain  from  further 
food.    The  examination  is  made  six  hours  later. 

For  Roentgen  Examination  of  the  Colon. — An  enema  con- 
sisting of  16  ounces  of  mucilage  of  acacia,  3  pounds  of  condensed 
milk,  and  8  ounces  of  barium  sulfate  is  warmed  to  body  tem- 
perature and  injected  into  the  rectum  from  a  height  of  from 
3  to  6  feet  (90  to  180  cm.).  The  examination  is  made  with 
a  fluoroscope  while  the  injection  is  passing  into  the  rectum. 

Skiabaryt  for  Oral  Administration:  A  mixture  of  barium  sulfate 
U.  S.  P.,  75  to  85  per  cent,  admixed  with  sugar,  tragacanth,  vanillin 
cinnamon  and  cacao. 

Dosage. — Triturate  150  to  200  Gm.  (5  to  6.5  ounces)  with  cold  water 
added  gradually  to  form  a  smooth,  thin  paste;  then  add  warm  water 
gradually  until  the  mixture  measures  500  cc.  (16  fluidounces).  The 
mixture  is  then  ready  for  drinking. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark    165,022. 

Skiabaryt  for  Rectal  Administration:  A  mixture  of  barium  sulfate 
U.  S.  P.,  75  to  85  per  cent,  admixed  with  sugar,  tragacanth,  vanillin 
and   cinnamon. 

Dosage. — Mix  200  Gm.  (6.5  ounces)  with  cold  water  to  form  a  smooth 
paste;  then  add  warm  water  with  stirring  until  the  mixture  has  acquired 
a  fairly  fluid  consistency.  It  is  then  ready  for  administration  through 
the   irrigator. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark   165,022. 

Barium  Sulphate  Pure-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  barium 
sulphate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

Barium  Sulphate-Merck  for  X-Ray  Diagnosis. — A  brand 
of  barium  sulphate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

Barium  Sulphate-Squibb  for  Roentgen-Ray  Work. — A 
brand  of  barium  sulphate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.   R.   Squibb   &   Sons,   New   York. 


122     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

BENZENE,  MEDICINAL.— Benzenum  Medicinale.— 

Medicinal     Benzol. — Crystallizable     Benzol. — CeHe. — A     liquid 
consisting  almost  entirely  of  benzene  (cyclohexatriene). 

Actions  and  Uses. — When  swallowed,  this  drug  usually  pro- 
duces a  sensation  of  burning  in  the  stomach.  Benzene  is  a 
narcotic  which,  when  swallowed  or  inhaled,  produces  vertigo, 
dehrium  and  tonic  convulsions  followed  by  deep  sleep ;  the 
ingestion  of  30  cc.  (1  ounce)  of  nearly  pure  benzene  has 
proved  fatal.  In  some  cases  of  chronic  poisoning,  petechial 
spots,  due  to  small  hemorrhages,  have  been  observed.  These 
spots  have  been  attributed  to  fatty  degeneration  of  the  blood 
vessels.  It  produces  leukocytosis  followed  by  leukopenia  with 
an  occasional  increased  number  of  erythrocytes.  Larger  doses 
may  produce  an  aplastic  anemia.  It  has  been  stated  that 
the  aplastic  anemia  is  due  to  a  contamination  of  the  drug 
with  nitrobenzene  or  aniline.  Benzene  has  been  used  occa- 
sionally on  account  of  its  narcotic  properties  and  has  also  been 
used  as  an  intestinal  antiseptic.  It  is,  however,  rarely  used 
for  these  purposes  at  the  present  time.  It  has  been  somewhat 
extensively  used  in  the  treatment  of  leukemia.  Moderate 
doses  cause  a  rapid  destruction  of  the  leukocytes,  especially 
the  lymphocytes.  This  action  is  accompanied  by  an  improve- 
ment in  the  subjective  symptoms  and,  in  some  cases,  by  a 
marked  reduction  in  the  size  of  the  spleen.  In  many  cases  the 
lymphocytes  have  been  reduced  to  the  normal  figure.  In  others 
the  number  of  leukocytes  has  still  remained  high,  although  the 
size  of  the  spleen  was  reduced.  In  many  cases  the  improve- 
ment is  such  that  an  apparent  cure  is  produced.  However,  a 
large  number,  if  not  all,  of  these  patients  relapse  or  succumb  to 
the  toxic  action  of  the  benzene.  The  administration  of  this 
drug  should  be  stopped  before  the  leukocytes  are  reduced  to 
the  normal  level.  Benzene  has  also  been  used  in  a  few  cases  of 
Hodgkin's  disease  and  in  cases  of  polycythemia.  The  effect  of 
benzene  on  the  leukocytes  is  largely  enhanced  by  the  previous 
or  simultaneous  treatment  with  the  roentgen  rays.  The  value  of 
benzene  in  leukemia  is  not  established  and  caution  against  too 
large  and  too  long-continued  dosage  should  govern  its 
employment. 

Dosage. — From  0.5  to  1  cc.  (8  to  15  minims)  given  four 
times  a  day.  Medicinal  benzene  may  be  given  in  capsules  or 
in  an  emulsion  or  may  be  administered  by  rectum.  Frequent 
examinations  of  the  blood  should  be  made  during  the  admin- 
istration of  medicinal  benzene  to  determine  when  it  is  advisable 
to  suspend  the  administration  of  the  medicine. 

Medicinal  benzene  is  prepared  by  fractional  distillation  of  the  light 
oil  of  coal  tar  and  is  a  colorless,  mobile  liquid,  possessing  a  strong 
characteristic,  but  not  disagreeable,  odor  and  a  burning  taste.  It  has 
a  specific  gravity  of  from  0.881   to  0.885  at   15   C. 

Medicinal  benzene  is  insoluble  in  water  but  soluble  in  90  per  cent 
alcohol  and  in  carbon  disulfide;  it  is  miscible  with  absolute  alcohol 
and  ether. 


BILE     SALT     COMPOUNDS  123 

Medicinal  benzene  boils  at  from  79  to  82  C.  It  is  inflammable  and 
burns  with  a  luminous  and  sooty  flame.  When  cooled  to  0  C,  medic- 
inal benzene  solidifies.  If  cooled  slowly  it  crystallizes  in  rhombohedral 
prisms,  vyhich  melt  at  about  6  C.  It  is  neutral  to  litmus.  Medicinal 
benzene  is  not  affected  by  cold  sulfuric  acid,  but  is  soluble  in  fuming 
nitric  acid,  without  liberating  nitrous  vapors.  When  poured  into  water 
the  mixture  separates  and  deposits  oily  globules  of  nitrobenzene,  which 
can  be  identfied  by  the  odor.  If  2  cc.  of  medicinal  benzene  be  shaken 
with  0.5  cc.  concentrated  sulfuric  acid  and  1  drop  of  fuming  nitric 
acid,  no  green  or  blue  tint  should  be  produced. 

Benzene    (Benzol)-Merck  Reagent,  Thiophene  Free. — 

A  brand  of  benzene,  medicinal-N.  N.  R. 

Merck   &   Co.,   Inc.,   Rahway,   N.  J.,   distributor.      No   U.    S.   patent  or 
trademark. 


BILE     SALTS     AND     BILE     SALT     COMPOUNDS 

The  bile  of  man  and  of  several  animals  contains  the  sodium 
salts  of  conjugated  cholic  acids  in  varying  proportions;  in  ox 
and  human  biles  especially  glycocholic  acid,  C28H43O6N,  and 
taurocholic  acid,  C2CH43O7NS.  Fresh  ox  bile  is  said  to  con- 
tain about  3  per  cent  each  of  sodium  glycocholate  and  sodium 
taurocholate. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  bile  salts  constitute  the  main  active 
principles  of  bile,  and  therefore  share  the  actions  and  uses  of 
the  latter,  perhaps  with  the  advantage  of  more  constant 
composition.  When  injected  into  the  circulation,  they  cause 
severe  nervous  and  cardiac  depression,  not  observed  vi^hen 
they  are  given  by  the  mouth.  They  are  generally  credited 
with  a  slight  antiseptic  and  laxative  action,  with  enhancing 
the  efficiency  of  the  resinous  hydragogue  cathartics,  and  with 
emulsifying  and  hence  favoring  the  absorption  of  fat.  They 
stimulate  the  secretory  activity  of  the  liver,  increasing  both 
the  fluids  and  solids  of  the  bile. 

They  have  been  used  in  obstructive  jaundice,  although  the 
rationale  is  somewhat  doubtful ;  their  use  in  biliary  fistula  is 
more  reasonable,  if  the  nutrition  is  noticeably  affected. 

The  sodium  glycocholate  and  taurocholate  may  be  separated  in  the 
following  manner:  Dry  ox  bile  is  treated  with  absolute  alcohol  and 
the  tincture  preciptated  by  ether  in  excess.  Both  salts  are  deposited 
and  the  glycocholate  crystallizes  on  standing,  the  taurocholate  remain- 
ing in  amorphous  form,  resembling  oil  or  resinous  matter.  If  the 
deposit  is  dissolved  in  water,  solution  of  lead  acetate  will  throw  down 
a  lead  glycocholate,  while  the  addition  of  lead  subacetate  to  the 
remainder  will  precipitate  the  taurocholate. 

Tests:  All  the  bile  acids  respond  to  Pettenkoflfer's  test.  A  small 
portion  of  the  salt  is  dissolved  in  a  little  concentrated  sulfuric  acid 
in  a  small  porcelain  dish  and  warmed,  care  being  taken  that  the 
temperature  does  not  rise  higher  than  from  60  to  70  C.  A  10  per  cent 
solution  of  cane  sugar  is  then  added  drop  by  drop  while  the  liquid 
is  stirred  with  a  glass  rod.  If  compounds  of  cholic  acid  are  present 
a  beautiful  red  color  will  appear,  which  does  not  disappear  at  room 
temperature,  but  usually  in  the  course  of  a  day  becomes  bluish  violet. 
The  red  liquid  shows  in  the  spectrum  two  absorption  bands,  one  at  F 
and  the  other  between  D  and  E,  nearer  to  E.  Care  must  be  taken  not 
to  heat  too  much  or  to  add  too  much  sugar.  The  sulfuric  acid 
must  be  free  from  sulfurous  acid  and  the  lower  oxides  of  nitrogen. 
As    albumin,     oleic    acid,    amyl    alcohol,    morphine,     etc.,     may     give    a 


124     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

similar  reaction,  spectroscopic  examination  should  not  be  omitted  in 
doubtful  cases  (Hammarsten:  Lehrbuch  der  physiologischen  Chemie, 
ed.  6,  p.  312).  Furfurol  Test  (Mylius) :  The  substance  is  dissolved  in 
alcohol  and  for  every  cubic  centimeter  of  the  alcoholic  solution,  1  drop 
of  a  1  in  1000  furfurol  solution  and  1  cc.  of  concentrated  sulfuric 
acid  are  added  and  the  mixture  cooled,  if  necessary,  so  that  the  tem- 
perature may  not  rise  too  high.  The  same  color  reaction  occurs  as  in 
Pettenkoflfer's  test. 

BILE  SALTS-FAIRCHILD.— A  preparation  obtained 
from  fresh  ox  bile,  consisting  essentially  of  sodium  glycocholate 
and  sodium  taurocholate,  in  the  proportion  existing  in  ox  bile. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  general  article,  Bile  Salts 
and  Bile  Salt  Compounds. 

Dosage. — From  0.03  to  0.13  Gm.  (^  to  2  grains). 

Manufactured  by  Fairchild  Bros,  and  Foster,  New  York.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

DECHOLIN. — Dehydrocholic  Acid. — An  oxidation  product 
of  cholic  acid  derived  from  natural  bile  acids. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Bile  Salts  and  Bile 
Salt  Compounds.  Decholin  is  proposed  for  use  in  functional 
insufficiency  of  the  liver ;  to  outline  the  bile  ducts  at  operation 
and  in  relieving  the  possible  occurrence  of  some  of  the  post- 
operative symptoms ;  in  cholecystography,  to  accelerate  the 
appearance  of  the  gallbladder  shadow  and  to  hasten  removal  of 
residual  tetraiodophenolphthalein  from  the  biliary  apparatus ;  in 
cardiac  decompensation  with  hepatic  congestions,  cirrhosis  of 
the  liver  and  similar  disturbances  of  hepatic  function  with 
ascites. 

Dosage. — From  0.25  to  0.5  Gm.  (4  to  8  grains)  two  to  three 
times  daily  after  meals  for  a  period  of  four  to  six  weeks. 

Manufactured   by   J.    D.    Riedel-E.    de    Haen,    A.    G.    Berlin,    Germany 
('Riedel-de  Haen,   Inc.,   New  York,   distributor).      U.    S.   patent   1,933.003 
(Oct.    21,    1933;    expires    1950).     U.    S.   trademark   315,067. 
Decholin  Tablets,  3H  grains. 

Decholin  occurs  as  a  fine,  colorless,  crystalline  powder  with  a  bitter 
taste:  sparingly  soluble  in  alcohol  and  glacial  acetic  acid.  It  melts 
at   233-235    C. 

Boil  about  1  Gm.  of  decholin  with  100  cc.  of  water  for  two  minutes; 
no  odor  develops;  cool  and  filter:  Separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of 
the  filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and 
1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride);  no  turbidity  with  1  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution  (sulfate); 
no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  (soluble  barium  com- 
pounds); no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen 
sulfide    (salts   of  heavy   metals). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  decholin,  accurately  weighed,  at  100  C.:  The  loss 
in  weight  does  not  exceed  1.5  per  cent.  Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of 
decholin,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent 
Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  in  40  cc.  of  previously 
neutralized  alcohol,  dilute  with  about  one-half  the  volume  of  water 
and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  using  phenol- 
phthalein  as  an  indicator.  The  amount  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  consumed  corresponds  to  not  less  than  98.5  per  cent  nor  more 
than    101.5   per   cent. 


BILE     SALT     COMPOUNDS  125 

DECHOLIN  SODIUM.— Sodium  Dehydrocholate.— The 
sodium    salt  of  dehydrocholic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Bile  Salts  and  Bile 
Salt  Compounds.  The  actions  and  uses  of  decholin-sodium  are 
the  same  as  those  of  decholin. 

Dosage. — Decholin-sodium  is  administered  intravenously.  One 
injection  is  given  on  each  of  three  successive  days.  According 
to  the  urgency  of  the  case,  the  first  dose  consists  of  from  5  to 
10  cc.  of  the  20  per  cent  solution;  the  second  and  third,  of  10  cc. 
The  5  per  cent  solution  may  be  used  at  the  beginning  or_  the 
end  of  the  treatment  or  when  a  less  intensive  effect  is  desired. 

Manufactured    by   J.    D.    Riedel-E,    de    Haen,    A.    G.    Berlin,    Germany 
(Riedel-de  Haen,   Inc.,   New  York,   distributor).     U.    S.   patent   1,933,003 
(Oct.  31,  1933;  expires  1950).     U.  S.  trademark  315,083. 
Ampoules  Solution  Decholin-Sodium,     5  per  cent,  10  cc. 
Ampoules  Solution  Decholin-Sodium,  20  per  cent,  10  cc. 

Decholin-sodium  occurs  as  a  fine,  colorless,  crystalline  powder  with 
a  very  bitter  taste,  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol.  An  aqueous  solution 
is  alkaline  to  litmus. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  decholin-sodium  in  200  cc.  of  water;  add 
an  excess  of  hydrochloric  acid;  collect  the  resultant  dehydrocholic  acid 
on  a  filter,  wash,  and  recrystallize  from  80  per  cent  acetic  acid;  it 
melts  at  233-238   C. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  decholin-sodium  in  100  cc.  of  water, 
acidify  with  hydrochloric  acid  and  filter:  Separate  portions  of  10  cc. 
each  of  the  filtrate  yield  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride 
solution  (sulfate) ;  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with 
hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of  heavy   metals). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  decholin-sodium  accurately  weighed,  to  constant 
weight  at  100  C.:  The  loss  in  weight  dose  not  exceed  7  per  cent 
Weigh  accurately  about  1  Gm.  in  a  tared  platinum  crucible,  add  2  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid,  gently  heat  while  fumes  of  sulfur  trioxide  are  evolved, 
repeat,  using  two  portions  of  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  respectively,  ignite, 
cool  and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  The  percentage  of  sodium  corresponds 
to  not  less  than  5.3  per  cent,  nor  more  than  5.6  per  cent,  when  calcu- 
lated to  the   dried   substance. 

GLYCOTAURO-H.  W.  &  D.— Bile-Salts-H.  W.  &  D.— 
Concentrated  ox  bile,  freed  from  bile  pigments,  standardized 
to  contain  50  per  cent  of  the  natural  mixture  of  sodium 
glycocholate  and  sodium  taurocholate.  Each  gram  represents 
approximately  15  cc.  of  fresh  ox  bile. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  general  article,  Bile  Salts 
and  Bile  Salt  Compounds. 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent   or   trademark. 

Glycotaiiro-H.    W.  &  D.  Capsules,  5  grains. 

Glycotauro-H.  W.  &  D.  Capsules  (half  size):  Each  contains  glycotauro 
0.15    Gm.    (2^    grains). 

Enteric  Coated  Glycotauro-H.  W.  &  D.  Tablets:  Each  contains  gly- 
cotauro 2  grains   (0.1  Gm.)   and  is  coated  with  salol. 

Glycotauro    is    prepared    by    evaporating    ox    bile   in    the    presence    of 

animal    charcoal,    extracting    the    residue    with    purified    methyl    alcohol, 

filtering,  evaporating  the  filtrate  and  mixing  the  residue  with  glycerin. 
Glycotauro    is    a    soft    semisolid    mass    of   light   brown    color,   bilelike 

odor  and  slightly  bitter  taste.     It  is  easily  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol. 

Its  specific  gravity  is  about  1.22. 


126     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS 

The  insoluble  compounds  of  bismuth  are  used  for  their 
mechanical  action  as  protectives  of  inflamed  or  irritated  sur- 
faces. On  a  wound,  a  firm  crust  is  formed,  beneath  which  heal- 
ing proceeds.  The  drying  property  of  the  powder  is  of  chief 
importance,  and  the  antiseptic  action  secondary.  For  the 
best  development  of  the  protective  mechanical  action,  a  very 
fine  division  of  the  bismuth  compound  is  essential.  This 
has  been  secured  in  various  ways.  Soluble  complex  salts 
of  bismuth,  which  are  decomposed  by  dilute  mineral  acids 
with  precipitation  of  insoluble  bismuth  salts  in  a  very  fine  state 
of  subdivision,  are  administered  with  the  expectation  that  the 
gastric  juice  will  bring  about  precipitation  and  thus  protect  the 
digestive  tract.  It  is  questionable  whether  this  assumption  is 
realized  in  many  cases.  Pharmacologists  and  many  clinicians 
doubt  the  usefulness  of  all  soluble  bismuth  preparations  as  a 
means  of  securing  their  protective  action.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  powder  is  given  alone  or  prepared  in  a  permanent  suspension 
holding  the  bismuth  in  such  a  fine  state  of  division  as  to  favor 
its  deposition  evenly  throughout  the  whole  intestinal  tract. 

Bismuth  has  been  combined  with  other  substances,  either  in 
mixture  or  in  synthetic  compounds,  to  produce  insoluble  com- 
pounds which  shall  be  useful  as  a  means  of  securing  convenient 
administration  or  of  enhancing  protective  and  antiseptic  actions. 
It  is  doubtful  whether  combination  with  antiseptic  acids,  as  in 
bismuth  subgallate  or  bismuth  subsalicylate,  increases  the  effici- 
ency of  the  preparation.  The  antiseptic  acids  lose  their  power 
in  alkaline  liquids,  as  in  the  intestines ;  the  introduction  of  iodine 
into  the  benzene  nucleus  does  not  increase  the  antiseptic  power. 
On  the  other  hand,  bismuth  compounds  with  phenol  or  with 
phenols  in  which  bromine  or  iodine  has  replaced  hydrogen  in 
the  benzene  ring  have  an  antiputrefactive  action. 

Soluble  compounds  of  bismuth  used  for  their  protective  action 
should  be  employed  with  caution  because  of  the  danger  of 
absorption  of  poisonous  amounts  of  bismuth.  Absorption  of 
insoluble  bismuth  compounds  from  wounds  and  cavities  occa- 
sionally occurs.  Skin  lesions  similar  to  those  sometimes  fol- 
lowing the  use  of  arsphenamine  are  among  the  most  important 
complications  of  bismuth  therapy.  For  example,  a  pruritus,  an 
erythema,  an  urticaria  or  a  dermatitis,  and  rarely  hemorrhagic 
lesions,  are  noted  following  bismuth  therapy ;  and  cases  of 
agranulocytosis  with  angina  have  been  reported.  The  adminis- 
tration of  the  drug  should  be  stopped  on  the  first  sign  of  cuta- 
neous irritation.  Bismuth  poisoning  is  indicated  by  a  blue  line 
on  the  gums,  headache,  nausea  and  stomatitis.  In  some  patients 
undergoing  bismuth  therapy  systemic  symptoms  of  malaise, 
headaches  and  vague  rheumatic  muscular  and  bone  pains  have 
been  noted.  Removal  of  the  bismuth  therapy  is  the  principal 
treatment.  Too  free  local  application  of  bismuth-containing 
powders  or  too  free  injection  into  cavities  should  be  avoided. 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  127 

Large  doses  of  bismuth  subnitrate  have  produced  nitrite  poison- 
ing by  its  reduction  in  the  colon. 

Alost  of  the  bismuth  compounds  here  described  (excluding 
those  for  use  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis)  belong  to  the 
insoluble  type.  This  includes  bismuth  betanaphtholate,  bismuth 
tribromphenate,  cremo-bismuth  and  lacbismo.  In  bismuth 
oxyiodogallate  the  bismuth  is  combined  with  an  antiseptic  acid 
which  probably  adds  nothing  to  its  antiseptic  power ;  on  the 
other  hand,  bismuth  betanaphtholate  and  bismuth  tribrom- 
phenate are  phenolic  compounds  which  may  reasonably  be 
expected  to  have  some  antiseptic  power. 

Until  1921  bismuth  had  been  used  particularly  in  the  treat- 
ment of  intestinal  infections,  as  a  paste  for  tuberculous  fistulae 
and  in  radiology.  Sauton  and  Robert  then  showed  the  value 
of  sodium  potassium  bismuth  tartrate  in  trypanosomiasis  and 
spirillosis  of  fowls.  Sazerac  and  Levaditi  then  took  up  the 
treatment  of  syphilis  with  the  same  drug.  From  this  time 
on  the  value  of  bismuth  preparations  for  treating  syphilis  has 
been  more  and  more  realized  and  its  general  use  has  been 
increased  enormously  throughout  the  world. 

For  use  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis,  the  administration  of 
bismuth  preparations  by  mouth  has  thus  far  not  proved  satisfac- 
tory nor  has  the  value  of  bismuth  inunctions  been  shown.  The 
best  results  with  bismuth  therapy  of  syphilis  have  been  achieved 
by  intramuscular  injections.  Lomholt  believes  that  roughly 
a  bismuth  salt  to  be  efficacious  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis 
should  furnish  at  least  0.5  mg.  metallic  bismuth  per  kilo  body 
weight.  Most  workers  believe  that  the  intravenous  injections 
are  strictly  contra-indicated  for  the  reason  that  the  therapeutic 
dose  approaches  too  closely  to  the  toxic  dose.  The  compounds 
employed  for  intramuscular  injection  consist  of  water  soluble 
salts  dissolved  in  aqueous  solution  or  other  suitable  solvents,  or 
suspended  in  oils ;  of  insoluble  bismuth  salts  suspended  in  water 
or  oils ;  of  so-called  oil  soluble  preparations ;  of  water  soluble 
and  oil  suspended  combinations ;  and  finally  of  bismuth  and 
arsenic  compounds.  The  so-called  oil  soluble  preparations 
are  claimed  to  be  more  exact  in  their  dosage  than  insoluble 
suspensions  of  bismuth  salts.  They  are  said  not  to  be  absorbed 
and  excreted  so  rapidly  as  the  soluble  bismuth  preparations. 
Yet  the  claim  is  made  that  they  are  absorbed  more  rapidly 
than  the  insoluble  bismuth  salts  in  suspension.  Thus  the 
claim  is  made  that  they  combine  some  of  the  advantages  of 
both  the  soluble  and  of  the  insoluble  preparations.  This 
question  has  not  been  entirely  and  satisfactorily  answered  as 
yet.  Thus  far  it  seems  to  be  the  generally  accepted  opinion  that 
bismuth  salts  used  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis  should  be 
administered  by  the  intramuscular  route.  In  giving  the  intra- 
muscular injections  of  the  bismuth  salts  the  needle  should 
be  inserted  in  the  upper  and  the  outer  third  of  the  buttocks, 
deep  down  into  the  muscular  tissue;  with  the  syringe  tip 
inserted  into  the  needle,  the  physician  should  aspirate  back 
with  the  plunger  of  the  syringe  in  order  to  be  sure  that  the 


128     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

needle  is  not  in  a  vein  or  in  an  artery.  This  will  go  far  toward 
obviating  many  of  the  distressing  venous  emboli  and  arterial 
emboli  that  have  been  reported.  Those  who  have  worked  with 
bismuth  salts  in  treating  syphilis  believe  that  their  efficiency 
stands  between  that  of  mercury  and  that  of  arsphenamine.  The 
present  evidence  appears  to  show  that  there  is  warrant  for  the 
administration  of  bismuth  compounds  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis  in  connection  with  arsphenamine  and  mercury  or  as 
a  substitute  for  mercury  therapy.  Some  few  syphilologists 
use  bismuth  therapy  alone  in  treatment  of  syphilis.  These 
men  are  much  in  the  minority,  however,  and  time  only  will 
fully  decide  the  value  of  this  procedure.  Thus  far,  sufficient 
evidence  has  not  been  produced  to  indicate  the  use  of  bis- 
muth preparations  alone  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis.  Bismuth 
compounds  are  valuable  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis  in  patients 
who  are  intolerant  to  other  drugs  or  who  show  resistance  to  the 
other  drugs  used  in  syphilis  by  the  persistence  of  a  positive 
Wassermann  reaction.  Treatment  with  bismuth  preparations  is 
not  usually  injurious  if  the  necessary  precautions  are  taken 
(careful  observation  of  the  skin  for  untoward  reaction,  of  the 
mouth  for  signs  of  beginning  bismuth  stomatitis  and  of  the  urine 
for  evidence  of  irritation  of  the  kidneys). 

Until  the  controversy  concerning  the  penetration  of  appreciable 
amounts  of  special  bismuth  salts  into  the  tissues  of  the  central 
nervous  system  and  of  their  presence  in  the  spinal  fluid  is 
settled  by  more  convincing  evidence,  it  appears  unwise  to  accept 
therapeutic  implications  based  upon  such  claims. 

In  common  with  another  heavy  metal,  mercury,  bismuth 
preparations,  when  administered  by  injection,  have  a  definite 
diuretic  action.  Excretion  studies  of  various  bismuth  com- 
pounds used  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis  give  some  indications 
as  to  the  best  type  of  bismuth  salts  for  desired  results.  The 
usefulness  of  a  bismuth  preparation  involves  the  concentration 
of  active  bismuth  attained  in  the  tissues,  especially  in  the 
blood,  and  the  height,  course,  rise,  duration  and  decline  of 
this  concentration.  As  a  rule,  watery  solutions,  if  repeated 
often  enough,  give  a  rapid  and  important  absorption  of  the 
metal  and  high  concentration  in  the  blood  stream.  This  can 
be  kept  up  if  the  injections  are  given  frequently  enough,  i.  e., 
two  or  three  times  a  week.  Oil  suspensions  differ  in  that  there 
is  a  slower  absorption  and  concentration  in  the  blood  stream,  but 
one  which  persists  longer,  thus  requiring  injections  but  once 
a  week.  Certain  of  the  oil  solutions  have  like  characteristics, 
with  an  added  more  rapid  absorption  than  the  oil  suspensions. 
Bismuth  subsalicylate  is  much  more  slowly  absorbed  and  there 
is  a  long  delay  before  the  bismuth  effect  is  achieved.  More- 
over, it  continues  to  be  excreted  over  long  periods  of  time, 
even  months.  Whether  this  long  excretion  indicates  a  thera- 
peutic level  of  the  drug  in  the  body  is  doubtful. 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  129 

BILIPOSOL. — A  complex  compound  of  high  molecular 
weight,  the  chemical  structure  of  which  has  not  been  established, 
combining  bismuth  and  a-carboxethyl-/3-methyl  nonoic  acid.  It 
contains  about  45  per  cent  of  bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Biliposol  is  proposed  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatrnent  of 
syphilis  (see  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds).  Biliposol 
belongs  to  the  class  of  so-called  liposoluble  bismuth  compounds 
which,  because  of  their  solubility,  are  absorbed  with  more 
rapidity  than  insoluble  bismuth  salts,  approaching  that  of  soluble 
bismuth  salts,  and  which  are  not  likely  to  cause  abscess 
formation. 

Dosage. — For  the  average  adult,  doses  of  2  cc.  of  biliposol 
solution  (representing  0.04  Gm.  of  bismuth  per  cubic  centimeter) 
are  administered  intramuscularly,  in  a  series  of  twelve  weekly 
injections.  Treatment  is  discontinued  for  one  month  and  then 
resumed  by  repeating  the  series  of  twelve  injections.  For  infants 
and  children  the  dosage  ranges  from  0.1  cc.  to  0.6  cc,  weekly. 

Manufactured  by  Laboratories  Frangais  de  Chimiotherapie,  Paris, 
France  (Ulmer  Laboratories,  Minneapolis,  distributor),  U.  S.  patent 
applied   for.      U.   S.   trademark  269,486. 

Ampoules  Biliposol  Solution,  2  cc:  A  solution  of  biliposol  in  olive  oil, 
containing  2  per  cent  of  benzyl  alcohol,  L5  per  cent  of  ethyl  aminoben- 
zoate,  and  1.5  per  cent  of  butyl  aminobenzoateper  cubic  centimeter.  Each 
cubic  centimeter  of  biliposol  solution  contains  biliposol  equivalent  to 
0.04  Gm.  of  bismuth   (Bi). 

Biliposol  occurs  as  a  rather  hard,  stiff,  unctuous,  white  or  slightly 
yellowish  mass  having  an  odor;  readily  soluble  in  most  organic  sol- 
vents, including  benzene,  chloroform,  ether,  purified  petroleum  benzin 
and  animal  and  vegetable  oils.  It  softens  when  warmed.  When  sub- 
jected to  very  gentle  ignition,  it  swells,  setting  free  white  fumes,  and 
the   mass   darkens. 

Warm  about  1  Gm.  of  biliposol  with  a  slight  excess  of  alcoholic 
potassium  hydroxide,  filter  the  insoluble  portion  and  ignite  .in  a  quartz 
dish:  the  residue  is  yellow.  Evaporate  the  alcoholic  filtrate:  a  yellowish 
residue  remains;  dissolve  in  15  cc.  of  water  and  divide  into  three 
5  cc.  portions.  Add  2  cc.  of  copper  sulfate  to  5  cc.  of  the  solution, 
filter,  wash  with  5  cc.  of  water  and  dry:  the  residue  is  soluble  in 
benzene.  Add.  2  cc.  of  nickel  chloride  to  another  5  cc.  portion  of  the 
solution,  filter,  wash  with  5  cc.  of  water  and  dry:  the  residue  is 
soluble  in  benzene.  Add.  2  cc.  of  cobalt  nitrate  to  another  5  cc.  por- 
tion of  the  solution,  filter,  wash  with  5  cc.  of  water  and  dry;  the 
residue    is   soluble   in    benzene. 

Ignite  2.8  Gm.  of  biliposol  in  a  quartz  crucible,  cool,  add  cautiously 
drop  by  drop  just  sufficient  nitric  acid  to  dissolve  the  residue  when  it 
is  warmed;  pour  the  acid  solution  into  100  cc.  of  water,  evaporate 
the  filtrate  on  the  water  bath  to  30  cc,  again  filter  and  divide  the 
filtrate  into  5  cc.  portions;  to  one  portion  add  an  equal  volume  of 
diluted  sulfuric  acid:  the  liquid  does  not  become  cloudy  (lead).  To 
another  portion  add  an  excess  of  ammonia  water:  the  supernatant 
liquid  does  not  exhibit  a  bluish  tint  (copper).  To  another  portion  add 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid:  a  precipitate,  insoluble  in  an  excess  of 
hydrochloric  acid  and  soluble  in  ammonia  water,  is  not  formed  (silver). 
Ignite  1  Gm.  of  biliposol  in  a  quartz  crucible:  the  residue  meets  the 
requirements  of  Bettendorf's  test,  U.  S.  P.  X,  p.  430  (arsenic). 
Transfer  0.2  Gm.  to  a  separatory  funnel,  dissolve  in  15  cc.  of  ether, 
extract  with  two  10  cc.  portions  of  diluted  nitric  acid,  add  1  cc.  of 
barium  chloride  solution  and  sufficient  water  to  make  the  volume  50 
cc:  after  ten  minutes  there  is  no  more  turbidity  than  in  a  control  tube 
containing  the  reagents  used  and  0.5  cc.  of  fiftieth  normal  sulfuric  acid. 
Add.   1    cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  to  the  remaining   10  cc.  portion  and 


130     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

then  add  sufficient  water  to  make  the  volume  50  cc. :  after  five  minutes 
there  is  no  more  turbidity  than  in  a  control  tube  using  the  reagents 
and   0.5   cc.   of    fiftieth  normal   hydrochloric   acid. 

Dissolve  about  0.35  Gm.  of  biliposol,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc. 
of  chloroform,  extract  with  one  20  cc.  portion  and  two  10  cc.  portions 
of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  (one  volume  of  "diluted  hydrochloric  acid- 
U.  S.  P."  to  one  volume  of  distilled  water),  add  filtered  ammonia  water 
a  little  at  a  time  and  with  stirring  until  the  precipitate  that  forms  just 
dissolves.  Saturate  with  hydrogen  sulfide,  filter,  wash  successively 
with  water,  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether,  dry  at  100  _C.,  cool  in  a 
desiccator,  weigh:  the  bismuth  sulfide  weighed  is  equivalent  to  not 
less  than  44.4  per  cent  nor  more  than  46.0  per  cent  of  bismuth. 
Evaporate  the  chloroform  solution  to  dryness  on  the  steam  bath  and 
then  dry  to  constant  weight  over  calcium  chloride:  the  weight  cal- 
culated to  a-carboxethyl-y8-methyl  nonoic  acid  ion  (multiply  by  0.9958) 
is  not  less  than  48  per  cent  nor  more  than  52  per  cent.  Add  an  excess 
of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  titrate  back  with  tenth- 
normal hydrochloric  acid  using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator,  calcu- 
late to  a-carboxethyl-;3-methyl  nonoic  acid  ion  (rnultiply  the  number  of 
cubic  centimeters  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  used  by  0.024318)  : 
the  weight  of  acid  ions  is  not  less  than  51  per  cent  nor  more  than  54.5 
per  cent  (limit  of  dibasic  acids)  :  Add  an  excess  of  sulfuric  acid  to 
the  filtrate,  evaporate  and  ignite  in  a  weighed  platinum  dish:  the  weight 
of  the  residue,  if  any,  should  not  exceed  0.5  per  cent  (alkali  and  alka- 
line earth   metals). 

BISMO-CYMOL.— A  basic  bismuth  salt  of  camphocar- 
boxylic  acid  (cainphor-3-carboxylic  acid)  having  the  probable 
formula  (CioHi50COO)2BiOBi(CioHi50COO)OH.  It  contains 
between  37  and  40  per  cent  of  bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Bismo-cymol  is  proposed  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis  (see  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds).  Bismo- 
cymol  belongs  to  the  class  of  so  called  liposoluble  bismuth  com- 
pounds which,  because  of  their  solubility,  are  absorbed  more 
rapidly  than  insoluble  bismuth  salts,  approaching  that  of  soluble 
bismuth  salts.  Though  animal  experiments  seem  to  show  a  low 
toxicity  for  this  preparation,  in  human  beings  it  is  well  to  watch 
the  gums  closely  for  evidence  of  beginning  stomatitis. 

Dosage. — Bismo-cymol  is  injected  intramuscularly  in  doses 
representing  0.1  Gm,  of  metallic  bismuth  once  a  week  or  in 
doses  representing  0.05  Gm.  of  metallic  bismuth  twice  a  week 
for  from  six  to  eight  weeks. 

Manufactured   by    Abbott    Laboratories,    North    Chicago.      U.    S.    patent 

applied  for.     U.  S.  trademark  applied  for. 

Bismo-Cymol    Ampoules,    1     cc:      Each    ampule    contains    bismo-cymol 

equivalent  to  0.05  Gm.  of  metallic  bismuth,    dissolved  in  olive  oil. 

Bismo-Cymol    Ampoules,    2    cc:      Each    ampule    contains    bismo-cymol 

equivalent   to   0.1    Gm.    of   metallic  bismuth,   dissolved   in   olive  oil. 

Bismo-cymol  occurs  as  a  white  powder  having  the  odor  of  camphor. 
It  is  insoluble  in  water  but  soluble  in  ether,  benzene  and  vegetable 
oils. 

Heat  1  Gm.  of  bismo-cymol  in  30  cc.  of  water  containing  3  cc.  of 
hydrochloric  acid,  add  ammonia  water  until  resulting  solution  is  alka- 
line to  litmus,  filter  and  wash  the  precipitate  with  7  cc.  of  water;  to  the 
filtrate  add  hydrochloric  acid  until  just  acid  to  litmus,  evaporate  on 
the  steam  bath  until  the  volume  is  reduced  one  half,  cool,  filter  and 
dry  the  crystals;  the  crystals  melt  at  127  C.  Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  the 
crystals  in  5  cc.  of  alcohol,  add  a  drop  of  diluted  ferric  chloride 
solution     (ferric     chloride     solution     diluted     1     to    5);     a     green     color 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  131 

results.  Dissolve  the  precipitate  (obtained  from  the  treatment  with 
ammonia  water)  in  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  pass  in  hydrogen 
sulfide;  a  black  precipitate  forms.  Suspend  0.2  Gm.  of  bismo-cymol 
in  10  cc.  of  boiling  water  and  add  2  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite;  a 
black   precipitate   forms. 

Add  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  about  0.2  Gm.  of 
aluminum  wire  to  about  0.2  Gm.  of  bismo-cymol;  heat  gently:  the 
vapors  do  not  turn  red  litmus  blue  (nitrate).  Suspend  0.25  Gm.  in 
30  cc.  of  water,  add  4  cc.  diluted  nitric  acid,  boil,  cool,  filter  and  add 
1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  no  more  turbidity  is  produced  than  in 
the  U.  S.  P.  test  for  chlorides  using  0.1  cc.  of  fiftieth  normal  hydro- 
chloric acid  (chloride).  Suspend  0.1  Gm.  in  30  cc.  of  water,  add  4  cc. 
of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  boil,  cool,  filter,  add  1  cc.  of  barium 
chloride  solution  and  dilute  to  50  cc:  no  turbidity  is  produced  in  ten 
minutes  (sulfate).  Add.  2  cc.  of  nitric  acid  to  2  Gm.  of  bismo-cymol 
in  a  porcelain  crucible,  evaporate  to  dryness  on  the  steam  bath,  ignite, 
add  5  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  10  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of 
stannous  chloride  in  hydrochloric  acid:  the  mixture  does  not  darken 
in  thirty  minutes  (arsenic).  Ignite  3  Gm.  of  bismo-cymol  in  a  quartz 
crucible,  cool,  add  drop  by  drop  just  enough  nitric  acid  to  dissolve  the 
residue  when  warmed,  pour  the  acid  solution  into  100  cc.  of  distilled 
water,  evaporate  to  30  cc,  filter  if  necessary  and  divide  into  5  cc. 
portions.  To  one  portion  add  an  equal  quantity  of  diluted  sulfuric 
acid:  the  liquid  does  not  become  cloudy  (lead).  To  another  portion 
add  an  excess  of  ammoiiia  water:  the  liquid  does  not  exhibit  a  bluish 
tirit  (copper).  To  another  portion  add  0.5  cc  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid:  a  precipitate  insoluble  in  an  excess  of  hydrochloric  acid  and 
soluble   in   ammonia   water   is   not   formed    (silver). 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  bismo-cymol,  accurately  weighed,  to  an 
Erienmeyer  flask,  add  1  Gm.  of  powdered  potassium  permanganate 
and  then  5  cc  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid,  allow  to  stand  ten  minutes, 
add  10  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  in  small  portions,  allow  to  stand  fifteen 
minutes,  decolorize  with  hydrogen  peroxide,  add  25  cc.  of  water,  boil 
for  fifteen  minutes,  pass  in  hydrogen  sulfide  until  the  bismuth  i? 
completely  precipitated,  filter  through  a  prepared  gooch  crucible,  _  wash 
with  water,  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether  in  this  order,  dry  in  an 
oven  for  thirty  minutes  at  100  C.,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh; 
repeat  the  washing  with  chloroform  and  ether  and  the  drying  at  100  C 
until  constant  weight  is  attained.  The  weight  of  bismuth  sulfide 
corresponds  to  not  less  than  37  nor  more  than   40  per  cent  bismuth, 

BISMOSOL. — A  sterilized  solution  of  potassium  sodium 
bismuthotartrate  (containing  35  per  cent  bismuth  [Bi]  10  Gm. ; 
piperazine,  0.3  Gm.,  in  an  aqueous  solution  of  glucose,  to  make 
100  cc. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Bismosol  is  proposed  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis  (see  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds). 

Dosage. — Bismosol  is  administered  intramuscularly  in  doses 
of  1  cc.  every  two  days  until  twenty  doses  have  been  given. 
After  an  intermission  of  one  month,  a  second  course  may  be 
given. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  by  license  of  Les 

fitablissements   Poulenc  Freres,   Paris.     No  U.   S.   patent.     U.   S.  trade- 
mark 196,017. 

Bismosol  Ampules,  1  cc. 

Bismosol  is  a  pale  yellow,  syrupy  liquid.  On  adding  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid,  drop  by  drop,  to  bismosol,  a  gelatinous  precipitate  is 
formed  which  redissolves  on  further  addition  of  the  acid;  the  resulting 
solution  yields  a  brownish-black  precipitate  _  when  saturated  with 
hydrogen  sulfide.  _  On  evaporation  and  ignition,  bismosol  yields  an 
alkaline  residue  which  effervesces  with  acids, 


132     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

To  1  cc.  of  bismosol  add  three  drops  of  acetic  acid,  a  few  drops  of 
solution  of  hydrogen  peroxide,  one  drop  of  ferrous  sulfate  solution 
and  then  an  excess  of  sodium  hj^droxide  solution:  a  purple  violet  color 
is  produced.  To  1  cc.  bismosol  add  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  drop 
by  drop,  until  the  precipitate  which  is  formed  has  redissolved,  and 
then  add  a  few  cubic  centimeters  of  potassium  bismuth  iodide  solution: 
a  brilliant    red    precipitate   is   produced. 

To  S  cc  of  bismosol  add  about  100  cc.  water  and  sufficient  hydro- 
chloric acid  to  redissolve  the  precipitate  first  formed;  heat  the  solu- 
tion to  from  70  to  80  C.  and  saturate  with  hydrogen  sulfide  to 
precipitate  completely  tne  bismuth  as  bismuth  sulfide.  Collect  the 
bismuth  sulfide  on  a  tared  Gooch  crucible,  wash  successively  with 
water,  alcohol,  carbon  disulfide  and  alcohol;  dry  to  constant  weight 
at  110  C.  The  weight  of  bismuth  sulfide  is  equivalent  to  3.5  Gm.  of 
bismuth    (Bi)    in    100    cc.    of   bismosol. 

BISMUTH  BETANAPHTHOL.— See  the  U.  S.  Pharma- 
copeia IX  under  Bismuthi  Betanaphtholas. 

Bismuth  Betanaphthol-Merck. — A  brand  of  bismuth  beta- 
naphthol. 

Manufactured  by   Merck  &   Co.,   Rahway,   X.  J. 

Orphol.--A  brand  of  bismuth  betanaphthol. 

Schering  and  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

BISMUTH  SODIUM  TARTRATE-SEARLE.  — Bis- 
muth and  Sodium  Tartrate- Searle. — A  basic  sodium  bismuth 
tartrate  containing  from  121  to  73.9  per  cent  of  bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Bismuth  sodium  tartrate-Searle  is  pro- 
posed as  a  means  of  obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth 
in  the  treatment  of  syphihs  (See  preceding  article,  Bismuth 
Compounds).     The  drug  has  a  definite  diuretic  action. 

Dosage. — 0.03  Gm.  (^  grain)  by  intramuscular  injection, 
preferably  into  the  gluteal  muscle.  The  initial  dose  is  0.015  Gm. 
(%  grain),  increased  to  0.03  Gm.  (1/2  grain)  with  the  second 
dose  and  continued  in  three  doses  weekly  for  from  six  to  ten 
weeks. 

Manufactured  by  G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Chicago.  U.  S.  patent  1,663,201 
(March  20,  1928;  expires  1945),  and  1,801,433  (April  21,  1931;  expires 
1948). 

Ampoules  Bismuth  Sodium  Tartrate-Searle,  1.5  per  cent.  2  cc:  Bismuth 
sodium  tartrate-Searle,  0.03  Gm.,  benzyl  alcohol  0.040  Gm.,  sucrose  0.50 
Gm.  in  water  sufficient  to  make  2  cc.  Each  ampule  contains  more  than 
2  cc.  of  solution. 

Ampoules  Bismuth  Sodium  Tartrate-Searle,  3  per  cent,  2  cc. — Bismuth 
Sodium  Tartrate-Searle,  0.060  Gm.;  benzyl  alcohol,  0.040  Gm.,  and 
sucrose,  0.50  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  2  cc. 

Solution  Bismuth  Sodium  Tartrate-Searle,  1.5  per  cent,  60  cc.  vial: 
An  aqueous  solution  containing  bismuth  sodium  tartrate-Searle  0.015  Gm., 
benzyl   alcohol   0.02   Gm,,   and   sucrose   0.25    Gm.,   in   one   cubic  centimeter. 

Solution  Bismuth  Sodium  Tartrate-Searle,  3  per  cent,  60  cc.  vial. — 
An  aqueous  solution  containing  in  each  2  cc.  bismuth  sodium  tartrate- 
Searle,  0.060  Gm.;  benzyl  alcohol,  0.040  Gm.,  and  sucrose,  0.50  Gm. 

Bismuth    sodium    tartrate-Searle    is    a    finely    divided,    white    powder, 

odorless    and    tasteless;    permanent    in    air.      The    product    is    soluble    in 

about  three   parts  of   water,   except   for   a   slight   residue    (0.1    per  cent); 

the  residue  is  soluble  in  sodium   hydroxide  solution.     The  aqueous  solu- 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  133 

tion  is  alkaline  to  litmus  paper.  When  acid  is  added  gradually  to  an 
aqueous  solution  of  bismuth  sodium  tartrate-Searle  a  precipitate  is  pro- 
duced,  which   dissolves  on   the   gradual  addition   of  an  alkali. 

Dissolve  0.5  Gm.  of  bismuth  sodium  tartrate-Searle  in  25  cc.  of 
water;  heat  to  50  C. ;  add  1.5  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite  dissolved  in 
5  cc.  of  10  per  cent  ammonia  water:  a  precipitate  of  metallic  bismuth 
forms.  To  about  2  cc.  of  the  aqueous  solution  (10  per  cent)  add  a  few 
drops  of  copper  sulfate  solution.  A  blue  precipitate  is  formed,  which  is 
soluble  in  potassium  hydroxide  solution.  On  standing,  the  alkaline  solu- 
tion gradually  deposits  a  precipitate.  Ignite  3  Gm.  in  a  quartz  crucible, 
cool,  and  cautiously  add  drop  by  drop  just  sufficient  nitric  acid  to  dis- 
solve the  residue  when  it  is  warmed;  pour  the  acid  solution  into  100  cc. 
of  water,  evaporate  the  filtrate  on  the  water  bath  to  30  cc,  again  filter 
and  divide  the  filtrate  into  5  cc.  portions;  to  one  portion  add  an  equal 
volume  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid:  the  liquid  does  not  become  cloudy 
(lead).  Add  an  excess  of  ammonia  water  to  another  portion:  the  super- 
natant liquid  does  not  exhibit  a  bluish  tint  (copper).  Add  to  another 
portion  diluted  hydrochloric  acid:  a  precipitate,  insoluble  in  an  excess 
of  hydrochloric  acid  and  soluble  in  ammonia  water,  is  not  formed 
(silver).  Ignite  1  Gm.  in  a  quartz  crucible:  The  residue  meets  the 
requirements   of   Bettendorf's   test,   U.   S.   P.   X,   p.   430    (arsenic). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  bismuth  tartrate-Searle,  weighed  accu- 
rately, at  100  C.  to  constant  weight:  the  loss  is  from  2.6  to  3.6  per  cent. 
Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  bismuth  sodium  tartrate-Searle,  accurately 
weighed,  in  20  to  30  cc.  of  water  and  add  sufficient  hydrochloric  acid 
to  redissolve  the  precipitate  first  formed;  saturate  the  solution  with 
hydrogen  sulfide;  collect  the  precipitate  of  bismuth  sulfide,  wash  it 
successively  with  water,  alcohol,  carbon  disulfide,  and  ether  and  dry 
it  at  100  C. :  the  weight  of  bismuth  sulfide  is  equivalent  to  not  less 
than   72.7  nor  more  than  73.9  per  cent  of  bismuth   (Bi). 

BISMUTH  SUBNITRATE.— Basic  Bismuth  Nitrate— 
"A  basic  salt,  which,  when  dried  to  constant  weight  over 
sulfuric  acid,   yields   upon   ignition   not   less   than   79   per   cent 

of    Bi203."-[/.    ^.    P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Bismuthi 
Subnitras. 

Bismuth  Paste  Surgical-P.  D.  &  Co.:  Bismuth  subnitrate,  1  part,  in 
yellow  petrolatum,  2  parts. 

Prepared  by   Parke,  Davis  &   Co.,   Detroit. 

BISMUTH  SUBSALICYLATE.  — Basic  Bismuth  Sali- 
cylate.— "A  basic  salt,  which,  when  dried  to  constant  weight 
at  100°C.,  yields  upon  ignition  not  less  than  62  per  cent  and 
not  more  than  66  per  cent  of  Bi20.3."-L''.  6^.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Bismuthi 
Subsalicylas, 

Bismuth  Subsalicylate  zvith  Butyn-D.  R.  L.  60  cc.  Bottle:  A  10  per 
cent  suspension  of  bismuth  subsalicylate-U.  S.  P.  in  peanut  oil  to  which 
has  been  added  0.4  per  cent  of  butyn  and  metaphen  1 :20,000.  Each  cubic 
centimeter   represents   from   0.057   to   0.059   Gm.   of   elemental   bismuth. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or   trademark. 

Ampoule  Bismuth  Subsalicylate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  1  cc:  A  10  per 
cent  suspension  of  bismuth  subsalicylate-U.  S.  P.  in  peanut  oil  to  which 
has  been  added  0.4  per  cent  of  butyn  and  metaphen  1:  20,000.  Each  cubic 
centimeter  represents   from   0.057   to   0.059   Gm.   of    elemental   bismuth. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 


134     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Ampules  Bismuth  Subsalicylate  2  grains  (0.13  Gm.)  in  Oil,  1  cc: 
A  suspension  of  bismuth  subsalicylate-U.  S.  P.,  0.13  Gm.,  camphor  0.1 
Gm.,  and  creosote  0.1    Gm.,  in  sufficient  olive  oil  to  make   1   cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
No  U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Bismuth  Salicylate  in  Oil-P.  D.  &r  Co.,  2  ounce  bottle:  A  suspension 
of  bismuth  subsaUcylate-U.  S.  P.,  in  olive _  oil,  containing  3  per  cent  of 
chlorobutanol.  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  bismuth  subsalicylate,  0.13 
Gm.    (2  grains). 

Prepared  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.'  No  U.  S.  patent  or  trade- 
mark. 

Glaseptic  Ampules  Bismuth  Salicylate  in  Oil-P.  D.  &  Co.,  1  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  1  cc.  oi  a  suspension  of  bismuth  subsalicylate-U.  S.  P.. 
0.13  Gm.   (2  grains),  in  olive  oil,  containing  3  per  cent  of  chlorobutanol. 

Prepared  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent  or  trade- 
mark. 

Bismuth  Salicylate  in  Oil-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.:  A  suspension  of  bismuth 
subsalicylate,  U.  S.  P.,  2  grains  (0.13  Gra.)  and  chlorbutanol,  3  per 
cent,  in  neutral  olive  oil  to  make  1  cc.  Marketed  in  bottles  containing  1 
ounce. 

Prepared  by  the  United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Wood- 
worth,  Wis. 

Bismuth  Subsalicylate-Merck. — A  brand  of  bismuth  sub- 
salicylate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &   Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

BISMUTH     TRIBROMPHENATE.— Bismuthi     Tri- 

bromphenas. — Bismuth  Tribromphenol. — Xeroform. — A  basic 
bismuth  tribromphenate  of  variable  composition. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Bismuth  tribromphenate  is  claimed  to 
be  a  nonirritant  and  nontoxic  antiseptic.  It  is  said  to  be 
useful  as  an  odorless  and  efficient  substitute  for  iodoform ; 
valuable  in  ulcus  cruris  and  all  weeping  eczemas;  internally, 
in  gastro-intestinal  catarrh,  proctitis,  dysentery,  bacillary  and 
choleraic  diarrhea,  cholera  infantum,  etc. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  3  Gm.  (15  to  45  grains)  per  day  to 
adults;  from  0.125  to  0.3  Gm.  (2  to  5  grains)  at  a  dose  to 
children.  Externally  (as  a  dusting  powder,  in  bandages,  etc.) 
like  iodoform,  in  lotions,  and  in  ointments. 

Bismuth  tribromphenate  is  an  amorphous,  yellow,  nearly  odorless 
and  tasteless  powder,  neutral  to  moistened  litmus  paper.  It  is  only 
slightly  soluble  in  water,  alcohol,  chloroform,  liquid  petrolatum  and 
vegetable  oils.  Alkalis  and  strong  acids  decompose  it.  It  is  stable  at 
temperatures  below   120   C. 

Boil  about  1  Gm.  of  the  salt  with  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion, filter  the  liquid  and  acidulate  the  filtrate  with  sulfuric  acid: 
the  white  curdy  precipitate  produced,  when  washed  and  dried,  melts 
at  from  90  to  95  C.  (tribromphenol).  The  contents  of  the  filter  dis- 
solve completely   in   diluted   hydrochloric  acid   (insoluble  inert  material). 

Boil  1  Gm.  of  bismuth  tribromphenate  with  20  cc.  of  a  mixture  of 
equal  parts  of  acetic  acid  and  water,  cool  the  solution  and  filter.  Free 
the  filtrate  from  bismuth  by  saturating  with  hydrogen  sulfide,  boil  the 
mixture  and  again  filter:  the  latter  filtrate  leaves  not  more  than  0.005 
Gm.  of  residue  on  evaporation  and  gentle  ignition  (alkalis  and  alkali 
earths). 

Shake  2  Gm.  of  bismuth  tribromphenate,  20  cc.  of  ether,  and  20  cc. 
of  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  distilled  water 
in  a  separatory  funnel  for  one  or  two  minutes.  Draw  off  the  aqueous 
portion  and  concentrate  to  about  4  cc;  pour  it  into  100  cc.  of  distilled 
water,  filter,  evaporate  the  filtrate  on  the  water  bath  to  30  cc,  again 
filter  and  divide  this  filtrate  into  portions  of  5  cc.  each.  Mix  one  por- 
tion with  an  equal  volume  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid:  it  does  not  become 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  135 

cloudy  (lead).  Treat  another  portion  with  a  slight  excess  of  ammonia 
water:  the  supernatant  liquid  does  not  exhibit  a  bluish  tint  (copper); 
another  portion  is  not  immediately  affected  by  barium  nitrate  test 
solution    (sulfate). 

Heat  gently  a  mixture  of  about  0.2  Gm.  of  bismuth  tribromphenate 
with  5  cc.  of  notassium  hydroxide  solution  and  about  0.2  Gm.  of 
aluminum  wire:  the  vapors  evolved  do  not  turn  red  litmus  blue 
(nitrates). 

Shake  1  Gm.  of  bismuth  tribromphenate  frequently  during  fifteen 
minutes  with  30  cc.  of  alcohol  (95  per  cent),  filter  and  rinse  the  flask 
with  two  separate  10  cc.  portions  of  alcohol,  allowing  the  washings  to 
run  through  the  filter.  To  the  combined  filtrate  and  washings  add  5  cc. 
of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide,  using  a  few  drops  of  phenolphthalein 
solution  as  an  indicator  and  determine  the  excess  of  alkali  with  tenth- 
normal hydrochloric  acid;  not  more  than  1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  should  have  been  consumed  by  the  alcoholic  liquid  (free 
tribromphenol). 

Add  2  _  cc.  of  nitric  acid  to  2  Gm.  of  bismuth  tribromphenate  in 
a  porcelain  crucible,  carefully  evaporate  to  dryness  on  a  sand  bath 
and  incinerate.  Dissolve  the  residue  in  5  cc.  of  concentrated  hydro- 
chloric acid  and  add  to  the  solution  10  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of 
stannous  chloride  in  concentrated  hydrochloric  acid:  the  mixture  should 
not  darken  on  standing  thirty  minutes   (arsenic). 

Mix  0.5  Gm.  of  the  salt  with  10  cc.  of  a  mixture  of  equal  parts 
of  hydrochloric  acid  and  distilled  water:  no  effervescence  should  occur 
(carbonate). 

To  about  0.5  Gm.  of  bismuth  tribromphenate,  accurately  weighed, 
add  20  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  digest  on  a  water  bath.  Add  150 
cc.  of  water  and  filter.  Rinse  the  beaker  with  30  cc.  of  acidulated  water 
and  allow  the  washings  to  run  through  the  filter.  Saturate  the  com- 
bined filtrate  and  washings  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (care  being  exercised 
that  the  solution  is  not  too  acid  so  as  to  prevent  quantitative  precipi- 
tation of  the  bismuth  sulfide),  filter  off  the  bismuth  sulfide,  wash 
and  dissolve  in  hot  dilute  nitric  acid.  Add  a  slight  excess  of  ammonia 
water  followed  by  2  cc.  of  ammonium  carbonate  test  solution.  Allow 
to  stand  thirty  minutes,  filter  off  the  precipitated  bismuth  hydroxide 
and  heat  to  constant  weight  at  dull  red  heat:  the  residue  of  bismuth 
oxide  (BizO.-i)  should  not  be  less  than  45  per  cent  or  more  than  55 
per  cent  of  the  original  weight  of  bismuth  tribromphenate  taken, 
corresponding  to  not  less  than  40  per  cent  nor  more  than  49  ner  cent 
of  bismuth. 

Xeroform-S.  and  G. — A  brand  of  bismuth  tribromphenate- 
N.  N.  R. 

Marketed  by  Schering  and  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

CREMO-BISMUTH.— Milk  of  Bismuth-S.  &  D.— A  mix- 
ture consisting  of  bismuth  subcarbonate,  suspended  in  water 
in  a  finely  divided  state,  each  hundred  cubic  centimeters  repre- 
senting the  equivalent  of  8.66  Gm.  (40  grains  in  1  fluidounce) 
of  bismuth  subnitrate. 

Dosage. — From  4  to  15  cc.  (1  to  4  fluidrachms),  every  two 
or  three  hours. 

Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  U.  S.  trade- 
mark  29,335. 

LAC  BISMO. — Mistura  Bismuthi-Hart.— A  mixture 
said  to  consist  of  bismuth  hydroxide  and  bismuth  subcarbonate, 
suspended  in  water,  in  a  finely  divided  state,  and  containing 
0.15  Gm.  {2y2  grains)  of  the  salts  in  4  cc.  (1  fluidrachm). 

Dosage. — From  4  to  15  cc.  (1  to  4  fluidrachms). 

Prepared  by  E.  J.  Hart  &  Co.,  Ltd.,  New  Orleans.     U.  S.  trademark. 


136     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

MESUROL.—Benzobis.— Basic  Bismuth  Methoxy  Hydroxy 
Benzoate. — A  basic  bismuth  saU  of  methoxyhydroxybenzoic  acid, 
of  variable  composition,  containing  from  54  to  57  per  cent  of 
bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mesurol  is  proposed  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis.     (See  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds). 

Dosage.  —  Mesurol  is  administered  intramuscularly  in  the 
form  of  emulsion  mesurol,  20  per  cent.  The  initial  dose  is 
0.5  cc,  increased  to  1  cc.  (0.103  to  0.117  Gm.  of  Bismuth)  at  the 
second  dose  and  continued  until  from  eight  to  twelve  weekly 
doses  have  been  administered. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company.  Inc.,  New  York. 
U.  S.  patent,  1,522,054  (Jan.  6,  1925;  expires  1942).  U.  S.  trademark 
226,373. 

Emulsion  Mesurol,  20  per  cent:  A  suspension  of  mesurol  in  sesame  oil 
each  cubic  centimeter  of  which  contains  mesurol  equivalent  to  from  0.103 
to  0.117  Gm.  of  bismuth   (Bi). 

Mesurol   is   a  yellowish   gray   powder,    insoluble   in   water  and   in  most 

organic  solvents. 

Suspend  about  0.05  Gm.  of  mesurol  in  5  cc.  of  water  and  add  S  cc.  of 
ammonium  sulfide:  the  solid  blackens.  Suspend  0.1  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of 
water,  acidify  with  hydrochloric  acid  and  allow  to  cool:  crystals  appear, 
which,  on  addition  of  ferric  chloride  solution,  cause  the  formation  of  a 
deep   blue   color;   the   crystals,   after   drying,   melt   at   152   C. 

Agitate  1  Gm.  of  mesurol  with  20  cc.  of  chloroform,  filter  the  liquid 
and  evaporate  the  filtrate  to  dryness:  not  more  than  0.005  Gm.  of 
residue  remains  (free  methoxyhydroxybenzoic  acid).  Ignite  3  Gm.  in 
a  quartz  crucible,  cool,  and  cautiously  add  drop  by  drop  just  sufficient 
nitric  acid  to  dissolve  the  residue  when  it  is  warmed;  pour  the  acid 
solution  into  100  cc.  of  distilled  water,  evaporate  the  filtrate  on  the 
water  bath  to  30  cc,  again  filter  and  divide  the  filtrate  into  5  cc.  por- 
tions; to  one  portion  add  an  equal  volume  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid: 
the  liquid  does  not  become  cloudy  (lead).  Add  an  excess  of  ammonia 
water  to  another  portion:  the  supernatant  liquid  does  not  exhibit  a 
bluish  tint  {copper).  Add  to  another  portion  diluted  hydrochloric  acid: 
a  precipitate,  insoluble  in  an  excess  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  soluble  in 
ammonia  water,  is  not  formed  {silver).  Boil  1  Gm.  in  70  cc.  of  water, 
add  hydrochloric  acid  in  small  portions  to  the  boiling  suspension  until 
the  suspended  particles  dissolve,  saturate  with  hydrogen  sulfide  and 
filter;  evaporate  the  filtrate  to  a  small  bulk,  cool,  transfer  to  a  platinum 
dish,  add  2  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  evaporate  to  dryness  and  ignite:  the 
residue  weighs  less  than  0.005  Gm.  {alkali  or  alkaline  earth  salts). 
Triturate  about  0.05  Gm.  with  0.1  Gm.  of  sodium  salicylate  and  5  cc. 
of  distilled  water,  and  superimpose  the  mixture  on  5  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid:  no  pink  or  brownish-red  zone  is  observed  at  the  line  of  contact 
{nitrate).  Suspend  0.06  Gm.  in  boiling  water,  add  diluted  nitric  acid 
in  small  portions  until  the  suspended  particles  dissolve,  cool,  dilute 
to  50  cc.  and  add  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  precipitate  is  not 
formed    {chloride). 

Transfer  about  2  Gm.  of  mesurol,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  quartz 
crucible;  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C. :  the  loss  in  weight  at  100  C. 
is  not  more  than  1  per  cent.  Ignite  the  dried  product  and  after  cooling 
add  5  cc.  of  nitric  acid  drop  by  drop  to  the  residue,  warming  until 
solution  has  been  effected;  evaporate  to  dryness,  carefully  ignite  it  at 
red  heat,  and  weigh  the  resulting  bismuth  oxide :  the  residue  corre- 
sponds to  not  less  than  54  per  cent  nor  more  than  57  per  cent  of  bis- 
muth. The  residue  meets  the  requirements  of  Bettendorf's  test,  U.  S. 
P.  X,  page  430   {arsenic). 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  137 

OLEO-BI-ROCHE.— A  suspension  of  finely  divided  bis- 
muth oleate,  Bi  (Ci7H33COO)3,  in  olive  oil,  containing  bismuth 
oleate  equivalent  to  0.05  Gm.  of  bismuth  (Bi)  in  each  cubic 
centimeter. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Oleo-Bi-Roche  is  proposed  as  a  means 
of  obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment 
of  syphilis   (see  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds). 

Dosage. — Two  cc.  intramuscularly,  preferably  into  the  glu- 
teal muscle,  once  a  week ;  in  the  case  of  adults,  from  twelve 
to  twenty  injections  of  2  cc.  are  proposed  as  a  course  of 
treatment.  The  product  is  supplied  in  25  cc.  and  100  cc.  bulk 
packages. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hoffmann-LaRoche  and  Co.,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent 
1,547,165    (July  28.   1925;   expires    1942).     U.   S.  trademark  183,191. 

In  the  manufacture  of  oleo-bi-Roche,  moist  bismuth  oleate  is  emul- 
sified and  dehydration  takes  places  subsequently.  The  bismuth  oleate 
used   complies   with   the   following    standards: 

It  is  a  soft,  amorphous  mass,  insoluble  in  water;  partially  soluble  in 
alcohol  and  ether.  Its  bismuth  content  is  19.8  per  cent,  and  its  oleic 
acid  content  about  77.8  per  cent. 

Suspend  about  1  Gm.  of  bismuth  oleate  in  10  cc.  of  ether.  Shake 
the  mixture  with  10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  draw  off  the 
aqueovis  layer  and  cautiously  pour  diphenylamine  solution  over  it:  a 
blue   zone   does   not  appear    (nitrate). 

Introduce  about  1.5  Gm.  of  moist  bismuth  oleate  (representing  0.1  to 
0.3  Gm.  of  Bi),  accurately  weighed,  into  a  beaker  of  50  cc.  capacity. 
Pour  20  cc.  of  ether  over  the  bismuth  oleate  and  stir  with  a  glass  rod. 
Transfer  the  turbid  liquid  to  a  separator  and  complete  the  transfer 
with  three  portions  of  ether  of  5  cc.  each.  Add  5  cc.  of  nitric  acid 
(25  per  cent)  to  the  contents  of  the  separator  and  agitate  the  contents 
for  one  to  two  minutes.  When  separation  has  occurred,  draw  the  aque- 
ous portion  into  a  beaker.  Extract  the  etheral  liquid  in  a  sepa- 
rator three  times  with  5  cc.  portions  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and 
add  the  washings  to  the  contents  of  the  beaker.  Dilute  the  acid  extrac- 
tions with  water  to  make  about  80  cc.  Add  a  drop  of  methyl  orange 
solution  to  the  liquid  and  neutralize  it  with  10  per  cent  ammonium 
carbonate  solution  (cover  the  beaker  with  a  watch  glass  to  avoid  loss 
by  spattering)  and  then  add  a  further  quantity  of  5  cc.  of  10  per  cent 
ammonium  carbonate  solution.  Complete  the  determination  in  the 
usual   way  and  weigh  as  bismuth  oxide. 

Introduce  about  1.5  Gm.  of  moist  bismuth  oleate  into  a  50  cc. 
beaker  and  weigh  accurately.  Add  20  cc.  of  ether  and  stir  with  a 
glass  rod.  Transfer  the  mixture  to  a  50  cc.  separator  and  complete 
the  transfer  with  three  5  cc.  portions  of  ether.  Add  5  cc.  of  25  per 
cent  nitric  acid  to  the  liquid  in  the  separator  and  agitate  the  mixture. 
After  separation,  draw  off  the  acid  liquid  and  then  extract  the  ether 
solution  with  three  5  cc.  portions  of  10  per  cent  nitric  acid  and  finally 
with  5  cc.  portions  of  water  until  the  washings  are  neutral  to  litmus. 
Filter  the  ether  solution  into  a  small  flask  and  complete  the  transfer 
with  ether.  Remove  the  ether  in  the  flask  by  distillation,  dissolve 
the  residue  in  30  cc.  of  neutral  alcohol  and  determine  the  acidity  of  the 
solution  by  titration  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide,  using  phenol- 
phthalein  as  indicator.  From  the  volume  of  tenth-normal  alkali  con- 
sumed, calculate  the  percentage  of  oleic  acid. 

BISMUTH  AND  POTASSIUM  TARTRATE.— Potas- 
sium Bismuth  Tartrate. — Potassium  Bismuthyl  Tartrate. — "A 
basic     bismuth     potassium     bismuthotartrate,     containing     the 


138     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

equivalent   of   not   less   than    71    per    cent    and   not   more    than 
75  per  cent  of  BisOs/'-t/.  i'.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Bismuthi 
et  Potassii  Tartras. 

Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate-D.  R.  L. — A  brand  of  potas- 
sium and  bismuth  tartrate-U.  S.  P. 

Dosage. — (a)  Oily  Suspension. — From  0.1  to  0.2  Gm.  (1^^  to 
3  grains)  by  intramuscular  injection,  preferably  into  the  gluteal 
muscle.  The  injections  may  be  repeated  at  intervals  of  seven 
days  until  a  total  of  from  2.4  to  3.0  Gm.  has  been  given,  (b) 
Aqueous  Isotonic  Solution. — 50  mg.  by  intramuscular  injection, 
preferably  into  the  gluteal  muscles,  at  intervals  of  2  to  3  days, 
until  a  total  of  12  to  18  injections  has  been  given. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Ampules  Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  (Aqueoiis)-D.  R.  L.,  2  cc: 
Each  ampule  contains  potassium  bismuth  tartrate-D.  R.  L.,  0.05  Gm. 
(equivalent  to  34  mg.  elemental  bismuth)  in  an  aqueous  solution  con- 
taining cresol   0.2   per   cent  and   sucrose  6   per   cent. 

Ampules  Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  0.1  Gm.: 
Each  ampule  contains  potassium  bismuth  tartrate-D.  R.  L.  0.1  Gm.  and 
butyn  0.4  per  cent  with  metaphen  1 :  20,000  in  an  emulsion  of  olive  and 
almond  oils,   2  cc. 

Ampules  Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  0.2  Gm. : 
Each  ampule  contains  potassium  bismuth  tartrate-D.  R.  L.  0.2  Gm.  and 
butyn,  0.4  per  cent  with  metaphen  1 :  20,000  suspended  in  peanut  oil, 
2   cc. 

Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  (Aqueous)-D.  R.  L.,  2.5  per  cent: 
Potassum  bismuth  tartrate-D.  R.  L.  2.5  per  cent  in  an  aqueous  solution 
containing  cresol  0.2  per   cent,  and  sucrose  6  per  cent. 

Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  10  per  cent:  Each 
cc.  contains  potassium  bismuth  tartrate-D.  R.  L.,  0.1  Gm.  (equivalent  to 
64  mg.  elemental  bismuth),  butyn  0.4  per  cent  and  metaphen  1:20,000 
suspended  in  peanut  oil,  2  cc. 

QUINIOBINE. — Quinine  bismuth  iodide  rendered  soluble 
in  olive  oil  by  means  of  lecithin.  Each  cubic  centimeter  con- 
tains 0.158  Gm.  of  quinine  bismuth  iodide,  equivalent  to  0.03 
Gm.  of  bismuth  (Bi),  rendered  soluble  in  olive  oil,  with  0.22 
Gm.  of  lecithin  and  0.385  Gm.  of  benzyl  alcohol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Quiniobine  is  proposed  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis.  It  is  claimed  that,  since  in  quiniobine  and  quinine 
bismuth  iodide  is  soluble,  the  injections  are  usually  only  slightly 
painful  and  the  dosage  is  more  accurate  than  with  suspensions 
of  quinine  bismuth  iodide. 

Dosage. — Single  dose  for  adults :  1  to  2  cc.  twice  a  week ;  the 
average  course  is  from  twelve  to  fourteen  injections. 

Manufactured    by     Chemisch-Pharmazeutische    A.     G.,     Bad    Homburg, 

Frankfurt-a-M.     Germany.      U.     S.     patent     7,777,173     (Sept     30,     1930; 
expires   1947).     U.   S.  trademark  254,643. 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  139 

Quiniobine  Ampules,  2  cc:  An  oily  solution,  each  2  cc.  of  which  con- 
tains quinine  bismuth  iodide  0.316  Gm.,  equivalent  to  0.06  Gm,  of  bismuth 
(Bi)  rendered  soluble  in  olive  oil,  with  0.44  Gm.  of  lecithin  and  0.77  Gm. 
of  benzyl  alcohol. 

Transfer  exactly  2  cc.  of  quiniobine  to  a  Kjeldahl  flask,  add  15  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid,  heat,  add  nitric  acid  a  few  drops  at  a  time  until 
the  solution  becomes  almost  clear.  From  time  to  time  during  the 
addition  of  the  nitric  acid,  heat  until  brown  fumes  are  not  evolved. 
When  the  solution  is  clear,  cool,  add  10  cc.  of  water  and  heat  until 
brown  fumes  are  not  evolved;  cool,  add  200  cc.  of  water,  transfer 
to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  warm,  add  hydrogen  sulfide  until  the  bismuth 
is  completely  precipitated  (if  the  bismuth  does  not  come  down  readily, 
add  ammonia  water  until  it  does),  filter  in  a  weighed  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  with  water,  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether  in  this  order,  dry  at 
100  C.,  cool  in  a  desiccator  over  sulfuric  acid,  weigh:  the  bismuth 
sulfide  is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  0.0585  Gm.  nor  more  than 
0.0615   Gm.   of   bismuth. 

The  quinine  bismuth  iodide  in  quiniobine  conforms  to  the  N.  N.  R. 
standards  for  that  substance. 

THIO-BISMOL.— Sodium  bismuth  thioglycollate.— A  salt 
formed  by  the  interaction  of  sodium  thioglycollate  and 
bismuth  hydroxide.  The  product  has  the  general  formula 
Bi(SCH2C02Na)3,  though  it  may  differ  slightly  in  composition 
from  this  formula.  It  contains  approximately  38  per  cent  of 
bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Thio-bismol  is  proposed  as  a  means  of 
obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis  (see  preceding  general  article,  Bismuth  Compounds)  ; 
it  is  a  water-soluble  compound,  readily  absorbable,  and  produces 
relatively  little  local  injury. 

Dosage. — For  the  average  adult,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains)  admin- 
istered intramuscularly  three  times  a  week  for  a  series  of  from 
twelve  to  fifteen  doses. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.  U.  S.  patent 
applied  for.     U.  S.  trademark  220,808. 

Ampoules  Thio-Bismol  0.2  Gm.:  Each  ampule  contains  0.2  Gm.  (3 
grains)  of  thio-bismol,  to  be  dissolved  in  1  cc.  of  sterile  distilled  water 
before  administration. 

Ampoules  Thio-Bismol,  2  Gm.  Each  ampule,  representing  ten  doses, 
contains  2  Gm.  (30  grains)  of  thio-bismol,  to  be  dissolved  in  20  cc.  of 
sterile  distilled  water  before  administration. 

Thio-bismol  occurs  as  a  canary  yellow  hygroscopic  noncrystallitie  but 
granular  substance  possessing  a  garlic-like  odor.  It  is  freely  soluble 
in  water  but  the  solutions  are  not  stable. 

Add  1  drop  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  1  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent 
solution  of  thio-bismol  solution:  a  heavy  yellow  precipitate  separates 
that  dissolves  on  the  addition  of  another  drop  of  acid.  Add  several 
drops  of  acetic  acid  to  1  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  thio-bismol: 
no  precipitate  forms.  Add  3  drops  of  ammonia  water  to  1  cc.  of  a  2 
per  cent  solution:  a  slight  change  of  color  and  a  slight  precipitate  occurs 
within  one-half  hour.  Add  1  drop  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  1  cc. 
of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  thio-bismol:  a  precipitate  forms,  insoluble 
in  excess  of  reagent.  Add  several  drops  of  copper  sulfate  solution  to 
1_  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  thio-bismol:  a  precipitate  forms  that 
gives  the  suspension  a  murky  greenish  brown  appearance.  The  pre- 
cipitate dissolves  in  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  leaving  a  yellow  solution 
(distinction  from  sodium  or  potassium  bismuth  tartrates) .  Gently  ignite 
an  intimate  mixture  containing  about  0.2  Gm.  each  of  thio-bismol  and 
sodium  carbonate,  cool,  add  3  cc.  of  water,  add  sufficient  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  to  make  the  solution  acid  and  boil:  lead  acetate  paper 
held  in  the  mouth  of  the  test  tube  blackens. 


140     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Extract  0.2  Gm.  of  thio-bismol  with  10  cc.  of  chloroform  or  ether: 
no  residue  remains  after  the  evaporation  of  the  solvent  (free  thioglycol- 
lic  acid).  To  1  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  thio-bismol  add  sufficient 
diluted  hj'drochloric  acid  to  just  dissolve  the  precipitate  first  formed, 
and  add  several  drops  of  barium  chloride  solution:  a  precipitate  does 
not  appear. 

Heat  an  accurately  weighed  sample  of  thio-bismol  weighing  about  1 
Gm.  in  a  100  C.  oven  for  one  hour,  cool  in  a  desiccator,  and  weigh: 
the  sample  does  not  lose  more  than  5  per  cent  in  weight.  Transfer 
an  accurately  weighed  sample  of  thio-bismol  weighing  about  0.4  Gm. 
to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  dissolve  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add  enough  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  to  just  dissolve  the  precipitate  first  formed,  saturate 
with  hydrogen  sulfide  until  the  bismuth  is  completely  precipitated  as 
bismuth  sulfide,  collect  the  precipitate  in  a  prepared  gooch  crucible, 
wash  with  water,  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform  and  ether  in  the  order 
named,  dry  at  100  C.,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh:  the  bismuth 
calculated  from  the  bismuth  sulfide  is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  Z7 
per  cent  nor  more  than  39.5  per  cent  in  the  original  calculated  to  the 
dry  substance.  Evaporate  the  filtrate  from  the  bismuth  determination 
to  a  small  bulk,  transfer  to  a  platinum  dish,  add  sulfuric  acid  and 
evaporate  to  dryness;  add  a  few  drops  of  sulfuric  acid,  evaporate  to 
dryness  again,  volatilize  a  small  amount  of  ammonium  carbonate  from 
the  dish,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh:  the  sodium  calculated  from 
the  weight  of  sodium  sulfate  is  not  less  than  12.23  per  cent  nor 
more  than  13.04  per  cent  in  the  original  substance  calculated  to  the  dry 
substance. 

QUININE  BISMUTH  IODIDE.— A  substance  of  vari- 
able composition  containing  between  18  and  20.1  per  cent  of 
bismuth,  between  48.7  and  53.5  per  cent  of  iodine;  and  quinine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Quinine  bismuth  iodide  is  proposed  as  a 
means  of  obtaining  the  systemic  effect  of  bismuth  in  the  treat- 
ment of  syphilis   (See  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds). 

Quinine  bismuth  iodide  is  a  red  powder  that  clings  to  most  surfaces 
even  when  it  is  dry.     It  is  insoluble  in  water  and  most  organic  solvents. 

Treat  about  0.5  Gm.  of  quinine  bismuth  iodide  with  15  cc.  of  20 
per  cent  potassium  hydroxide  solution,  warm,  add  50  cc.  of  water,  filter 
off  the  insoluble  material,  wash  with  water,  dry  at  100  C,  extract  with 
five  10  cc.  portions  of  benzene,  evaporate  the  benzene  and  dry  the 
residue  at  100  C.:  the  residue  melts  at  171  C.  and  gives  the  U.S. P.  X 
tests  for  quinine.  Ash  the  filter  and  undissolved  precipitate  in  a  quartz 
crucible:   a  yellow   residue  remains. 

Treat  about  0.1  Gm.  of  quinine  bismuth  iodide  with  about  1  cc.  of 
nitric  acid:  the  material  blackens.  Add  10  cc.  of  water  and  boil:  violet 
colored  vapors  are  given  off. 

Shake  0.030  Gm.  of  quinine  bismuth  iodide  with  4  cc.  of  water,  filter 
through  a  pledget  of  cotton,  add  1  cc.  of  chloroform  and  0.3  cc.  each  of 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  ferric  chloride  solution,  shake  and  allow  to 
stand  five  minutes:  the  chloroform  docs  not  acquire  a  purple  tinge 
(iodides) . 

Shake  0.75  Gm.  of  quinine  bismuth  iodide  with  4  cc.  of  potassium 
iodide  solution,  filter,  add  1  cc.  of  chloroform  to  the  filtrate,  shake  and 
allow  to  stand  five  minutes:  the  chloroform  does  not  acquire  a  purple 
tingle    (iodine). 

Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  quinine  bismuth  iodide,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  wide  mouth  weighing  bottle  and  dry  in  a  vaccum  over  sulfuric  acid 
to  constant  weight:  it  loses  not  more  than  1  per  cent  in  weight.  Trans- 
fer about  0.5  Gm.  of  the  original,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  600  cc. 
beaker,  add  nitric  acid  until  the  color  changes  to  black,  add  100  cc.  of 
water  and  boil  until  clear  and  almost  colorless,  add  an  excfess  of  stronger 
ammonia  water  and  20  cc.  of  ammonium  carbonate  solution,  allow  to 
stand  three  hours,  filter,  wash  the  precipitate  with  water  and  ash,  ignite 
in  a  weighed  quartz  crucible,  add  a  few  drops  of  nitric  acid,  evaporate 
and    ignite    to    constant    weight,    cool    in    a    desiccator    and    weigh:     the 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  141 

bismuth  oxide  weighed  is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  18  per  cent  nor 
more  than  20.08  per  cent  of  bismuth.  Transfer  about  0.12  Gm.  of  the 
original,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  glass  capsule,  transfer  this  tube  to  a 
Carius  tube  containing  30  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and  0.2  Gm.  of  silver 
nitrate,  seal  and  heat  for  seven  hours  at  210  C;  cool,  open  the  tube, 
transfer  the  contents  to  a  large  beaker  and  dilute  to  SOf)  cc;  allow 
to  stand  for  four  hours,  filter  through  a  Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  very 
dilute  nitric  acid  (1  cc.  diluted  nitric  acid  in  50  cc.  of  water),  dry  at 
100  C,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh:  the  silver  iodide  is  equivalent 
to  not  less  than   48.75   per  cent  nor  more  than   53.5    per  cent  iodine. 

SODIUM  lODOBISMUTHITE.  —  Sodium  bismuth 
iodide.  —  A  compound  formed  by  the  interaction  of  bismuth 
chloride  and  sodium  iodide  in  ethyl  acetate  solution,  consisting 
essentially  of  hydratcd  sodium  iodobismuthite  (sodium  bismuth 
iodide)  NasBiLs"  with  inorganic  salts.  It  contains  approximately 
21  per  cent  bismuth  (Bi),  62  per  cent  iodide  (I")  and  11  per 
cent  water  of  hydration. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  is  claimed  for  sodium  iodobismuthite 
that  it  has  the  quality  of  appearing  •  in  the  spinal  fluid  and  of 
penetrating  the  brain  tissue.  This  claim  and  therapeutic  indica- 
tions based  upon  it  require  further  confirmation. 

Dosage. — See  lodobismitol  with   Saligenin. 

Sodium  iodobismuthite  occurs  as  a  red  crystalline  compound,  odorless, 
or  having  only  a  faint  acetic  or  ethyl  acetate  odor,  permanent  in  dry 
air  and  possessing  an  astringent  taste.  It  yields  a  clear  solution  with 
one  part  water;  on  moderate  dilution  of  the  solution,  sodium  iodobis- 
muthite hydrolyzes  to  form  a  black  precipitate  of  bismuth  iodide  in  a 
finely  divided  state,  while  on  further  addition  of  water  the  black  pre- 
cipitate changes  to  red  bismuth  oxyiodide.  Hydrolysis  may  be  retarded 
by  the  addition  of  acids  or  alkali  iodides.  The  aqueous  solution  is 
neutral  or  faintly  acid  to  litmus.  Sodium  iodobismuthite  dissolves 
readily  and  without  decomposition  in  ethylene-glycol,  propylene  glycol, 
glycerin,  anhydrous  alcohol  and  ethyl  acetate;  it  is  insoluble  in  absolute 
ether,  chloroform,  carbon  disulfide,  petroleum  ether,  fixed  oils  and 
liquid  petrolatum.  On  heating  the  product  in  an  oven  at  80  to  110  C, 
it  loses  water  of  hydration,  with  slight  decomposition,  leaving  a  maroon 
colored  residue  that  becomes  brown  or  black  on  aging,  and  that  changes 
to  red  on  exposure  to  moisture. 

Add  3  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  25  cc.  of  water  to  about  0.5  Gm. 
of  sodium  iodobismuthite,  add  an  excess  of  stronger  ammonia  water, 
filter  and  wash  the  filter  with  water.  Ignite  the  filter  in  a  quartz 
crucible;  the  residue  is  yellow.  A  few  drops  of  the  filtrate  imparts 
an  intense  yellow  color  to  a  nonluminous  flame.  Add  3  cc.  of  ferric 
chloride  solution  to  a  10  cc.  portion  of  the  filtrate  acidified  with  hydro- 
chloric acid,  shake  with  3  cc.  of  chloroform;  a  violet  coloration  is 
imparted  to  the  chloroform.  Add  5  cc.  of  chloroform  to  about  0.2  Gm. 
of  sodium  iodobismuthite  and  shake  the  mixture;  the  chloroform  remains 
clear  and  colorless  (free  iodine  and  distinctimi  from  quinine  bismutJi 
iodide).  Percolate  0.1  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite  with  10  cc.  of 
absolute  ether;  no  residue  remains  after  the  evaporation  of  the  solvent. 
Add  2  cc.  of  nitric  acid  to  1.5  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite  in  a 
quartz  dish,  evaporate  on  a  steam  bath  and  ignite  at  red  heat;  dissolve 
in  5  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid;  the  solution  meets  the  requiremetns  of 
the  Bettendorff  test,  U.  S.  P.  X  (arsenic).  Add  just  suflRcient  nitric 
acid  to  blacken  3  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite  contained  in  a  150  cc. 
beaker,  add  100  cc.  of  water  and  boil;  filter  and  evaporate  the  filtrate 
to  30  cc,  filter  again  and  divide  the  latter  filtrate  into  portions  of  5  cc. 
each.  Mix  one  portion  with  an  equal  volume  of  dilute  sulfuric  acid: 
the  liquid  does  not  become  cloudy  (lead) ;  precipitate  another  portion 
with  a  slight  excess  of  ammonia  water:  the  supernatant  liquid  does  not 
exhibit  a  bluish  tint  (copper)  :  another  portion  is  not  immediately 
affected  by  barium  nitrate  solution    (sulfate).     To  another  portion,  add 


142     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  no  precipitate  is  formed  which  is  insoluble 
in  a  slight  excess  of  hydrochloric  acid,  but  soluble  in  ammonia  water 
(silver) . 

Transfer  about  0.4  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  wide  mouth  weighing  bottle  and  heat  to  constant  weight  in  an  oven 
at  110  C. ;  the  loss  in  weight  is  not  less  than  10.5  per  cent  nor  more 
than  12.5  per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  beaker,  dissolve  in  3  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  125  cc.  of  water 
saturate  the  solution  with  hydrogen  sulfide  to  precipitate  completely 
the  bismuth  as  bismuth  sulfide,  filter  in  a  gooch  crucible,  wash  with 
water,  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether  in  this  order,  dry  for  one  hour 
at  100  C.,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh;  repeat  the  washing  with 
chloroform  and  ether  and  the  drying  at  100  C.  until  constant  weight 
is  attained;  the  bismuth  sulfide  weight  is  equivalent  to  not  more  than 
21.8  per  cent,  nor  less  than  20.3  per  cent  bismuth. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  250  cc.  beaker,  add  10  cc.  of  a  solution  of  acid  silver  nitrate  (pre- 
pared by  dissolving  1  Gm.  of  silver  nitrate  in  20  cc.  of  water  and 
adding  5  cc.  of  nitric  acid)  and  then  100  cc.  of  water,  allow  to  stand 
two  hours,  filter,  using  a  filter  paper,  wash  well  with  water.  Without 
allowing  the  precipitate  to  dry,  puncture  the  filter  and  wash  the  pre- 
cipitate into  a  250  cc.  glass-stoppered  Erlenmej-er  flask,  using  100  cc. 
of  stronger  ammonia  water,  agitate  the  solution,  then  allow  the  flask 
and  contents  to  stand  two  hours,  collect  the  precipiate  on  a  prepared 
gooch  crucible  and  wash  it  with  diluted  ammonia  water,  then  with 
water;  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.  The  weight  of  silver  iodide 
is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  60  per  cent  nor  more  than  63  per  cent 
iodide.  Add  10  cc.  of  potassium  iodide  solution  to  the  filtrate  and 
heat  on  the  steam  bath  until  most  of  the  ammonia  has  been  removed, 
filter  the  solution  and  collect  the  precipitate  on  a  prepared  gooch 
crucible,  wash  with  water,  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.;  the  weight 
of   silver   iodide   is   equivalent  to   not  more   than   0.7   per  cent  chloride. 

lODOBISMITOL  WITH  SALIGENIN.— A  solution  of 
sodium  iodobismuthite  (sodium  bismuth  iodide)  and  sodium 
iodide  in  propylene  glycol  (racemic  1,2  propylene  glycol)  con- 
taining saligenin  and  a  small  amount  of  acetic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — lodobismitol  with  saligenin  seems  to  be 
well  absorbed  and  to  be  excreted  fairly  rapidly.  In  laboratory 
animals  the  bismuth  enters  the  brain  in  from  90  to  100  per  cent 
of  the  cases.  The  claim  is  made  for  it  that  it  will  penetrate 
the  brain  in  significant  quantity  in  a  great  majority  of  persons 
treated.  This  claim,  however,  and  therapeutic  indications  based 
on  it  require  further  confirmation. 

Z)oja(7r.— Intramuscular  injections  of  2  cc.  repeated  every 
three  days.  Two  full  days  should  elapse  between  injections. 
From  14  to  16  injections  comprise  a  course  of  treatment. 
A  rest  period  of  from  two  to  four  weeks  should  elapse  between 
courses.  At  each  injection  the  patient  would  thus  receive  from 
0.024  to  0.0276  Gm.  of  metallic  bismuth  (from  0.1154  to  0.1328 
Gm.  sodium  bismuth  iodide,  and  from  0.218  to  0.258  Gm. 
sodium  iodide). 

Manufactured    by    E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons,    New    York,    by   license    of 

Stanford    University.      U.    S.    patent    1,890,508    (Dec.    13,    1932;    expires 

1949)    and   1,927,210    (Sept.    19,   1933;   expires   1950).    U.   S.  trademark. 

Ampules  lodobismitol  with  Saligenin  2  cc:    Each  2  cc.  contain  from 

0.1154  to  0.1328  Gm.  of  sodium  iodobismuthite   (equivalent  to  0.024  to 

0.0276  Gm.  of  bismuth)  and  from  0.218  to  0.258  Gm.  of  sodium  iodide, 

dissolved  in  propylene  glycol  containing  4  per  cent  saligenin  and  0.1  per 


BISMUTH     COMPOUNDS  143 


cent  acetic  acid.  The  total  iodide  per  2  cc.  is  equivalent  to  from  0.252 
to  0.296  Gra.  of  sodium  iodide. 

The  specific  gravity  of  iodobismitol  with  saligenin  at  25  C.  ranges 
from  1.167  to  1.175.  The  pn  of  iodobismitol  with  saligenin  taken  with 
a  quinhydrone  electrode  ranges  from  4.5  to  5.0.  The  refractive  index 
at  25   C.   ranges  from   1.4609  to  1.4611. 

Transfer  about  3  cc.  of  iodobismitol  with  saligenin,  accurately 
weighed,  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  3  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and 
125  cc.  of  water;  determine  the  bismuth  according  to  the  method  out- 
lined under  sodium  iodobisniuthite:  each  cubic  centimeter  contains  the 
equivalent  of  not  less  than  0.012  nor  more  than  0.0138  Gm.  of  bismuth. 
Add  10  cc.  of  a  nitric  acid-silver  nitrate  solution  (prepared  by  dissolv- 
ing 1  Gm.  of  silver  nitrate  in  20  cc.  of  water  and  adding  5  cc.  of  nitric 
acid)  to  about  3  cc.  of  iodobismitol  with  saligenin,  accurately  weighed, 
and  then  add  100  cc.  of  water,  allow  to  stand  two  hours,  filter  into 
a  prepared  Gooch  crucible,  and  wash  with  very  dilute  nitric  acid  (5  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  to  make  100  cc),  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100 
C. :  weight  of  silver  iodide  is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  0.135  nor  more 
than   0.145   Gm.  of  iodide  per  cubic  centimeter. 

The  sodium  iodobismuthite  in  iodobismitol  with  saligenin  conforms  to 
the  New  and    Nonofficial   Remedies  standards  for  this   substance. 

The  propylene  glycol  used  in  the  preparation  of  iodobismitol  with 
saligenin  complies  with  the  following  tests  and  standards: 

Propylene  glycol,  racemic  1,2  propylene  glycol,  CH2OH  CHOH  CH3, 
occurs  as  a  viscous,  colorless,  almost  odorless  liquid,  completely  miscible 
with  water,  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether.  The  specific  gravity  at  25  C. 
ranges  between  1.035  and  1.037.  The  refractive  index  at  25  C.  ranges 
between  1.4312  and  1.4317. 

Transfer  25  cc.  of  propylene  glycol  to  a  distilling  flask;  determine 
the  distillation  range  according  to  Method  I  of  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  X: 
ninety-five  per  cent  distils  over  at  from  184  to  189  C.  (corrected)  at 
760  mm.  The  refractive  index  of  the  distillate  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  material  before  distillation.  Agitate  5  cc.  of  propylene  glycol  with 
15  cc.  of  distilled  water;  insert  a  piece  of  red  and  a  piece  of  blue 
litmus  paper;  the  solution  must  be  neutral  to  the  litmus  papers.  Add 
1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  and  1  cc.  of  nitric  acid  to  5  cc.  of 
propylene  glycol  diluted  with  15  cc.  of  water:  not  more  than  a  slight 
opalescence  appears  within  fifteen  minutes  (chloride).  Add  1  cc.  of 
barium  chloride  and  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  5  cc.  of 
propylene  glycol  diluted  with  15  cc.  of  water;  no  precipitate  forms  in 
fifteen  minutes  (sulfate).  Bubble  hydrogen  sulfide  through  5  cc. 
of  propylene  glycol  diluted  with  15  cc.  of  water:  there  is  no  opalescence 
and  no  change  of  color. 

Incinerate  about  2  Gm.  of  propylene  glycol,  accurately  weighed,  in 
a  platinum  dish:  the  residue  is  not  more  than  0.05  per  cent. 

The  saligenin  used  in  the  preparation  of  iodobismitol  with  saligenin 
complies  with   the  following  tests  and  standards: 

Saligenin,  ortho-hydroxy  benzyl  alcohol,  salicyl  alcohol,  occurs  a.s 
white  monoclinic  plates.  It  is  soluble  in  water,  chloroform,  and  the 
fixed  and  volatile  oils;  freely  soluble  in  alcohol  and  ether.  The  aqueous 
solution  is  neutral  to  litmus  paper.     It  melts  between  85  and  86  C. 

Add  3  cc.  of  aniline  to  1  Gm.  of  saligenin  and  heat  just  below  the 
boiling  point  for  6  minutes.  Add  15  cc.  of  alcohol  and  heat  to  boiling; 
add  warm  water  (80  C.),  a  few  cc.  at  a  time,  but  stop  short  of  the 
point  where  the  precipitate  formed  fails  to  dissolve  at  this  temperature, 
allow  to  cool,  filter  and  dry  the  crystals:  the  melting  point  falls  between 
106  and  108.5  C.  (ortho-hydroxy  benzyl  aniline).  Saligenin  is  not 
precipitated  by  the  usual  alkaloidal  reagents.  Add  a  few  drops  of 
ferric  chloride  solution  to  about  0.1  Gm.  of  saligenin:  the  solution 
becomes  bluish  violet.  Add  a  few  drops  of  sulfuric  acid  to  about  0.01 
Gm.  of  saligenin:  the  particles  instantly  become  cherry  red,  while  the 
acid  is  but  slightly  colored  (distinction  from  other  local  anesthetics). 
Add  100  cc.  of  cold  water  to  0.3  Gm.  of  saligenin  in  a  beaker:  the 
substance  is  completely  soluble  and  the  solution  is  colorless  (substances 
insoluble  in   cold  water).      Add    1    cc.   of   sodium  hydroxide  solution  to 


144     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

5  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of  saligenin.  The  yellow  color  produced  is 
not  darker  than  that  of  a  solution  made  by  diluting  0.3  cc.  of  U.  S. 
P.  XI  ferric  chloride  colorimetric  solution  to  5  cc.  with  distilled  water, 
when  compared  immediately  in  a  container  of  the  same  dimensions 
(limit  of  salicyl  aldehyde).  Add  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  and 
1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  to  5  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of  saligenin: 
not  more  than  a  slight  opalescence  appears  (limit  of  chloride).  Add. 
1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution  and  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid 
to  5  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of  saligenin :  no  precipitate  appears 
(absence  of  sulfate).  Dissolve  about  0.40  Gm.  of  saligenin  (weighed  to 
the  second  decimal  place)  in  100  cc.  of  water;  add  phenolphthalein  and 
titrate  with  hundredth  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  not  more 
than  9   cc.   is   required   (limit  of  acids). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  saligenin,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  wide 
mouthed  weighing  bottle,  dry  over  phosphorus  pentoxide  for  twenty- 
four  hours:  the  loss  in  weight  is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent.  Incin- 
erate about  1  Gm.  of  saligenin.  accurately  weighed:  the  ash  is  not 
more  than  0.05  per  cent. 

SODIUM  POTASSIUM  BISMUTHYL  TARTRATE. 

— A  basic  water  soluble  sodium  potassium  bismutb  tartrate  con- 
taining from  40.75  to  41.25  per  cent  of  bismuth. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate  is 
proposed  as  a  means  of  obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth 
in  the  treatment  of  syphilis  (See  preceding  article,  Bismuth 
Compounds). 

Sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate  is  a  white,  heavy  powder,  solu- 
ble  in   water  and   insoluble  in   organic   solvents. 

During  the  ignition  of  about  0.1  Gm.  of  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl 
tartrate  in  a  quartz  crucible,  a  small  globule  of  metallic  bismuth  forms 
that  oxidizes  on  extended  heating.  The  residue  is  yellow  and  alkaline 
to  litmus,   and   effervesces  with  acids. 

Transfer  0.1  Gm.  of  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartate  to  a  test 
tube,  add  5  cc.  of  water  and  sufficient  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to 
dissolve  the  precipitate  first  formed  and  add  0.5  cc.  of  barium  chloride 
solution:   no  cloudiness   appears  within  2  minutes. 

Transfer  0.1  Gm.  of  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate  to  a  test 
tube,  add  5  cc.  of  water  and  sufficient  diluted  nitric  acid  to  dissolve 
the  precipitate  first  formed  and  add  0.5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution: 
no  precipitate  appears. 

A  sample  of  s9dium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate  loses  not  more  than 
0.3   per  cent  of   its   weight  when  dried  in  a  vacuum  over  sulfuric  acid. 

Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate, 
accurately  weighed,  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  100  cc.  of  water,  add 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  a  drop  at  a  time  until  the  precipitate  that 
forrns  redissolves,  saturate  with  hydrogen  sulfide,  filter,  wash  suc- 
cessively with  water,  alcohol,  chloroform  and  ether,  dry  at  100  C.,  cool 
in  a  desiccator  and  weigh:  the  bismuth  sulfide  weighed  is  equivalent 
to  not  less  than  40.75  per  cent  nor  more  than  41.25  per  cent  of  bismuth. 

TARTRO-QUINIOBINE.— A  suspension  of  quinine  bis- 
muth iodide  and  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate  in  olive 
oil.  each  cubic  centimeter  containing  quinine  bismuth  iodide, 
0.072  Gm.,  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate,  0.032  Gm.,  and 
camphor,  0.003  Gm. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tartro-quiniobine  is  proposed  as  a  means 
of  obtaining  the  systemic  effects  of  bismuth  in  the  treatment  of 
sj'^philis  (See  preceding  article,  Bismuth  Compounds)  ;  it  is 
designed  to  secure  both  early  action,  through  the  presence  of 


BROMINE     DERIVATIVES  145 

the  water-soluhlc  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl  tartrate,  and  pro- 
longed action  through  the  insoluble  quinine  bismuth  iodide  com- 
ponent of  the  mixture. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  2  cc,  administered  intramuscularly  twice 
a  week.  These  should  be  separate  doses  from  ampules,  as  bulk 
dosage  has  been  found  to  be  inexact. 

Manufactured  by  Chemisch-Pharniazeutische  A.  G.,  Bad  Homburg, 
Frankfurt  a.  M.,  Germany.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S.  trademark  364,048. 
Tartro-Qxciniobinc  Ampules.   2  cc. 

Transfer  2  cc.  of  the  tartro-quiniobine.  well  mixed  to  a  weighed 
Gooch  crucible  and  percolate  with  petroleum  benzine  until  all  of  the 
soluble  part  is  extracted,  dry  in  an  oven  at  50  C.,  cool  in  a  desiccator 
over  sulfuric  acid  and  weigh:  the  residue  weighs  not  more  than 
0.215   Gm.,   nor  less  than  0.20  Gm. 

Place  the  crucible  containing  the  residue  just  weighed  in  an  800  cc. 
beaker  and  add  5  cc.  of  nitric  acid  to  the  crucible;  when  the  acid  has 
percolated  through,  tip  the  crucible  over,  add  100  cc.  of  water,  stir 
until  the  asbestos  is  washed  out  of  the  crucible,  boil  until  the  solution 
is  nearly  colorless,  remove  the  crucible  by  means  of  a  glass  rod,  wash 
the  crucible  adding  the  washings  to  the  solution,  filter  the  asbestos 
using  a  large  filter  paper,  wash  with  very  dilute  nitric  acid  (20  cc. 
diluted  nitric  acid  diluted  to  100  cc.)  until  the  bismuth  is  all  in  the 
solution,  add  an  excess  of  stronger  ammonia  water  and  20  cc.  of 
ammonium  carbonate  solution,  heat  to  boiling  and  allow  to  stand  three 
hours,  filter  through  ashless  paper,  ignite  in  a  quartz  crucible,  cool, 
add  a  few  drops  of  nitric  acid,  evaporate  and  then  ignite,  cool  in  a 
desiccator  over  sulfuric  acid  and  weigh:  the  residue  when  calculated  to 
bismuth   is  not   more   than   0.0550   Gm.,   nor  less    than   0.0523   Gm. 

The  quinine  bismuth  iodide  and  the  sodium  potassium  bismuthyl 
tartrate  in  tartro-quiniobine  conform  to  the  N.  N.  R.  standards  for 
these  substances. 


BROMINE     DERIVATIVES 

Synthetic  compounds  containing  bromine  have  been  produced 
with  the  purpose  of  securing  the  sedative  action  of  bromide  ion 
without  the  objectionable  effects  of  the  alkali  bromides.  These 
compounds  split  off  bromine  ions  in  the  system,  the  decomposi- 
tion being  due  to  the  oxidation  of  the  organic  substance  with 
which  it  is  combined ;  but  bromine  which  is  too  firmly  bound 
may  fail  to  exert  its  typical  effects.  As  the  usual  indications 
for  bromide  action  in  the  organism  require  a  prompt  and  power- 
ful action  on  the  cells  to  produce  sleep,  to  abolish  reflexes  or 
to  arrest  an  epileptic  paroxysm,  the  synthetic  compounds  are 
likely  to  fail  as  substitutes  for  the  alkali  bromides  because  their 
bromide  ion  is  liberated  too  slowly.  The  introduction  of  bromine 
into  compounds  already  possessing  hypnotic  or  sedative  powers 
may  result  in  increasing  the  efficiency  of  these  compounds. 

BROMETONE.  —  Tribromtertiarvbutylalcohol.  —  Acetone- 
bromoform.  —  CBrs.CCOH)  (CH3).CH.,— l,l,l-tribrom-2-methyl- 
propan-2-ol  produced  by  the  reaction  of  acetone  on  bromoform. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Brometone  is  claimed  to  have  a  sedative 
action  similar  to  that  of  the  bromides  without  the  disadvantage 
of  producing  bromism.  In  doses  of  0.3  Gm.  (5  grains),  four  or 
five  times  a  day,  in  adults,  it  is  claimed  that  brometone  causes 


146     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

no  unpleasant  results,  produces  no  disturbance  of  the  digestive 

organs,  and  has  no  appreciable  effect  on  the  secretions.  Its 
action  is  prompt  and  its  effect  is  manifest  for  several  hours. 
In  doses  exceeding  1.6  Gm.  (25  grains),  daily,  it  may  produce 
dizziness,  vertigo,  anorexia  and  mental  hebetude,  all  of  which 
symptoms  disappear  on  discontinuance  of  its  use.  Therapeu- 
tically, this  drug  has  been  said  to  be  useful  in  mild  conditions 
of  excitation  and  insomnia,  in  so-called  narcotic  abstinence,  in 
hysteria,  and  in  nervous  affections  generally.  It  relieves  some 
forms  of  cough  and  it  is  said  to  produce  amelioration  in  some 
cases  of  epilepsy.  It  has  been  used  to  relieve  dizziness  due  to 
labyrinthine  disturbances. 

Dosage. — The  dose  is  0.3  Gm.  (5  grains),  dry  or  in  capsules, 
to  be  repeated  two  or  three  times  during  twenty-four  hours. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.     U.  S.  trademark. 

Brometone  Capsules,  5  grains. 

Brometone   occurs    in   fine   white,    prismatic   crystals    which   possess   a 

camphoraceous  odor  and  taste.     It  is  slightly  soluble  in   water;   soluble 

in  alcohol,  ether,  benzin  and  most  organic  solvents.     It  melts  at  about 

176  C.  and  volatilizes  on  exposure  to  air. 

BROMURAL.— (CH3.CH(CH3)CHBr.CO)HN.CO.NH2.— 

2-monobromisovalerylurea,  obtained  by  the  interaction  of  urea 
with  bromisovaleryl  bromide. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Bromural  is  a  nerve  sedative  which  pro- 
duces sleep  in  mild  cases  of  insomnia  without  markedly  affect- 
ing the  circulation  or  respiration.  All  action  by  bromural  is 
said  to  cease  after  from  three  to  five  hours.  In  many  cases, 
however,  the  sleep  caused  by  the  preparation  continues  beyond 
the  limits  of  its  action.  It  is  claimed  to  be  useful  as  a  nerve 
sedative  and  for  the  purpose  of  inducing  sleep  in  functional 
nervous  disease.  Bromural  is  not  effective  in  cases  of  insom- 
nia  associated    with    pain,    cough,    angina   pectoris   or   delirum. 

Dosage. — As  a  nerve  sedative,  0.3  Gm.  (5  grains),  three 
times  daily;  as  a  hypnotic  at  bedtime,  0.6  Gm.  (10  grains), 
which  dose  may  be  repeated  if  advisable  during  the  night,  after 
the  action  of  the  first  dose  has  ceased. 

Manufactured  by  E.  Bilhuber,  Inc.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  by  license  of 
the  Chemical  Foundation,  Inc.  (Bilhuber-Knoll  Corporation,  Jersey  City, 
N.  J.,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent  914,518  (March  9,  1909;  expired). 
U.    S.   trademark   61,165. 

Bromural  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.). 

Bromural  forms  small,  white,  almost  tasteless  needles  which  are 
easily  soluble  in  hot  ^Y^ter,  ether,  alcohol  and  alkalis,  but  less  readily 
in  cold  water.     It  sublimes  on  heating  and  melts  at  from   147  to  149  C. 

Bromural  can  be  precipitated  from  a  10  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  with  acids.  The  presence  of  bromine  may  be  demonstrated 
by  fusion  with  sodium  carbonate  and  potassium  nitrate  and  testing 
for  a  bromide  with  silver  nitrate  solution.  On  heating  the  alcoholic 
solution  of  bromural  with  sodium  ethylate  for  several  hours  on  the 
water  bath,  sodium  bromide  will  precipitate.  If  this  is  filtered  off  and 
the  filtrate  evaporated,  a  crystalline  mass  remains  which  can  be 
recrystallized  from  water.  This  is  dimethylacrylic  acid,  melting  at 
280   C.     If   1    Gm.   of  bromural   is   boiled   for   about  one  minute   with 


BROMINE     DERIVATIVES  147 

10  per  cent  solution  of  sodium  hydroxide,  ammonia  obtained  from  the 
urea  will  be  given  off.  If  the  hot  liquid  is  then  cooled,  acidified  with 
nitric  acid  and  extracted  with  ether,  and  the  ether  evaporated,  an  oil 
fluid  1-brom-isovaleric  acid,  which  has  the  specific  odor  of  valeric  acid, 
will  remain.  The  biuret  reaction  cannot  be  obtained.  On  melting 
bromural  and  adding  concentrated  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  cop- 
per sulfate,  no  color  reaction  will  take  place. 

CARBROMAL. — Bromdiethylacetylurea. — For  standards  see 
the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Carbromalum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Carbromal  is  said  to  be  an  efficient  and 
prompt  sedative,  reducing  excitement  and  promoting  sleep  in 
conditions  in  which  a  powerful  hypnotic  is  not  required.  In 
therapeutic  doses  it  is  said  not  to  exert  any  unfavorable  influence 
on  the  respiration  or  heart  action.  The  sleep  produced  is  said 
to  be  restful,  dreamless  and  exceptionally  free  from  unpleasant 
by-effects  and  sequelae. 

Carbromal  is  stated  to  be  useful  as  a  sedative  and  mild  hyp- 
notic in  neurasthenia,  hysteria,  cardiac  neuroses  with  tachy- 
cardia, chorea,  mental  disorders  with  moderate  excitement, 
insomnia  due  to  various  internal  diseases,  etc. 

Dosage. — As  a  sedative  from  0.3  to  0.6  Gm.  (5  to  10  grains), 
given  in  cold  water,  repeated  three  or  four  times  daily  if 
necessary;  as  a  hypnotic  from  0.6  to  1.3  Gm.  (10  to  20  grains), 
followed  by  a  drink  of  hot,  sweetened  water  or  weak  tea. 

Adalin. — A  brand  of  carbromal-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured     by     Winthrop     Chemical     Company,     Inc.,     New     York. 
U.   S.  patent  983,425    (Feb.   7,   1911;  expired).     U.   S.  trademark  81,136. 
Adalin   Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.). 

SABROMIN.  —  Calbroben.  —  Calcium  Dibrombehenate 
Ca(C2iH4iBr2.COO)2.  Sabromin  contains  not  less  than  28.5 
per  cent  of  bromine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Sabromin  is  converted  in  the  stomach 
into  dibrombehenic  acid,  and  this  is  absorbed  from  the  intes- 
tinal tract.  The  absorption  and  elimination  are  slower  than 
that  of  the  inorganic  bromides ;  hence,  sabromin  is  not  adapted 
to  conditions  in  which  a  rapid  saturation  of  the  system  with 
bromine  is  required.  It  is  indicated  in  conditions  in  which  the 
bromides  cannot  be  administered  for  continued  periods  with- 
out gastric  disturbance  or  in  which  brominism  is  caused 
readily.  It  is  claimed  that  sabromin  is  of  value  in  conditions 
in  which  a  mild  sedative  action  is  desired,  particularly  in  con- 
ditions requiring  prolonged  administration,  and  that  because 
of  absence  of  taste,  it  is  of  value  in  pediatric  practice. 

Dosage. — For  adults,  from  0.3  to  1.2  Gm.  (5  to  20  grains). 
When  administered  in  the  form  of  tablets,  these  should  be 
masticated  before  swallowing. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York. 
U.  S.  patent  848,230  (March  26,  1907;  expired).  U.  S.  trademark 
74.091. 


148     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


Sabromin   Tablets,    8   Grains. 

Sabromin  is  a  yellowish-white  powder;  odorless  and  tasteless.  It  is 
insoluble  in  water  and  alcohol,  but  soluble  in  ether,  chloroform,  acetone, 
benzene,   petroleum  benzin   and  carbon   tetrachloride. 

Shake  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sabromin  with  10  cc.  of  boiling  water  and 
filter.  The  filtrate  is  neutral  to  litmus  paper  and  gives  not  more  than 
a  slight  opalescence  with  silver  nitrate  solution  (soluble  bromides),  and 
no  precipitate  with  barium  chloride  solution   (sulfates). 

Heat  about  0.2  Gm.  of  sabromin  with  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  for  one  minute.  Dilute  the  solution  with  5  cc.  of  water, 
acidulate  with  acetic  acid,  filter  and  divide  the  filtrate  into  two  por- 
tions. To  one  portion  add  ammonium  oxalate  solution.  A  white  pre- 
cipitate results  (calcium);  shake  the  second  portion  with  5  cc.  of  dilute 
hydrochloric  acid;  add  10  drops  of  chlorine  water  and  5  cc.  of  chloro- 
form and  agitate  the  mixture:  after  separation,  the  chloroform  shows 
a  yellow  coloration   (bromine). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  sabromin,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight 
at   100   C. :   the  loss   is  not  more  than   2.5   per  cent   (limit  of  moisture). 

Dissolve  0.25  Gm.  of  sabromin  in  5  cc.  of  chloroform  and  add 
3  drops  of  absolute  alcohol:  not  more  than  a  slight  opalescence  is 
produced,  and  only  a  very  slight  precipitate  occurs  after  standing  for 
twenty-four  hours. 

Boil  about  2  Gm.  of  sabromin,  accurately  weighed,  in  a  reflux 
apparatus  with  100  cc.  of  10  per  cent  alcoholic  potassium  hydroxide 
for  six  hours.  Transfer  the  solution  to  a  porcelain  evaporating  dish 
and  evaporate  the  alcohol  over  a  water  bath.  Dilute  the  residue  with 
a  little  water,  pour  the  solution  into  a  500  cc.  flask,  and  add  40  cc.  of 
30  per  cent  nitric  acid.  Dilute  to  500  cc.  with  water,  shake  well  and 
filter.  To  250  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  20  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and  50  cc. 
of  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  solution.  Titrate  the  excess  of  silver  salt 
with  tenth-normal  potassium  sulfocyanate  solution,  using  ferric  ammo- 
nium sulfate  as  indicator:  the  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  consumed 
corresponds   to  not  less  than  28.5   per  cent  of  bromine. 

Heat  about  2  Gm.  of  dried  sabromin,  accurately  weighed,  until  most 
of  the  carbon  has  been  consumed;  extract  the  residue  with  hot,  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid;  filter;  add  a  slight  excess,  each  of  ammonia  water 
and  ammonium  oxalate  solution;  collect  the  preciiiitate,  dry  it  and 
ignite  it  to  calcium  oxide  in  the  usual  way;  the  weight  of  calcium 
oxide   corresponds   to  not   less   than   3.5    per   cent   of   calcium. 


CALCIUM     COMPOUNDS 

Calcium  performs  important  function.s,  especially  in  forming 
the  structure  of  bone,  in  the  regulation  of  nervous  and  muscular 
activity,  and  in  the  coagulation  of  the  blood.  In  rickets,  osteo- 
malacia and  osteopsathyrosis  there  is  defective  deposition  of 
calcium  in  the  bones,  but  this  is  usually  due  to  factors  other 
than  a  deficient  supply  of  calcium ;  and  these  conditions  are 
not  benefited  by  the  administration  of  calcium  salts  except  in 
rare  experimental  conditions,  when  calcium  has  been  almost 
totally  lacking  in  the  diet.  When  the  calcium  content  of  the 
blood  is  low,  as  in  infantile  and  parathyroid  tetany,  the  admin- 
istration of  calcium  salts  results  in  a  temporary  increase  in 
blood  calcium  and  a  cessation  of  the  symptoms,  but  unless  the 
cause  of  the  condition  is  removed,  the  concentration  sinks 
rapidly  following  discontinuance  of  calcium  administration. 
Administration  of  the  parathyroid  hormone  leads  to  an  increase 
in  blood  calcium  even  though  additional  calcium  is  not  supplied. 

The  administration  of  calcium  salts  has  been  shown  to  lessen 
certain   transudation   phenomena.     There   is    some   clinical   evi- 


CALCIUM     COMPOUNDS  149 

clence,  not  altogether  conclusive,  for  the  use  of  calcium  salts 
for  various  types  of  urticaria  and  angio-neurotic  edema.  Intra- 
venous administration  of  suitable  calcium  compounds  has  been 
shown  to  be  effective  in  lessening  peristalsis  and  therefore  is 
useful  in  certain  types  of  intestinal  and  gallbladder  pain  (Aub 
and  Bauer,  /.  A.  M.  A.  96:1216,  and  Am.  J.  Physiol.  97:1421, 
1931).  Calcium  chloride  has  been  shown  to  be  useful  in  treat- 
ing edema  in  certain  types  of  B right's  disease  and  the  ascites 
of  cirrhosis  of  the  liver.  It  is  unreliable  against  ascites  and 
other  generalized  edemas.  It  has  been  reported  as  being 
effective  in  preventing  arsphenamine  reactions  and  also  in 
certain  dermatoses,  as  dermatitis  herpetiformis,  lichen  rubra 
and  erythema  pernio,  but  further  observations  are  needed  in 
these  directions.  A  deficiency  of  calcium  in  the  circulating 
fluids  leads  to  increased  excitability  of  the  neuromuscular  sys- 
tem, as  is  seen  for  example  in  tetany.  The  administration  of 
calcium  salts  decreases  the  neuromuscular  irritability  in  such 
cases.  The  intravenous  infusion  of  soluble  calcium  salts  causes 
a  constriction  of  the  blood  vessels  and  a  marked  contraction 
of  the  pupils. 

Calcium  is  necessary  for  blood  coagulation,  but  a  large  excess 
lengthens  the  coagulation  time.  The  effect  of  calcium  on  blood 
coagulation  has  led  to  its  injudicious  use  in  hemorrhagic  con- 
ditions, such  as  hemophilia,  purpura  and  the  intestinal  hemor- 
rhage of  typhoid  fever.  It  is  very  improbable  that  it  is  effective 
in  any  of  these  conditions,  as  in  all  of  them  the  blood  contains 
an  adequate  amount  of  calcium.  It  has  been  claimed  that  the 
administration  of  calcium  salts  to  jaundiced  patients  is  effective 
in  preventing  postoperative  hemorrhage.  There  is,  however, 
very  little  evidence  that  this  is  the  result  of  shortening  of  the 
coagulation  time.  It  has  been  shown  that  the  administration 
of  calcium  salts  tends  to  diminish  the  toxicity  of  carbon  tetra- 
chloride. When  calcium  chloride  is  administered,  the  basic 
portion  of  the  molecule  is,  to  a  large  extent,  excreted  by  way 
of  the  bowel.  The  acid  portion  behaves  in  the  same  manner  as 
hydrochloric  acid  from  other  sources,  decreasing  the  alkali 
reserve  of  the  body  and  increasing  the  acidity  of  the  urine. 
Large  doses  of  calcium  chloride  may  produce  acidosis.  Calcium 
chloride  is  one  of  the  substances  which  may  be  administered  to 
render  the  urine  acid. 

Intravenously,  overdoses  of  calcium  compounds  may  be  fatal 
by  paralyzing  the  heart  and  central  nervous  system. 

The  average  normal  diet  usually  contains  just  about  enough 
calcium  for  the  needs  of  the  body,  but  when  unusual  diets  are 
taken  there  may  be  a  calcium  deficiency.  This  may  be  remedied 
by  the  administration  of  natural  foods  having  a  high  calcium 
content,  such  as  milk,  green  vegetables  and  Qgg  yolk.  The 
administration  of  special  preparations  of  calcium  salts  is  indi- 
cated only  in  special  pathological  conditions,  especially  tetany. 
The  administration  of  calcium  salts  in  the  treatment  of  rickets 
or  other  diseases  associated  with  deficient  calcification  is  in 
itself  inefficient,  but  may  be  used  as  an  adjunct  in  the  treatment 


150     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

when  vitamin  D  is  also  administered.  On  oral  administration, 
calcium  chloride  is  effective  particularly  in  tetany  owing  to 
the  acidosis  (which  is  limited  to  the  body  fluids)  resulting 
from  its  administration.  The  absorption  of  calcium  chloride 
from  the  intestines  probably  plays  no  greater  part  than  that 
which  would  result  from  the  administration  of  any  other 
calcium  salt.  The  lactate  and  gluconate  are,  however,  more 
pleasant  to  take  than  calcium  chloride  and  are  less  irritating. 
Calcium  chloride  cannot  be  used  for  subcutaneous  or  intra- 
muscular injection  as  it  is  too  irritating.  It  may,  however, 
be  used  intravenously.  For  hypodermic  or  intramuscular  use, 
the  less  irritant  lactate  or  the  non-irritant  gluconate  are 
employed. 

AFENIL.  —  Calcium  chloride  urea.  — CaCl2.4(NH2)2CO.— 
Afenil  is  a  molecular  compound  of  calcium  chloride  and  urea. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Afenil  has  the  actions  of  calcium 
chloride.  It  is  claimed  that  afenil  solutions,  when  administered 
intravenously,  are  better  tolerated  and  less  irritating  than 
solutions  of  calcium  chloride. 

Dosage. — Afenil  is  marketed  in  ampules  containing  10  cc. 
of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of  afenil.  Each  injection  consists 
of  the  entire  contents  of  one  ampule. 

Manufactured  by  Knoll  and  Co.,  Ludwigshafen  a.  R.,  Germany  (the 
Bilhuber-Knoll  Corporation,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademark  170,032.     German  patent  306,804. 

Ampules  Afenil:  Each  ampule  contains  10  cc.  of  a  sterile  10  per 
cent  solution   of  afenil    (equivalent  to  0.11    Gm.    Ca.). 

Afenil   occurs  as   colorless   crystals;   non-hygroscopic;    very   soluble   in 

water. 

The   calcium    content    of    afenil    is    determined    by    precipitating   with 

ammonium   oxalate    in   the    usual   way    and   weighing   as    calcium   oxide. 

The  urea  content  of  afenil  is  determined  by  an  estimation  of  nitrogen 

by  the  Kjeldahl  method. 

CALCIUM  GLUCONATE.— "The  normal  calcium  salt  of 
gluconic  acid.  It  yields  not  less  than  12.4  per  cent  and  not 
more  than  12.8  per  cent  of  CaO."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Calcii 
Gluconas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Calcium  gluconate  is  used  to  obtain  the 
therapeutic  effects  of  calcium.  It  is  more  palatable  than  cal- 
cium chloride  for  oral  administration,  and  for  hypodermic  or 
intramuscular  use  is  nonirritant. 

Dosage. — Orally,  for  adults,  5  Gm.  (75  grains)  three  times  a 
day;  for  children,  2  Gm.  (30  grains)  three  times  a  day.  Intra- 
muscularly or  intravenously,  for  adults,  1  Gm.  administered 
every  day,  on  alternate  days  or  every  third  day ;  for  children, 
0.2  to  0.5  Gm.  administered  every  day,  on  alternate  days  or 
every  third  day. 

Ampule  Compound  Solution  of  Calcium  Gluconate  10%,  10  cc.-U.  S. 
S.  P.  Co. — A  solution  containing  in  each  10  cc.  calcium  gluconate,  1  Gm. 
051/2  grains);  dextrose  anhydrous,  0.5  Gm.  (714  grains);  citric  acid, 
0.037  Gm.    0/2   grain),  and  lactic  acid,  0.1   Gm.    (1J4   grains). 

Prepared  by  the  United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Wood- 
worth,  Wis.     U.   S.  patent  applied    for. 


CALCIUM     COMPOUNDS  151 

Calcium  Gluconate-Pfizer. — A  brand  of  calcium  gluconate- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Chas  Pfizer  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademark   142,090. 

Calcium  Gluconate-Sandoz. — A  brand  of  calcium  gluco- 
nate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent 
1,648,368    (Nov.  8,   1927;   expires   1944). 

Ampules  Calcium  Gluconate-Sandoz:  Each  ampule  contains  10  cc.  of 
a  10  per  cent  stabilized  supersaturated  solution  of  calcium  gluconate- 
Sandoz. 

Calcium  Gluconate-Merck. — A  brand  of  calcium  gluconatc- 
U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

CALCIUM   PEROXIDE.— See  Peroxides,   Metallic. 

TRIBASIC  CALCIUM  PHOSPHATE.— Calcii  Phos- 

phas  Tribasicus. — Tertiary  Calcium  Phosphate,  Ca3(P04)2. 
Tribasic  calcium  phosphate  contains  approximately  85  per  cent 
of  Ca3(P04)2. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tribasic  calcium  phosphate  has  been  pro- 
posed for  use  as  an  antacid.  It  has  the  advantage  over  alkaline 
hydroxides  such  as  magnesium  hydroxide  and  alkali  carbonates 
such  as  sodium  bicarbonate,  in  that,  being  less  soluble,  it  tends  to 
neutralize  the  excess  of  acid  in  the  stomach  but  produces  less 
systemic  alkalization.  It  has  been  claimed  that  tribasic  calcium 
phosphate  is  somewhat  constipating.  It  has  been  shown  that 
some  of  the  calcium  is  absorbed,  hence  this  salt  may  be  used  to 
obtain  the  therapeutic  effects  of  calcium. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  5  Gm,  (15  to  75  grains). 

Ucoline  Calcium  Phosph<ite  Cocoa  Wafers:  Each  wafer  contains  tribasic 
calcium  phosphate-N.  N.  R.,  0.6  Gm.  (9  grains),  cocoa  0.2  Gm.  (3 
grains),  dextrose,  0.5  Gm.  (7  grains)  in  a  binder  composed  of  dextrin 
(tapioca)  and  starch,  and  flavored  with  potassium  bitartrate,  gluside, 
vanillin,   coumarin,   and   methyl    salicylate. 

Prepared  by  Ucoline  Products  Company,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

Tribasic  calcium  phosphate  occurs  as  a  white,  odorless  and  tasteless 
powder.  It  is  almost  insoluble  in  water  but  is  readily  soluble  in  diluted 
mineral  acids.  Water  agitated  with  tribasic  calcium  phosphate  is  neu- 
tral  or   acquires   a   slight   alkaline   reaction   to    litmus   paper. 

Dissolve  0.2  _Gm.  of  tribasic  calcium  phosphate  in  5  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid,  add  drop  by  drop  ammonia  water  until  a  precipitate 
forms,  add  1  cc.  of  acetic  acid,  followed  by  1  or  2  cc.  of  ammonium 
oxalate  solution:  a  white  precipitate  forms.  Dissolve  0.2  Gm.  of  tri- 
basic calcium  phosphate  in  a  slight  excess  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and 
add  ammonium  molybdate  solution:  a  yellow  precipitate  forms  which 
is  soluble  in  ammonia  water.  Mix  0.2  Gm.  of  tribasic  calcium  phos- 
phate with  about  5  cc.  of  water,  then  add  20  cc.  of  neutral  solution 
of  silver  nitrate  (1  in  20)  and  agitate  the  mixture  for  about  two 
minutes,  keeping  protected  from  light:  the  liquid  is  neutral  to  litmus 
paper  (distinction  from  dibasic  phosphate),  and  the  precipitate  is  of  a 
pure  yellow  color,  free  from  brown  or  gray  (uncombined  calcium  oxide). 
A   solution  of    0.2    Gm.    of   the   salt   in   10   cc.   of  water   and   just  suffi- 


152     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

cient  hydrochloric  acid  is  not  darkened  by  the  addition  of  an  equal 
volume  of  hydrogen  sulphide  water  (heavy  metals).  Mix  0.5  Gm.  of 
the  salt  with  3  cc.  of  water  and  immediately  add  3  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid:  not  more  than  a  few  gas  bubbles  should  be  evolved 
(carbonate).  Dissolve  0.2  Gm.  of  tribasic  calcium  phosphate  in  10  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  add  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  not 
more  than  a  slight  turbidity  results  (chloride).  To  a  solution  of 
0.5  Gm.  of  the  salt  in  10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filtered  if 
necessary,  add  a  few  drops  of  diluted  sulphuric  acid:  no  turbidity  is 
produced  in  ten  minutes  (barium).  Dissolve  0.2  Gm.  of  tribasic  cal- 
cium phosphate  in  5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid,  add  a  few  cubic  centi- 
meters of  sulfuric  acid  and  heat  until  fumes  of  sulfur  trioxide  are 
evolved;  add  10  cc.  of  sulfurous  acid  solution,  evaporate  until  the 
solution  is  free  from  sulfur  dioxide,  dilute  the  evaporated  solution 
to  5  cc. :  this  meets  the  U.  S.  P.  X  limit  for  arsenic.  Digest  2  Gm. 
of  the  salt  with  100  cc.  of  water  for  one-half  hour  on  a  steam  bath, 
cool,  add  suflFicient  water  to  restore  the  original  volume,  stir  well,  filter, 
evaporate  50  cc.  of  the  filtrate  to  dryness  in  a  porcelain  dish,  and 
ignite  the  residue  gently:  the  weight  of  the  residue  does  not  exceed 
0.005  Gm.  {soluble  salts).  Dissolve  0.2  Gm.  of  tribasic  calcium  phos- 
phate in  the  smallest  possible  amount  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid, 
filter,  wash,  make  the  filtrate  up  to  49  cc.  and  add  1  cc.  of  barium 
chloride  solution:  the  turbidity  produced  should  not  be  greater  than 
is  apparent  in  a  similarly  made  up  control  tube  using  2  cc.  fiftieth- 
normal  sulfTiric  acid  in  place  of  the  tribasic  calcium  phosphate  (see 
U.  S.  P.  X,  page  462).  Agitate  1  Gm.  of  tribasic  calcium  phosphate 
with  30  cc.  water  for  five  minutes,  filter  and  add  to  the  filtrate  2  drops 
phenolphthalein  solution:  the  pink  color,  if  any,  is  completely  discharged 
by   one  drop  of  tenth-normal   acid    (nncombincd  calcium  oxide). 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  tribasic  calcium  phosphate,  accurately 
weighed,  in  a  mixture  of  25  cc.  of  water  and  10  cc.  of  nitric  acid,  filter 
and  wash  if  not  entirely  soluble,  add  ammonia  water  vmtil  a  slight 
precipitate  is  produced,  then  dissolve  the  precipitate  by  the  addition 
of  1  cc.  of  nitric  acid,  cool  or  heat  the  solution  to  about  50  C  add 
75  cc.  of  ammonium  molybdate  solution,  and  allow  to  remain  at  this 
temperature  for  thirty  minutes,  stirring  occasionally,  filter  at  once, 
wash  once  or  twice  with  water  by  decantation,  using  30  to  40  cc.  each 
time,  transfer  the  precipitate  to  the  filter  and  wash  with  cold  water 
until  the  washings  cease  to  react  acid  with  litmus  paper,  transfer  the 
precipitate  and  filter  to  the  precipitating  vessel,  add  50  cc.  of  half- 
normal  sodium  hydroxide,  agitate  until  the  precipitate  is  dissolved 
and  then  titrate  the  excess  of  alkali  with  half-normal  sulfuric  acid, 
using  3  drops  of  phenolphthalein  solution  as  indicator.  Each  cubic 
centimeter  of  half-normal  sodium  hydroxide  consumed  corresponds  lo 
0.002066  Gm.  P04=.  The  amount  of  phosphate  (P04=)  should  not  be 
less  than  52   per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  tribasic  calcium  phosphate,  acurately 
weighed,  in  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  filter  if  the  product  is  not 
entirely  soluble,  wash,  and  add  ammonia  water  until  a  permanent 
precipitate  just  forms;  add  2  per  cent  citric  acid  solution  until  the 
precipitate  just  dissolves  and  then  add  50  cc.  more;  make  up  to  200  cc; 
add  an  excess  of  ammonia  oxalate  solution,  allow  to  stand  one  hour 
on  the  steam  bath,  filter,  wash,  dissolve  the  precipitate  in  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid,  then  add  ammonia  water  imtil  alkaline,  and  a  few 
cubic  centimeters  of  ammonium  oxalate  solution;  allow  the  mixture  to 
stand  on  the  steam  bath  an  hour,  filter,  wash,  dry  and  ignite  to  con- 
stant weight;  calculate  the  weight  of  the  calcium  oxide  to  calcium  (Ca)  : 
the  percentage  of  calcium  found  multiplied  by  the  factor  1.581  (Ca  to 
PO4-  in  Ca:!(P04)2)  should  correspond  with  the  percentage  of  phos- 
phate   (PO4-)    found   plus   or  minus   2.5    per   cent. 

On  ignition,  tribasic  calcium  phosphate  loses  not  more  than  8  per  cent 
of  its  weight. 

Calcium  Phosphate  Tribasic-Merck. — A  brand  of  tribasic 
calcium  phosphate-N.  N.  R. 

iSIanufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.    No  U.  S.  patent 
or    trademark. 


CARBOHYDRATES  153 

CAFFEINE  WITH  SODIUM  BENZOATE.— "A  mix- 
ture of  caffeine  and  sodium  benzoate,  containing,  when  dried 
to  constant  weight  at  80  C,  not  less  than  47  per  cent  and 
not  more  than  50  per  cent  of  anhydrous  caffeine  (C8Hin02N4)  : 
and  not  less  than  50  per  cent  and  not  more  than  43  per  cent 
of  sodium  benzoate  (NaCTHsO:.)."  U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Caffeina 
cum  Sodii  Benzoate. 

Ampuls  Solution  Caffeine  Sodio-Benzoate,  2  cc:  Each  2  cc.  contains 
0.48  Gra.  (7J/^  grains)  24.33  per  cent  solution  marketed  in  packages  of 
ten  2  cc.  size  ampules. 

Prepared  by   the   U.   S.    Standard    Products   Co.,   Woodworth,   Wis. 


CARBOHYDRATES 

Highly  concentrated  sugar  solutions  are  sometimes  adminis- 
tered by  injection  for  irritant  effects.  This  includes  sucrose 
and  invert  sugar.  Carbohydrates  used  as  sources  of  energy 
consist  chiefly  of  alpha  or  beta  lactose  and  dextrose.  Dextrose 
is  the  sugar  generally  employed  for  parenteral  administration. 

Carbohydrates  for  Oral  Administration 

BETA-LACTOSE.— C10H..O11.— A  disaccharide  obtained 
by  allowing  a  solution  of  lactose  to  crystallize  above  93  C. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Like  its  more  common  isomer,  lactose- 
U.  S.  P.,  beta-lactose  is  used  as  a  diluent  and  as  a  food,  par- 
ticularly in  modified  milk  for  infants ;  also  as  a  supplementary 
food  for  adults.  Hov^ever,  it  possesses  greater  solubility  and 
a  higher  degree  of  sweetness  than  lactose-U.  S.  P.  Beta- 
lactose  provides  a  favorable  medium  for  the  growth  of  the 
B.  acidophilus. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  for  lactose-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  National  Milk  Sugar  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent    1,956,811    (May    1,    1934;    expires    1951). 

Beta-lactose  occurs  as  small,   odorless,   white,   rhombic  crystals.      It   is 
freely   soluble   in   either   hot  or   cold   water   but   alpha-lactose   is   liable   to 
separate    when    strong    solutions    are    allowed    to    stand.      It    is    almost 
insoluble   in   alcohol   and  definitelv   insoluble   in   ether   and   chloroform. 
25 
The    specific    rotation    [a]    —    of    a    10    per    cent    solution    at    25    C. 
D 
measured   not  more  than   three   minutes   after   the  water   is   first  added 
to  the  substance,  ranges  between  +35  and   +38.  After   standing  twenty- 

25 
four  hours,   the   specific  rotation    [a]   —   ranges  between   52.5    and   55.5. 

D 
Add  an  equal  volume  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  a  hot  20  per 
cent  solution  of  beta-lactose  and  warm  the  mixture:  the  liquid  turns 
yellow  and  finally  brownish  red;  on  svibsequent  addition  of  a  few  drops 
of  cupric  sulfate  solution,  a  precipitate  of  cuprous  oxide  occurs.  Add 
to  5  Gm.  of  beta-lactose  sufficient  water  to  make  25  cc.  of  solution: 
the    solid   dissolves   in   less    than    five    minutes. 

Dissolve   3    Gm.    of   beta-lactose   in    10    cc.   of   boiling   distilled   water; 
the    solution   is    clear,    colorless,    odorless    and    neutral   to   litmus    paper, 


154     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


Transfer  1  Gm.  of  beta-lactose  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask  and  boil  for 
ten  minutes  with  15  cc.  of  alcohol  under  a  reflux  condenser,  allow  to 
stand  five  hours  or  longer  at  room  temperature,  filter,  evaporate  10  cc. 
of  the  filtrate  to  dryness  on  the  steam  bath:  the  residue  weighs  not 
more  than  0.007  Gm.   (sucrose,  dextrose). 

A  5  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  beta-lactose  meets  the  U.  S.  P.  X 
requirements  for  heavy  metals   (U.   S.   P.  X,  p.   439). 

Dissolve  1  Gm.  of  beta-lactose  in  50  cc.  of  distilled  water,  boil  for 
one  minute,  cool,  add  a  drop  of  iodine  solution;  the  solution  is  not 
colored   red,  green  or  blue   (starch,   dextrin). 

Transfer  about  2  Gm.  of  beta-lactose,  accurately  weighed  in  a  wide 
mouth  weighing  bottle,  to  a  desiccator  containing  a  60  per  cent  solution 
of  calcium  nitrate;  when  constant  weight  is  attained  transfer  to  an 
oven  at  70  C,  until  constant  weight  i:  again  attained,  finally  transfer 
to  a  vacuum  oven  at  100  C  and  a  pressure  of  2  cm.  of  mercury  until 
constant  weight  is  attained.  The  loss  obtained  by  use  of  the  vacuum 
oven  is  not  more  than  0.18  per  cent. 

Carbohydrates  for  Parenteral  Administration 


DEXTROSE.— rf  Glucose— CH20H.CH.(CHOH).,.CHOH. 
H2O.  "A  sugar  usually  obtained  by  the  hydrolysis  of  starch." 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Dextrosum. 

Dextrose  is  a  readily  absorbable  food.  Its  solutions,  which 
are  being  extensively  used  in  modern  therapy,  may  be  admin- 
istered in  the  form  of  enemas  or  for  parenteral  alimentation 
by  hypodermic  or  intravenous  injection.  These  solutions,  alone 
or  in  combination  with  various  salt  solutions,  are  used  to  supply 
f^uid,  sustain  the  blood  volume  temporarily,  produce  diuresis, 
replace  lost  chlorides,  but  are  primarily  intended  to  supply 
dextrose  to  the  patient  without  disturbing  the  gastro-intestinal 
tract.  The  strength  of  the  solution,  the  medium  (distilled 
water,  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  or  Ringer's  solu- 
tion), as  well  as  the  total  quantity  of  solution  to  be  employed 
and  route  of  administration  are  interrelated  and  vary  with  the 
type  of  case  and  the  individual  case. 

Subcutaneous  injections  are  necessarily  low  in  dextrose  con- 
tent (2.5  per  cent  in  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride)  ; 
intravenous  solutions  may  vary  in  strength  from  5  to  50  per 
cent  of  dextrose.  Slow  rate  of  flow  is  essential  to  the  proper 
administration  of  these  solutions  and  is  especially  important  in 
cases  of  hemorrhage  which  are  not  entirely  controlled.  If  it 
is  necessary  to  supply  very  large  amounts  of  dextrose  to  the 
individual  in  a  relatively  short  time,  small  amounts  of  high 
concentration  are  generally  preferable  to  greater  amounts  of 
lower  concentration. 

These  solutions  must  be  properly  warmed  so  that  they  enter 
the  vein  at  body  temperature.  The  entire  apparatus  (bottle 
or  flask,  rubber  tubing,  connections,  and  needle)  must  be  sterile 
and  the  entire  line  of  rubber  tubing,  as  well  as  the  needle, 
must  be  freed  of  air  bubbles  before  the  needle  is  inserted.  The 
area  in  which  the  needle  is  injected  must  also  be  adequately 
prepared.  The  intake  air  should  be  filtered  by  a  cotton  pledget 
or  other  adequate  device. 


CARBOHYDRATES  155 

The  administration  of  these  solutions  should  be  instituted  by 
a  physician,  continued  under  his  supervision  (especially  intra- 
venous and  intraperitoneal  injections),  and  must  be  discontinued 
before  the  container  is  empty. 

The  official  dextrose  of  the  U.  S.  P.  XI  contains  one  mole- 
cule of  water  of  crystallization,  therefore  physicians  should 
l^ear  in  mind  that  a  solution  labeled  in  terms  of  dextrose- 
U.  S.  P.  will  actually  contain  a  less  amount  of  anhydrous 
dextrose.  However,  in  prescribing  there  should  be  reference 
to  hydrous  dextrose  in  conformance  with  U.  S.  P.  practice. 
The  physician  should  bear  in  mind  that  in  more  concentrated 
solutions  of  dextrose  there  is  considerable  variation  in  content 
when  comparing  dextrose  percentage  calculated  on  the  basis  of 
content  of  the  hydrous  and  anhydrous  forms.  This  amounts 
to  approximately  5  Gm.  in  100  cc.  in  case  of  a  50  per  cent 
solution.  Manufacturers  are  encouraged  to  label  their  products 
in  terms  of  —  Gm.  of  dextrose-U.   S.  P.  in  —  cc. 

Dosage. — 180  Gm.  (6  ounces)  daily  orally.  Intravenously 
the  quantity  varies  with  the  strength  of  the  solution ;  the 
equivalent  of  300  cc.  (8  to  10  fluidounces)  of  a  15  to  20  per 
cent  solution  is  frequently  used.  As  an  enema,  solutions  con- 
taining from  5   to    12  per  cent  are  most  commonly  employed. 

The  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Ampoules  Dextrose  50%,  20  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  20  cc.  of  a 
50  per  cent  solution  of  dextrose-U,  S.  P. 

Ampoules  Dextrose  50%,  50  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  50  cc.  of  a  50 
per  cent  solution  of  dextrose,  U.   S.  P. 

Dextrose-Ringer's  Stock  Solution  Five  Times  Concentrated-Abbott :  A 
solution  containing  25  per  cent  by  weight  of  dextrose-U.  S.  P.  (equivalent 
to  28.1  Gm.  C6H12O6.H2O  in  100  cc.)  in  concentrated  Ringer's  Solution 
(five  times  strength).  When  one  volume  is  diluted  with  water  to  exactly 
five  volumes,  the  resulting  solution  contains  5  per  cent  by  weight  of 
dextrose-U.  S.  P.  (equivalent  to  56  Gm.  C6H12O6.H2O  in  1000  cc.)  in 
a  Ringer's  solution  containing  in  1,000  cc.  of  aqueous  solution:  sodium 
chloride  7.0  Gm.;  potassium  chloride  0.3  Gm.;  calcium  chloride  0.25  Gm. 
The  product  is  marketed  in  ampules  of   100   cc. 

Actions  and  Uses. — This  product  after  dilution  with  four  volumes  of 
freshly  distilled  water  (which  provides  a  somewhat  hypertonic  solution)  is 
proposed  for  continuous  venoclysis  over  prolonged  periods.  It  is  intended 
as  a  source  of  dextrose  for  the  maintenance  of  nutrition  and  of  ions  in 
balanced  ratio  for  the  maintenance  of  the  salt  equilibrium  of  the  blood 
stream. 

Dosage. — According  to  the  needs  of  the  individual  case.  Generally,  500 
cc.  per  hour  may  be  administered  until  the  blood  pressure  is  satisfactory. 
The  flow  is  then  diminished  to  100  cc.  per  hour,  which  may  be  continued 
for  several  days  if  necessary.  When  given  in  the  absence  of  low  blood 
pressure,  the  rate  of  flow  should  not  exceed  200  cc.  per  hour  at  any  time. 
Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  concentrated-Abbott  occurs 

as   a   clear,    colorless    solution    possessing    a   slightly   saline    taste.      The 

specific  gravity  is  from  1.128  to  1.120  at  20  C. 

Add  a  few  drops  of  the  solution  to  5  cc.  of  hot  alkaline  cupric  tartrate 

test    solution;    a    copious    red    precipitate    of    cuprous    oxide    is    forrned. 

Dilute  3  cc.  of  solution  to  10   cc.  and  add  one  drop  of  iodine  solution; 

the    liquid    is    colored    yellow    (sohible    starch,    sulfite) :    2    cc.    of    the 

solution  diluted  to   10   cc.   conforms  to   the   U.    S.    P.   X   test  for   heavy 

metals:    5    cc.    of    the    solution    conforms   to   the    U.    S.    P.    X    test    for 

arsenic. 


156     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Transfer  4  cc.  of  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  con- 
centrated-Abbott to  a  suitable  test  tube  and  add  sufficient  water  to  make 
9  cc.  of  solution;  add  1  cc.  of  freshly  prepared  sodium  cobaltic  nitrite 
solution  and  mix  thoroughly.  Treat  similarly  in  exactly  similar  test 
tubes,  portions  of  a  standard  aqueous  solution  containing  1.5  Gm.  of 
potassium  chloride  (previously  dried)  in  1,000  cc:  the  turbidity  pro- 
duced by  4  cc.  of  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  concen- 
trated-Abbott at  the  end  of  ten  minutes  is  less  than  that  produced  by 
5  cc,  and  greater  than  that  produced  by  4  cc  of  the  standard  solution 
(limit  of  potassium    [K+]). 

Transfer  1  cc  of  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  concen- 
trated-Abbott to  a  Nessler  tube,  add  0.5  cc.  of  diluted  acetic  acid, 
40  cc  of  water  and  5  cc.  of  ammonium  oxalate  solution.  Dilute  at 
once  to  50  cc.  and  mix  thoroughly.  Treat  similarly  portions  of  a 
standard  solution  formed  by  dissolving  0.287  Gm.  of  precipitated 
calcium  carbonate  (previously  dried  to  constant  weight  at  200  C.) 
in  10  cc  of  water  and  3  cc  of  acetic  acid  and  diluting  the  solution  to 
250  cc:  the  turbidity  produced  by  1  cc.  of  the  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock 
solution  five  times  concentrated-Abbott  at  the  expiration  of  fifteen 
minutes  is  less  than  that  produced  by  1.25  cc.,  and  greater  than  that 
produced   by    1    cc.   of   the   standard   solution    (limit   of  calcium    [Ca+  +  ]). 

The  dextrose  content  as  determined  by  the  optical  rotation  method  of 
the  U.  S.  P.  X  is  not  more  than  26.82  Gm.  anhydrous  dextrose 
(29.5  Gm.  CeHxoOe.HoO)  nor  less  than  24.26  Gm.  anhydrous  dex- 
trose (26.7  Gm.  CtiH]206.H20)  per  hundred  cubic  centimeters.  Treat 
5  cc.  of  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  concentrated- 
Abbott  with  an  excess  of  sulfuric  acid,  evaporate  to  dryness,  and 
ignite  to  constant  weight  at  750  C.:  the  weight  of  ash  obtained  is 
not   more   than   0.242    Gm.,   nor   less   than   0.219   Gm. 

Transfer  20  cc.  of  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  con- 
centrated-Abbott to  a  100  cc.  volumetric  flask,  add  water,  dilute  to 
the  mark  and  mix  thoroughly.  Transfer  10  cc.  of  this  solution  to  a 
400  cc.  beaker,  add  50  cc.  of  water  and  4  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid; 
dilute  to  200  cc,  add  15  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution;  heat  the  mix- 
ture to  boiling  and  allow  to  stand  until  the  precipitate  is  granular. 
Filter  on  a  weighed  Gooch  crucible  previously  heated  to  140-150  C.; 
wash  the  precipitate  well  with  hot  water;  dry  to  constant  weight  at 
140-150  C.:  the  chloride  (C1-)  calculated  from  the  silver  chloride 
weighed  is  not  more  than  2.1  per  cent  nor  less  than  1.9  per  cent  of 
weight  of  sample  of  Dextrose-Ringer's  stock  solution  five  times  coii- 
centrated-Abbott. 

Baxter  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Glenview,  111.  (American  Hospital 
Supply  Corporation,  Chicago,  eastern  distributor). 

Sterile  21/2%  Dextrose  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Container :  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,   U.    S.    P.,   2.62   Gm. 

Sterile  5%  Dextrose  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Container:  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,  U.   S.  P.,   5.25  Gm. 

Sterile  71/2%  Dextrose  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Container :  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,   U.   S.   P.,   7.85   Gm. 

Sterile  10%  Dextrose  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Container:  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,  U.   S.   P.,   10.5   Gm. 

Sterile  20%  Dextrose  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Ccmtaincr :  Each  100  cc 
contains  dextrose,    U.  S.   P.,  21   Gm. 

Sterile  25%  Dextrose  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Container :  Each  100  cc. 
contains   dextrose,   U.    S.   P.,   26.25    Gm. 

Sterile  2^2%  Dextrose  in  Physiological  Sodium  Chlonde  Solution  in 
Vacoliter  Container:  Each  100  cc.  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  2.62  Gm. 
and   sodium   chloride,    0.85   Gm. 

Sterile  5%  Dextrose  in  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in 
Vacoliter  Container:  Each  100  cc.  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  5.25  Gm. 
and   sodium   chloride,   0.85    Gm. 

Sterile  7^2%  Dextrose  in  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in 
Vacoliter  Container :  Each  100  cc.  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  7.85  Gm. 
and   sodium  chloride,   0.85   Gni. 


CARBOHYDRATES  157 

Sterile  10%  Dextrose  in  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in 
Vacoliter  Container:  Each  100  cc.  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  10.50 
Gm.   and   sodium   chloride,   0.85    Gm. 

The  several  accepted  dextrose  solutions  and  dextrose  in  physiologic 
solution  of  sodium  chloride,  marketed  in  Vacoliter  Containers,  are  also 
supplied   in   Half-Size   Vacoliter   Containers. 

The  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

Ampules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  U.  S.  P.,  10  Gin.,  20  cc.:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make 
20  cc. 

Ampules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  50  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make 
50  cc.  and  is  accompanied  by  an  ampule  containing  2  cc.  of  a  buffer 
solution  composed  of  dibasic  sodium  phosphate,  0.3  Gm.,  and  monobasic 
potassium    phosphate,    0.024    Gm.,    in    distilled    water. 

Ampules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  100  cc: 
Each  ampule  contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to 
make  100  cc.  and  is  accompanied  by  an  ampule  containing  4  cc.  of  a 
buffer  solution  composed  of  dibasic  sodium  phosphate,  0.6  Gm.,  and 
monobasic  potassium    phosphate,   0.04X   Gm.,   in   distilled   water. 

Ampules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  U.  S.  P.,  25  Cm.,  50  cc. 
(Buffered) :  Each  ampule  contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  dis- 
tilled water  to  make  50  cc.  The  solution  is  buffered  with  sodium  citrate 
0.25   per   cent. 

Ampules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  U.  S.  P..  50  Gm.,  100  cc. 
(Buffered) :  Each  ampule  contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  in  dis- 
tilled water  to  make  lUO  cc.  The  solution  is  buffered  with  sodiuin 
citrate   0.25    per   cent. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Solution  Dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  50  cc,  in  Bottles:  Each  bottle 
contains  dextrose-U.  vS.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  sufficient  distilled  water  to  make 
50  cc. 

Solution  Dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  100  cc.  in  Bottles:  Each  bottle 
contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  in  sufticient  distilled  water  to  make 
100  cc. 

Solution  Dextrose-U.  S.  P.  5%  in  Safti flask  Containers:  Each  Safti- 
flask  contains  1,000  cc.  of  a  solution  containing  52.5  Gm.  of  dextrose- 
U.    S.    P. 

Solution  Dextrose-U.  S.  P.  10%  in  Saftiflask  Containers:  Each  Safti- 
flask  contains  1,000  cc.  of  a  solution  containing  105  Gm.  of  dextrose- 
U.    S.   P. 

Solution  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  2J4%  in  Physiologic  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride  in  Saftiflask  Container:  Each  Saftiflask  contains  1,000  cc.cf 
a  solution  containing  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  26.25  Gm.  and  sodium  chloride, 
8.5    Gm. 

Solution  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  5%  in  Physiologic  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride  in  Saftiflask  Container:  Each  Saftiflask  contains  1,000  cc.  of 
a  solution  containing  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  52.5  Gm.  and  sodium  chloride, 
8.5    Gm. 

Solution  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  10%  in  Physiologic  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride  in  Saftiflask  Container:  Each  Saftiflask  contains  1,000  cc.  of 
a  solution  containing  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  105  Gm.  and  sodium  chloride, 
8.5    Gm. 

Solution  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  20%  in  Fractionally  Distilled  Water  in 
Saftiflask  Container:  Each  Saftiflask  contains  1,000  cc.  of  a  solution 
containing   dextrose,    U.    S.   P.,   210    Gm. 

Solution  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  25%  in  Fractionally  Distilled  Water  in 
Saftiflask  Container:  Each  Saftiflask  contains  1,000  cc.  of  a  solution 
containing  dextrose,   U.    S.    P.,   262.5    Gm. 

The  several  accepted  solutions  of  dextrose  and  dextrose  in  physiologic 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  (Cutter  Laboratories),  marketed  in  1.000  cc. 
size   Saftiflasks,   are   also   supplied   in    5()0    cc.    size    Saftitiasks. 


158     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Hospital  Liquids,  Inc.,  Chicago. 

Dextrose  5%  in  Distilled  Water  in  Filtrair  Container:  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  5.50  Gm.  Marketed  in  bottles  containing 
1,000  cc. 

Dextrose  10%  in  Distilled  Water  in  Filtrair  Container:  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  11.0  Gm.  Marketed  in  bottles  containing 
1,000  cc. 

Dextrose  25%  in  Distilled  Water  in  Filtrair  Container:  Each  100  cc. 
contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  27.5  Gm.  Marketed  in  bottles  containing 
1,000  cc. 

Dextrose  5%  in  Physiologic  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in  Filtrair  Con- 
tainer: Each  100  cc.  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  5.50  Gm.  and  sodium 
chloride,  U.   S.  P.,  0.85  Gm.     Marketed  in  bottles  containing  1,000  cc. 

Dextrose  10%  in  Physiologic  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in  Filtrair  Con- 
tainer: Each  100  cc.  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  11.0  Gm.  and  sodium 
chloride,  U.   S.   P.,  0.85   Gm.     Marketed  in  bottles  containing  1,000  cc. 

The  several  accepted  dextrose  solutions  (in  distilled  water  and  in 
physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride)  marketed  in  Filtrair  Containers 
of   1,000  cc.  capacity  are  also  supplied  in   500  cc.   containers. 

The  Lakeside  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Alihvaukee,  Wis. 

Ampoules  Dextrose  (d-Gliicose)  10  Gm.,  20  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose    (rf-glucose)    10   Gm.,   in   distilled   water,   to   make   20   cc. 

Ampoules  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  25  Gm.,  50  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose    (d-glucose)    25    Gm.,   in   distilled  water,   to  make   50   cc. 

Ampoules  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  50  Gm.,  100  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose    (c?-glucose)    50  Gm.,   in  distilled   water,  to    make   100   cc. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly  10  Gm.,  Buffered  20 
cc:  Each  ampule  contains  dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.;  cresol,  0.1  per 
cent;  distilled  water,  to  make  20  cc. ;  buffered  with  sodium  phosphate 
(0.2   Gm.    per   2   cc.) 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly  25  Gm.,  50  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.;  distilled  water  to  make 
50  cc. ;  accompanied  by  an  ampule  containing  2  cc.  of  a  buffer  solution 
which  contains  in  100  cc.  sodium  chloride,  0.9  Gm.,  and  sufficient  sodium 
phosphate  (0.2  Gm.  per  2  cc.)  to  bring  the  resulting  combination  of 
buffer    and    glucose    solution    to   a    hydrogen    ion    concentration    of    pB.    7. 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly.  50  Gm.,  100  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.;  distilled  water  to  make 
100  cc. ;  accompanied  by  an  ampule  containing  4  cc.  of  a  buffer  solution 
which  contains  in  100  cc.  sodium  chloride,  0.9  Gm.,  and  sufficient  sodium 
phosphate  (0.2  Gm.  per  2  cc.)  to  bring  the  resulting  combination  of 
the  buffer  and  glucose  solution  to  a  hydrogen  ion  concentration  of  pH   7. 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly,  Unbuffered,  25  Gm., 
50  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  distilled 
water  to  make  50  cc. 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly,  Buffered,  25  Gm.  50 
cc:  Each  ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.  in  distilled  water 
to  make  50  cc.  The  solution  is  buffered  with  sodium  citrate,  0.25  per 
cent. 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly,  Unbuffered,  50  Gm., 
100  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.  in  distilled 
water  to  make   100  cc. 

Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.,  Cincinnati 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  50%,  20  cc:  Each  cubic  centimeter  con- 
tains approximately   0.57   Gm.   of   anhydrous   dextrose. 

Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  50%,  50  cc:  Each  cubic  centimeter  con- 
tains approximately   0.57  Gm.   of   anhydrous  dextrose. 


u. 
u. 

5-. 

s. 

p., 
p. 

i(;    Cm., 
,    10    Gni. 

20 
I    in 

cc. : 
dis- 

u. 
u. 

5. 

S. 

p., 
p. 

25    Gm., 
,    25    Gm. 

50 
,    in 

cc. : 
dis- 

u. 
u. 

s. 

s. 

p., 
p. 

50    Gm., 
,    50    Cm. 

,    in 

cr.; 
dis- 

CARBOHYDRATES  159 

The  E.  S.  Miller  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Los  Angeles. 

Ampoule  Sterile  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  5  Gm.,  10  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  5  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make 
10  cc. 

Ampoule  Sterile  Soluti(m  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.,  20  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make 
20  cc. 

Ampoule  Sterile  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  50  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make 
50  cc. 

Ampoule  Sterile  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  100  cc:  Each 
ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make 
100  cc. 

Ampoule-Vial  Sterile  Solution  Dextrose, 
Each  rubber-capped  vial  contains  dextrose, 
tilled  water  to  make  20  cc. 

Ampoule-Vial   Sterile    Solution   Dextrose,    U. 
Each    rubber-capped    vial    contains    dextrose, 
tilled   water   to   make    50   cc. 

Ampoule-Vial   Sterile    Solution   Dextrose,    U. 
Each    rubber-capped    vial    contains    dextrose, 
tilled   water   to  make    100    cc. 

The  National  Drug  Company,  Philadelphia. 

Ampul  Solution  of  Dextrose,  10  Gm.,  20  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose  anhydrous   10  Gm.  in  distilled  water  to  make  20  cc. 

Ampul  Solution  of  Dextrose,  25  Gm.,  50  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose  anhydrous    25   Gm.   in  distilled  water  to  make  50  cc. 

Ampul-Vial  Solution  of  Dextrose,  25  Gm.,  50  cc:  Each  ampule-vial 
contains  dextrose  anhydrous  25   Gm.   in  distilled   water  to  make   50  cc. 

Ampul-Vial  Solution  of  Dextrose,  50  Gm.,  100  cc :  Each  ampule-vial 
contains  dextrose  anhydrous   50   Gm.   in   distilled   water  to  make   100  cc. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit, 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  per  cent,  20  cc: 
Each  ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.,  in  distilled  water,  to 
make   20   cc;    buffered   with   sodium   citrate,   0.25   per   cent. 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  per  cent,  50  cc: 
Each  ampule  contains  dextrose-U,  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  distilled  water,  to 
make   50  cc;   buffered   with   sodium  citrate,   0.25   per   cent. 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  per  cent,  100  cc: 
Each  ampule  contains  dextrose  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to 
make    100   cc;   buffered   with  sodium   citrate,   0.25   per  cent. 

G,  D,  Searle  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Chicago. 

Solution  Dextrose  and  Sodium  Chloride  Ampules  20  cc  (Searle)  tvith 
Benzyl  Alcohol:  Each  ampule  contains  equal  parts  of  a  30  per  cent 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  a  50  per  cent  solution  of  dextrose  with  a 
small  amount  of  benzyl  alcohol.  For  vise  as  a  sclerosing  agent  in  the 
treatment  of   varicose  veins. 

Sharp  &  Dohme,  Inc.,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore. 

Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.  (d-Glucose),  25  Gm.,  50  cc  Ampoule  (Unbuffered): 
Each  ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  distilled  water,  to 
make  50  cc. 

Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.  (d-Glucose),  25  Gm.,  50  cc.  Ampoule  (Buffered): 
Each  ampule  contains  dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  in  distilled  water,  to 
make  50  cc;  buffered  with  sodium  citrate,  0.25  per  cent. 

The  Sterisol  Ampoule  Corporation,  Long  Island  City,  N.  Y. 

Sterisol  Ampoule  Dextrose  5%  in  Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride:  A  solution  containing  in  each  100  cc.  5  Gm.  of  anhydrous 
dextrose  and  0.85  Gm.  of  sodium  chloride.  Supplied  in  ampules  contain- 
ing 250,   500,   and    1,000   cc. 


160     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

The  United  States  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Dextrose  Solution,  25  Gm.,  50  cc. :  A  solution  marketed  in  bottles  and 
containing  anhydrous  dextrose  25  Gm.  in  sufficient  distilled  water  to 
make  50    cc. 

Dextrose  Solution,  50  Gm.,  100  cc:  A  solution  marketed  in  bottles 
and  containing  anhydrous  dextrose  50  Gm.,  in  sufficient  distilled  water  to 
make   100  cc. 

John  Wyeth  &  Brother,  Inc.,  Philadelphia. 

Ampoule  Solution  Dextrose  25  Gm.  in  50  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose-U.  S.  P.  25  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  SO  cc;  buffered 
with  sodium  citrate  0.25   per  cent. 

Ampoule  Solution  Dextrose  50  Gm.  in  100  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
dextrose-U.  S.  P.  50  Gm.,  in  distilled  water  to  make  100  cc. ;  buffered 
with  sodium  citrate  0.25   per  cent. 

SOLUTION  OF  INVERT  SUGAR-LILLY.— A  solu- 
tion of  a  mixture  of  dextrose  and  levulose  obtained  by  the 
inversion  of  sucrose. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solution  of  invert  sugar-Lilly  is  used  in 
the  injection  treatment  of  varicose  veins.  It  is  claimed  that  the 
use  of  sugar  solutions  such  as  solutions  of  dextrose  or  of  invert 
sugar  have  the  advantage  over  solutions  of  sodium  chloride, 
sodium  salicylate  or  mercuric  chloride  in  that  they  do  not  cause 
severe  cramps  or  sloughing  if  accidentally  injected  outside 
the  vein. 

Dosage. — Depending  on  the  size  of  the  vein,  from  5  to  20  cc. 
of  solution  is  injected.  For  young  patients  whose  veins  react 
to  solutions  of  less  concentration,  solutions  containing  from  50 
to  60  Gm.  of  invert  sugar  in  100  cc.  are  used;  for  older  patients 
and  varicosities  of  long  standing,  a  solution  containing  75  Gm.  of 
invert  sugar  in  100  cc.  is  used. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Solution  of  Invert  Sugar-Lilly,  5  Gm.  in  10  cc 
Solution  of  Invert  Sugar-Lilly,  6  Gm.  in  10  cc 
Solution  of  Invert  Sugar-Lilly,  7.5  Gin.  in  10  cc. 

Solution  of  invert  sugar-Lilly  is  prepared  by  inverting  cane  sugar 
with    tartaric    and    adjusting   to    a    pH    of    6.8    with    sodium    hydroxide. 

Solution  of  invert  sugar-Lilly  is  a  clear,  pale  amber,  sweet,  watery 
solution. 

A  10  cc.  portion  requires  less  than  2  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  to  neutralize  the  acid,  phenolphthalein  being  used  as  an 
indicator.  No  sediment  separates  from  the  solution  in  ampules  on 
prolonged  standing  (insoluble  salts,  ultramarine  or  Prussian  blue).  A 
10  per  cent  solution  is  not  affected  by  the  addition  of  an  equal  volume 
of  hydrogen  sulfide  solution  (heavy  metals).  Ten  cc.  portions  of  a 
10  per  cent  solution  remain  clear  for  at  least  one  minute  after  the 
addition  of  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (chloride)  or  of  ammonium 
oxalate  solution  (calcium).  A  portion  equivalent  to  5  Gm.  of  invert 
sugar  shows  no  more  sulfate  than  corresponds  to  0.3  cc,  of  fiftieth- 
normal  sulfuric  acid  according  to  the  U.  S.  P.  X  test.  A  solution 
equivalent  to  5  Gm.  of  invert  sugar  evaporated  to  dryness  and  ashed 
yields  a  residue  weighing  not  more  than  0.004  Gm.  A  solution  equiva- 
lent to  5  Gm.  of  invert  sugar  yields  not  more  ammonia  than  is 
equivalent  to  0.5  cc.  of  hundredth-normal  hydrochloric  acid.  A  solution 
containing  16  per  cent  of  invert  sugar  calculated  from  its  copper  reduc- 
ing power,   when  examined  by   means   of  the  polariscope  has  a  specific 

25 
rotation  of  a  —  between  — 16  and  — 18.5. 
D 


CARBON     TETRACHLORIDE  161 

Dilute  exactly  10  cc.  of  the  original  to  exactly  500  cc;  transfer 
10  cc.  of  this  solution  to  a  250  cc.  beaker  and  assay  for  invert  sugar 
according  to  paragraphs  35  and  36  on  pages  190  and  191  of  the  1925 
edition  of  the  A.  O.  A.  C.  Manual:  the  amount  of  invert  sugar  is 
within  5  per  cent  of  the  amount  claimed.  Transfer  50  cc.  of  the  pre- 
pared solution  to  a  100  cc.  standard  flask;  invert  according  to  paragraph 
23-C,  page  187  of  the  A.  O.  A.  C.  Manual  and  assay  for  sucrose  accord- 
ing to  paragraph  28,  page  189  of  the  A.  O.  A.  C.  Manual:  the  weight 
of  sucrose  is  not  greater  than  4  per  cent  of  the  weight  of  invert  sugar 
found. 


CARBON  TETRACHLORIDE.  —  Tetrachlormethane.— 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Carbonei 
Tetrachloridum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Carbon  tetrachloride  has  narcotic  and 
anesthetic  properties  somewhat  similar  to  those  of  chloroform. 
It  has  recently  come  into  use  as  a  vermifuge  in  the  treatment 
of  hookworm  disease.  It  also  removes  some  intestinal  parasites 
other  than  hookworm,  such  as  Oyxuris  vermicularis,  Ascaris 
lumhricoides  and  Trichocephalus  dispar,  but  it  is  less  effective 
against  these  worms  than  some  other  drugs,  such  as  oil  of  cheno- 
podium.  It  is  reported  that  usually  about  95  per  cent  of  the 
hookworms  are  removed  by  the  first  dose  of  carbon  tetrachloride 
and  that  occasionally  all  are  removed.  As  a  vermifuge  it  appears 
to  be  relatively  safe,  but  serious  symptoms  and  even  death  have 
occurred,  especially  in  patients  addicted  to  the  use  of  alcohol. 
During  treatment  some  of  the  patients  complain  of  headache. 
Good  results  are  obtained  by  administration  in  water  or  milk 
or  in  gelatin  capsules  on  an  empty  stomach,  followed  in  three 
hours  by  a  purgative  dose  of  magnesium  sulfate.  The  capsules 
may  be  prepared  extemporaneously.  Lambert  recommends 
giving  the  vermicide  and  a  solution  of  magnesium  sulfate 
together,  claiming  that  this  prevents  headache.  A  mild  laxative 
is  generally  given  to  constipated  patients  on  the  day  previous 
to  treatment.  To  insure  complete  removal  of  the  hookworms 
a  test  dose  of  oil  of  chenopodium,  3  cc.  (45  minims),  may  be 
given  a  week  after  the  treatment  with  carbon  tetrachloride. 
A  second  dose  of  carbon  tetrachloride  should  not  be  given 
within  three  weeks.  Alcohol  should  not  be  taken  during 
treatment. 

Dosage. — From  2  to  3  cc.  (30  to  45  minims).  For  children 
0.13  cc.  (2  minims)  for  each  year  of  age  up  to  15  years.  If 
the  drug  is  to  be  given  with  the  purgative,  the  dose  for  adults 
is  administered  in  50  cc.  (1^  fluidounces)  of  a  solution  of 
magnesium  sulfate.  For  children  the  dose  of  the  purgative  is 
appropriately  reduced.   The  dose  of  3  cc.  should  not  be  exceeded. 

Capsules    Carbon    Tetrachloride    (For   Human    Use)-P.    D.    &■    Co.,    20 
minims.     Each  capsule  contains  carbon  tetrachloride-U.  S.  P.,  20  minims. 
Prepared  by  Parke,   Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 
Capsules  Carbon  Tetrachloride-S.  &  D.,  0.3  cc. 
Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore. 
Capsules  Carbon  Tetrachloride-S.  &■  D.,  1  cc. 
Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore. 


162     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

CASTOR  OIL.— "Castor  Oil  is  the^fixed  oil  obtained  from 
the  seed  of  Ricinus  communis  Linne  (Fam.  Euphorbiacae)," 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  P.  under  Oleum  Ricini. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  Useful  Drugs. 

McNeil's  Emulsion  of  Castor  Oil  (Emulsum  Olei  Ricini-MeNeil's) : 
Castor  oil  5U  per  cent  by  volume  with  acacia  as  an  emulsifying  agent  and 
sodium  benzoate  0.1  per  cent  as  a  preservative.  Cinnamon  is  used  as  a 
flavoring   agent. 

Prepared  by  McNeil  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Philadelphia.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 


CHAULMOOGRA     DERIVATIVES 

Chaulmoogra  oil  is  a  fixed  (fatty)  oil  expressed  from  the 
seeds  of  Taraktogenos  kursii,  a  tree  growing  in  Burma  and 
adjacent  countries.  In  addition  to  small  quantities  of  the  gly- 
cerides  of  the  fatty  acids  commonly  found  in  vegetable  fats, 
chaulmoogra  oil  contains  the  glycerides  of  a  series  of  highly 
unsaturated  fatty  acids,  chiefly  chaulmoogric  acid,  C18H32O2,  and 
hydnocarpic  acid,  C16H2SO2.  This  series  of  fatty  acids  differs 
from  other  ordinary  fatty  acids  in  being  optically  active  and  in 
possessing,  as  part  of  the  molecular  structure,  a  ring  of  carbon 
atoms.  The  therapeutic  properties  of  chaulmoogra  oil  appear  to 
be  due  to  these  optically  active  unsaturated  fatty  acids  of  the 
chaulmoogric  series. 

Chaulmoogra  oil  has  been  used  in  the  treatment  of  leprosy 
for  many  years,  the  bulk  of  the  evidence  indicating  that  it  is 
of  value  though  not  having  specific,  curative  properties.  The 
fatty  acids  of  chaulmoogra  oil  have  a  destructive  action  on 
acid-fast  bacilli,  such  as  the  bacillus  of  leprosy,  and  it  is  to  this 
property  that  the  beneficial  effects  of  chaulmoogra  oil  deriva- 
tives in  leprosy  are  probably  due.  Chaulmoogra  oil  is  given  by 
mouth  or  by  hypodermic  injection,  although  the  latter  procedure 
is  not  devoid  of  disadvantages  (abscesses). 

The  sodium  salts  of  the  fatty  acids  of  chaulmoogra  oil  and 
the  ethyl  esters  prepared  from  these  fatty  acids  have  been  intro- 
duced for  hypodermic  use  in  the  treatment  of  leprosy  with  the 
claim  that  they  are  better  tolerated  than  the  oil.  In  India, 
preparations  of  the  first  kind  have  been  used  considerably  and 
Leonard  Rogers,  in  particular,  reports  the  successful  use  of  the 
sodium  salts  at  first  subcutaneously  and  later  on  intravenously. 
The  ethyl  esters  prepared  from  the  fatty  acids  of  the  oil  have 
been  used  by  several  observers  for  a  number  of  years. 

ETHYL  CHAULMOOGRATE.— "The  ethyl  esters  of  the 
mixed  acids  of  chaulmoogra  oil."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Aethylis 
Chaulmoogras. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  See  preceding  article,  Chaulmoogra 
Derivatives. 


CHINIOFON     POWDER  163 

Dosage.  —  Orally,  ethyl  chaulmoograte  is  administered  in 
gradually  increasing  doses  of  from  1  cc.  to  5  cc.  daily  after 
meals  with  warm  milk  or  hot  tea.  Intramuscularly,  1  cc.  is  the 
initial  dose,  this  being  increased  by  1  cc.  every  second  or  third 
injection  until  a  maximum  of  3  cc.  to  5  cc.  is  reached.  The 
injections  are  administered  once  a  week. 

Chaulmestrol. — A  brand  of  ethyl  chaulmoograte-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured   by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    New   York.      U.    S.    patent 
957,633    (May   10,    1910;   expired).     U.   S.   trademark   155,565. 
Ampules  Chaulmestrol,  1   Cc. 
Ampules  Chaulmestrol,  3  Cc. 


CHINIOFON  POWDER.  — Chiniofon.— "A  mixture  of 
7-iodo-8-hydroxy-quinoline-5-sulfonic  acid,  sodium  bicarbonate 
and  sodium  iodohydroxyquinolinesulfonate,  containing  not  less 
than  26.5  and  not  rnore  than  28.9  per  cent  of  iodine  (I)."   U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Pulvis 
Chiniofoni. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Chiniofon  powder,  which  is  closely  similar 
to  preparations  introduced  under  various  proprietary  names  as 
wound  antiseptics,  has  been  found  to  be  of  use  in  the  treatment 
of  amebic  dysentery.  It  is  claimed  that  the  action  of  the  drug 
is  probably  due  to  its  absorption  and  direct  action  through  the 
blood  stream  on  the  amebas  invading  the  bowel  wall.  The  drug 
has  been  reported  in  some  cases  to  produce  diarrhea ;  but  serious 
toxic  effects  do  not  appear  to  be  common. 

The  diagnosis  of  amebiasis  depends  on  the  observation  of 
motile  forms  or  cysts  of  Endameba  histolytica  in  stool  speci- 
mens (repeated  examinations  are  often  necessary)  or  their 
recovery  by  means  of  the  proctoscope  from  the  intestinal 
mucosa ;  positive  diagnosis  can  often  be  made  by  the  latter 
procedure  when  stool  examinations  are  negative,  and  this  is 
considered  to  be  the  more  satisfactory  as  well  as  the  more 
rapid  method  of  diagnosis  in  many  cases. 

In  view  of  the  frequency  of  persistent  infection  in  the  absence 
of  marked  symptoms,  adequate  therapy  includes  reexaminations 
and  repetitions  of  courses  of  treatment. 

Do.fa(7^.— Orally,  for  adults,  from  0.25  to  1.0  Gm.  (4  to  15 
grains)  in  the  form  of  pills,  cachets  or  solution,  three  times 
daily;  for  children,  according  to  age;  rectally,  1  to  5  Gm.  (15 
to  75  grains)  freshly  dissolved  in  200  cc.  of  water  at  a  tem- 
perature not  exceeding  44  C.  The  course  of  treatment  requires 
from  seven  to  fourteen  days.  Combined  oral  and  rectal  admin- 
istration has  been  used  in  acute  cases  and  in  the  more  serious 
chronic  cases  accompanied  by  obstinate  clinical  symptoms.  It 
has  been  pointed  out  that  the  iodine  content  of  chiniofon  should 
be  considered  when  chronic  endamebiasis  is  accompanied  by 
thyroid  disturbance. 

Until  more  evidence  becomes  available,  chiniofon  should  be 
used  with  caution  in  cases  with  liver  damage. 


164     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 
Chiniofon-Searle. — A  brand  of  chiniofon  powder -U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Tablets  Chiniofon-Searle,  0.25   Gnu    (4  gr.). 

Tablets  Chiniofon-Searle  Enteric  Coated,  0.25  Gm.  (4  grains) :  The 
tablets  are  coated  with  phenyl  salicylate. 

Chiniofon-Winthrop. — A  brand  of  chiniofon  powder-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York. 
No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Tablets  Chiniofon-Winthrop,  0.25  Gm.  (4  grains) :  The  tablets  are 
coated  wth  keratin. 


CHLORAL     DERIVATIVES     AND 
SUBSTITUTES 

Cliloral  hydrate  is  still  the  standard  hypnotic  of  its  class ;  but 
it  has  the  disadvantages  of  causing  cardiac  and  respiratory 
depression  in  overdosage  and  of  irritating  the  stomach  unless 
diluted  suitably ;  furthermore,  it  cannot  be  used  hypodermically. 
Attempts  to  modify  the  drug  so  as  to  make  it  safer  have  at  the 
same  time  resulted  in  weakening  its  hypnotic  action.  Attempts 
to  remove  its  irritant  action  have  been  more  successful.  The 
following  chloral  derivatives  are  described  below  and  include 
several  preparations  which  are  less  irritating  to  the  stomach, 
and  at  least  one  which  can  be  given  by  hypodermic  injection 
(chlorobutanol)  : 

Butylchloral  hydrate,  trichlorbutylidene  glycol,  CH3CHCI, 
CCl2CH.(OH)2. 

Chlorobutanol  (chloretone),  l,l,l-trichlor-2-methylpropan-2-ol, 
CClaCCOH)  (CH3).CH3. 

BUTYLCHLORAL    HYDRATE.  —  Butylchloral    Hy- 

dratum. — Trichlorbutylidene  Glycol. — Croton  Chloral  Hvdrate. 
— 2,2,3-trichlorbutan-l,  1-di-ol.— CHsCHCl.CClz.CHCOH)^.— A 
crystalline  product  obtained  by  the  addition  of  water  to  liquid 
butyl  chloral  (2,2,3-trichlorbutanol,  CH3CHCICCI2.CHO). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  action  of  this  preparation  is  similar 
to  that  of  chloral  hydrate,  except  that  the  former  is  said  to  be 
less  depressing  and  more  analgesic.  It  has  been  especially 
recommended  for  relief  of  facial  neuralgia. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1.3  Gm.  (5  to  20  grains). 

Butylchloral  hydrate  occurs  in  pearly  white,  trimetric  laminae, 
having  a  pungent  but  not  acrid  odor,  and  an  acrid,  nauseous  taste. 
It  fuses  at  about  78  C.  to  a  transparent  liquid,  which,  in  cooling, 
begins  to  solidify  at  about  71  C.  It  is  soluble  in  about  50  parts  of 
water,  and  in  its  own  weight  of  glycerin  or  of  alcohol  (90  per  cent)  ; 
it  slowly  dissolves  in  20  parts  of  chloroform.  __  From  a  solution  in 
alcohol,  it  is  precipitated  by  the  gradual  addition  of  water  in  the 
form  of  globules  said  to  consist  of  butylchloral  alcoholate,  C4H5CI3O. 
C2H5OH.  The  alcoholic  solution  is  neutral,  and  the  aqueous  solution 
is  neutral  or  but  slightly  acid  to  litmus. 

It  gives  no  precipitate  with  solution  of  silver  nitrate.  Heat  about 
0.2  pm.  of  butylchloral  hydrate  with  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  and  add  2  drops  of  a  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  aniline: 
the  odor  of  phenyl  isocyanide  is  not  evolved  (chloral  hydrate). 


CHLORAL     DERIVATIVES  165 

Butyl-Chloral  Hydrate-Merck. — A  brand  of  butylchloral 
hydrate-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor. 

CHLOROBUTANOL.  —  Chlorbutol— Acetone-Chloroform. 
— "Trichlortertiarybutyl  alcohol,  either  anhydrous  or  containing 
up  to  about  one-half  molecule  of  water."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Chloro- 
butanol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Chlorobutanol  is  said  to  be  absorbed 
unchanged  from  the  alimentary  tract,  but  to  be  decomposed  in 
the  body.  It  is  a  local  anesthetic  with  an  action  weaker  than 
that  of  cocaine,  but  sufficient  frequently  to  prevent  vomiting 
from  slight  gastric  irritation.  Its  antiseptic  action  is  said  to  be 
fifteen  times  as  strong  as  that  of  boric  acid.  It  acts  on  the 
central  nervous  system  similarly  to  chloral  hydrate,  and  although 
the  claim  has  been  made  that  hypnotic  doses  are  without  effect 
on  the  circulation  and  respiration,  independent  observers  have 
described  a  fall  of  blood  pressure  and  interference  with  respira- 
tion in  animals,  and  consider  it  fully  as  dangerous  as  chloral 
hydrate.  In  man,  100  grains  (6.5  Gm.)  caused  severe  symptoms, 
but  recovery  occurred.  It  is  claimed  that  no  habit  is  induced, 
but  this  may  be  because  of  its  restricted  employment.  It  is  said 
to  be  useful  as  a  mild  local  anesthetic  in  dentistry,  etc.,  as  a 
preservative  for  hypodermic  solutions  and  for  insomnia,  vomit- 
ing and  spasmodic  conditions.  It  is  also  said  to  be  useful  as 
an  introductory  to  general  anesthesia,  as  it  lessens  excitement 
and  nausea. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1.3  Gm.  (5  to  20  grains)  dry  or  in 
capsules.  Hypodermically  as  a  local  anesthetic  a  saturated 
aqueous  solution  may  be  used. 

Chlorbutanol  (Hydrous) -Merck.  —  A  brand  of  chloro- 
butanol-U.  S.  P.  containing  one  molecule  of  water  in  two  of 
chlorobutanol.  This  product  is  used  in  the  preparation  of 
aqueous  solutions. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Chlorbutanol  (Anhydrous) -Merck. — A  brand  of  chloro- 
butanol-U.  S.  P.     For  use  in  the  preparation  of  oil  solutions. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Chloretone. — A  brand  of  chlorobutanol-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.     U.  S.  trademark. 

Boro-Chloretone:  A  dusting  powder  composed  of  chloretone,  1  part; 
boric  acid,    1    part;   purified  talc,  2  parts. 

Chloretone  Capsules,  3  grains. 

Chloretone  Capsules,  5  grains. 

Chloretone  Inhalant:  Chloretone,  1  Gm.;  camphor,  2.5  Gm. ;  menthol 
1.8  Gm. ;  oil  of  cinnamon,  0.06  Gm.;  refined  liquid  petrolatum,  94.64  Gm. 


166     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

CHLORINATED  PARAFFIN.— Chlorcosane.— "A  liquid 
paraffin  which  has  been  treated  with  chlorine."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Paraffinum 
Chlorinatum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  chlorine  of  chlorinated  paraffin  is 
therapeutically  without  action.  Chlorinated  paraffin  is  used  as 
a  solvent  for  dichloramine-T.  With  it,  solutions  containing  up  to 
8  per  cent  may  be  prepared.  The  high  viscosity  of  the  oil  pre- 
vents its  being  readily  sprayed  with  a  hand  spray ;  the  addition 
of  about  10  per  cent  carbon  tetrachloride  will  reduce  the  viscosity 
so  that  it  can  be  readily  sprayed  in  an  ordinary  oil  atomizer. 


CINCHOPHEN     AND     CINCHOPHEN 
DERIVATIVES 

Cinchophen  was  introduced  in  therapeutics  under  the  proprie- 
tary name  "atophan."  It  was  admitted  to  the  U.  S.  Pharma- 
copeia IX  as  acidum  phenylcinchoninicum,  the  name  being  later 
changed  to  cinchophenum.  It  has  been  omitted  from  the  U.  S.  P. 
XI  and  is  now  official  in  the  N.  F.  VI.  Cinchophen  and  its 
compounds  are  derived  from  quinolin  carboxylic  acid.  Cincho- 
phen is  phenylquinolincarboxylic  acid.  Neocinchophen  (intro- 
duced as  novatophan)  is  ethylmethylphenylquinolincarboxylic 
acid.  Cinchophen  has  a  slightly  bitter  taste,  while  neocinchophen 
is  practically  tasteless ;  otherwise  their  actions  are  closely 
similar. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Cinchophen  and  cinchophen  derivatives 
increase  the  permeability  of  the  kidneys  selectively  to  uric  acid, 
and  therefore  greatly  increase  the  excretion  of  the  urates.  Under 
a  purin-free  diet  the  amount  of  uric  acid  in  the  blood  is  reduced 
one-half;  when  exogenous  purins  are  given,  the  total  amount  is 
rapidly  excreted  so  that  the  content  of  uric  acid  in  the  blood 
remains  at  normal  or  below.  The  influence  of  the  cinchophen  on 
uric  acid  excretion  is  greater  and  is  exerted  more  promptly 
than  that  of  sodium  salicylate.  Its  action  grows  weaker  after 
the  first  three  hours  and  is  practically  terminated  in  nine  hours 
after  the  administration  of  the  dose.  The  amount  of  ammonia 
and  that  of  total  nitrogen  in  the  urine  are  slightly  increased 
during  the  action  of  cinchophen,  but  not  in  proportion  to  the 
increase  in  the  uric  acid  of  the  urine.  Cinchophen  does  not 
increase  the  leukocytes,  the  purin  bases  or  the  phosphoric  acid. 
There  is  no  evidence  of  increased  formation  of  uric  acid  or  of 
any  effect  on  deposited  urates. 

Cinchophen  is  useful  in  acute  gout ;  it  relieves  pain  in  this 
disease,  acting  more  promptly  than  colchicum  and,  when  proper 
dosage  is  used,  generally  without  undesirable  by-effects.  In 
nonuratic  joint  affections,  particularly  acute  articular  rheuma- 
tism, favorable  results  are  reported,  while  the  chronic  forms 
seem  to  yield  to  cinchophen  only  in  isolated  cases.  It  frequently 
relieves  the  pain  of  sciatica,  but  not  invariably  according  to 
McLester  (Arch.  Int.  Med.  12:739  [Dec]   1913). 


CINCHOPHEN  167 

While  the  ordinary  doses  of  cinchophen  are  usually  harmless 
they  are  occasionally  followed  by  severe  and  even  fatal  effects : 
these  are  more  frequent  with  the  larger  doses.  Symptoms  of 
intoxication  due  to  overdosage  are  a  sense  of  oppression  in  the 
gastric  region  with  acid  eructation  and  diarrhea,  which  can  be 
avoided  by  the  simultaneous  use  of  small  doses  of  sodium  bicar- 
bonate. In  cystitis  it  may  cause  pain  in  the  bladder  with 
hematuria.  It  occasionally  induces  a  scarlet,  an  urticaria-like, 
or  a  vesiculous  rash.  It  sometimes  induces  cardiac  distress  with 
dizziness.  Excessive  doses  or  the  long  continued  use  of  mod- 
erate amounts  may  cause  damage  to  the  kidney  and  occasionally 
gives  rise  to  acute  yellow  atrophy  or  to  dangerous  or  fatal 
hepatitis,  usually  characterized  by  the  late  and  relatively  abrupt 
onset  of  symptoms,  the  most  frequent  being  jaundice.  The 
appearance  of  skin  rash,  vomiting,  anorexia,  albuminuria,  heart- 
burn, diarrhea  or  jaundice  requires  the  immediate  discontinuance 
of  the  drug.  Relatively  small  doses  occasionally  induce  symp- 
toms in  patients  showing  idiosyncrasy,  and  it  is  possible  that 
an  attack  of  hepatitis  renders  the  patient  extremely  susceptible 
to  further  medication  at  a  later  date.  Especial  caution  is  neces- 
sary in  the  use  of  cinchophen  in  the  presence  of  renal  insuffi- 
ciency. The  promiscuous  use  of  cinchophen  by  the  public  for 
the  relief  of  pain  is  obviously  dangerous.  Fewer  cases  of  poison- 
ing have  been  reported  after  neocinchophen,  but  the  relative 
danger  of  these  two  has  not  been  determined  satisfactorily. 
There  is  perhaps  some  reason  to  believe  that  neocinchophen  is 
less  likely  to  prove  toxic,  but  the  evidence  is  not  conclusive; 
the  same  contraindications  and  precautions  should  be  observed 
in  the  use  of  neocinchophen  as  in  the  case  of  cinchophen. 

Dosage. — In  gout  the  dose  of  cinchophen  is  from  0.5  Gm.  (8 
grains)  four  times  a  day  to  1  Gm,  (15  grains)  three  times  a 
day  suspended  in  large  quantities  of  water.  In  order  to  prevent 
the  precipitation  of  free  uric  acid  from  the  urine  with  possibly 
resulting  renal  colic,  Weintraub  considers  it  necessary  to  admin- 
ister simultaneously  15  Gm.  (225  grains)  of  sodium  bicarbonate 
in  the  course  of  the  first  day  and  from  5  to  10  Gm.  (75  to  150 
grains)  on  the  following  days.  In  articular  rheumatism.  Heller 
prescribes  daily  doses  of  from  3  to  5  Gm.  (45  to  75  grains). 

2-phenyl-quinoIin-4-carboxylic  acid  was  described  by  Doebner  and 
Giesecke  in  1887  {Ann.  d.  Chem.  343:291,  1887),  who  prepared  it 
by  warming  together  pyrocacemic  acid,  benzaldehyde  and  anilin  in 
alcoholic  solution.  Its  therapeutic  action  was  described  by  Nicolaier 
and  Dohrn   in    1908    {Deutsches  Arch.  f.   kin.   Med.   93:331,    1908). 

CINCHOPHEN.— Phenylcinchoninic  Acid.  —  Phenylquino- 
linecarboxylic  Acid. — '"Contains,  when  dried  to  constant  weight 
at  100°  C.,  not  less  than  99.5  per  cent  of  CoHoN.CcHrXOOH 
2:4."    N.  F. 

For  standards  see  The  National  Formulary  under  Cincho- 
phenum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Cincho- 
phen and   Cinchophen   Derivatives. 


168     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Cinchophen-Abbott. — A  brand  of  cinchophen-N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 
Tablets  Cinchophen-Abbott,  5  grains. 
Tablets  Cinchophen-Abbott,  7j/^  grains. 

Cinchophen-Calco. — A  brand  of  cinchophen-N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  Calco  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  Bound  Brook,  N.  J. 
Cinchophen-Calco  Tablets,  7j4  grains. 

Cinchophen-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  cinchophen-N.  F. 

Prepared  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works. 

Cinchophen-Pfizer. — A  brand  of  cinchophen-N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  Chas.  Pfizer  &  Co.,  Brooklyn. 

Cinchophen-Squibb. — A  brand  of  cinchophen-N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.   Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

CHLOROXYL.  —  Cinchophen  Hydrochloride.  —  Phenylcin- 
choninic  acid  hydrochloride.  —  C6H5C9H5NCOOH.HCI.  The 
hydrochloride  of  2-phenylquinolin-4-carboxylic  acid. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — The  same  as  those  of  cinchophen. 

Manufactured    by    Eli    Lilly    &    Company,    Indianapolis.      U.    S.    patent 
1,306,439    (June    10,    1919;    expires    1936).      U.    S.    trademark    123,336. 
Chloroxyl   Tablets,   5   grains. 

Chloroxyl  is  a  yellow  crystalline  powder  with  an  astringent,  slightly 
bitter  taste.  It  is  insoluble  in  water,  ether,  or  chloroform,  but  slightly 
soluble  in  alcohol. 

Dissolve  2  Gm.  chloroxyl  in  10  cc.  sodium  hydroxide  solution;  heat 
to  boiling,  and  while  hot  add  acetic  acid  until  no  further  precipitate 
is  formed.  Cool,  decant  the  supernatant  liquid  and  wash  the  precipitate 
with  distilled  water  until  it  is  free  from  acetic  acid.  Dry  the  precipi- 
tate at  100  C:  this  precipitate  responds  to  the  U.  S.  P.  tests  for 
phenylcinchoninic  acid. 

Accurately  weigh  about  2  Gm.  of  chloroxyl,  add  SO  cc.  of  half-normal 
sodium  hydroxide  and  heat  on  a  boiling  water  bath  for  one  hour. 
Determine  the  excess  of  sodium  hydroxide  by  titration  with  half- 
normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution,  using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator: 
chloroxyl  contains  not  less  than  11.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  12.5  per 
cent  of  combined  hydrochloric  acid  (each  cc.  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion is  equivalent  to  0.00912  Gm.   HCl). 

NEOCINCHOPHEN.— "The  ethyl  ester  of  6-methyl-2- 
phenylquinolin-4-carboxylic  acid."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Neocin- 
chophenum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  cinchophen.  See 
preceding  general  article,  Cinchophen  and  Cinchophen  Deriva- 
tives. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  cinchophen.  Neocinchophen  is 
practically  tasteless. 

Neocinchophen-Abbott.  —  A  brand  of  neocinchophen- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 
Neocinchophen-Abbott  Tablets,  5  grains. 
Neocinchophen-Abbott  Tablets,  7J^   grains. 


COPPER     SALTS  169 

Neocinchophen-Lederle.  —  A    brand    of    neocinchophen-U. 
S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Lederle  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Pearl   River,   N.   Y.     No 
U.    S.   patent   or  trademark. 

Tablets   Neocinchophen-Lederle,    5    grains. 

Neocinchophen-Merck. — A  brand  of  neocinchophen-U.  S.P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.    No  U.  S,  patent 
or  trademark. 

Neocinchophen-Squibb. — A  brand  of  neocinchophen-U.   S. 
P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.    Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.     No  U.   S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Tablets   Neocinchophen-Squibb,    5    grains. 


COPPER     SALTS 

COPPER  CITRATE.  —  Cuprum  Citricum.  —  Cupric 
Citrate. — The  cupric  salt  of  citric  acid,  containing  from  34  to  36 
per  cent  of  copper. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Copper  citrate  possesses  the 
astringent  and  antiseptic  properties  of  other  salts  of  copper 
somewhat  modified  by  its  sparing  solubility. 

It  may  be  used  for  the  same  purposes  as,  and  in  doses 
similar  to,  those  of  other  salts  of  copper. 

Copper  Citrate  Ointment  (5  per  cent)-M.  E.  S.  Co.:  An  ointment  con- 
taining 5  per  cent  of  copper  citrate,  10  per  cent  of  wool  fat,  and  85  per 
cent  of  petrolatum,  sterile,  without  alcohol  or  preservative. 

Copper  Citrate  Ointment  (10  per  cent)-M.  E.  S.  Co.:  An  ointment 
containing  10  per  cent  of  copper  citrate,  10  per  cent  of  wool  fat,  and  80 
per  cent   of  petrolatum,   sterile,    without  alcohol   or   preservative. 

Manufactured  by  the  Manhattan  Eye  Salve  Company,  Louisville,  Ky. 
No   U.    S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Copper  citrate  occurs  as  a  green  or  bluish-green,  finely  crystalline, 
odorless  powder.  It  is  but  slightly  soluble  in  cold  water;  somewhat 
more  soluble  in  a  cold  solution  of  an  alkali  citrate,  forming  a  greenish- 
blue  solution;  more  soluble  in  a  hot  solution  of  an  alkali  citrate;  also 
soluble  with  decomposition  in  ammonia  water  and  in   mineral  salts. 

When  dissolved  in  ammonia  water,  copper  citrate  yields  an  intense 
blue  solution.  When  heated  to  90  C,  the  salt  loses  water  of  hydra- 
tion and  assumes  a  pale  blue  color.  At  a  higher  temperature,  it 
blackens  and  at  a  low  red  heat  leaves  a  black  residue  of  cupric  oxide. 
If  about  1  Gm.  of  copper  citrate  is  dissolved  in  20  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid,  the  solution  diluted  to  200  cc.  with  hot  water,  the 
mixture  saturated  with  hydrogen  sulfide,  filtered,  and  the  filtrate 
evaporated  nearly  to  dryness  on  the  water  bath,  the  residue  responds 
to  the  usual  tests  for  citric  acid.  If  0.5  Gm.  of  copper  citrate  is 
dissolved  in  10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium 
chloride  solution  added,  no  immediate  turbidity  occurs.  A  solution  of 
0.5  Gra.  of  the  salt  in  10  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  should  not 
evolve  any  odor  of  acetic  acid  when  boiled.  The  salt  should  be  free 
from  nitrates,  chlorides  and  carbonates. 

To  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  add  25  cc.  water  and  10  cc. 
of  normal  sulfuric  acid.  _  Heat  the  mixture  almost  to  boiling  until 
solution  is  complete,  adding  a  little  more  acid  if  necessary.  Cool 
the  solution  and  add  10  cc.  of  potassium  iodide  solution  and  allow  it 
to  stand  five  minutes,  with  occasional  shaking.  Add  200  cc.  of  water 
and  titrate  the  liberated  iodine  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate: 
the  titration  should  indicate  not  less  than  34  per  cent  of  copper. 


170     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Copper  Citrate-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  copper  citrate- 
N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

CUPRIC  SULFATE.— Copper  Sulfate.— "Contains  not 
less  than  63  per  cent  and  not  more  than  66.8  per  cent  of  CuSO*, 
corresponding  to  not  less  than  98.5  per  cent  of  the  hydrated 
salt.     (CuSCSHsO)."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Cupri-Sulfas. 


CREOSOTE    AND    GUAIACOL    COMPOUNDS 

Creosote  consists  of  phenols  and  phenol  derivatives,  chiefly 
guaiacol  and  creosol.  These  have  essentially  similar  antiseptic 
actions,  resembling  phenol.  Creosote  and  guaiacol  are  used 
internally  as  intestinal  and  urinary  antiseptics  (see  general 
article,  Naphthol  Compounds),  as  stimulant  expectorants  in 
bronchitis  and  in  the  treatment  of  tuberculosis.  The  value  of 
the  drugs  as  intestinal  antiseptics  and  for  the  treatment  of 
tuberculosis  is  not  established. 

Their  local  irritant  actions  often  interfere  with  their  internal 
administration.  This  local  action  and  the  toxicity  can  be 
minimized,  as  with  other  phenols,  by  masking  the  active  OH 
group,  through  replacement  of  its  H  by  acid  radicals,  as  in 
the  official  guaiacol  carbonate  and  in  most  of  the  proprietary 
derivatives.  These  esters  are  insoluble  and  inactive,  but  like 
phenyl  salicylate,  are  saponified  in  the  intestines,  liberating 
their  active  constituents  gradually.  These  various  esters  are 
practically  equivalent. 

Note. — The  Council  wishes  it  understood  that  any  claims 
of  nontoxicity  that  are  made  for  drugs  that  have  or  are  sup- 
posed to  have  important  general  effects  are  admitted  to  this 
book  only  when  they  do  not  conflict  with  known  facts.  In  all 
such  instances,  however,  it  is  recommended  that  a  claim  of 
lack  of  toxicity  be  not  accepted  too  freely,  but  be  considered 
to  mean  only  that  toxic  efifects  have  not  as  yet  been  recognized 
with  the  doses  that  have  been  studied.  The  most  sincere  and 
apparently  justified  beliefs  concerning  this  point  are  often  ulti- 
mately reversed  by  extended  experience.  Much  the  same  may 
be  said  regarding  any  claims  that  drugs  are  nonirritating. 

CALCIUM  CREOSOTATE.— "A  mixture  of  the  calcium 
compounds  of  the  constituents  of  creosote.  When  dried  to 
constant  weight  it  yields,  upon  ignition,  not  less  than  40  per  cent 
and  not  more  than  50  per  cent  of  CaO."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Calcii 
Creosotas. 


CREOSOTE    AND     GUAIACOL    COMPOUNDS      171 

Actions  and  Uses. — Calcium  creosotate,  when  administered 
internally,  is  claimed  to  have  the  same  actions  and  uses  as 
creosote.  It  is  claimed  that  calcium  creosotate  does  not  readily 
produce  gastric  distress,  nausea  and  vomiting. 

There  is  some  evidence  to  indicate  that  by  the  use  of  calcium 
creosotate,  relatively  large  quantities  of  creosote  may  be  admin- 
istered, but  it  appears  probable  that  such  tolerance  is  due  to 
the  slower  absorption  and  excretion  and  therefore  decreased 
efficiency.  That  the  creosote  contained  in  calcium  creosotate  is 
liberated  in  the  body  is  evident  from  the  fact  that  during  its 
elimination  by  the  kidneys  it  has  produced  albuminuria  and 
urine  containing  derivatives  of  phenols. 

Dosage. — From  0.25  to  1  Gm.  (4  to  16  grains)  every  two 
to  four  hours,  beginning  with  small  doses  and  gradually  increas- 
ing until  tolerance  is  reached. 

Calcreose. — A  brand  of  calcium  creosotate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  The  Maltbie  Chemical  Company,  Newark,  N.  J,  U.  S. 
patent  1,047,961    (Dec.  24,   1912;  expired).     U.  S.  trademark  94,789. 

Calcreose    Tablets,   4   grains. 

Compound  Syrup  of  Calcreose. — A  syrup  containing  in  100  cc.  calcreose 
solution,  33.3  cc;  alcohol,  5  cc;  extractives  from  wild  cherry,  4  Gm. 
(20  grains  per  fluidounce) ;  chloroform,  0.6  cc.  (3  minims  per  fluidounce) ; 
peppermint  and  other  aromatic  drugs. 

Dosage. — Four  to  8  cc.    (1  to  2  fiuidrachms). 

Solution  Calcreose:  Prepared  by  adding  454  Gm.  (1  pound  avoidupois) 
calcium  creosotate-U.  S.  P.  to  3,785  cc.  (1  gallon)  of  water,  agitating  occa- 
sionally during  twenty-four  hours,  filtering  and  adding  enough  water 
through  the  filter  to  make  3,785  cc.    (1  gallon)   of  solution. 

Dosage. — Four  to  8  cc.  (2  to  4  fiuidrachms)  in  a  half  glass  of  water, 
followed  immediately  by  one-half  glass  of  water,  beginning  with  4  cc. 
(1    fluidrachm)    in   one-fourth  glass   of   water. 

CREOSOTE.— Creasote.— Wood  Creosote.— "A  mixture  of 
phenols  obtained  from  wood  tar."     U.  S.  P. 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Creosotum. 

CREOSOTE  CARBONATE.— "A  mixture  of  the  car- 
bonates of  the  various  constituents  of  creosote."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Creosoti 
Carbonas. 

Creosotal-Winthrop.  —  A  brand  of  creosote  carbonate- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  expired. 

GUAIACOL  BENZOATE— Guaiacolis  Benzoas.— Ben- 

zosol.   CeHoCOO.CsHi.OCHs. — Guaiacol  Benzoate  is  the  benzoic 
acid  ester  of  guaiacol. 


172     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — Guaiacol  benzoate  is  decomposed  slowly 
in  the  intestinal  tract  into  guaiacol  and  benzoic  acid,  which 
exert  their  usual  actions.  The  liberated  constituents  are 
absorbed  and  excreted  in  the  urine.  It  is  claimed  to  be  non- 
irritating. 

Its  uses  are  analogous  to  those  of  creosote  and  of  benzoic 
acid.  It  is  said  to  be  useful  in  incipient  pulmonary  tuber- 
culosis, as  an  intestinal  antiseptic  in  fermentation,  diarrhea, 
typhoid  fever  and  diabetes  mellitus  and  as  a  urinary  antiseptic 
in  cystitis,  etc.     (See  general  article,  Naphthol  Compounds.) 

Dosage. — From  0.2  to  0.6  Gm.  (3  to  10  grains),  in  powder, 
capsule  or  pill,  or  suspended  in  liquids  or  as  an  emulsion. 

Guaiacol  benzoate  occurs  in  minute  colorless  crystals;  odorless  or 
having  a  faint  aromatic  odor;  tasteless  or  nearly  so.  Guaiacol  ben- 
zoate is  almost  insoluble  in  water;  soluble  in  ether  and  chloroform; 
also  soluble  in  hot  alcohol.  Guaiacol  benzoate  melts  at  from  59  to 
61  C. 

With  sulfuric  _  acid  guiacol  benzoate  forms  a.  permanent  yellow 
coloration.  Ferric  chloride  produces  in  the  guaiacol  benzoate-sulfuric 
acid  mixture  a  violet  color,  changing  to  green  and  blue,  and  on  the 
further  addition  of  nitric  acid,  to  orange  and  green,  or  of  potassium 
nitrite  to  green,   violet  and  yellow. 

On  heating  with  alcoholic  potassium  hydroxide  guaiacol  benzoate  is 
saponified  and   the  odor   of  guaiacol   is    developed. 

Guaiacol  benzoate  is  incompatible  with  the  alkalis,  which  split  it 
into  guaiacol  and  benzoic  acid. 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  guaiacol  benzoate,  accurately  weighed:  the 
ash  does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent. 

Benzosol. — A  brand  of  guaiacol  benzoate-N.  N.  R. 

Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  New  York,  distributor.  U.  S.  patent  expired. 
U.   S.  trademark   65,165. 

GUAIACOL  CARBONATE.  — For  standards  see  the 
National  Formulary  under  Guaiacolis  Carbonas. 

Ductal. — A  brand  of  guaiacol  carbonate-N.  F. 

Duotal    Tablets,    5    grains. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  expired. 

PROPOSOTE.— Creosote  Phenylpropionate.— A  condensa- 
tion product  of  creosote  and  phenylpropionic  acid.  Proposote 
contains  the  equivalent  of  50  per  cent  of  creosote. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Proposote  is  not  decomposed  by  the 
gastric  fluids  and  passes  the  stomach  practically  unabsorbed. 
It  is  decomposed  in  the  intestines  and  the  components  are 
chiefly  eliminated  through  the  kidneys.  The  administration 
of  proposote  is  claimed  to  be  of  value  in  bronchitis  and  in 
coughs  due  to  bronchial  infection.  Animal  experimentation 
and  clinical  experience  tend  to  show  that  proposote  causes  less 
gastric  or  intestinal  disturbance  than  creosote  does. 

Proposote  is  used  for  the  same  purposes  for  which  creosote 
is  administered. 


CREOSOTE    AND     GUAIACOL    COMPOUNDS      173 

Dosage. — For  adults,  0.6  cc.  (10  minims)  three  times  a 
day.  For  children,  0.3  cc.  (5  minims)  once  or  twice  a  day. 
Proposote  is  supplied  in  the  form  of  capsules  only. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  and  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.  S.  trademark  176,953. 

Proposote  Capsules,  5  minims. 
Proposote  Capsules,  10  minims. 

Proposote  is  prepared  by  treating  phenylpropionic  acid  with  creosote 
in  the  presence  of  phosphorus  oxychloride  and  purification  by  treatment 
with   dilute   alkali   solution    and   extraction   with   benzin. 

Proposote  is  an  amber  colored  oily  liquid,  having  a  characteristic 
odor  resembling  creosote  and  a  slightly  bitter  taste.  It  is_  insoluble  in 
water,  soluble  in  alcohol,  ether  and  fatty  oils.  The  boiling  point  of 
proposote  is  above  360  C. ;  its  specific  gravity  at  25  C.  is  1.10. 

Treat  5  Gm.  of  proposote  with  4  Gm.  sodiurn  hydroxide  and  20  cc. 
of  water;  heat  on  a  steam  bath  until  saponification  is  complete  (1  to  2 
hours),  5  cc.  of  alcohol  being  added  to  facilitate  saponification;  sepa- 
rate the  aqueous  solution  and  dilute  it  to  100  cc;  acidify  with  10  per 
cent  sulfuric  acid  and  separate  the  liberated  cresol.  Concentrate  the 
aqueous  filtrate  and  allow  it  to  cool:  fine  needles  of  hydrocinnamic  acid 
separate. 

Dissolve  1  cc.  of  proposote  in  25  cc.  of  neutral  alcohol  and  titrate 
with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide,  using  methyl  red  as  indicator. 
Each  cc.  of  alkali  equals  1.5  per  cent  of  acid  calculated  as  phenyl- 
propionic  acid:  more  than  0.1   per  cent  is  present. 

Dissolve  1  cc.  of  proposote  in  16  cc.  of  alcohol;  transfer  1  cc.  of 
this  solution  to  25  cc.  of  water  and  add  2  drops  of  ferric  chloride 
solution:  no  brown  color  appears  within  five  minutes  (limit  of  creosote). 

Ignite  2  cc.  of  proposote:  the  ash  is  not  more  than   0.1    per  cent. 

POTASSIUM     GUAIACOLSULFONATE.— "Contains, 

when  dried  over  sulfuric  acid  for  24  hours,  not  less  than  97  per 
cent  of  C6H3.OH.OCH3.SO3K."    A^.  F. 

For  standards  see  The  National  Formulary  under  Potassii 
Guaiacolsulfonas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Potassium  guaiacolsulfonate  acts  as  a 
sedative  expectorant.  It  has  the  advantage  over  guaiacol  in 
that  it  is  comparatively  tasteless,  does  not  disturb  digestion 
and  is  nontoxic.  In  potassium  guaiacolsulfonate,  the  guaiacol 
is  so  firmly  bound  that  almost  none  is  split  off  when  the  salt 
is  administered,  and  it  is  questionable  whether  its  action  is  due 
to  small  quantities  of  guaiacol  set  free  or  to  the  guaiacolsul- 
fonic  group  as  a  whole. 

It  is  claimed  that  potassium  guaiacolsulfonate  is  useful  in 
the  treatment  of  diseases  of  the  respiratory  tract,  incipient 
tuberculosis  and  certain  diarrheas. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1.3  Gm.  (5  to  20  grains),  dissolved 
in  water  or  syrup,  or  in  the  form  of  tablets. 

Thiocol-Roche. — A  brand  of  potassium  guaiacolsulphonate- 
N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hoffmann-LaRoche  &  Co.,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(Hofifmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.).  U.  S.  patent  650,218 
(expired).     U.   S.  trademark  80,717. 

Syrup  Thiocol-Roche:  Containing  thiocol-Roche,  10.5  Gm.,  in  100  cc. 
(6  grains  in  a  fluidrachm). 

Thiocol-Roche   Tablets,    5  grains. 


174     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

CRESOL     AND     CRESYLIC     ACID 
PREPARATIONS 

Cresols  are  phenols  in  which  one  of  the  hydrogen  atoms 
has  been  replaced  by  CH3.  This  substitution  increases  the 
germicidal  efficiency,  while  the  toxicity  is  not  increased,  at 
least  not  in  the  same  ratio.  The  cresols,  therefore,  possess  dis- 
tinct advantages  as  disinfectants.  In  practice,  they  are  much 
less  toxic  than  phenol,  because  they  are  used  more  diluted,  but 
they  are  far  from  being  "nonpoisonous."  Another  advantage 
of  the  cresol  preparations  over  phenol  is  their  lower  cost. 
Their  disadvantages  are  the  disagreeable  odor,  which  depends 
mainly  on  impurities,  their  limited  solubility  in  water,  and  their 
variable  composition  and  activity. 

They  may  be  rendered  soluble  by  the  addition  of  soap,  as 
in  the  official  compound  solution  of  cresol,  and  in  several 
other  ways.  The  variability  is  best  discounted  by  the  deter- 
mination of  the  phenol  coefficient,  that  is,  the  ratio  of  the 
germicidal  power  of  the  disinfectant  to  the  germicidal  power 
of  phenol,  tested  under  identical  conditions.  (The  Council 
has  approved  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service 
for  determinations  of  the  phenol  coefficient.  The  details  of  the 
test  are  described  in  Public  Health  Reports,  July  8,  1921,  pp. 
1559-1564.)  A  disinfectant  three  times  as  active  as  phenol 
against  B.  typhosus  would  have  the  coefficient  3  (this  being 
about  the  coefficient  of  compound  cresol  solution).  Most 
disinfectants  are  now  sold  with  a  statement  of  their  coefficient. 
The  degree  of  dilution  for  disinfection  is  obtained  simply  by 
multiplying  by  20  the  phenol  coefficient ;  for  instance,  a  dis- 
infectant having  the  coefficient  3  would  be  diluted  3x20=60 
times. 

The  official  cresol  is  a  mixture  of  the  three  isomers  of 
CeHi.OH.CHs.  The  "higher  homologues,"  containing  two  or 
more  methyl  groups  are  generally  referred  to  as  cresylic  acid. 
They  have  a  higher  disinfectant  coefficient. 

CRESOL.— "A  mixture  of  isomeric  cresols  (C6H4.CH3.OH) 
obtained  from  coal  tar."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Cresol. 

PHENOCO. — A  mixture  of  coal  tar  creosote  and  higher 
phenol  homologues,  in  soap  solution.  It  is  said  to  contain  coal 
tar  creosote,  20  per  cent,  phenol  homologues,  50  per  cent,  and 
soap,  30  per  cent. 

In  the  foregoing  definition,  the  manufacturers  use  the  term 
"coal  tar  creosote"  to  signify  the  product  obtained  by  the 
destructive  distillation  of  coal,  containing  15  per  cent  of  cresols, 
but  no  phenol ;  the  term  "higher  phenolhomologues"  is  used 
to  designate  phenols  containing  two  or  more  methyl  groups. 


CRESOL     DERIVATIVES  175 

Actions  and  Uses. — Phenoco  is  an  antiseptic  and  germicide, 
being,  in  the  latter  respect,  from  fifteen  to  sixteen  times  stronger 
than  phenol  against  B.  typhosus  as  tested  by  the  U.  S.  Public 
Health  Service  method,  it  is  stated  to  be  noncaustic,  nonirritant 
and,  for  mammals,  about  one-half  as  toxic  as  phenol. 

It  is  used  in  minor  surgery,  obstetrics,  gynecology,  ophthal- 
mology, otology,  diseases  of  the  skin,  etc. 

Dosage. — Dilutions  of  from  1  to  5  per  cent,  or  higher,  accord- 
ing to  the  severity  of  the  case. 

Manufactured  by  the  West  Disinfecting  Co.,  New  York.  No  U.  S. 
patent.      U.   S.   trademark  61,552. 

Phenoco  is  said  to  be  prepared  by  incorporating  a  nearly  dry 
vegetable  oil  soap  with  the  coal  tar  creosote  and  phenol  homologues  at 
a  temperature  of  100  C.  under  continuous  agitation  until  complete 
solution  has  taken  place. 

Phenoco  is  a  dark  brown  fluid  of  a  characteristic  odor  like  that  of 
coal  tar.  It  is  miscible  with  water  in  all  proportions,  forming  a  white 
emulsion;  it  is  soluble  in  alcohol,  ether,  acetone  and  fixed  oils,  forming 
clear  solutions.  It  is  compatible  with  physiologic  solution  of  sodium 
chloride.  It  is  incompatible  with  strong  alkalis  and  acids.  When 
tested  against  B.  typhosus  by  the  "phenol  coefficient"  method  of  the 
U.  S.  Public  Health  Service,  it  is  said  to  be  from  fifteen  to  sixteen 
times   stronger,   as   a   germicide,   than   pure   phenol. 

The  chemical  composition  of  phenoco  is  controlled  according  to  the 
method  published  in  Bulletin  107,  Bureau  of  Animal  Industry,  "The 
Analysis   of   Coal-Tar    Creosote   and   Cresylic   Acid    Sheep   Dips." 


CRESOL     DERIVATIVES 

The  toxicity  and  local  actions  of  the  cresols,  as  of  other 
phenols,  may  be  diminished  by  "masking"  the  active  OH  group 
through  replacement  of  the  H  by  acid  radicals. 

CRESATIN-Dr.  N.  Sulzberger. —  7;/-Cresyl  Acetate.— 
CH3C6H4.0(CH3CO).  —  The  acetic  acid  ester  of  metacresol, 
CH3C6H4.OH. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Cresatin-Dr.  N.  Sulzberger  is  said  to  pos- 
sess antiseptic  and  analgesic  properties,  and  is  apparently  free 
from  toxic  effects.  It  is  said  to  be  useful  in  the  treatment  of 
affections  of  the  nose,  throat  and  ear,  such  as  follicular  tonsilitis, 
nasal  suppuration  due  to  ethmoid  diseases,  atrophic  nasopharyn- 
geal catarrhs,  furunculosis  of  the  external  auditory  canal  and 
purulent  otitis  media.  When  applied  to  mucous  membranes  it 
is  said  to  cause  no  irritation,  sloughing  or  discomfort. 

Dosage. — Cresatin-Dr.  N.  Sulzberger  may  be  employed  either 
in  the  pure  form  or  in  dilution  with  oils  or  alcohol  by  direct 
application  or  spray. 

Manufactured  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  U.  S. 
patent   1,031,971    (July  9,   1912;   expired).     U.   S.  trademark   80,533. 

The  chemical  properties  of  meta-cresyl  acetate  were  studied  by 
C.  Panoff  in  1903    (J.  Russ.    Phys.   Chem.   Soc.   35:93,   1903). 

Cresatin-Dr.  N.  Sulzberger  occurs  as  a  colorless,  oily  liquid,  pos- 
sessing a  characteristic  odor.  It  is  practically  insoluble  in  water,  but 
soluble  in  the  ordinary  organic  solvents  in  liquid  petrolatum  (not  over 
5   per  cent),  and   in  fixed  and  volatile  oils  and  is  volatile  with  steam. 


176     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


If  10  cc.  of  cresatin-Dr.  N.  Sulzberger  is  shaken  for  one  minute 
with  100  cc.  of  water  and  filtered  through  a  wet  filter,  the  filtrate  has 
a  neutral  reaction,  and  does  not  produce  a  violet  color  with  ferric 
chloride  solution  or  a  turbidity  with  silver  nitrate  solution.  If  10  cc. 
of  cresatin  is  evaporated  it  leaves  after  incineration  no  weighable 
residue. 


D I B RO M IN. — Dibromobarbituric  Acid. — Dibromomalonylu- 
reide. 

NH-CO  Br 

/  \     / 

oc  c 

\       /  \ 

NH-CO  Br 

Actions  and  Uses. — Dibromin  is  an  antiseptic  and  germicide 
proposed  for  use  in  solution  as  in  irrigating  fluid  and  wet  dress- 
ings for  flushing  cavities,  irrigating  infected  wounds  and  for 
saturating  gauze  packing.  Dibromin  is  claimed  to  be  practically 
free  from  irritating  or  toxic  properties  in  the  concentrations 
required  for  therapeutic  use. 

Dosage. — To  determine  the  strength  of  dibromin  solutions 
which  may  be  safely  used  on  an  individual  without  producing 
irritation,  it  is  advised  to  begin  with  solutions  of  1  in  10,000 
(6  grains  to  one  gallon)  and  then  gradually  to  increase  the 
concentration. 

Manufactured  by   Parke,   Davis   &   Co.,    Detroit.     U.    S.   patent  applied 
for.     U.   S.  trademark    158,277. 
Dibromin  Capsules,  6  grains. 

Dibromin  occurs  as  a  crystalline,  colorless  powder;  almost  odorless; 
taste  slightly  astringent.  It  melts  with  decomposition  at  about  150  C. 
One  part  of  dibromin  dissolves  in  about  33  parts  of  water;  it  is  soluble 
in  ether,  glycerin  and  alcohol;  insoluble  in  fixed  oils.  The  dry  salt  is 
permanent,  but  aqueous  solutions  decompose  slowly.  It  is  decomposed 
by  alkalis,  reducing  agents  and  most  organic  substances. 

Heat  about  0.25  Gm.  of  dibromin  to  160  C:  bromine  is  evolved. 
Heat  about  0.25  Gm.  dibromin  with  an  aqueous  solution  of  sodium 
carbonate:  the  odor  of  bromoform  develops. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  dibromin,  accurately  weighed,  in  about 
20  cc.  of  water,  add  20  cc.  of  potassium  iodide  solution  and  an  excess  of 
diluted  sulfuric  acid.  After  one  minute  determine  the  liberated 
iodine  by  titration  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate:  iodine 
liberated  corresponds  to  not  less  than  54.8  per  cent  of  bromine:  this 
corresponds    to    not    less    than    98    per   cent    of    dibromobarbituric    acid. 


DIGESTIVE     ENZYMES 

As  a  result  of  the  replies  to  a  questionnaire  sent  to  the  mem- 
bers of  the  American  Gastro-Enterological  Association,  W.  A. 
Bastedo  reported  (/.  A.  M.  A.  85:745  [Sept.  5]  1925)  that 
many  members  of  the  association  do  not  prescribe  digestive 
enzymes,  while  those  who  do  employ  such  enzymes  confine 
their  use  almost  wholly  to  cases  of  demonstrated  or  believed 
enzyme   deficiency;    almost   all    who   prescribe   them    show   no 


DIGESTIVE     ENZYMES  177 

great  enthusiasm  over  the  results  of  their  use,  except  possibly 
in  case  of  pancreatin  in  proved  pancreatic  deficiency. 

In  consideration  of  the  replies  to  the  questionnaire,  and  in 
consideration  of  the  fact  that  no  favorable  evidence  has  since 
become  available,  all  digestive  enzyme  preparations  have  been 
omitted  save  those  recommended  for  use  outside  the  body  for 
the  digestion  of  food  previous  to  administration  and  locally  for 
the  softening  of  dead  tissues  or  the  solution  of  false  membranes. 

Proteolytic  Enzymes 

PEPSIN  GROUP,  INCLUDING  RENNIN 
ENZYMOL. — An  extract  prepared  from  the  fresh  animal 
stomach,  said  to  contain  the  activated  gastric  enzyme  in  asso- 
ciation with  the  soluble  constituents  with  which  the  proenzyme 
is  naturally  associated.  It  is  free  from  alcohol,  contains  a 
trace  of  thymol,  and  has  an  acidity  due  to  combined  hydro- 
chloric acid  equivalent  to  0.26  to  0.3  per  cent  of  actual  hydro- 
chloric acid.  It  is  adjusted  to  a  definite  proteolytic  power  by 
the  U.  S.  P.  assay  method  for  pepsin,  and  contains  25  per  cent 
of  glycerin  by  weight. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Enzymol  is  said  to  be  useful  as  an  appli- 
cation to  old  sores,  ulcers  and  slow-healing  wounds.  It  is  said 
to  correct  offensive  odors,  to  exert  a  solvent  action  on  pus  and 
sloughing  and  necrotic  tissue,  and  to  impart  a  healing  stimulus. 
It  is  said  to  have  been  effective  in  cases  in  which  the  condition 
has  long  remained  unhealed  and  has  resisted  treatment. 

Dosage. — Enzymol  is  made  ready  for  use  by  the  addition  of 
from  one-half  to  one  or  two  volumes  of  water ;  for  the  solu- 
tion of  necrotic  and  carious  bone,  and  in  some  large  abscess 
cavities,  it  is  advised  that  the  preparation  be  diluted  with  two 
volumes  of  0.2  per  cent  solution  of  hydrochloric  acid.  A  small 
vial,  containing  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  and  a  pipet  for  meas- 
uring accompany  the  package  of  enzymol. 

Manufactured  by  Fairchild  Bros.  &  Foster,  New  York,  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademark  44,769, 

Enzymol  is  a  light  straw-colored  fluid. 

The  presence  of  the  various  groups  of  proteins  is  shown  by  the 
following  reactions:  On  heating  to  boiling,  the  fluid  gives  a  copious 
coagulation.  The  filtrate  from  this  gives  a  marked  precipitate  with 
phosphotungstic  acid.  The  protein  derivatives  remaining  in  solution 
may  be  determined  by  silver  nitrate  and  barium  oxide  according  to 
Hall.  Alcohol  in  excess,  likewise,  gives  a  copious  precipitate.  The 
proteolytic  power  for  pepsin  when  acidified  and  tested  by  the  method 
of  the  U.  S.  P.  should  be  such  that  4  cc.  will  dissolve  800  Gm.  of 
coagulated  egg  albumin  in  two  and  one-half  hours. 

TRYPSIN     GROUP 

TRYPSIN. — The  proteolytic  enzyme  of  the  pancreas,  sepa- 
rated to  a  considerable  extent  from  the  other  constituents  of 
the  gland. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Digestive  Enzymes. 


178     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Trypsin-Armour. — It  is  stated  that  trypsin-Armour  is  stand- 
ardized so  that  1  part  digests  at  least  100  parts  of  casein  accord- 
ing to  the  Fuld-Gross  method. 

Dosage. — Trypsin-Armour  is  applied  locally  by  means  of  a 
brush  or  as  a  spray.  About  0.4  Gm,  (6  grains)  is  mixed  with 
0.125  Gm.  (2  grains)  sodium  bicarbonate  and  triturated  in  a 
mortar  while  1  or  2  fiuidrachms  of  distilled  water  is  added. 
The  mixture  is  then  warmed  to  from  38  to  40.6  C.  and  applied 
immediately.  The  application  may  be  repeated  several  times  an 
hour  if  necessary,  a  fresh  solution  being  made  before  each 
application. 

Manufactured  by  Armour  &  Co.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent  or  trade- 
mark. 

Trypsin-Armour  is  prepared  from  the  fresh  pancreas  of  hogs  with 
the  view  of  retaining  the  proteolytic  ferment  in  an  especially  active 
condition.     It  has  been  activated  by  enterokinase. 

It  is  a  light  yellow  powder,  possessing  a  faint  odor  and  a  meatlike 
taste.  It  is  not  completely  soluble  in  water  at  once,  but  dissolves 
almost  entirely  in  time. 

Trypsin-Fairchild. — When  tested  by  the  Fuld-Gross  method 
it  is  said  that  trypsin-Fairchild  converts  200  times  its  weight 
of  casein  to  the  standard  end-point. 

Dosage. — Trypsin-Fairchild  is  locally  applied  in  solution  or 
after  trituration  of  the  trypsin  with  some  appropriate  diffusible 
powder. 

Manufactured  by  Fairchild  Bros.  &  Foster,  New  York.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Trypsin-Fairchild  is  a  fine  dry  powder,  in  which  form  the  enzyme 
is  permanent  when  protected  from  moisture.  It  is  slowly  but  not  com- 
pletely soluble  in   water. 

Trypsin-Fairchild  has  from  four  to  five  times  the  strength  of  pan- 
creatin-U.  S.  P.  The  tryptic  power  of  Fairchild's  trypsin  by  the  method 
proposed  by   Sir  William  Roberts    is   10,000  units. 


DIGITALIS     AND     DIGITALIS-LIKE     PRIN- 
CIPLES    AND     PREPARATIONS 

The  digitalis  group  embraces  many  crude  drugs  and  proxi- 
mate principles  which  have  a  peculiar  action  on  cardiac  muscle. 
Digitalis,  strophanthus  and  squill  have  been  investigated  far  more 
than  the  others,  and  we  are  much  better  informed  concerning 
their  actions ;  from  them  are  derived  nearly  all  of  the  active 
principles  and  proprietary  preparations  of  the  group  which  have 
been  included  in  N.  N.  R. 

Cardiac  Action. — The  cardiac  action  of  the  individual  drugs 
of  the  group  is  similar,  and  the  claims  made  for  the  different 
preparations  concern  the  removal  of  the  disadvantages  that 
have  been  experienced  in  the  use  of  the  drugs  belonging  to  the 
digitalis  group.  The  first  disadvantage  of  digitalis  medication 
is  the  varying  strength  of  the  crude  drugs.  This  uncertainty 
is  avoided  by  the  use  of  physiologically  standardized  prepara- 
tions. The  pharmacopeia  requires  that  digitalis  be  standardized 
against   International   Standard   Digitalis   Powder  by  the  one- 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  179 

hour  frog  method  in  which  the  ventricle  of  the  frog's  heart  is 
caused  to  stop  in  systole  in  one  hour  after  the  injection  of  the 
drug  into  the  lymph  sac.  The  following  methods  of  standard- 
ization are  also  used  extensively : 

1.  The  frog-lethal  dose  method  (M.  L.  D.  in  twelve  or 
twenty-four  hours). 

2.  The  guinea-pig  lethal  dose  method. 

3.  The  intravenous  cat  method. 

Differences  in  Emetic  Action. — The  digitalis  principles  are 
irritant  to  certain  mucous  membranes  and  the  subcutaneous  tis- 
tues  and  it  has  been  deduced  that  the  nausea  and  vomiting  which 
sometimes  follow  the  oral  administration  of  these  drugs  result 
from  irritation  of  the  gastro-intestinal  tract,  and  that  these 
symptoms  might  be  avoided  by  the  hypodermic  or  intravenous 
use  of  these  drugs  or  by  the  use  of  certain  preparations.  It  has 
been  shown,  however,  that  digitalis  does  not  markedly  irritate 
the  stomach  or  intestines  directly,  but  that  its  preparations  cause 
nausea  and  vomiting  almost  entirely  through  their  action  on  the 
heart  itself.  Digitonin  and  other  useless  substances  are  present 
in  digitalis  in  amounts  far  too  small  to  cause  gastric  disturb- 
ances. It  has  been  shown  also  that  the  emetic  action  is  roughly 
proportional  to  the  cardiac  effects  of  the  various  members  of 
the  group,  and  when  this  undesired  action  is  induced  it  cannot 
as  a  rule  be  avoided  by  changing  the  mode  of  administration, 
or  by  resorting  to  other  members  of  the  group. 

Differences  in  Absorption. — Digotoxin  and  gitalin,  the  chief 
active  principles  of  digitalis,  and  preparations  representing  the 
entire  drug,  are  absorbed  fairly  readily  from  the  gastro-intestinal 
tract ;  hence  their  actions  may  be  limited  to  the  therapeutic  stage, 
whereas  strophanthus  and  strophanthin  are  absorbed  more  slowly 
and  irregularly  with  correspondingly  greater  difficulty  in  limit- 
ing their  actions  to  those  desired,  when  they  are  administered  by 
the  mouth.  This  disadvantage  has  been  overcome  by  adminis- 
tering strophanthin  intramuscularly  or  intravenously,  in  much 
smaller  doses,  however. 

Differences  in  Cumulative  Action. — The  effects  of  all  the 
digitalis  bodies  are  said  to  be  cumulative.  This  cumulative 
effect  is  especially  pronounced  in  the  case  of  digitalis  itself  and 
digitoxin.  It  is  much  less  pronounced  in  the  case  of  strophan- 
thus, and  strophanthin. 

Digitalis  Principles 

The  disadvantages  of  all  the  drugs  of  the  digitalis  group  have 
served  as  a  constant  stimulus  in  the  search  for  pure  principles 
suitable  for  subcutaneous  and  intravenous  administration;  but 
despite  the  numerous  investigations  directed  toward  this  end,  the 
chemistry  of  digitalis  and  other  members  of  the  group  is 
imperfectly  understood.  Several  digitalis  principles  have  been 
isolated  in  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  purity.  Of  these  digi- 
toxin and  gitalin  together  represent  very  nearly  the  crude  drug 


180     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

digitalis.  The  digitalin  on  the  market  is  not  the  true  digitalin, 
but  the  different  brands  consist  of  mixtures  of  two  or  more 
principles. 

It  must  be  remembered,  therefore,  that  Merck's  "crystallized" 
digitalin,  Merck's  "pure"  digitalin  and  the  "true"  digitalin  of 
Boehringer  and  Soehne,  which  naturally  might  be  supposed  to 
be  identical,  differ  somewhat  in  their  action. 

Proprietary  Digitalis  Preparations. — Several  digitalis  prepara- 
tions have  been  introduced  into  therapeutic  use  with  the  claim 
that  they  are  composed  either  of  pure  principles,  or  of  purified 
extracts  of  digitalis,  and  that  they  are  devoid  of  certain  dis- 
advantages possessed  by  the  preparations  of  the  U.  S.  Pharma- 
copeia. 

It  may  be  said  at  once  that  there  is  no  proof  that  any  of 
these  proprietary  preparations  can  be  used  to  greater  advantage 
than  digitalis  and  its  galenicals  in  the  majority  of  cases  of 
cardiac  disease.  The  Council,  therefore,  especially  urges  on 
clinicians  the  necessity  of  acquiring  skill  in  the  use  of  the  digi- 
talis principles  by  the  careful  observation  of  the  actions  of  a 
very  few  of  the  members  of  the  group,  rather  than  trying  to 
use  without  discrimination,  the  large  number  of  preparations 
which  are  offered.  The  following  principles  obtained  from  the 
digitalis  group  are  described  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies : 
digitalein,  crude;  digitalin,  "French";  digitalin,  "German"; 
digitoxin ;  ouabain  crystallized,  cymarin,  scillaren,  scillaren-B, 
and  urginin. 

DIGITALIS. — For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia 
under  Digitalis  Pulverata. 

Pil.  Digitalis  (Davies,  Rose):  Each  contains  0.1  Gm.  (l'-^  grains)  of 
Digitalis. 

Prepared  by  Davies,  Rose  &  Co.,  Ltd.,   Boston,  Mass. 

Tablets  Digitalis  Whole  Leaf-Lederle,  ^4  grain:  Each  tablet  con- 
tains   J/2    cat  unit. 

Prepared  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Tablets  Digitalis  Whole  Leaf-Lederle,  lYz  grains:  Each  tablet  con- 
tains  1    cat  unit. 

Prepared  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Tablets  Digitalis  Whole  Leaf-Lederle,  3  grains:  Each  tablet  contains 
2  cat  units. 

Prepared  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Capsules  Digitalis  Duo-Test  McNeil. 

Prepared  by  McNeil  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Philadelphia. 

Tablets  Digitalis  Leaves-Squibb,  1  cat  unit:  Each  tablet  contains  1 
cat  unit    (approximately    1J4    grains). 

Prepared   by    E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons,   New   York. 

Tablets  Digitalis-Squibb,  1  grain:  Each  tablet  is  equivalent  to  10 
minims  of  tincture  of   digitalis-U.    S.   P. 

Prepared  by  E.  R.   Squibb    &   Sons,   New  York. 

Tablets  Digitalis-Wilber,  V/i  grains:  Each  tablet  contains  one  cat 
unit. 

Prepared  by  The  Wilber  Co.,  Inc.,   Richmond,  Va. 

Wyeth's  Capsules  Digitalis  Leaf  Defatted:  Each  tablet  contains  1  cat 
unit. 

Prepared  by  John  Wyeth  Bros.,    Inc.,   Philadelphia. 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  181 

DIGALEN-ROCHE  (CLOETTA).  —  The  cardioactive 
principles  of  digitalis  as  isolated  by  Cloetta.  It  is  standardized 
by  the  intravenous  cat  method  of  Hatcher  and  Brody  (Am.  J. 
Pharm.  82:360,  1910). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  digitalis. 

Dosage. — The  average  dose  of  digalen-Roche  (in  30  cc.  vials) 
is  from  1  to  2  cc.  (15  to  30  minims).  The  maximum  daily 
dosage  is  6  cc.  (90  minims).  The  average  dose  of  tablets 
digalen-Roche  is  from  y^  to  \  cat  unit  three  times  daily.  The 
average  dose  of  digalen  injectable-Roche  is  2  cc. 

Manufactured  by  Hoflfmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademarks  43,593;   83,738. 

Digalen  Injectable-Roche:  Ampules  containing  2.1  cc.  Each  2  cc. 
represents   1   cat  unit,  in  8  per  cent  alcohol. 

Digalen-Roche:  Vials  containing  30  cc,  of  which  1  cc.  equals  1  cat 
unit,  in  26  per  cent  alcohol. 

Tablets  Digalen-Roche,   Yi   cat  unit. 
Tablets  Digalen-Roche,  1  cat  unit. 
Digalen-Roche  (Cloetta)   is  prepared  as  follows: 

The  dried  and  finely  powdered  leaves  of  digitalis  are  extracted  with 
diluted  alcohol;  then  the  extract  is  mixed  with  lead  acetate  solution  in 
order  to  remove  chlorophyll  and  resins,  and  filtered.  From  this  filtrate 
the  excess  of  lead  is  precipitated  with  sodium  sulfate  and  the  alcohol 
distilled  off  in  vacuo.  From  the  remaining  aqueous  solution,  the  active 
derivative  of  digitalis  contained  in  digalen-Roche  (Cloetta)  is  extracted 
by  ethereal  solvents  and  precipitated  afterward  in  an  amorphous  condi- 
tion according  to  a  special  secret  method.  The  several  dosage  forms 
are  standardized  by   the   intravenous   cat   method. 

Digalen-Roche  (Cloetta)  is  a  colorless  or  slightly  yellowish  liquid 
of  an  agreeable  aromatic  odor  with  a  sweet  taste  which  subsequently 
becomes  bitter. 

The  active  derivative  contained  in  digalen-Roche  (Cloetta)  is  an 
amorphous,  white  or  slightly  yellow  powder.  It  is  stated  to  have  a 
solubility  five  times  as  great  as  that  of  crystallized  digitoxin.  It  is 
stated  to  dissolve  readily  in  alcohol  and  chloroform,  and  less  readily 
in  ether.     It  has  an  intensely  bitter  taste  and  causes  violent  sneezing. 

To  2  cc.  of  digalen-Roche  (Cloetta)  add  a  few  drops  of  diluted  acetic 
acid  and  extract  with  chloroform.  Evaporate  the  chloroform  extract 
and  dissolve  the  residue  in  about  2  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  contain- 
ing a  trace  of  ferric  chloride.  To  this  solution  add  strong  sulfuric 
acid  without  mixing  so  as  to  form  a  separate  layer:  a  brown  ring  forms 
between  the  two  layers  which  becomes  broader  after  some  hours  and 
expands  toward  the  top  in  a  blue-green  to  black  shade,  and  toward 
the  bottom  in  a  reddish-brown  one.  The  acetic  acid  finally  acquires  a 
dark  green-blue  color. 

DIGIFOLINE-CIBA.— A  digitalis  preparation  containing 
the  therapeutically  desirable  constituents  of  digitalis  leaf.  It  is 
standardized  by  the  intravenous  cat  method  of  Hatcher  and 
Brody  (Am.  J.  Pharm.  82:360,  1910). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  digitalis. 

Dosage. — In  the  majority  of  cases  in  v^hich  digitalis  therapy 
is  indicated,  the  oral  administration  of  0.1  Gm.  (V/2  grains)  in 
the  form  of  tablets,  or  of  1  cc.  (15  minims)  of  digifoline-Ciba 
liquid  four  times  daily  until  the  desired  therapeutic  effects  or 
minor  toxic  symptoms  appear.  In  cases  in  v^hich  the  patient 
has  received  no  digitalis  during  the  preceding  two  weeks  and 


182     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

it  is  desired  to  use  the  massive  dose  method,  digifoline-Ciba 
tablets  or  digifoline-Ciba  liquid,  in  the  proportion  of  the  former 
representing  0.7  Gm.  (11  grains)  of  digitalis  or  8  cc.  (2  fluid- 
drachms)  of  the  latter  per  hundred  pounds  (45.4  Kg.)  of  the 
patient's  body  weight  may  be  employed  as  the  initial  dose.  If 
neither  clinical  improvement  nor  toxic  signs  have  appeared  in 
six  hours,  a  second  dose  may  be  given,  one-half  the  size  of  the 
initial  one ;  and  at  the  expiration  of  each  succeeding  six  hours,  in 
the  continued  absence  of  desired  therapeutic  effects  or  evidence 
of  poisoning,  the  dose  may  be  repeated,  the  third  being  one-half 
that  of  the  second ;  the  fourth,  and  all  subsequent  doses  being 
one-half  that  of  the  third,  until  the  total  dosage  of  the  tablets 
amounts  to  the  equivalent  of  1.5  Gm.  (22  grains)  of  digi- 
talis or  16  cc.  (4  fluidrachms)  of  the  liquid  per  hundred  pounds 
of  the  patient's  weight.  The  intravenous  dose  of  digifoline-Ciba 
recommended  is  0.03  cc.  (J/^"  minim)  of  the  contents  of  the 
ampule  per  pound  of  body  weight  in  patients  who  have  received 
no  digitalis  medication  during  the  preceding  two  weeks.  In  the 
absence  of  therapeutic  effects  or  signs  of  digitalis  poisoning  at 
the  expiration  of  two  hours,  0.008  cc.  (%  minim)  per  pound  of 
body  weight  may  be  injected;  and  further  doses  of  0.008  cc.  (% 
minim)  per  pound  of  body  weight  may  be  injected  intravenously 
at  two  hour  intervals  until  improvement  occurs,  poisoning 
becomes  apparent  or  a  total  dosage  of  0.06  cc.  (1  minim)  per 
pound  of  body  weight  has  been  reached.  Under  no  circum- 
stances should  this  dosage  be  exceeded  in  seriously  ill  patients. 

Manufactured  by  the  Society  of  Chemical  Industry  in  Basle,  Switzer- 
land (Ciba  Company,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.    S.   trademark   99,808. 

Ampules  Digifoline-Ciba,  2  cc. — Each  ampule  contains  2  cubic  centi- 
meters, representing  Digifoline-Ciba  equivalent  to  0.1  Gm.  (IJ^  grains) 
of  digitalis  leaves.  The  product  is  standardized  by  the  Hatcher  and 
Brody  cat  method  so  that  each  ampule  represents  one  cat  unit.  It  con- 
tains neither  alcohol  nor  glycerin. 

Digifoline-Ciba  Liquid:  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  digifoline-Ciba 
equivalent  to  0.1  Gm.  (1 14  grains)  of  digitalis  leaves.  The  product  is 
standardized  by  the  Hatcher  and  Brody  cat  method  so  that  each  cubic 
centimeter  represents  one  cat  unit.  It  contains  12  per  cent  of  alcohol. 
Tablets  Digifoline-Ciba:  Each  tablet  contains  digifoline-Ciba  equivalent 
to  0.1  Gm.  (l^/^  grains)  of  digitalis  leaves.  The  product  is  standardized 
by  the  Hatcher  and  Brody  cat  method  so  that  each  cubic  centimeter  repre- 
sents one  cat  unit. 

Dried  and  finely  ground  digitalis  leaves  are  extracted  with  distilled 
water.  The  neutralized  filtrate  is  then  treated  with  alcohol,  precipi- 
tated with  a  solution  of  lead  acetate  and  filtered.  The  filtrate,  after 
the  removal  of  the  lead  and  neutralization,  is  filtered  and  concentrated 
to  a  certain  volume  in  a  high  vacuum  at  a  temperature  not  exceeding 
30  C.  The  active  principles  which  separate  through  the  foregoing  con- 
centration are  collected  and  dried  under  a  high  vacuum  at  a  temperature 
of  40  C.  It  is  then  dissolved  in  methyl  alcohol,  the  filtrate  treated 
with  chloroform  and  the  chloroform,  separated  from  the  aqueous  solu- 
tion, distilled  off  and  the  residue  dissolved  in  methyl  alcohol.  The 
aqueous  solution  which  has  been  separated  from  the  chloroform  solution 
is  treated  with  a  mixture  of  ether  two  parts  and  benzene  one  part; 
the  ether-benzene  extract  is  concentrated  under  high  vacuum  at  low 
temperature  and  the  remaining  residue  dissolved  in  methyl  alcohol.  The 
several  methyl  alcohol  solutions  are  mixed,  decolorized  with  charcoal 
and  concentrated  under  a  high  vacuum  to  a  dry  residue,  which  con- 
stitutes  digifoline-Ciba. 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  183 

Digifoline-Ciba  is  almost  colorless  and  odorless,  with  a  slightly  bitter 
taste.  It  is  an  amphorus  brownish  powder,  soluble  in  water,  methyl 
alcohol  and  ethyl  alcohol;  insoluble  in  ether  and  petroleum  ether. 

Prepare  two  solutions:  (A)  Dissolve  ferric  sulfate,  5  Gm.,  in  water, 
100  cc,  filter  and  add  5  cc.  of  the  filtrate  to  50O  cc.  of  pure  glacial 
acetic  acid;  (B)  add  5  cc.  ferric  sulfate  solution  (ferric  sulfate, 
5  Gm.  in  water,  100  cc.)  to  500  cc.  pure  sulfuric  acid.  Dissolve  a 
trace  of  digifoline-Ciba  in  5  cc.  of  solution  A  and  layer  this  solution 
carefully  on  5  cc.  of  solution  B:  at  the  point  of  contact,  a  dark  band 
appears;  the  lower  layer  assumes  a  red  color  and  the  upper  layer  a 
bluish-green  color;  on  standing,  the  bluish-green  layer  turns  to  indigo- 
blue. 

DIGITALEIN,     CRUDE.— Digitaleinum     Crudum.— A 

mixture  of  glucosides  from  Digitalis  purpurea  prepared  accord- 
ing to  the  process  of  Schmiedeberg.    Its  composition  is  variable. 
Actions  and   Uses. — Digitalein   acts   similarly  to  digitalis   on 
the  heart. 

Its  uses  are  the  same  as  those  of  digitalis. 
Dosage.— From  0.001  to  0.002  Gm.  (Vqo  to  Vso  grain),  two  or 
three  times  a  day. 

Commercial  digitalein  is  an  amorphous  yellowish-white,  bitter  pow- 
der, soluble  in  water  and  absolute  alcohol,  insoluble  in  chloroform 
and  ether.  The  aqueous  solution  foams  on  shaking.  The  solution 
yields  a  precipitate  on  the  addition  of  lead  acetate,  ammonia  water  or 
tannic   acid. 

DIGITALIN,    "FRENCH."— Homolle's    Digitalin.— Digi- 

taline     Amorphe.  —  Digitaline     Chloroformique.  —  A     mixture 

obtained  from   Digitalis  purpurea  by  the  method  of  Homolle. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Its  action  is  like  that  of  digitoxin.     Its 

uses  are  the  same  as  those  of  digitalis. 

Dosage. — The  dose  is  variously  given  as  from  0.00025  to  0.002 
Gm.  0/^40  to  Yso  grain).  The  maximum  daily  dose  is  0.006  Gm. 
(Mo  grain).  It  must  be  used  with  caution  and  its  action  care- 
fully watched. 

One  hundred  grams  of  powdered  digitalis  leaves  is  moistened  with 
1  liter  of  water  and  slowly  exhausted  in  a  percolator  until  the  per- 
colate amounts  to  3  liters.  This  is  precipitated  with  250  Gm.  of  lead 
acetate  and  the  filtrate  from  the  precipitate  is  treated  with  40  Gm.  of 
crystallized  sodium  carbonate  and  20  Gm.  of  sodium  ammonium  phos- 
phate, in  order  to  remove  the  excess  of  lead.  The  filtrate  is  precipi- 
tated with  40  Gm.  of  tannic  acid.  The  tannate  is  mixed  with  25  Gm. 
of  powdered  litharge  and  50  Gm.  of  purified  animal  charcoal  and 
dried.  From  the  dried  mass  the  digitalis  bodies  are  extracted  with 
90  per  cent  alcohol,  the  latter  is  distilled  off  and  the  residue  washed 
with  distilled  water  and  again  taken  up  in  90  per  cent  alcohol.  This 
is  again  distilled  and  the  residue  exhausted  with  chloroform.  When 
the  latter  is  expelled  the  digitalin  remains  behind  (Hager's  Handbuch 
der  pharmaceutischen  Praxis,  edited  by  B.  Fischer  and  C.  Hartwich, 
ed.    1,    Berlin,  Julius   Springer,    1903,   vol.    1,   p.    1035). 

"French"  digitalin  is  a  yellowish-white,  amorphous  powder  of  a 
peculiar  aromatic  odor  and  little  taste.  It  is  neutral  to  litmus,  almost 
insoluble  in  water,  soluble  in  alcohol  and  chloroform  and  insoluble 
in  ether.  It  softens  at  90  C.  and  begins  to  melt  at  100  C.  It  is  not 
precipitated  by  solutions  of  lead  salts,  but  with  tannic  acid  it  forms  a 
tannate  insoluble  in  water.  Concentrated  sulfuric  acid  dissolves 
digitalin  "French,"  producing  a  yellow  color,  which  finally  changes  to 
an    emerald-grten. 


184     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

DIGITALIN,  "GERMAN."— Digitalinum  Germanicum. 

— A  mixture  of  glucosides  obtained  from  digitalis  seeds 
according  to  the  process  of  Walz,  and  consisting  largely  of 
digitonin,  with  true  digitalin  and  other  glucosides. 

Note. — Digitonin  is  given  as  a  sj^nonym  for  crystallized 
digitalin  by  some  manufacturers ;  and  it  is  to  be  observed 
particularly  that  this  is  quite  different  from  "true  digitalin" 
or  the  "crystalline  digitaline"  of  the  French  Pharmacopeia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — These  are  similar  to  those  of  digitalis. 

Dosage. — What  has  been  said  of  the  uncertainty  of  dosage 
of  true  digitalin  must  obviously  apply  with  even  greater  force 
to  "German"  digitalin,  since  the  activity  of  the  latter  probably 
depends  mainly  on  the  true  digitalin  that  it  contains.  The 
dose  of  "German"  digitalin  was  formerly  given  as  0.001  to 
0.002  Gm.  (Yqo  to  %o  grain),  maximum  dose  0.004  Gm.  (Ms 
grain),  with  a  maximum  per  day  of  0.002  Gm.  (^30  grain). 
Many  clinicians,  however,  have  used  very  much  larger  doses 
without  ill  effects,  and  the  relative  activity  of  certain  speci- 
mens of  the  "German"  digitalin  and  other  members  of  the 
group  would  seem  to  indicate  that  such  specimens  of  "Ger- 
man" digitalin  might  be  given  safely  in  daily  doses  of  a  grain, 
or  possibly  more. 

As  "German"  digitalin  (so-called  digitalinum  purum)  is  a 
mixture  of  very  powerful  active  principles,  the  proportion  of 
which  may  vary  with  changes  in  the  manipulations,  it  is 
important  that  the  directions  for  its  preparation  should  be 
carefully  followed,  and  caution  should  be  exercised  to  pur- 
chase only  such  products  as  the  manufacturers  can  guarantee 
to  have  been  made  with  the  necessary  care. 

Digitalis  seeds  are  extracted  with  alcohol,  the  alcohol  driven  off,  and 
the  extract  diluted  with  water  and  purified  by  precipitation  with  lead 
acetate.  The  filtrate  is  freed  from  lead  by  sodium  phosphate.  From 
the  liquid  thus  purified,  the  digitalis  bodies  are  precipitated  with  tannic 
acid  and  the  tannate  well  washed  with  water  and  decomposed  with  lead 
or  zinc  acetate.  The  digitalin  thus  separated  is  taken  up  in  alcohol, 
the  latter  carefully  distilled  off  and  the  residue  washed  with  ether  as 
long  as  it  takes  up  anything.  The  digitalin  purified  in  this  way  is 
dried  at  a  low  temperature  and  finely  powdered.  (Hager's  Handbuch 
der  pharmaceutischen  Praxis,  edited  by  B.  Fischer  and  C.  Hartwich, 
ed.   1,   Berlin,  Julius   Springer,   1903,  vol.    1,  p.   1032). 

"German"  digitalin  is  a  yellowish-white,  amorphous  powder,  soluble 
in  water  and  alcohol,  insoluble  in  ether  and  chloroform.  It  is  said 
to  contain  from  about  50  to  60  per  cent  of  digitonin  and  from  5  to 
6  per   cent  of  digitalinum  verum,  the  remainder  being  other  glucosides. 

Sulfuric  acid  containing  a  trace  of  ferric  sulfate  produces  with 
digitalin,  "German,"  an  intense  golden-yellow  coloration,  changing  to 
red  and  finally  to  a   permanent  reddish-violet. 

DIGITOXIN.  —  Digitoxinum.  —  Digitaline  Cristallisee 
(Nativelle). — CisHeeOis. — A  glucoside  occurring  in  the  leaves 
of  Digitalis  purpurea.   It  is  the  chief  active  principle  of  digitalis. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Digitoxin  acts  much  like  digitalis. 

The  cardiac  action  of  digitoxin  is  persistent,  and  when  the 
therapeutic  effects  have  passed  off,  a  smaller  amount  will  be 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  185 

required  as  a  rule  to  reinstate  the  desired  effects  than  was 
needed  in  the  first  instance.  Locally,  it  is  extremely  irritant; 
hence  it  cannot  be  used  for  subcutaneous  or  intramuscular 
injection. 

Dosage. — The  toxicity  of  digitoxin,  though  very  great,  has 
been  exaggerated,  probably  owing  to  the  appearance  of  symp- 
toms after  too  frequent  repetition  of  the  dose,  and  the  single 
dose  has  been  given  as  0.25  mg.  i}A^o  grain),  and  a  maxi- 
mum daily  dose  of  0.001  Gm.  (i^  grain).  These  doses  are 
undoubtedly  too  small  when  it  is  desired  to  induce  the 
therapeutic  action  promptly,  though  they  are  approximately 
accurate  when  the  dosage  is  to  be  continued  for  a  time  after 
the  therapeutic  effects  are  induced.  A.  sharp  distinction  should, 
therefore,  be  made  between  the  single  or  daily  dose  for 
continued  use  after  the  desired  effects  have  been  induced,  and 
the  dose  required  at  the  beginning  of  treatment. 

The  beginning  single  dose  is  0.5  mg.  (1/120  grain),  and  the 
maximum  beginning  daily  dose  is  0.001  Gm.  (%o  grain).  The 
dose  must  be  reduced,  or  stopped,  immediately  when  the  thera- 
peutic effect  or  toxic  symptoms  are  induced. 

Poisoning  with  digitoxin  requires  no  treatment  except  the 
utmost  quiet  in  bed,  with  a  sedative,  such  as  phenobarbital,  if 
necessary  to  secure  rest.  The  stomach  should  not  be  washed 
unless  there  is  reason  to  believe  that  it  contains  some  of  the 
poison,  but  severe  and  repeated  vomiting  is  a  prominent  symp- 
tom of  poisoning  with  all  digitalis  bodies. 

Digitoxin  occurs  in  thin,  colorless,  rectangular,  anhydrous  leaflets, 
odorless  and  having  a  bitter  taste.  It  is  slightly  soluble  in  water, 
ether  and  amylic  alcohol;  easily  soluble  in  alcohol  and  in  chloroform; 
insoluble  in  benzin  or  carbon  disulfide;  slightly  soluble  in  fatty  oils. 
Digitoxin  should  not  melt  below  240  C.  If  a  fragment  of  digitoxin  is 
dissolved  in  2  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  containing  a  trace  of  ferric 
chloride  and  the  solution  poured  on  2  cc.  of  concentrated  sulfuric 
acid,  a  brown  color  should  be  produced  at  the  zone  of  contact  of  the 
two  liquids.  This  color  gradually  changes  to  green  and  finally  to 
indigo  blue;  after  half  an  hour  the  entire  acetic-acid  layer  will  become 
blue.  Digitoxin  dissolves  in  cold,  concentrated  hydrochloric  acid  to 
a  colorless  solution,  but  if  this  solution  be  heated  on  the  water  bath 
for  some  time  a  green  color  should  be  obtained. 

If  dried  at  100  C,  digitoxin  should  not  lose  more  than  1  per  cent  of 
its  weight   (limit  of  adhering  moisture). 

Digitoxin-Merck. — A  brand  of  digitoxin-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor. 

TINCTURE  DIGITALIS.— Tincture  of  Digitalis.— "The 
potency  of  tincture  of  digitalis  shall  be  such  that  1  cc.  of  the 
tincture,  when  assayed  as  directed,  shall  possess  an  activity 
equivalent  to  not  less  than  1  and  not  more  than  1.1  U.  S.  P. 
digitalis  units." 

For  standards  see  the  United  States  Pharmacopeia  under 
Tinctura  Digitalis. 

Tincture  Digitalis  Duo-Test  McNeil.— A  brand  of  tinc- 
ture digitalis-U.  S.  P. 

Prepared  by  McNeil  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Philadelphia. 


186     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Tincture  Digitalis,  Purified,  S.  &  D. — A  brand  of  tinc- 
ture digitalis-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Sharp   &  Dohme.,   Philadelphia. 

Tincture  Digitalis-Wilber. — A  brand  of  tincture  digitalis- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured   by   Wilber    Co.,    Richmond,   Virginia. 

Related  Digitalis  Principles 

OUABAIN,  CRYSTALLIZED.— Ouabainum.— Crystal- 
lized Strophanthin.  —  G-Strophanthin.  —  C30H46O12+9H2O.  —  A 
glucoside,  obtained  from  Acokanthcra  Ouabaio  by  Arnaud, 
or,  as  now  commonly  prepared,  from  Strophanthus  grotus,  in 
which  case  it  is  also  called  crystallized  strophanthin,  or 
g-strophanthin. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  pharmacologic  action  of  crystal- 
lized ouabain  is  probably  qualitatively  identical  with  that  of  the 
official  strophanthus  or  strophanthin,  but  the  crystallized 
ouabain  is  more  active  than  the  official  strophanthin  when 
injected  subcutaneously  or  intravenously.  This  action  develops 
more  rapidly,  the  drug  is  more  quickly  excreted,  and  shows  less 
tendency  to  cumulative  action  than  does  digitalis. 

Crystallized  ouabain  is  used  in  place  of  strophanthus  or 
strophanthin  as  a  substitute  for  digitalis. 

Dosage. — Ouabain  is  absorbed  so  slowly  and  so  irregularly 
from  the  alimentary  canal  that  the  oral  administration  of  the 
drug  is  not  to  be  recommended  and  is  even  considered  unsafe. 

For  intravenous  or  intramuscular  administration,  the  dose 
is  0.5  mg.  (M20  grain)  and  this  dose  should  not  be  repeated 
as  a  rule  within  less  than  twenty-four  hours.  It  is  best 
employed  dissolved  in  from  4,000  to  8,000  parts  of  physiologic 
solution  of  sodium  chloride.  When  the  intramuscular  or  intra- 
venous dose  is  to  be  repeated  within  less  than  twenty-four 
hours,  a  smaller  amount  should  be  administered. 

Since  ouabain  solution  may  deteriorate  rapidly,  only  recently 
prepared  solutions  or  solutions  which  have  been  recently  tested 
should  be  used. 

Ouabain  Ampulcs-H.  IV.  &  D.:  One  cubic  centimeter  of  solution  con- 
tains crystallized  oaubain,  0.5  mg.  Each  ampule  contains  more  than 
1  cc.  The  date  of  manufacture  and  an  expiration  date  (three  months) 
is  placed  on  each  package. 

Prepared  by   Hynson,  Westcott   &   Dunning,   Baltimore. 

Ampoules  Ouabain  0.0005  Gm.   (1-128  gyain)-Lilly:  Crystallized  ouabain 
0.0005    Gm.   in  2  cc.  of  a  buffered,  sterile  normal  salt  solution. 
Prepared  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis,  Ind. 

The  light  brown  dehaired  seeds  of  Strophanthus  gratus  are  cold 
pressed  to  free  them  from  oil.  The  oil-free  cakes  thus  formed  are 
broken  up  and  extracted  with  96  per  cent  alcohol.  The  alcohol  is 
distilled  off  on  the  water  bath,  leaving  a  residue,  _  which  is  thus 
described:  It  consists  of  several  layers — an  upper  thin  layer  of  oil. 
then   an  aqueous  alcohol   layer,   followed  by   a  yellowish-brown  mass   of 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  187 

crystals,  under  which  is  a  layer  of  a  brown  extract,  from  which  an 
amorphous  strophanthin  can  be  isolated.  The  above  mentioned  crystals 
are  freed  from  the  mother  liquor  and  recrystallized  from  hot  water. 
The  seeds  yield  about  3.62  per  cent  of  ouabain. 

Ouabain  forms  colorless  quadratic  crystals  of  bitter  taste  which  are 
easily  soluble  in  hot  water,  soluble  in  100  parts  of  cold  water  and 
30  parts  cold  absolute  alcohol  and  30  parts  of  amyl  alcohol.  It  is 
slightly  soluble  in  acetic  ether,  ether,  and  chloroform.  Its  solubilities 
require  further  study.  Solutions  of  1  part  of  ouabain  in  100  parts  of 
95  per  cent  alcohol  have  been  frequently  observed  to  deposit  crystals  on 
standing. 

A  solution  of  0.01  Gra.  in  1  cc.  of  water  run  into  a  layer  of  con- 
centrated sulfuric  acid  colors  the  latter  pink  to  red  and  the  aqueous 
layer  is  colored  a  dirty  green.  When  crystallized  ouabain  is  dried  at 
105  C,  it  should  lose  from  18  to  22  per  cent  of  water  and  the  anhy- 
drous ouabain  so  obtained  should  melt  at  from  187  to  188  C.  On 
ignition  no  weighable  residue  should  remain.  Heating  with  dilute 
hydrochloric  acid  or  sulfuric  acid  produces  hydrolytic  cleavage,  yield- 
ing a  body   which   is   identical   to   rhamnose. 

Ouabain-Merck  (G.  Strophanthin). — A  brand  of  ouabain, 
crystallized-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

SCILLAREN-B. — Glucosidum    e    scilla    solubile.— The 

amorphous  component  of  the  natural  mixture  of  the  glucosides 
occurring  in  squill,  Urginea  ma^'itiina.  Completely  dried 
scillaren-B  contains  approximately  99.5  per  cent  active  glu- 
cosidal  substance.  Scillaren-B  dried  in  a  high  vacuum  at 
78  C.  for  fifteen  hours  loses  not  more  than  5  per  cent  of  its 
weight. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  scillaren. 

Dosage. — Scillaren-B  is  for  intravenous  administration  when 
immediate  action  is  imperatively  indicated.  Not  more  than 
0.5  mg.  iViso  grain)  of  scillaren-B  may  be  injected  intravenously 
within  twenty-four  hours. 

Manufactured  by  Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Basle,  Switzerland  (Sandoz 
Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent  No.  1,516,552 
(Nov.  25,  1924;  expires  1941)  and  No.  1,579,338  (April  6,  1926;  expires 
1943).      U.   S.  trademark   173,046. 

Ampules  Scillaren-B :  Each  cubic  centimeter  represents  0.5  mg.  (Viao 
grain)   of   scillaren-B. 

Scillaren-B  occurs  as  a  fine  white  or  slightly  yellowish-white,  odor- 
less, granular  powder,  possessing  a  very  bitter  taste;  freely  soluble  in 
water,  ethyl  and  methyl  alcohol,  1  in  5,  respectively,  very  slightly  solu- 
ble in  chloroform,  1  in  10,000,  and  practically  insoluble  in  ether.  An 
aqueous  solution  is  neutral  toward  litmus.  An  alcoholic  solution  of 
scillaren-B  is  dextrorotatory. 

Dissolve  about  0.001  Gm.  of  scillaren-B  in  0.1  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol; 
add  3  cc.  of  acetic  anhydride,  followed  by  the  addition  of  0.1  cc.  of 
sulfuric  acid,  agitate  and  cool:  a  violet-blue  color  results,  gradually 
changing  to  a  blue  (this  color  reaction  is  presutnptively  due  to  aghi- 
cone,  scillaridin-B).  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  in  10  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol, 
add  10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sulfuric  acid  solution  and  heat  the  mixture 
under  a  reflux  condenser  on  a  steam  bath  for  thirty  minutes:  only  a 
slight  turbidity  results;  disconnect  the  reflux  condenser  and  continue 
heating  for  one  hour  to  remove  the  methyl  alcohol:  the  aglucone  sepa- 
rates as  small  yellowish  brown  greasy  lumps  which  solidify  on  cooling; 


188     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

collect  the  resultant  aglucone  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  with  water  and  dry 
in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator  over  sulfuric  acid:  it  responds  to 
the  foregoing  color  reaction.  The  neutralized  filtrate  reduces  alkaline 
cupric  tartrate  solution. 

Dissolve  about  0.02S  Gm.  of  scillaren-B  in  1  cc.  of  carbon  dioxide 
free  water:  a  clear  and  colorless  solution  results  (^aglucone).  Add  to  the 
foregoing  solution  1  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol,  followed  by  the  addition  of 
1  cc.  of  lead  acetate  solution:  no  immediate  coloration  or  precipitation 
results  (^appreciable  amounts  of  tannoid  substances).  Dissolve  about 
0.025  Gm.  in  a  mixture  of  2  cc.  methyl  alcohol  and  2  cc.  of  water, 
add  0.5  cc.  of  alkaline  cupric  tartrate  solution  and  heat  for  ten  seconds: 
no  turbidity  results    {reducing  free  sugars). 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  scillaren-B,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc. 
of  75  per  cent  (by  weight)  of  ethyl  alcohol;  observe  the  angular  rota- 
tion at  20  C. :  the  specific  rotatory  power  in  alcohol  [a]  —  falls  between 
+   35  and  +   41. 

Ignite  about  0.1  Gm.  of  scillaren-B,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dry  about  0.2  Gm.,  accurately  weighed, 
over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator  for  forty-eight 
hours  at  20  C.:  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  2  per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  scillaren-B,  accurately  weighed,  previously 
dried  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partial  vacuum,  to  a  250  cc.  Erlenmeyer 
flask,  dissolve  in  5  cc.  of  water  and  add  20  cc.  of  5  per  cent  sulfuric 
acid;  heat  on  a  steam  bath  for  six  hours,  cool,  and  collect  the  separated 
yellowish  brown  lumps  on  a  Gooch  crucible;  wash  free  from  acid  with 
water,  dry  for  twenty-four  hours  at  60  C,  and  weigh:  the  amount  of 
aglucone  found  is  not  less  than  50  per  cent  nor  more  than  57.5  percent. 

SCILLAREN. — Glucosidum  e  scilla  totum. — A  mixture 
of  the  natural  glucosides,  scillaren-A  and  scillaren-B,  occurring 
in  fresh  squill  Urginea  maritima,  in  the  proportions  in  which 
they  exist  in  the  fresh  crude  drug ;  namely,  about  2  parts  of 
scillaren-A  to  1  part  of  scillaren-B.  Completely  dried  scillaren 
contains  approximately  98  per  cent  of  the  active  glucosides. 
Scillaren  dried  in  a  high  vacuum  at  78  C.  for  fifteen  hours 
loses  not  more  than  6  per  cent  of  its  weight. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  cardiac  action  of  scillaren  is  essen- 
tially similar  to  that  of  digitalis ;  but  this  action  is  apparently 
less  persistent  than  that  of  digitalis. 

Dosage. — 1.6  mg.  (Yn)  grain)  orally  from  three  to  four  times 
daily  until  compensation  is  established  or  until  minor  toxic 
symptoms  are  induced.  After  compensation  is  established, 
0.8  mg.  iVso  grain)  may  be  administered  from  two  to  four 
times  daily. 

Manufactured  by  Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Basle,  Switzerland  (Sandoz 
Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent  No. 
1,516,552  (Nov.  25,  1924;  expires  1941)  and  No.  1,579,338  (April  6, 
1926;  expires  1943).     U.   S.  trademark  173,046. 

Tablets  Scillaren:  Each  tablet  represents  0.8  mg.  (l/^o  grain)  of 
scillaren. 

Solution  Scillaren:  Each  cubic  centimeter  represents  0.8  mg.  (^/^o  grain) 
of  scillaren. 

Dosage. — 2  cc.  (40  drops)  three  to  four  times  daily;  after  compensation 
is  established,  1  cc.  (20  drops)  two  to  four  times  daily.  A  dropping 
device  is  supplied  with  each  package,  designed  to  yield  20  drops  per  cubic 
centimeter. 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  189 


Scillaren  occurs  as  a  white  or  yellowish-white,  odorless  granular 
powder,  possessing  a  very  bitter  taste;  soluble  in  absolute  ethyl  alcohol, 
1  in  5,  in  methyl  alcohol  1  in  5,  sparingly  soluble  in  water,  1  in  3,000, 
practically  insoluble  in  chloroform,  and  in  ether.  An  aqueous  solution  is 
neutral  toward  litmus.     An  alcoholic  solution  of  scillaren  is  levorotatory. 

Dissolve  about  0.001  Gra.  of  scillaren  in  0.1  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol, 
add  3  cc.  of  acetic  anhydride,  followed  by  the  addition  of  0.1  cc.  of 
sulfuric  acid,  agitate  and  cool:  a  violet-red  color  results,  immediately 
turning  to  a  bluish  green  (this  color  reaction  is  due  to  the  mixture 
of  aglucones).  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  in  10  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol,  add 
10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sulfuric  acid  solution  and  heat  the  mixture  under 
a  reflux  condenser  on  a  steam  bath;  after  five  minutes  the  aglucone, 
scillaridin-A,  begins  to  crystallize;  continue  heating  for  thirty  minutes, 
cool,  collect  the  resultant  aglucone  on  a  filter,  wash  with  water  and 
dry  at  105  C;  its  melting  point  is  not  definite,  occurring  with  decom- 
position at  about  220  C,  and  responding  to  the  color  reaction  character- 
istic for  scillaren-A  and  scillaridin-A.  On  further  heating  the  filtrate 
for  one  hour  on  a  steam  bath  without  a  reflux  condenser,  the  hydrolysis 
progresses  with  a  partial  resinification  of  the  mixed  aglucones;  they 
separate  partially  in  the  form  of  yellowish-brown  oily  droplets  which, 
ori  cooling,  solidify  into  a  brownish  brittle  mass;  neutralize  the  solution 
with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution;  the  separated  residue 
consisting  of  a  mixture  of  the  two  aglucones,  namely,  scillaridin  A 
and  B,  is  removed  by  filtration:  the  filtrate  contains  nonhydrolyzable 
scillaren-B  and  cleaved  sugar  but  is  entirely  free  from  scillaren-A. 
Boil  about  2  cc.  of  the  filtrate  with  5  cc.  of  alkaline  cupric  tartrate 
solution:  a  reduction  of  the  latter  results.  Transfer  the  remainder 
of  the  filtrate  to  a  glass  stoppered  Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  25  cc.  of  ethyl 
acetate,  followed  by  the  addition  of  15  Gm.  of  a  finely  powdered 
ammonium  sulfate:  decant  the  ethyl  acetate  and  the  aqueous  ammonium 
sulfate  layers  into  a  suitable  Squibb  separatory  funnel,  shake  vigor- 
ously and  allow  the  two  layers  to  separate  completely;  filter  the  ethyl 
acetate  solution  through  paper  by  aid  of  suction  into  a  small  flask  and 
evaporate  to  dryness;  the  residue  mixed  with  20  cc.  of  acetic  anhydride 
and  0.5  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  gives  a  violet-blue  color,  changing  to  the 
blue  characteristic  of  scillaren-B. 

Dissolve  about  0.025  Gm.  of  scillaren  in  2  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol:  a 
clear  colorless  solution  results,  and  remains  clear  on  dilution  with  an 
equal  volume  of  carbon  dioxide-free  water  (aglucone).  Add  to  the 
foregoing  solution  1  cc.  of  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  methyl  alcohol 
and  lead  acetate  solution:  a  slight  yellow  coloration  and  opalescence 
result  in  ten  minutes,  but  no  precipitation  (appreciable  amounts  of 
tannoid  substances).  Dissolve  about  0.025  Gm.  in  a  mixture  of  2  cc. 
of  methyl  alcohol  and  2  cc.  of  water,  add  0.5  cc.  of  alkaline  cupric 
tartrate  solution  and  heat  for  ten  seconds:  no  turbidity  results  (reduc- 
ing free  sugars). 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  scillaren,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of 
75  per  cent  (by  weight)  of  ethyl  alcohol;  observe  the  angular  rotation 
at  20  C.:  the  specific  rotatory  power  in  alcohol  [a]  20/D  falls  between 
—  25  and  —35. 

Ignite  about  0.1  Gm.  of  scillaren,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.25  per  cent.  Dry  about  0.2  Gm.,  accurately  weighed, 
over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator  for  forty-eight 
hours  at  20  C:  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  4  per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  scillaren,  accurately  weighed,  previously 
dried  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partial  vacuum,  to  a  250  cc.  Erlenmeyer 
flask,  dissolve  in  5  cc.  of  water  and  add  20  cc.  of  5  per  cent  sulfuric 
acid;  heat  on  a  steam  bath  for  six  hours;  cool  and  collect  the  separated 
crystalline  and  oily  resinous  mixture  on  a  Gooch  crucible,  and  wash  free 
from  acid  with  water;  dry  for  twenty-four  hours  at  60  C.,  and  weigh: 
the  amount  of  aglucone  found  is  not  less  than  48  per  cent  nor  more 
than  53  per  cent. 

Scillaren-A,  a  component  of  scillaren,  responds  to  the  following  tests 
for  identity  and  purity: 

Scillaren-A  occurs  as  small,  colorless,  odorless  crystals  or  crystalline 
powder,  with  a  very  bitter  taste;  soluble  in  ethyl  alcohol,  1  in  350, 
in  methyl  alcohol,  1  in  80;  in  a  mixture  of  4  parts  by  volume  of  ethyl 


190     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

alcohol  and  1  part  by  volume  of  water,  1  in  40;  practically  insoluble 
in  chloroform  and  ether.  It  dissolves  in  water  with  difficulty,  possessing 
a  neutral  reaction  toward  litmus.  The  specific  rotation  in  75  per  cent 
alcohol  [a]  20/D  falls  between  —  72  and  —  78  determined  on  the 
undried  material. 

Dissolve  about  0.001  Gm.  of  scillaren-A  in  0.1  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol, 
and  add  3  cc.  of  acetic  anhydride,  followed  by  the  addition  of  0.1  cc.  of 
sulfuric  acid;  on  immediate  agitation  a  red  color  results,  disapearing 
rapidly  and  changing  to  a  persistent  light  green  (this  color  reaction 
is  due  to  aglucone,  scillaridin-A).  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  in  10  cc. 
of  methyl  alcohol,  add  10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sulfuric  acid  solution, 
heat  the  mixture  under  a  reflux  condenser  on  a  steam  bath  for  thirty 
minutes,  collect  the  resultant  aglucone  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  with 
water  and  dry  at  105  C.:  its  melting  point  is  not  definite,  occurring  at 
about  220  C,  and  responding  to  the  foregoing  color  reaction.  The 
neutralized  filtrate  reduces  alkaline  cupric  tartrate  solution  immediately. 

Dissolve  about  0.025  Gm.  in  2  cc.  of  a  mixture  of  4  parts  of  ethyl  ' 
alcohol  (by  volume)  and  1  part  of  carbon  dioxide-free  water:  a  clear 
colorless  solution  results,  which  remains  clear  on  dilution  with  an 
equal  volume  of  carbon  dioxide-free  water  (aglucone).  Add  to  the 
foregoing  solution  0.1  cc.  of  lead  acetate  solution:  no  immediate  colora- 
tion or  precipitation  results  (appreciable  amounts  of  tannoid  substances). 
Dissolve  about  0.025  Gm.  in  a  mixture  of  2  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol  and 
2  cc.  of  water,  add  0.5  cc.  of  alkaline  cupric  tartrate  solution  and  heat 
to  boiling:  the  blue  color  persists  for  some  time  (reducing  free  sugars). 
Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  scillaren-A,  accurately  weighed,  in  25  cc.  of 
75  per  cent  (by  weight)  of  ethyl  alcohol;  observe  the  angular  rotation 
at  20  C. :  the  specific  rotatory  power  in  alcohol  [a]  20/D  falls  between 
—  72  and  —  78. 

Incinerate  about  0.1  Gm.  of  scillaren-A,  accurately  weighed:  the 
residue  does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dry  about  0.2  Gm.,  accurately 
weighed,  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator  for 
forty-eight  hours  at  20  C.:  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  2.5  per 
cent. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  scillaren-A,  accurately  weighed,  previously 
dried  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partial  vacuum,  to  a  250  cc.  Erlenmeyer 
flask,  add  10  cc.  of  methyl  alcohol  and  10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sulfuric 
acid  solution,  reflux  on  a  steam  bath  for  fifteen  minutes,  disconnect 
the  condenser  and  boil  on  the  steam  bath  until  reduced  to  about  a 
10  CQ.  volume,  cool  and  collect  the  crystals  formed  on  a  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  free  from  acid  with  water  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  105  C: 
the  amount  of  aglucone  found  should  not  be  less  than  48  per  cent,  nor 
more  than  53  per  cent. 

URGININ. — A  mixture  of  two  non-water  soluble  gluco- 
sides,  urginin-A  and  urginin-B,  derived  from  squill,  in  the 
proportions  in  which  they  exist  in  the  drug ;  namely,  about 
equal  parts.  The  product  is  standardized  so  that  the  variation 
in  the  proportion  of  each  glucoside  is  not  more  than  plus  or 
minus  2.5  per  cent  (from  50  per  cent),  i.  e.,  47.5  to  52.5  per 
cent.  Urginin  dried  in  a  high  vacuum  at  50  C.  for  five  hours 
loses  not  more  than  2  per  cent  of  its  weight.  Physiological 
standardization  by  the  Hatcher-Brody  cat  method  as  modified 
by  C.  DeLind  Van  Wijngaarden,  Arch,  exper.  Path.  u.  Pharm., 
113,  40,  59,  114,  21,  1926,  and  by  J.  H.  Burn,  Methods  of 
Biological  Assay,  Oxford  University  Press,  1928,  demonstrates 
the  lethal  dose  of  urginin  for  cats  to  be  0.2020  mg.  per  Kg.  (one 
cat  unit). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  cardiac  action  of  urginin  is  essen- 
tially similar  to  that  of  digitalis. 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  191 

Dosage. — Where  digitalis  has  not  been  used  within  one  week, 
3  mg.  (6  tablets  or  3  cc.  of  the  solution)  daily  in  divided  doses 
given  at  intervals  of  6  hours,  until  the  usual  effects  of  the 
drug  are  observed;  after  which  the  maintenance  dose  of  0.5 
mg.  (one  tablet,  or  0.5  cc.  of  the  solution)  may  be  given  daily. 
In  milder  cardiac  disorders,  from  0.5  mg.  to  1  mg.  of  urginin 
per  day  (one  to  two  tablets,  or  0.5  to  1  cc,  of  urginin  solution) 
may  be  given. 

Manufactured    by    the    Grisard    Laboratories,    Inc.,    Winchester,    Tenn., 
(Calco    Chemical   Co.,    Bound   Brook,    N.   J.,    distributor).       U.   S.    patent 
1,972,876   (Sept.    11,   1934;  expires    1951).     U.   S.  trademark  324,695. 
Coated    Tablets    Urginin,    0.5    nig. 
Tablets  Urginin,  0.5  mg. 

Solution  Urginin:  Each  cubic  centimeter  represents  one  milligram 
(Vgo  grain)  of  urginin,  in  a  vehicle  composed  of  equal  volumes  of 
glycerin  and  alcohol. 

Urginin  occurs  as  a  pale  yellow,  granular  powder,  possessing  a 
slight  characteristic  odor  and  an  extremely  bitter  taste;  soluble  in 
acetone,  alcohol,  ethyl  acetate,  glacial  acetic  acid,  dilute  alkali  car- 
bonate and  hydroxide  solutions,  sparingly  soluble  in  chloroform,  prac- 
tically insoluble  in  water,  carbon  tetrachloride,  ether  and  purified 
petroleum  benzine.  A  saturated  aqueous  solution  is  neutral  to  litmus. 
An  alcoholic  solution  is  levorotatory.  Dissolve  about  0.001  Gm.  of 
urginin  in  2  cc.  of  acetic  anhydride,  followed  by  the  addition  of  0.1 
cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  agitate  and  cool:  a  rose  color  appears  changing 
to  violet  then  to  green  (^this  color  reaction  is  due  to  the  mixture  pre- 
sumably of  agliicones).  Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  urginin  in  25  cc. 
of  ethyl  alcohol,  add  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  and  heat  the  mixture  under 
a  reflux  condenser  on  a  steam  bath  for  six  hours.  The  resinification 
of  the  presumably  mixed  aglucones  separates  in  the  form  of  yellowish 
brown  oily  droplets,  which  on  cooling  solidify  into  a  brownish  waxy 
mass;  remove  the  hydrolytic  residue  by  filtration:  the  filtrate  contains 
nonhydrolized  substances  and  a  cleaved  sugar.  Boil  about  2  cc.  of  the 
filtrate  with  5  cc.  of  alkaline  cupric  tartrate  solution:  a  reduction  of  the 
latter  results.  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  urginin  in  5  cc.  of  a  10  per 
cent  solutiori  of  sodium  hydroxide  and  add  about  0.1  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent 
solution  of  cupric  sulfate;  a  violet  color  does  not  appear  (^absence  of 
soluble  protein).  Dissolve  about  0.01  Gm.  of  urginin  in  5  cc.  of 
ethyl  alcohol  and  add  0.1  cc.  of  a  5  per  cent  solution  of  ferric  chloride: 
a  greenish  yellow  color  results  (absence  of  tannins).  Dissolve  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  urginin  in  5  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of  sodium  hydrox- 
ide solution  and  add  10  cc.  of  boiling  alkaline  cupric  tartrate  solution: 
no  reduction  of  latter  appears  immediately  (^absence  of  free  reducing 
sugars). 

Ignite  about  0.1  Gm.  of  urginin,  accurately  weighed:  the  residue 
does  not  exceed  0.25  per  cent.  Dry  about  0.2  Gm.  of  urginin,  accu- 
rately weighed,  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator 
for  forty-eight  hours  at  20  C. :  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed 
4  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  urginin,  accurately  weighed, 
in  25  cc.  of  95  per  cent  ethyl  alcohol;  observe  the  angular  rotation 
at  20  C:  the  specific  rotatory  power  [a]  20/D  falls  between  — 18.0 
and  — 21.5.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  urginin,  accurately  weighed, 
previously  dried  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partial  vacuum,  to  a  suitable 
Erlenmeyer  flask,  dissolve  in  7  cc.  of  alcohol,  followed  by  the  addition 
of  7  cc.  of  a  mixture  of  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  and  25  cc.  of  water; 
connect  with  condenser  and  "reflux"  on  a  steam  bath  for  six  hours; 
disconnect  the  condenser;  neutralize  the  mixture  with  normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution  using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator;  add  0.1  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid;  remove  the  alcohol  by  heating  on  the  steam  bath 
until  reduced  to  about  a  10  cc.  volume;  add  10  cc.  of  water,  mix  thor- 
oughly and  evaporate  to  about  10  cc;  cool  and  collect  the  separated 
crystalline  and  dark  waxy  resinous  residue  on  a  filter  paper,  wash 
the  residue  with  water  using  three  portions  of   10  cc.  each;  dissolve  the 


192     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

residue  in  warm  alcohol  by  passing  it  through  the  filter  and  collecting 
in  a  tared  beaker;  evaporate  to  a  pilular  consistency  on  the  steam 
bath  and  dry  for  three  hours  at  90  C. :  the  amount  of  hydrolytic 
residue   found  is  not  less  than  70  per  cent  nor  more  than  75  per  cent. 

STROPHANTHIN. — Strophanthinum.— "A  glucoside  or 
a  mixture  of  glucosides  obtained  from  Strophanthus  Kombe 
Oliver  (Fam.  Apocynaceae). 

"Strophanthin,  when  assayed  as  directed  in  the  U.  S_.  Phar- 
macopeia, shall  possess  a  potency  equivalent  to  the  activity  of 
not  less  than  40  per  cent  and  not  more  than  60  per  cent  of 
ouabain  when  similarly  assayed."  U.  S.  P.  The  ouabain  used 
in  this  assay  contains  about  12.5  per  cent  of  water. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Strophan- 
thinum. 

Hypodermic   Tablets  Strophanthin  Vioo  grain-Lilly. 

Prepared  by  Eli  Lilly   &   Co.,  Indianapolis,   Ind. 

Hypodermic   Tablets  Strophanthin  l/^o  grain    (0.325   mg.)-S.   &    D. 

Prepared  by    Sharp   &   Dohme,   Philadelphia  and  Baltimore. 

Digitalis  Preparations 

DIGIPOTEN. — A  mixture  of  the  digitalis  glucosides  in 
soluble  form,  diluted  with  milk-sugar  to  give  the  preparation 
an  activity  equal  to  that  of  digitalis  of  standard  quality  as 
determined  by  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia.  It  is  standardized  by 
the  "one  hour  frog  method."  The  minimum  lethal  dose  of 
digipoten  per  gram  of  body  weight  of  frog  is  0.6  mg. ;  or 
the  equivalent  in  digipoten  of  0.0005  mg.  of  ouabain  for  each 
gram  of  body  weight  of  frog.  It  is  virtually  free  from 
digitosaponin. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Digipoten  has  the  same  activity  as  digi- 
talis leaf  of  good  quality  and  may  be  used  as  is  the  official 
drug  with  respect  to  indications  and  dosage. 
Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  digitalis. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent   or  trademark. 

Digipoten   Tablets:    digipoten   0.03   Gm.    ('^    grain). 

Digipoten  is  prepared  by  extracting  digitalis  leaves  with  diluted 
alcohol,  the  alcohol  being  removed  by  distillation  in  vacuo,  the  result- 
ing extract  filtered,  and  the  filtrate  precipitated  with  tannin.  The 
precipitated  tannates  of  the  glucosides  are  washed  with  water,  and 
the  glucosides  are  liberated  in  the  usual  manner.  The  resulting  green 
brittle  powder  is  triturated  with  sufficient  milk  sugar  to  reduce  the 
activity  of  the  finished  product  to  the  standard. 

Digipoten  is  a  pale  green  powder,  possessing  the  characteristic  bitter 
taste  of   digitalis.      It  is   soluble   in   water  and  in   25    per   cent  alcohol. 

On  ignition  it  leaves  no  appreciable  amount  of  ash.  If  0.1  Gm.  of 
digipoten  is  dissolved  in  2  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  containing  a  trace 
of  ferric  chloride  and  underlaid  with  concentrated  sulfuric  acid,  there 
appears  at  first  a  brownish  zone,  changing  to  red,  and  finally  the  upper 
layer  changes  to  a  dark  green  (digitoxin). 

DIGIT  AN. — First  introduced  as  digipuratum. — A  digitalis 
preparation  said  to  contain  digitoxin  and  digitalin  in  the  form 
of  tannates.     It  is  standardized  biologically  by  the  method  of 


DIGITALIS     PREPARATIONS  193 

Gottlieb.  It  is  claimed  that  in  digitan  85  per  cent  of  the 
inactive  substances  found  in  the  ordinary  extract  have  been 
removed  and  that  it  is  free  from  digitonin. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  digitalis. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  digitalis. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  under  U.  S. 
patent  943,578  (Dec.  4,  1909;  expired). 

Digitan  Ampules  (for  Hypodermic  Use):  Each  contains  16  minims 
(1  cc.)  of  a  sterilized  solution  of  digitan  equivalent  to  digitan,  1J4  grains 
(0.1   Gm.). 

Digitan  Tablets,  IJ4  grains  (0.1  Gm.). 

Digitan  Tincture:    1  cc.  contains  digitan,  114   grains   (0.1   Gm.). 

Digitan  is  obtained  by  removing  objectionable  constituents  from  an 
alcoholic  extract  of  digitalis,  neutralized  with  alkaline  hydroxides,  by 
the  addition  of  ether,  petroleum  benzene,  or  some  other  suitable  precip- 
itant, and  reducing  the  purified  liquid  to  a  powder  by  evaporating  with 
milk  sugar. 

Digitan  is  a  greenish-yellow,  odorless,  bitter  powder.  The  active 
constituents  of  digitan  are  insoluble  in  cold  water  and  diluted  acids, 
but  are  easily  soluble  in  weak  alkalis. 

Digitan  responds  to  the  following  identity  test:  If  0.1  Gm.  of 
digitan  is  underlaid  with  about  3  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  which  con- 
tains 1  per  cent  of  a  5  per  cent  solution  of  ferric  sulfate,  there  appears 
a  red  band  (presence  of  digitalin)  and  above  this  another,  at  first 
bright  green,  later  changing. to  dark  green  and  finally  blue  (presence 
of    digitoxin). 

The  physiologic  activity  is  determined  by  the  method  of  Gottlieb, 
the  activity  being  adjusted  so  that  the  injection  into  the  femoral 
lymphatic  of  a  freshly  caught  land  frog  (Rana  temporaria),  weighing 
30  Gm.,  of  0.2  cc.  of  a  solution  made  by  treating  1  Gm.  of  digitan 
with  19  cc.  of  hot  water  and  1  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  sodium 
bicarbonate  causes  permanent  stoppage  of  the  heart  within  half  an 
hour  in  the  majority  of  cases. 

DIGITOL.— Fat-Free  Tincture  of  Digitalis-Mulford.— A 
biologically  standardized,  fat-free  tincture  of  digitalis,  corre- 
sponding in  drug  strength  to  tincture  of  digitalis-U.  S.  P., 
and  containing  not  more  than  70  per  cent  alcohol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  digitalis.  Digitol 
was  introduced  at  a  time  when  the  "fat"  of  digitalis  was 
believed  to  cause  gastric  disturbances.  At  present  this  claim 
of  superiority  is  not  tenable.  The  only  advantage  of  the  defat- 
ting  process  is  to  make  possible  a  nearly  clear  mixture  of  the 
product  with  water. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1  cc.  (5  to  15  minims). 

Manufactured  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  No 
U.   S.   patent  or   trademark. 

Digitalis  which  has  previously  been  subjected  to  percolation  with 
petroleum  benzin  is  extracted  by  percolation  with  the  hydro-alcoholic 
menstruum  in  the  usual  way. 

It  is  a  brownish-green  liquid  having  a  characteristic  and  highly 
alcoholic  odor  and  a  bitter  taste. 

It  is  standardized  to  such  a  strength  that  the  minimum  lethal  dose 
for  a  250  Gm.  guinea-pig  is  approximately   1   cc. 


194     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 
DYES 

Dyes  are  used  medically  as  antiseptics,  as  chemotherapeutic 
agents  and  for  special  effects  upon  tissue  cells.  The  local 
antiseptic  action  of  dyes  can  be  explained  by  their  bacterio- 
static and  bactericidal  powers.  These  are  often  relatively  spe- 
cific. When  dyes  are  injected  intravenously  for  the  treatment 
of  patients  with  localized  infections  or  septicemia,  the  results 
may  be  due  in  part  to  direct  actions  of  the  dyes  upon  micro- 
organisms in  the  lesions  and  in  the  blood  and  in  part  to  non- 
specific effects  due  apparently  to  the  colloidal  properties  of 
the  dyes. 

The  dyes  which  have  been  introduced  in  medicine,  for  the 
most  part  in  the  last  decade,  are  practically  all  organic  syn- 
thetics. Roughly  they  may  be  divided  into  five  classes:  (1) 
the  azo  dyes,  of  which  scarlet  red  medicinal,  scarlet  red 
sulfonate  and  dimazon  are  described  in  New  and  Nonofficial 
Remedies  (these  have  been  in  use  for  considerable  time) ; 
(2)  the  acridine  dyes,  such  as  acriflavine  hydrochloride 
(introduced  as  "acriflavine"),  acriflavine  base  (introduced 
as  "neutral  acriflavine")  and  proflavine;  (3)  the  fluorescein 
dyes,  either  as  fluorescein  or  combined  with  the  metal 
mercury,  such  as  mercurochrome  soluble  and  flumerin ; 
(4)  the  phenolphthalein  dyes  such  as  phenolyhthalein  and 
phenolsulfonphthalein,  which  are  official  in  the  U.  S.  Phar- 
macopeia, and  the  chlorine,  bromine  and  iodine  substitution 
products ;  (5)  the  triphenylmethane  or  rosaniline  series,  which 
comprise  a  large  list  of  substances  used  in  the  industries, 
extensively  in  laboratory  practice  and  more  recently  in 
medicine,  such  as  gentian  violet,  crystal  violet,  methyl  violet 
and  fuchsin ;  (6)  miscellaneous  dyes,  such  as  methylene  blue 
(methylthionine  chloride-U.  S.  P.).  Much  confusion  has 
existed  concerning  the  composition  of  dyes,  various  manu- 
facturers of  commercial  dyestuffs  making  similar  dyes  of 
varying  composition  both  qualitatively  and  quantitatively ; 
usually  the  commercial  dye  contains  a  diluent,  such  as  dextrin 
or  salts,  and  is  judged  by  tinctorial  power.  In  order  to  obtain 
comparable  results  when  employed  clinically,  the  dyes  should 
be  of  constant  composition,  preferably  without  diluent. 

The  Azo  Dyes 

The  azo  dyes  have  been  used  in  medicine  for  many  years — 
more  generally  recalled  under  the  name  "scarlet  R"  (scarlet  red). 
The  exact  constitution  of  the  "scarlet  R"  dyes  which  have  been 
used  seems  to  have  varied  in  minor  details  with  different  inves- 
tigators. Chemically  they  have  been  azo  compounds  (that  is, 
they  contain  the  linkage — N  :  N — )  combined  with  betanaphthol. 
In  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  a  distinction  between  two 
scarlet  red  compounds  has  been  made ;  scarlet  red  medicinal 
Biebrich  is  described  as  toluylazotoluylazobetanaphthol ;  scarlet 
red  sulfonate  is  described  as  the  sodium  salt  of  azobenzenedi- 


DYES  195 

sulfonic  acid  azobetanaphthol ;  it  differs  from  the  former  in 
that  the  methyl  group  (CHs — )  of  toluyl  radicals  has  been 
replaced  by  sodium  sulfonate  ( — SOsNa)  groups. 

In  addition  to  the  scarlet  red  compounds  there  is  the  chemi- 
cally related  diacetylaminoazotoluene  (dimazon),  which  contains 
only  one  azo  group  and  has  a  diacetylamino  [(CH3CO)2N — ] 
group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Scarlet  red  medicinal  Biebrich  and  scarlet 
red  sulfonate  have  a  marked  power  of  stimulating  the  prolifera- 
tion of  epithelial  cells. 

Opinions  are  divided  as  to  the  clinical  value,  but  the  dyies 
are  used  to  promote  the  growth  of  epithelium  in  the  treatment 
of  burns,  wounds,  chronic  ulcers,  etc.  In  chronic  ulcers,  how- 
ever, it  is  requisite  that  the  local  circulation  be  good  in  order 
to  obtain  a  permanent  result. 

Dosage. — The  scarlet  red  preparations  are  generally  used  in 
the  form  of  an  ointment  containing  from  4  to  8  per  cent  of  the 
substance.  The  8  per  cent  ointment  is  somewhat  irritating 
and  should  be  alternated  with  a  soothing  ointment.  Dimazon 
is  generally  used  in  the  form  of  a  2  per  cent  ointment ;  it  is 
also  employed  as  a  dusting  powder  (mixed  with  talcum)  or  as 
a  solution  (in  oil). 

SCARLET  RED.— Scarlet  Red,  Medicinal;  Biebrich  Scar- 
let Red. — "An  azo  dye.  toluylazotoluylazo-jS-naphthol,  CHsCHe 
H4N  rNCeHs.CHaN  :  N.C10H5OH."    A^.  F. 

For  standards  see  The  National  Formulary  under  Rubrum 
Scarlatinum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  The  Azo 
Dyes. 

Ointment  Scarlet  Red  Biebrich  8  Per  Cent:  Scarlet  red  8  per  cent 
in  an  ointment  base  consisting  of  stearin  5  per  cent,  wool  fat  25  per  cent, 
and   petrolatum   70   per  cent. 

Prepared  by  the   National   Drug   Co.,   Philadelphia. 

Scarlet  Red  Medicinal  Biebrich-Calco. — A  brand  of 
scarlet  red-N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  the   Calco   Chemical   Co.,   Inc.,   Bound   Brook,   N.  J. 

Scarlet    Red    Medicinal-Kalle. — A   brand   of   scarlet   red- 

N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  Kalle  &  Co.,  Aktiengesellschaft,  Biebrich  a/Rh., 
Germany  (Heilkraft  Medical  Company,  Boston,  distributor).  No  U.  S. 
patent   or   trademark.      Sold   in  the   form   of  ointment  only. 

Scarlet  Red  Salve:  Biebrich  scarlet  red  medicinal-Kalle  &  Co.  8  parts, 
eucalyptol  2   parts  and  petrolatum  90  parts. 

Prepared  by   the  Heilkraft  Medical   Company,   Boston. 

Scarlet  Red  Medicinal  Biebrich-Merck. — A  brand  of 
scarlet  red-N.  F. 

Merck   &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,   N.  J.,  distributor. 


196     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Scarlet  Red  Medicinal-"National." — A  brand  of  scarlet 
red-N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  The  National  Aniline  and  Chemical  Co.,  Inc., 
New  York.     No  U.   S.  patent  or   trademark. 

SCARLET    RED    SULFONATE.— The   sodium   salt   of 

azobenzenedisulfonic  acid  azobetanaphthol. — C6H4.(S03Na)N  :  N. 
C6H3.(S03Na).N  :  N.doHeOH. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  The  Azo 
Dves.  Scarlet  red  sulfonate  is  marketed  only  in  the  form  of 
ointment  and  emulsion. 

Manufactured  by  Badische  Anilin  und  Sodafabrik,  Ludwigshafen,  Ger- 
many (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Scarlet  Red  Emulsion,   4   per  cent-P.   D.   &   Co.:  scarlet  red   sulfonate, 

4  parts;   alcohol,   4   parts;   sterilized  quince  seed  jelly,   92  parts. 
Scarlet  Red    Ointment,   5  per  cent-P.   D.  &  Co.:  scarlet  red  sulfonate, 

5  parts;   petrolatum  containing  a   small  amount  of  wax,   95   parts. 
Scarlet  Red  Ointment,  10  per  cent-P.  D.  &■  Co.:  scarlet  red  sulfonate, 

10  parts;   petrolatum  containing   a  small  amount  of  wax,   90  parts. 

Scarlet  red  sulfonate  is  a  dark,  brownish-red  odorless  powder.  It 
is  soluble  in  water;  slightly  soluble  in  ether,  alcohol  and  acetone; 
almost  insoluble  in  chloroform,  benzene,  fixed  oils,  fats  and  petrolatum. 

Add  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  a  concentrated,  aqueous  solution 
of  scarlet  red  sulfonate:  red  floccules  separate  from  the  orange  red 
solution.  Add  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  a  concentrated  aqueous 
solution  of  the  substance;  a  brownish-red  precipitate  forms.  Treat  the 
substance  with  concentrated  sulfuric  acid:  a  green  solution  results 
which  becomes  blue  on  the  addition  of  water,  and  on  further  dilution, 
brownish-red  floccules  separate.  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  the  sub- 
stance in  5  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid,  heat  to  boiling,  add  zinc  dust 
and  continue  the  boiling;   the  liquid  becomes  almost  colorless. 

DIMAZON.  —  Diacetylaminoazotoluene.  —  CHsCeHi.N  :  N 
C6H3(CH3)N(CH3CO)2. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  The  Azo 
Dyes. 

Manufactured  by  Kalle  &  Co.,  Aktiengesellschaft,  Biebrich,  a/Rh., 
Germany  (Heilkraft  Medical  Company,  Boston,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent 
applied  for.     U.  S.  trademark  89,119. 

Dimazon   Ointment:  Dimazon  2  parts  and  petrolatum    98  parts. 

Prepared  by  Heilkraft  Medical  Company,  Boston.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Dimazon   Oil:   Dimazon  2  parts  and  olive  oil   98   parts. 

Prepared  by  Heilkraft  Medical  Company,  Boston.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Dimazon  Powder:  Dimazon  5  parts  and  talcum  95   parts. 

Prepared  by  Heilkraft  Medical  Company,  Boston.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Dimazon  is  prepared  by  the  acetylization  of  aminoazotoluene.  It  is 
an  orange  colored  crystalline  powder,  insoluble  in  water  but  readily 
soluble  in  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform,  acetone  and  benzene,  oils,  fats 
and  petrolatum.  It  can  be  removed  from  cloth  by  washing  with  soap 
and  water.     It  melts  at  75  C. 


DYES  197 

When  hydrolyzed  with  a  dilute  alcoholic  solution  of  sodium  hydrox- 
ide, dimazon  loses  an  acetyl  group  with  formation  of  the  insoluble 
monoacetylaminoazotoluol,  which  has  a  melting  point  of  186  C.  Pro- 
longed treatment  with  an  alcoholic  alkali  solution  results  in  loss  of 
the  second  acetyl  group  with  formation  of  aminoazotoluol,  melting  point 
100  C. 

Treated  with  fuming  hydrochloric  acid,  dimazon  yields  monoacetyl- 
azotoluol  which  is  precipitated  on  dilution  with  water.  Prolonged 
heating  with  the  acid  forms  aminoazotoluol  and  eventually  the  hydro- 
chloride of  the  latter. 

If  dimazon  is  boiled  with  alcohol  for  a  long  time,  an  acetyl  group 
is  removed  with  formation  of  ethyl  acetate,  which  may  be  recognized 
by  its  odor. 

The  Acridine  Dyes 

The  acridine  derivatives  are  mostly  yellov^^  dyes — acridine 
dyes  obtained  from  coal  tar — to  which  the  term  "flavine"  has 
been  applied  ("flavine"  should  more  correctly  be  applied  to 
a  vegetable  coloring  matter).  The  representative  acridine 
dyes  used  in  medicine  are  acriflavine  hydrochloride  (intro- 
duced as  "trypaflavine"  and  "acriflavine"),  acriflavine  base 
(introduced  as  "neutral  trypaflavine"  and  "neutral  acriflavine"), 
and  proflavine.  In  1912,  Ehrlich  found  that  the  acridine  dye 
diaminoethylacridinium  chloride  hydrochloride  possessed  thera- 
peutic properties  when  used  in  trypanosome  infections  and  hence 
he  termed  it  trypaflavine.  Later  this  substance  was  investigated 
in  England,  particularly  in  regard  to  its  effects  as  a  wound 
antiseptic,  and  the  name  "acriflavine"  was  applied  to  it.  In  a 
generic  sense  the  terms  "trypaflavine"  and  "acriflavine"  have 
been  applied  both  to  acriflavine  base  and  acriflavine  hydro- 
chloride. Another  closely  related  substance,  diaminoacridine 
monohydrogen  sulfate,  was  studied  also,  to  which  was  given 
the  name  "proflavine."  A  considerable  number  of  bacteriologic 
and  clinical  reports  on  these  substances  have  been  published. 
It  appears  to  be  established  that  these  dyes  possess  marked 
antiseptic  and  germicidal  properties,  and  on  this  account  they 
have  been  employed  in  a  number  of  pathologic  conditions. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  antiseptic  or  bacteriostatic  action  of 
acriflavine  hydrochloride  and  proflavine  appears  to  be  weakened 
in  the  presence  of  serum.  In  the  treatment  of  wounds,  it  is 
claimed  that  these  drugs  are  comparatively  free  from  toxic  or 
irritant  action  on  living  tissues  and  that  they  do  not  inhibit 
appreciably  the  phagocytic  action  of  the  leukocytes  on  the  heal- 
ing process.  Acriflavine  hydrochloride  is  claimed  to  exert  a 
specific  bactericidal  action  on  the  gonococcus.  The  evidence 
indicates  that  it  has  a  greater  antiseptic  action  than  proflavine, 
though  its  action  is  slower.  Applications  of  acriflavine  hydro- 
chloride, acriflavine  base  and  proflavine  have  been  employed  in 
the  treatment  of  wounds,  urethritis,  gingivitis,  gonorrheal  con- 
junctivitis, blenorrhea,  eczema,  furunculosis,  otitis  media,  and 
other  conditions  requiring  the  use  of  a  germicide.  When  taken 
by  mouth,  the  dyes  tend  to  render  the  urine  antiseptic  provided 
the  reaction  of  the  secretion  be  alkaline.  The  use  of  acriflavine 
base  rather  than  acriflavine  hydrochloride  has  been  suggested  in 


198     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

areas  where  freedom  from  irritation  (due  to  the  acid  reaction 
of  acrifiavine  hydrochloride  and  proflavine)  is  desirable.  The 
intravenous  use  of  acriflavine  base  has  been  proposed,  but 
critical  evidence  for  its  necessity  is  lacking. 

Dosage. — In  the  treatment  of  wounds,  the  solution  gener- 
ally employed  is  1  in  1,000  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride,  although  weaker  solutions  may  be  used.  In  suppurat- 
ing wounds,  this  solution  is  used  for  syringing  and  swabbing  the 
wound  after  free  incision,  for  irrigation  after  providing  ade- 
quate drainage,  and  for  saturating  the  gauze  with  which  the 
wound  is  finally  covered.  Evaporation  should  be  prevented  by 
protective  dressing.  In  cavities,  gauze  saturated  with  the  solu- 
tion may  be  used  as  a  light  packing.  Fresh  wounds  are  cleansed 
thoroughly  with  the  solution,  and  as  much  of  the  solution  as 
possible  is  left  in  contact  with  the  injured  surfaces.  Such 
wounds  may  be  closed  by  suture  and  may  be  expected  to  heal 
by  first  intention. 

In  the  treatment  of  open  wounds,  an  ointment  has  been  used 
which  contains  1  per  cent  of  proflavine  oleate  (prepared  from 
proflavine  base)  in  an  ointment  base  composed  of  equal  parts  of 
petrolatum  and  calcium  carbonate.  A  thick  layer  of  the  oint- 
ment may  be  spread  on  gauze  and  applied  to  the  surface  of  the 
cleansed  wound,  or  the  ointment  may  be  spread  on  the  wound 
directly.  The  primary  dressing  need  not  be  changed  for  several 
days. 

In  gonorrhea,  a  strength  of  1  in  1,000  in  physiological  solu- 
tion of  sodium  chloride  may  be  used  for  injection  into  the 
urethra.  For  irrigation,  when  relatively  large  quantities  are 
to  be  used,  a  1  in  4,000  solution  is  preferable  because  it  is  less 
irritating ;  solutions  of  from  1  in  6,000  to  1  in  10,000  have  been 
used.  In  throat  infections  a  spray  of  1  in  1,000  solution  is  used. 
In  middle  ear  suppurations  a  1  in  500  solution  in  50  per  cent 
alcohol  is  dropped  into  the  ear  or  the  cavity  may  be  packed 
with  gauze  wet  with  the  solution.  In  gingivitis  the  mouth  is 
irrigated  with  a  1  in  1,000  solution.  Solutions  of  acriflavine 
hydrochloride,  acriflavine  base  and  proflavine  may  be  boiled,  or 
heated  in  an  autoclave  to  130  C,  without  decomposition,  but  they 
are  sensitive  to  light  and  should  be  stored  in  amber  bottles. 
Solutions  over  a  week  old  should  be  discarded. 

ACRIFLAVINE  HYDROCHLORIDE.— "A  mixture  of 
the  hydrochlorides  of  2,  8  diamino-10-methylacridinium  chloride 
and  2,  8  diaminoacridine  containing,  when  dried  to  constant 
weight  over  sulfuric  acid,  not  less  than  23  and  not  more  than 
24.5  per  cent  of  Chlorine."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Acriflavinae 
Hydrochloridum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article.  The 
Acridine  Dyes. 


DYES  199 

Acriflavine  Hydrochloride-Abbott. — A  brand  of  acrifla- 
vine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,005,176  (Oct.  10,  1911;  expired),  by  license  of  the  Chemical 
Foundation,  Inc. 

Tablets  Acriflavine  Hydrochloride- Abbott,  0.03  Gm.:  Each  tablet  con- 
tains  acriflavine-Abbott,   0.03   Gm,    (0.46  grain). 

Acriflavine-"National." — A  brand  of  acriflavine  hydro- 
chloride-U. S.  P.  In  addition,  acriflavine-^National"  is  con- 
trolled biologically  so  that  the  maximum  nonlethal  dose  for 
mice  weighing  20  Gm.  shall  not  exceed  0.0015  Gm. 

Manufactured  by  the  National  Aniline  &  Chemical  Co.,  New  York, 
under  U.  S.  patent  1,005,176  (Oct.  10,  1911;  expired),  by  license  of 
The   Chemical    Foundation,   Inc. 

To  determine  the  maximum  nonlethal  dose  the  drug  is  dissolved 
in  water  in  such  concentration  that  1  cc.  contains  the  quantity  to  be 
administered.  A  series  of  mice  weighing  20  Gm.  each  are  injected 
subcutaneously  with  small  doses  of  the  drug,  each  succeeding  animal 
receiving  an  increase  of  Vio  mg.  of  the  drug  over  the  preceding  one. 
The  dosage  under  which  all  of  the  animals  survive  and  over  which 
all   die   is   the   maximum   nonlethal   dose. 

ACRIFLAVINE.— Acriflavine  Base.— Neutral  Acriflavine. 
— "A  mixture  of  2,  8  diamino-10-methylacridinium-chloride  and 
2,  8  diaminoacridine  and  containing,  when  dried  to  constant 
weight  at  100°C.,  not  less  than  13.3  per  cent  and  not  more  than 
14.3  per  cent  of  chlorine  (CI)."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Acriflavina. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  The 
Acridine  Dyes. 

Acriflavine  is  a  brownish-red,  odorless,  granular  powder.  It  is 
soluble  in  about  3  parts  of  water;  incompletely  soluble  in  alcohol; 
nearly  insoluble  in  ether,  chloroform  and  the  fixed  oils;  the  aqueous 
solution    is    brownish-red   in    color,    and   fluoresces   on   dilution. 

Add  a  few  drops  of  hydrochloric  acid  to  an  aqueous  solution  of  acri- 
flavine base  which  is  sufficiently  diluted  to  be  fluorescent:  the  fluores- 
cence disappears,  but  partially  reappears  on  further  dilution  with  water. 
Add  2  drops  of  sulfuric  acid  to  about  1  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution 
(1  in  250)  and  agitate  the  mixture:  an  orange-red  crystalline  precipi- 
tate is  produced.  An  aqueous  solution  (1  in  5)  does  not  effervesce 
on  the  addition  of  an  equal  volume  of  a  saturated  solution  of  sodium 
bicarbonate  {distinction  from  acriflavine  hydrochloride  and  proflavine). 
Dissolve  1  Gm.  in  250  cc.  water;  to  a  10  cc.  portion  add  1  cc.  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid,  add  1  cc.  barium  chloride  solution:  no  precipitation 
occurs  {distinction  from  proflavine);  to  another  portion  of  10  cc.  add 
1  cc.  formaldehyde  solution:  no  precipitation  occurs  {distinction  from 
proflavine) . 

When  tested  for  arsenic  according  to  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  X., 
the  product  should  meet  requirements  for  arsenic  (p.  428,  Arsenic 
Test).  Dry  about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight  at 
100  C:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  7.0  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  1  Gm., 
accurately  weighed,  previously  dried  at  100  C,  in  250  cc.  of  warm 
water,  collect  the  insoluble  matter,  if  any,  in  a  weighed  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  the  insoluble  matter  with  hot  water,  dry  and  weigh  the  residue: 
the  insoluble  matter  does  not  exceed  0.5  per  cent.  Heat  with  an  excess 
of  sulfuric  acid  at  a  low  temperature  about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed, 
previously  dried  at  100  C:  the  "sulfated"  ash  does  not  exceed  3.5 
per  cent,  when  calculated  as  sodium  chloride.  Transfer  about  0.3  Gm., 
accurately    weighed,    to    a    500    cc.    Kjeldahl    flask,    and    determine    the 


200    NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

nitrogen  content  according  to  the  method  described  in  Medical  War 
Manual  No.  6,  Laboratory  Methods  of  the  United  States  Army,  p.  221. 
(The  sulfuric  acid  digestion  should  be  carried  on  at  least  twenty 
hours) :  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not  less  than  15.5 
per  cent,  nor  more  than  16.3  per  cent,  when  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance. 

Transfer  about  0.25  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  250  cc.  Erlermieyer 
flask,  dissolve  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  add  about  0.5  Gm.  of  silver  nitrate, 
previously  dissolved  in  about  10  cc.  of  water;  add  10  cc.  sulfuric  acid, 
finally  add  about  2  Gm.  of  powdered  potassium  permanganate  in  several 
portions;  allow  the  flask  and  contents  to  digest  on  a  steam  bath  for  at 
least  30  minutes;  decolorize  the  solution  by  addition  of  hydrogen 
peroxide  with  the  aid  of  heat,  to  remove  traces  of  the  manganese 
oxides  formed;  filter  the  precipitate  of  silver  chloride  on  to  a  Gooch 
crucible,  wash  the  precipitate  with  nitric  acid  and  water,  and  dry  to 
constant  weight  at  105  C.:  the  percentage  of  chloride  corresponds  to  not 
less  than  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  found  according  to  the  preceding 
assay  multiplied  by  the  factor  0.844  (N  to  CI  in  C14H14N3CI),  when 
calculated  to  the  dried  substance,  nor  more  than  the  percentage  of  nitro- 
gen found  times  0.844  plus  3.0  per  cent,  when  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  400  cc. 
beaker,  and  dissolve  in  100  cc.  of  water:  the  hydrogen  ion  concentration 
determined  by  using  the  hydrogen  electrode  and  a  calomel  cell  (normal 
potassium  chloride  solution)  corresponds  to  a  pn  of  not  less  than  3  nor 
more   than  7. 

Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott. — A  brand  of  acriflavine-U. 
S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.  U.  S. 
patent   1,005,176    (Oct.    10,    1911;   expired).     No  U.   S.  trademark. 

Enteric  Coated  Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott,  0.03  Gm.  (Yz  grain) : 
Each  contains  neutral  acriflavine-Abbott  0.03  Gm.  (J^  grain),  and  is 
coated  with  shellac  and  phenyl  salicylate. 

Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott  for  Intravenous  Injection,  0.1  Gm.  Ampules. 

Neutral  Acriflavine  Jelly  1 :1, 000- Abbott :  Neutral  acriflavine-Abbott, 
0.1  part,  dissolved  in  100  parts  of  tragacanth  gum  jelly,  containing 
sufficient  sodium  hydroxide  so  that  the  finished  product  has  a  ^h  of  about 
8.5,   to  make   100   parts. 

Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott ,  0.03  Gm.   (Yi  grain). 

Acriflavine  Neutral-Calco. — A  brand  of  acriflavine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the   Calco  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,   Bound  Brook,  N.  J. 
Tablets  Acriflavine  Neutral-Calco,    Yi  grain   (uncoated). 

Neutral  Acriflavine-"National." — A  brand  of  acriflavine- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  The  National  Aniline  and  Chemical  Co.,  New  York, 
under  U.  S.  patent  1,005,176  (Oct.  10,  1911;  expired)  by  license  of  the 
Chemical  Foundation,  Inc.     No  U.  S.  trademark. 

Enteric  Coated  Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-" N ational ,"  0.0324  Gm. 
(Y  grain):  Each  contains  neutral  acriflavine-"National,"  0.0324  Gm. 
iY   grain),  and  is  coated  with  phenyl  salicylate   containing  some  keratin. 

Tablets    Neutral  Acriflavine-" National,"   0.1    Gm.    (IY2    grains). 

Neutral  Acriflavine-" National"  Troches:  Each  contains  neutral  acri- 
flavine-"National,"  0.006  Gm.,  menthol  0.0006  Gm.  and  sodium  chloride 
0.0006  Gm. 

Neutral  Acriflavine-" National"  "Pro  Injectione,"    0.5   Gm.  vials. 

Neutral  Acriflavine-" National"  "Pro  Injectione,"   1.0   Gm.   vials. 

Ointment  Neutral  Acriflavine-" National,"  1  per  cent:  Neutral  Acri- 
flavine-"National,"  1  part,  dissolved  in  glycerin,  8  parts,  and  incorporated 
with  a  base  composed  of  hydrous  wool  fat  and  petrolatum  to  make 
100   parts. 


DYES  201 

PROFLAVINE.  —  Proflavina.  —  Proflavine  Sulfate.— 
3 :  6-diaminoacridinium  monohydrogen  sulfate.  —  2  :  8-diamino- 
acridinium  monohydrogen  sulfate. 


HoN 


+  H2O 
NH2 


H  HSO4 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  The  Acri- 
dine  Dyes. 

Proflavine  is  a  reddish-brown,  odorless,  crystalline  powder.  It  is 
soluble  in  water  and  in  alcohol,  forming  brownish  solutions  which 
fluoresce  on  dilution;  it  is  nearly  insoluble  in  ether,  chloroform,  liquid 
petrolatum,   fixed   oils   and   volatile   oils. 

An  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine  is  neutral  to  litmus.  Add  a  few 
drops  of  hydrochloric  acid  to  an  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine  which 
is  sufficiently  dilute  to  be  fluorescent.  The  fluorescence  disappears, 
but  partially  reappears  on  dilution  with  water.  Add  2  drops  of  sul- 
furic acid  to  about  1  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine  (1  in 
250),  and  agitate  the  mixture.  A  brown,  crystalline  precipitate  is  pro- 
duced. Under  the  microscope  the  crystals  are  seen  to  be  mostly  pris- 
matic needles.  An  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine  (1  in  250)  gives  a 
precipitate  with  barium  chloride  solution  (distinction  from  acriflavine). 
An  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine  (1  in  250)  gives  no  precipitate  with 
silver  nitrate  solution  (distinction  from  acriflavine).  Add  a  few  drops 
of  formaldehyde  solution  to  5  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine 
(1  in  250),  and  immediately  add  2  drops  of  sodium  nitrite  solution 
(1  in  10)_.  A  violet  color  is  produced.  On  the  further  addition  of 
sodium  nitrite  solution,  a  brownish-violet  precipitate  is  formed  and, 
after  a  few  minutes,  the  solution  becomes  colorless.  This  may  be  best 
observed  after  filtration  (distinction  from  acriflavine,  the  filtrate  from 
which  becomes  cherry-red).  An  aqueous  solution  of  proflavine  (1  in 
250)  gives  a  lemon  yellow  precipitate  with  sodium  hydroxide  solution 
(distinction  from  acriflavine,  which  gives  an   orange  precipitate). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  proflavine,  accurately  weighed:  the  ash 
amounts  to  not  more  than    1   per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  proflavine,  accurately  weighed,  in  250  cc. 
of  warm  water,  collect  the  insoluble  matter,  if  any,  in  a  weighed  Gooch 
crucible,  wash  the  insoluble  matter  with  hot  water,  dry  and  weigh  the 
residue:  the  insoluble  matter  amounts  to  not  more  than   1   per  cent. 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  proflavine,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight 
at  100  C:  the  substance  loses  not  more  than  10  per  cent  of  its  weight. 

Proflavine-Abbott. — A  brand  of  proflavine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,005,176  (Oct.  10,  1911;  expired),  by  license  of  The  Chemical 
Foundation,   Inc. 

Proflavine-"National." — A  brand  of  proflavine-N.  N.  R. 
In  addition,  proflavine-"National"  is  controlled  biologically  so 
that  the  maximum  nonlethal  dose  for  mice  weighing  20  Gm. 
must  not  exceed  0.006  Gm. 

Manufactured  by  the  National  Aniline  &  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New 
York,  under  U.  S.  patent  1,005,176  (Oct.  10,  1911;  expired),  by  Kcense 
of   The    Chemical    Foundation,    Inc. 


202     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

To  determine  the  maximum  nonlethal  dose  the  drug  is  dissolved  in 
water  in  such  concentration  that  1  cc.  contains  the  quantity  to  be 
administered.  Of  a  series  of  mice  weighing  20  Gm,  apiece,  each  is 
injected  subcutaneously  with  small  doses  of  the  drug,  each  succeeding 
animal  receiving  an  increase  of  Yio  mg.  of  drug  over  the  preceding  one. 
The  dosage  under  which  all  of  the  animals  survive  and  over  which  all 
die   is   the    maximum   nonlethal   dose. 

The  Fluorescein  (Pyronine)  Dyes 

Fluorescein  is  formed  by  combining  resorcinol  (C6H4(OH)2) 

CO 
with   phthalic   anhydride    (C6H4<       >0) ;    at   the    same   time 

CO 
water   is    given    ofif   yielding   a   product   having    the   structural 
formula 


The  product  is  closely  related  to  phenolphthalein  and  its  deriva- 
tives (which  are  described  in  the  next  section),  differing  chiefly 
in  the  presence  of  the  oxygen  molecule  between  the  two  ortho 
positions  of  the  resorcinol  nuclei.  In  common  with  the  phthaleins, 
it  forms  salts  with  alkali  whereby  a  rearrangement  takes  place 
and  the  quinoid  group  is  formed.  Fluorescein  is  easily  bromin- 
ated,  the  tetrabrom  compound  being  the  beautiful  dye  eosin. 
Fluorescein  has  been  combined  with  one  molecule  of  mercury 
_( — HgOH),  the  sodium  salt  of  the  combination  being  flumerin; 
in  mercurochrome  soluble,  two  of  the  hydrogen  atoms  of 
flumerin  have  been  replaced  by  two  bromine  atoms. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Fluorescein  has  been  employed  mainly  as 
a  diagnostic  agent  in  ophthalmologic  work.  Flumerin  and  mer- 
curochrome soluble  are  bactericides ;  flumerin  has  also  been 
employed  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis. 

FLUORESCEIN.  —  Fluoresceinum. — Resorcinolphtha- 
lein  (a  term  not  strictly  correct  but  commonly  used). — Dioxy- 
fluoran.  — 0:(C6H30H)2:C.C6H4.COO.  —  The  anhydride  of 
fluoresceinic  acid,  O  :(C6H30H)2:C(OH).C6H4(COOH). 

Actions  mid  Uses. — The  soluble  sodium  salt  of  fluorescein 
(fluorescein  2  Gm.,  sodium  bicarbonate  3  Gm.,  water  to  make 
100  cc.)  has  been  used  for  the  diagnosis  of  corneal  lesions  and 
the  detection  of  minute  foreign  bodies  embedded  in  the  cornea. 
While  a  weak  solution  of  fluorescein  will  not  stain  the  normal 
cornea,  ulcers  or  parts  deprived  of  epithelium  will  become  green 
and  remain  so  for  a  time ;  foreign  bodies  will  appear  surrounded 
by  a  green  ring;  loss  of  substance  in  the  conjunctiva  is  indicated 
by  a  yellow  hue.  Fluorescein  also  reveals  defects  or  disease  of 
the  efidothelium  of  the  cornea,  producing  a  deep  coloration  of 
the  diseased  area. 


DYES  203 

Fluorescein  is  prepared  by  the  fusion  of  phthalic  anhydride  and 
resorcinol  at  from  195  to  200  C.  till  the  mass  becomes  solid.  This 
is  extracted  with  water  and  the  residue  dissolved  in  potassium 
hydroxide  solution,  which  is  then  filtered  and  the  fluorescein  pre- 
cipitated with  acid. 

Fluorescein  is  an  orange  red  powder,  insoluble  in  water,  ether, 
chloroform  and  benzol;  soluble  in  hot  glacial  acetic  acid  and  boiling 
alcohol.  It  dissolves  in  alkaline  solution  with  formation  of  a  salt. 
The  alkaline  solution  by  transmitted  light  is  red;  by  reflected  light  it 
has  a  green  fluorescence  even  in  very  dilute  solution.  When  fluores- 
cein is  boiled  with  chalk  and  water,  the  calcium  salt  of  fluorescein  is 
formed,  which  is  recognized  by   its  red  brown  color  and  green  sheen. 

Fluorescein-Merck. — A  brand  of  fluorescein-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,   Rahway,   N.   J.,  distributor. 

MERCUROCHROM  E.— See  Mercury  and  Mercury 
Compounds. 

The  Phenolphthalein  Dyes 

Phenolphthalein — long  used  by  chemists  as  an  indicator  before 
its  tlierapeutic  properties  were  discovered — is  a  condensation 
product  of  phthalic  anhydride  and  phenol.  In  neutral  and  acid 
mediums  it  exists  in  a  form  in  which  there  is  no  quinoid  group, 


ONa 
C 

O 
COONa 

Quinoid  Group 

but  the  presence  of  alkali  (/'h=8  to  10)  causes  the  characteristic 
rearrangement  with  typical  salt  formation  and  the  presence  of  a 
quinoid  group  whereby  the  beautiful  red  color  is  formed. 
This  reaction  is  also  characteristic  of  other  members  of  the 
series.  Phenolsulfonphthalein — which  chemists  also  use  as  an 
indicator — contains  an  SO2  group  in  place  of  the  CO  group  in 
the  phthalic  anhydride  nucleus.  In  phenoltetrachlorphthalein, 
the  four  hydrogen  atoms  in  the  benzene  ring  belonging  to  the 
phthalic  acid  nucleus  have  been  replaced  by  chlorine;  in  tetra- 
bromophenolphthalein,  the  four  bromine  atoms  are  in  the  phenol 
groups,  two  in  each,  which,  it  will  be  noted,  is  a  different 
substitution  than  in  the  case  of  phenoltetrachlorphthalein. 

Actions  and  Uses. — All  of  the  compounds  of  the  phenol- 
phthalein type  are  used  in  medicine  as  diagnostic  agents  except 
phenolphthalein  itself.  Also  phenolphthalein  is  used  not  because 
of  its  property  of  color  formation,  but  because  of  its  action  on 
the  intestine.  Phenolsulfonphthalein  and  phenoltetrachlor- 
phthalein are  used  because  they  pass  unchanged  through  the 
body  and  at  the  same  time  have  the  property  of  intense  color 


204     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

formation  when  the  excretions  are  collected  and  alkalinized. 
Bromsulphalein  is  used  in  a  somewhat  analogous  way,  but 
instead  of  determining  the  amount  in  the  excretion  of  the  bile, 
the  amount  (not  excreted)  in  the  blood  gives  an  index  of  liver 
function.  Tetrabromophenolphthalein  and  tetraiodophenolphtha- 
lein — which  are  employed  in  the  form  of  the  sodium  salts — are 
not  used  because  they  are  dyes  per  se,  but  rather  as  carriers  of 
bromine  or  iodine;  they  appear  in  the  gallbladder  in  sufficient 
concentration  to  permit  the  heavy  halogen  molecules  to  cast  a 
shadow  to  the  roentgen  rays. 

BROMSULPHALEIN-H.  W.  &  D.— Disodium  phenoltet- 
rabromphthaleinsulfonate.  —  O.CO.QBr4.C[C6H3(OH)S03Na]2 

The  disodium  salt  formed  by  the  interaction  of  tetrabromo- 
phthalic  acid  (or  anhydride)  and  phenol  with  subsequent  sul- 
fonation.     It  contains  from  2)7  to  38  per  cent  of  bromine. 

Actions  mid  Uses. — Bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.,  after  intra- 
venous injection  into  normal  rabbits,  is  excreted  in  the  bile 
to  the  extent  of  about  85  per  cent  in  one  hour.  Normally 
it  is  rapidly  removed  from  the  blood  stream,  but  when  the 
liver  is  extirpated  it  is  retained  in  the  blood  stream  almost 
completely.  In  normal  animals  the  drug  appears  in  the  urine 
in  traces  only  or  not  at  all.  Experiments  on  man  have  been 
in  accord  with  animal  experiments. 

Bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.  is  used  as  a  test  of  liver  func- 
tion; the  amount  remaining  in  the  blood  stream  after  intra- 
venous injection,  as  determined  colorimetrically,  is  considered  a 
measure  of  hepatic  dysfunction. 

Dosage. — 0.002  Gm,  per  kilogram  of  body  weight  is  injected 
intravenously  in  5  per  cent  aqueous  solution  without  dilution. 
To  carry  out  the  test,  the  solution  of  salt  may  be  injected  into 
an  arm  vein;  thirty  minutes  after  the  injection,  a  specimen  of 
blood  (from  4  to  5  cc.)  is  drawn,  preferably  from  the  opposite 
arm,  by  allowing  the  blood  to  run  from  the  needle  directly  into 
a  dry  test  tube ;  after  the  blood  has  coagulated  it  is  centrifugal- 
ized  and  the  serum  is  pipetted  into  two  small  test  tubes ;  to  one 
of  these  is  added  one  or  two  drops  of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of 
sodium  hydroxide,  and  to  the  other  tube,  a  drop  of  hydrochloric 
acid;  the  amount  of  dye  present  is  determined  by  comparison 
with  a  series  of  standards. 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore.  U.  S. 
patent  and  trademark  applied  for. 

Solution  Bromsulphalein-H.  IV.  &  D.:  Ampules  containing  3  cc.  of 
a  sterile  5  per  cent  solution  of  bromsulfalein-H.  W.  &  D. 

Bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.  is  a  white,  crystalline  powder,  soluble 
in  water,  insoluble  in  alcohol  or  acetone.  The  aqueous  solution  is 
almost  colorless. 

To  a  few  cubic  centimeters  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bromsulpha- 
lein-H.  W.  &  D.,  add  a  drop  of  hydrochloric  acid:  no  precipitate  is 
formed.  To  3  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  bromsulphalein-H.  W. 
&  D.,  add  a  drop  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution;  an  intense  bluish- 
purple  color  results.     To  2  cc.  of  a  1  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  the 


DYES  205 

salt,  add  a  drop  of  hydrochloric  acid,  heat  to  boiling  and  add  an  equal 
volume  of  boiling  1  per  cent  barium  chloride  solution:  the  liquid 
remains  clear  white  hot  (absence  of  sulfate);  on  cooling,  crystals  of  a 
difficultly  soluble  barium  salt  form  which  under  the  microscope  appear 
as  groups  of  platelets  (distinction  from  barium  sulfate).  To  a  1  per 
cent  solution  of  the  salt,  add  an  equal  volume  of  5  per  cent  calcium 
chloride  solution:  no  precipitate  forms,  even  after  the  addition  of  an 
equal  volume  of  alcohol.  Acidify  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  the  salt 
with  nitric  acid  silver  nitrate  solution:  not  more  than  a  slight  opal- 
escence is  produced  (limit  of  ionic  halogen).  To  each  of  a  series  of 
phosphate  buffer  mixtures  from  pH  6.8  to  pB.  8.8  of  5  cc.  each,  add  a 
drop  of  5  per  cent  solution  of  bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.:  there  is  no 
color  at  6.8;  a  faint  perceptible  purple  at  7.0;  the  color  increases  in 
intensity   up   to    8.4. 

Determine  the  bromine  content  of  bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.  by 
the  lime  or  the  sodium  hydroxide  combustion  method:  the  bromine 
content   is   from    37   to   38   per   cent. 

PHENOLSULFONPHTHALEIN.— Phenol  Red. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Phenol- 
sulfonphthaleinum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solutions  of  phenolsulfonphthalein  in- 
jected into  the  tissues  are  readily  absorbed,  and  are  excreted 
mainly  in  the  urine.  A  very  small  amount  is  excreted  by  the 
feces. 

Phenolsulfonphthalein  is  used  for  determining  the  functional 
activity  of  the  kidney.  When  injected  intramuscularly  or  intra- 
venously, it  begins  to  be  excreted  in  normal  cases  in  from  five 
to  ten  minutes.  In  case  of  a  deficient  functional  activity,  the 
first  appearance  of  its  secretion  is  delayed.  In  normal  cases, 
after  intramuscular  injections,  almost  the  total  amount  is 
excreted  within  two  hours  (from  60  to  80  per  cent).  Failure 
to  excrete  nearly  the  full  amount  within  two  hours  indicates  a 
deficient  functional  activity,  and  the  degree  of  this  functional 
deficiency  may  be  estimated  by  the  proportionate  amount 
excreted  within  two  hours.  The  average  normal  eliminations 
after  intravenous  administration  are  from  35  to  45  per  cent  in 
fifteen  minutes,  from  50  to  65  per  cent  in  thirty  minutes,  and 
from  65  to  80  per  cent  in  the  first  hour. 

Dosage. — One  cc.  of  a  sterile  solution,  containing  0.006  Gm. 
of  phenolsulfonphthalein  as  the  monosodium  salt,  is  injected  into 
the  lumbar  muscles.  Great  care  must  be  taken  that  all  of  the 
solution  is  injected. 

From  twenty  minutes  to  half  an  hour  before  administering 
the  test,  the  patient  is  given  from  200  to  400  cc.  of  water  in 
order  to  insure  free  urinary  secretion;  otherwise  delayed  time 
of  appearance  may  be  due  to  lack  of  secretion. 

Under  aseptic  precautions  a  catheter  is  introduced  and  the 
bladder  is  completely  emptied,  or  the  patient  is  allowed  to  empty 
it  voluntarily.  The  time  is  noted,  and  1  cc.  of  a  carefully  pre- 
pared solution  of  the  phenolsulfonphthalein  containing  6  mg. 
to  the  cubic  centimeter  is  accurately  administered  intramuscu- 
larly or  intravenously  by  means  of  an  accurately  graduated 
syringe. 


206     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

The  urine  is  allowed  to  drain  into  a  test  tube  in  which  has 
been  placed  a  drop  of  25  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution, 
and  the  time  of  the  appearance  of  the  first  faint  pinkish  tinge 
is  noted. 

In  patients  having  no  urinary  obstruction,  the  catheter  is 
withdrawn  at  the  time  of  the  appearance  of  the  drug  in  the 
urine.  If  injection  is  made  intramuscularly,  the  patient  is 
instructed  to  void  into  a  receptacle  at  the  end  of  one  hour 
and  ten  minutes,  and  into  a  second  receptacle  at  the  end  of 
the  second  hour.  If  injection  is  made  intravenously ,  the  patient 
is  instructed  to  void  into  a  receptacle  at  the  end  of  fifteen  or 
thirty  minutes  or  one  hour. 

When  the  passing  of  the  catheter  is  disagreeable  and  no 
urinary  retention  is  present,  its  use  can  be  dispensed  with  and 
the  time  of  appearance  of  the  drug  can  be  disregarded. 

The  urine  collected  is  made  alkaline  with  a  25  per  cent  solu- 
tion of  sodium  hydroxide  and  then  diluted  to  1  liter.  The 
solution  is  thoroughly  mixed  and  a  small  filtered  portion  taken, 
to  compare  with  the  standard  which  is  used  for  all  of  these  esti- 
mations. Comparison  is  made  in  a  colorimeter,  a  special  form 
of  which  has  been  devised  for  this  purpose. 

Phenolsulfonphthalein-H.  W.  &  D. — A  brand  of  phenol- 
sulfonphthalein-U.  S.   P. 

Prepared  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,   Baltimore. 

Phenolsulfonphthalein  Ampnies-H.  W.  &  D.:  One  cc.  of  solution 
contains  6  mg.  of  phenolsulphonphthalein,  in  the  form  of  the  monosodium 
salt.      Each   ampule   contains   more    than    1    cc. 

PHENOLTETRACHLORPHTHALEIN-H.  W.  &  D. 
— Phenoltetrachlorphthaleinum. — A  dibasic  dye  formed  by 
the  condensation  of  phenol  and  tetrachlorphthalic  acid  or  its 
anhydride. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Phenoltetrachlorphthalein  has  been  used 
for  the  determination  of  the  functional  activity  of  the  liver.  It 
can  be  used,  in  the  form  of  the  sodium  salt,  intravenously ;  it 
cannot  be  given  subcutaneously  or  intramuscularly.  It  has  been 
proposed  that  the  excretion  can  be  determined  by  any  one  of 
these  methods : 

1.  The  excretion  of  the  drug  in  the  stool:  Rowntree,  Hur- 
witz  and  Bloomfield  (Bull.  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  24:327,  1913) ; 
Whipple,  Peightal  and  Clark  {Bull.  Johns  Hopkins  Hosp.  24: 
343,  1913) ;  Rowntree,  Marshall  and  Chesney  (Proc.  Am.  A. 
Phys.  &  Surg.,  1914;  /.  A.  M.  A.  63:1533  [Oct.  31]  1914). 

2.  The  excretion  of  the  drug  in  the  duodenum  by  means  of  a 
duodenal  tube:  Aaron,  Beck  and  Schneider  (/.  A.  M.  A., 
Nov.  19,  1921,  p.  1631). 

3.  Its  disappearance  from  the  blood  stream :  S.  M.  Rosenthal 
(/.  Pharmacol.  &  Exper.  Therap.  19:385  [June]  1922)  ;  H.  H. 
Rosenfield  and  E.  F,  Schneiders  (/.  A.  M,  A„  March  17,  1923, 
p.  743), 


DYES  207 

Dosage. — From  0.05  to  0.4  Gm.  administered  in  the  form  of 
the  disodium  salt.  The  solution  must  not  be  exposed  unduly 
long,  as  the  salt  is  sensitive  to  the  action  of  the  carbon  dioxide 
of  the  atmosphere. 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,   Baltimore.     No  U.   S. 

patent  or  trademark. 
Ampules  Phenoltetrachlorphthalein-H.  IV.  &  D.:    Each  ampule  contains 

more    than    2    cc.    of    a    solution    of    disodium    phenoltetrachlorphthalein, 

each  cubic  centimeter  representing  0.05  Gm.  of  phenoltetrachlorphthalein- 

H.   W.   &  D. 

Phenoltetrachlorphthalein-H.  W.  &  D.  is  a  cream  white  powder; 
odorless;  permanent  in  the  air.  It  is  practically  insoluble  in  water; 
very  soluble  in  acetone,  soluble  in  alcohol,  ether  and  glacial  acetic 
acid;  slightly  soluble  in  chloroform,  benzene  and  carbon  disulfide.  It 
dissolves  in  solutions  of  the  alkalis  and  carbonates  to  form  solutions 
which  are  deep  purple  when  concentrated,  but  which  change  to  violet- 
red  on  dilution,  and  in  very  dilute  solutions  assume  a  bluish  tint 
(distinction  from  phenolphthalein). 

Phenoltetrachlorphthalein  does  not  melt  when  heated  to  300  C.  It 
does  not  respond  to  the  U.  S.  P.  test  for  heavy  metals  as  described 
under  phenolphthalein. 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  phenoltetrachlorphthalein-H.  W.  &  D.,  accu- 
rately weighed,  to  constant  weight  at  115  C.:  the  loss  is  not  more 
than  0.5  per  cent.  To  about  5  Gm.  of  the  substance,  accurately 
weighed,  add  25  cc.  of  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  heat  to 
about  70  C.  and  stir.  Dilute  with  warm  water  to  about  75  cc,  filter 
through  a  tared  Gooch  crucible,  dry  to  constant  weight  at  115  C.  and 
weigh:  the  weight  of  the  insoluble  matter  (tetrachlorfluorane)  does  not 
exceed  0.2  per  cent.  Incinerate  about  2  Gm.  of  the  substance,  accu- 
rately weighed:   the  ash  does  not  exceed  0.15   per  cent. 

PHENTETIOTHALEIN  SODIUM.  —  Phentetiotha- 
leinis     Sodium. — Phenoltetraiodophthalein     Sodium. — NaO.O  : 

I 1 

C.CeL.C :  CeH^OCeHiONa.  The  sodium  salt  of  a  dibasic  dye, 
phenoltetraiodophthalein.  Phentetiothalein  sodium  contains  from 
56  per  cent  to  59  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Phentetiothalein  sodium  is  used  for  the 
roentgenologic  examination  of  the  gallbladder  and  simultaneous 
test  of  hepatic  function.  It  is  said  to  be  better  suited  for 
intravenous  injection  than  tetiothalein  sodium,  because  the 
dosage  is  smaller  and  better  tolerated,  and  because  one  injection 
serves  at  the  same  time  for  cholecystography  and  liver  function 
test.  Following  the  intravenous  injection,  the  solution  appears 
in  the  normal  gallbladder  in  sufficient  concentration  to  cast  a 
shadow  to  the  roentgen  rays  and  if  the  liver  is  damaged  it  is 
retained  in  the  blood  in  amounts  indicative  of  the  extent  of 
impairment.  It  is  claimed  to  cause  little  or  no  toxic  reaction. 
Myocardial  insufficiency  and  uremia  are  considered  contra- 
indications, and  jaundice  enjoins  caution. 

Dosage. — Intravenously  for  visualization  of  the  gallbladder 
and  simultaneous  test  of  liver  function,  40  mg,  per  kilogram 
of  body  weight ;  the  dose  need  not  exceed  2.5  Gm.,  regardless 
of  weight.  The  dye  is  dissolved  in  freshly  distilled  water, 
filtered  through  fine  filter  paper,  and  sterilized  for  fifteen  min- 


208     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

utes  in  a  boiling  water  bath.  A  solution  of  8  per  cent  has 
been  found  satisfactory.  The  solution  is  injected  intravenously 
by  gravity  or  syringe  method,  either  in  the  morning  between 
8  and  9  or  in  the  evening  between  5  and  9.  If  given  in  the 
evening  the  evening  meal  should  be  omitted  and  no  food  given 
until  the  first  roentgenogram  is  taken  in  the  morning.  At  this 
time  a  fat  meal  is  given  and  the  roentgenogram  taken  one  hour 
after  the  meal  and,  if  desired,  another  three  hours  after  the 
meal  to  determine  the  rapidity  and  characteristics  of  emptying. 
More  satisfactory  results  are  probably  obtained  if  the  injection 
is  made  in  the  morning  with  the  stomach  empty,  omitting 
breakfast  and  lunch  and  taking  roentgenograms  four,  eight  and 
twenty-four  hours  after  the  injection.  For  gallbladder  visual- 
ization alone  the  drug  is  administered  orally :  4  Gm.  in  the 
form  of  plain  gelatin  capsules  (8  capsules  of  0.5  Gm,  each), 
or  dissolved  in  30  cc.  of  distilled  water  and  added  to  120  to 
240  cc.  of  grape  juice,  to  be  taken  during  and  after  the  evening 
meal,  which  should  be  of  the  usual  amount  but  free  of  fat 
(the  aqueous  solution  of  the  drug  should  not  be  more  than 
48  hours  old).  Meticulous  roentgen  ray  technic  is  necessary, 
and  if  the  interpretation  of  the  cholecystogram  is  in  question 
a  check  determination  should  be  made  either  by  the  oral  or, 
if  preferred,  by  the  intravenous  method.  The  liver  function 
test  cannot  be  made  by  this  method  because  the  dye  is  not 
absorbed  rapidly  enough  into  the  blood. 

To  make  the  determination  of  liver  function,  blood  is  collected 
one-half  hour  and  again  preferably  one  hour  after  the  intra- 
venous injection.  The  serum  is  alkalinized  with  a  small  drop  of 
5  per  cent  solution  of  sodium  hydroxide  and  compared  to  a  set 
of  standard  solutions  as  suggested  by  Rosenthal  (An  Improved 
Method  for  Using  Phenoltetrachlorphthalein  as  a  Liver  Func- 
tion Test,  /.  Pharmacol.  &  Exper.  Therap.  19:385  [June]  1922) 
and  modified  by  Cole,  Gopher  and  Graham  (Simultaneous 
Cholecystography  and  Determination  of  Liver  Function,  /.  A. 
M.  ^.  90:1111   [April  7]  1928. 

Phentetiothalein  sodium  occurs  as  bronze  purple,  odorless,  slightly 
hygroscopic  granules.     It  is  soluble  in  water  and  alcohol. 

Dissolve  1  Gm._  of  phentetiothalein  sodium  in  water:  a  clear  solution 
appears.  Add  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  drop  by  drop  to  1  cc.  of  a 
10  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  phentetiothalein  sodium:  a  yellow  colored 
precipitate  appears.  Add  sodium  hydroxide  solution  in  large  excess  to 
1  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  phentetiothalein  sodium:  a 
permanent  purple  color  appears. 

Intimately  mix  0.1  Gm.  of  the_  salt  with  1.0  Gm.  of  anhydrous 
sodium  carbonate  and  heat  to  fusion;  cool  the  mixture,  dissolve  in 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  filter;  add  a  few  drops  of  hydrogen 
peroxide  solution  and  agitate  the  mixture  with  a  few  cubic  centimeters 
of    chloroform:    the    chloroform   layer    is    colored    violet    {iodine). 

Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  of  phentetiothalein 
sodium  to  a  flat  type  weighing  bottle  and  dry  in  a  vacuum  at  80  C.  to 
constant  weight:  the  loss  in  weight  is  not  more  than  5   per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  of  phentetiothalein 
sodium  to  a  bomb  tube;  determine  the  iodine  by  the  Carius  method: 
the  amount  of  iodine  found  is  not  less  than  56  per  cent  nor  more  than 
59  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dry  basis. 


DYES  209 

Iso-Iodeikon. — A  brand  of  phentetiothalein  sodium-N.  N.  R. 
Manufactured    by    the    Mallinckrodt    Chemical    Works,    St.    Louis.      No 
U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Iso-Iodeikon,  2.5   Gm.  Ampoules. 

SOLUBLE  lODOPHTHALEIN.— Tetraiodophenolphtha- 
lein  Sodium. — Tetraiodophthalein  Sodium. — Tetiothalein  Sodium. 
— "The  disodium  salt  of  tetraiodophenolphthalein.  It  contains 
not  less  than  85  per  cent  of  tetraiodophenolphthalein.  The 
separated  tetraiodophenolphthalein  contains  not  less  than  61  per 
cent  and  not  more  than  62  per  cent  of  I."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  lodo- 
phthaleinum  Solubile. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Soluble  iodophthalein  is  used  for  the  roent- 
genologic examination  of  the  gallbladder.  Following  the  intra- 
venous injection  or,  if  decomposition  is  avoided,  the  oral 
administration,  the  substance  appears  in  the  normal  gallbladder 
in  sufficient  concentration  to  cast  a  shadow  to  the  roentgen  rays. 
After  injection,  a  few  of  the  patients  may  have  unpleasant  sen- 
sations, such  as  dizziness,  nausea,  various  body  pains,  and  fall 
in  blood  pressure.  The  transitory  fall  in  blood  pressure  may  be 
relieved  by  the  administration  of  from  0.5  to  1  cc.  of  epinephrine 
hydrochloride  solution  (1  in  1,000)  intramuscularly.  Soluble 
iodophthalein  is  useful  as  a  diagnostic  agent,  but  workers  are 
cautioned  as  to  the  selection  of  types  of  cases  in  which  it  is 
indicated  and  its  possible  toxicity  in  large  doses.  More  than 
1,000  patients,  however,  are  reported  to  have  been  examined  by 
this  method  with  no  deaths.  Myocardial  insufficiency  and 
uremia  are  considered  contraindications,  and  jaundice  enjoins 
caution. 

Dosage. — To  visualize  the  gallbladder  in  a  patient  weighing 
between  115  and  160  pounds  (52  and  72.6  Kg.),  3  Gm.  of  soluble 
iodophthalein  is  dissolved  in  24  cc,  or  3.5  Gm.  of  soluble 
iodophthalein  is  dissolved  in  28  cc.  of  freshly  distilled  water ;  the 
solution  is  then  sterilized  by  heating  the  container  in  boiling 
water  for  twenty  minutes.  For  patients  weighing  over  160 
pounds  the  maximum  dose  should  not  exceed  3.5  Gm.  For 
patients  weighing  less  than  115  pounds  (52  Kg.),  the  amount  of 
salt  is  to  be  reduced.  The  solution  is  injected  intravenously  in 
two  doses,  one-half  hour  apart,  in  the  morning  before  breakfast. 
Care  must  be  taken  not  to  allow  extravasation,  in  order  to 
avoid  tissue  necrosis.  Breakfast  is  omitted.  At  noon  a  glass  of 
milk  is  permitted,  and  the  evening  meal  is  allowed  as  usual. 
Water  by  mouth  is  allowed  at  all  times. 

Soluble  iodophthalein  may  be  administered  orally:  4  Gm.  in 
the  form  of  plain  gelatin  capsules  (8  capsules  of  0.5  Gm.  each), 
or  dissolved  in  30  cc.  of  distilled  water  and  added  to  120  to 
240  cc.  of  grape  juice,  to  be  taken  during  and  after  the  evening 
meal,  which  should  be  of  the  usual  amount  but  free  of  fat 
(the  aqueous  solution  of  the  drug  should  not  be  more  than  48 


210     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

hours  old).  Keratin  coated  capsules  may  be  used.  Meticulous 
roentgen  technic  is  necessary,  and  if  the  interpretation  of  the 
cholecystogram  is  in  question  a  control  determination  should 
be  made  either  by  the  oral  or,  if  preferred,  by  the  intravenous 
method.  Soluble  iodophthalein  is  said  to  be  preferable  for 
intravenous  injection. 

lodeikon. — A  brand  of  soluble  iodophthalein-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis.  No 
U.   S.  patent.     U.   S.  trademark  222,470. 

lodeikon,  3.5  Gin.  Ampules. 

lodeikon  Capsules-Abbott. — Each  keratin-coated  capsule  contains  iodei- 
kon,  0.25  Gm. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Tetraiodophenolphthalein      Sodium      Salt-Eastman. — A 

brand  of  soluble  iodophthalein-U,  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Eastman  Kodak  Company,  Rochester,  N.  Y. 
No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

The  Triphenylmethane  (Rosaniline)  Dyes 

Of  the  derivatives  of  triphenylmethane  and  its  homologue 
tolyldiphenylmethane,  the  most  interesting  medicinally  are  those 
which  result  from  the  introduction  of  amino  groups  forming 
pararosaniline  (triaminotriphenylcarbinol  (NH2C6H4)3COH) 
and  rosaniline  (triaminotriphenyltolycarbinol  (NH2C6H4)2(CH3. 
NH2CeH3).COH).  On  treating  rosaniline  with  hydrochloric 
acid,  the  hydroxyl  of  the  carbinol  group  is  split  off,  permitting 
the  formation  of  a  quinoid  group ;  thus  is  formed  a  typical  dye 
known  as  fuchsin,  NH.CeH..CH3.NH2C0H3C:C6H4:NH2Cl.  The 
red  color  of  pararosaniline  chloride  or  fuchsin  is  changed  to 
violet  by  the  entrance  of  a  methyl  group  in  the  amino  groups, 
the  intensity  of  the  violet  color  increasing  with  an  increasing 
number  of  methyl  groups.  Thus,  there  are  the  closely  related 
gentian  violet,  crystal  violet  and  methyl  violet.  Gentian  violet 
is  a  mixture  of  pentamethylpararosaniline  chloride  and  hexa- 
methylpararosaniline  chloride ;  by  some  it  is  defined  as  a  mixture 
of  methyl  violet  and  crystal  violet.  Crystal  violet  is  a  relatively 
pure  form  of  hexamethylpararosaniline  chloride;  methyl  violet 
is  considered  to  contain  mostly  pentamethylpararosaniline  chlor- 
ide with  some  of  the  hexaderivative  and  probably  some  tetra- 
derivative  also.  Hence,  one  definition  of  gentian  violet  is  prac- 
tically the  same  as  the  other.  It  seems  likely  that  in  therapeutics 
it  will  be  found  that  there  is  little  difference  between  the  penta 
and  hexa  derivatives  and  the  mixtures  of  the  two,  so  that  the 
one  most  easily  obtained  in  pure  form  (crystal  violet)  will  be 
the  one  most  used.  The  material  which  has  been  used  by  the 
workers  so  far,  however,  has  been  gentian  violet. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Gentian  violet  was  introduced  as  an 
antiseptic  by  J.  Stelling  in  1890  and  has  recently  been  advocated 
by   Churchman,   who   found   that   solutions   of  the   dye  had   a 


DYES  211 

selective  action  on  certain  bacteria  and  that  the  majority  of 
gram-negative  organisms  survived  exposure  to  gentian  violet 
solutions  in  strengths  far  in  excess  of  that  required  to  kill 
gram-positive  organisms ;  in  fact,  the  action  of  the  dye  is 
sufficiently  selective,  so  that  often  a  "strain  within  a  species" 
is  not  affected.  Churchman's  work,  however,  was  done  largely 
with  a  product  containing  dextrin  as  a  diluent.  Gentian  violet 
is  a  useful  antiseptic  for  infected  wounds,  mucous  membranes 
and  serous  surfaces.  Its  chief  application  has  been  in  the  treat- 
ment of  affections  of  the  pleural  cavity  and  of  the  joints, 
particularly  in  empyema  and  arthritis — affections  in  which 
staphylococci,  B.  pyocyaneus  and  B.  diphtheriae  are  the  causa- 
tive agents.  Young  and  Hill  have  also  proposed  the  use  of 
gentian  violet  intravenously  in  staphylococcus  septicemia, 
chronic  cystitis  (from  staphylococcus),  osteomyelitis  (with 
staphylococcus  present).  The  effects  are  probably  due  to  fioc- 
culation  and  colloidal  "reactions,"  which  are  not  without  danger. 
Intravenous  injection  of  the  dye  in  doses  of  5  mg.  per  kilogram 
of  body  weight  causes  marked  cyanosis,  which  persists  for  a 
few  hours  after  injection,  owing  to  the  intense  color  of  the 
dye.  In  feeble  patients,  cardiac  stimulants  should  be  given. 
Evidence  has  been  advanced  that  gentian  violet,  administered 
in  enteric  coated  tablets,  is  of  value  as  an  anthelmintic  in  the 
treatment  of  Strongloides  infection.  Churchman  also  has 
found  that  acid  fuchsin  (the  acid  sodium  salt  of  fuchsin 
disulfonic  and  trisulfonic  acids)  is  in  some  respects  the 
opposite  of  that  of  gentian  violet  in  selective  power,  a  stained 
culture  of  B.  prodigiosus  being  killed  by  the  acid  fuchsin,  while 
the  gram  positive  B.  anthracis  would  be  unaffected.  The  selec- 
tive action  of  acid  fuchsin,  however,  is  clearly  brought  out  only 
when  the  organisms  are  exposed  to  the  dye  with  slight  elevation 
of  temperature  (about  50  C).  Acid  fuchsin  is  incompatible  with 
gentian  violet,  and  the  compatibility  of  all  mixtures  of  dyes 
should  be  determined  before  any  combination  is  prepared. 
Churchman  claims,  however,  that  acriflavine  possesses  much  the 
same  selectivity  as  acid  fuchsin,  so  he  has  proposed  the  use 
of  a  mixture  of  these  two  dyes.  The  effectiveness  of  such  a 
solution  has  not  yet  been  established  clinically.  None  of  the 
rosaniline  dyes  is  a  strong  bactericide. 

CRYSTAL  VIOLET.  —  Hexamethyltriamino-triphenyl- 
methane. — Hexamethylpararosaniline  chloride. —  (CH3)2N.C6H4. 
(CH3)2N.C6H4.C  :  CcH^ :  N.(CH3)2C1. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  The  Triphenyl- 
methane   (Rosaniline)   Dyes. 

Dosage. — For  direct  application,  a  solution  of  from  1  in  500 
to  1  in  1,000  may  be  employed.  For  the  treatment  of  burns, 
local  applications  in  the  form  of  a  spray  or  jelly  containing 
1  per  cent  of  crystal  violet  have  been  employed. 

Crystal  violet  occurs  as  a  dark  green  amorphous  powder  having  a 
light  metallic  luster.  It  is  soluble  in  alcohol,  chloroform,  glycerin  and 
water,    practically   insoluble   in   benzene   and   ether. 


212     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Reduce  about  0.2  Gm.  of  crystal  violet  with  zinc  and  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid  until  colorless,  filter  through  paper:  no  immediate  colora- 
tion occurs,  but  a  blue  zone  appears  at  point  of  contact  when  the  solu- 
tion is   spotted  with  ammonia  water. 

When  tested  for  arsenic  according  to  U.  S.  P.  XI,  the  product  should 
meet  the  requirements  for  arsenic  (p.  438,  Arsenic  Test).  To  about 
1  Gm.  of  crystal  violet  previously  ignited  in  a  platinum  dish  with 
an  excess  of  sulfuric  acid,  add  5  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  evaporate 
to  dryness,  treat  the  residue  obtained  with  20  cc.  of  a  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid  (1  part  of  acid  and  20  parts  of  water),  warm,  filter  through 
paper  and  divide  into  two  portions:  a  faint  precipitate  occurs  on  satura- 
ation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  {heavy  metals);  no  precipitation  on  the 
addition  of  1   cc.  of  potassium  ferrocyanide  solution   {zinc). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  crystal  violet,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant 
weight  at  100  C. :  the  loss  does  not  exceed  2.5  per  cent.  Incinerate 
about  1  Gm.  of  crystal  violet,  accurately  weighed,  previously  dried  at 
100  C.:  the  ash  does  not  exceed  1  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of 
crystal  violet,  previously  dried  at  100  C.,  in  300  cc.  of  alcohol,  heat 
to  boiling;  collect  the  insoluble  matter,  if  any,  in  a  tared  Gooch 
crucible;  wash  the  insoluble  matter  with  hot  alcohol,  dry  the  insoluble 
matter  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.:  the  insoluble  matter  does  not 
exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  crystal  violet  to  a 
500  cc.  Kjeldahl  flask  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according 
to  the  official  method  described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of 
Analysis  of  the  Association  of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third 
edition,  page  20,  chapter  2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen 
corresponds  to  not  less  than  10  per  cent,  nor  more  than  11  per  cent 
when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of 
crystal  violet  to  a  Parr  sulfur  bomb;  determine  the  chlorine  content 
by  the  Parr  method:  the  amount  of  chlorine  found  corresponds  to  not 
less  than  8.4  per  cent  nor  more  than  8.9  per  cent  when  calculated  to 
the  dried  substance.  Dissolve  about  5  Gm.  of  crystal  violet,  accurately 
weighed,  in  400  cc.  of  water,  previously  boiled,  cool  under  carbon 
dioxide  and  make  up  to  a  500  cc.  volume  in  a  volumetric  flask;  transfer 
an  aliquot  of  50  cc.  to  a  mixture  of  20  cc.  alcohol,  10  cc.  glacial 
acetic  acid,  50  cc.  of  a  20  per  cent  solution  of  potassium  and  sodium 
tartrate  and  50  cc.  of  water,  and  while  continually  boiling  titrate  with 
tenth-normal  titanium  trichloride  solution:  the  percentage  of  purity 
(using  factor  0.020386)  corresponds  to  not  less  than  96  per  cent  nor 
more  than   100  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 

Crystal  Violet  Medicinal-Calco.— A  brand  of  crystal 
violet-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Calco  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  Bound  Brook,  N.  J. 
No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Crystal  Violet  Jelly-Calco:  A  1  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  crystal 
violet-N.  N.  R.   in  a  gum  tragacanth  jelly  base.      • 

GENTIAN  VIOLET  MEDICINAL.— A  mixture  of 
pentamethylpararosaniline  and  hexamethylpararosaniline  chlor- 
ides. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  The  Triphenyl- 
methane  (Rosaniline)  Dyes. 

Dosage. — For  direct  application,  a  solution  of  from  1  in  500 
to  1  in  1,000  may  be  employed;  for  instillation,  a  1  in  10,000 
solution.  For  intravenous  use,  Young  and  Hill  recommend  5 
mg.  per  kilogram  of  body  weight,  injected  in  0.5  per  cent 
dilution.    For  Strongloides  infection,  0.03  Gm. 

Gentian  violet  occurs  as  a  dark  green  ("bronze")  powder  or  greenish 
glistening  pieces  having  a  metallic  luster.  It  is  soluble  in  water  (1  in 
10),  alcohol  or  chloroform;  insoluble  in  ether.  Its  solution  in  alcohol 
or  chloroform  has  a  deeper  hue  than  the  same  strength  aqueous  solution. 


BENZEDRINE  213 

Concentrated  sulfuric  acid  dissolves  gentian  violet  \yith  an  orange  to 
brownish-red  color;  on  slowly  diluting  this  solution  in  distilled  water, 
the  solution  assumes    a  brown,   then  a   green  and  finally   a   blue  color. 

Add,  drop  by  drop,  tannic  acid  solution  to  a  solution  of  gentian 
violet  (1  in  500):  a  deep  blue  precipitate  forms  (basic  color).  To  5  cc. 
of  an  aqueous  solution  of  gentian  violet,  add  a  few  drops  of  hydro- 
chloric acid  and  about  0.5  Gm.  of  zinc  dust;  rapid  decolorization  ensues. 
Place  a  few  drops  of  the  decolorized  solution  near  a  few  drops  of 
ammonia  water  on  filter  paper:  the  zone  of  contact  assumes  a  blue  color. 

Add  hydrochloric  acid  slowly,  drop  by  drop,  with  agitation  to  an 
aqueous  solution  of  the  dye  (1  in  500):  the  violet  color  changes 
gradually  to  bluish-green,  to  green  and  finally  to  brownish-yellow,  the 
solution  remaining  clear;  now  dilute  gradually  the  solution:  the  color 
changes  in  reverse  order  as  the  hydrogen-ion  concentration  is  increased. 
Dissolve  1  Gm.  of  the  dye  in  boiling  alcohol;  cool;  filter  through 
Gooch  filter;  wash  residue  with  alcohol  until  washings  cease  to  be 
colored  violet  and  dry  at  100  C.:  the  weight  of  insoluble  material 
corresponds   to  not  more  than  1   per  cent   (dextrin). 

When  tested  for  arsenic  according  to  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia,  X, 
the  product  should  meet  requirements  for  the  test  for  arsenic  (p.  428, 
Arsenic  Test). 

Incinerate  1  Gm.  of  gentian  violet:  not  more  than  0.01  Gm.  of  ash 
remains. 

Gentian  Violet  Improved  Medicinal. — A  brand  of  gentian 
violet  medicinal-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  The  Coleman  and  Bell  Company,  Norwood,  Ohio. 
No  U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Gentian  Violet  Medicinal-"National." — A  brand  of  gen- 
tian violet  medicinal-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  The  National  Aniline  and  Chemical  Company,  Inc., 
New  York.     No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Tablets   Gentian    Violet   Medicinal-" National,"    0.0324    Gm.    (Y2    grain). 

Enteric  Coated  Tablets  Gentian  Violet  Medicinal-" National,"  0.0324.Gm 
(^2  grain):  The  tablets  are  coated  with  phenyl  salicylate  containing  some 
keratin. 


EPINEPHRINE     AND     RELATED 
PREPARATIONS 
Phenylalkylamine  Derivatives 

Benzedrine 

BENZEDRINE. — Racemicdesoxy-nor-ephedrine. — Racemic 
benzyl-methyl  carbinamine. — A  synthetically  prepared  racemic 
mixture  of  bases  having  the  formula  C6H5CH2CHNH2CH3. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Benzedrine  produces  local  effects  similar 
to  those  of  ephedrine.  Local  application,  by  means  of  a  spray 
or  dropper,  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  in  liquid  petrolatum,  or 
inhalation  of  the  vapors  of  benzedrine  or  its  carbonate  produces 
shrinking  of  the  nasal  mucosa  in  head  colds,  sinusitis,  vaso- 
motor rhinitis,  hay  fever  and  asthma.  Both  benzedrine  and 
its  carbonate  (the  latter  readily  forms  on  exposure  of  benzedrine 
to  air)  are  volatile. 


214     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — As  a  spray,  a  1  per  cent  solution  in  liquid  petro- 
latum ;  as  an  inhalant,  one  or  two  inhalations  through  each 
nostril  at  hourly  intervals,  has  been  recommended.  Continued 
overdosage  should  be  guarded  against,  as  this  has  caused  rest- 
lessness and  sleeplessness ;  but  no  serious  reactions  have  been 
observed. 

Manufactured  by  Smith,  Kline  &  French  Laboratories,  Philadelphia, 
Pa.  U.  S.  patent  1,921,424  (Aug.  8,  1933;  expires  1950)  1,879,003  (Sept. 
27,  1932;  expires  1949)  and  2,015,408  (Sept.  24,  1935;  expires  1952). 
U.    S.   trademark   272.377. 

Benzedrine  Inhaler:  Each  inhaler  tube  contains,  at  the  time  of  packing, 
benzedrine  0.325    Gm.,  oil  of  lavender  0.097  Gm.,  and  menthol  0.032  Gm. 
Benzedrine   Solution:  Benzedrine    1    per   cent,   oil   of  lavender   0.33   per 
cent,   in   liquid   petrolatum. 

Benzedrine  occurs  as  a  colorless,  mobile  liquid,  boiling  at  200-203  C, 
with  slight  decomposition.  The  specific  gravity  at  25  C.  is  0.931.  The 
vapor  pressure  at  ordinary  temperature  is  relatively  high,  and  the 
substance  possesses  a  strong  basic  odor  and  a  burning  taste.  It  is 
soluble  in  ether  and  alcohol  and  slightly  soluble  in  water. 

Place  1  Gm.  of  benzedrine  in  an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  50  cc.  of 
water  and  5  cc.  of  40  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  then  add 
benzoyl  chloride,  0.5  cc.  at  a  time;  shake  the  flask  after  each  addition; 
add  the  benzoyl  chloride  until  no  more  precipitate  forms  after  an  addi- 
tion. Recrystallize  twice  from  50  per  cent  alcohol  solution,  dry  the 
crystals;  the  melting  point  is  134-135  C.  The  nitrogen  content  of  the 
benzoyl  derivative  by  the  micro  Dumas  method  is  not  less  than  5.70  nor 
more   than    5.95    per   cent. 

Transfer  0.5  Gm.  of  benzedrine,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  tared 
weighing  bottle  and  place  on  the  steam  bath  for  one  hour.  The  residue 
is  not  more  than  0.5  per  cent  (nonvolatile  compounds).  Dissolve  1  cc. 
of  benzedrine  in  10  cc.  of  liquid  petrolatum  U.  S.  P.  X  (anhydrous): 
no  turbidity  is  produced  (water). 

Suspend  about  1  Gm.  of  benzedrine,  accurately  weighed,  in  10  cc. 
of  water  and  titrate  with  half-normal  sulfuric  acid,  using  methyl 
red  as  an  indicator:  the  acid  used  corresponds  to  not  less  than  95  per 
cent  nor  more  than  100  per  cent  of  the  base  (1  cc.  half -normal  sulfuric 
acid  is  equivalent  to  0.0675   Gm.  of  base). 

Determine  carbon,  hydrogen  and  nitrogen  by  micro  combustion 
methods.  The  carbon  should  be  not  less  than  79.7  nor  more  than 
80.2  per  cent;  the  hydrogen,  not  less  than  9.6  nor  more  than  9.9  per 
cent;  and  the  nitrogen,  not  less  than  10.2  nor  more  than  10.6  per 
cent. 

Benzedrine  Inhaler:  Transfer  the  cotton  filling  to  a  Kjeldahl  distilla- 
tion flask,  add  250  cc.  of  water  and  1  Gm.  of_  sodium  hydroxide;  distil 
150  cc.  into  20  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sulfuric  acid,  titrate  the  excess  acid 
with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  base  is  equivalent 
to  not  less  than  0.305  Gm.  nor  more  than  0.360  Gm.  per  tube. 

Transfer  the  solution  from  the  titration  to  a  separatory  funnel,  extract 
with  30  cc.  of  ether,  transfer  the  aqueous  layer  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask, 
add  2  cc.  of  40  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  0.5  cc.  of 
benzoyl  chloride  and  shake  the  flask  and  contents  for  ten  minutes;  set 
aside  for  two  hours;  add  0.5  cc.  of  benzoyl  chloride,  shake  the  flask 
and  contents  for  ten  minutes,  set  aside;  at  the  end  of  two  hours  add 
0.5  cc.  of  benzoyl  chloride,  shake  the  flask  for  ten  minutes,  allow  to 
stand  on  the  steam  bath  until  the  odor  of  benzoyl  chloride  has  dis- 
appeared; remove  the  precipitate  by  filtration,  wash  with  cold  water, 
dry    at  90   C.;   the  melting  point  is   130-135   C. 

Benzedrine  Solution:  Transfer  an  accurately  weighed  sarnpleof  benze- 
drine solution  weighing  about  15  Gm.  to  a  Kjeldahl  distillation  flask, 
add  5  Gm.  of  talc,  250  cc.  of  water  and  1  Gm.  of  sodium  hydroxide; 
distil  150  cc.  into  20  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sulfuric  acid,  titrate  the 
excess  acid  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  base  is 
equivalent  to  not  less  than  0.95  per  cent  nor  more  than   1.05  per  cent. 

Transfer  the  foregoing  solution  to  a  separatory  funnel  and  proceed 
to  determine  the  melting  point  of  benzoyl  derivative  as  outlined  under 
"Benzedrine  Inhaler." 


EPHEDRINE  215 

Ephedrine 

Ephedrine  is  an  alkaloid  first  obtained  by  Nagai  in  1887  from 
a  Chinese  herb,  ma  huang  (Ephedra  eqiiisetina).  Chemically, 
ephedrine  is  a-hydroxy-/3-methylamino-propylbenzene  (CeHs. 
CHOH.CH(NHCH3).CH3).  Structurally,  it  is  closely  related 
to  epinephrine,  and  like  epinephrine  it  is  levorotatory ;  but  it  is 
more  stable.  Its  salts  are,  in  general,  soluble  in  water  and  in 
alcohol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ephedrine  produces  effects  somewhat 
similar  to  those  of  epinephrine.  However,  it  is  difficult  to 
explain  its  actions  without  postulating  a  direct  stimulation  of 
smooth  muscle  as  well  as  a  stimulating  effect  on  the  sympa- 
thetic nervous  system.  In  small  doses  ephedrine  has  a  stimu- 
lating action  upon  the  heart,  increasing  the  rate  and  the 
strength  of  contractions  and  raising  the  blood  pressure.  In 
large  and  toxic  doses  the  drug  has  a  depressant  action  upon 
the  heart  muscle.  It  causes  a  rather  lasting  rise  of  blood 
pressure,  on  intravenous  or  intramuscular  injection,  due  mainly 
to  vasoconstriction.  Other  effects  similar  to  those  of  epineph- 
rine are  dilatation  of  the  bronchi  and  mydriasis  after  local  or 
systematic  administration.  On  local  application  to  mucous  mem- 
branes or  wounds  it  contracts  the  capillaries  to  a  moderate 
degree  and  thus  diminishes  hyperemia  and  reduces  swelling. 
Ephedrine  is  used  locally  in  the  eye  to  dilate  the  pupils,  and  in 
the  nostrils  to  shrink  the  congested  mucosa  in  rhinitis  and  sinu- 
sitis. The  systemic  effects  can  be  obtained  by  oral  as  well  as 
by  hypodermic  or  intramuscular  administration.  Ephedrine  is 
useful  against  asthma,  especially  to  prevent  the  attacks ;  but  it 
often  fails  partially  or  completely.  It  is  also  used  against  hay 
fever  and  urticaria.  It  tends  to  produce  symptoms  of  the 
anxiety  complex.  This  may  constitute  a  definite  contraindica- 
tion to  its  use.  Its  use  in  serious  heart  disease  is  not  yet  con- 
sidered safe.  Ephedrine  is  used  to  sustain  the  blood  pressure  in 
spinal  anesthesia,  but  it  is  still  questionable  whether  the  drug 
is  of  real  benefit  in  shock,  hypotension  and  circulatory  collapse 
and  hemorrhage.    It  is  without  value  in  Addison's  disease. 

Dosage. — Salts  of  ephedrine  are  quite  effective  whether  given 
orally,  intramuscularly,  intravenously,  or  by  any  ordinary  path 
of  administration.  As  a  spray  it  is  used  in  0.5  to  2  per  cent 
solution  of  a  salt  of  ephedrine ;  in  ophthalmologic  work  it  has 
been  used  in  4  per  cent  solution.  Orally,  the  usual  dose  for 
adults  is  from  20  to  50  mg.  (Ys  to  %  grain)  every  3  to  4 
hours. 

EPHEDRINE.  — "An  alkaloid  obtained  from  Ephedra 
eqiiisetina  Bunge,  Ephedra  sinica  Stapf  and  other  species  of 
Ephedra  (Fam.  Gnetaceae)."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Ephedrina. 


216     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  the  ephedrine  salts. 
The  free  alkaloid  is  employed  in  mediums,  such  as  oils,  in  which 
it  is  more  soluble  than  the  salts. 

_  Dosage. — One  per  cent,  in  oil,  may  be  used  for  local  applica- 
tion to  mucous  membranes.  Orally,  the  usual  dose  for  adults 
is  from  20  to  50  mg.  (^  to  %  grain)  every  3  to  4  hours. 

Ephedrine-Abbott. — A  brand  of  ephedrine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No 
U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Ephedrine  Inhalant-Abbott:  A  1  per  cent  solution  of  ephedrine- Abbott 
in  light  liquid  petrolatum  tinted  pink  and  perfumed  with  oil  of  rose.  No 
U.  S.  trademark. 

Ephedrine-Lilly. — A  brand  of  ephedrine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Inhalant   Ephedrine    Compound-Lilly:   A    solution    containing   ephedrine- 

Lilly,  1  Gm.  in  a  liquid  composed  of  menthol,  0.66  Gm. ;  camphor, 
0.66  Gm.;  oil  of  thyme,  0.31  cc. ;  liquid  petrolatum  to  make  100  cc. 
U.  S.  patent  1,743,992  (Jan.  14,  1930;  expires  1947)  and  1,762,128 
(June   3,    1930;   expires   1947).     No  U.   S.  trademark. 

Inhalant  Ephedrine  ( Plain) -Lilly :  A  solution  made  by  dissolving 
ephedrine  base,  1  Gm.,  in  cottonseed  oil  and  perfuming  and  flavoring 
with  cinnamic  aldehyde,  benzaldehyde  and  jasmine  extract  tinted  with 
butter  yellow.  Sufficient  liquid  petrolatum  is  then  added  to  make  100  cc. 
The  product  does  not,  however,  contain  ephedrine  base,  which  reacts 
with  the  aldehydes;  the  finished  substance  contains  ephedrine  cinnamic 
aldehyde,  0.85  Gm.,  and  ephedrine  benzaldehyde,  0.88  Gm.,  in  each  100  cc. 
of  inhalant. 

Ointment  Ephedrine  Co-mpaund:  Ephedrine-Lilly,  1  Gm.;  menthol,  0.65 
Gm.;  camphor,  0.65  Gm.,  oil  of  thyme,  0.375  Gm.;  hydrous  wool  fat, 
5    Gm.;    liquid   petrolatum,    24   Gm.;    white   petrolatum  to  make    100    Gm. 

EPHEDRINE     ANHYDROUS.— Ephedrina     Sicca.— 

/a^z;o-ct-hydroxy-j8-methyl-amino-propylbenzene. — (CeHo.CHOH. 
CHNHCH3CH3).    An  alkaloid  derived  from  Ephedra  equisetina. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  the  ephedrine  salts. 
The  free  alkaloid  is  employed  in  mediums,  such  as  oils,  in  which 
it  is  more  soluble  than  the  salts. 

Dosage. — One  per  cent,  in  oil,  may  be  used  for  local  applica- 
tion to  mucous  membranes. 

Ephedrine  anhydrous  occurs  as  an  unctuous,  almost  colorless  solid 
that  tends  to  crystallize  as  needles.  The  liquefied  alkaloid  boils  between 
152  and  153  C.  at  25  mm.  pressure.  It  is  freely  soluble  in  alcohol, 
chloroform  and  ether,  and  soluble  in  liquid  petrolatum  and  water,  the 
solutions  being  strongly  alkaline  to  litmus  paper  moistened  with  water. 
Dissolve  0.01  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous  in  1  cc.  of  water  and  add 
0.1  cc.  of  copper  sulfate  solution  (10  per  cent)  followed  by  1  cc.  of 
sodium  hydroxide  solution  (20  per  cent) :  a  reddish  purple  color 
develops.  To  this  solution  add  1  cc.  of  ether,  shake  the  mixture 
and  compare  with  a  tube  made  up  similarly,  but  without  using  ether: 
the  reddish  purple  is  partially  extracted  (apparently^  decolorized  by  the 
ether).  Dissolve  0.05  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous  in  10  cc.  of  chloro- 
form and  allow  the  solution  to  stand  for  18  hours,  evaporate  sponta- 
neously: white  crystals  of  ephedrine  hydrochloride  appear;  wash  with 
2  cc.  of  chloroform,  dry  spontaneously:  the  crystals  melt  at  214-220   C. 

Dissolve  0.05  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous  in  from  30  to  40  cc.  of 
distilled    water,    add    1    cc.    of   diluted    nitric   acid    and    1    cc.    of   silver 


EPHEDRINE    '  217 

nitrate  solution :  less  turbidity  results  than  in  a  control  tube  using 
0.1  cc.  of  fiftieth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  (limit  of  chloride).  Dis- 
solve 0.1  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous  in  from  30  to  40  cc.  of  distilled 
water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium 
chloride  solution:  no  turbidity  develops  in  ten  minutes  (limit  of 
sulfate). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  10  cc.  graduated  flask  and  dissolve  by  adding  7  cc.  of  water  and 
1  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid;  dilute  the  solution  to  10  cc,  transfer  the 
solution  to  a  polarimetric  tube  and  take  the  rotation  at  25  C:  the 
specific  rotation  [a]  25/D  of  the  hydrochloride  falls  between  — 33.0 
and  — 35.5.  (The  factor  ephedrine  to  ephedrine  hydrochloride  is  1.22. 
The  weight  of  the  hydrochloride  should  be  corrected  for  the  water  in 
the  ephedrine  by  dividing  the  calculated  weight  by  the  percentage  of 
ephedrine   obtained   in   the  titration.) 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous,  accurately  weighed, 
in  5  cc.  of  neutralized  alcohol,  add  5  drops  of  bromcresol  green 
solution  and  an  excess  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  and  titrate 
the  excess,  using  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  acid 
used  in  neutralizing  the  ephedrine  is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  98 
per  cent  nor  more  than   100  per  cent  of  ephedrine  anhydrous. 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous,  accurately  weighed, 
in  a  tared  beaker  in  10  cc.  of  absolute  ether;  evaporate  spontaneously; 
dry  the  residue  for  18  hours  in  a  desiccator  containing  calcium  chloride 
and  ephedrine,  the  temperature  not  being  allowed  to  exceed  22  C: 
the  loss  is  not   greater  than   1.5  per  cent. 

Fit  a  100  cc.  beaker  with  a  cork  stopper  through  which  has  been 
inserted  a  test  tube  2J4  inches  long  and  nine-sixteenths  inch  in 
diameter;  remove  the  stopper  and  accompanying  test  tube  from  the 
beaker;  transfer  5  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous  to  the  test  tube;  melt 
the  material  by  immersing  the  test  tube  in  hot  water;  cool  the  test 
tube  and  contents  to  about  30  C. ;  place  the  stopper  and  test  tube  in 
the  beaker;  stir  slowly  the  supercooled  liquid,  using  an  appropriate 
Anschutz  thermometer;  record  the  highest  temperature  obtained  as  the 
material  congeals:  the  congealing  point  is  between  31.0  and   37.5  C. 

Heat  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ephedrine  anhydrous,  accurately  weighed,  in 
a  platinum  dish  until  constant  weight  is  obtained:  the  ash  is  less  than 
0.1  per  cent. 

EPHEDRINE  HEMIHYDRATE.  —  Ephedrina  Semi- 
aquosa.  —  /a^z/o-a-hydroxy-/3-methyl-amino-propylbenzene  with 
one-half  molecule  of  water  of  crystalHzation.  QHoCHOH.CH 
NHCHs.CHs.^^HaO.  A  hydrated  alkaloid  derived  from  Ephedra 
eqtdsetina. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  the  ephedrine  salts. 
The  free^  alkaloid  is  employed  in  mediums,  such  as  oils,  in 
which  it  is  more  soluble  than  the  salts. 

Dosage. — One  per  cent,  in  a  suitable  base,  may  be  used  for 
local  application  to  mucous  membranes. 

Ephedrine  hemihydrate  occurs  as  colorless  hexagonal  plates.  The 
liquefied  alkaloid  boils  at  152-153  C.  at  25  mm.  pressure.  It  is  freely 
soluble  in  alcohol,  ether  and  chloroform  (the  chloroform  solution  is 
turbid,  owing  to  the  insolubility  of  the  accompanying  water).  It  is 
soluble  in  water.  All  of  these  solutions  are  strongly  alkaline  to 
litmus  paper  moistened  with  water.  It  is  soluble  in  liquid  petrolatum 
but  the  solution  is  turbid,  owing  to  the  insolubility  of  the  accompany- 
ing water. 

Dissolve  0.01  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate  in  1  cc.  of  water  and 
add  0.1  cc.  _  of  copper  sulfate  solution  (10  per  cent)  followed  by 
1  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  (20  per  cent) :  a  reddish  purple 
color  develops.     To  this  solution  add   1  cc.  of  ether,  shake  the  mixture 


218     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

and  compare  with  a  tube  made  up  similarly,  but  without  using  ether: 
the  reddish  purple  is  partially  extracted  (apparently  decolorized  by 
the  ether). 

Dissolve  0.05  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate  in  10  cc.  of  chloroform, 
and  allow  the  solution  to  stand  18  hours,  evaporate  the  chloroform 
spontaneously:  white  crystals  of  ephedrine  hydrochloride  appear; 
wash  with  2  cc.  of  chloroform,  dry  spontaneously:  the  crystals  melt  at 
214-220  C. 

Dissolve  0.05  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate  in  from  30  to  40  cc.  of 
distilled  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver 
nitrate  solution:  less  turbidity  results  than  in  a  control  tube  con- 
taining the  same  quantity  of  reagents,  to  which  has  been  added  0.1  cc. 
of  fiftieth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  {limit  of  chloride).  Dissolve  0.1 
Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate  in  from  30  to  40  cc.  of  distilled  water, 
add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride 
solution:     no    turbidity     develops     in     10     minutes     (limit    of    sulfate). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  10  cc.  graduated  flask  and  dissolve  by  adding  7  cc.  of  water 
and  1  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid;  dilute  the  solution  to  10  cc.  transfer 
the  Eolution  to  a  polarimetric  tube  and  take  the  rotation  at  25  C.: 
the  specific  rotation  [a]  25/D  of  the  hydrochloride  falls  between 
—  33.0  and  — 35.5.  (The  factor  ephedrine  to  ephedrine  hydrochloride 
is  1.22.  The  weight  of  the  hydrochloride  should  be  corrected  for  the 
water  in  the  ephedrine  by  dividing  the  calculated  weight  by  the  per- 
centage of   ephedrine   obtained   in   the  titration). 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate,  accurately  weighed, 
in  5  cc.  of  neutralized  alcohol,  add  5  drops  of  bromcresol  green  solu- 
tion and  an  excess  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  and  titrate  the 
excess,  using  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  acid  used 
in  neutralizing  the  ephedrine  is  equivalent  to  not  less  than  94  per  cent 
nor  more  than  96  per  cent  of  ephedrine. 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate,  accurately  weighed, 
in  a  tared  beaker  in  10  cc.  of  absolute  ether,  evaporate  spontaneously; 
dry  the  residue  for  18  hours  in  a  desiccator  containing  calcium  chloride 
and  ephedrine,  the  temperature  not  being  allowed  to  exceed  22  C. : 
the  loss  is  not  greater  than  6  per  cent  nor  less  than  3  per  cent. 

Fit  a  100  cc.  beaker  with  a  cork  stopper  through  which  has  been 
inserted  a  test  tube  2^  inches  long  and  nine-sixteenths  inch  in 
diameter;  remove  the  stopper  and  accompanying  test  tube  from  the 
beaker;  transfer  5  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate  to  the  test  tube,  melt 
the  material  by  immersing  the  test  tube  in  hot  water,  cool  the  test 
tube  and  contents  to  about  30  C,  place  the  stopper  and  test  tube 
in  the  beaker;  stir  the  supercooled  liquid  slowly,  using  an  appropriate 
Anschutz  thermometer;  record  the  highest  temperature  obtained  as  the 
material   congeals;    the   congealing   point   is   between   36  and   39.4   C. 

Heat  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ephedrine  hemihydrate,  accurately  weighed, 
in  a  platinum  dish  until  constant  weight  is  obtained:  the  ash  is  less 
than  0.1   per  cent. 

Ephedrine  Alkaloid-Merck. — A  brand  of  ephedrine  hemi- 
hydrate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

EPHEDRINE  HYDROCHLORIDE.— "When  dried  over 
sulfuric  acid  for  twenty-four  hours,  contains  not  less  than  80 
per  cent  and  not  more  than  82.5  per  cent  of  anhydrous  eohedrine 
(C10H15ON)."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Ephedrinae 
Hydrochloridum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Ephedrine. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Ephedrine. 


EPHEDRINE  219 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott. — A  brand  of  ephedrine 
hydrochloride-U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No 
U.    S.    patent   or   trademark. 

Ampoules  Ephedriiw  Hydrochloride-Abbott,  0.05  Gm.,   1  cc. 

Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,   y%  grain. 

Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,  0.0324  Gm.   (14   grain). 

Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,   }i  grain. 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride  Solution- Abbott,  3%:  It  is  preserved  with 
chlorobutanol,   0.5    per   cent. 

Tablets  Ephedriiie  Hydrochloride-Abbott ,  J4  grain. 

Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,    Yz   grain. 

Syrup  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott :  Contains  ephedrine  hydro- 
chloride-Abbott,  0.2195  Gm.,  in  10  cc.  iVs  grain  per  fluidrachm)  and 
alcohol  12  per  cent. 

Syrup  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride  (Double  Strength)-Abbott:  Contain- 
ing ephedrine  hydrochloride- Abbott,  0.4390  Gra.,  in  100  cc.  ('^  grain  per 
fluidrachm)   and  alcohol   12  per  cent. 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Gane  and  Ingram. — A  brand 
of  ephedrine  hydrochloride-U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Gane  and  Ingram,  Inc.,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Lilly. — A  brand  of  ephedrine 
hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Hypodermic  Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Lilly,  0.016  Gm.  (]4 
grain). 

Hypodermic  Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochlc^ride-Lilly,  0.0325  Gm.  (y2 
grain). 

Pulviiles    Ephedrine   Hydrochloride-Lilly,    0.025    Gm.    (Yt    grain). 

Pulvules   Ephedrine   Hydrochloride-Lilly,    0.05      Gm.    (Y^    grain). 

Solution  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Lilly,  3%:  It  is  preserved  with 
chlorobutanol,    0.5   per   cent. 

Syrup  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride:  Contains  ephedrine  hydrochloride- 
Lilly,  0.22  Gm.,  in  100  cc.  (1  grain  per  fluidounce)  and  alcohol,  12  per 
cent;  it  is  flavored  with  vanillin,  benzaldehyde  and  tolu,  and  tinted  with 
amaranth. 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Merck. — A  brand  of  ephedrine 
hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-P.  D.  &  Co.— A  brand  of 
ephedrine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-P.  D.  &  Co.,   Y&  grain. 
Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-P.  D.  &  Co.,   Ya  grain. 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Squibb. — A  brand  of  ephedrine 
hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Squibb,   Y&  grain. 

Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Squibb,   Ya  grain. 


220     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

EPHEDRINE  SULFATE.— "When  dried  over  sulfuric 
acid  for  twenty-four  hours,  contains  not  less  than  75.5  per 
cent  and  not  more  than  11  .Z  per  cent  anhydrous  ephedrine 
(C10H15ON)."    U.  S.P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Ephedrinae 
Sulfas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Ephedrine. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Ephedrine. 

Ephedrine  Nasal  Jelly-Malthie :     Ephedrine  sulfate-U.  S.  P.   1   per  cent, 
and  sodium   benzoate  0.5   per  cent  in  a  glycerite  of  tragacanth  base. 
Prepared  by   The   Maltbie  Chemical   Company,   Newark,   N.  J. 

Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott.  —  A  brand  of  ephedrine  sul- 
fate-U. S.  P. 

Capsules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott,  ^  grain. 
Capsules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott,  J4  grain. 
Capsules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott,    %   grain. 

Solution  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott,  3%.  It  is  preserved  with  chloro- 
butanol  0.5%. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No 
U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Ephedrine    Sul£ate-Gane    and    Ingram.  —  A    brand    of 

ephedrine  sulfate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Gane's  Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  New  York  (Gane  and 
Ingram,    Inc.,   New   York,  distributor).      No   U.    S.    patent  or  trademark. 

Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly. — A  brand  of  ephedrine  sulfate- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Ampoules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,  1  cc,  0.05  Gm.:  Each  ampoule 
contains  ephedrine  sulfate-Lilly,  0.05  Gm.   (^  grain)    in  1  cc.  of  solution. 

Elixir  Ephedrine  Sulfate,  2  grains:  Contains  ephedrine  sulfate-Lilly, 
0.44  Gm.  in  100  cc.  (2  grains  per  fluidounce)  in  a  menstruum  composed 
of  alcohol  12  per  cent,  glycerin,  sucrose  and  water,  flavored  with 
gluside,  oenanthic  ether,  oil  of  orange,  oil  of  coriander,  oil  of  caraway, 
oil    of  lemon,   oil  of  cassia,  oil  of  anise,   safrol  and  vanillin. 

Hypodermic   Tablets   Ephedrine   Sulfate-Lilly,    0.016      Gm.    (%    grain). 

Hypodermic    Tablets   Ephedrine    Sulfate-Lilly,    0.0325    Gm.    (Yz    grain). 

Lilly's  Ephedrine  Jelly:  Ephedrine  sulfate-Lilly,  1  Gm. ;  glycerin,  15 
Gm.;  tragacanth,  1  Gm. ;  eucalyptol,  0.1  Gm.;  oil  of  wintergreen,  0.005 
Gm.;  oil  of  dwarf  pine  needles,  0.005  Gm.;  water  to  make  100   Gm. 

Pulvules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,  0.025  Gm.:  Each  pulvule  (filled 
capsule)    contains    ephedrine    sulfate-Lilly,    0.025    Gm.    (^    grain). 

Pulvules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,  0.05  Gm.:  Each  pulvule  (filled  cap- 
sule)   contains   ephedrine  sulfate-Lilly,   0.05   Gm.    (54   grain). 

Solution  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,  3%:  It  is  preserved  with  chloro- 
butanol,  0.5  per  cent. 

Syrup  Ephedrine  Sulfate:  Containing  ephedrine  sulfate-Lilly,  0.22 
Gm.,  in  100  cc.  (1  grain  per  fluidounce)  and  alcohol  12  per  cent;  it  is 
flavored  with  vanillin,  benzaldehyde  and  tolu,   and  tinted  with  amaranth. 

Syrup  Ephedrine  Sulfate:  Containing  ephedrine  sulfate-Lilly,  p. 44 
Gm.,  in  100  cc.  (2  grains  per  fluidounce)  and  alcohol,  12  per  cent;  it  is 
flavored  with  vanillin,   benzaldehyde  and  tolu,  and  tinted  with  amaranth. 


EPINEPHRINE  221 

Ephedrine  Sulfate-Merck. — A  brand  of  ephedrine  sulfate- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Ephedrine  Sul£ate-P.  D.  &  Co. — A  brand  of  ephedrine 
sulfate-U.  S.  P. 

Maufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Capsiiles  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.   &  Co.,   0.025   Cm.    (}i   grain). 

Capsules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  &  Co.,   0.05     Cm.  (Y^  grain). 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.05  Gm.  (H 
grain),   1    cc. 

Solution  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  5%;  It  is  preserved  with 
chlorobutanol,    0.5    per  cent. 

Epinephrine 

Epinephrine,  the  active  principle  of  the  suprarenal  glands,  is 
extensively  used  in  surgery  and  to  a  less  extent  in  medicine 
in  the  form  of  the  1  in  1,000  solution  of  epinephrine  hydro- 
chloride (solution  of  epinephrine  hydrochloride,  U.  S.  P.).  The 
alkaloid,  in  addition  to  being  obtained  from  the  suprarenal 
glands,  is  also  prepared  synthetically;  and  such  preparations, 
if  they  are  levorotatory,  are  equally  as  active  as  the  natural 
product.  Artificial  epinephrines  have  also  been  prepared  which 
are  optically  inactive,  and  such  are  only  about  half  as  active 
physiologically  as  is  natural  epinephrine.  Dextrorotatory  epine- 
phrine is  almost  inactive.  The  levorotatory  product  is  the  only 
one  used  in  medicine. 

EPINEPHRINE.  —  Laevo-methylaminoethanolcatechol.  — 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Epinephrina. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Epinephrine  acts  peripherally  on  a  variety 
of  structures  by  stimulating  the  myoneural  junctions  of  the 
sympathetic  nerve  endings.  Its  most  important  actions  consist 
of  a  constriction  of  the  blood  vessels,  with  consequent  rise  of 
blood  pressure  and  slowing  of  the  heart,  and  a  direct  stimulant 
effect  on  the  heart  muscle  similar  to  that  of  digitalis.  Relaxa- 
tion of  the  bronchial  muscles  and  also  glycosuria  follow  intra- 
muscular or  hypodermic  injection.  Moderate  doses,  when  given 
by  mouth,  have  practically  no  action.  However,  in  certain 
patients  suffering  with  toxic  thyroid,  the  administration  of 
epinephrine  by  mouth  may  occasionally  produce  typical  effects. 
The  effect  of  a  single  intravenous  dose  is  fleeting. 

Epinephrine  is  chiefly  used  locally  for  its  vasoconstrictor 
action  in  hemorrhage,  and  in  catarrhal  and  congestive  conditions. 
It  often  relieves  asthmatic  paroxysms  when  used  by  hypodermic 
injection.  If,  however,  asthmatic  paroxysms  are  frequent  it  is 
generally  advisable  to  use  ephedrine  with  or  in  place  of 
epinephrine.  Intravenous  injections  are  sometimes  effective  in 
shock  and  anesthesia  accidents  (care  being  taken  not  to  give 
an  overdose).    It  has  also  been  employed  in  Addison's  disease, 


222     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

but  it  is  apparently  of  little  or  no  value  in  this  condition. 
Epinephrine  in  the  form  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  a  salt  of 
epinephrine  has  been  used  locally  in  the  treatment  of  glaucoma 
with  apparently  favorable  results  in  certain  cases,  while  in  other 
cases  it  appears  to  be  ineffective. 

The  vasoconstrictor  action  of  epinephrine  is  used  to  prolong 
the  anesthetic  effect  of  local  anesthetics  by  retarding  the  circula- 
tion in  the  injected  area  thus  hindering  the  removal  of  the 
anesthetic  agent  by  too  rapid  absorption  into  the  blood  stream. 
In  the  same  manner  it  is  believed  to  lessen  the  toxicity  of  the 
local  anaesthetics  by  retarding  their  absorption  into  the  general 
circulation. 

Dilute  watery  solutions  rapidly  lose  their  strength,  the 
deterioration  being  accompanied  by  a  reddish  or  brownish  dis- 
coloration. 

Dosage. — Hypodermically  or  intramuscularly  from  0.06  to 
1  cc.  (1  to  15  minims)  of  a  1  in  1,000  solution,  diluted  with 
sterile  salt  solution.  Locally,  it  is  used  in  solution  varying  in 
strength  from  1  in  15,000  to  1  in  1,000.  Epinephrine  is  also 
used  in  oily  solution  for  sprays,  in  ointment  for  application  to 
mucous  membranes,  such  as  the  eye  or  the  nose,  where  a  slower 
but  more  lasting  action  is  desired,  and  in  suppositories. 

Adrenalin. — A  brand  of  epinephrine-U.  S.  P.  Made  from 
the  suprarenal  gland. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.  U.  S.  patents 
730,175,  730,176,  730,196,  730,197,  730,198  (June  2  1903;  expired); 
753,177    (Feb.   23,    1904;   expired).     U.    S.  trademark  53,934. 

Adrenalin  CJiloride  Solution:  A  solution  containing  1  part  of  adrenalin 
(as  adrenalin  chloride)  in  1,000  parts  of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  preserved  by  the  addition  of  0.5  per  cent  of  chloretone  and 
not  more  than   0.1    per   cent   of   sodium   bisulfite. 

Adrenalin  Inhalant:  A  glycerine  solution  containing  1  part  of  adrenalin 
(as  adrenalin  chloride)  in  1,000,  3  per  cent  of  chloretone,  15  per  cent 
of  alcohol,  and  aromatics. 

Adrenalin  Ointment:  Contains  adrenalin  chloride  equivalent  to  one 
part   of   adrenalin   in    1,000    parts   of   oleaginous    ointment  base. 

Adrenalin  and  Chloretone  Ointment :  Contains  adrenalin  chloride  equiv- 
alent to  one  tenth  per  cent  of  adrenalin  and  4.5  per  cent  of  chloretone  in 
an  ointment  base  of  hydrous  wool  fat  and  petrolatum. 

Adrenalin  Suppositories:  One  part  of  adrenalin  (as  adrenalin  chloride) 
to  1,000  parts  of  oil  of  theobroma  (cacao  butter)  and  not  more  than  0.2 
per  cent  of  sodium  bisulfite.  Each  suppository  weighs  about  1  Gm. 
(15   grains). 

Adreiialin  Tablets  %oo  grain:  One  thousandth  Gm.  (?ioo  grain) 
adrenalin,  as  borate,  yielding  a  1  in  1,000  solution  when  dissolved  in 
15  minims  (1  cc.)  of  water.  Each  tablet  contains  not  more  than  ?ioo 
grain  of  sodium  bisulfite. 

Adrenalin  Tablets  Vo.oo  grain:  Each  contains  adrenalin,  0.00033  Gm. 
(^/^OO  grain)  as  borate,  yielding  a  1  in  1,000  solution  when  dissolved  in 
5  minims  of  water.  Each  tablet  contains  not  more  than  l/^oo  grain  of 
sodium    bisulfite. 

Adrenalin  and  Cocaine  Tableis:  Each  hypodermic  tablet  contains 
cocaine  hydrochloride  0.01  Gm.  (J^  grain),  adrenalin  0.00005  Gm. 
(M.300  grain)    and  not  more  than  %oo  grain  of  sodium  bisulfite. 


EPINEPHRINE  223 

Ampoules  Adrenalin  Chloride  Solution  1:10,000,  1  cc:  a  solution  of 
1  part  of  adrenalin  (as  adrenalin  chloride)  in  physiological  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  10,000  parts,  containing  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent 
of   sodium  bisulfite  as   preservative. 

Ampoules  Adrenalin  Chloride  Solution  1:2,600,  1  cc:  a  solution 
of  1  part  of  adrenalin  (as  adrenalin  chloride)  in  physiologic  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  2,600  parts,  containing  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent  of 
sodium  bisulfite  as  preservative. 

Ampoules  Adrenalin  Chloride  Solution  1:1,000,  1  cc:  a  solution  of 
1  part  of  adrenalin  (as  adrenalin  chloride)  in  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  1,000  parts,  containing  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent 
of  sodium  bisulfite  as   preservative. 

Suprarenalin. — A  brand  of  epinephrine-U.  S.  P.  Made  from 
the  adrenal  gland. 

Manufactured  by  Armour  &  Co.,  Chicago.  U.  S.  patent  829,220  (Aug. 
21,   1906;  expired).      No  U.   S.  trademark. 

Suprarenalin:     Vials    containing    suprarenalin,    1    grain. 

Suprarenalin  Ointment:  One  part  of  suprarenalin  suspended  in  1,000 
parts  of  petrolatum  base. 

Suprarenalin  Solution:  A  solution  containing  adrenalin  sulfite  equiva- 
lent to  1  part  of  suprarenalin  in  1,000  parts  of  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  without  addition  of  other  preservatives. 

SUPRARENIN.  — Synthetic  epinephrine  obtained  by  the 
method  of  Stolz  and  Flaecher  (Ztschr.  f.  physiol.  Chem.  vol.  58, 
p.  189). 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  Epinephrine.  Synthetic 
epinephrine  has  the  physiologic  effects  of  natural  epinephrine 
obtained  from  the  adrenal  gland. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  986,156    (March   7,    1911;    expired). 

Ampules  Suprarenin  Powder,  0.05  Cm.:  Each  ampule  contains  supra- 
renin   bitartrate   0.091    Gm.,   equivalent   to  suprarenin    0.05    Gm. 

Ampules  Suprarenin  Solution:  Each  1  cc.  contains  suprarenin  bitar- 
trate equivalent  to  suprarenin  0.001  Gm.    (Yes  grain). 

Suprarenin  Solution,  1 : 1,000 :  Each  1  cc.  contains  suprarenin  bitar- 
trate equivalent  to  suprarenin  0.001  Gm.  (1^5  grain)  and  0.5  per  cent 
chlorobutanol. 

Tablets  Suprarenin:  Each  tablet  contains  suprarenin  bitartrate  equiv- 
alent to  0.001    Gm.    (%5  grain)    of   suprarenin. 

Synthetic    epinephrine    (the    free    base)    is    a   white    odorless   powder, 
nearly  insoluble  in  water,  alcohol  and   ether.     It  melts  at  from  211   to 
212   C.     It  rotates  polarized  light  to  the  left,  the  rotation  being 
19.6  o 

[a]  —  —  51.4  0 

D 
It  has  the   chemical   and   physical   properties   of  epinephrine   obtained 
from  adrenal  glands. 

Suprarenin  bitartrate  is  a  white  odorless  powder  soluble  in  water  and 
yielding  a  solution  which  has  an  acid  reaction.  Suprarenin  bitartrate 
melts  at  149  C.  and  its  aqueous  solution  rotates  polarized  light  to  the 
left. 

SOLUTION  OF  EPINEPHRINE  HYDROCHLO- 
RIDE-U.  S.  P. — "A  solution  of  epinephrine  in  distilled  water 
and  hydrochloric  acid,  containing,  in  each  100  cc,  not  less  than 
0.095  Gm.  and  not  more  than  0.105  Gm.  of  C9H13O3N."  U.  S.  P. 


224     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

For  standards  see  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Liquor  Epineph- 
rinae  Hydrochloridi. 

Solution  of  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride. — A  brand  of 
solution   epinephrine   hydrochloride-U.   S.    P. 

Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,   North   Chicago,   111. 

Cheplin's  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride  Solution. — A  brand 
of  solution  epinephrine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,   Syracuse,   N.  Y. 
Cheplin's  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride  Solution,  Ampules,  1   cc. 

Solution  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride-Lederle. — A  brand 
of  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,   Pearl  River,   N.  Y. 

Solution     Epinephrine    Hydrochloride-Lederle     (Steril- 
ized).— A  brand  of  epinephrine  hydrochloride-U.   S.  P. 
Manufactured  by  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,   Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Epinephrin  Hydrochloride  Solution  1  :  1000  (U.  S.  S.  P. 
Co.). — A  brand  of  epinephrine  hydrochloride-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  United  States  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth, 
Wisconsin. 

Epinephrin-Wilson. — A  brand  of  epinephrine-U.  S.  P. 
Manufactured  by   Wilson  Laboratories,   Chicago. 
Epinephrin  Powder-Wilson. 

Epinephrin  Hydrochloride  Solution-Wilson. — A  brand  of 
solution   of   epinephrine-hydrochloride-U.    S.    P. 

Manufactured  by   Wilson   Laboratories,   Chicago. 

Neo-Synephrin 

NEO-SYNEPHRIN  HYDROCHLORIDE.  —  laevo-a- 
hydroxy-/3-methyl-amino-3-hydroxy  ethylbenzene  hydrochloride. 
— The  hydrochloride  of  the  laevo  isomer  of  a  synthetically 
prepared  derivative  of  phenylethylamine  having  the  formula 
C6H4OH.CHOHCH2NHCH3.HCL  Neo-synephrin  hydrochlo- 
ride differs  from  synephrin  tartrate  in  that  (1)  neo-synephrin 
hydrochloride  is  a  salt  of  hydrochloric  acid — synephrin  tartrate 
is  a  salt  of  tartaric  acid ;  (2)  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride  is 
a  laevo  compound — synephrin  tartrate  is  a  racemic  compound ; 
and  (3)  the  hydroxyl  of  the  nucleus  in  neo-synephrin  hydro- 
chloride is  in  the  meta  position — in  synephrin  tartrate  it  is  in 
the  para  position. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Neo-synephrin  hydrochloride  is  a  vaso- 
constrictor which  is  active  when  administered  orally.  It  is 
more  powerful  in  vasoconstrictive  ability  than  synephrin  tartrate, 
and  possesses  a  relatively  low  toxicity.  Applied  to  mucous 
membranes  it  causes  contraction  of  the  small  blood  vessels, 
thus  reducing  swelling  and  congestion  of  such  membranes. 
Neo-synephrin  hydrochloride  may  be  useful  in  the  symptomatic 


NEO-SYNEPHRIN  225 

treatment  of  the  nasal  congestion  accompanying  disorders  of 
the  upper  respiratory  tract  such  as  sinusitis,  vasomotor  rhinitis 
and  hay  fever.  It  may  also  be  employed  in  combination  with 
a  local  anesthetic,  for  surgical  or  dental  use. 

Dosage. — For  topical  application  to  the  nasal  mucous  mem- 
brane the  0.25  per  cent  solution  is  ordinarily  used.  The  1  per 
cent  solution,  diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of  physiologic 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  or  Ringer's  solution,  may  be  used 
when  a  stronger  preparation  is  desired.  For  surgical  and 
dental  anesthesia,  it  may  be  diluted  in  the  proportion  of  three 
to  four  drops  of  the  1  per  cent  solution  to  10  cc.  of  a  2  per 
cent  procaine  hydrochloride  solution.  Neo-synephrin  hydro- 
chloride is  relatively  stable  in  alkaline  solutions ;  it  may  be 
sterilized  by  boiling. 

Manufactured  by  Frederic  Stearns  &  Company,  Detroit.  U.  S. 
patent  1,680,055  (Aug.  7,  1928;  expires  1945).  U.  S.  trademark  90,142. 
Neo-Synephrin  Hydrochloride  Emulsion  (Aromatic) :  Neo-synephrin 
hydrochloride  0.25  per  cent,  sodium  benzoate  0.4  per  cent,  camphor  0.07 
per  cent,  menthol  0.052  per  cent,  oil  of  red  thyme  0.17  per  cent  in  a 
mineral  oil  and  water  emulsion  containing  acacia.  The  product  is  pre- 
served with  chlorobutanol   0.5   per  cent. 

Solution  Neo-Synephrin  Hydrochloride,  0.25  Per  Cent:  Neo-synephrin 
hydrochloride  0.25  per  cent,  sodium  benzoate  0.1  per  cent,  and  sodium 
chloride  0.8  per  cent,  in  distilled  water. 

Solution  Neo-Synephrin  Hydrochloride,  1  Per  Cent:  Neo-synephrin 
hydrochloride  1  per  cent,  sodium  benzoate  0.1  per  cent,  and  sodium 
chloride   0.8   per  cent,   in   distilled   water. 

Neo-Synephrin    Hydrochloride   Jelly:     Neo-synephrin    hydrochloride,    0.5 

per   cent,   incorporated   in   a   jelly-like    bland   base  composed   of   tragacanth, 

chondrus,   glycerin   and   water.      Sodium   benzoate   0.5    per   cent   is   present 

as    preservative.      The    product    is    supplied    in    collapsible   tube   containers. 

Neo-synephrin    hydrochloride    occurs     as     white,    odorless,     nonhygro- 

scopic   crystals   possessing  a  bitter  taste.      It  is   readily   soluble  in  water 

and    alcohol.      The    aqueous    solution    is    neutral    to    litmus    paper.       It 

melts    between     139-141     C.       The    specific    rotation     [a]     25/D    ranges 

between  — 46.2   and  — 47.2. 

Transfer  0.3  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride  to  a  glass  con- 
tainer, dissolve  in  3  cc.  of  water,  add  15  drops  of  ammonia  water  and 
rub  the  glass  container  with  a  glass  rod:  the  base  that  separates  when 
washed  with  cold  water  and  dried  melts  at  170-171  C,  without  decom- 
position. Determine  the  nitrogen  content  of  the  base  by  the  micro 
Dumas  method:  the  nitrogen  found  is  not  less  than  8.2  per  cent  nor 
more  than  8.5  per  cent.  Dissolve  0.010  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydro- 
chloride in  1  cc.  of  water  and  add  1  cc.  of  copper  sulfate  solution 
(10  per  cent)  followed  by  1  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  (20  per 
cent)  :  a  reddish  purple  color  forms  that  is  not  extracted  by  ether. 
Dissolve  0.01  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride  in  1  cc.  of  water 
and  add  1  drop  of  ferric  chloride  (10  per  cent):  a  permanent  amethyst 
purple  color  develops.  Dissolve  0.02  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydro- 
chloride in  3  cc.  of  alcoholic  potassium  hydroxide  solution,  add  3 
drops  of  chloroform  and  boil:  there  is  no  odor  of  carbylamine  (absence 
of  primary  amines).  Dissolve  0.05  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride 
in  30-40  cc.  of  distilled  water,  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  in 
1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution:  no  turbidity  should  result  (absence  of 
sulfate).  Dissolve  0.2  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride  in  10  cc. 
of  distilled  water:  the  solution  yields  a  negative  test  for  heavy  metals 
when  tested  according  to  the  U.  S.  P.  X  method  (see  U.  S.  P.  X,  page 
439).  To  1  cc.  of  a  solution  containing  0.02  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin 
hydrochloride  add  2  drops  of  a  freshly  prepared  solution  of  sodium 
nitroprusside,    1     per    cent,    then    1    cc.    of    sodium    hydroxide    solution 


226     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


followed  by  0.6  cc.  (10  drops)  of  glacial  acetic  acid:  the  final  solution 
should  not  be  a  deeper  yellow  than  the  same  reagents,  without  the  neo- 
synephrin  hydrochloride   {absence  of   corresponding   ketone). 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride,  accurately 
weighed,  in  200  cc.  of  water,  heat  to  boiling,  add  4  cc.  of  diluted 
nitric  acid,  followed  by  silver  nitrate  solution  in  slight  excess;  allow 
the  container  and  mixture  to  stand  for  six  hours,  transfer  to  a  Gooch 
crucible,  wash  well  with  diluted  nitric  acid  (10  cc.  of  diluted  nitric 
acid  diluted  to  100  cc),  dry  at  100  C,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh: 
the  chloride  (Cl~)  calculated  from  the  silver  chloride  weighed  is  not 
less  than  17.20  per  cent  nor  more  than  17.60  per  cent.  Heat  about  0.2 
Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  for  twenty-four 
hours,  in  an  oven  at  100  C. :  the  loss  is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent. 
Determine  the  nitrogen  content  by  the  micro  Dumas  method:  the 
nitrogen  found  is  not  less  than  6.7  per  cent  nor  more  than  7.0  per  cent. 
Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  neo-synephrin  hydrochloride,  accurately 
weighed,  to  a  platinum  dish;  ignite  until  constant  weight  is  attained: 
the  ash  is  less  than  0.1   per  cent. 

NEO-SYNEPHRIN     HYDROCHLORIDE     ONE     PER     CENT     SOLUTION 

Transfer  10  cc.  of  the  solution  to  a  beaker,  evaporate  the  solution 
to  dryness  on  a  boiling  water  bath,  extract  the  residue  with  three 
15  cc.  portions  of  boiling  absolute  _  isopropyl  alcohol,  evaporate  the 
isopropyl  alcohol  to  dryness  on  a  boiling  water  bath,  dry  the  extract 
in  an  oven  at  100  C.  to  constant  weight:  the  residue  is  equal  to  not  less 
than  0.95  per  cent  nor  more  than  1.05  per  cent.  The  melting  point 
ranges  between   138  and    140   C. 

Dissolve  the  residue  in  3  cc.  of  water,  add  10  drops  of  ammonia 
water,  rub  the  glass  container  with  a  glass  rod,  filter  the  precipitate, 
wash  with  cold  water  on  a  porous  plate:  the  melting  point  is 
169-171  C. 

NEO-SYNEPHRIN     HYDROCHLORIDE     J4     PER     CENT     SOLUTION 
Follow  the  standards  as  described  for  the   1   per  cent  solution  except 
use  a  25  cc.  sample. 


ERGOT 

Ergot  contains  alkaloids  which  are  specific  for  ergot,  and  a 
number  of  amines.  These  amines,  however,  are  decomposition 
products  of  proteins  and  probably  do  not  exist  in  fresh  ergot. 

The  chief  constituents  are : 

1.  Ergotoxine  or  hydroergotinine,  CssHnOeNs,  an  amorphous 
alkaloid  occurring  in  alcoholic  extracts.  It  causes  the  charac- 
teristic reaction  of  ergot  on  the  cock's  comb,  and  is  concerned 
in  the  uterine  and  vascular  effects.  It  is  rather  unstable  and 
by  loss  of  water  changes  into  its  anhydride,  crystalline  ergo- 
tinine,  C35H39O5N5,  which  possibly  because  of  its  low  solubility 
in  physiological  solutions  is  quite  weak  in  action.  This  pair  of 
alkaloids,  the  amorphous  and  the  crystalline  ergotinine,  exist 
already  formed  in  ergot,  and  each  member  can  easily  be  con- 
verted into  the  other  by  chemical  means.  Both  are  insoluble 
in  water  and  petroleum  benzin,  sparingly  soluble  in  ether,  and 
readily  soluble  in  almost  all  other  organic  solvents.  Amor- 
phous ergotinine  or  ergotoxine  is  easily  soluble  in  cold  alcohol ; 
crystalline  ergotinine  is  sparingly  soluble.  They  dissolve  in 
dilute  sodium  hydroxide;  but  the  latter  alkaloid  is  partially 
converted  into  ergotoxine.  Their  salts  form  colloidal  solutions^ 
with  water,  but  these  are  precipitated  by  electrolytes  (salts  or 
mineral  acids). 


ERGOT  227 

2.  (a)  Ergotamine,  CssHssNbOs,  a  crystalline  alkaloid.  Ergo- 
tamine causes  contraction  of  the  uterus  of  the  guinea-pig,  rat  and 
cat  and  of  the  human  subject  and  increases  the  blood  pressure 
through  action  on  the  motor  endings  of  the  sympathetic  division 
of  the  autonomic  nervous  system.  In  sufficient  dosage  it  causes 
darkening  of  the  cock's  comb  (characteristic  of  the  action  of 
ergot),  and  with  toxic  doses  convulsions  and  development  of 
gangrene  of  the  cock's  comb  or  of  the  tail  of  the  white  rat. 

Ergotamine  is  insoluble  in  water,  easily  soluble  in  methyl 
and  ethyl  alcohol,  acetone  and  chloroform  and  less  so  in  ether. 
It  forms  water-soluble  salts.  Ergotamine  and  its  salts  crystaUize 
easily.  It  is  unstable  by  its  sensitiveness  to  heat,  light,  and  air. 
By  chemical  means  it  is  easily  changed  into 

(b)  Ergotaminine.  This  is  a  crystalline  isomer  of  ergot- 
amine.  It  is  very  slightly  soluble  in  ethyl  alcohol  and  other 
organic  solvents,  much  less  so  than  ergotamine  and  ergotoxine. 
It  is  strongly  dextrorotatory,  while  ergotamine  is  levorotatory 
in  chloroform.     Ergotaminine  is  less  active  than  ergotamine. 

3. — P-hydroxyphenylethylamine,  OH.C6H4.CH2.CH2NH2,  or 
tyramine.  This  is  closely  related  to  epinephrine  in  structure  and 
action.  It  is  partially  responsible  for  the  pressor  effect,  but  is 
not  materially  concerned  in  the  uterine  action. 

4. — /3-iminazolylethylamine,  4-m-aminoethylglyoxaline,  C3H3. 
N2CH2.CH2.NH2,  or  histamine.  This  lowers  the  blood  pressure 
in  carnivores  and  stimulates  the  excised  uterus  powerfully. 

A  number  of  other  aromatic  amines  occur,  such  as  agmatine, 
guanidobutylamine  and  isoamylamine.  Acetylcholine  is  fre- 
quently present,  and  lowers  the  blood  pressure  both  by  vaso- 
dilatation and  by  cardiac  inhibition. 

These  aromatic  amines  are  not  specific  for  ergot,  being  pro- 
duced by  putrefaction  in  extracts  of  both  animal  and  plant 
origin.  They  are  derived  from  the  amino-acids  by  the  splitting 
off  of  carbon  dioxide;  tryamine  from  tryosine;  histamine  from 
histidine;  agmatine  from  arginine;  isoamylamine  from  leucine. 
It  is  not  known  whether  they  are  present  in  fresh  ergot  or  not ; 
but  they  have  been  shown  not  to  be  present  in  fresh  rye. 

Ergotin  is  a  term  applied  to  a  variety  of  pharmaceutical 
extracts,  generally  prepared  in  such  a  way  that  they  contain 
mainly  the  amines,  and  relatively  small  amounts  of  the  alkaloids. 

It  will  be  seen  that  there  are  a  number  of  the  constituents 
of  ergot  which  exert  some  effect  upon  the  excised  uterus,  but 
only  the  alkaloids  have  a  prolonged  effect  upon  the  human 
uterus  when  used  clinically.  The  action  of  the  amines  is  chiefly 
that  of  histamine,  and  such  evidence  as  is  available  indicates 
that  the  action  of  this  substance  is  transitory. 

Moreover  histamine  and  tyramine  require  massive  doses  to 
produce  their  circulatory  effects  when  given  by  mouth,  and  in 
the  absence  of  positive  evidence  it  is  to  be  questioned  whether 
any  of  the  uterine  effects  which  follow  the  oral  administration 


228     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

of  active  ergot  preparations  are  to  be  ascribed  to  the  relatively 
small  amounts  of  amines  present. 

The  galenic  preparations  must  vary  in  composition  according 
to  the  solvent.  The  alcoholic  fluid  extract  contains  both  the 
alkaloids  and  the  amines ;  the  aqueous  preparations,  including 
the  solid  extracts  and  "ergotins,"  contain  chiefly  if  not  solely 
the  non-specific  amines. 

All  ergot  preparations,  especially  those  containing  water, 
deteriorate  with  age.  It  is  necessary  therefore  to  standardize 
them,  and  the  date  of  assay  should  be  indicated  on  the  con- 
tainer. No  satisfactory  chemical  method  of  standardization  is 
available,  and  it  is  therefore  necessary  to  use  biological  meth- 
ods. A  number  of  different  methods  have  been  proposed,  but 
if  the  current  belief  is  confirmed  that  the  activity  of  ergot  as 
used  clinically  is  due  chiefly  if  not  solely  to  the  alkaloids 
present,  then  a  method  of  assay  should  be  used  which  is  a 
measure  of  the  alkaloidal  content.  In  this  country  the  cock's 
comb  method  (official  in  the  U.  S.  P.  X)  or  the  Broom-Clark 
method  (paralysis  of  the  motor  effect  of  epinephrine  upon  the 
isolated  uterus  of  the  rabbit)  are  commonly  employed  for  this 
purpose. 

ERGOT.— Ergot  of  Rye.— Secale  Cornutum  P.  I.— "The 
dried  sclerotium  of  Claviceps  purpurea  (Fries)  Tulasne  (Fam. 
Hypocrcaceae),  developed  on  rye  plants. 

"Ergot,  when  assayed  by  the  method  directed  in  the  U.  S. 
Pharmacopeia,  possesses  a  potency  per  gram  equivalent  to  not 
less  than  0.5  milligram  of  ergotoxine  ethanesulfonate.  It  con- 
tains not  more  than  4  per  cent  of  seeds,  fruits  and  other  foreign 
organic  matter."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Ergot. 

ERGOT  ASEPTIC— A  liquid  extract  of  ergot,  standard- 
ized by  the  cock's  comb  method  of  assay  to  have  the  same 
potency  as  fluidextract  of  ergot-U.  S.  P. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  ergot. 

Dosage. — 1  to  2  cc.  Ergot  aseptic  is  intended  for  intra- 
muscular injection.  Ergot  aseptic  is  marketed  in  ampules  only. 
The  date  of  manufacture  appears  on  each  package  and  the 
product  is  not  guaranteed  to  possess  its  full  potency  for  more 
than  one  year  from  time  of  manufacture. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  and  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Ampoules   Ergot  Aseptic,   1   cc. 

Ergot  is  extracted  with  diluted  alcohol  acidulated  with  hydrochloric 
acid.  The  percolate  is  partially  neutralized  with  alkali  and  concen- 
trated by  distillation  in  a  partial  vacuum  at  a  temperature  not  above 
80  C.  A  large  excess  of  alcohol  is  added  to  the  concentrated  percolate 
and  the  material  which  precipitates  is  removed.  The  liquid  portion  is 
freed  from  alcohol  by  distillation  in  a  partial  vacuum  at  a  low  tem- 
perature, and  chlorobutanol  in  the  proportion  of  0.005  Gm.  per  cc.  added 


ERGOT  229 

to  the  aqueous  slightly  acid  liquid.  After  three  weeks  the  liquid  is 
assayed,  adjusted  to  proper  volume  and  sealed  in  ampules.  The 
finished  ampules  are  tested   for  sterility  and  potency. 

Ergot  aseptic  is  standardized  to  the  same  potency  as  fluidextract  of 
ergot-U.  S.  P.,  as  determined  by  the  cock's  comb  method  described  in 
the  U.  S.  P.  X. 

GYNERGEN.  —  Ergotamine  Tartrate.— (C33H3505N5)2.H2G 
HiOe. — The  normal  tartrate  of  one  of  the  principal  alkaloids 
of  ergot,  C83H35O5N5. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Gynergen  stimulates  the  motor  nerve  end- 
ings of  the  sympathetic  division  of  the  autonomic  nervous 
system,  thus  causing  an  increase  in  blood  pressure,  contraction 
of  the  uterus,  etc.  (the  isolated  uterus  of  the  guinea-pig  is 
affected  in  dilutions  of  from  1  in  150,000,000  to  1  in  200,000,000). 
In  large  doses  it  paralyzes  the  sympathetic  nerve  endings.  It 
causes  the  darkening  of  the  cock's  comb  characteristic  of  the 
action  of  ergot  and  in  toxic  doses  causes  gangrene  and  convul- 
sions. There  is  some  evidence  to  show  that  Gynergen  is  of 
value  in  certain  cases  of  migraine  but  the  value  of  the  drug 
in  this  condition  at  the  present  time  is  not  yet  completely  estab- 
lished. The  drug  is  not  always  a  prophylactic  and  its  continued 
administration  will  not  always  prevent  attacks.  Caution  in  its 
use  is  advisable  on  account  of  the  danger  of  poisoning  from 
long  continued  use  or  over  dosage. 

Gynergen  is  proposed  for  use  when  the  action  of  ergot  to 
produce  uterine  contraction  is  desired ;  it  is  contraindicated 
whenever  tonic  contraction  of  the  uterus  is  undesirable.  Gyner- 
gen is  also  stated  to  be  indicated  in  hemorrhage  following 
abortion,  after  curettage  and  in  postpartum  endometritis.  It 
is  also  used  by  some  physicians  in  conditions  in  which  there 
is  believed  to  be  overactivity  of  the  sympathetic  nervous  sys- 
tem, but  its  value  here  is  not  so  well  established. 

Dosage.  —  Intramuscularly,  the  average  dose  is  0.25  mg. ; 
orally,  1  mg.  two  to  four  times  daily.  Caution  should  be  exer- 
cised in  the  repeated  use  of  ergotamine ;  cases  of  gangrene 
have  been  reported  where  the  use  of  the  alkaloid  has  been  con- 
tinued over  a  period  of  some  days.  For  migraine  the  dose 
recommended  is  0.25  mg.  by  subcutaneous  injection,  to  be  fol- 
lowed in  two  or  three  hours  by  a  full  dose  of  0.5  mg.  if  no 
untoward  effects  have  been  seen  or  if  the  original  dose  has 
not  been  effective.  If  preferred,  tablets  containing  1  mg.  may 
be  given  by  mouth,  but  this  method  of  administration  is  not 
so  effective  as  when  the  drug  is  given  by  the  subcutaneous 
route. 

Manufactured  by  Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Basle,  Switzerland  (Sandoz 
Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor.)  U.  S.  patent  1,394,233 
(Oct.  18,  1921;  expires  1938);  1,435,187  (Nov.  14,  1922;  expires  1939). 
U.  S.  trademark  173,047. 

Ampules  Gynergen  Solution  1:2000,  0.5  cc:  Each  ampule  contains 
0.25  mg.  of  gynergen  in  an  aqueous  solution  containing  a  small  excess 
of  tartaric  acid. 


230     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Ampules   Gynergen,   1    cc:   Each   cubic   centimeter   of   solution    contains 
0.5   mg.  of  gynergen  and  a  small  excess  of  tartaric  acid. 

Gynergen    Solution    0.1    Per    Cent:    Each    cubic    centimeter    of    solution 
contains  1  mg.  of  gynergen,  and  a  small  excess  of  tartaric  acid. 
Tablets   Gynergen,   0.001   Gm. 

Ergotamine  tartrate  ordinarily  crystallizes  with  solvents  of  crystal- 
lization. Ergotamine  tartrate  with  ethyl  alcohol  of  crystallization  occurs 
as  colorless  rhombic  crystals  that  are  difficulty  soluble  in  water;  these 
crystals  lose  their  solvent  of  crystallization  (sometimes  as  much  as 
8  per  cent)  in  a  high  vacuum  beginning  at  ordinary  temperature  and 
raising  the  temperature  to  105  C. 

Ergotamine  tartrate  is  soluble  in  water  (1  in  500)  and  in  ethyl 
alcohol  (1  in  500);  on  heating  it  blackens  at  177  C,  and  at  184  C. 
it  decomposes  with  the  evolution  of  gas.  Dissolves  about  0.001  Gm.  of 
ergotamine  tartrate  in  a  mixture  of  5  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  and 
5  cc.  of  ethyl  acetate  and  to  1  cc.  of  this  solution  add  slowly  and  with 
continual  agitation  and  cooling  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid:  a  blue  color 
with  a  red  tinge  develops;  add  0.1  cc.  of  diluted  ferric  chloride 
(1  in  1);  the  red  tinge  becomes  less  pronounced  and  the  blue  color 
more  pronounced.  Add  0.1  cc.  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide  solution 
to  2  cc.  of  a  solution  of  ergotamine  tartrate  (1  in  50,000) :  a  slight 
turbidity  appears.  Add  0.1  cc.  of  trinitrophenol  solution  to  2  cc.  of  a 
solution  containing  ergotamine  tartrate  (1  in  20,000):  a  turbidity 
appears.  In  a  subdued  light,  transfer  0.5  Gm.  of  ergotamine  tartrate 
to  a  separatory  funnel  containing  20  cc.  of  water  and  1  cc.  of  ammonia 
water,  shake  the  solution  with  three  portions  of  chloroform  (20  cc, 
15  cc.  and  15  cc),  combine  the  chloroform  extracts  and  evaporate 
spontaneously;  transfer  a  weighed  portion  to  a  beaker,  add  10  times 
the  weight  of  acetone  at  30  C;  if  the  solid  does  not  dissolve  mark  the 
height  of  the  liquid  in  the  beaker  and  then  add  twice  the  volume  of 
acetone  already  present  and  warm;  if  the  solid  still  does  not  dissolve, 
filter,  reject  the  residue  and  evaporate  the  filtrate  to  the  volume  already 
marked;  add  0.7  part  of  water  and  cool  to  0  C.  for  two  hours,  filter 
oflF  the  crystals  and  wash  with  2  cc.  of  ether:  the  crystals  are  rhombic 
and  are  highly  refractive.  Dry  the  crystals  for  twenty-four  hours  in 
a  high  vacuum:  the  crystals  lose  their  solvent  of  crystallization,  and 
JDCCome  a  lusterless  powder  that  has  the  following  properties:  on  heat- 
ing, the  powder  blackens  at  174  C.  and  decomposes  with  the  evolution 
of  gas  from  181  to  182  C.  It  is  very  soluble  in  chloroform  and 
glacial    acetic   acid,    but   is    less    soluble   in    alcohol,    benzene   and   ether. 

20 
The  specific  rotation   [a]  —   of    a    0.6   per    cent    solution    in    chloroform 

D 
is   between  — 125   and  — 155. 


ri?/ETHANOLAMINE-TECHNICAL.— A  mixture  con- 
taining approximately  75  per  cent  triethanolamine,  (C2H40H)3N, 
20  per  cent  diethanolamine,  (C2H40H)2NH,  and  5  per  cent 
monethanolamine,  C2H4OH  NH2. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Triethanolamine-technical  is  an  excellent 
emulsifying  agent  for  use  in  the  preparation  of  ointments  and 
other  dermatologic  medicaments.  When  added  to  certain  prepa- 
rations used  on  the  scalp,  for  example,  oil  of  cade,  it  facilitates 
their  subsequent  removal.  Triethanolamine-technical  combines 
with  fatty  acids  to  form  soaps  with  good  detergent  properties, 
which  are  soluble  not  only  in  water  but  also  in  gasoline,  kero- 
sene, and  oils.  It  is  claimed  to  have  the  power  of  increasing 
the  penetration  of  oily  substances  and  to  possess  a  certain 
amount  of  bacteriostatic  action. 


Ti?/ETHANOLAMINE-TECHNICAL  231 

Dosage. — In  the  preparation  of  emulsions,  the  fatty  acids  are 
dissolved  in  oil,  and  the  triethanolamine-technical  in  water,  after 
which  the  two  solutions  are  mixed.  Emulsions  are  made  in 
concentrations  of  from  20  to  40  per  cent,  which  may  be  diluted 
subsequently.  For  emulsions  containing  olive  oil  the  propor- 
tions are  2  per  cent  triethanolamine-crude  to  15  per  cent  oleic 
acid.  The  same  proportions  are  used  for  the  majority  of  vege- 
table oil  emulsions.    For  mineral  oils  less  fatty  acid  is  required. 

Trietbanolamine-technical  is  a  colorless  to  pale  yellow  viscous,  hygro- 
scopic liquid,  with  a  slight  ammoniacal  odor.  It  is  miscible  with  water 
and  alcohol  and  is  soluble  in  chloroform;  immiscible  with  ether,  benzene 
and  purified  petroleum  benzin.  The  specific  gravity  is  from  1.115  to 
1.124  at  25   C.     The  refractive  index  is  from   1.480  to  1.485  at  20  C. 

To  1  cc.  of  triethanolamine-technical  add  0.1  cc.  of  copper  sulfate 
solution:  a  deep  blue  color  forms.  Add  5  cc.  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion and  concentrate  to  Yz  volume  by  boiling:  the  color  remains.  To 
1  cc.  of  triethanolamine-technical  add  0.3  cc.  of  cobalt  chloride  solution: 
a  carmine  red  solution  forms.  In  a  test  tube  place  1  cc.  of  triethanol- 
amine-technical, and  by  means  of  a  slotted  cork,  suspend  a  piece  of 
moistened  red  litmus  paper  in  the  air  space,  slot  the  side  of  the  cork 
to  let  air  escape,  and  place  the  tube  in  the  steam-bath:  the  paper  turns 
blue.  To  2  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  triethanolamine- 
technical,  add  2  drops  of  phenolphthalein  indicator  solution;  an  alkaline 
reaction  is  indicated. 

Weigh  and  transfer  50  cc.  of  triethanolamine-technical  to  a  suitable 
Ladenburg  distilling  flask;  attach  the  flask  to  a  suitable  condenser 
with  receiver  and  slowly  and  carefully  fractionate  at  a  pressure  of 
10  mm.  of  mercury;  not  more  than  8  per  cent  by  weight  of  distillate 
is  obtained  below  89  C,  of  which  1  Gm.  consumes  not  more  than 
15.4  cc,  nor  less  than  14.3  cc.  of  normal  hydrochloric  acid  when 
titrated  as  indicated  for  triethanolamine-technical;  not  more  than  5  per 
cent  by  weight  of  residue  is  left  after  distillation  below  209    C. 

Transfer  2  to  3  Gm.  of  triethanolamine-technical,  accurately  weighed, 
to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask.  Add  75  cc.  of  water  and  0.1  cc.  of  methyl 
red  indicator  solution,  and  titrate  with  normal  hydrochloric  acid:  not 
less  than  6.7  cc,  nor  more  than  7.8  cc.  of  normal  hydrochloric  acid  is 
consumed  per  gram. 

The  weight  of  the  ash  obtained  from  1  Gm.  of  triethanolamine- 
technical,  accurately  weighed,  is  not  more  than  0.0001   Gm. 

Transfer  about  1.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  of  triethanolamine- 
technical  to  a  100  cc.  beaker,  add  50  cc.  of  solution.  A  (dehydrated 
alcohol  saturated  with  triethanolamine  hydrochloride)  and  agitate  the 
contents  until  the  sample  is  dissolved.  Add  10  cc.  of  solution  B  (100  cc 
of  solution  A  treated  with  dry  hydrogen  chloride  until  the  weight 
increases  20  Gm.).  Stir  the  contents  well  and  set  the  mixture  aside 
5  minutes.  Filter  the  solution  through  a  prepared  Gooch  crucible  and 
complete  transfer  of  the  precipitate  by  washing  with  5  to  10  one  cc. 
portions  of  solution  A,  then  cover  the  precipitate  by  adding  slowly 
40  cc.  of  solution  A,  at  the  same  time  applying  gentle  suction  to  the 
crucible.  Follow  by  washing  with  five  10  cc.  portions  of  solution  C 
(a  mixture  of  6  volumes  of  anhydrous  ethyl  ether  and  4  volumes  of 
dehydrated  alcohol  saturated  with  triethanolamine  hydrochloride). 
Finally  remove  all  liquid  by  suction,  allow  air  to  be  drawn  through 
the  crucible  for  several  minutes  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  105  C. 
The  weight  of  triethanolamine  calculated  from  the  weight  of  triethanol- 
amine hydrochloride  precipitate  obtained  is  not  less  than  75  per  cent 
of  the  weight  of  sample. 

Triethanolamine-Carbide  and  Carbon  Chemicals  Cor- 
poration.— A  brand  of  triethanolamine-technical   (N.   N.   R.). 

Manufactured  by  the  Carbide  and  Carbon  Chemicals  Corporation, 
New  York. 


232     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

ETHYLHYDROCUPREINE 

Ethylhydrocupreine  is  a  synthetic  derivative  of  cupreine, 
C19H22O2N2.  Cupreine  is  an  alkaloid  occurring  together  with 
quinine  in  the  bark  of  Remijia  pediincidata.  Ethylhydrocupreine 
may  also  be  synthetically  made  from  quinine.  It  is  closely 
related  to  quinine,  differing  from  the  latter  in  containing  two 
more  hydrogen  atoms  and  an  ethoxy  group  in  place  of  a  methoxy 
group.  Ethylhydrocupreine  has  the  antimalarial  and  anesthetic 
action  of  quinine.  Toxic  symptoms,  however,  such  as  tinnitus, 
deafness,  amblyopia  or  amaurosis  (retinitis)  are  more  liable 
to  occur  than  with  quinine.  While  these  are  generally  tran- 
sient, retinitis  may  result  in  permanent  impairment  of  vision. 
This  demands  caution  in  the  administration  of  the  drug.  Ethyl- 
hydrocupreine has  a  specific  bactericidal  effect  on  the  pneumo- 
coccus  in  vitro  and  it  exerts  a  protective  and  curative  action 
in  animals  experimentally  infected  with  virulent  strains  of 
pneumococci.  The  value  of  the  drug  in  the  internal  treatment 
of  lobar  pneumonia  in  man  has  not  been  established.  Ethyl- 
hydrocupreine hydrochloride  has  a  definite  value  in  the  treat- 
ment of  pneumococcic  infections  of  the  eye  (ulcus  corneae 
serpens). 


FIBRIN  FERMENTS  AND  THROMBOPLASTIC 

SUBSTANCES 

The  clotting  of  blood  (that  is,  the  transformation  of  the 
fibrinogen  of  circulating  blood  into  the  insoluble  fibrin  of  blood 
clot)  has  been  shown  to  be  due  to  the  action  of  the  fibrin  fer- 
ment (thrombin)  on  the  fibrinogen  of  the  blood.  The  fibrin 
ferment  of  thrombin  exists  in  the  blood  in  the  form  of  its 
forerunner  (prothrombin)  which  is  acted  on  by  the  calcium 
salts  and  converted  into  thrombin.  Besides  calcium  salts,  how- 
ever, another  factor  is  necessary.  In  spite  of  a  sufficient  supply 
of  calcium  salts,  blood  does  not  clot  spontaneously  within  the 
vessels  in  health.  This  other  factor  may  be  furnished  by  the 
breaking  down  of  blood  cells  or  blood  platelets  or  by  the  pieces 
of  tissues  that  are  cut  or  badly  injured.  It  has  been  designated 
as  "zymoplastic"  substance  by  Schmidt,  as  "thrombokinase"  by 
Morowitz,  and  as  "thromboplastic  substance"  or  "thromboplas- 
tin" by  Howell.  Howell  believes  that  the  reason  why  blood 
does  not  coagulate  within  the  vessels  is  that  the  prothrombin 
exists  there  in  combination  with  an  inhibiting  substance,  anti- 
prothrombin  (heparin)  which  prevents  it  from  acting.  He 
believes  that  when  blood  is  shed  or  flows  over  injured  tissue 
the  thromboplastin  derived  from  blood  cells,  blood  platelets  or 
tissue  cells  combines  with,  or  neutralizes,  the  antiprothrombin 
(heparin),  liberating  the  prothrombin  from  combination  with 
the  latter.  The  prothrombin  thus  liberated  and  activated  by 
the  calcium  salts  is  converted  into  thrombin  and  converts  the 
fibrinogen  of  the  plasma  into  fibrin,  causing  coagulation  to  set 
in.     Howell  has  shown  that  thromboplastin  or  "thromboplastic 


FIBRIN     FERMENTS  233 

substance,"  from  every  source  in  which  he  has  investigated  it, 
contains  the  phosphatid  cephaHn  (also  written  kephalin),  and 
that  the  facilitating  influence  of  thromboplastin  on  coagulation 
is  due  to  the  action  of  the  cephalin.  It  is  soluble  in  ether,  but 
insoluble  in  alcohol  and  acetone.  In  solution  or  in  solid  form, 
cephalin  gradually  loses  its  power  to  hasten  the  clotting  of 
blood,  owing  probably  to  an  oxidation  of  the  unsaturated  fatty 
acids  in  the  molecule. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  Preparations  containing  thromboplastin 
are  said  to  be  useful  when  applied  locally  in  the  treatment 
of  hemorrhage,  especially  hemorrhage  from  oozing  surfaces, 
likewise  in  the  treatment  of  scar  tissues,  in  nosebleed,  and  in 
surgery  of  the  bones,  glands,  nose  and  throat,  but  many  sur- 
geons have  abandoned  their  use  even  for  such  purposes.  Intra- 
venous injection  is  probably  dangerous,  and  there  is  no 
satisfactory  evidence  that  subcutaneous  injection  is  useful. 
Preparations  should  be  standardized  by  testing  on  specimens  of 
blood  in  vitro.  They  should  be  capable  of  reducing  the  coagu- 
lation time  to  about  one  third  of  its  original  length ;  they 
should  be  proved  to  be  sterile.  The  Council  holds  that  there 
is  no  evidence  to  warrant  the  internal  use  of  these  substances, 
and  further  that  such  use,  on  account  of  the  danger  from 
anaphylaxis  from  preparations  containing  animal  proteins,  is 
likely  to  be  harmful  unless  proper  precautions  are  taken.  There 
appears  to  be  no  evidence  that  this  danger  is  connected  with 
local  application,  but  even  before  such  use  physicians  should 
inquire  into  the  patient's  history  to  determine  whether  or  not 
sensitivity  to  these  proteins  exists. 

BRAIN  LIPOID.— Impure  Cephalin.— Impure  Kephalin.— 
An  extract  of  the  brain  of  the  ox,  or  other  mammal,  prepared 
according  to  the  method  of  Howell  as  applied  in  practice  by 
Hirschfelder  (Lancet  2:542,  1915)  and  described  below. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Fibrin  Ferments 
and  Thromboplastic  Substances, 

Dosage. — Brain  lipoid  may  be  spread  on  gauze  sponges,  on 
pledgets,  or  on  the  tissues  themselves ;  or  an  emulsion  may 
be  prepared  by  shaking  up  with  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  and  used  in  the  same  way  or  sponged  over 
the  tissues. 

For  use  in  an  office  or  dispensary,  a  5  per  cent  ethereal  solu- 
tion of  brain  lipoid  suffices  and  can  be  kept  ready  for  use  for 
some  time  (several  months)  in  a  sterile  dropper  bottle  from 
which  an  opalescent  emulsion  can  be  prepared  extemporaneously 
by  dropping  from  10  to  30  drops  into  an  ounce  of  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  then  shaking.  This  solution 
can  also  be  dispensed  by  pharmacists,  provided  the  opening  in 
the  stopper  of  the  dropper  bottle  is  kept  slightly  open  to  pre- 
vent the  ether's  blowing  off  when  the  bottle  is  shaken  or  heated. 


234     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Brain  lipoid  (impure  cephalin)  is  prepared  from  ox  brain  which  is 
run  through  a  hashing  machine,  then  covered  with  3  volumes  of 
alcohol  and  agitated  two  or  three  times.  The  excess  of  alcohol  is  then 
poured  off  and  squeezed  out  gently  through  linen,  care  being  taken 
to  avoid  great  force  in  wringing  out  the  alcohol,  as  this  tends  to  break 
up  the  brain  tissue_  into  very  finely  divided  particles  which  pass  through 
the  filter.  The  residue  is  then  covered  with  3  volumes  of  ether,  shaken 
vigorously  and  filtered  first  through  cotton  and  then  through  filter 
paper.  The  clear  filtrate  thus  obtained  is  evaporated  to  dryness  over 
a  water  bath,  leaving  a  yellow  residue  of  fatty  appearance  and  con- 
sistency. (This  residue  consists  largely  of  cephalin,  but  though  the 
latter  is  not  in  the  pure  state,  it  is  extremely  active  in  accelerating  the 
clotting  of  blood  in  vitro.) 

The  method  of  preparation  renders  it  sterile.  It  can  be  transferred 
on  a  sterile  spatula  or  knife  blade  to  sterile  vessels.  It  retains  its 
activities  for  several  weeks. 

(The  impurities,  largely  the  lecithins  and  myelins,  do  not  materially 
interfere  with  the  activity  of  the  cephalin,  but,  on  the  contrary,  facili- 
tate its  emulsification  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and 
thus   facilitate   its   intimate  miscibility   with    blood.) 

FIBROGEN  LOCAL-MERRELL.— Suspension  of  Tissue 
Fibrinogen  and  Cephalin  for  Local  Use. — A  sterile  suspension 
of  tissue  fibrinogen  and  cephalin,  containing  1.5  per  cent  tissue 
fibrinogen  and  0.5  per  cent  cephalin  in  a  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  0.9  per  cent. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Fibrin  Ferments 
and  Thromboplastic  Substances. 

Dosage. — Fibrogen  Local-Merrell  is  applied  locally,  undiluted. 

Manufactured  by  the  Wm.   S.  Merrell  Company,  Cincinnati,  U.  S.  A. 
Patent  Re   16,639.     U.  S.  trademark  208,323. 
Fibrogen  Local-Merrell,   7   cc.    Vials. 

Fresh  beef  lungs  are  finely  ground  and  extracted  in  the  cold  with 
1.0  per  cent  sodium  chloride  solution.  To  the  filtered  extract  is  added 
an  equal  volume  of  saturated  ammonium  sulfate  solution.  The  globulin 
fraction  containing  the  tissue  fibrinogen  is  precipitated  and  removed  by 
filtration.  Fibrogen  is  prepared  from  a  1.5  per  cent  dry  weight  sus- 
pension of_  this  material  in  physiological  saline.  Complete  sterilization 
is  accomplished  by  the  addition  of  bichloride  of  mercury  which  is  sub- 
sequently removed  by  dialysis.  After  the  mercury  has  been  removed 
so  that  less  than  one  part  in  15,000  remains,  sodium  chloride  is  added 
to  make  a  final  concentration  of  0.9  per  cent.  The  amount  of  the 
residual  mercury  is  determined  by  the  following  method:  A  measured 
volume  of  Fibrogen  is  digested  in  a  specially  constructed  apparatus 
to  avoid  the  loss  of  mercury.  The  amount  of  mercury  present  is 
measured  by  titration  against  standard  KCN  solution  using  di-phenyl- 
carbazone  as  an  indicator. 

Cephalin,  which  functions  as  a  stabilizer  by  preventing  rapid  loss 
of  activity  on  exposure  to  heat  is  then  added  to  the  extent  of  0.5  per 
cent.  Fibrogen  is  preserved  with  sodium  ethylmercuri  thiosalicylate 
[Merthiolate]  1:10,000.  Bacteriological  tests  are  made  to  insure  abso- 
lute sterility. 

The  potency  of  Fibrogen  Local-Merrell  is  determined  by  measuring 
its  power  to  accelerate  the  clotting  of  recalcified,  citrated  or  oxalated 
plasma  or  of  blood.  By  the  above  tests  the  coagulation  time  is  found 
to  be  reduced  approximately  90  per  cent. 

The  following  is  a  description  of  the  method  employed  for  measuring 
the  thromboplastic  activity  of  Fibrogen  Local-Merrell: 

10  cc.  of  blood  are  drawn  from  the  heart  of  a  rabbit  into  an  oiled 
syringe.  The  blood  is  then  transferred  in  1.0  cc.  quantities  into  each 
of  six  tubes  previously  placed  in  a  water  bath  which  is  maintained  at 
a  temperature  of  37.5   degrees   C.     To  each  of  three  tubes,   which  are 


FIBRIN     FERMENTS  235 

to  serve  as  controls,  is  added  0.1  cc.  of  physiological  saline  and  to  each 
of  the  remaining  tubes  are  added  an  equal  amount  of  Fibrogen  Local- 
Merrell.  The  contents  of  each  tube  are  then  thoroughly  mixed.  The 
blood  contained  in  the  tubes  to  which  Fibrogen  Local-Merrell  has  been 
added  will  have  clotted  solidly  within  15  to  30  seconds,  whereas  the 
blood  contained  in  the  control  tubes  will  require  approximately  IS  to 
25  minutes  to  clot.  The  time  of  coagulation  of  the  blood,  therefore, 
has  been  reduced  approximately  90  per  cent  through  the  action  of 
Fibrogen    Local-Merrell. 

SOLUTION  BRAIN  EXTRACT.— Liquor  Extract! 
Cerebri. — Solution  Thromboplastin-Hess. — An  extract  of  cattle 
brain  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  prepared  by 
the  method  of  Hess  (/.  A.  M.  A.  66:558  [Feb.  19]  1916,  foot- 
note 2). 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Fibrin  Ferments 
and  Thromboplastic  Substances. 

Dosage. — The  solution  may  be  applied  directly  to  the  bleed- 
ing tissues  or  sprayed  on  them,  or  a  sponge  or  tampon  may 
be  immersed  in  it  and  then  pressed  on  the  bleeding  surface. 

Cattle  brains  are  obtained  fresh  from  the  slaughter-house,  stripped 
of  their  membranes,  washed  in  running  water  and  weighed.  They  are 
then  passed  through  a  meat  chopping  machine  three  times,  and  to  the 
quantity  prepared  an  equal  quantity  of  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  is  added.  This  suspension  is  allowed  to  remain  in  the  refriger- 
ator for  forty-eight  hours,  and  is  then  pressed  through  cheese-cloth 
twice.  This  extract,  which  contains  fine  suspension  of  tissue  in  addition 
to  tissue  juice,  is  diluted  with  one  half  its  volume  of  physiological  solu- 
tion of  sodium  chloride.  Cresol  is  then  added  in  proper  proportion  so 
that  the  finished  preparation  contains  0.3  per  cent.  It  maintains  its 
hemostatic  potency  for  some  time  (several  months).  (As  cresol  is  not  a 
perfect  antiseptic,  the  sterility  of  this  preparation  cannot  be  guaranteed.) 

Thromboplastin  Local-Lederle.  —  An  extract  of  cattle 
brain  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  prepared 
according  to  the  method  of  Hess. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Fibrin  Ferments 
and  Thromboplastic  Substances. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Solution  Brain  Extract. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 
No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Thromboplastin  Local-Lederle,  20  cc.   Vial. 

The  potency  of  thromboplastin  local-Lederle  is  tested  as  follows: 
Transfer  0.5  cc.  of  oxalated  blood  plasma  (0.1  per  cent  oxalate)  to 
each  of  a  series  of  tubes,  and  add  0.2  cc.  of  thromboplastin  local- 
Lederle  to  each  tube.  Also  transfer  0.5  cc.  of  oxalated  blood  plasma  to 
each  of  a  control  series  of  tubes  and  add  0.2  cc.  of  physiologic  solu- 
tion of  sodium  chloride.  To  each  tube  (and  control)  add  0.2  cc.  of 
calcium  chloride  solution  the  strength  of  which  is  determined  by 
control  tests  as  follows:  that  dilution  of  calcium  chloride  (usually 
0.15,  0.25  or  0.5  per  cent)  is  chosen  with  which  the  plasma  forms 
solid  clots  in  not  less  than  20  minutes:  thromboplastin  local-Lederle 
must  cause  clotting  of  the  oxalated  blood  (such  as  to  permit  complete 
inversion  of  the  tubes)  within  one  minute;  the  controls  must  fail  to 
show   clotting  at  the  expiration   of  20  minutes. 

Thromboplastin  Local-Squibb. — An  extract  of  cattle  brain 
in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  prepared  according 
to  the  method  of  Hess. 


236     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and    Uses. — See   preceding  article,   Fibrin   Ferments 
and  Thromboplastic  Substances. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,   Solution  Brain  Extract. 

Manufactured  by  E.   R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.     No  U.  S.   patent 
or  trademark. 

Thromboplastin   Locnl-Sqiiibb.   Dental   Package,   six   4   cc.   vials. 
Thromboplastin  Local-Sqiiihb,  20  cc.   Vial. 

Blood  plasma  is  obtained  by  bleeding  45  cc.  of  sheep's  blood  into  a 
tube  containing  5  cc.  of  1  per  cent  sodium  oxalate  in  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride,  centrifuging  the  mixture  to  obtain  the 
clear  plasma  and  preserving  this  at  a  low  temperature.  A  0.5  per  cent 
calcium  chloride  solution  is  prepared  by  dissolving  0.5  Gm.  anhydrous 
calcium  chloride  in  100  cc.  of  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride. 
Place  5  drops  of  blood  plasma  in  a  flat  bottomed  vial,  add  3  drops  of 
calcium  chloride  solution  and  2  drops  of  the  thromboplastin  local-Squibb 
to  be  tested  and  mix  the  contents  by  gentle  rotation:  no  more  than 
sixty  seconds  should  elapse  before  the  vial  may  be  completely  inverted 
without  loss  of   its  contents. 


FORMALDEHYDE     PREPARATIONS     AND 

COMPOUNDS     WHICH     LIBERATE 

FORMALDEHYDE 

The  antiseptic  actions  of  formaldehyde  cannot  be  utilized 
directly  on  the  body  because  of  the  irritant  and  coagulant 
effects.  Attempts  have  been  made  to  avoid  these  effects  by 
combining  the  formaldehyde  in  such  a  way  as  to  cause  it  to 
be  liberated  very  gradually.  The  results  have  been  rather 
disappointing,  because  it  is  difficult,  if  not  impossible,  to  secure 
just  that  degree  of  stability  in  which  the  formaldehyde  will  be 
liberated  in  concentrations  sufficient  to  maintain  the  antiseptic 
action,  but  not  sufficient  to  become  irritant.  Methenamine 
(hexamethylenetetramine)  is  a  notable  exception ;  but  its  effects 
are  confined  to  acid  fluids,  and,  therefore,  essentially  to  the 
urine.  Other  compounds  are  effective  mainly  through  the 
other  constituents  with  which  the  formaldehyde  is  combined, 
rather  than  through  the  formaldehyde  itself. 

The  wide  reactivity  of  formaldehyde  gives  the  possibility  of 
a  great  variety  of  compounds ;  with  proteins ;  carbohydrates ; 
amides;  phenols  and  aromatic  derivatives.  Methenamine  does 
not  contain  formaldehyde  as  such,  but  liberates  it  under  certain 
conditions. 

Formaldehyde  Preparations 

PARAFORMALDEHYDE.— For  description  see  the  U.  S. 
Pharmacopeia  X  under   Paraformaldehydum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  is  converted  into  formaldehyde  by  heat, 
and  is  therefore  used  in  fumigation.  Formaldehyde  is  also 
liberated  on  contact  with  water,  so  that  paraformaldehyde  is 
antiseptic  and  escharotic.  The  rate  of  liberation,  however,  is 
variable,  so  that  its  internal  employment  is  not  advisable. 

Dosage. — Internally  from  0.3  to  1  Gm.  (5  to  15  grains) ; 
externally   (for  warts)    in  10  per  cent  suspension  in   collodion. 


FORMALDEHYDE  2Z1 

SOLUTION  OF  FORMALDEHYDE.— "An  aqueous 
solution  containing  not  less  than  Zl  per  cent  of  CH2O  with 
variable  amounts  of  methanol  to  prevent  polymerization." 
V.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Liquor 
Formaldehydi. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  Useful  Drugs. 

Formalin. — A  brand  of  solution  of  formaldehyde-U.  S.  P. 

Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor.     U.  S.  trademark  65,625. 

Methenamine  and  Methenamine  Compounds 

Hexamethylenetetramine,  official  as  methenamine,  owes  its 
action  entirely  to  the  liberation  of  formaldehyde,  which  occurs 
only  in  acid  fluids.  It  is  an  active  urinary  antiseptic,  provided 
the  urine  is  secreted  in  an  acid  state.  It  has  been  shown  that 
no  antiseptic  effects  can  occur  in  the  body  tissues  and  fluids 
which  have  a  neutral  or  slightly  alkaline  reaction.  Hexa- 
methylenetetramine is  not  a  uric  acid  solvent,  and  in  gout  it 
has  not  given  satisfactory  results. 

Its  use  as  a  prophylactic  against  nephritis,  especially  in 
scarlatina,  has  been  recommended  by  several  authors.  Yet 
hexamethylenetetramine  itself  may,  at  least  sometimes,  act  as  a 
renal  irritant.  The  Council  deems  it  a  duty  to  call  attention 
to  this  fact,  and  also  to  the  statement  of  Jochmann  that 
prophylactic  drug  treatment,  as  with  hexamethylenetetramine, 
cannot  prevent  the  nephritis  of  scarlatina. 

Hexamethylenetetramine  compounds  simply  possess  the  actions 
of  hexamethylenetetramine  and  of  the  salts  of  the  acid  with 
which  it  may  be  combined. 

METHENAMINE.  —  Hexamethylenamine.  —  Hexamethyl- 
enetetramine.— "Contains  not  less  than  99  per  cent  of  (CH2)8N4." 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Methenamina. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Methenamine  and 
Methenamine  Compounds. 

Methenamine-Calco.— A  brand  of  methenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   Calco  Chemical   Co.,   Inc.,   Bound   Brook,   N.  J. 
Tablets   Methcnaiiiinc-Calco,    5   grains. 

Formin. — A  brand  of  methenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Merck  &   Co.  Inc.,   Rahway,   N.  J.,  distributor. 
Formin  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gni.J. 
Formin  Tablets,  7y^  grains  (0.5  Gm.). 

Urotropin. — A  brand  of  methenamine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York,  U.  S.  trademark 
269,754. 

Urotropin  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.). 
Urotropin  Tablets,  7^  grains  (0.5  Gm.). 


238     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

GELATIN  COMPOUND  PHENOLIZED.— A  mixture 
composed  of  gelatin,  625  parts ;  zinc  oxide,  250  parts ;  glycerin, 
1,900  parts;  water,  1,900  parts,  containing  1.5  per  cent  of  phenol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Gelatin  compound  phenolized  is  used  in 
the  preparation  of  bandages  to  cover  chronic  ulcers  and  unhealed 
secondary  burns  and  in  the  preparation  of  pressure  bandages  for 
varicose  veins  when  surgical  treatment  is  not  necessary. 

Dosage. — For  use,  the  preparation  is  heated  until  it  becomes 
liquid  and  is  applied  with  a  brush ;  over  this  a  spiral  bandage 
is  applied  and  another  layer  of  the  preparation  brushed  on; 
this  is  repeated  until  a  total  thickness  of  three  layers  of  the 
bandage  and  four  of  the  preparation  has  been  applied. 

Manufactured  by  Sharpe  &  Dchme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  No 
U.    S.   patent  or  trademark. 


GOLD     SALTS 

SODIUM  GOLD  THIOSULFATE.— Sodii  et  Aurii 
Thiosulfas. — Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate. — Sodium  Aurothiosul- 
fate,  Na3Au(S203)2.2H20.  The  complex  salt  formed  from  1 
molecule  of  gold  thiosulfate  and  3  molecules  of  sodium  thio- 
sulfate.    It  contains  approximately  37.4  per  cent  of  gold. 

Actions  and  Uses. — A  review  of  the  literature  in  regard  to 
the  use  of  gold  and  sodium  thiosulfate  in  the  treatment  of  lupus 
erythematosus  reveals  in  general  quite  satisfactory  clinical 
results,  and  it  is  considered  a  distinct  advance  in  the  therapy 
of  this  condition.  Although  there  have  been  many  recurrences 
in  cases  originally  thought  cured,  nevertheless  the  beneficial 
and  often  curative  action  of  the  drug  in  a  fair  percentage  of 
the  cases  seems  to  warrant  giving  it  a  definite  place  in  the 
treatment  of  a  disease  for  which  at  present  there  is  no  specific 
remedy. 

Gold  and  sodium  thiosulfate  must,  however,  be  used  with 
extreme  caution.  This  is  especially  true  in  the  presence  of 
tuberculosis  and  in  diseases  of  the  liver  and  kidneys.  Dosages 
at  first  advocated  have  been  found  to  be  too  great,  resulting 
frequently  in  severe  reactions,  sometimes  resulting  fatally.  Even 
with  much  smaller  doses,  accidents  of  this  kind  have  occurred. 
The  reactions  most  commonly  encountered  are  varying  degrees 
of  fever,  diarrhea,  vomiting,  albuminuria,  enteritis,  stomatitis, 
prostration  and  shock.  Skin  reactions  consist  of  varying  degrees 
of  erythema  urticaria,  severe  papular  and  vesicular  dermatitis, 
and  scarlatinoform  and  exfoliative  dermatitis.  Cases  of  aplastic 
anemia,  of  hemorrhagic  diathesis,  and  of  agranulocytosis  have 
also  been  noted  following  its  use.  Published  necropsy  reports 
reveal  conditions  usually  found  in  metal  poisoning.  A  certain 
number  of  cases  of  toxic  hepatitis  and  of  acute  yellow  atrophy 
have  been  noted  after  the  use  of  this  drug. 

Dosage. — At  present  the  initial  dose  preferred  is  0.005  Gm. 
(^/i2  grain)  intravenously,  given  in  from  2  to  5  cc.  of  sterile 
distilled   water.     Subsequent   doses   given   at   weekly   intervals 


GOLD     SALTS  239 

are  increased  0.005  Gm.  (Yio  grain)  per  dose,  not  exceeding  a 
maximum  of  0.05  Gm.  for  women  and  0.075  Gm.  (1^  grains) 
for  men,  provided  no  reactions  have  occurred.  The  drug  may 
be  continued  cautiously  in  smaller  dosage  following  complete 
recovery  from  mild  reactions  but  should  be  discontinued  perma- 
nently if  severe  reactions  have  occurred.  A  careful  physical 
examination  to  rule  out  disease  of  the  liver  and  kidneys,  or 
other  serious  organic  disorders,  should  be  made  before  using 
this  therapy.  Cases  of  lupus  erythematosus  of  the  disseminated 
type  are  most  likely  to  show  an  extreme  idiosyncrasy  for  the 
drug,  and  if  used  at  all  in  such  cases  it  must  be  given  in  very 
small  doses  not  exceeding  0.005  Gm.  at  the  start  and  cautiously 
increased  to  a  maximum  of  probably  not  over  0.025  Gm. 

Sodium  gold  thiosulfate  occurs  in  white,  glistening,  needle-like  or 
prismatic  crystals.  The  aqueous  solution  is  colorless.  It  is  freely 
soluble  in  water;  very  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol,  ether  and  chloroform. 
An   aqueous   solution    (1:200)    is   neutral   or    faintly   alkaline  to  litmus. 

Sodium  gold  thiosulfate  decomposes  without  melting  when  heated 
gently,  leaving  a  brown  residue  on  ignition.  An  aqueous  solution 
(1:200)   assumes  a  yellow  color  on  standing  and   decomposes. 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  sodium  gold  thiosulfate  in  20  cc.  of  water: 
separate  portions  of  2  cc.  each  yield  a  brick  red  precipitate  with  0.4  cc. 
of  silver  nitrate  solution;  a  purple  red  color  followed  by  a  gray  brown 
precipitate  on  addition  of  0.2  cc.  of  ammonia  water  and  0.5  cc.  of 
solution  of  hydrogen  peroxide,  followed  by  heating  to  boiling  point 
(distinction  from  arsenic,  antimony  and  tin);  no  precipitate  with 
0.3  cc.  of  sodium  iodide  (IS  per  cent);  a  bluish  purple  (purplish  gold) 
precipitate  preceded  by  disappearance  of  the  iodine  color  with  0.3  cc. 
of  iodine  test  solution  (presence  of  S2O3 — ) ;  no  precipitate  in  the  cold, 
on  addition  of  0.5  cc.  of  concentrated  hydrochloric  acid,  but  on  heating 
to  boiling  a  precipitate  then  forms;  a  precipitate  with  0.5  cc.  nitric  acid; 
no  precipitate  on  addition  of  0.2  cc.  barium  chloride  solution  and  0.2  cc. 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  (sulfate) ;  no  apparent  change  in  cold  or 
after  heating  with  0.4  cc.  of  sodium  bisulfite  solution  (no  auric 
compounds) . 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm,  of  sodium  gold  thiosulfate,  accurately 
weighed,  in  5  cc.  of  water,  carefully  add  4-5  cc.  nitric  acid  and  25  cc. 
water;  agitate;  when  the  reaction  has  subsided,  filter  the  residue  onto 
a  tared  Gooch  crucible.  Wash  the  residue  with  six  25  cc.  portions  of 
water  and  save  the  filtrate  for  determination  of  sulfur  constituent. 
Wash  the  residue  in  the  crucible  with  alcohol  and  ether  after  removal  of 
the  filtrate;  dry  the  contents  at  100  C.  and  ignite  to  constant  weight. 
The  weight  of  gold  should  not  be  less  than  37  per  cent  nor  more  than 
37.5   per  cent. 

Transfer  the  filtrate  from  the  gold  precipitation  to  a  250  cc.  volumetric 
flask  and  make  up  to  volume  by  addition  of  water.  Pipet  50  cc.  of  the 
solution  to  a  500  cc.  beaker,  add  5  cc.  hydrochloric  acid,  evaporate  to 
one-third  volume,  dilute  to  250  cc,  heat  almost  to  boiling  temperature, 
slowly  add  with  stirring  10  cc.  of  hot  barium  chloride  solution,  digest, 
filter  through  a  tared  Gooch  crucible,  dry  and  ignite  the  residue  to  con- 
stant weight:  the  weight  of  barium  sulfate  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  24.2  per  cent  nor  more  than  24.7  per  cent  of  sulfur. 

Gold   Sodium   Thiosulfate-Abbott. — A   brand   of  sodium 
gold  thiosulfate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured    by    the    Abbott    Laboratories,    North    Chicago,    111.      No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

^Ampules  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Abbott,  0.01  Gm. 
Ampules  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Abbott,  0.05  Gm. 
Ampules  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Abbott,  0.1  Gm. 
Ampules  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Abbott,  0.25  Gm. 


240     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Merck. — A  brand  of  sodium 
gold  thiosulfate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Ampuls   Gold   Sodium   Thiosulfate-Mcyck,  0.01    Gm. 

Ampuls   Gold   Sodium   Thiosulfate-Mcrck,  0.025    Gm. 

Am,puls   Gold  Sodium   Thiosulfate-Merck,  0.05    Gm. 

Ampuls   Gold   Sodium   Thiosulfate-Merck,  0.10    Gm.. 

Ampuls   Gold   Sodium    Thiosulfate-Merck,  0.20    Gm. 

Ampuls   Gold   Sodium   Thiosulfate-Merck,  0.25    Gm. 

Ampuls    Gold    Sodium    Thiosulfate-Merck,  0.30    Gm. 

Ampuls    Gold   Sodium    Thiosulfate-Merck,  0.50    Gm. 

Ampuls    Gold   Sodium    Thiosulfate-Merck,  1.0    Gm. 

Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Searle. — A  brand  of  sodium 
gold  thiosulfate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Chicago,  111.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

Ampuls  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Searle,  5  cc:  Gold  sodium  thio- 
sulfate-Searle,  0.05  Gm.,  sodium  thiosulfate,  0.75  Gm.  Each  ampule 
contains   more    than    5    cc.    of    solution. 

TRIPHAL. — A  product  consisting  essentially  of  sodium 
aurothiobenzimidazole  carboxylate,  CeHsN  :  NHCSAu.COONa, 
with  a  small  amount  of  a  product  of  indefinite  composition.  The 
sodium  salt  of  a  compound  formed  by  the  interaction  of  gold 
halides  with  thiobenzimidazole  carboxylic  acid.  Triphal  con- 
tains from  44  to  47  per  cent  of  gold. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Proposed  for  use  as  a  gold  salt  in  the 
treatment  of  lupus  erythematosus.  Foci  of  infection,  if  present, 
should  be  removed  before  beginning  treatment  with  triphal.  It 
is  contraindicated  in  pregnancy,  kidney  disease,  acute  progres- 
sive pulmonary  tuberculosis  and  intestinal  tuberculosis.  Patients 
receiving  triphal  should  be  kept  away  from  strong  sunlight  and 
should  receive  no  actinotherapy.  Generalized  pruritis  may 
result  from  idiosyncrasy  or  metallic  retention.  The  development 
of  erythema  or  albuminuria  indicates  intolerance  to  the  drug ; 
on  its  appearance  triphal  should  be  discontinued  and  intravenous 
injections  of  sodium  thiosulfate  instituted. 

Dosage. — For  adults,  initial  dose,  intravenously,  0.005  Gm. 
{Vi2  grain),  the  dose  being  gradually  increased  to  0.075  Gm. 
(1^  grains)  ;  for  children,  average  initial  dose,  0.0005  Gm.  (K.30 
grain),  gradually  increased,  if  possible,  to  0.025  Gm.  (^  grain) 
once  a  week. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,   New  York.     U.   S. 
patent  1,558,584  (Oct.  27,  1925;  expires  1942).     U.  S.  trademark   188,475. 
Ampules  Triphal,  0.025  Gm. 
Ampules  Triphal,  0.1  Gm. 

Triphal  occurs  as  a  light  yellow,  odorless  powder,  readily  soluble 
in  cold  water,  insoluble  in  alcohol  and  ether.  An  aqueous  solution  of 
Triphal  is  slightly  alkaline  in  reaction,  is  stable  for  only  a  short  time, 
and  is  readily  decomposed  by  heat.  On  addition  of  mineral  acids  to 
solution,  a  precipitate  is  produced,  soluble  on  addition  of  excess  alkali 
solution. 


HYDROCHLORIC     ACID     SUBSTITUTES     241 

Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  triphal  in  1  cc.  water;  a  clear  solution  results. 
Transfer  1  cc.  of  triphal  solution  (1:200)  to  a  clean  test  tube  con- 
taining a  freshly  prepared  solution  of  sodium  stannite  (prepared  by 
adding  sufficient  stannous  chloride  slowly  to  2  cc.  of  dekanormal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  until  the  precipitate  barely  dissolves).  Gently  heat 
the  solution  to  the  boiling  point;  a  metallic  mirror  is  formed.  To  3  cc. 
of  solution  (1:200)  add  1  cc.  dekanormal  sodium  hydroxide  solution 
and  0.15  cc.  freshly  prepared  phenylhydrazine  hydrochloride  solution 
(1:10);  a  blue  color  is  produced,  which  appears  reddish  in  reflected 
light.  To  4  cc.  of  the  solution  (1:200)  add  0.15  cc.  alkaline  mercuric 
potassium  iodide  solution;  a  pronounced  yellowish  color  is  produced. 
Dissolve  0.1  Gm.  of  triphal  in  3  cc.  water,  add  0.2  cc.  of  diluted  acetic 
acid,  and  filter;  the  filtrate  shows  no  brown  coloration  after  adding 
0.1  cc.  of  sodium  sulfide  solution.  To  2  cc.  of  solution  (1:50)  add 
0.2  cc.  diluted  nitric  acid  and  filter;  to  one  half  of  the  filtrate  add  0.2 
cc.  barium  nitrate  solution;  no  precipitate  occurs  (sulfate);  to  the 
other  portion  of  acidified  solution  add  silver  nitrate  solution;  not  more 
than  a  faint  turbidity  appears  (halides).  To  4  cc.  of  triphal  solution 
(1:100)  add  0.2  cc.  sodium  nitrite  solution  and  0.2  cc.  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid,  followed  by  the  addition  of  sufficient  betanaphthol  solution 
(0.01  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution)  that  the  precipitate 
formed  redissolves;  no  red  color  appears.  Ignite  0.1  Gm.  of  triphal 
in  a  porcelain  crucible,  extract  the  residue  with  normal  hydrochloric 
acid,  and  filter;  the  filtrate  gives  a  characteristic  sodium  flame  test 
and  yields   a   white   precipitate  with   a   solution   of   barium   chloride. 

Dry  about  0.1  Gm.  of  triphal,  accurately  weighed,  for  eight  hours 
at  100  C.  The  loss  in  weight  should  not  be  more  than  8.0  per  cent 
nor   less   than   6.0   per   cent   of   sample  weight. 

Transfer  approximately  0.2  Gm.  triphal,  accurately  weighed,  into  a 
tared  porcelain  crucible,  and  ignite  well  at  red  heat.  Extract  the 
residue  with  six  5  cc.  portions  of  normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution; 
filter  each  portion  through  an  ashless  filter  paper.  Transfer  the 
remaining  residue  to  the  filter  and  wash  with  five  3  cc.  portions  of 
water.  Transfer  filter  and  residue  to  crucible,  dry,  and  ignite  to 
constant  weight.  The  weight  of  the  residue  corresponds  to  not  more 
than  50.0  per  cent  and  not  less  than  47.8  per  cent  of  gold,  calculated 
to  the  dried  basis. 


HYDROCHLORIC     ACID     SUBSTITUTES 

Several  solid  substances  have  been  introduced  as  medicinal 
substitutes  for  hydrochloric  acid.  It  is  claimed  that  these  have 
the  action  of  the  free  acid  in  the  stomach,  but  are  without 
the  marked  acid  taste.  They  also  permit  the  administration 
of  the  acid  in  dry  form. 

These  bodies  contain  hydrochloric  acid  in  combination  with 
organic  substances  from  which  the  free  acid  is  readily  spht 
off.  The  physiologic  activity  of  these  compounds  varies  in 
marked  degree  with  the  separability  of  the  hydrochloric  acid. 
The  dissociation  of  the  hydrochloric  acid,  on  which  the  prac- 
tical value  depends,  is  in  some  cases  nearly  complete  in  aqueous 
solution,  but  is  much  less  marked  in  the  case  of  the  large 
protein-like  complexes. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  seems  to  be  possible  to  secure  the 
antiseptic  and  digestive  action  of  free  hydrochloric  acid  from 
some  of  these  products,  while  from  others  the  liberation  of 
the  halogen  acid  is  probably  insufficient  to  accomplish  these 
ends  in  any  marked  degree. 


242     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

BETAINE  HYDROCHLORIDE.— Betainae  Hydro- 
chloridum. — C5HUNO2.HCI. — The  hydrochloride  of  betaine,  an 
alkaloid  found  in  the  beet,  Beta  vulgaris j  and  in  many  other 
plants. 

Actions  and  Uses. — In  the  dry  state  betaine  hydrochloride 
does  not  split  off  hydrochloric  acid  at  ordinary  temperature. 
In  aqueous  solution,  betaine  hydrochloride  is  decomposed  into 
betaine  and  hydrochloric  acid  (hydrogen  chloride).  Since 
betaine  has  no  physiologic  action,  betaine  hydrochloride  is  a 
convenient  method  of  administering  hydrochloric  acid. 

Betaine  hydrochloride  is  used  for  the  same  purpose  as 
hydrochloric  acid. 

Dosage. — Five-tenths  Gm,  (8  grains)  which  corresponds  to 
about  1.1  cc.  (18  minims)  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid-U.  S.  P., 
to  be  taken  dissolved  in  water. 

Betaine  hydrochloride  consists   of  colorless  crystals,   freely  soluble  in 
water.     It  contains  23.8  per  cent  of  absolute  hydrochloric  acid. 

Betaine  Hydrochloride-Roche. — A  brand  of  betaine  hydro- 
chloride-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hoffmann-LaRoche  &  Co.,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(HoflFmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 


HYPOCHLORITES     AND     HYPOCHLORITE 
SUBSTANCES 

The  germicidal  action  of  free  chlorine  and  the  hypo- 
chlorites is  well  known.  In  medicine  this  action  has  been 
utilized  by  the  employment  of  chlorine  water,  chlorinated  lime, 
solution  of  chlorinated  soda  (Labarraque's  solution),  and 
solution  of  chlorinated  potassa  (Javelle  water). 

Hypochlorite  preparations  are  fairly  permanent  in  the 
presence  of  alkali,  and  alkaline  hypochlorite  preparations  have 
the  added  advantage  that  the  alkali  has  a  destructive  and 
solvent  action  on  most  bacteria  and  other  organic  matter.  In 
the  treatment  of  infected  wounds  with  hypochlorite  solutions 
at  present  in  vogue,  an  excessive  degree  of  alkalinity  is  held 
to  be  objectionable  on  the  grounds  that  it  causes  destruction  of 
normal  tissue  and  irritation  of  the  skin. 

Organic  preparations  containing  a  chloramide  group,  which 
are  practically  neutral  and  relatively  stable  have  been  proposed 
as  substitutes  for  hypochlorites  on  the  theory  that  the  action 
of  hypochlorites  is  dependent  on  the  combination  of  their  active 
chlorine  (C1+)  with  nitrogen  of  proteins. 

Hypochlorite  Preparations 

HYCLORITE.— A  solution  of  chlorinated  soda,  each  100 
Gm.  of  which  is  stated  to  contain  sodium  hypochlorite  4.05  Gm., 
sodium  chloride  2.50  Gm.,  calcium  hydroxide  0.14  Gm.,  inert 


HYPOCHLORITES  243 

salts  0.65  Gm.  It  contains  not  less  than  3.85  per  cent  of 
available  chlorine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Hyclorite  differs  from  solution  of 
chlorinated  soda-U.  S.  P.,  chiefly  because  of  the  greater  content 
of  available  chlorine  and  the  lesser  degree  of  alkalinity  of  the 
former.  It  has  the  actions  and  uses  of  solution  of  chlorinated 
soda-U.  S.  P.,  and  when  properly  diluted  it  also  may  be  used 
in  the  same  conditions  as  those  for  surgical  solution  of  chlori- 
nated soda-U.  S.  P.  One  volume  of  hyclorite  diluted  with  7 
volumes  of  water  has  the  same  available  chlorine  content  as 
surgical  solution  of  chlorinated  soda,  and  is  isotonic. 

Dosage. — Hyclorite  is  used  full  strength  or  diluted  with  1  or 
2  parts  of  water  for  direct  application  to  mucous  membrane, 
muscular  tissue,  bone  infections,  etc.  For  irrigation  of  wounds, 
throat  and  body  cavities,  dilutions  of  from  1  in  200  to  1  in 
2,000  are  used.  For  use  in  the  irrigation  method  of  treating 
infected  wounds,  dilute  1  part  of  hyclorite  with  7  parts  of  water. 

The  available  chlorine  content  of  hyclorite  decreases  at  the 
rate  of  about  12  per  cent  per  year.  In  order  that  due  allowance 
for  this  decrease  may  be  made  when  diluting  for  use,  each 
bottle  of  hyclorite  bears  the  date  of  bottling. 

Manufactured  by  General  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Philadelphia,  Pa.  (Beth- 
lehem Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pittsburgh,  Pa.,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.    S.  trademark  120,110. 

Hyclorite  is  prepared  by  decomposing  chlorinated  lime  suspended 
in   water  with   sodium  carbonate. 

Hyclorite  has  the  properties  of  solution  of  chlorinated  soda-U.  S.  P., 
but  contains  no  carbonate.  When  exposed  to  air,  a  pellicle  forms  on 
its  surface  owing  to  the  formation  of  calcium  carbonate. 

_  To  a  definite  weight  of  hyclorite,  about  5  grams,  is  added  50  cc.  of 
distilled  water.  To  the  resulting  solution,  10  cc.  of  a  3  per  cent  hydro- 
gen peroxide  solution,  previously  rendered  neutral,  is  slowly  added. 
After  the  reaction  is  completed,  which  is  indicated  by  the  ceasing  of 
the  evolution  of  oxygen,  4  drops  of  methyl  orange  indicator  solution 
and  an  excess  (measured)  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  are  added, 
and  then  the  residual  acidity  determined  by  titration  with  tenth-normal 
sodium  hydroxide:  the  alkalinity  found  corresponds  to  not  more  than 
0.14   Gm.   of   calcium  hydroxide  per   100   Gm.   of  hyclorite. 

Mix  in  a  flask  about  5  cc.  of  hyclorite,  accurately  weighed,  with 
50  cc,  of  distilled  water;  add  1  Gm.  of  potassium  iodide  and  5  cc. 
of  acetic  acid  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate,  starch 
test  solution  being  used  as  indicator:  it  shows  not  less  than  3.85  per 
cent  of  available  chlorine. 

Each  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  used  corresponds  to 
0.003546  Gm.  oi  available  chlorine.  Due  allowance  should  be  made  for 
th«  decrease  in  available  chlorine  content  of  about  12  per  cent  per 
year,  date  of  bottling  being  stamped  on  each  bottle. 

Chloramine  Preparations 

AZOCHLORAMID. — A  product  containing  approximately 
96  per  cent  of  N,N-Dichloroazodicarbonamidine. — (H2N(C1N): 
C-N=N-C:(NC1).NH2)— An  N-chloro  derivative  of  azodicar- 
bonamidine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Similar  to  those  of  chloramine-T,  dichlor- 
amine-T,  and  diluted  solution  of  sodium  hypochlorite,  over  which 


244     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

it  is  claimed  to  have  an  advantage  in  that  it  possesses  lower 
reactivity  with  extraneous  organic  matter  and  higher  bacteri- 
cidal activity  in  the  presence  of  organic  material.  Solutions 
of  azochloramid  are  proposed  for  dressing,  packing  or  irrigating 
infected  wounds  and  cavities.  Internal  use  of  azochloramid 
solutions  is  not  recommended.  The  available  evidence  indicates 
that  the  substance  possesses  a  relatively  low  toxicity. 

Dosage. — Azochloramid  is  usually  employed  in  concentrations 
of  1  :  1,600  and  1  :  3,300  in  approximately  isotonic  buffered  saline 
solutions.  A  solution  containing  one  part  of  azochloramid  in 
500  parts  of  glyceryl  triacetate  (triacetin)  and  possessing 
greater  stability  than  the  aqueous  solutions  may  also  be  used. 

Manufactured  by  Wallace  &  Tiernan  Products,  Inc.,  Belleville,  N.  J. 
(Davis  Emergency  Equipment  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  Industrial  Distributor.) 
U.  S.  patents  1,958,370  (May  8,  1934;  expires  1951)  and  1,958,371  (May 
8,    1934;    expires    1951).      U.    S.   trademark. 

Azochloramid  Buffered  Saline  Mixture  (for  preparing  1  liter  of  a 
1 :3,300  aqueous  solution) :  Vials  containing  azochloramid  0.3  Gm., 
sodium  phosphate  0.6  Gm.,  potassium  phosphate  (monobasic)  0.9  Gm., 
and  sodium   chloride   8.5   Gm. 

Azochloramid  Buffered  Saline  Mixture  (for  preparing  1  gallon  of  a 
1:3,300  aqueous  solution):  Vials  containing  azochloramid  1.14  Gm., 
sodium  phosphate  2.27  Gm.,  potassium  phosphate  (monobasic)  0.34  Gm., 
and  sodium  chloride  32.18   Gm. 

Azochloramid  Buffered  Saline^  Mixture  _  (for  preparing  1  liter  of  a 
1:1,600  aqueous  solution):  Vials  containing  azochloramid  0.6  Gm., 
sodium  phosphate  0.6  Gm.,  potassium  phosphate  (monobasic)  0.09  Gm., 
and  sodium  chloride  8.5  Gm. 

Azochloramid  Buffered  Saline^  Mixture  (for  preparing  1  gallon  of  a 
1:  1,600  aqueous  solution):  Vials  containing  azochloramid  2.27  Gm., 
sodium  phosphate  2.27  Gm.,  potassium  phosphate  (monobasic)  0.34  Gm., 
and   sodium  chloride   32.18    Gm. 

AzocJdoramid  in  Triacetin  1:500:  A  solution  containing  azochloramid 
1  Gm.  in  500  Gm.  of  triacetin  (triacetin,  a  mixture  containing  approxi- 
mately 95  per  cent  glyceryl  triacetate.  CH0OOCCH3.CHOOCCH3.CH2 
OOCCH3). 

Azochloramid  Solution  in  Triacetin  1:125:  A  solution  containing 
Azochloramid  1  Gm.  in  125  Gm.  of  triacetin  (triacetin,  a  mixture  con- 
taining approximately  95  per  cent  glyceryl  triacetate  (CH2OOCCHS. 
CHOOCCH3.CH0OOCCH3)  for  use  in  the  preparation  of  azochloramid 
in  olive  oil  1:2,000  (one  volume  of  azochloramid  in  triacetin  1:125 
diluted  with   15   volumes  of  olive  oil). 

Azochloramid  occurs  in  bright  yellow  needles  or  plates.  It  possesses 
an  odor  suggestive  of  chlorine  and  has  a  burning  taste.  When  pure 
it  is  odorless  and  practically  tasteless.  It  is  very  slightly  soluble  in 
water,  slightly  soluble  in  glycerin  and  ether;  soluble  in  alcohol;  soluble 
(incompletely)  in  glacial  acetic  acid,  acetone  and  ethyl  acetate;  very 
slightly  soluble  in  chloroform,  and  nearly  insoluble  in  carbon  tetra- 
chloride and  liquid  petrolatum.  Azochloramid  decomposes  (explosively) 
without  melting  at  155.0-155.5  (U.  S.  P.  X.  Melting  Point  Method). 
Solutions   of   azochloramid   decompose  on  exposure   to  light. 

Agitate  0.01  Gm.  of  azochloramid  with  35  cc.  of  water:  a  practically 
complete  solution  (yellow-orange)  occurs  with  only  a  very  slight  tur- 
bidity at  most.  Treat  5  cc.  portions  of  this  solution  as  follows:  Add 
0.25  cc.  of  silver  ammonium  nitrate  solution:  a  brick-red  precipitate 
forms,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia  water;  add  2  cc.  of  potassium 
iodide  solution  and  agitate  with  0.5  cc.  of  chloroform:  the  chloroform 
layer  is  colorless  or  at  most  very  faintly  colored;  add  0.1  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  to  the  mixture  and  further  agitate:  the  chloroform 
layer  acquires  a  deep  violet  color;  add  2  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid 
solution  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  slight  white  turbidity 
but   no  precipitate  forms;    add  sulfurous  acid  solution  until  the  yellow 


HYPOCHLORITES  245 

color  disappears:  add  2  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  solution  and  1  cc. 
of  silver  nitrate  solution  and  agitate;  a  curdy,  white  precipitate  remains 
soluble  on  addition  of  excess  ammonia  water:  add  from  30  to  40  cc. 
of  water  and  treat  according  to  the  U.  S.  P.  X  turbidimetric  test  for 
chlorides:  the  turbidity  is  less  than  that  produced  in  a  control  test  made 
with   0.1   cc.   of   fiftieth  nonnal  hydrochloric  acid. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  to  0.15  Gm.  of  azochloramid,  accurately  weighed, 
in  20  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  in  a  glass  stoppered  250  cc.  Erlenmeyer 
flask.  Add  10  cc.  of  potassium  iodide  solution  and  50  cc.  of  distilled 
\yater,  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  for  ten  minutes  and  titrate  the 
liberated  iodine  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate.  The  number  of 
cubic  centimeters  of  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  consumed  per 
gram  (due  to  active  chlorine  and  the  azo  group,  — N  =  N — )  is  not 
less   than  317   cc.   nor  more  than   328   cc. 

Dissolve  from  0.12  to  0.15  Gm.  of  azochloramid,  accurately  weighed 
in  15  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  contained  in  a  400  cc.  beaker;  add  90  cc. 
of  water  with  stirring  and  follow  with  sufficient  sulfurous  acid  solu- 
tion to  produce  a  clear  colorless  solution.  Add  20  cc.  of  silver  nitrate 
solution  and  20  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  solution.  Heat  the  solution 
until  it  boils  and  set  aside  for  several  hours.  Filter  through  a  prepared 
Gooch  crucible  and  wash  the  precipitate  well  with  jiortions  of  hot  water 
slightly  acidified  with  nitric  acid,  wash  with  one  portion  of  cold  water, 
dry  at  105  C.  for  one  and  one-half  hours,  cool  and  weigh:  the 
chloride  (Cl~)  calculated  from  the  silver  chloride  weighed  is  not  less 
than   38.25    per   cent  nor   more   than   38.75   per   cent. 

Heat  from  0.2  to  0.3  Gm.  of  azochloramid,  accurately  weighed,  for 
five  hours  at  100  C.:  the  loss  in  weight  is  not  less  than  0.4  per  cent  nor 
more  than  0.7  per  cent.  Heat  about  0.25  Gm.  of  azochloramid,  accu- 
rately weighed,  in  a  platinum  dish,  until  constant  weight  is  attained: 
the  ash  is  less   than   0.1   per  cent. 

The  triacetin  used  in  Azochloramid  in  Triacetin  1:500  complies  with 
the  following  tests  and  standards: 

Triacetin  is  a  colorless,  somewhat  oily  liquid  with  a  slight  fatty  odor 
and  a  bitter  taste.  It  is  miscible  with  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform  and 
benzene;  soluble  in  water;  insoluble  in  carbon  disulfide,  and  ligroin. 
The  specific  gravity  is  from  1.154  to  1.158  at  25  C.  The  refractive 
index  is  1.4295-1.4310  at  25  C. 

Transfer  25  cc,  of  triacetin  to  a  distillation  flask.  Determine  the 
distillation  range  according  to  method  I  of  the  U.  S.  P.  X.  Ninety-five 
per  cent  distils  over  at  from  258  to  259    (corrected)   at  760  mm. 

The  saponification  value  as  determined  by  the  method  of  the  U.  S. 
P.  X,  page  457,  on  0.5  to  0.6  Gm.  of  triacetin,  accurately  weighed,  is 
not  less  than   762   nor  more  than   772. 

Dilute  0.4  cc.  of  bromcresol  green  indicator  solution  (0.04  per  cent 
of  monosodium  salt  according  to  Clark  and  Lubbs)  to  30  cc.  Transfer 
15  cc.  of  this  solution  to  5  cc.  of  triacetin  in  a  separatory  funnel  and 
agitate  vigorously  for  two  minutes:  the  color  of  the  clear  aqueous 
extract  (centrifuge  if  necessary)  shows  no  appreciable  change  from  that 
of  the  original   solution  at  the  end   of  fifteen   minutes. 

Reflux  a  mixture  of  150  cc.  of  triacetin  and  100  cc.  of  dry  toluene 
for  one  hour  in  a  glass  apparatus  for  the  determination  of  water  as 
described  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  American  Society  for  Testing 
Materials,  A.  S.  T.  M.  Designation:  D  95-30.  Not  more  than  0.75  cc. 
of  water   collects  in  the  graduated  trap. 

CHLORAMINE-T.— Chloramina  U.  S.  P.  X.— Chloramine. 
— "Sodium  paratoluenesulfonchloramide  contains  the  equivalent 
of  not  less  than  11.5  per  cent  and  not  more  than  13  per  cent  of 
active  chlorine."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Chlor- 
amina-T. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  of  chloramine-T  are  essen- 
tially similar  to  those  of  diluted  solution  of  sodium  hypochlorite- 


246     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

U.  S.  P.  It  has  the  advantages  of  greater  stability,  convenience 
of  preparation,  and  the  production  of  less  irritation.  On  the 
other  hand,  it  lacks  the  solvent  action  of  alkaline  hypochlorites. 

It  is  practically  nontoxic,  but  should  not  be  used  by  mouth, 
since  it  is  decomposed  by  the  gastric  juice. 

Dosage. — Chloramine-T  is  used  in  0.1  to  4  per  cent  aqueous 
solution.  For  wounds,  the  normal  strength  is  from  1  to  2 
per  cent,  applied  by  the  same  technic  as  the  surgical  solution 
of  chlorinated  soda.  It  has  also  been  employed  for  irrigation 
of  the  urethra,  bladder  and  uterus,  and  as  a  mouth  wash. 

Chloramine-T  (Monsanto). — A  brand  of  Chloramine-T- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Monsanto  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

Chloramine-T  (Squibb). — A  brand  of  Chloramine-T-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.   R.   Squibb  &  Sons,   New  York. 

Chlorazene. — A  brand  of  chloramine-T — U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  No 
U.   S.  patent;   U.   S.  trademark  119,014. 

Aromatic  Chlorazene  Powder:  Chlorazene,  5  per  cent;  sodium  bicar- 
bonate, 5  per  cent;  eucalyptol,  2  per  cent;  saccharin,  1  per  cent;  sodium 
chloride,  87   per  cent. 

Chlorazene  Surgical  Cream:  Chlorazene  1  Gm.  in  100  Cm.  of  a  base 
composed  approximately  of  sodium  stearate  15  per  cent  and  water  85 
per  cent. 

Chlorazene  Tablets,   4.6  grains. 

DICHLORAMINE-T.  —  Dichloramina  U.  S.  P.  X.— 
Dichloramine. — "Paratoluenesulfondichloramide,  containing  the 
equivalent  of  not  less  than  28  per  cent  and  not  more  than  30 
per  cent  of  active  CI."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Dichlor- 
amina-T. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Dichloramine-T  is  an  effective  germicide 
through  its  content  of  active  chlorine  (C1+).  It  is  only  spar- 
ingly soluble  in  water,  but  soluble  in  chlorinated  eucalyptol 
or  chlorinated  paraffin  (chlorcosane).  The  solution  produces 
a  gradual,  sustained  antiseptic  action. 

It  is  more  irritant  than  chloramine,  but  also  more  solvent. 
It  should  not  be  administered  internally. 

Dichloramine-T  is  claimed  to  be  useful  in  the  prevention  and 
treatment  of  diseases  of  the  nose  and  throat;  it  has  been  used 
with  success  when  applied  to  wounds. 

Dosage. — Dichloramine-T  dissolved  in  chlorinated  paraffin 
(which  see)  is  used  in  concentrations  of  from  0.5  to  10  per 
cent.  In  nasopharyngeal  work  from  a  1  to  a  2  per  cent  solu- 
tion is  employed;  for  application  to  wounds  a  5  per  cent 
solution.  The  solution  of  dichloramine-T  in  chlorinated  paraffin 
is  not  very  stable  and  should  not  be  kept  for  more  than  two 
or  three  days.  At  times  the  solutions  may  become  irritating 
to  the  skin  because  of  the  formation  of  hydrochloric  acid. 
Both  dichloramine-T  powder  and  solution  should  be  protected 
from  sunlight  to  prevent  decomposition. 


HYPOCHLORITES  247 

DiCHLORAMiNE-T  (Abbott). — A  brand  of  dichloramine-T- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

DiCHLORAMiNE-T  (MoNSANTo). — A  brand  of  dichloramine-T 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Monsanto  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

HALAZONE.  —  /^-sulfonedichloramidobenzoic  acid. — 
CflH,(S02NCl2)COOH-l  :4. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Halazone  is  said  to  be  a  powerful 
disinfectant.  It  is  said  to  act  like  chlorine,  but  to  have  the 
advantage  of  being  stable  in  solid  form.  In  the  presence  of 
alkali  carbonate,  borate  and  phosphate,  Dakin  and  Dunham 
report  that,  in  from  thirty  to  sixty  minutes,  halazone  in  the 
proportion  of  from  1  in  200,000  to  1  in  500,000  sterilized 
polluted  water  contaminated  with  such  organisms  as  BacUhis 
coli.  Bacillus  typhosus,  Bacillus  paratyphosus  A  and  B,  Cholera 
vibrio  and  Bacillus  dysenteriae. 

Dosage. — For  the  sterilization  of  water,  0.004  to  0.008  Gm. 
of  halazone,  in  the  form  of  tablets  containing  sodium  carbonate 
(or  sodium  borate)  and  sodium  chloride,  is  added  to  1  liter. 

Parasulfonedichloramidobenzoic  acid  was  first  prepared  by  H.  D. 
Dakin  and  E.  K.  Dunham  {Brit.  M.  J.  1:  682  [May  20]  1917)  under 
the  name   "Halazone." 

Halazone  is  a  white  powder  having  a  strong  odor  of  chlorine.  It  is 
slightly  soluble  in  water  and  chloroform;  insoluble  in  petroleum  ether; 
soluble  in  glacial  acetic  acid,  benzene,  and  with  the  formation  of  the 
salt  in  alkali  hydroxide  solutions.  It  crystallizes  in  stout  prisms  from 
glacial  acetic  acid.     The  melting  point  of  pure  halazone  is  213  C. 

Halazone  liberates  iodine  from  a  sodium  iodide  solution,  and  bromine 
from  a  sodium  bromide  solution. 

If  15  cc.  of  a  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  anilin  is  treated  with 
0.05  Gm.  of  halazone,  the  solution  acquires  a  brownish-red  color,  which 
becomes  deep  blue  on  supersaturation  with  ammonia  water.  If  0.1  Gm. 
of  halazone  is  treated  with  a  few  drops  of  concentrated  sulfuric  acid, 
chlorine  is  evolved,  but  no  blackening  occurs  {readily  carbonizable 
matter.) 

About  0.150  Gm.  of  halazone  (or  in  the  case  of  halazone  tablets, 
30  tablets),  accurately  weighed,  is  dissolved  in  from  50  to  100  cc.  of 
water  and  10  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution.  Fifteen 
cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  potassium  iodide  solution  is  added,  and  the  mix- 
ture is  then  acidified  with  acetic  acid  and  titrated  with  tenth-normal 
sodium  thiosulfate  volumetric  solution.  (If  the  reagents  used  liberate 
iodine,  the  number  of  cubic  centimeters  of  tenth-normal  sodium  thio- 
sulfate volumetric  solution  required  for  tbeir  decolorization  should 
be  deducted  from  the  total  volume  used.)  The  chlorine  content  of 
halazone  should  not  be  higher  than  26.26  per  cent  or  lower  than  24  per 
cent.  Each  cubic  centimeter  of  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate 
volumetric  solution  is  equivalent  to  0.00177  Gm.  of  active  chlorine. 
The    theoretical    chlorine    content    of    pure    halazone    is    26.26    per    cent. 

Halazone-Abbott. — A  brand  of  halazone-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Halazone  Tablets-Abbatt :  Halazone-Abbott,  0.004  Gm.  sodium  borate, 
0.011    Gm,,  and  sodium  chloride  enough  to  make  approximately  0.13  Gm. 

Halazone-Monsanto. — A  brand  of  halazone-N.  N.  R. 
Manufactured  by  Monsanto  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis.     No  U.  S.  pat- 
ent or  trademark. 


248     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

IODINE     COMPOUNDS 

Iodine  compounds  are  used  partly  for  their  local  irritant  and 
antiseptic  effects,  which  are  due  probably  to  the  action  of  free 
iodine  contained  in  the  preparations  or  liberated  from  them, 
and  partly  for  their  systemic  actions,  and  also  for  roentgen-ray 
diagnosis.  These  may  be  discussed  separately  under  the  head- 
ings of  "Iodine  Preparations  Containing  Free  Iodine,"  "Iodine 
Dusting  Powders,"  and  "Iodine  Compounds  for  Systemic  Use," 
the  last  named  group  being  subdivided  into :  "Iodine-Proteins," 
"Iodine  Aliphatic  Compounds,"  "Iodized  Fats,"  "Iodized  Quino- 
line  Derivatives,"  and  "Water- Soluble  Iodine  Compounds  for 
Intravenous   Pyelography." 

Iodine  Preparations  Containing  Free  Iodine 

IODINE. — "Contains    not    less    than    99.5    per    cent    of    I." 
U.  S.  P. 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  lodum. 

lOCAMFEN.— A  liquid  obtained  by  the  interaction  of 
iodine  10  parts,  phenol  20  parts  and  camphor  70  parts,  con- 
taining about  7.25  per  cent  free  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — locamfen  has  the  antiseptic  and  germi- 
cidal properties  of  iodine  and  the  analgesic  and  stimulating 
properties  of  camphor  and  phenol. 

locamfen  is  used  especially  in  the  treatment  and  dressing  of 
surgical  and  traumatic  wounds,  and  in  dentistry ;  also  in  ring- 
worm of  the  feet,  nails,  and  other  parts  of  the  body. 

Dosage. — locamfen  is  applied  in  small  quantities  directly  to 
wounds,  the  skin,  cavities,  etc.,  or  on  tampons  or  drainage 
material. 

Manufactured  by  Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.    S.   trademark    112,934. 

locamfen  is  a  dark,  reddish-brown,  viscid  liquid,  having  a  cam- 
phoraceous  odor.  locamfen  is  insoluble  in  water,  but  soluble  in  all 
proportions   in  alcohol,   ether,   benzin   and   liquid   petrolatum. 

locamfen,  like  free  iodine,  interacts  with  fats  and  waxes,  its  free 
iodine   entering   into   combination. 

The  free  iodine  content  of  iocamfen  may  be  determined  thus:  About 
2  Gm.  iocamfen  is  weighed  into  a  glass-stoppered  flask,  dissolved  in 
about  25  cc.  of  chloroform,  about  10  cc.  of  potassium  iodide  solution 
(1  in  10)  added,  and  the  free  iodine  determined  by  titration,  under 
agitation,  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  solution,  using  starch 
as  an  indicator. 

CAMIOFEN  OINTMENT.— An  ointment  obtained  by 
mixing  iocamfen  (a  liquid  obtained  by  the  interaction  of  iodine 
10  parts,  phenol  20  parts  and  camphor  70  parts,  containing  about 
7.25  per  cent  free  iodine)  with  an  equal  weight  of  a  mixture 
composed  of  lard,  wax  and  oil  of  theobroma,  but  containing 
nearly  all  of  its  iodine  in  combined  form. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  ointment  has  the  properties  of  fatty 
iodine  compounds,  phenol  and  camphor. 


IODINE  249 

It  is  used  in  skin  diseases,  inflammatory  swellings,  itching,  etc. 

Dosage. — It  is  applied  directly  or  on  gauze,  undiluted  or 
mixed  with  fatty  substances.  The  parts  to  which  camiofen  oint- 
ment is  applied  should  be  dry,  and  the  application  of  mercuric 
chloride  before  or  after  the  use  of  the  ointment  must  be  guarded 
against. 

Prepared  by  Schering  and  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.  S.  trademark  119,578. 

Iodine  Dusting  Powders 

Dusting  powders  containing  iodine  in  various  combinations  are 
widely  used  in  the  treatment  of  w^ounds,  granulating  surfaces, 
abscess  cavities,  etc.,  whether  due  to  syphilis  or  tuberculosis  or 
to  other  infections.  The  clinical  results  are  ascribed  to  a  slight 
antiseptic  action  of  the  iodine,  to  stimulation  of  phagocytosis, 
and  to  diminished  secretion  from  the  wound  which  renders  it 
a  less  favorable  culture  medium  for  germs. 

Iodoform  has  been  the  standard  drug  of  tliis  class.  Other 
insoluble  organic  iodine  compounds  have  been  introduced  to 
replace  iodoform,  but  with  limited  success.  While  they  avoid 
the  disagreeable  odor  and  the  occasional  toxic  systemic  effects, 
they  also  lack  much  of  the  efficiency. 

THYMOL  IODIDE.— "A  mixture  of  iodine  derivatives  of 
thymol,  principally  dithymol-diiodide  [(CeH2.CH3.QH7. 01)2], 
containing,  when  dried  to  constant  weight  over  sulfuric  acid, 
not  less  than  43  per  cent  of  I."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Thymolis 
lodidum. 

Thymol  Lodide-Merck. — A  brand  of  thymol  iodide-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by   Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N,  J. 

Aristol. — A  brand  of  Thymol  Iodide-U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
trademark   17,393. 

VIOFORM-CIBA.— lodochlorhydroxyquinoline.  —  C0H4N. 
OH. I. CI. — A  substitution  compound  of  anachlor-ortho-hydroxy- 
quinoline  resulting  from  the  introduction  of  one  atom  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Vioform-Ciba  is  used  as  an  almost  odor- 
less  substitute  for   iodoform,   and  internally  against  amebiasis. 

The  diagnosis  of  amebiasis  depends  on  the  observation  of 
motile  forms  or  cysts  of  Endameba  histolytica  in  stool  speci- 
mens (repeated  examinations  are  often  necessary)  or  their 
recovery  by  means  of  the  proctoscope  from  the  intestinal 
mucosa ;  positive  diagnosis  can  often  be  made  by  the  latter 
procedure  when  stool  examinations  are  negative,  and  this  is 
considered  to  be  the  more  satisfactory  as  well  as  the  more 
rapid  method  of  diagnosis  in  many  cases. 


250     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

In  view  of  the  frequency  of  persistent  infection  in  the  absence 
of  marked  symptoms,  adequate  therapy  includes  re-examinations 
and  repetitions  of  courses  of  treatment. 

Dosage.  —  Vioform-Ciba  is  used  as  a  dusting  powder  for 
application  to  wounds,  ulcers,  burns,  exudative  skin  eruptions, 
etc.  Against  amebiasis  0.75  Gm.  to  1.0  Gm.  daily  (in  capsules 
in  divided  doses  of  0.25  Gm.  [4  grains])  by  mouth  for  10  days, 
with  repetition  of  the  course  after  a  rest  period  of  a  week  to 
ten  days.  A  few  cases  of  gastro-intestinal  irritation  with  this 
dosage  have  been  reported;  on  account  of  the  high  iodine  con- 
tent the  possibility  of  iodism  should  be  kept  in  mind.  Until 
more  evidence  becomes  available,  vioform  should  be  used  with 
caution  in  cases  with  liver  damage. 

Manufactured  by  the  Society  of  Chemical  Industry  in  Basle,  Switzer- 
land (Ciba  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York).  U.  S.  patent  641,491  (Jan.  16,  1900; 
expired).      U.    S.   trademark   92,72,2. 

Vioform-Ciba  is  a  grayish-yellow  powder,  having  a  very  faint 
aromatic  odor,  almost  insoluble  in  water,  sparingly  soluble  in  alcohol, 
soluble  in  hot   glacial  acetic  acid. 

Boil  vioform-Ciba  with  dilute  hydrochloric  acid:  it  dissolves  slowly, 
evolving  an  odor  of  iodine.  Treat  a  specimen  of  vioform-Ciba  with 
concentrated  sulfuric  acid:  copious  vapors  of  iodine  are  evolved. 
Repeatedly  crystallize  vioform-Ciba  from  hot  glacial  acetic  acid:  crystals 
are  obtained  which  melt  at   178  to   180  C. 

Mix  about  0.5  Gm.  of  vioform-Ciba,  accurately  weighed,  in  a  nickel 
crucible  with  a  mixture  of  powdered  sodium  hydroxide  4  parts  and 
potassium  nitrate  1  part,  and  heat  until  fusion  has  been  completed. 
Cool  and  dissolve  the  fused  mass  in  150  cc.  of  water,  warming  to  hasten 
solution;  filter  into  a  400  cc.  beaker  and  wash  well.  Add  25  cc.  of 
tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  (the  amount  of  silver  is  k  in  the  formula 
below) ;  then  add  slowly,  with  stirring,  nitric  acid  until  acid  in  reaction 
to  litmus  paper.  Filter  the  solution  through  a  weighed  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  and  titrate  the  excess  silver  nitrate  in  the  filtrate  with  tenth- 
normal potassium  _  sulfocyanate  (the  amount  of  silver  jn  the  filtrate 
is  a).  The  precipitate  in  the  Gooch  crucible  (consisting  mainly  of 
silver  iodide  with  some  silver  chloride)  is  further  washed  with  3  por- 
tions of  alcohol,  then  with  ether,  dried  at  100  C.  and  weighed  (w). 
The  amount  of  iodine  can  be  calculated  according  to  the  formula. 
0.7527  w  -\-  a  —  k 

~  293 

where  w  equals  combined  weight  of  silver  iodide  and  silver  chloride; 
X  equals  weight  of  silver^  iodide  and  {w-x)  equals  weight  of  silver 
chloride  by  this  method  vioform-Ciba  contains  not  less  than  37.5  per 
cent  nor  more  than  41.5  per  cent  of  iodine,  and  not  less  than  11.5  per 
cent  nor  more  than  12.2  per  cent  of  chlorine. 

Iodine  Compounds  for  Systemic  Use 

These  are  typified  by  sodium  iodide  and  potassium  iodide. 
The  mechanism  of  their  action  is  not  clearly  understood.  The 
most  definite  results  are  seen  in  the  rapid  absorption  of  certain 
inflammatory  exudates  and  especially  of  the  gummatous  lesions 
of  tertiary  syphilis.  Lesions  of  this  type  in  bone,  skin,  brain, 
or  other  organs  diminish  or  disappear  under  adequate  doses  of 
the  drug.  In  actinomycosis  and  sporotrichosis  the  action  of 
iodine  as  iodide  is  almost  specific.  The  iodide  ion  is  not 
germicidal. 


IODINE  251 

The  beneficial  effect  of  iodides  in  arteriosclerosis  and  aneu- 
rysm is  probably  limited  to  the  absorption  of  syphilitic  deposits 
in  the  vessel  wall.  The  iodides  do  not  directly  lower  blood 
pressure.  They  may  tend  to  affect  the  production  of  thyroxin 
and  may  thus  exert  an  indirect  effect  on  metabolism.  Iodides 
in  very  small  amounts  are  effective  in  the  prophylaxis  of  simple 
endemic  goiter. 

Iodine  compounds  with  proteins  and  fats  have  been  intro- 
duced with  claims  that  they  are  less  irritating  to  the  digestive 
tract  and  that  they  are  less  inclined  to  set  up  the  disagreeable 
symptoms  of  iodism,  for  instance,  coryza  and  skin  eruptions. 
Experience  confirms  in  a  measure  the  former  claim,  but  the 
latter  is  misleading.  Iodism  is  probably  a  necessary  manifes- 
tation of  the  full  physiologic  activity  of  the  drug.  If,  therefore, 
a  preparation  consistently  fails  to  elicit  these  characteristic 
symptoms,  it  may  be  presumed  that  the  amount  of  the  drug 
absorbed  is  insufficient  to  produce  the  full  effects,  such  as  are 
required  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis,  although  it  may  suffice 
in  conditions  for  which  a  milder  action  is  desired.  Clinical 
observations  establish  the  fact  that  the  organic  iodides,  in  the 
dosage  ordinarily  employed,  are  weaker  than  full  doses  of  the 
inorganic  forms. 

IODINE-PROTEIN  COMPOUNDS 
lodalbin  and  iodo-casein  appear  to  suffer  little  change  in  the 
acid  contents  of  the  stomach,  but  on  passing  into  the  intestines 
they  are  dissolved  and  decomposed  by  contact  with  the  alka- 
line secretion  and  absorbed  chiefly,  if  not  entirely,  as  iodide 
ions;  their  actions  and  uses  are  therefore  identical  with  those 
of  the  inorganic  iodides.  The  slower  absorption  may  result 
in  a  more  continuous  action,  but  this  seems  to  be  of  small 
importance. 

lODALBIN.— A  compound  of  iodine  and  blood  albumin, 
containing  approximately  21.5  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses.  — See  preceding  article,  Iodine-Protein 
Compounds. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  0.6  Gm.  (5  to  10  grains)  repeated 
according  to  indications. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.     No  U.  S.  patent 

or  trademark. 

lodalbin  Capsules,  5  grains. 

lodalbin   and  Mercurol   Tablets:     lodalbin,    5    grains    (0.32    Gm.),   and 

mercurol,   1   grain    (0.06   Gm.). 

lodalbin  is  prepared  by  treating  blood  albumin  with  a  solution  of 
iodine  whereby  an  insoluble  precipitate  is  produced.  This  precipitate 
is  separated,  purified  by  the  removal  of  free  iodine,  dried,  powdered 
and  assayed. 

lodalbin  is  a  reddish-colored  powder,  practically  tasteless  and  pos- 
sessing a  peculiar,  rather  pleasant  odor  suggestive  of  cane  syrup  or 
molasses.  It  is  almost  insoluble  in  water,  acids,  alcohol  and  other 
ordinary  solvents,  but  is  readily  soluble  in  strong  alkaline  solutions; 
xnore    slowly    soluble    in    dilute    alkaline    solutions.      When    heated,     it 


252     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

evolves    iodine    vapors    copiously    and    is    subsequently    consumed    to    an 
ash,  leaving  a  small  amount  of  residue. 

The  presence  and  amount  of  iodine  can  be  determined  by  the  usual 
processes  for  detecting  and  estimating  this  element  in  organic 
substances. 

lODO-CASEIN. — Casein-Iodine. — A  compound  of  iodine 
with  milk  casein,  containing  about  18  per  cent  of  iodine  in 
organic  combination. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Iodine-Protein 
Compounds. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1.3  Gm.  (5  to  20  grains),  as  indicated. 
For  goiter  prophylaxis,  the  equivalent  of  0.01  Gm.  iodine,  or 
about  0.05  Gm. 

Manufactured   by    Sharp    &    Dohme,    Philadelphia    and    Baltimore.      No 

U.   S.   patent  or   trademark. 

lodO'Casein  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.). 

Tablets   lodo-Casein   with    Chocolate:      Each   tablet    contains    iodo-casein 

equivalent  to  0.01  Gm.  iodine. 

Iodo-casein    is   prepared    by    treating   a    solution    of    casein   in   sodium 
carbonate   with   a   solution   of   iodine   and   precipitating  with  acetic  acid 
Iodo-casein    is   a   yellowish-brown   powder,   almost   odorless   and   taste- 
less, insoluble  in  water,  or  acid  solutions.     It  is   partially  dissolved  and 
decomposed   by    alkalis. 

IODIZED    ALIPHATIC    COMPOUNDS 
lOTHION.  —  lopropane.  —  Diiodohydroxypropane.  —  1.3- 
diiodopropane-2-ol.  —  CH2l.CH(0H).CHJ.       lothion     contains 
from  77  to  80  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — lothion  is  absorbed  from  the  intact  skin 
and  is  used  when  it  is  desired  to  obtain  the  systemic  effect  of 
iodides  by  external  application.  It  is  claimed  to  be  practically 
unirritating  to  the  skin  in  the  concentrations  ordinarily  used, 
and  to  produce  no  discoloration. 

Dosage. — lothion  is  used  in  the  form  of  iothion  oil,  in  solu- 
tion in  alcohol  or  glycerin,  or  in  the  form  of  ointments  con- 
taining from  5  to  20  per  cent  of  iothion.  It  is  applied  without 
friction,  and  the  parts  are  not  bandaged. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  New  York. 
lothion  Oil:  lothion,  10  parts;  chloroform,  10  parts;  olive  oil,  80  parts, 
lothion  is  a  yellowish,  oily  liquid  having  a  faint  but  not  unpleasant 
odor.  It  is  insoluble  in  water;  soluble  in  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform, 
carbon  disulfide,  glycerin  and  oils.  It  is  volatile  at  body  tempera- 
ture. It  is  decomposed  by  alkalis  and  weakly  alkaline  solutions.  The 
specific  gravity  is  from  2.4  to  2.5  at  20   C. 

Heat  about  1  Gm.  of  iothion,  accurately  weighed,  on  the  water  bath 
under  a  reflux  condenser,  with  25  cc.  of  half  normal  alcoholic  potas- 
sium hydroxide  for  from  five  to  six  hours.  Dilute  with  water  and 
evaporate  the  alcohol.  Add  a  slight  excess  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid 
and  a  few  cubic  centimeters  of  sodium  nitrate  solution,  and  extract 
with  carbon  disulfide  until  all  of  the  iodine  has  been  removed.  Titrate 
the  carbon  disulfide  solution  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate 
in  the  usual  way:  the  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  consumed  indi- 
cates not  less  than   77  per  cent  nor  more  than  80  per  cent  of  iodine. 


IODINE  253 

SIOMINE.  —  Hexamethylenetetramine  tetraiodide. — Meth- 
enamine  tetraiodide  (CH2)6N4l4.  Siomine  contains  78.5  per 
cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Siomine  is  decomposed  in  the  intestine 
with  formation  of  hexamethylenetetramine  and  iodide,  the  rate 
of  absorption  and  excretion  being  essentially  the  same  as  that 
of  inorganic  iodides.  It,  therefore,  produces  the  effects  of  ordi- 
nary iodides,  from  which  it  differs  only  in  that  it  can  be  admin- 
istered in  solid  form. 

No  therapeutic  claims  are  made  for  the  hexamethylene- 
tetramine component  of  siomine,  this  serves  only  to  render  the 
substance  insoluble. 

While  ordinarily  the  hexamethylenetetramine  content  of 
siomine  may  be  ignored,  the  drug  should  be  discontinued  if  any 
signs  of  hexamethylenetetramine  intolerance  arises,  such  as 
vesical  irritation  or  hematuria. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  potassium  iodide.  Siomine  is 
best  administered  in  capsule  form  during  or  immediately  follow- 
ing meals. 

Manufactured  by   Pitman-Moore   Company,  Indianapolis.     U.    S.  patent 

1,226,394    (May    15,   1917;   expired).     U.   S.  trademark   107,998. 

Siomine  Capsules,   Yz   Grain:    Siomine  Vi   grain   (0.03  Gm.)   and  lactose 

4^   grains   (0.29   Gm.). 

Siomine   Capsules,   1    Grain:     Siomine   1    grain    (0.06    Gm.)    and  lactose 

4   grains   (0.26  Gm.). 

Siomine  Capsules,  2  Grains:     Siomine  2  grains   (0.13   Gm.)   and  lactose 

3    grains    (0.19    Gm.). 

Siomine   Capsules,   5    Grains:     Siomine   2   grains    (0.3   Gm.)    and   lactose 

2   grains   (0.13   Gm.). 

Hexamethylenamine  tetraiodide  was  described  by  Herton  in  1888,  and 
a  process  essentially  the  same  as  that  used  for  the  preparation  of  siomine 
is  described  by  Sugiura  and  Falk  {Biocliem.  Bull.  5:  18,  1916).  Under 
the  name  siomine,  it  was  first  proposed  for  therapeutic  use. 

Siomine  is  a  red  powder,  having  a  slight,  but  characteristic,  odor  and 
taste.     When  heated  to  138  C,  it  decomposes  with  violence. 

Siomine  is  slightly  soluble  in  acetone,  alcohol,  chloroform,  carbon 
disulfide  and  ether  (with  partial  decomposition).  It  is  almost  insol- 
uble in  water,  but  dissolves  with  decomposition  in  aqueous  solutions  of 
alkali  iodides  and  of  sodium  thiosulfate  and  in  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid. 

Heat  5  Gm.  of  siomine  with  15  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid:  first, 
vapors  of  iodine  (recognized  by  their  color  and  effect  on  starch  paper) 
are  evolved;  later,  formaldehyde  is  given  off  (recognized  by  its  odor 
and  the  blackening  of  paper  moistened  with  silver  ammonium  nitrate 
solution).  Heat  the  siomine-sulfuric  acid  mixture  until  it  is  color- 
less; supersaturate  with  potassium  hydroxide  solution:  ammonia  is 
evolved  (recognized  by  its  odor  and  effect  on  red  litmus  paper).  To 
0.5  Gm.  of  siomine  add  a  drop  of  strong  sulfuric  acid:  decomposition 
occurs  with  evolution  of  brown  fumes. 

Warm  0.5  Gm.  of  siomine  with  0.5  cc.  of  water  vmtil  a  clear  solu- 
tion results:  the  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  barium  chloride  solution 
does   not    produce   a    precipitate    ^sulfates). 

Incinerate  a  weighed  quantity  of  siomine:  not  more  than  0.03  per 
cent  of  ash  remains. 


254     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

IODIZED     FATS     AND     FATTY     ACIDS 

Iodized  fats  and  iodized  fatty  acids  produce  in  general  the 
same  systemic  effects  as  ordinary  (inorganic)  iodides ;  but  their 
iodine  is  more  slowly  absorbed  and  excreted,  and  therefore  more 
persistently  retained;  especially  in  tissues  rich  in  lipoids,  such 
as  the  nervous  structures. 

The  iodized  fats  and  fatty  acids  generally  pass  the  stomach 
unchanged,  and  are  saponified  and  absorbed  in  the  small  intes- 
tine, like  ordinary  fats.  They  are  then  deposited  for  the  most 
part  in  lipoid  tissues,  where  they  are  gradually  oxidized,  yield- 
ing inorganic  iodide,  which  is  given  off  to  the  blood  and 
excreted.  The  iodine  content  of  the  blood  is  thus  maintained 
more  uniform  than  when  inorganic  iodides  are  administered. 

It  is  conceivable  that  iodized  fats  and  fatty  acids  have  thera- 
peutic advantages  over  ordinary  iodides  when  a  gradual,  long- 
sustained  iodide  action  is  desired;  but  the  clinical  evidence  is 
not  decisive.  The  doses  used  in  these  conditions  as  a  rule  are 
not  irritating  to  the  stomach  and  are  not  likely  to  produce 
iodism.  Hypodermic  injections  remain  unabsorbed  for  long 
periods,  and  do  not  produce  systemic  actions,  except  in  very 
hypersensitive  individuals,  for  instance,  in  tuberculosis. 

Iodized  oils  are  injected  as  contrast  mediums  in  roentgen 
diagnosis,  especially  of  tumors  of  the  spinal  cord ;  in  the  locali- 
zation of  bronchial  and  pulmonary  lesions;  and  in  gynecology. 
Various  vegetable  oils  may  be  used ;  animal  oils  cause  local 
irritation.  According  to  the  method  of  iodation,  the  oil  may 
contain  iodine  alone,  or  iodine  and  chlorine  ("chloriodized 
oils").    These  do  not  differ  essentially. 

Iodized  oils  are  quite  viscid.  For  injections  into  cavities  they 
may  be  thinned,  for  instance,  by  diluting  with  ethyl  oleate; 
they  may  be  rendered  water-miscible  by  emulsification. 

Caution. — "It  should  be  emphasized  that  the  injection  of 
iodized  oils  is  essentially  a  surgical  procedure,  introducing  a 
foreign  and  possibly  irritant  body,  and  involving  more  or  less 
risk,  which  should  be  weighed  against  the  presumptive  advan- 
tages, in  comparison  with  the  relative  advantages  and  disad- 
vantages of  other  measures.  The  following  cautions  should  be 
especially  borne  in  mind : 

"1.  Oils  that  have  aged  and  darkened  beyond  their  original 
color  should  never  be  used. 

"2.  Subarachnoid  injections  should  be  avoided,  at  least  until 
all  other  means  of  diagnosis  have  been  exhausted. 

"3.  Intratracheal  and  intrapleural  injections  should  be  avoided 
in  tuberculosis  of  the  respiratory  organs  and  also  when  restric- 
tion of  respiratory  area  would  be  contraindicated. 

"4.  The  injection  pressure  should  be  carefully  controlled,  so 
as  not  to  lacerate  the  tissues. 

"5.  Intra-uterine  injections  should  be  made  only  under  fluoro- 
scopic observations. 


IODINE  255 

"6.  Iodized  oil  should  not  be  used  for  renal  pyelography, 
except  in  the  form  of  emulsion;  and  the  injection  should  be 
stopped  if  pain  is  felt. 

"7.  Intravascular  injections  with  iodized  oil  appear  too  dan- 
gerous; the  use  of  emulsions  for  this  purpose  requires  further 
study."  (Dangers  of  the  Injection  of  Iodized  Oils,  Report 
of  the  Council  on  Pharmacy  and  Chemistry.  The  Journal, 
A.  M.  A.  99:1946,  Dec.  3,  1932.  The  full  report  may  be  con- 
sulted for  further  discussion  of  the  history,  scope  and  limita- 
tions of  iodized  oils.) 

8.  When  the  so-called  per-nasal  method  of  injecting  the  oil 
into  the  larynx  is  employed,  it  should  be  remembered  that  in 
the  injection  of  the  local  anesthetic  required  for  this  procedure, 
the  risk  of  intoxication  from  the  anesthetic  is  greatly  enhanced 
as  the  absorptive  surface  is  increased. 

CHLORIODIZED    RAPESEED    OIL.— A   halogenated 

addition  product  of  rapeseed  oil  containing  from  24  to  26  per 
cent  iodine  and  from  7  to  8  per  cent  chlorine  in  organic 
combination. 

Actions  and  Uses. — In  the  form  of  an  emulsion,  chloriodized 
rapeseed  oil  is  used  as  a  roentgenographic  opaque  medium  in 
urography. 

Dosage. — The  amount  of  emulsion  to  be  used  is  determined 
by  the  size  of  the  cavity  to  be  visualized.  Intravenous  and 
intraspinal  injections  are  contraindicated. 

Manufactured  by  the  Dermatological  Research  Laboratories  branch  of 
the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  U.  S.  patent  1,870,023 
(Aug.  2,   1932;   expires   1949). 

Ampules  Campiodol  Emulsion,  20  cc:  Chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  5  cc, 
acacia  solution   (35  per  cent)   5  cc,  and  distilled  water  10  cc. 

Chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  is  a  yellow,  semiviscous  oil,  having  an 
alliaceous  odor  and  an  oleaginous  taste,  soluble  in  benzene,  carbon 
disulfide,  chloroform  and  ether,  insoluble  in  alcohol  and  water.  On 
exposure  to  air  and  sunlight  it  decomposes,  turning  a  brown  color. 
Specific  gravity  at  20  C,  from  1.2  to  1.3. 

Boil  about  0.5  cc.  of  chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  and  20  cc.  of  half- 
normal  potassium  hydroxide  alcoholic  solution,  in  a  porcelain  dish  for 
about  ten  ininutes,  evaporate  the  liquid  on  a  water  bath  and  ignite  the 
residue.  Dissolve  the  residue  in  10  cc.  of  water,  filter  the  solution,  add 
5  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and  2  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  to  the  filtrate; 
collect  the  precipitate  consisting  of  a  mixture  of  silver  chloride  and 
iodide  on  a  filter,  wash  with  diluted  nitric  acid  and  water,  percolate  the 
precipitate  obtained  with  10  cc.  of  diluted  ammonium  hydroxide  several 
times:  a  white,  curdy  precipitate  results  on  the  addition  of  an  excess 
of  diluted  nitric  acid.  Mix  10  cc.  of  chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  with 
50   cc.   of  purified  petroleum  benzin:   a  transparent  liquid  results. 

Dissolve  about  1  cc.  of  chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  in  10  cc.  of  chloro- 
form, add  a  few  drops  of  phenolphthalein  solution  and  0.3  cc.  of  tenth- 
normal sodium  hydroxide  solution:  the  liquid  becomes  red  (limit  of 
acidity).  Shake  1  cc.  chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  with  50  cc.  of  water, 
allow  the  oil  to  separate,  filter  the  supernatant  layer  through  a  wetted 
filter:  the  filtrate  yields  no  more  than  a  slight  opalescence  with  1  cc. 
of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (soluble 
inorganic   halides). 

Ignite  about  1  Gm.  of  chloriodized  rapeseed  oil  accurately  weighed; 
the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.01  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of 
chloriodized   rapeseed   oil,    accurately    weighed,   to   a   bomb   tube;    deter- 


256     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

mine  chlorine  and  iodine  contents  by  the  modified  Carius  method. 
Collect  the  insoluble  residue  of  silver  halide  on  a  filter  paper,  wash 
thoroughly  with  diluted  nitric  acid  and  water,  puncture  the  filter,  wash 
the  insoluble  material  into  a  250  cc.  glass  stoppered  Erlenmeyer  flask, 
using  about  100  cc.  of  previously  filtered  stronger  ammonium  hydroxide, 
stopper  the  flask,  shake  the  flask  and  contents  and  allow  to  stand  for 
one  hour.  Collect  the  insoluble  residue  of  silver  iodide  on  a  tared 
Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  diluted  ammonium  hydroxide  and  water,  and 
dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C. :  the  amount  of  iodine  found  is  not 
less  than  24  per  cent  nor  more  than  26  per  cent.  To  the  ammoniacal 
filtrate  from  the  iodine  determination  add  25  cc.  of  potassium  iodide 
solution  and  remove  the  ammonia  by  heating  on  a  water  bath,  collect 
the  insoluble  residue  of  silver  iodide  on  a  tared  Gooch  crucible,  wash 
with  water  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C:  the  amount  of  silver 
iodide  found  calculated  as  chlorine  is  not  less  than  7  per  cent  nor  more 
than  8  per  cent. 

lODOSTARINE-ROCHE.  —  Diiodotariric  acid.— dsHas 
I2O2. — An  iodine  addition  product  of  tariric  acid,  C18H32O2, 
derived  from  the  fruit  of  a  species  of  Picramnia.  lodostarine- 
Roche  contains  47.5  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — lodostarine-Roche  is  used  as  a  substitute 
for  the  inorganic  iodides.  See  preceding  article,  Iodized  Fats 
and  Fatty  Acids. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  potassium  iodide.  Marketed 
in  the  form  of  tablets  only. 

Manufactured    by    F.    Hoffmann-LaRoche    &    Co.,    Basle,    Swizterland 
(Hoffmann-LaRoche,    Inc.,    Nutley,    N.    J.,    distributor).      U.    S.    patent 
982,656  (Jan.  24,  1911;  expired).     U.  S.  trademark  87,996. 
Tablets   lodostarine-Roche,    0.25    Cm. 

Chocolate  Tablets  lodostarinc-Roche :  Each  contains  iodostarine-Roche 
equivalent  to  iodine,  0.01  Gm.  This  dosage  form  is  used  only  for  prophy- 
laxis against  goiter  and  for  the  treatment  of  simple  goiter. 

Iodostarine-Roche  is  a  white,  crystalline  solid,  odorless  and  tasteless. 
It  is  insoluble  in  water;  slightly  soluble  in  cold  alcohol;  soluble  in 
warm  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform,  benzene  and  carbon  disulfide.  It  is 
permanent  in  the  air.  It  melts  at  48  to  49  C. ;  at  a  higher  temperature 
it  decomposes  with  evolution  of  iodine. 

To  about  1  Gm.  of  iodostarine-Roche,  accurately  weighed,  add  50  cc. 
of  half-normal  potassium  hydroxide  in  methyl  alcohol.  Heat  for  two 
hours  under  a  reflux  condenser.  Remove  the  condenser,  boil  off  the 
alcohol,  taking  care  to  avoid  loss  by  bumping,  and  transfer  the  residue 
to  a  separator,  using  at  first  warm  water,  but  finally  a  little  diluted 
nitric  acid  to  insure  complete  transfer  of  the  iodide  to  the  separator. 
Cool  and  add  50  cc.  of  ether  and  sufficient  diluted  nitric  acid  to  decom- 
pose the  soap.  If  the  solution  becomes  yellow  from  liberation  of  iodine 
add  a  little  sodium  sulfite  to  reduce  the  iodine.  Shake  thoroughly 
and  draw  off  the  acid  layer  through  a  wetted  filter  into  a  500  cc.  flask. 
Wash  the  ether  in  the  separator  with  three  separate  portions  of  water 
of  25  cc.  each,  adding  these  through  the  filter  to  the  acid  solution  in  the 
flask,  warm  to  expel  dissolved  ether,  cool,  and  add  5  cc.  of  concentrated 
nitric  acid  and,  at  once,  25  cc.  of  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate.  Titrate 
the  excess  of  silver  with  tenth-normal  potassium  sulfocyanate,  using 
ferric  ammonium  sulfate  as  indicator:  the  volume  of  tenth-normal  silver 
nitrate  used  indicates  not  less  than  47.5  per  cent  of  iodine. 

LIPIODOL-LAFAY.— Iodized  Poppy-Seed  Oil  40  per  cent. 
— An  iodine  addition  product  of  poppy-seed  oil  containing  39 
to  41  per  cent  of  iodine  (0.54  Gm.  of  iodine  per  cc.)  in  organic 
combination. 


IODINE  257 

Actions  and  Uses. — Lipiodol-Lafay  is  used  as  a  substitute 
for  inorganic  iodides;  and  as  a  contrast  medium  in  roentgenog- 
raphy. See  preceding  article,  Iodized  Fats  and  Fatty  Acids. 
In  subarachnoid  injection  for  roentgen  examination,  lipiodol 
radiologique  descendant  is  used  for  the  recognition  of  intra- 
dural tumors. 

Dosage. — From  1  cc.  to  5  cc.  (15  to  75  minims)  or  more 
according  to  the  uses  to  which  it  is  to  be  put. 

Manufactured   by    Andre    Guerbet    &    Cie,    Paris    (E.    Fougera    &    Co., 

New  York,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S.  trademark  196,499. 
Ampcmles  Lipiodol-Lafay,  1  cc. 
Ampoules  Lipiodol-Lafay,  2  cc. 
Ampoules  Lipiodol-Lafay,  3  cc. 
Ampoules  Lipiodol-Lafay,  5  cc. 
Capsules    Lipiodol-Lafay,     0.5     Gm.:      Each     gelatin     capsule     contains 

lipiodol-Lafay,    equivalent    to    0.2    Gm.    of    iodine. 
Dosage:    Two  to  five  capsules  daily  after  meals. 
Lipiodol  Radiologique  Descendant. 
Tablets  Lipiodol  Calcium-Lafay :  Each  tablet  contains  a  calcium   salt  of 

the  iodized  fatty  acids  of  lipiodol-Lafay  0.1   Gm.   (equivalent  to  0.04  Gm. 

of  iodine)    incorporated   in   a  base   composed   of   sugar,   acacia   and  cacao, 

and  flavored  with  vanillin. 

Dosage:    Two  to  five  tablets  daily. 

Lipiodol-Lafay  is  a  thick,  viscous  oily  liquid,  having  an  alliaceous 
odor  and  an  oleaginous  taste  and  insoluble  in  water.  On  exposure  to 
air  and  sunlight  it  decomposes,  turning  a  dark  brown  color.  Specific 
gravity  at  20   C.,  from   1.340  to  1.350. 

Boil  0.5  cc.  of  lipiodol-Lafay  and  10  cc.  of  alcoholic  solution  of 
potassium  hydroxide  (1  in  10),  in  a  porcelain  dish  for  about  five  min- 
utes, evaporate  the  liquid  on  a  water  bath  and  ignite  the  residue. 
Dissolve  the  residue  in  10  cc.  of  water,  filter  the  solution,  add  5  cc.  of 
hydrochloric  acid  to  the  filtrate,  then  add  chloroform  and  a  few  drops 
of  chlorine  water  and  agitate:  the  chloroform  solution  is  violet.  Dis- 
solve 1  cc.  of  lipiodol-Lafay  in  10  cc.  of  chloroform  and  add  a  few 
drops  of  phenolphthalein  solution  and  0.3  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution:  the  liquid  becomes  red  (limit  of  acidity).  Mix 
10  cc.  of  lipiodol-Lafay  with  50  cc.  of  petroleum  benzin:  a  transparent 
liquid  results. 

Boil  about  1  cc.  of  lipiodol-Lafay  with  10  cc.  of  nitric  acid  and 
0.5  Gm.  of  silver  nitrate,  cool,  add  25  cc.  of  water,  collect  the  precipi- 
tate formed  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  free  from  the  excess  of  silver 
nitrate;  puncture  the  filter,  collect  its  contents  in  a  glass  stoppered 
flask,  treat  with  50  cc.  of  stronger  ammonia  water,  agitate  thoroughly 
and  allow  to  stand  for  one  hour.  Filter  off  the  insoluble  silver  iodide; 
treat  the  filtrate  with  15  cc.  potassium  iodide  solution,  and  remove  the 
excess  of  ammonia  by  evaporation  on  a  steam  bath:  no  opalescence 
results   (absence  of  chlorine  compounds). 

Ignite  about  1  Gm.  accurately  weighed;  the  residue  does  not  exceed 
0.01  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.35  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  bomb 
tube;  determine  the  iodine  content  by  the  Carius  method:  the  amount 
of  iodine  found  is  not  less  than  39  per  cent  nor  more  than  41  per  cent. 

LIPIODOL    RADIOLOGIQUE   ASCENDANT.— 

Iodized  Poppy-Seed  Oil  10  per  cent. — An  iodine  addition  product 
of  poppy-seed  oil  containing  9.8  to  11.2  per  cent  of  iodine  (0.11 
Gm.  of  iodine  per  cc.)  in  organic  combination. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Lipiodol  radiologique  ascendant  is  used 
for  recognition  of  intradural  tumors  when  it  is  desired  to 
employ  a  contrast  medium  of  lesser  density  than  that  of  the 
spinal  fluid. 


258     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — From  1  to  2  cc,  previously  brought,  with  the 
syringe,  to  a  temperature  of  40  C. 

Manufactured  by  Andre  Guerbet  &  Cie.,  Paris  (E.  Fougera  &  Co., 
New  York,  distributor).     No  U.  S.  patent.     U.  S.  trademark  196,499. 

Lipiodol  radiologique  ascendant  is  a  yellow,  oily  liquid,  having  an 
alliaceous  odor  and  an  oleaginous  taste,  insoluble  in  water.  On  exposure 
to  air  and  sunlight  it  decomposes,  turning  a  brown  color.  Specific 
gravity   at  20   C,   from  0.99   to   1. 

Lipiodol  radiologique  ascendant  conforms  to  the  tests  for  identity  and 
purity,  ash  and  assay  as  described  under  lipiodol-Lafay,  except  that  the 
iodine  content  found  is  not  less  than  9.8  per  cent  nor  more  than 
11.2  per  cent. 

LIPOIODINE-CIBA.  —  Ethyl  diiodobrassidate  C2iH39la 
COOCCaHs),  the  ethyl  ester  of  diiodobrassidic  acid  CHs. 
(CH2)7.CHI.CHL(CH2)ii.COOH,  containing  41  per  cent  of 
iodine. 

Actions  arid  Uses. — Lipoiodine-Ciba  is  used  as  a  substitute 
for  the  inorganic  iodides  and  as  a  contrast  medium  for  roent- 
genologic work.  See  preceding  article,  Iodized  Fats  and  Fatty 
Acids. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  0.6  Gm.  (5  to  10  grains),  or  in  acute 
cases  from  1.2  to  1.8  Gm.  (20  to  30  grains).  Lipoiodine-Ciba 
tablets  should  be  masticated  before  swallowing. 

For  diagnostic  work,  from  5  to  20  cc.  of  lipoiodine-Ciba 
diagnostic,  as  determined  by  the  extent  of  the  field  to  be 
investigated. 

Manufactured  by  the  Society  Chemical  Industry  in  Basle,  Switzer- 
land (the  Ciba  Company,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent 
1,024,171    (April  23,  1912,  expired).     U.  S.  trademark,  81,554. 

Lipoidine-Ciba  Diagnostic,  10  cc.  bottle:  A  60  per  cent  solution  of 
lipoiodine-Ciba  in  sesame  oil. 

Tablets  Lipoiodine-Ciba,   0.3  Gm.    (Uncoated). 

Lipoiodine-Ciba   crystallizes   in   white,    odorless   and   tasteless   needles, 

melting  at   Z7   C.      It  is  insoluble  in  water,   slightly  soluble  in  alcohol, 

and  very   soluble   in    fatty   oils,   ether   and   benzene.     Lipoiodine-Ciba   is 

decomposed  by  exposure  to  direct  light. 

The    iodine    content    of    lipoiodine-Ciba    may    be    determined    by    the 

method  of  H.   Baubigny  and  G.   Chavanne    {Compt.   rend.  Acad.   d.  sc. 

Paris   136:1197,    1199;    Chem.   Zentralbl.   3:69,    1903). 

ORIDINE. — The  calcium  salt  of  the  iodized  fatty  acids  of 
cottonseed  oil.  It  contains  from  23  to  25  per  cent  of  iodine  in 
organic  combination. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Oridine  is  used  as  a  substitute  for  the 
inorganic  iodides.  See  preceding  article,  Iodized  Fats  and  Fatty 
Acids. 

Dosage. — The  iodine  content  of  oridine  1  Gm.  is  approxi- 
mately equivalent  to  sodium  iodide  0.28  Gm.  and  to  potassium 
iodide  0.31  Gm.  When  used  for  the  prophylaxis  of  goiter, 
0.01  to  0.03  Gm.  per  day  is  given  until  40  doses  have  been  taken. 


IODINE  259 

Manutactured   by    Eli    Lilly   and    Co.,    Indianapolis.      No   U.    S.    patent. 

U.   S.   trademark  185,838. 

Oridine  Tablets:    Each  contains  oridine,  equivalent  to  iodine  0.01   Gm. 

This  dosage  form  is  used  only  for  prophylaxis  against  goiter  and  for  the 

treatment  of  simple  goiter. 

Oridine  is  a  light  brown  powder,  almost  odorless  and  tasteless.  It  is 
almost  insoluble  in  water,  benzene,  ether  and  alcohol;  slightly  soluble 
in   chloroform  and   carbon  tetrachloride. 

Mix  oridine,  1  Gm.  with  water  20  cc.  and  filter:  the  filtrate  becomes 
but  slightly  opalescent  on  the  addition  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (soluble 
iodides). 

Mix  about  0.5  Gm.  of  oridine,  accurately  weighed,  in  a  nickel  cru- 
cible with  a  mixture  of  powdered  sodium  hydroxide  4  parts  and  potas- 
sium nitrate  1  part,  and  heat  until  fusion  has  been  completed.  Cool 
and  dissolve  the  fused  mass  in  150  cc.  of  water,  warming  to  hasten 
solution;  filter  into  a  400  cc.  beaker  and  wash  well.  Add  25  cc.  of 
tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  (the  amount  of  silver  is  "k"  in  the  formula 
below) ;  then  add  slowly,  with  stirring,  nitric  acid  until  acid  in  reac- 
tion to  litmus  paper.  Filter  the  solution  through  a  weighed  Gooch 
crucible,  wash  and  titrate  the  excess  silver  nitrate  in  the  filtrate  with 
tenth-normal  potassium  sulfo-cyanate  (the  amount  of  silver  iri  the 
filtrate  is  "a").  The  precipitate  in  the  Gooch  crucible  (consisting 
mainly  of  silver  iodide  with  some  silver  chloride)  is  further  washed 
with  3  portions  of  alcohol,  then  ether,  dried  at  100  C.  and  weighed 
("w").  The  amount  of  iodine  can  be  calculated  according  to  the 
formula. 

.7527  w  +  a  — k 


293 
where  w  equals  combined  weight  of  silver  iodide  and  silver  chloride, 
x  equals  weight  of  silver  iodide  and  (w-x)  equals,  weight  of  silver 
chloride :  by  this  method  oridine  contains  not  less  than  _  23  per  cent 
nor  more  than  25  per  cent  of  iodine.  (Chlorine  is  used  in  the  manu- 
facture of  oridine  so  that  the  finished  product  contains  from  1  to  3  per 
cent  of  combined  chlorine.) 

RIODINE  (Astier). — A  66  per  cent  solution  in  oil  of  an 
iodine  addition  product  of  castor  oil.  Riodine  (Astier)  contains 
about  17  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Riodine  (Astier)  is  used  as  a  substitute 
for  the  inorganic  iodides.  See  preceding  article,  Iodized  Fats 
and  Fatty  Acids. 

Dosage. — From  0.4  to  1.2  Gm.  (6  to  18  grains)  per  day,  in 
pearls,  taken  after  meals.     Supplied  only  in  the  form  of  pearls. 

Manufactured  by  Dr.  P.  Astier  Laboratories,  Paris,  and  Gallia  Labora- 
tories, Inc.,  New  York,  American  licensees  and  distributors).  No  U.  S. 
patent.      U.    S.   trademark  86,974. 

Riodine  Pearls,  0.2   Gm.   (3.1  grains). 

Riodine    (Astier)    is    prepared    by   treating   castor    oil   with   hydrogen 

iodide. 

Riodine   (Astier)    is  an  oil-like  liquid,  light  amber  in  color,  having  a 

faint   alkaline   reaction.      It    is    insoluble   in    water;    soluble   in   alcohol, 

chloroform  and  ether. 

When    heated,    it    is    decomposed    and    purple    vapors    of    iodine    are 

given    off.      When    heated    with    alcoholic    potash,    riodine    (Astier)    is 

saponified  and  potassium  iodide  formed. 

STEARODINE.  —  Calcium  lodostearate.  —  Ca[CH3(CH2)7 
CHI(CH2)8C02]2. — It  contains  from  26  to  28  per  cent  of  iodine 
in  organic  combination. 


260     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — Stearodine  is  used  as  a  substitute  for  the 
inorganic  iodides.  See  preceding  article,  Iodized  Fats  and  Fatty 
Acids. 

Dosage. — For  prophylaxis  of  goiter,  0.01  Gm.  weekly  or 
biannual  series  of  six  weeks'  treatment  consisting  of  0.01  Gm. 
daily. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.    S.    trademark  222,580. 

Stearodine  Tablets:  Each  contains  stearodine,  equivalent  to  0.01  Gm. 
of  iodine.  This  dosage  form  is  used  only  for  prophylaxis  against  goiter 
and    for  the  treatment  of  simple  goiter. 

Stearodine  is  a  cream  colored  solid,  almost  odorless,  insoluble  in 
water,  soluble  in  chloroform,  ether  and  benzin. 

When  stearodine  is  agitated  with  diluted  nitric  acid,  the  filtrate 
responds  to  tests  for  calcium.  When  a  small  quantity  of  stearodine  is 
warmed  with   strong  sulfuric  acid,  violet  vapors  of  iodine  are  evolved. 

Agitate  about  1  Gm.  stearodine  with  diluted  nitric  acid:  the  filtrate 
is  not  rendered  distinctly  turbid  by  the  addition  of  silver  nitrate  solu- 
tion (absence  of  inorganic  iodide). 

Mix  about  0.1  Gm.  of  stearodine,  weighed  accurately,  with  2  Gm.  of 
sodium  hydroxide  in  a  nickel  crucible  and  fuse  the  mixture  gently. 
Allow  the  fusion  to  cool  somewhat;  add  8  Gm.  of  fusion  mixture 
(sodium  carbonate,  potassium  carbonate  and  potassium  nitrate)  and  heat 
strongly  until  a  clear  liquid  results.  Allow  the  fusion  to  cool  and  dis- 
solve_  the  mass  in  250  cc.  of  water;  add  30  cc.  sodium  hypochloride 
solution  containing  2.5  per  cent  available  chlorine;  after  five  minutes 
acidify  with  an  ^excess  of  phosphoric  acid  and  heat  until  all  free  chlorine 
has  been  expelled;  add  an  excess  of  sodium  iodide  and  titrate  the  free 
iodine  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate:  each  cubic  centimeter  of 
tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  consumed  corresponds  to  0.0126  Gm. 
of  iodine;  the  iodine  content  found  is  not  less  than  26  per  cent  and  not 
more  than  28  per  cent. 

CALCIUM  lODOBEHENATE.  — Calcium  Monoidobe- 
henate. — "Consists  principally  of  calcium  monoiodobehenate 
[(C2iH42lCOO)2Ca]  and  contains,  when  dried  to  constant  weight 
at  100°  C,  not  less  than  23.5  per  cent  of  I."    U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Calcii 
lodobehenas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Calcium  iodobehenate  is  used  as  a  sub- 
stitute for  the  inorganic  iodides.  See  preceding  article,  Iodized 
Fats  and  Fatty  Acids. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  3  Gm.  (15  to  45  grains)  daily. 

Sajodin. — A  brand  of  Calcium  lodobehenate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured    by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    Inc.,    Nev,    York.      U.    S. 
patent  839,509    (Dec.  25,    1906;   expired).     U.   S.  trademark  61,730. 
Sajodin  Tablets,  1  grain, 
Sajodin  Tablets,  8  grains. 

IODIZED     QUINOLINE     DERIVATIVES 
CHINIOFON  (See  under  Chiniofon  Powder). 

VIOFORM   (See  under  Iodine  Dusting  Powders). 


IODINE  261 

WATER-SOLUBLE     IODINE     COMPOUNDS     FOR     INTRA- 
VENOUS    PYELOGRAPHY 

Satisfactory  roentgen  pictures  of  the  urinary  tract  may  be 
secured  by  the  intravenous  injection  of  soluble  iodine  com- 
pounds of  low  toxicity,  which  are  rapidly  excreted  by  the  urine. 
Several  organic  compounds  are  now  available  for  this  use. 
Sodium  iodide,  in  the  necessary  dose,  is  too  toxic  for  intra- 
venous injection.  The  organic  compounds  may  also  be  used 
for  ureteral  retrograde  pyelography. 

DIODRAST.— 3.5-^nodo-4-pyridone-A^-acetic  acid  anddieth- 
anolamine.  —  C5H20NLo.CH2.COOH4-NH(CH2CH20H)2.  —  A 
mixture  or  a  loose  combination  (in  solution)  of  diethanolamine, 
NH(CH2CH:OH)2  and  3,5-(/nodo-4-pyridone-A^-acetic  acid, 
C5H2OHNI2CH2.COOH  in  equimolecular  quantities.  Diodrast 
contains  approximately  49.8  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  mid  Uses. — Diodrast  is  proposed  as  a  contrast  agent 
for  intravenous  urography.  Local  reactions  about  the  site  of 
injection  are  said  usually  not  to  occur  or  to  be  very  mild  when 
they  are  observed ;  systemic  reactions  occur  occasionally.  The 
latter  consist  chiefly  of  flushing  of  the  skin  with  a  sense  of 
warmth;  less  often  transient  nausea,  vomiting,  erythematous 
eruptions,  respiratory  distress  and  cyanosis  may  occur.  These 
side  effects  usually  subside  within  a  few  minutes  to  an  hour 
or  so  without  special  therapy,  but  the  skin  eruptions  may 
rarely  persist  for  several  days.  In  animals,  diodrast  in  doses 
equivalent  by  weight  to  those  used  clinically  has  been  found 
to  lower  the  blood  pressure  for  a  period  of  about  two  hours ; 
this  slowly  returns  to  normal  and  may  be  followed  by  a 
secondary  rise ;  at  the  same  time,  respiration  is  stimulated. 
These  actions  have  been  reported  also  to  occur  in  the  human 
being.  Fasting  and  dehydration  of  patients  preliminary  to  injec- 
tion of  the  drug  are  widely  employed.  The  optimum  time  for 
taking  roentgenograms  varies  between  five  and  fifteen  minutes 
after  injection  in  individuals  with  normal  kidney  function 
(usually  one  exposure  is  made  after  ten  minutes  and  a  second 
after  a  further  interval  of  ten  or  fifteen  minutes).  When  renal 
function  is  impaired,  this  interval  is  proportionately  longer 
(thirty  minutes  or  more).  Pressure  over  the  bladder  is 
employed  by  some  clinicians ;  this  is  released  immediately  before 
the  first  exposure  and  is  replaced  until  the  next.  The  use  of 
the  drug  is  contraindicated  in  patients  with  severe  liver  dis- 
orders, nephritis,  tuberculosis  or  hyperthyroidism,  and  great 
care  must  be  exercised  in  cases  of  uremia.  Preliminary  renal 
and  hepatic  function  tests  are  advisable  in  suspected  cases. 
Caution  should  be  exercised  in  cases  in  which  a  reduction  in 
blood  pressure  would  be  dangerous  or  otherwise  undesirable. 

Dosage.  —  Twenty  cc,  of  a  solution  containing  7  Gm.  of 
diodrast,  previously  warmed  to  body  temperature,  is  injected 
slowly,    usually    into    the    cubital    vein.      Children    are    given 


262     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

correspondingly  smaller  doses.  Diodrast  is  administered  intra- 
venously in  the  form  of  an  aqueous  solution;  each  cubic  centi- 
meter contains  0.35  Gm. 

Manufactured    by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    Inc.,    New    York.      U.    S. 

patent  and  trademark  applied  for. 

Diodrast    Sterile    Solution    (35    per    cent,    weight /volume),    10    cc.    size 

ampule:   10  cubic  centimeters  contains  diodrast  3.5    Gm. 

Diodrast    Sterile    Solution    (35    per    cent,    weight /volum-e,    20    cc.    size 

ampule:   20   cubic  centimeters  contains  diodrast  7.0   Gm. 

Diodrast  responds  to  the  following  identity  tests:  Dilute  about 
10  cc.  of  diodrast  solution  with  an  equal  volume  of  water,  add  an 
excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  collect  the  liberated  3,5-diiodo-4- 
pyridone-A^'-acetic  acid  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  and  dry  at  100  C. :  it 
melts  with  decomposition  between  245  and  249  C.  (the  melting  point 
bath  previously  heated  to  200  C.)  (Save  the  filtrate.*)  Transfer  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  the  resultant  acid  to  a  small  hard  glass  test  tube  contain- 
ing a  piece  of  sodium  (about  the  size  of  a  pea),  previously  melted; 
after  the  first  violent  action  has  ceased,  heat  until  the  contents  of  the 
test  tube  are  decomposed:  vapors  of  iodine  are  evolved;  the  tube  and 
contents  are  allowed  to  cool;  add  10  cc.  of  water:  boil  the  mixture 
for  a  few  minutes;  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions; 
to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  concentrated  nitric  acid,  boil,  cool  and  add 
1  cc.  of  _  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  curdy  yellow  precipitate  results, 
insoluble  in  an  excess  of  stronger  ammonia  water;  to  the  other  portion 
add  a  few  drops  of  fresh  ferrous  and  ferric  sulfate  solutions,  heat 
to  nearly  boiling  and  carefully  neutralize  with  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid:  a  finely  divided  blue  precipitate  results.  Concentrate  the  original 
filtrate  frorn  the  foregoing,*  cool  in  ice  water,  filter,  evaporate  to 
syrupy  consistency,  add  5  cc.  of  alcohol,  neutralize  the  mixture  care- 
fully with  normal  sodium  hydroxide  using  litmus  as  an  indicator,  filter 
and  increase  the  volume  of  the  filtrate  to  about  10  cc.  with  absolute 
alcohol,  add  1  Gm.  of  trinitrophenol  (picric  acid),  heat  to  boiling  and 
finally  cool  in  ice  water;  collect  the  resulting  J/ethanolamine  trinitro- 
phenolate  on  a  filter  paper,  recrystallize  from  alcohol  and  dry  in  a  desic- 
cator over  sulfuric  acid  under  a  partial  vacuum:  it  melts  at  245  to  249 
C,  with  decomposition  (the  melting  point  bath  previously  heated  to 
200   C). 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  the  resultant  acid  in  1.5  cc.  of  a  10  per 
cent  solution  of  sodium  hydroxide  and  make  up  to  a  volume  of  3  cc: 
a  clear  colorless  solution  results.  To  the  foregoing  solution  add  7  cc. 
of  water  and  an  excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filter,  and  divide 
the  filtrate  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  chloroform 
and  0.1  cc.  of  ferric  chloride  solution:  no  coloration  is  imparted  to  the 
chloroform  layer  (absence  of  free  inorganic  iodides);  to  the  other  por- 
tion add  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution:  no  turbidity  results  (sulfate j. 

Z?iiodo-4-pyridone-A''-acetic  acid,  a  component  of  diodrast,  responds  to 
the  following  tests  for  identity  and  purity. 

Dtiodo-4-pyTidone-JV-acetic  acid  occurs  as  a  white  crystalline  odorless 
powder;  slightly  soluble  in  water;  practically  insoluble  in  organic 
solvents.  It  melts  at  245  to  249  C,  with  decomposition  (the  melting 
point  bath  previously  heated  to  200  C^.). 

Z?nodo-4-pyridone-A/'-acetic  acid  responds  to  identity  and  purity  tests 
previously  described  under  diodrast,  except  those  dealing  with  diethanol- 
amine. 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  diodrast  acid  component,  3,5-c?uodo-4-pyridone-Ar- 
acetic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.:  the  loss 
in  weight  does  not  exceed  1  per  cent.  Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of 
Diodrast  acid  component,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500  cc.  Kjeldahl 
flask  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the  official  method 
described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of  Analysis  of  the  Asso- 
ciation of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third  edition,  page  20,  chapter 
2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  3.3,  nor  more  than  3.6  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 
Transfer    about    0.5    Gm.    of    the    diodrast    acid    component    to    a    Parr 


IODINE  263 

sulfur  bomb;  determine  the  iodine  content  by  the  Lemp  and  Broderson 
Method  (/.  A.  Chem.  Soc.  39:  2069):  the  amount  of  iodine  found 
corresponds  to  not  less  than  62.3  per  cent,  nor  more  than  63.2  per 
cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 

DIODRAST    STERILE    SOLUTIONS 

Diodrast  solution  is  prepared  by  neutralizing  3,5rftiodo-4-pyridone-A/^- 
acetic  acid  in  water  with  an  equimolecular  quantity  of  diethanolamine. 
The  mixture  thus  formed  in  solution  (not  isolated  in  solid  form)  is 
very  soluble  in  water. 

Diodrast  solution  occurs  as  a  clear  and  nearly  colorless  liquid.  It  is 
neutral  to  litmus.  Diodrast  solution  is  incompatible  with  mineral  acids. 
The  specific  gravity  is  from   1.180  to  1.190  at  25   C. 

Place  10  cc.  of  diodrast  solution,  accurately  measured,  in  a  suitable 
tared  platinum  dish,  evaporate  to  dryness  on  the  steam  bath  and  ignite: 
the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.10   per  cent. 

Transfer  10  cc.  of  diodrast  solution,  accurately  measured,  to  a  suit- 
able glass  stoppered  Erlenmeyer  flask,  neutralize  with  normal  hydro- 
chloric acid,  adding  a  very  slight  excess;  cool  the  flask  and  contents  to 
about  5  C,  collect  the  precipitate  formed  in  a  tared  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  with  cold  diluted  acid  solution,  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C: 
the  weight  of  3,5dnodo-4-pyridone-A''-acetic  acid  obtained  corresponds  to 
not  less  than  2.7  Gm.  nor  more  than  2.8  Gm.  The  free  acid  corre- 
sponds to  the  standards  given  under  diodrast. 

Note. — The  assay  by  precipitation  with  a  mineral  acid  is  roughly 
approximate;  it  is  important  that  as  nearly  exactly  the  specified  amount 
of  diodrast  solution  as  possible  be  used,  because  the  solubility  of  the 
3,5-d!iodo-4-pyridone-iV'-acetic  acid  precipitate  varies.  This  assay  method 
of  standardization  is  therefore  at  best  approximate,  and  must  be  con- 
sidered tentative  until  such  time  as  more  accurate  analytic  procedure 
is  available. 

HIPPURAN.— Sodium  ortho-iodohippurate.— CeHJ.CONH. 
CH2COONa+2H20.  The  sodium  salt  of  o-iodohippuric  acid. 
Hippuran  contains  38.8  per  cent  of  iodine,  when  calculated  to 
the  dried  substance. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Hippuran  is  proposed  for  use  as  a  radi- 
opaque agent  for  intravenous,  oral  or  retrograde  urography. 
When  used  by  the  intravenous  route,  irritation  at  the  site  of 
injection  is  stated  not  to  occur  and  systemic  reactions  appear 
to  be  unusual ;  a  sensation  of  generalized  warmth  is  the  most 
common  side-effect;  nausea  occurs  occasionally  and  vomiting 
rarely.  Fasting  and  dehydration  of  patients  preliminary  to 
administration  of  the  drug  are  usually  employed.  Pressure 
over  the  bladder  region  is  employed  by  some  clinicians ;  this 
is  released  immediately  before  the  first  exposure  and  is  replaced 
until  the  next.  Ordinarily  the  first  film  is  exposed  about  ten 
minutes  after  injection  and  two  subsequent  pictures  are  taken 
at  fifteen  or  twenty  minute  intervals.  In  case  excretion  is 
delayed,  later  exposures  may  be  necessary. 

Results  with  oral  administration  of  the  drug  are  less  satis- 
factory but  a  sufficiently  high  percentage  of  successful  pictures 
appear  to  be  obtained  to  make  this  method  worthy  of  trial  in 
occasional  cases  in  which  intravenous  or  retrograde  urography 
is  not  feasible.  The  somewhat  objectionable  taste  of  the  com- 
pound usually  does  not  militate  against  its  ingestion.  Toxic 
effects  after  oral  administration  have  not  been  reported.  Pic- 
tures are  taken  60,  90,  120  and  150  minutes  after  oral  adminis- 


264     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

tration.  The  use  of  moderate  compression  over  the  bladder 
region  is  recommended  in  the  intervals  between  exposures. 
While  the  iodine  in  hippuran  is  firmly  bound,  the  compound 
should  nevertheless  be  used  with  caution  if  at  all  in  patients 
with  hyperthyroidism  and  tuberculosis.  The  use  of  the  drug 
is  contraindicated  in  severe  liver  disorders,  nephritis  and  uremia. 
In  suspected  cases  preliminary  hepatic  and  renal  function  tests 
should  be  employed. 

Satisfactory  visualization  has  been  reported  with  hippuran 
when  employed  by  the  retrograde  method  for  urethrograms, 
cystograms  or  pyelograms.  There  is  said  to  be  little  or  no 
tissue   irritation   with   effective   concentrations. 

Dosage. — For  intravenous  use,  25  cc.  of  a  solution  containing 
12  Gm.  of  hippuran,  previously  warmed  to  body  temperature, 
is  injected  into  the  cubital  vein.  Young  children  are  given 
proportionately  smaller  doses.  For  oral  use,  12  Gm.  of 
hippuran  is  dissolved  in  75  cc.  of  simple  syrup.  For  children, 
10  Gm.  is  employed.  For  retrograde  use,  hippuran  is  employed 
in  15  to  20  per  cent  solution  for  pyelography  or  3  to  5  per  cent 
solution  for  cystography.  The  solution  may  be  made  either 
by  diluting  the  ampule  solution  with  sterile  distilled  water  or 
by  dissolving  the  crystals  in  distilled  water,  filtering  and 
sterilizing  by  heat. 

Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis.  U.  S. 
patent  and  trademark  applied  for. 

Hippuran   (Crystals)   12   Gm.   vial. 

Stenle  Solution  Hippuran  25  cc.  size:  25  cc.  contains  12  Gm.  hippuran. 

Hippuran  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline  powder,  possessing  a  faint 
odor  and  an  alkaline  taste;  very  soluble  in  water,  freely  soluble  in 
ethyl  alcohol  and  soluble  in  dilute  alkali.  An  aqueous  solution  is  neutral 
or  faintly  alkaline  to  litmus. 

Fuse  about  0.2  Gm.  of  hippuran  with  2  Gm.  of  powdered  sodium 
hydroxide:  it  decomposes  with  the  evolution  of  iodine  vapors  and 
ammonia.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  hippuran  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add 
an  excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  collect  the  resultant  o-iodo- 
hippuric  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry  at  110  C.:  it  melts  at  171  to 
174  C.;  to  1  cc.  of  the  foregoing  filtrate  add  10  cc.  of  uranyl  zinc 
acetate  solution:  a  yellow  precipitate  results.  Transfer  about  0.5 
Gm.  of  hippuran  to  a  glass-stoppered  cylinder,  add  25  cc.  of  a  diluted 
nitric  acid  (one  part  diluted  nitric  acid  and  5  parts  water),  shake  for 
five  minutes,  filter:  the  filtrate  yields  no  distinct  opalescence  on  the 
addition   of   2   cc.   silver  nitrate   solution   (absence  of  inorganic  halides). 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  hippuran  in  50  cc.  of  water,  add  5  cc. 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filter:  separate  portions  of  10  cc.  each  of 
the  filtrate  yield  no  turbidity  on  the  addition  of  1  cc.  of  barium  chlo- 
ride solution  (sulfate);  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation 
with  hydrogen  sulfide   {salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  hippuran,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight 
at  100  C. :  the  loss  in  weight  is  not  more  than  10  per  cent  nor  less 
than  6  per  cent.  Er>il  about  1  Gm.  of  hippuran,  accurately  weighed, 
with  10  cc.  of  benzene  for  fifteen  minutes,  replacing  the  evaporated 
liquid  if  necessary,  d.cant  the  supernatant  liquid  through  filter  paper 
and  wash  filter  with  10  cc.  and  5  cc.  portions,  respectively;  evaporate 
the  combined  filtrates  to  dryness  in  a  tared  beaker  and  dry  to  constant 
weight  at  100  cc. :  the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.2  per  cent  (uncombined 
o-iodohippuric  acid).  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  hippuran,  accurately 
weighed,  to  a  500  cc.  Kjeldahl  flask;  determine  the  nitrogen  content 
according  to  the  official  method  described  in  the  Official  and  Tentative 


IODINE  265 

Methods  of  Analysis  of  the  Association  of  Official  Agricultural  Chem- 
ists, third  edition,  page  20,  chapter  2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage 
of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not  less  than  4.1  per  cent,  nor  more  than 
4.4  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Weigh  accurately 
about  1  Gm.  of  hippuran  in  a  tared  platinum  dish,  add  5  cc.  of 
sulfuric  acid,  heat  cautiously  while  fumes  of  iodine  and  sulfur  trioxide 
are  evolved;  repeat  twice,  using  portions  of  1  cc,  each  of  sulfuric 
acid;  add  about  0.5  Gm.  of  ammonium  carbonate;  ignite  to  constant 
weight,  and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  the  sodium  found  corresponds 
to  not  less  than  6.8  per  cent  nor  more  than  7.3  per  cent,  when  calcu- 
lated to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  hippuran 
to  a  Parr  sulfur  bomb;  determine  the  iodine  content  by  the  Lemp- 
Broderson  method  (/.  Am.  Chcm.  Soc.  39:  2069):  the  amount  of 
iodine  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  38.5  per  cent  nor  more  than 
39  per  cent,   when  calculated  to   the  dried   substance. 

NEO-IOPAX.— Neo-Iopax  Sodium.— D /sodium  AT-methyl- 
3  :  5-c?iiodo-4-pyridoxyl-2  :  6-(/zcarboxylate.  —  NaOOC.CsONL'. 
CHsCOONa.  The  cf/sodium  salt  of  iV-methyl-3  :  5-c/iiodo-cheli- 
damic  acid.    Neo-Iopax  contains  51.5  per  cent  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Neo-iopax  is  used  as  a  contrast  medium 
in  intravenous  urography.  It  has  advantages  over  iopax  in  that 
a  smaller  dose  is  required,  the  volume  of  solution  injected  is 
much  less  and  the  drug  is  excreted  in  the  urine  in  relatively 
higher  concentration.  Clinical  reports  indicate  that  systemic 
reactions  occur  uncommonly  and  are  usually  mild  and  fleeting. 
In  some  cases  there  is  more  or  less  severe  pain  in  the  arm 
radiating  to  the  shoulder ;  usually  this  disappears  on  completion 
of  the  injection  but  in  a  small  percentage  of  cases  it  may  persist 
for  a  variable  period.  The  pain  may  usually  be  relieved  by  local 
applications  of  heat  and  the  administration  of  an  analgesic  when 
necessary.  If  only  anatomic  information  is  desired,  it  is  usually 
sufficient  to  take  a  single  roentgenogram  from  twenty  to  thirty 
minutes  after  injection.  In  other  cases,  a  series  of  roentgeno- 
grams are  taken  at  intervals  of  ten,  thirty  and  fifty  minutes 
after  injection.  Before  the  second  picture  is  taken,  the  bladder 
is  emptied  in  order  that  the  shadow  of  the  drug  in  the  bladder 
may  not  obscure  the  lower  parts  of  the  ureters.  If  the  first 
plates  show  that  but  little  of  the  drug  has  been  excreted,  it  is 
presumed  that  the  kidneys  are  functioning  poorly,  and  several 
hours  should  be  allowed  to  elapse,  during  which  plates  should 
be  made  at  intervals.  Impairment  of  renal  function  will  allow 
but  poor  concentration  of  the  drug ;  many  hours  are  then 
required  for  its  excretion.  The  use  of  the  drug  is  contra- 
indicated  in  patients  with  severe  liver  disorders,  nephritis,  tuber- 
culosis or  hyperthyroidism,  and  great  care  must  be  exercised 
in  cases  of  uremia.  Caution  must  also  be  exercised  in  patients 
with  any  severe  systemic  disease.  Preliminary  liver  and  kidney 
function  tests  are  advisable  in  suspected  cases. 

Dosage. — Twenty  cc.  of  solution  containing  15  Gm.  of  neo- 
iopax  previously  warmed  to  body  temperature  is  injected  intra- 
venously, very  slowly,  into  the  cubital  vein.  Children  are 
given  correspondingly  smaller  doses. 

Manufactured  by  Schering  Corporation,  Bloomfield,  New  Jersey.  U.  S. 
patent  applied  for.     U.   S.  trademark  297,925. 


266     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Ampoule  Solution  Neo-Iopax,  20  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  neo-iopax, 
15  Gm.,  dissolved  in  sviiEcient  sterile  distilled  water  to  make  20   cc. 

Neo-Iopax  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder;  very 
soluble  in  water;  insoluble  in  acetone,  benzine,  chloroform,  ether  and 
purified   petroleum  benzine.     An  aqueous   solution  is  neutral  to  litmus. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  neo-iopax  in  100  cc.  of  water,  add  an 
excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  collect  the  liberated  A'^-methyl-S : 
5-duodo-4-pyridoxyl-2:6-c?/carboxylic  acid  on  a  filter,  wash  and  dry  in 
a  desiccator  over  sulfuric  acid  under  a  partial  vacuum:  it  melts  at 
about  174  C.,  with  decomposition;  heat  the  remainder  of  the  resultant 
acid  at  its  decomposition  temperature  (about  175  to  180  C.)  until 
no  further  evolution  of  gas  is  noted:  the  residual  substance,  .V-methyl- 
3:S-diiodo-4-pyridone,  thrice  recrystallized  from  water,  melts  at  214  C.; 
to  1  cc.  of  the  foregoing  filtrate  add  10  cc.  of  uranyl  zinc  acetate  solu- 
tion: a  yellow  precipitate  results.  Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  neo-iopax 
in  50  cc.  of  water,  add  an  excess  of  hydrochloric  acid,  filter  through 
paper  and  divide  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of 
chloroform  and  0.1  cc.  of  ferric  chloride  solution:  no  coloration  is 
imparted  to  the  chloroform  layer  (absence  of  free  inorganic  iodide) ; 
saturate  the  other  portion  with  hydrogen  sulfide:  no  coloration  or 
precipitation  results   (salts  of  heavy  metals). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  neo-iopax,  accurately  weighed  to  constant  weight 
at  100  C.:  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  2  per  cent.  Transfer 
aboiit  1  Gm.  of  neo-iopax,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500  cc.  Kjeldahl 
flask,  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the  official  method 
described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of  Analysis  of  the  Asso- 
ciation of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third  edition,  page  20,  chapter 
2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  2.7  per  cent,  nor  more  than  2.9  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the 
dried  substance.  Weigh  accurately  about  0.5  Gm.  of  neo-iopax  in  a 
tared  platinum  dish,  add  10  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  gently  heat  while 
fumes  of  iodine  and  sulfur  trioxide  are  evolved,  repeat,  using  two 
portions  of  sulfuric  acid,  respectively,  ignite,  cool  and  weigh  as  sodium 
sulfate:  the  sodium  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  9.2  per  cent 
nor  more  than  9.4  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 
Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  neo-iopax  to  a  Parr  sulfur  bomb;  deter- 
mine the  iodine  content  by  the  Lemp  and  Broderson  Method 
(Journal  of  the  American  Chenvical  Society  39:  2069):  the  amount  of 
iodine  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  51  per  cent  nor  more  than 
53  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the   dried  substance. 

SKIODAN.— Skiodan     Sodium.— Methlodal.—  CHsI.SOsNa. 

— The  sodium  salt  of  mono-iodo-methanesulfonic  acid.  Skio- 
dan contains  52  per  cent  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Skiodan  is  proposed  as  a  therapeutically 
indifferent  medium  for  roentgenography,  especially  for  visual- 
ization of  the  urinary  tract  either  by  intravenous  injection  or 
by  direct  injection  into  the  renal  pelvis  through  a  ureteral 
catheter.  It  has  been  reported  that  skiodan  exerts  a  diuretic 
action,  most  marked  during  the  first  half  hour  after  intravenous 
injection.  Excretion  studies  show  that  within  a  few  minutes 
after  intravenous  injection  the  concentration  of  skiodan  in  the 
urine  reaches  a  maximum  of  from  4  to  6  per  cent  (corresponding 
to  from  2  to  3  per  cent  of  iodine).  Usually,  75  per  cent  is 
eliminated  in  three  hours,  more  than  90  per  cent  in  ten  hours, 
and  the  remainder  within  about  twenty-four  hours. 

Dosage. — For  intravenous  urography,  skiodan  is  administered 
in  sterile  aqueous  solution  (from  20  to  40  Gm.  in  100  cc),  the 
average  dosage  for  adults  being  about  2  Gm.  for  each  15  pounds 
of  body  weight ;  for  retrograde  pyelography  an  aqueous  solution 
of  skiodan  (from  10  to  20  Gm.  in  100  cc.)  is  injected  through 


IRON     AND     IRON     COMPOUNDS  267 

a  ureteral  catheter  in  the  renal  pelvis.  Cystograms  may  be 
made  with  3  to  5  per  cent  solutions.  Aqueous  solutions  of 
skiodan  should  be  kept  protected  from  light;  they  can  be  kept 
for  a  considerable  time  without  impairment  but  should  be 
resterilized  before  use. 

On  the  day  before  the  intravenous  injection  of  skiodan  the 
patient  is  given  a  soft  diet,  with  a  cleansing  enema  in  the 
evening.  During  the  night  the  fluid  intake  is  restricted  as 
much  as  possible. 

Sterile  Solution  Skiodan    (40  per  cent   by  volume) :    Each   cubic  centi- 
meter contains  skiodan,  0.4  Gm. 
Tablets   Skiodan,    1    Gm. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  New  York.  U.  S.  patent 
applied  for.     U.    S.  trademark  283,045. 

Skiodan  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder  possessing 
a  slight  saline  taste  followed  by  a  sweetish  after-taste;  it  is  very  soluble 
in  methyl  alcohol,  slightly  soluble  in  ethyl  alcohol,  practically  insoluble 
in  acetone,  benzene  and  ether;  the  aqueous  solution  is  neutral  to 
litmus;    on  exposure  to  light  it  decomposes,   turning  to   a  yellow  color. 

Fuse  about  0.5  Gm.  of  skiodan  with  5  Gm.  of  powdered  anhydrous 
sodium  carbonate  in  a  nickel  crucible  until  decomposed:  the  crucible 
and  contents  are  allowed  to  cool;  dissolve  the  residue  in  20  cc.  of 
water;  filter  the  mixture  through  paper  and  divide  the  filtrate  into 
two  portions.  To  one  portion  add  an  excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid  followed  by  the  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  freshly  prepared  sodium 
nitrite  solution  and  finally  a  few  drops  of  chloroform  and  agitate  the 
mixture:  a  deep  violet  color  is  assumed  by  the  chloroform;  to  the  other 
portion  add  a  few  drops  of  freshly  prepared  sodium  nitroprusside  solu- 
tion: a  deep  violet  color  results.  To  about  0.1  Gm.  of  skiodan  dis- 
solved in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  an  excess  of  acetic  acid,  followed  by  the 
addition  of  an  equal  volume  of  zinc  uranyl  acetate  solution  (prepared 
according  to  Barber  and  Kolthoff,  J.  A.  C.  S.  50:  1625,  1928):  a 
yellow,  crystalline  precipitate  results.  Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  skiodan 
in  25  cc.  of  water;  separate  portions  of  5  cc.  each  yield  no  opalescence 
with  1  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution 
(inorganic  iodide  and  chloride) ;  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution  (sulfate) ;  no 
coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  {salts 
of  heavy  metals).  When  tested  for  arsenic  according  to  the  U.  S.  P.  X, 
the    product    meets    requirements    for    arsenic    (p.    428,    Arsenic    Test). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  skiodan,  accurately  weighed  to  constant  weight 
at  100  C. :  the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  1   per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of  skiodan  to  a  bomb  tube;  determine  the 
iodine  content  by  the  Carius  method:  the  amount  of  iodine  found 
corresponds  to  not  less  than  51.9  per  cent  nor  more  than  52.3  per  cent 
when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Weigh  accurately  about 
0.3  Gm.  of  skiodan  in  a  tared  platinum  dish,  add  5  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid,  gently  heat  while  the  fumes  of  iodine  and  sulfur  trioxide  are 
evolved,  repeat  twice,  using  two  portions  of  2  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid 
each  time,  cool  and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  the  percentage  of  sodium 
corresponds  to  not  less  than  9.3  per  cent,  nor  more  than  9.5  per  cent 
calculated  to  the   dried  substance. 


IRON     AND     IRON     COMPOUNDS 

Iron  is  used  in  medicine:  (1)  in  the  form  of  metallic  or 
elementary  iron  (reduced  iron,  U.  S.  P.)  ;  (2)  in  the  ferrous 
or  unoxidized  form  of  combination — responding  to  tests  for 
ferrous  ions  (ferrous  carbonate  in  mass  of  ferrous  carbonate 
and  pill  of  ferrous  carbonate,  ferrous  iodide  in  syrup  of  fer- 


268     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

rous  iodide,  U.  S.  P.)  ;  (3)  in  the  trivalent  or  oxidized  form, 
the  ferric  compounds — responding  to  tests  for  ferric  ions  (ferric 
chloride  in  tincture  of  ferric  chloride,  U.  S.  P.)  ;  and  (4)  in 
the  form  of  complex  compounds  of  iron. 

Complex  (masked  or  nonionic)  iron  compounds  are  those 
compounds  of  iron  whose  solutions  do  not  respond  to  the  ordi- 
nary tests  for  ferrous  or  ferric  ions  because  in  them  the  iron 
is  part  of  a  radical.  Complex  compounds  of  iron  do  not  have 
the  astringent  taste  of  simple  iron  solutions.  The  permanence 
of  these  complex  radicals  differs  widely ;  while  some,  such  as 
soluble  ferric  phosphate,  N.  F.,  and  solution  of  peptonized 
iron,  N.  F.,  are  converted  to  simple  ionic  iron  by  action  of 
dilute  acids,  others  resist  treatment  with  strong  acids  or  with 
alkalis.  The  complex  iron  compounds  occurring  naturally  in 
animal  and  vegetable  tissues  (which  are  often  termed  food 
irons)  belong  generally  to  the  more  resistant  class,  while  the 
complex  iron  compounds  produced  artificially  are  as  a  rule 
decomposed  rather  readily.  There  is,  however,  no  sharp  line 
of  distinction  between  the  natural  complex  iron  compounds  and 
the  artificially  produced  ones,  nor  is  there  any  good  evidence 
that  they  differ  in  therapeutic  action.  Until  a  difference  in 
their  effects  has  been  demonstrated,  we  may  class  together  all 
complex  iron  compounds  whose  solutions  are  not  decomposed 
into  simple  ionic  iron  by  digestion  at  body  temperature  with 
0.2  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid  and  pepsin.  (It  should  be 
emphasized  that  salts  of  iron  which  give  the  iron  test  directly 
are  classed  as  inorganic  iron,  whatever  their  acid  radicals  may 
be,  and  that  true  iron  albuminate  and  iron  peptonate  are  inor- 
ganic iron  compounds.) 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solutions  of  ferric  iron  are  used  exter- 
nally as  styptics.  Ferric  solutions  may  be  used  for  their 
astringent  effects,  internally,  and  as  a  gargle.  The  principal 
use  of  iron,  however,  is  in  the  treatment  of  anemia  and  chlorosis. 
For  this  purpose,  the  ferrous  salts  are  usually  preferred  to  the 
ferric  salts,  as  they  are  not  so  caustic  and  hence  are  less  likely 
to  disturb  the  stomach.  Reduced  iron,  yielding  ferrous  chloride 
when  dissolved  in  the  stomach,  acts  as  a  ferrous  compound, 
provided  the  hydrochloric  acid  in  the  gastric  fluid  is  sufficient 
to  permit  solution.  So  far  as  the  complex  iron  compounds  are 
not  decomposed  by  gastric  digestion,  they  also  are  devoid  of 
gastric  effects;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  it  has  been  claimed 
that  certain  hemoglobin-like  compounds  escape  absorption  alto- 
gether, Bunge  supposed  that  only  "organic  iron"  could  be 
absorbed  and  assimilated  by  the  body,  the  reputed  action  of 
inorganic  iron  being  altogether  indirect  and  due  to  its  local 
effect  on  the  alimentary  canal.  This  theory  was  modified  by 
Abderhalden  to  the  effect  that  inorganic  iron,  while  it  could 
not  be  converted  into  hemoglobin,  nevertheless,  stimulated  the 
conversion  of  "organic  iron."  Later  work  (Tartakowski),  how- 
ever, seems  to  prove  that  inorganic  iron  is  assimilated  and 
converted  into  hemoglobin  and  thus  far  is  therapeutically  fully 


IRON     AND     IRON     COMPOUNDS  269 

equal  to  natural  complex  iron  compounds,  Whipple  and  his 
co-workers  have  shown  that  ferrous  carbonate  (in  the  form  of 
Blaud's  Pills)  aids  recovery  from  the  anemia  of  repeated  hem- 
orrhages. Starkenstein  Hefftner-Heubner :  (Handbuch  der 
experimentelle  Pharmakologie)  reports  that  Reiman  has  shown 
that  ferrous  salts  are  effective  in  bringing  about  a  reticulocyte 
response,  hemoglobin  and  red  blood  cell  increase  in  much 
smaller  amounts  than  the  ferric  salts.  100  mg.  of  iron  as 
ferrous  salts  daily  were  shown  to  be  effective.  A  difference 
exists  between  the  different  iron  preparations  in  their  local 
irritant  and  astringent  action,  which  is  absent  in  most  of  the 
complex  iron  compounds.  These  local  actions  may  be  desirable 
in  some  cases  and  undesirable  in  others.  This  should  mainly 
determine  the  selection  of  the  particular  iron  preparation  most 
suitable  for  each  patient.  Suitable  diet  (especially  liver,  kidney, 
meat  and  spinach)  is  sometimes  more  effective  than  the  iron 
preparations,  presumably  by  the  cooperation  of  other  factors ; 
for  in  pernicious  anemia,  liver  extract  that  is  practically  iron- 
free  is  equally  active. 

Simple  Iron  Salts 

FERROUS  LACTATE.— Ferri  Lactas.— Iron  Lactate.— 

Ferrum  Laclicum.— Fe(GH503)2-|-3HoO. — The  ferrous  salt  of 
lactic  acid.  The  salt  contains  approximately  19  per  cent  of 
metallic  iron. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ferrous  lactate  is  a  mild  chalybeate, 
which,  because  of  its  feeble  taste,  may  be  taken  without  difficulty. 

Dosage. — From  0.06  to  1.3  Gm.  (1  to  20  grains).  Owing  to 
its  liability  to  oxidation,  it  is  best  prescribed  in  solutions  con- 
taining much  sugar.  Syrup  dissolves  1  Gm.  in  120  Gm,  (4 
grains  to  the  fluidounce). 

Ferrous  lactate  occurs  in  pale  greenish-white  crusts,  consisting  of 
srnall  needle-shaped  crystals  or  transparent  green  scales,  having  a 
slight,  peculiar  odor  and  a  sweetish,  ferruginous  taste.  It  is  slowly- 
soluble  in  about  40  parts  of  cold  and  in  12  parts  of  boiling  water; 
almost  insoluble  in  alcohol;  freely  soluble  in  a  solution  of  an  alkali 
citrate,  yielding  a  green  solution.  When  strongly  heated,  the  salt 
froths,  gives  out  dense,  white,  acid  fumes,  chars  and  finally  leaves  a 
brownish-red   residue. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  the  salt  has  a  greenish-yellow  color  and  a 
slightly  acid  reaction,  and  gives  a  deep  blue  precipitate  with  potassium 
ferricyanide,  and  a  light  blue  one  with  potassium  ferrocyanide.  A  2 
per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  the  salt  should  not  yield  more  than  a 
faint  opalescence  with  a  lead  acetate  solution  (limit  or  absence  of 
sulfate,  chloride,  citrate,  tartrate  and  malate).  The  aqueous  solution 
after  acidulation  with  hydrochloric  acid  should  not  yield  any  precipitate 
or  coloration  when  treated  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (foreign  metals). 
The  aqueous  solution,  acidulated  with  nitric  acid,  should  not  afford 
more  than  slight  opalescence  with  barium  chloride  solution  or  with 
silver  nitrate  solution  (limit  of  sulfate  or  chloride).  If  25  cc,  of 
a  2  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  the  salt  is  mixed  with  5  cc,  of  diluted 
sulfuric  acid,  the  mixture  boiled  for  a  few  minutes,  an  excess  of 
sodium  hydroxide  solution  added  and  the  mixture  filtered,  the  filtrate, 
when  mixed  with  a  few  drops  of  alkaline  cupric  tartrate  solution  and 
boiled,  does  not  yield   a  red  precipitate   (sugar).     If  a  portion  of  the 


270    NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

salt  is  triturated  with  sulfuric  acid,  no  offensive  odor  is  developed 
(butyric  acid),  nor  is  any  gas  evolved  (carbonate)  and  the  mixture, 
after  standing  for  some  time,  does  not  assume  a  brown  color  (sugar, 
gum  or  other  readily  carbanisable  impurities).  If  from  1  to  1.5  Gm, 
of  the  salt  is  weighed  and  moistened  with  nitric  acid  and  carefully 
ignited  in  a  porcelain  crucible  it  leaves  a  residue  of  ferric  oxide, 
weighing  not  less  than_  27  per  cent  nor  more  than  27.8  per  cent  of 
the  material  taken:  this  residue  does  not  have  an  alkaline  reaction 
on  litmus   paper,    nor   yield  anything   soluble   to   water    (foreign   salts). 

Iron  Lactate-Merck. — A  brand  of  ferrous  lactate-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  Xo  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Complex  Iron  Salts 

GREEN  IRON  AND  AMMONIUM  CITRATES.— 
"Contains  ferric  citrate  equivalent  to  not  less  than  14.5  per  cent 
and  not  more  than  16  per  cent  of  Fe."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Ferri  et 
Ammonii  Citrates  Virides. 

Iron  Citrate  Green-P.  D.  &  Co. — A  brand  of  Green  Iron 
and  Ammonium  Citrates-U.  S.  P. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Iron  and  Iron 
Compounds.  Iron  citrate  green-P.  D.  &  Co.  is  intended  for 
intramuscular  and  hypodermic  administration,  it  being  claimed 
that  because  of  the  higher  ammonium  citrate  content  the  use 
of  this  product  is  less  painful  and  less  liable  to  produce  coagu- 
lation of  proteins  when  injected  than  is  produced  with  the 
pharmacopeia!  iron  and  ammonium  citrates. 

The  Council  is  not  convinced  that  the  intramuscular  or 
hypodermic  administration  of  iron  yields  effects  which  differ 
from  those  obtained  by  the  oral  administration;  however,  the 
unsettled  state  of  iron  therapy  and  the  rather  large  clinical 
use  of  iron  by  intramuscular  or  subcutaneous  injection  appears 
to  justify  the  provisional  acceptance  of  this  preparation. 

Dosage. — From  0.015  Gm.  (^4  grain)  to  0.1  Gm.  (1^  grains) 
administered  intramuscularly  or  subcutaneously.  Iron  citrate 
green-P.  D.  &  Co.  is  marketed  in  the  form  of  solution  only. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Ampoules  Iron  Citrate  Green-P.  D.  &■  Co.,  54  grain:  Iron  citrate  green- 
P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.015  Gm.  (J4  grain);  quinine  and  urea  hydrochloride, 
0.005   Gm.;  distilled  water,   1  cc. 

Ampoules  Iron  Citrate  Green-P.  D.  &  Co.,  ^  grain:  Iron  citrate  green- 
P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.05  Gm,  (^  grain);  quinine  and  urea  hydrochloride, 
0.005   Gm.;  distilled  water,   1   cc. 

Ampoules  Iron  Citrate  Green-P.  D.  &  Co.,  l^z  grains:  Iron  citrate 
green-P.  D.  &  Co,  0.1  Gm.  (IJ^  grains);  quinine  and  urea  hydrochloride, 
0.005   Gm.;  distilled  water,   1   cc. 

SOLUTION  OF  FERRIC  CHLORIDE.— "An  aqueous 
solution  containing  ferric  chloride  (FeCla),  corresponding  to  not 
less  than  10  per  cent  and  not  more  than  11  per  cent  of  Fe.  It 
contains  not  less  than  3  per  cent  and  not  more  than  5  per  cent 
of  HCl."     V.  S.P. 


ISACEN  271 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Liquor  Ferri 
Chloridi. 

Saf-T-Top  5%  Ferric  Chloride  in  50%  Glycerine  Solution:  A  solution 
containing  ferric  chloride-U.  S.  P.  and  glycerin  in  equal  parts,  by  weight: 
marketed  in  ampules  having  a  capillary  opening,  and  containing  2  and 
15  CO.  This  form  is  intended  for  use  as  a  neutralizing  agent  of  the  toxi- 
codendrol  of  poison  ivy  and  poison  sumac.     It  is  applied  externally. 

Prepared   by    Robert    A.    Bernhard,    Rochester,    N.   Y. 

Complex  Iron  Salts — Hemoglobin  Derivatives 

Hemoglobin  is  the  coloring  matter  of  the  blood  corpuscles 
and  is  the  most  important  iron-containing  compound  of  the 
body.  It  exists  in  venous  blood  as  hemoglobin,  sometimes  called 
reduced  hemoglobin,  and  in  the  lungs  takes  on  oxygen  in  a 
loose  chemical  combination  becoming  oxyhemoglobin. 

Hemoglobin  is  obtained  from  oxyhemoglobin  by  the  action 
of  various  reducing  agents. 

When  ingested,  it  is  decomposed  in  the  stomach,  being  con- 
verted into  a  protein,  globin,  and  into  hematin,  an  acid,  non- 
albuminous  substance,  containing  the  iron  of  hemoglobin.  The 
same  decomposition  is  produced  by  heating  in  solution  to  70  C, 
and  by  various  chemical  agents.  It  is  doubtful  whether  hemo- 
globin is  absorbed  into  the  blood  from  the  gastro-intestinal 
canal. 

Various  preparations  of  hemoglobin  have  been  put  on  the 
market.  These  are  of  two  classes:  (1)  preparations  consisting 
essentially  of  oxyhemoglobin,  usually  sold  under  the  name 
''hemoglobin";  (2)  preparations  derived  by  the  action  of  reduc- 
ing agents  on  the  blood,  such  as  zinc  and  pyrogallol.  They 
consist  of  reduced  hemoglobin  or  of  some  modification  of  it. 


ISACEN.— Diacetyldihydroxyphenylisatin.— 


CCt 


<(  )>OOCCHj 


The  diacetyl  derivative  of  dihydroxyphenylisatin.  The  com- 
pound resembles  phenolphthalein  in  that  the  isatin  group  has 
sornewhat  the  same  general  grouping  as  that  of  the  phthaleins ; 
unlike  phenolphthalein,  in  isacen  the  two  hydroxy  radicals  (of 
the  two  phenol  groups)  have  been  condensed  with  two  acetyl 
groups. 

Actions    and    Uses. — Isacen    passes    through    the    stomach 
unchanged.    When  it  reaches  the  intestine,  a  gradual  splitting 


272     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

off  of  dihydroxyphenylisatin  takes  place  under  the  influences  of 
the  alkaline  contents  of  the  intestine.  The  dihydroxyphenylisatin 
thus  produced  is  stated  to  be  nontoxic,  not  to  be  absorbed,  and 
to  be  excreted  entirely  through  the  feces.  Neither  dihydroxy- 
phenylisatin nor  the  acetyl  compound  isacen  appears  in  the  urine 
after  administration  of  isacen.  Isacen  acts  as  a  laxative  or 
purgative,  depending  on  the  dosage  employed. 

Dosage. — As  a  laxative,  0.005  Gm.  (^2  grain)  ;  in  cases  of 
obstinate  constipation,  from  0.015  to  0.02  Gm.  (^  to  ^  grain). 
Isacen  is  supplied  in  the  form  of  tablets  only. 

Manufactured  bj'  Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.     U.  S.  patent 
1,624,675    (April    12,    1927;    expires   1944).      U.    S.   trademark   200,220. 
Isacen   Tablets  0.005   Gm.   (Y12  grain). 

Isacen  is  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless,  tasteless  powder.  It  is 
insoluble  in  water  and  dilute  hydrochloric  acid;  slightly  soluble  in 
alcohol,  very  slightly   soluble  in  ether.      It  melts  at  241   to  242   C. 

Boil  0.1  Gm.  of  isacen  with  3  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution;  cool, 
dilute  to  10  cc,  with  water:  on  the  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  potassium 
ferricyanide  solution  (1  in  10)  a  cherry  red  color  results.  Boil  1  Gm. 
of  isacen  with  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution;  cool  and  add  an 
excess  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid:  the  odor  of  acetic  acid  develops.  Dis- 
solve 1  Gm.  of  isacen  in  20  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  and  maintain  at 
100  C.:  a  clear  solution  results  (limit  of  dihydroxyphenylisatin).  Boil 
1  Gm.  of  isacen  with  50  cc.  of  distilled  water:  no  odor  develops.  Cool 
the  solution,  add  siifficient  water  to  restore  the  volume  of  50  cc;  filter, 
and  to  10  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  a  few  drops  of  silver  nitrate  solution; 
no  opalescence  is  produced  immediately  (chloride).  Transfer  2  Gm.  of 
isacen  to  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder,  add  50  cc.  of  distilled  water, 
shake  for  five  minutes  and  filter  through  paper.  To  25  cc.  of  the  filtrate 
add  one  drop  of  phenolphthalein  solution:  on  the  addition  of  one  drop 
of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  a  pink  color  results  (limit 
of  acid).  Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  accurately  weighed:  the  ash  should 
not  be   more  than   0.5    per   cent. 


ISOPROPYL  ALCOHOL.— Propan-2-ol.—CH3.CH(OH). 
CHs. — obtained  by  the  reduction  of  acetone  or,  as  a  product  in 
the  petroleum  industry,  by  the  absorption  of  olefin  gases  con- 
taining propylene  in  sulfuric  acid,  and  hydrolyzing  the  result- 
ing sulfuric  acid  esters. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Isopropyl  alcohol,  because  it  is 
a  solvent  for  creosote,  is  used  in  the  removal  of  that  substance 
from  the  skin  as  a  prophylactic  agent  against  creosote  burns. 
Isopropyl  alcohol  has  been  recommended  for  the  disinfection 
of  the  skin  and  of  hypodermic  syringes  and  needles.  As  it  is 
said  not  to  affect  the  potency  of  solutions  of  insulin,  it  has 
been  employed  as  a  disinfecting  agent  in  connection  with  the 
administration  of  this  agent.  Until  further  data  are  available, 
isopropyl  alcohol  should  not  be  relied  on  to  destroy  such  spore- 
bearing  organisms  as  Clostridium  tetani,  Clostridium  Welchii 
or  Bacillus  anthracis.  It  is  not  potable  and  should  not  be 
given  by  mouth. 

Isopropyl  alcohol  is  a  clear,  colorless,  volatile  liquid,  having  a  charac- 
teristic odor  and  a  slightly  bitter  taste,  miscible  with  water  in  all  pro- 
portions; also  miscible  with  chloroform  and  ether.    It  is  insoluble  in  salt 


KEPHRINE     HYDROCHLORIDE  273 

solutions  and  may  be  recovered  from  aqueous  mixtures  by  salting  out 
with  sodium  chloride,  sodium  hydroxide,  etc.  Specific  gravity  at  25  C. 
from  0.780  to  0.790.  Refractive  index  at  20  C,  from  1.3770  to  1.3780 
Isopropyl  alcohol  is  volatized  at  low  temperatures  and  boils  at  from 
81  to  83  C.  It  does  not  affect  blue  or  red  litmus  paper  previously 
moistened   with   water   when   diluted   with   an   equal   volume   of   water. 

Shake  20  cc.  of  isopropyl  alcohol  in  a  glass  stoppered  cylinder  with 
1  cc.  of  a  freshly  prepared  solution  of  ammonio  silver  nitrate  and 
allow  to  stand  in  diffused  daylight  for  six  hours:  the  mixture  does  not 
become  more  than  faintly  opalescent  or  acquire  more  than  a  faint 
brownish  tint  (aldehyde).  To  5  cc.  of  isopropyl  alcohol  add  2  cc.  of 
normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  5  drops  of  a  1  per  cent  aqueous 
solution  of  sodium  nitroprusside,  mix  thoroughly,  finally  make  slightly 
acid  with  acetic  acid:   no  purplish  red  color   (acetone). 

Evaporate  100  cc.  of  isopropyl  alcohol  in  a   platinum  dish  on  a  water 

bath,   and   dry   at    100   C. :    the   residue   does   not  exceed   0.01    per  cent. 

Saf-T-Top    Isopropyl    Alcohol,    98%:      Isopropyl    alcohol,    98    per    cent, 

marketed  in  ampules  having  a  capillary  opening,  and  containing  2  and  15 

cc.     This  dosage  form  is  intended  solely  for  the  removal  of  creosote  from 

the  skin. 

Prepared   by    Robert    A.    Bernhard,    Rochester,    N.    Y. 


KEPHRINE    HYDROCHLORIDE.— Methylaminoaceto- 

catechol  hydrochloride. — a-keto-^-methylainine-or^Ao-/>ara  dihy- 
droxyethyl-benzene  hydrochloride.— (OH)a  CeHa  COCHa  NH 
(CHs)  HCl.  Kephrine  hydrochloride  is  the  monohydrochloride 
of  a  base  resembling  epinephrine  (/a^z/o-methylaminoethanol- 
catechol)  but  differs  in  that  kephrine  possesses  a  ketone  group 
in  place  of  the  secondary  alcohol  group  of  epinephrine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Kephrine  hydrochloride  acts  by  constric- 
tion of  the  blood  vessels.  In  comparison  with  epinephrine  its 
action  is  less  powerful,  but  the  effects  are  more  lasting. 
Kephrine  hydrochloride  is  used  only  locally  and  will,  as  a  rule, 
arrest  capillary  bleeding  within  two  or  three  minutes.  The 
hemostatic  effects  usually  persist  from  one  to  two  hours.  As 
there  is  no  appreciable  absorption  of  kephrine  hydrochloride 
into  the  blood  stream,  it  does  not  have  any  noticeable  effect  on 
the  blood  pressure.  Kephrine  hydrochloride  is  not  destroyed 
by  blood  alkali. 

Dosage. — Kephrine  hydrochloride  is  marketed  in  the  form  of 
powder  and  suppositories;  bandages  and  gauze  impregnated 
with  kephrine  hydrochloride  are  also  supplied.  The  selection 
of  a  suitable  dosage  form  is  governed  by  the  anatomic  or 
pathologic  characteristics  of  the  individual  case. 

Manufactured  by  Chemosan  Union,  A.  G.,  Vienna,  Austria  (Campbell 
Products,   Inc.,   New  York,  distributor).     No  U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Kephrine  Hydrochloride  Powder:  Kephrine  hydrochloride  5  parts  and 
tricalcium  phosphate  95  parts. 

Kephrine  Hydrochloride  Rectal  Suppositories:  Kephrine  hydrochloride 
3  parts,  extract  of  belladonna  1  part,  in  96  parts  of  a  suppository  base. 

Kephrine  Hydrochloride  Bandage:  Bandages,  5  meters  long  and  1,  3, 
5  and  8  centimeters  wide,  impregnated  with  kephrine  hydrochloride,  1  Gm! 
per  3,000  square  centimeters. 


274     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Kephrine  Hydrochloride  Gauze:  Gauze  impregnated  with  kephrine 
hydrochloride,  1  Gm.  per  3,000  square  centimeters. 

Kephrine  hydrochloride  occurs  as  a  white,  odorless  powder;  freely 
soluble  in  water,  soluble  in  alcohol;  insoluble  in  ether.  Its  aqueous 
solution  is  neutral  to  litmus.  Kephrine  hydrochloride  "melts"  with 
decomposition  at  238  to  ?40   C. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride  in  25  cc.  of 
water,  add  a  very  slight  excess  of  ammonia  water;  collect  the 
resultant  methylaminoacetocatechol  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  and  dry 
at  100  C.:  a  yellow  crystalline  powder  results  which  on  heating 
deepens  in  color  at  200  C.  and  "melts"  with  decomposition  at  230  C; 
the  filtrate  from  the  foregoing  gives  a  white  precipitate  with  silver 
nitrate  solution,  insoluble  in  boiling  nitric  acid  but  soluble  in  an 
excess  of  ammonia  water. 

Dissolve  about  0.02  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride  in  20  cc.  of 
water;  separate  portions  of  2  cc.  yield  a  canary-yellow  color  with  1  cc. 
of  ammonium  molybdate  solution,  which  is  not  discharged  on  subse- 
quent addition  of  0.3  cc.  of  dekanormal  sodium  hydroxide  solution 
(distinction  from  epinephrine) ;  a  bluish  purple  color  with  0.2  cc.  of  a 
1:  100  sodium  nitroprusside  solution,  1  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion and  0.2  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid  (.distinction  from  salts  of 
ephedrine,  neosynephrine  and  tyramine).  Boil  about  0.01  Gm.  of 
kephrine  hydrochloride  with  2  cc.  of  alcoholic  potassium  hydroxide 
solution  and  3  drops  of  chloroform:  no  odor  of  phenylisocyanide  is 
evolved  (primary  amines).  To  about  0.1  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydro- 
chloride in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and 
1   cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution:   no  turbidity   develops    (sulfate). 

Dry  about  0.5  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed, 
to  constant  weight  at  100  C. :  the  loss  does  not  exceed  7  per  cent. 
Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride,  accurately 
weighed:  the  residue  is  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about 
0.25  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500 
cc.  Kjeldahl  flask  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to 
the  method  described  in  Methods  of  Analysis  of  the  Association  of 
Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third  edition,  page  20,  art.  22:  the 
amount  of  nitrogen  is  not  less  than  6.35  per  cent  nor  more  than 
6.5  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  about 
0.3  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable 
Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  100  cc.  of  water,  previously  boiled  to  remove 
carbon  dioxide  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  hydrogen 
chloride  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  16.5  per  cent  nor  more 
than  17  per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance.  Transfer  about 
0.3  Gm.  of  kephrine  hydrochloride,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable 
glass  stoppered  Erlenmeyer  flask,  dissolve  in  about  20  cc.  of  water, 
neutralize  with  a  diluted  ammonium  hydroxide  _  solution, _  adding  a 
very  slight  excess;  place  the  flask  and  contents  in  a  refrigerator  at 
5  C.  and  allow  to  stand  for  eighteen  hours.  Collect  the  precipitate 
on  a  tared  Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  cold  water  followed  by  cold 
alcohol  and  ether,  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C:  the  percentage 
of  methylaminoacetocatechol  obtained  corresponds  to  not  less  than 
83  per  cent,  nor  more  than  86  per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance. 


LACTIC     ACID-PRODUCING     ORGANISMS 

AND     PREPARATIONS 

Sour  milk  and  lactic  acid-producing  bacteria  are  used  for  the 
treatment  of  vomiting,  acute  diarrhea,  constipation,  various 
chronic  disorders  of  the  gastro-intestinal  tract  and  for  the  relief 
of  general  symptoms  associated  with  these  intestinal  disorders 
both  in  children  and  in  adults.  It  is  difficult  to  evaluate  the 
benefit  derived  from  sour-milk  or  this  form  of  bacterial  therapy. 


LACTIC    ACID-PRODUCING    PREPARATIONS     275 

Clinical  opinion  appears  to  indicate  that  some  of  the  preparations 
are  distinctly  useful  in  certain  cases. 

The  preparations  which  have  been  used  are:  (1)  Milk  soured 
by  the  addition  of  lactic  acid  and  (2)  milk  soured  by  the 
fermentation  of  lactose  by  a  variety  of  microorganisms.  Chemi- 
cally prepared  lactic  acid  milk  is  not  included  in  N.  N.  R.  The 
milk  preparations  made  by  the  fermentative  activity  of  Strepto- 
coccus lacticus  and  Kefir  fungi  have  been  omitted  because  of 
their  indefinite  qualities  and  because  they  are  not  extensively 
prescribed.  Bacillus  hulgaricus  preparations  have  been  omitted 
because  they  contained  an  organism  foreign  to  the  intestinal 
tract  of  man  and  incapable  of  being  implanted  in  the  human 
intestine.  The  Bacillus  acidophilus  preparations  have  been 
retained  because  this  organism  is  capable  of  implantation, 
growth  and  lactic  acid-production  in  the  intestine  of  man. 

Two  classes  of  Bacillus  acidophilus  preparations  are  manu- 
factured commercially.  One  is  a  preparation  of  the  growth  of 
the  organism  in  milk.  The  other  is  a  group  of  broth  cultures, 
and  concentrates  containing  the  organisms  in  various  solutions 
or  candy-like  materials.  Of  these,  the  milk  preparations  appear 
to  be  preferable,  although  a  positive  opinion  on  this  point  must 
be  withheld  until  questions  are  settled  by  further  investigations. 

The  benefit  derived  from  milk  soured  by  B.  acidophilus  may 
be  attributed  to  (1)  the  nutritive  value  of  the  milk,  (2)  the 
ingested  lactose,  (3)  the  effect  of  lactic  acid  and  (4)  a  special 
consequence  of  the  predominance  of  the  lactic  acid-producing 
B.  acidophilus  in  the  intestine.  No  one  denies  the  value  of 
milk,  whether  sweet  or  sour,  as  a  growth  promoting  and  energy 
yielding  food.  The  ingested  lactose  serves  as  nutriment  for 
both  man  and  the  fermentative  bacteria  in  the  intestine.  In 
fact,  the  feeding  of  at  least  100  grams  daily  of  lactose  or  dextrin 
is  an  essential  part  of  the  regimen,  especially  when  cultures 
and  concentrates  of  B.  acidophilus  are  administered.  The  lactic 
acid  appears  to  aid  in  the  establishment  of  a  condition  favorable 
for  the  growth  of  aciduric  bacteria  in  the  intestine.  When  the 
lactic  acid-producing  bacteria,  particularly  B.  acidophilus, 
become  predominant  in  the  intestine,  either  through  the  inges- 
tion of  large  numbers  of  them,  by  implantation  or  by  the  cre- 
ation of  a  condition  favorable  to  the  overgrowth  of  B.  acidophilus 
when  normally  present,  the  putrefactive  flora  is  reduced  or 
suppressed.  This  result  appears  to  be  attributable  largely  to 
the  continued  production  of  lactic  acid  in  the  intestine  and 
possibly  to  a  less  clearly  understood  process  of  bacterial 
antagonism. 

The  evidence  indicates  that  a  predominantly  putrefactive 
flora  in  the  intestine  is  sometimes  associated  with  malaise, 
headache,  pains,  nervousness,  vomiting  and  other  symptoms. 
The  indeterminate  names  "auto-intoxication"  and  "intestinal 
toxemia"  have  been  applied  to  these  conditions.  The  Council, 
unable  to  find  suitable  definitions  of  these  terms  has  attempted 


276     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

to  discourage  their  use.  The  replacement  of  putrefactive  bac- 
teria by  fermentative  organisms  which  produce  lactic  acid  with- 
out gas  in  the  intestine  has  apparently  been  followed  by  relief 
of  these  symptoms.  But  there  has  been  gross  overstatement  of 
the  benefits  derivable  from  therapy  with  lactic  acid-producing 
bacteria.  The  Council  is  opposed  to  the  exploitation  of  the 
products  as  remedies  for  such  indefinite  conditions  as  "auto- 
intoxication" and  "intestinal  toxemia"  and  as  direct  contributors 
to  the  longevity,  psychic  sanity  and  general  well-being  of  indi- 
viduals. The  lactic  acid-bacteria  may  promote  health,  but  are 
not  regarded  as  essential  or  specific  vehicles  of  something 
necessary  for  health. 

The  conditions  essential  to  the  transformation  of  the  intestinal 
flora,  allowing  the  fermentative  lactic  acid  type  to  predominate, 
are  the  feeding  of  lactose  in  quantities  in  excess  of  100  Gm. 
daily,  or  the  administration  of  large  amounts  of  viable  cultures 
of  B.  acidophilus  together  with  liberal  quantities  of  lactose  or 
dextrine.  Thus  far,  the  most  successful  method  of  producing 
this  transformation  of  the  intestinal  flora  has  been  the  use  of 
milk  fermented  by  B.  acidophilus,  containing  at  the  time  of 
ingestion  a  large  number  of  viable  organisms. 

Bacillus  acidophilus  milk  is  prepared  by  the  inoculation  of 
sterilized  milk  with  a  "starter"  made  by  growing  B.  acidophilus 
at  35  to  2)7  C.  for  from  24  to  48  hours  in  sterilized  milk. 
( Jn  the  comr)letion  of  proper  "ripenhiGT."  which  should  occur 
within  from  24  to  48  hours  at  35  to  Z^  C,  a  product  is  obtained 
which  is  slightly  sour  to  the  taste  and  has  a  characteristic 
odor  resembling  that  of  ordinary  buttermilk.  There  is  a  slight 
separation  of  whey,  but  on  thorough  mixing  the  product  has  a 
uniform  creamy  consistency.  The  most  favorable  practical 
storage  temperature  for  the  usual  tvpe  of  this  product  is  12 
to  16  C. 

Bacillus  acidophilus  milk,  broth  cultures  and  concentrates 
will  be  considered  acceptable  provided  the  number  of  viable 
organisms  contained  in  a  stated  quantity  at  the  time  of  manu- 
facture is  declared  on  the  label,  provided  that  the  label  bears 
an  expiration  date  and  provided  that  for  both  cultures  and 
for  concentrates  the  advertising  emphasizes  the  need  of  coin- 
cident administration  of  carbohydrates  (lactose  or  dextrin). 
The  time  of  manufacture  is  defined  as  the  date  when  the  pro- 
ducer completes  the  preparation  of  the  product  for  sale.  At 
this  date  the  preparation  should  contain  not  less  than  200  million 
viable  B.  acidophilus  per  cubic  centimeter  of  milk  or  broth  or 
per  gram  of  concentrate.  The  expiration  date  is  defined  as 
the  Gate  after  the  time  of  manufacture  on  which  the  prepara- 
tion will  contain  not  less  than  100  million  viable  B.  acidophilus 
per  cubic  centimeter  of  milk  or  broth  or  per  gram  of  concen- 
trate. This  period  will  vary  under  different  conditions  of 
acidity  of  the  preparation  or  different  storage  temperatures  and 
as  a  result  of  other  factors.  For  properly  made  and  stored 
preparations   of   B.   acidophilus   milk,   the   expiration   date   will 


LACTIC    ACID-PRODUCING    PREPARATIONS     277 

usually  be  one  week,  and  probably  less  than  two  weeks,  after 
the  date  of  manufacture. 

Liquid  cultures  and  aqueous  suspensions  of  the  lactic  acid- 
producing  organisms  have  been  used  as  local  appHcations  in 
attempts  to  check  infections  of  mucous  membranes,  and  to 
arrest  putrefaction  or  suppuration  in  wounds,  abscesses  and 
sinuses.  There  is  no  convincing  evidence  in  favor  of  such  use, 
and  the  Council  will  not  accept  preparations  recommended  for 
these  purposes. 

Bacillus  acidophilus  (also  called  Lactobacillus  acidophilus)  belongs  to 
the  aciduric  lactobacillus  group  which  is  widely  distributed  in  nature. 
This  group  of  bacteria  contains  many  varieties  of  related  organisms. 
Bacillus  acidophilus  and  Bacillus  bifidus  are  found  in  the  gastro-intestinal 
tract  of  man  and  animals.  Bacillus  bulgaricus  usually  occurs  in  the 
intestinal  contents  of  cattle.  It  is  frequently  present  in  dairy  products, 
contaminated  with  fecal  material  from  cows.  The  morphology  of  these 
bacteria  are  somewhat  variable.  They  are  usually  long  and  fairly  slender 
bacilli,  which  at  times  form  filaments.  Branched  forms,  common  _  in 
B.  bifidus  is  rarely  seen  in  the  other  members  of  this  group.  Typical 
forms  in  young  cultures  are  Gram-positive.  They  are  preferably  micro- 
aerophilic.      Some   strains    require   added   CO2  for   normal    growth. 

Growth  of  these  organisms  is  greatly  aided  by  the  presence  of  various 
carbohydrates  in  the  medium.  Milk  is  a  particularly  good  medium  for 
the  preservation  of  viability.  B.  acidophilus  ferments  dextrose  and 
lactose  regularly.  Most  strains  ferment  maltose,  sucrose  and  raffinose. 
Mannitol  is  rarely  fermented.  Approximately  one-half  of  the  strains 
ferment  salicin.  Of  the  total  acid  produced  in  the  fermentation  of 
lactose  12  to  20  per  cent   is  optically  inactive  lactic  acid. 

For  isolation  purposes  and  for  the  study  of  colonies,  whey  agar,  casein 
digest  agar  or  tomato  juice  agar  are  used.  The  cultures  of  B.  acidophilus 
producing  "rough"  colonies  are  regarded  as  being  most  suitable  for 
intestinal   implantation. 

CHEPLIN'S  B.  ACIDOPHILUS  MILK.— A  milk  cul- 
ture of  B.  acidophilus.  It  contains  not  less  than  250  millions 
viable  organisms  (B.  acidophilus)  per  cubic  centimeter  at  the 
time  of  sale. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  See  preceding  article,  Lactic  Acid- 
Producing  Organisms  and  Preparations. 

Dosage. — For  adults,  from  500  to  1,000  cc,  increased  or 
decreased  to  meet  individual  requirements.  When  employed  in 
infant  feeding,  it  may  be  diluted  with  water  which  has  been 
boiled  and  cooled,  or  with  solution  of  calcium  hydroxide  in  such 
proportions  as  the  case  may  demand  but  it  should  be  borne  in 
mind  that  this  product  does  not  possess  the  full  growth  pro- 
moting potency  of  whole  milk;  lactose  (sugar  of  milk)  should 
be  added  to  restore  the  normal  sugar  content.  Cheplin's  B. 
acidophilus  milk  is  marketed  in  bottles  containing  400  cc.  It 
must  be  kept  on  ice  and  should  be  consumed  within  the  period 
of  time  stamped  on  the  package  (three  weeks  from  date  of 
preparation). 

Manufactured  by  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
No  U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Fresh  skimmed  cow's  milk,  standardized  with  40  per  cent  cream 
so  that  its  final  fat  content  is  not  less  than  one-half  of  1  per  cent, 
is  sterilized  in  one  heating  at  120  C.  for   15   minutes.     After  cooling   to 


278     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

at  least  Zl  C.,  the  milk  is  inoculated  with  a  twenty-four-hour  culture 
of  pure  strains  of  B.  acidophilus  which  have  been  grown,  by  repeated 
transfers,  sufficiently  long  in  milk  to  develop  rapidly  and  bring  about 
proper  coagulation  of  the  casein.  Viable  milk  cultures  of  the  organ- 
isms are  employed  as  the  inoculum.  After  inoculation  the  milk  is  kept 
at  Z7  C.  for  from  20  to  24  hours  until  an  acidity  is  reached  such  that 
10  CO.  will  require  for  neutralization  10  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  using  phenolphthalein  as  indicator.  The  product  is 
then  agitated  until  completely  homogenous,  transferred  to  400  cc.  bottles, 
which  are  closed  with  seals  and  cooled  to  5  C.  The  strains  of  B.  acidoph- 
ilus used  are  isolated  by  Cheplin.  To  insure  maximum  therapeutic 
effects  and  colonization  within  the  human  alimentary  canal,  the  organism 
is  freshly  isolated  from  human  intestinal  contents  as  frequently  as  is 
found  necessary  through  actual  feeding  experiments. 

SHEFFIELD  B.  ACIDOPHILUS  MILK.— A  whole 
milk  cultured  with  Bacillus  acidophilus.  It  contains  not  less 
than  250  million  viable  organisms  per  cubic  centimeter  at  the 
time  of  sale. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  general  article,  Lactic  Acid-Producing 
Organisms  and  Preparations. 

Dosage. — For  adults  1,000  cc.  per  day,  increased  or  decreased 
to  meet  individual  requirements.  When  employed  in  infant 
feeding,  it  may  be  diluted  with  boiled  water.  Sheffield  B. 
acidophilus  milk  must  be  kept  in  a  cool  place  and  should  be  used 
prior  to  the  expiration  date  stamped  on  the  label. 

Manufactured  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse, 
N.  Y.  (Sheffield  Farms  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  N.  Y.,  distributor).  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Fresh  whole  cow's  milk  with  a  butter  fat  content  of  not  less  than  3 
per  cent  is  sterilized  at  100  C.  for  two  hours.  After  cooling  at  37  C, 
the  milk  is  inoculated  with  a  twenty  hour  seed  culture  of  pure  strains 
of  Bacillus  acidophilus.  After  inoculation  the  milk  is  kept  at  37  C.  for 
from  twenty  to  twenty-four  hours  until  an  acidity  is  reached  such  that 
10  cc.  _  will  require  for  neutralization  8  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  phenolphthalein  being  used  as  indicator.  The 
product  is  then  cooled,  agitated  until  homogeneous  and  transferred  to 
one-half  pint,  pint  and  quart  bottles.  The  strains  of  Bacillus  acidophilus 
used  are  isolated  by  Cheplin.  To  insure  a  high  degree  of  activity 
and  colonization  within  the  human  alimentary  tract,  the  organism  is 
freshly  isolated  from  human  intestinal  contents  as  frequently  as  is 
found   necessary   through    actual    feeding  experiments. 

SUPPLEE  B.  ACIDOPHILUS  MILK.— A  whole  milk 
cultured  with  Bacillus  acidophilus.  It  contains  not  less  than 
200  million  viable  B.  acidophilus  organisms  at  the  date  of  manu- 
facture and  not  less  than  100  million  at  the  expiration  date. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  general  article.  Lactic  Acid-Produc- 
ing Organisms  and  Preparations. 

Dosage. — For  adults  1,000  cc.  per  day,  increased  or  decreased 
to  meet  individual  requirements.  When  employed  in  infant 
feeding,  it  may  be  diluted  with  boiled  water.  Supplee  B.  acid- 
ophilus milk  must  be  kept  in  a  cool  place  and  should  be  used 
prior  to  the  expiration  date  stamped  on  the  label. 

Manufactured  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse, 
N.  Y.  (Supplee- Wills-Jones  Milk  Co.,  Philadelphia,  Pa.,  distributor). 
No  U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Fresh   whole   cow's   milk  with   a   butter   fat   content  of   not   less   than 

3  per  cent  is  sterilized  at  100  C.  for  two  hours.    After  cooling  to  37  C. 

the  milk  is  inoculated  with  a  twenty  hour  seed  culture  of  pure  strains 


LIQUID     PETROLATUM  279 

of  Bacillus  acidophilus.  After  inoculation  the  milk  is  kept  at  37  C.  for 
from  twenty  to  twenty-four  hours  until  an  acidity  is  reached  such  that 
10  cc.  will  require  for  neutralization  8  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  phenolphthalein  being  used  as  indicator.  The 
product  is  then  cooled,  agitated  until  homogeneous  and  transferred  to 
one-half  pint,  pint  and  quart  bottles.  The  strains  of  Bacillus  acidoph- 
ilus used  are  isolated  by  Cheplin.  To  insure  a  high  degree  of 
activity  and  colonization  within  the  human  alimentary  tract,  the 
organism  is  freshly  isolated  from  human  intestinal  contents  as  fre- 
quently  as   is   found   necessary    through   actual    feeding   experiments. 


LANOLIN.  —  A  name  applied  to  Hydrous  Wool  Fat- 
U.  S.  P.,  which  contains  not  less  than  25  per  cent  and  not  more 
than  30  per  cent  of  water.  For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Phar- 
macopeia under  Adeps  Lanae  Hydrosus. 


LENIGALLOL,  —  Pyrogallolis  Triacetas.  —  Triacetyl 
pyrogallol.  C6H3(CH3C02)3. — Pyrogallol  triacetate,  obtained  by 
replacing  the  hydroxyl  groups  of  pyrogallol  with  acetate  groups. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Lenigallol  as  such  is  said  to  be  nonpoison- 
ous  and  nonirritating,  but  it  produces  a  mild  and  painless  cor- 
rosive effect  by  the  gradual  liberation  of  pyrogallol.  (See  note 
under  Creosote  and  Guaiacol  Compounds.) 

It  is  introduced  as  a  substitute  for  pyrogallol  in  psoriasis, 
lupus,  acute  and  subacute  eczema  of  children  and  other  skin 
diseases. 

Dosage. — In  5  to  10  per  cent  ointment,  usually  with  zinc  oxide. 

Manufactured  by  Knoll  A.-G.,  Ludwigshafen  a.Rh.,  Germany  (Bilhuber- 
Knoll  Corporation,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Lenigallol-Zinc  Ointment.  It  contains  lenigallol  6  per  cent  in  a  base 
composed  of  zinc  oxide  ointment-U.   S.  P. 

Lenigallol  is  prepared  by  boiling  10  parts  of  pyrogallol,  1  part 
sodium  acetate  and  25  parts  of  acetic  anhydride  for  two  hours,  and 
washing  the   crystalline   product   on   a   filter   with  water. 

It  is  a  white,  crystalline  powder,  melting  at  165  C.  It  is  insoluble 
in   water,   but  soluble  with   decomposition   in   warm  aqueous   alkalis. 

Lenigallol  is  incompatible  with  alkalis,  strong  acids  and  oxidizing 
agents. 


LIQUID  PETROLATUM.— Liquid  Paraffin.— White 
Mineral  OiL — "A  mixture  of  liquid  hydrocarbons  obtained 
from  petrolatum."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Petrolatum 
Liquidum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  Useful  Drugs. 

Maltine  with  Mineral  Oil  and  Cascara  Sagrada:  An  emulsified  mixture 
of  liquid  petrolatum,  40  cc,  and  maltine,  60  cc,  containing  a  non-bitter 
extract  of  cascara  sagrada  representing  2.2  Gm.  of  cascara  sagrada  per 
100  cc.  Maltine  meets  the  requirements  given  for  this  product  under 
Maltine   with    Cod   Liver   Oil    (which   see   under   Vitamin   Preparations). 


280     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Prepared  by  The  Maltine  Co.,  Brooklyn.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark   44,566. 

Petrolagar:  Liquid  petrolatum  65  cc,  emulsified  witli  agar  in  a  men- 
struum containing  sugar,  flavoring,  sodium  benzoate  0.1  Gm.,  and  water 
to  make  100  cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Petrolagar  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent.    U.   S.  trademark  165,616. 

Petrolagar  (Unsweetened) :  Liquid  petrolatum  65  cc,  emulsified  with 
agar  in  a  menstruum  containing  sodium  benzoate  0.1  Gm.,  and  water  to 
make   100   cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Petrolagar  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent.      U.    S.  trademark    165,616. 

Petrolagar  with  Cascara  (Non-Bitter) :  _  Liquid  petrolatum  65  cc, 
emulsified  with  agar  in  a  menstruum  containing  non-bitter  fluid  extract 
of  cascara  sagrada  13.2  cc,  sugar,  flavoring,  sodium  benzoate  0.1  Gm., 
and  water  to  make  100  cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Petrolagar  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent.      U.    S.  trademark    165,616. 

Petrolagar  (with  Milk  of  Magnesia) :  Liquid  petrolatum,  65  cc,  mag- 
nesia  magma,  8  cc;  emulsified  with  agar  in  a  menstruum  containing 
sugar,    flavoring,    sodium    benzoate    0.1    Gm.,   and  water   to   make   100   cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Petrolagar  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademark   165,616. 

Petrolagar  (with  Phenolphthalcin) :  Liquid  petrolatum  65  cc,  emulsified 
with  agar  in  a  menstruum  containing  phenolphthalcin  0.32  Gm.,  sugar, 
flavoring,    sodium   benzoate    0.1    Gm.,    and    water    to    make    100    cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Petrolagar  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademark   165,616. 

Squibb' s  Mineral  Oil  with  Agar:  Liquid  petrolatum-Squibb,  heavy 
(California),  50  cc. ;  agar,  1.5  Gm. ;  sodium  benzoate  0.1  Gm.;  acacia, 
glycerin,   water   and   flavoring   sufficient  to  make   100   cc. 

Prepared  bv  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  U.  S.  patent  1,799,804 
(April  7,  1931;  expires  1948)  and  1,913,561  (June  13,  1933;  expires 
1950).     No  trademark. 

Squibb' s  Mineral  Oil  with  Agar  and  Phcnolphthalein:  Liquid  petro- 
latum-Squibb, heavy  (California),  50_cc.;  agar,  1.5  Gm.;  phenolphthalcin, 
3.1  Gm.  {\y2  grains  per  fluidounce)';  sodium  benzoate,  0.1  Gm.;  acacia, 
glycerin,   water  and   flavoring  sufficient   to   make    100   cc. 

Prepared  bv  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  U.  S.  patent  1,799,804 
(April  7,  1931:  expires  1948)  and  1,913,561  (June  13,  1933;  expires 
1950).      No  trademark. 

Liquid  Petrolatum-Merck. — A  brand  of  liquid  petrolatum- 
U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &   Co.,  Railway,   N.  J. 

Smith's  Mineral  Oil. — A  brand  of  liquid  petroleum-U.  S.  P. 

^Manufactured  by   Smith   Oil   &  Refining   Co.,   Rockford,  Illinois. 

Liquid  Petrolatum  Heavy  (California) -Squibb. — A  brand 
of  liquid  petrolatum-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.   Squibb  &  Sons,   New  York. 


MAGNESIUM     COMPOUNDS 

PLANT'S  MAGNESIA  WAFERS.— Wafers,  each  con- 
taining magnesium  hydroxide,  Mg(0H)2,  0.3  Gm.  (4.64  grains) 
compressed  with  the  addition  of  sucrose  and  starch  and  essential 
oils  as  flavors. 


MAGNESIUM     COMPOUNDS  281 

Actions  and  Uses. — Plant's  magnesia  wafers  are  used  as  an 
alkaline  laxative  and  antacid. 

Dosage. — From  two  to  four  wafers,  followed  by  a  glassful  of 
water.  The  magnesium  content  of  each  wafer  is  approximately 
equivalent  to  that  of  4  cc.  of  magnesia  magma-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Arner  Company,  Buffalo  (The  Plant  Products 
Company,  Cleveland,  Ohio,  distributor).  U.  S.  Patent  1,694,341  (Dec.  4, 
1928;  expires   1945).     U.    S.  trademark   239,341. 

TRIBASIC  MAGNESIUM  PHOSPHATE.  —  Mag- 
nesii  Phosphas  Tribasicus. — Tertiary  ^Magnesium  Phos- 
phate, AIg3(P04)2.7H20.  Tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  con- 
tains approximately  70  per  cent  AlgaCPOi)^. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  has  been 
proposed  for  use  as  an  antacid.  It  has  the  advantage  over 
alkaline  hydroxides  such  as  magnesium  hydroxide  and  alkali 
carbonates  such  as  sodium  bicarbonate  in  that,  being  insoluble, 
it  neutralizes  the  excess  of  acid  in  the  stomach,  but  does  not 
produce  systemic  alkalization.  It  has  been  claimed  that  tribasic 
magnesium  phosphate  has  a  laxative  action. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  5  Gm.  (15  to  75  grains). 

Tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  occurs  as  a  white,  odorless  and  taste- 
less powder.  It  is  almost  insoluble  in  water,  but  it  is  readily  soluble 
in  diluted  mineral  acids.  Water  agitated  with  tribasic  magnesium  phos- 
phate is  neutral  or  acquires  a  slightly  alkaline  reaction  to  litmus  paper. 

Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  in  a  slight 
excess  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  add  ammonium  molybdate  solution: 
yellow  precipitate  forms  which  is  soluble  in  am.monia  water.  Mix 
0.2  Gm.  of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  with  about  5  cc.  of  water, 
then  add  20  cc.  of  neutral  solution  of  silver  nitrate  (1  in  20)  and 
agitate  the  mixture  for  about  two  minutes,  keeping  protected  from 
light:  the  liquid  is  neutral  to  litmus  paper  (distinction  from  dibasic 
phosphate),  and  the  precipitate  is  of  a  pure  yellow  color,  free  from 
brown  or  gray  (uncombined  magnesium  oxide).  A  solution  of  0.2  Gm. 
of  the  salt  in  10  cc.  of  water  and  just  sufficient  hydrochloric  acid  is 
not  darkened  by  the  addition  of  an  equal  volume  of  hydrogen  sulfide 
water  (heavy  metals).  Mix  0.5  Gm.  of  the  salt  with  3  cc.  of  water 
and  add  3  cc.  of  diluted  hydrothloric  acid:  not  more  than  a  few  gas 
bubbles  should  be  evolved  (carbonate).  Add  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  to  0.5  Gm.  of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  solution  and  heat: 
the  odor  of  ammonia  is  not  evolved  (magnesium  ammonium  phosphate). 
To  a  solution  of  0.5  Gm.  of  the  salt  in  10  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid,  filtered  if  necessary,  add  a  few  drops  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid: 
no  turbidity  is  produced  in  ten  minutes  (barium).  Dissolve  0.2  Gm. 
of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  in  5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid,  add  a 
few  cubic  centimeters  of  sulfuric  acid  and  heat  until  fumes  of 
sulfur  trioxide  are  evolved;  add  10  cc.  of  sulfurous  acid  solution, 
and  evaporate  until  the  solution  is  free  from  sulfur  dioxide;  dilute 
the  evaporated  solution  to  5  cc. :  this  meets  the  U.  S.  P.  X  limits  for 
arsenic.  Add  30  cc.  of  water  to  1  Gm.  of  the  salt;  follow  with  5  cc. 
of  hydrochloric  acid,  warm  if  necessary  until  the  salt  is  dissolved,  cool, 
add  ammonia  water  in  small  proportions  until  a  permanent  precipitate  is 
just  produced  and  then  add  5  cc.  acetic  acid:  not  more  than  a  slight 
quantity  remains  undissolved  (aluminum,  iron,  etc.).  Filter  the  solu- 
tion, if  not  clear  add  5  cc.  ammonium  oxalate:  not  more  than  a  slight 
turbidity  is  produced  (calcium).  Dilute  1  cc.  of  the  solution  to  200  cc. 
and  add  ammonia  water  until  alkaline  to  litmus  paper:  a  white  crystal- 
line precipitate  gradually  appears.     When  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate 


282     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

is  assayed  for  chloride  and  sulfate  according  to  the  method  described 
in  the  U.  S.  P.  X,  page  462,  their  sum  should  not  exceed  0.5  per  cent. 
Digest  2  Gm.  of  the  salt  with  100  cc.  of  water  for  one-half  hour  on 
a  steam  bath,  cool,  add  sufficient  water  to  restore  the  original  volume, 
mix  and  filter;  evaporate  50  cc.  of  the  filtrate  to  dryness  and  ignite 
gently:  the  weight  of  the  residue  does  not  exceed  0.015  Gm.  (soluble 
salts).  Agitate  1  Gm.  of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  with  20  cc. 
of  water  for  five  minutes,  filter,  and  add  to  the  filtrate  2  drops  phenol- 
phthalein  solution:  the  pink  color,  if  any,  is  completely  discharged  by 
one   drop    of   tenth-normal    acid    {uncomhined    magnesium   oxide). 

Determine  the  phosphate  content  of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate  by 
the  method  given  under  tribasic  calcium  phosphate.  The  amount  of 
phosphate   (PO4— )    should  not  be  less  than   50  per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  tribasic  magnesium  phosphate,  accurately 
weighed  in  25  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  add  ammonia  water 
in  small  portions  until  a  permanent  precipitate  is  just  produced  and 
redissolve  the  precipitate  by  the  addition  of  acetic  acid;  if  the  solution 
is  not  clear,  filter  and  wash;  add  to  the  solution  10  cc.  of  sodium  phos- 
phate T.  S.,  then  render  strongly  alkaline  by  the  addition  of  stronger 
ammonia  water;  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  twenty-four  hours;  filter 
on  a  tared  Gooch  crucible  and  wash  the  precipitate  with  diluted 
ammonia  water  (1  volume  of  ammonia  water  diluted  with  19  volumes 
of  water)  until  the  washings  cease  to  give  a  reaction  for  chloride, 
ignite  and  weigh:  the  percentage  of  magnesium  found  multiplied  by 
2.605  (factor  Mg  to  P04=  in  Mg3(P04)2)  should  correspond  to  the 
percentage  of  phosphate    (P04=)    found  plus  or  minus   1.5   per  cent. 

On  ignition  it  loses    from  25   per  cent  to  30  per  cent  of   its  weight. 

Magnesium     Phosphate  Tribasic-Merck. — A     brand     of 
tribasic  magnesium  phosphate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,   N.  J.     No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 


MENTHOL. — "An  alcohol  obtained  from  oil  of  peppermint 
or  other  mint  oils  or  prepared  synthetically."     U.  S.  P. 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Menthol. 

Pemco  Menthol  Eucalyptus  Compound  Nasal  Spray:  Menthol,  ^  per 
cent;  oil  of  eucalyptus,  8  per  cent;  creosote,  1:1,400;  epinephrine  hydro- 
chloride, 1:100,000;  olive  oil,  ^  per  cent;  oil  of  Cassia,  J/2  per  cent; 
liquid   petrolatum,   90 J4    per   cent. 

Prepared  by   the    Prophylacto    Manufacturing    Co.,    Chicago. 


MERCURY    AND    MERCURY    COMPOUNDS 

Mercury  has  been  employed  in  the  treatment  of  disease  since 
time  immemorable.  It  was  employed  very  early  in  the  treat- 
ment of  skin  diseases,  metallic  mercury  being  used  incorporated 
in  various  ointments  with  elaborate  bases.  Naturally,  when 
syphilis  was  called  to  the  attention  of  the  early  practitioners, 
it  was  to  be  expected  that  they  would  employ  some  of  these 
mercurial  ointments  for  treating  the  disease.  Thus  mercury 
inunctions  were  the  first  form  of  mercury  employed  in  treating 
syphilis.  Later,  MathioH  used  it  internally  in  the  form  of  red 
mercuric  oxide.  Still  others  tried  pills  of  metallic  mercury 
internally,  and  mercury  salts  in  solutions  were  also  extensively 
used,   for   example,   van   Swieten's   sublimate   solution.     In   the 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  283 

early  part  of  the  nineteenth  century  the  yellow  mercurous  iodide 
tablet  was  suggested  and  used  by  Ricord  and  later  by  his  cele- 
brated pupil,  Fournier.  Jonathan  Hutchinson  introduced  mer- 
cury with  chalk  in  the  latter  half  of  the  last  century.  This  also 
had  a  great  vogue  over  a  period  of  time.  Mercury  fumigations 
were  employed  quite  extensively  in  the  sixteenth  to  eighteenth 
centuries,  but  were  discarded  because  of  their  danger.  The 
intramuscular  and  intravenous  injections  of  mercury  salts  have 
been  used  only  in  the  past  fifty  or  sixty  years.  One  now 
finds  the  oral  method  of  administration  to  be  rarely  employed. 
It  is  often  the  cause  of  troublesome  gastro-intestinal  symptoms, 
the  inunction  method  obviates  the  digestive  disturbances.  If 
this  method  is  to  be  employed,  it  is  necessary  for  the  physician 
to  instruct  the  patient  to  rub  in  the  ointment  vigorously  for 
thirty  minutes  by  the  clock.  Only  the  mercury  that  penetrates 
the  hair  follicles  is  absorbed.  Simply  placing  the  ointment 
on  the  outside  of  the  skin  is  of  little  value.  After  rubbing 
it  in  for  thirty  minutes,  it  probably  is  permissible  to  remove 
the  excess  that  is  left  on  the  skin  by  the  use  of  soap  and  water, 
or  even  a  small  amount  of  benzin  with  a  cloth.  In  using 
mercury  inunctions,  different  sites  should,  if  possible,  be 
employed  each  night  for  at  least  six  nights.  As  a  rule,  hairy 
persons  do  not  stand  inunctions  well ;  there  is  a  tendency  to 
the  development  of  folliculitis. 

In  more  recent  years  the  attempt  to  improve  mercurial 
therapy  has  been  mainly  along  two  lines :  the  perfection  of 
intramuscular  usage  and  the  introduction  of  the  organic 
compounds. 

The  intramuscular  injections  are  of  two  types,  either  of  the 
soluble  or  of  the  insoluble  salts.  As  a  rule  the  soluble  salts  are 
somewhat  more  painful  and  because  of  their  rapid  absorption 
require  an  injection  daily,  or  at  least  every  other  day.  They 
are  of  great  value  in  getting  the  patient  under  rapid  mercurial- 
ization.  For  this  same  purpose  one  may  also  employ  intra- 
venous injections,  though  they  are  not  used  much  in  this 
country.  Moreover,  these  preparations  when  given  intra- 
venously must  be  given  daily  if  they  are  to  do  any  good,  since 
mercury  is  so  rapidly  immobilized,  and  as  a  rule  daily  intra- 
venous injections  are  scarcely  practical.  The  most  popular  of 
the  soluble  salts  are  probably  mercury  bichloride,  red  mercuric 
iodide  and  mercuric  succinimide.  Mercuric  cyanide  and  mer- 
curic oxycyanide  are  used  considerably  in  France  for  intravenous 
administration. 

The  claim  is  made  for  the  insoluble  salts  of  mercury  that 
they  do  not  require  administration  so  frequently  and  that  they 
are  less  painful.  True,  there  is  danger  of  a  certain  amount  of 
cumulative  absorption  so  that  it  is  necessary  for  the  physician 
to  watch  the  patient  very  closely  when  the  insoluble  salts  are 
being  employed.  The  difference  between  the  mercurous  and 
mercuric  compounds  is  primarily  one  of  solubility  and  absorp- 
tion. After  the  mercurous  compounds  are  absorbed,  a  process 
that  is  quite  possibly  preceded  by  their  oxidation  to  mercuric 


284     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

compounds,  no  difference  has  been  demonstrated.  Of  the  insol- 
uble, or  perhaps  better,  semisoluble,  salts,  mercuric  salicylate 
is  probably  the  best  and  should  be  comparatively  safe  if  the 
patient  is  observed  carefully,  the  injections  required  being  given 
only  once  a  week. 

In  using  mercury  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis  the  physician 
should  watch  the  patient  carefully  for  symptoms  of  intoxica- 
tion; for  example,  stomatitis,  gastro-intestinal  symptoms,  or 
symptoms  of  irritation  of  the  kidneys. 

Several  organic  compounds  of  mercury  have  also  been  intro- 
duced. Originally  these  were  suggested  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis.  They  probably,  however,  have  a  very  limited  anti- 
syphilitic  efficiency.  Several  of  these  organic  compounds  are 
being  used  as  diuretics  with  notable  success,  for  example, 
merbaphen  and  mersalyl. 

Compounds  of  mercury  are  also  used  for  the  preparation  of 
antiseptic  and  germicidal  solutions.  In  recent  years  solutions  of 
compounds  of  mercury  with  dyes  or  other  organic  radicals  have 
been  used  extensively  in  place  of  mercuric  chloride,  mercuric 
cyanide  and  mercuric  iodide  for  disinfection  of  the  skin,  for  the 
treatment  of  infected  wounds  and  for  the  treatment  of  systemic 
bacterial  infections.  In  general  these  organic  compounds  of 
mercury  are  claimed  to  be  less  toxic  and  less  irritating  than  the 
older  chlorides,  iodides  and  cyanides  of  mercury.  They  possess 
definite  capacity  to  disinfect  superficial  layers  of  tissue.  Claims 
for  their  ability  to  penetrate  deeply  into  living  tissue  and  to 
act  as  efficient  chemotherapeutic  agents  after  injection  into  the 
blood  stream  have  not  been  established. 

MERCURY.— Quicksilver.— "Contains  not  less  than  99.5 
per  cent  of  Hg."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Hydrar- 
gyrum. 

Mercuric  Compounds 

MERCURIC    BENZOATE.  — Hydrargyri    Benzoas.— 

Hydrargyrum  Benzoicum. — Hg(C6H5COO)2+H20. — The  mer- 
curic salt  of  benzoic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  mercuric  chloride. 

Dosage. — Mercuric  benzoate  is  used  for  intramuscular  injec- 
tions in  syphilis  and  locally  in  the  treatment  of  gonorrhea. 
For  intramuscular  injection,  mercuric  benzoate  is  given  in  a 
1  per  cent  solution  by  dissolving  0.3  Gm.  of  mercuric  ben- 
zoate in  30  cc.  of  water,  containing  1.5  Gm.  of  ammonium 
benzoate  or  given  in  2  per  cent  solution  with  2.5  per  cent  of 
sodium  chloride,  the  average  dose  being  about  12  or  24  minims, 
respectively  (0.015  Gm.,  ^  grain,  or  0.03  Gm.,  ^  grain),  every 
second  day.  For  urethral  irrigation  the  solution  may  be  1  in 
2,000  or  1  in  1,000  with  an  equal  quantity  of  sodium  chloride. 

Mercuric  benzoate  is  a  white,  crystalline  powder;  slightly  soluble  in 
water,  yielding  a  weakly  acid  solution ;  more  soluble  in  an  aqueous 
sodium  chloride  solution.     It  is  insoluble  in  alcohol  or  ether.     At  20  C, 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  285 

a  10  per  cent  solution  of  sodium  benzoate  dissolves  1  per  cent  of  its 
weight  of  mercuric  benzoate.  With  alcohol  mercuric  benzoate  is  decom- 
posed into  a  basic  salt  having  a  yellow   color. 

A  solution  of  1  Gm.  of  mercuric  benzoate  and  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium 
chloride  in  20  cc.  of  water  yields  a  black  precipitate  with  hydrogen 
sulfide,  and  with  ferric  chloride  solution,  it  yields  a  fawn-colored 
precipitate   of   ferric   benzoate. 

Shake  1  Gm.  of  mercuric  benzoate  with  20  cc.  of  water  and  filter: 
no  turbidity  is  produced  when  silver  nitrate  solution  is  added  to  10  cc. 
of  the  filtrate  acidified  with  a  few  drops  of  nitric  acid  (chloride).  Two 
cc.  of  a  similar  solution,  when  mixed  with  ferrous  sulfate  solution  to 
which  is  added  sulfuric  acid  so  as  to  form  a  layer  beneath,  should 
produce  no  brown  coloration  at  the  zone  of  contact  of  the  two  solutions 
initrates). 

Incinerate  aboiit  0.5  Gm.  of  the  salt  in  a  porcelain  crucible:  not 
more   than   0.1    per   cent   of    residue    remains. 

MERCURIC     CYANIDE.  —  Hydrargyri     Cyanidum.— 

Hydrargyrum  Cyanatum. — Hg(CN)-. — The  mercuric  salt  of 
hydrocyanic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mercuric  cyanide  has  been  reported  to 
be  as  actively  antiseptic  as  mercuric  chloride  and  to  be  less 
irritating ;  but  this  has  been  questioned.  It  is  used  locally  and 
internally  as  is  mercuric  chloride.  Blum  and  Schwab  (Presse 
Med.  30:1081  [Dec.  16]  1922)  highly  recommended  this  drug 
as  a  diuretic  in  cardiac  (but  not  in  renal)  disease.  They  give 
it  in  doses  of  0.04  to  0.05  Gm.  by  intravenous  or  intramuscular 
injection.  They  state,  however,  that  mercury  should  be  used  as 
a  diuretic  only  as  a  last  resort  when  other  drugs  have  failed. 

Do.yo^^.— Internally,  from  0.004  to  0.008  Gm.  (i/ie  to  ^ 
grain)  ;  locally,  solutions  of  from  1  in  4,000  to  1  in  2,000  may 
be  used  for  applications  to  the  eye  or  mucous  membranes ;  from 
25  to  35  minims  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  may  be  used  hypoder- 
mically  without  causing  local  irritation.  Death  has  occurred 
from  the  use  of  a  vaginal  injection  containing  0.9  Gm.  (14 
grains)  of  mercuric  cyanide. 

In  diphtheria  and  croup,  it  is  used  in  0.01  per  cent  solution  as 
a  gargle  or  internally  in  doses  of  from  0.0005  Gm.  to  0.001  Gm. 
In  fibrinous  rhinitis  it  is  used  on  a  tampon  in  0.04  per  cent 
solution. 

Mercuric  cyanide  occurs  in  colorless  or  white,  prismatic  crystals, 
or  white  powder,  odorless  and  having  a  bitter,  metallic  taste  (the  salt 
is  exceedingly  poisonous).  It  is  darkened  on  exposure  to  light;  is 
soluble  at  15  C.  in  12.8  parts  of  water  and  in  15  parts  of  alcohol,  in  3 
parts  of  boiling  water  and  in  6  parts  of  boiling  alcohol,  and  is  very 
sparingly   soluble   in   ether. 

When  slowly  heated  in  a  glass  tube,  the  salt  decrepitates  and  decom- 
poses into  metallic  mercury  and  inflammable  cyanogen  gas,  which  burns 
with  a  purple  flame.  On  further  heating,  the  blackish  residue  con- 
sisting of  paracyanogen  with  globules  of  metallic  mercury,  is  wholly 
dissipated.  If  1  part  of  the  salt  is  gently  heated  with  1  part  of  iodine 
in  a  dry  test-tube  it  will  produce  at  first  a  yellow  sublimate,  which 
afterward  becomes  red,  and  above  this  a  sublimate  of  colorless,  needle- 
shaped  crystals.  On  adding  hydrochloric  acid  to  the  aqueous  solution 
of  the  salt,  the  odor  of  hydrocyanic  acid  is  evolved.  A  5  per  cent 
aqueous    solution    of    the    salt    should    be    neutral    to    litmus    paper,    and 


286     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

should  not  yield,  on  tbe  gradual  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  potassium 
iodide  solution,  either  a  red  or  a  reddish  precipitate,  soluble  in  an 
excess  of  the  precipitant,  nor  should  it  yield  a  white  precipitate  with 
silver  nitrate  solution  (mercuric  chloride).  If  mercuric  cyanide  is 
dissolved  in  an  aqueous  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  the  addition  of 
phenolphthalein  to  this  solution  should  produce  no  red  coloration 
(mercuric  oxide).  Ammonia  should  not  color  an  aqueous  solution  blue 
(mercuric  oxide).  Ammonia  water  dissolves  mercuric  cyanide  without 
producing  a  white  precipitate   (oxy cyanide). 

Mercuric  Cyanide-Mallinckrodt.  —  A  brand  of  mercuric 
cyanide-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis.  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Mercury  Cyanide-Merck. — A  brand  of  mercuric  cyanide- 
N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

MERCURIC    OXYCYANIDE.    —    Hydrargyri    Oxy- 

cyanidum.  —  Hydrargyrum  Oxycyanatum.  —  Hg(CN)2HgO. — 
A  basic-mercuric  salt  of  hydrocyanic  acid,  containing  from  51.7 
to  56.0  per  cent  of  mercuric  cyanide  [Hg(CN)2]  and  from  44.3 
to  48.0  per  cent  of  mercuric  oxide  (HgO). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mercuric  oxycyanide  has  been  proposed 
as  a  substitute  for  mercuric  chloride.  Its  antiseptic  power  is 
claimed  to  be  greater  and  it  is  asserted  to  be  less  irritating  than 
mercuric  chloride  because  it  does  not  act  on  albumin  to  the  same 
extent.  It  has  advantage  over  mercuric  chloride  in  that  it 
does  not  corrode  steel  instruments. 

Representative  syphilographers  differ  as  to  the  use  of  mer- 
curic oxycyanide  intravenously.  Some  believe  that  its  use  should 
be  limited  to  hospitals ;  others,  that  it  has  no  advantage  over 
other  and  safer  methods  of  administering  mercury ;  while  others 
consider  it  safe  and  valuable;  but  all  are  in  accord  that  its  safe 
use  requires  experience.  It  is  used  quite  extensively  by  the 
French  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis,  generally  being  employed 
by  the  intravenous  route. 

Dosage. — Alercuric  oxycyanide  may  be  administered  in  the 
same  doses  as  mercuric  chloride.  It  may  be  applied  locally  in 
solutions  of  1  in  5,000  or  somewhat  stronger. 

Sterile  Ampules  of  Mercury  Oxycyanide,  0.008  Gm.:  Each  contains 
5  cc.  of  solution  representing  0.008  Gm.  (J^  grain)  of  mercuric  oxy- 
cyanide-N.   N.  R. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Sterile  Ampules  Mercury  Oxycyanide,  0.016  Gm.:  Each  contains  5  cc. 
of  solution  representing  0.016  Gm.  (^  grain)  of  mercuric  oxycyanide- 
N.   N.  R. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Sterile  Ampules  of  Mercury  Oxycyanide  0.01  Gm.:  Each  contains  5  cc. 
of  solution,  representing  0.01  Gm.  (J^  grain)  of  mercuric  oxycyanide- 
N.   N.  R. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  287 

Mercuric  oxycyanide  occurs  as  a  white,  or  nearly  white,  micro- 
crystalline  powder,  soluble  in  about  80  parts  of  water,  yielding  a  solu- 
tion alkaline  to  litmus.  Boiled  with  a  mixture  of  sodium  hydroxide, 
ferrous  sulfate  and  ferric  chloride  solutions,  cooled  and  then  treated 
with  hydrochloric  acid,  mercuric  oxycyanide  yields  a  blue  precipitate. 
A  saturated  solution  yields  a  white  precipitate  with  ammonium  chloride, 
soluble  in  an  excess  of  the  precipitant.  Tannic  acid  solution  produces 
at  first  a  deep  yellow  color,  then  gradually  a  tan  colored  precipitate. 
Hydrogen  sulfide,  and  ammonium  sulfide  both  produce  a  black  pre- 
cipitate in  an  aqueous  solution  of  mercuric  oxycyanide.  Potassium 
iodide  solution  when  added  to  a  solution  of  mercuric  oxycyanide  yields 
a  red  precipitate  soluble  in  excess  of  the  iodide.  An  aqueous  solution 
should  not  respond  to  tests  for  chloride,  nor  should  0.2  Gm.  leave  a 
weighable   residue   when   ignited. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  mercury  oxycyanide,  accurately  weighed, 
in  50  cc.  of  warm  water,  together  with  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  chloride, 
cool  the  solution,  add  methyl  orange  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal 
hydrochloric  acid  to  the  red-end  point.  Add  2  Gm.  of  potassium 
iodide,  dilute  with  water  to  about  ISO  cc.  and  titrate  again  with  the 
tenth-normal  acid  to  the  red-end  point:  in  the  first  titration,  each 
cubic  centimeter  of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution  is  equiva- 
lent to  0.01083  Gm.  of  HgO  and  in  the  second,  each  cubic  centimeter 
of  tenth-normal  hydrochloric  acid  solution  is  equivalent  to  0.012631  Gm. 
of  Hg(CN)2. 

MERCURIC  SALICYLATE.— "A  compound  of  mercury 
and  salicylic  acid  containing  not  less  than  54  per  cent  and  not 
more  than  59.5  per  cent  of  Hg."     U .  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Hydrargyri 
Salicylas. 

Afiipules  Mercury  Salicylate,  1  grain  (0.065  Gm.)  Suspended  in 
Oil,  1  cc:  Each  1  cc.  ampule  contains  mercury  salicylate,  1  grain 
(0.065  Gm.),  quinine  and  urea  hydrochloride,  0.05  Gm.,  anhydrous  wool 
fat  0.1  Gm.,  distilled  water  0.05  cc.  and  Wesson  oil  (maize  oil)  to 
make   1   cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Mercury  Salicylate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.065  Gm. 
(1  grain):  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  mercuric  salicylate  0.065  Gm.; 
apothesine,  0.01   Gm.;   in  olive  oil,    1   cc. 

Prepared   by    Parke,    Davis    &    Co.,    Detroit. 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Mercury  Salicylate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.13  Gm. 
(2  grains):  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  mercuric  salicylate,  0.13  Gm.; 
apothesine,  0.01   Gm.;   in  olive  oil,    1   cc. 

Prepared   by    Parke,    Davis    &   Co.,    Detroit. 

Sterile  Ampoules  Mercury  Salicylate  0.065  Gm.  (1  grain):  Each 
ampule  contains  mercuric  salicylate,  0.065  Gm.;  camphor,  10  per  cent; 
eugenol,  1  per  cent;  in  neutral  vegetable  oil,  1  cc.  Each  ampule  contains 
more   than    1    cc.    of   suspension. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Sterile  Ampules  of  Mercury  Salicylate-H.  IV.  &  D.,  1  grain:  One 
cc.  of  suspension  contains  0.06  Gm.  (1  grain)  of  mercuric  salicylate 
Each  ampule  contains  more  than  1  cc.  of  suspension.  Mercuric  salicylate 
is  suspended  in  a  mixture  of  vegetable  fats  which  are  solid  at  34.4  C,  but 
liquid  at  body  temperature.  For  use,  the  ampule  is  immersed  in  warm 
water  until  the  fat  is  liquefied,  agitated  and  opened,  and  a  measured 
quantity  of  the  contents  injected  through  a  20-gage  needle.  This  prepa- 
ration  should   not   be   injected   intravenously. 

Prepared  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent    or    trademark. 

Sterile  Ampules  of  Mercury  Salicylate-H.  IV.  &  D.,  lYz  grains:  One 
re.   of   suspension   contains   0.09   Gm.    (li^    grains)    of   mercuric   salicylate. 


288     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Each  ampule  contains  more  than  1  cc.  of  suspension.  Mercuric  salicylate 
is  suspended  in  a  mixture  of  vegetable  fats  which  are  solid  at  34.4  C.,  but 
liquid  at  bodj'  temperature.  For  use,  the  ampule  is  immersed  in  warm 
water  until  the  fat  is  liquefied,  agitated  and  opened,  and  a  measured 
quantity  of  the  contents  injected  through  a  20-gage  needle.  This  prepa- 
ration  should   not   be   injected   intravenously. 

Prepared  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent    or    trademark. 

Sterile  Ampiiles  of  Mercury  Salicylate-H.  IV.  &  D.,  2  grains:  One 
cc.  of  suspension  contains  0.12  Gm.  (2  grains)  of  mercuric  salicylate. 
Mercuric  salicylate  is  suspended  in  a  mixture  of  vegetable  fats  which  are 
solid  at  34.4  C.,  but  liquid  at  body  temperature.  For  use,  the  ampule  is 
immersed  in  warm  water  until  the  fat  is  liquefied,  agitated  and  opened, 
and  a  measured  quantity  of  the  contents  injected  through  a  20-gage 
needle.     This   preparation   should  not  be  injected   intravenously. 

Prepared  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent    or    trademark. 

MERCURIC  SUCCINIMIDE.— "Contains,  when  dried 
for  twenty-four  hours  over  sulfuric  acid,  not  less  than  49.5  per 
cent  and  not  more  than  51  per  cent  of  Hg,  corresponding  to 
not  less  than  98  per  cent  of  (CH.oCO). :  NHgN  :  (COCH,)^." 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Hydrargyri 
Succinimidum. 

Actio)is  and  Uses. — ^Mercuric  succinimide  has  the  action  of 
other  salts  of  mercury,  but  its  solutions  are  said  to  be  rela- 
tively nonirritating.  The  preparation  is  used  as  are  other  com- 
pounds of  mercury  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis. 

Dosage. — Mercuric  succinimide  is  used  mainly  by  hypoder- 
mic injection.  The  daily  hypodermic  dose  is  from  0.01  to 
0.02  Gm.  (Yq  to  Vs  grain)  given  in  the  form  of  a  2.5  per  cent 
solution  (from  0.5  to  1  cc,  or  8  to  16  minims  of  such  solu- 
tion). Alercuric  succinimide  may  be  given  by  the  mouth  in 
doses  of  from  0.01  to  0.015  Gm.   (%  to  Vi  grain). 

Sterile  Ampoules  Mercury  Succinimide  0.01  Gm.  (j4  grain):  Mercuric 
succinimide-U.    S.    P.,    0.01    Gm.,    in    water,    1    cc. 

Prepared   by    the   Abbott    Laboratories,    North    Chicago,    111. 

Ampules  Solution  Mercttry  Succinimide  %  grain  (0.01  Gm.)  1  cc: 
Mercuric  succinimide-U.  S.  P.  0.01  Gm.  benzyl  alcohol  0.01  cc,  and 
glycerin   0.013    Gm.,   in   sufficient   distilled   water   to   make   1   cc. 

Prepared  by  the  Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 
No  U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Mercury  Succinimide-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.01  Gm. 
(14,  grain):  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  mercuric  succinimide- 
U.   S.   P.,   0.01   Gm.;   apothesine,   0.005   Gm. ;   in  distilled  water,   1   cc. 

Prepared  by   Parke,   Davis   &   Co.,   Detroit. 

Ampuls  Mercury  Succinimide,   %   grain. 

Prepared  by   Sharp  &  Dohme,   Philadelphia  and   Baltimore. 

Hypodermic    Tablets  Mercuric   Succinimide   0.012    Gm.    (Ys    grain). 

Prepared   by   Sharp    &    Dohme,    Philadelphia    and   Baltimore. 

Mercury  Succinimide-Merck. — A  brand  of  mercuric  sue 
cinimide-U,  S.  P. 

Merck    &    Co.,    Inc.,    Rahway,    X.    J.,    distributor. 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  289 

MERCUROCHROME.  —  Mercurochrome  Soluble.  — 
NaOGC.CeH.C:  CeHsBr:  OC6HBr(ONa)(HgOH).3H20.— The 

I     ^ — o ^1 

clisodium  salt  of  2 :  7-dibromo-4-hydroxymercurifluorescem,  con- 
taining 24  to  26  per  cent  of  mercury. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mercurochrome  is  a  nonirritating  mod- 
erately active  antiseptic.  When  applied  to  the  skin,  mucous 
membranes  and  wounds  it  exerts  bacteriostatic  and  bactericidal 
action.  The  2  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  Mercurochrome  acts 
more  slowly  than  Tincture  of  lodine-U.  S.  P.,  but  has  more 
prolonged  bacteriostatic  effect.  The  aqueous-alcohol-acetone 
solution  called  Surgical  Solution  of  Alercurochrome  is  more 
rapid  in  its  action  than  the  aqueous  solution  and  may  be  used 
for  preoperative  skin  sterilization.  Mercurochrome  penetrates 
significantly  only  into  dying  or  dead  tissue. 

The  drug  is  tolerated  in  a  strength  of  1  per  cent  by  the  blad- 
der, renal  pelvis  and  urethra ;  a  2  per  cent  solution  applied  to 
the  anterior  urethra  causes  only  temporary  discomfort.  When 
tested  by  intravenous  injection  into  rabbits,  the  danger  point  is 
reached  with  a  dosage  of  25  mg.  per  Kg.,  and  5  mg.  causes  a 
decrease  in  phenolsulfonphthalein  excretion  and  an  albuminuria 
which  lasts  about  a  week.  Dogs  are  more  resistant.  No  sys- 
temic effects  have  been  observed  following  its  local  application 
in  the  human.  Mercurochrome  has  been  used  in  cystitis  and 
urethritis ;  also  in  affections  of  the  eye  and  affections  of  the  ear, 
such  as  otitis  media. 

The  drug  has  also  been  injected  intravenously  in  the  treat- 
ment of  septicemias  and  of  local  infections  (subcutaneous 
abscess  following  severe  injury,  retroperitoneal  abscess  fol- 
lowing bladder  instrumentation,  etc.).  The  drug  seems  to 
have  given  better  results  against  organisms  of  the  colon 
group;  although  it  has  seemed  to  give  good  results  in  some 
cases  of  staphylococcus  and  streptococcus  septicemia,  it  is 
often  times  without  effect.  The  intravenous  injection  is 
usually  but  not  invariably  followed  by  a  transient  high 
temperature  and  vomiting  and  sometimes  by  a  severe  diarrhea 
and  prostration.  Cases  of  mercurial  stomatitis  have  also  been 
observed  following  this  procedure,  and  now  and  then  the 
patient  goes  into  a  severe  collapse.  The  physician  should 
realize  that  intravenous  use  of  this  drug  may  result  in  such 
severe  symptoms  that  it  should  be  looked  upon  as  purely  an 
emergency  hospital  procedure.  The  effect  of  Mercurochrome 
injected  intravenously  may  be  due  in  part  to  its  action  upon 
bacteria  causing  the  infection  and  in  part  to  nonspecific  actions 
attributable  to  the  colloidal   properties   of  the  substance. 

Dosage. — In  the  treatment  of  infections  of  the  kidney  pelvis, 
the  ureters  are  catheterized  and  the  pelvis  gently  filled  with  a 
1  per  cent  solution ;  the  catheter  is  plugged  and  the  solution 
retained  for  five  minutes.  In  the  treatment  of  bladder  con- 
ditions. 25  to  30  cc.  of  the  1  per  cent  solution  is  introduced 
into    the    bladder    and    retained    for    one    hour    or    lonser,    the 


290     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

treatment  being  given  daily  or  on  alternate  days,  or  at  longer 
intervals  according  to  circumstances.  In  anterior  gonococcus 
urethritis,  the  anterior  urethra  is  filled  with  a  1  per  cent 
solution  and  the  solution  retained  for  five  minutes.  If  the 
posterior  urethra  be  involved,  the  solution  is  gently  retained 
for  an  hour  or  more.  In  rare  cases,  considerable  irritation  is 
produced,  particularly  in  those  with  residual  urine.  Later,  in 
the  treatment  of  acute  anterior  gonorrhea,  a  2  per  cent  solu- 
tion is  used  every  three  hours.  The  dose  by  intravenous  injec- 
tion has  usually  been  5  mg.  per  Kg,  of  body  weight ;  it  is 
preferably  administered  in  a  0.4  per  cent  solution,  freshly  pre- 
pared from  recently  distilled  water  and  filtered  before  using. 
Solutions  are  self-sterilizing  and  should  not  be  boiled.  They 
should  be  made  up  from  the  drug  itself,  as  the  tablets  are  not 
suitable  for  this  purpose, 

Mercurochrome  is  incompatible  with  acids,  with  the  salts 
of  most  alkaloids  and  with  most  local  anesthetics.  The  aqueous 
solution  stains  the  skin  red  but  the  discoloration  may  be  removed 
by  a  washing  in  a  solution  of  sodium  hypochlorite  (solution 
of  chlorinated  soda). 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore,  by  license 
of  E.  C,  White,  U.  S.  patent  1,535,003  (April  21,  1925;  expires  1942). 
U.  S.  trademark  197,189. 

Mercurochrome  2  Per  Cent  Aqueous  Solution. 
Sealed  Tubes  Mercurochrome,  0.5    Cm. 

Surgical   Solution   of  Mercurochrome. — Mercurochrome   2    per   cent   dis- 
solved in  a  vehicle  consisting  of  55  parts  of  95  per  cent  alcohol-U.  S.  P., 
10   parts  of  acetone-U.    S.   P.,  and   35   parts  of  water,  to  which  has  been 
added  sodium  carbonate  in  the  proportion  of  0.1   per  cent. 
Tablets  of  Mercurochrome:     Each  contains   4.6   grains. 

Mercurochrome  occtirs  as  iridescent,  green  scales  or  granules;  odor- 
less; permanent  in  the  air.  It  is  freely  soluble  in  water;  practically 
insoluble  in  alcohol;  insoluble  in  chloroform  or  ether.  On  incineration 
mercurochrome  yields  an  ash  containing  sodium  bromide  and  sodium 
carbonate. 

The  aqueous  solution  (1  in  10)  of  mercurochrome  is  of  a  deep  cherry- 
red  color;  on  dilution  with  water  it  becomes  fluorescent.  The  aqueous 
solution  is  stable  in  the  air,  does  not  precipitate  proteins  and  does  not 
respond  to  the  usual  tests  for  mercury  ions.  Add  a  few  drops  of 
hydrochloric  acid  to  about  10  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution  of  mercuro- 
chrome (1  in  100):  an  orange-red  precipitate  is  given  and,  if  the  mix- 
ture be  filtered,  the  filtrate  is  nearly  colorless,  or  only  slightly  yellow. 
Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  mercurochrome,  acurately  weighed,  to  constant 
weight  over  sulfuric  acid:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  10  per  cent. 
Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  mercurochrome,  accurately  weighed,  in  about 
50  cc.  of  water  at  50-60  C.,  filter  through  a  weighed  Gooch  crucible, 
wash  the  residue  thoroughly  until  the  washings  have  only  a  slight  color, 
dry  at  110  C.  and  weigh:  the  insoluble  matter  amounts  to  not  more 
than  0.2  per  cent  of  the  weight  taken.  Place  about  0.2  Gm.  of  finely 
powdered  mercurochrome,  dried  to  constant  weight  over  sulfuric  acid, 
accurately  weighed,  in  an  800  cc.  Kjeldahl  flask  and  slowly  add  10  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid,  in  such  a  way  as  to  wash  down  any  adherent  par- 
ticles. Mix  the  materials  carefully,  heat  to  a  temperature  of  from 
60  to  75  C.,  remove  the  flame  and  add,  little  by  little,  finely  powdered 
potassium  permanganate,  mixing  thoroughly  after  each  addition,  until 
the  presence  of  a  considerable  excess  of  brown  manganese  compounds 
is  noted.  The  appearance  of  a  slight  flame  after  the  addition  of  each 
portion  of  the  oxidizing  agent  is  immaterial.  Cool  the  mixture  to  room 
temperature,   add   100  cc.   of  water,  then   gradually  add  powdered   oxalic 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  291 

acid  with  shaking  until  the  solution  becomes  clear.     Filter  if  necessary, 

make  the  volume  to   about  200  cc.  with  water,  pass  in  hydrogen   sulfide. 

collect   the    precipitate   in   a   Gooch    crucible,    dry   at    100    C.   and   weigh: 

the    weight    of    mercuric    sulfide    corresponds    to    not    less    than    24    or 

more  than    26   per  cent  of  mercury. 

Mercurochrome  Suppository  Aces:  Suppositories  representing  a  2  per 
cent  solution  of  mercurochrome  (H.  W.  &  D.)  in  a  slightly  aromatized 
hydro-glycero-gelatin  base:  each  suppository  weighs  approximately  6.5  Gm. 
(100  grains)  and  contains  V\2  per  cent  of  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of 
phenol,   thymol,   eucalyptol   and   menthol. 

Prepared   by   Aces    Laboratory,    Inc.,    Peekskill,    N.   Y. 

Mercurochrome  Applicators:  Mercurochrome  (H.  W.  &  D.),  10  per 
cent  and  acacia  dried  on  one  end  of   3   inch   wooden   sticks. 

Prepared  by  the  Arzol  Chemical  Company.  Nyack,  N.  Y.  (J.  Sklar 
Manufacturing   Company,    Brooklyn,   N.   Y.,   distributor.) 

Saf-T-Top  Mercvroclirome  Solution,  2  per  cent,  2  cc:  An  aqueous  2 
per  cent  solution  of  mercurochrome  marketed  in  ampules  having  a  capillary 
opening,   containing   2   cc. 

Prepared   by   Robert   A.   Bernhard,   Rochester,   N.   Y. 

Saf-T-Top  Mercurochrome  Solution,  2  per  cent,  15  cc. :  An  aqueous 
2  per  cent  solution  of  mercurochiome  marketed  in  ampules  with  a  capillary 
opening,   containing   15   cc. 

Prepared  by    Robert   A.   Bernhard,   Rochester,   N.   Y. 

Saf-T-Top  Mercurochrome  2  per  cent  in  25  per  cent  Glycerine:  A 
solution  of  mercurochrome,  H.  W.  &  D.,  2  per  cent  in  a  solution  of 
25  per  cent  glycerin,  marketed  in  ampules  with  a  capillary  opening,  con- 
taining  2   and    15    cc. 

Prepared  by    Robert   A.   Bernhard,   Rochester,   N.   Y. 

Ampules  Mercurochrome-H.  W .  &  D.,  1%,  10  cc:  An  aqueous  1  per 
cent  solution  of  mercurochrome,  stabilized  with  0.18  per  cent  of  ammo- 
nium  hydroxide;    in    10    cc.   ampules. 

Prepared  by  G.  D.   Searle   &   Co.,  Inc.,  Chicago,  111. 

Ampules  Mercurochrome-H.  W .  &  D.,  1%,20  cc. :  An  aqueous  1  per 
cent  solution  of  mercurochrome,  stabilized  with  0.18  per  cent  of  ammo- 
nium hydroxide;   in   20   cc.   ampules. 

Prepared  by   G.  D.   Searle   &  Co.,   Inc.,  Chicago,  111. 

MERCUROL.  —  Hydrargyri  Nucleinas.  —  Mercury 
Nucleinate. — An  organic  compound  of  mercury  with  nucleinic 
acid  from  yeast,  containing  20  per  cent  of  metallic  mercury. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mercurol  does  not  coagulate  albumin ; 
it  has  marked  bactericidal  power  and  possesses  the  pharma- 
cologic action  of  soluble  mercury  compounds. 

It  is  said  to  be  useful  as  a  local  antiseptic  application  and 
as  an  antisyphilitic  remedy. 

Dosage. — From  0.03  to  0.12  Gm.  (^  to  2  grains).  It  is 
supplied  only  in  the  form  of  mercurol  and  iodalbin  tablets. 
(See  under  Iodalbin.) 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  U.  S.  patent  637,355 
(Nov,   21,    1899;  expired). 

Mercurol  is  prepared  by  adding  a  solution  of  mercuric  chloride  to 
an  alkaline  solution  of  nuclein,  containing  an  excess  of  alkali,  pre- 
cipitating the  resulting  nucleinate  of  mercury  by  the  addition  of  alcohol 
and  a  concentrated  solution  of  a  neutral  salt  (sodium  chloride),  separat- 
ing the   precipitate,   washing  and   drying  it. 

It  is  a  brownish-white  powder,  soluble  in  water,  especially  in  warm 
water,  insoluble  in  alcohol.  Its  watery  solution  has  a  distinct  metallic 
taste  and  a  weak  alkaline  reaction,  and  is  not  precipitated  by  alkalis  or 
by  albuminous  liquids. 

The  mercury  in  this  preparation  resists  the  action  of  hydrogen  sul- 
fide to  a  marked  degree. 


292     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

MEROXYL. — A  mixture  containing  approximately  50  per 
cent  of  the  sodium  salt  of  2,4-dihydroxy-3,5-dihydrox-mercuri- 
benzophenone-2'-sulfonic  acid, 

HgOH 
O  / 

O-ii-OoH 

I  I  \ 

SOsNa         OH    HgOH 

with  foreign  matter  consisting  of  ammonium  2,4-dihydroxy- 
benzophenone-2-sulfonate,  sodium  acetate  and  water. 

Actions  and  Uses. — A  local  antiseptic  and  germicide  recom- 
mended for  superficial  infections  by  Young,  White,  Hill  and 
Davis  (Surgery,  Gynecology  and  Obstetrics  36:508  [April] 
1923).  It  is  used  for  wet  dressings  of  wounds,  and  also  for 
irrigation  of  wounds  and  of  infected  bladders.  When  injected 
intravenously  in  animals,  the  toxicity  was  found  to  be  high; 
by  oral  administration,  however,  the  drug  showed  a  much 
lower  degree  of  toxicity. 

Dosage. — For  wet  dressings  of  wounds  and  irrigation  of 
infected  wounds,  a  0.1  per  cent  solution  is  used.  For  prophy- 
lactic treatment  of  urinary  infection,  postoperative  cystitis, 
acute  gonorrhea,  abscess  and  carbuncle,  a  0.5  per  cent  solu- 
tion is  employed.  Solutions  of  2.5  per  cent  or  greater  strength 
gelatinize  on  standing. 

Manufactured  by  Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Baltimore.  No  U.  S. 
patent   or   trademark. 

Meroxyl  Tablcts-H.  IV.  &  D.:  Each  tablet  contains  meroxyl,  0.15  Gni. 
(2.3   grains). 

Meroxyl  occurs  as  a  flesh  colored  or  pink  powder  easily  soluble  in 
hot  water  up  to  10  per  cent.  Solutions  of  2.5  per  cent  or  stronger 
gel  or  form  a  deposit  on  cooling.  The  color  of  the  solution  varies  with 
concentration;  a  0.5  per  cent  solution  has  a  brownish-pink  color  with 
greenish  fluorescence,  the  color  becoming  browner  in  more  concentrated 
solutions.      The   solution   produces   no   stain  on   skin   or   fabrics. 

Add  1  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to  1  cc.  of  meroxyl  solu- 
tion, 1  per  cent:  no  precipitate  forms.  Add  1  cc.  of  potassium  iodide 
solution  to  10  cc.  of  meroxyl  solution,  1  per  cent:  no  precipitate 
forms.  (If  the  solution  is  made  neutral  or  slightly  acid  with  acetic 
acid,  a  precipitate  is  formed.)  Add  1  cc.  of  ammonium  sulfide  solu- 
tion to  5  cc.  of  meroxyl  solution,  1  per  cent:  a  black  precipitate  of 
mercuric  sulfide  occurs.  Add  3  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  to 
3  cc.  of  meroxyl  solution,  10  per  cent;  the  odor  of  ammonia  develops. 
Add  a  few  drops  of  diazotized  paranitraniline  to  2  cc.  of  a  slightly 
alkaline  solution  of  meroxyl,  0.5  per  cent:  an  intense  bordeaux  color 
appears.  Add  a  few  drops  of  a  sodium  hypochlorite  solution  to  2  cc. 
of  meroxyl  solution,  0.5  per  cent:  an  intense  orange  color  is  produced 
and   a   fine   flaky   precipitate   forms  slowly. 

Treat  1  Gm.  of  meroxyl  with  SO  cc.  of  boiling  water:  (the  insoluble 
matter   does   not   exceed   0.1    per   cent). 

Assay  the  product  according  to  the  method  given  under  mercuro- 
chrome:  the  mercury  content  is  not  less  than  26  per  cent,  nor  more 
than  29   per  cent, 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  293 

MERTHIOLATE.— Merthiolate  Sodium.— Sodium  Ethyl- 
mercuri  Thiosalicylate.— CoHsHg.S.QHiCOONa.  Merthiolate 
contains  from  49.15  to  49.65  per  cent  of  mercury  in  organic 
combination. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Merthiolate,  Lilly,  is  a  potent  germicide 
for  spore-bearing  and  non-spore-bcaring  bacteria  and  is  also  a 
fungicide.  It  is  used  for  sterilizing  tissue  surfaces.  It  does 
not  precipitate  with  serum  proteins.  Merthiolate  is  much  less 
toxic  than  mercuric  chloride.  Rabbits  tolerated  intravenous 
doses  of  0.020  Gm.  to  0.025  Gm.  per  Kg.,  and  rats  as  much 
as  0.045  Gm.  when  injected  slowly,  the  animals  being  observed 
in  both  cases  for  seven  days.  Hemolytic  tests  with  washed 
rabbit  red  blood  cells  indicate  that  merthiolate  has  relatively 
low  hemolytic  activity. 

Dosage. — For  disinfection  of  instruments,  1  in  1,000  aqueous 
solution;  for  application  to  the  intact  skin,  tincture  1  in  1,000; 
for  application  in  wounds  and  to  denuded  surfaces,  aqueous  solu- 
tion 1  in  1,000;  for  ophthalmological  use,  from  1  in  10,000  to 
1  in  5,000  aqueous  solution ;  for  application  to  nasal  mucous 
membranes,  from  1  in  5,000  to  1  in  2,000  aqueous;  for  urethral 
irrigations,  1  in  30,000  to  1  in  5,000  aqueous. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis.  U.  S.  patent  1,672,615 
(June  5,   1928;   expires   1945).     U.   S.  trademark  252,182. 

Merthiolate  Jelly  1:1,000:  Merthiolate  0.1  per  cent,  eucalyptol  0.016 
per  cent,  and  eugenol  0.016  per  cent,  in  a  water-soluble  base. 

Merthiolate  Ointment  1:2,000:  Merthiolate  0.05  per  cent  in  a  petro- 
latum base. 

Merthiolate  Ophthalmic  Ointment,  1:5000:  Contains  merthiolate  1 
part,  in  5,000  parts  of  a  base  consisting  of  liquid  petrolatum  and  wool 
fat  with   small  amounts  of   paraffin,   white   petrolatum  and  ceresin. 

Merthiolate  Solution  1:1,000:  One  gram  of  merthiolate  and  1  Gm.  of 
monoethanolamine  in  1,000  cc.  of  water,  buffered  with  1.4  Gm.  of  sodium 
borate  in  1,000  cc.  and  containing  sodium  chloride  to  make  the  solution 
approximately   isotonic. 

Tincture  Merthiolate,  1:1000:  Contains  merthiolate,  0.1  Gm.,  and 
monoethanolamine,  0.1  Gm.,  dissolved  in  alcohol,  50  cc;  acetone,  10  cc, 
and   water,   sufficient  to  make    100   cc. 

Merthiolate  occurs  as  a  light  cream  colored  nonhygroscopic  crystalline 
powder,  having  a  slight  odor.  It  is  stable  in  air  but  unstable  in  sun- 
light. One  part  by  weight  of  merthiolate  dissolves  in  approximately 
1  part  of  water  or  in  approximately  8  parts  of  95  per  cent  alcohol. 
It  is  practically  insoluble  in  ether  and  benzene.  A  1  per  cent  solution 
in   water   has   a   pH   value  of  about   6.7. 

Add  diluted  sulfuric  acid  to  a  solution  of  merthiolate:  a  white  pre- 
cipitate of  ethylmercurithiosalicylic  acid  is  produced.  Recrystallize  this 
product  from  95  per  cent  alcohol  and  dry  in  a  vacuum  over  sulfuric 
acid;  it  melts  at  111-114  C.  Bubble  carbon  dioxide  into  a  1  per  cent 
solution  of  merthiolate:  a  precipitate  is  produced  which  is  soluble  in 
sodium  hydroxide.  Add  a  few  drops  of  silver  nitrate  solution  to  a 
1  per  cent  solution  of  merthiolate:  a  white  precipitate  separates.  Add 
a  few  drops  of  lead  acetate  solution  to  a  1  per  cent  solution  of 
merthiolate:  a  white  precipitate  separates.  Add  a  few  drops  of  copper 
sulfate  solution  to  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  merthiolate:  a  green  pre- 
cipitate  separates. 

Shake  0.5  Gm.  of  merthiolate,  accurately  weighed,  with  20  cc.  of 
anhydrous  ether  for  ten  minutes;  filter,  evaporate- the  ether  and  dry  in  a 
vacuum  over  sulfuric  acid  to  constant  weight:  the  weight  of  the 
residue  does  not  exceed  0.003  Gm.  Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  mer- 
thiolate in  5  cc  of  sulfuric  acid:  not  more  than  a  slight  yellow  color  is 


294     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

produced.  Mix  equal  parts  of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  merthiolate 
and  ammonium  sulfide:  a  white  precipitate  is  formed,  but  no  blacken- 
ing occurs  after  standing  forty-eight  hours.  Dry  0.1  Gm.  of  mer- 
thiolate to  constant  weight  in  a  vacuum  over  sulfuric  acid:  it  does  not 
lose  more   than   0.5    per   cent   in    weight. 

Transfer  to  a  platinum  dish  about  1  Gm.  of  merthiolate,  acurately 
weighed;  add  3  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  and  evaporate;  add  2  cc.  of  sul- 
furic acid  and  evaporate;  add  2  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  and  evaporate; 
introduce  into  the  dish  a  small  piece  of  ammoniuni  carbonate  and  heat 
until  it  is  volatilized,  cool  in  a  desiccator  and  weigh:  The  sodium  is 
not  less  than  5.1  per  cent  nor  more  than  5.7  per  cent.  Transfer  about 
0.2  Gm.  of  merthiolate,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  100  cc.  Erlenmeyer 
flask;  add  3  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  10  cc.  of  water,  20  cc.  of 
sodium  sulfide  solution  (50  Gm.  crystals  dissolved  and  diluted  to  make 
100  cc.)  and  0.25  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite;  boil  under  a  reflux  for 
twenty  minutes;  transfer  to  a  weighed  platinum  dish,  dilute  to  105  cc. 
and  electrolyze  at  4  volts  for  seventeen  hours;  remove  the  solution; 
wash  the  dish  with  water;  dry  the  dish  by  evaporating  the  ether,  after 
washing  it  with  alcohol  and  then  ether;  weigh:  the  mercury  is  equiva- 
lent to  not  less  than  49.1  per  cent  nor  more  than  49.6  per  cent. 
Saf-T-Top  Tincture  of  Merthiolate  1:1000:  Tincture  of  merthiolate 
1 :  1000  marketed  in  Saf-T-Top  containers  (glass  ampules  having  a  capil- 
lary  opening)    containing  2   cc.   and    15   cc. 

Marketed  by  Robert  A.    Bernhard,  Rochester,   N.  Y. 

MERBAPHEN.— Novasurol— "The  double  salt  of  sodium 
mercurichlorphenyl  oxyacetate  with  diethyl-barbituric  acid,  con- 
taining when  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100  C,  not  less  than 
33  per  cent  and  not  more  than  34.5  per  cent  of  Hg."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Mer- 
baphenum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Merbaphen  was  introduced  originally  as 
an  antisyphilitic,  but  seems  to  be  used  chiefly  as  a  diuretic.  It 
induces  diuresis  only  provided  sufficient  renal  tissue  is  still  intact 
and  is  therefore  contraindicated  in  acute  diseases  of  the  kidney 
as  well  as  in  advanced  nephritis.  It  is  effective  in  ascites  and 
edema  of  cardiac  and  cardiorenal  origin.  It  is  usually  not 
effective  in  ascites  resulting  from  cirrhosis  of  the  liver.  It 
has  been  tried  in  hydrothorax,  in  pericardial  effusion  and  in 
the  ascites  of  tuberculous  peritonitis,  but  without  uniform 
results.  The  best  results  are  achieved  when  merbaphen  is 
employed  in  conjunction  with  other  diuretic  measures:  the  use 
of  acid-producing  salts,  and  the  low  fluid,  low  salt  diet. 

Dosage. — The  dose  as  a  diuretic  ranges  from  1  to  2  cc.  of 
the  10  per  cent  solution  injected  intramuscularly  or  intrave- 
nously. It  is  recommended  that  0.5  cc.  be  given  first,  in  order 
to  determine  the  patient's  tolerance  for  mercury.  If  the  drug 
is  well  borne,  the  dose  may  be  increased  to  1  cc.  or  up  to  2  cc, 
according  to  the  effect  observed.  The  drug  is  given  once  or 
twice  a  week.     Digitalis  may  be  given  as  indicated. 

Novasurol. — A  brand  of  merbaphen-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patents  1,034,092  (July  30,  1912;  expired)  and  1,074,781  (Oct.  7,  1913; 
expired).     U.    S.   trademark    106,829. 

Novasurol  Ampules:  Each  ampule  contains  1  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent 
solution   of   novasurol   and   metacresol,    0.05    per   cent. 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  295 

METAPHEN.  — The  anhydride  of  4,  nitro-5-hydroxy- 
mercuri-or//io  cresol.  C6H2.CH3.0.N02.Hg.  When  metaphen  is 
dissolved  in  alkah  solution,  the  anhydride  ring  opens,  forming 
the  resulting  sodium  derivative.  Metaphen  contains  from  56  to 
57  per  cent  of  mercury  in  organic  combination.  It  is  used  only 
in  form  of  the  sodium  salt. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Metaphen  is  a  germicide,  more  powerful 
than  mercuric  chloride  and  certain  organic  mercury  compounds 
when  tested  on  cultures  of  Staphylococcus  aureus  and  Bacillus 
typhosus.  It  is  stated  to  be  relatively  nonirritating  when  applied 
to  mucous  membranes  or  the  skin  and  to  be  without  deleterious 
action  on  metallic  instruments  or  rubber.  Metaphen  is  claimed 
to  be  relatively  non-toxic;  white  rats  were  found  to  survive 
doses  of  0.006  Gm.  per  kilogram  of  body  weight  when  injected 
intravenously,  whereas  some  died  in  from  1  to  7  days  when 
injected  with  0.07  Gm.  per  kilogram.  When  injected  intra- 
muscularly, they  tolerated  (with  but  slight  pain)  doses  of  0.03 
Gm.  per  kilogram. 

Metaphen  is  proposed  for  use  in  the  treatment  of  gonorrhea 
and  infections  of  the  eye ;  for  skin  sterilization  and  for  steriliza- 
tion of  instruments  and  rubber. 

Dosage. — Solutions  of  metaphen  in  water  are  prepared  with 
the  aid  of  sodium  hydroxide.  For  disinfection  of  instruments 
solutions  of  1  in  5,000  to  1  in  1,000;  for  application  to  the 
skin  solutions  of  1  in  5,000  and  1  in  1,000;  for  ophthalmological 
and  for  urethral  irrigation  solutions  of  1  in  5,000  to  1  in  10,000 
are  proposed. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago.     U.  S.  patent 

Reissue    17,563    (Sept.    22,    1925;    expires    1942).      U.    S.    trademark   No. 

205,507. 

Metaphen   Solution   1:500:    1    part   metaphen   dissolved   in   500    parts  of 

water    by    means    of    sodium    hydroxide    (four    molecules    of    NaOH    for 

every   molecule  of    metaphen)    forming   metaphen   sodium. 

Metaphen  Solution  1:2,500:     1   part  metaphen  dissolved  in  2,500  parts 

of  water  containing  0.33  per  cent  each  of  sodium  bicarbonate  and  sodium 

carbonate   forming   metaphen   sodium. 

Tincture   Metaphen   1:200:      Metaphen    0.5    Gm.,    dissolved   in   a   liquid 

composed  of  acetone  10  cc,  water  40  cc,  and  alcohol  50  cc. 

Metaphen  is  a  yellow,  odorless  and  tasteless  substance;  insoluble  in 
water,  almost  insoluble  in  methyl  alcohol,  acetone,  ether  and  aqueous 
sodium  carbonate  and  sodium  bicarbonate  solution;  soluble  in  dilute 
aqueous  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  in  ammonium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion; soluble  in  boiling  glacial  acetic  acid  and  in  nitric  acid  at  room 
temperature. 

Suspend  0.1  Gm.  of  metaphen  in  10  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid,  allow 
to  stand  for  five  rninutes,  decant  and  wash  the  residue  three  times  by 
decantation  with  distilled  water;  repeat  the  procedure  three  times,  then 
dissolve  the  residue  in  15  cc.  of  distilled  water  and  1  cc.  of  50  per 
cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution;  add  0.5  Gm.  of  sodium  hydrosulfite 
and  heat  to  boiling:  a  heavy  deposit  of  metallic  mercury  is  obtained 
(combined  mercury).  Add  50  cc.  of  benzene  to  0.5  Gm.  of  metaphen, 
shake  for  two  minutes,  filter,  and  evaporate  the  filtrate  to  dryness:  the 
residue  does  not  weigh  more  than  0.005  Gm.  (absence  of  uncombined 
4-nitro-2-cresol).  Dissolve  0.4  Gm.  of  metaphen  in  3  cc.  of  15  per 
cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  30  cc.  of  water;  divide  into  two 
equal  portions  and  transfer  to  two  test  tubes;  to  one  add  0.1  (3m.  of 
sodium    hydrosulfite,    allow    to    stand    for    one    hour,    filter    and    compare 


296     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


the  filtrate  with  the  other  tube:  the  first  tube  is  no  darker  than  the 
control  (absence  of  dinitrocresol) .  Treat  0.1  Gm.  of  metaphen  with 
20  cc.  of  1  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution:  no  insoluble  residue 
remains  (absence  of  inorganic  mercury  salts  or  mercury  derivative  of 
nitroindazolc). 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  metaphen,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  dry 
Erlenmeyer  flask;  add  2  Gm.  of  potassium  permanganate,  mix  well,  and 
then  add  5  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid;  allow  the  solution  to  stand 
for  15  minutes;  then  carefully  add  15  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  (concen- 
trated) in  2  cc.  portions,  and  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  for  another 
10  minutes.  Decolorize  the  mixture  drop  by  drop  with  hydrogen  per- 
oxide solution;  after  decolorization  add  5  cc.  of  water  and  boil  for 
from  five  to  eight  minutes.  Cool,  add  15  cc.  of  water  and  saturate 
the  solution  with  hydrogen  sulfide;  keep  the  solution  saturated  for 
18  hours.  Transfer  the  precipitated  mercuric  sulfide  to  a  Gooch  cru- 
cible; wash  with  hydrogen  sulfide  water,  then  with  hydrogen  sulfide 
water  acidified  with  sulfuric  acid;  wash  thoroughly  with  distilled 
water,  then  with  alcohol  and  carbon  disulfide.  The  carbon  disulfide 
should  remain  over  the  precipitate  for  approximately  one-half  hour. 
Wash  finally  with  acetone.  Dry  in  an  oven  for  one-half  hour  at  100 
to  110  C.  and  weigh  the  mercuric  sulfide:  the  amount  of  mercury 
calculated  from  the  weight  of  the  mercuric  sulfide  is  not  less  than 
56  per  cent,  nor  more  than  57  per  cent  in  the  dried  substance. 
Saf-T-Top  Tincture  Metaphen:  Tincture  of  metaphen  1:200,  marketed 
in  ampules  having  a  capillary  opening,  containing  2  cc.  and  15  cc. 
Prepared   by   Robert   A.   Bernhard,   Rochester,   N.   Y. 

POTASSIUM  MERCURIC  IODIDE.— Potassii 
Hydrargyri  lodidum. — A  complex  salt,  K^HgL,  formed  by 
the  interaction  of  one  molecule  of  mercuric  iodide  with  two 
molecules  of  potassium  iodide  and  containing  about  25.5  per 
cent  of  mercury. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Potassium  mercuric  iodide  is  used  for 
the  same  purposes  as  mercuric  iodide,  over  which  it  has  some 
advantages  because  of  its  solubility.  As  a  germicide  it  is 
effective,  as  it  does  not  coagulate  albumin ;  however,  there 
seems  to  be  no  work  to  show  how  much  the  activity  is  decreased 
when  an  excess  of  potassium  iodide  is  present.  In  comparison 
with  mercuric  chloride  it  is  claimed  to  have  a  greater  safety 
factor :  Weight  for  weight,  potassium  mercuric  iodide  is  about 
one  half  as  toxic  as  mercuric  chloride  according  to  animal 
experiments ;  in  proportion  to  the  mercury  content,  however, 
potassium  mercuric  iodide  and  mercuric  chloride  possess  about 
the  same  toxicity. 

Externally,  potassium  mercuric  iodide  is  used  for  skin  dis- 
infection, irrigations  and  disinfection  of  instruments  and  of 
excreta  and  discharges. 

Dosage. — As  a  germicide  it  is  used  in  concentrations  of 
1  in  100  to  1  in  10,000.  For  irrigation  of  wounds,  it  is  desir- 
able to  render  the  solution  isotonic  by  addition  of  0.9  per 
cent  sodium  chloride.  Solutions  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide 
may  be  prepared : 

(1)  By  dissolving  1  part  by  weight  of  mercuric  iodide  and 
1  part  by  weight  of  potassium  iodide  in  a  small  amount  of 
water  and  then  diluting  to  proper  strength ;  such  a  solution 
will    contain    about    20    per    cent    excess    of    potassium    iodide, 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  297 

sufficient  to  prevent  precipitation  of  mercuric  iodide  from  dilute 
solutions  of  the  complex  salt.  (1  Gm.  mercuric  iodide  is  equiva- 
lent to  1.7  Gm.  potassium  mercuric  iodide.) 

(2)  By  dissolving  potassium  mercuric  iodide  in  water  con- 
taining potassium  iodide.  Solutions  made  from  potassium 
mercuric  iodide  alone  have  a  tendency  to  decompose  with 
precipitation  of  mercuric  iodide ;  hence  it  is  necessary  to  have 
present  an  excess  of  potassium  iodide  equivalent  to  about  20 
per  cent  by  weight  of  the  amount  of  potassium  mercuric 
iodide  used. 

Germicidal  Discs  of  Potassio-Mercuric  lodide-P.  D.  &  Co.:  Disc- 
shaped tablets  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide  containing  an  excess  of 
potassium  iodide,  colored  blue.  Each  disc  represents  mercuric  iodide, 
0.U971  Gm.  (11/^  grains);  potassium  iodide,  0.0971  Gm.  (1^  grains); 
sodium  bicarbonate,  2.9259   Gm.    (45   grains). 

Prepared  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent  or  trade- 
mark. 

Germicidal  Discs  of  Potassio-Mercuric  lodide-P.  D.  &  Co.:  Disc- 
shaped tablets  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide  containing  an  excess  of 
potassium  iodide,  colored  blue.  Each  disc  represents  mercuric  iodide, 
0.0283  Gm.  (^s  grain);  potassium  iodide,  0.0283  (^  grain);  sodium 
bicarbonate,   1.0368  Gm.    (16   grains). 

Prepared  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No.  U.  S.  patent  or  trade- 
mark. 

Kalmerid  Germicidal  Tablets  Potassium  Mercuric  Iodide:  Each  tablet 
contains  potassium  mercuric  iodide,  0.5  Gm.  (7.72  grains);  potassium 
iodide,  0.37  Gm.  (5.7  grains);  ammonium  chloride,  0.125  Gm.  (1.83 
grains);   an  eosin  "Y,"   0.005   Gm.    (0.077  grain). 

Prepared  by  Davis  &  Geek,  Inc.,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.  U.  S.  patent 
1,276,119    (Aug.  20,   1918;   expired).     U.   S.  trademark   116,042. 

Potassium  mercuric  iodide  occurs  as  yellow  crystals,  deliquescent  in 
air.  It  is  soluble  in  alcohol  and  in  potassium  iodide  solution.  It  yields 
a  clear  solution  with  one  part  of  water.  When  the  solution  is  diluted 
with  much  water,  mercuric  iodide  precipitates  slowly;  but  if  one  fifth 
of  its  weight  of  potassivmi  iodide  is  previously  added  to  the  salt  or  its 
concentrated  solution,  no  mercuric  iodide  separates  on  dilution.  Its 
aqueous  solution  is  slightly  alkaline  to  litmus.  When  the  salt  is  heated 
in  a  test  tube  to  the  point  of  fusion,  it  becomes  red,  but  on  cooling 
again  assumes  a  yellow  color;  at  higher  temperatures,  there  is  volatili- 
zation  of  mercuric  iodide. 

Treat  about  0.2  Gm.  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide  with  1  cc.  of 
water  and  add  1  cc.  of  chloroform  and  0.5  cc.  of  ferric  chloride  solu- 
tion: the  chloroform  shows  the  characteristic  color  of  iodine.  Treat 
about  0.1  Gm.  of  the  salt  with  2  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  and 
add  a  few  drops  of  formaldehyde  solution:  a  black  precipitate  of 
metallic  mercury  is  produced. 

Potassium  mercuric  iodide  loses  not  more  than  4  per  cent  of  its 
weight  when   dried  at   120   C   for   four  hours. 

Transfer  about  1.5  Gm.  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide,  accurately 
weighed,  to  a  100  cc.  volumetric  flask,  and  dissolve  in  1.5  cc.  of 
water,  then  dilute  to  100  cc.  Pipette  immediately  10  cc.  of  the  solu- 
tion into  a  glass  stoppered  250  cc.  bottle  and  add  35  cc.  of  hydrochloric 
acid  and  5  cc.  of  chloroform.  Titrate  the  solution  with  tenth-normal 
potassium  iodate  (10.701  Gm.  in  1,000  cc),  stoppering  the  bottle  and 
shaking  the  contents  well  after  each  addition.  The  addition  of  the 
potassium  iodate  solution  is  continued  until  the  iodine  which  was  first 
liberated  disappears,  and  the  chloroform  shows  no  pink  color:  the 
iodine  content,  calculated  to  the  dry  salt,  is  not  less  than  63.4  per 
cent   nor   more  than   65.5   per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  2.5  Gra.  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide,  accurately 
weighed,    in   about    10   cc.   of  water,   and   add   sufficient   potassium   iodide 


298     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

solution  to  prevent  precipitation  of  mercuric  iodide.  Introduce  the 
solution  and  washings  into  a  cathode  cup,  previously  weighed  with  its 
metallic  mercury,  and  add  10  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  20  per 
cent.  Pass  through  the  solution  an  electric  current,  gradually  increas- 
ing the  current  so  that  at  the  end  of  eight  minutes  it  will  be  2  to 
3  amperes  and  7  to  10  volts,  stirring  the  solution  by  rotating  the 
anode  about  500  revolutions  per  minute.  After  forty  minutes,  wash 
with  distilled  water,  with  the  aid  of  a  siphon  and  without  interrupting 
the  current  until  the  current  drops  to  zero.  Remove  the  cathode  cup 
and  allow  it  to  stand  with  20  cc.  of  acetic  acid  solution,  3  per  cent, 
until  bubbles  cease  to  be  evolved.  Wash  the  mercury  with  water,  and 
then  alcohol,  remove  most  of  the  excess  alcohol  by  filter  paper,  then 
dry  in  a  desiccator  over  potassium  hydroxide  sticks  and  a  beaker  of 
mercury.  The  increase  in  the  weight  in  the  cathode  cup  represents 
the  amount  of  mercury  present  in  the  quantity  of  the  salt  taken.  The 
mercury  content  of  potassium  mercuric  iodide,  calculated  to  the  dry 
salt,  is  not  less  than  25.0  per  cent,  nor  more  than  26.0  per  cent. 

RED  MERCURIC  IODIDE.— "Contains,  when  dried  to 
constant  weight  over  sulfuric  acid,  not  less  than  99  per  cent  of 
Hgla.  Caution:  Red  Mercuric  Iodide  is  extremely  poisonous." 
N.  F. 

For  standards  see  the  National  Formulary  under  Hydrargyri 
lodidum  Rubrum. 

SALYRGAN.  —  Mersalyl.  —  Sodium  [o(hydroxymercuric- 
methoxypropylcarbamyl)  phenoxy]  acetate.  —  NaOOC.CHaO. 
C6H4CONH.C3H5(O.CH3)(HgOH).  Salyrgan  is  a  complex 
synthetic  mercurial,  prepared  by  the  action  of  mercury  acetate 
and  methyl  alcohol  on  salicylallylamido-o-acetic  acid  and  sub- 
sequent conversion  to  the  sodium  salt.  Salyrgan  when  dried 
to  constant  weight  contains  39.6  per  cent  of  mercury  in  non- 
ionizable  form. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Salyrgan  has  been  demonstrated  to  exert 
a  destructive  action  on  the  spirochete  of  syphilis  in  rabbits, 
but  is  used  chiefly  as  a  diuretic.  It  induces  diuresis  only  pro- 
vided sufficient  renal  tissue  is  still  intact  and  is  therefore  contra- 
indicated  in  acute  diseases  of  the  kidney  as  well  as  in  advanced 
nephritis.  It  is  effective  in  ascites  and  edema  of  cardiac  and 
cardiorenal  origin.  It  is  usually  not  eft'ective  in  ascites  resulting 
from  cirrhosis  of  the  liver.  It  has  been  tried  in  hydrothorax,  in 
pericardial  effusion  and  in  the  ascites  of  tuberculous  peritonitis, 
but  without  uniform  results.  The  best  results  are  achieved 
when  salyrgan  is  employed  in  conjunction  with  other  diuretic 
measures :  the  use  of  acid-producing  salts,  and  the  low  fluid, 
low  salt  diet.  On  the  whole  salyrgan  is  probably  a  little  better 
diuretic  and  definitely  less  toxic  than  merbaphen. 

Dosage. — Salyrgan  is  supplied  only  in  the  form  of  a  10  per 
cent  solution.  As  a  diuretic,  an  initial  dose,  intramuscularly  or 
intravenously,  of  0.5  cc.  of  the  solution  to  test  tolerance, 
increased  to  1  cc.  or  to  a  maximum  of  2  cc.  if  required;  injec- 
tions are  made  at  intervals  of  from  three  to  five  days. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  1,693,432  (Nov.  27,  1928;  expires  1945).    U.  S.  trademark  188,515. 

Ampules  Salyrgan  Solution,  1  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  1  cc.  of  a  10 
per   cent    solution    of   salyrgan. 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  299 

Ampules  Salyrgan  Solution,  2  cc. — Each  ampule  contains  2  cc.  of  a 
10  per  cent  solution  of  salyrgan. 

Salyrgan  occurs  as  a  white,  crystalline,  odorless  powder  with  a  bitter 
taste;  readily  soluble  in  ethyl  alcohol,  about  1  in  3,  methyl  alcohol,  about 
1  in  2  and  water,  about  1  in  1,  and  insoluble  in  ether.  An  aqueous 
solution  is  alkaline  to  litmus  paper. 

Dissolve  0.5  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  5  cc.  of  formic  acid  (90  per 
cent)  and  boil  the  mixture  under  a  reflux  condenser  for  fifteen  minutes: 
the  precipitate  formed  dissolves,  leaving  a  gray  residue  containing  fine 
globules  of  metallic  mercury.  Filter  the  mixture  through  paper  while 
hot;  allow  the  filtrate  to  cool,  collect  the  resultant  salicylallylamido-^- 
acetic  acid  crystals  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  and  dry  over  sulfuric  acid  in 
a  partially  exhausted  desiccator:  it  melts  at  120-121  C.  Dissolve  about 
1  Gm.  in  10'  cc.  of  water,  add  10  cc.  of  a  solution  of  hydrochloric  acid 
(1  part  hydrochloric  acid  and  1  part  water),  connect  to  a  condenser, 
distill  oflf  about  three  fourths  the  volume:  the  distillate  responds  to  tests 
for  methyl  alcohol.  Dissolve  0.5  Gm.  in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  0.5  cc.  of 
diluted  acetic  acid  and  0.3  cc.  of  sodium  sulfide  solution:  no  colora- 
tion results  (^heavy  metals — especially  mercuric  ions).  Dissolve  0.1  Gm. 
in  5  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of  nitric  acid,  filter  through  paper  and 
divide  the  filtrate  into  two  portions;  to  one  portion  add  1  cc.  of  silver 
nitrate  solution:  no  opalescence  results  (chlorides);  to  the  other  portion 
add  1  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution:  no  turbidity  results  (sulfates). 
Dissolve  0.5  Gm.  in  10  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  diluted  sulfuric  acid, 
filter  through  paper  and  divide  the  filtrate  into  two  portions;  to  one 
portion  add  0.1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  potassium  permanganate  solution: 
no  immediate  decoloration  results  (salicylallylamido  acetic  acid) ;  to 
the  remaining  portion  add  0.1  cc.  of  diluted  ferric  chloride  solution; 
no  violet  color  develops  {salicylallylamide) .  When  tested  for  arsenic 
according  to  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  X,  the  product  meets  the  require- 
ments for  arsenic   (p.  428,  Arsenic  Test). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight  over  sul- 
furic acid  in  a  partially  exhausted  desiccator:  the  loss  in  weight  does 
not  exceed  5.0  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed, 
to  a  500  cc.  Kjeldahl  flask,  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  accord- 
ing to  the  official  method  described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods 
of  Analysis  of  the  Association  of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  Sec- 
ond Edition,  p.  8.  The  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  2.55  per  cent,  nor  more  than  3.0  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the 
dried  substance.  Weigh  accurately  about  0.5  Gm.  in  a  tared  platinum 
di_sh,_  add  10  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  gently  heat  while  fumes  of  sulfur 
trioxide  are  evolved,  repeat,  using  two  portions  of  2  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid,  respectively,  ignite,  cool  and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate.  The  per- 
centage of  sodium  corresponds  to  not  less  than  4.3  per  cent,  nor 
more  than  4.9  per  cent,  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 
Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask; 
add  100  cc.  of  water  and  agitate  until  the  powder  has  dissolved;  add  15 
cc.  hydrochloric  acid,  connect  to  a  reflux  condenser  and  boil  for  three 
hours.  Add  175  cc.  of  hot  water,  and  pass  in  hydrogen  sulfide  for 
fifteen  minutes.  (It  is  important  that  the  temperature  of  the  solution 
should  be  about  70  C.  in  order  to  keep  in  solution  slightly  soluble 
organic  compounds  formed  during  hydrolysis).  Filter  while  warm, 
through  a  Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  distilled  water  and  finally  three 
parts  of  cold  alcohol  and  then  one  portion  of  carbon  disulfide.  Close 
the  rubber  tubing  leading  from  the  suction  flask  to  the  suction  pump 
with  a  pinch  clamp;  add  sufficient  carbon  disulfide  to  cover  the  pre- 
cipitate, cover  the  crucible  with  a  watch  glass  and  allow  to  stand  one- 
half  hour.  Then  release  the  pinch  clamp,  drain  off  the  solution  and 
wash  with  several  portions  of  carbon  disulfide.  Dry  in  an  oven  at 
100  C,  weigh  the  mercury  sulfide  and  calculate  to  mercury.  The 
percentage  of  mercury  corresponds  to  not  less  than  38.0  per  cent,  nor 
more  than  41.0  per  cent,  when  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 

SOLUTION  COLLOIDAL  MERCURY  SULPHIDE- 
HILLE.  —  Liquor  Hydrargyri  Sulfidum  Colloidale. — Solution 
Colloidal    Mercuric    Sulfide. — A    colloidal    2    per    cent    solution 


300     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

of  mercuric  sulfide  in  water,  stabilized  with  a  hydrolyzed 
protein  substance  and  preserved  with  0.2  per  cent  of  tricresol. 
Actions  and  Uses. — Solution  colloidal  mercury  sulphide-Hille 
is  proposed  for  intramuscular  injection  in  the  treatment  of 
syphilis. 

Dosage. — The  usual  dose  is  from  2  to  3  cc.  administered 
intramuscularly  twice  a  week  for  a  course  of  sixteen  to  twenty 
injections.  With  intermittent  treatment  there  should  then  be 
a  rest  period  of  six  or  eight  weeks.  If  continuous  therapy  is 
being  used,  of  course  some  other  antisyphilitic,  for  example 
arsphenamine,  might  then  be  employed. 

Manufactured  by  Hille  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Solution  colloidal  mercury  sulphide-Hille  is  black  in  reflected  light 
and  brown  in  transmitted  light.  It  possesses  the  odor  and  taste  of 
cresol.     It  has  a  specific  gravity  of  from   1.0670  to  1.0690. 

Solution  colloidal  mercury  sulphide-Hille  is  neutral  to  litmus. 
(Place  a  drop  of  the  solution  over  a  piece  of  blue  litmus  paper  and  a 
drop  on  red  litmus  paper;  after  one  minute  the  original  color  can  be 
detected  on  the  edges  of  the  drop.)  To  1  cc.  of  the  original  solution 
add  3  cc.  of  iodine  solution:  a  clear  reddish  solution  results  which 
within  an  hour  becomes  turbid  because  of  the  separation  of  a  red 
precipitate. 

To  20  cc.  of  solution  colloidal  mercury  sulphide-Hille  add  7  Gm.  of 
sodium  chloride  and  boil  until  the  colloid  coagulates,  filter  off  the  precip- 
itate and  cool  the  solution:  the  yellowish  solution  remains  clear 
{lead),  dilute  the  filtrate  to  25  cc.  Transfer  about  one  fourth  of 
the  black  precipitate  to  a  beaker,  add  10  cc.  of  water,  2  cc.  of 
diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  a  small  crystal  of  potassium  chlorate, 
boil  until  the  solution  no  longer  evolves  chlorine,  filter  off  the  sulfur 
and  add  a  few  drops  of  stannous  chloride:  a  white  precipitate  that 
changes  to  gray  forms.  To  5  cc.  of  the  yellowish  filtrate  add  5  cc. 
of  ammonia  water:  no  color  change  occurs  (copper)  and  no  pre- 
cipitate forms  (bismuth,  iron).  To  5  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  1  cc. 
of  a  1  per  cent  solution  of  tannic  acid:  a  white  precipitate  forms. 
To  5  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  2  drops  of  a  36  per  cent  solution  of  acetic 
acid:  a  turbidity  appears  that  disappears  on  the  addition  of  more 
acetic  acid.  To  5  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  1  cc.  of  copper  sulfate 
solution:  a  slight  precipitate  forms  that  is  rendered  soluble  by  adding 
2  volumes  of  water;  add  1  cc.  of  normal  sodium  hydroxide  solution: 
a  violet  color  appears.  To  5  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  1  cc.  of  mercuric 
chloride  solution:  no  precipitate  forms.  To  5  cc.  of  the  original  solu 
tion  add  5  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  a  small  crystal  of  potas 
sium  chlorate  and  heat.  When  the  black  precipitate  has  disappeared 
filter  and  boil  to  a  small  volume.  Add  2  cc.  of  sulfurous  acid  and 
continue  the  boiling  until  sulfur  dioxide  is  no  longer  given  off 
cool:  this  solution  conforms  to  the  U.  S.  P.  X  Gutzeit  test  for  arsenic. 

Transfer  exactly  5  cc.  of  solution  colloidal  mercury  sulphide-Hille  to 
a  weighed  platinum  dish,  add  sodium  sulfide  solution  (50  Gm.  sodium 
sulfide  dissolved  to  make  100  cc.)  until  the  precipitate  just  dissolves 
and  then  add  as  much  again,  electrolyze  the  solution  for  six  hours 
using  6  volts,  wash  with  water,  alcohol  and  ether,  dry  in  a  desiccato" 
containing  sulfuric  acid  and  a  beaker  containing  metallic  mercury, 
weigh:  the  mercury  calculated  to  mercuric  sulfide  is  not  less  than 
1.94  per  cent  nor  more  than   2.06  per  cent. 

YELLOW  MERCURIC  OXIDE.— Yellow  Precipitate— 
"When  dried  to  constant  weight  at  110  C,  contains  not  less  than 
99.5  per  cent  of  HgO."—U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Hydrargyri 
Oxidum  Flavum. 


MERCURY     COMPOUNDS  301 

Compound  Yellozv  Oxide  and  Adrenalin  Ointmcnt-M.  E.  S.  Co. : 
Yellow  oxide  of  mercury,  1  per  cent;  solution  of  adrenalin  chloride,  1 
per  cent;  menthol,  0.04  per  cent;  phenol,  0.2  per  cent;  anhydrous  wool  tat, 
10  per  cent,  and  white  petrolatum  sufficient  to  make  100  per  cent.  Put 
up  in  collapsible  tubes,   for  application  to   the  eye. 

Prepared  by  Manhattan  Eye  Salve  Co.,  Louisville,  Ky.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Mercury  (Metallic)  Preparations 

MERCURETTES-P.  D.  &  CO.— Tabellae  Hydrargyri 
Cum  Oleo  Theobromatis. — Briquettes,  each  containing  finely 
divided  metallic  mercury  3.25  Gm.  (50  grains)  incorporated  with 
theobroma  (cacao  butter)  and  perfumed.  Each  briquette  weighs 
8  Gm.   (120  grains). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  ointment  of  mer- 
cury-U.  S.  P.  It  is  claimed  that  in  the  treatment  of  syphilis 
and  certain  forms  of  parasitic  skin  diseases  where  ointment  of 
mercury  has  been  employed,  the  use  of  mercurettes  permits 
a  more  accurate  dosage  and  is  more  convenient  and  less  dis- 
agreeable. 

Dosage. — Applied  by  inunction.  If  less  than  one  briquette  is 
to  be  used,  it  may  be  divided  by  cutting  with  a  knife. 

Prepared  by  Parke,  Davis  and  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark   180,215. 


METRAZOL.— Pentamethylenetetrazol.— 


CH2CH2CH2CH2CH2C=N— N=N— N. 

I I 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  action  of  metrazol  is  similar  to  that 
of  camphor,  but  it  is  claimed  to  be  more  dependable,  mainly  on 
account  of  its  greater  solubility  in  water.  Its  action  following 
injection  intravenously  or  subcutaneously  is  induced  promptly. 
Metrazol  stimulates  the  vasomotor  and  respiratory  centers  in 
experiments  on  normal  animals,  but  an  experienced  worker  in 
this  field  found  it  a  very  uncertain  respiratory  stimulant  in  con- 
ditions of  depressed  respiration  in  animals,  in  which  carbon 
dioxide,  epinephrine  and  ephedrine  were  markedly  effective ;  that 
as  a  circulatory  stimulant  it  usually  caused  a  rise  of  blood 
pressure  only  in  convulsive  doses ;  that  it  did  make  irregularly 
beating  hearts  beat  more  regularly,  but  only  at  expense  of 
depression  of  rate  and  amplitude.  The  use  of  metrazol  is 
reported  as  a  sustaining  agent  and  restorative  in  chronic  cardiac 
and  circulatory  insufficiency,  in  pneumonia,  and  in  other  infec- 
tious diseases.  It  has  been  reported  to  be  of  value  in  emer- 
gencies due  to  cardiovascular  collapse,  in  shock,  in  respiratory 
failure  and  in  narcotic  depression.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
causes  capillary  dilatation  in  the  splanchnic  region,  and  animal 
experiments  indicate  that  the  intravenous  injection  may  be  dis- 
tinctly dangerous.  It  may  be  combined  with  digitalis  and  the 
xanthine  diuretics. 


302     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — Intramuscularly,  subcutaneously,  or  intravenously, 
from  0.1  to  0.3  Gm.  (1^  to  4^4  grains)  repeated  as  required; 
orally,  from  0.1  to  0.3  Gm.  (1^  to  4j^  grains)  several  times 
daily. 

Manufactured  by  Knoll  A.-G.,  Ludwigshafen  a.  Rh.,  Germany  (Bilhuber- 
Knoll  Corporation,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent 
1,599,493   (Sept.  14,  1926;  expires  1943).     U.  S.  trademark  249,687. 

Hypodermic  Tablets  Metrazol  V/i  grains:  Each  tablet  contains  1^ 
grains  of  metrazol. 

Metrazol  Ampules,  1  cc:  Each  ampule  contains  1.1  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent 
aqueous  solution  of  metrazol. 

Metrazol  Solution  10  per  cent:  An  aqueous  solution  containing 
metrazol,   0.1   Gm.  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Metrazol   Tablets:    Each  tablet  contains    1^2    grains   of  metrazol. 

Metrazol  occurs  as  biaxial,  optically  negative,  white  crystals  that  are 
freely  soluble  in  water.     It  melts  at  57-58  C. 

To  a  10  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  metrazol  add  a  saturated  solu- 
tion of  mercuric  chloride:  a  white  solid  precipitate  results,  which  may 
be  recrystallized  from  hot  water  or  alcohol  to  yield  crystals  melting  at 
177-178  C.  and  leaving  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent  of  ash  on  incinera- 
tion. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  metrazol,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  wide 
mouth  weighing  bottle;  allow  to  stand  over  calcium  chloride:  the  loss 
in   weight  is  not  more  than  0.1   per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.2  Gm.  of  metrazol,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
platinum   dish   and   incinerate:   the   ash   is   not   weighable. 

Determine  nitrogen  by  the  Dumas  method  as  described  in  Clarke's 
Handbook  of  Organic  Analysis,  ed.  2,  New  York,  Longmans,  Green 
&  Co.,  1916,  p.  199:  the  nitrogen  is  not  less  than  40.4  nor  more  than 
40.9  per  cent. 


NAPHTHOL     COMPOUNDS 

Compounds  of  naphthol  that  are  insoluble  in  the  stomach 
have  been  introduced  in  therapeutics.  The  expectation  was 
that,  owing  to  the  greater  concentration  of  the  naphthol  in 
the  intestines  after  its  liberation  by  the  bile  and  pancreatic 
juices,  these  compounds  would  have  a  maximum  antiseptic 
action.  In  addition,  the  action  of  whatever  substance  was 
united  with  the  naphthol  would  be  exerted,  whether  on  the 
intestine  or  on  some  other  part  of  the  body,  such  as  the  genito- 
urinary tract. 

A  wide  difference  of  opinion,  however,  exists  among  authori- 
ties as  to  the  actual  efficacy  of  all  intestinal  antiseptics  and  of 
most  urinary  antiseptics.  Whatever  opinion  regarding  this  is 
held,  it  should  be  remembered  that  any  of  them,  if  used  freely 
or  for  a  long  time,  may  have  irritating  effects  on  the  digestive 
tract  or  undesirable  effects  on  other  tissues.  Reasonable  caution 
should  therefore  be  exercised  in  using  them. 

BETANAPHTHYL  BENZOATE.  —  Betanaphtholis 
Benzoas.  —  Betanaphthol  Benzoate.  —  Benzonaphthol  —  CeHs 
COO.CCioHt). — The  benzoic  acid  ester  of  betanaphthol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Betanaphthyl  benzoate  is  not  decomposed 
by  the  gastric  fluid,  but  is  split  into  its  constituents  in  the 
intestinal  canal. 


NITRATES— ORGANIC  303 

Betanaphthyl  benzoate  is  used  internally  as  an  intestinal  anti- 
septic in  diarrhea  and  typhoid  fever.  Externally,  betanaphthyl 
benzoate  is  used  as  a  parasiticide  in  the  form  of  from  a  3  to 
a  10  per  cent  ointment.  It  has  been  used  in  psoriasis,  eczema, 
scabies,  etc. 

Dosage. — From  0.2  to  0.5  Gm.  (3  to  8  grains)  ;  maximum 
dose,  single,   1   Gm.   (15  grains),  daily  4  Gm.   (60  grains). 

Betanaphthyl  benzoate  occurs  in  colorless  needles,  or  as  a  white, 
tasteless,  crystalline  powder  of  faintly  aromatic  odor.  It  darkens  with 
age.  It  is  almost  insoluble  in  water,  very  soluble  in  alcohol  and  ether, 
and  soluble  in  chloroform  and  fixed  oils.     It  melts  at  from  107  to  110  C. 

Betanaphthyl  benzoate  heated  with  a  solution  of  potassium  hydroxide 
in  alcohol  develops  the  odor  of  ethyl  benzoate;  on  the  addition  of 
chloroform  the  mixture  acquires  a  blue  color.  Shake  vigorously  for 
one  minute  1  Gm.  of  betanaphthyl  benzoate  with  20  cc.  of  a  cold 
5  per  cent  aqueous  sodium  hydroxide  solution,  and  filter  immediately. 
To  10  cc.  of  the  filtrate,  add  2  cc.  of  chloroform,  and  boil:  no  blue 
color  is  produced  in  the  aqueous  layer  (uncombined  betanaphthol) . 
Carefully  neutralize  the  remaining  10  cc.  of  alkaline  filtrate,  then 
add  a  few  drops  of  ferric  chloride  solution  previously  diluted  with 
two  volumes  of  water  and  neutralize,  if  necessary,  with  amrnonia  water: 
no  pink  precipitate  is  produced  {nncombined  benzoic  acid).  Shake 
vigorously  for  one  minute  0.5  Gm.  of  betanaphthyl  benzoate  with  5  cc. 
of  an  aqueous  5  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  filter:  no  blue 
color  develops  in  the  filtrate  on  the  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  iodine 
solution    {alphanaphthol). 

Shake  vigorously  for  one  minute  0.5  Gm.  of  betanaphthyl  benzoate 
with  50  cc.  of  distilled  water  and  filter:  the  filtrate  should  not  be 
acid  toward  litmus.  Five  cc.  portions  of  the  filtrate  mixed  with  equal 
volumes  of  diluted  nitric  acid  do  not  become  turbid  on  the  addition 
of  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  {chloride)  or  of  barium  nitrate  solution 
{sulfate). 

Incinerate  0.5  Gm.  of  betanaphthyl  benzoate:  not  more  than  0.1  per 
cent   of  ash  remains. 

Betanaphthol  Benzoate-Merck. — A  brand  of  betanaphthyl 
benzoate-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

BISMUTH  BETANAPHTHOL.— See  Bismuth  Con> 
pounds. 


NITRATES— ORGANIC 

The  esters  of  nitric  acid  and  the  higher  alcohols  (glycerin, 
propanetriol,  erythrite  (butanetetrol),  etc.)  have  an  action  on 
the  blood  vessels  similar  to  that  of  the  inorganic  nitrites  (sodium 
nitrite)  and  that  of  the  nitrous  acid  esters  of  the  alcohols  (amyl 
nitrite,  ethyl  nitrite).  This  is  generally  attributed  to  the  for- 
mation in  the  body  of  nitrites  from  them.  The  action  of  organic 
nitrates  differs  from  that  of  the  organic  nitrites  chiefly  in  that 
the  action  of  the  former  is  longer  continued.  This  is  seen  in 
the  case  of  glyceryl  trinitrate-U.  S.  P.  (nitroglycerin),  and 
to  a  still  greater  degree,  in  the  following: 


304     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

DILUTED   ERYTHRITYL  TETRANITRATE-U.  S. 

P. — Diluted  Erythrol  Tetranitrate. — Diluted  Tetranitrol. — 
"Diluted  Erythrityl  Tetranitrate  is  a  mixture  of  erythrityl  tetra- 
nitrate and  lactose,  and  occurs  as  a  white  powder,  or  in  the  form 
of  tablets.  The  powder  contains  not  less  than  47  per  cent  and 
not  more  than  53  per  cent  of  C4H6(N03)4  (302.08).  Tablets 
of  Erythrityl  Tetranitrate  do  not  vary  more  than  7.5  per  cent 
above  and  not  more  than  7.5  per  cent  below  the  labeled  amount 
of  erythrityl  tetranitrate    [C4Hfi(N03)4]."   U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Erythritylis 
Tetranitras  Dilutus. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Diluted  erythrityl  tetranitrate  is  a  vaso- 
dilator like  nitroglycerin.  Its  action  is  slower  and  more  lasting, 
beginning  in  fifteen  minutes  and  persisting  for  three  or  four 
hours. 

It  is  said  to  be  useful  in  angina  pectoris  and  vascular  diseases. 
It  is  reported  as  especially  useful  as  a  prophylactic  in  preventing 
anginal  pain. 

Dosage. — From  0.03  to  0.06  Gm.  (^  to  1  grain)  every  four 
to  six  hours.  Pure  erythrityl  tetranitrate  is  a  crystalline  mass, 
which  explodes  on  percussion,  hence  it  is  marketed  chiefly  in 
the  form  of  tablets.     Sold  in  the  form  of  tablets  only. 

ERYTHROL    TETRANITRATE    (UNDILUTED).— 

Erythrityl  tetranitrate. — It  has  twice  the  strength  of  diluted 
erythrityl  tetranitrate-U.  S.  P. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  under  Diluted  Erythrityl 
Tetranitrate. 

Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,   N.  J.,  distributor.     German  patent  81,664. 

Erythrol  Tetranitrate  Tablets-Merck,   Vz  grain. 

Erythrol  Tetranitrate  Tablets-Merck,   14  grain. 


OPIUM    PRINCIPLES,    DERIVATIVES    AND 
PREPARATIONS 

Morphine  is  a  complex  derivative  of  phenanthrene.  It  con- 
tains two  OH  groups  (one  phenolic,  the  other  alcoholic)  in 
which  substitutions  can  be  made  by  either  alkyl  or  acid  radicals. 

The  more  important  alkyl  esters  are  the  monomethyl 
(codeine)  ;  the  dimethyl  (thebaine)  ;  and  ethyl-morphine. 
Heroin  is  the  diacetyl  derivative. 

The  nature  of  these  radicals  —  whether  acid  or  alcoholic, 
aromatic  or  aliphatic — modifies  the  actions,  quantitatively,  but 
only  in  degree.  Replacement  of  one  hydroxy!  group  (codeine) 
diminishes  the  narcotic  action  and  increases  the  respiratory  and 
tetanic  action.  When  both  OH  groups  are  replaced  by  acids 
(diacetyl  morphine),  the  narcotic  effects  are  stronger  than  with 
codeine,  and  the  tetanic  action  is  weaker  than  with  morphine. 


OPIUM    PRINCIPLES    AND     PREPARATIONS     305 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  central  actions  of  all  these  morphine 
derivatives  are  qualitatively  identical ;  but  they  present  quantita- 
tive differences  v^hich  have  some  practical  importance : 

Morphine  produces  the  strongest  narcotic  analgesic,  hypnotic 
and  intestinal  effects,  and  the  weakest  stimulation.  It  causes  the 
greatest  derangement  of  digestion.  It  and  diacetyl  morphine 
are  most  liable  to  induce  a  habit. 

Codeine  (methyl-morphine)  is  less  narcotic,  less  constipating, 
and  less  apt  to  induce  tolerance  and  habit.  It  is,  therefore, 
especially  valuable  in  cough  or  in  other  conditions  in  which  the 
sedative  action  must  be  continued  for  some  time  and  in  patients 
who  do  not  tolerate  morphine. 

Ethyl-Morphine  seems  to  stand  intermediate  between  mor- 
phine and  codeine,  in  all  respects.  The  hydrochloride  is  used 
as  a  sedative,  but  mainly  for  its  special  action  on  the  con- 
junctiva. 

Diacetyl-Morphine  (heroin)  closely  approaches  morphine,  of 
which  it  shares  all  the  disadvantages,  and  over  which  it  has 
no  important  advantage.  It  was  originally  introduced  with 
the  claim  that  therapeutic  doses  lessen  the  cough  reflex  and 
slow  the  respiration,  but  that  the  inspirations  are  deepened 
and  more  powerful,  so  that  the  alveolar  air  is  more  effectively 
ventilated.  Independent  workers,  however,  have  shown  that 
there  is  no  real  difference  from  morphine  in  these  respects. 
It  is  now  generally  conceded  that  diacetyl-morphine  is  as  effec- 
tive as  morphine  in  cough,  but  not  more  so ;  that  it  is  rather 
less  effective  against  dyspnea;  and  that  it  is  more  liable  to 
produce  habit  and  toxic  effects.  Codeine  seems  to  be  superior 
to  diacetyl  morphine  in  its  power  to  allay  cough,  to  overcome 
pain  and  to  promote  sleep  (Bastedo). 

DILAUDID  HYDROCHLORIDE.— D/hydro-morphinone 

hydrochloride. — CitHioOsN.HCI.  Dilaudid  hydrochloride  differs 
essentially  from  morphine  hydrochloride  in  that  one  of  the 
hydroxyl  groups  of  the  latter  has  been  replaced  by  a  ketone 
group  and  the  adjacent  double  bond  has  been  removed  by 
hydrogenation. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  base  dilaudid  is  closely  allied  both 
chemically  and  pharmacologically  to  morphine,  having  the 
analgesic  property  of  morphine  as  well  as  its  action  on  the 
respiratory  system.  Its  action  on  the  intestine  is  probably  less 
marked  than  is  that  of  morphine.  It  is  more  toxic  than  morphine 
and  is  clinically  effective  in  doses  which  are  considerably  smaller 
than  are  necessary  with  that  alkaloid.  It  has  been  shown 
experimentally  and  clinically  that  dilaudid  is  powerfully  anal- 
gesic and   that,   like  morphine,   it   can  depress   the   respiratory 


306     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

mechanism  profoundly.  At  the  same  time,  the  experimentally 
established  ratio  between  effective  doses  of  morphine  and 
dilaudid  for  the  production  of  desirable  effects  is  not  materially 
different  from  the  ratio  between  their  toxic  doses.  Clinical 
trial  has  not  shown  that  dilaudid  is  free  from  tolerance  and 
addiction  evoking  properties,  and,  while  side  actions  such  as 
nausea,  vomiting  and  constipation  seem  to  occur  less  frequently 
than  with  morphine,  the  prolonged  administration  of  dilaudid 
should  be  undertaken  with  as  much  caution  as  would  be  exer- 
cised with  morphine  itself.  Dilaudid  hydrochloride  comes  within 
the   scope  of  the  federal   narcotic   regulations. 

Dosage.— As  a  sedative  and  for  the  relief  of  pain,  the  usual 
oral  dose  is  2.5  mg.  (^4  grain)  ;  in  mild  pain  or  cough,  1.3  mg. 
(%,8  grain)  may  be  given  orally.  The  customary  hypodermic 
dose  is  2  mg.  (^^2  grain).  Clinically  the  dose  of  dilaudid  neces- 
sary to  produce  analgesia  is  about  one-fifth  that  of  morphine. 

Manufactured  by  E.  Bilhuber,  Inc.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.  (Bilhuber- 
Knoll  Corporation,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent. 
German  patent  380,919   (1923).     U.  S.  trademark  298,197. 

Ampules  Solution  DUaudid  Hydrochloride,  2  mg.  (V^2  grain),  1.1  cc: 
Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  dilaudid,  2  mg.,  in  physiologic  solution  of 
sodium  chloride. 

Dilaudid  Hydrochloride  Compounding  Tablets  J^  Grain:  Each  tablet 
contains  dilaudid  hydrochloride  one-half  grain.  These  tablets,  each  many 
times  the  average  dose,  are  for  use  in  compounding  only. 

Dilaudid  Hydrochlai-ide,  Rectal  Suppositories  V24  grain :    Each  contains 
dilaudid  hydrochloride  0.0026  Cm.    (1/24  grain)   in  a  cacao  butter  base. 
HypoderrrUc   Tablets  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  2  mg.   (\^2  grain). 
Hypodermic   Tablets  Dilaudid   Hydrochloride,  3.2  mg.    ('I/20  grain). 
Hypodermic   Tablets  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  4  mg.   ^Vie  grain). 
Tablets  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  2.5  mg.   ('I/24  grain). 

Dilaudid  hydrochloride  occurs  as  a  fine,  white,  crystalline,  odorless 
powder;  freely  soluble  in  water,  about  1  in  3;  soluble  in  alcohol; 
insoluble  in  ether.  Its  aqueous  solution  is  neutral  to  litmus.  From 
aqueous  solution,  ammonia  water  and  sodium  hydroxide  precipitate  the 
free  base,  di'hydromorphinone  as  fine,  white  crystals,  soluble  in  an 
excess  of  sodium  hydroxide. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  in  25  cc.  of  water, 
add  sufficient  ammonia  water  to  make  distinctly  alkaline  and  Jet  stand 
overnight;  collect  the  precipitate  of  rfihydromorphinone  on  a  filter  paper, 
wash  with  cold  water,  dry  at  100  C. :  it  melts  with  decomposition  at 
257  to  262  C.  To  10  cc.  of  the  foregoing  filtrate  add  an  excess  of 
diluted  nitric  acid  and  2  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution :  a  curdy  white 
precipitate  results,  soluble  in  an  excess  of  ammonia  water.  Add  0.5 
Gm.  of  dilaudid,  previously  dissolved  in  2  cc.  of  water,  to  an  aqueous 
solution  containing  1  Gm.  of  hydroxylamine  hydrochloride,  warm,  fol- 
lowed by  the  addition  of  an  excess  of  ammonia  water  and  set  aside 
overnight;  collect  the  precipitate  of  oxime  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  with 
a  diluted  ammonia  water  (1  part  ammonia  water  with  99  parts  of 
water)  and  water,  dry  at  100  C:  it  melts  with  decomposition  at  230  to 
235   C. 

Dissolve  0.02  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  in  5  cc.  of  sulphuric  acid 
and  add  1  drop  of  ferric  chloride  solution  and  heat  gently:  no  blue 
coloration  results.  Dissolve  0.01  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  in  1 
cc.  of  water  and  mix  10  cc.  of  a  freshly  prepared  potassium  ferri- 
cyanide   solution  to   which   previously   has   been   added    0.1    cc.    of   ferric 


OPIUM     PRINCIPLES    AND     PREPARATIONS     307 

chloride  solution:  a  blue  color  results  {difference  from  codeine).  Boil 
about  0.2  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  with  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution:  the  odor  of  ammonia  is  not  noticeable  {ammonium  salts).  Dis- 
solve about  0.5  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  in  15  cc.  of  water: 
separate  portions  of  5  cc.  each  yield  no  red  coloration  on  dilution  with 
an  equal  volume  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  0.2  cc.  of  ferric 
chloride  solution  (meconate);  no  turbidity  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid  and  1  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution  (sulfate) ;  no  colora- 
tion or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  (salts  of 
heavy  metals). 

Dry  about  0.5  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  at  100  C.  for  six  hours: 
the  loss  in  weight  does  not  exceed  1.5  per  cent.  Incinerate  about  0.5 
Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride  accurately  weighed:  the  residue  is  not 
more  than  0.1  per  cent.  Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydro- 
chloride acurately  weighed,  to  a  suitable  Kjeldahl  flask  and  determine 
the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the  official  method  described  in 
Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of  Analysis  of  the  Association  of 
Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  third  edition,  page  20,  chapter  2,  para- 
graph 22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to  not  less  than  4.25 
per  cent,  nor  more  than  4.5  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance.  Transfer  about  0.3  Gm.  of  dilaudid  hydrochloride,  accurately 
weighed,  to  a  suitable  beaker,  add  100  cc.  of  water,  followed  by  the 
addition  of  25  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  and  10  cc.  of  nitric  acid,  boil 
with  continuous  stirring  and  allow  to  cool  in  a  dark  place.  Collect  the 
precipitate  of  silver  chloride  on  a  Gooch  crucible,  wash  with  a  diluted 
nitric  acid  and  water,  followed  by  alcohol  and  ether;  finally  dry  to 
constant  weight  at  100  C. :  the  amount  of  hydrogen  chloride  calculated 
from  the  silver  chloride  found  corresponds  to  not  less  than  11.25  per 
cent,  nor  more  than  11.5  per  cent  when  calculated  to  the  dried 
substance. 

PAPAVERINE.— Papaverina.—CsoHoiO.N.— An  alkaloid 
obtained  from  opium,  belonging  to  the  benzyl  isoquinoline  group 
(that  is,  it  is  not  a  morphine  derivative). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Pal  found  that  papaverine  relaxes  smooth 
muscle  in  general,  although  different  organs  are  afifected  in  a 
varying  degree. 

Papaverine  is  most  effective  in  hypertonic  conditions,  while 
it  does  not  interfere  materially  with  the  normal  movements, 
for  instance,  of  the  intestines.  It  is  also  a  rather  feeble  cen- 
tral analgesic  and  a  local  anesthetic.  Its  toxicity  is  low,  and 
neither  tolerance  nor  habituation  has  been  reported.  These 
actions  have  prompted  its  use,  with  reported  success,  in  various 
spasmodic  conditions  of  the  smooth  muscles.  Pal  recommends 
it  especially  in  all  kinds  of  gastric  and  intestinal  spasms  (also 
for  the  diagnosis  of  pyloric  spasm),  in  biliary  colic,  and  in 
bronchial  spasm.  Of  more  doubtful  value  is  its  employment  in 
pertussis,  hyperemesis,  and  vascular  spasm — angina  pectoris, 
acute  uremia  and  eclampsia.  It  is  admitted  to  be  inefifective  in 
chronic  hypertonus.  The  local  anesthetic  action,  with  vaso- 
dilatation, has  been  used  against  rhino-asthma,  and  to  mitigate 
the  pain  of  irritant  injections. 

Dosage. — The  oral  and  hypodermic  single  dose  is  from  0.03 
to  0.08  Gm.    (^   to    Ws   grain);   daily   dose  to  0.5   Gm.    (7^ 


308     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

grains).     Single  doses  of  even  1   Gm.   (15  grains)   are  said  to 
be  nontoxic. 

Papaverine  occurs  in  fine,  white  rhombic  prisms  or  needles  or  some- 
times in  scales;  it  is  odorless  and  tasteless.  It  is  nearly  insoluble  in 
cold  water;  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform  and  ben- 
zene if  cold;  somewhat  more  soluble  in  these  liquids  when  hot,  but 
deposited  by  them  on  cooling,  and  soluble  in  warm  petroleum  ether 
and   in  acetone.     It  melts  at   147   C. 

If  about  0.01  Gm.  of  papaverine  is  dissolved  in  10  cc.  of  water 
containing  a  few  drops  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  and  a  few  drops 
of  potassium  ferricyanide  solution  is  added,  a  lemon  yellow  precipitate 
of  papaverine  ferricyanide  should  form  at  once  {distinction  from  other 
opitun  alkaloids).  If  about  0.001  Gm.  of  papaverine  is  dissolved  in 
0.1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  containing  in  each  cubic  centimeter  1  drop 
of  formaldehyde  solution,  a  colorless  or,  at  most,  a  faintly  yellowish- 
green  solution  should  be  produced.  This  gradually  changes  to  deep 
rose  and  finally  becomes  brown  {distinction  from  vwrpliine  and  its 
esters,  which  give  purple  or  violet  colors).  If  0.01  Gm.  of  papaverine 
is  dissolved  in  0.2  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  the  solution  should  not  be 
colored  more  deeply  than  a  very  faint  pink  or  brown  (limit  of  crypto- 
pine,  thebaine  or  of  other  organic  impurities).  If  0.01  Gm.  of  papa- 
verine is  dissolved  in  10  cc.  of  water  containing  a  few  drops  of  hydro- 
chloric acid,  a  few  drops  of  a  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  iodic  acid 
added,  and  the  mixture  shaken  with  chloroform,  the  chloroform  layer 
should   not  be  colored   violet   {morphine). 

If  from  0.2  to  0.3  Gm.  of  papaverine  is  weighed,  dissolved  in  20  cc. 
of  warm  water  containing  a  few  drops  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid, 
the  solution  cooled,  1  cc.  of  freshly  prepared  potassium  ferricyanide 
solution  added,  the  mixture  agitated,  allowed  to  stand  over  night  and 
filtered,  the  filtrate  made  alkaline  with  ammonia  water,  shaken  with 
several  successive  portions  of  ether,  the  ether  solutions  combined, 
washed  with  water,  evaporated,  the  residue  dried  at  100  C.  and 
weighed,  the  weight  should  not  amount  to  more  than  2  per  cent  of  the 
weight  taken    (limit  of  foreign  opium  alkaloids). 

PAPAVERINE    HYDROCHLORIDE.— For    standards 

see  the  National  Formulary  under  Papaverine  Hydrochloridum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Papaverine. 

Papaverine  hydrochloride  occurs  in  a  fine  white,  crystalline  powder 
or  in  small  monoclinic  plates  or  prisms;  odorless  and  having  a  bitter 
taste;  permanent  in  the  air.  It  is  sparingly  soluble  in  water;  soluble 
in  alcohol;  very  soluble  in  chloroform  and  insoluble  in  ether.  An 
aqueous  solution  of  papaverine  hydrochloride  has  an  acid  reaction 
toward  litmus  paper. 

If  from  0.2  to  0.3  Gm.  of  papaverine  hydrochloride  is  weighed,  dis- 
solved in  20  cc.  of  warm  water,  the  solution  cooled,  a  slight  excess 
of  ammonia  water  added  and  the  mixture  shaken  with  three  successive 
portions  of  25  cc.  each  of  ether,  or  a  sufficient  quantity  to  complete 
the  extraction,  the  ether  solutions  combined,  washed  with  water,  evap- 
orated to  dryness,  the  residue  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.  and 
weighed,  the  weight  should  indicate  not  less  than  88  per  cent  of  papa- 
verine. The  alkaloid  obtained  by  this  process  should  conform  to  the 
tests   for   identity   and   purity    described   under    Papaverine. 

Papaverine    Hydrochloride-Merck. — A    brand    of    papav- 
erine hydrochloride-A^  F. 

Manufactured   by    Merck   &    Co.,    Inc.,    Rahway,    N.   J. 

Papaverine    Hydrochloride-Roche. — A    brand    of    papav- 
erine hydrochloride-A^.  F. 

^lanufactured   by   Hoflfmann-LaRoche,    Inc.,    Nutley,   N.  J. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  309 

ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS 

The  discovery  of  the  importance  of  internal  secretions  has 
led  to  extensive  clinical  trials  with  preparations  of  the  so-called 
ductless  glands,  and  other  tissues  which  elaborate,  or  yield  on 
extraction,  active  principles.  Seven  of  these,  the  thyroid,  the 
adrenal  medulla,  the  posterior  lobe  of  the  pituitary  gland,  the 
parathyroid  glands,  the  pancreas  (insulin)  and  liver  and  stomach 
(antianemic  material)  have  given  decisive  therapeutic  results. 
Thyroid  in  the  form  of  the  desiccated  gland  or  as  the  pure 
principle  thyroxine,  epinephrine  from  the  medulla  of  the  adrenal 
glands,  extracts  of  the  posterior  pituitary  gland,  the  parathyroid 
glands,  the  liver  and  desiccated  stomach  are  included  in  the 
U.  S.  Pharmacopeia;  insulin  is  described  in  this  book.  The 
other  organ  products  are  scarcely  beyond  the  experimental 
stage  from  the  therapeutic  standpoint  although  physiologically 
active  principles  have  been  obtained  from  the  anterior  lobe  and 
pars  intermedia  of  the  pituitary  gland,  the  adrenal  cortex,  the 
gonads,  the  placenta  and  from  the  urine  especially  in  preg- 
nancy ;  active  extracts  of  thymus  and  pineal  body  have  also 
been  reported.  Many  commonly  used  preparations,  most  of 
which  are  of  no  demonstrated  therapeutic  value,  are  in  the  form 
of  the  powdered  dried  gland  from  which  the  gross  fat  and 
connective  tissue  is  removed  as  completely  as  possible,  and 
the  drying  is  conducted  at  a  relatively  low  temperature.  The 
powder  (often  improperly  called  an  "extract")  is  frequently 
compressed  into  tablets.  The  Council  recommends  that  the 
"strength"  of  these  stated  in  terms  of  the  dried  gland.  Since, 
in  general,  there  are  no  tests  for  the  quality,  or  even  identity, 
of  these  powdered  products,  the  physician,  unless  he  can  him- 
self supervise  their  preparation,  is  forced  to  rely  on  the  general 
reputation  of  the  manufacturer. 

Further  information  is  available  in  the  Council  publication 
Glandular  Physiology  and  Therapy  (American  Medical  Asso- 
ciation,  1935). 

Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations 

Investigation  has  demonstrated  striking  therapeutic  effects 
from  the  feeding  of  liver  or  certain  preparations  of  liver  or  of 
a  preparation  of  stomach  tissue  in  pernicious  anemia  and  sprue 
when  the  bone  marrow  is  not  exhausted;  also  in  certain  cases 
of  obscure  anemia. 

Preparations  obtained  from  liver  have  also  been  used  experi- 
mentally as  a  means  of  controlling  essential  hypertension  and 
in  certain  eclamptic  conditions.  Thus  far  the  Council  has 
accepted  only  those  preparations  of  liver  primarily  intended  for 
the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia. 

Convincing  evidence  is  now  at  hand  that  the  daily  ingestion 
of  from  200  to  400  Gm.  of  fresh  liver  will  induce  and  maintain 
a  remission  in  pernicious  anemia.  It  has  also  been  shown  that 
concentrates  may  be  made  from  such  amounts  of  liver,  but  these 


310     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

possess  usually  not  more  than  two  thirds  of  the  original  activity 
of  the  liver  from  which  they  are  derived.  Similar  effects  can 
be  produced  by  30  to  40  Gm.  of  desiccated  stomach  and  by 
combinations  of  stomach  tissue  and  liver.  Extracts  suitable  for 
parenteral  administration  may  be  prepared  from  10  to  15  Gm. 
of  liver  and  will  possess  a  therapeutic  effect  equal  to  that  of 
the  large  amounts  of  liver  given  above. 

Standardization  of  preparations  depends  on  the  reticulocyte 
response  following  the  uniform  daily  administration  of  the 
product  to  a  patient  with  pernicious  anemia.  The  test  patient 
should  preferably  have  no  complicating  infection,  diarrhea, 
marked  arteriosclerosis  or  extensive  neurologic  changes.  The 
red  blood  cell  count  should  be  between  1,000,000  and  3,000,000 
per  cubic  millimeter  and  the  patient  should  not  be  in  a  spon- 
taneous or  induced  remission,  nor  should  transfusion  have  been 
performed  recently.  The  patient  should  not  have  received  potent 
antianemic  material  or  arsenic  within  a  month.  Daily  reticulo- 
cyte counts  for  one  day  before  and  for  ten  days  after  the  test 
has  been  started  should  be  made.  During  days  of  marked  rise 
of  reticulocytes,  two  counts  a  day  may  be  necessary  to  determine 
the  maximal  value.  The  acceptable  standard  response  is  set 
forth  in  the  accompanying  table. 


Initial 

Minimum 

Red  Blood   Count 

Reticulocyte  Response 

[illion  per  Cu.   Mm. 

Per  Cent 

1.0 

30 

l.S 

18 

2.0 

12 

2.5 

7 

3.0 

4 

The  figures  given  have  been  obtained  by  the  daily  oral  admin- 
istration of  material  derived  from  300  to  400  Gm.  of  liver,  or 
of  30  to  40  Gm.  of  desiccated  stomach,  or  by  the  daily  parenteral 
injection  of  material  derived  from  10  to  15  Gm.  of  liver. 

The  test  should  be  conducted  by  uniform  daily  administration 
for  ten  days  of  the  least  amount  of  material  expected  to  yield 
the  standard  reticulocyte  response.  Should  there  be  no  reticulo- 
cyte response  or  a  lesser  response  than  the  required  minimum, 
within  the  ten-day  period,  that  amount  of  a  preparation  of  estab- 
lished potency  known  to  correspond  to  the  foregoing  standards 
should  be  administered  in  uniform  dosage  for  ten  days.  The 
purpose  of  this  control  is  to  establish  the  reactivity  of  the 
patient  to  known  amounts  of  active  principle.  In  assaying  an 
orally  administered  product  an  orally  administered  standard 
should  be  used,  and  with  a  product  for  parenteral  use  a  paren- 
terally  administered  standard  should  be  employed.  The  principles 
underlying  the  determination  of  potency  of  autolyzed  liver 
preparations,  stomach  tissue  extracts  or  combinations  of  liver 
and  stomach  tissue  or  extracts  are  the  same.  In  each  case  the 
least  daily  amount  of  the  preparation  administered  that  is  neces- 
sary to  produce  the   standard   reticulocyte  response  within  the 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  311 

ten-day  period  should  be  determined.  Satisfactory  responses 
to  similar  tests  should  be  obtained  in  at  least  three  patients. 

The  Council  will  require  that  all  preparations  designed  for 
use  in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia  be  manufactured  by  a 
satisfactory  method  and  that  they  be  labeled  with  the  amount  of 
the  contained  material  which  will  produce  the  standard  rise  of 
reticulocytes  when  assayed  in  the  manner  defined. 

SOLUTIONS     FOR     ORAL     ADMINISTRATION 

SOLUTION  OF  LIVER.— Liquid  Extract  of  Liver.— 
"Contains  that  soluble  fraction  of  mammalian  livers  which 
increases  the  number  of  red  blood  corpuscles  in  the  blood  of 
persons  suffering  from  pernicious  anemia,  and  conforms  to  the 
specifications  outlined  under  Standardization  of  Products  for 
the  Treatment  of  Pernicious  Anemia"   U.  S.  P. 

CHAPPEL  LIVER  EXTRACT  (ORAL).— A  solution 
of  a  water-soluble  fraction  extracted  from  fresh  mammalian 
liver.  The  daily  oral  administration  of  60  cc.  (2  fluid  ounces) 
has  been  found  to  produce  the  standard  reticulocyte  response 
as  defined  by  the  Council  when  assayed  in  cases  of  pernicious 
anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Chappel  liver  extract  (oral)  is  used  in 
the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article,  Liver 
and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — From  15  to  90  cc.  (4  to  24  fluidrachms)  daily. 

Manufactured  by  Chappel  Bros.,  Inc.,  Rockford,  III.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Chappel  liver  extract  (oral^  is  prepared  from  livers  selected  from 
healthy  animals,  U.  S.  government  inspected  and  as  free  as  possible 
from  fat.  The  livers  are  finely  ground  while  still  warm  and  extracted 
several  times  with  water.  After  precipitation  of  the  proteins  by  heat, 
the  volume  of  the  liquid  is  reduced  in  vacuo  at  low  temperature, 
alcohol  added  to  bring  the  alcoholic  strength  to  70  per  cent,  the  pre- 
cipitate filtered  out,  and  the  filtrate  again  evaporated.  The  residue  is 
dissolved  in  a  hydro-alcoholic  menstruum  containing  18  per  cent  of 
alcohol  with  a  small  quantity  of  flavoring  added. 

CONCENTRATED     LIVER    EXTRACT-ARMOUR. 

— A  solution  of  a  water-soluble  fraction  extracted  from  fresh 
mammalian  liver.  The  daily  oral  administration  of  45  cc. 
(1^  fluid  ounces)  has  been  found  to  produce  the  standard 
reticulocyte  response  as  defined  by  the  Council  when  assayed  in 
cases  of  pernicious  anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Concentrated  liver  extract- Armour  is 
used  in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding 
article,  Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — Concentrated  liver  extract-Armour  is  administered 
orally.  The  average  dose  is  15  cc.  (4  fluidrachms)  three  times 
daily,  mixed  with  orange  juice  or  milk. 

Manufactured  by  Armour  and  Company,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Concentrated  liver  extract-Armour  is  made  by  the  process  developed 
by    Dr.    K.    K.    Koessler   and    his    co-workers,    Drs.    M.    T.    Hanke   and 


312     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Siegfried  Maurer  in  the  laboratory  of  the  Otho  S.  A.  Sprague  Memorial 
Institute  at  the  University  of  Chicago.  Fresh  livers  still  retaining  the 
animal  heat  are  finely  minced  and  macerated  with  three  volumes  of 
water.  The  coagulable  proteins  are  removed  by  heat  and  the  liquid  is 
condensed  at  low  temperature  and  negative  pressure.  The  resulting 
extract  is  treated  with  hot  85  per  cent  alcohol  under  a  reflux  con- 
denser and  the  soluble  fraction  separated  by  filtration.  The  clear 
filtrate  is  _  evaporated  to  dryness  in  vacuo  and  the  residual  extract 
dissolved   in    distilled   water   containing   20   per  cent   of  alcohol. 

SOLUTION  LIVER  EXTRACT  (LEDERLE)  FOR 
ORAL  USE. — A  hydro-alcoholic  solution  of  an  active  prin- 
ciple of  liver  extract  (Cohn's  fraction  G).  No  protocols  having 
been  received  at  the  time  of  going  to  press,  the  usual  potency 
statement  is  not  given  for  this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solution  liver  extract  (Lederle)  for  oral 
use  is  used  in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding 
article,  Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage— From  20  to  60  cc.  (5  to  15  fluidrachms)  daily.  The 
maintenance   dose    is   determined   individually   for   each   patient. 

Manufactured  by  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y.  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

To  prepare  solution  liver  extract  (Lederle)  for  oral  use  the  finely 
minced  livers  of  edible  animals  are  added  to  water.  The  mixture 
is  adjusted  to  a  pn  of  5.4  to  5.8,  heated  to  75  C,  held  at  this  tempera- 
ture for  thirty  minutes  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  concentrated  in 
vacuo  to  a  small  volume.  By  fractional  precipitation  with  alcohol  at 
4  C.  much  inactive  material  is  precipitated  and  discarded.  The  alco- 
holic filtrate  is  concentrated  in  vacuo  and  sufficient  absolute  alcohol 
added  to  precipitate  the  active  material.  The  active  material  is  dis- 
solved in  a  hydro-alcoholic  menstruum  containing  in  the  finished 
product    20   per   cent   of   alcohol    by   volume. 

SOLUTION    LIVER    EXTRACT- VALENTINE.— A 

solution  of  a  water-soluble  fraction  extracted  from  edible  livers 
of  mammalian  animals.  The  daily  oral  administration  of  45  cc. 
(1^  fluid  ounces)  (55.5  Gm.)  has  been  found  to  produce  the 
standard  reticulocyte  response  as  defined  by  the  Council  when 
assayed  in  cases  of  pernicious  anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solution  liver  extract- Valentine  is  used  in 
the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia  and  sprue. 

Dosage. — Solution  liver  extract- Valentine  is  administered 
orally.  Ninety  cubic  centimeters,  or  3  ounces,  is  the  average 
daily  dose ;  this  is  usually  divided  into  three  parts  and  admin- 
istered at  the  end  of  each  meal.  The  daily  amount  may  be 
reduced  to  60  cc,  or  2  ounces,  when  the  erythrocyte  count 
reaches  4.5  million  per  cubic  millimeter.  If  the  count  tends  to 
increase  above  this  level  the  quantity  may  be  reduced  to  30  cc, 
or  1  ounce,  daily.  The  maintenance  dose  should  be  varied  in 
keeping  with  the  requirements  of  the  individual  patient. 

Manufactured  by  the  Valentine  Company,  Inc.,  Richmond,  Va.  No 
U.    S.   patent.     U.    S.   trademark   298,963. 

To  prepare  solution  liver  extract-Valentine,  livers  from  edible  animals 
are  ground  directly  into  water.  The  mixture  is  heated  to  approximately 
90  C.  to  coagulate  protein  and  to  inactivate  liver  enzymes.  The  coagu- 
lated protein  is  then  removed  by  filtration.  Approximately  9  per  cent 
of  glycerin  and  0.2  per  cent  of  sodium  chloride  are  added  to  the  finished 
product. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  313 


POWDERS  FOR  ORAL  ADMINISTRATION 
EXTRACT  OF  LIVER.— Dry  Liver  Extract.— "Contains 
that  soluble  fraction  of  mammalian  livers  which  increases  the 
number  of  red  blood  corpuscles  in  the  blood  of  persons  suffering 
from  pernicious  anemia.  This  fraction,  which  has  been  dried, 
conforms  to  the  specifications  outlined  under  Standardisation 
of  Products  for  the  Treatment  of  Pernicious  Anemia"  U.  S.  P, 

AUTOLYZED  LIVER  CONCENTRATE-SQUIBB. 

— A  mixture  containing  autolyzed  liver  concentrate  95  per  cent, 
monosodium  glutamate,  5  per  cent,  with  a  small  amount  of 
extract  of  onion  and  black  pepper  as  flavoring.  The  daily 
oral  administration  of  33.4  to  44.5  Gm,  (6  to  8  teaspoonfuls) 
has  been  found  to  produce  the  standard  reticulocyte  response 
as  defined  by  the  Council  when  assayed  in  cases  of  pernicious 
anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Autolyzed  liver  concentrate- Squibb  is  pro- 
posed for  use  in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preced- 
ing article.   Liver  and   Stomach    Preparations. 

Dosage. — Six  to  eight  teaspoonfuls  in  divided  doses  daily  for 
a  period  of  ten  days ;  thereafter  a  maintenance  dose  of  three  to 
four  teaspoonfuls  daily  is  usually  sufficient. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &•  Sons,  New  York,  by  license  of  the 
University  of  Pittsburgh  Medical  School.  U.  S.  patent  No.  2,032,544 
(March  3,   1936;   expires   1953).      No  U.   S.  trademark. 

Fresh  edible  livers  which  have  been  chilled  immediately  on  removal 
from  the  body,  are  ground  and  mixed  with  fiftieth-normal  hydrochloric 
acid.  Sufficient  chloroform  is  added  to  act  as  a  preservative  and 
prevent  bacterial  growth.  The  mixture  is  incubated  at  37  C.  and  autol- 
ysis allowed  to  proceed  from  five  to  ten  days.  The  solution  is  then 
filtered  to  remove  any  undigested  material;  the  filtrate  which  contains 
the  active  material  is  desiccated  at  a  lower  temperature  in  vacuo,  and 
the  resulting  mass  ground  to  a  fine  powder.  Five  per  cent  of  mono- 
sodium  glutamate  is  added  together  with  a  small  amount  of  extract  ot 
onion  and  black  pepper  as  flavoring. 

LIVER  EXTRACT-LEDERLE.— A  concentrated,  water- 
soluble,  nitrogenous,  nonprotein  fraction  obtained  from  fresh 
mammalian  liver.  No  protocols  having  been  received  at  the 
time  of  going  to  press,  the  usual  potency  statement  is  not  given 
for  this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Liver  extract-Lederle  is  proposed  for  use 
in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article. 
Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — Liver  extract-Lederle  is  administered  orally.  The 
optimum  daily  dose  is  the  contents  of  from  six  to  eight  vials ; 
for  the  average  case,  an  initial  daily  dose  of  the  contents  of 
six  vials  is  sufficient. 

Manufactured  by  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y.  No 
U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 

To  prepare  liver  extract-Lederle,  the  finely  minced  livers  of  edible 
animals  are  added  to  water.  The  mixture  is  adjusted  to  a  pn  of 
from  5.4  to  5.8,  heated  to  75  C.  to  coagulate  the  protein,  held  to  this 
temperature  for  thirty  minutes,  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  concen- 
trated in  vacuo  to  small  bulk,  and  enough  95  per  cent  alcohol  is  added 


314     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

so  that  the  final  mixture  contains  65  per  cent  of  alcohol  by  volume. 
The  precipitate  is  discarded  and  the  alcoholic  filtrate  concentrated  in 
vacuo,  sufficient  absolute  alcohol  being  added  to  precipitate  the  active 
material,  which  is  subsequently  dried  in  vacuo  and  granulated.  It  is 
soluble    in   water;    insoluble   in   alcohol,   acetone,   or   ether. 

LIVER  EXTRACT-LILLY.  — A  water-soluble.  nitrog= 
enous,  nonprotein  fraction  obtained  from  fresh  mammalian  liver 
in  powdered  form.  No  protocols  having  been  received  at  the 
time  of  going  to  press,  the  usual  potency  statement  is  not  given 
for  this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Liver  extract-Lilly  is  used  in  the  treat- 
ment of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article,  Liver  and 
Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — Liver  extract-Lilly  is  administered  orally.  The 
initial  daily  dose  for  the  average  uncomplicated  case  being  from 
12.6  to  25.2  Gm.  (3  to  6  level  teaspoonfuls  or  the  contents  of 
3  to  6  vials). 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis,  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.   S.   trademark  243,147. 

Liver  Extract-Lilly,  110  Gm.  bottle. 

Liver  Extract-Lilly  Vials:  Each  vial  contains  4.2  Gm.  of  powdered 
extract. 

To  prepare  liver  extract-Lilly,  livers  from  edible  animals  are 
ground  directly  into  water,  and  the  mixture  adjusted  to  the  iso-electric 
point  (approximately  pu  5  to  pn  6).  The  mixture  is  then  heated  to 
coagulate  protein  (approximately  80  C.) ;  stirred  for  thirty  minutes, 
and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  reduced  in  vacuum  to  a  small  volume  and 
enough  95  per  cent  alcohol  added  to  produce  a  concentration  of  70  per 
cent.  The  precipitate  which  is  _  formed  is  discarded  and  the  filtrate 
reduced  to  a  small  volume;  it  is  added  to  absolute  alcohol  and  the 
precipitate  separated,   dried  in  vacuum  and   powdered. 

Liver  extract-Lilly  is  a  yellow  powder  having  a  not  unpleasant 
taste,  almost  entirely  soluble  in  water.  It  is  precipitated  from  the 
aqueous  solution   by  alcohol  and  acetone.     It  is  insoluble  in   ether. 

LIVER  EXTRACT-PARKE,  DAVIS  &  CO.— A  light 
brown  granular  powder  representing  a  water-soluble  fraction 
of  mammalian  liver,  which  contains  the  substance  effective  in 
the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  The  daily  oral  adminis- 
tration of  18  to  21  Gm.  (the  contents  of  six  vials)  has  been 
found  to  produce  the  standard  reticulocyte  response  as  defined 
by  the  Council  when  assayed  in  cases  of  pernicious  anemia. 

Actions  crnd  Uses. — Liver  extract-Parke,  Davis  &  Co.  is  used 
in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article, 
Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — The  maximum  daily  dose  needed  to  induce  remis- 
sion in  severe  relapse  of  pernicious  anemia  is  the  contents  of 
from  four  to  six  vials  (12  to  21  Gm.),  to  be  continued  within 
this  range  until  the  red  blood  cells  and  hemoglobin  have  reached 
normal.  The  contents  of  from  two  to  four  vials  daily  con- 
stitute the  maintenance  dose. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U-  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  315 

J'ials  Liver  Extract-Parke,  Davis  &  Co. :  Each  vial  contains  from  3  to 
3.5   Gm.   of   powdered   extract. 

Fresh  livers  from  edible  animals  are  finely  minced  and  macerated 
for  one-half  hour  with  cold  water  having  a  pa  of  5.  The  mixture  is 
then  heated  at  about  85  C.  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  reduced  to  a 
small  volume  at  a  low  temperature,  in  vacuo.  Alcohol  is  added  until 
a  concentration  of  70  per  cent  has  been  reached;  the  mixture  is  again 
filtered,  evaporated,  dried  in  vacuo  and  powdered.  No  product  is 
released  for  use  until  approved  by  the  Thomas  Henry  Simpson 
Memorial   Institute,   University  of   Michigan,  Ann  Arbor,   Mich. 

LIVER  MEAL. — A  mixture  containing  desiccated  beef  liver 
81  per  cent,  malted  milk  18  per  cent,  and  powdered  cinnamon 
1  per  cent. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Liver  meal  is  prepared  to  meet  the  need 
of  a  concentrated  liver  diet  in  a  form  that  is  palatable  and 
convenient. 

Dosage. — For  children,  one  heaping  teaspoonful  three  times 
daily ;  for  adults,  two  heaping  teaspoonfuls  three  times  daily. 
Liver  meal  may  be  added  to  milk,  soups,  cereals  or  fruit  juices 
but  should  not  be  cooked  or  boiled. 

Manufactured  by  the  Livermeal  Corporation,  Hoboken,  N.  J.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

To  prepare  liver  meal,  fresh  beef  liver  is  ground  and  then  coagulated 
in  air-tight  kettles  at  a  temperature  of  82  C.  The  liver  is  dehydrated 
in  vacuo  and  powdered.  The  malted  milk  and  powdered  cinnamon  are 
then  added  and  thoroughly  mixed.  The  manufacture  is  so  regulated 
that  no  batch  is  more  than  thirty  days  old  when  shipped.  The  malted 
milk  used  complies  with  the  government  standard  and  has  approxi- 
mately the  following  composition:  carbohydrates,  71.22  per  cent;  pro- 
teins, 14.48  per  cent;  fat,  8.15  per  cent;  ash,  3.43  per  cent,  and  water, 
2.72  per  cent. 

Liver  meal  is  a  light  brown  powder  having  a  slight  odor  and  taste 
of  liver. 

EXTRALIN. — A  liver-stomach  concentrate  resulting  from 
the  interaction  of  a  mammalian  concentrated  liver  extract  con- 
taining the  Cohn  fraction  D  and  stomach  tissue  material.  No 
protocols  having  been  received  at  the  time  of  going  to  press, 
the  usual  potency  statement  is  not  given  for  this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Extralin  is  proposed  for  use  in  the  oral 
treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article,  Liver 
and   Stomach   Preparations. 

Dosage. — For  cases  of  pernicious  anemia  in  relapse,  an  initial 
dosage  of  2  Gm.  (four  pulvules)  three  times  daily  is  suggested  ; 
1.5  Gm.  (three  pulvules)  three  times  daily  constitutes  an  ade- 
quate maintenance  dose  for  most  cases.  The  amount  necessary 
for  maintenance  varies  with  different  individuals  and  can  be 
determined  only  after  repeated  examinations. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis,  Ind.  U.  S.  patent 
1,894,247    (Jan.    10,    1933;   expires    1950).      U.    S.   trademark   290,233. 


316     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


Pulvules  Extralin,  0.5  Gm. :  The  content  of  each  pulvule  is  equiva- 
lent  in  antianemic   potency   to   approximately   20   Gm.   of   fresh   liver. 

An  extract  containing  the  Cohn  fraction  D  is  prepared  by  grinding 
mammalian  livers  into  water,  adjusting  the  mixture  to  the  iso-electric 
point  (approximately  pn  5  to  pu  6),  and  heating  to  about  80  C.  to 
coagulate  protein;  this  is  stirred  for  thirty  minutes  and  filtered;  the 
filtrate  is  reduced  under  vacuum  to  small  volume.  This  extract  is  then 
admixed  with  finely  minced  fresh  hog  stomachs  or  fresh  hog  stomach 
linings.  The  hydrogen  ion  concentration  is  adjusted  to  approximately 
pn  and  the  mixture  allowed  to  interact  or  digest  for  about  two  hours 
at  37.5  C.  It  is  then  spread  out  in  a  thin  layer  on  pans  and  dried 
under  vacuum.  The  dried  product  is  removed  from  the  drier  and 
ground,  then  extracted  with  petroleum  ether  to  remove  fat.  The 
defatted  material  is  then  extracted  with  water  and  filtered,  and  the 
filtrate  concentrated  under  vacuum  to  a  thick  syrup.  This  is  dried 
under  vacuum  and  ground  to  the  proper  fineness.  The  proportions 
used  are  such  that  there  is  represented  in  the  finished  product  two 
to  four  parts  of  original  liver  to  one  part  of  original  stomach  tissue 
material. 

STOMACH. — Dried  Stomach. — "The  dried  and  powdered 
defatted  wall  of  the  stomach  of  the  hog,  Sus  scrofa  var.  Domes- 
ticus  Gray  (Fam,  Suidae).  It  contains  that  antianemic  factor 
which  causes  an  increase  in  the  number  of  red  blood  corpuscles 
in  the  blood  of  persons  suffering  from  pernicious  anemia.  This 
substance  conforms  to  the  specifications  outlined  under  Stan- 
dardization of  Products  for  the  Treatment  of  Pernicious 
Anemia."     U.  S.  P. 

EXTRALIN   (See  under  Liver). 

VENTRICULIN.— Desiccated,  defatted,  hog  stomach.  The 
daily  oral  administration  of  30  Gm.  has  been  found  to  produce 
the  standard  reticulocyte  response  as  defined  by  the  Council 
when  assayed  in  cases  of  pernicious  anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ventriculin  is  proposed  for  use  in  the 
treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article,  Liver 
and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — From  20  to  30  Gm.  is  administered  daily,  suspended 
in  a  half  glassful  of  water  or  fruit  juice.  When  the  red  blood 
cell  count  has  reached  a  satisfactory  level,  10  Gm.  is  usually 
sufficient  as  a  maintenance  dose.  In  severe  relapses  a  dosage  of 
from  20  to  30  Gm.  is  indicated. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  U.  S'.  jiatent  applied 
for.      U.    S.   trademark   number  270,811. 

Ventriculin,  10    Gm.    Vials. 
Ventriculin,  100  Gm.  Bottle. 
Ventriculin,  500  Gm.  Bottle. 

Ventriculin  is  a  granular  substance,  practically  insoluble  in  water 
and   having  a  faint  odor  and  slight  taste. 

To  prepare  ventriculin,  fresh,  whole  stomachs  from  healthy  hogs  are 
freed  from  extraneous  fat,  ground  and  dried  in  a  vacuum  at  a  tem- 
perature not  exceeding  65  C.  The  dried  material  is  then  defatted  by 
extraction  with  purified  benzin.  The  defatted  material  is  dried  with- 
out further  application  of  heat,  ground  and  milled  to  coarse  powder. 
No  product  is  released  for  use  until  approved  by  the  Simpson 
Memorial    Institute,    University   of   Michigan,   Ann   Arbor,    Mich. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  317 


SOLUTIONS     FOR     PARENTERAL     ADMINISTRATION 

PURIFIED  SOLUTION  OF  LIVER.— Parenteral  Solu- 
tion of  Liver. — "Contains  that  soluble  fraction  of  mammalian 
livers  which  increases  the  number  of  red  blood  corpuscles  in 
the  blood  of  persons  suffering  from  pernicious  anemia,  and 
conforms  to  the  specifications  outlined  under  Staiidardicatioii 
of  Products  for  the  Treatment  of  Pernicious  Anemia."    U.  S.  P. 

CHAPPEL  LIVER  EXTRACT  (SUBCUTANEOUS). 

— A  sterile  aqueous  solution,  containing  the  nitrogenous,  non- 
protein fraction  G  of  Cohn  et  al.  obtained  from  fresh  mammalian 
liver,  preserved  with  cresol  0.4  per  cent.  The  daily  parenteral 
administration  of  2.5  cc.  has  been  found  to  produce  the  stand- 
ard reticulocyte  response  as  defined  by  the  Council  when  assayed 
in  cases  of  pernicious  anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Chappel  liver  extract  (subcutaneous)  is 
proposed  for  subcutaneous  or  intramuscular  injection  in  the 
treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article,  Liver  and 
Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — Two  cc.  daily;  the  maintenance  dose  is  2  cc.  at 
intervals  of  from  ten  to  twenty  days. 

Manufactured  by  Chappel  Bros.,  Inc.,  Rockford,  111.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

Ampoules  Chappel  Liver  Extract   (Subcutaneous)   2.5  cc. 

To  prepare  Chappel  liver  extract  (subcutaneous),  finely  ground 
equine  livers  are  extracted  several  times  \yith  water.  After  precipita- 
tion of  the  proteins  by  heat,  the  liquid  is  concentrated  in  vacuo  at 
low  temperature,  alcohol  added  to  bring  the  alcoholic  strength  to 
70  per  cent,  the  precipitate  filtered  out,  and  the  filtrate  again  evapo- 
rated. Sufficient  absolute  alcohol  is  then  added  to  bring  the  alcoholic 
strength  of  the  liquid  up  to  95  per  cent.  The  precipitate  is  then 
dissolved  in  water  and  the  reaction  of  the  solution  adjusted  to  pH  7.2. 
Cresol  0.4  per  cent  is  added  as  preservative  and  the  solution  is  then 
filtered. 

ONE  CC.  CONCENTRATED  SOLUTION  LIVER 
EXTRACT  PARENTERAL-LEDERLE.— A  sterile,  aque- 
ous solution,  containing  the  nitrogenous  nonprotein  fraction  G 
of  Cohn  et  al.  obtained  from  fresh  mammalian  liver,  preserved 
with  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol.  No  protocols  having  been  received 
at  the  time  of  going  to  press,  the  usual  potency  statement  is  not 
given  for  this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Concentrated  solution  liver  extract  paren- 
teral-Lederle  is  proposed  for  intramuscular  injection  in  the 
treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article.  Liver 
and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — To  insure  optimum  dosage  for  cases  of  pernicious 
anemia  in  relapse  it  is  advisable  to  make  an  injection  of  1  cc. 
each  day  for  three  or  four  successive  days.  In  a  series  of  cases 
in  which  remissions  have  been  thus  initiated  by  the  use  of  con- 
centrated solution  liver  extract  parenteral-Lederle  there  is  evi- 
dence that  injections  of  1  cc.  every  two  weeks  provide  sufficient 
active  material  to  complete  the  remission  and  maintain  a  satis- 


318     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

factory  blood  picture.  In  complicated  cases  and  those  with 
extensive  neurologic  involvement,  the  optimum  dosage  may  be 
much  larger  and  must  be  determined  for  each  patient. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 
Vials  Concentrated  Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral-Lederle,  1  cc. 
Concentrated  solution  liver  extract  parenteral-Lederle  is  prepared 
as  follows:  A  mixture  of  finely  ground  liver  and  water  is  acidified 
to  the  isoelectric  point,  pn  5.0-5.4.  After  partial  coagulation  of  the 
liver  proteins  is  effected  by  heating  to  75-85  C.  the  pulp  is  separated 
by  filtration,  centrifugation  or  pressing  and  the  aqueous  filtrate  is 
concentrated  in  vacuo  to  the  consistency  of  a  thin  syrup.  By  careful 
fractional  precipitation  with  large  volumes  of  alcohol  at  low  tem- 
peratures (4  C.)  much  inactive  material  (proteins)  is  precipitated 
and  subsequently  discarded.  The  alcoholic  filtrate  is  concentrated 
in  vacuo  and  sufficient  alcohol  added  to  precipitate  the  active  material 
(fraction  G)  of  Cohn  et  al.  (Proceedings  of  the  American  Society 
of  Biological  Chemistry,  /.  Biol.  Chem.  74:lxix  [July]  1927).  The 
washed  precipitate,  generally  known  as  "Cohn's  fraction  G,"  com- 
monly obtained  as  a  hygroscopic,  brownish  powder,  in  addition  to 
the  active  antianemic  factor,  contains  much  inert  matter.  In  order 
to  obtain  a  concentrate  of  the  active  factor  as  free  as  possible  from 
inert  substances,  the  solution  containing  the  fraction  G  of  Cohn  is 
treated  with  a  special  activated  carbon.  Subsequently  the  material 
is  concentrated  in  vacuo.  The  solution  is  then  sterilized  and  0.5  per 
cent  of  phenol  added  as  a  preservative. 

THREE  CC.  CONCENTRATED  SOLUTION  LIVER 
EXTRACT  PARENTERAL-LEDERLE.  — A  sterile, 
aqueous  solution,  containing  the  nitrogenous  nonprotein  fraction 
G  of  Cohn  et  al.  obtained  from  fresh  mammalian  liver,  preserved 
with  0.5  per  cent  phenol.  No  protocols  having  been  received  at 
the  time  of  going  to  press,  the  usual  potency  statement  is  not 
given  for  this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Lederle  solution  liver  extract  parenteral 
refined  and  concentrated  is  proposed  for  intramuscular  injection 
in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article, 
Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — To  insure  optimum  dosage  for  cases  of  pernicious 
anemia  in  relapse  it  is  advisable  to  make  an  injection  of  3  cc. 
each  day  for  three  or  four  successive  days.  In  a  series  of  cases 
in  which  remissions  have  been  thus  initiated  by  the  use  of 
Lederle  solution  liver  extract  parenteral  refined  and  concen- 
trated there  is  evidence  that  weekly  injections  of  3  cc.  provide 
sufficient  active  material  to  complete  the  remission  and  maintain 
a  satisfactory  blood  picture.  In  complicated  cases  and  those 
with  extensive  neurologic  involvement,  the  optimum  dosage  may 
be  much  larger  and  must  be  determined  for  each  patient. 

Manufactured  by   the   Lederle   Laboratories,    Inc.,    Pearl   River,   N.    Y. 

yials  Lederle  Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral  Refined  and  Concen- 
trated,  3   cc. 

To  prepare  Lederle  solution  liver  extract  parenteral  refined  and  con- 
centrated, the  finely  minced  livers  of  edible  animals  are  added  to  water. 
The  mixture  is  adjusted  to  a  pu  of  5.4  to  5.8,  heated  to  75  C,  held 
at  this  temperature  for  thirty  minutes  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is 
concentrated  in  vacuo  to  a  relatively  small  volume.  By  fractional  pre- 
cipitation with  large  volumes  of  alcohol  at  low  temperatures  (4  C.) 
much  inactive  material  (proteins)  is  precipitated  and  subsequently  dis- 
carded.    The  alcoholic   filtrate   is   concentrated    in   vacuo   and   sufficient 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  319 

absolute  alcohol  added  to  precipitate  the  active  material  (fraction  G) 
of  Cohn  et  al.  (Proceedings  of  the  American  Society  of  Biological 
Chemistry,  J.  Biol.  Chetn.  74:  Ixix,  1927).  The  active  material  is 
dissolved  in  water,  the  reaction  of  the  solution  is  adjusted  to  />h  6.6 
to  6.8,  and  after  calculation  of  the  final  volume  (from  weight  of  liver 
used),  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol  is  added.  The  solution  is  subsequently 
passed  through  a  Berkefeld  filter  and,  after  regular  sterility  tests,  is 
filled  into  vials. 

LIVER  EXTRACT  (INTRAMUSCULAR)-PARKE, 
DAVIS  &  CO. — A  sterile  aqueous  solution,  containing  the 
nitrogenous  nonprotein  fraction  G  of  Cohn  et  al.  obtained  from 
fresh  mammalian  liver.  The  daily  parenteral  administration  of 
2  cc.  has  been  found  to  produce  the  standard  reticulocyte 
response  as  defined  by  the  Council  when  assayed  in  cases  of 
pernicious  anemia. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Liver  extract  (intramuscular) -Parke, 
Davis  &  Co.  is  used  in  the  treatment  of  pernicious  anemia.  See 
preceding  article,  Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — Two  cc.  daily  is  usually  sufficient  to  induce  remis- 
sion in  severe  relapse  of  pernicious  anemia.  This  dosage  is 
repeated  until  the  red  blood  cells  and  hemoglobin  have  reached 
normal.    The  maintenance  dose  is  2  cc.  every  two  or  three  days. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Glaseptic  Ampoules  Solution  Liver  Extract-P.  D.  &  Co.  (Intramus- 
cular) 2  cc. 

To  prepare  liver  extract  (intramuscular)  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  liver 
extract-Parke,  Davis  &  Co.  is  dissolved  in  distilled  water  at  a  con- 
centration of  about  3  Gm.  for  each  20  cc.  of  solution.  The  solution  is 
treated  with  a  silicate  of  aluminum,  sodium  and  calcium  to  eliminate 
toxic  nitrogenous  substances,  filtered  through  Berkefeld  filters  and  filled 
into  ampules.  Tlje  ampules  are  sterilized  and  a  representative  sample 
of  each  lot  tested  for  sterility.  No  product  is  released  for  use  until 
approved  by  the  Thomas  Henry  Simpson  Memorial  Institute,  Univer- 
sity of  Michigan,  Ann  Arbor,  Mich. 

SOLUTION  LIVER  EXTRACT  CONCENTRATED- 
LILLY. — A  sterile  aqueous  solution  containing  the  nitrogenous 
nonprotein  fraction  G  of  Cohn,  preserved  with  0.5  per  cent 
phenol.  No  protocols  having  been  received  at  the  time  of  going 
to  press,  the  usual  potency  statement  is  not  given  for  this 
product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solution  liver  extract  concentrated-Lilly 
is  proposed  for  intramuscular  injection  in  the  treatment  of 
pernicious  anemia.  See  preceding  article,  Liver  and  Stomach 
Preparations. 

Dosage. — For  the  average  patient  in  relapse,  3  cc.  is  given 
daily  for  three  successive  days,  then  3  cc.  is  given  at  weekly 
intervals  until  sufficient  time  has  elapsed  in  which  to  observe 
the  response.  Thereafter,  either  the  volume  of  the  dose  or  the 
time  interval  between  doses  is  adjusted  according  to  the  indi- 
vidual patient's  needs. 

Manufactured    by    Eli    Lilly    &    Co.,    Indianapolis.      U.    S.    patent    No. 

1,914,338.     No   U.    S.   trademark. 


320     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Ampoules  Solution  Liver  Extract  Concentrated-Lilly,  10  cc. 

To  prepare  solution  liver  extract  concentrated-Lilly,  livers  from 
edible  animals  are  ground  directly  into  water  and  the  mixture  adjusted 
to  the  iso-electric  point  (approximately  pn  5  to  6).  The  mixture  is 
then  heated  to  coagulate  protein  (approximately  80  C),  stirred  for 
thirty  minutes  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  reduced  in  vacuum  to  a 
small  volume  and  enough  alcohol  added  to  produce  a  concentration 
of  70  per  cent.  The  70  per  cent  alcohol  solution  is  then  chilled,  and 
the  resulting  precipitate  discarded.  The  filtrate  is  reduced  in  vacuum 
to  a  small  volume,  added  to  several  volumes  of  alcohol,  and  the  pre- 
cipitate separated  therefrom.  The  precipitate  is  dissolved  in  water  and 
filtered.  The  solution  is  sterilized  by  boiling  and  then  passed  through 
Berkefeld  filters;  0.5  per  cent  phenol  is  added  as  a  preservative. 

SOLUTION  LIVER  EXTRACT-LILLY.  — A  sterile 
aqueous  solution  of  liver  extract-Lilly,  preserved  with  0.3  per 
cent  of  cresol.  No  protocols  having  been  received  at  the  time 
of  going  to  press,  the  usual  potency  statement  is  not  given  for 
this  product. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Solution  liver  extract-Lilly  is  proposed 
for  intramuscular  injection  in  the  treatment  of  pernicious 
anemia.     See  preceding  article,  Liver  and  Stomach  Preparations. 

Dosage. — Determined  by  the  condition  of  the  patient.  Daily 
intramuscular  injection  of  2  cc.  has  been  followed  by  maximal 
reticulocyte  count.  The  maintenance  dose  varies  with  the 
individual  patient. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis,  Ind.  No.  U.  S. 
patent.     U.    S.  trademark  243,147. 

Ampoules  Solution  Liver  Extract-Lilly,  10  cc. 

To  prepare  solution  liver  extract-Lilly,  livers  from  edible  animals 
are  ground  directly  into  waterj  and  the  mixture  adjusted  to  the  iso- 
electric point  (approximately  pn  5  to  pH  6).  The  mixture  is  then 
heated  to  coagulate  protein  (approximately  80  C),  stirred  for  thirty 
minutes,  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  reduced  in  vacuum  to  a  small 
volume  and  enough  95  per  cent  alcohol  added  to  produce  a  concentra- 
tion of  70  per  cent.  The  precipitate  that  is  formed  is  discarded  and 
the  filtrate  reduced  to  a  small  volume;  it  is  added  to  alcohol  and  the 
precipitate  separated,  dried  in  vacuum,  dissolved  in  water;  0.3  per  cent 
of  cresol  is  added,  and  the  mixture  is  filtered,  sterilized  and  filled 
into  ampules. 

Ovary 

The  ovaries  produce  internal  secretions  which  are  necessary 
for  the  proper  functioning  of  the  uterus,  in  particular,  for  the 
production  of  cyclic  growth  processes  of  this  organ  and  for 
the  development  of  the  decidua ;  in  addition  these  internal  secre- 
tions determine  cyclic  changes  in  the  vagina  and  cervix  and 
influence  the  growth  of  the  mammary  gland.  The  ovary  may 
perhaps  also  exert  a  certain  influence  on  metabolism  and  appar- 
ently also  on  the  nervous  system.  However,  these  latter  effects 
are  not  well  defined  at  the  present  time.  There  is  good  reason 
for  assuming  that  in  addition  to  intrinsic  factors  situated  in  the 
ovary  itself,  hormones  given  off  by  the  anterior  pituitary  regu- 
late the  growth  of  the  follicles,  ovulation,  and  corpus  luteum 
formation. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  321 

Various  preparations  of  the  ovary  of  animals  have  been  used 
in  the  treatment  of  conditions  beHeved  to  be  due  to  ovarian 
dysfunction,  on  the  assumption  that  the  preparations  contain 
the  active  principles  or  hormones  of  the  ovary.  Preparations 
of  the  whole  ovary,  corpus  luteum,  liquor  folliculi  and  ovarian 
residue  have  been  employed.  Rational  as  ovarian  therapy  may 
theoretically  appear  to  be  in  some  conditions,  the  actual  results 
are  rarely  striking,  and  often  nil  to  the  careful  observer. 
It  is  altogether  probable  that  the  activity  which  may  be  pre- 
sented by  the  fresh  gland  is  not  contained  in  a  finished  desiccated 
product,  or  else,  when  given  by  mouth,  it  is  destroyed  by  the 
digestive  juices;  extensive  clinical  experience  has  failed  to 
establish  the  value  of  desiccated  preparations  administered 
orally.  Favorable  reports  have  often  concerned  cases  in  which 
ovarian  products  were  given  together  with  preparations  of  the 
thyroid  gland,  the  activity  of  which  is  not  appreciably  destroyed 
in  the  digestive  tract. 

The  so-called  follicular  hormone  has  been  shown  to  induce 
estrus  in  mature  animals  and  sexual  maturity  in  immature 
animals,  either  normal  or  ovariectomized.  It  is  also  responsible 
for  the  appearance  of  certain  secondary  sex  characteristics  in 
some  animals  and  is  believed  to  play  an  important  role  in 
mammary  development.  Knowledge  concerning  certain  possible 
functions  exercised  in  menstruation  and  pregnancy  has  not 
progressed  beyond  the  conjectural  stage  but  it  is  suggested 
that  this  hormone  may  play  a  part  in  premenstrual  proliferation 
of  the  uterine  mucosa  and  in  development  of  the  mammary 
gland  in  pregnancy.  In  certain  mammals  (women  and  mares) 
during  pregnancy  estrogenic  substances  also  occur  in  large 
amounts  in  the  blood,  urine,  placenta,  amniotic  fluid,  umbilical 
cord  and  fetal  blood.  Numerous  assayed  and  active  prepara- 
tions, closely  related  chemically,  are  available  for  injection  in 
pure  or  partially  purified  form,  their  source  in  most  cases  being 
pregnancy  urine  or  placenta.  Their  clinical  field  of  usefulness 
has  not  yet  been  adequately  defined  although  the  most  favorable 
results  have  been  in  the  relief  of  menopausal  symptoms  and 
in  the  treatment  of  gonorrheal  vulvovaginitis  in  children.  The 
Council  has  recognized  the  nonproprietary  name  Theelin  for 
the  crystalline  (ketohydroxy)  estrogenic  hormone  as  described 
by  Doisy  and  the  nonproprietary  name  Theelol  for  the  crystal- 
line (trihydroxy)  estrogenic  hormone  as  described  by  Doisy.  A 
crystalline  substance,  believed  to  be  dihydrotheelin  (estradiol), 
recently  isolated  from  the  follicular  fluid  of  hog  ovaries,  is 
definitely  more  actively  estrogenic  by  the  usual  methods  of 
assay. 

The  corpus  luteum  produces  those  proliferative  changes  in 
the  uterus  which  precede  and  make  possible  the  nidation  of  the 
ovum  and  apparently  sensitizes  the  uterus  so  that  it  responds  to 
the  embryo  by  decidua  formation.  It  is  also  believed  to  be 
concerned  with  premenstrual  uterine  changes,  and  may  cause 
inhibition  of  ovulation. 


322     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

The  active  principle  of  the  corpus  luteum,  progesterone,  has 
been  shown  to  be  closely  related  chemically  to  estrogenic  and 
androgenic  substances.  On  injection  into  animals  it  produces 
effects  in  keeping  with  the  above  functions  and  also  has  been 
shown  to  render  the  uterus  in  vivo  temporarily  quiescent  and 
to  desensitize  it  in  vitro  to  the  action  of  the  oxytocic  principle 
of  the  posterior  pituitary.  Extracts  of  corpus  luteum  and 
progesterone  are  inactive  when  given  by  mouth.  Their  clinical 
value  is  still  in  the  experimental  stage  but  preliminary  results 
have  suggested  that  they  may  be  useful  in  certain  cases  of 
habitual  or  threatened  abortion  and  also  in  certain  cases  of 
menorrhagia  and  metrorrhagia.  At  present  no  preparation 
of  corpus  luteum  is  accepted  by  the  Council. 

Pancreas 

The  pancreas  is  a  gland  having,  in  general,  two  functions : 
(1)  It  secretes  into  the  intestine  a  digestive  juice  containing 
the  enzymes  trypsin,  lipase  and  amylase;  (2)  it  secretes  into  the 
blood  a  hormone,  insulin,  which  regulates  the  process  of  carbo- 
hydrate metabolism.  (For  description  of  insulin,  see  under 
Insulin.) 

When  insulin  secretion  is  deficient,  or  possibly  when  there 
is  an  overproduction  of  sugar  due  to  other  causes,  the  diabetes 
develops,  in  which  disease  the  percentage  of  sugar  increases 
in  the  blood  (hyperglycemia)  so  that  sugar  overflows  into  the 
urine  (glycosuria).  The  hyperglycemia  is  associated  with  a 
breakdown  of  the  first  and  last  stages  in  the  metabolism  of 
sugar,  as  revealed,  respectively,  by  failure  of  glycogen  to  be 
deposited  in  the  liver  and  by  failure  of  the  respiratory  quotient 
to  become  increased  when  carbohydrate  food  is  ingested.  The 
depression  in  carbohydrate  metabolism  impairs  that  of  fats,  so 
that  ketone  substances  (acetone,  acetoacetic  and  oxybutyric 
acids)  appear,  producing  acidosis  and,  later,  coma. 

Insulin,  if  administered  subcutaneously,  intravenously,  or  intra- 
peritoneally,  causes  a  fall  in  the  percentage  of  sugar  in  the 
blood.  The  exact  mode  of  action  is  not  definitely  known  but 
experimental  evidence  suggests  that  besides  increased  oxidation 
of  sugar,  increased  storage  as  glycogen  in  the  liver  and  possibly 
in  the  muscles  is  a  factor  in  the  result.  When  the  percentage 
of  blood  sugar  falls  below  the  kidney  threshold  in  the  diabetic 
patient,  sugar  disappears  from  the  urine.  If  an  overdose  of 
insulin  is  given,  the  blood  sugar  falls  to  a  subnormal  level,  and 
characteristic  symptoms  are  observed.  The  level  at  which  these 
symptoms  occur  depends  not  only  on  the  extent  but  also  on  the 
rate  of  fall.  If  the  blood  sugar  has  been  persistently  high  and  is 
rapidly  reduced,  hypoglycemic  symptoms  may  appear  at  a  much 
higher  level  of  blood  sugar  than  when  the  fall  is  slower 
and  more  gradual.  These  symptoms  are  due  to  the  diminished 
sugar  in  the  blood,  as  shown  by  the  fact  that  they  are  relieved 
by  the  replacement  of  the  sugar  by  oral  or  intravenous  admin- 
istration. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  323 

Clinical  assays  conducted  on  patients  with  uncomplicated 
diabetes  on  certain  standard  dietary  regimens  reveal  that  one 
insulin  unit  will  promote  the  metabolism  of  approximately  1.5 
Gm.  of  dextrose.  The  physician  may,  therefore,  gage  his  insulin 
dose  with  some  precision.  To  do  so,  he  must  know  how  much 
dextrose  the  patient  will  derive  from  his  food  and  metabolism, 
and  how  much  insulin  the  patient  himself  can  provide  from  his 
insulin-making  tissues.  The  latter  may  be  determined  by 
measuring  the  patient's  ability  to  utilize  carbohydrate  without 
extra  insulin.  In  any  case,  insulin  injections  must  be  made  at 
regular  intervals  and  must  be  supplemented  by  accurately 
weighed  diets  of  known  composition. 

When  properly  employed,  insulin  is  a  specific  in  the  treat- 
ment of  diabetic  coma  and  acidosis.  It  is  of  pronounced  value 
in  the  management  of  diabetic  patients  undergoing  surgery  and 
of  those  with  complicating  infectious  diseases.  It  makes  pos- 
sible freedom  from  glycosuria  and  good  mental  and  physical 
vigor  for  patients  with  severe  diabetes. 

There  is  as  yet  no  positive  evidence  that  treatment  with 
insulin  will  arrest  the  diabetic  process  by  restoring  the  patient's 
antidiabetic  function.  In  the  severer  cases,  the  evidence  now 
available  is  against  such  an  assumption.  In  the  milder  cases 
in  which  insulin  has  been  used,  the  evidence  is  difficult  of  inter- 
pretation because  such  patients  may  show  very  marked  improve- 
ment in  their  ability  to  utilize  carbohydrate  on  dietary  regulation 
and  exercise  alone. 

Oral  Administration  of  Pancreatic  Preparations. — In  diabetes, 
reliance  on  the  oral  administration  of  the  pancreatic  prepara- 
tions thus  far  prepared  has  no  justification  and  such  prac- 
tice merits  the  most  vigorous  condemnation.  Many  reputed 
antidiabetic  pancreatic  preparations  are  on  the  market  with 
claims  that  they  are  effective  if  taken  by  mouth.  The  most 
widely  heralded  of  them  have  been  subjected  to  the  scrutiny 
of  clinical  tests  controlled  with  simultaneous  laboratory  inves- 
tigation. None  of  these  thus  tested  has  shown  any  effect  on 
blood  sugar  or  glycosuria.  Completely  negative  results  were 
obtained  when  these  preparations  were  given  in  the  doses  rec- 
ommended by  their  exploiters  as  well  as  in  doses  twenty  times 
as  large.  The  claim  that  such  preparations  exert,  in  some 
mysterious  manner,  a  rejuvenating  or  stimulating  action  on  the 
diseased  pancreas  is  based  on  uncontrolled  clinical  observation. 

INSULIN. — An  aqueous  solution  of  an  active  principle 
from  pancreas  which  afifects  sugar  metabolism.  The  strength 
of  insulin  is  expressed  in  "units."  The  unit  is  equivalent  to 
0.125  mg.  of  the  international  standard  preparation  of  dry 
insulin  hydrochloride  prepared  by  the  Medical  Council  of 
Great  Britain.  One  mg.  of  this  standard  preparation  contains 
eight  insulin  units,  as  provisionally  defined  by  the  Insulin  Com- 
mittee of  the  University  of  Toronto. 


324     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — Insulin  lowers  the  blood  sugar  in  nor- 
mal rabbits  causing  characteristic  symptoms  when  a  low  level 
is  reached,  which  symptoms  are  overcome  by  the  administra- 
tion of  dextrose.  It  prevents  the  hyperglycemia  due  to  piqure, 
asphyxia  and  epinephrine.  It  increases  the  sugar  consumption 
of  the  isolated  mammalian  heart.  It  causes  glycogen  to  be 
deposited  in  the  liver  of  diabetic  animals  fed  with  carbohy- 
drates, and  raises  the  respiratory  quotient  of  siich  animals. 
It  affects  the  metabolism  of  fat  in  diabetic  animals  and  causes 
the  acetone  bodies  to  disappear  from  the  urine.  It  has  been 
demonstrated  that  the  administration  of  insulin  to  diabetic  dogs 
and  to  man  in  severe  cases  of  diabetes  mellitus  restores  tem- 
porarily to  the  body  the  impaired  ability  to  oxidize  carbo- 
hydrate, and  that  glycogen  is  again  stored  in  the  liver.  If 
a  suitable  dose  of  insulin  is  administered  at  suitable  intervals 
to  a  person  suffering  from  diabetes  mellitus,  the  blood  sugar 
is  maintained  at  a  normal  level  and  the  urine  remains  free 
of  sugar ;  fat  is  also  burned  and  as  a  result,  ketone  bodies 
do  not  appear  in  the  urine  and  diabetic  acidosis  and  coma 
are  prevented. 

The  administration  of  insulin  is  indicated  in  cases  of  diabetes 
mellitus  which  cannot  be  controlled  at  a  satisfactory  level  by 
dietetic  treatment.  In  such  cases,  with  proper  regulation  of 
the  diet,  insulin  should  be  administered  in  such  amounts  as  to 
prevent  glycosuria  and  a  too  great  hyperglycemia.  In  some 
cases  the  dosage  of  insulin  may  be  gradually  decreased  as  the 
body  power  of  utilizing  carbohydrate  returns  toward  normal. 

Overdosage  of  insulin  is  followed  by  the  development  of 
serious  symptoms  which  demand  immediate  treatment.  The 
patient  complains  of  weakness  and  fatigue  and  a  feeling  of 
nervousness  or  tremulousness.  This  is  followed  by  profuse 
sweating,  which  is  the  most  characteristic  sign  of  overdosage. 
There  is  sometimes  pallor  or  flushing.  In  the  more  severe 
forms  there  is  acute  distress  with  mental  disturbances  and 
even  unconsciousness.  These  symptoms  are  relieved  by  the 
administration  of  some  form  of  soluble  carbohydrate,  such  as 
orange  juice,  by  mouth  or  stomach  tube,  or,  if  the  patient  is 
comatose,  by  the  intravenous  injection  of  from  5  to  20  grams 
of  pure  dextrose  in  a  5  to  50  per  cent  sterile  solution.  Although 
symptoms  of  hypoglycemia  usually  develop  gradually,  the  onset 
in  occasional  cases  may  be  sudden.  In  view  of  this,  ambulant 
patients  should  be  instructed  to  carry,  for  immediate  use,  soluble 
carbohydrate  in  the  form  of  powdered  dextrose  or  an  orange. 
Physicians  treating  patients  with  insulin  should  be  impressed 
with  the  necessity  of  having  adequate  supplies  of  sterile  solution 
of  dextrose  at  hand.  In  case  of  emergency  when  sterile 
solution  of  dextrose  is  not  available,  a  subcutaneous  injection 
of  0.3  cc.  to  0.6  cc.  of  1  in  1,000  solution  of  epinephrine 
may  be  employed,  but  this  must  always  be  followed  by  carbo- 
hydrates by  mouth.  The  injection  of  epinephrine  must  be 
employed   carefully   as    its   action   depends   on   the   presence  of 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  325 

glycogen,  of  which  there  is  usually  very  little  in  the  diabetic 
organism.  Epinephrine  should  never  be  employed  when  the 
hypoglycemia  follows  excessive  exercise,  vomiting  or  the 
omission  of  meals. 

Insulin  has  been  used  in  the  treatment  of  non-diabetic  mal- 
nutrition with  reported  increase  in  appetite  and  gain  in  weight. 
Care  is  necessary  in  avoiding  symptoms  of  hypoglycemia. 

Dosage. — Insulin  is  administered  by  injection  into  the  loose 
subcutaneous  tissue  of  the  body,  usually  thirty  minutes  before 
meals.  There  is  no  average  dose  of  insulin  for  diabetics ; 
each  case  must  be  studied  individually.  Except  when  com- 
plications occur  insulin  is  not  indicated  when  a  patient  has 
adequate  dextrose  tolerance  to  provide  him  with  a  diet  suf- 
ficient for  light  work.  The  dose  depends  upon  the  amount  of 
dextrose  in  such  a  diet  as  he  is  unable  to  metabolize;  i.  e.,  the 
total  dextrose  minus  the  dextrose  excretion.   A  convenient  formula 

Average  grams   of  d-glucose   excreted  cr    •      ^        -j.       c  •        i- 

is  : — T-r^ =  sufficient  units  of  insulin 

to  render  most  patients  aglycosuric.  Usually  the  daily  dose 
is  administered  in  two  equal  portions,  one  before  breakfast 
and  the  other  before  supper.  The  carbohydrate  of  the  diet 
should  be  distributed  between  the  three  meals.  With  large 
daily  dosage  (40  units  or  more)  insulin  may  be  injected  before 
each  meal ;  less  carbohydrate  should  be  given  at  breakfast  than 
at  the  other  two  meals.  When  the  patient  becomes  aglycosuric 
the  diet  can  usually  be  increased.  Sufficient  insulin  should 
be  used  to  keep  the  fasting  blood  sugar  normal,  but  hypogly- 
cemia should  be  avoided.  If  patients  are  not  under  close 
observation,  half  the  estimated  dose  may  be  used  and  the  dose 
gradually  increased  until  therapeutic  results  are  obtained. 
Complications,  such  as  infections,  may  reduce  the  dextrose 
tolerance,  thus  necessitating  an  increase  of  insulin  dosage. 

In  cases  of  coma  or  severe  acidosis  an  initial  dose  of  30-60 
units  may  be  given  (in  coma  one-half  the  amount  intravenously 
and  one-half  subcutaneously)  followed  at  J^  to  3  hour  intervals 
by  doses  of  20  units  or  more  subcutaneously.  Some  physicians 
administer  1  Gm.  of  dextrose  for  each  unit  of  insulin  used. 
The  patient  should  never  become  hypoglycemic.  Examine  the 
urine  hourly  for  dextrose.  If  urine  becomes  sugar  free  more 
dextrose  must  be  given.  More  than  150  units  of  insulin  in 
twelve  hours  is  rarely  needed.  Young  children  with  diabetes 
of  recent  onset  usually  require  smaller  doses  and  seldom  more 
than  80  units  in  the  first  12  hours. 

In  a  small  number  of  cases  of  diabetes  mellitus,  insulin 
can  be  discontinued,  particularly  with  patients  who  receive  it 
because  of  an  exacerbation  caused  by  complications,  and  where 
diabetes  is  of  recent  onset  (though  perhaps  the  latter  should 
receive  it  intermittently  as  a  prophylactic  against  increasing 
severity). 

Dosage  of  insulin  should  always  be  expressed  in  units  rather 
than  in  cubic  centimeters  or  minims.  The  volume  of  a  dose  of 
insulin  containing  a  certain  number  of  units  will  vary  with  the 


326     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

strength  of  the  solution  which  is  employed.  In  general  it  is 
advisable  to  keep  the  volume  per  injection  at  from  ^  to  ^  cc, 
choosing  the  strength  of  insulin  v^hich  will  give  the  required 
number  of  units  in  this  volume  or  less. 

The  animals  used  as  test  subjects  and  controls  are  rabbits,  unselected 
as  to  sex,  breed  or  color,  free  of  any  visible  sign  of  infection,  and 
weighing  from  1.8  Kg.  to  2,2  Kg.  Each  animal  is  used  once  each  week 
as  long  as  it  remains  suitable  in  all  respects  for  use,  particularly  as 
regards  weight.  A  record  of  each  animal's  reaction  toward  insulin  is 
kept,  in  order  that  those  showing  marked  irregularities  on  more  than 
one  occasion  may  be  discarded.  Test  animals  are  kept  on  a  diet  of 
hay  and  oats,  carrots  being  allowed  once  each  week  with  the  first  post- 
assay  meal.  All  new  rabbits  are  placed  on  this  diet  for  two  weeks 
prior  to  being  first  used.  Twenty-four  hours  before  rabbits  are  to  be 
used,  all  food  is  removed  from  their  cages,  water  being  allowed  to 
remain. 

In  assaying  a  sample  of  insulin  the  approximate  potency  of  which  is 
unknown,  a  rough  indication  of  its  potency  is  first  obtained  by  inoculat- 
ing a  number  of  animals  (say,  eighteen)  with  a  widely  varying  number 
of  doses  per  2  Kg.  body  weight  (say,  six)  and  rioting  the  lowest  dose 
which  produces  convulsions  in  the  majority  of  animals  given  that  dose. 
This  so-called  "convulsant  dose"  is  then  considered  as  about  3  units. 
For  the  determinative  assay,  eighteen  rabbits  are  used  each  day.  Each 
of  these  rabbits  is  weighed  and  a  normal  blood  sample  is  taken  from  it 
Then  three  doses  of  the  insulin  sample  under  assay,  diluted  with  acid 
water  ipn  2.5)  so  that  there  are  presumably  2.5  units  in  each  cc.  of 
solution,  are  injected  subcutaneously  into  three  equal  groups  of 
three  animals — 2.5  units,  2.0  units  and  1.5  units  per  2  Kg.  body 
weight  being  giveri  to  each  animal  of  the  first,  second  and  third  groups, 
respectively.  Similarly,  three  doses  of  the  International  Insulin  Stand- 
ard, diluted  with  acid  water  (/>h  2.5)  so  that  there  are  2.5  units  in 
each  cc.  of  solution,  are  injected  into  three  equal  groups  of  three  ani- 
mals— 2.5  units,  2.0  units  and  1.5  units  per  2  Kg.  of  body  weight  being 
given  to  each  animal  of  the  first,  second  and  third  of  these  groups, 
respectively.  At  intervals  of  one  and  one-half,  three  and  five  hours 
after  injection,  a  sample  of  blood  is  withdrawn  from  each  animal. 
The  samples  of  each  bleeding  are  pooled  in  equal  quantities  and  the 
sugar  content  of  these  and  of  the  normal  blood  samples  is  determined 
by  a  suitable  method,  such  as  that  of  Shaffer  and  Hartrnann  (/.  Biol. 
Chem.  45:  365,  1920).  Calculations  are  then  made,  using  the  follow- 
ing equation:  a         w 

Units  per  cc.   =  —  x  —  x  1.5 

where  ^      .    ?     . 

a  =  percentage  of  blood   sugar  before   injection   minus  the    averages   of 
the   percentages  of   blood-sugar   found   in  the  samples   taken   one 
and  one-half,  three  and  five  hours  after  injection, 
b  =  percentage    of  blood   sugar   before   injection   minus   0.045    per   cent, 
w  =  weight   of   rabbit   in   kilograms, 
c  =  number  of  cc.  of  the  original   (undiluted)   insulin  injected. 

For  the  sample  under  assay  on  the  one  hand,  and  for  that  used  as  a 
standard  (a  solution  standardized  upon  the  International  Insulin  Stand- 
ard) on  the  other,  the  averages  of  the  results  arising  out  of  the  above 
equation  on  the  first  day  are  compared,  and  the  dilution  of  the  unknown 
sample  is  then  adjusted  from  day  to  day  until  the  two  averages  become 
practically  identical  and  remain  so  for  at  least  three  days  of  confirmatory 
testing.  The  potency  of  the  sample  under  assay  may  then  be  arrived 
at  by  a  simple  arithmetical  calculation. 

The  doses  used  in  the  Insulin  Committee  Laboratory   ordinarily  occa- 
sion convulsions  in  about  20  to  25  per  cent  of  the  anirnais  given  injec- 
tions.     These    may    be    readily    antidoted    by    an    injection    of    dextrose 
either    intravenously    or    subcutaneously;     but    this    course    should    be 
followed  only  where  an  animal  is  lost  to  a  test  through  failure  to  bleed, 
or  where  death  due  to  respiratory  failure  is  imminent. 
U.  S.  patents   1,469,994   (Oct.  9,  1923;  expires  1940),  1,470,024   (Oct.  9, 
1923;     expires     1940)     and     1,520,673     (Dec.     23,     1924;     expires     1941). 
Canadian  patent  234,336  and  234,337.      U.   S.  trademark  179,174.     Cana- 
dian trademark  31,646. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS 


327 


Insulin-Mulford. — A  brand  of  insulin. 

Manufactured  by  Sharpe  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia,  under  license  from 
the  Governors  of  the  University  of  Toronto. 

Insulin-Mulford,  10  Units,  5  cc:  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 
10  units. 


Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 
Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 


Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 
Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 


Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 


Insulin-Mulford,  20     Units,    5    cc: 

20   units. 

Insulin-Mulford,    40     Units,    5    cc. : 

40  units. 

Insulin-Mulford,    10    Units,    10    cc. 

10  units. 

Insulin-Mulford,    20    Units.    10    cc. 

20  units. 

Insulin-Mulford,    40    Units,    10    cc. 

40  units. 

Insulin-Mulford,    80    Units,    10    cc:      Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 

80  units. 

Insulin-Mulford,  100  units,  10  cc:    Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  100 

units. 

Beef  pancreas  is  rendered  as  free  from  fat  and  connective  tissue  as 
possible,  and  extracted  with  acidulated  60  per  cent  alcohol.  The  mix- 
ture is  centrifugalized  and  the  gland  residue  reextracted  with  60  per 
cent  alcohol.  The  alcoholic  liquid  is  then  concentrated  to  about  one- 
twelfth  its  original  volume.  The  active  substance  is  then  precipitated 
with  ammonium  sulfate,  and  reprecipitated  from  an  alcoholic  solution. 
It  is  further  purified  by  a  method  of  iso-electric  precipitation  and  is 
finally  dissolved  in  acid  water  (pa  2.5)  and  preserved  by  the  addition 
of  0.1  per  cent  cresol.  It  is  then  filtered  through  a  Berkefeld  filter, 
and  submitted  to  sterility  tests;  its  potency  is  determined  by  the  method 
described   under   the   preceding   article.   Insulin. 


Insulin-Squibb. — A  brand  of  insulin. 

Manufactured    by    E.    R.    Squibb    and    Sons,    New    York,    under    license 
from  the  Governors  of  the  University  of  Toronto. 

Insulin-Squibb,     10     Units,     5     cc:       Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 

10  units. 

Insulin-Squibb,     20     Units,     5     cc. : 

20  units. 

Insulin-Squibb,     40     Units,     5     cc: 

40  units. 

Insulin-Squibb,    10     Units,    10    cc : 

10  units. 

Insulin-Squibb,    20     Units,    10    cc: 

20  units. 

Insulin-Squibb,    40     Units,    10    cc. : 

40   units. 

Insulin-Squibb,    80     Units,     10    cc: 

80  units. 

Imulin-Squibb,    100    Units,    10    cc: 

100  units. 

Insulin-Squibb  is  made  by  extracting  finely  ground  beef  pancreas 
with  acidulated  aqueous  alcohol  and  subsequently  removing  the  tissue 
by  centrifuging.  The  alcoholic  solution  is  concentrated  and  the  insulin 
is  precipitated  by  ammonium  sulfate  after  the  removal  of  fats.  This 
sulfate  precipitate  is  dissolved  in  dilute  ammonia  and  impurities 
removed  by  alcoholic  precipitation.  From  the  above  filtrate  the  insulin 
is  precipitated  with  ether  and  redissolved  in  ammonia.  It  is  then 
reprecipitated  at  its  iso-electric  point  pu  4.8-5.2.  This  nearly  pure 
insulin  precipitate  is  centrifuged  and  dissolved  in  acid  water  which  is 
then   passed    through  a   Berkefeld   filter   and   assayed. 


Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 


J28     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


Insulin-Stearns. — A  brand  of  insulin. 

Manufactured  by  Frederick  Stearns  and  Company,  Detroit,  under 
license  from  the  Governors  of  the  University  of  Toronto.  No  U.  S. 
trademark. 


Insulin-Stearns, 
10  units. 

Insulin-Stearns, 
20  units. 

Insulin-Stearns, 
40  units. 

Insulin-Stearns, 
10  units. 

Insulin-Stearns, 
20  units. 

Insulin-Stearns, 
40   units. 

Insulin-Stearns, 
80  units. 


10     Units,     5    cc. 


Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 


20     Units,    5     cc. :      Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 


40     Units,     5     cc. 
10    Units,    10    cc. 


20     Units,    10    cc. 


40 


Units,    10    cc. 
Units,    10    cc 
100    Units,    10    cc. 


80 


Each    cubic  centim.eter  contains 

Each    cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each    cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each    cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each    cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each    cubic  centimeter  contains 


Insulin-Stearns, 
100  units. 

The  method  of  preparation  of  insulin-Stearns  is  essentially  that 
described  in  the  Journal  of  Biological  Chemistry,  October,  1923,  p.  717, 
et  seq.  The  potency  of  insulin-Stearns  is  determined  by  the  method 
described  under  the  preceding  article,  "Insulin"  and  is  checked  by  the 
mouse  method  of  assay.  Dilution  of  concentrated  solutions  to  proper 
strength  is  made  with  sterile  distilled  water  with  a  ^h  of  2.5  and  0.1 
per  cent  cresol  is  added.  Final  filtration  is  carried  on  through  sterile 
Handler  or  Berkefeld  filters,  and  the  material  is  filled  into  sterile  vials. 
Corroborative  tests  for  unit-strength  and  sterility  are  made  before  any 
lot  is  released  for  use. 


Insulin-Toronto. — A  brand  of  insulin. 

Prepared     by     the     Connaught     Laboratories,     University     of     Toronto, 
Toronto,  5,  Canada. 


Units,  10  cc: 
20  Units,  10  cc: 
40  Units,  10  cc: 
80  Units,  10  cc: 
100    Units.    10    cc: 


Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 

Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 


Insulin-Toronto,    10 

10  units. 

Insulin-Toro7ito, 

20   units. 

Insulin-Toronto, 

40   units. 

Insulin-Toronto, 

80  units. 

Insulin-Toroiito 

100   units. 

The     method     of     preparation     of     insulin-Toronto     is     essentially     as 

described  in  the  Trans.  Roy.  Soc.  Can.,  1932,  XXVI  Sec.  V,  pp.  311-314. 
After  a  concentrated  solution  of  the  product  has  been  prepared,  its 
potency  is  determined,  and  the  desired  dilution  of  the  solution  is  made 
with  distilled  water.  Glycerine  is  then  added,  for  purposes  of  iso- 
tonicity,  as  well  as  tricresol  (0.1%),  as  a  preservative.  The  solution 
is  then  passed  through  a  gold-plated  filter  (Seitz).  The  filtrate  is 
subjected  to  tests  for  stability,  sterility  and  potency,  and  is  released  for 
use  only   in   accordance  with  the  results    of  these  tests. 


Iletin   (Insulin-Lilly). — A  brand  of  insulin. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis,  under  license  from  the 
Governors    of    the    University    of    Toronto.      U.     S.    trademark    171,971. 

Iletin  (Insulin-Lilly)  U-10,  5  cc:  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 
10   units. 

Iletin  (Insulin-Lilly),  U-20,  5  cc. :  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 
20   units. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  329 

Iletin    (Insulin-Lilly),    U-40,    5    cc. :      Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 

40   units. 

Iletin    (Insulin-Lilly),    U-10,    10    cc:      Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 

10   units. 
Iletin    (Insulin-Lilly),    U-20,    10    cc:      Each    cubic    centimeter   contains 

20   units. 

Iletin    (Insulin-Lilly),    U-40,    10    cc:     Each    cubic   centimeter    contains 

40  units. 

Iletin    (I insulin-Lilly)    U-80,    10    cc:      Each    cubic    centimeter    contains 

80  units. 

Iletin    (Insulin-Lilly)    U-lOO,    10    cc:      Each   cubic  centimeter   contains 

100   units. 

Fresh  pancreatic  glands  of  animals,  from  which  fat  and  connective 
tissue  have  been  removed,  are  ground  and  extracted  with  1  ^2  volumes 
95  per  cent  alcohol,  containing  0.11  per  cent  absolute  sulfuric  acid. 
The  mixture  is  agitated  during  two  hours  and  then  filtered.  The 
residue  is  again  extracted  using  an  equal  volume  of  70  per  cent 
alcohol  containing  0.11  per  cent  absolute  sulfuric  acid.  This  is 
filtered  and  the  filtrate  added  to  the  first  filtrate.  The  combined 
filtrates  are  chilled  to  0  C.  and  filtered.  The  filtrate  is  concentrated 
to  about  one  twenty-fifth  its  original  volume  and  filtered,  and  the  filtrate 
added  to  5.3  times  its  volume  of  95  per  cent  alcohol.  This  mixture 
is  allowed  to  stand  for  several  hours,  and  then  filtered,  and  the  filtrate 
made  up  to  contain  93  per  cent  alcohol.  After  standing  several  days, 
the  precipitate  formed  is  collected  and  dissolved  in  distilled  water. 
The  insulin  preparation  is  further  purified  by  precipitation  at  the  isa 
electric  point,  the  hydrogen  ion  concentration  being  adjusted  to  approxi- 
mately pn  4.7,  after  which  the  solution  is  allowed  to  stand  in  the  ice- 
box. The  precipitate  formed  is  dissolved  in  acidified  water  (/>h  2.5), 
filtered,  reprecipitated  and  redissolved  if  necessary  for  further  purifi- 
cation. The  solution  is  then  diluted  to  approximately  the  desired 
potency,  filtered  through  a  Berkefeid  filter,  and  submitted  to  standardi- 
zation and  sterility   tests. 

Parathyroid  Gland 

Parathyroid  preparations  have  been  made  from  the  dried 
gland  for  oral  administration  and  by  extracting  substances 
from  the  gland  for  subcutaneous  administration.  The  reports 
of  success  after  oral  therapy  lack  any  conclusive  evidence  that 
this  was  dependent  upon  the  use  of  the  gland.  No  proof  has 
been  brought  forward  that  the  one  definite  effect  that  can  be 
referred  to  the  parathyroid  gland  (maintaining  or  raising  the 
calcium  concentration  of  the  serum)  has  been  produced  by 
parathyroid  preparations  taken  by  mouth.  To  ascribe  to  the 
oral  administration  of  parathyroid  preparations  improvement  in 
conditions  that  are  not  definitely  known  to  depend  upon  para- 
thyroid disease,  or  deficiency,  is  illogical  and  misleading.  In 
consideration  of  the  accumulated  evidence  of  the  ineffectiveness 
of  oral  therapy  with  parathyroid,  preparations  of  parathyroid 
designed  for  oral  administration  are  not  accepted  for  inclusion 
in  this  book.  Recent  investigations  have  shown  that  prepara- 
tions which  have  a  most  powerful  influence  on  calcium, 
metabolism  may  be  made  from  the  parathyroids  of  the  ox. 
If  this  substance  is  injected  intramuscularly  or  subcutaneously, 
the  calcium  concentration  of  the  serum  of  animals  deprived  of 
their  parathyroid  glands  can  be  raised  and  maintained  at  a 
normal  limit.     By  repeated  doses  it  may  be  raised  far  beyond 


330     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

this,  either  in  parathyroidectomized  or  in  normal  animals ;  unless 
the  dosage  is  carefully  regulated,  death  may  ensue.  The  prepa- 
rations can  be  standardized  according  to  their  activity  in  raising 
the  calcium  concentration  in  parathyroidectomized  animals  or 
in  normal  animals.  On  subcutaneous  and  intramuscular  injec- 
tion the  plasma  calcium  begins  to  rise  in  about  4  hours,  reaches 
its  maximum  in  from  12  to  18  hours  and  returns  to  the  previous 
level  in  from  20  to  24  hours.  Associated  with  the  rise  in 
plasma  calcium  is  an  increased  urinary  excretion  of  calcium 
and  inorganic  phosphate  and  a  decrease  in  the  plasma  content 
of  the  latter.  An  immunity  or  tolerance  to  the  hormone  is 
induced  by  repeated  administration.  Treatment  by  these  para- 
thyroid preparations  has  been  shown  to  be  of  value  in  tetania 
parathyreopriva  and  in  infantile  tetany.  In  infantile  tetany  their 
employment  would  appear  to  be  a  temporary  expedient  until 
other  measures  have  an  opportunity  to  combat  the  fundamental 
underlying  condition.  In  gastric  tetany  the  calcium  of  the 
serum  is  normal,  and  it  has  not  yet  been  demonstrated  suffi- 
ciently that  this  condition  can  be  affected  beneficially  by 
parathyroid  therapy.  The  available  clinical  or  scientific  evidence 
does  not  permit  an  estimate  of  the  ultimate  usefulness  of  the 
parathyroid  preparation  in  other  conditions.  The  danger  of 
hypercalcemia,  which  is  easily  induced  by  overdosage  and  which 
is  associated  with  grave  manifestations,  makes  it  imperative 
that  clinical  studies  should  be  controlled  by  blood  serum  cal- 
cium determinations.  The  normal  concentration  in  man  being 
approximately  10  mgm.  of  calcium  per  100  cc.  of  serum,  values 
above  12  mgm.  are  considered  undesirable  while  those  above 
15  mgm.  may  be  dangerous. 

SOLUTION    OF    P  A  R  A  T  H  Y  R  O  I  D.— Parathyroid 

Extract. — Parathyroid  Extract-Hanson — "Contains  the  water- 
soluble  principle  or  principles  of  the  parathyroid  glands  which 
have  the  property  of  relieving  the  symptoms  of  parathyroid 
tetany  and  of  increasing  the  calcium  content  of  the  blood  serum 
in  man  and  other  animals.  It  is  obtained  from  the  fresh  para- 
thyroid glands  of  healthy  domesticated  animals  used  for  food 
by  man.  The  parathyroid  glands  must  be  removed  from  the 
animals  immediately  after  slaughtering,  and  then  extracted  at 
once  or  kept  frozen  until  extracted.  The  glands  are  freed  from 
gross  fat  and  connective  tissue,  ground,  extracted,  and  purified 
to  make  it  suitable  for  parenteral  administration.  The  solution 
is  then  adjusted  to  the  proper  potency  by  assay. 

"One  cc.  of  Solution  of  Parathyroid  possesses  a  potency 
equivalent  to  not  less  than  80  parathyroid  units  and  not  more 
than  120  parathyroid  units,  each  unit  representing  one-hundredth 
of  the  amount  required  to  raise  the  calcium  level  of  100  cc.  of 
the  blood  serum  of  normal  dogs  0.001  Gm.  within  from  sixteen 
to  eighteen  hours  after  administration.  The  solution  must  be 
sterile."-C/.  S.  P. 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  331 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Liquor 
Parathyroidei. 

Actions  and  Uses  (See  preceding  article,  Parathyroid  Gland). 

Dosage. — The  average  adult  dose  is  0.2  to  0.4  cc.  (20  to  40 
units)  every  twelve  hours  for  five  or  six  days,  never  more 
than  ten  days  in  succession.  Treatment  should  then  be  dis- 
continued for  a  week  or  two,  to  be  resumed  if  necessary.  For 
children  the  initial  dose  should  not  exceed  0.1  to  0.2  cc.  (10 
to  20  units). 

Solution  of  parathyroid  is  administered  subcutaneously  or 
intramuscularly;  not  intravenously. 

Parathyroid  Extract-Lilly. — A  brand  of  solution  of  para- 
thyroid-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis,  by  license  under 
U.  S.  patent  1,890,851  (Dec.  13,  1932;  expires  1949).  No  U.  S.  trade- 
mark. 

Parathyroid  Extract-Lilly,  1  cc.  Ampules:  Each  cubic  centimeter  con- 
tains 100  units. 

Parathyroid  Extract-Lilly,  5  cc.   Vials:     Each  cc.  contains    100  units. 

Parathyroid  Hormone-Squibb. — A  brand  of  solution  of 
parathyroid-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York,  by  license  under 
U.  S.  patent  1,890,851  (Dec.  13,  1932;  expires  1949).  No  U.  S.  trade- 
mark. 

Parathyroid  Hormone-Squibb,  5  cc.  Vials:     Each  cc.  contains  100  units. 

Paroidin. — A  brand  of  solution  of  parathyroid-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.     U.  S.  patent  1,890,851 
(Dec.    13,   1932;   expires    1949).      U,   S.   trademark. 
Paroidin,  5  cc.   Vials:     Each  cc.  contains   100  units. 

Pituitary  Gland 

Posterior  Lobe. — The  posterior  lobe  of  the  pituitary  gland 
and  the  intermediate  portion  yield  on  extraction  substances 
having  a  marked  effect  on  plain  muscle,  especially  that  of  the 
blood  vessels  and  the  uterus.  The  intravenous  or  intramus- 
cular injection  of  preparations  of  the  posterior  lobe  is  sometimes 
followed  by  an  increase  in  blood  pressure  which  is  maintained 
over  a  considerable  period  of  time.  Injection  of  subsequent 
doses  in  such  cases  is  followed  by  a  similar  effect  unless  repeated 
too  soon  after  the  first  injection,  when  a  fall  in  pressure  may 
occur.  The  increase  in  pressure  is  due  to  an  action  on  the 
smooth  muscle  of  the  vessels.  In  a  considerable  number  of 
individuals  the  increase  in  blood  pressure  may  be  very  slight 
and  in  some  instances  instead  of  an  increase  a  definite  lower- 
ing of  the  blood  pressure  may  follow  the  injection  of  pituitary 
preparations.  The  heart  is  not  stimulated  in  any  case  and  may 
be  depressed,  either  through  the  vagus  response  to  a  high  blood 
pressure  or  by  a  direct  action  on  the  heart  muscle  itself  or 
through  impairment  of  its  nutrition  because  of  constriction 
of  the  coronary  vessels.     The  tone  of  the  intestinal  tract  may 


ZZ2     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

be  markedly  increased  by  direct  action  on  the  muscular  coat. 
The  administration  of  extracts  usually  retards  the  secretion 
of  urine  to  a  marked  degree  during  the  first  hour  and  a 
half  and  sometimes  longer.  There  is  some  experimental  evi- 
dence to  show  that  the  absorption  of  water  from  the  gastro- 
intestinal tract  is  delayed,  thereby  lessening  the  water  available 
for  secretion.  However,  the  antidiuretic  action  may  be  due 
to  increased  reabsorption  of  water  from  the  kidney  tubules  into 
the  blood.  The  bladder  musculature  is  stimulated  especially 
when  it  has  been  previously  in  an  atonic  condition.  Posterior 
pituitary  extract  does  not  increase  the  formation  of  milk,  but 
apparently  may  cause  a  temporary  acceleration  of  the  output. 
The  extract  of  the  posterior  lobe  causes  a  marked  constriction 
of  the  uterus  by  a  direct  stimulating  action  on  the  muscle.  This 
occurs  especially  in  pregnant  and  to  a  less  extent  in  non- 
pregnant animals. 

Solutions  prepared  from  the  posterior  lobe  injected  intramus- 
cularly are  employed  against  uterine  atony  and  in  postpartum 
as  well  as  in  other  forms  of  uterine  hemorrhage.  They  should 
not  be  injected  during  the  first  stage  of  labor  because,  if  the 
cervix  be  not  fully  dilated,  energetic  contractions  may  cause 
rupture  of  the  uterus.  They  may  be  useful  in  intestinal  paresis 
whether  following  abdominal  operations  or  complicating  infec- 
tious diseases.  The  extracts  are  also  extensively  used  in  diabetes 
insipidus,  in  which  they  reduce  greatly  the  volume  of  urine 
excreted.  For  this  purpose  they  need  to  be  injected  once  or 
twice  daily.  The  extracts  should  always  be  injected  hypoder- 
mically  or  intramuscularly  although  some  activity  has  been 
seen  when  they  are  applied  to  the  nasal  mucous  membrane; 
similar  activity  has  been  noted  on  insufflation  of  dried  and 
finely  powdered  posterior  pituitary  into  the  nose.  The  extract 
of  the  posterior  lobe  of  the  pituitary  gland  has  been  fraction- 
ated:  one  product  (pitocin)  acts  on  the  uterus  and  a  second 
product  (pitressin)  produces  the  characteristic  efifect  of  the 
original  solution  on  the  blood  vessels,  intestine  and  urinary 
secretion.  The  result  of  this  fractionation  may  arise  from  the 
separation  of  two  distinct  active  principles  or  from  the  splitting 
of  a   single  molecule  into   fractions  having  different  activities. 

Anterior  Lobe. — Hyperactivity  of  the  anterior  lobe  has  been 
supposed  to  produce  gigantism  and  acromegaly,  for  clinically 
both  conditions  have  been  accompanied  by  tumors  of  the  pitui- 
tary. On  the  other  hand,  hypoactivity  of  the  anterior  lobe  has 
been  held  responsible  for  the  syndrome  dystrophia  adiposogeni- 
talis,  for  this  condition  has  also  been  found  associated  with 
tumors  of  that  gland  and  experimental  extirpation  of  the  pitui- 
tary in  dogs  has  often  been  accompanied  by  dystrophy,  adiposity, 
and  atrophy  of  the  gonads  and  external  genitalia. 

More  recently  evidence  has  accumulated  which  indicates  that 
the  hormone  of  the  anterior  lobe  is  essential  to  normal  growth 
and  the  development  of  the  ovaries  and  testes,  but  that  it  may 
have  nothing  to  do  with  some  of  the  other  disturbances  formerly 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  333 

attributed  to  abnormal  functioning  of  the  pituitary,  as  a  consid- 
erable number  of  cases  of  Frohlich's  syndrome  have  come  to 
autopsy  in  which  the  pituitary  has  been  histologically  normal. 
It  is  also  claimed  that  extirpation  of  the  hypophysis  in  adult 
dogs  and  white  rats  without  injury  to  the  hypothalamus  does 
not  produce  dystrophia  adiposogenitalis.  Extirpation  in  imma- 
ture animals  is  followed  by  cessation  of  growth  and  sexual 
development,  a  condition  which  has  been  corrected  in  white 
rats  by  daily  transplants  of  the  anterior  lobe  of  the  pituitary 
or  by  daily  injections  of  appropriate  amounts  of  the  fresh 
extract  of  the  anterior  lobe  of  bovine  glands. 

Present  evidence  would  seem  to  indicate  that  a  number  of 
factors  are  concerned  in  the  action  of  extracts  of  the  anterior 
lobe:  (1)  a  growth  factor  concerned  with  the  development  of 
the  body;  (2)  a  factor  which  stimulates  the  growth  and  matu- 
ration of  the  ovarian  follicles,  which  in  turn  bring  on  the 
changes  characteristic  of  estrus ;  (3)  a  factor  which  causes 
luteinization  of  the  ovarian  follicles;  (4)  a  factor  which  is 
necessary  for  normal  thyroid  development  and  function  and 
which,  if  present  in  excess,  produces  hyperplasia  of  the  thyroid 
with  hyperthyroidism  in  both  the  rat  and  the  guinea-pig ;  (5)  a 
factor  which  has  been  named  Prolactin,  which  produces  lacta- 
tion in  mammals,  and  possibly  plays  a  part  in  mammary  gland 
proliferation ;  it  also  induces  a  secretion  of  crop  milk  in  pigeons ; 
(6)  a  diabetogenic  principle  associated  with  the  growth  hormone 
which  decreased  the  hypoglycemic  response  to  insulin  and  the 
absence  of  which  leads  to  hypoglycemia  and  prevents  in  part  the 
effects  of  pancreatectomy  in  dogs  and  toads ;  and  (7)  a  ketogenic 
principle,  apparently  distinct  from  the  diabetogenic  factor,  which 
increases  the  ketone  content  of  the  blood  in  rabbits  and  rats. 
In  addition  to  the  above  enumerated  factors,  the  existence  of 
which  seems  to  be  clearly  established,  experimental  evidence 
has  been  offered  indicating  the  presence  of  other  principles ; 
among  these  are  one  which  stimulates  the  adrenal  cortex  and 
one  which  stimulates  the  parathyroid  glands. 

A  gonadotropic  substance  which  forms  the  basis  of  preg- 
nancy tests  occurs  in  large  amounts  in  the  urine  of  pregnancy. 
Although  this  substance  was  originally  considered  to  come  from 
the  anterior  pituitary  gland,  the  placenta  which  also  yields  it  in 
large  amounts  seems  to  be  a  more  probable  source.  It  is  pre- 
dominantly luteinizing  in  action  in  contrast  to  the  principle 
found  in  the  urine  at  the  menopause  and  after  castration  which 
produces  follicular  stimulation.  Pregnancy  urine  and  placenta 
are  the  sources  of  most  gonadotropic  preparations  available  for 
clinical  use. 

The  Council  believes  that  extensive  clinical  trial  has  failed  to 
establish  the  value  of  desiccated  pituitary  preparations  for  oral 
administration  whether  these  are  prepared  from  the  anterior 
or  from  the  posterior  lobe. 


334     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

POSTERIOR  PITUITARY.— Pituitarium  Posterium  U. 
S.  P.  XI. — Pituitary. — Hypophysis  Sicca — "The  cleaned,  dried, 
and  powdered  posterior  lobe  obtained  from  the  pituitary  body  of 
domesticated  animals  which  are  used  for  food  by  man.  The 
pituitary  body  must  be  removed  from  the  animal  immediately 
after  slaughtering  and  then  dried  at  once  or  kept  frozen  until 
dried."- C7.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Pituitarium 
Posterium. 

AMPOULES  OF  PITOCIN.— An  aqueous  solution  con- 
taining the  oxytocic  principle  of  the  posterior  lobe  of  the  pitui- 
tary gland  (alphahypophamine)  containing  less  than  %  unit  of 
pressor  activity  per  cubic  centimeter.  Five-tenths  per  cent  of 
chlorbutanol  is  used  as  a  preservative.  It  is  standardized  by 
the  U.  S.  P.  method  for  posterior  pituitary,  each  cubic  centimeter 
containing  10  units.  Pitocin  therefore  has  an  activity  on  the 
uterus  equal  to  that  of  the  U.  S.  P.  solution  of  pituitary. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Pitocin  is  used  to  stimulate  uterine  con- 
tractions in  obstetrical  practice. 

The  use  of  the  product  may  be  particularly  indicated  in  those 
cases  in  which  increase  of  blood  pressure  is  undesirable.  Its 
use  is  contraindicated  in  contracted  pelvis  and  in  incomplete 
dilatation  of  the  cervix.  (See  preceding  article,  Pituitary 
Gland.) 

Dosage. — From  0.3  cc.  to  1  cc.  (5  to  15  minims)  intramus- 
cularly. If  used  before  delivery  is  completed,  small  doses  are 
used,  repeated  if  necessary  in  twenty  to  thirty  minutes. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.     U.  S.  patent  1,960,493 
(May  29,    1934;   expires,    1951).     U.   S.  trademark   254,956. 
Ampoules  of  Pitocin,  0.5  cc:     Each  ampule  contains  more  than  0.5  cc. 
Ampoules  of  Pitocin,  1  cc:     Each  ampule  contains  more  than  1  cc. 

AMPOULES  OF  PITRESSIN.— An  aqueous  solution 
containing  the  pressor  and  diuretic-antidiuretic  principle  of  the 
posterior  lobe  of  the  pituitary  gland  (betahypophamine)  con- 
taining less  than  1  unit  of  oxytocic  activity  per  cubic  centimeter. 
Five-tenths  per  cent  of  chlorbutanol  is  used  as  a  preservative. 
It  is  standardized  by  the  method  of  Hamilton  and  Rowe  (/.  Lab. 
&  Clin.  Med.  2:120  [Nov.]  1916)  so  that  each  cubic  centimeter 
contains  10  pressor  units  (1  unit  represents  the  pressor  activity 
exhibited  by  0.5  mg.  of  standard  powdered  pituitary-U.  S.  P.). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Pitressin  is  used  for  raising  the  blood 
pressure,  for  increasing  the  muscular  activity  of  the  bladder 
and  intestinal  tract,  also  for  antidiuretic  effect  in  diabetes 
insipidus.     (See  preceding  article,  Pituitary  Gland.) 

Experimental  evidence  has  been  obtained  indicating  that  the 
product  increases  the  blood  sugar  and  it  has  been  successfully 
employed  to  counteract  overdoses  of  insulin  in  animals.  No 
clinical  studies  to  determine  the  value  for  this  purpose  have 
been  reported  so  far.     It  has  been  suggested  that  the  product 


ORGANS     OF     ANIMALS  335 

may  be  of  value  either  in  conjunction  with  or  supplementary  to 
the  use  of  epinephrine  in  the  treatment  of  serum  sickness  and 
similar  vasomotor  disturbances,  but  no  definite  evidence  on  this 
point  is  as  yet  available. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1  cc.  (5  to  15  minims)  intramuscularly, 
repeated  as  may  be  indicated. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.     U.   S.  patent  1,960,493 
(May  29,    1934;   expires   1951).     U.   S.   trademark   254,507. 
Ampoules  of  Pitressin,  1   cc:     Each  ampule  contains  more  than    1   cc. 

SOLUTION  OF  POSTERIOR  PITUITARY.— Liquor 

Pituitarii  Posterioris  U.  S.  P.  XL— Solution  of  Pituitary— "Con- 
tains the  water-soluble  principle  or  principles  from  the  fresh  pos- 
terior lobe  of  the  pituitary  body  of  healthy  domesticated  animals 
used  for  food  by  man.  The  pituitary  body  must  have  been 
removed  from  the  animal  immediately  after  slaughtering,  and 
then  extracted  at  once  or  kept  frozen  until  extracted.  One  cc.  of 
Solution  of  Posterior  Pituitary  produces  an  activity  upon  the 
isolated  uterus  of  the  virgin  guinea-pig,  corresponding  to  not 
less  than  80  per  cent  and  not  more  than  120  per  cent  of  that 
produced  by  0.005  Gm.  of  the  Standard  Powdered  Posterior 
Pituitary,  prepared  as  directed  in  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia.  The 
solution  must  be  sterile.''-^/.  S.  P. 

For  methods  of  assay  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under 
Liquor  Pituitarii  Posterioris. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Pituitary  Gland. 

Dosage. — For  use  in  obstetrical  cases,  from  0.2  to  1  cc.  (5  to 
15  minims)  ;  in  surgical  cases,  from  1  to  2  cc.  (15  to  30  minims), 
preferably  by  deep  intramuscular  injection  or  subcutaneously. 

Pituitary  Solution. — A  brand  of  solution  of  posterior  pitui- 
tary-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured   by  Abbott  Laboratories,   North   Chicago,  111. 

Pituitary  Liquid  (U.  S.  P.)  Armour. — A  brand  of  solution 
posterior  pituitary-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured   by   Armour    &    Company,    Union    Stock   Yards.    Chicago, 

Pituitary  Extract-Lilly-U.  S.  P. — A  brand  of  solution  of 
posterior  Pituitary-U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Eli  Lilly   &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Pituitary  Extra ct-U.  S.  P.-Merrell. — A  brand  of  solution 
of  posterior  pituitary-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Wm.  S.  Merrell  Company,  Cincinnati. 

Pituitrin. — A  slightly  acid  aqueous  solution  containing  the 
water-soluble  principles  of  the  fresh  posterior  lobe  of  the  pitui- 
tary body  of  cattle,  of  the  same  strength  as  solution  of  pituitary- 
U.  S.  P.,  preserved  by  the  addition  of  chlorbutanol,  each  cubic 


336     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

centimeter  containing  0.005  Gm.  It  is  standardized  (1)  for 
oxytocic  action  by  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  P.,  and  (2)  by 
its  effect  on  blood  pressure  according  to  the  method  of  Hamil- 
ton and  Rowe  (/.  Lab.  &  Clin.  Med.  2:120  [Nov. J  1916). 

Actions  and   Uses. — See  preceding  article,   Pituitary   Gland. 

Dosage. — See  Solution  of  Posterior  Pituitary. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  and  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
Trademark    76,722. 

Ampoules   Pituitrin,  0.5  cc. 
Ampoules  Pituitrin,  1  cc. 

Pituitary  Solution-Squibb. — A  brand  of  solution  of  pos- 
terior pituitary-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.   Squibb  &  Sons,   New  York. 

Pituitary  Solution  (U.  S.  P.)-Wilson. — A  brand  of  solu- 
tion of  posterior  pituitary-U.   S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Wilson  Laboratories,  Chicago. 

Thyroid 

THYROID. — "The  cleaned,  dried,  and  powdered  thyroid 
gland  previously  deprived  of  connective  tissue  and  fat.  It  is 
obtained  from  domesticated  animals  that  are  used  for  food  by 
man. 

Thyroid  contains  not  less  than  0.17  per  cent  and  not  more 
than  0.23  per  cent  of  iodine  in  thyroid  combination,  and  must 
be  free  from  iodine  in  inorganic  or  any  form  of  combination 
other  than  that  peculiar  to  the  thyroid  gland.  A  desiccated 
thyroid  of  a  higher  iodine  content  may  be  brought  to  this  stand- 
ard by  admixture  with  a  desiccated  thyroid  of  a  lower  iodine 
content  or  with  lactose  or  sodium  chloride."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Thyroideum. 

THYROXINE.— See  under  Thyroxine. 


PARRESINE. — A  mixture  composed  of  paraffin  (melting 
point  48  to  49  C),  from  94  to  96  per  cent;  gum  elemi,  from 
0.20  to  0.25  per  cent;  Japan  wax,  from  0.40  to  0.50  per  cent, 
asphalt,  from  0.20  to  0.25  per  cent,  and  eucalyptol,  2  per  cent. 
To  this  mixture  is  added  from  0.5  to  1.0  per  cent  solution  of 
alkannin  in  eucalyptol  and  a  minute  quantity  of  gentian  violet, 
these  being  employed  to  bring  the  product  to  a  standard  color. 
Alarketed  only  in  the  form  of  Parresined  Lace  Alesh  Surgical 
Dressing. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Non-absorbent  protective,  used 
for  the  preparation  of  Parresined  Lace  Mesh  Surgical  Dressing. 

Prepared  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  Illinois.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.    S.  trademark,  117,626. 


PENTNUCLEOTIDE.— The  sodium  salts  of  the  pentose 
nucleotides  from  the  ribonucleic  acid  of  yeast.  Pentnucleotide 
is  prepared  from  yeast  nucleic  acid  by  hydrolysis  for  twenty- 
four  hours  with  1  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution.  The 
lead  salts  prepared  from  the  acidified  hydrolyzed  solution  are 


PENTNUCLEOTIDE  ZZI 

decomposed  with  hydrogen  sulfide  and  the  Hberated  acids  are 
concentrated  and  precipitated  with  alcohol.  The  sodium  salts 
are  prepared  by  neutralization  with  sodium  hydroxide.  The 
final  product  is  approximately  an  8  per  cent  solution  of  the 
sodium  salts  of  what  appear  to  be  four  nucleotides ;  the  solu- 
tion has  a  pB.  of  7.2  and  is  preserved  with  cresol,  0.3  per  cent. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Pentnucleotide  is  proposed  for  use  in 
infectious  conditions  accompanied  by  a  leukopenia  or  neutro- 
penia, such  as  agranulocytic  angina  but  its  usefulness  in  other 
forms  of  sepsis  remains  to  be  demonstrated.  Immediately  fol- 
lowing the  intravenous  administration  of  pentnucleotide  there  is 
usually  a  sharp,  temporary  reaction  characterized  by  dyspnea, 
precordial  distress,  bradycardia  and  sweating.  Following  intra- 
muscular use,  similar  reactions  have  occasionally  been  reported 
but  in  milder  form ;  generally  no  reaction  occurs.  On  or  about 
the  fifth  day  following  the  use  of  pentnucleotide  in  cases  marked 
by  extreme  lowering  of  the  leukocyte  count  the  total  and  dif- 
ferential white  blood  cell  count  begins  to  return  to  normal. 
With  the  return  of  the  blood  picture  to  normal  there  is  a 
corresponding  improvement  in  the  clinical  picture. 

Dosage. — In  usual  cases  the  contents  of  one  vial  (10  cc), 
undiluted,  are  injected  into  the  gluteal  muscle  twice  a  day  until 
the  white  blood  cell  count  has  risen  definitely,  and  thereafter 
once  a  day  until  the  white  blood  cell  count  has  been  at  a  normal 
figure  for  at  least  three  days.  Should  the  white  blood  cell 
count  fall  again,  intensive  treatment  should  be  resumed. 

In  desperately  ill  cases  the  contents  of  two  vials  (20  cc.) 
are  injected  into  the  gluteal  muscles  twice  a  day  for  four  suc- 
cessive days.  After  four  days  the  contents  of  one  vial  (10  cc.) 
are  injected  intramuscularly  twice  a  day  until  the  white  blood 
cell  count  has  risen  definitely,  and  thereafter  once  a  day  until 
the  white  blood  cell  count  has  been  at  a  normal  figure  for  at 
least  three  days. 

Manufactured  by  Smith,  Kline  &  French  Laboratories,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
No  U.   S.   patent.     U.   S.  trademark   301,527. 
Vials    Pentnucleotide,    10   cc. 

Pentnucleotide  is  a  clear  pale  yellow  solution  having  a  mildly  saline 
taste.     The   dry   salt  is  very   hygroscopic   when   exposed   to  air. 

Treat  10  cc.  of  pentnucleotide  with  10  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and 
boil  the  mixture  for  two  minutes:  aniline  acetate  paper  susjiended  in 
the  vapors  acquires  a  rose  red  color  (furjnral  from  ribosc) .  Neutralize 
the  solution  with  stronger  ammonia  water,  add  2  cc.  of  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid,  filter,  make  alkaline  with  ammonia  water  and  set  aside: 
a  precipitate  forms  on  standing.  Filter  and  wash  the  i)recipitate  with 
water,  moisten  with  0.5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  follow  with  1  cc. 
of  water;  evaporate  a  few  drops  of  the  acid  filtrate  to  dryness  on  a 
porcelain  dish  on  a  water  bath,  add  0.15  cc.  of  i)otassiuni  Iiydroxide 
solution  (10  per  cent)  and  again  evaporate  to  dryness:  a  i)in))lish  to 
rosy  or  brownish  red  coloration  forms  (gnanidine).  To  10  cc.  of  the 
ammoniacal  filtrate  add  5  cc.  of  10  per  cent  calcium  chloride  solution: 
a  gelatinous  precipitate  forms;  filter  and  wash  with  water;  add  1  cc.  nf 
diluted  nitric  acid  to  the  precipitate;  wash  with  2  cc.  of  water;  to  the 
dissolved  precipitate  add  0.5  cc.  ammonium  molybdate  solution:  a 
yellow  coloration  and  a  yellow  precipitate  forms  on  gentle  warming 
(phosphates). 

Treat  5  cc.  of  pentnucleotide  with  5  cc.  of  a  solution  of  brucine 
acetate  (10  per  cent):  a  white  precipitate  forms,  becoming  crystalline  on 


338     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

standing.  To  5  cc.  of  pentnucleotide  add  5  cc.  of  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  (10  per  cent):  not  more  than  a  slight  precipitate  appears;  add 
0.1  cc.  of  1  per  cent  copper  sulphate  solution:  no  violet  nor  purple 
coloration  is  produced  (biuret) ;  add  1  cc.  of  1  per  cent  copper  sulphate 
solution:  no  marked  precipitate  is  produced  (gums).  To  5  cc.  of 
pentnucleotide  add  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  and  an  equal 
volume  of  freshly  prepared  hydrogen  sulphide  water;  treat  according 
to  U.  S.  P.  test  for  heavy  metals:  no  more  color  change  is  shown  than 
when  5  cc.  of  pentnucleotide  is  treated  with  1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid  and  an  equal  volume  of  water.  To  5  cc.  of  pentnucleotide  add 
several  drops  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (10  per  cent):  a  white  precipitate 
forms,  which  dissolves  on  shaking  the  mixture. 

To  5  cc.  of  pentnucleotide  add  10  cc.  of  lead  acetate  solution  and 
0.2  cc.  of  glacial  acetic  acid:  a  white  precipitate  forms.  Agitate  the 
mixture  for  one  or  two  minutes  and  filter  with  suction;  wash  the 
precipitate  well  with  water;  suspend  in  15  cc.  of  distilled  water,  and 
treat  with  excess  hydrogen  sulphide;  stir  well,  and  filter  into  a  tared 
flat  shallow  weighing  dish;  evaporate  nearly  to  dryness  on  the  steam 
bath;  add  about  5  cc.  of  dehydrated  alcohol,  evaporate  the  alcohol, 
then  dry  in  a  vacuum  desiccator  over  sulphuric  acid  to  constant  weight; 
dissolve  the  dried  substance  in  10  cc.  of  water:  add  one  drop  of 
phenolphthalein  indicator  solution  and  titrate  with  tenth  normal  sodium 
hydroxide  solution:  not  more  than  63.5  cc.  nor  less  than  57.5  cc.  of 
tenth  normal  sodium  hydroxide  is  consumed  per  gram  of  dried  sub- 
stance. Evaporate  a  5  cc.  portion  of  pentnucleotide  to  dryness  in  a 
shallow  dish  over  a  steam  bath;  dry  for  twenty-four  hours  in  a 
desiccator:  not  more  than  0.45  Gm.,  nor  less  than  0.41  Gm.  of  solid 
residue  results. 


PEROXIDES 

Hydrogen  peroxide  is  a  combination  of  two  atoms  of  hydro- 
gen with  two  atoms  of  oxygen,  one  of  the  latter  being  given 
off  to  oxidizable  substances,  leaving  a  residue  of  water.  In 
the  presence  of  catalase,  a  ferment  found  in  all  cells,  it  is  readily 
decomposed.  The  liberated  oxygen  sometimes  causes  consid- 
erable effervescence.  For  this  reason  it  is  dangerous  to  inject 
it  into  closed  body  cavities  or  into  abscesses  from  which  the 
gas  has  not  a  free  exit.  Hydrogen  peroxide  solution  (liquor 
hydrogenii  dioxidi)  is  official  in  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia.  This 
preparation  is  germicidal  when  diluted  with  not  more  than  twice 
its  volume  of  water.  Diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of  water 
it  destroys  typhoid  bacilli  in  two  and  one-half  minutes. 

Metallic  Peroxides 

Metallic  peroxides  are  compounds  in  which  the  hydrogen  of 
hydrogen  peroxide  has  been  replaced  by  metals,  and  which  are 
readily  decomposed  with  liberation  of  hydrogen  peroxide,  or 
of  oxygen. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Like  hydrogen  peroxide,  the  metallic 
peroxides  depend  for  their  value  on  the  readiness  with  which 
a  part  of  their  oxygen  becomes  active.  They  are  claimed  to 
possess  advantages  over  solution  of  hydrogen  peroxide,  because 
the  oxygen  is  set  free  more  gradually.  Among  themselves  the 
metallic  peroxides  differ  in  their  action  in  accordance  with 
their  solubility  and  the  alkalinity  produced  by  interaction  of 
the  peroxide  with  water.  The  action  of  peroxides  is  also 
affected  by  the  nature  of  the  metal  which  goes  into  solution 


PEROXIDES  339 

when  the  peroxide  is  decomposed.  Thus,  the  use  of  sodium 
peroxide  is  limited  by  the  strong  base  formed  when  it  dissolves 
in  water. 

Because  of  the  strong  oxidizing  effects  on  the  lower  organ- 
isms, the  peroxides  have  been  recommended  as  a  convenient 
means  of  sterilizing  water. 

CALCIUM  PEROXIDE.— Calcii  Peroxidum.— A  mix- 
ture consisting  essentially  of  calcium  peroxide  (the  calcium  salt, 
Ca02,  of  hydrogen  peroxide)  and  calcium  hydroxide  and  car- 
bonate, containing  not  less  than  60  per  cent  calcium  peroxide, 
equivalent  to  13.3  per  cent  available  oxygen. 
Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Metallic  Peroxides 
Dosage. — From  0.06  to  0.3  Gm.  (1  to  5  grains)  in  water  or 
with  sodium  bicarbonate,  two  to  three  times  daily. 

Calcium  peroxide  is  a  light,  cream-colored,  odorless  and  tasteless 
powder.  It  is  practically  insoluble  in  water,  but  by  such  contact  it 
is  gradually  decomposed  into  hydrogen  peroxide  and  calcium  hydrox- 
ide, the  hydrogen  peroxide  being  further  decomposed  by  the  alkaline 
calcium  hydroxide  with  liberation  of  oxygen.  It  is  decomposed  by 
dilute  acids  with_  formation  of   a  solution  containing  hydrogen  peroxide. 

If  a  few  milligrams  of  calcium  peroxide  is  shaken  with  10  cc.  of 
water  and  1  drop  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid,  and  a  few  cubic  centime- 
ters of  ether  added,  the  subsequent  addition  of  a  drop  of  potassium 
dichromate  solution  will  produce  a  blue  color  in  the  aqueous  layer. 
On  shaking  the  mixture,  the  blue  will  pass  into  the  ethereal  layer. 
If  1  Gm.  of  calcium  peroxide  is  dissolved  in  25  cc.  of  diluted  nitric 
acid  and  2  cc.  of  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate  added  to  the  solution 
and  the  resulting  precipitate  filtered  off,  the  further  addition  of  a  few 
drops  of  silver  nitrate  solution  to  the  filtrate  will  produce  no  tur- 
bidity. If  1  Gm.  of  calcium  peroxide  is  exposed  to  the  full  heat  of  a 
Bunsen  flame  for  five  minutes,  then  dissolved  in  25  cc.  diluted  hydro- 
chloric acid  and  the  solution  made  up  to  100  cc,  a  solution  will_  result 
which  will  conform  to  the  following  tests:  Ten  cc.  of  the  solution,  to 
which  ammonium  hydroxide  in  excess  has  been  added,  will  yield  a 
white  precipitate  on  the  addition  of  ammonium  oxalate  solution.  Ten 
cc.  of  the  solution  saturated  with  hydrogen  sulfide  will  yield  no 
precipitate,  nor  become  colored.  Ten  cc.  of  the  solution  will  yield  not 
more  than  a  turbidity  on  the  addition  of  barium  chloride  solution. 
Ten  cc.  of  the  solution,  after  addition  of  a  slight  excess  of  ammonium 
hydroxide  and  acidification  with  acetic  acid,  will  yield  no  turbidity 
on  the  addition  of  potassium  dichromate  solution.  If  from  0.2  to 
0.3  Gm.  of  calcium  peroxide,  weighed  into  a  flask,  is  shaken  with 
25  cc.  of  water,  then  25  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  added,  the 
titration  of  this  solution  with  tenth-normal  potassium  permanganate  will 
indicate  the  presence  of  not  less  than  60  per  cent  of  calcium  peroxide. 

SODIUM     PEROXIDE.— Sodii    Peroxidum.— NasOa.— 

The  sodium  compound  analogous  to  hydrogen  peroxide,  con- 
taining at  least  90  per  cent  of  sodium  peroxide. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Sodium  peroxide  is  not  used  internally, 
but  has  been  used  in  acne,  applied  in  the  form  of  a  paste  pre- 
pared with  liquid  paraffin,  or  as  a  soap  to  remove  comedones. 

Sodium  peroxide  occurs  in  the  form  of  a  whole,  or  yellowish,  amor- 
phous powder.  It  is  soluble  in  water,  with  decomposition  and  evolution 
of  heat,  forming  an  alkaline  solution  and  liberating  oxygen.  It  dis- 
solves in  cold  dilute  acids,  forming  a  solution  of  hydrogen  peroxide. 
When  heated,  sodium  peroxide  becomes  darker,  but  on  cooling  resumes 
its  original  color.     It  does  not  react  with  alcohol,  but  it  ignites  ether  on 


340     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

contact.      A    mixture   with    red   phosphorus   explodes    under    pressure    on 
being   struck.      It   is    an   extremely    powerful    oxidizing    agent. 

Sodium  peroxide  should  not  respond  to  tests  for  sulfates,  chlorides, 
phosphates,  nitrates  and  heavy  metals.  If  1  Gm.  or  1.5  Gm.  of 
sodium  peroxide  is  weighed  and  gradually  added  with  constant  stirring 
to  950  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  (1  per  cent)  and  the  solution 
made  up  to  1,000  cc,  the  titration  of  100  cc.  of  this  solution  with 
tenth  normal  potassium  permanganate  will  indicate  the  presence  of  not 
less  than  90  per  cent  sodium   peroxide. 

Sodium  Peroxide-Merck. — A  brand  of  sodium  peroxide- 
N.  N.  R.,  containing  not  less  than  96  per  cent  of  sodium 
peroxide. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,    Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor. 


PETROLATUM.— Petroleum  Jelly.— "A  purified,  semi- 
solid mixture  of  hydrocarbons  obtained  from  petroleum." 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  and  under 
Petrolatum. 

Petrobran. — Each  100  Gm.  contains:  petrolatum,  74  Gm. ;  bran,  22  Gm., 
with  powdered  licorice  and  "oil  of  pineapple"  (ethyl  butyrate)  sufficient 
to  flavor. 

Prepared  by  Sargent's  Drug  Store,  Chicago.     No  U.  S.  trademark. 


PHENETIDIN     DERIVATIVES 

The  phenetidins  (derivatives  of  para-aminophenol  C6H4(NH2) 
(OH),  1 :  4)  comprise  chemical  relatives  of  aniline  (aminoben- 
zene).  The  members  of  this  group  have  similar  properties  and 
are  more  or  less  active,  according  as  they  undergo  decomposi- 
tion in  the  system,  so  as  to  yield  either  para-aminophenol  or 
acetylaminophenol.  They  have  a  more  or  less  pronounced 
action  on  the  blood,  by  which  they  produce  hemolysis  and 
destruction  of  the  red  blood  corpuscles.  They  also  act  as  heart 
depressants. 

Acetophenetidin  and  its  congeners  are  antipyretics  and  anal- 
gesics. They  are  extensively  employed  for  the  relief  of  pain, 
but  for  this  purpose  they  should  be  used  with  caution  in  con- 
sideration of  their  poisonous  properties. 

They  have  also  been  considerably  employed  for  the  reduction 
of  temperature  in  fever.  Nearly  every  newly  discovered  product 
related  to  acetophenetidin  has  been  heralded  as  a  "safe"  anti- 
pyretic and  free  from  poisonous  effects  on  the  blood  and  heart. 
Invariably,  extended  clinical  experience  has  shown  that  all 
these  preparations  are,  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  hemolytic 
and  depressing  to  the  circulation.  Hence  their  employment  in 
the  infectious  fevers  should  be  most  cautious. 

ACETOPHENETIDIN.— Acetphenetidinum  U.  S.  P.  X. 
— Phenacetin. — Paraacetaminophenetol. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Aceto- 
phenetidinum. 


PHYSIOLOGIC     SALINE     SOLUTIONS        341 

Phenacetin. — A  name  applied  to  acetophenetidin.  See  the 
U.  S.  Pharmacopeia.  The  tests  of  identity  and  purity  prescribed 
by  the  United  States  Pharmacopeia  under  acetophenetidin  should 
apply  to  the   product  dispensed  under  this  title. 

PHENACAINE.— See  Anesthetics,  Local. 

PHENETSAL.  —  Phenetsalum.  —  Salophen.  —  Acetyl-/>- 
aminophenyl  Salicylate.  —  Acet-Z^-aminosalol.  —  1 :  4-Acetamino- 
phenyl  Salicylate.  —  C6H40H.CO.O.C6H4(NHCH3CO).  The 
salicylic  acid  ester  of  1  :  4-acetaminophenol,  C6H4(NHCH3CO) 
(OH). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  actions  of  phenetsal  resemble  those 
of  phenyl  salicylate  (salol).  It  is  not  changed  in  the  stom- 
ach, but  is  broken  up  in  the  intestine,  liberating  salicylic 
acid  and  paramidophenol  (which  is  less  toxic  than  phenol). 
It  acts  as  an  antirheumatic,  antipyretic,  antiseptic  and  anal- 
gesic. It  is  said  to  be  useful  in  rheumatism,  gout,  typhoid 
fever,  and  as  an  intestinal  antiseptic,  in  diarrhea  and  dysen- 
tery. Externally,  it  has  been  applied  in  psoriasis  and  other 
itching  skin  diseases. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1  Gm.  (5  to  15  grains),  in  powder 
wafers  or  capsules.     Externally,  in  10  per  cent  ointment. 

Phenetsal  forms  small,  white,  crystalline  leaflets  or  powder,  odorless 
and  tasteless,  melting  at  from  187  to  188  C.  It  is  almost  insoluble 
in  cold  water,  more  soluble  in  warm  water,  freely  soluble  in  watery 
solutions  of  the  alkalis  and  in  alcohol,  ether  and  benzene,  but  not  in 
petroleum   benzin. 

If  its  alkaline  solution  is  boiled,  it  gradually  becomes  blue;  on  con- 
tinuing the  boiling  the  color  is  discharged,  but  is  again  produced  on 
cooling  and  exposure  to  air.  On  the  addition  of  ferric  chloride  to  the 
alkaline  solution,  the  violet  color  characteristic  of  salicylic  acid  is 
produced,  but  a  simple  aqueous  solution  of  phenetsal  does  not  react 
with  ferric  chloride  and  should  not  be  changed  by  silver  nitrate. 
It   forms   a   colorless   solution   with   concentrated   sulfuric  acid. 

It  is  incompatible  with  alkalis,  which  decompose  it. 

Salophen. — A  brand  of  phenetsal-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     U.   S.  trademark  20,759. 

Winthrop  Tablets  of  Salophen,  5  grains. 


PHYSIOLOGIC     SALINE     SOLUTIONS 

Physiologic  solution  sodium  chloride  (U.  S.  P.)  is  the  most 
commonly  used  saline  solution.  Various  modifications  have 
found  wide  acceptance  particularly  those  containing  metallic 
ions  found  in  the  blood,  the  one  most  commonly  referred  to 
being  Ringer's  Solution,  In  addition,  adaptations  of  Ringer's 
Solution  have  been  used,  such  as  those  containing  sodium 
lactate  for  the  buffering  action. 

(For  Solutions  of  Sodium  Chloride  with  Dextrose  see  under 
Dextrose.  For  Ringer's  Solution  combined  with  dextrose,  see 
under  Dextrose.) 


342     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

PHYSIOLOGICAL  SOLUTION  OF  SODIUM 
CHLORIDE-U.  S.  P.— Physiological  Salt  Solution,  Normal 
Saline  Solution. 

For  standards  see  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Liquor  Sodii 
Chloridi  Physiologicus. 

Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in   Vacoliter  Containers. 

Prepared  by  Baxter  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Glenview,  111.  (American  Hos- 
pital Supply  Corporation,   Chicago,  distribvitor.) 

Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in  Half-Size  Vacoliter  Con- 
tainers. 

Prepared  by  Baxter  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Glenview,  111.  (American  Hos 
pital  Supply  Corporation,  Chicago,  distributor.) 

Physiological   Solution   of   Sodium    Chloride   in   Saftiflask   Container. 

Prepared  by  Cutter  Laboratories,   Berkeley,   Calif. 

Physiologic  Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride  in  Filtrair  Dispenser. 

Prepared  by  Hospital  Liquids,  Inc.,  Chicago. 

Sterisol  Ampoule  Physiological  Solution   of  Sodium   Chloride. 

Prepared  by  Sterisol  Ampoule  Corporation.     Long  Island  City,  N.  Y. 

Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium   Chloride,   50   cc.   Bottle. 

Prepared  by  United  States  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth, 
Wisconsin. 

Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride,  100  cc.  Bottle. 

Prepared  by  United  States  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth, 
Wisconsin. 

RINGER'S  SOLUTION.— Aqueous  solution  containing,  in 
1,000  cc,  sodium  chloride  7.0  Gm.,  potassium  chloride  0.30  Gm., 
and  calcium  chloride  0.25  Gm. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ringer's  Solution  is  used  when  chlorides 
and  sodium,  potassium  and  calcium  have  been  diminished.  It 
is  indicated  in  all  forms  of  dehydration  but  particularly  in 
cases  in  which  loss  of  gastro-intestinal  secretions  has  resulted 
from  vomiting,  diarrheas  or  fistulas.  It  is  also  used  in  acidosis 
or  alkalosis  for  improvement  of  circulation  and  stimulation  of 
renal  activity. 

Dosage. — Ringer's  Solution  is  given  by  all  parenteral  routes, 
chiefly   subcutaneously   and  intraperitoneally. 

Ringer's  Solution  in  Filtrair  Container:  Each  100  cc.  contains  sodium 
chloride-U.  S.  P.  0.7  Gm.,  potassium  chloride-U.  S.  P.  0.03  Gm.,  and 
calcium  chloride  (anhydrous)  0.025  Gm.  Marketed  in  bottles  (Filtrair 
containers)   of  500  and    1,000  cc. 

Prepared   by    Hospital    Liquids,    Inc.,    Chicago. 

Ringer's  solution  occurs  as  a  clear,  colorless  solution,  possessing  a 
slightly  saline  taste.  The  specific  gravity  is  from  1.005  to  1.006  at 
25  C.  Twenty -live  cc.  of  the  solution  concentrated  to  10  cc.  conforms 
to  the  U.  S.  P.  XI  test  for  heavy  metals;  10  cc.  of  the  solution  con- 
forms to  the  U.   S.  P.  XI  test  for  arsenic. 

Concentrate  20  cc.  of  Ringer's  solution  to  a  volume  of  5  cc,  transfer 
to  a  test  tube,  add  1  cc.  of  freshly  prepared  sodium  cobaltic  nitrite 
solution,  dilute  to  10  cc,  and  mix  thoroughly;  prepare  a  standard  solu- 
tion of  potassium  chloride  as  follows:  dissolve  1.5  Gm.  of  potassium 
chloride  (dried  at  200  C.)  to  make  1,000  cc.  of  solution.  Transfer 
4  cc.  and  5  cc  portions  of  the  standard  potassium  chloride  solution 
to  test  tubes  and  add  1  cc.  of  freshly  prepared  sodium  cobaltic  nitrite 
solution.  Dilute  each  portion  of  the  standard  to  10  cc,  and  mix 
thoroughly:  the  turbidity  produced  by  the  Ringer's  solution  at  the  end 
of  ten  minutes  is  less  than  that  produced  by  5  cc.  and  more  than  that 
produced  by  4  cc  of  the  standard  solution  (limit  of  potassium  [K+]). 
Transfer  5  cc  of  Ringer's  solution  to  a  Nessler  tube,  add  O.S  cc.  of 
diluted   acetic   acid,    40    cc.    of   water,   and    5    cc.    of   ammonium  oxalate 


PHLORHIZIN  343 

solution;  dilute  to  50  cc,  and  mix  thoroughly;  prepare  a  standard  cal- 
cium acetate  solution  by  dissolving  0.287  Gm.  of  precipitated  calcium 
carbonate  (dried  at  200  C.)  in  15  cc.  of  water  containing  3  cc.  of 
acetic  acid  and  diluting  to  250  cc.  Transfer  1  cc.  and  1.25  cc.  portions 
of  this  standard  solution  to  Nessler  tubes,  add  40  cc.  of  water  and  5  cc. 
of  ammonium  oxalate  solution  and  dilute  to  50  cc:  the  turbidity  pro- 
duced by  5  cc.  of  the  Ringer's  solution  is  less  than  that  produced  by 
1.25  cc.  and  more  than  that  produced  by  1  cc.  of  the  standard  solution 
at  the  expiration  of  fifteen  minutes   (/imif  of  calcium   [Ca++]). 

Transfer  25  cc.  of  Ringer's  solution  to  a  weighing  dish,  evaporate 
to  dryness  on  the  steam  bath,  place  in  oven  at  150  C.  for  two  hours, 
cool  in  a  desiccator,  and  weigh:  the  weight  of  residue  obtained  is  not 
less  than  0.18  Gm.  and  not  more  than  0.19  Gm.  Treat  25  cc.  of 
Ringer's  solution  with  an  excess  of  sulfuric  acid,  evaporate  to  dryness, 
and  ignite  to  constant  weight  at  750  C:  the  weight  of  ash  obtained  is 
not  less  than  0.22  Gm.  nor  more  than  0.23  Gm. 

Transfer  10  cc.  of  Ringer's  solution  to  a  400  cc.  beaker,  add  50  cc. 
of  water  and  4  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid;  dilute  to  200  cc,  add  15  cc. 
of  silver  nitrate  solution,  heat  to  boiling  and  allow  to  stand  until  the 
precipitate  is  granular.  Filter  onto  a  weighed  gooch  crucible  previously 
heated  to  150  C;  wash  the  precipitate  well  with  hot  water;  dry  to 
constant  weight  at  140  to  ISO  C:  the  chloride  (CI")  calculated  from 
the  silver  chloride  weight  is  not  less  than  0.0435  Gm.  nor  more  than 
0.0465  Gm. 


PHLORHIZIN.— Phlorhizinum.— Phlorizin.— C21H24O10+ 
2H2O. — A  glucoside  from  the  root  of  the  apple,  pear,  cherry, 
etc. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Phlorhizin  destroys  malarial  parasites 
in  vitro.  When  administered  to  man  or  animals,  it  produces 
glycosuria  of  renal  origin.  Polyuria  is  also  produced.  It  has 
been  recommended  as  an  antiperiodic  in  malaria ;  but  its  use 
in  this  disease  is  not  justified  in  view  of  the  possible  injury 
to  the  kidney  which  it  may  cause.  It  is  used  as  a  means  of 
testing  the  functional  activity  of  the  kidney. 

Dosage. — To  test  the  permeability  of  the  kidney,  0.005  Gm. 
(VI2  grain)  is  dissolved  in  1  cc.  (15  minims)  of  a  0.5  per 
cent  solution  of  sodium  carbonate  and  injected  hypodermi- 
cally.  Dextrose  should  appear  in  the  urine  in  from  fifteen 
minutes  to  one-half  hour  and  the  secretion  of  sugar  should 
continue  for  from  two  to  four  hours.  The  test  gains  in  diag- 
nostic value  if  the  urine  of  each  kidney  is  collected  separately. 
Phlorhizin  may  be  given  by  mouth  in  pills  massed  with  glu- 
cose syrup  or  suspended  in  a  mixture  with  acacia  or  traga- 
canth.  The  internal  dose  is  from  0.3  to  0.6  Gm.  (5  to  10 
grains). 

Phlorhizin  occurs  as  minute  white,  slightly  pinkish  crystals,  of  a 
silky  texture,  or  as  a  pale  yellow,  light  crystalline  powder,  odorless 
and  having  a  bitter,  but  later  a  sweet,  taste.  It  is  sparingly  soluble 
in  cold,  but  freely  soluble  in  hot  water,  from  which  it  crystallizes  on 
cooling.  It  is  soluble  in  alcohol  (1  in  4)  sparingly  soluble  in  ether. 
The  solutions  are  levogyrate.  At  100  C.  it  loses  water  and  at  about 
107  C.  melts.  When  heated  to  about  130  C,  it  becomes  solid  again 
and  melts  again  at  about  170  C.  At  about  200  C.  it  assurnes  a  red 
color,  due  to  the  formation  of  rufin.  Boiled  with  dilute  acids,  it  is 
converted  into  sugar,  phlorose  and  phloretine.  Exposed  to  air  in  the 
presence  of  ammonia,  it  assumes  a  purple  color.  Cold  concentrated 
sulfuric  acid  dissolves  it  to  a  yellow  solution  and  at  from  25  to  50  C. 
the  solution  becomes  red. 


344     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

PSYLLIUM  SEED.  —  Plantago  Seed.  —  Plantain  Seed. — 
"The  cleaned,  dried,  ripe  seed  of  Plantago  Psyllium  Linne,  or 
of  Plantago  arenaria  (P.  ramosa  [Gilib.]  Aschers)  Wadsstein  et 
Kitaibel,  known  in  commerce  as  Spanish  or  French  Psyllium 
Seed;  or  of  Plantago  ovata  Forskal,  known  in  commerce  as 
Blonde  Ps341ium  or  Indian  Plantago  Seed  (Fam.  Planfagi- 
naceae). 

"Plantago  Seed  contains  all  of  its  natural  mucilage  and  not 
more  than  0.5  per  cent  of  foreign  organic  matter.  It  yields 
not  more  than  4  per  cent  of  total  ash  and  not  more  than  1  per 
cent  of  acid-insoluble  ash."  A^.  F. 

For  standards  see  the  National  Formulary,  under  Plantaginis 
Semen. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Psyllium  seed,  by  virtue  of  its  indigesti- 
bility  and  mucilaginous  character,  acts  as  a  mild  laxative.  The 
addition  of  ground  psyllium  seed  to  the  food  of  rats  and  dogs 
has  been  found  to  be  followed  by  darkening  of  the  kidneys ;  and 
when  prolonged  its  use  was  followed  by  the  appearance  of 
microscopic  pigment  granules  in  the  tubules  of  rats.  The  sig- 
nificance of  this  has  not  been  determined,  but  until  the  ground 
psyllium  seed  shall  have  been  shown  to  be  harmless  to  man, 
no  product  of  that  type  will  be  accepted  by  the  Council.  No 
such  effect  was  observed  after  feeding  the  whole  psyllium  seed. 

Dosage. — From  4  to  15  Gm.  (1  to  4  drachms)  one  to  three 
times  a  day.  Psyllium  seed  may  be  mixed  with  orange  juice 
or  prune  juice  and  eaten  without  mastication,  or  the  dose  may 
be  mixed  with  a  little  hot  water  and  the  resulting  gelatinous 
mass   spread  on  bread  or  taken  with   other  food. 

Richards  Psyllium  Seed. — A  brand  of  psyllium  seed  (plan- 
tago seed). 

Prepared   by   Richards   Pharmacal   Co.,    Inc.,    New   York. 

Schieffelin  Psyllium  Seed. — A  brand  of  psyllium  seed 
(plantago  seed). 

Prepared  by  Schieffelin  &  Co.  New  York,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 


PYRAZOLON     DERIVATIVES 

The  preparations  in  this  group  are  used  for  their  anti- 
pyretic and  analgesic  action.  There  is  reason  to  believe  that 
they  have  less  tendency  to  disintegrate  the  red  blood  cor- 
puscles than  have  the  phenetidin  compounds,  but  in  other 
respects  they  are  open  to  the  same  objections.  On  taking 
small  doses,  some  susceptible  individuals  experience  nervous 
and  circulatory  depression,  while  after  large  doses  instances 
of  collapse  have  been  reported. 


PYRAZOLON     DERIVATIVES  345 

The  following  pyrazolon  derivatives  are  included  in  New 
and  Nonofficial  Remedies : 

Melubrin,  a  complex  synthetic  differing  from  antipyrine  in 
that  a  sodium  amino-methyl  sulphite  has  replaced  the  hydro- 
gen atom  of  the  pyrazolon  group.  In  this  it  is  asserted  that 
the  toxicity  is  very  much  reduced. 

Aminopyrine  (pyramidon)  chemically  known  as  dimethyl- 
amino  antipyrine. 

Antipyrine  Compounds  and  Derivatives 

ANTIPYRINE.  —  Phenazone.  —  "Phenyldimethylpyra- 
zolon."-L^.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Antipyrina. 

MELUBRIN.  —  Sodium  antipyrine  aminomethansulfonate. 
Sodium -l-phenyl-2,3-dimethyl-5-pyrazolon -4 -aminomethansulfo- 
nate.  The  sodium  salt  of  l-phenyl-2,3-dimethyl-5-pyrazolon- 
4-aminomethansulfonic  acid,  differing  from  antipyrine, 
C11H12N2O,  in  that  a  sodium  aminomethansulfonate  group, 
NH.CH2S03Na,  has  replaced  a  hydrogen  atom  of  the  pyra- 
zolon group. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  is  claimed  that  melubrin  in  ordinary 
or  even  large  doses  is  not  toxic.  In  moderate  doses,  it  is 
said  to  have  almost  no  effect  on  the  circulation  or  respira- 
tion. It  acts  as  a  powerful  antipyretic  in  fever  and  it  is 
analgesic. 

Melubrin  is  said  to  be  useful  in  painful  affections,  such  as 
sciatica  and  other  neuralgias,  and  as  an  antipyretic  in  various 
febrile  affections.  It  is  said  to  have  effects  similar  to  those 
of  the  salicylates  in  acute  rheumatism. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  2  Gm.  (15  to  30  grains).  The  larger 
doses  are  recommended  for  the  treatment  of  rheumatism.  It 
is  claimed  that  as  much  as  10  Gm.  (150  grains)  may  be  given 
daily. 

Manufactured  by  Farbwerke,  vorm.  Meister,  Lucius  and  Bruening, 
Hoechst,  a.  M.,  Germany  (Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York). 
U.  S.  patent  1,056,881  (March  5,  1913;  expired).  U.  S.  trademark 
88,562. 

Melubrin  is  prepared  by  allowing  a  solution  of  formaldehyde  bisul- 
fite to  act  on  l-phenyl-2,3-dimethyl-4-amino-pyrazolon,  and  purifying 
the   resulting   product   by    recrystallization. 

It  is  a  white,  odorless,  almost  tasteless  crystalline  powder,  readily 
soluble  in  water,  but  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol.  The  aqueous  solution 
is  neutral  in   reaction  but  unstable. 

If  about  0.2  Gm.  of  melubrin  dissolved  in  5  cc.  of  water  is  boiled 
with  3  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  sulfur  dioxide  and  formalde- 
hyde will  be  liberated.  If  half  of  the  solution  thus  formed  is  treated 
with  3  drops  of  sodium  nitrite  solution  and  5  cc.  of  an  alkaline  solution 
of  betanaphthol,  a  red  precipitate  will  be  produced.  If  the  remainder 
of  the  solution  is  treated  with  1  Gm.  of  sodium  acetate  and  15  cc.  of 
a  saturated  aqueous  benzaldehyde  solution  a  yellowish-white,  flocculent 
precipitate  will  be  formed  which,  when  washed  and  dried,  will  melt 
at    173   C.      If   a   small   quantity   of   melubrin   is   moistened   with   hydro- 


346     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

chloric  acid,  it  will  respond  to  the  flame  test  for  sodium.  If  a  10  per 
cent  aqueous  solution  of  melubrin  is  made  alkaline  with  ammonia  water 
saturation  with  hydrogen  sulfide  should  produce  no  change.  If  0.5 
Gm.  of  melubrin  is  thoroughly  mixed  with  4  Gm.  of  sodium  nitrate 
and  gradually  heated,  4  cc.  of  concentrated  sulfuric  acid  added  to  the 
resulting  mass,  and  the  mixture  heated  until  no  further  white  fumes 
are  produced,  the  resulting  substance  powdered  and  mixed  with  10  cc. 
of  saturated  hydrochloric  acid  solution  of  stannous  chloride,  no  dark- 
ening will  occur  within  one  hour.  If  from  0.4  to  0.5  Gm.  of  melubrin 
is  weighed  in  a  platinum  dish,  treated  with  dilute  sulfuric  acid,  and 
heated  to  constant  weight,  the  sodium  sulfate  thus  formed  will  weigh 
from  0.2160  to  0.2250  Gm.  for  each  gram  of  material  used,  representing 
a  sodium  content  of  from  6.99  to  7.28  per   cent. 

Aminopyrine  and  Aminopyrine  Derivatives 

AMINOPYRINE.— Amidopyrina  U.  S.  P.  X.— "Dimethyl- 
aminophenyldimethylpyrazolon."    U.   S.   P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Amino- 
pyrina. 

Actions  mid  Uses. — Aminopyrine  acts  as  an  antipyretic  and 
anodyne,  similarly  to  antipyrine,  but  is  effective  in  smaller  doses. 
The  action,  while  somewhat  slower  at  the  beginning,  is  more 
lasting.  It  is  claimed  to  be  comparatively  free  from  harmful 
influences  on  the  blood,  heart  or  kidneys.  It  is  said  to  be  useful, 
particularly  in  the  chronic  fevers  of  tuberculosis,  as  well  as  in 
the  acute  febrile  conditions  incident  to  typhoid  fever,  erysipelas 
and  pneumonia.  In  the  treatment  of  infectious  fevers,  it,  as 
other  antipyretics,  should  be  cautiously  employed.  See  general 
article,  Phenetidin  Derivatives.  Aminopyrine  appears  to  pro- 
duce serious  and  sometimes  fatal  granulocytopenia  especially  in 
susceptible  individuals.  The  drug  should  therefore  be  with- 
drawn if  a  skin  eruption,  dizziness  or  chill  occur ;  it  should 
not  be  administered  in  large  doses  or  over  a  long  period  of  time 
unless  repeated  leukocyte  and  differential  counts  are  made  at 
regular  intervals. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  0.4  Gm.  (5  to  6  grains),  most  con- 
veniently in  the  form  of  tablets,  a  single  dose  usually  sufficing 
for  twenty-four  hours. 

Aminopyrine-Abbott. — A  brand  of  aminopyrine-U.  S.  P. 
Manufactured  by  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Aminopyrine-Merck. — A  brand  of  aminopyrine-U.  S.  P. 

Prepared  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

Pyramidon. — A  brand  of  aminopyrine-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  expired.     U.   S.  trademark. 

Elixir  of  Pyramidon:     Each  4  cc.   (one  fluidrachm)   contains  pyramidon, 
0.162   Gm.    (2^    grains)    in  a  menstruum  containing  alcohol  20    per  cent. 
Pyramidon  Tablets,  ij^   grains. 
Pyramidon  Tablets,   5  grains. 


PYRETHRUM     OINTMENT  347 

PYRETHRUM    OINTMENT.— An   ointment   containing, 

an  extract  from  powdered  pyrethrum  flowers  (Chrysanthemum 
cinerariae folium).  The  extract  is  obtained  by  treating  pow- 
dered pyrethrum  flowers  with  a  hydrocarbon  oil  of  the  kero- 
sene type;  this  extract  is  then  incorporated  into  an  ointment 
base  composed  of  hydrous  wool  fat,  petrolatum  and  paraffin. 
The  finished  ointment  contains  27  per  cent  of  the  active  extract 
(representing  0.75  per  cent  of  pyrethrins  I  and  II)  and  73  per 
cent  of  ointment  base. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Pyrethrum  ointment-Upsher  Smith  has 
been  shown  to  be  an  effective  agent  in  the  treatment  of  scabies. 
Based  on  the  (as  yet  unpublished)  investigation  of  Sweitzer  and 
Tedder  the  claim  is  made  that  the  ointment  penetrates  the 
burrows  and  kills  both  the  mites  and  the  eggs  and  that  except 
in  rare  instances  it  does  not  produce  dermatitis  with  resultant 
exfoliation.  Sweitzer  and  Tedder  reported  four  cases  of  allergic 
sensitivity  to  the  active  substance  in  a  series  of  618  patients 
treated. 

Dosage. — The  ointment  is  applied  to  the  entire  body  follow- 
ing a  thorough  cleansing  with  soap  and  water.  Further  appli- 
cations are  made  on  at  least  three  or  four  successive  days. 
In  most  cases  it  is  necessary  to  continue  the  treatment  for  a 
period  of  from  five  to  seven  days,  and  in  obstinate  cases  the 
use  of  the  ointment  may  be  required  for  a  longer  time.  The 
ointment  should  not  be  used  on  patients  who  are  sensitive  to 
pyrethrum  flowers. 

Manufactured  by  the  Upsher  Smith  Company,  Minneapolis.  No  U.  S. 
patent   or   trademark. 

Pyrethrum    ointment  is  an   unctuous,   yellowish   green  mass. 

Place  5  Gm.  of  pyrethrum  ointment  in  a  suitable  flask,  add  25  cc. 
of  half-normal  potassium  hydroxide  alcoholic  solution  and  an  equal 
volume  of  water,  and  heat  the  mixture  under  a  reflux  condenser  for 
five  minutes.  The  alcohol  is  removed  by  evaporation,  the  mixture 
cooled  and  allowed  to  separate.  Remove  the  liquid  by  decantation,  add 
sufficient  barium  chloride  solution,  thoroughly  mix  and  allow  to  separate. 
To  the  mixture  add  1  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid  to  remove  the  excess  of 
barium  salt.  To  about  5  cc.  of  the  filtrate  add  an  equal  volume  of 
mercuric  sulfate  solution:  an  immediate  pink  color  develops  which 
deepens  on  standing,  finally  changing  to  a  green  coloration  with  the 
development  of   a  turbidity   or  a  precipitate    {monocarboxylic   acid). 

Determine  the  pyrethrin  content  by  the  procedure  (with  slight  modi- 
fication) described  by  Seil  in  "Soap"  in  May  1934;  the  combined 
pyrethrin  content  (pyrethrins  I  and  II)  is  not  less  than  0.7S  per  cent 
nor  more  than  1   per  cent. 


QUINIDINE 

Quinidine  is  obtained  from  cinchona  bark  as  a  by-product  in 
the  manufacture  of  quinine,  to  which  it  is  closely  related,  being 
a  stereoisomer  of  quinine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Quinidine,  like  quinine,  is  a  protoplasm 
poison.  It  affects  protozoa  more  than  bacteria  but  less  power- 
fully than  quinine.  At  one  time  it  was  used,  to  some  extent, 
as  a  substitute  for  quinine  because  it  was  then  much  the  cheaper 


348     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

preparation.  It  has  the  antimalarial  action  of  quinine,  and 
may  be  tolerated  by  some  patients  who  have  an  idiosyncrasy 
to  quinine. 

Quinidine  acts  upon  the  heart  in  such  a  manner  as  to  bring 
about  cessation  of  fibrillation  of  the  auricles  in  a  certain  pro- 
portion of  instances.  Quinidine  and  other  cinchona  alkaloids 
are  the  only  drugs  known  to  have  this  specific  effect.  The 
pharmacology  of  the  drug  has  been  extensively  investigated 
It  has  been  shown  that  quinidine  increases  the  refractory  period 
of  the  auricular  muscle  and  decreases  its  irritability  and  the 
rate  of  conductivity.  Its  chief  action  is  upon  the  cardiac 
muscle.  In  ordinary  doses  the  heart  is  slowed  and  the 
auriculo-ventricular  conduction  time  is  lengthened.  Quinidine 
is  used  to  restore  the  normal  rhythm  of  the  heart  in  cases 
of  auricular  fibrillation.  This  has  been  brought  about  in 
approximately  50  per  cent  of  the  reported  cases  in  which  the 
drug  has  been  used.  It  is  apparently  most  efficacious  in  the 
cases  of  fibrillation  of  short  duration  or  of  the  paroxysmal  type. 
It  may  also  stop  fibrillation  of  several  years'  duration.  It  is 
least  effective  in  cases  of  fibrillation  with  marked  cardiac  insuf- 
ficiency. Quinidine  is  not  without  some  unpleasant  and  even 
dangerous  effects.  Some  patients  appear  much  more  susceptible 
to  its  intoxication  than  others.  The  untoward  symptoms  brought 
about  by  its  use  in  these  patients  are  nausea,  vomiting,  con- 
vulsions, palpitation,  headache,  faintness  and  flushing.  In  most 
cases  following  the  administration  of  the  drug,  the  pulse 
increases  in  rapidity  before  the  normal  rhythm  is  established. 
In  some  cases  the  effect  of  the  drug  is  restricted  to  this  altera- 
tion of  rhythm.  In  a  few  instances,  such  serious  results  as 
rapid  idioventricular  rhythms  (ventricular  tachycardia)  have 
been  initiated  during  the  course  of  therapy.  Toxic  effects  may 
appear  after  the  establishment  of  a  normal  rhythm.  Some  cases 
have  been  reported  in  which  sudden  death  occurred  a  short 
time  after  the  drug  had  been  stopped.  The  drug  is  rapidly 
eliminated  and  it  appears  that  no  cumulative  effect  can  take 
place.     It  has  no  known  permanent  effect. 

Dosage. — Quinidine  is  generally  administered  as  quinidine  sul- 
fate. Commonly  0,2  Gm,  (3  grains)  of  quinidine  sulfate  is 
given  as  a  preliminary  dose  and  is  repeated  after  two  hours  to 
determine  the  patient's  susceptibility  to  the  drug.  If  there  are 
no  symptoms  following  this  preliminary  dose,  therapeutic  admin- 
istration is  begun  on  the  following  day  when  from  0.2  Gm,  to 
0,4  Gm.  (3  to  6  grains)  is  given  from  three  to  five  times  daily, 
for  one  to  three  days.  As  a  rule,  if  the  establishment  of  the 
normal  rhythm  can  be  effected,  the  change  occurs  after  from 
one  to  three  days'  treatment.  The  maximum  dose  per  day 
advised  by  most  authors  is  from  1  to  2  Gm.  (15-30  grains). 
If  toxic  symptoms  occur,  the  administration  of  the  drug  should 
be  discontinued. 


QUINIDINE  349 

QUINIDINE.  — Quinidina.  — An    alkaloid,    C20H24O2N2+ 
2H2O,  obtained  from  the  bark  of  various  species  of  Cinchona. 
Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Quinidine. 
Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Quinidine. 

Quinidine  occurs  in  white  crystals  or  as  an  amorphous,  white  powder; 
odorless;    taste,   intensely   bitter   and    persistent;    efflorescent   in   dry   air. 

Quinidine  is  very  slightly  soluble  in  water;  soluble  in  alcohol  and 
ether;  freely  soluble  in  chloroform;  very  slightly  soluble  in  petroleum 
benzin. 

The  saturated  aqueous  solution  of  quinidine  is  alkaline  to  litmus 
and  its  alcoholic  solution  is  dextrorotatory.  A  solution  of  quinidine 
in  diluted  sulfuric  acid   (1   in   1,000)    shows  a  strong  blue  fluorescence. 

Quinidine  loses  its  water  of  hydration  at  100  C  The  dried  alkaloid 
melts  at  about   168   C. 

Add  a  few  drops  of  bromine  water  to  10  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution 
of  quinidine  (1  in  1,000),  prepared  with  just  sufficient  diluted  sulfuric 
acid  to  produce  complete  solution,  and  follow  with  ammonia  water  in 
slight   excess.      The   liquid    acquires   an   emerald-green   color. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  quinidine  in  15  cc.  of  hot  water  contain- 
ing a  few  drops  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid;  cool  the  solution;  add  1  cc. 
of  silver  nitrate  solution  and  stir  the  mixture  with  a  glass  rod.  A 
white,  crystalline  precipitate  forms  after  a  short  interval  (distinction 
from  many  other  alkaloids). 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  quinidine  in  10  cc.  of  warm  water,  con- 
taining a  slight  excess  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid;  add  an  excess  of 
potassium  iodide  solution  and  agitate:  an  orange  yellow,  crystalline 
precipitate   forms  after  an  interval    {distinction  from  quinine). 

Dissolve  0.5  Gm.  of  quinidine  in  15  cc.  of  boiling  distilled  water, 
with  just  enough  sulfuric  acid  to  form  a  solution  neutral  to  litmus 
paper,  and  add  5  cc.  of  potassium  iodide  solution.  Agitate  the  mix- 
ture gently;  cool _  it  to  15  C.,  and  keep  it  at  this  temperature  for  one 
hour,  with  occasional  stirring:  a  white  precipitate  is  formed  {differ- 
ence from  quinine).  Filter  out  the  precipitate  and  add  2  drops  of 
ammonia  water  to  the  filtrate:  not  more  than  a  slight  turbidity  results 
(limit  of  other  cinchona  alkaloids).  Care  must  be  taken  to  have  the 
liquid  perfectly  neutral  after  the  addition  of  the  potassium  iodide 
solution;  if  slightly  acid,  very  dilute  ammonia  water  must  be  added, 
drop  by  drop,  with  constant  stirring  until  exact  neutrality  to  litmus  is 
attained. 

A  solution  of  about  0.1  Gm.  of  quinidine  in  5  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid 
is  not  darker   than   pale  yellow    (organic  impurities). 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm,  of  quinidine,  accurately  weighed:  the  ash 
does    not    exceed    0.1    per    cent. 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  quinidine,  accurately  weighed,  to  constant  weight 
at  100  C.:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  11  per  cent. 

Quinidine-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  quinidine-N.   N.   R. 

Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,   St.   Louis,  distributor.      No  U.   S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Quinidine-Merck. — A  brand  of  quinidine-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.     No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

QUINIDINE    SULFATE.— "A    sulfate    of    an    alkaloid 

obtained  from  cinchona."- [/.  vS.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Quinidinae 
Sulfas. 


350     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and   Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Quinidine. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Quinidine.  Quinidine  sulfate 
may  be  administered  in  the  form  of  cachets,  capsules,  pills  or 
tablets. 

Quinidine  Sulphate  (Davies  &  Rose). — A  brand  of  qui- 
nidine sulphate. 

Manufactured  by  Davies,  Rose  &  Co.,  Ltd.,  Boston. 
Tablets  Quinidine  Sulphate  3  Gm.    Davies  &  Rose. 

Quinidine  SuLPHAXE-Merck.  —  A  brand  of  quinidine  sul- 
phate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 


QUININE     DERIVATIVES 

The  action  of  quinine  is  essentially  the  same  in  all  its  com- 
pounds. The  official  salts  have  the  disadvantage  of  the  bitter 
taste,  and  of  producing  a  local  action  on  the  stomach  and  other 
tissues.  To  obviate  these  difficulties,  insoluble  compounds  like 
the  alkaloid  or  the  tannate  have  been  used,  since  these  pass  the 
mouth  and  stomach  without  offending  the  taste  or  disturbing 
the  stomach.  The  same  object  is  obtained  more  or  less  com- 
pletely in  a  number  of  synthetic  compounds  in  which  the  quinine 
radical  is  combined  with  other  radicals,  such  as  those  of  car- 
bonic acid,  to  form  insoluble,  and  therefore  tasteless,  esters. 
In  the  intestines  these  esters  are  broken  up  more  or  less  rapidly 
into  the  alkaloid  quinine  and  the  other  components.  The  rapid- 
ity with  which  this  decomposition  occurs  will  determine  to  a 
large  extent  the  intensity  of  the  therapeutic  effect  and  the 
liability  to  produce  cinchonism. 

Some  of  the  esters  also  contain  other  therapeutically  active 
radicals  (phenetidin,  salicyl,  etc.).  When  liberated  these  pro- 
duce their  characteristic  effects ;  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  the 
combinations  of  several  therapeutically  active  radicals  in  fixed 
proportions  are  superior  to  simple  mixtures  of  the  ingredients. 

QUININE.— "An  alkaloid  obtained  from  cinchona."  U.S.  P. 
For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Quinina. 

QUININE  SULFATE.— For  standards  see  the  U.  S. 
Pharmacopeia  under  Quininae  Sulfas. 

Coco-Quinine:  Each  100  cc.  contains  quinine  sulfate,  2.19  Gm. 
(10  grains  per  fiuidounce),  suspended  in  a  syrup  flavored  with  chocolate, 
yerba  santa  and  vanillin,  and  containing  sodium  benzoate,  0.18  Gm.  per 
100  cc.  and  alcohol,  4   per  cent. 

Prepared  by  Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,   Indianapolis.     U.   S.  trademark   174,144. 


RESORCIN     COMPOUNDS  351 

QUININE  ETHYLCARBONATE.  —  Euquinine.  —  For 
standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Quininae  Aethyl- 
carbonas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Quinine  ethylcarbonate  is  used  in  place 
of  quinine  sulfate  and  similar  soluble  quinine  salts  when  a 
practically  tasteless  quinine  compound  is  preferred. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  that  of  quinine  sulfate. 

Quinine  Ethyl  Carbonate-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of 
quinine  ethyl  carbonate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

Quinine  Ethyl  Carbonate-Merck. — A  brand  of  quinine 
ethyl  carbonate-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 


RESORCIN     COMPOUNDS 

RESORCINOL  MONOACETATE.  — Resorcin  Acetate, 
;«-Hydroxyphenyl  Acetate. — wi-Acetyloxyphenol  CeHiCGH). 
(OOCCH3).     The  monoacetic  ester  of  resorcinol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  action  of  resorcinol  monoacetate  is 
similar  to  that  of  resorcinol,  but  milder  and  more  lasting  because 
of  the  gradual  liberation  of  resorcinol. 

Resorcinol  monoacetate  is  used  in  the  treatment  of  acne, 
sycosis  and  chilblains,  and  particularly  in  the  treatment  of 
alopecia  and  seborrhea. 

Dosage. — Resorcinol  monoacetate  is  applied  in  ointments  of 
from  5  to  20  per  cent  and  in  acetone  solution.  For  scalp  lotions, 
alcoholic  solutions  of  from  3  to  5  per  cent  are  used. 

Resorcinol  monoacetate  is  a  viscous,  lemon  yellow  liquid,  boiling 
under  ordinary  pressure  at  283  C.  with  decomposition.  It  is  soluble 
in  alcohol,  acetone  and  most  organic  solvents;  sparingly  soluble  in 
water.  It  has  a  faint  characteristic  odor  and  burning  taste.  Resorcinol 
monoacetate,  at  a  pressure  of  10  mm.,  distils  completely  between  150 
and    153   C. 

Dissolve  10  cc.  resorcinol  monoacetate  in  20  cc.  benzene  and  shake 
with  100  cc.  of  distilled  water  containing  methyl  orange  solution:  not 
more  than  0.5  cc.  tenth-normal  alkali  is  required  to  neutralize  the 
free  acidity. 

Euresol. — A  brand  of  resorcinol  monoacetate. — N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  E.  Bilhuber,  Inc.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.  (Bilhuber-Knoll 
Corporation,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark  88,894. 

Euresol  pro  Capillis:  Euresol  perfumed  to  render  it  suitable  for  scalp 
lotions. 

Resorcinol  Monoacetate-Eastman  Kodak  Co. — A  brand 

of  resorcinol  monoacetate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Eastman  Kodak  Co.,  Rochester,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 


352     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

RHUS     PREPARATIONS 

IVYOL  POISON  IVY  EXTRACT.— A  solution  in  olive 
oil  of  an  irritant  or  vesicant  oil  extracted  from  the  fresh  leaves 
of  poison  ivy  (Rhus  toxicodendron). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ivyol  Poison  Ivy  Extract  is  used  to 
relieve  the  symptoms  of  the  dermatitis  produced  through  con- 
tact with  poison  ivy. 

Dosage. — In  cases  of  average  susceptibility,  the  contents   oi 
one  syringe  (0.55  to  0.6  cc.)   intramuscularly  at  daily  intervals 
for  four  doses  or  until  relieved.     In  cases  of  unusual  suscep 
tibility,  from  0.2  to  0.35  cc,  increased  or  not  as  indicated. 

Manufactured  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  U.  S 
patent  1,559,340  (Oct.  27,  1925;  expires,  1942).  U.  S.  trademark 
applied  for. 

Ivyol  Poison  Ivy  Extract:  Miniature  syringes  each  containing  0.7  cc.  o^ 
ivyol    poison   ivy    extract. 

The  fresh  leaves  of  Rhus  toxicodendron  are  extracted  with  purified 
petroleum  benzin.  The  resulting  extract  is  filtered  through  paper  and 
decolorized  by  agitation  with  fuller's  earth.  The  decolorized  extract  is 
concentrated  in  vacuo  to  one-tenth  its  original  volume;  the  concentrated 
extract  is  allowed  to  evaporate  spontaneously  to  dryness;  and  the 
residue  dissolved  in  sterile  olive  oil  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of 
the  extract  to  1,000  parts  of  oil,  and  2  per  cent  of  camphor  is  added 
as  a  preservative. 

IVYOL-POISON   OAK  EXTRACT-MULFORD.  — A 

solution  in  olive  oil  of  an  irritant  or  vesicant  oil  extracted  from 
the  fresh  leaves   of  poison  oak   (Rhus  diver siloba) . 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ivyol-poison  oak  extract  is  used  to  relieve 
the  symptoms  of  the  dermatitis  produced  through  contact  with 
poison  oak. 

Dosage. — In  cases  of  average  susceptibility,  0.7  cc.  intra- 
muscularly at  daily  intervals  for  four  doses  or  until  relieved. 
In  cases  of  unusual  susceptibility,  from  0.2  to  0.35  cc.  increased 
or  not  as  indicated. 

Manufactured  by    Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.     U.   S. 

patent     1,559,340     (Oct.     27,     1925;     expires,     1942).       U.    S.    trademark 

applied    for. 

lyyol-Poison   Oak  Extract:     Miniature  syringes  each  containing  0.7    cc. 

of    ivyol-poison    oak    extract,    which    permits    administration    of    not    more 

than  0.6  cc. 

The  fresh  leaves  of  Rhus  diversiloba  are  extracted  with  purified 
petroleum  benzin.  The  resulting  extract  is  filtered  through  paper  and 
decolorized  by  agitation  with  fullers'  earth.  The  decolorized  extract  is 
concentrated  in  vacuo  to  one-tenth  its  original  volume;  the  concentrated 
extract  is  allowed  to  evaporate  spontaneously  to  dryness;  and  the  residue 
dissolved  in  sterile  olive  oil  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  the  extract 
to  1,000  parts  of  oil,  and  2  per  cent  of  camphor  added  as  a  preservative. 

POISON  IVY  EXTRACT-LEDERLE  (IN  ALMOND 
OIL). — A  solution  in  almond  oil  of  a  substance  extracted  from 
the  fresh  leaves  of  poison  ivy  {Rhus  toxicodendron). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Poison  ivy  extract-Lederle  (in  almond 
oil)  is  used  to  relieve  the  symptoms  of  the  dermatitis  pro- 
duced   through    contact    with    Rhus    toxicodendron.      There    is 


RHUS     PREPARATIONS  353 

evidence  indicating  that  the  product  is  useful  in  prophylaxis  of 
this  dermatitis. 

Dosage. — One  cubic  centimeter  injected  intramuscularly  at 
intervals  of  from  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours.  For 
prophylaxis,  it  is  suggested  that  two  injections  of  1  cc.  each  be 
given  at  a  two  week  interval. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 
No   U.    S.    patent   or   trademark. 

Poison  Ivy  Extract-Lederle  (in  Almond  OH)  1  cc. :  Syringes  contain- 
ing  1   cc.    of  poison  ivy  extract-Lederle   (in  almond  oil). 

Freshly  gathered  mature  leaves  of  Rhus  toxicodendron  are  macerated 
with  acetone.  The  resulting  extract  is  decolorized  and  dehydrated  and 
then  concentrated  until  the  content  of  solid  matter  becomes  13  per  cent. 
Five  parts  of  this  liquid  are  added  to  95  parts  of  sterile  almond  oil 
containing   0.5    per   cent   of   chorobutanol   and   this   liquid   is   filtered. 

POISON  OAK  EXTRACT-LEDERLE  (IN  ALMOND 
OIL). — A  solution  in  almond  oil  of  a  substance  extracted  from 
the  fresh  leaves  of  poison  oak  (Rhus  diversiloha). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Poison  oak  extract-Lederle  (in  almond 
oil)  is  used  to  relieve  the  symptoms  of  the  dermatitis  produced 
through  contact  with  poison  oak. 

Dosage. — One  cubic  centimeter  injected  intramuscularly  at 
intervals  of  from  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 
No  U.    S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Poison  Oak  Extract-Lederle  (in  Almond  OH)  1  cc:  Syringes  contain- 
ing  1   cc.  of  poison  oak  extract-Lederle    (in  almond  oil). 

Freshly  gathered  mature  leaves  of  Rhus  diversiloba  are  macerated 
with  acetone.  The  resulting  extract  is  decolorized  and  dehydrated  and 
then  concentrated  until  the  content  of  solid  matter  becomes  13  per  cent. 
Five  parts  of  this  liquid  are  added  to  95  parts  of  sterile  almond  oil 
containing   0.5    per    cent    of   chorobutanol   and    this   liquid    is   filtered. 

RHUS  TOX.  ANTIGEN-STRICKLER.— A  solution  of 
a  substance  extracted  from  the  fresh  leaves  of  Rhus  toxico- 
dendron; it  contains  0.4  Gm.  of  procaine  hydrochloride  in  each 
100  cc. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Rhus  tox.  antigen-Strickler  is  used  to 
determine  sensitiveness  to  Rhus  toxicodendron,  and  to  relieve 
the  symptoms  of  the  dermatitis  produced  through  contact  with 
the  plant. 

Dosage. — To  determine  sensitiveness  to  Rhus  toxicodendron, 
0.1  cc.  of  rhus  tox.  dermal  test  is  injected  intradermally.  For 
treatment,  three  doses  of  from  0.5  to  1.5  cc.  injected  intra- 
muscularly  are   given   at   twenty-four   hour   intervals. 

Manufactured  by  the  Mulford  Colloid  Laboratories,  Philadelphia. 
No   U.    S.   patent    or  trademark. 

Rhus  Tox.  Antigen-Strickler:  Packages  of  four  1  cc.  vials,  each  cc. 
containing   0.0075    Gm.   of   substance   dissolved   in   40   per   cent  alcohol. 

Rhus  Tox.  Dermal  Test:  Packages  of  a  1  cc.  vial,  each  cc.  containing 
0.0125   Gm.  of  substance  dissolved  in  a  menstruum  composed  of  dextrose, 


354     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

15   per  cent;   alcohol,   10   per  cent,   and   water,   75   per  cent    (accompanied 

by  a  vial   of  rhus  venenata  dermal  test). 

Freshly  gathered  leaves  of  Rhus  toxicodendron  are  extracted  with 
absolute  alcohol;  the  alcohol  is  removed,  the  residue  is  extracted  with 
chloroform  to  remove  the  chlorophyll,  and  then  treated  with  zinc  sul- 
fate; sodium  phosphate  is  then  added  to  precipitate  the  zinc  as  zinc 
phosphate;  the  precipitate  is  then  collected  and  dried.  The  precipitate 
is  extracted  successively  with  ether,  amyl  alcohol  and  dimethyl  carbinol 
in  an  extraction  apparatus,  the  extractions  evaporated  and  the  residual 
extract  dried  at  a  low  temperature. 

RHUS     VENENATA     ANTIGEN-STRICKLER.  — A 

solution  of  a  substance  extracted  from  the  fresh  leaves  of 
Rhus  venenata;  it  contains  0.4  Gm.  of  procaine  hydrochloride 
in  each  100  cc. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Rhus  venenata  antigen-Strickler  is  used 
to  determine  sensitiveness  to  Rhus  venenata,  and  to  relieve 
the  symptoms  of  the  dermatitis  produced  through  contact 
with  the  plant. 

Dosage. — To  determine  sensitiveness  to  Rhus  venenata,  0.1 
cc.  of  rhus  venenata  dermal  test  is  injected  intradermally. 
For  treatment,  three  doses  of  from  0.5  to  1.5  cc.  injected  intra- 
muscularly are  given  at  twenty-four  hour  intervals. 

Manufactured  by  the  Mulford  Colloid  Laboratories,  Philadelphia. 
No  U.    S.   patent  or  trademark. 

Rhus  Venenata  Antigen-Strickler:  Packages  of  four  1  cc.  vials,  each 
cc.  containing  0.0075  Gm.  of  substance  dissolved  in  40  per  cent  alcohol. 
Rhus  Venenata  Dermal  Test:  Packages  of  a  1  cc.  vial,  each  cc.  con- 
taining 0.0125  Gm.  of  substance  dissolved  in  a  menstruum  composed  of 
dextrose,  15  per  cent;  alcohol,  10  per  cent,  and  water,  75  per  cent 
(accompanied  by  a  vial  of  rhus  tox.   dermal  test). 

Freshly  gathered  leaves  of  Rlius  venenata  are  extracted  with  absolute 
alcohol;  the  alcohol  is  removed,  the  residue  is  extracted  with  chloroform 
to  remove  the  chlorophyll  and  then  treated  with  zinc  sulfate;  sodium 
phosphate  is  then  added  to  precipitate  the  zinc  as  zinc  phosphate;  the 
precipitate  is  then  collected  and  dried.  The  precipitate  is  extracted 
successively  with  ether,  amyl  alcohol  and  dimethylethyl  carbinol  in  an 
extraction  apparatus,  the  extractions  evaporated  and  the  residual  extract 
dried  at  a  low  temperature. 


SALICYLIC     ACID     COMPOUNDS 

To  avoid  the  disagreeable  taste  and  gastric  symptoms  of 
salicylates,  esters  and  similar  compounds  have  been  intro- 
duced, which  are  more  or  less  insoluble,  so  that  the  salicyl 
radical  is  liberated  only  in  the  intestine  or  after  absorption 
into  the  blood.  These  compounds  have  little,  or  no  direct 
action  on  the  stomach.  Notwithstanding  this,  nausea  and 
vomiting  are  frequently  induced,  probably  owing  to  action 
on  the  central  nervous  system.  In  practice,  these  compounds 
are  not  superior  to  sodium  salicylate,  which  does  not  produce 
direct  gastric  irritation  when  properly  guarded  by  a  bicar- 
bonate. 

The  taste  of  these  compounds  is  much  less  objectionable 
than  that  of  the  simpler  salicylate  salts,  but  this  advantage 
scarcely  balances  their  high  cost. 


SALICYLIC     ACID     COMPOUNDS  355 

The  alkyl  esters  (methyl  saHcylate  type)  are  absorbed  readily 
from  the  skin  and  are  therefore  better  for  external  use  than 
simpler  salicylates. 

The  acyl  derivatives  (acetylsalicylic  acid  type)  possess  a 
higher  analgesic  and  antipyretic  action  and  have  therefore  a 
special  field. 

The  salols  contain  active  phenols  which  adapt  them  to 
intestinal  antisepsis. 

Salicylic  acid  compounds  may  be  arranged  under  four  types : 

1.  Compounds  formed  by  replacing  the  hydrogen  (H)  of  the 
hydroxyl  group  (OH)  in  salicylic  acid,  by  acyl  radicals.  To  this 
type  belong  acetylsalicylic  acid  (aspirin)  C6H40.(COCH3). 
COOH  and  novaspirn. 

2.  Compounds  formed  by  replacing'  hydrogen  (H)  of 
the  carboxyl  group  (COOH)  in  salicylic  acid  by  alkyl  radi- 
cals: methyl  salicylate,  C6H4.0H.COO(CH3),  and  the  cor- 
responding ethyl  salicylate,  methoxymethyl  salicylate  (mesotan), 
monoglycol  salicylate  (spirosal),  and  methyl  benzoyl  salicylate 
(benzosalin).  Of  these,  ethyl  salicylate,  ethyl  salicylate  car- 
bonate (sal-ethyl  carbonate),  mesotan  and  spirosal  are  described 
in  N.  N.  R. 

3.  Compounds  formed  by  replacing  the  hydrogen  (H)  of 
the  carboxyl  group  (COOH)  in  salicylic  acid  by  phenol  rad- 
icals: phenyl  salicylate  (salol),  CoH4.0H.COO(C6Hb),  and  the 
corresponding  betanaphthyl  salicylate,  and  acetparamidophenyl 
salicylate  (phenetsal).  Of  these,  betanaphthyl  saHcylate  and 
phenetsal  are  described  in  N.  N.  R. 

4.  Salicylic  compounds  in  which  the  salicylic  action  is  sub- 
ordinate. Those  described  in  N.  N.  R  are :  mercuric  salicylate 
and  santyl. 

EQUIVALENTS    OF    100    PARTS    OF    VARIOUS    SALICYLIC    ACID    DERIVA- 
TI\-ES    IN    TERMS    OF    SALICYLIC    ACID    AND 

SODIUM  salicylate: 

Equivalent  Parts 
Equivalent  Parts        of  Sodium 
1 00   Parts   of  of  Salicylic  Acid         Salicylate 

Salicylic    acid     100  116 

Sodium    salicylate    86  100 

Acetylsalicylic    acid     11  89 

Sal-Ethyl    carbonate    11  89 

Novaspirin     62  72 

Acid  Derivatives  of  Salicylic  Acid  (Acetylsalicylic 
Acid  Type) 

These  are  employed  in  rheumatic  conditions,  and  especially 
as  analgesics  and  antipyretics  in  colds,  neuralgias,  etc.  Their 
analgesic  effects  surpass  those  of  sodium  salicylate,  with  less 
danger  of  local  irritation.  The  promiscuous  use  of  acetyl- 
salicylic  acid    (aspirin)    by  the   laity,   especially   for   the   relief 


356     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

of  headache,  has  frequently  led  to  cases  of  rather  severe  poi- 
soning, the  chief  symptoms  being  edema  of  the  lips,  tongue, 
eyelids,  nose  or  of  the  entire  face ;  also  urticarial  rashes,  vertigo, 
nausea  and  sometimes  cyanosis.  Some  persons  are  especially 
susceptible  to  acetylsalicylic  acid  and  these  symptoms  are  usually 
ascribed  to  an  idiosj^ncrasy. 

ACETYLSALICYLIC  ACID.— Aspirin.— "When  dried  to 
constant  weight  over  sulfuric  acid,  contains  not  less  than  99.5 
per  cent  of  HC7H4O0C2H3O2."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Acidum 
Acetylsalicylicum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Acid  Derivatives 
of  Salicylic  Acid   (Acetylsalicylic  Acid  Type). 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  1  Gm.  (5  to  15  grains),  repeated  once 
in  three  hours  until  symptoms  of  salicylism  (ringing  in  the 
ears,  etc.)  are  noted.  It  may  be  administered  in  the  form  of 
a  powder,  wafers,  or  capsules.  If  prescribed  as  a  powder, 
this  may  be  administered  by  dissolving  it  in  sweetened  water, 
or  by  placing  it  on  the  tongue,  and  taking  a  swallow  of  water. 
The  powder  should  be  dispensed  in  wax  paper. 

Acetylsalicylic  Acid-Heyden. — A  brand  of  acetylsalicylic 
acid-U.   S.  P. 

Prepared  by  Heyden   Chemical   Corporation,   New  York. 

Acetylsalicylic  Acid-Mallinckrodt. — A  brand  of  acetyl- 
salicylic acid-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

Acetylsalicylic  Acid-Merck.  —  A  brand  of  acetylsalicylic 
acid-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 

Acetylsalicylic  Acid  (Aspirin) -Monsanto. — A  brand  of 
acetylsalicylic  acid-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  Monsanto  Chemical  Works,  St.  Louis. 

NOVASPIRIN.  —  Salicitrin.  —  Methylene-Citrylsalicylic 
Acid. 

CH2.C00(GH4.C00H) 

I      O.CHa 

c  o 

I       CO 
CH2COO(C6H4.COOH).— 

A  compound  of  anhydromethylenecitric  acid  and  salicylic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Acid  Derivatives 
of  Salicylic  Acid  (Acetylsalicylic  Acid  Type). 

Dosage. — 1  Gm.   (15  grains),  several  times  daily. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York  City. 
U.  S.  patent  858,142   (June  25,   1907;  expired).     U.  S.  trademark  62,613. 


SALICYLIC     ACID     COMPOUNDS  357 

Novaspirin  Tablets,  5  grains. 

Novaspirin  is  a  grayish-white  odorless,  crystalline  powder,  permanent 
in  the  air,  having  a  faint  acidulous  taste.  It  is  almost  insoluble  in 
water;  soluble  in  alcohol;  less  soluble  in  ether  or  chloroform.  On 
heating  novaspirin  with  caustic  alkalis,  salicylate  is  formed,  and  on 
adding  diluted  acid  to  the  alkaline  solution,  crystals  of  salicylic  acid 
are  separated.  On  long  standing  in  the  presence  of  water  or  more 
quickly  with  alkalis,  novaspirin  is  split  into  its  components.  When 
heated  in  a  dry  test  tube  novaspirin  melts,  and  at  higher  temperatures 
formaldehyde  and  salicylic  acid  are  liberated.  The  salicylic  acid  sub- 
limes and  is  deposited  on  the  cooler  portions  of  the  tube.  Novaspirin 
when  decomposed  yields  62  per  cent  of  salicylic  acid.  After  drying 
over  sulfuric  acid  to  constant  weight,  novaspirin  melts  at  from  153 
to  154  C.  A  saturated,  aqueous  solution  of  novaspirin  (prepared  with- 
out heat)   does  not  produce  a  violet  color  with  ferric  chloride  solution. 

Incinerate  1  Gm.  of  novaspirin:  not  more  than  0.1  per  cent  of  ash 
remains. 

Dry  1  Gm.  of  novaspirin  over  sulfuric  acid:  the  loss  in  weight  is 
not  more  than  5  per  cent. 

Alkyl  Derivatives  of  Salicylic  Acid  (Methyl- 
Salicylate  Type) 

These  act  somewhat  more  slowly,  but  otherwise  as  efficiently 
as  sodium  salicylate.  They  are  for  the  most  part  saponified  in 
the  intestines,  but  some  may  be  absorbed  unchanged.  They 
have  not  the  disagreeable  taste,  but  frequently  they  cause  some- 
what more  local  irritation.  They  are  also  quite  well  absorbed 
from  the  skin,  and  may,  therefore,  be  applied  externally,  usually 
dissolved  in  olive  oil.  Methyl  salicylate  is  official  in  the  U.  S. 
Pharmacopeia. 

ETHYL  SALICYLATE.— Aethylis  Salicylas.— C6H4OH. 

C.O.O.(C2H5). — The  salicylic  acid  ester  of  ethyl  alcohol  anal- 
ogous to  methyl  salicylate   (oil  of  wintergreen). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ethyl  salicylate  has  the  same  action  as 
methyl  salicylate,  but  is  said  to  be  less  irritant  and  less  toxic. 

Dosage. — From  0.3  to  0.6  cc.  (5  to  10  minims)  three  or  four 
times  a  day. 

It  is  a  transparent,  colorless,  volatile  liquid,  possessing  a  pleasant 
characteristic  odor  and  taste.  Its  specific  gravity  is  1.132  at  20  C. 
and  it  boils  at  from  230  to  232  C.  It  is  insoluble  in  water,  but  soluble 
in   alcohol. 

Sal-Ethyl.— A  brand  of  ethyl  salicylate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.   S.   trademark  92,115. 

Sal-Ethyl  Capsules,  5  minims. 

MESOTAN.  —  Salmester.— C6H40H.CO.O.(CH2.0.CH3).— 

Methyloxymethyl  salicylate,  an  ester  of  salicylic  acid,  analogous 
to  methyl  salicylate. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Mesotan  is  an  active  counterirritant, 
used  especially  in  rheumatic  conditions,  similarly  to  the  local 
application  of  methyl  salicylate.  It  is  more  irritant  than  the 
latter,  and  lacks   its  odor.     It  is  absorbed  from  the  skin,  but 


358     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

its  action  is  predominantly  local,  relieving  pain  and  swelling. 
It  is  not  an  efficient  means  for  producing  the  systemic  actions 
of  salicylates. 

Dosage. — For  application  mesotan  is  diluted  with  1  to  4  parts 
of  olive  oil  or  cotton  seed  oil,  and  is  painted  over  the  affected 
area  usually  twice  daily.  Friction  should  not  be  used,  and 
dressings,  if  any  are  necessary,  should  be  light  and  permeable. 
The  site  of  application  should  be  changed,  if  possible,  after  each 
treatment;  or  the  area  may  be  rested  for  two  days  after  four 
days  of  treatment. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York.  U,  S 
patent  No.  706,018  (Aug.  5,  1902;  expired),  U.  S.  trademark  No 
39,017. 

Mesotan  is  a  clear,  yellowish,  faintly  aromatic,  oily  fluid,  specifit 
gravity  1.2  at  15  C.  and  boiling  at  about  162  C.  It  is  but  slightly 
soluble  in  water,  but  readily  soluble  in  the  usual  organic^  solvents 
and  miscible  with  oils  in  all  proportions.  Above  100  C.  it  is  decom- 
posed, yielding  salicylic  acid,  formaldehyde  and  methyl  alcohol,  and 
it   is   likewise   decomposed  to   a   certain   extent   by   moisture   in  the  air. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  mesotan  gives  a  violet  color  with  ferric 
chloride  and,  after  heating  or  exposure  to  moisture,  it  responds  to 
the  usual  tests  for  formaldehyde.  Concentrated  sulfuric  acid  colors 
it  red. 

Mesotan  should  be  kept  in  a  cool  place  and  preserved  dry  in  well- 
stoppered  bottles. 

SAL-ETHYL  CARBONATE.— The  carbonic  acid  ester 
of  ethyl  salicylate. — Salicvlic  ethyl  ester  carbonate. — 0:C 
(OC6H4.COOQH5)2. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Sal-ethyl  carbonate  provides  the  anti- 
pyretic and  analgesic  effects  of  the  salicylates.  It  is  relatively 
insoluble  in  water  and  in  the  acid  secretions  of  the  stomach, 
whereby  the  disagreeable  taste  and  local  gastric  symptoms  of 
the  soluble  salicylates  are  practically  avoided.  For  cases  requir- 
ing a  rapid  analgesic  and  antipyretic  effect  rather  than  salicylate 
saturation,  tablets  sal-ethyl  carbonate  with  aminopyrine  are 
supplied;  but  it  should  be  recalled  that  aminopyrine  may  pro- 
duce dangerous  granulocytopenia   in   occasional   individuals. 

Dosage. — Sal-ethyl  carbonate  and  tablets  sal-ethyl  carbonate 
with  aminopyrine  may  be  given  in  dosages  ranging  from  0.3  to 
1  Gm.  (5  to  15  grains),  three  or  four  times  daily,  according  to 
the  individual  requirements. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.   S.  trademark  92,115. 

Compressed   Tablets  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate  5  grs. 

Compressed  Tablets  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate  with  Aminopyrine:  Each  tab- 
let contains  sal-ethyl  carbonate  0.23  Gm.  (3J4  grains)  and  aminopyrine 
0.1   Gm.    (IJ^    grains). 

Compressed  Tablets  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate  with  Phenacetin:  Each  tablet 
contains  sal-ethyl  carbonate  0.23  Gm.  (3J/2  grains)  and  phenacetin 
(acetophenetidin-U.  S.  P.)   0.1  Gm.   (1^   grains). 

Tablet  Triturates  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate  1   gr. 

Sal-ethyl    carbonate    occurs   as    white,    odorless   and    tasteless   crystals. 

It   is    almost    insoluble    in    water    and    diluted    hydrochloric   acid.      It   is 

slightly   soluble    in   ether   and  alcohol  but   readily  soluble  in  chloroform 

and  acetone.     It  melts  between  96  and  99  C. 


SALICYLIC     ACID     COMPOUNDS  359 

Transfer  about  2  Gm.  of  sal-ethyl  carbonate  to  a  test  tube,  add  5  cc. 
of  half  normal  alcoholic  potassium  hydroxide  and  heat  on  the  steam 
bath  for  five  minutes:  the  product  dissolves,  and  the  formation  of  a  pre- 
cipitate follows;  cool,  decant  the  supernatant  liquid,  add  6  per  cent 
acetic  acid  to  the  precipitate;  it  effervesces;  add  an  equal  volume  of 
water  to  the  decanted  liquid:  a  colorless  oil  separates,  having  the  odor 
of  ethyl  salicylate.  Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  sal-ethyl  carbonate  to  an 
Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  20  cc.  of  normal  sodiurn  hydroxide,  20  cc.  of  alco- 
hol and  boil  under  a  reflux  condenser  for  thirty  minutes;  cool,  acidify 
the  solution  by  addition  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid;  extract  the  solution 
with  20  cc.  of  ether,  filter  the  ether,  evaporate  to  dryness:  the  residue 
responds  to   qualitative  tests   for   salicylic   acid. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sal-ethyl  carbonate  in  10  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid:  the  solution  remains  colorless  for  five  minutes  (readily  carboniz- 
able  substances).  Transfer  about  0.5  Gm.  of  sal-ethyl_  carbonate  to  a 
test  tube,  add  10  cc.  of  water  and  a  few  drops  of  ferric  chloride  solu- 
tion:  no  blue  color  develops    (salicylic  acid). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  sal-ethyl  carbonate,  accurately  weighed,  to 
an  Erlenmeyer  flask,  add  40  cc.  of  half-normal  alcoholic  potassium 
hydroxide,  boil  under  a  reflux  condenser  on  the  steam  bath  for  three 
hours,  wash  the  condenser  and  add  the  washings  to  the  flask,  remove  the 
alcohol  by  evaporating  to  about  one-third  the  volume,  adding  50  cc.  of 
water  and  evaporating  to  about  15  cc,  transfer  the  solution  to  a 
250  cc.  volumetric  flask,  make  up  to  volume  by  addition  of  water. 
Transfer  a  25  cc.  aliquot  to  an  Erlenmeyer  flask  and  test  the  solution 
according  to  the  method  for  total  salicylate  described  in  the  A.  O.  A.  C. 
Manual,  third  edition,  page  446,  Iodine  Method,  paragraph  24:  the 
weight  of  the  tetraiodophenylene  quinone  multiplied  by  0.5208  and  by 
the  aliquot  factor  is  equivalent  to  not  less  tnan  98.5  per  cent  nor 
more  than  100.5  per  cent  of  the  sample  taken.  Transfer  about  1  Gm. 
of  sal-ethyl  carbonate,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  tared  weighing  bottle; 
heat  in  an  oven  at  100  C.  for  one  hour;  cool  in  a  desiccator  and 
weigh:  the  loss  in  weight  is  not  greater  than  1  per  cent.  Transfer 
about  0.5  Gm.  of  sal-ethyl  carbonate,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  platinum 
dish  and  ignite:  the  ash  is  not  more  than  0.2  per  cent. 

SPIROSAL.  —  Alonoglycol-Salicylate.  —  Glysal.  —  CeHiGH 
CO.O.(CH2.CH2.0H). — The  salicylic  acid  ester  of  monoglycol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Acid  Derivative  of 
Salicylic  Acid.  When  spirosal  is  applied  to  the  skin  from  about 
one-fifth  to  one-sixth  of  the  amount  used  is  absorbed.  Usually 
it  causes  very  little  irritation  even  when  rubbed  in  thoroughly. 

Dosage. — It  is  used  undiluted  or  mixed  with  from  2  to  3 
parts  of  alcohol  or  in  a  mixture  with  olive  oil,  1  to  8,  or  in 
ointments  with  equal  parts  by  weight  of  petrolatum  or  lard. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.  U.  S.  patent 
794,982    (July  18,   1905;  expired).     U.   S.  trademark  62,856. 

Spirosal  is  an  almost  odorless  and  colorless  oily  fluid,  with  a  boiling- 
point  of  from  169  to  170  C.  at  12  mm.  pressure.  It  is  easily  soluble 
in  alcohol,  ether,  chloroform  and  benzol  and  soluble  in  about  110  parts 
of  water  and  8  parts  of  olive  oil. 

When  0.5  Gm.  spirosal  is  saponified  with  5  cc.  sodium  hydroxide 
solution  by  slight  warming,  the  clear  fluid  diluted  with  water  and 
acidified  with  dilute  sulfuric  acid,  fine  crystalline  needles  of  salicylic 
acid  are  formed,  which,  after  being  extracted  with  ether  and  the  latter 
then  _  evaporated,  can  be  identified  by  the  melting  point  and  ferric 
chloride  reaction.  The  saturated  aqueous  solution  obtained  by  shaking 
1  cc.  of  spirosal  with  50  cc.  of  water  gives  a  filtrate,  which  becomes 
intensely  violet  on  addition  of  ferric  chloride,  but  should  not  be 
changed  by  barium  nitrate  or  silver  nitrate  solution.  Five-tenths  Gm. 
of  spirosal  when  added  to  2  cc.  of  concentrated  sulfuric  acid  should 
give  a  light  yellow  and  not  a  brownish  color;  0.3  Gm.,  if  incinerated 
on  platinum  foil,   should  not  leave  any  weighable  residue. 


360     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Phenol  Derivatives  of  Salicylic  Acid 
(Salol  Type) 

Phenol  derivatives  of  salicylic  acid  of  the  salol  type  are 
used  mainly  as  intestinal  antiseptics.  Phenyl  salicylate  (salol) 
is  official. 

BETANAPHTHYL  SALICYLATE.  —  See  Naphthol 
Compounds. 

PHENETSAL.— See  Phenetidin  Derivatives. 

Salicylic  Compounds  in  Which  the  Salicylate  Action 
Is  Subordinate 
MERCURIC  SALICYLATE.— See  Alercuric  Compounds. 

SANTYL.— See  Sandalwood  Oil  Derivatives. 


SANDALWOOD     OIL     DERIVATIVES 

The  oil  of  sandalwood  is  eliminated  chiefly  by  the  kidneys 
and  is  a  fairly  effective  urinary  antiseptic,  although  it  is  inferior 
to  methenamine  in  acid  urines.  It  is  used  particularly  in  sub- 
acute or  chronic  urethritis  and  cystitis.  The  oil,  at  times, 
is  disturbing  to  the  stomach,  and  medicinal  doses  may  cause 
irritation  of  the  bladder  with  dysuria  and  pain  in  the  kidney 
region  and  urethra. 

The  new  derivatives  of  santal  oil  are  generally  less  irritating 
than  the  oil  itself. 

ARHEOL  (Astier). — Santalol. — A  sesquiterpenic  alcohol, 
the  chief  constituent  of  sandalwood  oil.  Arehol  (Astier)  con- 
tains not  less  than  95  per  cent  of  santalol. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  action  of  arehol  (Astier)  is  the  same 
as  that  of  santalol.  It  is  used  in  urethritis,  cystitis  and  vesical 
catarrh,  especially  from  gonorrhea. 

Dosage. — From  0.4  to  0.6  Gm.  (6  to  10  grains).  Arehol 
(Astier)  is  marketed  only  in  pearls  containing  0.2  Gm.  (3 
grains)  of  which  from  9  to  12  pearls  are  to  be  taken  daily. 

Manufactured  by  Dr.   P.   Astier  Laboratories,   Paris   and  Gallia  Labora- 
tories, Inc.,  New  York.     No  U.  S.   patent.     U.   S.  trademark  72,513. 
Arheol  (Astier)  Pearls:    Arheol  pearls,  0.2  Gm.    (3  grains). 

Arheol  (Astier)  is  a  colorless,  oily  liquid;  specific  gravity  about 
0.968  at  15  C.  It  is  insoluble  in  water  but  soluble  in  alcohol.  It 
boils  under  11  mm.  pressure  at  169  C,  and  under  ordinary  pres- 
sure at  about  300  C. 

SANTYL.  —  Santalolis  Salicylas.  —  Salicylic  Ester  of 
Santalol.— Santalyl  Salicylate.— C6H4OH.COO  (C15H23).  —  The 
salicylic  acid  ester  of  santalol. 


SCOPOLAMINE  361 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  is  said  that  santyl  passes  the  stomach 
unchanged  but  is  slowly  split  up  in  the  intestines  into  its  con- 
stituents, santalol  and  salicylic  acid.  Santyl  is  claimed  to  have 
the  same  actions  as  sandalwood  oil,  except  that  because  of  the 
slow  liberation  of  santalol,  it  produces  less  irritation  of  the 
gastro-intestinal  tract  or  of  the  kidneys  and  urinary  passages, 
and  no  unpleasant  odor  or  eructations. 

It  is  claimed  to  be  useful  in  the  same  manner  as  santal  oil 
for  gonorrheal  urethritis. 

Dosage. — 1.5  cc.  (24  minims)  usually  given  in  4  capsules  of 
0.4  cc.  (6  minims)  each,  three  times  a  day.  It  is  incompatible 
with  alkalis  and  with  the  usual  incompatibles  of  the  sandal- 
wood oil  and  of  salicylates. 

Manufactured  by  E.  Bilhuber,  Inc.,  Jersey  City,  -N.  J.  (Bilhuber-Knoll 
Corporation,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.,  distributor).  U.  S.  patent  862,858  (Aur. 
6,  1907;  expired)  by  license  from  The  Chemical  Foundation,  Inc.  U.  S. 
trademark   61,255. 

Santyl   Capsules,   6   minims. 

According  to  the  German  patent  the  neutral  esters  of  sandalwood 
oil  are  produced  by  heating  the  oil  with  the  respective  acid  anhydrides 
and   subsequent   purification   of   the   product. 

Santyl  is  a  yellowish  oil  with  only  a  faint  balsamic  odor  and  taste: 
specific  gravity,  1.07  at  15  C;  it  boils  under  20  mm.  pressure  at 
121  C.  to  126.6  C,  with  partial  decomposition.  It  is  insoluble  in 
water,  but  soluble  in  about   10   parts  of  alcohol. 

Santyl  should  possess  the  physical  constants  given  above.  On  saponi- 
fication with  alcoholic  sodium  hydroxide  it  should  yield  approximately 
40  per   cent  of  salicylic  acid  and  60  per  cent  of  santalol. 


SCOPOLAMINE 

SCOPOLAMINE    HYDROBROMIDE.— Hyoscine 

Hydrobromide.  —  "The  hydrobromide  of  levorotatory  scopo- 
lamine obtained  from  plants  of  the  Solanaceae."  U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Scopo- 
laminae  Hydrobromidum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  is  used  mainly  as  a  sedative  in  Psy- 
chiatry and  Surgery  and  also  locally  as  a  mydriatic  in  cases 
which  display  an  idiosyncrasy  toward  atropine.  Its  peripheral 
(but  not  its  central)  action  is  similar  to  that  of  atropine  but  its 
effects  are  more  transient. 

SCOPOLAMINE  STABLE-ROCHE.  —  Scopomannit.— 
An  aqueous  solution  of  pure  scopolamine  hydrobromide,  pro- 
tected against  decomposition  by  the  addition  of  10  per  cent 
of  mannite. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — The  same  as  those  of  scopo- 
lamine hydrobromide-U.   S.   P. 

Ampules  Scopolamine  Stable-Roche,  V^oo  grain,  1  cc.  Each  ampule 
contains  1.2  cc.   (1  cc.  contains  0.0003  Gm.  of  scopolamine  hydrobromide). 

Ampules  Scopolamine  Stable-Roche,  Vioo  grain,  1  cc:  Each  ampule  con- 
tains   1.2    cc.    (1    cc.    contains   0.0006    Gm.    of    scopolamine   hydrobromide). 

Manufactured  by  Hofifmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.  No  U.  S. 
patent.     German   patent  266,415.     U.   S.   trademark   103,288  and   103,289. 


362     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Scopolamine  stable-Roche  is  prepared  from  freshly  manufactured 
scopolamine  hydrobromide  having  an  optical  activity  of  — 26.0"  for 
the  sodium  line  (determined  in  an  aqueous  solution  containing  the 
equivalent  of  4.5  Gm.  of  anhydrous  scopolamine  hydrobromide  in  100 
cc.  at  a  temperature  of  15  C.  in  a  100  millimeter  tube)  and  a  melting 
point  of  195  C.  by  dissolving  in  an  aqueous  10  per  cent  solution  of 
mannite. 

That  scopolamine  stable-Roche  contains  all  of  its  scopolamine  in  an 
undecomposed  state  may  be  determined  by  comparing  its  action  with 
that  of  a  freshly  prepared  solution  of  scopolamine  hydrobromide.  For 
this  purpose  the  manufacturers  recommend  the  method  of  Langer,  in 
which  the  frog  heart  is  stopped  by  muscarine,  or,  better,  by  pilocarpine, 
and  the  systolic  beat  is  reestablished  by  the  addition  of  scopolamine, 
which  is  antagonistic  to  both  muscarine  and  pilocarpine. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES 

Under  this  heading  are  described  in  the  following  pages 
agents  of  a  complex  biologic  nature  which  are  used  in  the 
treatment  and  diagnosis  of  disease  and  which  depend  for  their 
action  on  various  phases  and  relations  of  immunity. 

Federal  Regulations. — The  urgent  need  for  control  of  many 
of  these  potent  and,  in  some  cases,  dangerous  products  has 
been  partly  met  by  a  federal  law  entitled  "An  act  to  regulate 
the  sale  of  viruses,  serums,  toxins,  and  analogous  products 
in  the  District  of  Columbia,  to  regulate  interstate  traffic  in 
said  articles  and  for  other  purposes."  Under  this  law  the 
importation,  exportation  or  interstate  sale  of  these  products 
is  expressly  forbidden  unless  the  manufacturer  holds  a  license 
from  the  Secretary  of  the  Treasury. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that  the  protection  of  the  federal  law  is 
of  avail  only  in  the  case  of  prophylactic  and  therapeutic  prepa- 
rations which  are  shipped  for  interstate  sale.  Only  products 
which  are  licensed  for  import,  export  or  interstate  sale  and 
which  have  not  been  found  to  conflict  with  the  rules  of  the 
Council  will  be  found  listed  here.  In  purchasing  the  products 
for  use,  preference  should  be  given  to  those  which  have  been 
kept  continually  at  a  low  temperature. 

Dating  of  Biologic  Products. — The  federal  law  requires  that 
each  package  of  biologic  products  be  marked  with  an  expira- 
tion date,  "the  date  beyond  which  the  contents  cannot  be 
expected  beyond  reasonable  doubt  to  yield  their  specific 
result."  The  regulations  framed  under  this  law,  as  outlined 
below,  prescribe  for  each  class  of  product  how  long  after 
date  of  manufacture  or  issue  this  expiration  date  may  be; 
but  the  temperature  at  which  the  product  is  kept  after  leav- 
ing the  manufacturer's  hands  cannot  be  controlled.  The  tem- 
perature on  the  shelves  of  the  supply  house  or  drug  store 
during  storage  is  fully  as  important  as  the  time  of  such 
storage,  and  physicians  would  do  well  to  secure  their  biologic 
products  from  stocks  which  are  shown  by  actual  continuous 
thermometer  records  to  have  been  kept  in  cold  storage.  This 
is  particularly  applicable  to  the  more  rapidly  deteriorating 
products,  such  as  smallpox  vaccine,  rabies  vaccine,  diphtheria 
toxoid  antipneumococcic  serum,  and  antimeningococcic  serum. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  363 

Official  potency  standards  have  been  established,  or  official 
potency  tests  are  made  at  the  National  Institute  of  Health  prior 
to  the  release  of  each  lot,  for  the  following  products :  botulinus 
antitoxin,  diphtheria  antitoxin,  B.  histolyticus  antitoxin,  B. 
odematiens  antitoxin,  staphylococcus  antitoxin,  tetanus  antitoxin, 
scarlet  fever  streptococcus  antitoxin,  perfringens  antitoxin,  vibrion 
septique  antitoxin,  diphtheria  toxin-antitoxin  mixture,  diphtheria 
toxoid,  antidysenteric  serum,  antimeningococcic  serum,  antipneu- 
mococcic  serum,  bacterial  vaccines  prepared  from  paratyphoid 
bacillus  A,  paratyphoid  bacillus  B,  and  typhoid  bacillus,  diph- 
theria toxin  for  the  Schick  test  and  scarlet  fever  streptococcus 
toxin  for  the  Dick  test  and  for  immunization.  For  these  products 
the  dating  of  each  lot  is  based  on  the  last  test  for  potency, 
that  is,  the  date  of  manufacture  is  taken  as  the  last  date  of 
satisfactorily  passing  a  potency  test.  For  all  other  biologic 
products,  the  testing  for  potency  is  on  a  less  satisfactory  basis, 
and  the  date  of  manufacture  is  counted  as  the  date  of  removal 
from  the  animal  in  case  of  animal  products,  or  the  date  of 
cessation  of  growth  in  the  case  of  other  products.  For  the 
purpose  of  determining  the  expiration  date,  the  date  of  issue 
may  be  used  instead  of  the  date  of  manufacture,  provided 
the  product  has  been  kept  between  the  date  of  manufacture 
and  the  date  of  issue  not  longer  than  the  following  periods, 
at  the  corresponding  temperature:  twenty- four  months  con- 
stantly below  0  C. ;  or  twelve  months  constantly  below  5  C, 
or  six  months  constantly  below  10  C. ;  or  three  months  con- 
stantly below  15  C. 

Added  Preservatives. — The  safeguarding  of  serums,  vaccines, 
etc.,  against  bacterial  contamination  requires  the  addition  of 
some  antiseptic.  In  the  preservation  of  serums  which  are  used 
in  larger  volumes,  the  amount  and  character  of  the  preservative 
are  more  important  matters.  The  most  commonly  used  anti- 
septics are  cresol  (0.4  per  cent),  phenol  (0.5  per  cent),  glycerin, 
and  organic  mercury  compounds. 

Immunity  Reactions. — Immunity,  in  its  broadest  medical 
sense,  means  resistance  to  disease  or  harm.  To  attempt  a 
more  precise  definition  would  give  emphasis  to  certain  theo- 
ries or  parts  of  the  subject  to  the  exclusion  of  others.  The 
science  of  immunology,  however,  is  concerned  chiefly  with  the 
specific  reactions  which  occur  after  a  preparation  containing 
the  micro-organisms  of  an  infectious  disease  or  a  complex 
substance  similar  to  the  products  of  micro-organisms  is  intro- 
duced within  the  body.  In  general,  these  reactions  are 
specific;  for  instance,  diphtheria  toxin  stimulates  the  body 
to  produce  an  antitoxin  which  combines  with  no  other  toxin 
save  that  produced  by  the  diphtheria  bacillus. 

The  reactions  of  immunity  may  act  either  to  prevent  dis- 
ease or  to  cure  it,  or  to  distinguish  one  disease  from  another. 
Accordingly,  the  products  enumerated  in  this  section  may  be 
used  in  prophylaxis,  in  treatment,  or  in  diagnosis.     Immunity 


364     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

may  be  natural  to  the  individual  or  it  may  be  acquired.  That 
which  is  called  into  play  by  the  use  of  these  products  is,  of 
course,  acquired  immunity. 

There  is  a  further  classification  of  acquired  immunity  into 
passive  and  active  forms.  In  active  immunity,  the  agents 
which  actually  perform  the  protective  work  are  created  within 
the  body.  In  passive  immunity,  these  agents  are  introduced 
ready  formed  from  without.  This  gives  us  a  basis  for  the 
classification  of  the  therapeutic  products.  Those  of  the  first 
class,  the  serums,  and  the  antitoxins,  which  are  derived  from 
the  serums,  are  intended  to  produce  passive  immunity ;  they 
are  "antibodies,"  which  directly  antagonize  the  invading  bac- 
teria and  toxins. 

The  other  great  class  of  immunity  products  is  called  "anti- 
gens" because  they  are  administered  in  the  hope  that  their 
presence  in  the  body  will  stimulate  the  production  of  anti- 
bodies. 

This  active  immunity,  formed  by  the  introduction  of  anti- 
gens is,  in  general,  slower  in  appearance  but  more  lasting 
than  the  passive  immunity  caused  by  the  introduction  of 
foreign  antibodies.  It  must  be  remembered  also  that  the 
antigen  is  of  the  same  nature  as  the  organism  causing  the 
disease  which  is  to  be  combated,  and  that  in  using"  antigens 
we  are  calling  on  the  cells  and  fluids  of  the  individual  to 
produce  their  own  protecting  substances.  To  the  class  of 
antigens  belong  bacterial  and  viral  vaccines,  tuberculins,  toxins, 
and  toxoids. 

These  antigens  and  antibodies  are  of  unknown  chemical 
composition  and  of  high  molecular  weight,  and  even  when 
soluble,  are  not  usually  absorbed,  without  change,  from  the 
gastro-intestinal  tract.  Hence,  they  must  be  administered  by 
the  intracutaneous,  subcutaneous,  intramuscular,  intraspinal,  or 
intravenous  route  in  order  to  reach  tissues  not  directly 
accessible. 

The  use  of  serums  and  serum  preparations  is  sometimes 
followed  by  certain  manifestations  which  are  discussed  under 
Normal  Horse  Serum.  These  are  due  to  sensitivity  of  the 
individual  to  horse  serum  and  in  certain  cases  may  be  avoided 
by  the  use  of  serums  from  the  bovine  species  or  from  sheep 
or  goats. 

I.     Non-Immune  Serums 

NORMAL    HORSE    SERUM.— Serum  Equinum.— The 

serum  of  the  blood  of  the  normal  horse  obtained  in  a  sterile 
manner  and  passed  through  a  Berkefeld  filter. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Though  not  a  specific  immunity  prod- 
uct, normal  horse  serum  is  classed  commonly  with  the  other 
serums.  It  is  claimed  that  it  is  used  with  success  in  hemor- 
rhagic conditions,  to  increase  the  coagulability  of  the  blood.  ^ 

The  injection  of  horse  serum  is  followed  in  certain  indi- 
viduals by  more  or  less  pronounced  symptoms  of  anaphylactic 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  365 

shock.  In  its  mildest  form,  this  appears  as  an  urticarial  erup- 
tion on  the  skin  or  an  edematous  swelling  of  the  mucous 
membranes.  In  more  severe  cases,  there  may  be  a  fall  of 
temperature,  increased  rapidity  of  pulse,  quickened  and  diffi- 
cult respiration,  cyanosis,  and  occasionally  convulsions.  In 
rare  cases,  the  attack  comes  on  with  great  suddenness  and 
may  terminate  fatally.  These  cases  of  sudden  death  occur 
especially  in  asthmatics  and  in  patients  who  are  naturally 
hypersensitive  to  horse  serum.  Ordinary  serum  disease  mani- 
fests itself  by  milder  but  similar  symptoms  which  appear 
from  a  few  days  to  one  or  two  weeks  after  the  injection  of 
the  serum.  In  addition  to  the  eruptions  which  are  urticarial 
or  scarlatiniform,  joint  pains  and  swelling  of  the  joints  some- 
times occur. 

If  horse  serum  is  applied  liberally  to  a  burn  or  an  open 
wound  on  a  patient  who  is  sensitive,  there  is  danger  of  a  severe 
if  not  a  fatal  reaction.  Before  administering  horse  serum  or 
a  preparation  containing  it  to  a  patient,  whether  topically, 
intracutaneously,  subcutaneously,  or  intravenously,  the  physician 
should  obtain  a  history  of  the  patient  as  regards  serum  admin- 
istration. Even  if  the  history  shows  absence  of  previous  symp- 
toms of  allergy  or  of  previous  serum  administration,  the  safest 
procedure  is  to  make  a  test  of  sensitiveness  by  injection  of  not 
more  than  0.05  cc.  of  a  1  in  10  dilution  of  the  serum  in  the 
skin  of  the  forearm  or  the  instillation  of  a  drop  of  the  same 
dilution  into  the  conjunctival  sac.  No  patient  showing  sensi- 
tiveness should  be  given  the  serum  without  previous  desensitiza- 
tion. 

Most  cases  of  serum  reaction  have  occurred  after  the  use 
of  antitoxic  serums ;  but  emphasis  should  be  laid  on  the  fact 
that  these  symptoms  are  not  caused  by  antitoxin,  but  are  due 
to  hypersusceptibility  to  the  proteins  of  horse  serum  in  which 
it  is  contained. 

Atropine  and  epinephrine  hypodermically,  should  be  used  for 
the  severer  manifestations  of  serum  reactions. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Normal  Horse  Scrum. — Marketed  in  syringes  each  containing  10  cc; 
also  in  vials  containing   10,  25,  SO  or   100  cc.  as  ordered. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Normal  Horse-Serum. — Marketed  in  a  special  syringe  containing  10  cc, 
with   sterile   needle. 

Normal  Horse  Serum  (1:10  Dilution)  for  the  Conjunctival  Test. — 
Normal  horse  serum  one  part,  diluted  with  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  nine  parts,  and  containing  0.45  per  cent  chlorobutanol. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  with  dropper  outfit.  To  determine 
hypersensitiveness  to  the  proteins  of  horse  serum,  one  drop  is  placed 
in  the   conjunctival  sac. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Normal  Horse  Serum. — The  serum  of  the  blood  of  the  normal  horse 
obtained  in  a  sterile  manner  and  passed  through  a  Berkefeld  filter. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  10  cc;  also  in  packages 
of  one  vial  containing  20  cc. 


366     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Normal  Horse  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  syringe; 
in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  syringe;  in  packages  of  one  50  cc.  double  ended 
vial. 

Normal  Horse  Serum  Without  Preservative. — Marketed  in  packages  of 
one  vial  containing  100  cc. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Normal  Horse  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  contain- 
ing 10  cc. ;  in  packages  of  two  syringes  each  containing  10  cc;  in 
packages  of  one  vial  containing  25  cc. ;  in  packages  of  one  double  ended 
vial  containing  50  cc.  Also  marketed  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial,  and 
in  packages  of  one  100  cc.  double  ended  vial,  complete  with  intravenous 
outfit.  One  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  dilution  is  included  with  each  package 
for  determining  sensitivity  of  the  patient  by  scratch  or  intradermal  test. 

Parke,  Davis  and  Company,  Detroit. 

Normal  Horse  Serum-P.  D.  and  Co. — Marketed  in  packages  containing 
one  10  cc.  syringe  container;  in  packages  containing  one  10  cc.  rubber- 
stoppered  bulb;  in  packages  containing  one  30  cc.  rubber-capped  bulb, 
and  in  packages  containing  one  1   cc.    rubber-stoppered  vial. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Normal  Horse  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing 
10  cc;  also  in  vials  of  20  cc  and  50  cc 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth, 
Wis. 

Normal  Horse  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing 
10  cc.     The  serum  is  preserved  with  0.4  per  cent  of  orthocresol. 

II.   Antibodies  Used  for  Prophylactic  or  Therapeutic 
Purposes 

Antibodies  are  usually  directed  against  the  toxins  or  solu- 
ble products  of  bacteria  or  against  the  bacteria  themselves.  All 
the  antibodies  enumerated  below^  are  formed  in  the  blood  serum 
of  the  larger  domestic  animals  by  active  immunization ;  that  is, 
by  injecting  the  animal  with  an  antigen.  The  animal  is  then 
bled  to  furnish  the  serum,  which  afterward  may  be  purified,  in 
the  case  of  the  antitoxins  and  some  immune  serums,  to  remove 
as  many  inactive  substances  as  possible,  leaving  the  antitoxin 
in  a  concentrated  form. 

ANTITOXINS 

The  antitoxins  are  among  the  most  useful  of  the  antibodies. 
As  the  name  implies,  they  antagonize  toxins.  Though  toxins 
may  be  secreted  by  plants  other  than  the  bacteria  and  by  some 
animals,  e.  g.,  the  snake,  the  typical  toxins  are  the  soluble 
poisons  produced  by  diphtheria  and  tetanus  bacilli. 

Diphtheria  and  tetanus  are  dangerous  diseases  almost  entirely 
on  account  of  the  action  of  these  toxins,  and  conversely,  their 
prevention  or  cure,  when  the  organisms  have  once  gained 
entrance  to  the  body,  depends  on  the  work  of  the  particular 
antitoxin.  Though  the  presence  of  the  toxin  stimulates  the 
body  to  produce  antitoxin,   this   active   immunity  may   not  be 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  367 

enough  to  save  life;  and,  at  any  rate,  assistance  by  the  injection 
of  antitoxin,  ready  made  in  the  blood  serum  of  another  animal, 
hastens  the  cure  or  may  prevent  the  disease. 

In  some  cases,  eruptions  occur  after  injection  of  antitoxin, 
rarely  swelling  and  pain  in  the  joints.  In  other  cases,  more 
severe  symptoms  have  been  observed  and  in  a  few  instances 
sudden  death  has  occurred.  These  conditions  are  due,  not  to 
the  antitoxin  but  to  the  horse  serum  in  which  it  is  contained. 
(See  Normal  Horse  Serum.) 

ANAEROBIC  ANTITOXIN.— An  antitoxic  serum  pre- 
pared by  immunizing  animals  against  the  anaerobic  bacteria 
found  in  gangrenous  wounds. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Evidence  has  been  published  to  indicate 
that  the  use  of  anaerobic  toxin  preparations  may  be  of  value  in 
the  treatment  of  gas  gangrene. 

Cutter  Laboratories,   Berkeley,   Calif. 

Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin,  Prophylactic  (Tetanus-Gas  Gangrene  Anti- 
toxin.).— An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  the 
toxins  of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani),  B.  perfringens  (CI.  zvelchii),  and' 
Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni).  The  animals  are  usually 
immunized  with  individual  toxins  and  the  resulting  antiserums  are  con- 
centrated by  a  modified  Banzhaf  method  and  mixed  in  proper  proportions. 
Unitage  of  the  tetanus  antitoxin,  Welch  bacillus  antitoxin  and  Vibrion 
septique  antitoxin  is  determined  according  to  the  method  prescribed  by 
the  National   Institute  of  Health. 

The  product  is  marketed  in  syringes  and  in  vials  containing  1,500  units 
of  Tetanus  antitoxin,  2,000  units  of  B.  welchii  antitoxin,  2,000  units  of 
Vibrion  septique  antitoxin. 

Dosage. — The  usual  prophylactic  dose  is  the  contents  of  one  syringe. 
Cases  in  which  considerable  time  has  elapsed  since  the  injury  or  in 
which  the  wound  is  particularly  liable  to  severe  infection  may  require  a 
larger  initial  dose.  In  those  cases  in  which  the  wound  is  badly  lacerated, 
or  which   are  badly  soiled,  the  dose  should  be  repeated  in  seven  days. 

Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin,  Therapeutic  (Gas  Gangrene  Antitoxin). — ^An 
antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  the  toxins  of  B. 
welchii  (CI.  welchii),  Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni) ,  B.  oede- 
matiens  (CI.  oedematiens)  and  B.  sordelli  (CI.  oedematoides).  The 
animals  are  usually  immunized  with  individual  toxins  and  the  resulting 
antiserums  are  concentrated  by  a  modified  Banzhaf  method  and  mixed  in 
proper  proportions.  Welch  bacillus  antitoxin,  vibrion  septique  and 
oedematiens  antitoxin  are  standardized  according  to  the  method  described 
by  the  National  Institute  of  Health.  B.  sordellii  antitoxin  is  standard- 
ized by  determining  the  number  of  guinea-pig  minimal  lethal  doses  of 
each  toxin  against  which  the  unit  volume  of  the  antitoxin  will  protect. 

The  product  is  marketed  in  bottles  containing  10,000  units  of  B.  welchii 
antitoxin,  10,000  units  of  Vibrion  septique  antitoxin,  500  units  of  B. 
oedematiens  and  enough  B.  sordellii  antitoxin  to  neutralize  50,000  or 
more  guinea-pig  minimal  lethal  doses  of  their  respective  toxins. 

Dosage. — The  initial  therapeutic  dose  is  the  contents  of  one  bottle, 
repeated  at  intervals  of  from  six  to  twelve  hours  as  required.  In  the 
early  stages  of  treatment  the  antitoxin  should  be  given  intravenously  if 
possible. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Tetanus  Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin,  "Globulin-Lederle-Modified." — A 
polyvalent  antitoxin  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  against  the  toxins 
of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani),  B.  perfringens  (CI.  perfringens)  and  Vibrion 
septique    (CI.    oedematis-maligni).      The    toxins    are    individually    prepared 


368     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

in  suitable  broth  mediums  grown  aerobically  after  inoculation  with 
anaerobically  grown  cultures.  Some  horses  are  immunized  with  injec- 
tions of  but  one  toxin,  while  others  are  immunized  against  several, 
simultaneously.  When  trial  bleeding  tests  indicate  that  horses  have 
achieved  a  suitabe  antitoxic  potency,  aseptic  bleedings  of  plasma  are 
made.  This  product  differs  from  tetanus-gas-gangrene  antitoxin  refined 
and  concentrated-Lederle  chiefly  in  the  method  of  refinement.  Accord- 
ing to  the  manufacturer,  the  process  of  refinement  is  based  essentially 
on  a  controlled  method  of  selective  digestion  of  the  proteins  of  the 
immune  horse  blood  with  pepsin.  As  a  result  of  this  process,  up  to 
90  per  cent  of  the  coagulable  protein  may  be  digested,  a  small  portion 
is  precipitated,  and  the  remainder,  a  pseudoglobulin  fraction,  is  purified 
first  by  ordinary  filtration  and  then  by  ultrafiltration  and  dialysis.  The 
resultant  solution  is  sterilized  and  standardized  the  same  as  antitoxin 
solutions  obtained  by  the  usual  "salting  out"  methods.  Tests  for  the 
content  of  tetanus  antitoxin,  perfringens  antitoxin  and  Vibrion  septique 
antitoxin  are  made  according  to  the  methods  described  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health.  The  product  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe 
containing  one  prophylactic  dose  and  one  vial  containing  one  prophylactic 
dose,  stated  to  represent  tetanus  antitoxin  1,500  units,  perfringens  anti- 
toxin  2,000    units   and   Vibrion   septique   2,000   units. 

Dosage. — Prophylactic:  the  contents  of  one  syringe  or  vial  within 
twelve  hours  of  the  injury.  If  there  is  still  further  danger  of  infection, 
this  may  be  repeated  in  five  to  seven  days. 

Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Polyvalent)  without  Tetanus  Antitoxin, 
"Globulin-Lederle-Modified."  —  A  polyvalent  antitoxin  prepared  by 
immunizing  horses  against  the  toxins  of  B.  perfringens  (CI.  perfringens), 
Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematis  maligni),  B.  oedematiens  (CI.  oede- 
matiens),  B.  sordellii  (CI.  sordellii)  and  B.  histolyticus  (CI.  hist olyti cum ) . 
The  toxins  are  individually  prepared  in  suitable  broth  mediums  grown 
aerobically  after  inoculation  with  anaerobically  grown  cultures.  Some 
horses  are  immunized  with  injections  of  but  one  toxin,  while  others  are 
immunized  against  several,  simultaneously.  When  a  potent  antitoxic 
serum  (as  indicated  by  potency  tests  applied  to  trial  bleedings)  is 
obtained,  aseptic  bleedings  of  plasma  are  made.  This  product  differs 
from  gas-gangrene  antitoxin  (polyvalent)  without  tetanus  antitoxin-Lederle 
chiefly  in  the  method  of  refinement.  The  process  of  refinement  is  based 
essentially  on  a  controlled  method  of  selective  digestion  of  the  proteins 
of  the  immune  horse  blood  with  pepsin;  as  a  result  of  this  process,  up 
to  90  per  cent  of  the  coagulable  protein  may  be  digested,  a  smaller  portion 
is  precipitated,  and  the  remainder,  a  pseudoglobulin  fraction,  is  purified 
first  by  ordinary  filtration  and  then  by  ultrafiltration  and  dialysis.  The 
resultant  solution  is  sterilized  and  standardized  the  same  as  antitoxin 
solutions  obtained  by  the  usual  "salting  out"  methods.  Tests  for  the 
content  of  perfringens  antitoxin  and  Vibrion  septique  antitoxin  are  made 
according  to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National  Institute  of  Health. 
B.  oedematiens  (CI.  oedematiens)  antitoxin  is  tested  according  to  the 
method  prescribed  by  the  Commission  of  Biological  Standardization  of 
the  League  of  Nations  in  August  1934.  The  B.  histolyticus  (CI.  his- 
tolyticum)  and  B.  sordellii  (CI.  sordellii)  antitoxins  are  tested  for 
potency  by  injection  into  mice  of  serial  dilutions  of  the  antitoxin  with 
definite  amounts  of  the  respective  toxins,  the  M.  L.  D.  of  the  toxins 
having  previously  been  determined  on  mice.  The  unit  of  B.  histolyticus 
(CI.  histolyticum)  is  defined  as  that  amount  which  will  neutralize  100 
M.  L.  D.  of  B.  histolyticus  (CI.  histolyticum)  toxin  for  a  20  Gm. 
mouse;  the  unit  of  B.  sordellii  (CI.  sordellii)  antitoxin  is  defined  as 
that  amount  which  will  neutralize  1,000  M.  L.  D.  of  B.  sordellii  (CI. 
sordellii)  toxin  for  a  20  Gm,  mouse.  The  product  is  marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one  vial  containing  one  therapeutic  dose,  stated  to  represent 
perfringens  antitoxin  10,000  units,  Vibrion  septique  antitoxin,  10,000 
units,  oedematiens  (Novyi)  antitoxin  200  units,  and  sordellii  antitoxin 
200  units. 

Dosage. — Therapeutic:  for  tetanus  and  gas  gangrene,  an  initial  intra- 
venous injection  of  one  to  four  minimum  therapeutic  doses;  supple- 
mentary injections  may  be  given  in  from  four  to  six  hours  or  as  soon 
as  they  are   indicated  by  the  symptoms. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  369 

Eli  Lilly  and  Company,  Indianapolis. 

Gas  Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Combined). — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by 
immunizing  horses  against  the  toxins  of  B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii)  and 
Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni).  After  the  desired  degree  of 
potency  is  obtained,  the  horses  are  bled,  the  plasma  separated  and  the 
serum  prepared  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  used  for  other  antitoxic 
serums.  The  product  is  concentrated  and  refined  by  a  method  which 
is  similar  to  that  used  for  diphtheria  antitoxin.  Marketed  in  packages 
of  one  syringe  containing  10,000  units  of  perfringens  antitoxin  and 
10,000   units   of   Vibrion   septique   antitoxin. 

Dosage. — The  contents  of  one  syringe  or  more,  preferably  by  intra- 
venous injection,  repeated  in  from  eight  to  twenty-four  hours,  as  required. 

Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Combined). — An  antitoxic  serum  pre- 
pared by  immunizing  horses  against  the  toxins  of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani) 
and  B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii).  As  the  desired  degree  of  potency  is 
obtained  for  the  respective  antitoxins,  the  horses  are  bled,  the  plasma  is 
separated,  and  the  serum  is  prepared  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  used 
for  other  antitoxic  serums.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe,  con- 
taining 1,500  units  of  tetanus  antitoxin  and  4,000  units  of  perfringens 
antitoxin. 

Dosage. — The  contents  of  one  syringe,  given  intramuscularly  as 
promptly  as  possible  after  injury  and  repeated  in  from  five  to  seven  days 
if  further  danger  of  infection  is  present. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Perfringens  Antitoxin. — B.  welchii  Antitoxin. — Anti-Gas  Gangrene 
Serum. — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  gradu- 
ally increasing  doses  of  the  toxin  of  B.  perfringens  (CI.  zvelchii).  After 
the  desired  degree  of  potency  is  obtained,  the  horses  are  bled,  the  plasma 
is  separated,  and  the  serum  is  prepared  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  used 
for  other  antitoxic  serums.  In  the  preparation  of  the  concentrated 
product,  a  method  is  used  which  is  similar  to  that  used  for  concentrated 
diphtheria  or  tetanus  antitoxin.  The  unitage  is  determined  according  to 
the  method  prescribed  by  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service.  The  product 
is  marketed  in  50  cc.  bottles  of  unconcentrated  serum  containing  at 
least  200  units  per  cubic  centimeter;  and  in  20  cc.  syringes  of  concen- 
trated serum  containing  at  least  500  units  per   cubic  centimeter. 

Dosage. — For  prophylaxis,  2,500  units;  for  treatment,  initially  from 
4,000  to  10,000  units  intramuscularly  and  4,000  units  intravenously,  fol- 
lowed by  4,000  to  8,000  units  intramuscularly  at  daily  intervals  as 
indicated. 

Tetanus  Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  Mixed-Mulford. — An  antitoxic 
serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  gradually  increasing  doses  of 
the  toxins  of  CI.  tetani  (B.  tetani),  CI.  Welchii  (B.  perfringens),  and  CI. 
oedematis-maligni  (Vibrion  septique).  After  the  desired  degree  of  potency 
is  obtained,  the  horses  are  bled,  the  plasma  is  separated  and  the  serum 
is  prepared  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  used  for  other  antitoxic  serums. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  one  ampule-vial  and  one  syringe  containing 
1.500  units  Clostridium  tetani  antitoxin,  2,000  units  Clostridium  Welchii 
antitoxin,    and    2,000    units    Clostridium   oedematis-maligni    antitoxin. 

Dosage. — For  prophylaxis,  the  contents  of  one  syringe  or  ampule 
injected  subcutaneously  in  a  single  dose.  To  maintain  the  antitoxic 
titer  of  the  blood,  the  dose  is  repeated  on  the  third  or  fifth  day. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Gas  Gangrene  Antitoxin  Refined  and  Concentrated  (CI.  Perfringens — 
CI.  Septique  Antitoxin). — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing 
horses  individually  against  the  toxins  of  B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii)  and 
Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni).  After  the  desired  degree  of 
potency  is  obtained,  the  horses  are  bled,  the  plasma  is  separated  and  the 
serum  is  prepared  in  a  manner  similar  to  that  used  for  other  antitoxic 
serums.  The  product  is  concentrated  and  refined  by  a  method  which  is 
similar   to   that   used   for    diphtheria    antitoxin.      The    unit   values   of   the 


370     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

constituents  are  determined  according  to  the  method  described  by  the 
National  Institute  of  Health.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe 
containing  10,000  units  of  perfringens  antitoxin  and  10,000  units  of 
vibrion  septique  antitoxin. 

Dosage. — The  contents  of  one  syringe,  preferably  by  intravenous  or 
intramuscular  injection,  repeated  in  from  eight  to  twenty-four  hours, 
as  may  be  indicated  by  the  effect  of  the  antitoxin  in  the  course  of  the 
infection.  It  is  advisable  to  inject  5,000  units  around  the  area  of  the 
wound,  where  possible,  to  neutralize  the  toxins  produced  at,  or  near, 
the  site  of  the  injury. 

Tetanus-Perfringens  Antitoxin,  Refined  and  Concentrated. — An  anti- 
toxic serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  individually  against  the  toxins 
of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani),  B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii)  and  Vibrion 
septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni) .  After  the  desired  degree  of  potency 
is  obtained,  the  horses  are  bled,  the  plasma  is  separated  and  prepared  in 
a  manner  similar  to  that  used  for  other  antitoxic  serums.  The  product 
is  concentrated  and  refined  by  a  method  which  is  similar  to  that  used  for 
diphtheria  antitoxin.  The  unit  values  are  determined  according  to  the 
method  described  by_  the  National  Institute  of  Health.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one  syringe  or  one  ampule-vial  containing  1,500  units  of 
tetanus  antitoxin,  2,000  units  of  perfringens  antitoxin  and  2,000  units 
of  vibrion  septique  antitoxin.  A  1  cc.  vial  of  a  1:10  dilution  of  anti- 
toxin is  included  with  each  package,  for  scratch  or  intradermal  test, 
to  determine  sensitivity  of  the  patient. 

Dosage. — For  prophylaxis,  the  contents  of  one  syringe,  or  ampule-vial, 
injected  intramuscularly  or,   preferably,   intravenously. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Combined)  Refined  and  Concentrated-P.  D.  & 
Co. — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  from  the  toxins  of  B.  perfringens 
(CI.  welchii)  and  Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni).  Horses  are 
immunized  with  the  respective  toxins  separately.  The  resulting  antitoxins 
are  standardized,  the  units  for  each  being  those  specified  by  the  United 
States  Public  Health  Service.  The  antitoxins  are  refined,  concentrated 
and  combined  in  such  proportion  that  the  quantity  of  the  finished  product 
in  the  marketed  syringes  contain  10,000  units  of  each  antitoxin.  Gas- 
gangrene  antitoxin  (combined)  refined  and  concentrated-P.  D.  &  Co.  is 
proposed_  for  therapeutic  use  against  gas-gangrene  infection  caused  by 
B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii)  and  Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni). 
It  is  marketed  in  syringes  containing  10,000  units  of  perfringens  anti- 
toxin and  10,000  units  of  vibrion  septique  antitoxin;  also  marketed  in 
vials  contaiiiing  10,000  units  of  perfringens  antitoxin  and  10,000  units  of 
vibrion  septique   antitoxin. 

Dosage. — The  contents  of  one  syringe,  preferably  by  intravenous  injec- 
tion, repeated  in  from  eight  to  twenty-four  hours  if  necessary,  especially 
in  acute  peritonitis  and  obstruction  of  the  small  bowel. 

Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Combined)  (Prophylactic)  Refined 
and  Concentrated-P.  D.  &  Co. — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  from  the 
toxins  of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani),  B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii)  and  Vibrion 
septique    (CI.    oedematismaligni) .      Horses   are    immunized    with    repeated 

Gradually  increasing  doses  of  tetanus  toxin  until  the  serum  samples 
rom  treated  animals  show,  when  tested  according  to  standard  methods, 
satisfactory  antitoxin  content.  Regular  bleedings  are  then  obtained  from 
the  treated  animals  and  the  antiserums  stored  at  a  temperature  below 
5°  C,  after  which  they  are  chemically  refined  and  concentrated.  The 
antitoxins  are  tested  and  standardized,  the  units  of  each  being  those 
specified  by  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service.  Tetanus-gas-gangrene  anti- 
toxin (combined)  (prophylactic)  refined  aiid  concentrated-P.  D.  &  Co.  is 
proposed  for  use  as  a  prophylactic  against  tetanus  and  gas  bacillus 
infections  and  is  especially  indicated  iii  the  treatment  _  contused  and 
penetrating  wounds  contaminated  with  soil,  sewage  material  or  the  con- 
tents of  the  patients'  intestinal  tract.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of 
1  syringe  (Bio.  2025)  and  in  rubber-diaphragm  capped  vial  (Bio.  2023) 
each  containing  respectively,  1,500  units  of  tetanus  antitoxin,  2,000  units 
of  perfringens  antitoxins  and  2,000  units  of  vibrion  septique  antitoxin. 
Dosage. — The  contents  of  one  container  injected  subcutaneously  or 
intramuscularly.  Further  prophylactic  injections  should  be  repeated  at 
24  to  48  hour  intervals  when  exposure  to  gas  bacilli  is  strongly  suspected. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  371 

U.  S.  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin  (Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene)  Refined  and  Con- 
centrated (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.). — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immuniz- 
ing horses  with  the  toxins  of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani),  B.  perfringens  (CI. 
welchii)  and  Vibrion  septique  (CI.  oedematismaligni).  When  tests  of 
trial  bleedings  indicate  that  the  potency  is  sufficiently  high,  the  horses 
are  bled  into  anticoagulant  and  the  plasma  concentrated  and  refined  by 
methods  according  to  the  Park-Banzhaf  process.  The  unit  values  of  the 
concentrates  are  determined  according  to  the  methods  described  by  the 
National  Institute  of  Health.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe, 
one  prophylactic  dose,  containing  vibrion  septique  antitoxin,  2,000  units; 
tetanus  antitoxin,  1,500  units;  and  B.  perfringens  (CI.  welchii)  anti- 
toxin,  1,000  units. 

Dosage. — For  prophylaxis:  The  contents  of  one  syringe  injected  sub- 
cutaneously  or  intramuscularly. 

BOTHROPS  ANTITOXIN.— An  antitoxic  serum  pre- 
pared by  immunizing  animals  against  the  venom  of  the  tropical 
American  serpents  of  the  genus  Bothrops. 

Actions  and  Uses. — In  animal  tests  the  venom  of  certain 
snakes  may  be  neutralized  by  the  employment  of  a  serum 
obtained  from  animals  that  have  been  injected  with  venom  from 
a  snake  of  the  same  family.  Bothrops  antitoxin  is  used  to 
neutralize  the  venom  injected  by  the  bite  inflicted  by  members 
of  the  genus  Bothrops. 

Dosage. — The  serum  is  administered  intramuscularly  or  sub- 
cutaneously ;  in  cases  seen  late  or  in  the  presence  of  severe 
symptoms  it  may  be  administered  intravenously. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antivenin  (Bothropic). — Tropical  American  Anti-Snake-Bite  Serum. — 
An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  injecting  horses  with  venom  from 
serpents  of  the  genus  Bothrops,  especially  of  the  "Fer-de-Lance" 
(Bothrops  atrox).  It  is  claimed  to  have  neutralizing  effect  against  the 
venom  of  the  genus  represented.  The  venom  is  extracted  and  promptly 
desiccated.  It  is  dissolved  in  saline  glycerin  solution  and  injected  sub- 
cutaneously  into  horses  in  fractional,  gradually  increasing  doses  until 
immunity  has  been  established.  The  horses  are  bled  and,  after  separation, 
the  plasma  is  concentrated  by  a  salting  out  process.  Potency  is  deter- 
mined by  tests  on  pigeons,  the  maximum  amount  of  venom  neutralized 
by  1  CO.  of  the  serum  being  taken  as  the  titer  of  the  product;  this  quan- 
tity must  neutralize  at  least  2  mg.  of  the  venom  when  tested  on  pigeons, 
mice  and  rabbits. 

Marketed  in  syringes  of  10  cc.   (a  single  dose). 

BOTULINUS  ANTITOXIN.— An  antitoxic  serum  pre- 
pared by  immunizing  animals  against  two  or  more  strains  of 
the  toxin  of  Clostridium  botulinum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — For  prophylaxis  and  treatment  of  botulism. 

Jensen-Salsbery  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 

Botulinus  Antitoxin  (Human)-Jensen-Salshery. — This  antitoxin  is  pre- 
pared by  the  hyperimmunization  of  horses  and  cattle  by  continued  and 
progressively  increasing  doses  of  botulinus  toxin.  It  is  prepared  against 
two  types  of  the  toxin,  namely,  A  and  B.  Each  type  is  prepared  in 
separate  animals  and  the  commercial  product  is  prepared  by  mixing  given 
quantities  of  each  type  so  that  each  marketed  package  will  contain  2,000 
units  each  of  type  A  and  type  B  antitoxin,  the  unit  of  each  being  that 
established    and    distributed   by    the    National    Institute   of   Health.     The 


372     NEW     AND'    NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

animals  are  bled  at  specified  intervals  and  the  same  technic  is  used  in 
preparing  the  final  product  as  is  required  by  the  National  Institute  of 
Health  in  the  preparation  of  the  antitoxins  for  which  standards  have 
been  established.  The  product  is  not  concentrated  but  consists  of  the 
whole  serum  as  it  is  derived  from  the  defibrinated  blood  by  process  of 
centrifugation  and  Berkefeld  filtration.  The  preservative  consists  of  a 
mixture  of  equal  parts  of  refined  tricresol  and  ether  so  that  the  final 
volume  is  0.8  per  cent  of  the  combined  preservative.  It  is  marketed  in 
packages  of  one  vial  containing  2,500  units  each  of  type  A  and  type  B 
botulinus  antitoxin. 

Dosage. — Prophylactic,  subcutaneous  injections  of  at  least  2,000  units 
of  bivalent  antitoxin;  curative,  intravenous  injection  of  at  least  10,000 
units  of  the  bivalent  antitoxin  repeated  as  the  nature  of  the  case  indicates. 

BOVINE  TETANUS  ANTITOXIN.— An  antitoxin 
complying  with  the  standards  for  tetanus  antitoxin-U.  S.  P., 
except  that  it  is  made  from  the  serum  of  cattle  instead  of  from 
horse  serum. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Tetanus  Antitoxin  (Boinne). — An  antitoxin  derived  from  the  blood 
serum  of  cattle  immunized  against  the  toxin  of  B.  tetani  (CI.  tetani). 
Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  1,500  units  (one  immuniz- 
ing dose). 

CROTALUS  ANTITOXIN.— An  antitoxic  serum  pre- 
pared by  immunizing  animals  against  the  venom  of  snakes  of 
the  crotalus  family. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tests  on  animals  show  that  the  venom  of 
certain  snakes  may  be  neutralized  by  the  employment  of  a 
serum  obtained  from  animals  that  have  been  injected  with 
venom  from  a  snake  of  the  same  family.  Crotalus  antitoxin 
is  used  to  neutralize  the  venom  injected  by  the  bite  inflicted  by 
members  of  the  crotalus  family. 

Dosage. — The  serum  is  administered  intramuscularly  or  sub- 
cutaneously;  in  cases  seen  late  or  in  the  presence  of  severe 
symptoms  it  may  be  administered  intravenously.  Recent 
observations  seem  to  show  that  there  is  great  advantage  in 
giving  the  serum  in  the  vicinity  of  the  bite.  Use  of  the  anti- 
toxin never  should  be  allowed  to  replace  first  aid  measures, 
especially  local  incision  and  suction.  Perhaps  50  cc.  of  serum 
is  as  small  an  amount  as  is  likely  to  prove  beneficial. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antivenin  (Nearctic  Crotalidae). — North  American  Anti-Snake-Bite 
Serum. — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  injecting  horses  with  venoms 
from  serpents  of  the  North  American  species  of  the  family  Crotalidae 
(Rattle  Snake,  75  per  cent;  Copperhead,  12^  per  cent;  and  Water 
Moccasin,  12J^  per  cent).  It  is  claimed  to  have  neutralizing  effect 
against  the  venom  of  the  species  represented.  The  venom  is  extracted 
from  the  snakes  and  promptly  desiccated.  The  mixture  of  the  venoms 
is  injected  subcutaneously  into  horses  in  fractional  doses  until  immunity 
is  established.  The  animal  is  bled,  and  the  plasma  is  concentrated  by 
a  salting  out  process. 

Marketed    in    syringes   containing    10    cc. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  373 

DIPHTHERIA  ANTITOXIN.— Purified  Antidiphtheric 
Serum. — Concentrated  Diphtheria  Antitoxin. — Refined  Diph- 
theria Antitoxin. — Antidiphtheric  GlobuHns. — "Diphtheria  Anti- 
toxin is  a  sterile  aqueous  solution  of  antitoxic  substances 
obtained  from  the  blood  serum  or  plasma  of  a  healthy  animal 
of  the  genus  Equus,  which  has  been  immunized  against  diph- 
theria toxin.  After  the  serum  or  plasma  from  the  immunized 
animal  has  been  collected,  the  antitoxin-bearing  globulins  are 
separated  from  the  other  constituents  of  the  serum  or  plasma 
and  dissolved  in  freshly  distilled  water.  Sodium  chloride  and 
a  preservative  are  then  added  and  the  solution  is  filtered  through 
a  bacteria-excluding  filter.  Diphtheria  Antitoxin  has  a  potency 
of  not  less  than  500  antitoxic  units  per  cc."  U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Antitoxinum 
Diphthericum. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,   Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Diphtheria  Antitoxin,  Globulin-Lederle-Modified.  —  This  preparation 
differs  from  diphtheria  antitoxin-U.  S.  P.  chiefly  in  the  method  of  refine- 
ment. The  process  of  refinement  is  based  essentially  on  a  controlled 
method  of  selective  digestion  of  the  proteins  of  the  immune  horse  blood 
with  pepsin.  As  a  result  of  this  process,  as  much  ai;  90  per  cent  of  the 
coagulable  protein  may  be  digested,  a  smaller  portion  is  precipitated,  and 
the  remainder,  a  pseudoglobulin  fraction,  is  purified,  first  by  ordinary 
filtration  and  then  by  ultrafiltration  and  dialysis.  Diphtheria  antitoxin, 
globulin-Lederle-modified,  is  marketed  in  single  syringe  packages  repre- 
senting 1,000,  5,000,  10,000,  20,000  and  40,000  units  of  diphtheria  anti- 
toxin,  respectively. 

DIPHTHERIA  ANTITOXIN,  BOVINE.  — An  anti- 
toxin differing  from  diphtheria  antitoxin-U.  S.  P.  in  that  it 
is  made  from  the  serum  of  cattle  instead  of  from  horse  serum 
and  is  less  potent. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Inc., 
Philadelphia  and  Baltimore. 

Diphtheria  Antitoxin  (Bovine). — An  antitoxin  derived  from  the  blood 
serum  of  cattle  immunized  against  diphtheria  toxin.  Diphtheria  anti- 
toxin (bovine)  serves  as  an  alternative  to  diphtheria  antitoxin  (equine)  in 
the  treatment  of  individuals  giving  a  positive  reaction  to  the  ophthalmic 
test  with  diphtheria  antitoxin  prepared  from  horse  serum.  Marketed  in 
packages   of  one   30   cc.  ampule  vial  containing  5,000  units. 

ERYSIPELAS   STREPTOCOCCUS   ANTITOXIN.— 

An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  animals  against  the 
toxin  of  the  hemolytic  streptococci  of  erysipelas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Reports  have  been  published  which  sug- 
gest that  the  injection  of  erysipelas  streptococcus  antitoxin 
favorably  affects  the  course  of  erysipelas  by  lowering  the  tem- 
perature, decreasing  leukocytosis,  causing  the  lesions  to  fade, 
and  relieving  the  symptoms  of  toxemia. 

Dosage. — There  is  no  established  dosage.  Quantities  recom- 
mended by  various  manufacturers  vary  from  12  cc.  to  100  cc, 
to  be  repeated  according  to  the  influence  or  want  of  influence 
on  the  course  of  the  infection.  For  intravenous  injection,  the 
unconcentrated  serum  is  proposed;  the  concentrated  serum,  in 
smaller  doses,  is  used  either  intravenously  or  intramuscularly. 


374     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin,  Globulitv-Lederle-Modified.  —  An 
antitoxin  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  through  the  injection  of  gradu- 
ally increasing  doses  of  toxin  produced  by  typical  strains  of  streptococci 
isolated  from  erysipelas  lesions,  and  by  the  well-known  scarlet  fever  strain 
Dochez  NY   5. 

This  scarlet  fever  strain  has  been  introduced  because  of  its  unusually 
potent  and  broadly  valent  antigenic  quality  which  includes  in  a  more 
potent  form,  characteristics  also  possessed  by  many  "erysipelas  strains." 
The  process  of  refinement  is  based  chiefly  on  a  controlled  method  of  selec- 
tive digestion  of  the  proteins  of  the  immune  horse  blood  with  pepsin.  As 
a  result  of  this  process,  up  to  90  per  cent  of  the  coagulable  protein  may 
be  digested,  a  smaller  portion  is  precipitated,  and  the  remainder,  a  pseudo- 
globulin  fraction,  is  purified  first  by  ordinary  filtration  and  then  by  ultra- 
filtration and  dialysis.  The  resultant  solution  is  sterilized  and  subjected 
to  the  tests  prescribed  by  the  National  Institute  of  Health,  While  anti- 
toxin processed  in  this  manner  is  stated  to  produce  fewer  reactions  than 
antitoxin  processed  by  the  usual  "salting  out"  method,  it  is  still  a  protein 
solution  and  all  customary  precautions  should  be  taken  to  avoid  or  care 
for  serum  reactions. 

Erysipelas  streptococcus  antitoxin,  globuIin-Lederle-modified,  is  admin- 
istered in  early  cases  of  moderate  severity  in  one  "basic  dose"  (the  entire 
content  of  one  syringe  as  marketed)  intramuscularly,  repeated  if  neces- 
ary  at  intervals  of  twenty-four  hours  until  the  erysipelatous  blush  dis- 
appears; in  late  and  severely  toxic  cases,  larger  doses  with  a  shorter 
interval  between  doses  may  be  used.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one 
syringe  containing  one  basic  dose. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore, 

Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  ( Concentrated) -Mulford. — This  anti- 
toxic serum  is  prepared  by  injecting  horses  intradermally  with  strains  pi 
hemolytic  streptococci  isolated  by  H.  Amoss  from  human  cases  of  erysip- 
elas lesions,  bleeding  the  horses  and  when  test  bleedings  show  the  serum 
to  have  reached  the  desired  potency,  separating  the  serum,  sterilizing  it, 
and  preserving  by  the  addition  of  0.35  per  cent  of  phenol.  The  product 
is  then  concentrated  by  a  process  which  preserves  both  the  antitoxic  and 
antibacterial  properties  claimed  to  be  in  the  original  serum.  Erysipelas 
streptococcus  antitoxin  (concentrated) -Mulford  is  standardized  in  terms 
of  "protective  units"  (1  unit  being  one-tenth  of  the  amount  of  erysipelas 
streptococcus  antitoxin  required  to  protect  66  per  cent  of  the  mice 
injected  with  one  minimal  fatal  dose  of  a  virulent  culture  of  erysipelas 
streptococci).  It  is  administered  in  doses  of  20  cc,  given  intramuscu- 
larly, and  repeated  within  twelve  to  twenty-four  hours  if  indicated. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  syringe  containing  500,000  protective 
units. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Refined  and  Concentrated-P.  D.  & 
Co. — This  antitoxin  is  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  toxin  and  cul- 
tures of  streptococci  isolated  from  erysipelas.  The  blood  serum  is  with- 
drawn from  the  immunized  animals  and  is  concentrated  and  refined  by 
methods  similar  to  those  used  for  other  antitoxins.  The  neutralizing 
value  of  the  antitoxin  is  demonstrated  by  mixing  dilutions  of  the  anti- 
toxin with  erysipelas  streptococcus  toxin  and  injecting  intradermally  into 
the  skin  of  humans  susceptible  to  erysipelas.  The  product  is  claimed  to 
possess  antitoxic  properties.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  piston 
syringe   containing   either    10   cc.    or   20    cc.   of   the   concentrated   product. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Co^icentrated-Squibb. — This  anti- 
toxin is  prepared  according  to  the  method  of  K.  E.  Birkhaug  of  the 
School  of  Medicine  and  Dentistry  of  the  University  of  Rochester.  It  is 
obtained  by  immunizing  horses  by  repeated  injections  of  the  toxic 
filtrate  from  a  number  of  strains  of  hemolytic  streptococci  of  erysipelas 
furnished  by   Birkhaug  and  the  injection  of  living  cultures  of  the  strep- 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  375 

tococci.  The  antitoxin  thus  obtained  is  concentrated  by  a  modification 
of  the  Banzhaf  method,  preserved  by  the  addition  of  0.4  per  cent  of 
cresol,  and  standardized  by  determining  its  neutralizing  power  against  a 
specific  toxin  furnished  by  the  licensor.  The  product  is  marketed  in 
packages  of  one  syringe  containing  10  cc. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  (Refined  anid  Concentrated)  .— 
Prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  toxin  and  cultures  of  streptococci 
isolated  from  erysipelas  cases.  When  tests  of  trial  bleedings  indicate 
that  the  potency  is  sufficiently  high  the  horses  are  bled  and  the  plasma 
concentrated  and  refined  by  methods  similar  to  those  used  for  other 
antitoxins.  The  product  is  preserved  with  0.4  per  cent  cresol  in  a  50 
per  cent  ether  solution.  Potency  tests  are  carried  out  by  making  serial 
dilutions  of  the  antitoxin  with  equal  amounts  of  erysipelas  toxin  and 
determining  the  titer  by  the  rabbit  ear  method  which  is  a  toxin  neutral- 
ization test. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  approximately  IS  cc, 
the  average  initial  therapeutic  dose. 

MENINGOCOCCUS  ANTITOXIN.— An  antitoxin  pre- 
pared by  the  immunization  of  animals  to  polyvalent  filtrates 
of  six  to  eight  day  hormone-broth  cultures  of  the  four  Gordon 
groups  of  meningococcus,  after  the  method  of  Ferry,  Norton 
and  Steele. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  published  studies  on  the  effect  of 
the  antitoxin  in  experimental  meningococcic  septicemia  in 
guinea-pigs  and  rabbits,  in  experimental  meningomyelitis  in 
monkeys  and  in  clinical  epidemic  meningitis  in  man  suggest 
(1)  that  the  symptomatology  of  the  disease  is  attributable  at 
least  in  part  to  the  effects  of  a  toxin  produced  by  the  organism 
and  (2)  that  the  clinical  manifestations  of  the  disease,  its  com- 
moner complications  and  its  mortality  rate  may  all  be  favorably 
affected  by  the  timely  and  proper  administration  of  the 
antitoxin.  The  antitoxin  should  be  used  only  in  specific  infec- 
tions with  the  rnepingococcus,  and  the  usual  precautions  con- 
cerning the  administration  of  horse  serum  should  be  observed. 

Dosage. — Dependent  on  the  condition  of  the  patient,  the 
degree  of  toxemia,  the  occurrence  of  complications,  and  whether 
child  or  adult,  20,000  to  30,000  units  (60-100  cc.)  in  120— 
200  cc.  of  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  may  be 
administered  intravenously  (injected  slowly).  This  may 
be  repeated  daily  if  required.  These  doses  (60-100  cc.)  may  be 
given  intramuscularly,  but  it  is  (probably)  a  less  effective 
route. 

Dependent  on  the  same  factors  and  also  on  the  volume  of 
spinal  fluid  withdrawn,  6,000—12,000  units  (20-40  cc.)  may  be 
injected  intraspinally  or  intracisternally.  This  procedure  may 
be  repeated  daily  if  required.  The  usual  case  is  said  to  require 
a  total  of  from  50,000  to  100,000  units. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Meningococcus  Antitoxin-P.  D.  &  Co. — An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by 
immunizing  horses  to  bacteria-free  meningococcus  toxin,  preserved  with 
0.3  per  cent  of  tricresol.  The  antitoxin  is  standardized  by  human  skin 
tests,  the  skin  test  dose  of  meningococcus  toxin  being  that  which  when 
injected   intradermally    into   a    susceptible   individual    will    produce   a   local 


Z16     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

skin  reaction  at  least  10  mm.  in  diameter.  The  unit  of  meningococus 
antitoxin  is  ten  times  that  amount  of  the  antitoxin  which,  when  mixed 
with  one  skin  test  dose  of  meningococcus  toxin,  will  produce  a  negative 
reaction  or  a  reaction  appreciably  less  than  10  mm.  in  diameter,  provided 
the  controlled  toxin  reaction  is  appreciably  more  than  10  mm.  in  diameter. 
The  final  product  is  standardized  to  contain  not  less  than  350  units  of 
meningococus  antitoxin  per  cubic  centimeter.  It  is  marketed  in  packages 
of  one  vial  having  a  diaphragm  stopper  at  each  end  and  containing 
10    thousand   units   of   antitoxin. 

SCARLET  FEVER  STREPTOCOCCUS  ANTI- 
TOXIN.— An  antitoxic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  animals 
against  the  toxin  of  the  hemolytic  streptococcus  of  scarlet  fever. 
It  is  prepared  (a)  after  the  method  of  G.  F.  Dick  and  G.  H. 
Dick  by  immunizing  horses  by  injecting  the  soluble  toxin  of 
strains  of  hemolytic  streptococci  that  have  produced  experi- 
mental scarlet  fever  in  human  beings  and  (6)  by  the  method 
of  A.  R.  Dochez  in  which  horses  are  immunized  against  the 
specific  scarlet  fever  organism  by  the  localization  of  the  living 
streptococci  in  a  subcutaneous  agar  nodule  in  which  the  strep- 
tococci grow  and  stimulate  the  production  of  antitoxic  and 
antibacterial  substances.  Certain  modifications  of  these  methods 
are  employed  by  some  producers. 

Scarlet  fever  streptococcus  antitoxin  is  standardized  in  terms 
of  units,  according  to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  U.  S.  Public 
Health  Service,  each  unit  being  capable  of  neutralizing  fifty 
skin  test  doses  of  toxin. 

Actions  and  Uses. — During  recent  years  much  evidence  has 
accumulated  to  show  that  scarlet  fever  is  caused  by  hemolytic 
streptococci  and  that  the  administration  of  a  serum  containing 
the  antitoxin  produced  by  these  organisms  favorably  influences 
the  course  of  scarlet  fever.  It  is  also  believed  that  temporary 
immunity  against  scarlet  fever  may  be  established  through  the 
use  of  such  a  serum.  The  serum  is  also  used  to  distinguish  the 
rash  of  scarlet  fever  from  other  rashes  by  the  production  of  a 
blanched  area  at  the  site  of  its  intradermal  injection. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  (Refined  and  Concentrated). — 
It  is  prepared  by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369 
(July  28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee, 
Inc.  The  serum  is  concentrated  by  the  method  employed  in  concentrating 
diphtheria  antitoxin.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing 
2,000  units  (prophylactic  dose),  and  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing 
6,000    units    (therapeutic  dose). 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin-Globulin-Lederle-Modified. — It  is 
prepared  by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July 
28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc. 
The  process  of  refinement  is  based  chiefly  on  a  controlled  method  of 
selective  digestion  of  the  proteins  of  the  immune  horse  blood  with  pepsin. 
As  a  result  of  this  process,  as  much  as  90  per  cent  of  the  coagulable 
protein  may  be  digested,  a  smaller  portion  is  precipitated,  and  the 
remainder,  a  pseudoglobulin  fraction,  is  purified  first  by  ordinary  filtra- 
tion and  then  by  ultrafiltration  and  dialysis.  Marketed  in  packages  of 
one  syringe  containing  2,000  units  (prophylactic  dose),  and  in  packages 
of  one   syringe   containing   6,000   units    (therapeutic   dose). 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  ZTJ 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Concentrated. — It  is  prepared  by 
the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  The 
serum  is  concentrated  by  the  method  employed  in  concentrating  diph- 
theria antitoxin.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  2,000 
units  (prophylactic  dose)  and  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  6,000 
units  (therapeutic  dose)  ;  also  marketed  in  single  1  cc.  vial  packages  (for 
the  diagnostic  blanching  test)  containing  sufficient  scarlet  fever  antitoxin 
for  five  tests. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Refined  and  Concentrated- 
"National." — It  is  prepared  by  inoculating  horses  with  scarlet  fever  strep- 
tococcus toxin  and  live  virulent  cultures  of  scarlet  fever  streptococci, 
under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license 
of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  It  is  marketed  in  syringe  packages 
of  2,000  units  (prophylactic  dose)  ;  in  syringe  packages  of  6,000  units 
(therapeutic  dose);  A  1  cc.  vial  of  a  1:10  dilution  of  antitoxin  is 
included  with  each  package,  for  scratch  or  intradermal  test,  to  determine 
sensitivity  of  the  patient;  also  marketed  in  single  1  cc.  vial  packages  for 
the  diagnostic  blanching  test  (Schultz-Carlton  reaction)  containing  suffi- 
cient  scarlet    fever    streptococcus    antitoxin   for   five    tests. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin-P.  D.  &  Co.— It  is  prepared 
by  inoculating  horses  with  scarlet  fever  streptococcus  toxin  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet 
Fever  Committee,  Inc.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  (prophy- 
lactic dose)  containing  2,000  units;  in  packages  of  one  syringe  (thera- 
peutic dose)  containing  6,000  units,  and  in  single  1  cc.  vials  (for  the 
diagnostic  blanching  test)  containing  sufficient  scarlet  fever  antitoxin 
for  five  blanching  tests. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &   Sons,  New  York. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Concentrated. — It  is  prepared  by 
the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires,  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  The 
serum  is  concentrated  by  the  Banzhaf  method.  Marketed  in  packages  of 
one  syringe  containing  2,000  to  2,500  units  (prophylactic  dose)  ;  in  pack- 
ages of  one  syringe  containing  6,000  units  (therapeutic  dose) ;  and  in 
packages  of  1  cc.  vials  (for  the  diagnostic  blanching  test)  containing 
sufficient  scarlet   fever  antitoxin   for  ten   blanching  tests. 

TETANUS  ANTITOXIN.— Purified  Antitetanic  Serum. 
— Concentrated  Tetanus  Antitoxin. — Refined  Tetanus  Anti- 
toxin.— Antitetanic  Globulins. — "Tetanus  Antitoxin  is  a  sterile 
aqueous  solution  of  antitoxic  substances  obtained  from  the 
blood  serum  or  plasma  of  a  healthy  animal  of  the  genus 
Equus,  which  has  been  immunized  against  tetanus  toxin. 
After  the  serum  or  plasma  from  the  immunized  animal  has 
been  collected,  the  antitoxin-bearing  globulins  are  separated 
from  the  other  constitutents  of  the  serum  or  plasma  and  dis- 
solved in  freshly  distilled  water.  Sodium  chloride  and  a 
preservative  are  then  added  and  the  solution  is  filtered  through 
a  bacteria-excluding  filter.  Tetanus  antitoxin  has  a  potency  of 
not  less  than  300  antitoxic  units  per  cc."  U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S,  Pharmacopeia  under  Antitoxinurn 
Tetanicum, 


378     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Tetanus  Antitoxin,  Glohnlin-Lederle-Modified. — This  preparation  differs 
from  tetanus  antitoxin-U.  S.  P.  chiefly  in  the  method  of  refinement. 
The  process  of  refinement  is  based  essentially  on  a  controlled  method  of 
selective  digestion  of  the  proteins  of  the  immune  horse  blood  with  pepsin. 
As  a  result  of  this  process,  as  much  as  90  per  cent  of  the  coagulablc 
protein  may  be  digested,  a  smaller  portion  is  precipitated,  and  the 
remainder,  a  pseudoglobulin  fraction,  is  purified  first  by  ordinary  filtra- 
tion and  then  by  ultrafiltration  and  dialysis.  Tetanus  antitoxin,  globulin- 
Lederle-modified,  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  1,500 
units  of  antitoxin;  in  single  syringe  packages  representing  1,500,  3,000, 
5,000,  10,000,  20,000  and  40,000  units  of  tetanus  antitoxin,  respectively; 
and  in  packages  of  one  cylinder  containing  10,000  units  of  tetanus  anti- 
toxin,   for  intraspinal   administration. 

ANTIBACTERIAL     SERUMS 

More  complex  in  action  than  the  antitoxins  and  much  less 
satisfactory  for  therapeutic  purposes  are  those  antibodies  which 
resist  the  bacteria  themselves.  This  field  of  usefulness  is  open 
to  much  controversy,  both  theoretical  and  practical. 

ANTIANTHRAX   SERUM.— Serum  Antianthracicum. 

— A  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  against  virulent 
anthrax  bacilli    (Bacillus  anthracis). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Good  results  have  generally  been  reported 
from  the  use  of  the  specific  serum  in  human  anthrax.  Pro- 
tective antibodies  can  be  demonstrated  experimentally. 

Dosage. — Minimum  of  50  cc.  intramuscularly  or  intrave- 
nously. The  serum  should  be  used  as  early  as  possible  and 
used  freely,  the  dose  being  repeated  several  times  a  day  in 
severe  cases. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Antianthrax  Serum. — Initial  doses  of  from  100  to  200  cc.  may  be 
administered  intramuscularly  or  intravenously,  to  be  repeated  in  twenty- 
four  hours  if  indicated.  Marketed  in  packages  containing  one  50  cc. 
cylinder   with  intravenous   outfit,   bulb  and    sterile   needle. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antianthrax  Serum-Mulford. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  of 
20  cc. ;  in  packages  of  one  double  ended  vial  of  50  cc.  100  cc.  should  be 
injected  intravenously  as  the  initial  dose. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Antianthrax  Serum. — Marketed  in  syringes  containing  50  cc.  Initial 
dose  of  from  50  to  100  cc,  injected  intravenously,  should  be  fol- 
lowed by  further  injection  in  six  or  more  hours.  It  is  well  to  test  the 
sensitization  of  the  patient  to  horse  serum,  prior  to  the  first  injection,  by 
means  of  the  cutaneous  test,  which  will  require  about  one-half  hour. 
The  drop  of  serum  required  for  this  test  can  be  obtained  directly  from 
the  syringe   container  of  antianthrax   serum. 

ANTIDYSENTERIC  SERUM.  — Serum  Antidysen- 
tericum. — The  serum  (polyvalent)  of  horses  immunized  against 
the  Shiga  bacillus  {Shigella  dysenteriae,  B.  dysenteriae),  its 
products  of  growth,  and  other  types  of  the  dysentery  bacilli. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  379 

Actions  and  Uses. — A  reduction  in  the  mortality  rate  of 
bacillary  dysentery  through  the  use  of  some  serums  has  been 
reported  by  some  observers  but  not  confirmed  by  all.  It  would 
seem  that  the  best  results  may  be  ascribed  to  an  antitoxic  action 
in  infections  with  the  Shiga-Kruse  type  of  bacillus.  Infections 
with  the  Flexner,  Harris  or  Hiss-Y  strains,  which  are  relatively 
poor  in  toxin  production,  have  not  been  so  favorably  affected, 
though  some  bactericidal  action  is  claimed.  The  most  favorable 
results  are  observed  in  the  early  stage  of  the  disease. 

The  serum  is  required  to  show  a  high  agglutinin  titer  for 
the  various  types  of  dysentery  bacilli. 

Dosage. — From  20  to  100  cc,  subcutaneously. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Antidysenteric  Serum  (Polyvalent). — From  horses  hyperimmunized 
against  the  Shiga  toxin  and  the  Shiga  and  Flexner  types  of  dysentery 
bacilli.     Marketed  in  vials  containing  20  cc. 

Dosage. — For  prophylaxis:  10  cc.  injected  subcutaneously.  For  treat- 
ment: an  initial  dose  of  from  SO  to  100  cc.  (preferably  injected  intra- 
venously)  and  repeated  at  four-hour  intervals  as  indicated  by  symptoms. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antidysenteric  Serum  (Polyvalent). — From  horses  immunized  against 
the  Shiga,  Flexner  and  Y  strains  of  the  dysentery  bacillus.  Marketed 
in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  20  cc.  each;  also  in  packages  of 
one  vial,  containing  50  cc.  each,  with  or  without  sterile  needle  and 
sterile  rubber   tubing   for   intravenous   injection. 

Dosage. — Fifty  to  100  cc,  to  be  followed  at  eight  hour  intervals  by 
doses  of  SO  cc.  until  400  cc.  has  been  given.  Prominent  authorities 
recommend   intravenous   injection. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Antidysenteric  Serum. — From  horses  immunized  against  several  strains 
of  Shiga,  Flexner  and  Hiss-Y  types  of  dysentery  bacilli.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one  vial,  containing  20  cc. 

Dosage. — Ten  cc.  is  suggested  as  prophylactic  dose;  therapeutic  dose, 
60  to   100  cc,   preferably  intravenously. 

ANTIMENINGOCOCCIC  SERUM.  —  Antimeningococ- 
cus  Serum. — Meningococcus  Serum. — Meningitis  Serum. — 
"Obtained  from  the  blood  of  an  animal  of  the  genus  Equiis 
immunized  with  cultures  of  the  several  types  of  meningococci 
(Neisseria  intracellular  is)  which  prevail  in  the  United  States." 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Serum 
Antimeningococcicum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Greater  success  seems  to  have  attended 
the  use  of  serum  directed  against  the  meningococcus  than  has 
been  the  case  with  any  other  antibacterial  serum.  Each  lot  of 
the  serum  is  required  to  be  tested  by  agglutination  and  none  is 
allowed  to  be  sold  which  does  not  reach  a  reasonable  titer 
against  the  several  types  of  meningococci. 

Each  lot  is  tested  at  the  National  Institute  of  Health  prior 
to  sale. 


380     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — Average  dose  for  adults,  30  cc.  (1  fluid  ounce) 
intraspinally  as  early  as  possible  in  the  disease,  repeated  as 
indicated;  for  children,  doses  up  to  20  or  30  cc.  intraspinally 
depending  upon  the  amount  of  spinal  fluid  that  can  be  with- 
drawn and  the  amount  of  serum  that  can  be  administered  with- 
out untoward  symptoms.  The  serum  should  be  introduced 
slowly  by  gravity  after  the  removal  of  a  corresponding  amount 
of  spinal  fluid.  Administration  should  be  controlled  by  blood 
pressure  readings,  a  drop  of  10  mm.  of  mercury  during  the 
administration  being  the  signal  for  withdrawal  of  the  needle. 
In  addition,  up  to  50  cc.  for  children  and  up  to  100  cc.  for  adults 
may  be  administered  intravenously  in  very  early  cases  or  in 
those  cases  accompanied  by  frank  meningococcemia  as  demon- 
strated by  positive  blood  cultures,  or  by  hemorrhagic  rash. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  contain- 
ing 15  cc,  with  sterile  needle,  stylet  and  attachments  for  intraspinal 
administration;  in  packages  of  two  vials  each  containing  15  cc.  with 
sterile    needle,     stylet     and     attachments     for     intraspinal     administration. 

Dosage. — The  recommended  intraspinal  dosage  for  the  treatment  of 
epidemic  cerebrospinal  meningitis  is  from  5  to  15  cc.  or  more  for  a 
child,  and   30   cc.  or  more   for  an  adult. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum. — Marketed  in  cylinders  containing,  respec- 
tively,   15  and   30  cc,   each  with   sterile   needle  and   stylet. 

Dosage. — Usually  20  cc.  intraspinally,  though  30  cc.  or  more  may  some- 
times be  given  if  a  large  amount  of  spinal  fluid  has  been  withdrawn  and 
the  serum  runs  in  without  difficulty.  This  dosage  applies  to  all  ages, 
though  unusual  care  should  be  exercised  in  the  case  of  young  babies. 
This  treatment  is  continued  every  12  to  24  hours  until  the  spinal  fluid 
becomes  clear  or  until  meningococci  can  no  longer  be  demonstrated  in 
spinal   fluid   obtained   from   two  successive   punctures. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum  Concentrated,  Lilly. — Refined  and  concen- 
trated by  the  Banzhaf  method.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  10  cc. 
double  ended  vial  with  apparatus  for  intraspinal  injection. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  «&  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum. — Marketed  in  double  ended  vials,  each  con- 
taining 15  cc.  with  sterilized  rubber  tubing  and  sterilized  intraspinal 
needle  and  stylet  for  injections  by  the  gravity  method. 

Also  marketed  in  one  syringe  containing  30  cc,  with  intraspinal  and 
intravenous    injection   outfit. 

Dosage. — From  15  to  30  cc.  or  more  at  intervals  of  twenty-four  hours. 

The  National  Drug  Company,   Philadelphia. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  two  15  cc.  double- 
end  vials  with  apparatus  for  intraspinal  injection;  in  packages  of  one 
15  cc.  cylinder  with  intraspinal  needle;  and  in  packages  of  one  30  cc. 
double-end  vial,  with  special  intravenous  and  intraspinal  needles  and 
gravity  outfit.  A  1  cc.  vial  of  a  1:  10  dilution  of  serum  is  included 
with  each  package,  for  scratch  or  intradermal  test,  to  determine  sensi- 
tivity of  the  patient. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  381 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum:  Marketed  in  packages  of  two  syringes, 
with  flexible  connection,  gravity  tube  and  needle  with  stylet  each  con- 
taining 15  cc. ;  also  in  packages  of  one  syringe  with  needle  and  long 
flexible  tube,  suitable  for  intravenous  injection  either  by  pressure  or 
gravity   method,    each   containing   30   cc. 

Dosage. — From  30  to  150  cc,  intravenously;  from  15  to  30  cc.  or 
more  intraspinally. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum. — Marketed  in  packages  of  two  15  cc.  con- 
tainers in  a  gravity  outfit  with  needle  and  trocar. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth, 
Wis. 

Antimeningococcic  Serum  Polyvalent. — Marketed  in  packages  of  two 
double-ended  vials,  each  containing  15  cc.  with  apparatus  for  intraspinal 
injection.  Also  marketed  in  packages  of  one  double-ended  vial  contain- 
ing 30  cc. 

ANTIPNEUMOCOCCIC     SERUMS 

Antipneumococcic  serums  are  obtained  from  horses  immunized 
by  injection  of  virulent  pneumococci  (Diplococcus  pneumoniae). 

Pneumococci  of  several  serological  types  may  cause  lobar 
pneumonia.  In  addition  to  the  fixed  types  I,  II  and  III 
originally  recognized,  subdivisions  of  type  II  have  been 
described.  The  previously  heterogeneous  group  IV  has  been 
partially  resolved  into  a  number  of  serological  types,  about  30 
now  being  recognized.  If  a  definite  diagnosis  of  acute  lobar 
pneumonia  is  made  within  two  days  of  the  onset  and  rapid 
typing  is  not  possible,  treatment  with  antipneumococcic  serum 
containing  types  I  and  II  may  be  instituted  without  waiting  to 
determine  the  pneumococcus  type,  but  it  should  be  realized  that 
this  treatment  will  be  of  no  value  in  about  half  the  cases. 

ANTIPNEUMOCOCCIC  SERUM,  TYPE  I.— Anti- 
pneumococcus  Serum,  Type  I. — Pneumonia  Serum,  Type  I. — 
"Obtained  from  the  blood  of  an  animal  of  the  genus  Eqiius 
which  has  been  immunized  with  cultures  of  a  pneumococcus 
(Diplococcus  pneumoniae)  of  a  variety  known  as  'type  I'." 
U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Serum 
Antipneumococcicum — I. 

Dosage.— First  dose,  10,000  units,  followed  by  a  second  dose 
of  20,000  in  one  hour ;  the  second  dose  is  repeated  at  intervals 
of  four  to  six  hours  until  the  temperature  falls  and  beneficial 
effects  are  evident. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum  Type  I. — Marketed  in  vials  containing 
50  cc.  and  100  cc. ;  also  in  double  ended  vials  containing  50  cc.  each, 
with  a   gravity   injecting  apparatus   for  intravenous  injection. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Refined  and  Concentrated  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I-Lederle. — 
Prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  intravenous  injections  of  cultures  of 
Tyoe  I  and  Type  II  pneumococci.     When  test  bleedings  show  the  serum 


382     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 


to  have  reached  a  sufficient  degree  of  potency  for  type  I  pneumococcus, 
the  horses  are  bled  aseptically  and  the  serum  is  refined  and  concentrated 
by  the  method  of  Lloyd  D.  Felton  (/.  Infect.  Dis.,  December  1928, 
p.  543).  _  The  finished  product  contains  type  II  pneumococcus  antibodies 
but  not  in  therapeutically  important  amounts.  The  usual  sterility  tests 
are  carried  out  and  safety  tests  are  made  by  injection  into  white  mice 
and  guinea-pigs.  The  potency  of  the  product  is  expressed  in  terms  of 
the  unit  described  by  Felton  {Boston  M.  &  S.  J.,  May  IS,  1924,  p.  819; 
7.  Infect.  Dis.,  September  1925,  p.  199;  October  1925,  p.  309).  While 
the  unit  originally  was  intended  to  be  the  amount  of  antibody  that  will 
protect  against  1  million  fatal  doses  of  culture,  it  has  lately  been  taken 
to  be  one-two  hundredth  cc.  of  the  control  serum  (F  146)  distributed  by 
Dr.  Felton.  The  product  is  marketed  in  packages  containing  10,000  and 
20,000  units  of  type  I  pneumococcus. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I. — Prepared  by  immunizing  horses 
with  dead  and  living  pneumococci  Type  I  and  standardized  by  animal 
potency  tests  against  a  highly  virulent  type  I  culture.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one   50   cc.   double  ended  vial. 

Pneumococcus  Antibody  Globulin  Type  I-Mulford. — Prepared  by 
immunizing  horses  with  intravenous  injections  of  cultures  of  Type  I  and 
Type  II  pneumococci.  When  test  bleedings  show  the  serum  to  have 
reached  a  sufficient  degree  of  potency  for  type  I  pneumococcus,  the 
horses  are  bled  aseptically  and  the  serum  is  refined  and  concentrated  by 
the  method  of  Lloyd  D.  Felton  (/.  Infect.  Dis.,  December,  1928,  p.  543). 
The  finished  product  contains  type  II  pneumococcus  antibodies,  but  not 
in  therapeutically  important  amounts.  The  usual  sterility  and  safety 
tests  are  made  by  injection  into  white  mice  and  guinea-pigs.  Standard- 
ization is  effected  on  the  basis  both  of  the  mouse  protection  test  and  by  a 
specific  polysaccharide  precipitation  test  devised  by  Zozaya,  Boyer  and 
Clark  (7.  Exper.  Med.,  October,  1930,  p.  471).  The  potency  of  the 
product  is  expressed  in  terms  of  the  unit  described  by  Felton  (7.  Infect. 
Dis.,  September,  1925,  p.  199;  October,  1925,  p.  309;  J.  A.  M.  A.,  June 
14,  1930,  p.  1893),  this  unit  being  the  amount  of  type  I  pneumococcus 
antibody  that  will  protect  mice  against  one  million  fatal  doses  of  the 
culture.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  containing  10,000  and  20,000  units 
of  type  I  pneumococcus,  accompanied  by  a  vial  containing  a  1:  10  dilu- 
tion  of   pneumococcus  antibody  globulin  type  I    for  the  ophthalmic  test. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum-Felton-Type  I  (Refined  and  Concentrated). — 
Prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  intravenous  injections  of  virulent 
and  avirulent  pneumococci  and  subcutaneous  injections  of  the  supernatant 
broth  culture  mediums,  in  which  the  bacteria  had  been  grown.  When 
test  bleedings  show  the  serum  has  reached  a  sufficient  degree  of  potency, 
full  bleeding  is  made.  The  serum  is  concentrated  by  a  method  similar 
to  that  used  for  antitoxins.  Marketed  in  packages  containing  10,000  and 
20,000   units   of  type  I   pneumococcus   antibodies. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum  {Felton)  Type  I. — Prepared  by  immunizing 
horses  with  killed  cultures  of  highly  virulent  Diplococcus  pneumoniae 
isolated  from  lobar  pneumonia.  The  product  is  refined  and  concentrated 
by  the  method  of  Dr.  L.  D.  Felton.  It  is  tested  by  three  methods:  The 
precipitation  test  designed  by  Dr.  Felton,  the  Felton  method  of  standardi- 
zation by  mouse  protection  test  and  the  National  Institute  of  Health 
standard  test.  The  finished  product  contains  type  II  pneumococcus  anti- 
bodies but  not  in  therapeutically  important  amounts.  It  is  marketed  in 
packages    containing    10,000    and    20,000   units    of   type    I    pneumococcus. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I. — Marketed  in  vials  containing  50  cc; 
also   marketed  in   packages  of  one   50   cc.   gravity   container. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  383 

ANTIPNEUMOCOCCIC     SERUM,    TYPE    II.  — An 

antiserum  containing  predominately  antibodies  of  type  II  pneu- 
mococcus    (Diplococcus  pnemnoniae) . 

Dosage. — Intravenously,  first  dose,  10,000  units  of  each  type, 
followed  by  a  second  dose  of  20,000  units  of  each  type  in  one 
hour;  the  second  dose  may  be  repeated  at  intervals  of  from 
four  to  six  hours  until  the  temperature  falls  and  beneficial 
effects  are  evident. 

Lederle  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Refined  and  Concentrated,  Type  II. — Pre- 
pared by  immunizing  horses  with  intravenous  injections  of  cultures  of 
type  I  and  type  II  pneumococcus.  When  test  bleedings  show  the  serum 
to  have  reached  a  sufficient  degree  of  potency  for  type  II  pneumococcus, 
the  horses  are  bled  aseptically  and  the  serum  is  refined  and  concentrated 
by  the  method  described  by  Lloyd  D.  Felton  (J.  Infect.  Dis.  43:543 
[Dec]  1928).  The  usual  sterility  tests  are  carried  out  and  safety  tests 
are  made  by  injection  into  white  mice  and  guinea-pigs.  The  potency  of 
the  product  is  expressed  in  terms  of  the  units  described  by  Felton  (Bostcnt 
M.  &  S.  J.  190:819  [May  15]  1924;  /.  Infect.  Dis.  37:199  [Sept.] 
1925;  37:  309  [Oct.]  1925)  and  used  by  Park.  While  the  unit  originally 
was  intended  to  be  the  amount  of  antibody  that  will  protect  against  one 
million  fatal  doses  of  culture,  it  has  lately  been  taken  to  be  i/'^op  cc.  of  the 
control  serum  (F  146)  distributed  by  Dr.  Felton.  Marketed  in  packages 
of  orie  syringe  containing  10,000  units  and  in  packages  of  one  syringe 
containing  20,000  units,  each  accompanied  by  a  vial  of  normal  horse  serum 
(1:  10  dilution)   for   the  conjunctival  test. 

ANTIPNEUMOCOCCUS  SERUM  TYPES  I  AND  II 
COMBINED. — An  antiserum  containing  antibodies  of  both 
types  I  and  II  pneumococci   (Diplococci  pneumoniae). 

Dosage. — Intravenously,  first  dose,  10,000  units  of  each  type, 
followed  by  a  second  dose  of  20,000  units  of  each  type,  in  one 
hour ;  the  second  dose  may  be  repeated  at  intervals  of  from  four 
to  six  hours  until  the  temperature  falls  and  beneficial  effects  are 
evident. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Bivalent  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Refined  and  Concentrated. — Pre- 
pared by  immunizing  horses  with  intravenous  injections  of  cultures  of 
type  I  and  type  II  pneumococci.  When  test  bleedings  show  the  serum 
to  have  reached  a  sufficient  degree  of  potency  for  types  I  and  II  pneu- 
mococci, the  horses  are  bled  aseptically  and  the  serum  is  refined  and 
concentrated  by  the  method  described  by  Lloyd  D.  Felton  (J.  Infect.  Dis., 
December,  1928,  p.  543).  The  usual  sterility  tests  are  carried  out  and 
safety  tests  are  made  by  injection  into  white  mice  and  guinea-pigs.  The 
potency  of  the  product  is  expressed  in  terms  of  the  unit  described  by 
Felton  (Boston  M.  &  S.  J.,  May  15,  1924,  p.  819;  /.  Infect.  Dis.,  Sep- 
tember, 1925,  p.  199;  October,  1925,  p.  309)  and  used  by  Park.  While 
the  unit  originally  was  intended  to  be  the  amount  of  antibody  that  will 
protect  against  one  million  fatal  doses  of  culture,  it  has  lately  been  taken 
to  be  1^00  cc.  of  the  control  serum  (F  146)  distributed  by  Dr.  Felton. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  10,000  units  each  of  types 
I  and  II,  and  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  20,000  units  each  of 
types  I  and  II,  each_ accompanied  by  a  vial  of  normal  horse  serum  (1:  10 
dilution)   for  the  conjunctival  test. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Types  I  and  II  Combined-Mulford. — A  serum 
obtained    from    horses    immunized    with    type    I    and    type    II    pneumococci 


384     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

and  standardized  by  animal  potency  tests.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of 
one  50  cc.  double  end  vial  and  in  packages  of  one  vial  for  intravenous 
injection, 

_  Dosage. — From  SO  to  100  cc.  given  intravenously  and  repeated  every 
'  six  to  eight  hours  until  the  temperature  falls  and  beneficial  effects  are 
evident. 

Antipnetimococcic  Serum,  Concentrated  (Pneumococcus  Antibody  Globu- 
lin, Types  I  and  II)-Mulford. — A  serum  obtained  by  immunizing  horses 
with  intravenous  injections  of  type  I  and  type  II  pneurnococci.  It  is 
subjected  to  the  usual  sterility  and  safety  tests  by  injection  into  white 
mice  and  guinea-pigs.  Standardization  is  effected  on  the  basis  both  of  the 
mouse  protection  test  and  by  a  specific  polysaccharide  precipitation  test 
devised  by  Zozaya,  Boyer  and  Clark  (/.  Exper.  Med.,  October  1930, 
p.  471).  The  potency  of  the  product  is  expressed  in  terms  of  the  unit 
described  by  Felton  (7.  Infect.  Dis.,  September  1925,  p.  199;  October 
1925,  p.  309;  The  Journal,  June  14,  1930,  p.  1893).  _  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one  10  cc.  syringe  containing  10,000  units  and  in  packages  of 
one  20   cc.   syringe   containing  20,000   units. 

Dosage. — Initial  dose,  10,000  units  followed  in  one  hour  by  a  second 
dose  of  20,000  units;  the  second  dose  is  repeated  at  intervals  of  from 
four  to  eight  hours  until  the  temperature  falls  and  beneficial  effects  are 
evident. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum  (Felton)  Types  I  and  II  Refined  and  Con- 
centrated.—Prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  injections  of  killed 
cultures  of  Types  I  and  II  pneurnococci.  The  product  is  refined  and  con- 
centrated by  the  method  of  Dr.  L.  D.  Felton  (J.  Infect.  Dis.,  Dec.  1928, 
p.  543)  and  contains  antibacterial  properties  against  the  Types  I  and  II 
pneumococci.  The  potency  of  the  product  is  expressed  in  terms  of  the 
unit  described  by  Felton,  one  unit  being  that  amount  of  serum  which, 
when  injected  simultaneously  with  a  given  test  dose  of  culture  will  pro- 
tect for  96  hours  at  least  60  per  cent  of  the  test  mice.  Marketed  in 
packages  containing  10,000  Felton  units  each  of  Types  I  and  II  pneumo- 
coccus antibodies  with  a  vial  of  normal  horse  serum  diluted  1;  10  for  reac- 
tion test;  and  in  packages  of  one  vial  with  syringe  attachment  containing 
20,000  Felton  units  each  of  Types  I  and  II  pneumococcus  antibodies  with 
a  vial  of  normal  horse  serum  diluted  1;  10  for  serum  reaction  test. 

Dosage. — Intravenously,  20,000  Felton  units  of  each  type  repeated  at 
intervals  of  4  to  6  hours  until  the  temperature  falls  and  beneficial  effects 
are  evident. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Antipneumococcic  Serum  Types  I  and  II  Refined  and  Concentrated. — 
An  antipneumococcic  serum  prepared  by  immunizing  horses  with  intra- 
venous injections  of  avirulent  and  virulent  pneumococcus  antibodies  of 
types  I  and  II.  The  potency  of  the  product  is  determined  and  expressed 
in  terms  of  the  unit  of  Lloyd  D.  Felton.  The  serum  is  concentrated  by 
a  method  similar  to  that  used  for  antitoxins.  It  is  marketed  in  packages 
of  one  syringe  containing  10,000  units  each  of  pneumococcus  antibodies  of 
types  I  and  II;  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  20,000  units  each 
of  pneumococcus  antibodies  of  types  I  and  II,  and  in  packages  of  one 
ampule  containing  20,000  units  each  of  pneumococcus  antibodies  of  types 
I  and  II. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Concentrated  Anti-Pneumococcic  Serum,  Types  I  and  II. — Prepared 
by  immunizing  horses  with  intravenous  injections  of  cultures  of  type  I 
and  type  II  pneumococci.  When  test  bleedings  show  the  serum  to  have 
reached  a  sufficient  degree  of  potency  for  types  I  and  II  pneumococci, 
the  horses  are  bled  aseptically  and  the  serum  is  refined  and  concentrated 
by  the  method  described  by  Lloyd  D.  Felton  (J.  Infect.  Dis.,  December, 
1928,  p.  543).  The  usual  sterility  and  safety  tests  are  made  by  injection 
into  white  mice  and  guinea-pigs.  The  potency  of  the  product  is  expressed 
in  terms  of  the  unit  described  by  Felton  (Boston  M.  &  S.  J.,  May  15, 
1924.  p.  819;  /.  Infect.  Dis.,  September,  1925,  p.  199;  October,  1925, 
p.    309)    and    used   by   Park.      While   the   unilt  originally   was    intended   to 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  385 

be  the  amount  of  antibody  that  will  protect  against  one  million  fatal  doses 
of  culture,  it  has  lately  been  taken  to  be  Y200  cc.  of  the  control  serum 
(F  146)  distributed  by  Dr.  Felton.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe 
containing  10,000  units  each  of  types  I  and  II;  also  marketed  in  packages 
of  one  syringe  containing  20,000  units  each  of  types  I  and  II  pneumococci. 

ERYSIPELAS   ANTISTREPTOCOCCIC    SERUM  — 

A  serum  containing  the  antibodies  and  antibacterial  properties 
of  hemolytic  streptococci  from  erysipelas. 

Actions  and  Uses. — For  therapeutic  use  against  erysipelas. 
It  may  be  of  value  when  administered  in  adequate  doses  in 
the  early  stages  of  the  disease. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,   Indianapolis. 

Erysipelas  Antistreptococcic  Serum-Lilly  (Concentrated  Globulin).-— 
The  serum  is  obtained  from  horses  immunized  with  strains  of  hemolytic 
streptococci  obtained  from  human  cases  of  erysipelas.  It  is  concentrated 
by  a  method  similar  to  that  employed  in  the  refineinent  of  diphtheria 
antitoxin,  the  resultant  serum  containing  both  neutralizing  and  bacterial 
antibodies.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  an  average 
initial   therapeutic  dose. 

Dosage. — The  contents  of  one  syringe. 
The  National  Drug  Co.,   Philadelphia. 

Erysipelas  Antistreptococcus  Serum. — The  serum  is  obtained  from 
horses  immunized  with  hemolytic  streptococci  isolated  from  patients  with 
erysipelas,  also  with  the  toxins  produced  by  these  organisms.  It  is 
concentrated  and  refined  by  a  method  similar  to  that  used  for  diphtheria 
antitoxin.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  10  cc.,  the 
average  initial  therapeutic  dose.  A  1  cc.  vial  of  a  1:  10  dilution  of 
serum  is  included  with  each  package,  for  scratch  or  intradermal  test,  to 
determine  sensitivity  of  the  patient. 

III.   Agents  for  Producing  Active  Immunity 

The  use  of  substances  for  the  production  of  active  immu- 
nity has  at  least  two  advantages  over  the  use  of  serums :  The 
antibodies  formed  in  the  patient's  own  serum  are  not  lost  so 
rapidly  as  antibodies  from  the  serum  of  another  species,  and,  in 
the  second  place,  not  only  are  the  immunity  reactions  of  the 
blood  serum  made  use  of,  but  the  fixed  cells  of  the  body  may 
also  take  part  in  the  immunizing  process.  Thus,  protection 
from  smallpox  conferred  by  vaccination  lasts  for  years,  while 
the  prophylactic  action  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  is  of  avail  only 
for  days. 

These  advantages  are  frequently  offset,  however,  by  the 
tardiness  and  uncertainty  v/ith  which  active  immunity  appears 
and  by  the  fact  that  the  body  may  already  be  overloaded  with 
antigen  in  the  disease  or  that  sufficient  antigen  to  produce  an 
effect  would  be  in  itself  harmful  to  the  patient. 

Antigens  may  be  of  various  sorts.  Thus  smallpox  vaccine, 
the  most  notably  successful,  is  conceded  to  be  the  living  micro- 
organisms attenuated  by  passage  through  the  bovine  species. 
Other  antigens,  such  as  tuberculins  and  bacterial  vaccines,  con- 
sist of  killed  whole  bacteria  or  of  products  formed  by  them  or 
extracted  from  them. 


386     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

ATTENUATED     LIVING     VIRUSES 

RABIES  VACCINE.  — Antirabic  Vaccine.  —  Antirabic 
Virus. — Pasteur  Treatment. — Pasteur  Prophylactic. — "A  sterile 
suspension  of  the  attenuated,  diluted,  dried  or  dead,  fixed  virus 
of  rabies.  The  virus  is  contained  in  the  tissue  of  the  central 
nervous  system  of  an  animal  suffering  from,  or  dead  of,  fixed 
virus  rabies  infection."   U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Vaccinum 
Rabies. 

Actions  and  Uses. — By  treatment  with  rabies  vaccine  after 
the  bite  of  a  rabid  animal,  immunity  is  usually  established 
before  the  incubation  period  of  the  disease  is  completed,  and 
rabies  is  thus  prevented.  The  treatment  fails  occasionally,  and 
in  a  small  percentage  of  cases  it  is  followed  by  paralysis,  which 
is  usually  transient  but  may  be  fatal. 

Cutter  Laboratory,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Semple). — An  antirabic  vaccine  prepared  according  to 
the  general  method  of  David  Semple  (phenol  killed).  The  brains  and 
spinal  cords  of  rabbits  killed  on  the  sixth  day  after  inoculation  with  fixed 
virus  rabies  are  ground  in  a  mortar  with  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  containing  1  per  cent  of  phenol  to  yield  a  10  per  cent  suspension 
of  brain  substance.  The  mixture  is  strained,  incubated  at  37  C.  for 
twenty-four  hours  and  then  diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  so  that  the  finished  product  contains  5  per 
cent  of  brain  substance.  Marketed  in  packages  of  seven  syringes,  each 
containing  2.5  cc;  also  marketed  in  packages  of  seven  vials  each  contain- 
ing 1  cc.  The  content  of  a  syringe  is  administered  daily  over  a  period  of 
from  fourteen  to  twenty-eight  days  according  to  the  severity  of  the  case. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Pasteur  Anti-Rabic  Vaccine. — The  virus  is  prepared  in  accordance 
with  the  general  method  of  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service.  One- 
fifth  of  an  inch  of  dried  cord,  emulsified  in  0.6  cc.  of  60  per  cent 
glycerin  containing  0.3  per  cent  trikresol  is  supplied.  This  is  diluted 
with  2.5  cc.  of  sterile  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  in 
syringes;  the  dilution  is  made  at  the  time  of  injection.  The  treatrijent 
consists  of  twenty-one  doses  which  are  administered  at  twenty-four  hour 
intervals,  and  these  are  sent  in  three  instalments  of  seven  doses  each. 
The  instalments  are  sent  by  special  delivery  mail.  The  first  dose  con- 
sists of  two  sections  of  a  cord  dried  for  six  days;  the  second  dose  con- 
sists of  two  sections  of  a  cord  dried  for  five  days;  and  the  third  dose 
two  sections  of  a  cord  dried  for  four  days.  The  remaining  eighteen  doses 
are  prepared  from  single  sections  of  cords  dried  as  follows:  3,  3,  2,  2, 
1,  5,  4,  4,  3,  3,  2,  2,  4,  3,  2,  3,  2,  1  days.  They  are  administered  in  the 
order  listed. 

Rabies  Vaccine-Gilliland  (Semple  Method). — An  antirabic  vaccine  pre- 
pared according  to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple  (phenol  killed). 
The  brain  and  cord  of  rabbits  killed  after  inoculation  with  fixed  rabies 
virus  are  emulsified  in  a  ball  mill,  after  which  a  sufficient  quantity  of 
physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  containing  1  per  cent  of  phenol 
is  added  to  yield  an  8  per  cent  emulsion  of  the  fixed  virus.  The  emulsion 
is  incubated  at  37.5  C.  for  twenty-four  hours  and  then  diluted  with  an 
equal  volume  of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  so  that  the 
finished  product  contains  4  per  cent  of  the  brain  and  cord  substance  in 
0.5  per  cent  phenol.  Marketed  in  packages  of  fourteen  syringes  each 
containing  2  cc;  also  in  packages  of  fourteen  vials,  each  containing  2  cc. 
The  content  of  a  syringe  or  vial  is  administered  daily  over  a  period  of 
fourteen  days. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  387 

Dr.  D.  L.  Harris'  Laboratory,  St.  Louis  (National  Patho- 
logical Laboratories,  St.  Louis,  Mo.). 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Harris). — Brains  and  spinal  cords  of  rabbits  that 
have  been  killed  after  fixed  virus  rabies  infection,  are  ground  to  a  paste, 
which  is  frozen  in  a  container  surrounded  w^ith  carbon  dioxide  snow.  The 
mass  is  pulverized  and  rapidly  dried  in  vacuo.  The  resulting  dry  powder 
is  standardized  by  the  method  devised  by  Dr.  Harris,  and  stored  in  vacuo 
in  the  cold.  One  dose  is  given  daily  over  a  period  of  ten  days  or  more, 
the  early  doses  increasing  in  unitage  up  to  a  maximum.  Each  package 
contains  vaccine  and  apparatus  for  the  administration  of  one  complete 
treatment,  consisting  of  10  tubes  of  rs.bies  vaccine  (Harris),  sealed  in  a 
vacuum,  and  numbered  consecutively;  10  vials  containing  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  for  preparing  the  vaccine  solution;  and  a 
Luer  syringe  with  needle. 

Hixson  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Johnstown,  Ohio. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Hixson). — An  antirabic  vaccine  prepared  according  to 
the  general  method  of  David  Semple  (phenol  killed).  The  brains  of 
rabbits  killed  after  inoculation  with  fixed  rabies  virus  are  emulsified  in  a 
1  per  cent  phenol  solution  by  shaking  with  steel  beads.  The  emulsion  is 
passed  through  a  100  mesh  sieve,  diluted  to  yield  an  8  per  cent  emulsion, 
incubated  at  37.5  C.  for  twenty-four  hours,  and  then  diluted  with  an 
equal  volume  of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  so  that  the  finished 
product  contains  4  per  cent  of  brain  substance,  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol,  and 
0.85  per  cent  of  sodium  chloride.  Marketed  in  packages  of  seven  vials 
each  containing  2  cc;  in  packages  of  fourteen  vials  each  containing  2  cc. ; 
and  in  packages  of  fourteen  syringes  each  containing  2  cc.  In  most  cases 
the  content  of  a  syringe  or  vial  (one  dose)  is  administered  daily  over  a 
period  of  fourteen  days.  For  bites  about  the  head  or  neck  two  doses  are 
given  daily  for  seven  days  followed  by  one  dose  daily  for  from  seven  to 
fourteen  days,   according  to  the  severity  of  the  bite. 

Jensen-Salsbery  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Human),  Phenol  Killed. — The  virus  is  prepared 
according  to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple.  The  brain  and  cord, 
removed  from  a  rabbit  paralyzed  on  the  sixth,  seventh,  or  eighth  day 
following  a  subdural  inoculation  of  fixed  virus  rabies,  are  tested  for 
sterility  before  emulsifying,  then  reduced  to  a  fine  suspension  by  shaking 
in  a  sterile  bottle  containing  beads.  The  virus  is  killed  by  suspending 
the  brain  and  cord  substance  in  a  sterile  1  per  cent  phenol  saline  solution 
in  proportion  of  4  per  cent  brain  substance.  This  resulting  suspension 
is  kept  at  37  C.  for  24  hours;  finally  it  is  diluted  with  an  equal  volume 
of  sterile  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  so  that  the  product 
as  sold  contains  brain  substance,  2  per  cent  and  phenol,  0.5  per  cent. 
Marketed  in  packages  containing  14  vials  and  a  syringe,  and  in  packages 
containing  21  vials  and  a  syringe.  The  content  of  vial  1  and  of  vial  2  is 
administered  on  the  first  day  of  treatment  allowing  4  to  6  hour  intervals; 
the  other  doses  are  administered  in  sequence  at  24  hour  intervals  until 
the  treatment  is  completed. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Rabies  Vaccine-Lederle  (Semple  Method). — An  antirabic  vaccine  pre- 
pared according  to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple  (phenol  killed). 
The  brains  of  rabbits  killed  on  the  sixth  or  seventh  day  after  inoculation 
with  fixed  virus  rabies  are  ground  in  a  ball  mill  for  four  days  with 
physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  containing  1  per  cent  phenol  to 
yield  an  8  per  cent  suspension  of  brain  substance.  The  mixture  is 
incubated  at  37  C.  for  twenty-four  hours  and  then  diluted  with  an  equal 
volume  of  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  so  that  the  finished 
preparation  contains  4  per  cent  of  brain  substance  and  0.5  per  cent  of 
phenol.  Marketed  in  packages  of  fourteen  vials  each  containing  2  cc.  with 
one   Luer   syringe. 

EH  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Harris) -Lilly — Sterile  brains  and  spinal  cords  of  rabbits 
killed  after  complete  paralysis  from  rabies  fixed  virus  infection  are  pul- 
verized  during   refrigeration    with   carbon   dioxide   snow   and  then   rapidly 


388     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

dried  in  vacuo  over  sulfuric  acid.  The  resulting  dry  powder  is  stand- 
ardized by  the  method  devised  by  Dr.  Harris,  and  stored  in  vacuo  in 
the  cold.  One  dose  (0.5  cc.)  is  given  daily  over  a  period  of  fourteen 
days.  Marketed  as  a  suspension  of  powdered  virus  in  sterile  water  in 
vials  for  use  with  a  special  syringe  unit. 

Medical  Arts  Laboratory,  Inc.,  Oklahoma  City,  Okla. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Killed  Virus). — An  antirabic  vaccine  prepared  accord- 
ing to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple  (phenol  killed).  It 
consists  of  a  sterile  suspension,  in  distilled  water,  of  the  brain  and  cord 
substance  of  rabbits  moribund  from  the  injection  of  fixed  virus  rabies. 
The  virus  is  killed  by  the  use  of  phenol  and  by  incubation  at  37  C.  for 
forty-eight  hours.  The  finished  product  contains  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  14  vials,  each  containing  2  cc.  and  in  packages 
of  14  individual  syringes,  each  containing  2  cc.  All  of  the  doses  are 
of  the  same  potency:  1  dose  is  to  be  given  daily  over  a  period  of 
fourteen  days.  _  In  severe  face  bites  or  when  treatment  has  been  delayed, 
2  doses  are  given  daily  for  four  or  five  days  with  at  least  a  total  of 
twenty-one   doses. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and   Baltimore. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Phenol  Killcd)-Mulford. — The  virus  is  prepared 
according  to  the  general  rnethod  of  David  Semple.  It  consists  of  a 
sterile  suspension  of  the  brain  tissue  of  rabbits  moribund  from  the  injec- 
tion of  virulent  fixed  rabies  virus.  The  virus  is  killed  by  the  use  of 
phenol  and  by  incubation  at  37.5  C.  for  three  days.  Marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  7  doses,  each  dose  consisting  of  ^  cc.  of  a  25  per  cent  suspension 
of  brain  tissue  contained  in  one  syringe  or  vial,  two  7  dose  packages  being 
sufficient  for  the  14  dose  treatment  and  three  for  the  21  dose  treatment; 
also  in  packages  of  7  vials,  each  vial  (one  dose)  containing  0.5  cc.  of  a 
25  per  cent  suspension  of  brain  tissue.  All  of  the  doses  are  of  the  same 
potency  and  in  the  treatment  of  the  average  case,  14  doses  are  recom- 
mended and  administered  at  daily  intervals.  In  the  treatment  of  severe 
cases,  two  doses  are  injected  daily  for  the  first  7  days,  supplemented 
with  one  additional  dose  for   the  next  7   days. 

The  National  Drug   Co.,   Philadelphia. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Hummi),  (Chloroform  Killed) — A^.  D.  Co. — Antirabic 
vaccine  prepared  according  to  a  modification  of  the  method  of  David 
Semple  (chloroform  killed).  The  brains  and  spinal  cords  of  rabbits  killed 
on  the  sixth  or  seventh  day  after  inoculation  with  fixed  rabies  virus  are 
ground  with  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  containing  2  per  cent 
chloroform,  to  yield  a  25  per  cent  suspension  of  brain  and  cord  substance. 
The  suspension  is  then  placed  in  the  refrigerator  at  2  to  5  _C._  for  two 
months.  It  is  then  tested  for  absence  of  living  virus  by  rabbit  injection. 
The  finished  product  represents  a  25  per  cent  emulsion. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  fourteen  vials,  each  containing  a  dose  of 
0.5  cc,  and  in  packages  of  fourteen  syringes,  each  containing  a  dose  of 
0.5  cc. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Rabies    Vaccine    (Cumming). — The    virus    is    prepared    by    dialyzing    a 

1  per  cent  suspension  of  brain  tissues  (from  a  rabbit  dying  of  rabies 
induced  by  an  infection  of  fixed  virus)  against  running  water  until  the 
active  virulent  virus  is  destroyed.  The  treatment  is  divided  into  two 
classes:   mild,   requiring   14   doses;   severe,   requiring   21   doses.     One   dose, 

2  cc,  is  given  daily  over  a  period  of  either  14  or  21  days.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  7  syringe  containers  of  2  cc.  each  (1  dose)  and  in  packages 
of  seven  2  cc.  vials  each  containing  one  dose. 

E.  R.  Squibb  and  Sons,  New  York. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Killed  Virus)  Squibb  (Semple  Method). — An  antirabic 
vaccine  prepared  according  to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple 
(phenol  killed).  The  brains  of  rabbits  killed  on  the  sixth  day  after  inocu- 
lation with  fixed  virus  rabies,  are  ground  in  a  ball  mill  with  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  containing  1  per  cent  of  phenol  to  yield  a  10 
per  cent  suspenson  of  brain  substance.     The  mixture  is  incubated  at  37  C, 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  389 

for  twenty-four  hours  and  then  diluted  with  an  equal  volume  of  physio- 
logical solution  of  sodium  chloride  so  that  the  finished  product  contains  5 
per  cent  of  brain  substance.  Marketed  in  packages  of  fourteen  vials, 
each  containing  2  cc.  The  content  of  a  vial  is  administered  daily  over 
a   period   of    fourteen   days. 

Terrell's  Laboratories,  Fort  Worth,  Texas. 

Rabies  Vaccine  f Phenolized). — An  antirabic  vaccine  prepared  according 
to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple  (phenol  killed).  The  brain  and 
cord  of  rabbits  killed  after  inoculation  with  fixed  virus  rabies  are  ground 
in  a  mortar  with  distilled  water  containing  2  per  cent  of  phenol  to  yield 
a  6  per  cent  emulsion  of  the  fixed  virus.  The  emulsion  is  incubated  at 
37  C.  for  forty-eight  hours  and  then  diluted  with  distilled  water  so  that 
the  finished  product  contains  1.5  per  cent  of  the  brain  and  cord  substance 
and  0.5  per  cent  phenol.  Marketed  in  packages  of  fourteen  vials  each 
containing  3  cc,  and  in  packages  of  twenty-one  vials  each_  containing 
3  cc.  The  content  of  a  vial  is  administered  daily  over  a  period  of  from 
fourteen  to  twenty-one  days  according  to  the  severity  of  the  case.  Ordi- 
narily one  dose  is  given  daily  but  under  certain  conditions,  such  as  badly 
lacerated  wounds,  bites  in  children,  bites  about  the  face  and  bites  that 
have  occurred  some  time  before  treatment  is  begun,  two  doses  may  be 
given  daily  for  the  first  few  days,  then  one  dose  daily  until  treatment  is 
finished. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth, 
Wis. 

Rabies  Vaccine  (Killed  Virus)  Semple  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.). — An  antirabic 
vaccine  prepared  according  to  the  general  method  of  David  Semple 
(phenol  killed).  The  brains  of  rabbits  killed  after  inoculation  with  fixed 
virus  of  rabies  are  placed  in  a  bottle  containing  beads  and  1  per  cent 
phenol  solution.  The  bottle  is  thoroughly  shaken,  the  resultant  emulsion 
passed  through  100  mesh  screen,  and  sufficient  1  per  cent  phenol  solution 
added  to  yield  a  20  per  cent  emulsion,  used  in  preparation  of  1  cc.  dose 
vaccine,  or  an  8  per  cent  emulsion,  used  in  preparation  of  2  cc.  dose 
vaccine.  The  emulsions  are  incubated  at  37  C.  for  24  hours,  then  diluted 
with  an  equal  volume  of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride.  The 
final  product  is  a  10  per  cent  emulsion  of  brain  substance  or  a  4  per 
cent  emulsion  of  brain  substance  in  0.5  per  cent  phenol.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  14  vials  each  containing  1  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  emulsion  (or  a 
total  of  25  per  cent  more  brain  substance  than  the  2  cc.  4  per  cent 
emulsion  contains) ;  also  in  4  per  cent  emulsion  in  the  following  packages, 
each  vial  or  syringe  containing  a  2  cc.  dose:  7  dose  vial  package,  7  dose 
syringe  package,  14  dose  vial  package,  14  dose  syringe  package,  and  21 
dose  syringe  package;  also  supplied  in  the  form  of  a  25  per  cent  suspen- 
sion of  brain  substance  containing  O.S  per  cent  of  phenol.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  seven  and  fourteen  vials  each  containing  a  single  dose 
(0.5  cc).  The  content  of  a  syringe  or  vial  is  administered  daily  over  a 
period  of  14  days.  In  cases  of  exceptional  severity  additional  dosage  may 
he  administered  at  the  discretion  of  the  physician. 

TOXIN-ANTITOXIN     MIXTURE 

DIPHTHERIA  TOXIN-ANTITOXIN  MIXTURE. 
— Mistura  Toxini  Diphtheric!  et  Antitoxini  Diphtherici. 

— A  mixture  of  diphtheria  toxin  and  diphtheria  antitoxin. 
Labelled  to  show  the  volume  of  each  dose  and  the  number  of 
L  +  doses  of  toxin  contained  in  each  dose. 

The  product  should  be  used  only  if  clear  and  free  from  sedi- 
ment or  flocculi. 

The  antitoxin  used  in  diphtheria  toxin-antitoxin  mixture  is 
produced  from  the  horse,  goat  or  sheep.  Diphtheria  toxin- 
antitoxin  mixture  has  been  almost  entirely  supplanted  by  diph- 
theria toxoid. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Diphtheria  toxin-antitoxin  mix- 
ture is  used  for  active  immunization  against  diphtheria.     It  is 


390     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

administered  subcutaneously,  preferably  at  the  insertion  of  the 
deltoid,  in  three  doses  with  an  interval  of  one  week  between 
doses.  A  Schick  test  performed  about  six  months  after  the  last 
injection  determines  whether  further  immunization  is  necessary. 
In  the  presence  of  an  outbreak  of  diphtheria  an  immunizing 
dose  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  alone  should  be  used  if  patients 
are  remote  from  regular  medical  observation. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin^  Mixture,  0.1  L  +  . — Each  cubic  centimeter 
represents  0.1  L+  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutralized  with  the  required 
amount  of  diphtheria  antitoxin.  Marketed  in  packages  of  3  ampules, 
each  ampule  containing  1  cc;  in  packages  of  30  ampules,  each  arnpule 
containing  1  cc. ;  in  packages  of  3  syringes,  each  syringe  containing 
1   cc;  and  in  ampules  containing,  respectively,   10  cc,  20  cc.  and  30  cc. 

Hixson  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Johnstown,  Ohio. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  0.1  L  +  . — Each  cubic  centimeter 
represents  0.1  L+  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutralized  with  the  proper 
amount  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  obtained  from  the  horse;  preserved  with 
merthiolate  1:10,000.  Marketed  in  packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  in 
packages  of  one   10   cc.  vial,   and  in   packages  of  one  30   cc.  vial. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  0.1  L-j-  (Sheep). — Each  cubic 
centimeter  represents  0.1  L+  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutralized  with 
the  proper  amount  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  obtained  from  sheep;  preserved 
with  merthiolate  1:10,000.  Marketed  in  packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials, 
in  packages  of  one  10  cc.   vial,  and  in  packages  of  one  30  cc.  vial. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  (0.1  L-\-). — A  mixture  containing 
0.1  L-j-  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutralized  with  that  amount  of 
antitoxin  necessary  to  bring  the  mixture  to  the  correct  toxicity.  Marketed 
in  packages  of  three  vials,  representing  one  complete  immunization;  and 
in   packages  of  one  30  cc.  vial,  representing  ten   immunizations. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  New  Formula  (Park-Banzhaf's 
0.1  L-\-). — Each  cubic  centimeter  of  the  mixture  constitutes  a  single  dose 
containing  0.1  lethal  dose  (1/10  L+)  of  toxin  properly  neutralized  with 
the  necessary  amount  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  marketed  in  packages  of 
three  1  cc.  vials  representing  one  immunizing  treatment;  also  in  pack- 
ages of  one  30  cc.  vial  representing  ten  immunizing  treatments  of  three 
doses  each;  also  marketed  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial  representing 
three   immunizing  treatments. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  (Diphtheria  Prophylactic). — Each 
cubic  centimeter  represents  0.1  L-f  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutralized 
with  the  required  amount  of  antitoxin  produced  from  goats,  marketed  in 
packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  one  immunization;  in  packages  of  one  15  cc. 
vial,  five  immunizations;  in  packages  of  one  30  cc.  vial,  ten  immuniza- 
tions; and  in  packages  of  thirty  1    cc.  vials,  ten  immunizations. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Diphtheria  Toxin- Antitoxin  Mixture,  Diphtheria  Prophylactic  (Goat). — 
Each  cubic  centimeter  of  the  mixture  represents  0.1  L-|-  dose  of  diphtheria 
toxin  neutralized  with  the  required  amount  of  antitoxin  produced  from 
goats.  Marketed  in  packages  of  3  bulbs,  each  containing  1  cc.  repre- 
senting one  immunizing  treatment;  also  in  rubber-capped  vials  containing 
30  cc;  also  marketed  in  packages  of  10  vials  each  containing  3  cc, 
representing  ten   immunizing  treatments. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  391 

E.  R.  Squibb  and  Sons,  New  York. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  (New  Formula)  (Sheep)-Squibb. — 
Each  cubic  centimeter  represents  0.1  L+  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutral- 
ized with  the  required  amount  of  antitoxin  obtained  from  the  sheep. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  three  ampules,  each  ampule  containing  1  cc.  of 
the  mixture,  and  in  vials  containing,  respectively,  10  and  30  cc. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  0.1  L+  Non-Sensitizing  (Sheep). — 
Each  cubic  centimeter  constitutes  a  single  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  neutral- 
ized with  the  proper  amount  of  antitoxin  produced  from  sheep.  Marketed 
in  packages  of  three  vials,  each  containing  1  cc;  in  packages  of  one  vial 
containing  10  cc;  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  30  cc,  and  in 
packages  of  thirty   vials,  each   containing   1   cc. 

TUBERCULINS 

Many  different  methods  have  been  used  to  prepare  from  the 
tubercle  bacillus  substances  which  might  be  used  in  the  diag- 
nosis, treatment  or  prophylaxis  of  tuberculosis.  These  have 
been,  in  general,  called  tuberculins,  and  a  few  of  the  more 
prominent  are  enumerated  here.  For  diagnosis,  Koch's  old 
tuberculin  is  almost  exclusively  employed.  For  treatment,  each 
tuberculin  has  its  advocates,  but  it  is  doubtful  whether  there  is 
any  essential  difference  in  the  action  of  the  various  forms. 
The  strength  varies,  however,  not  only  in  tuberculins  prepared 
by  different  methods,  but  also  in  different  batches  prepared  in 
exactly  the  same  manner.  When  a  correct  dosage  for  an 
individual  has  been  found,  therefore,  a  change  to  a  different 
laboratory  number  of  the  same  preparation  should  be  accom- 
panied by  a  reduction  to  one  half  the  dose  in  order  to  avoid  a 
severe  reaction.  The  plan  of  treatment  provides  usually  for  a 
gradual  increase  in  dose,  keeping  the  doses  low  enough  to 
prevent  any  marked  constitutional  disturbance.  For  this  reason, 
the  active  cooperation  of  the  patient  is  necessary,  and  an 
accurate  record  must  be  kept  of  the  temperature  and  pulse  at 
frequent  intervals  during  the  day  and  of  the  slightest  change  in 
subjective  or  objective  symptoms.  The  immunity  to  tuberculin 
acquired  by  this  increasing  dosage  is  not  an  immunity  to  tuber- 
culosis ;  but  the  advocates  of  this  tuberculin  treatment  claim 
that  it  frequently  is  accompanied  by  clinical  improvement.  The 
usual  hygienic-dietetic  measures  should  be  carried  out  as  well. 

Danger  from  Tuberculins. — The  early  history  of  the  use  of 
tuberculin  is  full  of  instances  showing  that  it  is  a  dangerous 
substance.  The  great  risk  lies  in  the  chance  of  a  severe  reac- 
tion, and  every  precaution  should  be  taken,  both  in  diagnosis 
and  in  treatment,  not  to  underestimate  the  patient's  susceptibility 
to  the  tuberculin.  This  susceptibility  varies  enormously  in 
different  individuals  and  at  different  stages  of  the  treatment, 
entirely  out  of  relation  to  the  progress  of  the  disease.  The  use 
of  tuberculin,  therefore,  requires  special  knowledge  and  expe- 
rience. 


392     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

OLD  TUBERCULIN.  —  Tuberculin-Koch.— Concentrated 
Tuberculin. — Crude  Tuberculin. — "A  sterile  solution  in  a  spe- 
cial liquid  culture  medium  of  the  soluble  products  of  growth 
of  the  tubercle  bacillus  (Mycohacterhim  tuberculosis)  and  should 
contain  about  50  per  cent  of  glycerin."  U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Tubercu- 
linum  Pristinum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — For  diagnosis,  old  tuberculin  may  be  used 
by  hypodermic  injection  to  show  a  reaction  at  the  site  of 
application  (local),  at  the  site  of  suspected  disease  (focal),  or 
general  (constitutional).  If  positive,  the  tuberculin  reaction 
merely  indicates  that  the  patient  has  at  some  time  been  infected 
with  tuberculosis  and  not  necessarily  that  he  has  clinical  tuber- 
culosis. In  many  advanced  or  acute  cases  of  tuberculosis,  the 
patients  do  not  react,  so  that  the  result  of  a  tuberculin  test  is 
never  absolute  but  always  must  be  judged  in  the  light  of  other 
findings.  The  occurrence  of  a  focal  reaction  is  good  presump- 
tive evidence  of  an  active  lesion. 

For  children,  the  intracutaneous  (Mantoux)  test  is  generally 
employed.  Concentrated  old  tuberculin  is  diluted,  under  sterile 
precautions,  so  that  0.1  cc.  (the  quantity  to  be  injected)  will 
contain  0.01  mg.  of  old  tuberculin.  Dilution  of  the  tuberculin 
should  be  made  on  the  day  of  test. 

The  diluted  material  should  be  injected  intracutaneously  into 
the  skin  of  the  flexor  surface  of  the  forearm.  A  1  cc.  tuber- 
culin syringe  and  a  sharp  26  gauge  one-half  inch  needle  are 
used. 

The  reactions  are  read  48  to  72  hours  after  injection.  No 
reading  should  be  made  after  72  hours.  If  the  reaction  is 
negative  following  a  dose  of  0.01  mg.,  a  second  dose  of  0.1  mg. 
should  be  injected  into  the  opposite  forearm.  If  after  48  hours 
no  reaction  follows  the  0.1  mg.  dose,  the  patient  should  be 
given  a  dose  of  1.0  mg.  In  the  absence  of  a  reaction  following 
this  last  dose  of  tuberculin,  the  patient  is  regarded  as  negative. 
The  reaction  consists  in  a  zone  of  redness,  usually  with  a 
papule,  at  the  point  of  the  tuberculin  injection.  This  reaction 
reaches  its  height  in  forty-eight  hours.  After  infancy  an 
increasing  proportion  of  those  who  react  are  found  to  be  free 
from  clinical  tuberculosis.  The  subcutaneous  test  is  used  more 
frequently  on  adults.  A  two-hour  temperature  chart  should  be 
kept  for  two  days  preceding  and  two  days  following  each 
injection.  To  an  adult  in  good  condition,  0.0002  cc.  may  be 
given  as  the  initial  dose,  and  if  there  is  no  reaction  0.001  cc. 
and  then  0.005  cc.  may  be  tried.  The  doses  should  be  given 
at  least  three  days  apart;  and  if  there  is  the  slightest  sugges- 
tion of  a  reaction  in  temperature  or  symptoms,  the  dose  should 
be  repeated,  not  increased.  Children  and  weak  patients  should 
receive  smaller  doses,  but  no  very  weak  patient  or  one  with 
a  fever  should  be  subjected  to  the  danger  of  a  subcutaneous 
test.     A   rise  of  temperature  of   1   degree   Fahrenheit  may  be 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  393 

taken  as  a  reaction,  especially  if  accompanied  by  changes  at 
the  site  of  the  disease.  This  reaction  means,  just  as  with  the 
cutaneous  test,  only  infection  and  not  necessarily  clinical  tuber- 
culosis ;  and  owing  to  the  danger  of  large  doses,  patients  may 
fail  to  react  because,  though  sensitive  to  tuberculin,  they  are 
not  sensitive  to  doses  small  enough  to  be  used  safely. 

For  treatment,  from  one  one  hundred-millionth  (0.00000001) 
to  one  millionth  (0.000001)  cc.  may  be  used  as  the  initial  dose, 
and  not  more  than  two  doses  a  week  should  be  given. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Tuberculin  for  the  Cutaneous  Reaction  (Pirquet's  Reaction). — Marketed 
in   packages   containing   three   capillary    tubes. 

Tuberculin  Old  (Tuberculin  O.  T.). — Prepared  from  strains  of  the 
human  type.  Marketed  in  1  cc.  vials  of  concentrated  tuberculin;  also  in 
serial   dilutions,   ranging  from   0.001    to   100   mg.   per  cubic  centimeter. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Lntracutaneous  Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test. — Marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one  1  cc.  vial  containing  diluted  tuberculin  sufficient  for  ten 
tests.     Each  dose  of  0.1   cc.   represents   0.0001    Gm.  of  tuberculin. 

Original   Tuberculin,   "O.    T." — Marketed  in    1   cc.   and   3   cc.   vials. 

Tuberculin  "O.  T."  (Old  Tuberculin). — Marketed  in  packages  contain- 
ing a  stated  amount  of  tuberculin  with  10  cc.  of  diluent,  so  that  1  cc. 
represents:  no.  1  Dilution  (each  cubic  centimeter  equals  0.01  mg.)  ; 
no.  2  dilution  (each  cubic  centimeter  equals  0.1  mg.);  no.  3  dilution 
(each  cubic  centimeter  equals  10  mgj  ;  nu.  5  dilution  (each  cubic  centi- 
meter equals   100  mg.).      Supplied  only  on  orders  direct  from  laboratories. 

Tuberculin  Ointment  in  Capsules  (for  the  Moro  Percutaneous  Diag- 
nostic Test). — An  ointment  consisting  of  tuberculin  "old"  and  anhy- 
drous  wool   fat  equal  parts.      Marketed  in   capsules   sufficient  for  one  test. 

Tuberculin  Solution  for  the  Von  Pirquet  Cutaneous  Diagnostic  Test. — 
Old  tuberculin  in  capillary  tubes,  each  sufficient  for  one  test.  ]\Iarketed 
in   packages   of   one,   live   and  ten  tubes;   also  in   vials   of   1    cc.   and   3   cc. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Intracutaneous  Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test. — -Marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one  vial  containing  tuberculin  "O.  T."  accompanied  by  a  vial 
containing  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  sufficient  to  make 
1  cc;  when  mixed,  the  content  of  the  two  vials  represents  0.001  Gm.  of 
tuberculin. 

Tuberculin  Pirquet  Test  ("O.  T."). — Old  tuberculin  marketed  in 
packages  containing  three  glass  capillary  tubes  and  three  scarifiers;  and  in 
packages   containing  ten  capillary  tubes. 

Tuberculin  "Old"  (Koch's  Old  Tuberculin). — Marketed  in  packages  con- 
taining a  stated  amount  of  tuberculin  with  sufficient  diluent  to  make 
1  cc,  as  follows:  Dilution  A,  containing  0.1  cc;  Dilution  B.  contain- 
ing 0.01  cc. ;  Dilution  C,  containing  0.001  cc ;  Dilution  D,  containing 
0.0001  cc;  Dilution  E,  containing  0.00001  cc,  and  Dilution  F,  contain- 
ing 0.000001  cc.    Also  marketed  in  packages  containing  1  cc.  of  tuberculin. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Pirquet  Test.- — Old  tuberculin  marketed  in  packages  of  three  capillary 
tubes,   each   tube   containing   sufficient   tuberculin   for   one   test. 

Tuberculin  Ointment  for  the  Moro  Percutaneous  Test. — Marketed  in 
collapsible  tubes,  containing  2  Gm.  of  an  ointment  consisting  of  equal 
parts    of   old  tuberculin   and   anhydrous   wool   fat. 

Old  Tuberculin,  Human  Strain  Concentrated. — Marketed  in  1  cc.  vials 
(1  Gm.  tuberculin)  for  making  doses  for  therapeutic  use  or  for  making 
the  subcutaneous  tuberculin  test;  also  in  1  cc.  vials  containing  a  stated 
amount   of   concentrated   tuberculin   for   making   dilutions,   containing   from 


394     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

0.001  to  100  mg.  tuberculin  per  cubic  centimeter.  A  vial  of  physiologic 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  is  included  in  each  package  for  makng  serial 
dilutions. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Tuberculin  "Old"  (O.  T.). — Marketed  in  packages  of  1  cc.  vials; 
also  in  serial  dilutions  in  five  vials  of  8  cc.  each,  the  first  containing 
0.001  mg.  in  each  2  minims,  and  each  succeeding  dilution  being  ten 
times   stronger  than   the  preceding. 

Dosage. — Two  minims. 

Pirquet  Test  for  Tuberculosis. — Old  tuberculin  marketed  in  capillary 
tubes,  put  up  in  packages  of,  respectively,  one,  three  and  ten  tubes, 
each  tube  containing  old  tuberculin  sufficient  for  one  test,  together  with 
packages  containing  an  equal  number  of  tubes  of  concentrated  glycerin 
bouillon  for  use  as  a  control. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Tuberculin  Intracutaneous  for  Mantoux  Test. — Marketed  in  packages 
of  one  intradermal  syringe  (single  test),  containing  0.1  cc.  of  a  1  in  1,000 
dilution  of  old  tuberculin  (O.  T.),  with  a  vial  of  glycerin  bouillon  for 
control;  in  packages  of  two  intradermal  syringes  (double  test),  one  con- 
taining 0.1  cc.  of  a  1  in  1,000  dilution  of  old  tuberculin  (O.  T.)  with 
vial  of  glycerin  bouillon  for  control  and  the  other  containing  0.1  cc.  of 
a  1  in  100  dilution  of  old  tuberculin  (O.  T.)  with  vial  of  glycerin 
bouillon  for  control;  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  ampule  containing  sufficient 
intradermal  tuberculin  solution  for  ten  single  tests;  in  packages  of  two 
1  cc.  ampules  containing  sufficient  intradermal  tuberculin  solution  for  ten 
double  tests;  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  ampule  containing  sufficient 
intradermal   tuberculin   solution   for   fifty    single   tests. 

Tuberculin  Old  (Human). — Marketed  in  single  1  cc.  vial  packages, 
each  cubic  centimeter  representing  1  Gm.  tuberculin-Koch.  Also  sup- 
plied on  special  order,  in  10  cc.  ampule  vials  of  five  serial  dilutions; 
dilutions  1  to  4  representing  in  each  two  minims,  respectively,  0.001 
mg.,  0.01  mg.,  0.1  mg.,  and  1  mg.  of  old  tuberculin,  and  dilution  5  rep- 
resenting 10  mg.   of  old  tuberculin  in  each  minim. 

Von  Pirquet  Test  for  Tuberculosis. — Old  tuberculin  marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one,  three  and  ten  capillary  tubes;  capillary  tubes  containing 
glycerin  bouillon  for  control  are  included  in  each  package. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Tuberculin  "Old"'   (Koch). — Marketed  in   1    cc.  bulbs. 

Tuberculin  (Old)  and  Control  for  the  Pirquet  Test. — Marketed  in  pack- 
ages containing  three  sealed  glass  tubes  of  tuberculin,  each  tube  con- 
taining tuberculin  sufficient  for  one  test,  and  three  tubes  of  control 
material. 

Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test. — A  filtrate  from  bouillon  cultures 
of  both  human  and  bovine  strains  of  Bacterium  tuberculosis  (Mycobac- 
terium tuberculosis)  representing  a  ten-fold  concentration  and  containing 
50  per  cent  of  glycerin  as  a  preservative.  Marketed  in  packages  of  two 
10  cc.  vials,  one  containing  0.01  cc.  tuberculin  old  (Koch),  and  the  other 
10  cc.  of  diluent. 

NEW  TUBERCULIN,  B.  E.— Tuberculinum  Novum 
B.  E.  —  Bazillenemulsion,  Koch. — Bacilli  Emulsion. — Bacilli 
emulsion  is  practically  a  bacterial  vaccine.  It  is  made  by  sus- 
pending one  part  of  pulverized  tubercle  bacilli,  B.  tubercnlosis 
(Mycobacterium  tubercnlosis),  in  100  parts  of  distilled  water 
and  100  parts  of  glycerine.  One  cc.  thus  corresponds  to  5  mg. 
of  tubercle  bacilli. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  395 

It  is  a  white,  fairly  permanent  esmulsion,  but  should  be 
shaken  thoroughly  before  making  dilutions.  New  tuberculin, 
B.  E.,  is  used  in  the  therapeutics  of  tuberculosis  probably  more 
frequently  than  any  other  tubercle  preparation. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Tuberculin  "B.  E."  (Bacillus  Emulsion). — Marketed  in  vials  contain- 
ing 1  cc;  also  in  packages  containing  a  stated  amount  of  tuberculin 
with  sufficient  diluent  to  make  1  cc,  as  follows:  Dilution  A,  containing 
0.1  cc;  Dilution  B,  containing  0.01  cc;  Dilution  C,  containing  0.001  cc. ; 
Dilution  D,  containing  0.0001  cc;  Dilution  E,  containing  0.00001  cc. ; 
and   Dilution   F,  containing  0.000001   cc. 

Alulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Bacillen  Emulsion  "B.  E." — Marketed  in  packages  of  1  cc.  vials; 
also  in   serial    (six)    dilutions. 

Parke,  Davis   &  Company,  Detroit. 

Tuberculin  B.  E.  (Concentrated). — Bacillus  emulsion,  marketed  in  bulbs 
containing  1   mg.  of  dry  tubercle  solids  per  cubic  centimeter. 

NEW  TUBERCULIN  B.  E.  DRIED— Tuberculinum 
Novum  B.  E.  Siccum. — A  solution  of  this  is  practically  a 
bacterial  vaccine.  The  bacteria,  B.  tuberculosis  (Mycobacterium 
tuberculosis),  are  dried,  ground,  mixed  with  a  suitable  base,  and 
made  into  tablets.  The  diluent  is  adjusted  so  that  one  tablet 
dissolved  therein  will  represent  the  desired  amount  of  new 
tuberculin  B.  E.  dried,  per  cc. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Tablets  Tuberculin  B.  E.-P.  D.  &  Co.— Marketed  in  vials  no.  1  of 
ten  tables,  each  tablet  containing  0.0001  mg.  new  tuberculin  B.  E.  dried; 
in  vials  no.  2  of  ten  tablets,  each  tablet  containing  0.001  mg.  new  tuber- 
culin B.  E.  dried;  in  vials  no.  3  of  ten  tablets,  each  tablet  containing 
0.01  mg.  new  tuberculin  B.  E.  dried;  in  vials  no.  4  of  ten  tablets,  each 
tablet  containing  0.1  mg.  new  tuberculin  B.  E.  dried;  in  vials  no.  5 
of  ten  tablets,  each  tablet  containing  1  mg.  new  tuberculin  B.  E.  dried; 
also  marketed  in  packages  of  5  vials,  nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  and  5. 

NEW  TUBERCULIN-T.  R.  —  Tuberculinum  Novum 
T.  R. — Tuberkelbacillin  Rest,  Koch. — Tuberculin  Residue. — 
Tuberculin  Riickstand. — This  is  made  from  living  dried  tubercle 
bacilli,  B.  tuberculosis  (Mycobacterium  tuberculosis),  hy  gv'mdmg 
to  complete  disintegration.  The  water  insoluble  material  is  sus- 
pended in  glycerine  and  water.  The  final  product  contains  the 
residue  of  10  mg.  of  dried  tubercle  bacilli  in  each  cc.  of  fluid. 

New  tuberculin  is  an  uncolored,  slightly  opalescent  liquid. 
It  is  used  occasionally  in  the  treatment  of  tuberculosis. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Tuberculin  T.  R. — Marketed  in  serial  dilutions  of  six  graduated 
strengths. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Tuberculin  T.  R.  (Concentrated). — Marketed  in  single  1  cc.  bulbs  con- 
taining 1   mg.  of  tubercle  solids    per  cubic  centimeter. 


396     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

NEW  TUBERCULIN  T.  R.  DRIED.— Tuberculinum 
Novum  T.  R.  Siccum. — Tuberculin  Residue  (Dried). — The 
mass  culture  of  B.  tuberculosis  (Mycobacterium  tuberculosis) 
is  repeatedly  ground  and  washed  until  all  water  soluble  material 
has  been  removed.  The  residue  is  then  ground  to  complete 
disintegration,  dried,  mixed  with  a  suitable  base  and  made  into 
tablets.  Each  tablet  represents  a  definite  amount  of  dry  tubercle 
bacilli. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Tablets  Tuberculin  T.  R.-P.  D.  &  Co.— Marketed  in  vials  no.  1  cf 
ten  tablets,  each  tablet  containing  0.0001  mg.  new  tuberculin  T.  B. 
dried;  in  vials  no.  2  of  ten  tablets,  each  tablet  containing  0.001  mg.  new 
tuberculin  T.  R.  dried;  in  vials  no.  3  of  ten  tablets,  each  tablet  con- 
taining 0.01  mg.  new  tuberculin  T.  R.  dried;  in  vials  no.  4  of  ten 
tablets,  each  tablet  containing  0.1  mg.  new  tuberculin  T,  R.  dried;  in 
vials  no.  5  of  ten  tablets,  each  tablet  containing  1  mg.  new  tuberculin 
T.  R.  dried;  also  marketed  in  packages  of  5  vials,  nos.  1,  2,  3,  4  and  5, 
inclusive. 

TUBERCULIN     DENYS.  —  Tuberculinum     Denys.— 

Tuberculine  Bouillon  Filtre. — Bouillon  Filtrate  Tuberculin, — 
This  is  prepared  like  old  tuberculin,  without  the  prolonged 
heating  and  concentration ;  that  is,  it  is  simply  a  glycerin-broth 
culture  of  the  tubercle  bacillus,  B.  tuberculosis  (M.  tubercu- 
losis), passed  through  a  porcelain  filter.  It  contains  all  the 
soluble  products  of  the  growth  of  the  tubercle  bacillus. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Tuberculin  B.  F.  (Boznne). — A  tuberculin  Denys  prepared  with  bovine 
cultures  of  Bacterium  tuberculosis,  containing  0.4  per  cent  of  cresol. 
Marketed  in  packages  of  six  1   cc.  rubber-stoppered  glass  tubes. 

Tuberculin  B.  F.  (Human). — A  tuberculin  Denys  prepared  with  human 
cultures  of  Bacterium  tuberculosis,  containing  0.4  per  cent  of  cresol. 
Marketed   in   packages   of   six    1    cc.    rubber-stoppered   bulbs. 

BACTERIAL     TOXIN 

SCARLET    FEVER    STREPTOCOCCIC    TOXIN.— 

Scarlet  Fever  Toxin  for  Immunization  and  the  Dick  Test. 
— "A  sterile  solution  in  beef  broth  of  certain  products  including 
a  soluble  toxin,  resulting  from  the  growth  in  the  broth  of 
suitable  strains  of  the  hemolytic  streptococci  (Streptococcus 
scarlatinae)."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Toxinum 
Scarlatinae   Streptococcicum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — The  toxin  is  used  for  active 
immunization.  For  this  purpose  it  is  injected  subcutaneously 
at  weekly  intervals.  The  amount  of  toxin  necessary  for 
immunity  production  varies  with  the  individual.  From  three 
to  five  doses  are  given,  beginning  with  250  to  500  skin  test  doses 
for  the  first  injection  and  increasing  the  amount  of  toxin  in 
each  subsequent  injection.  Immunity  to  the  toxin  appears  in  a 
few  weeks  and  is  determined  by  the  absence  of  a  reaction  to  the 
intracutaneous  test. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  397 

Lederle  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Pearl   River,   N.   Y. 

Scarht  Fever  Streptococcus  Immunising  To.vm.— ^Prepared  by  the 
method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  Marketed 
in  single  immunization  packages  of  five  vials  of  toxin  containing,  respec- 
tively, 500,  2,000,  8,000,  25,000  and  80,000  skin  test  doses;  also  marketed 
in  ten  immunization  packages  of  six  10  cc.  vials  of  toxin  containing, 
respectively,  500,  2,000,  8,000,  25,000,  80,000  and  80,000  skin  test  doses 
per  cubic  centimeter;  also  marketed  in  packages  of  one  2  cc.  vial  contain- 
ing 80,000  to  100,000  skin  test  doses  of  scarlet  fever  streptococcus  toxin 
for  supplementary  treatment  of  those  patients  who  fail  to  become  Dick 
negative  after  receiving  the  full  live  dose  series  of  scarlet  fever  strepto- 
coccus  immunizing  toxin. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunization-Mulford:  Pre- 
pared by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  Patent  1,547,369  (July 
29,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee 
Incorporated.  Marketed  in  packages  of  five  ampoule-vials  containing, 
respectively,  500,  2,000,  8,000,  25,000  and  from  80,000  to  100,000  skin 
test  doses;  also  in  packages  containing  ten  complete  treatments  consisting 
of  six  10-cc.  vials,  one  containing  500  skin  test  doses  per  cubic  centi- 
meter, one  containing  2,000  skin  test  doses  per  cubic  centimeter,  one 
containing  8,000  skin  test  doses  per  cubic  centimeter,  one  containing 
25,000  skin  test  doses  per  cubic  centimeter  and  two  containing  from  80,000 
to  100,000  skin  test  doses  per  2  cubic  centimeters. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunization-"  National." — 
Prepared  by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369 
(July  28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee, 
Inc.  Marketed  in  packages  of  five  vials,  containing,  respectively,  500, 
2,000,  8,000,  25,000  and  80,000  skin  test  doses.  Also  marketed  in  single 
vial  packages  containing  100.000  skin  test  doses;  and  in  packages 
of  six  10  cc,  vials  of  toxin,  one  containing  500  skin  test  doses,  one  con- 
taining 2,000  skin  test  doses,  one  containing  8,000  skin  test  doses,  one 
containing  25,000  skin  test  doses,  and  two  containing  80,000  skin  test 
doses. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Preventive  Immunization- 
P.  D.  &  Co. — Prepared  by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,547,369  (July  28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever 
Committee,  Inc.  Marketed  in  packages  of  five  vials  of  toxin  containing, 
respectively,  500,  2,000,  8,000,  25,000  and  80,000  skin  test  doses;  also 
marketed  in  packages  of  six  1  cc.  vials,  one  containing  500  skin  test 
doses  per  cc,  one  containing  2,000  skin  test  doses  per  cc,  one  containing 
8,000  skin  test  doses  per  cc,  one  containing  25,000  skin  test  doses  per  cc, 
and  two  containing  40,000  skin  test  doses  per  cc,  of  which  2  cc.  is  used 
for  the  fifth  dose. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunizatioyi-Squibb. — Prepared 
by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  Marketed 
in  packages  of  five  vials  of  toxin  containing,  respectively,  500,  2,000, 
8.000,  25,000  and  80,000  skin  test  d&ses;  also  marketed  in  packages  of 
six  10  cc.  vials  of  toxin  containing,  respectively,  500,  2.000,  8,000, 
25,000,    40,000   and   40,000   skin   test   doses   per   cubic   centimeter. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunization. — Prepared  by 
the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee  Inc.  Marketed 
in    single    immunization    packages    of    five    vials    containing,    respectively. 


398     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

500,  2,000,  8,000,  25,000  and  80,000  skin  test  doses  of  toxin;  also  in  ten 
immunization  packages  of  six  10  cc.  vials  containing,  respectively,  500, 
2,00p,  8,000,  25,000  80,000  and  80,000  skin  test  doses  of  toxin  per  cubic 
centimeter. 

Modified  Bacterial  Toxin 

DIPHTHERIA  TOXOID.  —  Anatoxin-Ramon.  —  Diph- 
theria Prophylactic. — "A  sterile  aqueous  solution  of  the  prod- 
ucts of  growth  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus  (Corynehacterium 
diphtheriae)  so  modified  by  special  treatment  as  to  have  lost 
the  ability  to  cause  toxic  effects  in  guinea-pigs  but  retaining 
the  property  of  inducing  active  immunity.  The  toxicity  of  the 
Diphtheria  Toxoid  shall  be  so  low  that  five  times  the  dose  for 
the  human  adult  does  not  cause  either  local  or  general  symptoms 
of  diphtheria  poisoning  in  a  guinea-pig  within  thirty  days  after 
its  injection  into  the  animal.  The  antigenic  value  shall  be  such 
that  the  initial  dose  for  the  human  shall  protect  at  least  80  per 
cent  of  guinea-pigs,  six  weeks  after  injection,  against  five 
minimum  lethal  doses  each  of  diphtheria  test  toxin.  Some 
specimens  are  concentrated  and  purified  by  precipitating  and 
washing  the  active  portion  of  the  detoxified  material.  Such 
concentrated  and  purified  specimens  must  be  capable,  when 
injected  into  guinea-pigs,  of  inducing  the  production  of  diph- 
theria antitoxin  of  such  potency  as  is  prescribed  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health  of  the  United  States  Public  Health  Service." 
US.P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Toxinum 
Diphthericum    Detoxificatum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Diphtheria  toxoid  is  used  for 
active  immunization  against  diphtheria.  It  is  administered  sub- 
cutaneously,  preferably  at  the  insertion  of  the  deltoid,  in  two 
or  three  doses  with  an  interval  of  three  or  four  weeks  between 
doses.  Since  some  local  and  general  reactions  have  been 
observed  in  adults  and  in  children  over  8  years  of  age,  an 
intracutaneous  test  dose  of  0.1  cc.  of  the  toxoid  diluted  (1  in  20) 
with  physiological  saline  solution  should  be  given  to  determine 
sensitivity  in  such  persons. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid-Cutter. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  whose  L4- 
dose  is  0.2  cc.  or  less  by  treatment  with  0.3  to  0.4  per  cent  formaldehyde 
at  a  temperature  of  from  Z7  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that 
injection  of  five  maximum  human  doses  into  guinea-pigs  causes  no  local 
or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning.  The  product  is  tested  for 
antigenic  potency  by  injection  into  at  least  ten  guinea-pigs  of  one  human 
dose  each;  if  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the  anirnals 
survive  for  ten  days  the  injection  of  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of  diph- 
theria toxin,  the  toxoid  is  considered  satisfactory.  It  is  marketed  in 
packages  of  one  immunization  treatment  of  two  1  cc.  vials;  in  packages 
of  ten  immunization  treatments  of  twenty  1  cc.  vials,  and  in  packages 
of  one  thirty  cc.  vial,   fifteen   immunization  treatments. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid-Gilliland. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  whose 
L-f  dose  is  0.20  cc.  or  less  by  treatment  with  formaldehyde  at  a  tem- 
perature of  from  38  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  injection 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  399 

of  five  maximum  human  doses  into  guinea-pigs  causes  no  local  or  general 
symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning.  The  product  is  tested  for  antigenic 
potency  by  injection  into  at  least  ten  guinea-pigs  of  one  human  dose 
each;  if  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the  animals 
survive  for  ten  days  the  injection  of  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of 
diphtheria  toxin,  the  toxoid  is  considered  satisfactory.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one  immunization  treatment  of  two  1  cc.  vials;  in  packages  of 
ten  immunization  treatments  of  twenty  1  cc.  vials;  and  in  packages 
of  fifteen  immunization  treatments  of  one  30  cc.  vial.  Each  package  is 
accompanied  by  a  sufficient  amount  of  diluted  diphtheria  toxoid  for  the 
reaction  test. 

Hixson  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Johnstown,  Ohio. 

Diphtheria  Toxaid. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  by  treatment  with 
0.4  per  cent  solution  of  formaldehyde  at  a  tempertaure  of  40  C.  until 
its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  5  cc.  will  not  cause  early  or  late  symptoms 
of  diphtheria  poisoning  in  a  guinea-pig  under  observation  for  thirty-five 
days.  The  product  is  tested  for  antigenic  potency  by  injecting  guinea- 
pigs  with  varying  doses  and  testing  the  resistance  of  these  guinea-pigs 
to  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of  diphtheria  toxin  given  six  weeks  after 
the  dose  of  toxoid.  If  80  per  cent  of  these  pigs  survive  for  ten  days,  the 
product  is  considered  satisfactory.  Merthiolate  1:  10,000  is  used  as  pre- 
servative. Marketed  in  packages  of  two  1  cc.  vials,  in  packages  of  twenty 
1  cc.  vials,  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial,  and  in  packages  of  one  30  cc. 
vial.  All  packages  are  accompanied  by  vials  containing  diluted  toxoid  for 
carrying  out  reaction   tests. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  New  York. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  of  which  the  L-f 
dose  is  0.2  cc.  or  less.  The  toxin  is  treated  with  formaldehyde  at  a  tem- 
perature of  37  to  40  C.  until  the  injection  of  five  human  doses  into  six 
300  Gm.  guinea-pigs  will  cause  no  signs  of  diphtheria  poisoning,  includ- 
ing paralysis  at  any  time  during  a  period  of  thirty  days.  It  is  tested 
for  antigenic  power  by  injecting  subcutaneously  at  least  ten  guinea- 
pigs  weighing  from  270  to  320  Grn.  each  with  the  initial  human  dose;  at 
the  end  of  six  weeks  each  animal  is  injected  subcutaneously  with 
5  M.  L.  D.  of  a  stable  diphtheria  toxin;  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the 
animals  must  survive  for  ten  days.  The  finished  product  is  adjusted  to 
contain  in  2  cc.  enough  of  the  toxoid  for  one  immunization  treatment. 
It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  immunization  treatment  consisting  of 
two  1  cc.  vials  of  diphtheria  toxoid;  in  packages  of  fifteen  immunization 
treatments  consisting  of  one  30  cc.  vial  of  diphtheria  toxoid;  in  packages 
of  one  vial  containmg  sufficient  diluted  diphtheria  toxoid  for  ten  tests, 
and  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  diluted  diphtheria  toxoid 
for  one  hundred  tests. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  by  treatment  with 
0.3  per  cent  solution  of  formaldehyde  at  a  temperature  approximately 
40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  5  cc.  will  not  cause  early  or 
late  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning  in  a  300  gram  guinea-pig.  The 
product  is  tested  for  antigenic  efficiency  by  injecting  the  initial  human 
dose  into  a  large  series  of  guinea-pigs;  if  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least 
80  per  cent  of  these  animals  survive  the  injection  of  five  minimum  lethal 
doses  of  diphtheria  toxin  for  ten  days,  the  product  is  considered  satis- 
factory. Merthiolate  1:10,000  is  used  as  preservative.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one  immunization  treatment  consisting  of  two  1  cc.  vials  of 
diphtheria  toxoid,  and  in  packages  of  fifteen  immunization  treatments 
consisting  of   one  30  cc.  vial  of  diphtheria  toxoid. 

Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.,  Cincinnati. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  the  L+  dose  of 
which  is  0.2  cc.  or  less  by  treatment  with  formaldehyde  solution  at  a 
temperature  of  from  _  38  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that 
injection  of  five  maximum  human  doses  into  guinea-pigs  causes  no  local 
or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning.  The  product  is  tested  for 
antigenic  potency  by  injection  into  at  least  ten  guinea-pigs  of  one  human 


400     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

dose  each;  if  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the  animals 
survive  for  ten  days  the  injection  of  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of  diph- 
theria toxin,  the  toxoid  is  considered  satisfactory.  Marketed  in  packages 
of  two  1  cc.  vials,  and  in  packages  of  fifteen  immunization  treatments 
of  one  30  cc.  vial. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid. — Prepared  from  broth  cultures  of  diphtheria  toxin 
having  an  L+  dose  of  0.25  cc.  or  less,  diluted  with  physiologic  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  and  free  of  serum  proteins.  Diphtheria  toxin  is  treated 
with  formaldehyde  at  a  temperature  of  from  30  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity 
is  so  reduced  that  5  cc.  will  not  cause  acute  death  in  a  guinea-pig.  It  is 
tested  for  antigenic  power  by  injecting  guinea-pigs  with  varying  doses 
and  testing  the  resistance  of  these  guinea-pigs  to  five  fatal  doses  of  diph- 
theria toxin  given  six  weeks  after  the  dose  of  toxoid.  The  dose  which 
induces  sufficient  antigenic  response  to  assure  survival  of  80  per  cent  of 
these  animals  for  ten  days  is  the  lowest  permissible  human  dose.  The 
finished  product  contains  two  such  doses  per  cubic  centimeter.  It  must  be 
so  free  from  toxicity  that  five  human  doses  cause  no  symptoms  of  poison- 
ing in  a  guinea-pig.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  immunizing  treat- 
ment containing  two  1  cc.  vials  of  diphtheria  toxoid  and  in  packages  of 
ten  immunizing  treatments  containing  twenty  1  cc.  vials  of  diphtheria 
toxoid;  also  in  packages  of  fifteen  immunizing  treatments  containing  one 
30  cc.  vial  of  diphtheria  toxoid. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid.— Prepared  from  seven  day  cultures  of  the  diphtheria 
bacillus  that  yield  a  toxin  having  an  L+  dose  of  not  more  than  0.2  cc. 
The  toxin  is  treated  with  formaldehyde  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that 
five  human  doses  will  cause  no  local  or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria 
poisoning  when  injected  subcutaneously  into  guinea-pigs.  The  product  is 
tested  for  antigenic  potency  by  injection  subcutaneously  of  one  human 
dose  of  the  toxoid  into  each  of  at  least  ten  guinea-pigs  weighing  between 
270  and  320  Gm.;  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  the  animals  are  injected  sub- 
cutaneously with  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of  a  stable  diphtheria  toxin; 
80  per  cent  of  the  animals  must  survive  for  ten  days.  For  the  two  dose 
method  of  treatment  the  following  forms  are  marketed:  packages  of 
one  immunization  treatment,  consisting  of  two  vials,  each  containing  one 
human  dose;  packages  of  ten  immunization  treatments,  consisting  of  one 
vial  containing  twenty  human  doses;  packages  of  fifteen  immunization 
treatments,  consisting  of  one  vial  containing  thirty  human  doses;  in 
packages  of  five  immunization  treatments,  consisting  of  one  vial,  contain- 
ing ten  human  doses,  and  in  packages  of  ten  immunization  treatments, 
consisting  of  twenty   1   cc.   vials,   each  containing  one  human  dose. 

For  determining  sensitivity  to  diphtheria  toxoid  the  product  is  sup- 
plied in  the  form  of  a  1:20  dilution.  The  test  dose  is  0.1  cc.  injected 
intradermally.      Supplied  in  packages   of  five  and  fifty    tests. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid.— Frepzred  from  diphtheria  toxin  of  which  the  L-f- 
dose  is  0.25  cc.  The  toxin  is  treated  with  formaldehyde  according  to  the 
specifications  of  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service  until  it  is  detoxified  so 
that  5  cc.  (five  minimum  human  doses)  injected  into  300  gram  guinea-pigs 
will  not  produce  signs  of  toxic  poisoning.  It  is  tested  for  antigenic  power 
by  subcutaneous  injection  of  0.5  cc.  into  ten  300  gram  guinea-pigs.  After 
six  weeks  the  animals  are  injected  with  five  M.  L.  D.  of  diphtheria  toxin 
and  the  product  is  considered  satisfactory  if  80  per  cent  survive  for  ten 
days.  Diphtheria  toxoid-P.  D.  &  Co.  is  marketed  in  packages  contain- 
ing one  bulb  (0.5  cc.)  of  dilute  diphtheria  toxoid  for  the  reaction  test 
and  two  bulbs  (0.5  and  1.0  cc,  respectively)  of  diphtheria  toxoid.  Also 
marketed  in  hospital  packages  of  one  vial  containing  30  cc.  of  diphtheria 
toxoid. 

For  determining  sensitivity  to  the  nonantigenic  portion  of  diphtheria 
toxoid,    a    diluted    diphtheria    toxoid    is    supplied.      This    is    marketed    in 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  401 

packages  of  one  0.5  cc.  vial  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  contain- 
ing diluted  diphtheria  toxoid  sufficient  for  five  and  fifty  reaction  tests, 
respectivel}'. 

Dosage. — For  the  reaction  test,  0.1  cc.  of  dilute  diphtheria  toxoid  intra- 
dermally,  for  immunization,  two  doses  (0.5  and  1.0  cc.)  of  the  diphtheria 
toxoid  subcutaneously,  with  an  interval  of  three  or  four  weeks  between 
injections, 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid-Squibh. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin  by  treat- 
ment with  formaldehyde  as  prescribed  by  the  U.  S.  Public  Health  Service 
to  secure  detoxification,  which  is  tested  by  injection  of  five  maximum 
human  doses  into  guinea-pigs  weighing  300  grams.  The  product  is  tested 
for  antigenic  potency  by  injection  into  at  least  ten  guinea-pigs  of  one 
human  dose  each;  if  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the 
animals  survive  for  ten  days  the  injection  of  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of 
diphtheria  toxin,  the  toxoid  is  considered  satisfactory.  Diphtheria  toxoid- 
Squibb  is  standardized  to  contain  in  2  cc.  enough  of  the  toxoid  for  one 
immunization  treatment.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  immunization 
treatment  containing  two  1  cc.  ampules  of  diphtheria  toxoid  and  in 
packages  of  one  30  cc.  vial  of  diphtheria  toxoid.  Also  _  marketed  in 
packages  of  one  vial  containing  1  cc.  of  diluted  diphtheria  toxoid  for 
the   reaction   test. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth, 
Wis. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co. — Prepared  from  diphtheria  toxin 
whose  L  +  dose  is  0.2  cc.  or  less  by  treatment  with  0.3  to  0.4  per  cent 
formaldehyde  at  a  temperature  of  from  37  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  so 
reduced  that  injection  of  five  human  doses  into  guinea-pigs  causes  no  local 
or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning.  The  product  is  tested  for 
antigenic  potency  by  injection  into  at  least  ten  guinea-pigs  of  one  human 
dose  each;  if  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  80  per  cent  of  the  animals 
survive  for  ten  days  the  injection  of  five  minimum  lethal  doses  of  diph- 
theria toxin,  the  toxoid  is  considered  satisfactory.  The  product  is  stand- 
ardized to  contain  in  2  cc.  enough  of  the  toxoid  for  one  immunization 
treatment.  Marketed  in  packages  of  two  1  cc.  vials;  in  packages  of 
twenty  1  cc.  vials;  in  packages  of  one  6  cc.  vial;  in  packages  of  one  20  cc. 
vial;   and  in  packages  of  one  30  cc.  vial. 

DIPHTHERIA  TOXOID,  ALUM  PRECIPITATED 

(REFINED).— Diphtheria  Toxoid.-— It  has  been  shown  that 
toxin  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus,  B.  diphtheriae  (C.  diphfheriae) 
modified  by  the  method  of  Ramon  may  be  precipitated  by  the 
addition  of  potassium  aluminum  sulfate.  The  resultant  water- 
insoluble  precipitate  which  contains  the  antigenic  properties  is 
purified  by  washing.  More  than  50  per  cent  of  the  proteins 
contained  in  the  original  crude  toxoid  are  removed  during  the 
process  of  purification. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Refined  diphtheria  toxoid,  alum 
precipitated  is  used  for  active  immunization  against  diphtheria. 
It  is  administered  subcutaneously,  preferably  at  the  insertion 
of  the  deltoid  muscle,  in  one  dose.  Due  to  the  presence  of 
potassium  aluminum  sulfate  in  the  product,  absorption  is 
delayed.  A  nodule  persists  at  the  site  of  inoculation  for  several 
days,  and  occasionally  an  abscess  forms. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined. — Prepared  from  diph- 
theria toxin  having  an  L-f  dose  of  0.20  cc.  or  less.  The  toxin  is 
treated  with  from  0.3   to   0.4   per  cent   formaldehyde  at  a  temperature  of 


402     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

from  38  to  40  C.  until  the  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  the  injection  of 
five  human  doses  into  a  guinea-pig  will  produce  no  symptoms  of  local  or 
general  diphtheria  poisoning.  The  toxoid  is  precipitated  by  the  addition 
of  not  more  than  2  per  cent  of  potassium  aluminum  sulfate.  The 
precipitate  is  washed  twice  with  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride 
and  resuspended  in  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  to  a  volume 
not  less  than  the  volume  of  the  original  toxoid.  Merthiolate  1 :  10,000  is 
added  as  a  preservative.  The  product  is  tested  for  potency  according  to 
the  method  prescribed  by  the  National  Institute  of  Health:  guinea-pigs 
weighing  500  Gm.,  given  one  human  dose,  rtiust  develop  within  six 
weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  per  cubic  centimeter 
of  blood  serum.  Marketed  in  packages  of  1  cc.  (one  immunizing  treat- 
ment)   and   in   packages   of    one    10   cc.   vial    (ten   immunizing   treatments). 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined). — Prepared  from  a  veal 
broth  culture  of  B.  diphtheriae  (C.  diphtheriae)  which  yields  toxin  having 
an  L+  dose  of  not  more  than  0.2  cc.  The  toxin  is  treated  with  0.4  per 
cent  U.  S.  P.  formaldehyde  until  the  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  five 
human  doses  will  cause  no  local  or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poison- 
ing when  injected  subcutaneously  into  guinea-pigs  weighing  300  Gm.  The 
toxoid  is  precipitated  with  a  solution  of  aluminum  and  potassium  sulfate. 
The  precipitate  is  washed  and  then  suspended  in  physiologic  solution  of 
sodium  chloride.  The  finished  product  contains  merthiolate  in  a  concen- 
tration of  1:  10,000.  The  product  is  tested  for  antigenic  potency  accord- 
ing to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National  Institute  of  Health:  guinea- 
pigs  weighing  500  Gm.,  given  one  human  dose,  must  produce  at  the  end 
of  six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  in  each  cubic  centi- 
meter of  blood  serum.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial  (one 
immunization);  ten  1  cc,  vials  (ten  immunizations);  one  10  cc.  vial  (ten 
immunizations). 

Hixson  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Johnstown,  Ohio. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined). — Prepared  from  diph- 
theria toxin  having  an  L+  dose  of  0.20  cc.  or  less  and  an  M.  L.  D. 
value  of  0.0025  cc.  The  toxin  is  treated  with  formaldehyde  at  a  tem- 
perature of  from  38  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  five 
human  doses  will  cause  no  local  or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria 
poisoning  when  injected  subcutaneously  into  guinea-pigs  under  observa- 
tion for  thirty  days.  The  toxoid  is  precipitated  with  a  solution  of 
aluminum  and  potassium  sulfate  in  such  amount  that  the  finished  product 
shall  not  contain  more  than  20  mg.  of  alum  per  human  dose.  The  super- 
natant solution  is  siphoned  off  and  discarded.  The  precipitate  is  washed 
three  times  with  sterile  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and 
resuspended  in  sterile  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  so  that  the 
final  volume  is  equal  to  that  of  the  original  toxoid.  The  finished  product 
contains  1  :  10,000  merthiolate  as  a  preservative.  The  immunizing  value 
of  the  diphtheria  toxoid-alum  precipitated  is  determined  according  to  the 
regulations  of  the  National  Institute  of  Health;  namely,  the  human  dose 
administered  subcutaneously  to  at  least  four  guinea-pigs  weighing  500  Gm. 
produces  at  least  two  units  of  antitoxin  per  cubic  centimeter  of  blood 
serum  at  the  end  of  four  weeks.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial 
(one  immunization),  ten  1  cc.  vials  (ten  immunizations)  and  one  10  cc. 
vial    (ten    immunizations). 

Jensen-Salsbery  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Kansas   City,   Mo. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined). — Prepared  from 
diphtheria  toxin  having  an  M.  L.  D.  value  of  0.0025  cc.  or  less.  The 
toxin  is  treated  with  formaldehyde  until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that 
five  human  doses  will  cause  no  local  or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria 
poisoning  when  injected  subcutaneously  into  guinea-pigs.  The  toxoid  is 
precipitated  by  the  addition  of  not  more  than  2  per  cent  of  potassium 
aluminum  sulfate;  the  precipitate  is  washed  with  physiologic  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  and  resuspended  in  a  volume  of  physiologic  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  equivalent  to  the  volume  of  the  original  toxoid. 
Merthiolate,   1:  10,000,  is  added  as  a  preservative.     The  product  is  tested 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  403 

for  antigenic  potency  acording  to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health:  guinea-pigs  weighing  500  Gm.,  given  one  human 
dose,  must  produce  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diph- 
theria  antitoxin   in   each   cubic   centimeter   of   blood. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  1  cc.  (1  immunizing  treatment)  and  in  pack- 
ages of  ten   1  cc.  vials   (10  immunizing  treatments). 

Lederle  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Pearl   River,   N.  Y. 

Refined  Diphtheria  Toxoid  (Alum  Precipitated)-Lederle. — Diphtheria 
toxin,  the  L-f  dose  of  which  is  0.2  cc.  or  less,  is  detoxified  with  0.2  to 
0.4  per  cent  solution  of  formaldehyde  to  make  diphtheria  toxoid.  The 
native  toxoid  is  concentrated  by  ultrafiltration  against  the  membrane  which 
passes  peptones  and  other  extractives  but  retains  the  toxoid.  When  the 
toxoid  is  essentially  free  from  membrane-passing  substances,  it  is  diluted 
with  buffered  saline  solution  so  that  each  cubic  centimeter  contains  approxi- 
mately 45  flocculating  units  (Ramon).  The  solution  is  then  brought  to  a 
reaction  of  pn  8.3  and  precipitation  is  effected  with  a  4  per  cent  solution 
of  potassium  aluminum  sulfate;  it  is  washed  with  sterile  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  resuspended  in  the  same  menstruum.  It 
is  preserved  with  Merthiolate  1:  10,000.  The  product  is  tested  for  anti- 
genic potency  according  to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health:  each  of  four  guinea-pigs,  weighing  500  Gm.,  are  given 
one  human  dose  subcutaneously.  At  the  end  of  six  weeks  the  pooled 
serum  must  show  at  least  two  units  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  in  each  cubic 
centimeter  of  blood.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial  (one 
immunization),  ten  1  cc.  vials  (ten  immunizations),  and  one  10  cc  vial 
(ten  immunizations);  also  marketed  in  packages  of  one  0.5  cc.  vial  (one 
immunization),  ten  0.5  cc.  vials  (ten  immunizations),  and  one  5  cc.  vial 
(ten  immunizations). 

Lee  Laboratories,  Columbus,  Ohio. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined. — Diphtheria  toxins  are 
filtered  free  from  the  bacterial  cells,  treated  with  0.4  per  cent  solution  of 
formaldehyde,  and  incubation  is  carried  out  at  38  to  40  C.  for  from  four 
to  seven  weeks  in  order  to  destroy  all  toxicity.  The  absence  of  toxicity  is 
determined  by  an  intracutaneous  test  on  guinea-pigs  and  by  the  injection 
of  5  cc.  subcutaneously  into  guinea-pigs.  The  skin  tests  shall  show  no 
reaction  in  from  forty-eight  to  seventy-two  hours,  and  the  pigs  receiving 
5  cc.  shall  show  no  symptoms  of  diphtheritic  poisoning  within  a  five  weeks 
period.  After  the  toxins  are  shown  to  be  completely  detoxified  and  sterile, 
they  are  precipitated  with  a  2  per  cent  solution  of  alum  and  allowed  to 
settle.  The  supernatant  liquid  is  siphoned  off  and  the  precipitate  washed 
with  sterile  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride.  This  washing  process 
is  repeated  three  times.  The  final  volume  is  then  made  up  to  the  original 
volume  of  the  toxin,  and  merthiolate  1:  5,000  is  added  as  a  preservative. 
The  regulations  of  the  National  Institute  of  Health  are  adhered  to  in 
checking  the  immunizing  value  of  every  batch:  pigs  are  injected  sub- 
cutaneously with  1  cc.  of  the  alum  precipitated  diphtheria  toxoid.  At 
the  end  of  six  weeks  they  are  bled,  and  their  serum  must  show  at  least 
2  units  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  per  cubic  centimeter.  Marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one  1  cc.  vial,  ten  1  cc.  vials,  and  one  10  cc.  vial,  representing 
respectively  one,  ten  and  ten  immunizing  doses. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined)-Lilly. — Prepared  from 
diphtheria  toxin  by  treatment  with  formaldehyde  and  precipitated  with 
alum,  washed,  and  resuspended  in  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride. 
The  product  is  tested  for  antigenic  efficiency  as  prescribed  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health:  guinea-pigs  weighing  500  Gm.  given  one  human 
dose,  must  produce  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diph- 
theria antitoxin  in  each  cubic  centimeter  of  blood. 

It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  immunization  treatment,  containing 
one  0.5_  cc.  vial,  and  in  packages  of  ten  immunizations,  containing  one 
5  cc.  vial  of  the  refined  toxoid. 


404     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Wm.   S.   Merrell   Co.,   Cincinnati. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined). — Prepared  from  diph- 
theria toxin  the  L-f  dose  of  which  is  less  than  0.2  cc.  The  toxin  is 
detoxified  with  an  appropriate  amount  of  formaldehyde  solution  so  that 
the  injection  of  five  human  doses,  subcutaneously,  into  guinea-pigs  causes 
neither  general  nor  local  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning.  The  toxoid 
is  refined  by  precipitation  with  a  sterile  solution  of  potassium  aluminum 
sulfate.  The  precipitate  is  then  washed  with  sterile  physiologic  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  and  resuspended  in  sufficient  physiologic  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  to  bring  its  volume  to  that  of  the  toxoid  from  which  the 
precipitate  was  prepared.  The  finished  product  is  preserved  with  merthio- 
late,  1:  10,000,  and  contains  less  than  2  per  cent  of  alum.  The  product  is 
tested  for  antigenic  potency  by  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health:  the  human  dose  must  produce  in  guinea-pigs  within 
six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diphtheria  antitoxin  per  cubic  centimeter 
of  blood  serum.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial  (one 
immunization)  and  one  10  cc.  vial  (ten  immunizations).  Also  marketed 
in   packages  of  ten   1  cc.  vials   (ten  immunizations). 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Refined  Diphtheria  Toxoid  (Alum  Precipitated). — Prepared  from  a 
seven  day  culture  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus  which  yields  toxin  having 
an  L+  dose  of  not  more  than  0.2  cc.  The  toxin  is  treated  with  formal- 
dehyde until  its  toxicity  is  so  reduced  that  five  human  doses  will  cause 
no  local  or  general  symptoms  of  diphtheria  poisoning  when  injected 
subcutaneously  into  guinea-pigs.  The  toxoid  is  precipitated  with  a 
solution  of  alum,  washed,  and  then  suspended  in  physiologic  solution 
of  sodium  chloride  to  which  merthiolate  has  been  added.  The  product 
is  tested  for  antigenic  potency  according  to  the  method  prescribed  by 
the  National  Institute  of  Health:  guinea-pigs,  weighing  500  Gm.,  given 
one  human  dose,  must  produce  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  two 
units  of  diphtheria   antitoxin  in  each  cubic  centimeter  of  blood. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  one  0.5  cc.  vial,  one  5  cc.  vial  ajid  ten  0.5  cc. 
vials,    representing,    respectively,    one,    ten   and    ten    immunizing   doses. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined)-P.  D.  &  Co. — Pre- 
pared by  detoxifying  diphtheria  toxin  of  0.1  L+  dose  with  a  0.4  per 
cent  solution  of  formaldehyde,  adding  to  the  resultant  toxoid  sufficient 
potassium  aluminum  sulfate  to  make  a  solution  of  2  per  cent,  washing 
the  precipitate  with  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  suspend- 
ing in  a  sufficient  amount  of  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  to 
bring  it  back  to  the  original  volume,  the  finished  product  to  contain  one 
human  dose  in  0.5  cc.  and/or  in  1  cc.  The  finished  product  is  preserved 
with  sodium  ethyl  mercuric-thiosalicylate  1:10,000  (merthiolate).  It  is 
standardized  according  to  the  requirement  of  the  National  Institute  of 
Health:  guinea-pigs  weighing  500  Gm.  given  one  human  dose  must 
produce  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diphtheria  anti- 
toxin in  each  cubic  centimeter  of  blood.  If  the  0.5  cc.  dose  of  the  toxoid 
produces  two  units  of  antitoxin  in  the  test  animals,  it  is  used  for  the 
0.5  cc.  product;  if  a  1  cc.  dose  of  the  toxoid  is  necessary  to  produce  two 
units  of  antitoxin  in  the  test  animals,  the  product  is  classified  as  a  1  cc. 
dose  product. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial  and  in  packages  of  one  10  cc. 
vial  containing  one  and  ten  doses,  respectively.  It  is  supplied  on  request 
in  packages  of  one  0.5  cc.  vial  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  con- 
taining one  and  ten  doses,  respectively.  Also  marketed  in  packages  of 
one  0.5  cc.  vial,  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  one  and 
ten  doses,  respectively. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  405 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Refined  Diphtheria  Toxoid  Alum  Precipitated-Squibh. — Prepared  by 
treating  diphtheria  toxoid  with  a  solution  of  alum  until  complete  pre- 
cipitation is  produced.  The  precipitate  is  washed  with  and  suspended 
in  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride.  The  product  is  tested  for 
antigenic  activity  according  to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National 
Institute  of  Health:  guinea-pigs,  weighing  500  Gm.,  given  one  human 
dose,  must  produce  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of 
diphtheria  antitoxin  in  each  cubic  centimeter  of  blood. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  one  0.5  cc.  vial  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc. 
vial,  representing  one  and  ten  immunizing  doses,  respectively;  in 
packages  of  ten  0.5  cc.  vials,  representing  ten  immunizing  doses;  also 
marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial,  in  packages  of  ten  1  cc.  vials 
and  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial,  representing  one,  ten  and  ten 
immunizing  doses   respectively. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth, 
Wis. 

Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined. — Prepared  by  treating 
diphtheria  toxin  with  0.3  to  0.4  per  cent  formaldehyde  at  temperatures 
of  from  35  to  40  C.  until  its  toxicity  is  reduced  to  the  point  where  five 
human  doses,  injected  into  a  guinea-pig,  produce  no  symptoms  of  diph- 
theria poisoning.  The  toxoid  is  treated  with  a  4  per  cent  solution  of 
potassium  aluminum  sulfate,  the  total  amount  of  which  is  not  to  exceed 
20  mg.  per  human  dose  of  the  finished  product.  The  resulting  precipitate 
is  washed  with  sterile  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and 
resuspended  in  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  to  which  merthio- 
late  (1:10,000)  has  been  added.  The  product  is  tested  for  antigenic 
potency  according  to  the  method  prescribed  by  the  National  Institute  of 
Health:  guinea-pigs,  weighing  500  Gm.,  given  one  human  dose,  must 
produce  at  the  end  of  six  weeks  at  least  two  units  of  diphtheria  antitoxin 
in  each  cubic  centimeter  of  blood. 

Marketed  in  packages  of  one  1  cc.  vial  (one  immunizing  dose) ;  in 
packages  of  ten  1  cc.  vials  (ten  immunizing  doses) ;  and  in  packages  of 
one  10  cc.  vial    (ten  immunizing  doses). 

STAPHYLOCOCCUS  TOXOID.— Staphylococcus  Ana- 
toxin.— Univalent  or  polyvalent,  potently  hemolytic  and  der- 
monecrotic  toxins  of  Staphylococcus  aureus  and  alhus  altered 
by  the  formaldehyde-detoxifying  process  of  Burnet  (modified 
from  Ramon).  Antigenicity  is  maintained  but  toxicity  is  greatly 
diminished. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Staphylococcus  toxoid  has  been 
reported  a  valuable  agent  in  the  prophylaxis  and  therapy  of 
various  staphylococcic  pyodermas  and  localized  pyogenic  proc- 
esses due  to  Staphylococcus  aureus  and  alhus  (boil,  carbuncle, 
furunculosis,  acne,  and  so  on).  The  toxoid  is  said  to  be  effec- 
tive in  producing  active  immunity  to  the  dermonecrotic  and 
hemolytic  elements  of  the  toxins  of  Staphylococcus  aureus  and 
alhus',  irrespective  of  the  individual  strain  of  the  infecting  organ- 
ism. The  toxoid  induces  the  production  of  staphylococcus  anti- 
toxin in  the  blood  serum  of  immunized  persons.  Treatment 
consists  in  the  subcutaneous  or  intramuscular  injection  at  two 
to  seven  day  intervals  of  an  amount  of  toxoid  representing  the 
following  dermonecrotizing  doses  of  toxin  (a  dermonecrotizing 
dose  is  the  least  amount  of  toxin  which  on  intradermal  injec- 


406     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

tion  will  produce  an  erythema  with  central  necrosis  at  least 
5  by  5  mm.  in  diameter)  : 

First        injection 20  doses 

Second     injection 40  doses 

Third       injection 60  doses 

Fourth     injection 80  doses 

Fifth        injection 100  doses 

Sixth       injection 200  doses 

Seventh   injection 400  doses 

Eighth     injection 600  doses 

Ninth       injection 800  doses 

Tenth      injection 1,000  doses 

Following  the  completion  of  the  tenth  injection,  subsequent 
treatment,  if  necessary,  may  be  maintained  at  that  dosage  or 
increased  as  the  progress  of  the  individual  case  may  indicate. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Staphylococcus  Toxoid-Lederle. — Prepared  by  treating  a  staphylococcus 
toxin  filtrate  with  0.3  per  cent  solution  of  formaldehyde  and  storing  at 
37-38  degrees  C.  until  0.1  cc.  injected  intraderraally  into  previously  tested 
rabbits  produces  no  evidence  of  necrosis.  The  product  is  then  diluted 
with  0.25  per  cent  peptone  solution  so  that  two  strengths  are  obtained: 
Dilution  No.  1,  containing  in  each  cubic  centimeter  the  toxoid  obtained 
from  100  necrotizing  doses  of  toxin;  and  Dilution  No.  2,  containing  in 
each  cubic  centimeter  the  toxoid  obtained  from  1,000  necrotizing  doses  of 
toxin.  The  material  is  then  preserved  with  merthiolate  1:10,000.  The 
usual  sterility  tests  prescribed  by  the  National  Institute  of  Health  are 
made.  Safety  tests  are  made  by  injecting  1  cc.  doses  into  each  of  two 
mice.  The  potency  of  the  original  toxin  is  tested  by  making  serial  dilu- 
tions and  injecting  0.1  cc.  of  each  dilution  intracutaneously  irito  sus- 
ceptible rabbits  in  order  to  determine  the  maximum  dilution  which  will 
cause  necrosis.  The  least  amount  of  toxin  which  produces  an  area  of 
erythema  with  a  central  necrosis  at  least  5  mm.  in  diameter  is  taken  as 
one  necrotizing   dose   of  toxin. 

Staphylococcus  Toxoid-Lederle  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  5  cc. 
vial,  each  cubic  centimeter  containing  the  toxoid  derived  from  100  necro- 
tizing doses  of  toxin;  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial,  each  cubic 
centimeter  containing  the  toxoid  derived  from  1,000  necrotizing  doses  of 
toxin. 

TETANUS    TOXOID,    ALUM    PRECIPITATED.— 

Tetanus  Anatoxin. — A  preparation  of  tetanus  toxin  after  the 
formaldehyde  detoxifying  procedure  of  Ramon  whereby  the 
toxic  action  is  greatly  diminished  with  no  loss  of  antigenic 
potency.  Alum  precipitation  furthers  this  action  by  freeing  the 
antigenic  substance  from  the  reaction-producing  proteins  of  the 
culture  medium. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — Tetanus  toxoid  is  recommended 
for  the  production  of  active  immunity  to  tetanus.  The  recom- 
mended human  dose  (1.0  cc.  or  0.5  cc.)  is  injected  subcutane- 
ously,  preferably  in  the  region  of  the  deltoid.  Approximately 
three  months  later  the  second  and  final  injection  is  given.  The 
immunity  thus  produced  is  reasonably  persistent.  However,  it 
has  been  shown  that,  if  some  time  after  the  original  immuniza- 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  407 

tion  a  single  injection  of  toxoid  is  given,  there  results  a  prompt 
(within  two  weeks)  and  marked  rise  in  the  antitoxic  titer  of 
the  serum.  Thus,  in  cases  of  injury  to  persons  previously 
immunized,  an  injection  of  tetanus  toxoid  may  suffice  to  protect 
against  tetanus  in  place  of  the  usual  tetanus  antitoxin.  It  should 
be  borne  in  mind  that  in  these  cases  several  weeks  is  required, 
following  the  second  injection  of  toxoid,  before  immunity  may 
be  assumed  to  be  well  established.  Therefore,  in  any  dubious 
instance  the  conservative  course  is  the  administration  of  anti- 
toxin. Active  immunization  to  tetanus  would  appear  to  be  a 
desirable  procedure  in  the  case  of  individuals  whose  work  sub- 
jects them  to  a  greater  than  normal  hazard  of  the  disease. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Refined  Tetanus  Toxoid  (Alum  Precipitated). — Marketed  in  packages 
of  two  1  cc.  vials  (one  immunization  treatment) ;  and  in  packages  of 
one   10  cc.   vial    (five  immunization  treatments). 

Lederle  Laboratories,   Inc.,   Pearl  River,   N.  Y. 

Refined  Alum  Precipitated  Tetanus  Toxoid-Lederle. — Marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  two  1  cc.  vials  (one  complete  immunization) ;  and  in  packages  of 
one  10  cc.  vial   (five  complete  immunizations). 

BACTERIAL     VACCINES 

Bacteral  vaccines,  or  bacterins,  are  suspensions  of  killed 
bacteria  in  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride,  usually  with 
the  addition  of  some  preservative  such  as  cresol,  phenol  or 
glycerin. 

The  therapeutic  use  of  stock  bacterial  vaccines  rests  on  uncer- 
tain clinical  evidence. 

The  dosage  and  intervals  for  bacterial  vaccine  treatment  can- 
not be  stated  definitely.  In  general,  the  severer  the  disease,  the 
smaller  the  dose  should  be ;  and  the  smaller  the  doses,  the 
shorter  the  intervals.  In  mild  afTections  no  improvement  may 
result  until  the  vaccine  is  pushed  to  a  systemic  reaction. 

Prophylactically,  the  typhoid  and  paratyphoid  vaccines  appar- 
ently have  proved  of  great  value.  Plague  and  cholera  vaccines 
are  also  used  in  prophylaxis. 

ACNE     BACILLUS     VACCINE.—Vaccinum   Acne.— 

Prepared  from  the  acne  bacillus  of  Unna  and  Sabouraud,  B. 
acnes  (Corynebacteriiim  acnes). 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  acne  bacillus  is  not  found  in  all  cases 
of  acne ;  but  in  those  cases  in  which  the  bacillus  is  found  (acne 
vulgaris)  it  seems  to  be  the  active  pathogenic  agent  and  the 
use  of  acne  vaccine  may  give  good  results,  especially  in  the 
cystic  form  and  in  acne  indurata.  In  other  cases,  the  staphy- 
lococcus is  responsible  for  the  inflammation,  and  the  corre- 
sponding staphylococcus  vaccine  or  toxoid  may  be  tried. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Acne  Bacillus  Vaccine. — Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  50  million 
killed  acne  bacilli  suspended  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride. 
Marketed    in    5    cc.    vial    packages. 

Dosage. — From   5    to   50   million   killed  bacteria. 


408     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Acne  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  40 
million  killed  acne  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Acne  Bacterin. — Marketed  in  packages  of  four  syringes,  containing, 
respectively,  25  million,  50  million,  100  million  and  200  million  killed 
acne  bacilli;  also  marketed  in  5  cc.  vials,  containing  200  million  killed 
bacilli   per   cubic  centimeter. 

Dosage. — Initially,   from   5   to   25    million. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Acne  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  vials  of  5  cc.  and  20  cc,  each  cubic  centi- 
meter  containing   1,000  million  killed   bacilli. 

BRUCELLA  MELITENSIS  VACCINE.— A  bacterial 
vaccine  obtained  from  Brucella  mclitcnsis  (var.  abortus,  var. 
siiis,  and  var.  melitensis). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Brucella  melitensis  vaccine  is  proposed 
for  use  in  the  treatment  of  undulant  fever. 

Jensen-Salsbery  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Kansas  City,  Mo. 

Undulant  Fever  Bacterial  Vaccine. — A  heat  killed  suspension  in 
physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  of  Brucella  melitensis,  var.  abortus 
and  var.  suis  (bovine  type,  50  per  cent;  porcine  type  50  per  cent),  pre- 
served with  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol.  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains  six 
billion  killed  organisms.  The  product  is  prepared  bj'  growing  the  organ- 
isms on  nutrient  agar  for  forty-eight  hours;  the  growth  is  washed  off 
with  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  maintained  at  a  tem- 
perature of  60  C.  for  forty  minutes.  The  usual  sterility  tests  prescribed 
by  the  U.  S.  government  are  made.  Safety  tests  are  made  on  the  stock 
vaccine  by  the  inoculation  of  rabbits.  No  potency  tests  are  made.  Purity 
of  cultures  is  determined  by  the  study  of  colony  formation,  carbohydrate 
reactions,  and  the  agglutination  test  with  specific  serum.  The  product  is 
marketed  in  packages   of  six   1  cc.  vials. 

Dosage. — Initially,  0.25  cc,  repeated  daily  with  increase  of  0.25  cc. 
until  1  cc.  is  given;  this  is  continued  according  to  the  indications  of  the 
case.  After  a  maximum  of  seven  doses  has  been  given,  a  period_  of 
from  two  to  three  weeks  should  be  permitted  to  elapse,  after  which, 
treatment  may   be   resumed   should   it  be   required. 

Lederle  Laboratories  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Brucella  Melitensis  Vaccine-Lederlc. — A  heat  killed  suspension  of 
Brucella  melitensis  (abortus  and  suis)  organisms  (2,000  million  per  cubic; 
centimeter)  prepared  by  using  equal  parts  of  bovine  and  porcine  strains. 
Both  strains  were  isolated  from  humans  exhibiting  typical,  and  clinically 
active,  cases  of  undulant  fever.  The  vaccine  is  preserved  with  0.5  per 
cent  phenol.  The  usual  sterility  tests  prescribed  by  the-U.  S.  govern- 
rnent  are  made,  and  in  addition  blood  agar  streaks  are  made  of  the  heat 
killed  stock  vaccine  before  the  addition  of  phenol.  Safety  tests  are 
made  by  injecting  white  mice  with  1  cc.  of  stock  vaccine  diluted  with 
three  parts  of  physiological  so'lution  of  sodium  chloride:  two  mice  are 
used  for  each  stock  bottle,  and  they  are  observed  for  two  weeks.  No 
potency  tests  are  made.  Purity  of  cultures  is  observed  by  agglutination 
test  with  specific  antiserums  and  also  by  fermentation  reaction  with  various 
sugars.      The   product   is   marketed  in   packages   of   one   5   cc.   vial. 

Dosage. — The  subcutaneous  injection  at  three  day  intervals  of  two 
0.25  cc.  doses,  two  0.5  cc.  doses,  and  repeated  injections  of  1  cc.  doses 
until   in  all  about   10   cc.   has  been   administered. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  409 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Undiilant  Fever  Vaccine. — A  heat  killed  suspension  of  Brucella  organ- 
isms (2,000  million  per  cubic  centimeter)  merthiolate  1:10,000  is  used 
as  perservative.  The  usual  sterility  tests  prescribed  by  the  U.  S.  govern- 
ment are  made,  and  in  addition  blood  agar  streaks  are  made  of  the  heat 
killed  stock  vaccine  before  the  addition  of  the  merthiolate.  Safety  tests 
are  made  on  the  stock  vaccine  by  injecting  guinea-pigs  with  the  maximum 
human  dose,  1  cc.  No  potency  tests  are  made.  Purity  of  cultures  is 
determined  by  the  study  of  colony  formation,  carbohydrate  reactions,  and 
agglutination  test  vi'ith  specific  serum.  The  product  is  marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one  5  cc.  vial,  in  packages  of  one  15  cc.  vial,  and  in  packages  of 
one  30  cc.  vial. 

Dosage. — The  subcutaneous  injection  at  seven  to  ten  day  intervals  of 
doses  of  0.25  cc,  0.5  cc.  and   1   cc,  respectively,  is  recommended. 

CHOLERA  VACCINE.  — Vaccinum  Cholerae.— Pre- 
pared from  killed  cholera  vibrios,  V.  cholerae  (V.  comma). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Cholera  vaccine  has  been  used  as  a  pro- 
phylactic with  favorable  results  reported. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Cholera  Vaccine  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  packages  of  two  1  re. 
vials  containing,  respectively,  4,000  and  8,000  million  killed  cholera 
vibrios. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Cholera  Vaccine,  Prophylactic. — Marketed  in  packages  of  three  1  cc 
vials,  one  containing  500  million  killed  cholera  vibrios  per  cubic  centi- 
meter, and  the  second  and  third  vials  each  containing  1,000  million 
killed  cholera  vibrios  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  packages  of  ten  2.5  cc. 
vials  each  containing  1,000  million  killed  cholera  vibrios  per  cubic  centi- 
meter. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Cholera  Bacterin  (Cholera  Vaccine). — Marketed  in  packages  of  three 
syringes  each,  the  first  containing  500  million  killed  cholera  vibrios,  while 
the  second  and  third  each  contains  1,000  million  killed  vibrios;  also 
marketed  in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed 
cholera  vibrios  per  cubic  centimeter. 

PLAGUE  BACILLUS  VACCINE.— Vaccinum  Pestis. 

— Made  from  Bacillus  pestis  (Pasteiirella  pestis). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Vaccine  has  been  used  for  the  prevention 
of  plague  with  results  that  appear  to  justify  its  use.  No  prac- 
tical application  has  been  made  of  vaccine  treatment  in  plague. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Plague  Vaccine  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  1  cc.  vials  containing 
5,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli;  also  in  10  cc.  vials  containing  5,000 
million  killed  plague  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Plague  Vaccine,  Prophylactic. — Marketed  (for  double  vaccination)  in 
single  immunization  packages  of  two  1  cc.  vials  containing,  respectively, 
1.000  and  2,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  also 
in    packages    of    ten    1.5    cc.    vials   containing    2,000    million    killed    plague 


410     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter.  Plague  vaccine  (for  single  vaccination)  is  sup- 
plied in  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  5,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli  per 
cubic  centimeter  (twenty  complete  immunizations)  and  in  packages  of 
three  1  cc.  vials,  each  containing  5,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli  per 
cubic  centimenter    (three  complete  immunizations). 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Plague  Bacterin. — Marketed  as  follows:  (1)  in  packages  of  one  1  cc. 
vial  (for  single  vaccination),  containing  5,000  million  killed  plague 
bacilli;  (2)  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial  (for  ten  vaccinations),  con- 
taining 5,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  (3)  in 
"double  vaccination"  packages  of  two  1  cc.  vials,  both  doses  to  be  used 
for  one  immunization,  the  first  dose  containing  1,000  million  killed  plague 
bacilli  and  the  second  dose  containing  2,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli; 
(4)  in  "10  double  vaccination"  packages  of  two  10  cc.  vials,  both  doses 
to  be  used  for  ten  immunizations,  the  first  dose  containing  1,000  million 
killed  plague  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter,  and  the  second  dose  containing 
2,000  million  killed  plague  bacilli  per  cube  centimeter,  and  (5)  in  "three 
dose"  packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  the  three  doses  to  be  used  for  immun- 
ization, the  first  dose  containing  1,000  million,  the  second  dose  containing 
2,000  million  and  the  third  dose  containing  5,000  million  killed  plague 
bacilli, 

STAPHYLOCOCCUS  VACCINE.— Vaccinum  Staphy- 
lococcicum. — !Made  from  Staphylococcus  aureus,  from  Staphy- 
lococcus albus,  or  from  Staphylococcus  citreus,  or  from  all  three. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Staphylococcus  vaccine  is  used  in  car- 
bunculosis,  furunculosis,  sycosis,  and  certain  cases  of  acne.  An 
autogenous  vaccine  is  preferable,  but  if  this  cannot  be  made,  a 
stock  vaccine  can  be  used  with  some  prospect  of  success.  The 
forms  of  acne  most  likely  to  respond  are  characterized  by  deep- 
seated  pustules,  with  considerable  induration,  occurring  on  the 
face,  chest  and  back.  When  the  lesions  are  superficial  and 
indolent,  the  acne  bacillus  vaccine  may  give  good  results. 

Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Furunculosis  Bacterin-Abbott  (Mixed). — Marketed  in  6  and  20  cubic 
centimeter  vials,  each  cvtbic  centimeter  containing  1,000  million  killed 
organisms  of  Staphylococcus  aureus  and  1,000  million  killed  organisms 
of   Staphylococcus   albus. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine. — A  suspension  of  strains  of  Staphylococcus 
aureus  and  albus  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  containing 
0.5  per  cent  phenol,  containing  about  2,000  million  to  each  cubic  centi- 
meter.    Marketed  in   5   cc.  vial   packages. 

Dosage. — From   100  million  to   1,000   million  killed  bacteria. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine  (Albus  and  Aureus).  —  A  suspension  oi 
Staphylococcus  albus  and  Staphylococcus  aureus  in  equal  proportions,  in 
physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  preserved  with  0.25  per 
cent  of  trikresol.  Marketed  in  packages  of  four  vials  containing,  respec- 
tively, 250,  500,  1,000  and  2,000  million  killed  bacteria  in  1  cc;  in 
packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  2,000  million  killed  bacteria  per 
cc_.  and  in  bulk  packages  of  5  cc.  and  10  cc.  ampules,  containing  2,000 
million  killed  bacteria  per  cc. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  411 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  con- 
taining 800  million  killed  Staphylococcus  albus,  800  million  killed  Staphy- 
lococcus  aureus  and  400  million  killed  Staphylococcus  citreus  per  cubic 
centimeter. 

Staphylococcus  Aureus  Vaccine,  Polyvalent. — Marketed  in  packages  of 
one  5  cc.  vial  containing  2,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  aureus  per 
cubic   centimeter. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine. — A  suspension  of  strains  of  Staphylococcus 
aureus  and  Staphylococcus  albus  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride,  containing  2,000  million  each  of  killed  micro-organisms  in  each 
cubic  centimeter.  Merthiolate,  1:10,000,  is  used  as  a  preservative. 
Marketed  in  single  5   cc.  and    20  cc.  vials. 

Staphylococcus  Aureus  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  single  5  cc.  and  20  cc. 
vial  packages,  containing  2,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  aureus  in 
each  cubic  centimeter  of  vaccine.  Merthiolate,  1:  10,000,  is  used  as  a 
perservative. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine. — A  suspension  of  killed  Staphylococcus  albus 
and  killed  Staphylococcus  aureus  in  equal  proportions,  in  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride.  Merthiolate,  1:  10,000,  is  used  as  a  perserva- 
tive. Marketed  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  2,000  million 
killed  staphylococci  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  packages  of  one  15  cc.  vial 
containing  2,000  million  killed  staphylococci  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  pack- 
ages of  one  30  cc.  vial  containing  2,000  million  killed  staphylococci  per 
cubic  centimeter. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Furunculosis  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  packages  of  four  1  cc.  bulbs, 
each  containing  2,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  aureus  obtained  from 
furuncular  lesions;  also  in  5  cc.  and  20  cc.  bulbs,  each  containing  2,000 
million  killed  staphylococci  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine  (Combined). — Marketed  in  packages  of  four 
1  cc.  bulbs,  each  containing  1,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  albus  and 
1,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  aureus;  also  in  5  cc.  and  20  cc.  bulbs, 
each  containing  1,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  albus  and  1,000 
million   killed  Staphylococcus   aureus    per   cubic   centimeter. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Staphylococcus  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  vials  of  5  cc.  and  20  cc.  each 
cubic  centimeter  containing  5,000  million  killed  Staphylococcus  aureus  and 
Staphylococcus   albus   in   equal    proportion. 

TYPHOID     AND     TYPHOID     PARATYPHOID     VACCINES 

Typhoid  vaccine  is  made  from  Bacillus  typhosus  (Eberthella 
typhosa).  In  some  cases  Bacillus  paratyphosus  A  (Salmonella 
paratyphi)  and  Bacillus  paratyphosus  B  (S.  shottmiilleri)  are 
used  either  alone  or  combined  with  Bacillus  typhosus,  but  usually 
the  three  organisms  are  combined  in  one  vaccine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Typhoid  and  paratyphoid  vaccines  are 
apparently  useful  in  the  prevention  of  typhoid  and  paratyphoid 
fever.  The  immunity  produced  is  believed  to  persist  in  the 
majority  of  cases  for  two  years  or  longer. 

The  use  of  vaccine  in  the  treatment  of  typhoid  fever  and  of 
the  carrier  state  has  given  inconclusive  results  and  is  not  gen- 
erally considered  of  value. 


412     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

BACTERIAL  VACCINE  MADE  FROM  THE 
TYPHOID  BACILLUS.— Typhoid  Prophylactic— Enteric 
Vaccine. — "A  sterile  suspension  of  killed  typhoid  bacilli  (Eber- 
thella  typhi)  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  or 
other  suitable  diluent.  The  vaccine  shall  contain,  in  each  cc, 
at  least  1,000,000,000  typhoid  organisms."     US.P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Vaccinum 
Typhosum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  general  article  Typhoid  and  Para- 
typhoid Vaccines. 

Dosage. — "Average  Dose — Prophylactic,  by  hypodermic  injec- 
tion, 0.5  cc.  and  1  cc,  the  latter  dose  to  be  repeated  once." — 
U.S. P.  As  a  preventive,  typhoid  vaccine  should  be  admin- 
istered only  to  healthy  persons.  The  skin  should  be  sterilized 
with  iodine  and  an  initial  dose  of  500  million  bacteria  injected, 
with  aseptic  precautions.  This  injection  should  be  followed 
in  from  seven  to  ten  days  by  a  second  dose  of  one  billion  bac- 
teria and  a  third  injection  of  the  same  size  is  given  from  seven 
to  ten  days  after  the  second.  The  initial  dose  of  combined 
typhoid  vaccine  contains  500  million  Bacillus  typhosus  (Eber- 
thella  typhosa)  and  250  million  of  each  of  the  paratyphoid  organ- 
isms. The  second  and  third  doses  should  be  twice  the  initial 
dose.  Interval  between  doses  should  be  the  same  as  for  typhoid 
vaccine.    Tj^phoid  vaccine  is  used  in  nonspecific  protein  therapy. 

The  Cutter  Laboratory,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Typhoid  Prophylactic. — A  suspension  made  from  a  single  strain, 
namely,  that  employed  by  the  U.  S.  Army,  containing  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter.  Marketed  in  packages  of  three 
bottles,  one  containing  500  million,  and  two  each  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli;  also  marketed  in  bottles  of  20  cc.  containing  1,000  million 
killed   typhoid   bacilli   per   cubic   centimeter. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta.  Pa. 

Typhoid  Vaccine. — Prepared  according  to  the  method  of  the  U.  S. 
Army  Medical  School  Laboratory  from  the  Rawling's  strain.  Marketed 
in  packages  containing  three  syringes,  the  first  containing  500  million 
killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  the  second  and  third  containing  each  1,000 
million  killed  typhoid  bacilli;  in  packages  containing  three  vials,  the 
first  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  and  the  second  and 
third  containing  each  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli;  also  in  vials 
containing  5,  10  and  20  cc.  of  the  vaccine  as  ordered;  also  marketed  in 
packages  of  thirty  vials  (ten  complete  immunizations),  ten  containing 
500  million,  and  twenty  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  each. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Typhoid  Vaccine  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  5  cc. 
vial    containing    1,000    million  killed   typhoid   bacilli    per    cubic   centimeter. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Typhoid  Vaccine,  Prophylactic. — Marketed  in  immunization  packages 
of  three  1  cc.  vials,  one  containing  500  million  and  two  containing  1,000 
million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  each,  and  in  hospital  size  packages  of  ten 
complete  immunizations  in  ten  vials,  one  vial  containing  a  complete 
immunization.      Merthiolate,    Lily,    1:  10,000    is    used    as   a    preservative. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  413 

Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.,  Cincinnati. 

Typhoid  Vaccine. — A  suspension  of  killed  typhoid  bacilli  in  physio- 
logic solution  of  sodium  chloride,  preserved  with  0.5  per  cent  of  phenol. 
The  product  is  prepared  according  to  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  Army 
Medical  School  from  the  Rawling's  strain.  Marketed  in  packages  of 
three  vials,  the  first  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  in  0.5  cc. 
of  suspension  and  the  second  and  third  containing  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli  in  1  cc.  of  suspension;  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial 
containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  and 
in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid 
bacilli   per  cubic  centimeter. 

Alulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Typho-Bactcrin. — Marketed  in  packages  ("immunizing")  of  three 
syringes  and  in  packages  of  thirty  1  cc.  vials  (hospital  size),  being  ten 
sets  of  three  immunizing  doses  containing,  respectively,  500,  1,000  and 
1,000   million   killed  typhoid  bacilli. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Typhoid  Vaccine. — A  suspension  of  killed  Bacillus  typhosus  in  physi- 
ological solution  of  sodium  chloride.  Merthiolate,  1:  10,000  is  used  as  a 
preservative.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  1,500 
million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  packages  of  one 
15  cc.  vial  containing  1,500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centi- 
meter; in  packages  of  one  30  cc.  vial  containing  1,500  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  three  vial  packages  (one  immuni- 
zation), the  first  dose  containing  750  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  the 
second  and  third  doses  containing,  respectively,  1,500  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Typhoid  Vaccine^  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  packages  of  three 
ampules,  one  containing  500  million,  and  two,  1,000  million,  killed 
bacteria  each;  in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million 
killed  typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  also  in  packages  of  ten  2J4  cc. 
rubber  diaphragm  capped  vials,  containing  in  each  cc.  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Typhoid  Vaccine  (Immunizing). — Marketed  in  packages  of  three  ampules 
containing,  respectively,  500,  1,000  and  1,000  million  killed  bacilli;  also 
in  hospital  size  packages  of  thirty  ampules,  ten  containing  500  million 
and  twenty  containing  1,000  million  killed  bacilli;  also  marketed  in 
packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli 
per  cubic  centmeter;  and  in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  1,000 
million   killed  typhoid  bacilli   per  cubic  centimeter. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Typhoid  Vaccine. — Marketed  in  packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  containing 
500  million,  1,000  million  and  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacteria, 
respectively,  suspended  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and 
preserved  with  0.5  per  cent  phenol;  also  marketed  in  packages  of  one 
5  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centi- 
meter and  in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli   per   cubic    centimeter. 

BACTERIAL  VACCINE  MADE  FROM  THE 
TYPHOID    BACILLUS    AND    THE    PARATYPHOID 

"A"  AND  "B"  BACILLI.— Typhoid  Combined  Vaccine.— 
Typhoid-Paratyphoid  Combined  Vaccine,  Typhoid  Mixed  Vac- 
cine  Prophylactic. — Typhoid-Paratyphoid   Prophylactic. — Mixed 


414     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Enteric  Vaccine. — "A  suspension  in  physiological  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  of  killed  typhoid  bacillus  (Eberthella  typhi) 
and  killed  paratyphoid  "A"  bacilli  (Salmonella  paratyphi)  and 
killed  paratyphoid  "B"  bacilli  (Salmonella  schottmiilleri). 

"The  vaccine  shall  contain  In  1  cc,  at  least  1,000,000,000 
typhoid  organisms  and  at  least  500,000,000  of  each  of  the  para- 
typhoid organisms."    U.S.P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Vaccinum 
Typho-Paratyphosum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  general  article  Typhoid  and  Typhoid- 
Paratyphoid  Vaccines. 

Dosage. — "Average  Dose — Prophylactic,  by  hypodermic  injec- 
tion, 0.5  cc.  and  1  cc,  the  latter  dose  to  be  repeated  once."  U.S.P. 

The  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111. 

Typhoid-Paratyphoid  Bacterin  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  packages 
of  three  1  cc.  vials,  one  vial  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli 
and  375  million  each  of  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and  B,  while  the  other  two 
vials  each  contain  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  750  million 
each  of  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and  B;  in  packages  (hospital)  of  thirty-six 
ampoules,  twelve  of  which  contain  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and 
750  million  each  of  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and  B,  except  those  marked 
"Dose  No.  1,"  which  contain  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  375 
million  each  of  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and  B;  and  in  6  and  20  cc.  vials, 
containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  and  750  million  each  nf 
paratyphoid  bacilli   A  and  B   in  each  cubic   centimeter. 

Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Typhoid-Paratyphoid  Prophylactic. — Marketed  in  packages  of  three  vials, 
one  vial  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  250  million  killed 
paratyphoid  A  bacilli  and  250  million  killed  paratyphoid  B  bacilli  per 
cubic  centimeter,  and  two  vials  each  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid 
bacilli,  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  bacilli  and  500  million  killed 
paratyphoid  B  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial 
containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  500  million  killed  para- 
typhoid A  bacilli  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  B  bacilli  per  cubic 
centimeter;  and  in  packages  of  one  syringe  containing  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli,  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  bacilli  and  500  million 
killed  paratyphoid  B  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter;  also  marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  ten  vials,  ten  complete  treatments,  each  cubic  centimeter  contain- 
ing 1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  A 
bacilli  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  B  bacilli. 

The  Gilliland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Typhoid-Paratyphoid  Bacterial  Vaccine  Immunizing.  —  Marketed  in 
packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials  one  containing  250  million  each  killed 
paratyphoid  A  and  B,  and  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  two 
containing  500  million  each  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  B  and  1,000  million 
killed  typhoid  bacilli,  suspended  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride,  containing  0.25  per  cent  of  cresol;  in  packages  of  three  1  cc. 
syringes,  one  containing  250  million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  B 
and  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  two  containing  500  million  each 
of  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  B  and  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli, 
suspended  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  containing  0.25  per 
cent  of  creosol;  also  marketed  in  vials  containing  5,  10  and  20  cc.  of  the 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  415 

latter  strength;  and  in  hospital  size  packages  of  ten  complete  immuniza- 
tions. Each  immunizing  treatment  consists  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  the  first 
dose  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  250  million  killed  para- 
typhoid A  bacilli  and  250  million  killed  paratyphoid  B  bacilli  and  the 
second  and  third  each  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  500 
million  killed  paratyphoid  A  bacilli  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  B 
bacilli. 

The  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Typhoid  Combined  Vaccine  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  packages  of 
three  vials  containing,  respectively,  (1)  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli, 
250  million  killed  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and  250  million  killed  paratyphoid 
bacilli  B,  (2)  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  500  miUion  killed  para- 
typhoid bacilli  A  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  bacilli  B,  (3)  1,000 
million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and 
500  million  killed  paratyphoid  bacilli  B;  and  in  packages  of  one  5  cc. 
vial  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  500  million  killed 
parathyphoid  bacilli  A  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  bacilli  B  per 
cubic  centimeter. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Co.,  Indianapolis. 

Typhoid  Mixed  Vaccine,  Prophylactic. — A  suspension  in  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride,  containing  Merthiolate,  Lilly,  1:  10,000  is  used 
as  a  preservative.  Marketed  in  packages  of  5  and  20  cc.  vials,  each  cubic 
centimeter  containing  500  million  each  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  B, 
and  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli;  in  packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials, 
one,  containing  250  million  each  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  B,  and  500 
million  killed  typhoid  bacilli;  two,  the  second  and  third  doses,  containing 
500  million_  each  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  B,  and  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli;  also  marketed  in  hospital  size  packages  of  ten  complete 
immunizations  in  ten  vials,  each  vial  containing  a  complete  immunization. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Typho-Bacterin  Mixed  (Triple  Vaccine). — Marketed  in  packages  of 
four  1  cc.  syringes,  the  first  dose  containing  125  million  killed  typhoid 
bacteria,  62.5  million  killed  paratyphoid  "A"  bacteria  and  62.5  million 
killed  paratyphoid  "B"  bacteria;  the  second,  third  and  fourth  doses  con- 
taining, respectively,  two,  four  and  eight  times  the  number  of  bacteria  in 
the  first  dose.  Also  marketed  in  20  cc.  vials,  and  in  5  cc.  vials,  con- 
taining 1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacteria,  500  million  killed  para- 
typhoid "A"  bacteria  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  "B"  bacteria  per 
cubic  centimeter.  Typho-bacterin  mixed  is  also  supplied  in  packages  of 
three  syringes,  in  packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  the  first  dose  containing 
500  million  killed  typhoid  bacteria,  250  million  killed  paratyphoid  "A" 
bacteria  and  250  million  killed  paratyphoid  "B"  bacteria,  while  the  second 
and  third  doses  contain,  respectively,  twice  the  number  of  bacteria  in 
the  first.  Also  marketed  in  packages  of  thirty  1  cc.  vials,  being  ten 
immunizations  of  three  doses  each,  the  first  dose  containing  500  million 
killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  250  million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid  A  and 
paratyphoid  B  bacilli,  and  the  second  and  third  doses  each  containing 
1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  500  million  each  of  killed  para- 
typhoid A  and  paratyphoid  B  bacilli. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Typhoid-Paratyphoid  Vaccine  (Prophylactic). — Marketed  in  packages 
of  three  1  cc.  bulbs,  the  first  dose  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid 
bacteria,  375  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  375  million  killed  para- 
typhoid B  bacteria,  the  second  and  third  doses  each  containing  1,000 
million  killed  typhoid  bacteria,  750  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  and 
750  million  killed  paratyphoid  B  bacteria,  respectively,  suspended  in 
physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  and  preserved  with  0.3  per  cent 
of  cresol;  in  packages  of  one  20  cc.  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed 
typhoid  bacilli  and  750  million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and 
B  per  cubic  centimeter;  also  in  packages  of  ten  2J^  cc.  rubber  diaphragm 
capped  vials,  containing  in  each  cc.  1,C00  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli, 
750  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  750  million  killed  paratyphoid  B 
bacilli. 


416     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Typhoid  Vaccine  Combined,  Immunising — Marketed  in  packages  of 
three  vials,  one  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  375 
million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  paratyphoid  B  bacilli,  and  each 
of  the  other  two  vials  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and 
750  million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  paratyphoid  B  bacilli;  in 
packages  of  thirty  ampules,  hospital  size,  ten  of  which  contain,  each, 
500  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli  and  375  million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid 
A  and  paratyphoid  B  bacilli,  and  twenty  of  which  contain,  each,  1,000 
million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  and  750  million  each  of  killed  paratyphoid 
A  and  paratyphoid  B  bacilli;  and  in  vials  of  5  cc,  and  20  cc,  each  cubic 
centimeter  containing  2,500  million  killed   bacilli. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Typhoid  ParatypJioid  Vaccine  Combined.- — Marketed  in  packages  of 
three  1  cc.  vials,  the  first  dose  containing  500  million  killed  typhoid  bac- 
teria, 375  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  and  375  million  killed  paratyphoid 
B  bacteria,  the  second  and  third  doses  each  containing  1,000  million 
killed  typhoid  bacteria,  750  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  bacteria  and  750 
million  killed  paratyphoid  B,  suspended  in  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  and  preserved  with  0.5  per  cent  phenol;  also  marketed  in  pack- 
ages of  one  5  cc.  vial,  each  vial  containing  1,000  million  killed  typhoid 
bacilli,  750  million  killed  paratyphoid  A  bacilli,  and  750  million  killed 
paratyphoid  B  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter,  and  in  packages  of  one  20  cc. 
vial  containing,  respectively,  1,000  million  killed  typhoid  bacilli,  750 
million  killed  paratyphoid  A  bacilli,  and  750  million  killed  paratyphoid  B 
bacilli   per   cubic   centimeter. 

Mixed  Bacterial  Vaccines 
These  contain  more  than  one  species  of  bacteria. 
Actions  and  Uses. — The  employment  of  bacterial  vaccines 
should  be  based  either  on  the  discovery  of  the  causative  micro- 
organism by  careful  bacteriologic  examination  of  the  patient 
under  treatment  or  on  well  established  clinical  knowledge  which 
has  shown  the  disease  present  to  be  regularly  due  to  the  activity 
of  a  definite  germ.  As  a  rule,  one  organism  plays  the  predomi- 
nant role  and  the  destruction  of  the  causative  agent  will  effect 
a  cure.  In  some  cases,  however,  it  has  been  found  that  two  or 
more  organisms  are  associated  in  producing  the  diseased  con- 
dition. In  such  cases,  a  vaccine  containing  all  the  known  causa- 
tive antigens  has  been  thought  to  be  indicated.  When  this 
etiologic  association  has  been  determined  by  actual  bacteriologic 
examination,  a  mixture  of  two  autogenous  vaccines  or  two 
corresponding  stock  vaccines  may  have  a  logical  basis.  If  the 
bacteriologic  examination  is  omitted,  the  mixture  rests  on  a 
purely  hypothetical  assumption  and  the  method  becomes  wholly 
irrational. 

While  the  subject  was  still  in  the  earlier  experimental  stage, 
various  mixtures  of  vaccine,  so-called  "mixed"  vaccines,  were 
admitted  to  N.  N.  R.  by  the  Council.  As  knowledge  concern- 
ing the  action  of  these  products  increased,  however,  it  was 
found  inadvisable,  in  most  instances,  to  continue  recognition 
of  them ;  and  the  mixed  vaccines,  which  had  been  admitted, 
were  deleted  unless  their  usefulness  was  established  by 
acceptable  clinical  evidence.  New  mixed  vaccine  products 
are  subject  to  the  same  conditions  before  being  accepted. 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  417 

ERYSIPELAS  AND  PRODIGIOSUS  TOXINS 
(COLEY). — Toxicum  Erysipelatis  et  Toxicum  Bacilli 
Prodigiosi. — This  preparation  is  practically  a  mixed  bacterial 
vaccine  made  from  strains  of  hemolytic  streptococci  isolated 
from  cases  of  erysipelas  and  from  Bacillus  prodigiosus  (Serratia 
marcescens).  Its  use  has  been  advised  in  cases  of  inoperable 
sarcoma. 

Actions  and  Uses. — This  remedy  is  said  to  have  benefited 
and  produced  cures  in  a  small  percentage  of  patients  treated, 
though  there  is  some  difference  of  opinion  as  to  this. 

Dosage. — For  adults  from  0.02  to  0.8  cc.  (0.25  to  10  minims). 
Dose  for  a  child  should  be  proportionately  smaller  according 
to  weight  of  patient.  It  is  given  by  hypodermic  injection.  The 
first  few  doses  should  be  systemic,  at  some  distance  from  the 
tumor.  When  injections  are  made  into  the  tumor  only  one 
quarter  to  one  half  the  dose  for  injection  outside  the  tumor 
is  required  to  produce  the  same  reaction.  A  reaction,  some- 
times severe,  consisting  of  chill  and  rise  of  temperature  is 
expected  to  follow  the  injections,  until  tolerance  becomes 
e'^tablished. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit. 

Erysipelas  and  Prodigiosus  Toxins  (Coley). — Marketed  in  packages 
c  ritaining  five  1   cc.  bulbs  and  in   15   cc.  bulbs. 

Sensitized  Bacterial  Vaccines — Serohacterins 

These  products  are  prepared  in  the  same  manner  as  bac- 
terial vaccines,  except  that  the  bacterial  suspensions  are 
treated  with  the  serum  of  an  animal  which  has  been  immun- 
ized to  some  extent  against  the  species  of  organism  in  hand. 
The  serum  is  then  washed  from  the  bacterial  bodies  by  cen- 
trifugation  and  the  latter  are  resuspended  in  physiological 
solution  of  sodium  chloride. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Acne  Serobacterin-Mulford  (Sensitized  Acne  Vaccine  Polyvalent). — 
Marketed  in  packages  of  four  1  cc.  syringes,  containing,  respectively, 
100  million,  200  million,  400  million  and  800  million  killed  sensitized 
bacteria  {B.  acne);  in  5  cc.  vials,  containing  800  million  killed  sensitized 
bacteria  per  cubic  centimeter. 

Cholera  Serobacterin-Mulford  (Sensitized  Cholera  Vaccine). — Marketed 
in  packages  of  three  syringes,  containing,  respectively,  500,  1.000  and 
2,000  million  killed  sensitized  cholera  vibriones  suspended  in  sterile 
physiological  solution  of  sedium  chloride. 

Staphylo-Serobacterin  (Sensitized  Staphylococcic  Vaccine). — Marketed 
in  packages  of  four  syringes,  containing,  respectively.  Staphylococcus 
aureus  and  Staphylococcus  albus  in  equal  proportions,  500,  1,000,  2,000 
and  4,000  million  killed  sensitized  staphylococci;  in  5  cc.  vials,  contain- 
ing  4,000   million   killed   sensitized    staphylococci   per   cubic   centimeter. 

Typho-Serobacterin-Mulford  (Sensitized  Typhoid  Vaccine). — Marketed 
in  packages  of  5  cc.  vials,  each  containing  2,000  million  killed  sensitized 
typhoid  bacilli  per  cubic  centimeter.  Also  marketed  in  packages  of  three 
syringes,  being  three  immunizing  doses,  the  first  containing  1,000  million 
and  the  second  and  third  each  containing  2,000  million  killed  typhoid 
bacilli. 


418     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Typho-Serobacterin-Mulford  Mixed  (Sensitized  Triple  Vaccine). — 
Marketed  in  packages  of  four  1  cc.  syringes,  the  first  dose  containing  250 
million  killed  sensitized  typhoid  bacteria,  125  million  killed  sensitized 
paratyphoid_  "A"  bacteria  and  125  million  killed  sensitized  paratyphoid 
"B"  bacteria;  the  second,  third  and  fourth  doses  contain,  respectively, 
two,  four  and  eight  times  the  number  of  bacteria  in  the  first  dose.  Also 
marketed  in  5  cc.  vials,  and  in  single  1  cc.  syringes  containing  2,000 
million  killed  sensitized  typhoid  bacteria,  1,000  million  killed  sensitized 
paratyphoid  "A"  bacteria,  and  1,000  million  killed  sensitized  paratyphoid 
"B"  bacteria  per  cubic  centimeter;  in  packages  of  three  syringes  and  in 
packages  of  three  1  cc.  vials,  the  first  dose  containing  1,000  million  killed 
sensitized  typhoid  bacteria,  500  million  killed  sensitized  paratyphoid  "A" 
bacteria  and  500  million  killed  paratyphoid  "B"  bacteria,  while  the  second 
and  third  doses  contain,  respectively,  twice  the  number  of  bacteria  in  the 
first  dose;  in  packages  of  thirty  1  cc.  vials  (hospital  size),  being  ten  sets 
of  three  doses,  the  first  containing  1,000  million  killed  sensitized  typhoid 
bacilli,  and  500  million  each  of  killed  sensitized  paratyphoid  bacilli  A  and 
B,  the  second  and  third  containing,  respectively,  twice  the  number  of 
bacilli  in  the  first  dose. 

IV.    Diagnostic  Agents 

TOXINS     FOR     IMMUNITY     TESTS 

DIPHTHERIA  TOXIN  FOR  THE  SCHICK  TEST. 

— Schick  Test  Toxin. — "A  solution  of  the  toxic  products  of 
growth  of  the  diphtheria  bacillus  (Corynebacterinm  diph- 
theriae)."     US.P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Toxinum 
Diphthericum  Diagnosticum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — This  test  is  intended  to  determine  those 
persons  who  are  immune  to  diphtheria.  In  nonimmune  per- 
sons a  circumscribed  area  of  redness  and  infiltration  from 
1  to  2  cm.  in  diameter  develops  at  the  site  following  injection 
of  0.1  or  0.2  cc.  of  the  Schick  test  material.  The  reaction 
occurs  in  from  twenty-four  to  forty-eight  hours,  and  is  at 
its  height  in  from  forty-eight  to  seventy-two  hours.  It  remains 
for  from  six  to  twelve  days,  is  followed  by  slight  scaling, 
and  leaves  a  brownish,  pigmented  spot.  In  some  persons,  a 
pseudoreaction  may  occur,  which  may  be  differentiated  by  its 
earlier  appearance  and  disappearance,  and  the  facts  that  it  is 
less  circumscribed  and  is  not  followed  by  pigmentation. 

Diphtheria  toxin  diluted  for  use  with  physiologic  solution  of 
sodium  chloride  soon  loses  in  potency.  Dilution  of  the  material 
should  be  made  only  on  the  day  of  test.  Diphtheria  toxin 
diluted  with  peptone  solution  is  apparently  quite  stable. 

Cutter  Laboratory,  Berkeley,  Calif. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test. — Marketed  in  packages  of  two 
vials,  one  containing  a  definite  volume  of  diphtheria  toxin  and  the  other 
containing  sterile  physiologic  solution  of  sodium  chloride  with  which  the 
toxin  is  to  be  diluted  before  administration.  The  diluted  toxin  is  of  such 
a  strength  that  0.1  cc.  given  intracutaneously  constitutes  a  one-fiftieth 
M.L.D.  There  are  approximately  50  test  doses  in  each  package.  Also 
marketed  in  packages  containing  sufficient  material  for  ten  tests. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test,  Diluted  Ready  for  Use. — An 
aged  standardized  diphtheria  toxin  is  diluted  with  peptone  solution  accord- 
ing to  the  method  of  White,  Bunney  and  Malcolm  so  that  0.1  cc.  contains 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  419 

a  standard  Schick  test  dose.  Samples  of  each  lot  are  tested  for  sterility 
by  the  method  of  the  National  Institute  of  Health.  The  product  is  ready 
for  use,  no  diluent  being  required.  Marketed  in  packages  containing 
sufficient  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  for  ten  and  fifty  tests. 

The  GilHland  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. 

Diphtheria  Schick  Test  Toxin,  Diluted  Ready  for  Administration- 
Gilliland. — A  diphtheria  toxin  made  by  growing  diphtheria  bacilli  in 
broth,  aging  and  diluting  with  peptone  solution  according  to  VV.  E. 
Bunney  (/.  Immunol.  20:71,  1931).  The  product  is  ready  for  use,  no 
diluent  being  required.  The  diluted  toxin  is  of  such  strength  that  0.1  cc. 
(one  dose)  given  intradermally.  constitutes  one-fiftieth  minimum  lethal 
dose  for  a  guinea-pig  of  250  Gm.  weight.  Marketed  in  packages  con- 
taining sufficient  material  for   10,  25  and  SO  tests. 

Hixson  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Johnstown,  Ohio. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test  (Diluted). — A  diphtheria  toxin 
prepared  by  growing  diphtheria  bacilli  in  broth,  aging  and  diluting  with 
a  solution  containing  sodium  borate  0.36  per  cent,  boric  acid  0.53  per  cent, 
and  sodium  chloride  0.61  per  cent.  The  diluted  toxin  is  of  such  strength 
that  0.1  cc.  (one  dose)  given  intracutaneously  constitutes  one-fiftieth 
minimum  lethal  dose  for  a  guinea-pig  of  250  Gm.  weight.  The  product  as 
marketed  is  ready  for  use,  no  diluent  being  required.  Merthiolate 
1:  10,000  is  used  as  preservative.  Marketed  in  packages  containing  suffi- 
cient material  for  10,  25  and  50  tests. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test  in  Peptone  Solution. — A  diphtheria 
toxin  made  by  growing  diphtheria  bacilli  in  broth,  aging,  and  diluting 
with  peptone  solution  according  to  White,  Bunney  and  Malcolm  (/. 
Immunol.  33:  93,  1932),  The  product  is  ready  for  use,  no  diluent  being 
required.  The  diluted  toxin  is  of  such  strength  that  0.1  cc.  (one  dose) 
given  intracutaneously  constitutes  one-fiftieth  minimum  lethal  dose  for  a 
guinea-pig  of  250  Gm.  weight.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  syringe 
containing  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  sufficient  for  one  test,  in  packages 
of  one  vial  containing  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  sufficient  for  ten  tests,  and 
in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  sufficient  for 
fifty  tests.  As  a  means  of  co'ntrol,  diphtheria  toxin  heated  to  75  C. 
for  ten  minutes  and  diluted  with  peptone  solution  is  supplied  in  packages 
of  one  syringe  containing  sufficient  material  for  one  control  test  and  in 
packages   of    one   vial   containing   sufficient    material    for   ten   control   tests. 

Schick  Test. — Marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  undiluted 
diohtheria  toxin  sufficient  for  50  tests;  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing 
undiluted  diphtheria  toxin  sufficient  for  100  tests.  Each  package  is  accom- 
panied by   the   required   amount  of   sterile    diluent. 

Eli  Lilly  &  Company,  Indianapolis. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test,  Diluted  Ready  for  Use-Lilly.— 
A  diphtheria  toxin  diluted  with  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride 
containing  0.1  _  per  cent  gelatin  and  having  a  pu  of  7.8  to  8.0.  The 
diluted  toxin  is  of  such  strength  that  0.1  cc.  (one  dose)  given  intra- 
cutaneously constitutes  one-fiftieth  minimal  lethal  dose  for  a  guinea-pig 
of  250  Gni.  weight.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing 
sufficient  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  for  ten  tests,  and  in  one  vial  containing 
sufficient  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  for   100  tests. 

Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.,  Cincinnati. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test,  Diluted  with  Peptone  Solution 
and  Ready  for  Use. — A  diphtheria  toxin  made  by  growing  diphtheria 
bacilli  in  broth,  aging  and  diluting  with  peptone  solution  according  to 
Bunney  (/.  Immunol.  30:71  [Jan.]  1931).  The  product  is  ready  for 
use,  no  diluent  being  required.  The  diluted  toxin  is  of  such  strength 
that  0.1  cc.  (one  dose)  given  intradermally  constitutes  one-fifieth  mini- 
mal lethal  dose  for  a  guinea-pig  of  250  Gm.  weight.  Marketed  in  pack- 
ages containing  sufficient  material  for   10  and  100  tests. 


420     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories,  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Phila- 
delphia and  Baltimore. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test,  Diluted  Ready  for  Use-Mulford. — A 
diphtheria  toxin  diluted  with  a  sodium  chloride-borax-boric  acid  bufiEer  solu- 
tion containing  0.1  per  cent  of  Witte's  peptone,  so  that  0.1  cc.  contains  a 
Schick  test  dose  (V^o  minimum  lethal  dose).  The  minimum  lethal  dose  is 
determined  by  injection  of  graduated  doses  into  a  series  of  250  Gm. 
guinea-pigs.  Marketed  in  1  cc.  vials  containing  sufficient  material  for  ten 
tests;  in  5  cc.  vials  containing  sufficient  material  for  fifty  tests  and  in 
10  cc.  vials  containing  sufficient  material  for  one  hundred  tests.  For  the 
control  test  a  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  inactivated  by  heat  is  supplied  in 
5  cc.  vials  representing  sufficient  material  for  fifty  control  tests. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Schick  Test,  Peptone  Diluent. — A  diphtheria  toxin  made  by  growing 
diphtheria  bacilli  in  broth,  aging  and  diluting  with  peptone  solution 
according  to  W.  E.  Bunney  (/.  Innnunol.  33:93,  1932).  The  product 
is  ready  to  use,  no  diluent  being  required.  Marketed  in  packages  of 
one  1  cc.  vial  containing  sufficient  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  for  ten  tests; 
in  packages  of  one  5  cc.  vial  containing  sufficient  diluted  diphtheria 
toxin  for  fifty  tests,  and  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial  containing  suffi- 
cient diluted  diphtheria  toxin  for  one  hundred  tests.  For  the  control 
test,  the  product  is  supplied  in  single  vial  packages  of  1  cc.  and  5  cc, 
containing,  respectively,  sufficient  heated  diphtheria  toxin  diluted  with 
peptone   solution,   for  ten  and  fifty  control  tests. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  Diluted  for  Schick  Tr^f.-— Marketed  in  packages  of 
one  vial  containing  1  cc.  of  diluted  diphtheria  toxin,  sufficient _  tor  ten 
tests;  and  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  10  cc.  of  diluted  diphtheria 
toxin,  sufficient  for  100  tests.  The  dose  is  0.1  cc.  of  the  diluted  toxin  or 
one-fiftieth  of  the  minimum  lethal  dose  of  diphtheria  toxin  for  a  guinea- 
pig  of  250  Gm.  weight.  As  a  means  of  control,  the  control  for  the  Schick 
test,  representing  diluted  diphtheria  toxin  heated  sufficient  to  destroy 
the    specific    exotoxins,    is    supplied. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test,  Ready  to  Use  tuithoiit  Dilution- 
Squibb. — A  diphtheria  toxin  made  by  growing  diphtheria  bacilli  in  broth, 
aging,  and  diluting  with  peptone  solution  according  to  W.  E.  Bunney 
(J.  Immunol.  30:71,  1931).  The  product  is  ready  for  use,  no  diluent 
being  required.  The  diluted  toxin  is  of  such  strength  that  0.1  cc.  (one 
dose)  given  intracutaneously  constitutes  one-fiftieth  minimum  lethal  dose 
for  a  guinea-pig  of  250  Gm.  weight.  It  is  marketed  in  packages  of  \  cc. 
containing  sufficient  for  ten  tests  and  in  packages  of  10  cc.  containing 
sufficient  for  100  tests. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth,  Wis. 

Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test  and  Control. — Marketed  in  packages 
containing  a  vial  with  undiluted  diphtheria  toxin  standardized,  and  a 
2  cc.  vial  of  sterilized  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  with 
which  the  toxin  is  diluted  before  using.  The  dose  is  0.2  cc. :  each  pack- 
age contains,  therefore,  10  tests.  As  a  means  of  control,  there  is  also 
supplied  diphtheria  toxin  of  the  same  lot  but  heated  sufficiently  to  destroy 
the  specific  exotoxins  and  2  cc.  of  physiological  solution  of  sodium 
chloride  for  diluent.  The  product  is  marketed  in  packages  containing  5 
times  the  foregoing  amount,  sufficient  for  50  tests  and  control  tests;  also 
marketed  in  packages  sufficient  for  100  tests,  but  the  strength  of  the 
toxin  is  such  that  the  dose  is  0.1    cc. 

SCARLET  FEVER  STREPTOCOCCIC  TOXIN, 
U.S. P. — (for  definition  see  this  title  under  Bacterial  Toxin.) 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  toxin  of  the  hemolytic  streptococcus 
of  scarlet  fever  is  used  to  determine  those  persons  who  are 
susceptible  to  scarlet  fever.  The  toxin  is  first  carefully  standard- 


SERUMS     AND     VACCINES  421 

ized  on  human  beings  and  diluted  so  that  0.1  cc.  represents  a 
skin  test  dose. 

The  test  dose  is  injected  intracutaneously  on  the  forearm 
and  the  degree  of  susceptibility  is  determined  at  the  end  of 
from  twenty-two  to  twenty-four  hours.  An  area  of  reddening 
1  cm.  or  more  in  diameter  constitutes  some  degree  of  a  posi- 
tive reaction,  while  a  smaller  area  of  reddening  is  considered 
negative.  Reactions  which  have  appeared  but  which  have 
entirely  faded  at  the  end  of  twenty-four  hours  are  regarded 
as  negative.  Positive  reactions  fade  rapidly  and  have  usually 
disappeared  at  the  end  of  from  forty-eight  to  seventy-two 
hours. 

Scarlet  fever  streptococcus  toxin  diluted  for  use  will  retain 
its  potency  for  at  least  two  months  at  room  temperature. 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test. — Prepared  by  the 
method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  Marketed 
in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for  ten  tests ;  in  pack- 
ages of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for   100  tests. 

Mulford  Biological  Laboratories.  Sharp  ^-  Dolmie.  Phila- 
delphia and   Baltimore. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  the  Dick  Tcst-Mtilford.  Pre- 
pared by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  Patent  1,547,369  (July 
29,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee 
Incorporated.  Marketed  in  1-cc.  ampoules  containing  diluted  toxin  ready 
for  immediate  use  sufficient  for  ten  tests  (in  0.1  cc.  doses);  also  in 
packages  of  one  10-cc.  ampoule-vial  containing  diluted  toxin  ready  for 
immediate  use,  sufficient  for   100  tests. 

The  National  Drug  Co.,  Philadelphia. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test  "National." — 
Prepared  by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369 
(July  28,  1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee, 
Inc.  Marketed  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for  ten 
tests;  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for  one  hundred 
tests;  also  in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for  fifty  tests. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test-P.  D.  &  Co. — Pre- 
pared by  the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28, 
1925;  expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc. 
Marketed  in  single  1  cc.  vial  packages  containing  sufficient  toxin  for 
ten  tests;  and  in  packages  of  one  10  cc.  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin 
for   one   hundred   tests. 

E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test-Squibh. — Prepared  by 
the  method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925; 
expires  1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  Marketed 
in  packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for  ten  tests;  in 
packages   of   one  vial  containing   sufficient  toxin   for   100   tests. 

United  States  Standard  Products  Company,  Woodworth, 
Wis. 

Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test. — Prepared  by  the 
method  of  Drs.  Dick  under  U.  S.  patent  1,547,369  (July  28,  1925;  expires 
1942)  by  license  of  the  Scarlet  Fever  Committee,  Inc.  Marketed  in 
packages  of  one  ampule  containing  sufficient  toxin  for  ten  tests,  and  in 
packages  of  one  vial  containing  sufficient  toxin  for   100  tests. 


422     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

SILVER     PREPARATIONS 

Silver  compounds  are  used  in  medicine  to  secure  caustic, 
astringent,  germicidal  and  antiseptic  effects.  These  results  are 
produced  by  the  free  silver  ions.  When  caustic  effects  are 
desired,  silver  nitrate  is  preferred,  because  the  colloidal  com- 
pounds of  silver  are  largely  or  completely  lacking  in  caustic 
properties.  As  an  astringent,  also,  silver  nitrate  is  the  compound 
of  choice ;  but  it  must  be  used  in  weaker  solutions.  The  anti- 
septic action  of  silver  nitrate  is  complicated  by  irritation,  pain, 
astringency  and  corrosion.  These  may  be  desirable  for  the 
destruction  of  tissue  or  the  stimulation  of  indolent  wounds ; 
but  when  they  are  not  necessary  for  such  purposes,  they  may 
be  avoided  by  the  use  of  colloidal  silver  preparations. 

Caution:  The  long  continued  use  of  any  silver  preparation 
may  produce  irremediable  discoloration  of  the  skin  or  mucous 
membrane  (argyria). 

Colloidal  Silver  Preparations 

In  these,  the  silver  does  not  exist  to  any  great  extent  as 
free  ions ;  therefore,  it  does  not  precipitate  chlorides  or  pro- 
teins, and  is  noncorrosive  and  relatively  or  quite  nonastringent 
and  nonirritant,  but  some  degree  of  antiseptic  action  is  retained. 
This  is  not  proportional  to  the  total  silver  content,  and  varies 
for  the  different  compounds ;  suggesting  that  the  antiseptic 
action  is  due  to  the  liberation  of  very  low  concentrations  of 
silver  ions,  which  vary  for  the  different  compounds. 

The  mechanism  of  these  effects  is  analogous  to  the  late 
action  of  silver  nitrate.  This  takes  place  in  two  stages:  (1) 
the  immediate  irritant  and  germicidal  effects  produced  by  the 
direct  application  of  the  free  silver  ions;  and  (2)  the  later, 
milder  antiseptic  effects  produced  by  the  re-solution  of  the 
protein  silver  compounds  that  were  formed  in  the  first  stage. 
If  the  second  stage  alone  is  desired  (i.  e.,  mild  antiseptics 
without  irritation),  the  direct  application  of  the  colloid  com- 
pounds may  have  advantages  over  their  indirect  production 
from  silver  nitrate,  aside  from  the  avoidance  of  irritation ;  for 
the  absence  of  any  coagulation  membrane  facilitates  their  access 
to  the  cells ;  they  form  more  concentrated  solutions  than  are 
likely  to  be  formed  from  the  re-solution  of  the  silver  precipitates 
in  situ;  the  colloidal  aggregates  may  be  smaller  and  therefore 
more  reactive;  and  because  of  the  absence  of  irritation,  they  are 
likely  to  be  more  frequently  applied  and  would  for  that  reason 
secure  a  more  continuous  action. 

The  colloidal  silver  preparations  appear  to  be  quite  efficacious 
for  the  prophylaxis  against  gonorrheal  infection,  evidently 
killing  these  organisms  on  direct  contact.  Culver  (J.  Lab.  & 
Clin.  Med.  3:487  [May]  1918)  reports  that  gonococci  in  hydro- 
cele broth  cultures   are  killed   by  momentary  exposure  to  0.5 


SILVER     PREPARATIONS  423 

per  cent  mild  protein  silver  or  to  0.25  per  cent  strong  protein 
silver.  As  regards  other  organisms,  discordant  results  have 
been  reported. 

Metallic  silver  and  insoluble  compounds  of  silver,  such  as 
the  oxide,  the  halogen  salts  (iodide,  chloride,  etc.)  and  protein- 
silver  precipitates,  may  be  brought  into  "colloidal  solution" ; 
i.  e.,  if  they  are  sufficiently  finely  divided,  they  become  miscible 
with  water,  so  that  they  apparently  go  into  solution  (such 
"colloidal  solutions"  are  strictly  permanent  "suspensions"  of 
the  insoluble  substance  in  a  state  of  ultrarnicroscopic  particles). 

The  commercial  preparations  are  for  the  most  part  produced 
by  dissolving  reduced  silver  or  silver  oxide,  or  some  protein- 
silver  precipitate,  in  an  excess  of  a  denatured  protein,  and 
drying  in  vacuo.  This  results  in  substances  that  dissolve  very 
freely,  although  somewhat  slowly,  in  water  yielding  brown 
"colloid  solutions"  which  contain  so  little  of  free  silver  ions 
that  they  do  not  readily  precipitate  chlorides  or  proteins.  They 
consist  of  indefinite  mixtures  of  metallic  silver,  silver  oxide, 
and  various  silver-protein  compounds,  all  in  colloidal  form. 
The  proportions  of  these  and  the  properties  of  the  mixture  vary 
according  to  the  conditions  under  which  they  are  produced. 
Although  there  are  many  gradations,  most  of  the  products  on 
the  market  fall  into  a  small  number  of  fairly  definite  thera- 
peutic groups : 

(A)  Protein  Silver,  Strong  Type. 

(B)  Protein   Silver,  Mild  Type. 

(C)  Collargol  Type. 

(D)  Electric  Type. 

A.  Protein  Silver,  Strong  Type. — Strong  protein  silver  com- 
pounds contain  the  lowest  percentage  of  silver  (from  7.5  to 
8.5  per  cent),  but  have  the  strongest  germicidal  action,  and 
are  distinctly  irritant.  They  are,  therefore,  therapeutically 
intermediate  between  silver  nitrate  and  mild  protein  silver. 
Protargol  belongs  to  this  group. 

Protargol  is  said  to  be  prepared  by  precipitating  a  "peptone" 
(albumose)  solution  with  silver  nitrate,  or  with  moist  silver 
oxide;  dissolving  the  silver  peptonate  in  an  excess  of  protal- 
bumose;  and  drying  in  vacuo  (Fraenkel). 

B.  Protein  Silver,  Mild  Type. — Mild  protein  silver  compounds 
contain  from  19  to  25  per  cent  of  silver,  but  are  quite  non- 
irritant.  The  following  products  listed  in  N.  N.  R.  belong  to 
this  group:  argyn;  cargentos ;  silvol;  solargentum- Squibb. 

Argyn  is  defined  as  a  colloidal  compound  of  silver  oxide  and 
serum  albumin. 

Solargentum- Squibb  is  prepared  from  alkali-gelatin,  used  as  a 
solvent  for  silver  oxide.  The  solution  is  then  concentrated 
and  dried  in  vacno. 

Cargentos  is  prepared  by  suspending  moist  silver  oxide  in 
a    solution   of   casein,   and   heating   the   mixture   until    no   pre- 


424     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

cipitate  is  obtained  on  the  addition  of  solution  of  sodium  chloride, 
and  by  evaporating  the  mixture  to  dryness  in  an  air  oven. 

C.  Collargol  Type.  This  contains  a  much  higher  percentage 
(78)  of  silver,  said  to  be  in  the  form  of  metallic  silver,  reduced 
to  the  colloidal  form  by  chemical  means,  and  "stabilized''  by 
"a  small  percentage  of  egg  albumin  with  products  of  oxidation." 
However,  the  albumin  is  denatured,  since  it  does  not  precipitate 
on  boiling;  and  it  presumably  constitutes  the  greater  part  of 
the  22  per  cent  that  is  not  silver.  Collargol,  therefore,  differs 
from  the  preceding  class  in  degree  rather  than  in  principle, 
containing  a  larger  proportion  of  silver  in  the  form  of  colloidal- 
metal  and  oxide,  and  a  smaller  proportion  in  the  form  of 
proteinate.  Its  therapeutic  field  has  been  mainly  for  intravenous 
and  intramuscular  injection.  According  to  the  results  of  Bottner 
(Miinchen.  med.  Wchnschr.  68:876  [July  15]  1921)  the  thera- 
peutic response  would  appear  to  be  due  to  the  foreign  proteins, 
rather  than  to  the  silver. 

D,  Electric  Type. — Metallic  silver  may  be  brought  into 
colloidal  solution  electrically,  i.  e.,  by  forming  an  arc  between 
silver  electrodes  under  water.  These  solutions  are  very  dilute 
and  are  not  sufficiently  stable  for  concentration.  They  are  also 
likely  to  contain  silver  oxide,  and  sometimes  ionized  silver. 

Therapeutic  Uses. — The  colloidal  silver  compounds  are  used 
mainly  on  mucous  membranes,  for  antisepsis.  The  protein 
silver,  strong  group  is  most  effective  in  this  respect,  but  is 
slightly  irritant  and  stimulant.  The  protein  silver,  mild  group 
acts  largely  as  mucilaginous  demulcent  and  protective ;  and 
as  detergent,  by  dislodging  pus.  Collargol  acts  locally  like  the 
protein  silver,  mild  group,  but  is  used  mainly  to  produce  sys- 
temic reactions. 

The  antiseptic  efficiency  of  the  silver  compounds  and  their 
content  of  silver  ions  may  be  conveniently  compared  by  their 
restraining  effect  on  gas-formation  by  yeast,  according  to 
the  method  of  Dreser,  as  modified  by  Pilcher  and  Sollmann 
(J.  Lab.  &  Clin.  Med.  8:301,  1923.  According  to  this,  the 
following  solutions  approximately  equal  the  efficiency  of  a 
1  in  1,000  solution  of  silver  nitrate  in  the  same  media  (J.  Lab. 
&  Clin.  Med.  9:260,  1924):  protargol  in  water  1  per  cent, 
in  physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  0.125  per  cent, 
in  blood  0.9  per  cent;  and  silvol  in  water  36  per  cent,  in 
physiological  solution  of  sodium  chloride  1  per  cent,  in  blood 
3  per  cent. 

The  protein  silvers  have  been  administered  by  mouth  as 
gastro-intestinal  antiseptics.  It  appears  most  improbable  that 
the  low  concentration  that  could  be  secured  in  this  manner 
would  have  any  antibacterial  action ;  there  is  no  decisive  clinical 
evidence  of  such  an  effect. 

Dosage  and  Administration. — The  concentrations  for  mucous 
membranes  range  from  0.1  to  10  per  cent  for  strong  protein 
silver ;    from    5    to    50   per    cent    for    mild    protein    silver,    and 


SILVER     PREPARATIONS 


425 


from  0.02  to  1  per  cent  for  collargol.  These  are  applied  every 
two  to  four  hours,  if  possible.  Solutions  should  be  recently 
prepared,  and  should  be  protected  against  light.  Ointments 
and  suppositories  are  used  with  the  same  concentrations  as  the 
aqueous  solutions.  Stains  on  linen  are  removed  by  1  in  1,000 
solution  of  mercuric  chloride.  The  usual  concentrations  for 
special  purposes  are  shown  in  the  adjoined  table. 


Strong  Protein  Silver     Mild  Protein  Silver 
Eye :  Per  Cent  Per  Cent 

Conjunctivitis,     simple     pu- 
rulent    or     gonorrheal...  2   to   10  Solution,  25 

Ointment,  10 
Prophylaxis      against      oph- 
thalmia    neonatorum 2   to    10  25 

Prophylaxis   before  ophthal- 
mic    operations      (several 

days)     25 

Corneal  ulcers    50 

Nose    and    throat 0.5  to   10  Spray,  10  to  20 

Swab,  25  to  50 

Wounds    and    ulcers 1  to  10,  solution  or 

ointment 
10,   dusting  pow^der 
Gonorrhea : 

Injections — Prophylactic     .  .  2  10 

Acute     ^    to   1  3  to  10 

Chronic     2   to   10  10  to   20 

Urethral   irrigation    1  :  2,000  to  1 :  1,000  1:1,000 

Urethral  suppositories    5   to   10  20    (0.13   Cm.   or  2 

erains) 

Cystitis    20  to  50   (5  cc.)   or 

10  to  25    (30  cc.) 
left  in  the  bladder 
Cynecologic  practice: 

Solutions    2   to   10  25   (tarnpons  of  solu- 

tion   in    glycerin) 

Tampons     2 

Ointments     5 

Suppositories      5  Suppositories,    20 

(0.3  Gm.  or  5  grains) 
Rectal  administration  : 

Irrigation     0.1  0.1    to    1 

Injection     2  10 

Suppositories     5   to   10  20    (0.13   Gm.  or  2 

grains) 

Oral   administration    0.002  to  0.015  Gm.         0.3  Gm.  (5  grains) 

iVs2  to  li  grain) 

Pyelography     2    (solargentum) 

50    (cargentos) 


(Early  Preventive)  Treatment  of  Venereal  Diseases. — The 
ordinary  routine  consists  in  washing  the  parts  thoroughly 
with  soap  and  water,  after  which  a  2  per  cent  strong  protein 
silver  solution  is  injected  into  the  urethra  and  held  there  for 
five  minutes.  The  glans  is  then  inuncted  with  30  per  cent  mild 
mercurous  chloride  ointment  for  five  minutes. 

The  efficacy  is  marked  if  the  treatment  is  applied  thoroughly 
within  an  hour  after  exposure,  and  is  fair  up  to  three  hours. 
In  the  A.  E.  F.,  the  ratio  of  diseases  to  exposure  was  about 


426     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

1  in  30  without  prophylactic  treatment,  and  1  in  90  with 
treatment.  Prophylaxis,  therefore,  reduced  the  incidence  to 
about  one  third  (Ashburn,  1919).  It  is  practically  useless 
after  five  hours. 

STRONG  PROTEIN  SILVER.  —  Argento-Proteinum 
Forte  U.  S.  P.  X. — Strong  Silver  Protein. — Strong  Protargin. — 
"A  compound  of  silver  and  protein,  containing  not  less  than 
7.5  per  cent  and  not  more  than  8.5  per  cent  of  silver  (Ag). 

"Caution.  —  Solutions  of  Strong  Protein  Silver  should  be 
freshly  prepared  and  should  be  dispensed  in  amber-colored 
bottles."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Argentum 
Proteinicum  Forte. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Silver 
Preparations.  Solutions  are  best  prepared  by  dusting  the 
powder  on  the  surface  of  cold  water,  and  allowing  it  to  dissolve 
without  stirring  or  shaking.  This  requires  about  ten  minutes. 
Solutions  should  be  freshly  prepared. 

Protargol. — A  brand  of  strong  protein  silver-U.  S.  P.  Pro- 
targol  is  a  compound  of  silver-albumose. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  expired.     U.  S.  trademark  30,882. 

Granules  Protargol  Compound. — Protargol,  22^3  per  cent,  and  urea, 
66^  per  cent.  The  urea  is  added  because  of  its  effect  of  increasing  the 
solubility  but  is   otherwise  inert. 

MILD  PROTEIN  SILVER.— Argento-Proteinum  Mite 
U.  S.  P.  X.— Mild  Silver  Protein.— Mild  Protargin.— "Silver 
rendered  colloidal  by  the  presence  of  or  combining  with  protein. 
It  contains  not  less  than  19  per  cent  and  not  more  than  25 
per  cent  of  silver  (Ag). 

"Caution. — Solutions  of  Mild  Protein  Silver  should  be 
freshly  prepared  and  should  be  dispensed  in  amber-colored 
bottles."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Argentum 
Proteinicum  Mite. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage. — See  preceding  article,  Silver 
Preparations. 

Argyn. — A  brand  of  mild  protein  silver-U.  S.  P.^  Argyn  is 
a  colloidal  compound  of  silver  oxide  and  serum  albumin. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.     No  U.  S. 
patent.      U.    S.   trademark    137,522. 
Argyn    Tablets,     6    grains. 

Cargentos. — Argenti     Oxidum     Colloidale-Mulford.— A 

brand  of  mild  protein  silver-U.  S.  P.  Cargentos  is  a  colloidal 
preparation  of  silver  oxide  and  modified  casein. 

Manufactured  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia  and  Baltimore.  U.  S. 
patent    1,043,646    (Nov.    5,    1912;    expired).      No    U.    S.   trademark. 


SILVER     PREPARATIONS  427 

Cargentos  Capsules,  3  Grains. — Capsules  of  Colloidal  Silver  Oxicle- 
Rlulford   3   grains. 

Cargentos  Ointment,  5  Per  Cent. — Ointment  of  Colloidal  Silver  Oxide- 
Mulford,  5  per  cent:  Cargentos,  1  part;  anhydrous  wool  fat,  19  parts; 
put  up  in  collapsible  tubes. 

Cargentos  Ointment,  10  Per  Cent. — Ointment  of  Colloidal  Silver  Oxide- 
Mulford,  10  per  cent:  Cargentos,  1  part;  anhydrous  wool  fat,  9  parts, 
put  up  in  collapsible  tubes. 

Cargentos  Urethral  Suppositories. — Colloidal  Silver  Oxide  Urethral  Sup- 
positories or  Bougies-Mulford:  Each  suppository  weighs  about  2.5  Gm. 
{2>7  grains).  The  vehicle  consists  of  glycerite  of  boroglycerin,  gelatin 
and   water. 

Silvol. — A  brand  of  mild  protein  silver-U.  S.  P.  Silvol  is 
a  compound  of  colloidal  silver  with  an  alkaline  proteid. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Capsules  Silvol,  6  grains. 

Silvol  Bougies  5  Per  Cent:  Bougies  weighing  0.81  Gm.  (12.5  grains) 
and  containing  silvol  5  per  cent  in  a  base  composed  of  oil  of  theobroma, 
wool   fat,   white   wax,   acacia   and   glucose. 

Silvol  Ointment  5  Per  Cent:  Silvol,  5  per  cent  in  a  base  composed  of 
petrolatum,   wool   fat,  benzoinated  lard    and  white  wax. 

Vaginal  Suppositories  Silvol  5  Per  Cent:  Suppositories  weighing  8.45 
Gm.  (130  grains)  and  containing  silvol,  5  per  cent,  in  a  base  composed 
of   gelatin  and    glycerin. 

Solargentum. — A  brand  of  mild  protein  silyer-U.  S.  P. 
Solargentum  is  a  compound  of  silver  and  gelatin,  containing 
from  19  to  23  per  cent  of  silver  in  colloidal  form. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No'  U.  S.  patent. 
U.   S.  trademark  328,686. 

Tablets  Solargentum,   4.6  grains. 

COLLARGOL.  —  Collargolum.  —  Colloidal     Silver.— 

Argentum  Colloidale. — Argentum  Crede. — Colloidal  silver  and 
silver  oxide,  formed  by  reduction  and  stabilized  by  derived  egg- 
albumin,  with  which  it  is  possibly  partly  combined,  Collargol 
contains  silver  equivalent  to  approximately  78  per  cent  metallic 
silver,  of  which  about  2  per  cent  is  ionized.  It  fornns  a  fairly 
stable  colloidal  suspension  in  water. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  intravenous  injection  of  collargol  is 
followed,  after  from  two  to  four  hours,  by  a  chill,  fever  and 
leukocytosis.  This  reaction  has  been  used,  with  variable  results, 
against  general  and  localized  infections,  similar  to  nonspecific 
protein  therapy.  Indeed,  it  is  possible  that  the  protein  stabilizer 
may  play  the  principal  or  sole  part  in  the  reaction.  The  direct 
antiseptic  action  is  feeble,  and  probably  due  to  contamination 
with  free  silver  ions. 

Dosage. — It  is  employed  in  carefully  filtered  solutions 
(colloidal  suspensions)  varying  in  strength  according  to  the 
intended  use ;  from  10  to  20  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  solution  for 
intravenous  injections  (the  possible  reaction  of  certain  persons 
to  tgg  protein  should  be  considered) ;  and  from  0.02  to  1  per 
cent    solution   for   washes.     Collargol    solution    should   not   be 


428     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

sterilized  by  boiling,  but  sterile  solution  mediums  should  be  used. 
Locally,  it  is  used  in  the  form  of  a  15  per  cent  ointment  (see 
collargol  ointment),  from  2  to  4  Gm.  (30  to  60  grains)  being 
very  thoroughly  rubbed  into  the  skin ;  in  the  form  of  5  per  cent 
dusting  powder,  prepared  with  finest  clay ;  in  bougies  containing 
0.2  (^m.  (3  grains),  in  vaginal  suppositories  and  tampons  each 
containing  0.05  Gm.  (^  grain),  and  for  parenteral  injections 
in  from  0.5  to  1  per  cent  glycerin  solutions. 

Manufactured  by  the  Heyden  Chemical  Company  of  America,  Inc.. 
Garfield,  N.  J.  (Schering  and  Glatz,  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor).  U.  S. 
trademark   32,452. 

Collargol  occurs  as  small,  hard,  brittle,  bluish-black  scale-like  pieces. 
With  20  parts  of  distilled  water,  it  forms  a  colloidal  suspension,  black 
in  incident  light  and  reddish  brown  in  transmitted  light,  which  remains 
stable  for  months.  The  addition  of  albumin  to  collargol  prevents  or 
delay s_  its  precipitation  by  acids  and  salts.  _  A  sufficient  amount  of 
albumin  to  prevent  its  precipitation  under  ordinary  conditions  is,  there- 
fore, added  to  collargol  during  its  manufacture.  Hence,  collargol. 
when  added  to  spring  or  well-water  containing  salts,  undergoes  no 
change,  whereas  colloidal  silver  containing  no  albumin  precipitates 
on  being  boiled.  Collargol  solutions  brought  once  to  the  boiling  point 
present   no   macroscopic   changes,   though   they    do   decrease   in   stability. 

A  colloidal  suspension  of  collargol  does  not  respond  directly  to  the 
usual  tests  for  silver.  If  the  colloidal  suspension  is  warmed  with  nitric 
acid  a  white  cloudiness  is  produced,  which  clears  completely  on  stand- 
ing, and  the  silver  can  then  be  demonstrated  in  the  usual  manner.  If 
a  fragment  of  collargol  is  heated  on  a  platinum  scoop,  shining  white 
metallic  silver  of  the  ordinary  kind,  insoluble  in  water,  is  at  once 
formed. 

Its  colloidal  suspension  should  not  be  exposed  to  light,  or  air;  it  is 
incompatible  with  the  usual  silver  reagents. 

Collargol  Ointment. — Unguentum  Crede.— Ointment  of  Colloidal  Silver. 
— Collargol   ointment   is   an   ointment   containing    15    per   cent  of   collargol. 

Collargol  ointment  is  prepared  by  incorporating  15  parts  of  collargol 
with  5  parts  of  water,  10  parts  of  white  wax  and  70  parts  of  ben- 
zoinated  lard,  taking  care  that  the  soluble  silver  shall  not  be  trans- 
formed into  metallic  silver  of  the  ordinary  kind.  This,  it  is  asserted, 
is  liable  to  occur  unless  great  care  is  observed  in  the  manipulation. 

The  natural  color  of  collargol  ointment  is  reddish  brown.  The  oint- 
ment is  good  as  long  as  it  colors  the  skin  black. 

LUNOSOL. — Argenti  Chloridum  Colloidale  Sacchara- 
tum-Hille. — A  preparation  of  colloidal  silver  chloride  contain- 
ing silver  chloride,  10  per  cent,  and  sucrose,  90  per  cent. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Lunosol  has  antiseptic  and  germicidal 
properties.  It  causes  neither  irritation  of  the  mucous  mem- 
branes nor  coagulation  of  albumin  even  in  concentrated  solu- 
tions ;  it  does  not  stain  the  skin  on  topical  application,  but,  as 
with  any  silver  preparation,  there  is  danger  of  argyria  when 
it  is  applied  to  mucous  membrane. 

Lunosol  is  intended  for  the  prophylaxis  against  and  treatment 
of  infections  of  the  accessible  mucous  membranes,  such  as  the 
genito-urinary  tract  and  the  eye,  ear,  nose  and  throat. 

Dosage. — Lunosol  is  generally  used  in  solutions  (colloidal 
suspensions)  of  from  1  to  25  per  cent.  In  the  male  urethra, 
from  3  to  25  per  cent  solutions  are  used ;  for  irrigation  of  the 
vagina,  a  1  per  cent  solution  is  used,  and  on  tampons,  a  10  per 
cent  solution;  for  irrigation  of  the  bladder,  a  0.1  to  1  per  cent 


SILVER     PREPARATIONS  429 

solution,  and  for  irrigation  of  the  rectum,  a  1  to  5  per 
cent  solution  is  used ;  in  ophthalmia  neonatorum,  25  to  50 
per  cent  solutions  are  applied ;  in  pyelitis,  3  to  10  per  cent  solu- 
tions are  injected  into  the  kidney  pelvis;  for  application  to  the 
nose,  eye  and  ear,  the  average  concentration  is  10  per  cent. 

Manufactured  by  Hille  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.    S.  trademark   189,347. 

Lunosol  is  a  white,  slightly  hygroscopic,  granular  powder,  odorless, 
having  a  sweetish,  metallic  taste.  It  is  completely  soluble  in  one  half 
of  its  weight  of  water,  forming  an  opalescent  solution  (colloidal  sus- 
pension) which  is  bluish  white  in  reflected  light  and  reddish  in  trans- 
mitted  light. 

If  a  solution  of  0.5  Gm.  of  lunosol  in  25  cc.  of  water  is  treated  with 
0.6  Gm.  of  potassium  iodide  dissolved  in  a  few  cc.  of  water,  a  yellow 
liquid  is  formed.  If  0.5  Gm.  of  lunosol  is  dissolved  in  25  cc.  of  water 
and  8  cc.  of  strong  ammonia  water  is  added,  a  clear,  colorless  solution 
results.  If  a  solution  of  0.5  Gm.  of  lunosol  in  10  cc.  of  water  is 
treated  with  15  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate,  a  clear  color- 
less solution  results.  Place  a  few  drops  of  lunosol  solution  (1  in  10) 
in  the  nostril:  no  sensation  of  irritation  is  produced.  To  about  2  cc. 
of  fresh  undiluted  egg  white,  add  1  cc.  of  lunosol  solution  (1  in  10); 
shake  the  mixture,  then  allow  to  stand  for  fifteen  minutes  and  finally 
dilute   with    15    cc.    of    water:    no   precipitate   forms. 

Dissolve  approximately  0.5  Gm.  of  lunosol,  accurately  weighed,  in  25 
cc.  of  water,  add  8  cc.  of  stronger  ammonia  water  followed  by  an 
excess  of  nitric  acid.  Collect,  wash,  dry  and  weigh  the  precipitate. 
The  weight  of  silver  chloride  found  corresponds  to  a  content  of  10  per 
cent  of  silver  chloride  in  the  specimen  taken. 

NEO-SILVOL. — Colloidal  silver  iodide  compound. — A  com- 
pound of  silver  iodide  with  a  soluble  gelatin  base,  containing 
18  to  22  per  cent  of  silver  iodide  in  colloidal  form. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Neo-Silvol,  even  in  concentrated  solutions, 
causes  neither  irritation  of  mucous  membranes  nor  coagulation 
of  albumin.  It  does  not  stain  the  skin  on  topical  application, 
but,  as  with  any  silver  preparation,  there  is  danger  of  argyria 
when  it  is  applied  to  mucous  membrane. 

Neo-silvol  is  intended  for  the  prophylaxis  against,  and  treat- 
ment of  infections  of  accessible  mucous  membranes,  especially 
of  the  genito-urinary  tract  and  of  the  eye,  ear,  nose  and  throat. 

Dosage. — In  the  treatment  of  acute  inflammations  of  the 
mucous  membranes  solutions  of  neo-silvol  as  strong  as  50  per 
cent  may  be  used.  In  inflammatory  infections  of  the  ear,  nose 
and  throat,  5  to  40  per  cent  solutions  are  used ;  for  irrigating 
sinuses  2  to  5  per  cent ;  for  inflammatory  conditions  of  the  eye 
and  conjunctival  infections  a  strength  of  10  to  40  per  cent;  in 
acute  anterior  urethritis,  as  an  abortive  measure,  20  per  cent; 
for  posterior  urethritis  or  in  the  routine  treatment  of  anterior 
urethritis,  10  per  cent ;  in  the  genito-urinary  tract  of  the  female, 
from  10  to  50  per  cent;  as  urographic  medium,  20  per  cent. 

Solutions  of  neo-silvol  are  prepared  by  adding  the  substance 
to  the  required  amount  of  water  (hot,  for  concentrations  of 
25  per  cent  or  over)  and  agitating  the  mixture  until  solution 
occurs. 


430     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Solutions  tend  to  precipitate  gradually  after  standing  longer 
than  a  week.  Local  anesthetics  should  not  be  added  to  solu- 
tions of  neo-silvol. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  U.  S".  patent  1,610,391 
(December   14,   1926;   expires   1943).     U.   S.  trademark  157,369. 

Capsules  Neo-silvol,  6  grains. 

Neo-Silvol  Ointment  5  Per  Cent:  Neo-Silvol,  5  per  cent,  in  a  base 
composed  of  glycerin  and  benzoinated  lard,  hydrous  wool  fat  and 
petrolatum. 

Neo-Silvol  Vaginal  Suppositories :  Each  suppository  contains  neo-silvol, 
0.4536  Gm.   (7  grains),  in  a  base  composed  of  gelatin,  glycerin  and  water. 

Neo-silvol  is  prepared  by  heating  freshly  precipitated  silver  oxide 
with  gelatin  (which  has  been  previously  dissolved  in  a  dilute  alkaline 
solution)  until  the  silver  oxide  has  been  reduced  to  a  metallic  silver 
in  a  colloidal  state  of  subdivision.  The  solution  is  treated  with  iodine, 
which  combines  with  the  _  silver.  The  liquid  is  then  evaporated  to 
dryness  in  vacuo.  The  finished  product  contains  from  1  to  3  per  cent 
of  combined  iodine  in  excess  of  that  required  for  combination  with  the 
silver. 

Neo-silvol  occurs  as  pale  yellow  granules.  In  concentration  up  to 
50  per  cent  neo-silvol  forms  with  water  almost  colorless,  milky  or 
opalescent  solutions  (colloidal  suspensions).  Neo-silvol  is  insoluble  in 
fixed  oils,^  but  slowly  soluble  in  glycerin.  Solutions  of  neo-silvol  are 
not  precipitated   in  the  cold  by  strong  acids  or  sodium  chloride. 

If  a  solution  of  neo-silvol  is  treated  with  a  solution  of  potassium 
hydroxide  no  precipitate  of  silver  iodide  is  formed;  if  this  solution  is 
boiled  for  a  few  minutes,  it  darkens  gradually,  but  no  precipitate  is 
formed  unless  it  is  allowed  to  stand  for  some  time.  If  a  solution  of 
neo-silvol  is  treated  with  dilute  hydrochloric  acid  silver  iodide  is  not 
precipitated;  if  this  mixture  is  now  boiled,  the  silver  iodide  is  gradu- 
ally precipitated.  Dilute  solutions  of  neo-silvol  do  not  discolor  in  sun- 
light (absence  of  silver  chloride  and  silver  bromide). 

Transfer  about  1  Gm.  of  neo-silvol,  accurately  weighed,  to  an  8  ounce 
Erlenmeyer  flask  containing  100  cc.  water  and  heat  on  steam  bath 
until  "solution"  is  effected.  Add  5  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  boil 
gently  over  a  flame  for  ten  or  fifteen  minutes;  cool;  when  sufficiently 
cool  to  handle,  filter  through  a  tared  Gooch  crucible  containing  a  fairly 
thick  pad  of  asbestos.  Wash  thoroughly  with  water  acidulated  with 
hydrochloric  acid  (0.3  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid).  Dry  at  100  C.  and 
weigh  as  silver  iodide:  the  weight  found  is  equivalent  to  18  to  22  per 
cent  of  silver  iodide. 

SILVER  LACTATE.  — Argenti  Lactas.  —  Ag.C3H503+ 

H2O. — The  silver  salt  of  lactic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Silver  lactate  is  used  as  an  active  anti- 
septic.   It  is  irritating  if  applied  in  substance  to  wounds. 

Dosage. — From  1  in  100  to  1  in  2,000  solutions. 

Silver  lactate  is  prepared  by  dissolving  freshly  precipitated  silver 
carbonate  in  a  solution  of  lactic  acid  by  the  aid  of  heat,  and  concen- 
trating the  solution  until  crystallization  begins.  The  operation  must 
be  conducted  in  a  darkened  room. 

Silver  lactate  occurs  in  the  form  of  crystalline  needles,  granular 
masses  or  crystalline  powder;  it  dissolves  in  about  15  parts  of  water. 
Pure  silver  lactate  when  heated  leaves  a  residue  of  metallic  silver, 
weighing  50.2  per  cent.  It  is  usually  colored  somewhat  brown  and 
gives  with  water  a  brownish  or  reddish  solution.  The  salt  must  be 
protected  from  the   light. 

Silver  Lactate-Merck. — A  brand  of  silver  lactate-N.  N.  R. 
On  heating  it  yields  from  50  to  51.5  per  cent  of  metallic  silver. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 


SODIUM     MORRHUATE  431 

SILVER  NITRATE.— "When  powdered  and  dried  to 
constant  weight  in  the  dark  over  sulfuric  acid,  contains  not  less 
than  99.8  per  cent  of  AgNOa."  U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Argenti 
Nitras. 

Silver  Nitrate  Applicators  (Arzol) :  Silver  nitrate,  75%.  and  potassium 
nitrate,  25%,  fused  to  one  end  of  wooden  sticks  3  and  6  inches  long, 
respectively.     Each  applicator  is  to  be  used  but  once. 

Prepared  by  The  Arzol  Chemical  Company,  Nyack,  N.  Y.  (J.  Sklar 
Manufacturing  Company,   Brooklyn,    N.   Y.,  distributor.) 

Ampoule  Solution  Silver  Nitrate  1  Per  Cent-Cutter:  Solution  silver 
nitrate  1  per  cent,  approximately  0.2  cc,  contained  in  ampules  composed 
of  beeswax.  For  the  prevention  of  ophthalmia  neonatorum,  two  drops 
are  placed  in  each  eye  after  preliminary  cleansing. 

Prepared  by  Cutter  Laboratories,  Berkeley,  Calif.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Ampule  Solution  Silver  Nitrate  1  Per  Cent-Lederle:  Solution  silver 
nitrate  1  per  cent  approximately  0.2  cc.  contained  in  ampules  composed 
of  beeswax.  A  pinhole  is  made  at  one  end  of  this  ampule,  and,  after  suit- 
able preliminary  cleansing  of  the  eye,  two  drops  are  placed  in  each  eye 
of  the  newborn. 

Prepared  by  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Capsules  Solution  Silver  Nitrate,  1  Per  Cent-P.  D.  &■  Co.,  6  minims: 
The  aqueous  solution  of  silver  nitrate  is  contained  in  capsules  composed 
of  beeswax  with  an  inner  lining  of  paraffin.  For  use  in  prophylaxis 
against  ophthalmia  neonatorum,  a  pinhole  is  made  in  one  end  of  the  cap- 
sule and  three  drops  of  the  solution  placed  in  the  eye  of  the  newborn. 

Prepared  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  U.  S.  patent  1,527,659 
(Feb.  24,  1925;  expires  1942).     No  U.  S.  trademark. 

Ampoule  Solution  Silver  Nit/ate  1  Per  Cent-Sharp  &  Dohme :  Solution 
silver  nitrate  1  per  cent,  approximately  0.2  cc,  is  contained  in  ampules 
composed  of  beeswax.  For  use,  a  pinhole  is  made  at  one  end  of  the 
ampule,  and  after  suitable  preliminary  cleansing  of  the  eye,  two  drops 
are  placed  in  each  eye  of  the  new-born. 

Prepared  by  Sharp  &  Dohme,  Inc.,  Philadelphia,  Pa.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 


SODIUM  MORRHUATE.  — The  sodium  salt  of  the 
unsaturated  fatty  acids  occurring  in  cod  liver  oil. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  action  of  sodium  morrhuate  is  that 
of  a  sclerosing  agent.  It  is  employed  in  solution  with  addition 
of  a  local  anesthetic  for  the  obliteration  of  varicose  veins. 

Dosage. — One  half  to  1  cc.  of  a  5  per  cent  solution. 

Sodium  morrhuate  is  a  pale,  yellowish,  granular  powder,  possessing 
a  slight  fishy  odor.     It  is  soluble   in  water. 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  morrhuate:  the  residue  responds 
to  test  for  sodium  carbonate.  Dissolve  about  0.01  Gm.  of  sodium 
morrhuate  in  10  cc.  of  water,  add  1  cc.  of  chloroform  followed  by  one 
drop  of  sulfuric  acid  and  shake:  a  violet-red  color  results,  gradually 
changing  to  a  reddish  brown. 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  morrhuate,  accurately  weighed,  at  100  C, 
for  six  hours:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  2  per  cent.  Weigh  accurately 
about  1  Gm.  of  sodium  morrhuate  in  a  tared  platinum  dish,  add  10  cc. 
of  sulfuric  acid,  gently  heat  while  fumes  of  sulfur  trioxide  are  evolved. 


432     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

repeat,  using  two  portions  of  2  cc.  of  sulfuric  acid,  respectively,  ignite, 
cool  and  weigh  as  sodium  sulfate:  the  sodium  found  corresponds  to 
not  less  than  7  per  cent,  nor  more  than  7.8  per  cent,  when  calculated 
to  the  dried  substance. 

Transfer  about  25  Gm.  of  sodium  morrhuate  to  a  suitable  Squibb 
separatory  funnel,  add  350  cc.  of  water  and  sufficient  diluted  sulfuric 
acid  to  precipitate  the  fatty  acids,  and  extract  with  3  portions  of  ether, 
using  150  cc,  100  cc,  and  50  cc,  respectively.  The  combined  ethereal 
solutions,  evaporated  to  an  oily  liquid  on  the  steam-bath,  conform  to 
the  following  requirements: 

Morrhuic  acid,  a  component  of  sodium  morrrhuate,  responds  to  the 
following  tests  for  identity,  purity  and  assay:  Morrhuic  acid  occurs 
as  a  light  amber  oily  liquid,  possessing  a  slight  fishy  odor  and  taste; 
soluble  in  alcohol,  carbon  tetrachloride,  chloroform  and  ether,  practically 
insoluble  in  water.     The  specific  gravity  is  0.898  to  0.907  at  25  C. 

Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm.  of  morrhuic  acid,  accurately  weighed:  the 
residue  does  not  exceed  0.2  per  cent.  Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of 
morrhuic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  in  a  dry  500  cc.  glass  stoppered 
flask,  add  10  cc.  of  chloroform,  followed  by  the  addition  of  25  cc.  of 
iodochloride  test  solution  (Wijs  modification),  accurately  measured, 
stopper  the  flask  and  allow  to  stand  for  thirty  minutes  in  a  cool  place 
protected  from  light.  To  the  mixture  add  20  cc.  of  a  15  per  cent 
solution  of  potassium  iodide,  mix  thoroughly,  add  200  cc.  of  water, 
previously  boiled  and  cooled,  and  titrate  the  excess  of  iodine  with 
tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  solution,  using  starch  paste  as  an  indi- 
cator. While  the  foregoing  is  being  performed,  make  a  control  test 
by  using  exactly  the  same  quantities  of  reagents  and  titrate  the  free 
iodine  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  solution:  the  amount  of 
tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  an 
iodine  value   of  not  less  than   145  and  not  more  than  185. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  morrhuic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  in  50  cc. 
of  alcohol  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  potassium  hydroxide  solution, 
using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  amount  of  tenth-normil 
potassium  hydroxide  solution  consumed  corresponds  to  a  neutraliza- 
tion value  which  should  not  be  less  than  188  and  not  more  than  193. 
Digest  about  5  Gm.  of  morrhuic  acid  under  a  reflux  condenser  with 
a  solution  of  about  2  Gm.  of  potassium  hydroxide  in  40  cc.  of  alcohol 
for  an  hour  or  until  saponified.  Evaporate  most  of  the  alcohol,  dis- 
solve the  residue  in  50  cc.  of  hot  water;  transfer  the  solution  to  a 
separatory  funnel,  rinsing  the  flask  with  25  cc.  to  50  cc.  of  hot  water; 
cool;  extract  with  ether,  using  2  portions  of  50  cc.  each,  adding  if 
necessary  about  5  cc.  of  alcohol  to  facilitate  the  separation  of  two 
liquids;  wash  the  combined  ether  extraction  with  small  portions  of 
water  until  not  reddened  by  phenolphthalein;  transfer  the  ethereal 
solution  to  a  tared  beaker;  evaporate  the  ether  on  a  water  bath;  dry  the 
residue  at  a  temperature  not  exceeding  100  C.,  and  weigh:  the  unsaponi- 
fiable  matter  does  not  exceed  1.5  per  cent. 

Ampules  Sodnini  Morrhuate  5%  with  Benzyl  Alcoh-ol  (Searle)  5  cc: 
Each  cc.  contains  0.05  Gm.  sodium  morrhuate  and  benzyl  alcohol  0.02  Gm. 
in  aqueous  solution. 

Prepared  by  G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent  or  trade- 
mark. 

Sodium   Morrliuate    5%    Solution    with    Benzyl    Alcohol    (Uhner)    5    cc. 

Vials:     Each   cubic   centimeter   contains    sodium   morrhuate-N.    N.    R.    0.05 

Gm.,  benzyl  alcohol  0.03  Gm.,  and  phenol  0.005  Gm.,  in  aqueous  solution. 

Prepared  by  the   Ulmer  Pharmacal  Co.,  Minneapolis.     No  U.  S.  patent 

or  trademark. 

Sodium  Morrhuate    5%    Solution    ztnth  Benzyl  Alcohol    (Ulmer)    20    cc. 

Vials:     Each   cubic   centimeter   contains    sodium   morrhuate-N.    N.    R.    0.05 

Gm.,  benzyl  alcohol  0.03  Gm.,  and  phenol  0.005  Gm.,  in  aqueous  solution. 

Prepared  by  the  Ulmer  Pharmacal  Co.,  Minneapolis.    No   U.   S.  patent 

or  trademark. 


SULFOICHTHYOLATE     PREPARATIONS      433 

SODIUM  THIOSULFATE.  — "Sodium  Hyposulfite." — 
"When  rendered  anhydrous  by  drying  to  constant  weight  at 
100°  C,  contains  not  less  than  99  per  cent  of  NaoSaOs.  It 
contains  not  less  than  2>2  per  cent  and  not  more  than  2i7  per  cent 
of  water."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Sodii 
Thiosulfas. 

Ampules  Sodium  Thiosulphatc  (Searlc),  5  cc. 
Prepared  by  G.  D.   Searle   &  Co.,  Inc..    Chicago. 
Ampules  Sodium   Thiosulphate   (Searle),    10    cc. 
Prepared  by  G.   D.   Searle  &  Co.,  Inc..    Chicago. 


SULFOICHTHYOLATE     PREPARATIONS 
AND     SUBSTITUTES 

Preparations  containing  as  their  essential  constituents  salts 
or  compounds  of  a  mixture  of  acids  containing  sulfur  and 
designated  by  the  group  name  "sulfoichthyolic  acid"  are  obtained 
from  certain  bituminous  shales.  Sulfoichthyolic  acid  is  char- 
acterized by  a  high  sulfur  content,  the  sulfur  existing  largely 
in  the  form  of  sulfonates,  sulfones  and  sulfides.  The  ammonium 
compound  of  this  so-called  sulfoichthyolic  acid — first  introduced 
as  ichthyol — has  been  used  most  extensively.  Compounds  with 
sodium  and  other  metals,  with  albumin,  with  formaldehyde,  etc., 
have  also  been  introduced. 

A  number  of  more  or  less  related  compounds  of  sulfur  have 
been  introduced  as  substitutes  for  the  sulfoichthyolates ;  and 
the  National  Formulary  contains  a  sulfoichthyolate  preparation 
under  the  title,  "Ichthammol." 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  current  estimate  of  the  effects  of 
sulfoichthyolic  acid  preparations  is  based  largely  on  the  use  of 
ichthyol.  The  use  of  sulfoichthyolate  preparations  is  still  largely 
empiric.  They  are  weakly  antiseptic  and  emollient.  Taken 
internally,  they  produce  some  gastro-intestinal  irritation,  with 
diarrhea,  etc. 

They  were  formerly  used  locally  under  the  supposition  that 
they  secure  the  absorption  of  swellings  and  effusions  in  con- 
tusions, burns,  etc.,  and  especially  in  gynecologic  practice,  and 
in  various  skin  diseases.  They  have  been  tried  internally  in  a 
great  variety  of  conditions,  but  there  is  no  evidence  that  they 
are  of  any  therapeutic  value  when  used  in  this  way.. 

ICHTHAMMOL.— Bitumen  Sulphonatum,  N.  F.  V.— 
Ammonium  Ichthosulfonate. — "Ichthammol  is  obtained  by  the 
destructive  distillation  of  certain  bituminous  schists,  sulfonating 
the  distillate,  and  neutralizing  the  product  with  ammonia."   N.  F. 

For  standards  see  the  National  Formulary  under  Ichthammol. 

Actions  and  Uses.— See  general  article.  Sulfoichthyolate  Prep- 
arations and  Substitutes. 


434     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Hirathiol. — Ammonii  Sulfoichthyolicum. — A  brand  of 
Ichthammol,  N,  F. 

Manufactured  by  Hirasawa  Chemical  Industrial  Company,  Tokyo,  Japan 
(Takamine  Laboratory,  Inc.,  Clifton,  N.  J.,  U.  S.  selling  agent).  No 
U.   S.  patent.     U.   S.  trademark  117,964. 

Hirathiol  is  a  brownish-black  syrupy  liquid,  having  a  characteristic 
empyreumatic  odor.  It  is  soluble  in  water,  glycerin  and  alcohol.  It 
is  miscible  with  fats. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  hirathiol  (1  in  10)  is  faintly  acid  to  blue 
litmus.  The  aqueous  solution  (1  in  20)  yields  a  greenish-black,  resin- 
like precipitate  on  the  addition  of  hydrochloric  acid.  This  precipitate 
is  soluble  in  ether;  it  is  also  soluble  in  water,  but  if  dissolved  in  the 
latter  solvent,  it  is  again  precipitated  by  the  addition  of  hydrochloric 
acid  or  sodium  chloride   solution. 

Boil  an  aqueous  solution  of  hirathiol  (1  in  10)  with  potassium  hydrox- 
ide solution:  ammonia  is  evolved.  Hirathiol  is  decomposed  by  acids, 
saline  solutions,  and  fixed  alkalis. 

Hirathiol    loses    46.5    per    cent    of   its    weight    when   dried    at    100    C. 

Weigh  from  5  to  6  Gm.  of  hirathiol  into  a  flask,  and  25  cc.  of 
potassium  hydroxide  solution  and  100  cc.  of  water.  Distil  the  mixture 
until  no  more  ammonia  passes  over,  collect  the  distillate  in  15  cc.  cf 
normal  sulfuric  acid,  to  which  1  drop  of  methyl  orange  solution  has 
been  added,  and  titrate  the  excess  of  acid  with  tenth-normal  potassium 
hydroxide:  the  amount  of  normal  sulfuric  acid  consumed  corresponds 
to  3.18  per  cent   of  total  ammonia    (NHs). 

Weigh  from  5  to  6  Gm.  of  hirathiol  into  a  beaker,  add  50  cc.  of 
water  and  10  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of  albumin,  followed  by 
5  portions  of  5  cc.  each  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  shaking  after 
each  addition.  Make  up  the  mixture  to  a  volume  of  500  cc.  and  filter 
through  a  dry  filter.  Heat  200  cc.  of  the  filtrate  to  boiling,  add  10  cc. 
of  barium  chloride  solution  and  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  for  twenty- 
four  hours.  Collect  the  precipitate  of  barium  sulfate,  heat  and  weigh: 
The  weight  of  barium  sulfate  obtained  corresponds  to  6.16  per  cent  of 
ammonium   sulfate. 

Weigh  from  0.5  to  1  Gm.  of  hirathiol  into  a  Kjeldahl  flask,  add 
30  cc.  of  water  and  5  Gm.  of  potassium  chlorate  followed  by  30  cc. 
of  nitric  acid,  and  evaporate  the  mixture  to  about  5  cc;  add  25  cc.  of 
hydrochloric  acid  and  evaporate  to  5  cc. ;  again  add  25  cc.  of  hydro- 
chloric acid  and  evaporate  to  5  cc.  Then  add  100  cc.  of  water,  heat 
to  boiling  and  add  10  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution,  allow  themixture 
to  stand  for  twenty-four  hours,  collect  the  precipitate  of  barium  sul- 
fate, heat  and  weigh:  the  weight  of  barium  sulfate  corresponds  to 
10.23   per  cent  of  total  sulfur. 

Calculate  the  ammonia  obtained  in  the  ammonium  sulfate,  as  pre- 
viously determined  in  hirathiol,  and  subtract  the  result  from  "total 
ammonia"  as  previously  determined.  Multiply  the  remainder  by  the 
factor  1.88:  the  result  represents  the  sulfur  present  as  "sulfonic 
sulfur."  Calculate  the  sulfur  contained  in  the  ammonium  sulfate 
as  previously  determined  in  hirathiol,  and  subtract  the  result  from 
"total  sulfur"  as  previously  determined:  the  remainder  (8.74  per 
cent)  represents  the  sulfur  present  in  the  organic,  sulfonic  acids  con- 
tained in  the  substance.  Subtract  the  "sulfonic  sulfur"  as  previously 
calculated,  from  the  sulfur  in  the  organic  acids,  as  previously  calcu- 
lated: the  remainder  corresponds  to  5.73  per  cent  of  organic  ("sul- 
fide")   sulfur. 

Ichthynat. — Ammonium  Ichthynatum. — A  brand  of  Ich- 
thammol, N.  F. 

Manufactured  for  the  Heyden  Chemical  Corporation,  New  York.  No 
U.   S.  patent.     U.   S.  trademark  44,053. 

Ichthynat  is  a  brown-black,  syrupy  liquid,  having  a  characteristic 
empyreumatic  odor   and  burning  taste. 


SULFOICHTHYOLATE     PREPARATIONS     435 


It  is  completely  soluble  in  water;  incompletely  soluble  in  alcohol 
or  ether,  but  nearly  soluble  in  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  alcohol 
and  ether;  also  soluble  in  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  alcohol,  water 
and  ether.  It  is  miscible  with  glycerin.  Ichthynat  is  decomposed  by 
acid  and  saline  solution,  fixed  alkalis,  their  carbonates  and  iodides, 
alkaloidal  salts  and  mercuric  chloride. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  ichthynat  (1  in  10)  has  a  faintly  acid  reac- 
tion on  blue  litmus  paper.  The  aqueous  solution  of  ichthynat  (1  in  10) 
yields  a  greenish-black,  resin-like  precipitate  on  the  addition  of  hydro- 
chloric acid.  This  precipitate  is  soluble  in  ether;  it  is  partially  soluble 
in  alcohol;  soluble  in  water,  but  if  dissolved  in  the  latter  solvent  it 
may  again  be  precipitated  from  solution  by  the  addition  of  hydrochloric 
acid  or  sodium  chloride  solution.  With  barium  chloride  solution  the 
aqueous  solution  of  ichthynat  (1  in  10)  gives  a  brownish-like  pre- 
cipitate which  is  insoluble  in  diluted  hydrochloric  acid.  If  the  aqueous 
solution  of  ichthynat  (1  in  10)  is  boiled  with  potassium  hydroxide  solu- 
tion, ammonia  is  evolved.  If  1  Gm.  of  ichthynat  is  ignited  it  will  leave 
not  more  than  0.5  per  cent  of  residue.  If  10  Gm.  of  ichthynat  is 
diluted  with  90  cc.  of  water,  the  mixture  placed  in  a  glass-stoppered 
cylinder  and  allowed  to  remain  undisturbed  for  twenty-four  hours,  no 
deposit  will   form. 

If  dried  at  100  C,  ichthynat  will  not  lose  more  than  47.0  per  cent 
of  its  weight  (absence  of  an  undue  amount  of  water).  If  from  5  to 
6  Gm.  of  ichthynat  is  weighed  into  a  flask,  and  25  cc.  of  potassium 
hydroxide  solution  and  100  cc.  of  water  is  added,  the  mixture  distilled 
until  no  more  ammonia  passes  over,  the  distillate  collected  in  15  cc. 
of  normal  sulfuric  acid  to  which  1  drop  of  methyl  orange  solution 
has  been  added  and  the  excess  of  acid  then  titrated  with  tenth-normal 
potassium  hydroxide,  the  amount  of  normal  sulfuric  acid  consumed 
will  correspond  to  from  3  to  5  per  cent  of  total  ammonia  (NHs).  If 
from  5  to  6  Gm.  of  ichthynat  is  weighed  into  a  beaker,  diluted  with 
50  cc.  of  water,  10  cc.  of  a  10  per  cent  solution  of  dried  egg  albumin 
added,  followed  by  five  portions  of  5  cc.  each  of  diluted  hydrochloric 
acid,  shaking  after  each  addition,  the  mixture  made  up  to  a  volume 
of  500  cc.  and  filtered  through  a  dry  filter,  and  if  200  cc.  of  the 
filtrate  is  heated  to  boiling,  and  10  cc.  of  barium  chloride  solution  is 
added,  the  mixture  allowed  to  stand  for  twenty-four  hours,  the  pre- 
cipitate of  barium  sulfate  collected,  heated  and  weighed  in  the  usual 
way,  the  weight  of  barium  sulfate  obtained  will  correspond  to  from 
5  to  7  per  cent  of  ammonium  sulfate.  If  from  0.5  to  1  Gm.  of 
ichthynat  is  weighed  into  a  Kjeldahl  flask,  diluted  with  30  cc,  of  water, 
and  5  Gm.  of  potassium  chlorate  added,  followed  by  30  cc.  of  nitric 
acid,  the  mixture  evaporated  to  about  5  cc,  and  25  cc.  of  hydro- 
chloric acid  added,  this  solution  evaporated  to  about  5  cc,  25  cc.  of 
hydrochloric  acid  again  added,  this  solution  evaporated  to  about  5  cc, 
100  cc.  of  water  added,  this  solution  heated  to  boiling,  10  cc.  of  barium 
chloride  solution  added,  the  mixture  allowed  to  stand  for  twenty-four 
hours,  the  precipitate  of  barium  sulfate  collected,  heated  and  weighed 
in  the  usual  way,  the  weight  of  barivim  sulfate  will  correspond  to 
from  8  to  10  per  cent  of  total  sulfur.  If  the  ammonia  contained  in 
the  ammonium  sulfate  as  previously  determined  in  ichthynat  is  calcu- 
lated, and  the  result  subtracted  from  the  "total  ammonia"  as  previously 
determined,  the  remainder  will  represent  the  ammonia  combined  with 
the  organic-sulfonic  acids.  If  this  value  is  multiplied  by  1.88,  the 
result  (from  3  to  5  per  cent)  will  represent  the  sulfur  present  in 
the  sulfonic  acids  in  an  oxidized  state,  i.  e.,  the  "sulfonic  sulfur." 
If  the  sulfur  contained  in  the  ammonium  sulfate  as  previously  deter- 
mined in  ichthynat  is  calculated,  and  the  result  subtracted  from  the 
"total  sulfur"  as  previously  determined,  the  remainder  will  represent 
the  sulfur  present  in  the  organic  sulfonic  acids  contained  in  the  sub- 
stance. If  the  "sulfonic"  sulfur  in  ichthynat  as  previously  calculated 
is  subtracted  from  the  sulfur  in  the  organic-sulfonic  acids  as  previously 
calculated,  the  remainder  will  correspond  to  at  least  5  per  cent  of 
"organic"    ("sulfide")    sulfur. 


436     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 
Ichthyol. — A  brand  of  Ichthammol,  N.  F. 

Manufactured  by  the  Ichthyol  Company,  Rahway,  N.  J.  (Merck  &  Co., 
Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S.  trademark 
62,603. 

Ichthyol  conforms  to  the  standards  of  Ichthammol,  N.  F.  VI,  and 
in  addition  to  the  following  standards:  Dissolve  10  Gm.  of  ichthyol  in 
90  cc.  of  water,  in  a  glass-stoppered  cylinder  and  allow  to  remain 
undisturbed  for  twenty-four  hours:  no  deposit  forms.  Transfer  0.5  to 
1  Gm.  of  ichthyol  accurately  weighed  to  a  Kjeldahl  flask,  dilute  with 
30  cc.  of  water,  add  5  Gm.  of  potassium  chlorate  and  30  cc,  of  hydro- 
chloric acid,  evaporate  the  mixture  to  about  5  cc,  add  25  cc.  of 
hydrochloric  acid,  evaporate  this  solution  to  about  5  cc,  again  add 
25  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid,  evaporate  to  about  5  cc,  then  add 
100  cc  of  water;  heat  the  solution  to  boiling,  add  10  cc.  of  barium 
chloride  solution,  allow  the  mixture  to  stand  twenty-four  hours:  the 
weight  of  the  precipitated  barium  sulfate  determined  in  the  usual  way 
will  correspond  to  at  least  10  per  cent  of  total  sulfur.  If  the  ammonia 
contained  in  the  ammonium  sulfate  as  previously  determined  in  ichthyol 
is  calculated,  and  the  result  substracted  from  the  "total  ammonia"  as 
previously  determined,  the  remainder  will  represent  the  ammonia  com- 
bined with  the  organic  sulfonic  acids.  If  this  value  is  multiplied  by 
1.88  the  result  will  represent  the  sulfur  present  in  the  sulfonic  acids 
in  an  oxidized  state;  i.  e.,  the  "sulfonic  sulfur."  If  the  sulfur  con- 
tained in  the  ammonium  sulfate  as  previously  determined  in  ichthyol 
is  calculated,  and  the  result  subtracted  from  the  "total  sulfur"  as  pre- 
viously determined,  the  remainder  will  represent  the  sulfur  present  in 
the  organic  sulfonic  acids  contained  in  the  substance.  If  the  "sulfonic" 
sulfur  in  ichthyol  as  previously  calculated  is  sul)tracted  from  the  sulfur 
in  the  organic-sulfonic  acids  as  previously  calculated,  the  remainder 
will  correspond  to  at  least  5.5   per  cent  of  "organic"   ("sulfide")   sulfur. 

Isarol-Ciba. — A  brand  of  Ichthammol,  N,  F. 

Manufactured  by  the  Society  of  Chemical  Industry  in  Basle,  Switzer- 
land (Ciba  Company,  Inc,  New  York),  No  U,  S.  patent,  U,  S.  trade- 
mark,  97,007. 

Isarol-Ciba  is  a  reddish-brown  to  brownish-black  syrupy  liquid  with 
a  strong  characteristic  empyreumatic  odor.  It  is  soluble  in  water  and 
in  glycerin,  and  is  miscible  with  fixed  oils  and  fats.  It  is  partly  soluble 
in  alcohol  or  ether,  and  entirely  soluble  in  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes 
of  these  solvents.  An  aqueous  solution  (1  in  10)  may  be  faintly  acid  or 
faintly  alkaline  to  litmus  paper.  The  addition  of  hydrochloric  acid 
to  this  solution  precipitates  a  dark  resinous  mass  which  is  soluble  in 
ether. 

Incinerate  a  weighed  portion  of  isarol-Ciba:  the  ash  does  not  exceed 
0.5  per  cent.  Dry  a  weighed  portion  on  a  water  bath  to  constant 
weight:  the  loss  is  not  more  than  50  per  cent. 

Accurately  weigh  about  5  Gm.  of  isarol-Ciba,  dissolve  in  100  cc. 
of  water,  transfer  to  a  distillation  flask,  add  an  excess  of  sodium 
hydroxide  solution  and  distil  slowly;  collect  the  distillate  (about  50  cc.) 
in  15  cc  of  normal  sulfuric  acid;  when  the  distillation  is  completed, 
titrate  the  excess  of  sulfuric  acid  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide, 
using  methyl  orange  as  indicator:  the  amount  of  ammonia  found  is  not 
less  than  2.5  per  cent.  Accurately  weigh  about  1  Gm.  of  isarol-Ciba; 
transfer  to  a  100  cc,  beaker  and  add  25  cc,  of  alcohol;  stir  thoroughly, 
filter,  and  wash  the  filter  with  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  ether  and 
alcohol  until  the  washings  are  clear  and  colorless;  dry  the  residue  on 
the  filter  at  100  C,  cool,  and  wash  the_  filter  with  200  cc.  of  warm 
water  slightly  acidulated  with  hydrochloric  acid;  determine  the  sulfate 
in  the  solution  by  precipitation  with  barium  chloride  solution,  and  after 
washing,  drying,  igniting  and  weighing,  calculate  the  results  to  ammo- 
nium sulfate:  the  amount  found  is  not  more  than  8  per  cent.  Dry 
about  1  Gm.  of  isarol-Ciba  on  a  watch  glass  to  constant  weight  at 
105  C. ;  pulverize  the  dried  material  and  transfer  about  0.5  Gm.,  accu- 
rately weighed,  to  a  nickel  crucible;  add  about  9  Gm.  of  sulfur-free 
sodium  peroxide,  and  mix  thoroughly;  place  the  crucible  carefully  in 
a  beaker  containing  cold  distilled  water,  which  should  reach  about  half- 
way  to   the  top;    ignite   the   dry   mixture   in  the   crucible   by   thrusting   a 


SULFONMETHANES  437 

red  hot  iron  wire  through  a  hole  in  the  cover  of  the  crucible;  after 
complete  combustion  has  taken  place,  tip  the  crucible  and  allow  the 
fused  mass  to  dissolve  in  the  distilled  water;  add  hydrochloric  acid 
in  slight  excess,  heat  to  boiling,  and  determine  the  sulfate  in  the 
solution  by  precipitation  with  barium  chloride  solution,  and  after 
washing,  drying,  igniting  and  weighing,  calculate  the  results  to  sulfur: 
the  total  sulfur   should  not  be  less  than   10   per  cent. 

THIGENOL-ROCHE.  —  Solution  of  Sodium  Sulfo- 
Oleate-Roche.  —  A  solution  of  the  sodium  salts  of  synthetic 
sulfo-oleic-acids,  containing  2.85  per  cent  of  sulfur. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Sulfoichthyolate 
Preparations  and  Substitutes. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hofifmann-La  Roche  &  Co.,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(Hoffmann-La  Roche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J,,  distributor).  No  U.  S.  patent. 
L;.   S.  trademark  80,424. 

Precipitated  sulfur  is  dissolved  by  boiling  in  the  glyceride  of  oleic 
acid;  the  resulting  solution  is  treated  with  sulfuric  acid,  during  which 
process  sulfurous  acid  escapes,  and  a  sulfo-oleic  acid  is  separated 
out.  The  separated  sulfo-acid  is  then  obtained  by  pouring  into  water 
and  subsequently  washing  thoroughly.  By  treatment  with  solution  of 
sodium  hydroxide,  there  results  a  solution  of  sodium  sulfo-oleate, 
which  is  evaporated  in  vacuo  until  it  has  a  specific  gravity  of  from 
1.05  to  1.06. 

Thigenol  is  a  dark  brown  liquid,  having  a  faint  sulfurous  odor, 
It  is  soluble  in  one  or  more  parts  of  water,  dilute  alcohol,  glycerin, 
chloroform,  or  oily  or  fatty  bases,  with  any  one  of  which  it  mixes 
freely.  When  water  is  the  vehicle  employed,  it  should  be  distilled; 
hard  water  will  cause  a  precipitate. 

Thigenol    is    incompatible   with    mineral   acids   or   acetic   acid. 


SULFONMETHANES 

Two  analogous  compounds  formed  by  the  substitution  of 
sulfone  radicals  in  methane  have  been  applied  in  therapeutics. 
The  first,  sulfonmethane-N.  F.  (sulfonal)  is  diethylsulfon- 
dimethylmethane ;  the  second,  sulfonethylmethane-U.  S.  P. 
(trional)  is  diethylsulfonemethylethylmethane.  The  latter  has 
been  generally  given  the  preference, 

Sulfonmethane  is  soluble  with  difficulty  and  slowly  absorbed 
and  its  hypnotic  action  is  but  slowly  established ;  sulfonethyl- 
methane  is  somewhat  more  soluble  than  sulfonal  and  acts  more 
quickly.  Both  drugs  are  preferably  given  in  hot  liquids ;  and 
in  the  case  of  sulfonmethane,  the  hypnotic  effect  is  likely  to 
be  postponed  for  several  hours.  Sometimes  it  is  not  developed 
until  the  following  day,  Sulfonethylmethane  is  usually  effec- 
tive in  an  hour  or  two. 

The  sulfonmethanes  in  therapeutic  doses  produce  sleep 
without  noticeable  effect  on  the  circulation  or  respiration.  In 
larger  doses,  acute  poisoning  occurs,  evidenced  by  disturbances 
of  the  digestive  organs,  the  metabolism  and  the  nervous  system. 
When  administered  for  too  long  a  period,  cumulation  is  likely 
to  occur,  producing  a  condition  of  chronic  poisoning  which 
terminates  fatally  in  a  large  percentage  of  cases.  In  such 
cases,  hematoporphyrin  derived  from  hemoglobin  turns  the  urine 


438     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

pink  or  red.  This  should  serve  as  a  warning,  indicating  the 
immediate  withdrawal  of  the  drug. 

The  symptoms  of  poisoning  consist  of  persisting  confusion, 
ataxia,  constipation,  vomiting,  albuminuria  and  nephritis. 

Dosage. — The  usual  dose  of  either  sulfonmethane  or  sulfon- 
ethylmethane  is  1.0  Gm,  with  a  maximum  of  2  Gm.  for  the 
first  and  4  Gm.  for  the  second.  When  these  drugs  are  used 
frequently,  the  administration  should  be  suspended  once  in  two 
or  three  days  to  allow  of  complete  elimination,  and  the  urine 
should   be   examined   frequently   for   hematoporphyrin. 

SULFONMETHANE.  — For  standards  see  the  National 
Formulary  under  Sulfonmethanum. 

Actions,  Uses  and  Dosage.  —  See  preceding  article,  Sulfon- 
methanes. 

Sulfonal.  —  A  nonproprietary  name  applied  to  sulfon- 
methane. 

SULFONETHYLMETHANE.  —  Diethylsulfonmethyl- 
ethylmethane. — For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under 
Sulfonethylmethanum. 

Trional. — A  nonproprietary  name  applied  to  sulfonmethyl- 
methane. 


TANNIC     ACID     DERIVATIVES 

The  pharmacologic  actions  of  tannic  acid  are  due  to  its 
property  of  precipitating  protein.  Its  most  important  use  is  in 
the  treatment  of  burns,  for  which  the  free  tannic  acid  must  be 
employed.  Internally,  tannic  acid  has  been  used  in  diarrhea ; 
but  if  tannic  acid  is  given  as  such,  it  is  rapidly  dissolved  in  the 
stomach,  and  may  then  produce  excessive  gastric  irritation, 
nausea  and  even  vomiting.  The  desire  to  avoid  these  effects 
has  prompted  the  introduction  of  relatively  insoluble  compounds 
of  tannin,  which  would  act  but  little,  if  at  all,  in  the  stomach ; 
and  whose  action  would  extend  farther  down  the  intestines. 
This  was  sought  to  be  accomplished  by  utilizing  the  differences 
in  reaction  (hydrogen  ion  concentration)  at  the  various  levels 
of  the  alimentary  tract.  It  was  therefore  aimed  to  make  the 
compounds  insoluble  in  diluted  acids,  and  soluble  in  diluted 
alkalis.  This  object  has  not  been  entirely  attained  and  is  prob- 
ably not  really  desirable  in  view  of  the  frequent  slightly  acid 
reaction  of  the  intestinal  contents.  It  is  probably  more  impor- 
tant that  the  compounds  should  be  but  slowly  soluble  in  any 
reaction  that  occurs  in  the  alimentary  tract. 

Types  of  Tannic  Acid  Derivatives. — Four  types  have  been 
marketed:  (1)  organic  esters  of  tannic  acid,  represented  by 
acetyltannic  acid  (acetyltannic  acid-U.  S.  P.,  tannigen)  ;  (2) 
coagulated  tannin  proteinate,  represented  by  exsiccated  tannin 
albuminate    (albumin   tannate-U.    S.   P.)  ;    (3)    tannin   caseinate 


TANNIC     ACID     DERIVATIVES  439 

(protan)  ;  and  (4)  a  heterogenous  group  of  other  compounds, 
such  as  bismuth  salts  of  tannic  acid,  etc.  The  chief  criteria 
for  evaluating  the  tannic  acid  compounds  are  their  solubilities 
or  speed  of  hydrolysis  during  various  reaction  periods  in  acid 
and  alkaline  solution,  with  or  without  the  addition  of  ferments. 

Importance  of  Differences  in  Solubility. — All  the  compounds 
are  somewhat  soluble  in  water ;  but  not  sufficiently  soluble  to 
affect  their  therapeutic  usefulness.  From  the  latter  stand- 
point, the  solubility  in  acid  gastric  juice  and  the  solubility 
in  sodium  bicarbonate  solution,  representing  the  maximum 
alkalinity  of  the  intestines,  are  most  important.  The  speed 
or  slowness  of  solution  is  at  least  as  important  as  the  abso- 
lute solubility. 

Insolubility  in  acid  gastric  juice  would  be  desirable,  theo- 
retically, by  precluding  gastric  side  effects.  In  fact,  however, 
it  is  probably  not  important,  provided  that  the  solution  is  slow, 
or  that  the  tannic  acid  is  taken  with  food.  Of  the  three 
types,  the  acetyltannic  acid-U.  S.  P.  is  the  least  soluble  in  gastric 
juice;  albumin  tannate-U.  S.  P.  is  fairly  soluble,  but  the  solution 
occurs  rather  slowly ;  protan  is  the  most  soluble,  and  the  solu- 
tion occurs  more  rapidly. 

Solubility  in  sodium  bicarbonate  solution  is,  of  course, 
necessary ;  in  fact,  the  fraction  that  does  not  dissolve  is 
merely  inert  ballast  in  the  therapeutic  use  which  could,  how- 
ever, be  compensated  by  increasing  the  dose  (all  three  classes 
contain  about  half  their  weight  of  tannic  acid).  The  most 
important  point  is,  therefore,  the  speed  of  solution.  The  more 
rapidly  the  tannic  acid  is  dissolved,  the  more  intensely  will 
it  act  on  the  upper  intestines,  and  the  less  on  the  lower 
portions.  In  the  case  of  acetyltannic  acid,  the  ester  must  also 
be  hydrolyzed  before  it  becomes  astringent.  The  rate  of  this 
hydrolysis  of  acetyltannic  acid-U.  S.  P.  is  about  the  same  as 
that  of  the  solution  of  albumin  tannate-U.  S.  P.,  in  both  cases 
requiring  more  than  three  hours  for  completion.  Under  clinical 
conditions  a  larger  part  of  the  albumin  tannate-U.  S.  P.  will 
have  been  dissolved  in  the  stomach,  and  it  will  thus  exert  a 
rather  stronger  action  in  the  duodenum,  and  probably  extend 
its  action  slightly  less  into  the  lower  intestines.  Clinically,  how- 
ever, the  difference  does  not  seem  to  be  large. 

Protan,  on  the  other  hand,  dissolves  completely  within  half 
an  hour,  so  that  its  action  would  be  much  greater  in  the  upper 
and  much  less  in  the  lower  intestines. 

Distinctive  Differences  in  Solubility. — All  the  compounds  are 
somewhat  soluble  in  water ;  acetyltannic  acid-U.  S.  P.,  not 
more  than  7,5  per  cent;  albumin  tannate-U.  S.  P.,  not  more 
than  20  per  cent;  protan  about  16  per  cent.  Artificial  gastric 
juice  (acid-pepsin  solution)  dissolves :  acetyltannic  acid-U.  S.  P., 
less  than  7.5  per  cent,  in  two  hours;  albumin  tannate-U.  S.  P., 
less  than  25  per  cent,  in  one-half  hour;  less  than  38  per  cent, 
in  two  hours ;  protan,  about  60  per  cent,  in  one-half  hour,  about 
72  per  cent,  in  two  hours.     Dilute  alkali   (1   per  cent  sodium 


440     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

bicarbonate)  hydrolyzes  from  33  to  50  per  cent  of  acetyltannic 
acid-U.  S.  P.  in  one-half  hour ;  75  per  cent  is  hydrolized  and 
85  per  cent  dissolved  in  three  hours.  Of  albumin  tannate- 
U.  S.  P.,  it  dissolves  from  35  to  50  per  cent  in  one-half  hour 
and  more  than  70  per  cent  in  two  hours.  Of  protan,  it  dissolves 
98  per  cent  in  one-half  hour. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  sparingly  soluble  tannic  acid  prep- 
arations are  used  in  diarrheal  affections,  particularly  those  of 
children.  They  should  not  be  employed  as  the  principal  cura- 
tive agent,  but  as  an  occasional  adjunct  to  the  proper  physical 
and  dietetic  remedies,  when  the  discharges  are  unduly  profuse. 

As  has  been  explained,  acetyltannic  acid-U.  S.  P.  and  albumin 
tannate-U.  S.  P.  act  at  all  levels  of  the  intestine.  Acetyltannic 
acid  might  be  expected  to  act  somewhat  more  mildly  in  the 
duodenum,  and  to  extend  its  action  somewhat  more  effectively 
into  the  lower  intestine ;  but  clinically  there  does  not  seem  to 
be  much,  if  any,  difference.  Protan  would  tend  to  expend  its 
action  mainly  on  the  upper  intestine. 

ACETYLTANNIC  ACID.— Diacetyltannic  Acid.— Tannyl 
Acetate. — Acetannin. — "A  product  obtained  by  the  acetylation  of 
tannic  acid."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Acidum 
Acetyltannicum. 

Actions  and  I'scs.  —  See  preceding  article,  Tannic  Acid 
Derivatives. 

Dosage. — From  0.2  to  0.7  Gm.  (3  to  10  grains),  four  times 
per  day,  taken  dry  on  the  tongue  followed  by  a  swallow  of 
water,  or  mixed  with  food,  avoiding  warm  or  alkaline  liquids. 

Tannigen.— A  brand  of  acetyltannic  acid-U.   S.   P. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent   expired. 

PROTAN.— Tannin  Nucleo-Proteid-Mulford.— A  chemical 
combination  of  casein  with  tannic  acid  containing  about  50  per 
cent  tannic  acid. 

Actions^  and  Uses. — Protan  is  said  to  be  useful  as  an  intes- 
tinal astringent  in  all  forms  of  diarrhea. 

Dosage. — For  infants  and  children,  from  0.3  to  0.6  Gm.  (5  to 
10  grains)  every  hour;  in  acute  catarrhal  diarrhea  (cholera 
morbus),  from  1  to  2  Gm.  (15  to  30  grains)  every  one  or  two 
hours;  in  chronic  diarrhea,  from  1.3  to  2  Gm.  (20  to  30  grains) 
every  hour  or  two  hours. 

Manufactured    by    Sharp    &    Dohme,    Philadelphia    and    Baltimore.      No 
U.  S.  patent.     U.  S.  trademark  38,616. 
Compressed  Tablets,  Protan,   5  grains. 

Protan  is  made  by  adding  a  solution  of  tannic  acid  to  an  alkaline 
solution    of   casein,    collecting    and    drying    the    precipitate. 

It  is  a  light  brown  powder,  tasteless,  and  free  from  astringent  action 
on  the  mouth  and  stomach;  insoluble  in  water  or  dilute  acids,  and 
does   not   coagulate  albumin   or   precipitate   pepsin   or   peptones. 


TETRACHLORETHYLENE  441 

When  protan  is  shaken  with  water  and  filtered,  a  colorless  solution 
should  be  obtained,  which  should  give  not  more  than  a  faint  trace  of 
color  with  ferric  chloride  solution,  showing  absence  of  more  than 
traces  of  free  (uncombined)  tannic  acid.  The  resistance  of  protan  to 
the  action  of  the  gastric  juice  may  be  shown  by  mixing  2  Gm.  (dried 
at  100  C.)  with  40  cc.  of  0.2  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid  containing 
ten  times  the  theoretical  amount  of  1  in  3,000  pepsin  necessary  to 
digest  the  protein  present,  warming  to  40  C.  for  six  hours,  filtering 
off  the  residue,  drying  and  weighing;  from  60  to  70  per  cent  of  the 
amount  taken  may  thus  be  recovered.  The  tannin  may  best  be  deter- 
mined by  difference,  the  casein  being  determined  by  decomposing  it 
by   the   Kjeldahl-Gunning   method  and   estimating  the   nitrogen. 

TETRACHLORETHYLENE.—".  .  .  contains  not  less 
than  99  per  cent  and  not  more  than  99.5  per  cent  of  CCI2 :  CCU', 
the  remainder  consisting  of  alcohol."     A^.  F. 

For  standards  see  the  National  Formulary  under  Tctra- 
chlorethylenum. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Observations  of  many  workers  have 
shown  that  tetrachlorethylene  is  a  useful  anthelmintic  for  the 
treatment  of  hookworm  infestation.  It  has  been  used  against 
other  worms  with  less  success,  although  there  is  some  evidence 
that  it  is  useful  in  Trichuris  infestation.  It  may  be  lethal  to 
Ascaris  but  its  use  in  that  infestation  is  not  advised  because  of 
the  danger  of  causing  migration  of  the  worms.  It  is  the  con- 
sensus of  the  investigators  that  tetrachlorethylene  is  less  toxic 
than  carbon  tetrachloride  (CCU)  and  at  least  as  efficacious  as 
the  latter  drug.  It  has  a  further  advantage  over  carbon  tetra- 
chloride in  that  it  does  not  lower  the  guanidine  content  of  the 
blood,  which  is  important  in  cases  exhibiting  a  calcium 
deficiency.  Untoward  reactions  are  rare,  but  giddiness,  vomit- 
ing and  drowsiness  have  been  reported  in  some  cases.  It  is 
probably  better  to  keep  the  patient  (especially  children)  in 
bed  during  the  treatment. 

Dosage. — From  1  to  3  cc.  depending  on  the  age  of  the 
patient.  Tetrachlorethylene  is  usually  given  in  soft  gelatin 
capsules  but  has  also  been  administered  to  children  on  a  lump 
of  sugar.  The  gastro-intestinal  tract  should  be  thoroughly 
emptied  before  administering  tetrachlorethylene.  Fats  and 
alcohol  must  be  avoided,  because  they  favor  absorption  of  the 
drug.  A  dose  of  tetrachlorethylene  should  be  followed  by  a 
saline  cathartic  of  sodium  or  magnesium  sulfate.  One  dose 
frequently  suffices,  but  if  necessary  it  may  be  repeated  once 
after  a  period  of  from  ten  days  to  two  weeks. 

Note. — Broken  capsules  should  be  discarded ;  the  solution 
should  never  be  employed  if  it  has  been  exposed  to  the  air 
for  more  than  a  very  brief  time,  because  of  the  possibility  of 
phosgene  formation  by  decomposition. 

Tetrachlorethylene-Calco. — A  brand  of  tetrachlorethylene 
N.  F.,  marketed  in  soft  gelatin  capsules  each  containing  1  cc. 
of  tetrachlorethylene. 

Manufactured  by  Calco  Chemical   Co..   Inc.    (a  division  of  the  American 
Cyanamid  Co.).   Bound   Brook,  N.  J.      No  U.   S.   patent  or  trademark. 
Tctrachlorcthylene-Calco,    1   cc. 


442     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

THYROXINE 

Actions  and  Uses. — Thyroxine  (Thyroxinum,  U.  S.  P.)  is 
used  essentially  for  the  same  purpose  as  Thyroid-U.  S.  P.,  but 
the  dosage  may  be  more  accurately  determined  and  results  more 
quickly  obtained.  It  is  indicated  in  cases  of  diminished  or 
absent  thyroid  functioning,  such  as  simple  goiter,  cretinism 
and  myxedema.  Reports  show  that  thyroxine  affects  the  pulse 
rate,  blood  pressure,  nitrogen  metabolism,  relieves  symptoms 
of  myxedema  and  will  produce  hyperthyroidism.  The  most 
important  quantitative  measure  is  the  determination  of  the 
basal  metabolic  rate.  One  milligram  (0.001  Gm.)  of  thyroxine 
increases  the  basal  metabolic  rate  in  adults  approximately  2  per 
cent.  The  relation  holds  for  larger  amounts,  that  is,  10  milli- 
grams increases  the  metabolic  rate  20  per  cent  and  it  is  through 
the  basal  metabolic  rate  that  the  pharmacologic  action  of 
thyroxine  can  be  followed  best.  When  given  by  mouth  or 
intravenously,  there  is  no  immediate  effect  except  occasionally 
when  an  increase  in  pulse  rate  and  respiration  occurs,  which 
however,  will  soon  disappear.  After  from  twenty-four  to 
thirty-six  hours,  there  is  a  noticeable  increase  in  pulse  rate. 
There  may  be  loss  of  weight  and  beginning  of  nervous  mani- 
festations. If  the  dosage  is  continued  for  five  or  six  days,  the 
typical  so-called  hyperthyroid  symptoms  may  be  produced:  loss 
of  weight,  increased  pulse  rate  with  tachycardia,  nervous  mani- 
festations and  a  sense  of  fatigue.  With  small  doses,  the  harm- 
ful effects  are  not  produced  and  a  stimulating  effect  is  manifest 
in  cases  of  myxedema.  The  amount  of  thyroxine  required  to 
produce  toxic  effects  is  exceedingly  small.  It  has  been  reported 
that  the  maximum  effect  from  a  single  injection  is  not  reached 
until  the  tenth  day,  the  duration  of  the  effects  being  about  three 
weeks. 

In  some  forms  of  goiter  (such  as  simple  adolescent  colloid 
goiter),  the  function  of  the  thyroid  is  defective  and  the  admin- 
istration of  thyroxine  is  indicated ;  but  in  many  cases  of  goiter 
(especially  exophthalmic)  thyroxine  should  never  be  admin- 
istered. 

Dosage. — From  0.2  mg.  to  2  mg.  Thyroxine  should  always 
be  given  at  first  in  minimum  doses  and  in  each  case  the 
optimum  amount  determined  by  trial.  For  the  exact  determina- 
tion of  this  dose,  the  establishment  of  the  basal  metabolic  rate 
for  each  given  case  is  necessary.  In  general  a  normal  adult  will 
show  evidences  of  hyperthyroidism  if  given  as  much  as  2  mg. 
per  day.  A  person  afflicted  with  high-grade  myxedema  requires 
from  1.5  to  2  mg.  per  day;  a  small  cretin  requires  from  0.2  to 
0.4  mg.  every  day  or  every  other  day. 

Thyroxine  may  be  administered  either  by  intravenous  injec- 
tion or  by  mouth.  In  those  cases  in  which  thyroxine  is  not 
absorbed  quantitatively  when  given  by  mouth  it  may  be  given 
intravenously  as  follows :  Place  a  known  amount  of  pure 
crystalline  thyroxine — from  1  to  10  mg. — in  a  small  sterile  test 


THYROXINE  443 

tube,  such  as  is  used  for  the  Wassermann  test.  Add  1  drop 
of  10  per  cent  sodium  hydroxide  solution  and  about  1  cc.  of 
water.  Warm  and  agitate  the  solution  until  the  crystals  are 
dissolved,  and  then  sterilize  by  placing  the  tube  in  boiling 
water.  Transfer  the  solution  to  a  sterile  hypodermic  syringe, 
rinse  out  the  test  tube  with  1  cc.  of  sterile  distilled  water,  adding 
this  to  the  solution  in  the  syringe,  and  then  inject  the  contents 
of  the  syringe  intravenously. 

In  many  cases,  after  symptoms  of  hypothyroidism  have  dis- 
appeared, remarkably  small  doses  suffice  to  keep  the  patient  in 
an  almost  normal  state.  The  patient  should  be  careful  of  exer- 
tion and  should  take  sufficient  protein  in  the  diet  to  compensate 
for  increased  loss  of  nitrogen  from  the  action  of  the  drug. 

THYROXIN. — "An  active  physiological  principle  obtained 
from  the  thyroid  gland,  or  prepared  synthetically,  and  contains 
not  less  than  64  per  cent  of  iodine  as  an  integral  part  of  the 
Thyroxin  molecule."     U .  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Thyroxinum. 

Thyroxin   (Squibb). — A  brand  of  thyroxin-U.  S.  P. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.   Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York. 

SYNTHETIC  THYROXINE-ROCHE.— iS[3',  5'-diiodo- 
4'-)3,5  diiodo-4-hydroxyphenoxy)  phenyl] -a-aminopropionic 
acid.— HOCeH2l2.0C6H2l2.CH2CH(NH2)COOH.  A  tetraiodo- 
derivative  of  /^-hydroxyphenyl  ether  of  tyrosine;  it  contains  not 
less  than  65  per  cent  of  iodine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article.  Thyroxin. 

Dosage. — See  preceding  article.  Thyroxin. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hoffmann-LaRoche  &  Company,  Basle,  Switzer- 
land (Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.,  distributor).  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Ampuls  Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche,  1.1  cc:  Each  cubic  centimeter 
contains   1   mg.  of  synthetic  thyroxine-Roche. 

Solution  Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche :  Each  cubic  centimeter  contains 
2  mg.  of  synthetic  thyroxine-Roche, 

Tablets  Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche,  1   mg. 

Synthetic  thyroxine  is  a  white  or  slightly  yellow,  needle-like,  odorless, 
crystalline  powder. 

It  is  insoluble  in  water  and  practically  insoluble  in  alcohol  or  the 
other  more  common  organic  solvents,  but  in  the  presence  of  mineral 
acids  it  dissolves  in  alcohol,  is  soluble  in  solutions  of  the  alkali 
hydroxides,  and  on  saturation  with  sodium  chloride  the  sodium  salt 
of  thyroxine  separates.  Synthetic  thyroxine  melts  with  decomposition 
between  225  and  228  C. 

Transfer  about  0.1  Gm.  of  synthetic  thyroxine^  to  a  small  hard  glass 
test  tube  containing  a  piece  of  sodium  about  the  size  of  a  pea,  previously 
melted;  after  the  first  violent  action  has  ceased,  heat  until  contents  of 
test  tube  are  decomposed:  vapors  of  iodine  are  evolved;  the  tube  and 
contents  are  allowed  to  cool;  add  10  cc.  of  water ;_  the  mixture  is  boiled 
for  a  few  minutes;  filter  through  paper  and  divide  into  two  portions. 
To  one  portion  add  a  few  drops  of  sodium  hydroxide  solution  followed 
by  the  addition  of  a  few  drops  of  freshly  prepared  ferrous  _  sulphate 
solution  and  finally  a  few  drops  of  ferric  chloride  solution  and. 
after  agitation,  add  just  enough  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  to  dis- 
solve   the     iron     hydroxides:     a     very     finely     divided     blue     precipitate 


444     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

results;  to  the  other  portion  add  1  cc.  of  concentrated  nitric  acid, 
boil,  cool  and  add  1  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution:  a  curdy  yellow  pre- 
cipitate results,  insoluble  in  a  large  excess  of  stronger  ammonia  water. 
Add  about  0.01  Gm.  of  synthetic  thyroxine  to  1  cc.  of  a  one  per  cent 
solution  of  triketohydrindene-hydrate  {Ninhydrin)  solution  and  boil  for 
one   minute:    a   blue   color    results. 

Place  about  0.03  Gm.  of  synthetic  thyroxine  in  a  50  cc.  glass 
stoppered  cylinder,  add  30  cc.  of  water,  shake  the  contents  for  five 
minutes,  filter  through  paper:  separate  portions  of  2  cc.  each  of  the 
filtrate  yield  no  opalescence  with  0.5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and 
0.5  cc.  of  silver  nitrate  solution  (soluble  halides);  no  turbidity  with 
0.5  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid  and  0.5  cc.  of  barium  nitrate  solution 
(sulfates);  no  coloration  or  precipitation  on  saturation  with  hydrogen 
sulfide   (salts  of   heavy   metals). 

Incinerate  about  0.05  Gm.  of  synthetic  thyroxine,  accurately  weighed; 
the  residue  is  negligible.  Dry  about  0.05  Gm.,  accurately  weighed,  for 
24  hours  over  sulfuric  acid  in  a  partial  vacuum:  the  loss  in  weight 
should  not  exceed  1  per  cent.  Weigh  accurately  about  0.1  Gm.  of 
the  substance,  previously  dried  for  24  hours  over  sulfuric  acid,  and 
transfer  to  a  bomb  tube:  determine  the  iodine  content  by  the  Carius 
method:  the  amount  of  iodine  found  should  not  be  less  than  65  per 
cent,  nor  more  than  66.5   per   cent. 

THYROXINE  CRUDE.— The  partially  purified  disodium 
salt  of  thyroxine,  approximately  25  per  cent  admixed  with  the 
acid-insoluble  humus-like  products  of  protein  hydrolysis. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  thyroxine,  except 
that  it  is  not  to  be  used  for  injection.  In  certain  individuals 
in  whom  the  thyroxine  equivalent  is  not  absorbed  quantitatively, 
the  pure  crystalline  thyroxine  should  be  given  intravenously  (see 
under  thyroxine). 

Dosage. — Thyroxine  crude  is  supplied  in  the  form  of  tablets 
for  oral  administration,  representing  a  stated  weight  of  thy- 
roxine.  Thyroxine  crude  must  not  be  administered  intravenously. 

Manufactured  by  E.   R.   Squibb   &   Sons,   New  York,  by  license  of  the 

University  of  Minnesota.     U.  S.  patents,  1,392,767   (Oct.  4,  1921;  expires 

1938),  and   1,392,768   (Oct.  4,  1921;  expires  1938). 

Thyroxine    Tablets,    0.2    mg.:     Each    tablet    contains    thyroxine    crude, 

equivalent  to  0.2  mg.  thyroxine. 

Thyroxine    Tablets,    0.4    mg.:     Each    tablet    contains    thyroxine    crude, 

equivalent  to   0.4  mg.   thyroxine. 

Thyroxine    Tablets,    0.8    mg. :     Each    tablet    contains    thyroxine    crude, 

equivalent  to  0.8  mg.   thyroxine. 

Thyroxine    Tablets,    2.0    mg :      Each    tablet    contains    thyroxine    crude. 

equivalent  to  2.0  mg.  thyroxine. 

Thyroid  glands  of  animals  are  hydrolyzed  by  treatment  with  sodium 
hydroxide  solution.  The  resulting  soaps  and  alkali  insoluble  materials 
are  removed.  The  clarified  hydrolysate  is  precipitated  with  acid  and 
filtered.  The  precipitation  is  twice  repeated  and  the  residue^  finally 
redissolved  in  a  slight  excess  of  sodium  carbonate  solution,  dried  and 
powdered.  The  thyroxine  content  is  determined  by  the  assay  described 
below  and  the  product  made  into  tablets  with  sucrose  and  lactose  as 
vehicles. 

Thyroxine  crude  is  a  light  brown  powder  having  a  characteristic  odor 
and  an  alkaline  taste.  It  is  soluble  in  water;  decomposed  by  acids. 
The  following  method  may  be  applied  for  the  assay  of  thyroxine 
tablets : 

Weigh  accurately  five  or  ten  tablets.  Grind  finely  the  tablets  and 
weigh  out  a  sample  of  the  powdered  thyroxine  for  analysis;  place  over 
sulfuric  acid  in  a  desiccator  for  twenty-four  hours  and  determine 
loss  in  weight.  Deliver  the  dried  sample  in  a  beaker  and  add  10  cc. 
sodium     hydroxide     solution,     30     per     cent.       Dissolve    the     sample    by 


URETHANES,     UREA     AND     UREIDS         445 

"working"  it  with  the  aid  of  a  glass  rod;  add  50  cc.  of  water.  Filter 
the  solution  into  a  small  beaker,  wash  the  original  beaker  and  filter 
paper  with  sodium  hydroxide  test  solution.  Make  the  filtrate  faintly 
acid  with  dilute  sulfuric  acid  solution;  filter  off  the  precipitate  and 
wash  it.  Determine  the  iodine  content  in  the  precipitate  according 
to  the  method  of  Kendall  {Jour.  Biol.  Chem.  19:252,  1914),  and 
calculate  the  amount  of  thyroxine  in  the  dried  specimen  and  in  tablets. 
(The  iodine  in  the  precipitate  is  thyroxine  iodine;  any  iodine  in  the 
filtrate  is  from  other  iodine  containing  compounds,  and  is  physiologically 
inactive.  Thyroxine  tablets-Squibb  contain  a  small  amount  of  humus- 
like substance  resulting  from  the  hydrolysis  of  the  protein.) 


URETHANES  (CARBAMATES),  UREA 
AND  UREIDS 

The  starting-point  of  this  group  is  urea,  which  is  carbamide, 
NH2CO.NH0.  By  the  addition  of  a  molecule  of  water  to  this 
compound,  we  have  ammonium  carbamate,  NH2COOXH4;  sub- 
stitution of  ethyl  for  ammonium  yields  ethyl  carbamate  (ure- 
thane),  NHsCCOCCoHs).  By  substitution  of  phenyl  for 
hydrogen,  we  get  NH(C6H5).CO.O(C2H5),  phenyl  urethane 
or  phenyl  ethyl  carbamate.  By  substituting  for  the  ethyl  of 
urethane  the  radical  of  methyl  propyl  carbinol,  we  get  methyl 
propyl  carbinol  urethane,  XH2.CO.O.CH(CH3)CH2.CH2CH3  or 
hedonal. 

Urethanes  are  diuretic  and  hypnotic  agents.  They  are  oxi- 
dized in  the  system  to  carbon  dioxide  and  urea.  Urethane  is  a 
comparatively  feeble  hypnotic. 

ADALIN. — See  Bromine  Derivatives. 

BARBITAL    AND    BARBITAL    DERIVATIVES.— 

See  Barbital  and  Barbital   Compounds. 

UREA. — Urea. — CO(NH2)2. — The  diamide  of  carbonic  acid. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Urea  is  an  active  diuretic:  it  is  rapidly 
eliminated  and  is  not  poisonous.  It  is  useless  in  the  treatment 
of  tuberculosis,  and  has  no  important  solvent  action  on  urinary 
calculi.  It  may  be  employed  when  diuresis  is  indicated,  though 
it  appears  irrational  in  any  renal  disease  characterized  by  reten- 
tion of  nitrogen. 

Dosage. — From  0.5  to  4  Gm.  (8  to  60  grains).  Urea  is  given 
in  solution,  or  it  may  be  enclosed  in  cachets. 

Urea  occurs  as  colorless,  transparent  prismatic  crystals,  almost  odor- 
less and  having  a  cooling  saline  taste.  It  is  somewhat  hygroscopic. 
It  is  soluble  in  water  (1  in  1),  more  readily  in  hot  water;  soluble  in 
alcohol  (about  1  in  10)  and  (1  in  1)  in  boiling  alcohol.  It  is  insoluble 
in  ether  and  chloroform;  it  fuses  at  132  C,  evolving  ammonia  and 
ammonium  cyanate.  Kept  at  150  C,  for  some  time,  most  of  it  is  con- 
verted to  biuret.  If  the  temperature  is  raised  to  170  C.  the  biuret 
evolves  ammonia  and  is  converted  to  cyanuric  acid.  Heated  with  water 
under  pressure,  it  is  decomposed  into  ammonium  carbonate.  It  is  not 
alkaline,  but  is  a  weak  base  and  though  a  diamide,  forms  salts  like  a 
monacid  base;  these  are  acid  to  litmus.  By  hydrolysis  it  is  converted 
into_  ammonia  and  carbon  dioxide.  Nitric  and  oxalic  acids  produce 
precipitates  when  added  to  concentrated  solutions  of  urea. 

Urea-Merck. — A  brand  of  urea-N.  N.  R, 

Merck   &   Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway.  N.  J.,  distributor. 


446     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

VITAMINS    AND  VITAMIN    PREPARATIONS 
FOR     PROPHYLACTIC     AND     THERA- 
PEUTIC    USE 

Vitamins 

The  investigations  of  nutrition  that  have  been  initiated  since 
the  second  decade  of  the  present  century  have  afforded  an 
entirely  new  outlook  upon  many  disorders,  some  of  which  have 
long  been  suspected  to  be  of  dietary  origin.  This  is  due  to 
the  scientific  demonstration  that  in  addition  to  the  long  recog- 
nized proximate  principles — the  proteins,  carbohydrates  and  fats 
— which  yield  the  energy  requisite  for  life  and  activity  and 
which,  along  with  certain  inorganic  elements,  form  the  struc- 
ture of  the  tissues  and  the  fluids  of  the  organism,  other  factors 
also  are  essential  for  the  preservation  of  bodily  well  being  and 
physiologic  function.  They  are  at  present  commonly  designated 
as  vitamins. 

The  absence  of  any  one  of  the  vitamins  from  a  diet  which 
is  satisfactory  in  other  respects  leads  to  the  development  of 
a  typical  syndrome  which  is  called  a  "deficiency  disease." 
These  diseases  may  be  as  striking  in  their  manifestations  as 
are  the  direct  result  of  underfeeding  (caloric  deficiency)  or 
deprivation  of  essential  inorganic  elements  such  as  iodine,  iron, 
calcium  or  phosphorus.  A  striking  illustration  of  a  "deficiency 
disease"  is  presented  by  scurvy.  This  can  be  entirely  averted 
or  effectively  cured  by  the  inclusion  of  foods  which  contain 
vitamin  C  (Cevitamic  acid)  in  the  diet.  It  has  been  clearly 
established  by  convincing  experiments  that  the  prophylactic  or 
remedial  agent — the  antiscorbutic  substance — is  a  definite  chemi- 
cal entity  having  the  composition  CeHsOe.  The  vitamin  is 
present  in  many  articles  used  as  food,  such  as  green  vegetables 
and  fruits,  yet  entirely  lacking  in  others  such  as  the  common 
cereals  and  grains.  Vitamin  C  is  readily  destroyed  by  heat 
under  certain  conditions,  notably  in  an  alkaline  medium  and 
in  the  presence  of  oxygen.  However,  foods  can  be  processed 
without  serious  loss  of  vitamin  C  if  precautions  are  taken  to 
exclude  air  and  if  the  reaction  of  the  food  is  not  unfavorable 
for  the  preservation  of  the  vitamin. 

The  foregoing  illustration  will  suffice  to  indicate  the  charac- 
teristics of  a  vitamin — a  substance  essential  for  maintenance  of 
normal  metabolic  functions,  not  identical  with  the  more  familiar 
nutrients,  not  synthesized  in  the  human  body,  and  therefore 
dependent  on  an  exogenous  supply,  sometimes  more  labile  than 
the  foodstuffs  proper  and  hence  subject  to  deterioration,  and 
distributed  variously  among  the  edible  parts  of  animals  and 
plants.  The  existence  of  four  of  the  vitamins  has  been  estab- 
lished by  their  isolation  in  pure  chemical  form,  in  fact  the 
chemical  constitution  of  three  of  them  has  been  definitely  estab- 
lished and  one  of  them  has  been  synthesized. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  447 

For  convenience  the  designations,  vitamins  A,  B,  C  and  D, 
etc.,  have  arisen.  Scurvy,  beriberi,  rickets,  pellagra,  and 
xerophthalmia  have  been  attributed  with  considerable  experi- 
mental certainty  to  the  lack  of  specific  vitamins ;  the  protective 
or  curative  substances  are  accordingly  sometimes  spoken  of 
as  the  antiscorbutic  vitamin  (C),  the  antirachitic  vitamin  (D), 
the  antineuritic  vitamin  (Bi),  the  antipellagric  vitamin  (B2  or 
G),  the  antixerophthalmic  vitamin  (A),  etc.  Detailed  accounts 
of  the  physiology  of  the  vitamins  can  now  be  found  in  the 
newest  textbooks  on  physiologic  chemistry  and  nutrition.  The 
problems  raised  thereby  are  the  subject  of  active  discussion  and 
extensive  investigation  so  that  with  respect  to  many  features 
only  tentative  conclusions  should  be  announced  at  this  time. 

While  some  helpful  chemical  and  physical  methods  for  deter- 
mining the  quantity  of  vitamins  present  in  a  given  product  are 
now  available,  for  conclusive  evidence  we  must  rely  on  biologi- 
cal assays.  To  facilitate  such  assays  and  to  make  for  uniform 
expression  of  vitamin  content,  the  Health  Organization  of  the 
League  of  Nations  has  sponsored  the  preparation  and  distribu- 
tion of  standards  for  vitamins  A,  B,  C  and  D.  The  Interna- 
tional Unit  for  each  of  the  vitamins  is  defined  in  terms  of  the 
biological  activity  of  a  specific  quantity  of  the  respective  stand- 
ard. The  U.  S.  P.  XI  units  for  vitamins  A  and  D  are  identical 
in  value  with  the  International  units. 

While  the  requirements  of  the  infant  for  vitamins  A,  B,  C 
and  D  have  been  fairly  well  established,  we  have  very  little 
evidence  that  bears  directly  on  the  adult  requirements  for  vita- 
mins A  and  D.  Ordinarily  there  is  no  reason  why  a  properly 
selected  diet  should  not  afiford  an  adequate  supply  of  the 
requisite  vitamins.  Furthermore,  with  the  exception  of  pellagra, 
there  is  no  evidence  of  any  noteworthy  prevalence  in  this 
country  of  conditions  in  adults  that  might  properly  be  ascribed 
to  a  lack  of  one  or  more  vitamins.  However,  it  must  be 
admitted  that  under  circumstances  bringing  about  a  highly 
restricted  dietary  regimen  and  leading  to  "one-sided"  diets  a 
relative  shortage  of  some  of  the  vitamins  does  at  times  arise. 
In  almost  all  such  instances  the  situation  can  be  properly  cor- 
rected by  prescription  of  appropriate  foods.  Occasionally,  and 
particularly  with  infants,  a  corrective  result  may  be  more  effec- 
tively secured  by  the  administration  of  products  especially  rich 
in  the  desired  vitamin;  for  example,  cod  liver  oil  as  a  dietary 
adjunct  in  the  prevention  or  teatment  of  rickets,  and  orange 
juice  in  the  relief  of  scurvy. 

The  clear  indications  for  such  specific  vitamin  therapy  are 
still  few  in  number.  The  chief  justification  for  the  recognition 
of  special  vitamin-bearing  products  at  present  applies  to  unusual 
concentrations  of  the  desired  potent  principle  that  they  may 
represent  or  to  exceptionally  desirable  dosage  forms.  These 
considerations,  which  may  be  modified  by  the  progress  of 
research,  have  served  as  criteria  in  the  selection  of  products 
offered  for  inclusion  in  N.  N.  R.  as  products  rich  in  specific 
vitamins  at  present  recognized  to  have  demonstrable  value  in 


448     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

clinical  practice  or  human  nutrition ;  or  as  pure  substances  such 
as,  carotene,  which  is  a  precursor  of  vitamin  A,  or  cevitamic 
acid  (crystalline  vitamin  C). 

Vitamin  A 

The  term  "vitamin  A"  has  been  applied  to  any  one  of  several 
substances  or  to  a  mixture  of  them  producing  a  certain  demon- 
strable specific  physiologic  effect.  It  seems  to  have  been  defi- 
nitely established  that  there  are  at  least  five  substances  which 
can  produce  to  some  degree  this  characteristic  response  in  the 
animal  body.  These  are  vitamin  A  itself,  alpha,  beta  and 
gamma  carotene  and  cryptoxanthin.  The  last  four  of  these,  the 
precursors  of  vitamin  A,  are  produced  in  the  plant  kingdom, 
and  ingestion  of  these  substances  by  most  animals  results  in 
varying  degree  (depending  on  the  species  of  animal  and  the 
precursor  fed)  in  the  formation  of  a  compound  having  the 
empiric  formula  C20H29OH  and  to  which  no  other  name  than 
vitamin  A  has  been  ascribed.  The  extent  to  which  the  different 
precursors  of  vitamin  A  can  be  converted  to  vitamin  A  by 
different  species  of  animals  has  not  definitely  been  established. 
The  exact  function  of  vitamin  A  has  not  been  established,  but 
the  pathologic  picture  which  results  from  varying  degrees  of 
deficiency  has  been  the  subject  of  extensive  investigation. 

The  claims  recognized  under  vitamin  A  shall  be  recognized 
under  the  precursors  of  vitamin  A  only  under  conditions 
specified   elsewhere   under   the   heading   of   Carotene    (p.   445). 

AUoivahle  Claims.  —  1.  Evidence  for  the  existence  of 
vitamin  A  and  its  role  in  human  nutrition  is  based  on  the 
fact  that  a  characteristic  eye  disease,  usually  called  xeroph- 
thalmia,  results  from  a  deficiency  of  this   vitamin. 

2.  It  is  generally  agreed  that  the  first  symptom  or  at  least 
one  of  the  first  clinical  symptoms  of  vitamin  A  deficiency 
is  night-blindness,  or  nyctalopia.  For  this  type  of  night 
blindness  vitamin  A  is  a  specific.  Cases  of  nyctalopia  exist 
which  do  not  respond  to  treatment  with  vitamin  A,  These 
may  be  due  to  congenital  defects  or  to  other  diseases  than 
avitaminosis  "A." 

3.  Present  indications  are  that  vitamin  A  is  an  aid  toward 
the  establishing  of  resistance  of  the  body  to  infections  in 
general  only  when  there  has  been  an  exhaustion  of  body 
reserves  of  the  vitamin  and  the  ingestion  of  vitamin  A  is 
inadequate.  It  certainly  has  not  been  shown  to  be  specific 
in  the  prevention  of  colds,  influenza  and  such  infections, 
nor  has  it  been  demonstrated  that  ingestion  of  vitamin  A 
far  in  excess  of  that  necessary  for  normal  body  function 
and  readily  obtained  from  a  properly  selected  diet  is  an 
aid  in  preventing  various  types  of  infections. 

4.  A  deficiency  of  vitamin  A  results  in  a  retardation  of 
growth  when  body  stores  of  the  vitamin  have  been  depleted, 
but  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  vitamin  A  is  no  more 
important  in  contributing  to  normal  growth  than  any  one 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  449 

of  the  other  vitamins,  the  essential  mineral  elements,  or 
amino  acids.  Statements  conveying  the  impression  that 
vitamin  A  is  more  important  in  promoting  growth  than 
other  food  essentials  are  therefore  considered  misleading 
and  objectionable. 

5.  There  is  at  the  present  time  inadequate  evidence  to 
warrant  the  claim  that  the  ingestion  of  sufficient  vitamin  A 
will  prevent  the  formation  of  renal  calculi  in  man. 

Vitamin  B 
The  term  "vitamin  B"  should  not  be  used  loosely. 
Ample  evidence  indicates  that  two  or  more  physiologically 
active  substances  play  a  role  in  relation  to  numerous  phenomena 
formerly  explained  in  terms  of  vitamin  B  alone.  At  least  two 
substances  have  received  general  recognition  in  this  connection ; 
the  existence  of  others  has  been  reported  but  the  evidence  sub- 
mitted has  not  been  accepted  as  convincing  by  all  investigators 
in  this  field.  The  dififerences  between  the  various  products 
referred  to  is  now  substantiated  by  chemical  evidences.  Thus 
the  crystallized  antineuritic  vitamin  of  Jansen  and  Donath,  and 
of  at  least  four  other  investigators,  is  a  nitrogenous  compound 
of  defined  composition;  the  so-called  vitamin  G  appears  to 
belong  to  the  flavin  group  of  compounds  that  have  been  exten- 
sively studied  by  Kuhn  and  others.  There  is  no  satisfactory 
evidence  that  the  flavins  have  any  definite  relationship  to  the 
development  or  cure  of  pellagra. 

It  seems  desirable,  therefore,  to  insist  that  claims  shall  refer 
clearly  to  one  or  more  of  the  following : 

(a)  Vitamin  Bi,  and/or 

(b)  Vitamin  G   (B2),  and/or 

(c)  The  undifferentiated  mixture  of  these  present  in  many  foods, 
which  might  be  referred  to  as  "vitamin  B  complex"  or  "undifferen- 
tiated vitamin  B." 

(d)  Reference  to  "Pellagra-preventing  value"  shall  be  limited  to 
products  which  have  actually  been  tested  for  such  value  and  shall 
not  be  based  on  so-called  vitamin  G  assays   with  rats. 

It  shall  be  understood  that  the  terms  in  (c)  above  refer  not 
only  to  vitamins  B  (Bi)  and  G  (B2)  but  also  to  other  alleged 
members  of  the  vitamin  B  complex.  If  some  other  alleged 
member  of  the  complex  is  being  referred  to,  the  statement  might 
be  allowed  provided  the  investigator,  who  has  alleged  the  exis- 
tence of  the  new  factor,  is  cited. 

Allowable  Claims. — 1.  Vitamin  Bx  may  he  cited  as  of 
value  in  correcting  and  preventing  anorexia  of  dietary  origin 
in  certain  cases. 

There  are  many  causes  of  anorexia,  some  referable  to 
infections  and  the  reactions  thereto,  others  to  organic  dis- 
orders, and  still  others  related  to  faulty  diet.  Where  there 
is  no  rather  obvious  cause  of  anorexia  in  question,  other 
than  a  possible  dietary  one,  it  is  permissible  to  claim  that 
vitamin  Bi  may  be  of  therapeutic  value  when  the  condition 
to  be  treated  is  due  to  a  deficiency  of  that  vitamin. 


450     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

2.  Vitamin  Bx  is  of  value  in  securing  optimal  grozvth  of 
infants  and  children. 

Citations  in  the  literature  support  the  claim  that  a  sub- 
optimal  supply  of  vitamin  Bi  results  in  limitation  of  growth. 

3.  Vitamin  Bi  is  of  value  in  correcting  and  preventing 
beriberi. 

The  consensus  of  the  students  of  beriberi  is  that  this 
disease  is  due  primarily  to  an  insufficient  supply  of  vitamin 
B],  There  are  conditions  which  probably  could  be  desig- 
nated as  "latent  beriberi" ;  it  does  not  seem  wise  at  this  time 
to  attempt  the  formulation  of  a  definite  statement  covering 
such  conditions  other  than  that  presented  in  Item  7. 

4.  Because  vitamin  Bx  is  a  dietary  essential  its  adminis- 
tration in  concentrated  form  is  of  value  in  some  conditions 
where  difficulty  in  utilizing  ordinary  foods  in  the  usual  ivay 
is  encountered. 

The  present  status  of  research  on  the  clinical  use  of 
vitamin  Bi  for  specific  diseases  other  than  beriberi  and  for 
infant  feeding,  is  such  that  definite  claims  for  therapeutic 
value  in  relation  to  such  diseases  cannot  be  recognized.  Its 
use  may  be  indicated,  however,  in  such  restricted  conditions 
as  pernicious  vomiting  of  pregnancy,  tube  feedings  through 
a  jejunal  fistula,  and  the  like,  because  the  above  permitted 
statement  applies  to  such  conditions  and  gives  an  intelligent 
basis  for  such  therapy. 

5.  Claims  for  concentrates  of  vitamin  Bi,  offered  for 
clinical  use  should  state  the  potency  in  terms  of  the 
International  unit.  The  term  "concentrate"  or  a  synonym 
will  not  be  recognized  if  the  product  does  not  exceed  a 
potency  of  25  International  units  per  gram  (or  per  cubic 
centimeter),  or  if  it  is  a  natural  product  which  may  have 
been  subjected  to  a  process  of  dehydration. 

6.  In  connection  with  medicinal  foods  acceptable  for 
N.  N.  R.,  the  claim  that  a  food  is  valuable  because  of  its 
vitamin  Bi  content  may  be  made  only  if  it  provides  in  the 
quantity  of  food  consumed  daily  at  least  200  units  of 
vitamin  Bi. 

Any  food  preparation  having  less  than  such  an  amount 
cannot  be  regarded  as  a  noteworthy  medicinal  source  of  the 
vitamin.  In  the  light  of  present  knowledge  the  daily 
requirement  for  vitamin  Bi  appears  to  be  not  less  than  50 
units  (International)  for  the  infant  and  200  units  (Inter- 
national) for  the  adult. 

7.  There  are  many  experimental  indications  in  the  litera- 
ture indicating  other  possible  functions  of  vitamin  Bi,  e.  g., 
an  influence  on  intestinal  motility  and  neuritis  of  various 
types,  and  also  indications  of  greatly  augmented  require- 
ments when  metabolism  is  increased  as  in  hyperthyroidism, 
neuritis  of  various  types,  infections,  etc.  It  seems  too  early 
to  permit  advertising  claims  for  these  conditions. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  451 

Vitamin  C 

Cevitamic  Acid 
There  is  ample  experimental  and  clinical  evidence  to  show 
that  vitamin  C  in  optimum  amounts  is  an  essential  dietary  con- 
stituent. Suboptimal  amounts  result  in  the  development  of 
clinical  and  pathologic  phenomena  to  which  the  descriptive  term 
scurvy  has  been  applied. 

The  chemical  nature  of  the  formerly  unidentified  essential 
food  substance  has  been  discovered.  Its  empirical  formula  is 
CeHsOe.  Vitamin  C  has  been  prepared  in  commercial  quantities 
both  from  natural  sources  and  through  synthesis.  The  Council 
on  Pharmacy  and  Chemistry  of  the  American  Medical  Associa- 
tion has  adopted  the  nonproprietary  designation  cevitamic  acid 
for  the  crystalline  vitamin  C  introduced  as  Ascorbic  Acid. 

Allozvable  Claims. — 1.  Definite  claims  for  the  therapeutic 
value  of  vitamin  C  should  be  permitted  only  in  relation  to 
scurvy  until  further  clinical  or  experimental  evidence  has 
substantiated  its  usefulness  in  other  states. 

2.  Vitamin  C  is  acceptable  for  the  correction  and  pre- 
vention of  scurvy.  This  effect  has  been  established  experi- 
mentally and  by  clinical  investigation. 

3.  It  may  be  permissible  under  certain  conditions  to  refer 
to  the  therapeutic  value  of  vitamin  C  in  early  and  latent 
scurvy.  Convincing  clinical  evidence  has  established  that 
this  state  does  occur.  It  would  be  well  to  emphasize  the 
fact  that  the  diagnosis  rests,  however,  on  the  basis  of  roent- 
genologic evidences  in  the  long  bones,  and  possibly  failure 
to  excrete  an  optimum  amount  of  cevitamic  acid  in  the  urine. 

4.  Dental  caries,  pyorrhea,  certain  gum  infections,  ano- 
rexia, anemia,  undernutrition  and  infection  alone  are  not 
in  themselves  sufficient  indications  of  vitamin  C  deficiency 
but  according  to  experimental  and  clinical  investigation 
they  may  be  concomitant  signs  of  vitamin  C  deficiency. 
Therefore,  it  would  be  permissible  to  accept  the  claim  for 
the  therapeutic  value  of  vitamin  C  in  these  symptomatic 
conditions  only  zvhen  it  is  definitely  stated  that  they  are 
the  consequences  of  a  deficiency  or  suboptimal  amount  of 
vitamin  C  or  when  there  is  a  pathologic  interference  with 
assimilation  of  the  amount  necessary  for  the  preservation 
of  health. 

5.  Unless  more  convincing  evidence  is  present  than  is 
now  available,  no  claim  referable  to  the  anti-infective  efifect 
of  vitamin  C  will  be  recognized.  Secondary  infections  are 
characteristic  of  disturbances  of  nutrition,  particularly  in 
all  vitamin  deficiency  diseases.  It  has  not  been  established 
that  vitamin  C  has  a  therapeutic  effect  which  directly 
influences   associated   secondary   infections   in   scurvy. 

6.  Because  vitamin  C  is  a  dietary  essential  its  adminis- 
tration in  concentrated  form  is  of  value  in  conditions  where 
difficulty  in  introducing  orally  or  utilizing  ordinary  foods 


452     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

in  the  usual  way  is  encountered.  Vitamin  C  (cevitamic 
acid)  is  accepted  as  an  essential  dietary  constituent  in 
infant  feeding  but  it  should  not  be  accepted  for  use  in  the 
treatment  of  diseases  except  according  to  the  conditions 
mentioned  above.  It  is  generally  administered  in  the  form 
of  a  vitamin  C  carrying  juice.  When  there  is  persistent 
vomiting,  diarrhea,  or  any  other  condition  preventing  its 
utilization  in  proper  amounts  it  would  be  permissible  to 
give  vitamin  C  parenterally  in  concentrated  form  as  sodium 
cevitamate. 

7.  Concentrates  of  vitamin  C  offered  for  clinical  use  must 
state  the  potency  in  terms  of  the  International  unit.  The 
International  unit  for  vitamin  C,  which  was  formerly  defined 
as  the  vitamin  C  activity  of  0.1  cc.  of  lemon  juice,  has  now 
been  defined  as  the  vitamin  C  activity  of  0.05  mg.  of 
1 -cevitamic  acid  (ascorbic  acid).  This  is  the  quantity  of 
1 -cevitamic  acid  usually  found  in  0.1  cc.  of  lemon  juice. 

8.  The  claim  that  a  food  is  valuable  because  of  its  vitamin 
C  content  should  be  permitted  only  if  it  provides  a  daily 
intake  of  at  least  250  units  of  vitamin  C. 

9.  A  reasonable  general  statement  regarding  allowable 
claims  for  vitamin  C  would  be  as  follows : 

An  optimum  amount  of  vitamin  C  should  be  supplied  at 
all  ages  for  its  therapeutic  value  in  preventing  the  develop- 
ment of  acute  or  latent  scurvy. 

Claims  for  the  therapeutic  value  of  vitamin  C  may  be 
accepted  when  the  agent  is  described  as  a  corrective  mea- 
sure for  scurvy  due  to  a  demonstrable  absence  or  a  sub- 
optimal  quantity  in  the  diet,  or  in  cases  in  which  it  is 
definitely  known  that  there  is  interference  with  the  absorp- 
tion of  an  optimal  amount. 

Advertising  of  vitamin  C  for  such  symptoms  as  failure 
to  gain  in  weight  or  stoppage  of  growth,  anorexia,  anemia, 
infections,  symptoms  referable  to  the  central  nervous  system 
or  hemorrhagic  conditions  cannot  be  accepted  unless  it  is 
definitely  stated  that  the  symptoms  are  referable  to  a  demon- 
strable deficiency  of  vitamin  C. 

The  cevitamic  acid  equivalent  or  potency  in  terms  of 
International  units  should  be  stated  in  all  dosage  claims  for 
vitamin  C.  Cevitamic  acid  (vitamin  C)  is  easily  decom- 
posed in  presence  of  certain  other  substances ;  therefore,  care 
should  be  exercised  against  administering  it  (or  orange 
juice)  in  mixtures,  or  by  such  procedure  as  to  render  it 
ineffective. 

Vitamin  D 

The  term  "vitamin  D"  is  applied  to  one  or  more  substances 
which  function  in  the  proper  utilization  of  calcium  and  phos- 
phorus. Vitamin  D  has  been  produced  in  crystalline  form  aj 
one  of  the  products  of  ultraviolet  irradiation  of  ergosterol  and 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  453 

shown  to  be  a  sterol  having  the  formula  C28H43OH.  Naturally 
occurring  vitamin  D  has  not  been  isolated,  but  there  is  evidence 
suggesting  that  it  may  not  be  identical  with  the  artificially 
produced  substance,  and  that  more  than  one  natural  compound 
may  function  as  the  vitamin. 

Alloivable  Claims. — 1.  Vitamin  D  is  recognized  as  a 
specific  in  the  treatment  of  infantile  rickets,  spasmophilia 
and  osteomalacia,  diseases  which  are  manifestations  of 
abnormal  calcium  and  phosphorus  metabolism.  Vitamin  D 
is  valuable  in  the  prevention  as  well  as  in  the  curative 
treatment  of  these  diseases.  Complications  such  as  renal 
insufficiency  or  glandular  malfunction  may  preclude  normal 
response  to  vitamin  D  therapy.  During  acute  infections, 
especially  of  the  gastro-intestinal  tract,  vitamin  D  may 
prove  ineffective  because  poorly  absorbed. 

2.  Direct  exposure  of  the  skin  to  ultraviolet  light  from 
the  sun  or  from  artificial  sources  results  in  the  formation 
of  vitamin  D  within  the  organism  but  the  Council  cannot 
recognize  statements  or  implications  that  vitamin  D  has  all 
beneficial  effects  of  exposure  to  sunshine. 

3.  There  is  clinical  evidence  to  justify  the  statement  that 
vitamin  D  plays  an  important  role  in  tooth  formation  and 
maintenance  of  normal  tooth  structure,  but  there  is  no 
warrant  for  the  claim  that  adequate  vitamin  D  intake  will 
insure  normal  tooth  structure  or  that  adequate  vitamin  D 
intake  will  prevent  dental  caries. 

4.  Animal  experimentation  has  shown  that  correction  of 
an  inadequate  intake  of  vitamin  D  results  in  the  more  eco- 
nomical utilization  of  calcium  and  phosphorus  and  also  that 
the  undesirable  effects  of  improper  ratios  of  calcium  and 
phosphorus  in  the  diet  can  largely  be  overcome  by  normal 
intake  of  vitamin  D.  The  importance  of  these  observations 
in  their  application  to  man  is  not  entirely  apparent  because 
of  the  lack  of  adequate  clinical  evidence  showing  the  avail- 
ability of  different  forms  of  calcium  and  phosphorus,  but  it 
may  be  stated  that  vitamin  D  has  a  favorable  influence  on 
calcium  and  phosphorus  metabolism. 

5.  The  vitamin  D  requirement  is  greatest  during  the 
period  of  infancy.  Beyond  the  age  of  infancy  the  exact 
vitamin  D  requirement  of  man  under  any  specified  conditions 
is  not  known  but  it  appears  that  the  requirement  during 
pregnancy  and  lactation  is  increased. 

CAROTENE 

(Pro- Vitamin  A) 
Carotene  is  a  hydrocarbon  having  the  empiric  formula  C40H58 
which  occurs  in  three  isomeric  forms  referred  to  respectively 
as  alpha,  beta  and  gamma  carotene.  The  alpha  form  is  opti- 
cally active  and  the  others  are  not.  The  beta  form  appears 
to   predominate    in    nature,    and    the    gamma    is    found    in    the 


454     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

smallest  quantities,  but  usually  a  mixture  of  the  different  forms 
occurs.  The  crystals  are  readily  oxidized.  They  should  be 
kept  in  a  vacuum  or  in  an  inert  gas  in  the  dark  at  a  low 
temperature.  The  International  unit  for  vitamin  A  adopted 
at  the  Second  International  Conference  on  Vitamin  Standardi- 
zation, 1934,  is  defined  as  the  vitamin  A  activity  of  0.6  micro- 
gram of  beta  carotene.  There  is  considerable  scientific  evi- 
dence indicating  that  alpha  and  gamma  carotene  have  one-half 
the  vitamin  A  activity  of  beta  carotene.  The  Council  has 
reached  the  following  decision  with  respect  to  the  use  of  the 
term  "Pro-vitamin  A  as  a  synonym  for  carotene:  (1)  that  the 
term  "A  Pro-vitamin  A"  be  regarded  as  a  synonym  for  alpha, 
beta  or  gamma  carotene  or  for  cryptoxanthin  and  that  the 
synonym  "Pro-vitamin  A"  be  adopted  and  used  in  New  and 
Nonofficial  Remedies  for  any  combination  for  two  or  more 
of  these,  and  (2)  that  when  this  synonym  is  used  on  the  label 
of  any  accepted  product,  it  appear  in  brackets  after  the  Council 
name  wath  a  statement  of  the  vitamin  A  potency  of  the  product. 
Actions  and  Uses. — It  appears  that  at  least  a  portion  of  the 
carotene  ingested  is  converted  in  the  liver  into  vitamin  A. 
Carotene  therefore  has  actions  similar  to  those  of  vitamin  A. 
As  carotene  may  be  a  mixture  of  the  alpha,  beta  and  gamma 
forms,  its  relative  efficiency  may  vary  according  to  the  ratio 
of  these  components.  Evidence  is  not  available  on  which  to 
base  the  exact  conversion  factor  of  carotene  in  terms  of  clinical 
vitamin  A  effect.  Much  depends  on  the  conditions  for  absorp- 
tion of  pigment.  In  view  of  the  fact  that  cases  of  carotenemia 
have  arisen  from  overdosage,  the  Council  warns  against  the 
administration  of  too  large  doses  of  carotene.  The  vitamin 
potencies  stated  are  on  the  basis  of  biological  assays  and  not 
on  physical  and  chemical  measurements  establishing  the  iden- 
tity and  purity  of  the  product. 

Carotene-SMACO.— A     brand     of     Carotene-N.     N.     R., 
obtained  from  carrots. 

Actions  and  Uses: — See  preceding  article.  Carotene. 
Dosage. — The  dosage  of  carotene  or  of  vitamin  A  is  not  yet 
on  a  satisfactory  basis.  Based  on  the  average  daily  dose  of 
Cod  Liver  Oil-tJ.  S.  P.  (three  teaspoonfuls,  12  cc),  the  dose 
should  be  equivalent  to  at  least  6,600  U.  S.  P.  units  of 
vitamin  A,  Carotene  is  generally  administered  in  the  form  of 
carotene   dissolved   in   an   oily   solution. 

Manufactured    by    the    S.    M.    A.    Corporation,    Cleveland,    Ohio.      No 
U.  S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Carotene-SMACO  occurs  as  crystals  which  in  plain  light  show  cleav- 
age in  two  directions  and  which  are  pleochroic-light  yellow  orange  to 
dark  yellow  orange  to  dark  orange.  _  In  polarized  light  they  are 
anisotropic,  biaxial  with  parallel  extinction  and  medium  low  bire- 
fringence. The  crystals  are  almost  tasteless  and  have  a  slight  aromatic 
odor.  They  are  soluble  in  chloroform  and  benzene,  slightly  soluble  in 
ether,  petroleum  ether,  fats,  and  oils,  very  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol, 
practically  insoluble  in  water.  (Carotene-SMACO  as  marketed  is  not 
completely  soluble  in  petroleum  ether.)  Carotene-SMACO  melts  between 
172  and   178  C. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  455 

Dissolve  about  0.025  Gm.  of  carotene-SMACO  in  50  cc.  of  chloro- 
form; mix  1  cc.  of  this  solution  with  5  cc.  of  a  saturated  solution  of 
antimony  trichloride  in  chloroform:  a  blue  color  develops  in  five  min- 
utes. Dissolve  exactly  0.020  Gm.  of  carotene-SMACO  in  2  cc.  of 
chloroform;  dilute  to  exactly  100  cc,  with  petroleum  ether;  dilute  1  cc. 
of  this  solution  to  exactly  100  cc,  with  ethyl  alcohol;  measure  the  per 
cent  transmittance  of  a  3  cm,  layer  of  this  solution  at  the  following 
wave  lengths:  490,  500,  515  and  SSOfiii,  the  per  cent  transmittance 
values  are  within  the  following  limits:  490/i/a,  12-17  per  cent;  SOOiM/i, 
33-38   per    cent;    SlSfi/i,    75-81    per   cent;    530/i/4,    90-95   per   cent. 

Fuse  about  0,1  Gm,  of  carotene-SMACO  with  metallic  sodium,  care- 
fully add  the  fused  residue  to  a  beaker  containing  water,  boil,  filter, 
add  3  cc.  of  ferrous  sulfate  solution,  boil,  add  1  cc.  of  ferric  chloride 
solution,  neutralize  the  alkali  with  diluted  hydrochloric  acid,  filter:  no 
blue  precipitate  remains  on  the  filter  paper   (nitrogenous  compounds). 

Dry  0.1  Gm.  of  carotene-SMACO  to  constant  weight  over  phosphorus 
pentoxide:  the  loss  is  not  more  th.>n  0.2  per  cent.  Determine  carbon 
and  hydrogen  by  micro  methods;  .Sased  on  the  dried  material,  the 
carbon  is  not  less  than  88.80  per  cent  nor  more  than  89.60  per  cent, 
and  the  hydrogen  is  not  less  than  JO  30  per  cent  nor  more  than  10.80 
per  cent. 

Incinerate  about  0.10  Gm,  of  ca -otene-SMACO  in  a  platinum  dish: 
the   residue   is  negligible. 

The  following  colorimetric  assay  is  a  modification  of  Palmer's 
method:  Carotene  in  petroleum  ether  is  matched  against  0.2  per 
cent  aqueous  potassium  dichromate  solution.  By  this  method  40  mm. 
of  0.2  per  cent  potassium  dichromate  solution  is  equivalent  to  48  mm. 
of  0.00268  per  cent  carotene  solution.  Transfer  about  0.020  Gm,  of 
carotene  to  a  500  cc,  flask,  dissolve  the  crystals  in  about  2  cc.  of 
chloroform,  dilute  with  petroleum  ether  to  exactly  500  cc,  and  match 
this  in  a  colorimeter  with  40  mm.  of  a  0.2  per  cent  aqueous  potassium 
dichromate  solution.  Rapidly  make  five  readings  that  do  not  vary  more 
than  1.5  mm.  Use  the  average  reading  in  the  following  formula  and 
calculate  the  per  cent  of  carotene: 

0.1287    X    500  ,  , 

^-j ;—  =  per  cent   carotene: 

average  weight  of  sample 

The   amount   of   carotene    in   carotene-SMACO    is   not   less   than   92    per 


SMACO  Carotene  in  Oil. — A  solution  containing  0.3  per 
cent  of  carotene-SMACO  in  cottonseed  oil.  It  is  biologically 
assayed  to  have  in  each  gram  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less 
than  7,500  units,  U.  S,  P. 
Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  of  carotene-SMACO, 
Dosage. — See  under  Carotene-SMACO,  The  product  as 
marketed  is  accompanied  by  a  dropper  designed  to  deliver  25 
drops  to  the  cubic  centimeter. 

Manufactured  by  the   S.   M,  A,   Corporation,  Cleveland,  Ohio, 

SMACO  carotene  in  oil  is  prepared  by  dissolving  in  cottonseed  oil 
carotene-SMACO  with  an  extract  of  carrots.  The  solution  is  standard- 
ized to  0.3  per  cent  of  carotene-SMACO  by  the  method  described  under 
that  product.  When  assayed  for  vitamin  A  potency  by  the  method  of 
the  U,  S,  P,  it  is  required  to  contain  not  less  than  7,500  units  per  gram. 

SMACO  Carotene  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Oil. 

— A  solution  in  cottonseed  oil  of  carotene-SMACO  0,3  per 
cent  with  sufficient  vitamin  D  concentrate  to  bring  the  assayed 
potency  to  not  less  than  1,000  U,  S,  P.  units  per  gram.  When 
assayed  for  vitamin  A  potency  by  the  method  of  the  U,  S,  P, 
it  is  required  to  contain  in  each  gram  not  less  than  7,500  units. 


456     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Actions  and  Uses. — SMACO  carotene  with  vitamin  D  con- 
centrate in  oils  is  proposed  as  a  substitute  for  a  cod  liver  oil 
of  equivalent  potency. 
Dosage. — The  same  as  for  cod  liver  oil  of  equivalent  potency. 
Manufactured  by  the  S,  M.  A.  Corporation.  The  vitamin  D  concen- 
trate is  used  by  license  of  Columbia  University  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,678,454  (July  24,  1928;  expires  1945).     No  U.  S.  trademark. 

SMACO  Carotene  and  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Cod 
Liver  Oil. — A  solution  of  carotene-SMACO,  0.03  per  cent,  in 
cod  liver  oil,  adjusted  by  the  addition  of  sufficient  SMACO 
vitamin  D  concentrate  so  that  it  will  assay  at  not  less  than 
100  units  of  vitamin  D  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram.  The  mixture  is 
assayed  to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  2,000 
units  U.  S.  P.  per  gram.  The  Carotene-SMACO  is  the  source 
of  not  less  than  650  of  these  units. 

Actions  and  Uses. — SMACO  carotene  and  vitamin  D  concen- 
trate in  cod  liver  oil  is  proposed  for  use  as  a  substitute  for 
cod  liver  oil  of  high  potency. 

Dosage. — The  same  as  for  cod  liver  oil  of  equivalent  potency. 

Manufactured  by  the  S.  M.  A.  Corporation,  Cleveland.  The  vitamin  D 
concentrate  is  used  by  license  of  Columbia  University  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,678,454   (July  24,    1928;   expires   1945).     No  U.   S.   Trademark. 

CEVITAMIC     ACID 
Crystalline    vitamin    C,     /a^2/o-CH20H(CHOH)OCHCOH : 

COHCO  (introduced  as  ascorbic  acid). — Cevitamic  acid  may  be 

prepared  from  adrenal  glands,  citrus  fruits,  cabbage,  paprika 
and  other  plant  materials.  It  may  also  be  prepared  synthetically. 
It  oxidizes  on  exposure  to  air  and  light  and  should  be  preserved 
in  an  oxygen-free  atmosphere  protected  from  light. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Cevitamic  acid  is  indicated  for  prophy- 
laxis and  treatment  of  scurvy.  Its  use  in  caries,  and  in  other 
conditions  in  which  a  deficiency  of  vitamin  C  may  be  a  con- 
tributing factor,  is  not  established. 

Dosage. — As  a  protective  dose  in  infants,  0.01  Gm.  (Yq  grain), 
corresponding  to  from  15  to  30  cc.  of  fresh  orange  juice;  the 
dosage  for  use  in  treatment  has  not  been  established.  The 
therapeutic  dose  for  infants  is  probably  about  10  to  50  mg.  and 
for  adults  probably  about  100  mg. 

Cevitamic  acid  occurs  as  white  or  yellowish  white,  odorless,  mono- 
clinic  crystals,  often  tabular — a  few  showing  simple  twinning.  The 
optical  properties  are  as  follows:  biaxial;  negative;  weakly  pleo- 
chroic;  birefringence — strong  (0.239);  optic  angle  (2  E)  about  5 
degrees;  extinction  generally  parallel  but  in  some  sections  inclined 
about  12  degrees;  indexes  of  refraction:  a  =  1.466  ±  0.002,  )3  = 
1.680  ±  0.002,  7  =  1.705  ±  0.002.  It  is  freely  soluble  in  water,  soluble 
in  alcohol  and  insoluble  in  chloroform  and  ether.  It  melts  between 
189  and   192  C. 

The  rotation  [a]  25/D  of  cevitamic  acid  determined  in  a  solution 
containing  the  equivalent  of  10  Gm.  in  100  cc.  of  the  solution  falls 
between   -f  20.5   and   -f-  21.5. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  457 

To  1  cc.  of  a  2  per  cent  aqueous  solution  of  cevitamic  acid  add  2 
drops  of  sodium  nitroprusside  solution  and  make  alkaline  with  tenth- 
normal sodium  hydroxide  solution:  a  blue  color  is  produced  that 
changes  to  green  and  then  to  red.  Add  2  cc.  of  2  per  cent  aqueous 
solution  of  cevitamic  acid  to  5  cc.  of  Fehling's  solution:  the  Fehling's 
solution  is  slowly  reduced   in  the  cold. 

Transfer  about  0.1  Gm.  of  cevitamic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
beaker  containing  100  cc.  of  cooled  distilled  water  that  has  just  pre- 
viously been  boiled,  and  25  cc.  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid;  titrate  with 
tenth-normal  iodine  solution  using  starch  as  an  indicator  (1  cc.  of 
tenth-normal  iodine  solution  corresponds  to  0.0088  Gm.  of  cevitamic* 
acid)  :  the  iodine  used  corresponds  to  not  less  than  98  per  cent 
cevitamic  acid. 

Transfer  about  0.12  Gm.  of  cevitamic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
beaker;  add  20  cc.  of  water  and  tirate  with  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide  using  phenolphthalein  as  an  indicator:  the  alkali  used  is 
equivalent  to  not  less  than  99.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  100.5  per  cent 
cevitamic  acid. 

Transfer  about  0.1  Gm.  of  cevitamic  acid,  accurately  weighed,  to  a 
wide-mouthed  glass  stoppered  weighing  bottle,  dry  in  a  vacuum  over 
phosphorus  pentoxide  for  eighteen  hours:  the  loss  is  not  greater  than 
0.3  per  cent. 

Transfer  about  0.1  Gm.  of  cevitamic  acid  to  a  platinum  dish,  ignite 
to  constant   weight:     the  ash  is  negligible. 

Cebione. — A  brand  of  cevitamic  acid-N.  N.  R.,  obtained  from 
vegetable   sources. 

Merck  &  Co..  Inc.,  New  York,  distributor.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark  318,171. 

Ampules  Cebione  (Crystals),  0.1  Gm. 
Tablets  Cebione  (Crystals),  0.01  Gm. 
Tablets  Cebione    (Crystals),  0.05  Gm. 

FISH    LIVER    OILS,    PREPARATIONS    AND    CONCENTRATES 

The  chief  fish  Hver  oil  used  therapeutically,  and  the  only 
official  one,  is  cod  liver  oil.  Cod  liver  oil  is  now  widely  used 
as  an  adjunct  in  infant  feeding.  This  oil  is  rich  in  both  vita- 
mins A  and  D  and  is  a  readily  digested  fat.  By  virtue  of  its 
vitamin  D  content,  cod  liver  oil  has  been  demonstrated  to  have 
a  favorable  influence  on  the  metabolism  of  calcium  and  phos- 
phorus in  general  and  particularly  in  the  prevention  of  rickets. 
In  fact  the  usual  recommended  dosages  of  cod  liver  oil  for 
infants  are  based  on  vitamin  D  requirements.  The  U.  S.  P.  XI 
dose  of  cod  liver  oil  for  infants,  12  cc.  daily,  probably  pro- 
vides more  than  three  times  as  much  vitamin  A  daily  as  an 
infant  will  obtain  by  breast  feeding  alone. 

The  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia,  besides  giving  tests  for  the 
purity  of  cod  liver  oil,  also  gives  methods  for  the  assay  of 
its  content  of  vitamin  A  and  vitamin  D ;  furthermore,  it  pro- 
vides that  the  vitamin  A  potency  and  vitamin  D  potency  of 
cod  liver  oil  when  designated  shall  be  expressed  in  "United 
States  Pharmacopeia  units"  per  gram  of  oil  and  may  be  referred 
to  as  "U.  S.  P.  units"  per  gram  of  oil.  It  is  also  stipulated 
that: 

The  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  specifies  that  cod  liver  oil  must 
contain  in  each  gram  at  least  600  U.  S.  P.  units  of  vita- 
min A  and  at  least  85  U.  S.  P.  units  of  vitamin  D.     Cod  liver 


458     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

oil  may  be  flavored  by  the  addition  of  not  more  than  1  per 
cent  of  any  one  or  any  mixture  of  flavoring  substances  recog- 
nized in  this  pharmacopeia. 

Evidence  has  accumulated  to  show  that  it  is  feasible  to  mar- 
ket cod  liver  oil  having  a  vitamin  A  potency  much  higher  than 
the  lower  limit  of  the  pharmacopeial  product.  Accordingly, 
all  brands  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies  are  required  to 
have  a  vitamin  potency  of  at  least  850  vitamin  A  units  per 
gram  and  at  least  85  vitamin  D  units  per  gram  when  tested 
by  the  U.  S.  P.  method. 

It  has  been  shown  that  an  effective  concentrate  of  cod  liver 
oil  can  be  made  and  marketed.  To  be  acceptable  for  inclusion 
in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies,  such  a  concentrate  should 
have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  at  least  14,000  U.  S.  P.  units  per 
gram,  or  1,100  U.  S.  P.  units  per  tablet  or  other  dosage  unit 
and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  at  least  1,400  U.  S.  P.  units  per 
gram,  or   110  U.   S.   P.  units  per  tablet  or  other  dosage  unit. 

The  Council  requires  that  the  vitamin  A  and  vitamin  D 
potency  of  accepted  brands  of  cod  liver  oil  and  cod  liver  oil 
concentrates  be  declared  in  U.  S.  P.  units  on  the  label  of  such 
products.  Statements  of  the  potency  of  tablet  preparations  of 
cod  liver  oil  concentrate  made  on  a  "per  tablet"  basis  and  also 
on  a  "per  gram  of  tablet"  basis  should  appear  in  the  firm's 
presentation  and  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies.  On  the 
labels,  however,  a  declaration  of  vitamin  potency  "per  tablet" 
is  sufficient. 

The  U.  S.  P.  recommended  dosage  is  largely  empiric, 
though  corresponding  to  the  widest  general  practice.  The 
adult  need  of  vitamin  D  (except  in  certain  instances)  ^  is 
problematic,  and  there  is  a  lack  of  data  on  which  to  determine 
an  adult  dose  of  vitamin  A.  The  Council  believes  that  the 
U.  S.  P.  dosage  of  cod  liver  oil  is  needlessly  high  and  has  fixed 
the  dosage  of  cod  liver  oil  for  infants  at  8  cc.  (2  teaspoonfuls) 
daily. 

COD  LIVER  OIL.— "The  partially  destearinated  fixed  oil 
obtained  from  the  fresh  livers  of  Gadus  Morrhua  Linne  and 
other  species  of  the  family  Gadidae.  Cod  Liver  Oil  may  he 
flavored  by  the  addition  of  not  more  than  1  per  cent  of  any 
one  or  any  mixture  of  flavoring  substances  recognized  in  this 
U.  S.  Pharmacopeia.  Cod  Liver  Oil  contains  in  each  Gm.  at 
least  600  U.  S.  P.  Units  of  Vitamin  A  and  at  least  85  U.  S.  P. 
Units  of  Vitamin  D. 

"The  Vitamin  A  potency  and  Vitamin  D  potency  of  Cod 
Liver  Oil  when  designated  shall  be  expressed  in  'United  States 
Pharmacopeia  Units'  per  gram  of  oil  and  may  be  referred  to 
as  'U.  S.  P.'"   U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  Oleum 
Alorrhuae. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Fish  Liver  Oils, 
Preparations  and   Concentrates. 

Dosage. — For  infants,  8  cc.   (2  teaspoonfuls)   daily. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  459 

Abbott's  A-B-D  Malt  Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  ViosteroL— 
Malt  extract,  57  per  cent;  cod  liver  oil  with  viosterol  to  adjust  it  to 
the  antirachitic  potency  of  the  final  product,  30  per  cent  (by 
volume);  glycerin,  10  per  cent;  alcohol,  3  per  cent.  The  finished  mixture 
is  assayed  for  vitamin  Bi  potency  by  a  modification  of  the  method  of 
Sherman  and  Spohn  (The  Vitamins,  Sherman  and  Smith,  ed.  2,  pp.  100, 
102)  and  is  required  to  contain  not  less  than  60  units  per  fluidounce, 
the  unit  being  that  amount  which  fed  to  rats  deprived  of  vitamin  Bi  (F) 
results  in  a  total  weight  gain  of  12  Gm.  in  twenty-eight  days;  it  is 
assayed  for  vitamin  Bj  (G)  by  the  method  of  Sherman  (The  Vitamins, 
Sherman  and  Smith,  ed.  2,  p.  135)  modified  by  using  Jansen  and  Donath's 
fullers'  earth  absorbate  of  Bi  as  a  source  of  this  vitamin  in  the  vitamin 
Bs  deficient  diet,  and  is  required  to  contain  not  less  than  60  units  per 
fluidounce,  the  unit  being  that  amount  which  fed  daily  to  rats  deprived 
of  vitamin  B2  (G)  results  in  a  total  weight  gain  of  12  Gm.  in  twenty- 
eight  days.  The  vitamins  A  and  D  potencies  of  the  finished  product  are: 
not  less  than  450  units  CU.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  Gm.,  and  200  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 

Dosage. — For  infants,  2  cc.  (30  minims)  three  times  daily;  for  pre- 
mature and  rapidly  growing  infants  and  for  older  children,  4  cc.  (60 
minims)  three  times  daily;  in  severe  rickets  and  for  adults,  4  cc.  (60 
minims)  or  more  four  times  daily. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  The 
viosterol  used  is  manufactured  by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni 
Research  Foundation  under  U.  S.  patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928; 
expires   1945)    and   U.   S.   patent   1,871,136    (Aug.   9,    1932:   expires   1949). 

Borcherdt's  Malt  Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil:  Each  100  cc.  contains 
cod  liver  oil,  25  cc,  and  Borcherdt's  malt  extract  (plain)  (essentially 
similar  in  extract  of  malt  U.  S.  P.)  75  cc.  The  vitamin  potency  is: 
not  less  than  400  units  (U.  S.  P.  )  of  vitamin  A  per  Gm.,  41  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  per  Gm.,  and  one  Sherman  unit  of  vitamin  B 
per  Gm.  (equivalent  to  28.5  Sherman  units  per  ounce).  The  vitamin  A 
potency  is  calculated  from  protocols  of  assay  according  to  the  A.  D.  M.  A. 
method,  protocols  of  assay  according  to  the  new  U.  S.  P.  procedures  not 
being  available  as  the  book  went   to  press. 

Prepared  by  the  Borcherdt  Malt  Extract  Co.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.   S.   trademarks   64,467   and   64,441. 

Maltine  with  Cod  Liver  OH:  Maltine,  70  per  cent,  and  cod  liver  oil, 
30  per  cent.  Maltine  is  a  preparation  essentially  similar  to  extract  of 
malt-U.  S.  P.,  but  it  contains  1.9  per  cent  of  alcohol  and  is  prepared  from 
malted  barley,  oats  and  wheat:  as  determined  by  a  modification  of  the 
method  of  Chick  and  Roscce  (Biochem.  J.  21:  689,  1927),  it  contains  one 
unit  per  Gm.  (28  units  per  ounce)  of  vitamin  Bi,  one  unit  being  the 
weight  of  this  product  necessary  as  the  sole  source  of  Bi  in  an  otherwise 
adequate  diet  to  protect  growing  rats  from  polyneuritis  and  to  assure 
normal  growth  and  Yz  unit  per  Gm.  (9  units  per  ounce)  of  vitamin  Bo, 
one  unit  being  the  weight  of  the  product  necessary  as  the  sole  source  of 
B2  in  an  otherwise  adequate  diet  to  protect  growing  rats  from  pellagra 
and  to  assure  normal  growth;  1  Gm.  converts  5  to  7  Gm.  of  starch  to 
maltose  and  dextrin  in  thirty  minutes  at  from  40  to  42  C.  The  vitamins 
A  and  D  potencies  of  the  finished  product  are  not  less  than  750  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  Gm.,  and  not  less  than  110  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 

Prepared  by  The  Maltine  Co.,  Brooklyn.  No  U.  S.  patent.  U.  S. 
trademark  44,566. 

Maltine  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Iron  Iodide:  Maltine  70  per  cent,  cod 
liver  oil  30  per  cent,  and  ferrous  iodide  0.44  Gm.  per  100  cc.  (2  grains  to 
each  fluidounce).  Maltine  is  a  preparation  essentially  similar  to  extract 
of  malt  U.  S.  P.,  but  it  contains  1.9  per  cent  of  alcohol  and  is  prepared 
from  malted  barley,  oats  and  wheat;  as  determined  by  a  modification  of 
the  method  of  Chick  and  Roscoe  (^Biochem.  J.  21:  689,  1927),  it  contains 
one  unit  per  gram  (28  units  per  ounce)  of  vitamin  Bi,  one  unit  being 
the  weight  of  the  product  necessary  as  the  sole  source  of  Bi  in  an  other- 
wise adequate  diet  to  protect  growing  rats  from  polyneuritis  and_  to  assure 
normal  growth;  and  J^  unit  per  gram  (9  units  per  ounce)  of  vitamin  B2, 
one  unit  being  the  weight  of  the  product  necessary  as  the  sole  source  of 
B2  in  an  otherwise  adequate  diet  to  protect  growing  rats  from  pellagra 
and  to  assure   normal   growth;    1    Gm.   converts   5   to  7   Gm.   of  starch  to 


460     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

maltose  and  dextrin  in  thirty  minutes  at  from  40  to  42  C.  The  vitamins 
A  and  D  potencies  of  the  finished  product  are  not  less  than  750  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  Gm.,  and  not  less  than  110  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 

Manufactured  by  the  Maltine  Company,  Brooklyn.  No  U.  S.  patent. 
U.  S.  trademark  44,566. 

Abbott's  Cod  Liver  Oil. — It  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of 
not  less  than  1,500  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  a  vitamin  D 
potency  of  not  less  than  100  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  Gm. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  III.  No 
U.  S.   patent  or  tradeniark. 

Abbott's  cod  liver  oil  complies  with  the  U.  S.  P.  standards  for  cod 
liver  oil.  In  addition  it  is  required  to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not 
less  than  1,500  units  per  gram  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than 
100   units  per   gram  as   described  by  the   method  of  the  U.   S.   P. 

Mead's  Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil. — It  has  a  potency 
of  not  less  than  1800  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  gram 
and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  175  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
per  gram. 

Manufactured  by  Mead  Johnson  and  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Mead's  Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil  Flavored. — Mead's  Standardized  cod 
liver  oil,  containing  0.12  per  cent  of  a  mixture  of  U.  S'.  P.  essential  oils 
of  flavoring. 

Mead's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Fortified  lifith  Percomorph  Liver  Oil. — A  mix- 
ture of  cod  liver  oil-U.  S.  P.  and  percomorph  liver  oil  5  per  cent.  It  has 
a  potency  of  not  less  than  6,000  vitamin  A  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram 
and  of  not  less  than  850  vitamin  D  units   (U.  S.  P.)   per  gram. 

Mead's  Standardized  cod  liver  oil  complies  with  the  U.  S.  P. 
standards  for  cod  liver  oil.  In  addition  it  is  required  to  have  a  vitamin 
A  potency  of  not  less  than  1,750  units  per  Gm.  and  a  vitamin  D 
potency  of  not  less  than  175  units  per  Gm. 

Nason's  Palatable  Cod  Liver  Oil. — Cod  liver  oil  contain- 
ing 0.5  per  cent  of  essential  oils  as  flavoring,  having  a  vitamin 
A  potency  as  determined  by  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  Pharma- 
copeia of  not  less  than  1750  units  per  Gm.  and  a  vitamin  D 
potency  of  not  less  than   130  units  per  Gm. 

Dosage. — For  adults,  2  to  4  cc.  (30  to  60  minims)  three 
times  a  day;  for  children,  1  to  2  cc.  (15  to  30  minims)  three 
times  a  day. 

Manufactured  by  Tailby-Nason  Co.,  Boston.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Nason's  palatable  cod  liver  oil  complies  with  the  U.  S.  P.  standard 
for  cod  liver  oil.  In  addition,  it  is  required  to  have  a  content  of  fat- 
soluble  vitamin  A,  determined  by  the  U.  S.  P.  method,  of  not  less  than 
1400  units  per  Gm.,  and  an  antirachitic  potency  of  not  less  than  130 
units  per  Gm. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company  Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil. 

— It  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  850  units  (U.  S. 
P.)  per  Gm.  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  85  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  per  Gm. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  461 

Dosage.— Inianis,  from  1  to  2  cc.  (15  to  30  minims)  ;  older 
children,  from  2  to  4  cc.  (30  to  60  minims)  ;  adults,  4  cc.  (1 
fluidrachm)  or  more,  three  times  a  day. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Malt  Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil-P.  D  &  Co.:  Each  100  cc.  contains 
standardized  cod  liver  oil-P.  D.  &  Co.,  25  cc,  and  malt  extract  (unmedi- 
cated)-?,  D.  &  Co.,  75  cc,  with  chocolate  and  extract  of  vanilla  as 
flavoring  agents. 

Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Standardized  Cod 
Liver  Oil,  10  minims. 

Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Standardized  Cod 
Liver  Oil,  20  minims. 

Sohible  Gelatin  Capsules  Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Standardized  Cod 
Liver   Oil,   2.5   Gm. 

Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Standardized  Cod 
Liver  Oil,  5  Gm. 

Parke,   Davis   &   Company's   standardized   cod   liver  oil   complies   with 

the   standards   of   the   U.    S.    Pharmacopeia.      In   addition,   it   is   required 

to   have  a  content  of   fat  soluble  vitamin   A,   determined  by   the   method 

of  the  U.  S.  P.  equivalent  to  not  less  than  850  units  per  Gm. 

Patch's  Flavored  Cod  Liver  Oil. — Cod  liver  oil  contain- 
ing less  than  0.5  per  cent  of  essential  oils  as  flavoring  and 
having  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  1,500  vitamin  A 
units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  Gm.,  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less 
than  95  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  Gm. 

Dosage. — 4  cc.  (1  fluidrachm)  3  times  a  day;  children  2  cc. 
(30  minims)  3  times  a  day. 

Manufactured  by  The  E.  L.  Patch  Co.,  Boston.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Patch's  flavored  cod  liver  oil  complies  with  the  U.  S.  P.  standards 
for  cod  liver  oil.  In  addition  it  is  required  to  have  a  content  of  fat- 
soluble  vitamin  A  of  not  less  than  850  units  per  Gm.  as  determined  by 
the  method  of  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia. 

Scott's    Norwegian   Cod   Liver    Oil    (Plain).— It   has   a 

vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  1,400  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per 
Gm.,  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  85  units  (U.  S. 
P.)  per  Gm.  Adequate  protocols  of  assay  according  to  the 
U.  S.  P.  procedure  not  having  been  available  at  the  time 
the  book  went  to  press,  the  vitamin  A  potency  is  calculated 
from  that  previously  found  acceptable. 

Dosage. — For  patients  over  5  months  of  age  4  cc.  (1  flui- 
drachm)  three  times  daily. 

Manufactured  by  Scott  &  Bowne  Laboratories,  Bloomfield,  N.  J.  No 
U.  S.  patent.     U.  S.  trademark  17960. 

Scott's  Norwegian  Cod-Liver  Oil  (Flavored). — Scott's  Norwegian  cod- 
liver  oil  (plain),  containing  0.78  per  cent  of  a  mixture  of  oils  of  pepper- 
mint,  sweet   birch,   cassia   and   bitter   almond   as  flavoring. 

Scott's  Norwegian  cod-liver  oil  (plain)  complies  with  the  U.  S.  P. 
standards  for  cod  liver  oil.  In  addition,  it  is  required  to  have  a 
content  of  fat-soluble  vitamin  A,  determined  by  the  U.  S.  P.  method, 
of  not  less  than   1,400  units  per  Gm. 


462     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil. — It  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of 
not  less  than  2,100  units  per  gram  and  a  vitamin  D  potency 
of  not  less  than  350  units  per  gram  when  assayed  by  the  method 
of  the  U.   S.  P. 

Dosage. — The  average  adult  daily  dose  is  15  cc.  (4  flui- 
drachms)  ;  for  children,  half  this  amount  or  less ;  for  infants, 
0.5  to  2.0  cc.  (8  to  30  minims)  according  to  age. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R,  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or   trademark. 

Squibb  Cod-Halibut  Liver  Oil  (see  under  Squibb  Stabilized  Halibut 
Liver  Oil). 

Squibb  Mint-Flavored  Cod-Liver  OH:  Squibb  cod  liver  oil  contain- 
ing  0.67    per  cent  of   oil   of   spearmint  as  flavoring. 

Squibb  cod  liver  oil  complies  with  the  U.  S.  P.  standard  for  cod  liver 

oil.     In  addition  it  is  required  to  have  a  content  of  fat  soluble  vitamin 

A,   determined  by  the  method  of  the  U.   S.    P.  of  not  less  than   2,100 

units   per   Gm.   and  an  antirachitic  potency  of  not  less   than  250   units 

per   Gm. 

Ucoline  Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil. — Cod  liver  oil  con- 
taining 0.5  per  cent  of  a  mixture  of  equal  parts  of  oil  of 
peppermint  and  oil  of  wintergreen  as  flavoring,  and  having  a 
vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  1,400  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per 
gram  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  102  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  per  Gm.  The  vitamin  potencies  are  calculated 
from  protocols  of  assay  based  on  procedures  other  than  the 
U.  S.  P.  method,  data  according  to  the  latter  not  being  availa- 
ble when  the  book  went  to  press. 

Dosage. — For  adults,  2  to  4  cc.  (30  to  60  minims)  three 
times  a  day;  for  children,  1  to  2  cc.  (15  to  30  minims)  three 
times  a  day. 

Manufactured  by  the  Ucoline  Products  Co.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Ucoline  standardized  cod  liver  oil  is  required  to  have  a  content  of  fat- 
soluble  vitamin  A  as  determined  by  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  P.  of 
not  less  than  1,000  units  per  gram  and  an  antirachitic  potency,  as 
determined  by  the  method  of  the  American  _  Drug  Manufacturers  Asso- 
ciation,  of   not  less  than   ZZZ  vitamin   D   units  per   gram. 

COD    LIVER    OIL    WITH    VIOSTEROL.— Viosterol 

dissolved  in  cod  liver  oil,  to  adjust  it  to  the  potency  of  not 
less  than  850  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  Gm.,  360  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  general  article,  Viosterol.  Cod  liver 
oil  with  viosterol  is  proposed  for  use  in  conditions  in  which  it 
is  desired  to  supplement  the  administration  of  vitamin  A  with 
that  of  a  relatively  large  amount  of  vitamin  D. 

Dosage. — For  infants  and  young  children,  2.5  to  3.3  cc.  (53 
to  67  minims)  daily;  for  adults  and  in  severe  cases  doses  up 
to  7  cc.   (140  minims)  or  more  are  given. 

Cod  liver  oil  with  viosterol  is  prepared  by  addition  of  irradiated 
ergosterol  to  cod  liver  oil  in  such  proportion  that  the  finished  product 
will  have  a  potency  of  not  less  than  850  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A 
per  Gm.  and  not  less  than  360  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  463 

Abbott's  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol. — A  brand  of  cod 
liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9, 
1932;  expires  1949)  by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni  Research 
Foundation. 

Irradiated  ergosterol,  prepared  by  the  method  described  under  viosterol 
in  oil-Abbott,  is  added  to  cod  liver  oil  and  the  finished  product  is 
required  to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  1,500  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  not  less  than  the  vitamin  D  potency  of 
cod  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Mead's  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol. — A  brand  of  cod 
liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Mead  Johnson  &  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind.,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9, 
1934;  expires,  1951)  under  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni  Research 
Foundation. 

Irradiated  ergosterol,  prepared  by  the  method  described  under  Mead[s 
viosterol  in  oil,  is  added  to  cod  liver  oil  and  the  finished  product  is 
required  to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  1750  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  not  less  than  the  vitamin  D  potency  of  cod 
liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Vios- 
terol.— A  brand  of  cod  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit,  under  U.  S.  Patent 
1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9,  1932; 
expires   1949)    by  license   of   the   Wisconsin   Alumni   Research   Foundation. 

Viosterol,  prepared  by  the  method  described  under  Parke,  Davis  & 
Co.'s  viosterol  in  oil,  is  added  to  cod  liver  oil  and  the  finished  product 
is  required  to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  850  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  to  have  not  less  than  the  vitamin  D  potency 
of  cod  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol. — A  brand  of  cod 
Hver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York,  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9,  1932; 
expires    1949)    by   license   of  the   Wisconsin    Alumni   Research   Foundation. 

Irradiated  ergosterol,  prepared  by  the  method  described  under 
viosterol  in  oil,  Squibb,  is  added  to  cod  liver  oil  and  the  finished 
product  is  required  to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  2,100 
units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  not  less  than  the  vitamin  D  potency 
of   cod   liver  oil   with   viosterol-N.   N.   R. 

Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  Mint-Flavored. 

— A  brand  of  cod  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R.,  containing 
0.67  per  cent  of  oil  of  spearmint  as  flavoring. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York,  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9,  1932; 
expires   1949)    by   license   of  the   Wisconsin   Alumni   Research   Foundation. 

_  Irradiated  ergosterol,  prepared  by  the  method  described  under 
viosterol  in  oil-Squibb  is  added  to  cod  liver  oil  containing  0.67  per 
cent  of  oil  of  spearmint  as  flavoring  and  the  finished  product  is  required 
to  have  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  2,100  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
per  gram  and  not  less  than  the  vitamin  D  potency  of  cod  liver  oil 
with  viosterol-N.  N.   R. 


464     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

CLINADOL  CO.'S  COD  LIVER  OIL  CONCEN- 
TRATE. — An  extract  of  the  nonsaponifiable  fraction  of  cod 
liver  oil  in  maize  oil,  to  which  has  been  added  gluside  (3  in 
10,000)  and  oil  of  cassia  2  per  cent.  It  has  a  vitamin  potency 
of  not  less  than  7,700  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  Gm. 
and  not  less  than  386  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 
Protocols  of  assay  according  to  the  new  U.  S.  P.  procedures 
not  being  available  as  the  book  went  to  press,  these  potencies 
are  calculated  from  those  previously  found  acceptable. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Clinadol  Co.'s  cod  liver  oil  concentrate 
possesses  properties  similar  to  those  of  cod  liver  oil  so  far  as 
these  depend  on  the  vitamin  content  of  the  latter. 

Dosage. — From  10  to  40  drops  daily.  A  glass  dropper  is 
included  with_  the  market  package,  designed  to  deliver  approxi- 
mately 1  minim  per  drop. 

Manufactured  by  the  Clinadol  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  N.  Y.  No  U.  S. 
patent.      U.   S.   trademark  279,325. 

The  vitamin  A  potency  of  Clinadol  Co.'s  cod  liver  oil  concentrate  is 
determined  by  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia;  when  assayed  by 
this  method  it  is  required  to  have  a  vitamin  potency  of  not  less  than 
7,700  vitamin  A  units  per  Gm.  and  not  less  than  386  vitamin  D  units 
per  Gm, 

COD  LIVER  OIL  CONCENTRATE  LIQUID 
(LEDERLE). — A  concentrate  of  the  unsaponifiable  fraction 
of  cod  liver  oil  dissolved  in  sufficient  cod  liver  oil  to  give  the 
desired  potency  to  the  marketed  product.  It  has  a  vitamin  A 
potency  of  not  less  than  60,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  a 
vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  8,500  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per 
gram. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  possesses  the  therapeutic  properties 
recognized  for  the  vitamins  present  in  cod  liver  oil. 

Dosage. — For  the  concentrate  in  vials,  9  drops  (3  minims, 
0.18  cc.)  daily  for  infants  (the  vials  are  marketed  with  a 
dropper  designed  to  dispense  three  drops  to  the  minim) ;  for 
the  capsules,  one  to  two  daily  for  children,  two  to  three  daily 
for  adults. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  New 
York.     No  U.  S.  Patent  or  trademark. 

Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid  (Lederle),  Vials,  5  cc. — Each  minim 
(3  drops,  0.06  cc.)  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  3,400  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  484  units 
(U.  S.  P.). 

Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid  (Lederle)  Capsules,  3  minims. — 
Each  capsule  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  10,260  units 
(U.  S.  P.),  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  1,400  units 
(U.   S.   P.). 

KINNEY'S  COD  LIVER  OIL  CONCENTRATE 
LIQUID. — A  concentrate  of  the  unsaponifiable  fraction  of  cod 
liver  oil  dissolved  in  sufficient  cod  liver  oil  to  give  the  desired 
potency  to  the  marketed  product.  It  has  a  vitamin  A  potency 
of  not  less  than  60,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  a  vita- 
min D  potency  of  not  less  than  8,500  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per 
gram. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  465 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  It  possesses  the  therapeutic  properties 
attributed  to  the  vitamins  present  in  cod  liver  oil. 

Dosage. — For  the  Liquid:  Infants,  from  six  to  eight  drops 
daily;  children,  two  to  four  drops  three  times  daily;  adults, 
four  drops  three  times  daily.  The  liquid  is  marketed  with  a 
dropper  designed  to  supply  3^  minim  (0.041  cc.)  in  each  two 
drops.  For  the  Capsules :  Children,  one  capsule  daily ;  adults, 
one  to  two  capsules  daily. 

Manufactured  by  the  Health  Products  Corporation,  Newark,  N.  J. 
(Scientific  Sugars  Co.,  Indianapolis,  distributor)    U.   S.   patent    1,984,858. 

Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Capsules,  3  minims. — Each 
capsule  contains  Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  3  minims, 
and  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  10,000  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
and  a  vitamin  D   potency  of  not  less  than   1,450  units   (U.  S.   P.). 

Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,  5  cc. — Each 
fS  minim  (0.038  Gm.)  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  2,280 
units  (U.  S.  P.)  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  320  units 
(U.   S.   P.). 

SMACO   VITAMIN   D   CONCENTRATE  IN   OIL.— 

A  solution  in  cottonseed  oil  of  the  vitamin  D  concentrate  of 
cod  liver  oil  obtained  by  the  method  of  Zucker.  It  is  assayed 
to  have  in  each  gram  a  potency  of  not  less  than  1,000  units  of 
vitamin   D    (U.   S.  P;).     ' 

Actions  and  Uses. — SMACO  vitamin  D  concentrate  in  oil  is 
proposed  for  use  as  an  antirachitic. 

Dosage. — Based  on  the  average  daily  dose  of  cod  liver  oil 
U.  S.  P.  (three  teaspoonfuls,  12  cc),  the  dose  should  be  equiva- 
lent to  at  least  930  units  of  vitamin  D,  U.  S.  P.  This  is  sug- 
gested as  an  approximate  dosage.  The  product  as  marketed  is 
accompanied  by  a  dropper  designed  to  deliver  25  drops  to  the 
cubic  centimeter. 

Manufactured  by  S.  M.  A.  Corporation,  Cleveland.  The  vitamin  D 
concentrate  is  used  by  license  of  Columbia  University  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,678,454   (July  24,   1928;   expires  1945).     No  U.   S.  trademark. 

WHITE'S  COD  LIVER  OIL  CONCENTRATE 
(LIQUID). — A  concentrate  of  the  unsaponifiable  fraction  of 
cod  liver  oil  dissolved  in  sufficient  cod  liver  oil  to  give  the 
desired  potency  to  the  finished  product.  It  has  a  vitamin  A 
potency  of  not  less  than  60,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and 
a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  8,500  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
per  gram. 

Actions  and  Uses. — It  possesses  properties  similar  to  those 
of  cod  liver  oil  so  far  as  these  depend  on  the  vitamin  content 
of  the  latter. 

Dosage. — For  the  Liquid:  Infants,  from  six  to  eight  drops 
daily ;  children,  two  to  four  drops  three  times  daily ;  adults, 
four  drops  three  times  daily.  The  liquid  is  marketed  with  a 
dropper  designed  to  supply  ^3  minim    (0.041    cc.)   in  each  two 


466     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

drops.  For  the  Capsules :  Children,  one  capsule  daily ;  adults, 
one  to  two  capsules  daily. 

Manufactured  by  the  White  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Newark,  N.  J.,  U.  S. 
patent    1,984,858. 

White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Capsules,  3  minims. — Each  capsule 
contains  White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  (Liquid)  3  minims  and  has 
a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  10,260  units  (U.  S.  P.}  and  a 
vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  1,453  units   (U.   S.  P.). 

White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,  50  cc. — Each  ^ 
minim  (0.038  Gm.)  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than  2,280  units 
(U.  S.  P.),  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  320  units 
(U.  S.  P.). 

TABLETS  COD  LIVER  OIL  CONCENTRATE- 
LEDERLE.  —  A  cod  liver  oil  concentrate  in  the  form  of 
sugar-coated  tablets,  each  having  a  vitamin  potency  of  not  less 
than  3,138  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A,  and  not  less  than 
314  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D.  Each  gram  of  tablet  has 
a  vitamin  potency  of  not  less  than  5,320  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of 
vitamin  A,  and  not  less  than  532  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Tablets  cod  liver  oil  concentrate-Lederle 
possess  properties  similar  to  those  of  cod  liver  oil  so  far  as 
these  depend  on  the  fat  soluble  vitamin  content  of  the  latter. 

Dosage. — The  dosage  should  be  regulated  according  to  the 
needs  of  the  individual  patient.  The  usual  dosage  for  adults 
is  two  to  three  tablets  after  meals ;  for  children,  one  to  two 
tablets  after  meals. 

Manufactured  by  the  Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  New 
York.      No   U.    S.   patent  or   trademark. 

The  basic  concentrate  is  obtained  from  cod  liver  oil  by  concentration 
of  the  unsaponifiable  fraction  of  the  latter.  The  vitamins  A  and  D 
potencies  of  tablets  cod  liver  oil  concentrate-Lederle  are  determined  by 
the  methods  of  the  U.  S.  P.:  When  assayed  by  these  methods  the 
product  is  required  to  have  a  potency  of  not  less  than  3,138  vitamin  A 
units  per  tablet,  or  5,320  vitamin  A  units  per  Gm.  of  tablet  and  not 
less  than  314  vitamin  D  units  per  tablet,  or  532  vitamin  D  units  per 
Gm.  of  tablet.      Biologic  assays  are  repeated  on  the  finished  tablet. 

UCOLINE    COD    LIVER    OIL    CONCENTRATE.— 

The  unsaponifiable  fraction  of  cod  liver  oil,  prepared  by  the 
Marcus  process,  dissolved  in  a  bland  vegetable  oil.  Each  gram 
of  the  solution  has  a  vitamin  potency  of  7,700  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
of  vitamin  A  and  552  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D.  The 
potencies  are  calculated  from  protocols  of  assay  based  on  pro- 
cedures other  than  the  new  U.  S.  P.  method,  data  according 
to  the  latter  not  having  been  available  when  the  book  went 
to  press. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Ucoline  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate 
possesses  properties  similar  to  those  of  cod  liver  oil  so  far  as 
these  depend  on  the  fat  soluble  vitamin  content  of  the  latter. 

Dosage. — From  3  to  6  drops  of  the  concentrate  solution  three 
times  daily  (a  glass  dropper  is  included  in  the  marketed  package, 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  467 

designed  to  deliver  one  minim  per  drop) ;  for  the  tablets,  1  to  2, 
three  times  daily. 

Manufactured  by  the  Ucoline  Products  Company,  Chicago,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,690,091    (Oct.  30,  1928,  expires  1945).     No  U.    S.  trademark. 

Ucoline  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Tablets. — Each  sugar  coated  tablet 
contains  0.02  Gm.  of  the  dry  concentrate.  They  are  assayed  to  contain 
in  each  tablet  not  less  than  1,400  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  and  nov 
less  than  154  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D.  This  represents  2,506 
units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A,  and  274  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D 
per  gram  of  tablet.  These  potencies  are  calculated  from  protocols  of 
assay  based  on  procedures  other  than  the  new  U.  S.  P.  method,  data 
according  to  the  latter  not  having  been  available  when  the  book  went 
to  press. 

WHITE'S  COD  LIVER  OIL  CONCENTRATE 
TABLETS.  —  A  cod  liver  oil  concentrate  in  the  form  of 
tablets.  Each  tablet  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than 
3,138  units  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  314  units 
when  assayed  by  the  method  of  the  U.  S.  P. ;  this  represents 
a  potency  per  gram  of  tablet  of  6,276  units  of  vitamin  A  and 
628  units  of  vitamin  D,  U.  S.  P. 

Actions  and  Uses. — White's  cod  liver  oil  concentrate  tablets 
possess  properties  similar  to  those  of  cod  liver  oil  so  far  as 
these  depend  on  the  fat-soluble  vitamin  content  of  the  latter. 

Dosage. — For  adults,  two  tablets  three  times  daily ;  for  chil- 
dren, one  tablet  three  times  daily,  after  each  meal;  for  infants, 
one  tablet  daily,  crushed  and  dissolved  in  the  feeding. 

Manufactured  by  White  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Newark,  N.  J.  U.  S.  patent 
1.984,858. 

IV kite's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,  5  cc. — Each  two- 
thirds  minim  (0.038  Gni.)  has  a  vitamin  A  potency  of  not  less  than 
z,280  units  (U.  S.  P.),  and  a  vitamin  D  potency  of  not  less  than  320 
units   (U.  S.  P.). 

The  concentrate  employed  in  the  manufacture  of  White's  cod  liver 
oil  concentrate  tablets  is  obtained  from  cod  liver  oil  by  concentration  of 
its  unsaponifiable  fraction.  The  vitamins  A  and  D  potencies  of  White's 
cod  liver  oil  concentrate  tablets  are  determined  by  the  U.  S.  P.  method; 
when  assayed  by  this  method  the  product  is  required  to  have  a  potency 
of  not  less  than  3,138  vitamin  A  units  per  tablet,  or  6,276  vitamin  A 
units  per  Gm.  of  tablet,  and  314  units  of  vitamin  D  per  tablet,  or  628 
vitamin  D  units  per  Gm.  of  tablet. 

HALIBUT     LIVER     OIL.— Oleum     Hippoglossi.  —  A 

fixed  oil  obtained  from  the  fresh  livers  of  Hippoglossns  liippo- 
glossus.  It  is  biologically  assayed  to  have  a  potency  of  not 
less  than  44,800  units  of  vitamin  A  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and 
not  less  than  540  units  of  vitamin  D   (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  The  same  as  those  for  cod  liver  oil 
(See  General  Article,  Fish  Liver  Oils,  Preparations  and 
Concentrates). 

Dosage. — For  infants,  6  to  10  drops  (2.5  to  3.5  minims) 
daily;  for  premature  and  rapidly  growing  infants,  15  drops 
(5.25  minims)  daily.  For  severe  vitamin  deficiencies,  20  drops 
(7   minims)    or   more   may    be   given   at   the   discretion   of   the 


468     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

physician.  The  accepted  preparations  are  marketed  with  an 
accompanying  dropper  designed  to  deliver  a  certain  number  of 
drops  to  the  minim. 

Halibut  liver  oil  is  a  yellow  to  brownish  yellow,  oily  liquid.  It 
has  a  slightly  fishy  but  not  rancid  odor  and  a  fishy  taste.  Halibut 
liver  oil  is  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol  but  is  soluble  in  ether,  chloro- 
form, benzene,  carbon  disulfide  and  ethyl  acetate.  The  specific  gravity 
is  from  0.920  to  0.930  at  25  C.  The  refractive  index  is  from  1.480 
to  1.485  at  20  C. 

A  solution  of  1  drop  of  the  oil  in  1  cc.  of  chloroform  when  shaken 
with  1  drop  of  sulfuric  acid  acquires  a  blue  color,  changing  to  violet, 
dark  green  and  finally  brown.  Treat  5  cc.  of  oil  with  5  cc.  of  benzene 
and  centrifuge  for  twenty-five  minutes  at  25  C:  no  precipitate  forms 
and  a  clear  solution  remains. 

Dissolve  2  Gni.  of  halibut  liver  oil  in  20  cc.  of  a  mixture  of  equal 
volumes  of  alcohol  and  ether,  which  previously  has  been  neutralized 
with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide,  using  5  drops  of  phenolphthalein 
T.  S.  as  indicator,  and  titrate  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  to 
the  production  of  a  pink  color  which  persists  for  fifteen  seconds:  not 
more  than  1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide  is  required  {free 
acid).  The  amount  of  unsaponifiable  matter,  as  determined  by  the 
method  of  U.  S.  P.  X,  page  463,  is  not  less  than  7  per  cent  nor  more 
than  13.5  per  cent  (it  is  solid  in  appearance).  The  saponification 
value  as  determined  by  the  method  of  U.  S.  P.  X,  page  457,  is  not 
less  than  160  and  not  more  than  180.  The  iodine  value,  as  deter- 
mined by  the  method  of  U.  S.  P.  X,  page  445,  on  0.18  to  0.20  Gm. 
of  sample,  accurately  weighed,  is  not  less  than  125  and  not  more  than 
155. 

Abbott's    Haliver    Oil,    Plain. — A   brand   of   hahbut   liver 

oil-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  U.  S. 
patent  and  trademark  applied  for. 

Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  Plain  Capsules,  3  minims:  Each  capsule  contains 
Abbott's  haliver  oil,  plain,    3  minims. 

Abbott's   haliver  oil  plain  is  prepared   by   extracting  the  oil   of  fresh 

halibut  livers.     The  oil  is  refined  and  assayed  biologically  to  have  not 

less  than  the  potency  of  halibut  liver  oil-N.   N.   R. 

I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  Plain.— A  brand  of  halibut 
liver  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by   International  Vitamin   Corporation.   New    York. 
No   U.   S.   patent.      U.   S.  trademark   314.818. 

Capsules  I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  Plain,  3  mi7iims. — The  content 
of  each  capsule  is  assayed  to  contain  not  less  than  10,000  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
of  vitamin  A  and  not  less  than  170  units   (U.  S.  P.)   of  vitamin  D. 

Manufactured  by  the  International  Vitamin  Corporation,  New  York. 
No  U.   S.  patent.     U.   S.  trademark  314,818. 

McKesson's  Halibut  Liver  Oil  Plain,  11  cc. — A  brand 
of  halibut  liver  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  International  Vitamin  Corporation,  New  York 
(McKesson  &  Robbins,  Inc.,  Bridgeport,  Conn.,  distributor).  No  U.  S. 
patent. 

McKesson's  Halibut  Liver  Oil  Plain,  Capsules,  3  minims. — The  content 
of  each  capsule  is  assayed  to  contain  not  less  than  10,000  units  (U.  S.  P.) 
of  vitamin  A  and  not  less  than   170  units   (U.   S.   P.)   of  vitamin  D. 

McKesson's  halibut  liver  oil  plain  is  prepared  by  extracting  the  oil  of 
fresh  halibut  livers.  The  oil  is  refined  and  assayed  to  have  not  less  than 
the   potency   of   halibut   liver   oil-N.   N.   R. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  469 

McKesson's  Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral 
Oil,  Capsules,  S  minims. — The  content  of  each  capsule  is  assayed  to  con 
tain  not  less  than  10,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  and  945  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D. 

Manufactured  by  the  International  Vitamin  Corporation,  New  York 
(McKesson  &  Robhins,  Inc.,  Bridgeport,  Conn.,  distributor).  No  U.  S. 
patent. 

Mead's  Halibut  Liver  Oil.— A  brand  of  halibut  liver  oil- 

N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Mead  Johnson  &  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Mead's  halibut  liver  oil  is  prepared  by  warming  the  livers  to  coag- 
ulation; the  extracted  oil  is  filtered,  treated  with  a  dilution  of  alkali, 
and  then  washed,  the  entire  process  being  conducted  with  a  substantial 
exclusion  of  air.  The  refined  oil  is  assayed  biologically  to  have  not  less 
than  the  potency  of  halibut  liver  oil-N,  N.  R. 

Parke-Davis  Haliver  Oil,  Plain. — A  brand  of  halibut  liver 
oil-N.  N.  R. 

Marketed  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.  U.  S.  patent  and 
trademark  applied   for. 

Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules  Parke-Davis  Haliver  Oil,  Plain,  S  minims: 
Each  capsule  contains  Parke-Davis  haliver  oil,  plain,  3  minims,  with  suf- 
ficient cod  liver  oil  to  fill  the  capsule. 

Parke-Davis    haliver    oil,    plain,    is    prepared   by    extraction    from    the 

livers   of    the    halibut.      The    oil    is    refined    and    assayed   biologically    to 

have  not  less  than  the  vitamin  potency  of  halibut  liver-oil-N.  N.  R. 

Squibb  Plain  Halibut  Liver  Oil. — A  brand  of  halibut 
liver  oil-X.  X.  R. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules  Squibb  Plain  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  3  minims: 
Each  capsule  contains  approximately  10  drops  or  0.2  cc.  of  Squibb  Plain 
Halibut  Liver   Oil. 

Squibb  Cod-Halibut  Liver  OH:  A  blend  of  refined  oils  from  the  livers 
of  the  cod  and  halibut  in  such  proportions  that  the  finished  product  has 
a  vitamin  potency  of  not  less  than  4,200  vitamin  A  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per 
gram  and  700  vitamin  D  units  (U.  S.  P.)   per  gram. 

Squibb   halibut-liver   oil   is   prepared  by   extraction   from   the   livers   of 

the   halibut.      The   oil   is  refined   and   assayed   to   have  not  less  than  the 

potency  of  halibut  liver  oil-N.   N.   R. 

HALIBUT     LIVER     OIL    WITH     VIOSTEROL.— 

Halibut  liver  oil  to  which  has  been  added  sufficient  viosterol 
(irradiated  ergosterol)  to  assure  a  potency  of  not  less  than 
9,000  vitamin  D  units  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram ;  the  halibut  liver 
oil  used  is  adjusted  (when  necessary)  to  have  a  vitamin  A 
potency  of  not  less  than  44,800  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A 
per  gram  by  the  addition  of  fish  liver  oils  from  one  or  more 
of  the  species  Gadiis  morrhua,  Ophiodon  elongatus  and  Ano- 
plopoma  fimbria. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  same  as  those  for  cod  liver  oil  (See 
General  Article,  Fish  Liver  Oils,  Preparations  and  Concen- 
trates, and  General   Article,   Viosterol). 


470     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — For  infants,  8  to  10  drops  (3  to  3.5  minims)  daily; 
for  premature  and  rapidly  growing  infants,  15  drops  (5.25 
minims)  daily;  for  older  children,  15  to  20  drops  (5.25  to 
7  minims)  daily;  for  adults,  especially  nursing  and  expectant 
mothers,  20  drops  (7  minims)  or  more  daily.  The  marketed 
preparation  is  accompanied  by  a  special  dropper  designed  to 
deliver  a  certain  number  of  drops  to  the  minim. 

Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  with  Viosterol. — A  brand  of  halibut 
liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  111.  U.  S. 
patent  and  trademark  applied  for.  The  viosterol  used  is  manufactured 
under  U.  S.  patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136 
(Aug.  9,  1932;  expires  1949)  by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni 
Research  Foundation. 

Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  3  minims: 
Each  capsule  contains  3  minims  of  Abbott's  halibut  liver  oil  with  viosterol 
diluted  with  3   minims  of  other  fish  oils. 

Abbott's  haliver  oil  with  viosterol  is  prepared  by  combining  halibut 
liver  oil,  one  or  more  other  fish  liver  oils,  and  viosterol  in  such  pro- 
portions that  the  finished  product  will  have  not  less  than  the  potency  of 
halibut    liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.   N.   R. 

Mead's  Viosterol  in  Halibut  Liver  Oil. — A  brand  of 
halibut  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Mead  Johnson  &  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark.  The  viosterol  used  is  manufactured  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9. 
1932;  expires  1949)  under  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni  Research 
Foundation. 

Mead's  Viosterol  in  Halibut  Liver  Oil  (In  Capsules) :  Each  capsule 
contains  3  minims  of  Mead's  viosterol  in  halibut  liver  oil. 

Mead's  Viosterol  in  halibut  liver  oil  is  prepared  by  combining  refined 
halibut  liver  oil,  one  or  more  other  fish  liver  oils,  and  viosterol  in  such 
proportions  as  to  bring  the  vitamin  potency  of  the  finished  product  to 
not  less  than  that  of  halibut  liver  oil  in  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 


Parke-Davis  Haliver  Oil  with  Viosterol.  —  A  brand  of 
halibut  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.   N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Company,  Detroit.  U.  S.  patent 
and  trademark  applied  for.  The  viosterol  used  is  manufactured  under 
U.  S.  patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136 
(Aug.  9,  1932;  expires  1949)  by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni 
Research  Foundation. 

Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Haliver  Oil  with   Viosterol. 

Parke-Davis  haliver  oil  with  viosterol  is  prepared  by  combining 
halibut  liver  oil,  one  or  more  other  fish  liver  oils,  and  viosterol  in 
such  proportions  that  the  finished  product  will  have  not  less  than  the 
vitamins  A  and  D  potency  of  halibut  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Squibb  Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol. — A  brand  of 

halibut  liver  oil  with  viosterol-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark.  The  viosterol  used  is  manufactured  under  U.  S.  patents 
1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9,  1932; 
expires    1949)    by   license  of   the   Wisconsin   Alumni   Research   Foundation. 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  471 

Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules  Squibb  Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  3 
minims:  Each  capsule  contains  approximately  10  drops  or  0.2  cc.  of 
Squibb   Halibut   Liver   Oil  with   Viosterol. 

Squibb  halibut-liver  oil  with  viosterol  is  prepared  by  combining  hali- 
but liver  oil  with  viosterol  in  oil  in  such  proportions  that  the  finished 
product  will  have  not  less  than  the  potency  of  halibut  liver  oil  with 
viosterol-N.    N.   R. 

I.  V.  C.  HALIBUT  LIVER  OIL  WITH  VITAMIN 
D  CONCENTRATE  IN  NEUTRAL  OIL.— Halibut  liver 
oil  to  which  has  been  added  a  concentrate  of  liver  oils  of 
Gadus  morrhua,  Ophiodon  elongatiis  and  Anoplopoma  fimbria. 
It  is  assayed  to  have  a  potency  of  not  less  than  59,000  units 
(U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  per  gram  and  not  less  than  1,000 
units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  per  gram. 

Manufactured  by  the  International  Vitamin  Corporation,  New  York. 
The  vitamin  D  concentrate  used  is  made  under  U.  S.  patent  1,690,091. 
U,  S.  trademark  314,818. 

Capsules  I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil  zvith  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in 
Neutral  Oil,  3  minims. — The  content  of  each  capsule  is  assayed  to  con- 
tain not  less  than  10,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  A  and  not  less 
than  945   units   (U.   S.  P.)   of  vitamin  D. 

McKESSON'S  HALIBUT  LIVER  OIL  WITH 
VITAMIN    D    CONCENTRATE    IN   NEUTRAL    OIL, 

6  CC. — Halibut  liver  oil  with  added  natural  vitamin  D  obtained 
from  cod  liver  oil  and  other  fish  liver  oils.  It  is  assayed  to 
have  a  potency  of  not  less  than  59,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of  vita- 
min A  per  gram  and  not  less  than  1,000  units  (U.  S.  P.)  of 
vitamin  D  per  gram. 

Manufactured  by  the  International  Vitamin  Corporation,  New  York 
(McKesson  &  Robbins,  Inc.,  Bridgeport,  Conn.,  distributor).  The 
vitamin   D  concentrate  used  is  made  under  U.   S.  patent  No.   1,690,091. 

PERCOMORPH  LIVER  OIL.— Oleum  Percomor- 
phum. — A  mixture  containing  the  fixed  oils  obtained  from  the 
fresh  livers  of  the  percomorph  fishes,  principally  Xiphias  gladius, 
Pneumatophorus  diego,  Thunnus  thynnus  and  Stereolepis  gigas 
— sometimes  also  Neothunnus  macropterus,  Katsuwonus  pelamis, 
Sarda  chiliensis,  Germo  alalunga,  Thunnus  orientalis,  Scomber 
scombrus,  Seriola  dorsalis,  Lutianus  campechanus,  Epinephelus 
morio,  Roccus  lineatus,  Cynoscion  nobilis,  Eriscion  macdonaldi, 
Epinephelus  analogus,  Stereolepis  ishinagi  and  Sphyraena 
argentea,  containing  50  per  cent  of  cod  liver  oil.  It  is  biologi- 
cally assayed  to  have  a  potency  of  not  less  than  60,000  units 
of  vitamin  A  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram  and  of  not  less  than  8,500 
units  of  vitamin  D  (U.  S.  P.)  per  gram. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Same  as  those  of  cod  liver  oil.  See 
General  Article,  Fish  Liver  Oils,  Preparations  and  Concentrates. 


472     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Dosage. — Prophylactic,  for  normal  infants  10  drops  daily ; 
curative,  and  in  severe  conditions,  to  20  drops  daily.  The 
product  is  marketed  with  a  dropper  designed  to  deliver  3  drops 
to  the  minim. 

Percomorph  liver  oil,  50%,  in  cod  liver  oil,  is  a  yellow  to  brownish 
yellow,  oily  liquid.  It  has  a  slightly  fishy  but  not  rancid  odor  and  a 
fishy  taste.  It  is  slightly  soluble  in  alcohol  but  is  soluble  in  ether, 
chloroform,  benzene,  carbontfisulfide  and  ethyl  acetate.  The  specific 
gravity  is  from  0.922  to  0.930  at  25  C.  The  refractive  index  is  from 
1.480  to  1.485  at  20  C. 

A  solution  of  one  drop  of  the  oil  in  1  cc.  of  chloroform,  when 
shaken  with  one  drop  of  sulfuric  acid,  acquires  a  blue  color,  changing 
to  violet,  dark  green,  and  finally  brown.  Treat  5  cc.  of  oil  with  5  cc. 
of  benzene  and  centrifugate  for  twenty-five  minutes  at  25  C;  no  pre- 
cipitate forms   and   a   clear   solution   remains. 

Fill  a  tall,  cylindric,  standard  oil-sample  bottle  of  about  120  cc. 
capacity  with  percomorph  liver  oil,  50%,  in  cod  liver  oil,  at  a  tem- 
perature between  23  and  28  C,  stopper,  and  immerse  the  bottle  in  a 
mixture  of  ice  and  distilled  water  for  five  hours:  the  oil  remains  fluid 
and   forms  no  deposit. 

Dissolve  2  Gm.  of  percomorph  liver  oil,  50%,  in  cod  liver  oil  in 
20  cc.  of  a  mixture  of  equal  volumes  of  alcohol  and  ether,  which  pre- 
viously has  been  neutralized  with  tenth-normal  sodium  hydroxide,  using 
5  drops  of  phenolphthalein  T.  S.  as  indicator,  and  titrate  with  tenth- 
normal sodium  hydroxide  to  the  production  of  a  pink  color  which 
persists  for  fifteen  seconds:  not  more  than  1  cc.  of  tenth-normal 
sodium  hydroxide  is  required  {free  acid).  The  amount  of  unsaponifi- 
able  matter  as  determined  by  the  method  of  U.  S.  P.  XI,  page  446,  is 
not  less  than  3.5  per  cent  nor  more  than  7  per  cent  (it  is  semisolid  in 
appearance).  The  saponification  value  as  determined  by  the  method  of 
U.  S.  P.  XI,  page  445,  is  not  less  than  174  and  not  more  than  186.  The 
iodine  value  as  determined  by  the  method  of  U.  S.  P.  XI,  page  445,  on 
0.18  to  0.20  Gm.  of  sample,  accurately  weighed,  is  not  less  than  145 
and  not  more  than   180. 

The  undiluted  fixed  oil  obtained  from  the  fresh  livers  of  the  perco- 
morph fishes  and  used  in  the  preparation  of  percomorph  liver  oil  50  per 
cent  in  cod  liver  oil  conforms  to  the  following  constants  as  determined 
by  methods  of  U.  S.  P.  XI:  specific  gravity,  from  0.924  to  0.930  at 
25  C;  refractive  index,  from  1.^84  to  1.490  at  20  C;  free  acid  in 
2  Gm.,  equivalent  to  not  more  than  1  cc.  of  tenth-normal  sodium 
hydroxide;  unsaponifiable  matter,  not  less  than  7  nor  more  than  13  per 
cent  (semi-solid  in  appearance)  ;  saponification  value,  not  less  than  168 
nor  more  than   182;  iodine  value,  not  less  than   145  nor  more  than  180. 

Mead's  Oleum  Percomorphum. — A  brand  of  percomorph 
liver  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Mead  Johnson  &  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind.  No  U.  S. 
patent  or  trademark. 

Mead's  Oleum  Percomorphum,  50%  (In  Capsules):  Each  capsule  con- 
tains 10  drops  (0.222  Gm.)  of  Mead's  Oleum  Percomorphum,  50%,  repre- 
senting a  vitamin  potency  of  not  less  than  13,300  vitamin  A  units  and 
1,850   vitamin    D    units,    U.    S.    P. 

Mead's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Fortified  with  Percomorph  Liver  Oil  (See  under 
Mead's   Standardized  Cod   Liver   Oil). 

VIOSTEROL 

Investigations  dealing  with  the  chemistry  and  physiology  of 
vitamin  D  led  to  the  demonstration  that  ergosterol  acquires 
antirachitic  activity  when  subjected  to  ultraviolet  irradiation. 
Ergosterol  is  a  widely  distributed  plant  sterol  that  was  first 
isolated  from  ergot  and  the  compound  can  readily  be  prepared 


VITAMIN     PREPARATIONS  473 

from  yeast.  In  1929  the  Council  adopted  the  term  "Viosterol" 
to  designate  irradiated  ergosterol.  Since  that  time  it  has  been 
demonstrated  that  other  physico-chemical  processes  may  be 
used  to  change  ergosterol  to  a  product  similar  in  physiological, 
physical  and  chemical  properties  to  irradiated  ergosterol.  Such 
forms  of  activated  ergosterol,  and  irradiated  ergosterol  pre- 
pared by  modifications  of  the  original  method,  are  designated 
as  "Viosterol"  followed  by  a  designation  of  the  process  used 
in  their  preparations.  The  term  "Viosterol  in  Oil"  is  used  to 
designate    viosterol    dissolved    in    edible   vegetable    oil. 

COD  LIVER  OIL  WITH  VIOSTEROL  (See  under 
Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Cod  Liver  Oil  Preparations). 

HALIBUT  LIVER  OIL  WITH  VIOSTEROL  (See 
under  Halibut  Liver  Oil  and  Halibut  Liver  Oil  Preparations). 

VIOSTEROL  IN  OIL.— Irradiated  Ergosterol  in  Oil- 
Activated  Ergosterol  in  Oil. — Viosterol  dissolved  in  a  vege- 
table oil  and  standardized  to  contain  the  equivalent  of  at  least 
10,000  units   (U.  S.  P.)  of  vitamin  D  in  each  Gm. 

Actions  and  Uses. — See  preceding  article,  Viosterol. 

Dosage. — Daily  prophylactic  dose  for  the  average  infant  and 
child,  8  to  10  drops  (0.16  to  0.21  cc. :  2^  to  3^^  minims); 
for  the  premature  and  rapidly  growing  infant,  15  drops  (0.31 
cc. :  5  minims)  ;  daily  curative  dose,  15  to  20  drops  (0.31  to 
0.41  cc. :  5  to  7  minims)  ;  in  severe  cases  and  for  adults,  doses 
in  excess  of  20  drops  may  be  given.  The  marketed  preparations 
are  accompanied  by  a  standard  dropper  designed  to  deliver  3 
drops  to  the  minim. 

Viosterol  in  oil  is  standardized  by  comparison  with  a  standard- 
ized  reference   specimen   of  cod   liver  oil. 

Viosterol  in  Oil-N.  N.  R.  must  be  labeled  in  terms  of  U.  S.  P.  units 
of  vitamin  D  per  Gm. 

Viosterol    in    Oil-Abbott. — A    brand    of   viosterol    in    oil- 

N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  The  Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9 
1932;  expires  1949)  by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni  Research 
Foundation. 

Viosterol  in  oil-Abbott  is  prepared  by  dissolving  ergosterol  in 
anhydrous,  peroxide  free  ether-U.  S.  P.;  the  solution  is  filtered,  placed 
in  transparent  quartz  containers  with  reflux  condensers,  and  exposed  to 
ultraviolet  rays  at  a  determined  distance  and  intensity  for  a  determined 
length  of  time._  The  irradiated  ergosterol,  freed  of  ether  and  dissolved 
in  sesame  oil,  is  biologically  assayed  and  adjusted  to  have  the  potency 
of  viosterol  in  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Mead's  Viosterol  in  Oil.  —  A  brand  of  viosterol  in  oil- 
N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Mead  Johnson  &  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind.,  under  U.  S. 
patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9, 
1932;  expires  1949)  by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni  Research 
Foundation. 


474     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Mead's  viosterol  in  oil  is  prepared  by  exposing,  under  reflux, 
an  ether  solution  of  ergosterol  and  an  antioxidant  to  the  radiation 
from  an  iron-cored-carbon  arc.  The  antioxidant  is  then  removed,  the 
solvent  evaporated  to  dryness,  and  the  residue  dissolved  in  maize  oil. 
The  resulting  solution  is  biologically  assayed  and  adjusted  to  have  the 
potency  of  viosterol  in  oil-N.  N.  R.  The  final  dilution  is  also  biologi- 
cally  tested. 

Viosterol  in  Oil-Merrell,  Sperti  Process. — A  brand  of 
viosterol  in  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  William  S.  Merrell  Company,  Cincinnati,  under 
U.  S.  patent  1,676,579  (July  10,  1928;  expires  1945),  by  license  of  the 
General  Development  Laboratories,  Inc. 

Viosterol  in  oil-Merrell,  Sperti  process,  is  prepared  by  irradiation  of 
a  solution  of  ergosterol  by  ultraviolet  rays  of  predetermined  or  selected 
wavelengths,  waves  shorter  than  2,753  angstroms  being  removed.  After 
irradiation  the  solution  is  refined  to  remove  the  majority  of  unchanged 
ergosterol,  the  solvent  is  distilled  off  at  a  low  temperature  in  an  inert 
atmosphere,  and  the  irradiated  ergosterol  is  taken  up  in  a  known  weight 
of  vegetable  oil.  The  resulting  concentrate  is  adjusted  by  admixture 
of  a  bland  vegetable  oil  so  that  the  final  product  when  assayed  accord- 
ing to  the  U.  S.  P.  method  has  not  less  than  the  vitamin  D  potency  of 
viosterol  in  oil — N.  N.  R. 

Parke,    Davis    &    Co.'s   Viosterol   in   Oil.  —  A  brand   of 

viosterol  in  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit,  under  U.  S.  patent 
1,683,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  and  1,871,136  (Aug.  9,  1932; 
expires   1949)   by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni   Research  Foundation. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.'s  Viosterol  in  Oil  is  prepared  by  dissolving 
crystalline  ergosterol  in  purified  ether  to  a  definite  concentration;  the 
solution  is  then  irradiated  by  exposure  for  a  specified  time  to  ultra- 
violet light  of  a  constant  artificial  source;  after  irradiation  the  ether  is 
recovered  and  the  irradiated  ergosterol  is  dissolved  in  maize  oil.  The 
final  dilution  and  concentration  is  based  upon  the  biological  assay  and 
is  adjusted  to  have  the  potency  of  viosterol  in  oil-N.  N.  R. 

Viosterol  in  Oil-Squibb.  —  A  brand  of  viosterol  in  oil- 
N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons,  New  York,  under  U.  S.  patent 

1,680,818,    (Aug.    14,    1928;   expires   1945)    and   1,871.136    (Aug.   9,   1932; 

expires  1949)    by  license  of  the  Wisconsin  Alumni  Research  Foundation. 

Viosterol     in     oil-Squibb     is     prepared     by     dissolving     ergosterol     in 

ether;    the   solution   is   then   irradiated   by  exposure   to    ultraviolet   rays; 

after  assay  of  the  irradiated  ergosterol  for  its  antirachitic  potency,  it  is 

dissolved  in  maize  oil  and  adjusted  to  have  the  potency  of  viosterol  in 

oil-N.  N.  R. 

Winthrop  Viosterol  in  Oil. — A  brand  of  viosterol  in  oil- 

N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Winthrop  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  New  York,  under 
U._  S.  patent  1,680,818  (Aug.  14,  1928;  expires  1945)  by  license  of  the 
Wisconsin  Alumni   Research  Foundation. 

Winthrop  viosterol  in  oil  is  prepared  by  dissolving  ergosterol  in 
alcohol.  The  solution  is  then  irradiated  by  exposure  _  to  ultraviolet 
rays  at  a  determined  distance  and  intensity.  After  irradiation  the 
alcohol  is  distilled  off  in  vacuo  and  the  residue  is  dissolved  in  sesame 
oil  and  adjusted,  on  the  basis  of  biologic  assay,  to  have  the  potency  of 
viosterol  in   oil-N.  N.  R. 


XANTHINE     DERIVATIVES  475 

XANTHINE     DERIVATIVES 

Structure  and  Relations.  —  Caffeine,  theobromine  and  theo- 
phylline are  methyl  xanthines,  derived  from  xanthine  by  the 
introduction  of  two  or  three  methyl  radicals  into  a  correspond- 
ing number  of  NH2  groups.  As  these  may  occupy  various  posi- 
tions in  the  xanthine  nucleus,  a  considerable  number  of  methyl 
xanthines  exist,  naturally  or  by  synthesis,  differing  quantitatively 
in  pharmacologic  activity.  Those  named,  however,  are  the  only 
ones  of  therapeutic  importance,  namely,  caffeine  (1:3:7  tri- 
methylxanthine) ;  theobromine  (3 :  7  dimethylxanthine)  ;  and 
theophylline    (1 :  3  dimethylxanthine). 

Caffeine  is  usually  obtained  from  tea  or  coffee;  theobromine 
is  obtained  from  cacao,  or  is  made  synthetically.  Theophylline 
occurs  in  nature  but  in  amounts  too  small  to  be  commercially 
available.  It  is  prepared  synthetically.  Theocin  is  a  proprietary 
name  for  synthetic  theophylline. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  Theobromine  and  theophylline  surpass 
caffeine  in  their  diuretic,  and  perhaps  in  cardiac  and  muscular 
actions.  They  are,  therefore,  generally  preferred  in  cardiac 
edemas,  etc.,  since  they  are  equally,  or  more,  effective,  more 
prompt,  and  largely  avoid  the  unpleasant  side  effects  (insomnia, 
nervousness,  gastric  disturbance)  which  often  interfere  with  the 
use  of  caffeine  in  adequate  doses.  This  freedom  from  side  effects 
holds  true,  particularly  for  theobromine.  Theophylline  surpasses 
theobromine  in  diuretic  efficacy,  but  its  action  is  probably  not 
so  lasting ;  it  may  produce  gastric  disturbances ;  renal  irritation 
has  been  reported.  Theobromine  is,  therefore,  generally  pre- 
ferred, sometimes  preceded  for  a  few  days  by  theophylline.  If 
central  stimulation  is  desired,  caffeine  must  be  used. 

Compounds. — The  slight  solubility  of  theobromine  and  theo- 
phylline limits  their  usefulness.  They  are  therefore  used  almost 
exclusively  in  the  form  of  the  readily  soluble  double  salts  (such 
as  theobromine  with  sodium  salicylate,  U.  S.  P.),  which  they 
form  with  a  considerable  number  of  compounds.  There  is  no 
reason  to  suppose  that  the  particular  salt  used  to  procure  the 
solubility  has  any  material  influence  on  the  action.  The  dosage 
of  these  added  compounds  is  also  generally  too  small  to  produce 
therapeutic  effects.  It  may,  therefore,  be  assumed  that  the 
various  preparations  which  have  been  introduced  are  strictly 
equivalent. 

Theobromine  and  Theobromine  Compounds 

THEOBROMINE.  —  Theobromina.  —  3,7-Dimethylxan- 
thine. — ■  C5H2(CH8)2.02N4.  A  base  occurring  in  Theobroma 
cacao;  also  made  synthetically. 

Actions  and  Uses. — The  uses  of  theobromine  are  similar  to 
those  of  caffeine,  but  its  action  is  said  to  be  relatively  greater 
on  the  heart  and  muscles  and  also  as  a  diuretic.  It  does  not 
act  so  powerfully  on  the  central  nervous  system. 


476     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

It  is  used  as  a  diuretic ;  myocardial  stimulant ;  and  as  a  means 
of  obtaining  relief  of  pain  in  angina  and  similar  lancinating 
pains  (this  effect  is  obtained  more  frequently  with  theophylline). 
Though  theobromine  (and  theophylline)  have  been  used  for 
lowering  hypertension,  the  evidence  for  this  action  does  not 
seem  to  warrant  this  use.  The  great  obstacle  to  its  use  has 
been  its  insolubility  and  the  consequent  uncertainty  of  the  degree 
of  its  absorption.     It  is  liable  to  produce  gastric  disturbances. 

Dosage. — From  0.35  to  0.5  Gm.  (5  to  8  grains). 

Theobromine  occurs  as  colorless,  rhombic  needles  or  as  a  white 
crystalline  powder,  odorless,  bitter,  and  permanent  in  the  air. 

Theobromine  is  slightly  soluble  in  water,  alcohol,  ethyl  acetate  and 
chloroform,  and  insoluble  in  petroleum  ether.  It  is  soluble  in  aqueous 
solutions  of  the  alkalis. 

Dissolve  about  0.01  Gm.  of  theobromine  in  1  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid 
in  a  porcelain  dish,  add  0.1  Gm.  of  potassium  chlorate,  evaporate  the 
mixture  to  dryness  on  a  water  bath  and  invert  the  dish  over  a  vessel 
containing  a  few  drops  of  ammonia  water:  the  residue  acquires  a 
purple  color,  which  is  destroyed  by  fixed  alkalis. 

Add  about  0.2  Gm.  of  theobromine  to  3  cc.  of  water  containing  a 
few  drops  of  diluted  sulfuric  acid  and  heat  the  mixture;  cool,  filter 
and  add  a  few  drops  of  tannic  acid  solution:  a  white  precipitate  is 
formed  which  is  soluble  in  an  excess  of  the  reagent. 

Dissolve  about  0.1  Gm.  of  theobromine  in  50  cc.  of  very  dilute 
ammonia  water  by  the  aid  of  a  gentle  heat;  add  an  excess  of  silver 
nitrate  solution;  agitate  the  mixture  and  warm  on  the  water  bath:  a 
white,    crystalline   precipitate   forms  on  standing. 

The  aqueous  solution  of  the  theobromine  (1  in  2,000)  is  not  precipi- 
tated by  iodine  solution  or  by  potassium  mercuric  iodide  solution 
(absence  of  most  foreign   alkaloids). 

Shake  about  1  Gm.  of  theobromine,  accurately  weighed,  with  10  cc. 
of  benzol  in  a  glass-stoppered  container;  allow  to  stand  over  night, 
filter  through  dry  filter  paper,  reject  the  first  5  cc.  of  filtrate,  evap- 
orate the  succeeding  3  cc.  of  the  filtrate,  dry  the  residue,  if  any,  at 
100  C.,  and  weigh:  the  residue  should  weigh  not  more  than  0.001  Gm. 
(limit  of  caffeine).  Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  theobromine,  accurately 
weighed,  to  constant  weight  at  100  C:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  3  per 
cent  of  the  weight  taken  (limit  of  moisture).  Incinerate  about  0.5  Gm. 
of  theobromine,  accurately  weighed:  the  ash  does  not  exceed  0.1  per 
cent.  Dissolve  about  0.2  Gm.  of  theobromine  in  5  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid:  not  more  than  a  faint  yellow  color  is  produced  within  five  minutes 
(organic  impurities). 

Theobromine-Merck. — A  brand  of  theobromine-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J.,  distributor. 

THEOBROMINE  SODIUM-ACETATE.  —  Theobro- 
minae  Sodio-Acetas. — A  hydrated  double  salt  of  theobromine 
sodium  and  sodium  acetate,  containing  not  less  than  6?)  per  cent 
of  theobromine,  corresponding  to  about  80  per  cent  of  the  anhy- 
drous double  salt.— NaCTHTOaNi+NaCoHaOo. 

Actions  and  Uses.  —  Theobromine  sodium-acetate  acts  like 
theobromine,  over  which  it  has  the  advantages  of  greater  solu- 
bility and  of  being  well  tolerated  by  the  stomach.  While 
inferior  in  diuretic  power  to  theophylline  (which  see),  it  is  said 
to  have  greater  power  in  sustaining  the  diuresis  produced. 


XANTHINE     DERIVATIVES  477 

Dosage. — From  0.5  to  1  Gm.  (8  to  15  grains),  preferably  in 
wafers  or  capsules.  If  in  solution,  this  should  be  freshly  pre- 
pared (with  peppermint  water),  without  sugar  or  mucilage. 

Theobromine  sodium-acetate  is  a  white,  finely  crystalline  powder, 
odorless  and  bitter.  It  is  soluble  in  cold  water;  slightly  soluble  in 
cold  alcohol;  more  so  in  hot  alcohol.  Its  aqueous  solutions  are  strongly 
alkaline  toward  phenolphthalein  and  litmus.  Jt  is  quite  hygroscopic, 
and  in  aqueous  solution  when  exposed  to  air  it  gradually  splits  up 
into  its  components  through  absorption  of  carbon  dioxide  and  becomes 
incompletely  soluble.  Its  aqueous  solution  is  precipitated  and  decom- 
posed by  carbon  dioxide  and  by  acids.  It  forms  a  bluish-white  pre- 
cipitate with  silver  nitrate  solution,  a  blue  precipitate  with  copper 
sulfate  solution,  and  a  white  one  with  tartar  emetic  solution.  It  is 
not  readily  precipitated  by  mercuric  potassium  iodide  solution  or  by 
iodine  solution.  It  is  incompatible  with  carbonated  beverages,  acids, 
saccharine  and  mucilaginous  liquids,  and  most  of  the  alkaloidal  reagents. 

To  10  cc.  of  an  aqueous  solution  of  theobromine  sodium-acetate 
(1  in  50)  add  2  cc.  of  diluted  nitric  acid,  filter  and  add  a  few  drops  of 
silver  nitrate  solution  to  the  filtrate:  not  more  than  an  opalescence 
results    {limit  of  chloride). 

Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  theobromine  sodium-acetate,  accurately  weighed, 
to  constant  weight  at  100  C. :  the  loss  does  not  exceed  20  per  cent. 

Dissolve  about  1  Gm.  of  theobromine  sodium-acetate,  accurately 
weighed,  which  has  previously  been  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100  C. 
in  100  cc.  of  hot  water,  add  phenolphthalein  solution  and  titrate  with 
normal  hydrochloric  acid  to  the  disappearance  of  the  pink  color:  not 
more   than    Z.7   cc.   of   normal    acid    should   be   required    for    each   gram. 

Dissolve  about  0.25  Gm.  of  theobromine  sodium-acetate,  accurately 
weighed,  which  has  been  previously  dried  to  constant  weight  at  100  C., 
in  100  cc.  of  hot  water,  add  a  few  drops  of  potassium  chromate  solu- 
tion and  titrate  the  solution  while  hot  with  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate 
to  the  formation  of  a  reddish  color;  the  tenth-normal  silver  nitrate 
consumed  corresponds  to  at  least  63  per  cent  of  theobromine. 

Agurin. — A  brand  of  theobromine  sodium-acetate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  Inc.,  New  York, 
trademark  36,018. 

Theobromine  and  Sodium  Acetate-Merck. — A  brand  of 
theobromine  sodium-acetate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  Merck  &  Co.  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J.  No  U.  S.  patent 
or  trademark. 

Theobromine  and  Sodium  Acetate-Roche. — A  brand  of 
theobromine  sodium-acetate-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  F.  Hoffmann-La  Roche  &  Co.,  Basle,  Switzerland 
(Hoffmann-La  Roche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J.). 

THEOCALCIN.— A  double  salt  or  mixture  of  calcium 
theobromine  ([C7H702N4]2Ca)  and  calcium  salicylate  ([C7H5 
OsJsCa).     It  contains  not  less  than  44  per  cent  of  theobromine. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Theocalcin  acts  like  theobromine,  over 
which  it  has  the  advantage  of  greater  solubility.  It  is,  however, 
less  soluble  than  the  official  theobromine  with  sodium  salicylate: 
on  this  account  it  is  claimed  to  be  less  likely  to  produce  gastric 
irritation. 


478     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Do^a^^.— Average  dose,  from  0.5  to  1  Gm.  (7  to  15  grains) 
three  times  a  day. 

Manufactured  by  E,  Bilhuber,  Inc.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J.    (Bilhuber-Knoll 
Corporation,    Jersey    City,    N.    J.,    distributor.)       U.    S.    patent    1,547,698 
(July  28,   1925;  expires   1942).     U.   S.  trademark  194,898. 
Theocalcin  Tablets,  7H   Grains. 

Theocalcin  is  a  white,  amorphous  powder,  having  a  saline  taste.  It 
is  partly  soluble  in  water. 

An  aqueous  solution  of  theocalcin  is  alkaline  to  phenolphthalein. 
An  aqueous  solution  of  theocalcin  (1  in  100),  slightly  acidulated  with 
acetic  acid,  becomes  violet  on  the  addition  of  ferric  chloride  solution. 
Transfer  about  0.05  Gm.  of  theocalcin  to  a  test  tube,  add  3  cc.  of 
diluted  acetic  acid  and  heat  to  boiling;  cool  the  contents  of  the  test  tube, 
filter  and  to  the  filtrate  add  0.5  cc.  of  ammonium  oxalate  solution:  a 
precipitate  forms,  which  dissolves  on  addition  of  1  cc.  of  diluted 
hydrochloric  acid.  To  about  0.05  Gm.  of  the  precipitate  obtained  in 
the  assay  for  theobromine,  add  1  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  about 
0.1  Gm.  of  potassium  chlorate  and  evaporate  to  dryness  on  a  water 
bath:  a  reddish  yellow  residue  remains,  which  becomes  purple  when 
moistened  with  a  drop  of  ammonia  water. 

Dried  to  constant  weight  at  110  C.,  theocalcin  loses  not  more  than 
5  per  cent  (water).  Treat  0.1  Gm.  of  theocalcin  with  2  cc.  of  sulfuric 
acid:  no  effervescence  occurs  {carbonate)  nor  is  more  than  a  slight  color 
produced  {readily  carbonizable  substances).  Mix  1  Gm.  of  theocalcin 
with  10  cc.  of  distilled  water,  add  a  few  cubic  centimeters  of  sodium 
hydroxide  solution  (filter  if  necessary)  and  shake  the  mixture  with  10 
cc.  of  chloroform,  separate  the  chloroform  layer,  evaporate  it  to  dry- 
ness on  a  water  bath  and  dry  to  constant  weight  at  80  C. :  the  weight 
of  the  residue  so  obtained  does  not  exceed  0.005   Gm.    {caffeine). 

Suspend  about  2  Gm.  of  theocalcin,  accurately  weighed,  in  75  cc.  of 
water  and  add  diluted  hydrochloric  acid  until  the  solution  is  acid  to 
phenolphthalein.  Warm  gently,  then  add  sodium  carbonate  solution 
until  the  calcium  is  completely  precipitated,  avoiding  a  large  excess. 
Filter  off  the  calcium  carbonate;  evaporate  the  combined  filtrate  and 
washings  on  a  steam  bath  to  20  cc.  Add  diluted  hydrochloric  acid, 
drop  by  drop,  until  just  acid  (to  phenolphthalein),  then  dilute  ammonia 
water  until  slightly  alkaline.  Allow  to  stand  at  from  20  to  25  C.  for 
three  hours,  stirring  occasionally.  Transfer  the  precipitate  of  theo- 
bromine to  a  tared  Gooch  crucible.  Wash  the  precipitate  and  filter  with 
four  successive  portions  of  5  cc.  each  of  ice  cold  distilled  water  and 
dry  to  constant  weight  at  100  C.  To  the  weight  of  the  precipitate 
thus  obtained,  add  0.14  Gm.  The  total  weight  corresponds  to  not  less 
than  44  per  cent  of  the  weight  of  theocalcin  taken.  About  0.2  Gm. 
of  the  precipitate  obtained  in  the  assay  for  theobromine  volatilizes 
when   slowly   heated,   leaving  only   a   negligible   residue. 

Theophylline  and  Theophylline  Compounds 

AMINOPHYLLINE.—Aminophyllin.— Theophylline  with 
Ethylenediamine-U.  S.  P. — A  double  salt  or  mixture  of  theo- 
phylline, C5Ho(CH3)2.02N4.H20,  and  ethylenediamine,  C2H4 
(NH2)2,  containing  not  less  than  70  per  cent  of  anhydrous 
theophylline    (calculated  to  the   dried   specimen). 

Actions  and  Uses. — Aminophylline  has  the  actions  and  uses 
of  theophylline  and  theophylline  with  sodium-acetate,  over  which 
it  has  the  advantage  of  greater  solubility.  Like  these  it  has  a 
diuretic  action,  produces  myocardial  stimulation.  It  has  been 
claimed  that  in  certain  cases  relief  of  pain  has  followed  the  use 
of  theophylline  preparations  in  cardiac  conditions.  The  evidence 
that  this  was  due  to  the  theophylline  is  not  convincing,  and  there 
is  no  evidence  that  the  improvement,  if  it  occurred,  was  due  to 
coronary  dilatation. 


XANTHINE     DERIVATIVES  479 

Dosage. — Orally,  from  0.1  to  0.2  Gm. ;  by  rectal  administra- 
tion in  the  form  of  suppositories,  0.36  Gm.,  or,  as  a  retention 
enema,  from  0.3  to  0.4  Gm.  dissolved  in  water;  intramuscularly, 
0.48  Gm. ;  intravenously,  in  emergencies  only,  0.24  Gm. 

Aminophylline  occurs  as  white  or  slightly  yellowish  granules,  possess- 
ing a  slight  ammoniacal  odor  and  a  bitter  taste;  soluble  in  water,  about 
1  part  in  5  parts  at  25  C. ;  insoluble  in  alcohol  and  ether.  An  aqueous 
solution  is  distinctly  alkaline  to  litmus  paper;  on  exposure  to  air  it 
gradually    absorbs   carbon  dioxide   with   the   liberation   of  theophylline. 

Dissolve  about  0.5  Gm.  of  aminophylline  in  25  cc.  of  distilled  water, 
previously  boiled  to  remove  carbon  dioxide,  add,  with  constant  stirring, 
1  cc.  of  diluted  hydrochloric  acid:  collect  the  precipitate  of  theophylline 
on  a  filter  paper,  wash  with  cold  water,  dry  at  100  C:  it  melts  at  from 
267  to  272  C.  Place  about  0.01  Gm.  of  the  resultant  precipitate  in  a 
porcelain  dish,  add  1  cc.  of  hydrochloric  acid  and  0.1  Gm.  of  potassium 
chlorate,  evaporate  the  mixture  to  dryness  on  a  water-bath:  on  inverting 
the  dish  over  ammonia,  the  residue  assumes  a  purple  color,  readily 
destroyed  by  fixed  alkalis.  To  the  filtrate  from  the  foregoing  add  2  cc. 
of  benzoyl  chloride,  followed  by  the  addition  of  5  cc.  of  sodium 
hydroxide  solution,  agitate  the  mixture  and  heat  gently  for  a  short 
time  and  allow  to  cool:  collect  the  precipitate  of  ethylenediamine 
dibenzoate  on  a  filter  paper,  wash  with  water  and  dry  at  100  C:  it 
melts  at  244  C. 

Incinerate  about  1  Gm.  of  aminophylline,  accurately  weighed:  the 
residue  does  not  exceed  0.1  per  cent.  Dry  about  1  Gm.  of  aminophyl- 
line, accurately  weighed,  in  a  desiccator  over  calcium  chloride  for 
forty-eight  hours:  the  loss  does  not  exceed  4.5  per  cent.  Transfer  about 
0.2  Gm.  of  aminophylline,  accurately  weighed,  to  a  500  cc.  Kjeldahl 
flask  and  determine  the  nitrogen  content  according  to  the  Gunning 
method  described  in  Official  and  Tentative  Methods  of  Analysis  of  the 
Association  of  Official  Agricultural  Chemists,  edition  3,  1930,  page  20, 
chapter  2,  paragraph  22:  the  percentage  of  nitrogen  corresponds  to 
not  less  than  32.2  per  cent  nor  more  than  2)2>  per  cent,  calculated  to 
the  dried  substance.  Transfer  about  0.15  Gm.  of  aminophylline  to  a 
100  cc.  volumetric  flask  containing  5  Gm.  of  sodium  chloride  and 
10  cc.  of  20  per  cent  hydrochloric  acid,  followed  by  the  addition  of 
50  cc.  of  tenth-normal  iodine  solution;  finally  dilute  with  water  to  the 
final  volume  of  100  cc.  and  allow  to  stand  for  thirty  minutes,  shaking 
at  intervals;  filter  through  paper,  rejecting  the  first  20  cc.  of  the  fil- 
trate; measure  accurately  50  cc.  of  the  filtrate  into  an  Erlenmeyer  flask 
and  titrate  the  excess  of  iodine  with  tenth-normal  sodium  thiosulfate 
solution,  using  starch-paste  as  an  indicator;  the  amount  of  iodine  con- 
sumed, multiplied  by  two  and  the  conversion  factor  (0.004503  Gm.) 
represents  the  amount  of  theophylline  present  in  the  specimen;  the  per- 
centage of  theophylline  found  by  this  method  should  not  be  less  than 
70  per  cent  nor  more  than  83  per  cent,  calculated  to  the  dried  substance. 

Note. — No  satisfactory  method  for  accurate  determination  of  theophyl- 
line in  theophylline-ethylenediamine  has  been  found.  The  assay  by  the 
periodide  method  is  only  roughly  approximate;  it  is  important  that  as 
nearly  exactly  the  specified  amount  of  aminophylline  as  possible  be 
used  with  iodine  because  the  solubility  of  the  periodide  precipitate  varies. 
This  assay  method  of  standardization  is  therefore  at  best  approximate 
and  must  be  considered  tentative  until  such  time  as  more  accurate  analytic 
procedure  is  available. 

Dubin-Aminophyllin. — A  brand  of  aminophylline-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  H.  E.  Dubin  Laboratories,  Inc.,  New  York.  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Ampules  Solution  Dubin-Aminophyllin,  0.24  Gm.,  10  cc. 
Ampules  Solution  Dubin-Aminophyllin,  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc. 
Suppositories  Dubin-Aminophyllin,  0.36  Gm. 
Tablets  Dubin-Aminophyllin,   0.1   Gm. 


480     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

Aminophylline-Pharmedic. — A  brand  of  aminophylline- 
N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  the  Pharmedic  Corporation,  New  York,  N.  Y.  No 
U.   S.  patent  or  trademark. 

Ampules   Solution   Aminophylline-Pharmedic,    0.24    Gnu,    10    cc. 
Ampules  Solution  Aminophylline-Pharmedic,  0.48  Gin.,  2  cc. 
Suppositories  Aminophylline-Pharmedic,   0.36  Gm. 
Tablets  Aminophylline-Pharmedic,   0.1   Gm. 

Aminophylline-Searle. — A  brand  of  aminophylline-N.  N.  R. 

Manufactured  by  G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.,  Chicago.  No  U.  S.  patent  or 
trademark. 

Ampules  Solution  Aminophylline-Searle,  0.24  Gm.,  10  cc:  Each  ampule 
contains  aminophylline-Searle,  0.24  Gm.,  in  sufficient  distilled  water  to 
make  10  cc. 

Ampules  Solution  Aminophylline-Searle,  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc:  Each  ampule 
contains  aminophylline-Searle,  0.48  Gm.,  benzyl  alcohol  0.04  Gm.,  in  suffi- 
cient  distilled   water  to   make  2   cc. 

Tablets  Aminophylline-Searle,   0.1    Gm.   (lYz   grains). 

THEOPHYLLINE.— For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Phar- 
macopeia under  TheophylHna. 

Theocin. — A  brand  of  theophylline-U.  S.  P.  prepared  syn- 
thetically. 

Manufactured   by    Winthrop    Chemical    Co.,    New    York.      U.    S.    patent 
716,994   (Dec.  30,   1902;   expired).     U.   S.   trademark    39,135. 
Tablets   Theocin,   iy2   grains. 

Theocin  is  obtained  by  heating  the  monoformyl  derivative  of  1,3- 
dimethyl-4,5-diamido-2,6-dioxy-pyrimidin  with  alkalis  resulting  in  the 
preliminary  formation  of  an  alkaline  salt  of  the  formyl  compound.  On 
further  heating,  this  splits  off  one  molecule  of  water,  forming  the  alkali 
salt  of  theocin.      Subsequent  treatment    with  acids   liberates   theocin. 

THEOPHYLLINE    WITH    SODIUM    ACETATE.— 

"Contains  not  less  than  55  per  cent  and  not  more  than  65  per 
cent  of  anhydrous  theophylline   (C-HsG^N*)."     U.  S.  P. 

For  standards  see  the  U.  S.  Pharmacopeia  under  TheophylHna 
Cum  Sodii  Acetate. 

Dosage. — From  0.2  to  0.35  Gm.  (3  to  5  grains),  best  given 
after  meals. 

It  is  a  white  crystalline  powder,  containing  about  60  per  cent  of 
anhydrous  theophylline.  It  dissolves  in  about  20  parts  of  water  at 
25  C.,  but  is  insoluble  in  alcohol  or  ether. 

Theocin  Soluble. — Theocin  Sodium  Acetate. — A  brand  of 
theophylline  with  sodium  acetate-U.  S.  P. 

Tablets  Theocin  Soluble,  2J4   grains. 

Manufactured  by  Winthrop  Chemical  Company,  New  York.  U.  S. 
patent  716,994    (Dec.   30,   1902;  expired).     U.  S.   trademark  39,135. 


ZINC     COMPOUNDS  481 

ZINC     COMPOUNDS 

The  essential  action  of  salts  of  zinc,  like  those  of  copper  and 
lead,  is  that  of  an  astringent  or  corrosive.  The  action  of 
these  salts  being  largely  proportional  to  the  concentration,  zinc 
chloride  in  strong  solution  has  been  used  as  an  escharotic, 
fairly  strong  solutions  of  zinc  sulfate  as  an  emetic,  weaker 
solutions  of  zinc  sulfate  and  zinc  acetate  as  astringent  and 
antiseptic  applications  to  the  mucous  membranes  of  the  eye, 
urethra,  etc.,  while  the  insoluble  zinc  oxide  is  used  externally 
as  a  mild  antiseptic  and  astringent.  Zinc  oxide  was  thought 
to  act  on  the  nervous  system;  but  this  theory  is  probably 
incorrect,  and  the  internal  use  of  zinc  oxide  has  been  practi- 
cally abandoned. 

Various  zinc  salts  containing  therapeutically  active  acid  radi- 
cals or  anions  have  been  used  in  medicine;  thus  in  zinc  per- 
manganate the  oxidizing  action  of  the  permanganate  radical  is 
influenced  beneficially,  it  is  claimed,  by  the  astringent  action 
of  the  zinc. 


ZINC    PERMANGANATE. —  Zinci     Permanganas. — 

Zn(MnO02+6H2O.  —  The   zinc   salt   of   permanganic   acid.     It 
should  contain  not  less  than  90  per  cent  of  zinc  permanganate. 

Actions  and  Uses. — Zinc  permanganate  resembles  the  potas- 
sium salt  in  its  oxidizing  properties,  but  is  more  astringent. 
It  is  antiseptic.  It  is  used  chiefly  in  urethritis,  either  as  an 
injection  or  as  a  urethral  douche. 

Dosage. — Locally,  1  part  to  4,000  (1  grain  in  8  fluidounces), 
1.3  Gm.  of  zinc  permanganate  is  equal  in  permanganate  con- 
tent to  1  Gm.  of  potassium  permanganate. 

Zinc  permanganate  occurs  in  dark  brown,  nearly  black,  lustrous 
deliquescent  crystals,  or  crystalline  masses.  It  is  readily  soluble  in 
water  (1  in  3),  generally  leaving  a  slight  residue.  Aqueous  solutions 
decompose  in  air,  but  are  permanent  if  kept  in  well-closed  bottles, 
protected  from  light.  When  heated  slowly,  it  loses  water  of  crystalliza- 
tion (25.46  per  cent)  and  oxygen,  leaving  a  residue  of  zinc  manganite. 
If  heated  quickly,  it  gives  off  pink  vapors,  or  more  properly,  a  fine 
dust  of  manganese  trioxide.  Zinc  permanganate  gives  up  oxygen  more 
easily  than  does  the  potassium  salt,  hence  great  care  should  be  taken 
in  bringing  it  in  contact  with  easily  oxidizable  substances. 

Zinc  permanganate  should  be  almost  completely  soluble  in  water. 
The  color  of  the  solution  is  discharged  by  alcohol,  hydrogen  sulfide, 
ferrous  sulfate,  oxalic  acid,  or  hydrogen  dioxide,  especially  if  the 
solution  is  first  rendered  acid  with  sulfuric  acid. 

If  1  pm.  of  the  salt  is  dissolved  in  50  cc.  of  water  and  5  cc.  of 
alcohol  is  added,  a  colorless  solution  must  be  obtained  after  boiling  and 
filtering;  if  a  small  part  of  the  latter,  acidified  with  nitric  acid,  is  tested 
with  silver  nitrate  solution  for  chloride  and  with  barium  chloride 
solution  for  sulfate,   not  more   than  traces   of   either   will  be    indicated. 

If  zinc  permanganate  is  examined  by  the  method  given  below,  the 
residual    titration    will    indicate    the    presence    of    not    less   than   90    per 


482     NEW     AND     NONOFFICIAL     REMEDIES 

cent  zinc  permanganate,  (Zn(Mn04)2-6H20).  From  0.1  to  0.2  Gm. 
of  substance  is  weighed,  dissolved  in  water,  filtered  through  asbestos, 
the  filtrate  acidulated  with  5  cc.  diluted  sulfuric  acid  warmed  to 
about  60  C,  treated  with  an  excess  of  tenth-normal  oxalic  acid,  and 
the  excess  of  oxalic  acid  determined  by  titration  with  tenth-normal 
potassium  permanganate. 

Zinc  Permanganate-Merck. — A  brand  of  zinc  permanga- 
nate-N.  N.  R. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Rahway,  N.  J. 


LIST  OF  ARTICLES  AND  BRANDS 

ACCEPTED    BY   THE    COUNCIL   BUT 

NOT  DESCRIBED  IN  N.  N.  R. 


Medicinal  Articles:  Articles  which  have  been  exam- 
ined by  the  Council,  which  are  marketed  under 
descriptive,  nonproprietary  names  with  well  established 
therapeutic  claims,  and  which  are  held  by  the  Council 
not  to  require  description  in  New  and  Nonofficial 
Remedies : 

ABBOTT    LABORATORIES 

Chlorcosane-Abbott  Pollen    Extracts    Diagnostic- 

Abbott 

ARLINGTON     CHEMICAL    CO. 

Pollen  Extract  Diagnostic-Arlco 
Arlco  Proteins  (For  Diagnosis) 

ROBERT    A.     BERNHARD 
Saf-T-Top  Tincture  Iodine,  U.  S.  P.,  2  cc.  and  15  cc. 
Saf-T-Top  Tincture  Iodine,  3^2  per  cent,  2  cc.  and  15  cc. 

CALCO    CHEMICAL    CO. 
Methylene  Blue-Calco  Methylthionine  Chloride-Calco 

CUTTER    LABORATORY 

Diphtheria  Antitoxin  Concen-      Tetanus  Antitoxin  Concen- 
trated trated. 
Smallpox  Vaccine 

GILLILAND    LABORATORIES,    INC. 
Gilliland's     Concentrated    and      Gilliland's     Concentrated     and 
Refined     Diphtheria     Anti-  Refined    Tetanus    Antitoxin 

toxin  Smallpox  Vaccine 

HIXSON    LABORATORIES,    INC. 

Diphtheria  Antitoxin  Tetanus  Antitoxin 

HOLLISTER-STIER    LABORATORIES 

Protein  Extracts  Diagnostic-Hollister-Stier 


484        ACCEPTED     BUT     NOT     DESCRIBED 

LEDERLE    LABORATORIES,    INC 

Ferric      Ammonium      Citrate-  Thyroid  Desiccated-Lederle 

Lederle,  Capsules  0.5  Gm.  Smallpox     Vaccine     (Vaccine 

Glycerinated    Allergenic    Ex-  Virus) 

tracts-Lederle  Smallpox    Vaccine    (Lederle) 

Pollen     Antigens     Diagnostic-  (Preserved     with     Brilliant 

Lederle  Green) 

ELI    LILLY     &     CO. 
Diphtheria    Antitoxin  -Lilly      Tetanus  Antitoxin 
(Purified,   Concentrated)  Smallpox  Vaccine 

McCORMICK     &     CO.,    INC. 
McCormick's   English  Mustard. 

MALLINCKRODT  CHEMICAL  WORKS 

Sodium  Acid  Phosphate  (Mo- 
nobasic) -Mallinckrodt 

MERCK  &     CO. 

Creosote-Merck  Trioxymethylene-Merck 

Guaiacol  Carbonate-Merck  (Paraformaldehyde-U.  S.  P.) 
Sodium  Biphosphate-Merck 

WM.     S.    MERRELL     COMPANY 

Acid  Salicylic-Merrell  Natural  Oil  of  Sweet   Birch- 

Sodium  Salicylate-Merrell  Merrell 

MONSANTO     CHEMICAL    WORKS 
Chlorcosane-Monsanto 

NATIONAL    DRUG    CO. 
Diphtheria  Antitoxin  Smallpox     Vaccine     (Vaccine 

Pollen  Extracts  Diagnostic  Virus) 

Tetanus  Antitoxin 

NEW    YORK    CITY    DEPARTMENT    OF    HEALTH 

Tetanus  Antitoxin  Diphtheria    Antitoxin     (Glob- 

ulin) 

PARKE,    DAVIS     &     CO. 
Diphtheria  Antitoxin  (Concen-      Protein    Extracts    Diagnostic- 

trated  Antidiphtheric  Serum  P.  D.  &  Co. 

Globulin)  Tetanus  Antitoxin  Globulin 

Group  Protein  Extracts-Diag-      Vaccine  Virus  (Glycerinated) 

nostic-P.  D.  &  Co. 


ACCEPTED     BUT     NOT     DESCRIBED        485 

SHARP     &     DOHME 
Diphtheria  Antitoxin  Pollens  Dried-Mulford 

Vaccine  Virus  (Smallpox  Vac-      Proteins  Dried-Mulford 

cine)  Tetanus  Antitoxin 

Pollen     Extracts     Diagnostic-      Tincture  Digitalis,  Purified,  S. 

Mulford  &  D. 

E.    R.     SQUIBB     &     SONS 
Diphtheria  Antitoxin-Squibb         Smallpox     (Variola)     Vaccine 

(Glycerinated) 
Tetanus  Antitoxin,  Purified 

STEVENSON     MINERAL     OIL    CO. 
Stevenson's  Heavy  Russian  Mineral  Oil 

UNITED     STATES     STANDARD     PRODUCTS     CO. 
Ampoule  Solution  Quinine  and      Magnesium   Sulphate   25%    in 

Urea  Hydrochloride  0.5  Gm.,  5  cc.  Ampuls 

1  cc.  Smallpox     Vaccine     (Vaccine 

Diphtheria    Antitoxin    Refined  Virus) 

and  Concentrated  Tetanus  Antitoxin 

W.     T.    WAGNER'S     SONS     CO. 
Wagner's  Artificial  Vichy  Wagner's     Artificial    Vichy 

Citrated 

Nonmedicinal  Articles. — Articles  which  have  been 
examined  by  the  Council,  which  are  not  advertised  as 
therapeutic  agents,  the  composition  or  essential  ingredi- 
ents of  which  are  quantitatively  declared  on  the  label 
or  in  the  advertising,  and  the  use  of  which  under 
ordinary  circumstances  is,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Council, 
not  contrary  to  the  public  welfare : 

AAIERICAN    ANTIFORMIN     CO. 
Antiformin  (a  strongly  alkaline  solution  of  sodium  hypochlorite) 

BELLE    ALKALI     CO. 
Dichlormethane  Solvent 

CHILD    WELFARE    GUILD,    INC. 
Bite-X 

JOHNSON    &    JOHNSON 
K-Y  Lubricating  Jelly 

ELI     LILLY     &     CO. 
Lubricating  Jelly 

McNEIL     LABORATORIES,     INC. 
Lubricant-McNeil 

MERAX,     INCORPORATED 
Merax  Mercury  Cyanide  Solution 

OHIO     CHEMICAL    AND     MANUFACTURING     CO. 
Ohio  Carbon  Titrachloride  Compound 


GENERAL     INDEX 


Index  to  Accepted  Articles,  Rules  of  the  Council   (capitals), 
and  'Articles  Accepted  but  Not  Described"   (italic). 

Abbott's  A-B-D    Malt  Extract  with   Cod  Liver   Oil  and  Viosterol 459 

Cod     Liver     Oil     460 

Cod    Liver    Oil    with    Viosterol 463 

Haliver    Oil,    Plain     468 

Haliver   Oil   Plain   Capsules,   3   minims '.  .  468 

Haliver    Oil    with    Viosterol 470 

A-B-D  Malt  Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Viosterol,  Abbott's 459 

Acceptance,  Duration  of   12 

Not    an    Indorsement     12 

Seal    of     12 

Acetannin      440 

Acetarsone     92 

-Abbott     93 

Acetonebromoform      145 

Acetone-Chloroform     165 

Acetophenetidin      340 

acetphenetidinum   U.S. P.    X 340 

acetylaminohydroxyphenylarsonic    Acid    92 

acetyl-/'-aminophenyl    Salicylate    341 

Acetylsalicylic    Acid     356 

Acid-Heyden     356 

Acid-Mallinckrodt     356 

Acid-Merck      356 

Acid     (Aspirin) -Monsanto     356 

Acid   Type    (Acid    Derivatives   of    Salicylic  Acid) 355 

Acetyltannic    Acid     440 

Acid  Derivatives  of  Salicylic  Acid    (Acetylsalicylic  Acid  Type) 355 

Salicylic-Merrell     484 

Acne    Bacillus    Vaccine 407 

Bacillus     Vaccine     (Cutter) 407 

Bacterin     (Mulford)      408 

Serobacterin-Mulford    (Sensitized   Acne   Vaccine   Polyvalent) 417 

Vaccine   Lederle)     408 

Vaccine     (Squibb)     408 

Acriflavine     199 

-Abbott,    Neutral    200 

Hydrochloride     198 

Hydrochloride-Abbott      199 

Hydrochloride-Abbott,    Tablets,   0.03    Gm 199 

"National"     199 

Neutral,  Abbott,    Enteric  Coated  Tablets,   0.03   Gm.    (J/^   grain)....  200 

Neutral,  Abbott  for  Intravenous  Injection,  0.1   Gm.   Ampules 200 

Neutral,   Abbott,   Tablets,   0.03   Gm.    (J^    grain) 200 

Neutral-Calco    200 

Neutral-Calco,  Tablets,   5^    grain    (uncoated) 200 

Neutral,   Jelly    1 :1,000-Abbott    200 

Neutral,    "National"     200 

Neutral,  "National."   Enteric  Coated  Tablets,  0.0324  Gm.  (^  grain)  200 

Neutral,   "National"   Ointment,   1   per  cent 200 

Neutral,  "National"  "Pro  Injectione,"  0.5  Gm.  vials.;  1.0  Gm.  vials  200 

Neutral,   "National,"   Tablets,   0.1    Gm.    (1^    grains) 200 

Activated  Ergosterol   in   Oil 473 

Adalin     147 

Tablets,   5    grains    (0.3   Gm.) 147 

Adrenalin     222 

and    Chloretone    Ointment 222 

and    Cocaine    Tablets 222 

and  Compound   Yellow  Oxide   Ointment-M.   E.   S.    Co 301 

and   Holocaine   Ointment-M.   E.    S.   Co 65 

Chloride    Solution    222 


488  GENERAL     INDEX 


Chloride    Solution,    Ampoules,     1:10,000;     1    cc;     1:2,600,     1    cc; 

1:1,000,    1    cc 223 

Hypodermic  Tablets  and  Apothesine   (%  grain);    (4 4^  grains)....  55 

Inhalant     222 

Ointment    222 

Suppositories     222 

Tablets,    2/200;    ¥200    grain 222 

Advertisements   in    Foreign    Countries 17 

Advertising    (Comments),    Rule   3. — Direct  Advertising — Lay....  16 

Direct. — Rule    3    9 

Indirect. — Rule  4    10 

Lay  Advertising    (Comments),   Rule  3 — Direct 16 

Use   of  Articles   for 18 

Aethylis   Salicylas    357 

Afenif    ISO 

Agar-Agar    25 

-Agar-Merck    25 

-Agar    Powder-Merck    25 

-Agar   Shreds-Merck    25 

-Agar    Shreds-Reinschild    25 

and   Agar   Preparations    25 

-Phenolphthalein     25 

and  Phenolphthalein,   with   Squibb's   Mineral   Oil 280 

with    Mineral    Oil,    Squibb's 280 

Agents  for  Producing  Active  Immunity 385 

Agurin      477 

Alcohol    Benzylicum    56 

Alkyl    Derivatives   of    Salicylic   Acid    (Methyl-Salicylate   Type) 357 

Allergenic    Extracts-Lederle     28 

Extracts-Lederle     Glxcerinatcd     484 

Extracts-Mulford      32 

Protein    Preparations    25 

Allergen    Solutiqns-Squibb,    Pollen    36 

allylispropylbarbituric    acid    101 

allylispropylmalonyl    urea     101 

Alum     48 

Alumini    Naphtholsulfonas     48 

Aluminum    Compounds     47 

Alumnol     48 

Alum  Precipitated    (Refined)    Diphtheria   Toxoid 401 

Precipitated    Refined,    Diphtheria    Toxoid    (Cutter) 401 

Precipitated   Refined,   Diphtheria  Toxoid    (Gilliland) 402 

Precipitated    (Refined),    Diphtheria    Toxoid,    (Hixson    Labs.) 402 

Precipitated    (Refined).    Diphtheria    Toxoid,    (Jensen-Salsbery)  .  .  .  .  402 

Precipitated,    Refined    Diphtheria,    Lederle 403 

Precipitated,    Refined,    Diphtheria   Toxoid    (Lee    Labs.) 403 

Precipitated    (Refined) -Lilly,    Diphtheria    Toxoid 403 

Precipitated.    Refined   Diphtheria  Toxoid    (N.    D.    Co.) 404 

Precipitated    (Refined),   Diphtheria  Toxoid    (Merrell) 404 

Precipitated    (Refined)-P.    D.    &   Co..    Diphtheria   Toxoid 404 

Precipitated,    Refined,    Diphtheria   Toxoid-Squibb 405 

Precipitated,   Refined,   Diphtheria  Toxoid    (U.    S.   S.  P.   Co.) 405 

Precipitated   Tetanus   Toxoid    406 

Precipitated    (Refined),   Diphtheria  Toxoid    (Gilliland) 402 

Precipitated    (Refined)    Diphtheria  Toxoid    (Hixon  Labs.) 402 

Precipitated    (Refined).   Diphtheria   Toxoid    (Jensen-Salsbery   Labs.)  402 

Precipitated  Tetanus  Toxoid-Lederle,   Refined 407 

Precipitated,    Refined    Tetanus   Toxoid    (N.    D.   Co.) 407 

Alurate     101 

Elixir    101 

Elixir     (Hoffmann-LaRoche)      101 

Tablets,    1    gr 101 

Alypin     S3 

Hydrochloride     53 

Tablets,    Yi    grain 54 

Amidopyrine    U.S. P.    X 346 

Amidopyrine,   with   Ortal    Sodium    Kapseals 109 

Aminoacetic   Acid    48 

Acid-Calco     49 


GENERAL     INDEX  489 


Acid-Merck    49 

Acid-Pfanstiehl     49 

-aminobenzoxydiethylaminoethane    mononitrate     (p) 70 

amino-benzoyl-2-diethylaminoethanolpenta-w-borate     (1-) 65 

-amino-benzoyldimethylaminomethyl-butanol    hydrochloride    (p) 71 

aminobenzoyl-2-2-dimethyl-3-diethylaminopropanol    hydrochloride     ip) .  60 

aminobenzoyl-7-dinormalbutylaminopropanol    sulfate     (p) 56 

Aminophyllin     478 

-Dubin      479 

0.24  Gm.,   10  cc;  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc;  Ampules  Solution  Dubin 479 

0.36   Gm.,   Suppositories,    Dubin    479 

0.1  Gm.,  Tablets,  Dubin    279 

Aminophylline     478 

-Pharmedic     480 

-Pharmedic  0.24   Gm.,  10  cc. ;  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc,  Ampules  Solution...  480 

-Pharmedic,   0.36   Gm.,   Suppositories 480 

-Pharmedic,   0.1    Gm.,   Tablets 480 

-Searle    480 

-Searle,   0.48   Gm.,  2  cc;   0.24  Gm.,   10  cc.   Ampules   Solution 480 

-Searle,  0.1   Gm.    (1^   grains).  Tablets 480 

Aminopyrine      346 

and    Aminopyrine    Derivatives 346 

-Abbott     346 

-Merck 346 

Compressed   Tablets    Sal-Ethyl    Carbonate   with 358 

-Ipral   Tablets,    4.33   grains 106 

Ammonii    Sulfoichthyolicum     434 

Ammonium    Ichthynatum    434 

Ichthosulfonate     433 

Iron     Citrates,     Green 270 

Ampules  Adrenalin  Chloride  Solution  1:  10,000,  1  cc;   1:  2,600.   1  cc. ; 

_  1:1.000,    1    cc 223 

Biliposol    Solution,    2   cc 129 

Bismuth   Sodium   Tartrate-Searle,    1.5    per   cent,    2   cc;    3    per   cent, 

2  cc 132 

Bismuth  Subsalicylate  2  grains   (0.13  Gm.)   in  Oil,   1  cc.   (Cheplin)  .  134 

Bismuth   Subsalicylate  with   Butyn-D.  R.  L.,    1    cc 133 

Buffered  Solution  of  Nupercaine-Ciba  2  cc,   1 :200 64 

Calcium    Gluconate-Sandoz    151 

Campiodol  Emulsion,  20  cc 255 

Cebione     (Crystals),    0.1    Gm 457 

Chappel    Liver    Extract    317 

Chaulmestrol   1   cc. ;    3   cc 163 

Compound    Solution    of    Calcium    Gluconate    10%,    10   cc.    U.S.S.P. 

Co 150 

Dextrose    (d-Glucose)    10    Gm.,    20   cc. ;    25    Gm.,    50   cc;    50    Gm., 

100   cc.    (Lakeside   Labs.) 158 

Digifoline-Ciba,   2   cc 182 

Diothane    Hydrochloride   Solution   in   Solution   of    Sodium    Chloride 

0.6%,    6    cc     (Merrell) 59 

Ephedrine   Hydrochloride-Abbott,    1.05   Gm.,    1    cc 219 

Ephedrine-Novocain    Solution,    1    cc. ;    2    cc 69 

Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,   1   cc,   0.05   Gm 220 

Ergot    Aseptic,    1    cc 228 

Gold    Sodium   Thiosulfate-Abbott,    0.01    Gm.;    0.05    Gm.;    0.1    Gm.; 

0.25    Gm 239 

Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Merck.   0.01   Gm.;   0.025   Gm.;   0.05   Gm. ; 

0.10  Gm.;   0.20  Gm.;  0.25  Gm.;   0.30  Gm. ;  0.50  Gm.;   1.0  Gm..  240 

Gold    Sodium  Thiosulfate-Searle,   5   cc 240 

Gynergen,     1     cc 230 

Gynergen  Solution  1 :2000,   0.5   cc 229 

lodobismitol    with    Saligenin    2    cc 142 

Iron  Citrate  Green  P.   D.  &  Co.   J4   grain,   J^  grain,   1^   grains....  270 

Lipiodol-Lafay,    1    cc;   2    cc. ;    3   cc;    5   cc 257 

Luminal-Sodium    (Powder),    2    grains,    5    grains 116 

Luminal   Sodium   Solution   in   Ethylene   Glvcol,   2   cc 116 

Mapharsen  0.04  Gm.,   0.06  Gm..  0.4  Gm.,  0.6  Gm 84 

Mercurochrome-H.   W.  &  D.,  1%,   10  cc;   20  cc.    (Searle) 291 


490  GENERAL     INDEX 


Mercury  Salicylate,    1   grain    (0.065   Gm.)    Suspended  in  Oil,    1   cc. 

(Cheplin)     287 

Mercury  Succinimide,  Vie  grain;  0.012  Gm.   (I/3  grain)   (S.  &  D.)  •  •  288 

Metycaine   1  % ,    1    cc 62 

Metycaine  2%   and  Epinephrine   (1:25,000),   1   cc 62 

Metycaine  2%   and   Epinephrine    (1:50,000),   2.5   cc 62 

Novocain   Solution   1   per  cent 69 

Novocain  Solution  1  per  cent,   2  cc. ;  2  per  cent,  3  cc 68 

Novocain  Solution,  10  per  cent,  2  cc.  (For  Spinal  Anesthesia)....  68 
Novocain    Solution,    2    per    cent    with    1-Suprarenin    Synthetic    Bi- 

tartrate    1:50,000,    1    cc;    1:20,000,    1    cc;    1:50,000,    3    cc; 

1:20,000,   3   cc;    1:20,000,  6  cc 68-69 

Novocain    Solution,    1    per    cent    with    1-Suprarenin    Synthetic    Bi- 

tartrate  1:50,000,  2  cc;    1:50,000,  6  cc 68 

of   Pitocin    334 

of   Pitocin,  0.5  cc. ;    1   cc 334 

of    Pitressin    334 

of   Pitressin,    1    cc 335 

Ouabain-H.  W.   &  D 186 

Ouabain  0.0005   Gm.    (1-128  grain)-Lilly 186 

Pentobarbital   Sodium-Lilly.   0.5   Gm.    (/^   grains) 112 

Phenoltetrachlorphthalein-H.    W.    &   D 206 

Phenobarbital  Sodium   (Powder) -Abbott,   0.13  Gm.    (2    grains) 116 

Pituitrin,   0.5    cc;    1    cc 336 

Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate   (Aqueous)-D.  R.  L.,  2  cc 138 

Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  0.1  Gm. ;  0.2  Gm.  138 

Procaine-Epinephrine,    1    cc.    (Abbott) 69 

Procaine    Hydrochloride    Crystals,    Sterile,    For    Spinal    Anesthesia, 

50,    100,   120,    150.   200   mg.    (Abbott) 70 

Procaine  Hydrochloride  Solution  10%,  2  cc.  For  Spinal  Anesthesia 

(Abbott)     69 

Procaine  Hydrochloride  Solution  2%,    5   cc.    (Abbott) 69 

Procaine     Hydrochloride-Squibb,     Sterile     (Crystals),     for     Spinal 

Anesthesia,  50,   100,  120,   150,  200  mg 70 

Salyrgan  Solution  1  cc,  2  cc 298 

Scillaren-B     187 

Scopolamine   Stable-Roche,  V200  grain,    1  cc;    Vioo  grain,   1  cc 361 

Suprarenin    Powder,    0.05    Gm 223 

Suprarenin    Solution     223 

Sodium   Amytal    0.065    Gm.    (1    grain);    0.125    Gm.    (1^    grains); 

0.25    Gm.    (3J4    grains);    0.5    Gm.    (7^    grains);    1.0   Gm.    (15 

grains)      119 

Sodium  Cacodylate  0.243  Gm,  (3M  grains),  5  cc.  (Lakeside  Labs.)  95 
Sodium    Cacodylate-Mulford,    M    grain,    1    cc;    1J4    grains,    1    cc; 

2  grains,  1  cc;  3  grains,  1  cc;  5  grains,  1  cc;  7  grains,  1  cc; 

15H    grains,    2    cc 95 

Sodium    Cacodylate-P.    D.    &   Co.,    Glaseptic,    0.2    Gm.    (3    grains), 

1  cc;  0.3  Gm.,  (5  grains),  1  cc;  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains),  1  cc; 
0.1  Gm.  (iy2  grains),  1  cc;  0.13  Gm.  (2  grains),  1  cc;  1  Gm. 
(15J4    grains),    2    cc 95 

Sodium  Morrhuate  5%   with  Benzyl  Alcohol   (Searle)    5  cc 432 

Sodium  Thiosulphate    (Searle),    5    cc. ;    10  cc 433 

Solution  Aminophyllin-Dubin,  0.24  Gm.,  10  cc;  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc. .  479 
Solution    Aminophylline-Pharmedic,    0.24    Gm.,    10    cc;    0.48    Gm., 

2  cc 480 

Solution  Aminophylline-Searle.  0.24  Gm.,  10  cc;  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc.  480 
Solution   Antimony    Sodium   ThioglycoUate,    0.5    per    cent,    10    cc; 

20    cc 76 

Solution  Antimony  Thioglycollamide,  0.4  per  cent,   10  cc ;   20  cc...  75 

Solution   Caffeine   Sodio-Benzoate,   2  cc 153 

Solution  Decholin-Sodium,  5  per  cent,  10  cc. ;  20  per  cent,  10  cc.  .  125 

Solution  Dextrose  50%,   20    cc. ;    50%,   50  cc.    (Merrell) 158 

Solution  of  Dextrose,  10  Gm.,  20  cc;  25  Gm.,  50  cc.   (N.  D.  Co.).  159 

Solution  Dextrose  25  Gm.  in  50  cc;  50  Gm.  in  100  cc.  (Wyeth) . .  60 
Solution    Dextrose    (d-Glucose)    Lilly,    25    Gm.,    50    cc;    50    Gm., 

100    cc 158 

Solution   Dextrose    (d-Glucose)    Lilly,    10   Gm.    Buffered   20  cc;   25 

Gm.   Buffered    50    cc 158 

Solution   Dextrose    (d-Glucose)    Lilly,   Unbuffered,   25    Gm.    50   cc; 

50    Gm.    100    cc 158 


GENERAL     INDEX  491 


Solution    Dextrose    (d-Glucose)     U.S. P.    10    Gm.    20    cc. ;    25    Cm. 

50  cc;    50  Gm.    100  cc.    (Cheplin) 157 

Solution    Dextrose    (d-GIucose)    U.S.P.,    25    Gm.    SO    cc;    50    Gm. 

100   cc.    (Buffered)    (Cheplin) 157 

Solution   Dilaudid    Hydrochloride,   2   rag.    (1/^2   grain)    1.1   cc 306 

Solution  Liver  Extract  Concentrated-Lilly,   10  cc;   19  cc 320 

Solution    Liver   Extract-Lilly.    10   cc 320 

Solution  Mercury  Succinimide  Yq  grain   (0.01   Gm.)   1  cc.   (Cheplin)    288 

Solution,   Neo-Iopax,   20   cc 266 

Solution  of    Nupercaine-Ciba,   5   cc,   1:1,000;   25   cc,    1:1,000 64 

Solution   Procaine,    Hydrochloride    2%,    1    cc 67 

Solution  Procaine  Hydrochloride  and  Epinephrine,   3  cc.    (Cheplin)      67 
Solution    Procaine    Hydrochloride   with    Epinephrine,    1    cc.    (U.    S. 

S.     P.     Co.) 68 

Solution   Procaine   Hydrochloride   with   Epinephrine,    1    cc 68 

Solution   Quinine  and   Urea  Hydrochloride,  0.5   Gm.,  1   cc.    {U.  S. 

S.    P.    Co.) 485 

Solution   Silver  Nitrate   1   Per  Cent-Cutter 431 

Solution    Silver  Nitrate   1    Per  Cent-Lederle 431 

Solution   Silver    Nitrate   1   Per  Cent-Sharp  &  Dohme 431 

Solution   Sodium   Cacodvlate   0.19   Gm.    (3    grains),    1   cc.    (Lakeside 

Labs.)     95 

Solution  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains),  1  cc. ;  0.32  Gm. 
(5  grains),  1  cc;  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains),  1  cc;  0.2  Gm.  (3 
grains),    5    cc. ;    0.32    Gm.     (5    grains),    5    cc;    0.45    Gm.     (7 

grains),    5    cc.    (U.    S.   S.   P.    Co.) 95 

Solarson.    1    cc 96 

Sterile  Crystals  Novocain  for  Spinal  Anesthesia.  50,  100,  120,  150, 

_200    mg. 68 

Sterile  Novocain  Crystals  for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  300  mg.,  500  mg.     69 
Sterile  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  5  Gm.   10  cc;  10  Gm.  20  cc; 

25   Gm.  50  cc;  50  Gm.  100  cc    (Miller  Lab's.) 159 

Sterile   Solution   Novocain   20  per  cent,   1.5   cc ;   20   per  cent,   5   cc.     68 
Sterile  Solution  Novocain  20  per  cent  with  1-Suprarenin   Synthetic 

Bitartrate   1:9,000,    1.5   cc;    5   cc 68 

Synthetic   Thvroxine-Roche,    1.1    cc 443 

Thio-Bismol  0.2  Gm.;  2  Gm 139 

Triphal,    0.025    Gm. ;    0.1    Gm 240 

-Vial    Solution   of  Dextrose.    25    Gm.    50    cc;    50   Gm.    100   cc.    (N. 

D.   Co.)    159 

-Vial   Sterile   Solution   Dextrose.   U.   S.  P.    10   Gm.   20  cc. ;   25   Gm. 

50  cc;   50  Gm.   100  cc.    (Miller  Lab's) 159 

Amytal      102 

Sodium      118 

Sodium  Ampoule.  0.065  Gm.  (1  grain);  0.125  Gm.  (1^  grains^: 
0.25    Gm.    (3^    grains);    0.5    Gm.    (754    grains);    1.0   Gm.    (15 

grains)      119 

Sodium  Pulvules,   1   grain:   3  grains 119 

Tablets,   ^   grain.;   %   grain.;   34  grain,;   l^/^   grains 102 

Anaerobic    Antitoxin     367 

Anaesthesine     73 

Anatoxin-Ramon     398 

Anesthesin     72 

-Abbott     73 

Anesthetics    SO 

General     50 

Local     S3 

Local,     Slightly     Soluble 72 

Antianthrax    Serum     378 

Serum    (Lederle)     378 

Serum-Mulford     378 

Serum    (P.   D.   &   Cc.) 378 

Antibacterial    Serums    378 

Antibodies  Used  for  Prophylactic   or  Therapeutic  Purposes 366 

Antidiphtheric    Globulins     373 

Antidysenteric    Serum    378 

Serum    (P.    D.    &    Co.) 379 

Serum    (Polyvalent)     (Lederle) 379 

Serum   (Polyvalent)    (S.  &  D.) 379 


492  GENERAL     INDEX 

Antiformin    (a    strongly    alkaline    solution    of    sodium    hypochlorite) 

(American    Antiformin    Co.) 485 

Anti-Gas  Gangrene  Serum   (S.  &  D.) 369 

Antigen-Strickler,    Rhus    Tox 353 

-Strickler,   Rhus  Tox.    (four    1   cc.  vials) 353 

-Strickler,   Rhus    Venenata 354 

-Strickler,  Rhus  Venenata   (four  1   cc.  vials) 354 

Antigens  Diagnostic-Lederle ,  Pollen    484 

-Lederle,    Concentrated    Pollen 35 

-Lederle,    Pollen     37 

-"National,"    Pollen    39 

Antimeningococcic    Serum     379 

Serum    Concentrated,    Lilly 380 

Serum    (Gilliland   Labs.) 380 

Serum    (Lederle)     380 

Serum    (N.  D.   Co.) 380 

Serum   (P.   D.   &  Co.) 381 

Serum  Polyvalent   (U.    S.  S.  P.   Co.) 381 

Serum    (S.  &  D.) 380 

Serum    (Squibb)     381 

Antimony   Compounds    75 

Sodium    Thioglycollate     75 

Sodium    Thioglycollate,    Ampules    Solution,    0.5    per    cent.    10    cc; 

.  20  cc. 76 

Thioglycollamide    75 

Thioglycollamide  Ampules  Solution,   0.4  per  cent.   10  cc;   20  cc. .  .  .  75 

Antipneumococcic    Serum,     Concentrated,     (Pneumococcus    Antibody 

Globulin,  Types  I  and  II)-MuIford 384 

Serum,  Types  I  and  II  Combined-Mulford 383 

Serum  (Felton)  Type  I   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 382 

Serum-Felton-Type  I   (Refined  and  Concentrated)    (N.  D.  Co.) 382 

Serum  Types  I  and  II  Refined  and  Concentrated  (N.   D.  Co.) 384 

Serum,    Refined  and    Concentrated,   Bilavent    (Lederle) 383 

Serum,  Refined  and  Concentrated.  Type  II   (Lederle) 383 

Serum    (Felton)    Types   I    and    II    Refined    and    Concentrated    (P. 

D.    &    Co.) 384 

Serums     381 

Serum,    Type    1 381 

Serum,    Type    II 383 

Serum  Type   I    (Gilliland) 381 

Serum,   Type   I-Lederle,   Refined   and   Concentrated 381 

Serum,  Type  I   (S.  &   D.) 382 

Serum,  Types  I  and  II   Concentrated    (Squibb) 384 

Serum,   Type   I    (Squibb) 382 

Antipneumococcus   Serum,  Tvpe  1 381 

Serum    Types    I    and    II    Combined 383 

Antipyrine     345 

Compounds    and   Derivatives    345 

Antirabic    Vaccine    386 

Vaccine,    Pasteur    (Gilliland)    386 

Virus 386 

Anti-Snake-Bite  Serum,  North  American 372 

Antistreptococcus   Serum,   Erysipelas    385 

Serum   Lilly    (Concentrated    Globulin)    Erysipelas 385 

Serum, _  Erysipelas    (N.   D.   Co.) 385 

Antitetanic    Globulins     377 

Antitoxin,    Anaerobic     367 

Bothrops     371 

Botulinus     371 

(Human) -Jensen-Salsbery,    Botulinus     371 

Bovine,    Diphtheria     373 

(Bovine),    Diphtheria    (S.    &    D.) 373 

Crotalus   372 

Diphtheria 373 

Diphtheria   (Concentrated  Antidiphtheric  Ser-itm    Globulin)    (P.   D. 

&    Co.)     484 

Diphtheria,    Globulin-Lederle-Modified     373 

Diphtheria  (Globulin)  (N.  Y.  C.  Dept.  of  Health) 484 

Diphtheria    (Hixson   Laboratories,   Inc.) 483 

Diphtheria-Lilly    (Purified,    Concentrated) 484 


GENERAL     INDEX  493 


Diphtheria,  Refined  and  Concentrated,    U.  S.  S.  P.   Co 485 

Diphtheria   (S.    &  D.) 485 

Diphtheria-Squibb     485 

Erysipelas    Streptococcus     373 

Erysipelas    Streptococcus    (Concentrated) -Mulford 374 

Erysipelas    Streptococcus    Concentrated-Squibb 374 

Erysipelas    Streptococcus    Globulin-Lederle-Modified 374 

Erysipelas   Streptococcus   Refined  and   Concentrated-P.    D.    &    Co...    374 
Erysipelas    Streptococcus     (Refined    and    Concentrated),    U.    S.    S. 

P.   Co.)    375 

Gas   Gangrene    (Combined)     (Lilly) 369 

Gas-Gangrene    (Combined)    Refined  and   Concentrated-P.   D.   &  Co..    370 
Gas-Gangrene,      "Globulin-Lederle-Modified"      (Polyvalent     without 

Tetanus    Antitoxin    1  .  .  .    368 

Meningococcus    375 

Menii'igococcus-P.    D.    &    Co 375 

Perfringens    (S.    &    D.) .•••:••    ^69 

Polyanaerobic,     Prophylactic      (Tetanus-Gas     Gangrene     Antitoxin) 

(Cutter)     367 

Refined    and    Concentrated    (Cl.    Perfringens — CI.    Septique    Anti- 
toxin)   (N.   D.    Co.) 369 

Scarlet    Fever    Streptococcus 376 

Scarlet   Fever   Streptococcus,   P.    D.   &    Co 377 

Scarlet  Fever   Streptococcus   Concentrated    (S.   &  D.) 377 

Scarlet   Fever   Streptococcus   Concentrated    (Squibb) 377 

Scarlet   Fever   Streptococcus,    Globulin-Lederle-Modified 376 

Scarlet  Fever   Streptococcus   (Refined  and  Concentrated)    (Gilliland)    376 
Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus,  Refined  and  Concentrated-"National".    377 

Tetanus    377 

Tetanus    (Hixson   Laboratories,    Inc.) 483 

Tetamis-N.   D.   Co 484 

-Tetanus  (N.  Y.  C.  Dept.  of  Health) 484 

-Tetanus  (U.  S.  S.  P.   Co.) 485 

Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene      (Combined)      (Prophylactic)      Refined     and 

Concentrated-P.    D.    &   Co 370 

Tetanits,    Concentrated    (Cutter) 483 

Tetanus    Gas-Gangrene,    Mixed-Mulford _. 369 

Tetanus     Gas-Gangrene,     "Globulin-Lederle-Modified" 367 

(Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene)    Refined    and    Concentrated    (U.    S.    S.    P. 

Co.),    Polyanaerobic    371 

Tetanus,    Globulin-Lederle-Modified    378 

Tetanus,    Globulin   (P.   D.    &   Co.) 484 

Tetanus,    Purified    (Squibb) 485 

-Toxin    Mixture    389 

-Toxin     Mixture,     Diphtheria 389 

-Toxin  Mixture,  Diphtheria   (Diphtheria  Prophylactic   (N.   D.   Co.).    390 
-Toxin     Mixture,      Diphtheria      (Diphtheria     Prophylactic),     (Goat) 

P.    D.    &   Co 390 

-Toxin  Mixture,   Diphtheria,   0.1   L-f    (Gilliland) 390 

-Toxin  Mixture,   Diphtheria,  0.1   L-f    (Hixson  Labs.) 390 

-Toxin   Mixture.   Diphtheria,   0.1    1.+    (Sheep)    (Hixson   Labs.) 390 

-Toxin   Mixture,   Diphtheria    (0.1    L-f)    (Lederle) 390 

-Toxin   Mixture,   0.1   L-f   Non-Sensitizing    (Sheep)    Diphtheria    (U. 

S.    S.    P.    Co.) 391 

-Toxin    Mixture,    New   Formula    (Park-Banzhaf's)    0.1    L-f,    Diph- 
theria   (S.    &    D.) 390 

-Toxin   Mixture    (New   Formula)     (Sheep)-Squibb,   Diphtheria 391 

Antitoxins     366 

Antivenin    (Bothropic)-S.    &    D 371 

(Nearctic    Crotalidae)     372 

Apothesine     54 

and   Adrenalin   Hypodermic   Tablets    (%   grain)  ;    A^a  grains) 55 

Hydrochloride     54 

Hypodermic  Tablets   0.08   Gm.    (ly^    grains) 55 

Solution     55 

Arbutin    76 

-Abbott     77 

-Merck    77 


494  GENERAL     INDEX 

Argenti    Chloridum    Colloidale    Saccharatum-Hille 427 

Lactas     430 

Oxidum    CoUoidale-Mulford    426 

Argento-Proteinum   Forte    U.    S.    P.    X 426 

Proteinum  Mite  U.   S.  P.   X 426 

Argentum    Arsphenamina    87 

Colloidale     427 

Crede 427 

Argyn     426 

Tablets,    6    grains 426 

Arheol     (Astier)     360 

(Astier)     Pearls     360 

Aristol    249 

Arlco  Proteins   (For   Diagnosis) 483 

Aromatic    Chlorazene    Powder 246 

Arsenic   Compounds    77 

Pentavalent,    Compounds    Containing 92 

Trivalent,    Compounds    Containing 80 

Arsphenamine     80 

-D.    R.    L 81 

-Mallinckrodt    81 

-Merck    82 

-Merck,    0.1    Cm.,    0.2   Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,    0.4   Gm.,    0.5    Gm.,    0.6   Gm. 

Ampules     82 

-Searle    81 

Silver    87 

-Squibb     81 

Aspirin     356 

Atropine  Derivatives  and  Analogues 98 

Attenuated    Living    Viruses 386 

Attitude   on   Mixtures 9 

Autolyzed    Liver   Concentrate-Squibb 313 

Azochloramid     243 

Buffered    Saline    Mixture    (for    preparing    1    gallon    of    a    1:1,600 

aqueous   solution)     244 

Buffered    Saline    Mixture    (for    preparing    1    gallon    of    a    1:3,300 

aqueous    solution)     244 

Buffered    Saline    Mixture     (for    preparing    1    liter    of    a    1:1,600 

aqueous    solution)     244 

Buffered    Saline    Mixture    (for    preparing    1    liter    of    a    1:  3,300 

aqueous   solution)     244 

in    Triacetin     1 :  500 244 

Solution  in  Triacetin  1:125 244 

B.   Acidophilus   Milk,   Chenlin's 277 

Acidophilus    Milk,    Sheffield 278 

Acidophilus    Milk,    Supplee 278 

Bacillen   Emulsion   "B.E."    (Mulford) 395 

Bacilli    Emulsion 394 

Bacillus  Emulsion    (Tuberculin   "B.E.")    (Lederle) 395 

Vaccine,    Acne     407 

Bacterial     Toxin 396 

Toxin,   Modified   398 

Vaccine  Made  from  the  Typhoid  Bacillus 412 

Vaccine    made    from    the    Typhoid    Bacillus    and    the    Paratyphoid 

"A"  and  "B"  Bacilli 413 

Vaccines     407 

Bacterin,    Acne     (Mtilford) 408 

Cholera    (Cholera  Vaccine)    (Mulford) 409 

Furunculosis- Abbott    (Mixed)    410 

Mixed  (Triple  Vaccine)  Typho  (S.  &  D.) 415 

Plague   (Mulford)    410 

(Prophylactic)    Typhoid-Paratyphoid    (Abbott)     414 

Tvpho-    (Mulford)     413 

Barbital     103 

-Abbott    103 

and    Barbital    Compounds 99 

-Mallinckrodt     103 

-Merck     103 

Sodium     120 


GENERAL     INDEX  495 


Sodium-Abbott    120 

Sodium-Merck     120 

Barbitone 103 

Barium   Sulfate    121 

Sulfate-Merck   for  X-Ray  Diagnosis 121 

Sulphate   Pure-Mallinckrodt    121 

Sulphate-Squibb    for    Roentgen-Ray    Work 121 

Basic   Bismuth   Nitrate 133 

Bismuth   Salicylate    133 

Bazillenemulsion,    Koch    394 

Benzedrine     213 

Inhaler      214 

Solution    214 

Benzene    (Benzol)-Merck   Reagent,   Thiophene    Free 123 

Medicinal     122 

Benzobis     136 

Benzocaine     72 

Benzol    (Benzene) -Merck   Reagent,  Thiophene   Free 123 

Benzonaphthol     302 

benzoyl-7-(2-methylpiperidino)-propanol    hydrochloride     61 

Benzyl    Alcohol    56 

Alcohol-Seydel     56 

-Methyl     Carbinamine    Racemic 213 

Betaine    Hydrochloride     242 

Betainae    Hydrochloridum    242 

Hydrochloride-Roche     242 

Beta-Lactose    153 

Betanaphthol    Benzoate    302 

Benzoate-Merck      303 

Betanaphthyl    Benzoate    302 

Biebrich    Scarlet    Red 195 

Bile  Salts  and  Bile   Salt  Compounds 123 

Salts-Fairchild     124 

Salts-H.    W.    &   D 125 

Biliposol     129 

Solution,   Ampoules,   2    cc 129 

Bismarsen    82 

Bismo-Cymol   130 

Cymol  Ampoules,  1  cc. ;  2  cc 130 

Bismosol     131 

Ampoules,    1    cc 131 

Bismuth    Arsphenamine    Sulfonate 82 

Betanaphthol-Merck     132 

Betanaphthol   132 

Compounds    126 

methoxy  hydroxy  benzoate,   basic 136 

Paste  Surgical-P.   D.  &  Co 133 

Potassium    Tartrate     137 

Potassium  Tartrate  (Aqueous)-D.  R.  L.,  2.5  per  cent 138 

Potassium  Tartrate   (Aqueous)-D.  R.  L.,  Ampules,  2  cc 138 

Potassium    Tartrate-D.    R.    L 138 

Potassium  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  10  per  cent 138 

Potassium    Tartrate    with    Butyn-D.    R.    L.,    Ampules,    0.1     Gm. ; 

0.2  Gm 138 

Subsalicylate  2  grains   (0.13  Gm.)   in  Oil,  1  cc.  Ampules  (Cheplin)  134 

Subsalicylate  in  Oil-P.   D.  &  Co.,  2   ounce  bottle 134 

Salicylate  in  Oil-P.  D.   &  Co.,  Glaseptic  Ampules,   1   cc 134 

Sodium    Tartrate-Searle 132 

Sodium    Tartrate-Searle,    Ampoules,    1.5    per    cent,    2    cc;    3    per 

cent,   2   cc 132 

Sodium     Tartrate-Searle,     Solution,     1.5     per     cent,     60     cc.     vial; 

3  per  cent,  60  cc.   vial 132 

Subnitrate    133 

Subsalicylate    133 

Subsalicylate  with   Butyn-D.   R.   L.,   Ampoule,   1   cc 133 

Subsalicylate-Merck     134 

Salicylate  in  Oil-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co 134 

Subsalicylate  with   Butyn-D.  R.   L.,   60  cc.   Bottle 133 


496  GENERAL     INDEX 


Tribromphenate     134 

Tribromphenol     134 

Bismuthi    Tribromphenas 134 

Bite-X  (Child   Welfare  Guild,  Inc.) 485 

Bivalent      Antipneumococcic      Serum,       Refined      and      Concentrated 

(Lederle)      383 

Bitumen    Sulphonatum,   N.   F.    V 433 

Borcherdt's   Malt  Extract   with   Cod   Liver   Oil 459 

Boro-Chloretone    165 

Bothrops  Antitoxin 371 

Botulinus    Antitoxin 371 

Antitoxin     (Human) -Jensen-Salsbery 371 

Bougies,    Silvol,    5    per    cent 427 

Bouillon    Filtrate   Tuberculin 396 

Bovine    Tetanus    Antitoxin 372 

Brain    Extract,    Solution 235 

Lipoid      233 

bromdiethj-lacetylurea      147 

Brometone      145 

Capsules.    5    grains 146 

Bromine  Derivatives 145 

Bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D 204 

-H.   W.   &  D.,   Solution 204 

Bromural    146 

Tablets,   5   grains   (0.3   Gm.) 146 

Brucella     Melitensis    Vaccine 408 

Melitensis    Vaccine-Lederle 408 

Butamin      71 

Butesin     73 

1    %   and  Butesin   Picrate   \%,  Ophthalmic   Ointment 74 

Picrate    73 

Picrate    Ointment    with    Metaphen 74 

Picrate   1%   and  Butesin   1%,  Ophthalmic  Ointment 74 

butyl-/'-aminobenzoate,    (n) 73 

-iS-bromallvl    barbituric   acid    112 

-Chloral   Hydrate    164 

-Chloral    Hydrate-Merck    165 

ethylbarbituric    acid,     (n) 105 

ethylmalonylurea,  (n)    107 

oxycinchoninic   acid.   7-diethylethylenediamide   hydrochloride    (-a)  .  .  63 
oxyquinolinecarboxvlic    acid-4-diethylethylenediamide    hydrochloride 

(2)     : " 63 

Butyn    56 

and  Epinephrine   Hypodermic  Tablets 58 

2%    and   Metaphen   1 :  3.000,   Ophthalmic   Ointment 58 

-D.  R.   L.,  Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate  with,   10   per  cent 138 

-D.   R.   L.,   Bismuth  Subsalicylate  with,  60  cc.   Bottle 133 

Ointment-M,    E.    S.    Co 58 

Solution,    2    per    cent 57 

Sulfate    56 

Tablets,  0.2  Gm.   (3   grains) 57 

B.    welchii    Antitoxin 369 

Caffeine   Sodio-Benzoate.   2   cc.   Ampuls   Solution 153 

with    Sodium    Benzoate 153 

Calbroben     147 

Calcii    Peroxidum     339 

Calcium    chloride    urea 150 

Compounds     1 48 

Creosotate    170 

Dibrombehenate      147 

ethylisopropylbarbiturate     105 

Gluconate     150 

Gluconate  10%,   10  cc.    U.   S.    S.  P.   Co.,  Ampule  Compound   Solu- 
tion of   150 

Gluconate-Merck     151 

Gluconate-Pfizer    151 

Gluconate-Sandoz    151 

Gluconate-Sandoz,    Ampules    151 


GENERAL     INDEX  497 


lodobehenate    260 

lodostearate     259 

Peroxide     339 

Phosphate    Cocoa   Wafers,   Ucoline 151 

Phosphate,    Tribasic    151 

Phosphate    Tribasic-Merck     152 

Calcreose    171 

Compound   Syrup  of 171 

Solution    171 

Tablets,    4     grains 171 

Camiofen    Ointment    248 

Campiodol    Emulsion,   Ampules,   20   cc 255 

Capsules    Carbon    Tetrachloride     (For    Human     Use) -P.     D.     &    Co., 

20   minims    161 

Carbon   Tetrachloride-S.   &   D.,   0.3   cc;    1   cc 161 

Colloidal    Silver   Oxide-Mulford,   3   grains 427 

Digitalis    Duo-Test    McNeil 180 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,  ^  grain;  0.0324  Gm.,   (Yz  grain); 

H  grain   219 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-P.  D.   &  Co.,   3/$   grain,;    ^  grain 219 

Ephedrine   Sulfate-Abbott.    3/$    grain;    Yz    grain;    ii   grain 220 

Ephedrine    Sulfate-P.   D.   &   Co.,   0.025   Gm.    (^    grain);    0.05   Gm. 

(Va-   grain)    221 

I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  Plain,  3  minims 468 

I.    V.    C.     Halibut    Liver    Oil    with    Vitamin    D     Concentrate     in 

Neutral  Oil,   3  minims 471 

Lipiodol-Lafay,    0.5     Gm 257 

Luminal-Sodium,    5   grains 116 

Neo-silvol,  6  grains  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 430 

Ortal   Sodium,   54   grain,    (0.05   Gm.),  3  grains    (0.2  Gm.),   5  grains 

(0.3    Gm.)    109 

Silvol,    6   grains 427 

Sodium    Alurate.    3^    grains 117 

Solution  Silver  Nitrate,  1  per  cent-P.  D.  &  Co.,  6  minims 431 

carbamido-benzenearsonic  acid   (p)    93 

phenylarsonic  acid   (/>) 93 

Carbarsone     93 

Pulvules,  0.25  Gm.   (33^4  grains) 94 

Vials,   2   Gm.    (31   grains) 94 

Carbohydrates     ... 153 

for    Oral    Administration 153 

for   Parenteral   Administration 154 

Carbon    Tetrachloride    161 

Tetrachloride    Compmmd,    Ohio    485 

Tetrachloride,   Capsules,  S.  &  D.,  0.3   cc;   1   cc 161 

Tetrachloride   (For  Human  Use) -P.  D.  &  Co.,  Capsules,  20  minims  161 

Carbromal    147 

Carboxylic    Acid    167 

Cargentos 426 

Capsules,    3    grains    427 

Ointment,   5   per   cent;    10   per   cent 427 

Urethral    Suppositories     427 

Carotene     453 

and  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Cod  Liver  Oil,   Smaco 456 

in    Oil,    Smaco    455 

Smaco     454 

with   vitamin   D    Concentrate   in    Oil,    Smaco 455 

Cascara   Sagrada,    Maltine   with   Mineral   Oil 279 

Casein-Iodine     252 

Castor  Oil    162 

Oil    (Emulsion   Olei   Ricini-McNeil's),   McNeil's   Emulsion   of 162 

Cebione    (Merck)     457 

Ampules    (Crystals),   0.1    Gm 457 

Tablets    (Crystals),   0.01    Gm.;   0.05   Gm 457 

Cephalin  for  Local  Use,  Suspension  of  Tissue  Fibrinogen  and 234 

Impure     233 

Cevitamic  Acid    451  and  456 

Chappell   Liver   Extract    (Oral) 311 

Liver    Extract    (Subcutaneous) , 318 


498  GENERAL     INDEX 

Chaulmestrol      163 

1   cc. ;   3  cc.  Ampuls 163 

Chaulmoogra    Derivatives     162 

Cheplin's    B.    Acidophilus    Milk 277 

Epinephrine   Hydrochloride    Solution 224 

Sodium    Cacodylate    0.05    Gm.    (^    grain),    1    cc;    0.1    Gm.     (13^ 
grains),  1   cc. ;  0.2  Gm.   (3  grains),   1  cc;  0.3  Gm.    (5  grains), 

1  cc. ;    0.5    Gm.    (7^    grains),    1    cc;    1.0    Gm.    (15^    grains), 

2  cc 94  and  95 

Chiniofon     163 

Powder     163 

-Searle     164 

-Searle  Enteric  Coated  0.25  Gm.    (4  grains).  Tablets 164 

-Searle,  0.25  Gm.   (4  gr.)   Tablets 164 

-Winthrop.   0.25  Gm.    (4  grains).  Tablets 164 

Chloral    Derivatives    and    Substitutes 164 

Chloramina  U.  S.  P.  X 245 

Chloramine  Preparations    243 

-T     245 

-T    (Monsanto)    246 

-T    (Squibb)     246 

Chlorarsenol,   Solution,   1   per  cent 96 

Chlorazene     246 

Powder,    Aromatic     246 

Surgical   Cream    246 

Tablets,    4.6    grains 246 

Chlorbutol-Acetone-Chloroform   165 

Chlorbutanol     (Anhydrous) -Merck     165 

(Hydrous)  -Merck 165 

Chlorcosane     166 

-Abbott   483 

-Monsanto    484 

Chloretone     165 

and    Adrenalin    Ointment 222 

Capsules,   3   grains;    5   grains 165 

Inhalant     165 

Chlorinated   Paraffin 166 

Chloriodized    Rapeseed    Oil 255 

Chlorobutanol    165 

Chloroxyl      168 

(Lilly)     168 

Tablets,  5  grains   (Lilly) 168 

Chocolate    Tablets   lodostarine-Roche 256 

Cholera   Bacterin    (Cholera   Vaccine)    (Mulford) 409 

Vaccine     409 

Mulford    Serobacterin    (Sensitized    Cholera   Vaccine) 417 

Vaccine     (Prophylactic)      (Lederle) 409 

Vaccine,    Prophylactic    (Lilly) 409 

Cinchophen    167 

-Abbott     168 

-Abbott  5  grains;  7j4   grains;  Tablets 168 

and    Cinchophen    Derivatives 166 

-Calco      168 

-Calco   Tablets,    7^    grains 168 

Hydrochloride     168 

-Mallinckrodt  168 

-Pfizer     168 

-Squibb     168 

Claims  as  to  Origin,  False. — Rule  5 10 

(Comments),  Rule  6. — Unwarranted  Therapeutic 18 

False,   as  to  Origin    (Comments),   Rule    5 18 

Unwarranted,    Therapeutic. — Rule    6 10 

Clinadol  Co.'s  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate 464 

Clinical  Evidence 19 

Coated  Tablets  Urginin,  0.5  Gm 191 

Cocaine  and  Adrenalin,   Tablets 222 

Cod-Halibut  Liver  Oil,    Squibb 469 

Cod  Liver  Oil    458 

Liver  Oil,  Abbott's   460 

Liver  Oil   and  Iron  Iodide,   Maltine  with 459 


GENERAL     INDEX  499 


Liver  Oil  and  Viosterol,  Abbott's  A-B-D  Malt  Extract  with 459 

Liver  Oil  Concentrate   Capsules,   3  minims,   White's 466 

Liver   Oil    Concentrate,    Clinadol    Co.'s 464 

Liver  Oil   Concentrate   Capsules,   3   minims,   Kinney's 465 

Liver    Oil    Concentrate    Liquid,    Kinney's 465 

Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid   (Lederle) 464 

Liver   Oil   Concentrate   Liquid   (Lederle)    Capsules,   3  minims 464 

Liver  Oil  Concentrate-Lederle,   Tablets 466 

Liver  Oil   Concentrate  Liquid   (Lederle),  Vials,  5  cc 464 

Liver  Oil   Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,  5   cc,  Kinney's 465 

Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,   5  cc,   White's 467 

Liver  Oil   Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,   50  cc,  White's 466 

Liver  Oil  Concentrate   (Liquid),  White's 465 

Liver   Oil   Concentrate   Tablets,    Ucoline 467 

Liver  Oil   Concentrate   Tablets,  White's 467 

Liver    Oil    Concentrate,    Ucoline 466 

Liver    Oil,    Mead's    Flavored,    Standardized 460 

Liver  Oil,   Mead's,   Fortified  with  Percomorph  Liver  Oil 460 

Liver   Oil,    Mead's   Standardized 460 

Liver  Oil,   Nason's  Palatable 460 

Liver  Oil,  Parke,  Davis  &  Company  Standardized 460 

Liver  Oil,  Patch's  Flavored 461 

Liver  Oil-P.  D.  &  Co.  with  Malt  Extract 461 

Liver   Oil   Scott's    (Flavored)    Norwegian 461 

Liver  Oil    Scott's    (Plain)    Norwegian 461 

Liver    Oil,    Soluble   Gelatin    Capsules,    Parke,    Davis   &    Company's 

Standardized,    10    minims 461 

Liver    Oil,    Soluble    Gelatin    Capsules,    Parke,    Davis    &   Company's 

Standardized,  10  minims;  20  minims;  2.5  Gm.;   5  Gm 461 

Liver  Oil,   Squibb   462 

Liver   Oil,    Squibb  Mint-Flavored 462 

Liver    Oil,    Ucoline   Standardized 462 

Liver  Oil  with  Maltine 459 

Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol 462 

Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  Abbott's 463 

Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  Mead's 463 

Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,   Mint-Flavored,   Squibb 463 

Liver  (Dil  with  Viosterol,  Parke,  Davis  &  Company's 463 

Liver  Oil  with   Viosterol,   Squibb 463 

Collargol     427 

Ointment    427 

Collargolum     427 

Colloidal    Mercury    Sulphide-Hille    Solution 299 

Silver    427 

silver   iodide   compound 429 

Silver   Oxide   Urethral   Suppositories  or   Bougies-Mulford 427 

Silver    Preparations     422 

Comments  on  the  Rules,  Explanatory 11 

Complex  Iron   Salts    270 

Iron    Salts — Hemoglobin    Derivatives 271 

Composition. — Rule    1    9 

— Secrecy   Objectionable    (Comments). — Rule   1 15 

Statement  of    15 

Compound   Syrup   of   Calcreose 171 

Yellow  Oxide  and  Adrenalin  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co 301 

Compounds   Containing  Pentavalent  Arsenic 92 

Containing    Trivalent    Arsenic 80 

Compressed  Tablets,  Protan,   5   grains 440 

Tablets   Sal-Ethyl  Car-Bonate,    5   grs 358 

Tablets   Sal-Ethyl   Carbonate  with   Aminopyrine 358 

Tablets  Sal-Ethyl   Carbonate  with  Phenacetin 358 

Concentrated  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I-Lederle,   Refined....  381 

Anti-Pneumococcic   Serum,   Types   I   and   II    (Squibb) 384 

Diphtheria  Antitoxin    373 

Pollen  Antigens-Lederle   35 

Pollen    Extracts-Abbott    35 

Liver    Extract-Armour     311 

Tetanus   Antitoxin    377 

Tuberculin     392 


500  GENERAL     INDEX 

Constituents,  Nonofficial   15 

Contents  of  N.  N.  R 9 

Copper    Citrate    169 

Citrate-Mallinckrodt     170 

Citrate  Ointment   (5  per  cent;   10  per  cent)   M.  E.  S.  Co 169 

Salts    169 

Sulfate     170 

Copyrights    (Comments),    Rule   9 — Patents,    Trademarks 23 

Cremo-Bismuth     134 

Creosotal-Winthrop    171 

Creosote 171 

and   Guaiacol    Compounds    170 

Carbonate     171 

■Merck    484 

Phenylpropionate    172 

Cresatin    175 

-Dr.  N.  Sulzberger   (S.  &  D.) 175 

Cresol 174 

and    Cresylic   Acid    Preparations 174 

Derivatives    175 

Cresyl   Acetate    175 

Cresylic   Acid   Preparations,    Cresol   and 174 

Crotalus    Antitoxin    372 

Croton    Chloral    Hydrate    164 

Crude    Tuberculin     392 

Crystallizable    Benzol    122 

Crystallized    Strophanthin    186 

Crystal    Violet    211 

Violet    Jelly-Calco     212 

Violet  Medicinal-Calco    212 

Cupric    Citrate    169 

Sulfate    170 

Cuprum    Citricum    169 

Cyclobarbital     113 

cyclohexenyl    ethyl    barbituric    acid 113 

Decholin     124 

Sodium     125 

-Sodium,  Ampoules  Solution,  5  per  cent.  10  cc;  20  per  cent,  10  cc.  125 

Tablets,    3  ^A    grains    124 

Definition    of   Proprietary   Articles 9 

Dehydrocholic    Acid    124 

Desiccated,    defatted,    hog   stomach 316 

Dextrose     154 

Ampule  Solution,  25   Gm.  in  50  cc;   50  Cm.  in  100  cc.   (Wyeth) .  .  .  160 

Ampul  Solution  of,  10  Gm.,  20  cc;  25  Gm.,  50  cc.  (N.  D.  Co.)...  159 
Ampul-Vial    Solution    of,    25    Gm.,    50    cc;    50    Gm.,    100    cc.    (N. 

D.  Co.)   159 

and    Sodium    Chloride    Ampules,    Solution,    20    cc.     (Searle)    with 

Benzyl    Alcohol    159 

(d-Glucose),   Ampoules,    10  Gm.,  20  cc;   25   Gm.,    50   cc. ;    50   Gm., 

100    cc.    (Lakeside   Lab's) 158 

(d-Glucose)    U.   S.   P.,   Ampules,    10   Gm.,  20   cc;   25   Gm.,   50    cc; 

50  Gm.,   100  cc.    (Cheplin) 157 

(d-Glucose)   U.   S.   P.,  Ampules.   25   Gm.,   50   cc;   50   Gm.,    100   cc. 

(Buffered)    (Cheplin)    157 

5%,  10  %,  25%   in  Distilled  Water  in  Filtrair  Container   (Hospital 

Liquids,  Inc.)    158 

5%,    10 %_   in    Physiologic    Sodium    Chloride    Solution    in    Filtrair 

Container    (Hospital    Liquids,    Inc.) 158 

in  Physiological   Sodium  Chloride   Solution   in   Vacoliter   Container, 

Sterile  2^^%,   5%,   754%,    10%    (Am.   Hosp.   Sup.   Corp.)  ..  156-157 

5%  in  Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride,   Sterisol  Ampoule  159 

Solution,  50  Gm.,  50  cc;   50  Gm.,  100  cc.   (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 160 

Solution   in   Vacoliter    Container,    Sterile   2^4%,    5%,    7^4  %,    10%, 

20%,  25%    (Am.   Hosp.   Sup.   Corp.) 156 

Solution   U.    S.   P.    20%,    25%    in    Fractionally    Distilled    Water   in 

Saftiflask    Container    (Cutter) 157 

Solution    U.    S.    P.    21^  %.    5%.    10%    in_  Physiologic    Solution    of 

Sodium    Chloride   in    Saftiflask   Container    (Cutter) 1.57 


GENERAL     INDEX  501 


U.  S.  p.,  Ampoule  Sterile  Solution,  5  Gm.,  10  cc;  10  Gm.,  20  cc; 

25  Gm.,   50   cc;   50  Gm.,  100  cc.   (Miller  Lab's) 159 

U.   S.   P.,   Ampoule-Vial   Sterile  Solution,   10   Gm.,   20   cc;   25   Gm., 

50  cc;   50   Gm.,    100   cc.    (Miller  Lab's) 159 

U.  S.  P.  (d-Glucose),  25  Gm.,  50  cc  Ampoule  (Buffered)    (S.  &  D.)  159 
U.    S.    P.     (d-Glucose),    25    Gm.,    50    cc.    Ampoule    (Unbuffered) 

(S.   &  D.)    159 

U.    S.    P.,    Glaseptic    Ampoules    Solution,    50    per    cent,    20   cc;    50 

per  cent.  50  cc;  50  per  cent,   100  cc.    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 159 

-U.    S.   P.,    Solution,   25    Gm.,    50   cc;    SO   Gm.,    100   cc   in    Bottles 

(Cutter)      157 

-U.  S.   P.,   Solution,   5%,   10%  in  Saftiflask  Containers   (Cutter)...  157 

diacetylaminoazotoluene      196 

diacetyldihydroxyphenylisaton      ...           271 

Diacetyltannic  Acid   440 

Diagnostic    Agents     418 

Reagents     14 

Dial-Ciba    103 

-Ciba,    Elixir   of 104 

-Ciba,   Tablets,   0.1    Gm.    (VA    grains) 104 

-Ciba  with  Urethane,  Sterile  Ampules,  Solution,   1   cc,  2  cc 104 

diallybarbituric    Acid     103 

dialylmalonylurea     103 

diaminoacridinium   monohydrogen    sulfate    (3:6) 201 

diaminodihydroxyarsenobenzene  Hydrochloride    80 

Diarsenol    82 

0.1    Gm.,   0.2   Gm.,    0.3   Gm.,    0.4  Gm.,   0.5    Gm.,    0.6    Gm.,    1    Gm., 

1 .2  Gm.,  2  Gm,  3   Gm,  Tubes 82 

Dibromin      176 

Capsules,   6   grains    (P.   D.   &   Co.) 176 

(P.    D.    &    Co.) 176 

dibromobarbituric   acid    176 

dibromomalonylureide    ^ 176 

dibutylaminopropyl-p-aminobenzoate-N-Sulfate    (7)    56 

Dichloramina  U.   S.   P.   X 246 

Dichloramine-T     246 

-T    (Abbott)     247 

-T   (Monsanto)    247 

Dichlormethane  Solvent   (Belle  Alkali  Co.) 485 

Dick   Test:      Scarlet   Fever    Streptococcus   Toxin    for   the    Dick   Test 

(Lederle)      421 

Test:     Scarlet    Fever    Streptococcus    Toxin    for    the     Dick    Test- 

Mulford     421 

Test:     Scarlet     Fever     Streptococcus     Toxin     for     the     Dick     Test 

"National"    421 

Test:   Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test-P.  D.  &  Co.  421 

Test:   Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test-Squibb.  .  .  .  421 
Test:    Scarlet    Fever    Streptococcus    Toxin    for   Dick   Test    (U.    S. 

S.  P.   Co.) 421 

Test:   Scarlet  Fever  Toxin  for  immunization  of  Dick  Test 396 

-diethylamino-i3-/3-dimethylpropyl-p-aminobenzoate   hydrochloride    (7)  .  .  60 

-diethylaminoethyl-p-aminobenzoate    penta    m-borate    (^3) 65 

-diethylaminopropyl  cinnamate  hydrochloride   (7) 54 

diethylbarbituric   acid    103 

diethylmalonylurea     103 

Digalen    Injectable-Roche     181 

-Roche    181 

-Roche    (Cloetta)    181 

-Roche   (30  cc.   vials) 181 

-Roche,  Tablets   ^    cat   unit;    1    cat   unit 181 

Digestive    Enzymes    176 

Digifoline-Ciba    181 

-Ciba,   Ampules,   2   cc 182 

-Ciba  Liquid    182 

-Ciba,  Tablets    182 

Digipoten      192 

Tablets :  digipoten  0.03  Gm.   ( i/^   grain) 192 

Digitalein,    Crude    183 

Digitaline  Cristallisee   (Nativelle)    184 


502  GENERAL     INDEX 

Digitalin,    "French"    183 

"German"     184 

Digitalis 180 

and   Digitalis-Like    Principles    and  Preparations 178 

(Davies,   Rose)    Pil 180 

Duo-Test    McXeil.    Capsules 180 

Leaf   Defatted,    Wyeths   Capsules 180 

Leaves-Squibb,    Tablets.    1    cat   unit 180 

-Like  Principles  and  Preparations,   Digitalis  and 178 

-Mulf ord,    Fat-Free    Tincture   of 193 

Preparations      192 

Principles     179 

-Squibb  Tablets,    1    grain 180 

Whole  Leaf-Lederle,  54  grains;   IJ/2   grains;  3  grains.  Tablets 180 

-Wilber,   Tablets,    1^    grains 180 

Digitan     192 

Ampules    (for  Hypodermic  Use) 193 

Tablets,    l^^    grains    (0.1    Gm.) 193 

Tincture     193 

Digitol    193 

Digitoxin    184 

-Merck    185 

dihydro-morphinone    hydrochloride    305 

diiodohydroxypropane      252 

diiodopropane-2-ol     (1.3) 252 

diiodo-4-pyridone-A'-acetic  acid  and   diethanolamine    (3,5) 261 

Diiodotariric  acid   256 

Dilaudid    Hydrochloride     305 

Hydrochloride,  Ampules  Solution,  2  mg.   (1/32  grain),   1.1  cc 306 

Hydrochloride    Compounding  Tablets,    Yi    grain 306 

Hydrochloride,   Hypodermic  Tablets,  2  mg.    (1/32  grain);    l.l   mg. 

(1.20   grain) ;   4  mg.    (1/16   grain) 306 

Hydrohloride,    Rectal    Suppositories,    1/24    grain 306 

Hydrochloride,  Tablets,  2.5  mg.    (1/24  grain) 306 

Diluted  Erythrityl  Tetranitrate-U.   S.  P 304 

Erythrol    Tetranitrate     304 

Dimazon     196 

Oil     (Kalle)     196 

Ointment    (Kalle)     196 

Powder  (Kalle)    196 

dimethylaminophenyldimethylpyrazolon     346 

dimethylxanthine.    (3.7-)    _. 475 

dinormalbutyl-p-aminobenzoate-trinitrophenol     73 

Diodrast   261 

Sterile  Solution  10  cc. ;  20  cc.  size  ampule 262 

Diothane     58 

Hydrochloride ._ 58 

Hydrochloride  Solution  in  Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride,  Ampules, 

0.6%,    6  cc.    (Merrell) • 59 

Ointment,    1  %    59 

Ointment,  1  %    (Merrell)    59 

Ointment,   1  %   in  Ophthalmic  Tube 59 

Solution,     1  %     59 

Solution,    1%     (Merrell) 59 

Dioxyfluoran     202 

Diphtheria    Antitoxin    373 

Antitoxin,    Bovine     373 

Antitoxin    (Bovine)     (S.    &    D.) 373 

Antitoxin    (Concentrated   Antidiphtheric    Serum    Globulin)    (P..    D. 

&    Co.)     484 

Antitoxin    Concentrated    (Cutter)    483 

Antitoxin,    Gilliland's   Concentrated    and  Refined 483 

Antitoxin,    Globulin-Lederle-Modified    373 

Antitoxin  (Globulin)   (N.   Y.   C.  Dept.   of  Health) 484 

Antitoxin   (Hixson   Laboratories,   Inc.) 483 

Antitoxin-Lillv    (Purified    Concentrated)    484 

Antitoxin-N.  D.   Co 484 

Antitoxin  (S.   &  D.)    485 

Antitoxin-S quibb    485 

Antitoxin   Refined  and  Concentrated  (U.  S.  S.  P.   Co.) 485 


GENERAL     INDEX  503 


Prophylactic     398 

Toxin-Antitoxin    Mixture     389 

Toxin-Antitoxin    Mixture,    Diphtheria   Prophylactic    (Goat)    (P.    D. 

&  Co.)    390 

Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,   (Diphtheria  Prophylactic  (N.  D.  &  Co.).   390 

Toxin-Antitoxin    Mixture,    0.1    L-f-    (Gilliland) 390 

Toxin-Antitoxin   Mixture,   0.1   L-f    (Hixson   Labs.) 390 

Toxin-Antitoxin   Mixture    (0.1   L-f)    (Lederle) 390 

Toxin-Antitoxin   Mixture,   New   Formula   (Park-Banzhaf's  0.1   L-f) 

(S.  &  D.)    390 

Toxin-Antitoxin    Mixture    (New   Formula)    (Sheep)-Squibb 391 

Toxin-Antitoxin   Mixture   0.1    L-f    Non-Sensitizing    (Sheep)     (U.S. 

S.    P.    Co.) 391 

Toxin-Antitoxin   Mixture   0.1    L-f    (Sheep)    (Hixson   Labs.) 390 

Toxin  Diluted   for   Schick  Test   (P.   D.  &  Co.) 420 

Toxin  for  Schick  Test  and  Control   (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) ^ 420 

Toxin    Diluted    for    Schick    Test    Ready    for    Administration    (Gil- 
liland)        419 

Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test  Diluted  Ready  for  Use   (Cutter) 418 

Toxin   for  Schick  Test,   Diluted  Ready   for  Use-Lilly 419 

Toxin  for  Schick  Test,  Diluted  Ready  for  Use-Mulford 420 

Toxin  for  Schick  Test  in  Peptone  Solution    (Lederle) 419 

Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test 418 

Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test    (Cutter) 418 

Toxin   for   the   Schick  Test    (Diluted)    (Hixson) 419 

Toxin    for    the    Schick    Test    Diluted    with    Peptone    Solution    and 

Ready  for  Use   (Merrell) 419 

Toxin     for    the     Schick     Test    Ready    to    Use    without     Dilution 

(Squibb)     420 

Toxoid     398 

Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated    (Refined) 401 

Toxoid   Alum    Precipitated,    Refined    (Cutter) 401 

Toxoid  Alum   Precipitated    (Refined)    (Gilliland) 402 

Toxoid,   Alum  Precipitated    (Refined)    (Hixson   Labs.) 402 

Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated    (Refined)    (Jensen-Salsbery) 402 

Toxoid    (Alum  Precipitated)    Refined-Lederle    403 

Toxoid,   Alum   Precipitated   Refined    (Lee   Labs.) 403 

Toxoid  Alum   Precipitated    (Refined)-Lilly 403 

Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated   (Refined)    (Merrell) 404 

Toxoid   (Alum  Precipitated),   Refined    (N.   D.   Co.) 404 

Toxoid,   Alum   Precipitated    (Refined) -P.   D.    &   Co 404 

Toxoid  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined   (U.   S.  S.  P.  Co.) 405 

Toxoid-Cutter     398 

Toxoid-Gilliland     398 

Toxoid    (Hixson  Labs.)    399 

Toxoid    (Lederle)    399 

Toxoid    (Lilly)     399 

Toxoid    (Merrell)    399 

Toxoid    (N.    D.    Co. ) 400 

Toxoid   (P.  D.   &  Co.) 400 

Toxoid   Refined   Alum   Precipitated-Squibb 405 

Toxoid    (S.    &   D.) 400 

Toxoid-Squibb     401 

Toxoid-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co 401 

Direct  Advertising — Lay  Advertising   (Comments),  Rule  3 16 

Advertising. — Rule  3    9 

Diseases   on    Label,    Naming    17 

Disinfectants  and  Germicides,  Standardization  of 16 

disodium    iV-methyl-3  :S-diiodo-4-pyridoxyl-2 :6-dicarboxylate     265 

phenoltetrabromphthaleinsulfonate      204 

Dried    Stomach    316 

Dry    Liver    Extract     313 

Dubin-Aminophyllin     479 

-Aminophyllin,    0.24   Gm.,    10   cc. ;    0.48   Gm.,    2   cc.   Ampules   Solu- 
tion         479 

-Aminophyllin    0.36   Gm. ,    Sunpositories 279 

-Aminophyllin,   0.1    Gm.,   Tablets 479 

Duotal     172 

Tablets    5    grains 172 

Duration   of  Acceptance    12 


504  GENERAL     INDEX 

Dyes    194 

The  Acridine    197 

The    Azo    194 

The    Fluorescein    (Pyronine) 202 

The    Phenolphthalein    203 

Elixir     Alurate     101 

Dial-Ciba     104 

Dial-Ciba   (Ciba)    104 

Ephedrine    Sulfate,    2    grains 220 

of  Luminal    115 

of    Pyramidon     346 

of  Veronal    103 

Emulsion    Mesurol,   20   per  cent 136 

of  Castor  Oil,  McNeil's   (Emulsum  Olei  Ricini-McNeil's) 162 

Enteric  Coated  Glycotauro-H.    W.  &  D.,  Tablets 125 

Coated    Tablets    Gentian    Violet    Medicinal-"National,"    0.0324    Gm. 

(i^    grain)     213 

Coated  Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott.   0.03   Gm.    C^    grain)..  200 
Coated    Tablets    Neutral    Acriflavine-"National"    0.0324    Gm.     (J/^ 

grain)     200 

Vaccine     •.••••. ^^2 

Enzymes,    Digestive    176 

Proteolytic     177 

Enzymol     177 

Ephedrina    Semiaquosa    217 

Sicca 216 

Ephedrine    215 

-Abbott   216 

Alkaloid-Merck     218 

Anhydrous     216 

Compound-Lilly,    Inhalant    216 

Compound,    Ointment    (Lilly) 216 

Hemihydrate     217 

Hydrochloride     218 

Hydrochloride-Abbott    219 

Hydrochloride-Abbott,  Ampoules,  0.05  Gm.,    1   cc 219 

Hydrochloride-Abbott,  Capsules,  Vs  grain;  0.0324   Gm.,    (y^  grain); 

34    grain 219 

Hydrochloride-Abbott,   Syrup    219 

Hydrochloride-Abbott,  Tablets,  ^  grain;   ^  grain 219 

Hydrochloride    (Double   Strength) -Abbott,   Syrup    219 

Hydrochloride-Gane    and    Ingram    219 

Hydrochloride-Lilly    219 

Hydrochloride-Lilly.    Hypodermic    Tablets,    0.016    Gm.     (^    Gm.)  ; 

0.0325    Gm.    (J^    grain) .  .  219 

Hydrochloride-Lilly,    Pulvules,    0.025    Gm.    (^    grain);    0.05    Gm. 

(3/4  grain)    219 

Hydrochloride-Lilly,   Solution,   3   per  cent 219 

Hydrochloride-Merck     219 

Hydrochloride-P.    D.    &    Co 219 

Hydrochloride-P.  D.   &   Co.,   Capsules,   Va   grain;    ^   S^am 219 

Hydrochloride    Solution-Abbott    3% 219 

Hydrochloride-Squibb    219 

Hydrochloride-Squibb,   Tablets,    Ys    grain;    3^,   grain 219 

Hydrochloride,    Syrup    219 

Inhalant-Abbott     216 

Jelly,    Lilly's     220 

-Lilly     216 

Nasal    Jelly-Maltbie     220 

-Novocain  Solution,  Ampules,  1  cc. ;   2  cc 69 

(Plain)-Lilly,    Inhalant    216 

Sulfate    220 

Sulfate-Abbott     : 220 

Sulfate-Abbott,  Capsules,  Vs  grain;   J^   grain;   f^  gram 220 

Sulfate-Abbott,    Solution,    3%    220 

Sulfate,   Elixir,   2   grains 220 

Sulf ate-Gane  and   Ingram 22U 

Sulfate-LiUy    ■  • 220 

Sulfate-Lilly,  Ampoules,    1   cc,  0.05   Gm 220 


GENERAL     INDEX  505 


Sulfate-Lilly,    Hypodermic   Tablets,    0.016    Gm.    (14    grain);    0.0325 

Gm.    ( Yz    grain)    220 

Sulfate-Lilly,    Solution    3%    220 

Sulfate-Lilly,   Syrup,  0.22  Gm.  in   100  cc;   0.44  in  100  cc 220 

Sulfate-Merck     221 

Sulfate-P.    D.    &    Co 221 

Sulfate-P.    D.    &    Co.,    Capsules,    0.025    Gm.    (^    grain);    0.05    Gm. 

(3/^  grain)    221 

Sulfate-P.    D.    &    Co.,    Glaseptic   Ampoules,    0.05    Gm.    ()4    grain), 

1    cc 221 

Sulfate-P.    D.   &   Co.,   Solution,   3% 221 

Epinephrine     221 

and   Butyn   Hypodermic   Tablets 58 

and  Metycaine  2%.  Ampoules  1   cc.    (1:  25,000) 62 

and  Metycaine  2%,  Ampoules,  2.5   cc.    (1,:50,000) 62 

and  Procaine  Borate   Tablets 67 

and  Procaine  Hydrochloride,    1   cc. ;   3   cc. ;   Ampule   Solution 68 

and   Related   Preparations    213 

Hydrochloride-Lederle,     Solution 224 

Hydrochloride-Lederle     (Sterilized) ,    Solution 224 

Hydrochloride,    Solution    (Abbott) 224 

Hydrochloride    Solution,    Cheplin's    '. 224 

Hydrochloride  Solution   1 :1000    (U.  S.  S.  P.   Co.) 224 

Hydrochloride    Solution-Wilson    224 

Hydrochloride-U.   S.   P.,    Solution   of 223 

-Procaine    Ampoules,    1    cc.    (Abbott) _ 69 

-Procaine    Hypodermic    Tablets     (Procaine    Y^    grain,    Epinephrine 

V"5no  grain;   Procaine   Yi    grain,  l/^oo  grain)    (Abbott) 69 

Solution,   Procaine,    100   cc.   Bottle    (Abbott) 69 

-Wilson     224 

Ergot    226  and  228 

Aseptic   228 

Aseptic.    Ampoules,    1    cc 228 

of    Rye     228 

Ergotamine    Tartrate     229 

Ergosterol    In    Oil,    Irradiated 473 

Erysipelas   and  Prodigiosus  Toxins    (Coley)    (P.    D.   &  Co.) 417 

Antistreptococcic    Serum    385 

Antistreptococcic   Serum-Lilly    (Concentrated    Globulin) 385 

Antistreptococcus  Serum   (N.   D.  Co.) 385 

Streptococcus    Antitoxin     373 

Streptococcus  Antitoxin    (Concentrated)-Mulford    374 

Streptococcus    Antitoxin    Concentrated-Squibb 374 

Streptococcus    Antitoxin,    Globulin-Lederle-Modified 374 

Streptococcus  Antitoxin   Refined  and   Concentrated-P.   D.  &   Co....  374 
Streptococcus  Antitoxin    (Refined  and  Concentrated)    (U.   S.   S.   P. 

Co.)     375 

Erythrityl    tetranitrate    304 

Erythrol  Tetranitrate,   Diluted    ^ 304 

Tetranitrate  Tablets-Merck,    J/2   grain;    Y\    grain 304 

Tetranitrate    (Undiluted)     304 

Erythrityl   Tetranitrate,   Diluted,-!!.   S.   P 304 

-ethanolamine-Technical     (Tri-)     230 

Ethyl   Aminobenzcate    72 

Chaulmoograte    162 

Chloride     50 

diiodobrassidate     258 

Salicylate     357 

Ethylene     50 

-Cheney    51 

for    Anesthesia,    Walco :  •  •  • ; 51 

Glycol,  Ampules,   Luminal   Sodium   Solution  in,   2   cc 116 

Ohio    51 

(Puritan   Compressed   Gas   Corp.) 51 

Ethylhydrocupreine    232 

Eucalyptus   Compound   Nasal    Spray,   Pemco   Menthol 282 

Eucatropine     98 

Hydrochloride     98 


506  GENERAL     INDEX 

Euphthalmine    98 

Hydrochloride    (S.   &  G.) 99 

Euresol    (Bilhuber,    Inc.) 351 

Evidence,   Clinical    19 

Submitted    11 

Exceptions   (to  Rule  3) 17 

Explanatory  Comments  on  the   Rules 11 

Extract    of    Liver 313 

Extralin    315 

Pulvules,    0.5    Gm 316 

Fat-Free  Tincture   of   Digitalis-Mulford    193 

Ferri    Lactas    269 

Ferric  Ammonium   Citrate-Lederle,   Capsules  0.5   Gm 484 

Chloride,    Solution    270 

Chloride  in   50%    Glycerine  Solution,    Saf-T-Top 271 

Ferrous    Lactate    269 

Fever  Undulant  Bacterial  Vaccine  (Jensen-Salsbery) 408 

Fibrin  Ferments  and  Thromboplastic  Substances 232 

Fibrogen    Local-Merrell    234 

Local-Merrell,    7    cc.    vials 234 

Fish   Liver   Oil   Preparations   and    Concentrates 457 

Fluorescein    202 

-Merck    203 

Formaldehyde    Preparations    236 

Preparations  and  Compounds  which  Liberate  Formaldehyde 236 

Solution  of    237 

Formalin    237 

Formin 237 

Tablets,  5   grains   (0.3  Gm.) ;   75^    grains   (0.5   Gm.) 237 

Foreign  Countries,  Advertisements  in 17 

Fraud     IS 

Previous  Noncompliance  and    11 

Furunculosis  Bacterin-Abbott   (Mixed)    410 

Vaccine  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 411 

Gas  Gangrene  Antitoxin    (Combined)    (Lilly) 369 

-Gangrene  Antitoxin    (Combined)    Refined  and   Concentrated-P.    D. 

&    Co 370 

Gangrene  Antitoxin   Refined  and  Concentrated    (CI.  Perfringens — 

CI.   Septique  Antitoxin)    (N.    D.   Co.) 369 

-Gangrene    Tetanus    Antitoxin    (Combined)     (Lilly) 369 

-Gangrene  Antitoxin    (Combined)    (Prophylactic)    Refined  and  Con- 
centrated-P.  D.   &   Co 370 

-Gangrene     Antitoxin     (Polyvalent     without     Tetanus     Antitoxin), 

"Globulin-Lederle-Modified"    368 

-Gangrene  Antitoxin.    Tetanus,    "Globulin-Lederle-Modified" 367 

-Gangrene  Tetanus  Antitoxin   Mixed-Mulford    369 

Gangrene     Antitoxin,     Tetanus      (Polyanaerobic     Antitoxin,     Pro- 
phylactic)    (Cutter)     367 

Gelatin    Compound    Phenolized    238 

General   Anesthetics    50 

Gentian    Violet   Improved    Medicinal 213 

Violet  Medicinal    212 

Violet    Medicinal-"National"    213 

Violet    Medicinal-"National,"    Enteric    Coated   Tablets,    0.0324    Gm. 

(^    grain)     213 

Violet  Medicinal-"National,"  Tablets,   0.0324  Gm.    (i^    grain) 213 

Germicidal   Discs  of  Potassio-Mercuric  lodide-P.  D.  &  Co.    (mercuric 

iodide   0.0971    Gm.) ;    (mercuric  iodide  0.0283   Gm.) 296 

Germicides,   Standardization  of  Disinfectants  and..... 16 

Gilhland's  Concentrated  and  Refined  Diphtheria  Anti-Toxin 483 

Concentrated  and  Refined  Tetanus  Antitoxin 483 

Glaseptic  Ampules   Bismuth   Salicylate  in  Oil-P.   D.  &  Co.,   1   cc 134 

Ampoules   Ephedrine    Sulfate-P.    D.    &   Co.,    0.05    Gm.    (H    grain), 

1    cc 221 

Ampoules   Mercury   Salicylate-P.   D.    &   Co.,   0.065   Gm.    (1    grain); 

0.13    Gm.    (2    grains) 287 

Ampoules  Mercury  Succinimide-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.01  Gm.   (^   grain).  288 


GENERAL     INDEX  507 


Ampoules  Sodium  Cacodylate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains), 
1  cc:  0.3  Gm,  (5  grains),  1  cc. ;  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains),  1  cc; 
0.1    Gm.    (11/^    grains),    1    cc. ;    0.13    Gm.    (2    grains),    1    cc; 

1  Gm.    (15 14    grains),  2  cc 95 

Ampoules   Solution    Dextrose,   U.    S.    P.,    50    per   cent,    20   cc;    50 

per  cent,  50  cc;  50  per  cent,  100  cc.   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 159 

Ampoules    Solution    Liver    Extract-P.    D.    &    Co.    (Intramuscular) 

2  cc 319 

Globulin-Lederle-Modified,  Tetanus  Antitoxin    378 

Glucose   i-d)    154 

Glucosidum    e   scilla    solubile 187 

Glycerinated  Allergenic  Extracts-Lederle    484 

Glycine     48 

GlycocoU    48 

Glycotauro-H.    W.    &  D 125 

-H.  W.  &  D.  Capsules,   5  grains;  half  size 125 

-H.  W.  &  D.,  Tablets,  Enteric  Coated 125 

Glysal     359 

Gold    Salts    238 

Sodium    Thiosul fate- Abbott    239 

Sodium  Thiosulfate-Abbott,  Ampuls,  0.01  Gm.;  0.05  Gm.;  0.1  Gm.; 

0.25   Gm 239 

Sodium   Thiosulfate-Merck    240 

Sodium  Thiosulfate-Merck,  Ampules,  0.01  Gm.;  0.025  Gm.;  0.05 
Gm.;    0.10    Gm.;    0.20   Gm.;    0.25    Gm.;    0.30   Gm.;    0.50    Gm.; 

1.0    Gm 240 

Sodium    Thiosulfate-Searle    240 

Sodium  Thiosulfate-Searle,  Ampules,  5  cc 240 

Granules  Protargol  Compound    426 

Green   Iron  and  Ammonium   Citrates 270 

Group  Protein  Extracts-Diagnostic-  P.  D.   &  Co 484 

G-Strophanthin     186 

Guaiacol    and   Creosote   Compounds 170 

Benzoate    171 

Carbonate     172 

Carbonate-Merck    484 

Gynergen     229 

Ampules,    1    cc 230 

Solution,   Ampules,    1 :2000,   0.5    cc 229 

Tablets,    0.001    Gm 230 

Halazone    247 

-Abbott     247 

-Monsanto    247 

Tablets- Abbott    247 

Halibut-Cod   Liver  Oil,   Squibb 469 

Liver    Oil    , 467 

Liver  Oil    (In  Capsules),   Mead's  Viosterol  in 470 

Liver   Oil   in    Viosterol,    Mead's 470 

Liver   Oil,    Mead's    469 

Liver   Oil,   Squibb  Plain 469 

Liver  Oil  With  Viosterol 469 

Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  Squibb 470 

Liver  Oil  Plain,  11   cc,  McKesson's 468 

Liver  Oil  Plain,   Capsules,    3    minims,   McKesson's 468 

Liver  Oil,  Plain,  I.  V.  C 468 

Liver  Oil,  Plain,  3  minims.  Capsules,  I.  V.  C 468 

Liver  Oil,  3  minims,   Soluble  CJelatine  Capsules,   Squibb  Plain....   469 
Liver    Oil    with    Vitamin    D    Concentrate    in    Neutral    Oil,    6    cc, 

McKesson's     471 

Liver   Oil  with  Vitamin   D   Concentrate  in   Neutral   Oil,   Capsules, 

3  minims,  McKesson's   469 

Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral  Oil,  I.  V.  C...   471 
Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral  Oil,   3  minims. 

Capsules,   I.   V.   C 471 

Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  3  minims,  2  cc.  Soluble  Gelatine  Cap- 
sules,   Squibb    471 

Haliver  Oil,  Plain,  Abbott's 468 

Oil  Plain  Capsules,   3   minims,  Abbott's 468 


508  GENERAL     INDEX 


Oil,  Plain,  Parke^Davis    469 

Oil,   Plain   3  minims.   Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules,   Parke-Davis 469 

Oil   with   Viosterol,    Abbott's 470 

Oil  with  Viosterol,  3  minims,  Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules,  Abbott's.  .  470 

Oil   with   Viosterol,   Parke-Davis    470 

Oil  with  Viosterol,  Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules   (Parke-Davis  &  Co.) .  470 

Hemoglobin  Derivatives,  Complex  Iron  Salts 271 

Hexamethylenamine    237 

Hexamethylenetetramine    237 

tetraiodide     253 

hexamethylpararosaniline    chloride     211 

hexamethyltriamino-triphenyl-methane     211 

Hippuran   263 

(Crystals)    12   Gm.  vial 264 

25  CO.,   Sterile  Solution 264 

Hirathiol    434 

Holocaine     65 

and  Adrenalin  Ointment-M.   E.   S.  Co 65 

Hydrochloride     65 

Ointment-M.  E.  S.   Co 65 

Homatropine    Hydrochloride     99 

Hydrochloride-Merck     99 

Hydrochloride-Roche     99 

Hyclorite    242 

Hydrarp^ri    Benzoas     283 

Cyanidum     285 

Nucleinas     291 

Oxycyanidum 286 

Hydrargyrum   Benzoicum    283 

Cyanatum     283 

Oxycyanatum    286 

Hydrochloric    Acid    Substitutes 241 

Hyoscine   Hydrobromide    361 

Hypochlorite    Preparations    242 

and    Hypochlorite    Substances    242 

Hypodermic  Tablets  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  2   mg.    (1/^2  grain) ;   3.2 

mg-    (V20  grain);    4   mg.    (Vie   grain) 306 

Tablets     Ephedrine    Hydrochloride-Lilly,     0.016     Gm.     (^     grain), 

0.0325    Gm.    (H    grain) 219 

Tablets    Ephedrine    Sulfate-Lilly,    0.016    Gm.     (J^    grain);     0.0325 

Gm.    (14    grain)    220 

Tablets    Metrazol,    1  Yi    grains 302 

Tablets   Strophanthin  i/^oo  grain    (0.325   mg.)-S.   &  D 192 

Tablets    Strophanthin,    i/ioo    grain-Lilly 192 

Tablets,  Novocain,  0.2  Gm. ;   0.05  Gm 69 

Tablets,    Novocain,    0.02    Gm.    with    1-Suprarenin    Synthetic    Bitar- 

trate,    0.02   mg 69 

Hypophysis    Sicca    334 

Ichthammol    433 

Ichthynat     434 

Ichthyol    (Merck  &   Co.) 436 

Identification. — Rule  2    9 

(Comments),   Rule  2    16 

Iletin    (Insulin-Lilly)    328 

(Insulin-Lilly)  U-10.  5  cc. ;   U-20    5  cc;  U-40,  5  cc. ;  U-10,  10  cc; 

U-20,   10  cc;  U-40,  10  cc;  U-80,   10  cc;  U-100,   10  cc 328-329 

Impure  Cephalin    233 

Kephalin     233 

Imitations  (Comments),  Unessential  Modifications  of  Official 

Substances     23 

Indications,    Therapeutic     18 

Indirect  Advertising. — Rule  4    10 

Advertising   (Comments).  Rule  4 17 

Inhalant   Ephedrine   Compound-Lilly    216 

Ephedrine    (Plain)-Lilly    216 

Inspection  of  Factories   15 

Insulin    323 

-Lilly    (Iletin)     328 


GENERAL     INDEX  509 


-Lilly    (Iletiri)    U-10,  U-20,   U-40,   5   cc 328-329 

-Lilly    (Iletin)   U-10,  U-20,  U-40,  U-80,   U-100,   10  cc 329 

-Mulford     327 

-Mulford,    10   Units,   5   cc. ;    20   Units,    5    cc;    40   Units,    5    cc;    10 
Units,    10   cc;   20   Units,   10   cc;   40   Units,    10   cc;    80   Units, 

10  cc;    100  Units,   10  cc 327 

-Squibb     327 

-Squibb,    10    Units,    5    cc;    20    Units,    5    cc;    40    Units,    5    cc;    10 
Units,    10   cc;   20  Units,    10   cc;   40   Units,    10   cc ;    80   Units, 

10  cc;   100  Units,   10  cc 327 

-Stearns    328 

-Stearns,    10   Units,    5    cc;    20   Units,    S    cc;    40    Units,    5    cc;    10 
Units,    10   cc. ;   20  Units,   10   cc ;    40   Units,    10   cc;   80  Units, 

10  cc. ;   100  Units,   10  cc 328 

-Toronto     328 

-Toronto,    10   Units,    10   cc;    20    Units,    10    cc;    40    Units,    10   cc; 

80  Units,   10  cc;   100  Units,   10  cc 328 

Intracutaneous  Tuberculin  for  the   Mantoux  Test   (Gilliland) 393 

Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test   (Lederle) 393 

Invert  Sugar-Lilly,  Solution  of 160 

Sugar-Lilly,   Solution   of,    5    Gm.   in    10   cc;    6   Gm.    in    10   cc;    7.5 

Gm.   in    10    cc 160 

locamfen     248 

lodalbin     251 

and  Mercurol  Tablets 251 

Capsules,    5   grains    251 

lodeikon     210 

2.5   Gm.   Ampules    210 

Capsules-Abbott    210 

Iso-     209 

Iso-,  2.5  Gm.  Ampoules 209 

Iodine     248 

Compounds     248 

Compounds    for    Intravenous   Pyelography-Water-Soluble 261 

Compounds  for  Systemic  Use 250 

Dusting    Powders     249 

Preparations    Containing    Free    Iodine 248 

Protein    Compounds    251 

SYz    per   cent,    2    cc.    and   15    cc.    Saf-T-Top    Tincture    (Robert   A. 

Bernhard)      483 

U.  S.  P.,  2  cc.  and  15   cc,   Saf-T-Top  Tincture   (Robert  A.  Bern- 
hard)     . 483 

Iodized   Aliphatic   Compounds    252 

Fats  and   Fatty   Acids 254 

Poppy-Seed   Oil,    10  per  cent 257 

Poppy-Seed  Oil,   50  per  cent 256 

Quinoline    Derivatives    260 

lodobismitol   with   Saligenin    142 

with  Saligenin,  Ampules,  2  cc 142 

lodo-Casein  252 

-Casein  Tablets,   5   grains   (0.3   Gm.) 252 

-Casein   with   Chocolate,   Tablets 252 

iodochlorhydroxyquinoline     249 

lodophthalein,    Soluble    209 

lodostarine-Roche     256 

-Roche,    Chocolate    Tablets    256 

-Roche,   Tablets,    0.25    Gm 256 

lopropane    252 

lothion    252 

Oil    <V;/inthrop)     252 

Ipral-Aminopyrine    Tablets,    4.33    grains 106 

Ipral    Calcium    105 

Calcium  Tablets,    %   grain,   2  grains 105 

Sodium     106 

Sodium  Tablets,  4  grains 105 

Iron    and    Iron    Compounds 267 

Citrate   Green-P.    D.    &   Co 270 

Citrate    Green-P.    D.    &    Co.,    ^    grain,    f^    grain    and    1J4    grains. 

Ampoules     270 

and  Ammonium  Citrates,  Green 270 


510  GENERAL     INDEX 


Iodide,  Maltine  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and 459 

Lactate 269 

Lactate-Merck     270 

Salts,    Complex    270 

Salts-Hemoglobin   Derivatives,   Complex   Iron   Salts 271 

Salts,    Simple    269 

Irradiated   Ergosterol    in    Oil 473 

Isacen     271 

Tablets   0.005   Gm.    (V12  grain) 271 

Isarol-Ciba     436 

isoamylethylbarbituric  acid    102 

isoamylethylmalonylurea     102 

isobutylallyl    barbituric    acid 116 

isopropyl  bromallyl  barbituric  acid 108 

isopropyl-5-B-bromallyl    barbituric    acid,    5- 108 

isobutylallyl    malonylurea    116 

Iso-Iodeikon    209 

-lodeikon,    2.5    Gm.    Ampoules 209 

Isopropyl   Alcohol    272 

Alcohol,    98%,    Saf-T-Top 273 

I.  V.  C.   Halbut  Liver  Oil,  Plain 468 

Halibut  Liver   Oil,   Plain,   3  minims.   Capsules 468 

Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin   D   Concentrate   in   Neural   Oil....    471 

Ivyol    Poson    Ivy    Extract 352 

-Poison    Oak    Exrtact-Mulford     352 

Poison  Ivy  Extract  (S.  &  D.) 352 

-Poison  Oak  Extract   (S.  &  D.) 352 

Kalmerid   Germicidal  Tablets  Potassium  Mercuric   Iodide 296 

Kapseals  Ortal  Sodium  with  Amidopyrine 109 

Ortal   Sodium  with  Phenacetin 110 

Kelene    50 

Kephrine   Hydrochloride    273 

Hydrochloride    Bandage     273 

Hydrochloride    Gauze     274 

Hydrochloride    Powder    273 

Hydrochloride  Rectal    Suppositories    273 

Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Capsules,  3   minims 465 

Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid 464 

Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials.  5  cc 464 

Koch's  Old  Tuberculin,    (Tuberculin  "Old")    (Lederle) 393 

K-Y  Lubricating  Jelly   (Johnson  &  Johnson) 485 

Label,  Naming  Diseases  on 17 

Lac    Bismo    134 

Lactic  Acid-Producing  Organisms  and   Preparations 274 

Lactate,    Silver    430 

Lactose.    Beta-    153 

laevo-a-hydroxy-;3-methyl-amino-3-hydroxy    ethylbenzene    hydrochloride  224 

-a-hydroxy-j8-methyl-amino-propylbenzene     216 

-methylaminoethanolcatechol     j 221 

Lanolin 279 

Larocaine    Hydrochloride    60 

Lay  Advertising   (Comments),   Rule  3. — Direct  Advertising 16 

Lenigallol     279 

-Zinc    Ointment    279 

Lilly's   Ephedrine  Jelly    220 

Lipiodol   Calcium-Lafay,   Tablets    257 

-Laf ay     256 

-Lafay,  Ampoules,  1  cc. ;  2  cc. ;  3  cc. ;  5  cc 257 

-Lafay,    Capsules,    0.5    Gm 257 

Radiologique    Ascendant    257 

Radiologique    Descendant    257 

Lipoiodine-Ciba,   0.3   Gm.    (Uncoated) ,  Tablets 258 

-Ciba  Diagnostic,    1 0   cc.   bottle 258 

-Ciba     258 

Liquid  Extract  of  Liver 311 

Paraffin     279 

Petrolatum     279 


GENERAL     INDEX  511 


Petrolatum   Heavy    (California) -Squibb    280 

Petrolatum-Merck     280 

Liquor    Extract!   Cerebri    235 

Hydrargyri    Sulfidum    Colloidale    299 

Pituitarii   Posterioris   U.   S.   P.   XI 335 

Liver   and    Stomach    Preparations 309 

Concentrate-Squibb.    Autolyzed    313 

Extract-Armour,   Concentrated    311 

Extract   Concentrated-Lilly,    Ampoules    Solution.    10    cc 320 

Extract-Lilly,   Solution    320 

Extract    (Intramuscular) -Parke,    Davis   &   Co 319 

Extract-Lederle    313 

Extract    (Lederle),    For   Oral    Use,    Solution 312 

Extract-Lilly    314 

Extract-Lilly,   Ampoules    Solution.    10   cc 320 

Extract-Lilly,    110   Gm.    Bottle 314 

Extract-Lilly    Vials    314 

Extract    of    313 

Extract     (Oral) ,     Chappel 311 

Extract   Parenteral-Lederle,   One   CC.    Concentrated    Solution 317 

Extract  Parenteral-Lederle,  Vials  Concentrated   Solution.   1   cc 318 

Extract  Parenteral-Lederle,  Three  CC.   Concentrated   Solution 318 

Extract   Parenteral   Retined  and   Concentrated,   Vials   Lederle    Solu- 
tion.   1   cc 318 

Extract-P.    D.    &   Co 314 

Extract-P.    D.    &    Co.    (Intramuscular)    2    cc,    Glaseptic    Ampoules 

Solution      319 

Extract-Parke,   Davis  &  Co.,  Vials 315 

Extract  Powders  for  Oral  Administration 313 

Extract   Solution   for   Oral   Administration 311 

Extract  Solutions  for  Parenteral  Administration 317 

Extract    (Subcutaneous)    Chappel    317 

Extract- Valentine.    Solution    312 

Meal    315 

Oil,  Cod , 458 

Oil    Preparations    and    Concentrates,    Fish 457 

Purified    Solution    of    317 

Solution   of    311 

Local   Anesthetics,    Slightly    Soluble 72 

Anesthetics    53 

Ltibricant-McNeil     485 

Lubricating  Jelly  (Lilly) 485 

Luminal    115 

Capsules.    1 J4    grains    115 

Elixir   of    115 

Sodium     115 

-Sodium,    Capsules,    5    grains 116 

-Sodium    (Powder),    Ampules.    2    grains,    5    grains 116 

Sodium   Solution  in  Ethylene  Glycol.   Ampules,  2   cc 116 

-Sodium  Tablet.    %    grain,    I/2    grain,   1  Vj    grains 116 

Tablets,   %  grain,   ^2   grain,  1^   grains 115 

Lunosol      428 

Magnesia    Wafers,    Plant's 280 

Magnesium    Compounds     280 

Phosphate,    Tribasic    281 

Phosphate  Tribasic-Merck    282 

Sulphate  25%  in   5  cc.  Ampuls  (U.  S.  P.  Co.) 485 

Magnesii   Phosphas   Tribasicus    281 

Malt  Extract  with  Abbott's  A-B-D  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Viosterol 459 

Extract  with   Cod   Liver   Oil.   Borcherdt's 459 

Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil.  P.  D.  &  Co 461 

Maltine   with    Cod   Liver   Oil 459 

with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Iron  Iodide 459 

with   Mineral   Oil   and   Cascara    Sagrada 279 

Mapharsen     84 

Ampoules  0.04  Gm..  0.06  Gm..  0.4  Gm.,  0.6  Gm 84 

Mantoux   Test.   Intracutaneous  Tuberculin    (Gilliland) 393 

Test,   Intracutaneous   Tuberculin    (Lederle) 393 


512  GENERAL     INDEX 

Mantoux  Test   (Continued) 

Test,  Tuberculin  Intracutaneous  (N.  D.  Co.) 394 

Test,  Tuberculin   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 394 

McCormick's   English  Mustard    484 

McKesson's  Halibut  Liver  Oil  Plain,  11  cc. 468 

Halibut  Liver  Oil  Plain,  Capsules,  3  minims 468 

Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral  Oil,  6  cc.  471 
Halibut   Liver    Oil    with    Vitamin    D    Concentrate   in    Neutral    Oil, 

Capsules,    3    minims    469 

McNeil's  Emulsion  of  Castor  Oil  (Emulsion  Olei  Ricini-McNeil's)  . . .  162 

Mead's   Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol 463 

Halibut  Liver  Oil    469 

Cod  Liver  Oil  Fortified  with  Percomorph  Liver  Oil 460 

Oleum   Percomorphum    472 

Oleum  Percomorphum   50%    (In  Capsules) 472 

Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil   460 

Standardized   Cod  Liver  Oil,  Flavored 460 

Viosterol   in   Halibut  Liver  Oil 470 

Viosterol  in  Halibut  Liver  Oil   (In  Capsules) 470 

Viosterol    in    Oil 473 

Meal,    Liver    315 

Medicinal    Benzene     122 

Benzol     122 

Medinal    120 

Suppositories,    10    grs 120 

Tablets,  5  grs 120 

Melitensis   Vaccine,   Brucella 408 

Melubrin 345 

Meningococcus    Antitoxin    375 

Antitoxin-P.    D.   &   Co 375 

Menthol     282 

Eucalyptus   Compound    Nasal   Spray,   Pemco 282 

Me  rax  Alercury   Cyanide  Solution 485 

Merbaphen     294 

Mercurettes-P.    D.   &   Co 301 

Mercuric    Benzoate    283 

Compounds      283 

Cyanide 285 

Cyanide-Mallinckrodt     286 

Iodide,    Red    298 

Oxide,    Yellow    300 

Oxycj'anide      286 

Salicylate     287 

Succinimide     288 

Mercurochrome     289 

Applicators    (Arzol)     291 

-H.  W.  &  D.,  1%,  10  cc;  20  cc,  Ampules   (Searle) 291 

2  Per  Cent  Aqueous  Solution 290 

2  per  cent  in  25  per  cent  Glycerine,  Saf-T-Top 291 

0.5    Gm.,    Sealed   Tubes 290 

Soluble     289 

Solution  2  per  cent,  2  cc;  2  per  cent,  15  cc,   Saf-T-Top 291 

Suppository    Aces    291 

Surgical    Solution     290 

Tablets    290 

Mercurol     291 

and   lodalbin   Tablets 251 

Mercury     283 

and    Mercury    Compounds 282 

Cyanide-Merck      286 

Cyanide    Solution,    Merax 485 

(Metallic)    Preparations    301 

Nucleinate      291 

Oxycanide,    0.008    Gm.;    0.016    Gm. ;    0.01    Gm. ;    Sterile    Ampules 

(Abbott) 286 

Salicylate-H.  W.   &   D..   1   grain;    1^    grains;   2  grains 287 

Salicylate  P.  D.   &  Co.,  0.065  Gm.   (1   grain);   0.13  Gm.    (2  grains) 

Glaseptic  Ampoules   287 

Salicylate,  0.065   Gm.   (1  grain).  Sterile  Ampoules   (Abbott) 287 


GENERAL     INDEX  513 


Salicviate,   1  grain   (0.065  Gm.)    Suspended  in  Oil,  1   cc,  Ampules 

Cheplin     287 

Succinimide,  Ye  grain;  0.012  Gra.  (^  grain)  Ampuls  (S.  &  D.)  .  . .   288 
Succinimide,     Yt     grain     (0  01     Gm.)     1     cc;     Ampules     Solution 

(Cheplin)      288 

Succinimide-Merck     288 

Succinimide-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.01  Gm.   {Yt  grain);  Glaseptic  Ampoules  288 

Succinimide,  0.01  Gm.   (J^   grain)   Sterile  Ampoules  (Abbott) 288 

Sulphide-Hille,    Colloidal    Solution 299 

Meroxyl      292 

Tablets-H.   W.   &   D 292 

Mersalyl     298 

Merthiolate    293 

Jelly,     1 :  1,000 293 

Ointment,     1 :  2,000 293 

Ophthalmic    Ointment,    1 :  5,000 293 

1 :  1,000,    Saf-T-Top,    Tincture   of 294 

Sodium     293 

Solution,     1 :  1,000 293 

Tincture,    1 :  1,000 293 

Mesotan     357 

Mesurol    136 

Emulsion.   20  per  cent 136 

Metallic   Peroxides    ; 338 

Metaphen     295 

1 :  3,000,   and   Butyn    2%,    Ophthalmic  Ointment 58 

Butesin   Picrate,    Ointment 74 

Saf-T-Top    Tincture    296 

Solution   1 :  500,   1 :  2,500    295 

Tincture     1 :  200     295 

Methenamine    and    Methenamine    Compounds 237 

-Calco 237 

-Calco,   5   grains.  Tablets 237 

tetraiodide     253 

Methiodal     266 

Methods  and  Purpose  of  the  Council 11 

methylaminoacetocatechol    hydrochloride    273 

Methyl    Chloride    51 

Methylene   Bliie-Calco     483 

-citrylsalicylate  Acid    356 

Methyl    w-amino-^-oxybenzoate     74 

Methylthionine   Chlaride-Calco    483 

Metrazol     301 

Ampules,    1    cc 302 

\Y2    grains,   Hypodermic  Tablets 302 

Solution   10  per   cent 302 

Tablets     302 

Metycaine      61 

Ampoules,    1  % ,    1    cc 62 

2%   and  Epinephrine   (1:25,000),  Ampoules,   1   cc 62 

2%   and  Epinephrine    (1:50,000),  Ampoules,  2.5   cc 62 

Hydrochloride     61 

Ophthalmic  Ointment,  4  per  cent 62 

Tablets,    0.15    Gm 62 

Tablets,     ^     grain 62 

Solution,   2  %     62 

Mild    Protargin    426 

Protein    Silver    426 

Milk,    ChepHn's    B.    Acidophilus 277 

of    Magnesia,    Petrolagar 280 

Sheffield    B.    Acidophilus 278 

Supplee    B.    Acidophilus 278 

Mineral   Oil  and  Cascara  Sagrada,   Maltine 279 

Oil,    Smith's    280 

Oil   with  Agar  and  Phenophthalein,   Squibb's 280 

Oil  with  Agar,   Squibb's 280 

Oil   Stevenson's   Heavy   Russian 485 

Waters    22 


514  GENERAL     INDEX 

Mistura    Bismuthi-Hart     134 

Toxini   Diphtheric!  et  Antitoxini  Diphtherici 389 

Mixed    Bacterial    Vaccines 416 

Mixtures,   Attitude  ox 9 

Pharmaceutic   Preparations   and 22 

Proprietary    14 

Modified    Bacterial    Toxin 398 

Modificatioxs    of   Official    Substances — Imitations    (Comments), 

Unessential     qw 

OF  U.  S.  P.  AND  N.  F.  Products 14 

monobromisovalerylurea     (2)     146 

monochlorethane    50 

monoglycol-salicylate      359 

Moro    Percutaneous    Diagnostic    Test    (Tuberculin    Ointment    in    Cap- 
sules  for   the   Moro   Percutaneous   Diagnostic   test) 393 

Percutaneous   Test.    Tuberculin    Ointment    (Lilly) 393 

Mustard,    McCormick's    English 484 

Mydriatics,     Synthetic     98 

Names   (Comments),   Rule  8. — Objectionable 20 

FOR   Unoriginal   Articles,    Proprietary 21 

Objectionable. — Rule   8    10 

Patented    Products    and    Protected. — Rule    9 11 

Permanently   Affixed    18 

Proprietary    ("Trade");    When    Permitted ^ 20 

Therapeutically    Suggestive    22 

Naming   Diseases  on    Label 17 

Napthol   Compounds    302 

Nason's  Palatable   Cod   Liver  Oil 460 

Natural   Oil  of  Sweet   Birch-Merrell 484 

Neoarsphenamine      85 

-D.   R.   L 86 

-Mallinckrodt     86 

-Merck      86 

-Merck,    0.15    Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,    0.45    Gm.,    0.6    Gm.,    0.75    Gm..    0.9 

Gm.    Ampules     86 

-Searle      86 

-Squibb     86 

Neocinchophen-Abbott      - 168 

-Abbott   Tablets.    5    grains,    lH    grains 168 

-Lederle      169 

-Lederle,   5  grains.  Tablets 169 

-Squibb    169 

-Squibb,    5    grains,    Tablets 169 

Neodiarsenol      86 

Ampoules,    0.15    Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,    0.45    Gm..    0.6    Gm.,    0.75    Gm., 

0.9  Gm.,   1.15  Gm.,   1.8  Gm.,  3   Gm.,   4.5   Gm 87 

Neo-Iopax     265 

-lopax,    20    cc.    Ampoule    Solution 266 

-lopax   Sodium    265 

Neonal    107 

Neosalvarsan     87 

Ampules,    0.15    Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,    0.45    Gm.,    0.6    Gm.,    0.75    Gm.,    0.9 

Gm.,  1.5  Gm..  1.8  Gm.,  3.0  Gm.,  4.5  Gm 87 

Neo-Silvol      429 

-Silvol,   6  grains.  Capsules   (P.   D.  &  Co.) 430 

-Silvol  Ointment,   5  per  cent   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 430 

-Silvol   Vaginal    Suppositories    (P.    D.   &   Co.) 430 

Neo-Synephrin     224 

Hydrochloride    224 

Hydrochloride  Emulsion    (Aromatic)    225 

Hydrochloride    Jelly 225 

Hydrochloride-Procaine     Hvpodermic    Tablets 68 

Hydrochloride,    0.25    Per    Cent.    Solution 225 

Hydrochloride.   1   Per  Cent,   Solution 225 

Neutral     Acriflavine-Abbott     200 

Acriflavine-Abbott.  Enteric  Coated  Tablets,   0.03   Gm.    (^    grain)..  200 

Acriflavine-Abbott   for   Intravenous   Injection,   0.1    Gm.   Ampules...  200 

Acriflavine-Abbott.   Tablets,   0.03    Gm.    (.V2    grain) 200 

Acriflavine-Calco     200 


GENERAL     INDEX  515 


Acririavine    Telly     1  :  1.000- Abbott 200 

Acriflavine-'^Natioiial"     200 

Acriflavine-'"National"    Troches    200 

Acriflavine-"Xational."    Enteric    Coated    Tablets,    0.0524    Gm.     (^ 

grain)      200 

Acriflavine-"Xational,"   Ointment,    1   per  cent 200 

Acriflavine-"Xational"    "Pro    Injectione,"    0.5    Gm.    vials;    1.0    Gm. 

vials     200 

Acriflavine-"Xational,"   Tablets,   0.1   Gm.    (li/4    grains) 200 

Xew  .^xd  Xonofficial  Remedies,  Scope  of 13 

axd  xoxofficial   remedies,   substances   described  ix 14 

Tuberculin,     B.     E 394 

Tuberculin,   B.    E.,   Dried 395 

Tuberculin-T.   R 395 

Tuberculin   T.    R.,    Dried 396 

N.   F.  Products,   Modifications  of  U.   S.  P.  and 14 

Xitrates-Organic     303 

Xon-Immune     Serums     364 

N.   X.   R.,   Contents  of 9 

Suffix     14 

Noncompliance   and    Fraud,    Previous 11 

XoxoFFiciAL   Constituents    15 

Xormal    Horse    Serum 364 

Horse    Serum-X.    D.    Co 366 

Horse    Serum-P.    D.    &    Co 366 

Horse   Serum   (S.   &  D.) 366 

Horse    Serum     (Squibb) 366 

Horse  Serum  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 366 

Horse   Serum  Without   Preservative    (S.   &   D.) 366 

Saline  Solution,   Physiological   Salt  Solution 342 

North   American   Anti-Snake-Bite    Serum 372 

Nostal     108 

Tablets,  0.1  Gm.    (1^  grains) 108 

X'ovaspirin 356 

Tablets,    5    grains 357 

Novocain    68 

Ampules,  Solution,  1   per  cent 69 

Ampules   Sterile   Solution,  20  per  cent.   1.55  cc. ;   20  per  cent,   5  cc.  68 
Hypodermic   Tablets    (0.125    Gm.) ;    (0.1    Gm.);    (0.05    Gm.)  ;    (0.02 
Gm.);     (0.06    Gm.)  ;     and     1-Suprarenin     Synthetic    Bitartrate 

(0.125  mg.);   (0.25  mg.);   (0.083  mg.)  ;   (0.05  mg.) ;    (0.06  mg.)  69 
20  per  cent  with   1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate    1:9,000,    1:5; 

5   cc,   Ampules    Sterile    Solution 68 

Tablets,    1    grain 69 

Tablets,   0.01    Gm.   with   1-Suprarenin   Synthetic  Bitartrate,   0.2   mg.  69 

Novasurol     294 

Ampules      294 

Nupercaine-Ciba      63 

-Ciba,   Ampoules   Buffered    Solution  of,   2   cc,    1 :  200 64 

-Ciba,  Ampules  Solutions  of,  5  cc,  1:  1,000;  25  cc,  1:  1,000 64 

-Ciba,    Solution   of,   2  % 64 

-Ciba,   Tablets,    50   mg 64 

Hydrochloride     63 

(0.08     Gm.)     and     l-Suorarenin     Synthetic    Bitartrate     (0.06    mg.) 

Hypodermic    Tablets     69 

Crystals  for  Spinal  Anesthesia,   Sterile  Ampules,  300  mg.,   500  mg.  69 

Ephedrine  Solution.  Ampules,    1   cc. ;   2   cc 69 

for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  Ampules  Sterile  Crystals,  50,   100,   120,   150, 

200    mg 68 

Hydrochloride      68 

Hypodermic   Tablets,   0.2   Gm. ;    0.05    Gm 69 

Hypodermic  Tablets,   0.02   Gm.   with   1-Suprerenin   Svnthetic   Bitar- 
trate,   0.02    mg 69 

Solution,   10  per  cent,  2  cc.  Ampules  (For  Spinal  Anesthesia) 68 

Solution  1   per  cent,  2  cc. ;   2  per  cent,  3  cc,  Ampules 68 

Solution,     2     per     cent     with     1-Suprarenin     Synthetic     Bitartrate, 
Ampules,    1:50,000,    1    cc;    1:20,000,    1    cc;    1:50.000,    3    cc. ; 

1 :  20,000,  3  cc. ;   1 :  20,000,  6  cc 68  and  69 


516  GENERAL     INDEX 

Nupercaine-Ciba   (Continued) 

Solution,     1     per     cent     with     1-Suprarenin     Synthetic     Bitartrate, 

Ampules,   1 :  50,000,  2  cc. ;   1 :  50,000,  6  cc 68 

Object   of   the  Rules 9 

Objectionable  Names    (Comments),   Rule  8 20 

Official    Articles     13 

Rules  of  the  Council  on  Pharmacy  and  Chemistry 9 

Substances — Imitations     (Comments),     Unessential     Modifica- 
tions  OF    23 

Ohio   Carbon   Tetrachloride    Compound 485 

Ethylene     51 

Oil  of  Sweet  Birch-Merrell,  Natural 484 

Ointment   Ephedrine   Compound    (Lilly) 216 

Neutral  Acriflavine-"National,"    1    per  cent 200 

of  Colloidal  Silver  Oxide-Mulford,  5  per  cent;   10  per  cent 427 

Scarlet  Red  Biebrich  8  per  cent 195 

Old    Tuberculin    392 

Tuberculin,    Human    Strain    Concentrated    (Lilly) 393 

Tuberculin,    Tuberculin    "O.    T."    (Gilliland) 393 

Oleo-Bi-Roche     137 

Oleum    Hippoglossi    467 

Percomorphum    471 

Percomorphum,    Mead's    472 

Percomorphum,   50    %    (In   Capsules),    Mead's 472 

One  cc.   Concentrated  Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral-Lederle. .  .  .  317 

Ophthalmic  Ointment  Butesin  Picrate  1%  and  Butesin  1% 74 

Ointment  Butyn  2%  and  Metaphen  1:  3,000 58 

Opium  Principles.   Derivatives  and   Preparations 304 

Organs    of    Animals 309 

Oridine 258 

Tablets    259 

Origin   (Comments),  Rule  5. — False  Claims  as  to 18 

Original  Tuberculin,  "O.  T."    (Gilliland) 393 

Orphol      132 

Ortal-Sodium     109 

Sodium,    Capsules.    ^   grain    (0.05    Gm.) ;    3    grains,    (0.2    Gm.) ;    5 

grains     (0.3    Gm.) 109 

Sodium  with  Amidopyrine,  Kapseals 109 

Sodium   with    Phenacetin,    Kapseals 110 

Orthoform    74 

New    74 

Ouabain  Ampules-H.  W.   &  D 186 

Crystallized    186 

0.0005    Gm.    (i/iog   grain)-Lilly,    Ampoules 186 

-Merck  (G.  Strophanthin) 187 

Ovary   320 

Pancreas     322 

Papaverine     307 

Hydrochloride      308 

Hydrochloride-Merck     308 

Hydrochloride-Roche      308 

paraacetaminophenetol 340 

para-aminobenzoyl-diethylaminoethanol  hydrochloride   67 

Paraffin,    Chlorinated    166 

Liquid     279 

Paraformaldehyde    236 

-U.    S.   P.   X.    (Trioxvmethylene-Merck) 484 

Parathyroid   Extract    330 

Extract-Hanson      330 

Extract-Lilly      331 

Extract-Lillv,   1    cc.   Ampules 331 

Extract-Lilly,    5   cc.    Vials 331 

Gland     329 

Hormone-Squibb 331 

Hormone-Squibb,   5   cc.  Vials 331 

Solution   of    330 

-Typhoid  Bacterin    (Prophylactic)    (Abbott) 414 

-Typhoid   Bacterial   Vaccine  Immunizing    (Gilliland) 414 

-Typhoid    Prophylactic    (Cutter)     414 


GENERAL     INDEX  517 


-Typhoid  Vaccine  Combined   (U.   S.   S.   P.   Co.) 416 

-Typhoid   Vaccine    (Prophylactic)    (P.    O.   &   Co.) 415 

Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Cod  Liver   Oil  with  Viosterol 463 

Davis  &  Company   Standardized   Cod   Liver   Oil 460 

Davis  &  Co.'s  Viosterol   in   Oil 474 

-Davis   Haliver   Oil,   Plain 469 

-Davis   Haliver   Oil    with   Viosterol 470 

Paroidin     331 

Vials,    5    cc 331 

Parresine      336 

Pasteur   Anti-Rabic    Vaccine    (Gilliland) 386 

Prophylactic     386 

Treatment      386 

Patch's  Flavored  Cod  Liver  Oil 461 

Patented  Products  and  Protected  Names. — Rule  9 11 

Patents,  Trademarks.  Copyrights   (Comments),  Rule  9 23 

Pemco   Menthol   Eucalyptus   Compound    Nasal    Spray 282 

Pentamethylenetetrazol     301 

Pentnucleotide     336 

Vials,    10    cc 337 

Pentobarbital-Sodium     110 

-Sodium-Lilly     112 

-Sodium-Lilly,   Pulvules,    1 5/2    grains 112 

Sodium-Lilly,   Ampoules,   0.5   (jm.    (7^/^    grains) 112 

Pentavalent   Arsenic,    Compounds    Containing 92 

Pepsin    Group,   Including   Rennin 177 

Percomorph   Liver   Oil 471 

Liver  Oil,  Mead's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Fortified  with 460 

Perfringens  Antitoxin   (S.   &   D.) 369 

Tetanus-Antitoxin,   Refined  and  Concentrated    (N.   D.   Co.) 370 

Permanently  Affixed  Names    18 

Pernoston     112 

Tablets,     3    grains 112 

Peroxides      338 

Metallic      338 

Petrobran     340 

Petrolagar    280 

(Unsweetened)      280 

with     Cascara     (Non-Bitter) 280 

(with   Milk   of   Magnesia) 280 

(with   Phenolphthalein)     280 

Petrolatum      340 

Heavv     (California) -Squibb,    Liquid 280 

Liquid     279 

-Merck.   Liquid   280 

Petroleum    Jelly     340 

Pharmaceutic   Preparations  and   Mixtures 22 

Phenacaine    Hydrochloride    65 

Hydrochloride     65 

-Werner      65 

Phanodorn      113 

Tablets,    3    grains 114 

Phenacetin     340  and  341 

Compressed  Tablets   Sal-Ethyl   Carbonate  with 358 

Kapseals    Ortal    Sodium    with 110 

Phenazone     345 

Phenetidin     Derivatives      340 

Phenetsal      341 

Phenmethylol     56 

Phenobarbital    114 

-Gane    &    Ingram 115 

-Merck    115 

Sodium     115 

Sodium-Abbott    116 

Sodium-Abbott.  Tablets,  0.1   Gm.   (IJ^   grains) 116 

Sodium-Gane    &    Ingram    116 

Sodium-Gane  &  Ingram,  Tablets,   ll4   grains 116 

Sodium-Mallinckrodt     116 

Sodium-Merck     116 


518  GENERAL     INDEX 

jpheiiobarbital    (Continued) 

Sodium    (Powder) -Abbott,   0.13   Gm.    (2   grains),   Ampoules 116 

Soluble     lis 

Tablets,   yi   grain,   J/   grain,   Ij^   grains 115 

Phenobarbitone      114 

Soluble     lis 

Phenoco    ; 174 

Phenol    Derivatives   of   Salicylic   Aci'd    (Salol    Type) 3S9 

Phenolphthalein-Agar      2S 

with    Petrolagar    280 

with    Squibb's    Mineral    Oil  and   Agar 280 

Phenol    Red     205 

Phenolsulf onphthalein      205 

Ampules-H.   W.   &   D 206 

-H.  W.   &  D 206 

Phenoltetrachlorphthalein,  Ampules.  H.  W.   &  D 206 

-H.  W.  &  D 206 

Phenoltetraiodophthalein    Sodium     207 

Phentetiothalein    Sodium    207 

Phentetiothaleinis    Sodium    207 

Phenylalkylamine    Derivatives    ••    213 

Phenylcinchoninic    Acid     167 

acid    hydrochloride     168 

phenyldimethylpyrazolon     345 

phenylethylbarbituric    acid     114 

phenylethylmalonylurea     114 

phenylglycolymethylvinyldiacetonalkamine    Hydrochloride     98 

phenvlquinoline     167 

Phlorhizin    343 

Phlorizin 343 

Physiologic    Saline    Solutions 341 

Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride  in  Filtrair  Dispenser  (Hosp.  Liquids, 

Inc.)      342 

Standardization    16 

Physiological    Salt   Solution,    Normal    Saline    Solution 342 

Sodium   Chloride   Solution  in   Half-Size  Vacoliter   Containers 342 

Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in  Vacoliter  Containers  (Am.  Hosp.  Sup. 

Corp.)     342 

Solution   of   Sodium    Chloride-U.    S.    P 342 

Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride,   50  cc;   100   cc.    Bottle    (U.    S.   S.   P. 

Co.)     342 

Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride  in  Saftiflask  Container  (Cutter  Labs.)   342 

Solution   of   Sodium   Chloride.    Sterisol   Ampoule 342 

Pil.    Digitalis    (Dayies,    Rose) 180 

piperidinopropanediol-di-phenylurethane   hydrochloride    58 

Pirquet    (Tutaneous    Diagnostic    Test,    Tuberculin     Solution    for    the 

(Gilliland)      393 

Test  for  Tuberculosis    (Mulford) 394 

Test  for  Tuberculosis,  Von   (N.   D.   Co.) 394 

Test    (Lilly)    393 

Test    ("O.   T.")    Tuberculin    (Lederle) 393 

Test.   Tuberculin    (Old)    and   Control    (P.    D.   &  Co.) 394 

Pirquet's  Reaction:  Tuberculin  for  the  Cutaneous  Reaction    (Cutter)   393 

Pitocin,   Ampoules  of 334 

Ampoules  of,  0.5  cc. ;  1  cc 334 

Pitressin,    Ampoules    of 334 

Ampoules   of,    1    cc 335 

Pituitarium   Posterium  U.    S.   P.   XI 334 

Pituitary     334 

Extract-Lillv-U.    S.    P 335 

Extract-U.  "S.  P.-Merrell    335 

Gland    331 

Liquid    (U.    S.   P.)    Armour 335 

Solution     (Abbott)     335 

Solution   of   Posterior 335 

Solution-Squibb     336 

Solution   U.   S.   P.    (Wilson) 336 

Pituitrin      335 

Ampoules,  O.S   cc;    1    cc 336 

Plague    Bacterin    (Mulford) 410 


GENERAL     INDEX  519 


Bacillus   \accine    409 

Vaccine    (Prophylactic)     (Lederle) 409 

Vaccine,    Prophylactic    (Lilly)     409 

Plantago    Seed    344 

Plantain    Seed    344 

Plant's   Magnesia   Wafers    280 

Pneumococcus   Antibody    Globulin   Type   I-Mulford 382 

Antibody    Globulin.    Types    I    and    II-Mulford,     Antipneumococcic 

Serum,    Concentrated    384 

Poison    Ivy    Extract,    Ivyol 352 

Ivy   Extract-Lederle    (In   Almond    Oil) 352 

Ivy  Extract   (In  Almond  Oil)    1   cc.    (Lederle) 353 

Oak  Extract-Lederle    (In   Almond    Oil) 353 

Oak   Extract-Lederle    (In  Almond   Oil)    1    cc 353 

Poisonous   Substances. — Rule   7 10 

Substances    (Comments) ,    Rule    7 20 

Policies    of    Firms    Detrimental    to    Rational    Therapeutics. — 

Rule    11    11 

OF  Firms  Detrimental  to  Rational  Therapeutics   (Comments), 

Rule    11 23 

Pollen   Allergen    Solutions-Squibb 36 

Antigens     Concentrated-Lederle     35 

Antigens    Diagnostic-Lederlc     484 

Antigens-Lederle 37 

Antigens-"National"      39 

Extracts-Abbott 45 

Extracts-Abbott,     Concentrated 35 

Extract-Arlco     40 

Extracts    Concentrated-Cutter     42 

Extracts-Cutter     41 

Extracts    Diagnostic    (Abbott) 483 

Extract    Diagnostic-Arlco     483 

Extracts  Diagnostic-Mulford   485 

Extracts-Hollister-Stier      43 

Extracts-Mulf  ord     43 

Exrtacts-U.    S.    Standard   Products   Co 46 

Pollens    Dried-Mulford     485 

Polvanaerobic    Antitoxin,    Prophylactic    (Tetanus-Gas    Gangrene   Anti- 
toxin)    (Cutter)     367 

Antitoxin    (Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene)    Refined   and    Concentrated    (U. 

S.    S.    P.    Co.) 371 

Posterior     Pituitary     334 

Pituitary,    Solution    of 335 

Potassii    Hydrargyri    lodidum .    296 

Potassio-Mercuric  lodide-P.  D.   &  Co.,   Germicidal  Discs  of    (mercuric 

iodide   0.0971    Gm.) ;    (mercuric  iodide   0.0283    Gm.) 296 

Potassium   and   Bismuth   Tartrate 137 

Bismuth  Tartrate   (Aqueous )-D.  R.  L.,  Ampules,  2  cc 138 

Bismuth  Tartrate   (Aqueous)-  D,  R.  L.,  2.5  per  cent 138 

Bismuth   Tartrate-D.    R.    L 138 

Bismuth  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  Ampules,  0.1  Gm.;   0.2  Gm.   138 

Bismuth  Tartrate   with   Butyn-D.   R,  L.,   10   per  cent 138 

Guaiacolsulfonate     173 

Mercuric    Iodide    296 

Mercuric    Iodide,    Kalmerid   Germicidal    Tablets 296 

Sodium  Bismuthyl   Tartrate    144 

Preparations  and    Mixtures,    Pharmaceutic 22 

Preservatives   and   Vehicles    15 

Previous   Noncompliance   and    Fraud 11 

Procaine     67 

-Abbott     69 

Borate     65 

Borate   and   Epinephrine,    Tablets 67 

Borate-Searle     67 

Borate    without    Epinephrine,    Tablets 67 

-Epinephrine  Ampoules,    1    cc.    (Abbott) 69 

-Epinephrine    Hypodermic   Tablets    (Abbott) 70 

-Epinephrine  Hypodermic  Tablets   (Procaine    ^   grain,   Epinephrine 

V20OO  grain ;   Procaine    H    grain,   l/oOO  grain)    (Abbott) 70 


520  GENERAL     INDEX 

Procaine    (Continued) 

-Epinephrine   Solution,   100  cc.   Bottle    (Abbott) 69 

Hydrochloride     67 

Hydrochloride-Abbott  Tablets,   1.14  grains   (0.07  Gm.) ;   2.28  grains 

(0.15    Gm.)    70 

Hydrochloride,   Ampule  Solution,   2%,    1    cc. .  _. 67 

Hydrochloride  and  Epinephrine,  Ampule  Solution,  3  cc 67 

Hydrochloride    Crystals,    Sterile    Ampules,    for    Spinal    Anesthesia, 

50,   100,  120,   150,  200  mg.    (Abbott) 70 

Hydrochloride  Hypodermic  Tablets,    J^   grain   (Abbott) 70 

Hydrochloride  Hypodermic  Tablets,   3   grains    (Abbott) 70 

Hydrochloride-Merck     70 

Hydrochloride  Solution  2%,   5  cc.  Ampoules   (Abbott) 69 

Hydrochloride     Solution     10%,     2     cc,     for     Spinal     Anesthesia, 

Ampoules    (Abbott)     69 

Hydrochloride-Squibb     _.  .  •      70 

Hydrochloride-Squibb,     Sterile     Ampules,      (Crystals)     for     Spinal 

Anesthesia,    50,    100,    120,    150,    200    mg 70 

Hypodermic  Tablets,    M   grain   (Abbott) 70 

Hydrochloride  with  Epinephrine,   1   cc.  Arnpule  Solution 68 

-Neo-Synephrin    Hydrochloride    Hypodermic    Tablets 68 

-Xeo-Synephrin    Hydrochloride    Hypodermic   Tablets    (Stearns) ....      68 

Nitrate    70 

Prodigiosus  and  Erysipelas  Toxins  (Coley)    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 417 

Proflavina 201 

Proflavine     201 

-Abbott     201 

-"National"      201 

Sulfate     201 

propan-2-ol    272 

Proposote 172 

Capsules,    5   minims;    10    minims 173 

Proprietary    Articles,    Definition    of 9 

Articles   to   the   Book   New  and   Nonofficial   Remedies,    Rule 

Governing  the  Admission   of 9 

Mixtures    14 

Names  for   Unoriginal  Articles 21 

("Trade")    Names;    When  Permitted 20 

Protan     440 

5    grains.   Compressed  Tablets    440 

Protargin,     Mild     426 

Strong     426 

Protargol     426 

Compound,    Granules    426 

Protected  Names,  Patented  Products  and. — ^Rule  9 11 

Protein    Extracts    Diagnostic-Hollister-Stier 483 

Extracts  Diagnostic-P.  D.  &  Co 484 

Extracts-Diagnostic  P.  D.   &  Co.,   Group 484 

Preparations,     Allergenic     25 

Preparations,    Simple    28 

Silver,    Mild    426 

Silver,    Strong    426 

Proteins    Dried-Mulford     485 

Proteolytic    Enzymes     177 

Pro-Vitamin    A    453 

Psyllium    Seed    344 

Seed,    Richards    344 

Seed,    Schieffelin    344 

Pulvules   Carbarsone,    0.25   Gm.    {334   grains) 94 

Ephedrine    Hydrochloride-Lilly,    0.025    Gm.    (^    grain);    0.05    Gm. 

(M    grain)     219 

Ephedrine    Sulfate-Lilly,    0.025    Gm.     (^    grain);    0.05    Gm.     (Vs 

grain)      220 

Extralin,    0.5    Gm 316 

Pentobarbital-Sodium-Lilly,    IJ/2    grains    , 112 

Sodium  Amytal,  1  grain ;  3  grains 119 

Purified   Antidiphtheric   Serum    373 

Antitetanic    Serum    377 

Solution  of  Liver    317 

Purpose  and    Methods  of   the    (Council 11 


GENERAL     INDEX  521 

Pyramidon     346 

Elixir    of    346 

Tablets,    1  ^    grains ;    5   gains 346 

Pyrazolon    Derivatives    344 

Pyrethrum     Ointment     347 

Pyrogallolis    Triacetas     279 

Pyronine   (The  Fluorescein)    Dyes 202 

Quicksilver     283 

Quinidina     349 

Quinidine     347 

-Mallinckrodt     349 

-Merck    349 

Sulfate     349 

Sulphate    (Davies,   Rose  &  Co.) 350 

Sulphate-Merck     350 

Sulphate,  Tablets,  3  Gm,   (Davies,  Rose  &  Co.) 350 

Quinine      350 

and   Urea  Hydrochloride  0.5  Gm.,  1  cc,  Ampoule  Solution  (U.  S. 

S.    P.    Co.) 485 

Bismuth    Iodide    140 

Derivatives     350 

Ethylcarbonate    351 

Ethyl     Carbonate-Mallinckrodt      351 

Ethvl    Carbonate-Merck    351 

Sulfate    (Lilly)     350 

Quiniobine      138 

Ampoules.    2    cc 139 

Rabies    Vaccine    386 

Vaccine   (Cumming)    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 388 

Vaccine-Crilliland    (Semple    Method)     (Gilliland) 386 

Vaccine    (Harris)     387 

Vaccine    (Harris) -Lilly     387 

Vaccine     (Hixson)     387 

Vaccine    (Human),    (Chloroform    Killed)-N.    D.  ■  Co 388 

Vaccine   (Human),  Phenol  Killed  (Jensen  Salsbery  Labs.) 387 

■  Vaccine   (Killed  Virus)    (Med.  Arts  Lab.) 388 

Vaccine   (Killed  Virus)   Semple   (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 389 

Vaccine    (Killed   Virus)    Squibb    (Semple   Method) 388 

Vaccine-Lederle    (Semple    Method)     388 

Vaccine    (Phenolized)     (Terrell's    Labs.) 389 

Vaccine    (Phenol    Killed)-Mulford    (S.   &   D.) 388 

Vaccine    (Semple)     (Cutter    Labs.) 386 

racemicdesoxy-nor-ephedrine    213 

Rapeseed    Oil,    Chloriodized 255 

Reagents,    Diagnostic    14 

Reconsideration      12 

Red   Mercuric  Iodide    298 

Refined   Alum   Precipitated   Tetanus   Toxoid-Lederle 407 

and  Concentrated  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I-Lederle.  .  .  .  .  .  .  381 

Diphtheria    Antitoxin     373 

Diphtheria   Toxoid    (Alum   Precipitated),    Lederle 403 

Diphtheria  Toxoid    (Alum   Precipitated)    (N.    D.    Co.) 404 

Diphtheria   Toxoid    (Alum    Precipitated) -Squibb 404 

Tetanus    Antitoxin     377 

Tetanus   Toxoid    (Alum  Precipitated)    (N.    D.    Co.) 407 

Related   Digitalis   Principles    186 

Resorcin    Acetate,    m-Hydroxyphenyl    Acetate 351 

Compounds    351 

Resorcinol    Monoacetate     351 

Monoacetate-Eastman  Kodak   Company    351 

Resorcinolphthalein      202 

Rhus    Preparations    352 

Tox.    Antigen-Strickler     353 

Tox.  Antigen-Strickler,    (four   1   cc.  vials) 353 

Venenata   Antigen-Strickler    354 

Venenata  Antigen-Strickler,    (four    1    cc.   vials) 354 

Venenata    Dermal    Test    354 

Richards   Psvllium    Seed    344 


522  GENERAL     INDEX 

Ringer's    Solution    342 

Solution   in    Filtrair   Container    (Hospital   Liquids,    Inc.) 342 

Riodine    (Astier)     259 

Pearls,    0.2    Gm.    (3.1    grains) 259 

Rosaniline    (The    Triphenylmethane),    Dyes 210 

Rule    1. — Composition    9 

1. — Composition — Secrecy    Objectionable    (Comments) 15 

2. — Identification    9 

2. — Identification    (Comments)    16 

3. — Direct  Advertising    9 

3. — Direct   Advertising — Lay    Advertising    (Comments) 16 

4.- — ^Indirect   Advertising    10 

4. — -Indirect  Advertising  (Comments)    17 

5. — False  Claims  as  to  Origin 10 

5. — False  Claims  as  to  Origin    (Comments) 18 

6. — L^nwarranted  Therapeutic   Claims    10 

6. — Unwarranted  Therapeutic  Claims   (Comments) 18 

7. — Poisonous    Substances    10 

7. — Poisonous  Substances   (Comments)    20 

8. — Objectionable  Names    10 

8. — Objectionable   Names    (Comments)     20 

9. — Patented  Products  and  Protected  Names 11 

9. — Patents.    Trademarks,    Copyrights    (Comments) 23 

10. — Unscientific   and   L^seless   Articles 11 

10. — Unscientific  and  L'seless  Articles   (Comments) 23 

11. — Policies  of  Firms  Detrimental  to  Rational  Therapeutics.  11 
11. — Policies  of  Firms  Detrimental  to  Rational  Therapeutics 

(Comments)      23 

Rules.  Explan.\tory  Comments  on  the 11 

Governing  the  Admission  of  Proprietary  Articles  to  the  Book 

New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies 9 

Object   of    9 

of  the  Council  on  Pharmacy  and  Chemistry,  Official 9 

Sabromin    147 

Tablets  8   Grains 148 

Saf-T-Top  5%   Ferric  Chloride  in  50%  Glycerine  Solution 271 

Isopropyl   Alcohol,    98% 27.3 

Mercurochrome  2  per  cent  in  25  per  cent  Glycerine 291 

Mercurochrome  Solution,  2  per  cent,  2  cc. ;  2  per  cent,  15  cc 291 

Tincture  Iodine,  5J4   per  cent,  2  cc.  and  15  cc.   (Robert  A.  Bern- 
hard)     483 

Tincture  Iodine  U.  S.  P.,  2  cc.  and  15  cc.  (Robert  A.  Bernh-ard).  .  483 

Tincture    Metaphen    296 

Tincture    of    Merthiolate    1 :1000 294 

Saiodin     260 

Tablets,    1    grain ;    S   grains 260 

Sal-Ethyl    357 

Capsules,    5    minims    357 

Carbonate     3o8 

Carbonate,   Compressed  Tablets,   5  grs 358 

Carbonate,  Tablet  Triturates,    1   gr 358 

Carbonate   with   Aminopvrine,    Compressed   Tablets 358 

Carbonate  with  Phenacetin,   Compressed  Tablets 358 

Salicvlic   Acid   Compounds    354 

Compounds  in  Which   the   Salicylate  Action  is  Subordinate 360 

Acid   (Methvl-Salicylate  Tvpe),  Alkyl  Derivatives  of 357 

Acid    (Salol   Type),   Phenol   Derivatives   of 360 

Saligenin  2  cc.  with  lodobismitol  Ampules 142 

with    lodobismitol    .  . 142 

Saline    Solutions,   Physiologic    341 

Salcitrin     " 356 

Salmester     357 

Salophen    341 

Winthrop   Tablets   of,    5    grains 341 

Salt   Solution,   Normal   Saline   Solution,   Physiological 342 

Salvarsan     82 

Tubes,   0.1    Gm.,    0.2    Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,    0.4    Gm..    0.5    Gm.,    0.6    Gm., 

1  Gm.,  1.2  Gm.,  2  Gm.,  3  Gm 82 

Silver    ^9 


GENERAL     INDEX  523 

Salyrgan     298 

Solution,  Ampules   1   cc,   2   cc 298-299 

Sandalwood  Oil  Derivatives    ■• 360 

Sandoptal     116 

Tablets,  0.2  Gm 116 

Santalol    360 

Santalolis    Salicylas    360 

Santalyl    Salicylate    360 

Santyl 360 

Capsules,    6    minims    361 

Scarlet    Red    195 

Red   Biebrich   8   Per  Cent,   Ointment 195 

Red  Emulsion,   4  per  cent-P.   D.  &  Co 196 

Red,    Medicinal    195 

Red   Medicinal  Biebrich-Calco    195 

Red   Medicinal    Biebrich-Merck    195 

Red    Medicinal-Kalle     195 

Red    Medicinal-"National"     196 

Red  Ointment,  5  per  cent;    10  per  cent-P.  D.  &  Co 196 

Red   Salve    (Kalle)    195 

Red    Sulfonate    _.  .  . ; 196 

Fever   Streptococcus  Antitoxin    376 

Fever    Streptococcus    Antitoxin    Concentrated Ill 

Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin   Concentrated    (Squibb) 377 

Fever   Streptococcus  Antitoxin-Globulin-Lederle-Modified 376 

Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin-P.   D.  &  Co 377 

Fever    Streptococcus   Antitoxin    (Refined   and   Concentrated) 376 

Fever      Streptococcus      Antitoxin,      Refined      and      Concentrated- 

"National" 377 

Fever   Streptococcic  Toxin    420 

Fever   Streptococcic  Toxin    ._ 396 

Fever   Streptococcus   Immunizing  Toxin    (Lederle) 397 

Fever   Streptococcus   Toxin   for   the   Dick   Test    (Lederle) 421 

Fever   Streptococcus  Toxin   for   the  Dick   Test-Mulford 421 

Fever   Streptococcus  Toxin   for  the    Dick   Test   "National"' 421 

Fever   Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test-P.   D.   &   Co 421 

Fever   Streptococcus  Toxin   for   Dick   Test-Squibb 421 

Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test   (U.   S.   S.  P.  Co.) 421 

Fever    Streptococcus   Toxin    for    Immunization-Mulford 397 

Fever   Streptococcus   Toxin   for   Immunization-"National" 397 

Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin   for   Immunization-Squibb 397 

Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunization    (U.   S.   S.   P.    Co.)  .  .    397 
Fever    Streptococcus   Toxin   for   Preventive   Immunization-P.    D.    & 

Co 397 

Fever  Toxin  for  Immunization  and  the  Dick  Test 396 

Schick  Test  and  Control,  Diphtheria  Toxin   (U.   S.   S.   P.  Co.) 420 

Test   (Diluted)   Diphtheria  Toxin   (Hixson) 419 

Test.    Diphtheria,    Toxin    Diluted    Readv    for    Administration    Gil- 

liland     419 

Test,    Diphtheria   Toxin,   Diluted   Ready   for  Use    (Cutter) 418 

Test,   Diphtheria   Toxin,   Diluted   Ready   for  Use-Lilly 419 

Test,   Diluted   Ready  for  Use  Mulford   Diphtheria  Toxin 420 

Test,    Diphtheria    Toxin    418 

Test,    Diphtheria    Toxin     (Cutter) 418 

Test,   Diphtheria   Toxin,   Diluted    (P.   D.   &   Co.) 420 

Test  in   Peptone   Solution,    Diphtheria   Toxin    (Lederle) 419 

Test    (Lederle)     419 

Test,  Peptone  Diluent   (N.  D.  Co.) 420 

Schieffelin  Psyllium   Seed    344 

Scillaren,    Solution    188 

Tablets      188 

Scillaren-B     187 

Ampules     187 

Scope  of  New  and  Noxofficial   Remedies 13 

Scooolamine     361 

Hydrobromide     361 

Stable-Roche 361 

Stable-Roche,  Ampules,  V200  grain,   1   cc. ;  l/ioo  grain,   1   cc 361 

Scopomannit    361 

Scott's   Norvi'eeian   Cod-Liver   Oil    (Flavored) 461 

Norwegian    Cod    Liver    Oil    (Plain) 461 


524  GENERAL     INDEX 

Seal  of  Acceptance   12 

Sealed  Tubes  Merciirochrome   0.5  Gm 290 

Secale  Cornutum   P.    1 228 

Secrecy  Objectionable   (Comments),  Rule  1. — Composition 15 

Secrets,   Trade    15 

Seed,    Psyllium    344 

Richards    Psyllium    344 

Schieffelin    Psyllium     344 

Serobacterin-Mulford    (Sensitized  Acne  Vaccine  Polyvalent),  Acne..   417 

-Mulford    (Sensitized  Cholera  Vaccine),  Cholera 417 

-Mulford  Mixed   (Sensitized  Triple  Vaccine),  Typho 418 

-Mulford   (Sensitized  Typhoid  Vaccine),  Typho 417 

(Sensitized   Staphylococcic  Vaccine)    Staphylo- 417 

Serum,   Antianthrax    378 

Antianthrax    (Lederle)     378 

Antianthrax-Mulford     378 

Antianthrax    (P.   D.   &  Co.) 378 

Antianthracicum     378 

Antidysenteric     378 

Antidysenteric    (P.    D.    &    Co.) 379 

Antidysenteric     (Polyvalent)     (Lederle) 379 

Antidysenteric    (Polyvalent)    (Mulford)     379 

Antimeningococcic     379 

Antimeningococcic-Lilly,    Concentrated    380 

Antimeningococcic    (Gilliland   Labs.)    380 

Antimeningococcic    (Lederle)    380 

Antimeningococcic    (Mulford)     380 

Antimeningococcic    (N.   D.   &   Co.) 380 

Antimeningococcic    (P.    D.    &   Co.) 381 

Antimeningococcic,    Polyvalent    (U.    S.    S.    P.   Co.) 381 

Antimeningococcic    (Squibb)     381 

Antipneumococcic  Concentrated  (Pneumococcus  Antibody  Globulin, 

Types  I  and  II) -Mulford    384 

Antipneumococcic   (P.  D.  &  Co.)    (Felton)   Type  1 382 

Antipneumococcic   (Lederle)   Refined  and   Concentrated  Bivalent.  .  .    383 
Antipneumococcic  (P.  D.  &  Co.)    (Felton)  Types  I  and  II  Refined 

and    Concentrated    384 

Antipneumococcic   (Felton)    Tvpe  I  Refined  and   Concentrated    (N. 

_D.    &    Co.)  _ " 382 

Antipneumococcic,   Type   I    381 

Antipneumococcic.    Type   I    (Gilliland) 381 

Antipneumococcic  Type  I-Lederle,   Refined  and   Concentrated 381 

Antipneumococcic,   Type  I    (Mulford) 382 

Antipneumococcic,   Type   I    (Squibb) 382 

Antipneumococcic,    Type   II    383 

Antipneumococcus,   Types  I   and  II   Combined 383 

Antipneumococcic,   Types  I  and  II  Combined-Mulford 383 

Antipneumococcic    (N.   D.   Co.),  Types  I  and   II   Refined  and   Con- 
centrated        384 

Antipneumococcic,  Refined  and  Concentrated,  Type  II  (Lederle) .  .    383 

Equinum    364 

Erysipelas    Antistreptococcus    385 

Erysipelas  Antistreptococcic-Lilly    (Concentrated  Globulin) 385 

Erysipelas  Antistreptococcus    (N.   I).   Co.) 385 

Normal    Horse    364 

Normal  Horse   (N.  D.  Co.) 366 

Normal  Horse    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 366 

Normal  Horse    (S.  &  D.) 366 

Normal   Horse    (Squibb) 366 

Normal  Horse  (U.   S.  S.  P.  Co.) 366 

North   American   Anti-Snake-Bite    372 

Purified   Antidiphtheric    373 

Tropical   American   Anti-Snake-Bite    371 

Without  Preservative,  Normal  Horse   (S.   &  D.) 366 

Serums    and    Vaccines 362 

Antibacterial     . 378 

Antipneumococcic    381 

Non-Immune    364 

Sheffield   B.  Acidophilus   Milk 278 


GENERAL     INDEX  525 

Silver   Arsphenamine    87 

Lactate     430 

Lactate-Merck     430 

Mild    Protein    426 

Nitrate     431 

Nitrate  Applicators   (Arzol)    (Arzol  Chem.   Co.) 431 

Nitrate   1   Per  Cent-Cutter,  Ampoule   Solution 431 

Nitrate    1    Per   Cent-Lederle,   Ampule   Solution 431 

Nitrate,  1  Per  Cent-P.  D.  &  Co.,  6  minims.  Capsules  Solution 431 

Nitrate   1   Per  Cent-Sharp  &  Dohme,  Ampoule  Solution 431 

Oxide-Mulford,  Ointment  of  Colloidal,  5  per  cent;    10  per  cent...   427 

Oxide-Mulford,   Capsules  of.  Colloidal,   3  grains 427 

Oxide   Urethral   Suppositories  or  Bougies-Mulford,   Colloidal 427 

Preparations    422 

Preparations,    Colloidal    422 

-Salvarsan    89 

-Salvarsan.    0.1    Gm.,   0.15    Gm.,    0.2    Gm.,    0.25    Cm.,   0.3    Gm.,   0.6 

Gm.  Ampules    89 

Silvol     427 

Bougies  5   Per  Cent 427 

6  grains,  Capsules  Neo-  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 430 

Capsules,    6   grains    427 

Ointment   5    Per   Cent    427 

Ointment  5  Per  Cent,  Neo-   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 430 

Vaginal    Suppositories,    5   Per   Cent 427 

Vaginal  Suppositories,  Neo-  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 430 

Simple  Iron   Salts   269 

Protein    Preparations    28 

Siomine      253 

Capsules,   J^   grain,;   1   grain.;   2  grains,;   5   grains 253 

Skiabaryt    for    Oral    Admmistration 121 

for    Oral    Administration    (Merck) 121 

for    Rectal    Administration    121 

for  Rectal  Administration   (Merck) 121 

Skiodan    266 

.Sodium     266 

Sterile   Solution    (40%    by   volume) 267 

Tablets,    1    Gm 267 

Smaco,    Carotene 454 

Carotene  and  Vitamin  D   Concentrate  in  Cod   Liver   Oil 456 

Carotene  in   Oil    455 

Carotene  with  Vitamin   D  Concentrate  in  Oil 455 

Vitamin  D   Concentrate   in   Oil 465 

Smallpox    Vaccine     484 

Vaccine    (Cutter)     483 

Vaccine    (Gilliland)     483 

Vaccine  (Lederle)  (Preserved  imth  Brilliant  Green) 484 

Vaccine  (Vaccine   Virus)  (U.  S.  S.  P.   Co.) 485 

Vaccine   (Vaccine    Virus)   (N.   D.    Co.) 484 

(Variola)    Vaccine   (Glvcerinated)    (Squibb) 485 

.Smith's    Mineral    Oil 280 

Sodii  et  Aurii  Thiosulf as 238 

Peroxidum     339 

Sodium    Acetate   and    Theobromine-Merck 477 

Acetate  and  Theobromine-Roche    477 

-Acetate,    Theobromine     476 

Acetate,    Theophylline    480 

Acid   Phosphate    (Monobasic)-Mallinckrodt 484 

allylisopropyl  barbiturate    117 

Alurate 117 

Alurate,   Capsules,   3J^    grains 117 

Amvtal    118 

Amvtal.   Ampoule,   0.065   Gm.    (1   grain);    0.125    Gm.    (1^    grains); 
'0.25   Gm.    (33/4    grains);    0.5    Gm.    (7^4    grains);    1.0   Gm.    (15 

grains)    119 

Amytal,   Pulvules.    1   grain ;    3   grains 119 

antipyrine    aminomethansulfonate    345 

Barbital      120 

Benzoate   with   Caffeine    153 

Biphosphate-Merck     484 


526  GENERAL     INDEX 


Sodium   (Continued) 

bismuth    iodide     141 

bismuth    thioglvcollate     139 

Cacodylate      94 

Cacodylate,    Ampoule,    0.243    Gm.     (3^4    grains),    5    cc.     (Lakeside 

Lab's)      95 

Cacodylate,  Ampoule  Solution,  0.19  Gm.  (3  grains),  1  cc.  (Lake- 
side   Lab's)     95 

Cacodylate,  Ampul  Solution,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains),  1  cc. ;  0.32  Gm. 
(5  grains),  1  cc. ;  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains).  1  cc. ;  0.2  Gm.  (3 
grains),    5    cc;     0.32    Gm.     (5    grains),    5    cc;    0.45    Gm.     (7 

grains),   5   cc.    (U.    S.    S.   P.   Co.) 95 

Cacodylate-Mulford  Ampoules,  ^  grain,  1  cc. ;  1^  grains,  1  cc; 
2   grains,    1    cc. ;    3   grains,    1    cc;    5    grains,    1    cc. ;    7   grains,    1 

cc. ;    15y2    grains,   2   cc 95 

Chloride    Ampules    and    Solution    Dextrose,    20    cc.     (Searle)    with 

Benzyl    Alcohol     159 

Chloride  in   Filtrair  Dispenser,   Physiologic    Solution  of 342 

Chloride   in    Saftitlask   Container,   Physiologic   Solution   of 342 

Chloride,   Physiological   Solution   of,    50   cc;    100   cc.   Bottle    (U.    S. 

S.    P.    Co.) 342 

Chloride,   Physiological   Solution   in   Half-Size   \  acoliter   Containers 

(Am.    Hosp.    Sup.    Corp.) 342 

Chloride,     Solution     in     Vacoliter     Containers,     Physiological     (Am. 

Hosp.    Sup.    Corp.) 342 

Chloride-U.   S.   P.,   Physiological   Solution  of 342 

Dehydrocholate      125 

diethylbarbiturate   120 

diethylmalonylurea     120 

ethylisopropylbarbiturate     106 

ethyl    (1-methylbutyl)    barbiturate    110 

Ethylmercuri    Thiosalicylate    293 

ethyl    (methylpropyl    carbinyl)    barbiturate 110 

Gold    Thiosulfate    238 

Hyposulfite     433 

lodobismuthite     141 

isoamylethylbarbiturate    118 

Morrhuate    43 1 

Morrhuate  5%   Solution  with  Benzyl  Alcohol   (Ulmer)   5  cc. ;  20  cc.  432 

Morrhuate  5%   with  Benzyl  Alcohol   (Searle)    5  cc.  Ampules 432 

ji-hexylethyl    barbiturate     109 

t!-hexylethyl    malonylurea    109 

.V-phenlglycinamide-p-arsonate      96 

ortho-iodohippurate     263 

[o(hydroxymercuric-methoxypropylcarbamyl)     phenoxy]     actetate .  .  .    298 

Peroxide      339 

Peroxide-Merck     340 

Potassium   Bismuthvl   Tartrate    144 

Salicvlate-Mcrrell      484 

Sulfo-Oleate-Roche,    Solution    437 

Thioglycollate,    Antimony     75 

Thiosulfate     433 

Thiosulfate    (Searle),    5   cc;    10   cc.   Ampules 433 

Solargentum-Squibb      427 

-Squibb,    Tablets,    4.6    grains 427 

Solarson      96 

Ampules,    1    cc 96 

Ampules    1    cc    ( VVinthrop) 96 

(Winthrop)      96 

Soluble    Barbital     120 

Barbital 120 

Barbitone      120 

Gelatin   Capsules  Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  3  minims.  .  .    470 

Gelatine   Capsules  Parke-Davis  Haliver   Oil.   Plain,   3  minims 469 

Gelatin   Capsules   Haliver  Oil  with   Viosterol    (Parke-Davis) 470 

Glelatin    Capsules    Parke.    Davis    &    Company's    Standardized    Cod 

Liver  Oil,   10  minims.  20  minims.  2.5  Gm.,   5   Gm 461 

Gelatine    Capsules    Squibb    Halibut    Liver    Oil    with    Viosterol.     3 

minims    471 

Gelatine  Capsules   Squibb  Plain  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  3  minims 469 


GENERAL     INDEX  527 


lodophthalein     209 

Phenobarbital     115 

Phenobarbitone     115 

Solution   Bismuth   Sodium   Tartrate-Searle,    1.5   per   cent,   60   cc.   vial; 

3    per   cent,   60   cc.    vial 132 

Brain    Extract     235 

Bromsulphalein-H.    W.   &   D 204 

Calcreose    171 

Colloidal   Mercuric   Sulfide    299 

Colloidal    Mercuric    Sulphide-Hille    299 

Dextrose,  Ampoules,  50%,  20  cc;   50%,   50  cc.   (Merrell) 158 

Dextrose    and    Sodium    Chloride    Ampules    20    cc.     (Searle)    with 

Benzyl    Alcohol    159 

Dextrose    (d-Glucose),    Ampoules,    Lilly,    10    Gm.    Buffered   20    cc. ; 

25   Gm.   Buffered  50  cc 158 

Dextrose    (d-Glucose)    Lilly,    Ampoules,    25    Gm.    50    cc;    50    Gm. 

100    cc 158 

Dextrose   (d-Glucose)   Lilly,  Ampoules,  Unbuffered,  25  Gm.   50  cc. ; 

50  Gm.  100  cc 158 

Dextrose-U.    S.    P.,    25    Gm.    50    cc;    50    Gm.    100    cc.    in    Bottles 

(Cutter)      157 

Dextrose   U.    S.   P.   20%,   25%;    in   Fractionally   Distilled  Water  in 

Saftiflask    Container    (Cutter) 157 

Dextrose-U.    S.    P.    2 14%,    5%,    10%    in    Physiologic    Solution    of 

Sodium  Chloride  in   Saftiflask  Container   (Cutter) 157 

Dextrose-U.   S.   P.   5%,   10%   in   Saftitiask   Containers    (Cutter) 157 

Dial-Ciba   with    Urethane,    Sterile   Ampules,    1    cc,   2    cc 104 

Dial-Ciba  with   Urethane,   Sterile  Ampoules,   1   cc;   2  cc.    (Ciba)  .  . .  104 

Ephedrine    Hydrochloride-Lilly,    3    per   cent 219 

Ephedrine    Sulfate-Abbott,    3  % 220 

Ephedrine     Sulfate-Lilly,     3% 220 

Ephedrine    Sulfate-P.   D.   &   Co.,    3% 221 

Epinephrin   Hydrochloride   1:1,000   (U.   S.   S.   P.   Co.) 224 

Epinephrine    Hydrochloride-Lederle    224 

Epinephine    Hydrochloride-Lederle    (Sterilized)     224 

Liver   Extract   Concentrated-Lilly    319 

Liver  Extract   (Lederle)   For  Oral  Use 312 

Liver    Extract-Valentine     312 

Metycaine    2%    62 

Neo-Synephrin  Hydrochloride,   0.25   Per  Cent;   1   Per  Cent 225 

of    Epinephrine    Hydrochloride    (Abbott) 224 

of  Epinephrine   Hydrochloride-U.   S.   P 223 

of   Ferric    Chloride    270 

of   Formaldehyde    237 

of    Invert    Sugar-Lilly    160 

of  Invert  Sugar-Lilly,  5   Gm.   in   10  cc. ;   6   Gm.  in   10   cc;    7.5   Gm. 

in    10    cc 160 

of    Liver    311 

of   Liver,   Purified    317 

of   Nupercaine-Ciba,   2%    64 

of   Parathyroid    330 

of   Posterior   Pituitary    335 

of    Sodium    Sulfo-Oleate-Roche 437 

Scillaren     188 

Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche    443 

Thromboplastin-Hess     235 

Urginin     191 

Sperti   Process,    Viosterol    in    Oil-Merrell 474 

Spirosal     359 

Squibb  Cod-Halibut  Liver  Oil 469 

Cod   Liver   Oil    462 

Cod  Liver   Oil  with  Viosterol,   Mint-Flavored 463 

Cod   Liver   Oil   with   Viosterol 463 

Halibut  Liver  Oil   with   Viosterol 470 

Squibb's  Mineral   Oil  with  Agar 280 

Mineral    Oil    with   Agar   and    Phenolphthalein 280 

Mint-Flavored   Cod-Liver   Oil    462 

Plain   Halibut  Liver   Oil 469 


528  GENERAL     INDEX 

Standardization   of   Disinfectants  and   Germicides 16 

Physiologic     16 

Staphylococcus    Anatoxin     405 

Aureus    Vaccine    (Lilly)     411 

Aureus   Vaccine,   Polyvalent    (Lederle) 411 

Toxoid    405 

Toxoid-Lederle     406 

Vaccine     410 

Vaccine   (Albus  and  Aureus)    (Gilliland) 410 

Vaccine    (Combined)    (P.   D.   &  Co.) 411 

Vaccine    (Cutter)     410 

Vaccine    (Lederle)     411 

Vaccine     (Lillv)     411 

Vaccine    (N.   D.   Co.) 411 

Vaccine     (Squibb)     411 

Staphylo-Serobacterian    (Sensitized    Staphylococcic    Vaccine) 417 

Statement  of   Composition    15 

Stearodine     259 

Tablets     260 

Sterile  Ampoules   Mercury  Salicylate   0.065   Cm.    (1   grain)    (Abbott)   287 
Ampules    of    Mercury    Oxycyanide,    0.008    Gm.;    0.016    Gm.;    0.01    Gm. 

(Abbott)     286 

Ampoules    Mercury    Succinimide    0.01    Gm.    (%    grain)    (Abbott)..    288 
Ampules  of  Mercury  Salicvlate-H.  W.   &  D.,   1  grain;   IJ/^   grains; 

2   grains    287 

Ampules  Novocain  Crystals  for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  300  mg.,  500  mg.     69 
Ampules     Procaine     Hydrochloride-Squibb     (Crystals)     for     Spinal 

Anesthesia,   50,   100,   120,  150,  200  mg 70 

Ampules   Procaine    Hvdrochloride   Crvstals    for    Spinal   Anesthesia, 

50,    100,    120,    150.    200   mg.    (Abbott) 70 

2^%,  5%,  7y2%,  10%  Dextrose  in  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride 

Solution   in  Vacoliter  Container    (Am.   Hosp.   Sup.   Corp.).  156-  157 
2^%.    57o,    7^%,    10%,    20%,    25%,    Dextrose    Solution    in   Vaco- 
liter Container    (Am.   Hosp.   Sup.   Corp.) 156 

Solution  Hippuran  25  cc.  size 264 

Solution  Skiodan    (40  per  cent  by  volume) 267 

Sterisol  Ampoule   Dextrose   5%   in  Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium 

Chloride    (Sterisol)     159 

Ampoule  Physiological   Solution  of   Sodium   Chloride 342 

Stevenson's  Heavy  Russian  Mineral  Oil 485 

Stomach 316 

and  Liver  Preparations    309 

desiccated,  defatted,  hog   316 

Dried    316 

Stovarsol      93 

Tablets,   0.25    Gm 93 

Strong    Protargin     426 

Protein    Silver    426 

Streptococcic   Toxin,    Scarlet   Fever 396 

Streptococcus    Antitoxin    (Concentrated)-Mulford,    Erysipelas 374 

Antitoxin    Concentrated,    Scarlet   Fever    (Mulford) Z77 

Antitoxin    Concentrated-Squibb    374 

Antitoxin    Concentrated,    Scarlet   Fever    (Squibb) 377 

Antitoxin,     Erysipelas     ^ 373 

Antitoxin-Globulin-Lederle-Modified,    Erysipelas    374 

Antitoxin-Globulin-Lederle-Modified,    Scarlet    Fever 376 

Antitoxin-P.  D.  &  Co.,   Scarlet  Fever 377 

Antitoxin   Refined   and    Concentrated-"National,"    Scarlet   Fever. . .    377 
Antitoxin   (Refined  and  Concentrated),  Erysipelas  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.)   375 

Antitoxin,  Refined  and   Concentrated-  P.   D.  &  Co.,  Erysipelas 374 

Antitoxin    (Refined  and  Concentrated),   Scarlet  Fever 376 

Antitoxin,    Scarlet   Fever    376 

Immunizing   Toxin,    Scarlet   Fever    (Lederle) 397 

Toxin  for  Dick  Test-P.  D.  &  Co.,  Scarlet  Fever 421 

Toxin    for   Dick   Test-Squibb,    Scarlet    Fever 421 

Toxin   for  the   Dick  Test    (Lederle),   Scarlet  Fever 421 

Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test-Mulford.   Scarlet  Fever 421 

Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test-"National."   Scarlet  Fever 421 

Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test  (U.   S.  S.  P.  Co.).  Scarlet  Fever 421 

Toxin   for   Immunization-Mulford,   Scarlet  Fever 397 


GENERAL     INDEX  529 


Toxin  for  Immunization,   "National,"   Scarlet   Fever 397 

Toxin  for  Immunization,   Scarlet  Fever   (U.   S.   S.  P.  Co.) 397 

Toxin   for   Immunization-Squibb,    Scarlet   Fever 397 

Toxin  for  Preventive  Immunization,  P.  D.  &  Co 397 

Toxin,    Scarlet   Fever    420 

Strophanthin      _ 192 

Vioo    grain-Lilly,    Hypodermic    Tablets 192 

¥200  grain   (0.325  mg.)-S.  &  D.,  Hypodermic  Tablets 192 

Submitted    Evidence     11 

Substances  Described  in  New  and  Nonofficial  Remedies 14 

Suffix    N.    N.    R 14 

Sulfarsphenamine     89 

Sulfoichthyolate    Preparations    and    Substitutes 433 

Sulfonal      438 

sulfonedichloramidobenzoid   acid    (p;    247 

Sulfonethylmethane      438 

Sulf onmethane     438 

Sulfonmethanes      437 

Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott      90 

-Abbott,   0.1   Gm.,    0.2   Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,   0.4   Gm.,   0.5    Gm.,    0.6   Gm., 

0.8   Gm.   Ampules    90 

Bismuth      82 

-Mallinckrodt     91 

-Mallinckrodt,   0.1    Gm.,    0.2    Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,   0.4   Gm.,    0.5    Gm.,    0.6 

Gm.  Ampules    91 

-Merck    91 

-Merck,    0.1    Gm.,    0.2    Gm..   0.3    Gm.,    0.4   Gm.,    0.5    Gm.,    0.6    Gm. 

Ampules      91 

-Searle     91 

-Searle,    0.1    Gm..    0.2    Gm.,    0.3    Gm.,    0.4    Gm.,    0.5    Gm.,    0.6    Gm. 

Ampules     91 

-Squibb     91 

-Squibb,   0.1    Gm.,   0.2   Gm.,   0.3   Gm.,    0.4   Gm.,   0.5   Gm.,    0.6   Gm., 

0.9    Gm.,    3.0   Gm.   Ampules 91 

-Winthrop      91 

-Winthrop,   0.1    Gm.,   0.15    Gm.,   0.3   Gm.,   0.45   Gm.,   0.6   Gm.,   0.75 

Gm.,    0.9    Gm.,    3.0   Gm.   Ampules 91 

Supplee    B.    Acidophilus    Milk 278 

Suppositories   Aminophylline-Pharmedic   0.36   Gm 480 

Dubin-Aminophyllin,     0.36     Gm 279 

Suprarenalin     223 

Ointment    223 

Solution    223 

Vials      223 

Suprarenin     223 

Powder,  Ampules,   0.05   Gm 223 

Solution,    1 :  1,000    223 

Solution,   Ampules    223 

Tablets     223 

0.15  mg.,  0.06  mg.,   0.125  mg.,  with  Tutocain,  0.03  Gm.,  0.05  Gm. 

Tablets     71 

1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.125  mg.) ;  (0.25  mg.)  ;  (0.083 
mg.);  (0.05  mg.)  ;  (0.06  mg.);  Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets 
(0.25   Gm.);    (0.1   Gm.)  ;    (0.05   Gm.);    (0.02   Gm.) ;    (0.06  Gm.)      69 

Synthetic   Bitartrate    (0.06   mg.).   Novocain    (0.08   Gm.) 69 

Synthetic    Bitartrate,    0.02    mg. ;    Novocain,    0.02    Gm.    Hypodermic 

Tablets      69 

Synthetic  Bitartrate,   0.2  mg.;   Novocain,   0.01   Gm.  Tablets 69 

Synthetic    Bitartrate   with    Sterile    Solution    Novocain    20   per    cent, 

1 :  9,000,   1.5   cc. ;    5   cc.   Ampules 68 

Surgical    Solution    of    Mercurochrome 290 

Suspension  of  Tissue  Fibrinogen  and  Cephalin  for  Local  Use 234 

Synthetic    Mydriatics    98 

Thyroxine-Roche     443 

Syrup   Ephedrine   Hydrochloride    219 

Ephedrine     Hydrochloride-Abbott     219 

Ephedrine    Hydrochloride     (Double    Strength) -Abbott 219 

Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,  0.22  Gm.  in  100  cc;  0.44  Gm.  in  100  cc.  220 
Thiocol-Roche   173 


530  GENERAL     INDEX 

Tabellae   Hydrarg>'ri   Cum    Oleo    Theobromatis 301 

Tablets   Acetarsone-Abbott,    0.25    Gm 93 

Acriflavine    Hydrochloride-Abbott,    0.03    Gm 199 

Acriflavine    Xeutral-Calco,    ^    grain    (tincoated) 200 

Alypin,     '  3     grain     54 

Aminophylline-Pharmedic,    0.1    Gm 480 

Aminophylline-Searle,   0.1    Gm.    (1^^    grains) 480 

Amytal,   Ys    grain,   ^   grain,   ^  grain,   IJ^   grains 102 

Cebione   (Crystals),  0.01   Gm.;    0.05   Gm 457 

Cinchophen-Abbott,    5    grains;    "J^    grains 168 

Chiniofon-Searle,   0.25    Gm.    (4   gr.) 164 

Chiniofon-Searle  Enteric  Coated,   0.25   Gm.    (4  grains) 164 

Chiniofon-Winthrop,    0.25    Gm.    (4   grains) 164 

Cod   Liver    Oil   Concentrate-Lederle 466 

Compounding,  j^    grain,   Dilaudid  Hydrochloride 306 

Dial-Ciba,   0.1   Gm.    (liA    grains) 104 

Digalen-Roche   ^    cat  unit;   1  cat  unit 181 

Digifoline-Ciba     182 

Digitalis    Leaves-Squibb,    1    cat   unit 180 

Digitalis-Squibb,    1    grain    180 

Digitalis  Whole  Leaf-Lederle,   54  grain;   IH   grains;   3  grains 180 

Digitalis  Whole  Leaf-Lederle,   ^  grain;   1^   grains;   3  grains 180 

Digitalis-Wilber,    1 J4    grains    180 

Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  2.5  mg.   (V24  grain) 306 

Dubin-Aminophyllin,    0.1    Gm 479 

Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,   J4   grain;   yi   grain 219 

Ephedrine    Hydrochloride-Squibb,    Ys    grain;    34    grain 219 

Gentian  Violet   Medicinal-"Xational,"  0.0324  (jm.   (Yz   grain) 213 

Gynergen.     0.001     Gm 230 

lodo-Casein   with    Chocolate    252 

lodostarine-Roche,    0.25    Gm 256 

Lipiodol     Calcium-Lafay     257 

LipoiodineyCiba,    0.3    Gm.    (Uncoated) 258 

Methenamine-Calco,    5    grains    237 

Metycaine,    Yz    grain    62 

Metycaine,    0.15     Gm 62 

Neocinchophen-Lederle,    5    grains    169 

Neochinchophen-Squibb,    5    grains    169 

Neutral   Acriflavine- Abbott,   0.03   Gm.    (i^    grain) 200 

Neutral  Acriflavine-"National,"   0.1    Gm.    il^A    grains) 200 

Novocain,    1    grain    69 

Novocain,   0.01   Gm.   with   Suprarenin   Synthetic  Bitartrate,   0.2   mg.  69 
Novocain,     Hypodermic,     0.02     Gm.     with     1-Suprarenin     Synthetic 

Bitartrate,   0.02   Gm 69 

Novocain   Hypodermic,   0.2   Gm.;   0.05   Gm 69 

Nupercaine-Ciba,  50  mg 64 

of    Mercurochrome    290 

Pernoston,    3    grains 112 

Phenobarbital   Sodium-Abbott.   0.1   Gm.    (1J4   grains) 116 

Phenobarbital  Sodium-Gane  &  Ingram,   1^   grains 116 

Procaine    Borate   and    Epinephrine 67 

1.14   grains    (0.07   Gm.)  ;  2.28   grains    (0.15    Gm.),   Procaine   Hydro- 
chloride-Abbott      70 

5/3    grain,   Procaine   Hydrochloride,   Hypodermic    (Abbott) 70 

3   grains.   Procaine   Hydrochloride,    Hypodermic    (Abbott) 70 

^    grain.    Procaine    Hypodermic    (Abbott) 70 

Procaine   Borate  without   Epinephrine 67 

Quinidine   Sulphate,   3    Gm.,   Davies  &  Rose 350 

Sandoptal,    0.2    Gm 116 

Scillaren 188 

Skiodan,     1     Gm 267 

Solargentum,    4.6    grains    427 

Stovarsol,    0.25    Gm 93 

Suprarenin     223 

Synthetic   Thyroxine-Roche,    1    mg 443 

Theocin,    1  ^    grains    480 

Theocin  Soluble.  2V2   grains   480 

Triturates   Sal-Ethvl   Carbonate,   1   gr 358 

Tuberculin  B.  E.  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 395 

Tuberculin  T.   R.-P.   D.   &  Co 396 


GENERAL     INDEX  531 


Tutocain,  0.03  Gm.,  0.1  Gm.,  0.05   Gm 71 

Tutocain,  0.03  Gm.,  0.05  Gm.,  with  Suprarenin,  0.15  mg.,  0.06  mg., 

0.125    mg 71 

Urginin,    0.5    Gm 191 

Urginin,    Coated,    0.5    Gm 191 

Tannic  Acid   Derivatives    438 

Tannigen    (Winthrop)     440 

Tannin    Xucleo-Proteid-Mulford     440 

Tannyl    Acetate    440 

Tartro-Quiniobine     144 

-Quiniobine  Ampules,   2   cc 145 

Tertiary   Magnesium   Phosphate    281 

Testimonials     16 

Tests     16 

Tetanus    Antitoxin     Zll 

Antitoxin    (Bovine)    (S.    &   D.) 372 

Antitoxin,   Bovine    372 

Antitoxin    Concentartcd    (Cutter)    483 

Antitoxin,    Gilliland's    Concentrated   and   Refined 483 

Antitoxin,    Globulin-Lederle-^Iodified    378 

Antitoxin   Globulin   (P.  D.   &  Co.) 484 

Antitoxin    (Hixson   Laboratories,    Inc.) 483 

Antitoxin-N.    D.    Co 484 

Antitoxin  (N.    Y.   C.  Dept.   Health) 484 

Antitoxin   (S.    &  D.) 485 

Antitoxin  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 485 

Antitoxin,   Purified    (Squibb) 485 

-Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin    (Combined)    (Lilly) 369 

-Gas-Gangrene    Antitoxin    (Combined)     (Prophylactic)    Refined    and 

Concentrated-P.    D.    &   Co 370 

-Gas-Gangrene     Antitoxin,     "GIobulin-Lederle-Modified" 367 

-Gas-Gangrene   Antitoxin    Mixed-Mulford    369 

-Gas-Gangrene    Antitoxin     (Polyanaerobic    Antitoxin,    Prophylactic) 

(Cutter)      367 

-Perfringens   Antitoxin.   Refined   and   Concentrated    (N.   D.   Co.)...    370 

Toxoid,   Alum  Precipitated    406 

Toxoid    (Alum    Precipitated)    Refined    (N.   D.    Co.) 407 

Toxoid-Lederle.   Refined   Alum   Precipitated 407 

Tetiothalein     Sodivim     209 

Tetrachlorethvlene      441 

-Calco      .  .  ." 441 

-Calco,    1    cc 441 

Tetrachlormethane     161 

Tetraiodophthalein     Sodium     209 

Tetraiodophenolphthalein     Sodium      209 

Tetraiodophenolphthalein    Sodium    Salt-Eastman    210 

The  Azo   Dyes    194 

Acridine    Dyes    197 

Fluorescein    (Pyronine)    Dyes    202 

Triphenylmethane    (Rosaniline)    Dyes    210 

Theobromine    and    Sodium    Acetate-Merck 477 

and    Sodium    Acetate-Roche    477 

and    Theobromine    Compounds 475 

-Merck      476 

Sodium-Acetate     476 

Theocalcin      477 

Tablets,   7^    grains    478 

Theocin     480 

Sodium    Acetate     480 

Soluble      480 

Soluble.    214    grains,    Tablets 480 

1  y.    grains.   Tablets    480 

Theophylline 480 

and    Theophylline    Compotuids     478 

with    Ethylenediamine-U.    S.    P 478 

with    Sodium    Acetate    480 

Ther.^peutically  Suggestive  Names    22 

Therapeutic   Claims    (Comments),    Rule   6. — Unwarranted 18 

Indications    18 


532  GENERAL     INDEX 

Thigenol-Roche     437 

Thio-Bismol     139 

Ampoules,   0.2  Gm. ;   2  Gm 139 

Thiocol-Roche     173 

-Roche,    Syrup    173 

Three  CC.   Concentrated  Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral-Lederle.  .    318 

Thromboplastic  Substance,   Fibrin   Ferments  and 232 

Local-Lederle     235 

Local-Lederle,   20    cc.    Vial 235 

Local-Squibb     235 

Local-Squibb,   20   cc.   Vial 236 

Local-Squibb,  Dental  Package,  six  4  cc.  vials 236 

Thymol    Iodide     249 

Thymol    Iodide-Merck    249 

Thyroid      336 

Desiccated-Lederle     484 

Thyroxin     443 

(Squibb)     443 

Thyroxine      442 

Crude   444 

-Roche,    1.1    cc.   Ampules,    Synthetic 443 

-Roche,   Solution   Synthetic    443 

-Roche,    Synthetic    443 

-Roche,    1    mg..    Tablets,    Synthetic 443 

Tablets,   0.2   mg. ;    0.4   mg. ;    0.8   mg.   2.0   mg.    (Squibb) 444 

Tincture     Digitalis     185 

Digitalis    Duo-Test    McNeil     185 

of    Digitalis-Mulford.    Fat-Free    193 

Digitalis,    Purified,    S.    &    D 186 

Digitalis,   Purified,   S.    &  D 485 

Digitalis-Wilber      186 

Merthiolate,    1 :  1.000    293 

Metaphen    Saf-T-Top    296 

Metaphen,    1:200     295 

of    Digitalis     185 

of    Merthiolate,    1 :  1,000,    Saf-T-Top 294 

Toxin-Antitoxin    Mixture     389 

-Antitoxin   Mixture,   Diphtheria    389 

-Antitoxin    Mixture    (Diphtheria    Prophylactic)    Diphtheria    (N.    D. 

Co.)     ,.390 

-Antitoxin    Mixture,    Diphtheria    Prophylactic,     (Goat)     Diphtheria 

(P.    D.    Co.) 390 

-Antitoxin    Mixture,   0.1    L-j-,    Diphtheria    (Gilliland) 390 

-Antitoxin   Mixture,    0.1    L+,    Diphtheria    (Hixson   Labs.) 390 

-Antitoxin   Mixture,  Diphtheria   (0.1   L-f)    Diphtheria    (Lederle)  .  .  .    390 
-Antitoxin     Mixture,     New     Formula      (Park-Banzhaf's     0.1     L-f) 

Diphtheria    (S.    &    D.) 390 

-Antitoxin   Mixture    (New  Formula)    (Sheep),   Squibb,    Diphtheria.    391 
-Antitoxin    Mixture    0.1    L+    Non-Sensitizing    (Sheep)    Diphtheria 

(U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 391 

-Antitoxin      Mixture,      Diphtheria     0.1      L-f      (Sheep)      Diphtheria 

(Hixson   Labs.)    390 

Bacterial     396 

Diphtheria,  for  Schick  Test  and  Control   (U.  S.   S.  P.   Co.) 420 

Diphtheria,   Diluted  for  Schick  Test    (P.   D.  &  Co.) 420 

Diphtheria,   for   Schick   Test,   Diluted,    Ready   for  Use-Lilly 419 

Diphtheria,   for   Schick   Test,   Diluted,   Ready   for   Use-Mulford 420 

Diphtheria,   for   Schick  Test  in   Peptone   Solution    (Lederle) 419 

Diphtheria,  for  the   Schick  Test 418 

Diphtheria,    for   Schick   Test    (Cutter) 418 

Diphtheria,   for  the   Schick  Test    (Diluted)    (Cutter) 418 

Diphtheria,   for  the   Schick  Test    (Diluted)    (Hixson) 419 

Diphtheria,      Schick     Test,     Diluted,      Ready     for     Administration 

(Gilliland) 419 

Diphtheria,    for    the    Schick    Test.    Diluted    with    Peptone    Solution 

and   Ready   for   Use    (Merrell) 419 

Diphtheria,    for   the    Schick   Test,    Ready   to   Use   without   Dilution- 

Squibb      •  •  •  • 420 

for  Dick  Test,  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus.  P.  D.  &  Co 421 

for  Dick  Test,  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus,   Squibb 421 


GENERAL     INDEX  533 


for  Dick  Test,  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus   (U.   S.  S.  P.  Co.) 421 

for  the   Dick  Test,   Scarlet  Fever   Streptococcus   (Lederle) 421 

for  the  Dick  Test,  Scarlet  Fever   Streptococcus,   Mulford 421 

for  the  Dick  Test,  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus,  "National" 421 

for  the  Dick  Test,  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus   (U.  S.  S.   P.  Co.).  421 

for   Immunization,   Scarlet   Fever   Streptococcus,   Mulford 397 

for  Immunization,   Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus,    "National" 397 

for  Immunization,   Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus,   Squibb 397 

for  Immunization,   Scarlet  Fever   Streptococcus   (U.   S.   S.   P.   Co.)  397 
for    Preventative    Immunization,    Scarlet    Fever    Streptococcus,    P. 

D.    &    Co 397 

Modified    Bacterial 398 

Scarlet   Fever   Streptococcic    396 

Scarlet   Fever   Streptococcic 420 

Scarlet    Fever    Streptococcus.    Immunizing    (Lederle) 397 

(Coley)   Erysipelas  and  Prodigiosus   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 417 

for   Immunity  Tests    418 

for   Immunity   Tests    418 

Toxoid,    Diphtheria    398 

Diphtheria,    Alum    Precipitated    (Refined) 401 

Diphtheria,    Alum    Precipitated,    Refined    (Cutter) 401 

Diphtheria,    Alum    Precipitated    (Refined),    (Gilliland) 402 

Diphtheria,   Alum   Precipitated    (Refined),    (Hixson    Labs.) 402 

Diphtheria,   Alum   Precipitated    (Refined),    (Jensen-Salsbery) 402 

Diphtheria    (Alum    Precipitated),    Lederle,    Refined 403 

Diphtheria    (Alum    Precipitated),    Lederle,    Refined 403 

Diphtheria,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined   (Lee  Labs.) 403 

Diphtheria,   Alum   Precipitated    (Refined)-Lilly 403 

Diphtheria,    Alum    Percipitated    (Refined)     (Merrell) 404 

Diphtheria,  Alum   Precipitated    (Refined)-P.    D.   &   Co 404 

Diphtheria,     Alum    Precipitated-Squibb,     Refined 405 

Diphtheria,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 405 

Diphtheria,    Cutter    398 

Diphtheria,    Gilliland     398 

Diphtheria    (Hixson    Labs.) 399 

Diphtheria    (Lederle)    399 

Diphtheria    (Lilly)     399 

Diphtheria    (Merrell)     399 

Diphtheria    (Mulford)     400 

Diphtheria    (N.    D.    Co.) 400 

Diphtheria  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 400 

Diphtheria,     Squibb     401 

Diphtheria,  U.  S.   S.  P.  Co 401 

Staphylococcus    405 

Staphylococcus,    Lederle    406 

Tetanus,   Alum   Precipitated 406 

Tetanus,    Alum   Precipitated,    Refined-Lederle 407 

Trademarks,    Copyrights    (Comments),    Rule    9. — Patents 23 

"Trade"   Names,   Proprietary;    When   Permitted 20 

Secrets    15 

triacetyl    pyrogallol    279 

Tribasic   Calcium  Phosphate    151 

Magnesium    Phosphate    281 

tribromteriarybutylalcohol     145 

trichlorbutan-1    164 

trichlorbutylidene   Glycol    164 

Trichlorethylene      52 

-Calco    53 

-Calco,    Tubes,    1    cc 53 

Trichloroethylene      52 

Triethanolamine-Carbide   and    Carbon   Chemicals    Corporation 231 

-Technical     230 

Trional      438 

-trioxy-5-diallylpyrimidin    (-2,    4,    6) 103 

-5-isobutylallylpyrimidin     (2,    4,    6) 116 

methylene-Merck    (Paraformaldehyde-U.    S.   P.   X.) 484 

5-n-butylethlpyrimidin    (2,    4,    6) 107 

Triphal    240 

Amptiles.    0.025   Gm.;    0.1    Gm 240 

Trivalent   Arsenic,    Compounds    Containing 80 


534  GENERAL     INDEX 

Tropical   American   Anti-Snake-Bite    Serum 371 

Tryparsamide     96 

Trypsin     177 

Trypsin-Armour      178 

-Fairchild 178 

Group     177 

Tuberculin   "B.   E."    (Bacillus  Emulsion)    (Lederle) 395 

B.  E.    (Concentrated)    (P.    D.   &  Co.) 395 

B.    E.    Dried,    New 395 

B.    E.,    New    394 

B.  E.    (P.  D.  &  Co.),  Tablets 395 

B.  F.    (Bovine)    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 396 

B.  F.   (Human)    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 396 

Denys      396 

for  the  Cutaneous  Reaction   (Pirquet's  Reaction)    (Cutter) 393 

for  the  Mantoux  Test,  Intracutaneous   (Gilliland) 393 

for  the   Mantoux   Test,    Intracutaneous    (Lederle) 393 

for  the  Mantoux  Test   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 394 

Human    Strain   Concentrated,    Old    (Lilly) 393 

Intracutaneous  for  Mantoux  Test   (N.   D.   Co.) 394 

-Koch    392 

Ointment  for  the  Moro  Percutaneous  Test   (Lilly) 393 

Ointment  in  Capsules  (for  the  Moro  Percutaneous  Diagnostic  Test)   393 

Old    392 

(Old)  and  Control  for  the  Pirquet  Test  (P.  D.  &  Co.) 394 

Old    (Human)    (N.   D.    Co.) 394 

"Old"    (Koch)    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 394 

"Old"    (Koch's  Old  Tuberculin)    (Lederle) 393 

"Old"    (O.   T.)    (Mulford) 394 

Old    (Tuberculin   O.   T.)    (Cutter) 393 

"O.  T.",    (Old  Tuberculin)    (Gilliland) 393 

"O.   T.",    Original    (Gilliland) 393 

Pirquet   Test    ("O.    T.")    (Lederle) 393 

Residue    395 

Residue    (Dried)     396 

Riickstand      395 

Solution  for  the  Von  Pirquet  Cutaneous  Diagnostic  Test  (Gilliland)    393 

T.   R.    (Concentrated)    (P.   D.   &  Co.) 395 

T.   R.    Dried,    New 396 

T.  R.   (P.  D.  &  Co.) 395 

T.    R.-P.   D.   &   Co.,  Tablets 396 

Tuberculine    Bouillon  Filtre 396 

Tuberculinum    Denys    396 

Novum    B.    E- 394 

Novum   B.    E.    Siccum 395 

Novum    T.    R 395 

Novum   T.   R.    Siccum 395 

Tuberculins     391 

Tuberkelbacillin    Rest,    Koch     395 

Tubes    Trichlorethylene-Calco,    1    cc 53 

Tutocain     71 

Tablets,   0.03   Gm.,   0.1   Gm.,   0.05  Gm 71 

Tablets.   0.03   Gm.,   0.05   Gm.,   with   Suprarenin   0.15   mg.,   0.06   mg., 

0.125    mg 71 

Tutocaine    Hydrochloride     71 

Type    I,    Antipneumococcic    Serum 381 

I,   Antipneumococcic    Serum    (Gilliland) 381 

I,    Antipneumococcic    Serum    (Mulford) 382 

I     (Refined    and    Concentrated),    Antipneumococcic    Serum-Felton- 

(N.    D.    &    Co.) 382 

I,   Antipneumococcic    Serum,   Refined   and    Concentrated-Lederle.  .  .    381 
I,    Antipneumococcic    Serum    (Squibb) 382 

I,  Pneumococcus    Antibody    Globulin-Mulford 382 

II,  Antipneumococcic    Serum    383 

II,  Antipneumococcic   Serum,   refined  and  Concentrated    (Lederle)  .    383 


GENERAL     INDEX  535 

Types  I  and  II,  Antipneumococcus  Serum,   Combined 383 

I  and  II,  Antipneumococcic  Serum,   Combined-Mulford 383 

I   and    II,   Antipneumococcic    Serum,   Concentrated    (Pneumococcus 

Antibody    Globulin) -Mulford    384 

I  and  II,  Antipneumococcic  Serum,   Concentrated   (Squibb) 384 

I  and  II,  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Refined  and  Concentrated   (N. 

D.  &  Co 384 

I    and    II,    Antipneumococcic    Serum,    Refined    and    Concentrated 

(Felton)    (P.    D.    &   Co.) 384 

Typho-Bacterin   Mixed    (Triple  Vaccine)    (S.   &   D.) 415 

-Bacterin     (Mulford)     413 

-Serobacterin-Mulford    Mixed    (Sensitized   Triple    Vaccine) 418 

-Serobacterin-Mulford    (Sensitized   Typhoid    Vaccine) 417 

Typhoid   and   Typhoid   Paratyphoid   Vaccines 411 

Bacillus,   Bacterial   Vaccine   Made   from   the 412 

Combined    Vaccine    (Prophylactic)     (Lederle) 415 

Mixed    \'accine,    Prophylactic    (Lilly) 415 

-Paratyphoid   Bacterial   Vaccine   Immunizing   (Gilliland) 414 

-Paratyphoid    Bacterin    (Prophylactic)     (Abbott) 414 

-Paratyphoid   Prophylactic    (Cutter)    414 

-Paratyphoid  Vaccine   (Prophylactic)    (P.   D.  &  Co.) 415 

Paratyphoid  Vaccine  Combined   (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 416 

Prophylactic     412 

Prophylactic    (Cutter) 412 

Vaccine   Combined.   Immunizing    (Squibb) 416 

Vaccine    (Gilliland)     412 

Vaccine    (Immunizing)     (Squibb)     413 

Vaccine    (Merrell)     413 

Vaccine    (N.    D.    Co.) 413 

Vaccine     (Prophylactic)     (Lederle) 412 

Vaccine,    Prophylactic    (Lilly)     412 

Vaccine    (Prophylactic)    (P.   D.   ii;:   Co.) 413 

Vaccine  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.) 413 

Ucoline   Cod   Liver  Oil  Concentrate 466 

Calcium  Phosphate  Cocoa  Wafers 151 

Cod   Liver   Oil   Concentrate   Tablets 467 

Standardized    Cod    Liver    Oil 462 

Undulant    Fever    Bacterial    Vaccine    (Jensen-Salsberv) 408 

Fever  Vaccine    (N.   D.   Co.) 409 

Unessential    Modifications   of   Official    Substances. — Imitations 

(Comments)      23 

Unoriginal  Articles,   Proprietary   Names   for 21 

Unscientific   and   Useless    Articles. — Rule    10 11 

AND  Useless  Articles   (Comments),  Rule  10 23 

Unv^^arranted  Therapeutic  Claims    (Comments),   Rule  6 18 

Urea     445 

and   Ureids,    Urethanes    (Carbamates) 445 

Hydrochloride   0.5    Gm.,   1    cc.   Ampoule   Solution   Quinine    (U.    S. 

S.    P.    Co.) 485 

Urethanes    (Carbamates),   Urea   and  Ureids 445 

Urethane  with  Dial-Ciba,   Sterile  Ampules,   Solution,   1   cc,  2  cc 104 

Urginin     190 

Coated    Tablets,    0.5    Gm 191 

Solution      191 

Tablets,    0.5    Gm 191 

Urotropin     237 

Tablets,    5   grains   (0.3   Gm.);   7]/.    grains    (0.5   Gm.) 237 

Useless  Articles,   Unscientific  and. — Rule    10 11 

Articles   (Comments),  Rule   10. — Unscientific  and 23 

Use    of    Articles    for    Advertising 18 

U.  S.  P.  AND  N.  F.  Products,  Modifications  of 14 

Vaccine,   Acne   Ba'cillus    407 

Acne    Bacillus    (Cutter)     407 

Acne    (Lederle)     408 

Acne    (Squibb)     408 


536  GENERAL     INDEX 

Vaccine    (Continued) 

Brucella    Melitensis     408 

Brucella    Melitensis-Lederle    408 

Cholera     409 

Cholera     (Prophylactic)     (Lederle) 409 

Cholera,    Prophylactic    (Lilly)     409 

Cholera   Serobacterin-Mulford,    Sensitized    Cholera 417 

Combined    Immunizing,    Typhoid    (Squibb) 416 

(Combined)    Staphylococcus   (P.   D.   &   Co.) 411 

Combined,  Typhoid  Paratyphoid   (U.  S.  S.  P.   Co.) 416 

(Cumming)    Rabies    (P.    D.    &   Co.) 388 

Furnculosis    (P.    D.    &   Co.) 411 

(Ghcerinated),    Smallpox    (Variola)    (Squibb) 485 

Made  From  The   Typhoid   Bacillus,    Bacterial 412 

Made   From   The   Typhoid   Bacillus  and  the   Paratyphoid,   "A"   and 

"B"    Bacterial     413 

Pasteur,    Anti-Rabic    (Gilliland) 386 

Plague    Bacillus    409 

Plague    (Prophylactic)     (Lederle)     409 

Plague   Prophylactic    (Lilly)    409 

Polyvalent,   Acne   Serobacterin-Mulford    (Sensitized   Acne) 417 

Rabies     386 

Rabies-GiUiland    (Sample   Method)    386 

Rabies    (Harris)     387 

Rabies    (Harris)    Lilly    387 

Rabies    (Hixson)    387 

Rabies   (Human),    (Chloroform  Killed) -N.   D.   Co 388 

Rabies   (Human),  Phenol  Killed,    (Jensen  Salsbery  Labs.) 387 

Rabies-Lederle    (Semple    Method)     387 

Rabies,   (Killed  Virus),   (Med.  Arts  Lab.) 388 

Rabies,    (Killed  Virus)    Semple    (U.    S.   S.   P.   Co.) 389 

Rabies,    (Killed  Virus)    Squibb    (Semple   Method) 388 

Rabies,    (Phenolized) ,    (Terrell's   Labs.) 389 

Rabies,    (Phenol    Killed) -Mulford    388 

Rabies    (Semple)     (Cutter    Labs.) 386 

Sensitized    Staphylococcic    (Staphylc-Serobacterin)     417 

Sensitized    Triple    (Typho-Serobacterin-Mulford    Mixed) 418 

Sensitized  Typhoid    (Tvpho-Serobacterin-Mulford)    417 

Smallpox    (Cutter)    483 

Smallpox    (Gilliland)     483 

Smallpox   (Lederle)    (Preserved  with  Brilliant   Green) 484 

Smallpox  (Vaccine   Virus)   Vaccine-N.   O.   Co 484 

(Smallpox  Vaccine)   Virus  (S.   &  D.) 485 

Smallpox  (Vaccine  Virus)   U.  S.  S.  P.   Co 485 

Staphylococcus     410 

Staphylococcus    (Albus  and   Aureus)    (Gilliland) 410 

Staphylococcus   Aureus    (Lilly)     411 

Staphylococcus    Aureus,    Polyvalent    (Lederle) 411 

Staphylococcus    (Cutter)     410 

Staphylococcus    (Lederle)     411 

Staphylococcus     (Lilly)      411 

Staphylococcus    (N.    D.    Co.) 411 

Staphylococcus     (Squibb)     411 

Typhoid   Combined    (Prophylactic)     (Lederle) 415 

Typhoid    (Gilliland)     412 

Typhoid    (Immunizing)    (Squibb)    413 

Typhoid    (Merrell)     413 

Typhoid    Mixed,    Prophylactic    (Lilly) 415 

Typhoid    (N.    D.    Co.) 413 

Typhoid-Paratyphoid   Immunizing,   Bacterial    (Gilliland) 414 

Typhoid    (Prophylactic)    (Lederle)    412 

Typhoid,    Prophylactic    (Lilly)     412 

Typhoid   (Prophylactic)    (P.  D.   &  Co.) 413 

Typhoid   (U.    S.   S.   P.   Co.) 413 

Undulant    Fever    Bacterial    (Jensen-Salsbery) 408 


GENERAL     INDEX  537 


Undulant    Fever    (N.    D.    Co.) 409 

Vims  (Glycerinated)   (P.  D.   &   Co.) 484 

Vaccines    and    Serums    362 

Bacterial     407 

Mixed     Bacterial     416 

Vaginal    Suppositories    Silvol,    5    Per   Cent 427 

Vehicles  and  Preservatives    15 

Ventriculin     316 

100  Gm.;   500  Gm.  Bottle 316 

10    Gm.    Vials    316 

Veronal     103 

Elixir    of    103 

Elixir    of    (Winthrop)     103 

-Sodium      120 

-Sodium   Tablets,    5    grains 120 

Tablets.    5    grains    103 

Vials   Carbarsone,   2   Gm.    (31    grains) 94 

Concentrated   Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral-Lederle,   1   cc 318 

Lederle  Solution  Liver  Parenteral  Refined  and  Concentrated,   3  cc.  318 

Liver   Extract-Parke,   Davis   &   Co 315 

Vichy,    Citratcd,    Wagner's  Artificial 485 

Wagner's    Artificial     485 

Vioform-Ciba     249 

Viosterol,  Abbott's  A-B-D   Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and 459 

in   Halibut   Liver   Oil    (In    Capsules),    Mead's 470 

in   Halibut   Liver   Oil,    Mead's 470 

in    Oil     473 

in   Oil-Abbott    473 

in   Oil,   Mead's    473 

in    Oil-Merrell,    Sperti    Process 474 

in  Oil.   Parke,   Davis  &   Co.'s 474 

in   Oil-Squibb    474 

in    Oil,    Winthrop    474 

with  Abbott's   Cod   Liver   Oil 463 

with    Abbott's    Haliver    Oil 470 

with    Cod    Liver    Oil 462 

with   Halibut   Liver   Oil 469 

with    Halibut    Liver    Oil-Squibb 470 

with   Mead's   Cod   Liver  Oil 463 

with    Mint-Flavored.    Squibb    Cod    Liver    Oil 463 

with  Parke,   Davis   &  Company's  Cod  Liver  Oil 463 

with    Haliver    Oil-Parke-Davis    . 370 

with   Soluble  Gelatin   Capsules  Abbott's  Haliver  Oil,   3   minims....  470 

with   Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules,   Haliver   Oil    (P.  D.  &  Co.) 470 

with   Squibb  Cod   Liver   Oil 463 

Virus,    Vaccine  (Glycerinated )-P.   D.   &   Co 484 

Viruses,    Attenuated    Living    386 

Vitamin    A    448 

B      449 

C      451 

D      452 

D   Concentrate  and  Carotene  in   Oil,    Smaco 455 

D  Concentrate  and   Carotene  in  Cod  Liver   Oil,   Smaco 456 

D    Concentrate    in    Neutral    Oil    Capsules,    3    minims.,    McKesson's 

Halibut  Liver   Oil 469 

D   Concentrate   in   Neutral   Oil,   3   minims.   Capsules   with   I.    V.    C. 

Halibut   Liver   Oil    471 

D  Concentrate  in  Neutral  Oil  with  I.  V.  C.   Halibut  Liver  Oil.  ..  .  471 
D    Concentrate    in    Neutral    Oil,    6    cc,    with    McKesson's    Halibut 

Liver    Oil     471 

D   Concentrate   in   Oil,   Smaco 465 

Vitamins    And    Vitamin    Preparations    For    Prophylactic    And    Thera- 
peutic   Use     446 

Von  Pirquet   Cutaneous   Diagnostic  Test,   Tuberculin   Solution    (Gilli- 

land)     393 

Pirquet  Test  for  Tuberculosis   (N.   D.   Co.) 394 


538  GENERAL     INDEX 

Wagner's   Artificial    Vichy    485 

Artificial    Vichy    Citrated     485 

Walco    Ethylene    for   Anesthesia 51 

Waters,    Mineral     22 

Water-Soluble   Iodine   Compounds   for   Intravenous   Pyelography 261 

White    Mineral    Oil 279 

White's  Cod   Liver   Oil   Concentrate   Capsules,    3   minims 466 

Cod    Liver    Oil    Concentrate    (Liquid) 465 

Cod   Liver   Oil   Concentrate  Liquid,    Vials,    50   cc 466 

Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials,   5  cc 467 

Cod  Liver   Oil   Concentrate,  Tablets 467 

Winthrop    Tablets    of   Salophen,    5   grains 341 

Viosterol    in    Oil    474 

Wyeth's    Capsules    Digitalis    Leaf    Defatted 180 

Xanthine    Derivatives     475 

Xeroform      134 

-S.    and    G 135 

Yellow    Mercuric    Oxide    300 

oxide  and  Adrenalin   Ointment,   M.   E.   S.   Co.,   Compound 301 

Precipitate      300 

Zinc    Compounds    481 

Ointment-Lenigallol      279 

Permanganate-Merck     482 

Permanganate,    1    grain,    Mulford 481 

Permanganate    481 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 


Note. — Names    of    products    "Accepted    but    not    described" 
appear  in  italics. 

Abbott  Laboratories,  North  Chicago,  Illinois. — Abbott's  A-B-D  Malt 
Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Viosterol,  459;  Abbott's  Cod  Liver 
Oil,  460;  Abbott's  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  463;  Abbott's  Haliver 
Oil,  Plain,  468;  Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  Plain  Capsules,  3  minims,  468; 
Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  470;  Acetarsone-Abbott,  93; 
Acriflavine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,  199;  Aminopyrine-Abbott,  346; 
Ampoule  Bismuth  Subsalicylate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  1  cc,  133; 
Ampoules  Dextrose  50%,  20  cc,  50%,  50  cc,  155;  Ampoules  Ephe- 
drine  Hydrochloride  Abbott,  0.05  Cm..  1  cc.  219;  Ampoules  Pheno- 
barbital  Sodium  (Powder)-Abbott  0.13  Gm.,  (2  grains),  116; 
Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Solution  10%,  2  cc,  69;  Ampoules 
Procaine  Hydrochloride  Solution  2%',  5  cc,  69;  Ampules  Campiodol 
Emulsion,  20  cc,  255;  Ampules  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Abbott 
0.01  Gm..  0.05  Gm..  0.1  Gm.,  0.25  Gm.,  239;  Ampules  Potassium 
Bismuth  Tartrate  (Aqueous) -D.  R.  L.,  2  cc,  138;  Ampules  Potas- 
sium Bismuth  Tartrate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  0.1  Gm.,  0.2  Gm.,  138; 
Anesthesin-Abbott,  11;  Arbutin-Abbott,  11;  Aromatic  Chlorazene  Pow- 
der, 246;  Argvn.  426;  Argvn  Tablets,  6  grains,  426;  Arsphenamine- 
D.  R.  L.,  81;  Barbital-Abbott,  103;  Barbital  Sodium-Abbott,  120; 
Bismarsen.  82;  Bismo-Cymol.  130;  Bismo-Cymol  Ampoules,  1  cc, 
2  cc,  130;  Bismuth  Subsalicylate  with  Butyn-D.  R.  L.,  60  cc. 
Bottle,  133;  Butesin,  1Z;  Butesin  Picrate,  73;  Butesin  Picrate  Oint- 
ment with  Metaphen,  74;  Butyn.  56;  Butyn  and  Ephedrine  Hypo- 
dermic Tablets,  58;  Butyn  Solution,  2  per  cent,  57;  Butyn  Tablets, 
0.2  Gm.  (3  grains),  57;  Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Abbott, 
Yz  grain,  0.0324  Gm.  (i^  grain),  219;  Capsules  Ephedrine  Sulfate- 
Abbott,  Yz  grain,  ^4  grain.  Yx  grain,  220;  Chlorazene,  246;  Chlora- 
zene Surgical  Cream.  246;  Chlorazene  Tablets,  4.6  grains,  246; 
Chlarcosane-Abbott,  483;  Chloriodized  Rapeseed  Oil.  255;  Cincho- 
phen-Abbott,  168;  Concentrated  Pollen  Extracts-Abbott,  35;  Dex- 
trose-Ringer's Stock  Solution  Five  Times  Concentrated-Abbott,  155; 
Dichloramine-T  (Abbott).  247;  Digipoten,  192;  Digipoten  Tablets, 
192;  Enteric  Coated  Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott,  0.03  Gm. 
HYz  grain),  200;  Ephedrine-Abbott,  216;  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride- 
Abbott,  219;  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride  Solution-Abbott,  3%,  219; 
Ephedrine  Inhalant-Abbott,  216;  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott,  220; 
Furunculosis  Bacterin-Abbott  (Mixed).  410;  Gold  Sodium  Thiosul- 
fate-Abbott, 239;  Halazone- Abbott,  247;  lodeikon  Capsules-Abbott, 
210;  Metaphen.  295;  Metaphen  Solution,  1:500.  1:2,500,  295;  Neo- 
Arsphenamine-D.  R.  L.,  86;  Neocinchophen-Abbott,  168;  Neocin- 
chophen-Abbott  Tablets,  5  grains,  7^4  grains.  168;  Neonal,  107; 
Neonal  Tablets,  0.1  Gm.,  107;  Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott,  200;  Neu- 
tral Acriflavine-Abbott  for  Intravenous  Injection,  0.1  Gm.  Ampules, 
200;  Neutral  Acriflavine  Jelly,  1:1,000  Abbott,  200;  Opthalmic 
Ointment  Butesin  Picrate,  1%  and  Butesin,  1%,  74;  Parresine,  336; 
Phenobarbital,  114;  Phenobarbital  Sodium-Abbott,  116;  Phenobar- 
bital  Tablets,  ^,  Y2,  W2  grains,  115;  Pituitary  Solution,  335;  Pollen 
Extracts-Abbott,  45;  Pollen  Extracts  Diagnostic-Abbott,  483;  Potas- 
sium Bismuth  Tartrate-D.  R.  L.,  138;  Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate 
(Aqueous) -D.  R.  L.,  2.5  per  cent,  138;  Potassium  Bismuth  Tartrate 
with  Bucytin-D.  R.  L.,  10  per  cent,  138;  Procaine-Abbott,  69;  Procaine- 
Epinephrine  Ampules,  1  cc,  69;  Procaine-Epinephrine  Hypodermic 
Tablets  (procaine  Yi  grain,  epinephrine  1/2500  grain;  _  procaine _  % 
grain,  epinephrine  Visno  grain),  70;  Procaine-Epinephrine  Solution, 
100  cc.  Bottle,  69;  Procaine  Hydrochloride-Abbott  Tablets.  1.14 
grains  (0.07  Gm.),  2.28  grains  (0.15  Gm.),  70;  Procaine  Hydro- 
chloride Hypodermic  Tablets,  Yi  grain,  70;  Procaine  Hydrochloride 
Hypodermic  Tablets,  3  grains,  70;  Procaine  Hypodermic  Tablets, 
->4     grain,     70;     Proflavine- Abbott,     201;     Soluble     Gelatin     Capsules 


540  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Abbott   Laboratories    (Continued) 

Abbott's  Haliver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  3  minims.  470;  Solution  of 
Epinephrine  Hydrochloride,  224;  Solution  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Abbott, 
3%,  220;  Sterile  Ampules  of  Mercury  Oxycyanide,  0.008  Gm.,  0.016 
Gm.,  0.01  Gm.,  286;  Sterile  Ampoules  Mercury  Salicylate  0.065  Gm. 
(1  grain),  287;  Sterile  Ampoules  Mercury  Succinimide,  0.01  Gm. 
(%  grain),  288;  Sterile  Ampoules  Procaine  Hydrochloride  Crystals 
for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  50  mg.,  100  mg..  120  mg.,  150  mg.,  200  mg., 
70;  Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  90;  Sulpharsphenamine-Abbott,  0.1 
Gm.,  0.2  Gm.,  0.3  Gm.,  0.4  Gm.,  0.5  Gm.,  0.6  Gm..  0.8  Gm. 
Ampules,  90;  Syrup  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride- Abbott,  219;  Syrup 
Epinephrine  Hydrochloride  (Double  Strength) -Abbott,  219;  Tablets 
Acriflavine  Hydrochloride-Abbott,  0.03  Gm.,  199;  Tablets  Cinchophen- 
Abbott,  5  grains,  7^  grains,  168;  Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride- 
Abbott,  ^  grain,  ^  grain,  219;  Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-Abbott, 
0.03  Gm.  (pi  grain),  200;  Tablets  Phenobarbital  Sodium-Abbott,  0.1 
Gm.  (1^  grains),  116;  Tincture  Metaphen,  1:200,  295;  Typhoid- 
Paratyphoid  Bacterin  (Prophylactic),  414;  Viosterol  In  Oil-Abbott, 
473. 

Aces  Laboratory,  Inc.,  Peekskill,  New  York. — Mercurochrome  Supposi- 
tory Aces,   291. 

American  Antiformin  Company,  164-166  Eighth  St.,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — 
Antiformin   (a  strongly  alkaline  solution  of  sodium  hypochlorite),  485. 

American  Hospital  Supply  Corporation,  1086  Merchandise  Mart,  Chi- 
cago, III. — Dextrose  in  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in 
Vacoliter  Container.  Sterile,' 2 1-^  %,  5%,  7i^%,  10%,  156-7;  Dextrose 
Solution  in  Vacoliter  Container,  Sterile,  2^%,  5%,  7^%,  10%, 
20%,  25%,  156;  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in  Vaco- 
liter Containers,  342;  Physiological  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in 
Half-size   Vacoliter   Containers,   342. 

Arlington  Chemical  Company,  Yonkers,  N.  Y. — Arico  Proteins  (For 
Diagnosis),  483;  Pollen  Extracts-Arlco,  40;  Pollen  Extract  Diag- 
nostic-Arlco,  483. 

Armour  and  Co.,  Union  Stock  Yards,  Chicago,  Illinois. — Concentrated 
Liver  Extract-Armour,  311;  Pituitary  Liquid  (U.  S.  P.)  Armour, 
335;  Suprarenalin,  223;  Suprarenalin  Ointment,  223;  Suprarenalin 
Solution,  223;    Suprarenalin   (Vials),   223;   Trypsin-Armour,    178. 

Baxter,  Don,  Intravenous  Products  Corporation  (See  under  Ameri- 
can Hospital   Supply  Corporation). 

Belle  Alkali  Co.,  P.  O.  Box  1371,  Charleston,  W.  Va. — Dichlormethane 
Solvent,  485. 

Bernhard,  Robt.  a.,  153  Anderson  Ave..  Rochester,  N.  Y. — Saf-T-Top. 
5%  Ferric  Chloride  in  50%  Glycerine  Solution,  271;  Saf-T-Top 
Isopropyl  Alcohol,  98%,  273;  Saf-T-Top  Mercurochrome,  2  per  cent 
in  25  per  cent  Glycerine,  291;  Saf-T-Top  Mercurochrome  Solution, 
2  per  cent,  2  cc,  15  cc,  291;  Saf-T-Top  Tincture  Iodine,  S]^  per 
cent,  2  cc.  and  15  cc,  483;  Saf-T-Top  Tincture  Iodine,  U.  S.  P., 
2  cc.  and  15  cc,  483;  Saf-T-Top  Tincture  of  Merthiolate,  1:1,000, 
294;   Saf-T-Top  Tincture   Metaphen,   296. 

Bethlehem  Laboratories,  Inc.,  300  Century  Bldg.,  Bethlehem,  Pa.— 
Hyclorite,  242, 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  541 

Bilhuber-Knoll  Corporation,  154  Ogden  Ave.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. — 
Afenil,  150;  Ampules  Afenil,  150;  Ampules  Solution  Dilaudid 
Hydrochloride,  2  mg.  (1/^2  grain),  1.1  cc,  306;  Bromural,  146;  Bro- 
mural  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.),  146;  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride, 
305;  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride  Compounding  Tablets,  ^  grain,  306; 
Dilaudid  Hydrochloride  Rectal  Suppositories.  V24  grain,  306; 
Euresol,  351;  Euresol  pro  Capillis,  351;  Hypodermic  Tablets 
Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  2  mg.  (%2  grain),  3.2  mg.  (1/20  grain), 
4  mg.  (V16  grain),  306;  Hypodermic  Tablets  Metrazol,  ll4  grains, 
302;  Lenigallol,  279;  Lenigallol-Zinc  Ointment,  279;  Metrazol,  301; 
Metrazol  Ampules,  1  cc,  302;  Metrazol  Solution,  10  per  cent.  302; 
Metrazol  Tablets,  302;  Santvl,  360;  Santyl  Capsules,  6  minims, 
361;  Tablets  Dilaudid  Hydrochloride,  2.5  mg.  (I/04  grain),  306; 
Theocalcin  Tablets,  7^/2   grains,  478;   Theocalcin,  477. 

BoRCHERDT  Malt  Extract  Cc,  217-221  North  Lincoln  St.,  Chicago,  111. 
— Borcherdt's   Malt    Extract   with    Cod    Liver    Oil,    459. 

Calco  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  Bound  Brook,  N.  J. — Acriflavine  Neutral- 
Calco,  200;  Aminoacetic  Acid-Calco,  49;  Cinchophen-Calco,  168;  Cin- 
chophen-Calco  Tablets,  7^^  grains,  168;  Coated  Tablets  Urginin,  0.5 
mg.,  191;  Crystal  V'iolet  Jellv-Calco,  212;  Crystal  Violet  Medicinal- 
Calco,  212;  Methenamine-Calco.  237;  Methylene  Blue-Calco,  483; 
Mcthylthioninc  Chloridc-Calco,  483 ;  Scarlet  Red  Medicinal  Biebrich- 
Calco,  195;  Solution  Urginin,  191:  Tablets  Acriflavine  Neutral- 
Calco,  200;  Tablets  Methenamine-Calco,  5  grains,  237;  Tablets 
Urginin,  0.5  mg.,  191;  Tetrachlorethylene-Calco,  441;  Tetrachlor- 
ethylene-Calco,    1    cc,   441;   Trichlorethylene-Calco,   53;    Urginin,    190. 

Campbell  Products  Co.,  79  Madison  Ave.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — Kephrine 
Hydrochloride,  2"2i\  Kephrine  Hydrochloride  Bandage,  273;  Kephrine 
Hydrochloride  Gauze,  274;  Kephrine  Hydrochloride  Powder,  273; 
Kephrine   Hydrochloride    Rectal   Suppositories,   27Z. 

Carbide   &   Carbon    Chemicals    Corporation,    30    East    42nd    St.,    New 
York. — Triethanolamine-Carbide    and    Carbon    Chemicals    Corporation, 
231. 

Chappel  Bros.,  Inc.,  Rockford,  111. — Ampoules  Chappel  Liver  Extract 
(Subcutaneous),  2.5  cc,  317;  Chappel  Liver  Extract  (Oral),  311; 
Chappel  Liver  Extract   (Subcutaneous),   317. 

Chemisch-Pharmazeutische  a.  G.,  Bad  Homburg,  Frankfurt-a.-M., 
Germany. — Quiniobine,  138;  Quiniobine  Ampules,  2  cc,  139;  Tartro- 
Quiniobine,   144;   Tartro-Quiniobine  Ampules,  2  cc,   145. 

Cheney  Chemical  Co.,  2929  East  67th  St.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. — Ethylene- 
Cheney,    51. 

Cheplin  Biological  Laboratories,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. — Ampule  Solution 
Procaine  Hydrochloride,  2%,  1  cc,  67;  Ampule  Solution  Procaine 
Hydrochloride,  and  Epinephrine,  3  cc,  67;  Ampules  Bismuth  Sub- 
salicylate, 2  grains  (0.13  Gm.),  in  Oil,  1  cc,  134;  Ampules  Mercury 
Salicylate,  1  grain  (0.065  Gm.),  Suspended  in  Oil,  1  cc,  287; 
Ampules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.,  20  cc ; 
25  Gm.,  50  cc;  50  Gm.,  100  cc;  25  Gm.,  50  cc. ;  50  Gm.,  100  cc, 
157;  Ampules  Solution  Mercury  Succinimide,  ]/(,  grain  (0.01  Gm.), 
1  cc,  288;  Cheplin's  B.  Acidophilus  Milk,  277;  Cheplin's  Epinephrine 
Hydrochloride  Solution,  224;  Cheplin's  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride 
Solution,  Ampules,  1  cc,  224;  Cheplin's  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.05 
Gm.  (54  grain),  1  cc,  94;  Cheplin's  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.1  Gin. 
HYz  grains);  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains);  0.3  Gm.  (5  grains);  0.5  Gm. 
(TYi  grains);  1.0  Gm.,  1  cc,  95;  Cheplin's  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.1 
Gm.    (15}^   grains),  2  cc,  95;    Sodium   Cacodylate,   94. 


542  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Child  Welfare  Guild,  Inc.,  386  Fourth  Ave.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — 
Bite-X,    485. 

CiBA  Company,  Inc.,  627-633  Greenwich  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — 
Ampules  Buffered  Solution  of  Nupercaine-Ciba.  2  cc,  1:200,  64; 
Ampules  Solution  of  Nupercaine-Ciba,  5  cc;  25  cc. ;  1:1,000,  64; 
Dial-Ciba,  103;  Digifoline-Ciba,  181;  Isarol-Ciba,  436;  Lipoiodine- 
Ciba,  258;  Lipoiodine-Ciba  Diagnostic  10  cc.  Bottle,  258;  Nupercaine- 
Ciba.  63;  Solution  of  Nupercaine-Ciba,  2%,  64;  Tablets  Dial-Ciba, 
0.1  Gm.  (1^  grains),  104;  Tablets  Lipoiodine-Ciba,  0.3  Gm. 
(Uncoated),  258;  Tablets  Nupercaine-Ciba,  50  mg.,  64;  Vioform- 
Ciba,  249. 

Clinadol  Co.,  Inc.,  64  West  14th  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y.— Clinadol 
Co.'s  Cod  Liver    Oil  Concentrate,  464. 

Coleman  &  Bell  Company,  Norwood,  Ohio. — Gentian  Violet  Improved 
Medicinal,   213. 

CoNNAUGHT  LABORATORIES,  University  of  Toronto,  Toronto  5,  Canada. — 
Insulin-Toronto,  328;  Insulin-Toronto,  10  Units,  10  cc. ;  20  Units, 
10  cc;    40   Units,    10   cc. ;    80   Units,    10   cc;    100   Units,    10   cc,   328. 

Cutter  Laboratory,  4th  and  Parker  Sts.,  Berkeley,  Calif. — Acne  Bacillus 
Vaccine,  407;  Ampoules  Solution  Silver  Nitrate,  1  Per  Cent- 
Cutter,  431;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin  Concentrated,  483;  Diphtheria 
Toxoid-Cutter,  398;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined, 
401;  Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test,  418;  Diphtheria  Toxin 
for  the  Schick  Test,  Diluted  Ready  for  Use,  418;  Physiological  Solu- 
tion of  Sodium  Chloride  in  Saftiflask  Containers,  342;  Pollen  Ex- 
tracts-Cutter, 41;  Pollen  Extracts  Concentrated-Cutter,  42;  Poly- 
anaerobic  Antitoxin,  Prophylactic  (Tetanus-Gas  Gangrene  Anti- 
toxin), 367;  Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin  Therapeutic  (Gas  Gangrene 
Antitoxin,  367;  Rabies  Vaccine  (Semple),  386;  Smallpox  Vaccine, 
483;  Solution  Dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  25  Gm.,  SO  cc ;  50  Gm.,  100  cc ; 
in  Bottles,  157;  Solution  Dextrose-U.  S.  P.,  5%;  10%;  in  Saftiflask 
Containers,  157;  Solution  Dextrose-LT.  S.  P.,  21/2%;  5%;  10%; 
in  Phvsiologic  Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride  in  Saftiflask  Containers, 
157;  Solution  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.,  20%;  25%;  in  Fractionally  Dis- 
tilled Water  in  Saftiflask  Container,  157;  Staphylococcus  Vaccine, 
410;  Tetanus  Antitoxin  Concentrated,  483;  Tuberculin  for  the 
Cutaneous  Reaction  (Pirquet's  Reaction),  393;  Tuberculin  Old 
(Tuberculin  O.  T.),  393;  Typhoid  Prophylactic,  412;  Typhoid- 
Paratyphoid   Prophylactic,    414. 

Davies,  Rose  &  Co.,  Ltd.,  22  Thayer  St.,  Boston,  Mass. — Quinidine  Sul- 
phate (Davies  &  Rose),  350;  Phil.  DigitaHs  (Davies  &  Rose),  180; 
Tablets   Quinidine   Sulphate,   3   Gm.,   Davies  &  Rose,    350. 

Davis  &  Geck.  Inc.,  217  Dufifield  St.,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y.—Kalmerid 
Germicidal  Tablets  Potassium  Mercuric  Iodide,  297. 

Diarsenol  Co.,  Inc.,  72  Kingsley  St.,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. — Diarsenol,  82; 
Diarsenol,  0.1  Gm.;  0.2  Gm.;  0.3  Gm.;  0.4  Gm.;  0.5  Gm.;  0.6  Gm.; 
1.0  Gm. ;  2.0  Gm.;  3.0  Gm.  Ampules,  82;  Neodiarsenol,  87;  Neo- 
diarsenol,  1.5  Gm. ;  1.8  Gm. ;  3  Gm.;  4.5  Gm.  Ampoules,  87;  Neo- 
diarsenol, 0.15  Gm.;  0.3  Gm. ;  0.45  Gm.;  0.6  Gm. ;  0.75  Gm.;  0.9 
Gm.   Ampoules,  87. 

DuBiN,  H.  E.,  Laboratories,  Inc.,  250  East  43rd  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y.— 
Ampules  Solution  Dubin-Aminophyllin,  0.24  Gm.,  10  cc. ;  0.48  Gm., 
2  cc,  479;  Dubin-Aminophyllin,  479;  Suppositories  Dubin-Amino- 
phyllin,   0.36   Gm.,    479;    Tablets   Dubin-Aminophyllin,    0.1    Gm.,    479. 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  543 

Eastman  Kodak  Co.,  343  State  St.,  Medical  Dept.,  Rochester,  N.  Y. — ■ 
Resorcinol  Monoacetate-Eastinan  Kodak  Co.,  351;  Tetraiodophenol- 
phthalein   Sodium  Salt-Eastman,  210. 

Fairchild  Bros.,  &  Foster,  Washington  &  Laight  Sts.,  New  York,  N.  Y. 
—Bile  Salts-Fairchild,    124;   Enzymol,    177;   Trypsin-Fairchild,   178. 

Fougera,  E.  and  Co.,  Inc.,  75  Varick  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — Ampoules 
Lipiodol-Lafay,  1  cc;  2  cc;  3  cc;  5  cc,  257;  Capsules  Lipiodol- 
Lafay,  0.5  Gm.,  257;  Lipiodol-Lafay,  256;  Lipiodol  Radiologique 
Ascendant.  257;  Lipiodol  Radiologique  Descendant,  257;  Tablets 
Lipiodol   Calcium-Lafay,   257. 

Gallia  Laboratories,  Inc.,  254-256  West  31st  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y. 
— Arheol  (Astier),  360;  Arheol  (Astier)  Pearls,  360;  Riodine 
(Astier),   259;   Riodine  Pearls,    0.2   Gm.    (3.1   grains),   259. 

Gane  &  Ingram,  Inc.,  43  West  16th  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y.— Ephedrine 
Hydrochloride-Gane  and  Ingram,  219;  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Gane  and 
Ingram,  220;  Phenobarbital  U.  S.  P.  (Gane  &  Ingram),  115;  Pheno- 
barbital  Sodium-Gane  &  Ingram,  116;  Tablets  Phenobarbital  Sodium- 
Gane  and  Ingram,   1 J^   grains,   116. 

GiLLiLAND  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Marietta,  Pa. — Antimeningococcic  Serum, 
380;  Antipneumococcic  Serum  Type  I,  381;  Diphtheria  Schick  Test 
Toxin,  Diluted  Ready  for  Administration-Gilliland,  419;  Diphtheria 
Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  0.1  L-f ,  390;  Diphtheria  Toxoid-Gilliland, 
398;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined),  402;  Gilli- 
land's  Concentrated  and  Refined  Diphtheria  Antitoxin,  483;  Gilli- 
land's  Concentrated  and  Refined  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  483;  Intra- 
cutaneous Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test,  393;  Normal  Horse 
Serum,  365;  Original  Tuberculin.  "O.  T.,"  393;  Pasteur  Anti-Rabic 
Vaccine,  386;  Rabies  Vaccine-Gilliland  (Semple  Method),  386;  Scar- 
let Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  (Refined  and  Concentrated),  376; 
Smallpox  Vaccine,  483;  Staphylococcus  Vaccine  (Albus  and  Aureus), 
410;  Tuberculin  "O.  T."  (Old  Tuberculin),  393;  Tuberculin  Oint- 
ment in  Capsules  (for  the  Moro  Percutaneous  Diagnostic  Test),  393; 
Tuberculin  Solution  for  the  Von  Pirquet  Cutaneous  Diagnostic 
Test,  393;  Tvphoid-Paratyphoid  Bacterial  Vaccine  Immunizing, 
414;   Typhoid  Vaccine,  412. 

Harris  Laboratory,  D.  L.,  Metropolitan  Bldg.,  St.  Louis,  Mo. — Rabies 
Vaccine   (Harris),   387. 

Hart,  E.  J.   &  Co.,  Ltd.,  New  Orleans,  La. — Lac  Bismo,   135. 

Heilkraft  Medical  Co.,  331  Talbot  Ave.,  Boston,  Mass. — Dimazon,  196; 
Dimazon  Oil,  196;  Dimazon  Ointment,  196;  Dimazon  Powder,  196; 
Scarlet  Red  Medicinal-Kalle,  195;  Scarlet  Red  Salve,  195. 

Heyden  Chemical  Corporation,  SO  Union  Square,  New  York,  N.  Y. — ■ 
Acetylsalicylic  Acid-Heyden,   356;    Ichthynat,   434. 

HiLLE  Laboratories,  1791  Howard  St.,  Chicago,  Illinois. — Lunosol,  428; 
Solution   Colloidal  Mercury   Sulphide-Hille,  299. 

Hixson  Laboratories,  22  W.  Gay  St.,  Columbus,  Ohio. — Diphtheria 
Antitoxin,  483;  Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  0.1  L4-,  390; 
Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  0.1  L-f  (Sheep),  390;  Diph- 
theria Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test  (Diluted),  419;  Diphtheria  Toxoid, 
399;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined),  402;  Rabies 
Vaccine    (Hixson),  387;    Tetanus  Antitoxin,   483. 


544  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.,  Nutley,  N.  J. — Alurate,  101;  Alurate  Tablets, 
1  gr.,  101;  Ampules  Scopolamine  Stable-Roche,  i/^oo  grain,  1  cc; 
Moo  grain.  1  cc,  361;  Ampuls  Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche,  1.1  cc, 
443;  Betaine  Hydrochloride-Roche,  242;  Capsules  Sodium  Alurate, 
3^  grains,  117;  Chocolate  Tablets  lodostarine-Roche,  256;  Digalen- 
Roche  (Cloetta),  181;  Homatropine  Hydrochloride-Roche,  99;  lodo- 
starine-Roche,  256;  Isacen,  271;  Isacen  Tablets,  0.005  Gm.  (I/12 
grain),  272;  Larocaine  Hydrochloride,  60;  Oleo-Bi-Roche,  137; 
Papaverine  Hydrochloride-Roche,  308;  Scopolamine  Stable-Roche, 
361;  Sodium  Alurate,  117;  Solution  Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche,  443; 
Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche,  443;  Syrup  Thiocol-Roche,  173;  Tablets 
Digalen-Roche,  Yz  cat;  1  cat  unit,  181;  Tablets  lodostarine-Roche, 
0.25  Gm.,  256;  Tablets  Synthetic  Thyroxine-Roche,  1  mg.,  443; 
Theobromine  and  Sodium  Acetate-Roche,  477;  Thigenol-Roche,  437; 
Thiocol-Rcche,   173;  Thiocol-Roche   Tablets,  5   grains,   173. 

Hollister-Stier  Laboratories,  476-481  Paulsen  Medical  &  Dental  Bldg., 
Spokane,  Wash. — Pollen  Extracts-HoUister-Stier,  43;  Protein 
Extracts  Diagnostic-Hollister-Stier,    483. 

Hospital  Liquids,  Inc.,  843  W.  Adams  St.,  Chicago,  111. — Dextrose, 
5%;  10%;  25%;  in  Distilled  Water  in  Filtrair  Containers,  158; 
Dextrose,  5%;  10%  in  Physiologic  Sodium  Chloride  Solution  in 
Filtrair  Container,  158;  Physiologic  Solution  of  Sodium  Chloride  in 
Filtrair  Dispenser,  342;  Ringer's  Solution,  342;  Ringer's  Solution  in 
Filtrair    Container,    342. 

Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning,  Inc.,  Baltimore,  Md. — Ampules  Phenol- 
tetrachlorphthalein.  H.  W.  &  D.,  207;  Ampules  Solution  Antimony 
Sodium  Thioglycollate,  0.5  per  cent,  10  cc;  20  cc,  76;  Ampules 
Solution  Antimony  Thioglycollamide,  0.4  per  cent,  10  cc;  20  cc, 
75;  Antimony  Sodium  Thioglycollate,  75;  Antimony  Thioglycolla- 
mide, 75;  Bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.,  204;  Enteric  Coated  Glyco- 
tauro-H.  W.  D.  Tablets,  125;  Glycotauro-H.  W.  &  D.,  125;  Glyco- 
tauro-H.  W.  &  D.,  5  grains,  125;  Glycotauro-H.  W.  &  D.  Capsules 
(half  size),  125;  Mercurochrome,  289;  Mercurochrome,  2  Per  Cent 
Aqueous  Solution,  290;  Meroxyl,  292;  Meroxyl  Tablets-H.  W  &  D., 
292;  Ouabian  Ampules-H.  W.  &  D.,  186;  Phenolsulfonphthalein- 
H.  W.  &  D.,  206;  Phenolsulfonphthalein  Ampules-H.  W.  &  D.,  206; 
Phenoltetrachlorphthalein-H.  W.  &  D.,  206;  Sealed  Tubes  Mercuro- 
chrome, 0.5  Gm.,  290;  Solution  Bromsulphalein-H.  W.  &  D.,  204; 
Sterile  Ampules  of  Mercury  Salicylate-H.  W.  &  D.,  1  grain;  1 J/^ 
grains;  2  grains,  287-8;  Surgical  Solution  of  Mercurochrome,  290; 
Tablets   of   Mercurochrome,   290. 

International  Vitamin  Corp.,  50  E.  42nd  Street,  New  York,  N.  Y.— 
Capsules,  I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  Plain,  3  minims.,  468;  Capsules 
I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral 
Oil,  3  minims,  471;  I.  V.  C.  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  Plain,  468;  I.  V.  C. 
Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral   Oil,  471. 

Jensen-Salsbery  Laboratories,  Inc.,  21st  &  Penn  Sts.,  Kansas  City, 
Mo.- — Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined),  402;  Rabies 
Vaccine  (Human),  Phenol  Killed,  387;  Undulant  Fever  Bacterial 
Vaccine,   408. 

Johnson    &    Johnson,    New    Brunswick,    N.    J. — K-Y    Lubricating    Jelly, 

485. 

Lakeside  Laboratories,  Inc.,  2344  N.  Oakland  Ave.,  Milwaukee,  Wis. — 
Ampoules  Dextrose  (d-Glucose)  10  Gm.,  20  cc. ;  25  Gm.,  50  cc; 
50  Gm.,  100  cc,  158;  Ampoule  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.243  Gm. 
(3^4^  grains),  5  cc,  95;  Ampoule  Solution  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.19 
Gm.    (3   grains),    1    cc,   95. 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  545 

Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Pearl  River,  N.  Y. — Acne  Vaccine,  408; 
Allergenic  Extracts-Lederle,  28;  Ampule  Solution  Silver  Nitrate, 
1  Per  Cent-Lederle,  431;  Antianthrax  Serum,  378;  Antipneumococcic 
Serum,  Refined  and  Concentrated,  Type  II,  383;  Antidysenteric 
Serum  (Polyvalent),  379;  Antimeningococcic  Serum,  380;  Bivalent 
Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Refined  and  Concentrated,  383;  Brucella 
Melitensis  Vaccine-Lederle,  408;  Cholera  Vaccine  (Prophylactic), 
409;  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid  (Lederle),  464;  Cod  Liver 
Oil  Concentrate  Liquid  (Lederle)  Capsules,  3  minims.  464;  Cod 
Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid  (Lederle),  Vials,  5  cc,  464;  Concen- 
trated Pollen  Antigens-Lederle,  35;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin,  Globulin- 
Lederle-Modified,  373;  Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  (0.1  L-f), 
390;  Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test  in  Peptone  Solution,  419; 
Diphtheria  Toxoid,  399;  Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin, 
Globulin-Lederle-AIodified,  374;  Ferric  Ammonium  Citrate-Lederle, 
Capsules,  0.5  Cm.,  484;  Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Polyvalent)  w^ith- 
out  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  368;  Glycerinatcd  Allergenic  Extracts-Lederle , 
484;  Intracutaneous  Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test,  393;  Liver 
Extract-Lederle,  313;  Neocinchophen-Lederle.  169;  Normal  Horse 
Serum,    365;    Normal    Horse    Serum    (1:  10    Dilution)    for    the    Con- 

i'unctival  Test,  365;  One  Cc.  Concentrated  Solution  Liver  Extract 
'arenteral-Lederle,  317;  Plague  Vaccine  (Prophylactic),  409;  Poison 
Ivy  Extract-Lederle  (In  Almond  Oil),  352;  Poison  Ivy  Extract- 
Lederle  (in  Almond  Oil),  1  cc.  353;  Poison  Oak  Extract-Lederle  (in 
Almond  Oil).  352;  Poison  Oak  Extract-Lederle  (in  Almond  Oil). 
1  cc,  353;  Pollen  Antigens-Lederle,  27 \  Pollen  Antigens  Diagnostic- 
Lederle,  484;  Rabies  Vaccine-Lederle  (Semple  Method),  387;  Refined 
Alum  Precipitated  Tetanus  Toxoid-Lederle,  407;  Refined  and  Con- 
centrated Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I-Lederle,  381;  Refined 
Diphtheria  Toxoid  (Alum  Precipitated) -Lederle,  403;  Scarlet  Fever 
Streptococcus  Antitoxin-Globulin-Lederle-Modified,  376;  Scarlet 
Fever  Streptococcus  Immunizing  Toxin,  397;  Scarlet  Fever  Strepto- 
coccus Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test,  421;  Schick  Test,  419;  Smallpox 
Vaccine  (Vaccine  Virus),  484;  Smallpox  Vaccine  (Lederle)  (Pre- 
served zvith  Brilliant  Green),  484;  Solution  Epinephrine  Hydro- 
chloride-Lederle,  224;  Solution  Epinephrine  Hydrochloride-Lederle 
(Sterilized),  224;  Solution  Liver  Extract  (Lederle)  For  Oral  Use, 
312;  Staphylococcus  Aureus  Vaccine,  Polyvalent,  411;  Staphylo- 
coccus Toxoid-Lederle,  406;  Staphylococcus  Vaccine,  411;  Tablets 
Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate-Lederle,  466;  Tablets  Digitalis  Whole 
Leaf-Lederle,  V^;  ll^;  3  grains.  180;  Tablets  Neocinchophen-Lederle, 
5  grains,  169;  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  Globulin-Lederle-Modified,  378; 
Tetanus  Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  "Globulin-Lederle-Modified,"  367; 
Three  Cc.  Concentrated  Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral-Lederle, 
318;  Thromboplastin  Local-Lederle,  235;  Thromboplastin  Local- 
Lederle,  20  cc.  Vials,  235;  Tuberculin  "B.  E."  (Bacillus  Emulsion), 
395;  Tuberculin  "Old"  (Koch's  Old  Tuberculin),  393;  Tuberculin 
Pirquet  Test  ("O.  T."),  393;  Typhoid  Combined  Vaccine  (Prophy- 
lactic), 415;  Typhoid  Vaccine  (Prophylactic),  412;  Thyroid  Desic- 
cated-Lederle,  484;  Vials  Concentrated  Solution  Liver  Extract  Par- 
enteral-Lederle, 318;  Vials  Lederle  Solution  Liver  Extract  Parenteral 
Refined  and  Concentrated,   3  cc,  318. 

Lee  Laboratories,  Columbus,  Ohio. — Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Pre 
cipitated.    Refined,    403. 

Lilly,  Eli.  &  Co.,  Indianapolis,  Ind. — Ampoule  Sodium  Amytal,  0.067 
Gm.  (1  grain);  0.125  Gm.  (1^  grains);  0.25  Gm.  (3^  grains); 
0.5  Gm.  (7^  grains);  1.0  Gm.  (15  grains),  119;  Ampoules  Ephedrine 
Sulfate-Lilly,  1  cc,  0.05  Gm.,  220;  Ampoules  Metvcaine,  1%,  1  cc, 
62;  Ampoules  Metycaine.  2%  and  Epinephrine  (1:25,000),  1  cc,  62; 
Ampoules  Metycaine,  2%  and  Epinephrine  (1:50,000),  2.5  cc,  62; 
Ampoules  Pentobarbital  Sodium-Lilly,  0.5  Gm.  (7^^^  grains),  112; 
Ampoules  Ouabain  0.0005  Gm.  (I/128  grain) -Lilly,  186;  Ampoules  Solu- 
tion Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly,  10  Gm.,  Buffered,  20  cc;  25  Gm., 
50  cc,  158;  Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose)  Lilly,  25  Gm., 
50  cc;  50  Gm.,  100  cc,  158;  Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose  (d-glucose) 
Lilly,   Unbuffered,   25   Gm.,   50   cc;    50   Gm.,    100   cc,   158;   Ampoules 


546  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Lilly,  Eli   &  Co.   (Continued) 

Solution  Liver  Extract  Concentrated-Lilly,  10  cc,  320;  Ampoules  Solu- 
tion Liver  Extract-Lilly,  10  cc,  320;  Amytal,  102;  Antimeningococcic 
Serum  Concentrated,  Lilly,  380;  Carbarsone,  93;  Cholera  Vaccine, 
Prophylactic.  409;  Coco-Quinine,  350;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin-Lilly 
(Purified,  Concentrated),  "484;  Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test, 
Diluted  Ready  for  Use-Lilly,  149;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  399;  Diphtheria 
Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined) -Lilly,  403;  Elixir  Ephedrine 
Sulfate,  2  grains,  220;  Ephedrine-Lilly,  216;  Ephedrine  Hydro- 
chloride-Lilly,  219;  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly,  220;  Erysipelas  Anti- 
streptococcic Serum-Lilly,  385;  Extralin,  315;  Gas  Gangrene  Anti- 
toxin (Combined),  369;  Hypodermic  Tablets  Ephedrine  Sulfate- 
Lilly,  0.016  Gm.  (14  grain);  0.0325  Gm.  (i^  grain),  220;  Hypoder- 
mic Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Lilly  0.016  Gm.  (^  grain); 
0.0325  Gm.  (^  grain),  219;  Hypodermic  Tablets  Strophanthin 
Vioo  grain-Lilly,  192;  Iletin  (Insulin-Lilly),  328;  Iletin  (Insulin- 
Lilly)  U-10,  5  cc;  U-20,  5  cc;  U-40,  5  cc;  U-10,  10  cc;  U-20, 
10  cc. ;  U-80,  10  cc;  U-100,  10  cc,  328-9;  Inhalant  Ephedrine  Com- 
pound-Lilly, 216;  Inhalant  Ephedrine  (Plain) -Lilly,  216;  Lilly's 
Ephedrine  Jelly,  220;  Liver  Extract-Lillv,  314;  Liver  Extract-Lilly, 
110  Gm.  Bottle.  314;  Liver  Extract-Lilly.  Vials,  314;  Lubricating 
Jellv,  485;  Merthiolate,  293;  Merthiolate  Jelly  1:1,000,  293;  Mer- 
thiolate  Ointment,  1:2,000,  293;  Merthiolate  Ophthalmic  Ointment, 
1:5,000,  293;  Merthiolate  Solution,  1:1,000,  293;  Metycaine.  61; 
Metycaine  Ophthalmic  Ointment,  4  per  cent,  62;  Normal  Horse 
Serum,  365;  Ointment  Ephedrine  Compound,  216;  Old  Tuberculin, 
Human  Strain  Concentrated,  393;  Oridine,  258;  Oridine  Tablets, 
259;  Parathyroid  Extract-Lillv,  331;  Parathyroid  Extract-Lilly,  1  cc. 
Ampuls.  331;  Parathvroid  Extract-Lilly,  5  cc.  Vial,  331;  Pentobar- 
bital-Sodium-Lillv,  112;  Pirquet  Test,  393;  Pituitary  Extract-Lilly- 
U.  S.  P..  335; 'Plague  Vaccine,  Prophylactic,  409;  Pulvules  Car- 
barsone, 0.25  Gm.  (334  grains),  94;  Pulvules  Ephedrine  Hydro- 
chloride-Lilly,  0.025  Gm.  (5^  grain);  0.05  Gm.  (54  grain),  219; 
Pulvules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly.  0.025  Gm.;  0.05  Gm.,  220;  Pul- 
vules Extralin.  0.5  Gm.,  316;  Pulvules  Pentobarbital-Sodium-Lilly, 
\y2  grains,  112;  Pulvules  Sodium  Amytal,  1;  3  grains,  119;  Rabies 
Vaccine  ( Harris) -Lillv,  387;  Smallpox  Vaccine,  484;  Sodium  Amytal, 
118;  Solution  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Lilly,  3%,  219;  Syrup 
Ephedrine  Hydrochloride,  219;  Solution  Ephedrine  Sulfate-Lilly, 
3%,  220;  Solution  of  Invert  Sugar-Lilly,  160;  Solution  of  Invert 
Sugar-Lilly,  5  Gm.  in  10  cc;  6  Gm.  in  10  cc. ;  7.5  Gm.  in  10  cc, 
160;  Solution  Liver  Extract-Lilly,  320;  Solution  Liver  Extract  Con- 
centrated-Lilly, 319;  Solution  Metycaine,  2%,  62;  Staphylococcus 
Aureus  Vaccine,  411;  Staphylococcus  Vaccine,  411;  Syrup  Ephedrine 
Sulfate  (0.22  Gm.  in  100  cc. ;  0.44  Gm.  in  100  cc),  220;  Tablets 
Amytal,  %;  J4 ;  M;  1/4  grains,  102;  Tablets  Metycaine,  0.15  Gm., 
Yi  grain.  62;  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  484;  Tincture  Merthiolate.  1:1,000. 
293;  Tuberculin  Ointment  for  the  Moro  Percutaneous  Test,  393; 
Typhoid  Mixed  Vaccine,  Prophylactic,  415;  Typhoid  Vaccine,  Prophy- 
lactic, 412;  Vials  Carbarsone,  2  Gm.   (31  grains),  94. 

LiVERMEAL    Corp.,    1006    Clinton    St.,    Hoboken,    N.   J. — Liver    Meal,    315. 

McCoRMicK  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Light,  Barre  &  Charles  Sts.,  Baltimore,  Md. — 
McCorniick's   English   Mustard,    484. 

McKesson  &  Robbins,  Inc.,  Bridgeport,  Conn. — McKesson's  Halibut 
Liver  Oil  Plain,  11  cc,  468;  McKesson's  Halibut  Liver  Oil  Plain, 
Capsules,  3  minims,  468;  McKesson's  Halibut  Liver  Oil  v^ith  Vita- 
min D  Concentrate  in  Neutral  Oil,  Capsules,  3  minims,  469;  McKes- 
son's Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Neutral 
Oil,   6  cc,   471. 

McNeil  Laboratories,  Inc.,  2900  N.  Seventeenth  St.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
— Capsules  Digitalis  Duo-Test  McNeil,  180;  Lubricant-McNeil,  485; 
McNeil's  Emulsion  of  Castor  Oil  (Emulsion  Olei  Ricini-McNeil's), 
162;   Tincture   Digitalis  Duo-Test-McNeil,   185. 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  547 

Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  Second  and  Mallinckrodt  Sts..  St. 
Louis,  Mo. — Acetylsalicylic  Acid-Mallinckrodt,  356;  Arsphenamine- 
Mallinckrodt,  81;  Barbital-Mallinckrodt,  103;  Barium  Sulfate  Pure- 
Mallinckrodt,  121;  Cinchophen-Mallinckrodt,  168;  Copper  Citrate- 
Mallinckrodt.  170;  Hippuran,  263;  Hippuran  (Crystals),  12  Cm. 
vial,  264;  lodeikon,  210;  lodeikon.  3.5  Gm.  Ampules,  210;  Iso- 
lodeikon,  209;  Iso-Iodeikon,  2.5  Gm.  Ampoules.  209;  Mercuric 
Cyanide-Mallinckrodt,  286;  Neoarsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  86; 
P'henobarbital  Sodium-Mallinckrodt,  116;  Quinidine-Mallinckrodt. 
349;  Quinine  Ethyl  Carbonate-Mallinckrodt,  351;  Sodium  Acid 
Phosphate  (Monobasic)-Mallinckrodt,  484;  Sterile  Solution  Hippuran, 
25  cc.  size,  264;  Sulpharsphenamine-Mallinckrodt,  91;  Sulpharsphen- 
amine-Mallinckrodt,  0.1  Gm. ;  0.2  Gm.;  0.3  Gm.;  0.4  Gm.;  0.5  Gm. ; 
0.6  Gm.  Ampules,  91. 

Maltbie  Chemical  Co.,  246-250  High  St.,  Newark,  N.  J.— Calcreose, 
171;  Calcreose  Tablets,  4  grains,  171;  Compound  Syrup  of  Calcreose, 
171;  Ephedrine  Nasal  Jelly-Maltbie,  220;   Solution  Calcreose,  171. 

M.^LTiNE  Company,  8th  Ave.  and  18th  St.,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — Maltine 
with  Cod  Liver  Oil,  459;  Maltine  with  Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Iron 
iodide,  459;   Maltine  with  ]\Iineral  Oil  and  Cascara  Sagrada,  279. 

Manhattan  Eye  Salve  Co.,  Inc..  Louisville,  Ky. — Butyn  Ointment-M. 
E.  S.  Co.,  58;  Compound  Yellow  Oxide  and  Adrenalin  Ointment- 
M.  E.  S.  Co.,  301;  Copper  Citrate  Ointment  (5  per  cent);  (10  per 
cent)-M.  E.  S.  Co.,  169;  Holocaine  and  Adrenalin  Ointment-M.  E. 
S.  Co.,  65;  Holocaine  Ointment-M.  E.  S.  Co.,  65. 

Mead  Johnson  &  Co.,  Evansville,  Ind. — Mead's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Fortified 
with  Percomorph  Liver  Oil,  460;  Mead's  Cod  Liver  Oil  -with 
Viosterol,  463;  Mead's  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  469;  Mead's  Oleum 
Percomorphym,  472;  Mead's  Oleum  Percomorphym,  50%  (In 
Capsules),  472;  Mead's  Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil.  460;  Mead's 
Standardized  (I^od  Liver  Oil,  Flavored,  460;  Mead's  Viosterol  in 
Halibut  Liver  Oil,  470;  Mead's  Viosterol  in  Halibut  Liver  Oil, 
(in   capsules),   470;    Mead's   \"iolsterol  in   Oil,   473. 

Medical  Arts  Laboratory,  Oklahoma  City,  Okla. — Rabies  Vaccine 
(Killed    Virus),   388. 

Merax,  Inc.,  1341  Hawthorn  Ave.,  Portland,  Oregon. — Merax  Mercury 
Cyanide  Solution,  485. 

Merck  &  Co.,  Rahway,  N.  J. — Agar  Agar,  25;  Agar  Agar  Powder, 
25;  Agar  Agar  Shreds,  25;  Aminopyrine-Merck,  346;  Ampules  Cebione 
(Crystals),  0.1  Gm.,  457;  Ampuls  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate-Merck, 
0.01  Gm.;  0.025  Gm.;  0.05  Gm.;  0.10  Gm.;  0.20  Gm. ;  0.25  Gm. ; 
0.30  Gm.;  0.50  Gm.  and  1.0  Gm,  240;  Arbutin-Merck,  77;  Ars- 
phenamine-Merck,  82;  Arsphenamine-Merck,  0.1  Gm.;  0.2  Gm. ; 
0.3  Gm.;  0.4  Gm.;  0.5  Gm. ;  0.6  Gm.  Ampules,  82;  Aminoacetic  Acid- 
Merck,  49;  Barbital-Merck,  103;  Barbital  Sodium-Merck,  120; 
Barium-Sulphate-Merck  for  X-Ray  Diagnosis,  121;  Benzene  (Ben- 
zol)-Merck  Reagent,  Thiophen  Free,  122;  Betanaphthol  Benzoate- 
Merck,  303;  Bismosol,  131;  Bismosol  Ampules,  1  cc,  131;  Bismuth 
Betanaphthol-Merck,  132;  Bismuth  Subsalicylate-Merck,  134;  Butyl- 
Chloral  Hydrate-Merck,  165;  Calcium  Gluconate-Merck,  151;  Calcium 
Phosphate  Tribasic-Merck,  152;  Cebione,  457;  Chlorbutanol  (Anhy- 
drous)-Merck,  165;  Chlorbutanol  (Hydrous)-Merck,  165;  Creosote- 
Merck,  484;  Digitan,  192;  Digitan  Ampules  (for  Hypodermic  Use), 
193;  Digitan  Tablets,  IH  grains  (0.1  Gm.).  193;  Digitan  Tincture, 
193;  Digitoxin-Merck,  185;  Ephedrine  Alkaloid-Merck,  218;  Ephedrine 
Hydrochloride-Merck,    219;    Ephedrine    Sulfate-Merck.    221;    Erythol 


548  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Merck   &   Co.    (Continued) 

Tetranitrate  (Undiluted).  304;  Erythol  Tetranitrate  Tablets-Merck,  J^  ; 
%  grain,  304;  Fluorescein-Merck,  203;  Formin,  237;  Formin  Tablets, 
5  grains  (0.3  Gm.);  7^  grains  (0.5  Gm.),  237;  Gold  Sodium  Thio- 
sulfate-Merck,  240;  Guaiacol  Carbonate-Merck,  484;  Homatropine 
Hydrochloride-Merck,  99;  Ichthyol,  436;  Iron  Lactate-Merck,  270; 
Kelene,  50;  Liquid  Petrolatum-Merck,  280;  Magnesium  Phosphate 
Tribasic-Merck.  282;  Mercury  Cyanide-Merck,  286;  Mercury 
Succinimide-Merck,  288;  Neocinchophen-Merck,  169;  Neoarsphen- 
amine-Merck,  86;  Neoarsphenamine-Merck,  0.15  Gm. ;  0.3  Gm. ;  0.45 
Gm.;  1.6  Gm.;  0.75  Gm.;  0.9  Gm.  Ampules,  86;  Ouabain-Merck  (G. 
Strophanthin),  187;  Papaverine  Hydrochloride-Merck.  308;  Pheno- 
barbital-Merck.  115;  Phenobarbital  Sodium-Merck,  116;  Procaine 
Hydrochloride-Merck,  70;  Quinidine-Merck,  349;  Quinidine  Sul- 
phate-Merck. 350;  Quinine  Ethyl  Carbonate-Merck,  351;  Scarlet  Red 
Medicinal  Biebrich-Merck,  195;  Silver  Lactate-Merck.  430;  Sodium 
BiophospJiate-Merck,  484;  Sodium  Peroxide-Merck,  340;  Stovarsol, 
93;  Stovarsol  Tablets,  0.25  Gm.,  93;  Sulpharsphenamine-Merck,  91; 
Sulpharsphenamine-Merck,  0.1  Gm.;  0.2  Gm. ;  0.3  Gm. ;  0.4  Gm. ;  0.5 
Gm.;  0.6  Gm.  Ampules,  91;  Tablets  Cibione  (crystals),  0.01  Gm.; 
0.05  Gm.,  457;  Theobromine-Merck.  476;  Theobromine  and  Sodium 
Acetate-Merck,  477;  Thymol  Iodide-Merck,  249;  Trioxymethvlene- 
Merck  (Parafarmaldchyde-U.  S.  P.  X),  484;  Tryparsamide,  96;  Urea- 
Merck,   445;    Zinc  Permanganate-Merck,    482. 

Merrell  Co.,  Wm.  S.,  Cincinnati,  Ohio. — Acid  SaUcylate-Merrcll,  484; 
Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose.  50%,  20  cc. ;  50%,  50  cc,  158;  Dio- 
thane  Hydrochloride,  58;  Diphtheria  Toxin  for  the  Schick  Test, 
Diluted  with  Peptone  Solution  and  Ready  for  Use,  419;  Diphtheria 
Toxoid,  399;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated  (Refined),  404; 
Fibrinogen  Local-Merrell,  234;  Fibragan  Local-Merrell,  7  cc.  Vials, 
234:  Natural  Oil  of  Sweet  Birch-Merrell,  484;  Pituitary  Extract-U. 
S.  P.-Merrell,  335;  Sodium  Salicylate-Merrell,  484;  Typhoid  Vaccine, 
413;    Viosterol  in   Oil,   Merrell,   Sperti  Process,  474. 

Miller.  E.  S.  Laboratories,  Inc.,  743  Maple  Avenue,  Los  Angeles, 
Calif. — Ampoule  Sterile  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50  Gm.,  10  cc; 
10  Gm.,  20  cc;  25  Gm.,  50  cc;  50  Gm.,  100  cc,  159;  Ampoule-Vial 
Sterile  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  10  Gm.,  20  cc. ;  25  Gm.,  50  cc; 
50   Gm.,   100  cc,    159. 

Monsanto  Chemical  Company,  St.  Louis,  Mo. — Acetylsalicylic  Acid 
(Aspirin) -Monsanto,  356;  Chloramine-T  (Monsanto),  246;  Chlorco- 
sane-Monsanto,  484;  Dichloramine-T  (Monsanto),  247;  Halazone- 
Monsanto,  247. 


Mulford  Colloid  Laboratories,  38  &  Ludlow  Sts.,  Philadelphia,  Pa. — 
Rhus  Tox.  Antigen-Strickler.  353;  Rhus  Tox.  Antigen-Strickler 
(four  1  cc.  vials),  353;  Rhus  Venenata  Antigen-Strickler,  354;  Rhus 
Venanata   Antigen-Strickler    (four    1    cc.   vials),    354. 

National  Aniline  &  Chemical  Company,  40  Rector  St.,  New  York. — 
Acriflavine-"National,"  199;  Enteric  Coated  Tablets  Gentian  Violet 
Medicinal-"National,"  0.0324  Gm.  (^  grain),  213;  Enteric  Coated 
Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-"National,"  0.0324  Gm.  (>^  grain),  200; 
Gentian  Violet  Medicinal-"National,"  213;  Neutral  Acriflavine- 
"National,"  200;  Neutral  Acriflavine-"National"  "Pro  Injectione," 
0.5  Gm.;  1.0  Gm.,  Vials,  200;  Neutral  Acriflavine-"National," 
Troches,  200;  Ointment  Neutral  Acriflavine-"National,"  1  per  cent, 
200;  Proflavine-"National,-''  201;  Scarlet  Red  Medicinal-"National," 
196;  Tablets  Gentian  Violet  Medicinal  "National,"  0.0324  Gm.  (^ 
grain),  213;  Tablets  Neutral  Acriflavine-"National,"  0.1  Gm.  (1^ 
grains),   200. 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  549 

National  Drug  Company,  4679-85  Stenton  Ave.,  Philadelphia,  Penna. — 
Ampul  Solution  of  Dextrose,  10  Gm.,  20  cc. ;  25  Gm.,  50  cc.,  159; 
Ampul-Vial  Solution  of  Dextrose,  25  Gm.,  50  cc.;  50  Gm.,  100  cc. ; 
159;  Antimeningococcic  Serum,  380;  Antipneumococcic  Serum- 
Felton-  Type  I  (Refined  and  Concentrated),  382;  Antipneumococcic 
Serum,  Types  I  and  II,  Refined  and  Concentrated,  384;  Diphtheria 
Antitoxin,  484;  Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  (Diphtheria 
Prophylactic),  390;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  400;  Erysipelas  Antistrepto- 
coccus  Serum,  385;  Gas  Gangrene  Antitoxin  Refined  and  Concen- 
trated (CI.  Perfringens.  CI.  Septique  Antitoxin),  369;  Normal  Horse 
Serum,  366;  Ointment  Scarlet  Red  Biebrich,  8  per  cent,  195;  Pollen 
Antigens  "National,"  39;  Pollen  Extracts  Diagnostic,  484;  Rabies 
Vaccine  (Human),  (Chloroform  Killed)-N.  D.  Co.,  388;  Refined  Diph- 
theria Toxoid  (Alum  Precipitated),  404;  Refined  Tetanus  Toxoid 
(Alum  Precipitated),  407;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin 
Refined  and  Concentratcd-"National,"  377;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococ- 
cus Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test-"National,"  421;  Scarlet  Fever  Strepto- 
coccus Toxin  for  Immunization-"National,"  397;  Schick  Test,  Peptone 
Diluent,  420;  Smallpox  Vaccine  (Vaccine  Virus),  484;  Staphylo- 
coccus Vaccine,  411;  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  484;  Tetanus-Perfringens 
Antitoxin,  Refined  and  Concentrated,  370;  Tuberculin  Intracutaneous 
for  Mantoux  Test,  394;  Tuberculin  Old  (Human),  394;  Typhoid 
Vaccine,  413;  Undulant  Fever  Vaccine,  409;  Von  Pirquet  Test  for 
Tuberculosis,   394. 

National  Milk  Sugar  Co.,  Inc.,  350  Madison  Ave.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — 
Beta-Lactose,  153. 

New  York  City  Department  of  Health,  Bureau  of  Laboratories, 
N.  Y.,  N.  Y. — Diphtheria  Antitoxin  (Globulin),  484;  Tetanus  Anti- 
toxin,  484. 

Ohio  Chemical  &  Manufacturing  Co.,  1177-1199  Marquette  St.  N.  E.. 
Cleveland,  Ohio. — Ohio  Carbon  Tetrachloride  Compound,  485;  Ohio 
Ethylene,   51. 

Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  Detroit,  Mich. — Adrenalin,  222;  Adrenalin  Chloride 
Solution,  222;  Adrenalin  Inhalant,  222;  Adrenalin  Ointment,  222; 
Adrenalin  Suppositories,  222;  Adrenalin  Tablets,  %oo  grain;  1/200 
grain,  222;  Adrenalin  and  Chloretone  Ointment,  222;  Adrenalin  and 
Cocaine  Tablets,  222;  Ampoules  Adrenalin  Chloride  Solution 
1:  10,000,  1  cc;  1:  2,600,  1  cc;  1:  1,000,  1  cc,  223;  Ampoules  Ergot 
Aseptic,  1  cc,  228;  Ampoules  Iron  Citrate  Green-P.  D.  &  Co.,  yi; 
M;  1^  grains,  270;  Ampoules  Mapharsen,  0.04  Gm. ;  0.06  Gm.;  0.4 
Gm.;  0.6  Gm.,  84;  Ampoules  of  Pitocin,  334;  Ampoules  of  Pitocin, 
0.5  cc;  1  cc,  334;  Ampoules  of  Pitressin,  334;  Ampoules  of  Pitres- 
sin,  1  cc,  334;  Ampoules  Pituitrin,  0.5  cc. ;  1  cc,  336;  Ampoules 
Thio-Bismol,  0.2  Gm. ;  2  Gm.,  139;  Antianthrax  Serum,  378;  Anti- 
dysenteric  Serum,  379;  Antimeningococcic  Serum,  380;  Antipneu- 
mococcic Serum  (Felton)  Type  I,  382;  Antipneumococcic  Serum 
(Felton)  Types  I  and  II  Refined  and  Concentrated,  384;  Apothesine, 
54;  Apothesine  Hypodermic  Tablets,  0.08  Gm.  (1^4  grains),  55; 
Apothesine  Solution,  55;  Apothesine  and  Adrenalin  Hypodermic 
Tablets  (Apothesine  Ys  grains,  Adrenalin  V1600  grain;  Apothesine 
AYs  grains,  Adrenalin  V^oo  grain),  55;  Bismuth  Paste  Surgical-P.  D. 
&  Co.,  133;  Bismuth  Salicylate  in  Oil-P.  D.  &  Co.,  2  ounce  bottle, 
134;  Boro-Chloretone,  165;  Brometone.  145;  Brometone  Capsules,  5 
grains,  146;  Capsules  Carbon  Tetrachloride  (For  Human  Use) -P. 
D.  &  Co.,  20  minims,  161;  Capsules  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-  P.  D. 
&  Co.,  Yi  grain;  Ya-  grain,  219;  Capsules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  & 
Co.,  0.025  Gm.  (^  grain);  0.05  Gm.  (3/^  grain),  221;  Capsules  Neo- 
silvol,  6  grains,  430;  Capsules  Ortal  Sodium,  Ya-  grain  (0.05  Gm.); 
3  grains  (0.2  Gm.)  ;  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.),  109;  Capsules  Silvol,  6 
grains,  427;  Capsules  Solution  Silver  Nitrate,  1  Per  Cent-P.  D.  &  Co., 
6  minims.  431;  Chloretone,  165;  Chloretone  Capsules,  3  grains;  5 
grains,  165;  Chloretone  Inhalant,  165;  Compressed  Tablets  Sal-Ethyl 
Carbonate,  5  grs.,  358;  Compressed  Tablets  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate  with 


550  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Parke,   Davis   &  Co.    (Continued) 

Aminopyrine,  358;  Compressed  Tablets  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate  with 
Phenacetin,  358;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin  (Concentrated  Antidiphtheric 
Serum  Globulin),  484;  Diphtheria  Toxin- Antitoxin  Mixture,  New- 
Formula  (Park-Banzhaf's  0.1  L-f),  390;  Diphtheria  Toxin  Diluted 
for  Schick  Test,  420;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  400;  Diphtheria  Toxoid, 
Alum  Precipitated  (Refined)-P.  D.  Co.,  404;  Ephedrine  Hydro- 
chloride-P.  D.  &  Co.,  219;  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  221; 
Ergot  Aseptic,  228;  Erysipelas  and  Prodigiosus  Toxins  (Coley).  417; 
Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Refined  and  Concentrated-  P.  D. 
&  Co.,  374;  Furunculosis  Vaccine,  411;  Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin 
(Combined)  Retined  and  Concentrated-  P.  D  &  Co.,  370;  Germicidal 
Discs  of  Potassio-Mercuric  lodide-P.  D.  &  Co.,  1^;  ^  grains,  297; 
Glaseptic  Ampoules  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.05  Gm.  (M 
grain),  1  cc.  221;  Glaseptic  Ampoules  Mercury  Salicylate-  P.  D.  & 
Co.,  0.065  Gm.  (1  grain);  0.13  Gm.  (2  grains),  287;  Glaseptic 
Ampoules  Mercury  Succinimide-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.01  Gm,  (i/^  grain), 
288;  Glaseptic  Ampoules  Sodium  Cacodylate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  0.2  Gm. 
(3  grains);  0.3  Gm.  (5  grains);  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains);  0.1  Gm.  (II/2 
grains);  0.13  Gm.  (2  grains),  1  cc.  95;  Glaseptic  Ampoules  Sodium 
Cacodylate-P.  D.  &  Co.,  1  Gm.  (15^  grains),  2  cc,  95;  Glaseptic 
Ampoules  Solution  Dextrose,  U.  S.  P.,  50%,  20  cc;  50  per  cent, 
50  cc;  50  per  cent,  100  cc,  159;  Glaseptic  Ampoules  Solution  Liver 
Extract-P.  D.  &  Co.  (Intramuscular),  2  cc,  319;  Glaseptic  Ampules 
Bismuth  Salicylate  in  Oil-P.  D.  &  Co..  1  cc,  134;  Group  Protein 
Extracts-Diagnostic-P.  D.  &  Co.,  484;  lodalbin,  251;  lodalbin  Cap- 
sules, 5  grains,  251;  lodalbin  and  Mercurol  Tablets,  251;  Iron  Citrate 
Green-P.  D.  &  Co.,  270;  Kapseals  Ortal  Sodium  with  Aminopyrine, 
109;  Kapseals  Ortal  Sodium  with  Phenacetin,  110;  Liver  Extract- 
Parke,  Davis  &  Co.,  314;  Liver  Extract  (Intramuscular)-Parke,  Davis 
&  Co.,  319;  Malt  Extract  with  Cod  Liver  Oil-  P.  D.  &  Co.,  461; 
Mapharsen,  84;  Meningococcus  Antitoxin-P.  D.  &  Co.,  375;  Mer- 
curettes-P.  D.  &  Co.,  301;  Mercurol,  291;  Neo-Silvol,  429;  Neo- 
Silvol  Ointment,  5  Per  Cent,  430;  Neo-Silvol  Vaginal  Suppositories, 
430;  Normal  Horse  Serum-P.  D.  &  Co.,  366;  Ortal-Sodium.  109; 
Parke,  Davis  &  Company's  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  463;  Parke- 
Davis  Haliver  Oil,  Plain,  469;  Parke-Davis  Haliver  Oil  with 
Viosterol,  470;  Parke,  Davis  &  Companv  Standardized  Cod  Liver 
Oil.  460;  Parke.  Davis  &  Co.'s  Viosterol  in  Oil,  474;  Paroidin,  331; 
Paroidin,  5  cc.  Vials,  331;  Pituitrin,  335;  Proposote,  172;  Proposote 
Capsules,  5  minims;  10  minims,  173;  Protein  Extracts  Diagnostic- 
P.  D.  &  Co.,  484;  Rabies  Vaccine  (Gumming),  388;  Sal-Ethyl,  357; 
Sal-Ethyl  Capsules,  5  minims,  357;  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate,  358;  Scar- 
let Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin-P.  D.  &  Co.,  377;  Scarlet  Fever 
Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test-P.  D.  &  Co.,  421;  Scarlet  Fever 
Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Preventive  Immunization-P.  D.  &  Co.,  397; 
Scarlet  Red  Emulsion,  4  per  cent-P.  D.  &  Co.,  196;  Scarlet  Red 
Ointment,  5  per  cent;  10  per  cent-P.  D.  &  Co.,  196;  Scarlet  Red 
Sulfonate,  196;  Silvol,  427;  Silvol  Bougies.  5  Per  Cent,  427;  Silvol 
Ointment,  5  Per  Cent,  427;  Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules  Parke-Davis 
Haliver  0'\\,  Plain,  3  minims,  469;  Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Haliver 
Oil  with  Viosterol,  470;  Soluble  Gelatin  Capsules  Parke,  Davis  & 
Company's  Standardized  Cod  Liver  Oil,  10  minims,  20  minims,  2.5 
Gm.,  and  5  Gm.,  461;  Solution  Ephedrine  Sulfate-P.  D.  &  Co., 
3%,  221;  Staphylococcus  Vaccine  (Combined),  411;  Stearodine,  259; 
Stearodine  Tablets,  260;  Tablet  Triturates  Sal-Ethyl  Carbonate,  1 
gr..  358;  Tablets  Tuberculin  B.  E.-P.  D.  &  Co.,  395;  Tablets  Tuber- 
culin T.  R.-P.  D.  &  Co.,  396;  Tetanus  Antitoxin  Globulin.  484; 
Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  (Combined)  (Prophylactic)  Refined 
and  Concentrated-P.  D.  &  Co.,  370;  Thio-Bismol,  139;  Tuberculin 
B.  E.  (Concentrated),  395;  Tuberculin  B.  F.  (Bovine),  396;  Tuber- 
culin B.  F.  (Human),  396;  Tuberculin  "Old"  (Koch),  394;  Tuber- 
culin (Old)  and  Control  for  the  Pirquet  Test,  394;  Tuberculin  T.  R. 
(Concentrated),  395;  Tuberculin  for  the  Mantoux  Test,  394; 
Typhoid-Paratyphoid  Vaccine  (Prophylactic),  415;  Typhoid  Vaccine 
(Prophylactic),  413;  Vaccine  Virus  (Glycerinated),  484;  Vaginal 
Suppositories  Silvol,  5  Per  Cent,  427;  Ventriculin,  316;  Ventriculin, 
10  Gm.  Vials,  316;  Ventriculin,  100  Gm.;  500  Gm.  Bottle,  316;  Vials 
Liver  Extract-Parke,   Davis  &  Co.,  315. 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  551 

Patch,  E.  L.,  Co.,  Stoneham  Postoffice,  Boston,  Mass. — Patch's  Flavored 
Cod  Liver  Oil,    461. 

Petrolagar  Laboratories,  8134  McCormick  Blvd.,  Chicago,  Illinois. — 
Petrolagar,  280;  Petrolagar  (Unsweetened),  280;  Petrolagar  with 
Cascara  (Non-Bitter),  280;  Petrolagar  (with  Milk  of  Magnesia), 
280;    Petrolagar    (with   Phenolphthalein),   280. 

Pfanstiehl  Chemcial  Co.,  104  Lake  View  Ave.,  Waukegan,  111. — 
Amino-Acid-Pfanstiehl,   49. 

Pfizer,  Chas.  &  Co.,  Ixc,  11  Bartlett  St.,  Borough  of  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — 
Calcium  Gluconate-Pfizer,   151;   Cinchophen-Pfizer,    168. 

Pharmedic  Corporation,  160  East  127  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — Amino- 
phylline-Pharmedic,  480;  Amoules  Solution  Aminophylline-Phar- 
medic.  0.24  Gm.,  10  cc. ;  0.48  Cm.,  2  cc,  480;  Suppositories  Amino- 
phvUine-Pharmedic,  0.36  Gm.,  480;  Tablets  Aminophylline-Phar- 
medic,  0.1   Gm.,   480. 

Pitman-Moore  Company,  Indianapolis,  Ind. — Siomine,  253;  Siomine 
Capsules,   J/^,   1;  2;   5  grains,  253. 

Plant  Products  Co.,  1605  Guarantee  Title  Bldg.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. — 
Plant's   Magnesia  Wafers,   280. 

Prophyl.\cto  Manufacturing  Co.,  25  E.  Washington  St.,  Chicago,  111. — 
Pemco  Menthol  Eucalyptus  Compound   Nasal  Spray,   282. 

Puritan  Compressed  Gas  Corporation,  2012  Grand  Ave.,  Kansas  City. — 
Ethylene    (Puritan    Compressed    Gas   Corp.),    51. 

Reinschild  Chemical  Co..  18  Grand  Street.  New  Rochelle,  N.  Y. — ■ 
Agar  Agar  Shreds,   25;   Phenolphthalein-Agar,   25. 

Richards  Pharmacal  Co.,  Inc.,  2  and  4  Depevster  St.,  New  York,  N. 
v.— Richards  Psyllium  Seed,  344. 

Riedel-de  Haen,  Inc.,  105  Hudson  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — Ampoules 
Solution  Decholin-Sodium,  5  per  cent,  10  cc;  2  per  cent,  10  cc, 
125;  Decholin,  124;  Decholin  Sodium,  125;  Decholin  Tablets,  SU 
grains,  124;  Nostal,  108;  Nostal  Tablets,  0.1  Gm.  (li^  grains),  108; 
Pernoston,    112;   Pernoston   Tablets,   3   grains,    112. 

Sandoz  Chemical  Works,  Inc.,  61-63  Van  Dam  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — 
Ampules  Calcium  Gluconate-Sandoz,  151;  Ampules  Gynergen,  1  cc, 
230;  Ampules  Gynergen  Solution  1:2,000,  0.5  cc,  229;  Ampules 
Scillaren-B,  187;  Calcium  Gluconate-Sandoz,  151;  Gynergen,  229; 
Gynergen  Solution..  0.1  per  cent,  230;  Sandoptal,  116;  Scillaren, 
188;  Scillaren-B,  187;  Solution  Scillaren,  188;  Tablets  Gynergen, 
0.001  Gm.,  230;  Tablets  Sandoptal,  0.2  Gm.,  116;  Tablets  Scillaren, 
188. 

Sargent's  Drug  Store,  23  N.  Wabash  Ave.,  Chicago,  Illinois. — Petro- 
bran.    340. 

Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.,  113  West  18th  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. —  Camio- 
fen  Ointment,  248;  Collargol,  427;  Collargol  Ointment,  427; 
Euphthalmine    Hydrochloride,    99;    Formalin,    237;    locamfen,    248; 


552  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.   (Continued) 

Medinal,  120;  Medinal  Suppositories,  10  grains,  120;  Medinal 
Tablets,  5  grains,  120;  Orpliol,  132;  Urotropin,  237;  Urotropin 
Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.) ;  7^  grains  (0.5  Cm.),  237;  Xeroform-S. 
and  Ga.,   135. 

Schering  Corporatiox,  Bloomfield,  N.  J. — Ampoule  Solution  Neo-Iopax, 
20  cc,  266;   Keo-Iopax,  265. 

ScHiEFFELiN  &  Co..  16-26  Coopcr  Square,  New  York,  N.  Y.— Schief- 
felin   Psyllium   Seed,   344. 

Scientific  Sugar  Co.,  Indianapolis,  Ind. — Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Con- 
centrate Capsules,  3  minims,  465;  Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concen- 
trate Liquid,  464;  Kinney's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Liquid,  Vials, 
5   cc,   465. 

Scott  &  Bowxe,  Bloomfield,  X.  J. — Scott's  Norwegian  Cod-Liver  Oil 
(Flavored),   461;    Scott's  Norwegian   Cod  Liver   Oil    (Plain).  461. 

Searle,  G.  D.  &  Co.,  4735-4743  Ravenswood  Ave.,  Chicago,  Illinois. — 
Aminophylline-Searle,  480;  Ampoules  Bismuth  Sodium  Tartrate- 
Searle,  1.5  per  cent,  2  cc;  3  per  cent,  2  cc;  1.5  per  cent,  60  cc. 
vial;  3  per  cent,  60  cc.  vial,  132;  Ampuls  Gold  Sodium  Thiosulfate- 
Searle,  5  cc,  240;  Ampules  Mercurochrome-H.  W.  &  D.,  1%,  10 
cc;  20  cc,  281;  Ampules  Sodium  Morrhuate  5%  with  Benzvl  Alcohol 
(Searle),  5  cc,  432;  Ampules  Sodium  Thiosulphate  (Searle),  5 
cc;  10  cc,  433;  Ampules  Solution  Aminophylline-Searle,  0.24  Gm., 
10  cc;  0.48  Gm.,  2  cc,  480;  Arsphenamine-Searle,  81;  Bismuth 
Sodium  Tartrate-Searle,  132;  Chiniofon-Searle,  164;  Gold  Sodium 
Thiosulfate-Searle,  240;  Neoarsphenamine-Searle,  86;  Procaine  Bor- 
ate-Searle,  67;  Solution  Dextrose  and  Sodium  Chloride  Ampules, 
20  cc.  (Searle)  with  Benzvl  Alcohol,  159;  Sulfarsphenamine- 
Searle,  91;  Sulfarsphenamine-Searle,  0.1  Gm.:  0.2  Gm.;  0.3  Gm.; 
0.4  Gm.;  0.5  Gm. ;  0.6  Gm.  Ampules,  91;  Tablets  Aminophylline- 
Searle,  0.1  Gm.  (11/2  grains),  480;  Tablets  Aminophylline-Searle, 
0.1  Gm.  (iy2  grains),  480;  Tablets  Chiniofon-Searle,  0.25  (4  gr.), 
164;  Tablets  Chiniofon-Searle  Enteric  Coated,  0.25  Gm.  (4  grains), 
164;  Tablets  Procaine  Borate  and  Epinephrine,  67  Tablets  Procaine 
Borate    without    Epinephrine,    67. 

Sevdel  Chemical  Company,  135  Halladay  St.,  Jersey  City,  N.  J. — 
Benzyl  Alcohol-Seydel,   56. 

Sharp  &  Dohme,  Philadelphia,  Penna. — Acne  Bacterin,  408;  Acne  Sero- 
bacterin-Mulford  (Sensitized  Acne  Vaccine  Polyvalent),  417;  Aller- 
genic Extracts-Mulford,  32;  Ampoule  Solution  Silver  Nitrate,  1  Per 
Cent-Sharp  &  Dohme,  431;  Ampules,  Sodium  Cacodylate-Mulford, 
3/4  grain;  1^2  grains;  2  grains;  3  grains;  5  grains;  7  grains,  1  cc, 
95;  Ampules  Sodium  Cacodylate-Mulford,  15^  grains,  2  cc,  95; 
Ampuls  Mercury  Succinimide,  %  grain,  288;  Antianthrax  Serum- 
Mulford,  378;  Antidysenteric  Serum  (Polyvalent),  379;  Antipneu- 
mococcic  Serum,  Concentrated  (Pneumococcus  Antibody  Globulin, 
Types  I  and  II),  384;  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Types  I  and  II 
Combined-Mulford,  383;  Antimeningococcic  Serum,  380;  Antipneu- 
mococcic Serum  Type  I,  382;  Antivenin  (Bothropic),  371;  Anti- 
venin  (Xearctic  Crotalidae),  372;  Bacillen  Emulsion  "B.  E.."  395; 
Botulinus  Antitoxin  (Human)  Jensen-Salsbery,  371;  Capsules 
Carbon  Tetrachloride-  S.  &  D..  0.3  cc;  1  cc.  161;  Cargentos,  426; 
Cargentos  Capsules,  3  grains,  427;  Cargentos  Ointment,  5  Per  Cent; 
10  Per  Cent,  427;  Cargentos  Urethral  Suppositories,  427;  Cholera 
Bacterin  (Cholera  Vaccine),  409;  Cholera  Serobacterin-Mulford, 
(Sensitized     Cholera     Vaccine).     417;     Compressed     Tablets,     Protan, 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  553 

Sharp  &  Dohme   (Continued) 

5  grains,  440;  Cremo-Bismuth,  135;  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  (d-Glucose), 
25  Gm.,  50  cc.  Ampoule  Unbuffered,  159;  Dextrose  U.  S.  P.  (d-Glu- 
cose),  25  Gm.,  50  cc.  Ampoule  (Buffered),  159;  Digitol,  193;  Diph- 
theria Antitoxin,  485;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin  (Bovine),  373;  Diphtheria 
Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  New  Formula  (Park-Banzhaf's  0.1  L-f), 
390;  Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test  Diluted  Ready  for  Use- 
Mulford,  420;  Diphtheria  Toxoid,  400;  Erysipelas  Streptococcus 
Antitoxin  (Concentrated) -Mulford,  374;  Gelatin  Compound  Phenol- 
ized, 238;  Hypodermic  Tablets  Mercuric  Succinimide,  0.012  Gm. 
(ys  grain),  288;  Hypodermic  Tablets  Strophanthin,  l/ooo  grain 
(0.325  mg.)  S  &  D..  192;  Insulin-Mulford.  327;  Insulin-Mulford, 
10  Units,  5  cc;  20  Units,  5  cc;  40  Units  5  cc;  10  Units,  10  cc. ; 
20  Units,  10  cc;  40  Units,  10  cc;  80  Units,  10  cc. ;  100  Units,  10 
CO.,  327;  lodo-Casein.  252;  lod-Casein  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.) 
252;  Ivyol  Poison  Ivy  Extract,  352;  Ivyol  Poison  Ivy  Extract 
(Syringes),  352;  Ivyol-Poison  Oak  Extract-Mulford,  352;  Ivyol- 
Poison  Oak  Extract  (Syringes),  352;  Normal  Horse  Serum,  366; 
Normal  Horse  Serum  Without  Preservative,  366;  Perfringens  Anti- 
toxin, 369;  Pirquet  Test  for  Tuberculosis,  394;  Plague  Bacterin, 
410;  Pneumococcus  Antibody  Globulin,  Tvpe  I-Mulford,  382;  Pollens 
Dried-Miilford,  485;  Pollen  Extracts-Mulford,  43;  PoUcn  Extracts 
Diagnostic-Mulford,  485;  Protan,  440;  Proteins  Dried-Mulford,  485; 
Rabies  Vaccine  (Phenol  Killed)-Mulford,  388;  Scarlet  Fever  Strep- 
tococcus Antitoxin  Concentrated.  377;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus 
Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test-Mulford,  421;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus 
Toxin  for  Immunization-Mulford,  397;  Staphylo-Serobacterin  (Sen- 
sitized Staphylococcic  Vaccine),  417;  Tablets  lodo-Casein  with 
Chocolate,  252;  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  485;  Tetanus  Antitoxin  (Bovine), 
372;  Tetanus  Gas-Gangrene  Antitoxin  Mixed-Mulford,  369;  Tincture 
Digitalis,  Purified-S.  &  D.,  186;  Tincture  Digitalis,  Purified,  S.  &  D., 
485;  Tuberculin  "Old"  (O.  T.),  394;  Tuberculin  T.  R.,  395; 
Typho-Bacterin,  413;  Typho-Bacterin  Mixed  (Triple  Vaccine),  415; 
Typho-Serobacterin-Mulford  Mixed  (Sensitized  Triple  Vaccine),  418; 
Typho-Serobacterin-Mulford  (Sensitized  Typhoid  Vaccine),  417; 
Vaccine    Virus    (Smallpox    Vaccine),    485. 

Sheffield  Farms  Co.,  Inc..  524-528  West  57th  St.,  New  York. — Shef- 
field B.  Acidophilus  Milk,  278. 

Sklar  Manufacturing  Co.,  J.,  133-143  Floyd  Street,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. — 
Mercurochrome  Applicators,  291;  Silver  Nitrate  Applicators  (Arzol), 
431. 

S.  M.  A.  Corporation,  Cleveland.  Ohio. — Carotene-SMACO,  454; 
SMACO  Carotene  in  Oil,  455;  SMACO  Carotene  and  Vitamin  D 
Concentrate  in  Cod  Liver  Oil,  456;  SMACO  Carotene  with  Vitamin 
D  Concentrate  in  Oil,  455;  Smaco  Vitamin  D  Concentrate  in  Oil, 
465. 

Smith,  Kline  &  French  Laboratories,  Philadelphia,  Penna. — Benze- 
drine, 213;  Benzedrine  Inhaler,  214;  Benzedrine  Solution,  214; 
Pentnucleotide,   336;    Pentnucleotide,   vials,    10   cc,   337. 

Smith    Oil  &  Refining  Company,   Rockford,   111. — Smith's   Mineral   Oil, 

280. 

Squibb,  E.  R.  &  Sons,  745  Fifth  Ave.,  New  York,  N.  Y.—  Acne  Vac- 
cine, 408;  Ampules  lodobismitol  with  Saligenin,  2  cc,  142;  Anti- 
meningococcic Servim,  381;  Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Type  I,  382; 
Arsphenamine-Squibb,  81;  Autolyzed  Liver  Concentrate-Squibb,  313; 
Barium  Sulfate-Squibb  for  Roentgen-Ray  Work,  121;  Chloramine-T 
(Squibb),  246;  (Jinchophen-Squibb,  168;  Concentrated  Anti-Pneu- 
mococcic  Serum,  Types  I  and  II,  384;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin-Sqiiibb, 
485;   Diphtheria  Toxin   for   the   Schick  Test,    Ready  to   Use  without 


554  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Squibb,  E.  R.  &  Sons   (Continued) 

Dilution- Squibb,  420;  Diphtheria  Toxoid-Squibb,  401;  Diphtheria 
Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture  (New  Formula)  (Sheep)-Squibb,  391; 
Ephedrine  Hydrochloride-Squibb,  219;  Erysipelas  Streptococcus 
Antitoxin  Concentrated-Squibb,  374;  Insulin-Squibb,  327;  Insulin- 
Squibb,  10  Units,  5  cc;  20  Units,  5  cc;  40  Units,  5  cc;  10  Units, 
10  cc;  20  Units,  10  cc. ;  40  Units,  10  cc. ;  80  Units,  10  cc;  100 
Units,  10  cc,  327;  lodobismitol  with  Saligenin,  142;  Ipral- 
Aminopyrine  Tablets,  4.33  grains,  106;  Ipral  Calcium,  105;  Ipral 
Calcium  Tablets,  ^^i  grain;  2  grains,  105;  Ipral  Sodium,  106; 
Ipral  Sodium  Tablets,  4  grains,  106;  Liquid  Petrolatum  Heavy 
California)  Squibb,  280;  Neoarsphenamine-Squibb,  86;  Neocin- 
chophen-Squibb,  169;  Normal  Horse  Serum,  366;  Parathyroid  Hor- 
mone-Squibb,  331;  Parathyroid  Hormone-Squibb,  5  cc.  Vials,  331; 
Pituitary  Solution-Squibb,  336;  Pollen  Allergen  Solutions-Squibb.  36; 
Procaine  Hydrochloride-Squibb.  70;  Rabies  Vaccine  (Killed  Virus) 
Squibb  (Semple  Method),  388;  Refined  Diphtheria  Toxoid  Alum 
Precipitated-Squibb,  405;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  Con- 
centrated, 377;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Dick  Test- 
Squibb,  421;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunization- 
Squibb,  397;  Smallpox  (Variola)  Vaccine  (Glyceriymted),  485; 
Solargentum,  427;  Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules  Squibb  Halibut  Liver 
Oil  with  Viosterol,  3  minims,  471;  Soluble  Gelatine  Capsules  Squibb 
Plain  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  3  minims,  469;  Squibb  Cod-Halibut  Liver 
Oil,  469;  Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil,  462;  Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil  with 
Viosterol,  463;  Squibb  Cod  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol.  Mint-Flavored, 
463;  Squibb's  Mineral  Oil  with  Agar,  280;  Squibb's  Mineral  Oil  with 
Agar  and  Phenol])hthalein,  280;  Squibb  Mint-Flavored  Cod-Liver 
Oil,  462;  Squibb  Plain  Halibut  Liver  Oil,  469;  Squibb  Stabilized 
Halibut  Liver  Oil  with  Viosterol,  470;  Staphylococcus  Vaccine.  411: 
Sterile  Ampules  Procaine  Hvdrochloride-Squibb  (Crystals)  for  Spinal 
Anesthesia.  50  mg.;  100  mg.;  120  mg. ;  150  mg.;  200  mg.,  70; 
Sulfarsphenamine-Squibb,  91;  Sulfarsphenamine-Squibh,  0.1  Gm.; 
0.2  Gm.;  0.3  Gm.;  0.4  Gm.;  0.5  Gm.;  0.6  Gm.;  0.9  Gm.;  3.0  Gm. 
Ampules.  91;  Tablets  Digitalis-Squibb.  1  grain.  180;  Tablets  Digitalis 
Leaves-Squibb,  1  cat  unit,  180;  Tablets  Ephedrine  Hydrochloride- 
Squibb,  ii  grain;  34  grain,  219;  Tablets  Neocinchophen-Squibb.  5 
grains,  169;  Tablets  Solargentum.  4.6  grains,  427;  Tetanus  Anti- 
toxin, Purified,  485;  Thromboplastin  Local-Squibb,  235;  Thrombo- 
plastin Local-Squibb.  20  cc.  Vial.  236;  Thromboplastin  Local-Squibb, 
Dental  Package,  six  4  cc.  vials,  236;  Thvroxin  (Squibb).  443; 
Thyroxine  Crude,  444;  Thyroxine  Tablets,  0.2  mg. ;  0.4  mg.;  0.8 
mg. ;  and  2.0  mg..  444;  Typhoid  Vaccine  Combined,  Immunizing. 
416;  Typhoid  Vaccine  (Immunizing).  413;  Viosterol  in  Oil-Squibb, 
474. 

Stearns,  Frederic  &  Co..  Detroit.  Mich.^Insulin-Stearns,  328;  Insulin- 
Stearns.  10  Units,  5  cc ;  20  Units.  5  cc;  40  Units,  5  cc;  10 
LTnits.  10  cc;  20  Units,  10  cc. ;  40  Units,  10  cc;  80  Units,  10  cc; 
100  Units,  10  cc,  328;  Neo-Synephrin  Hydrochloride,  224;  Neo- 
Synephrin  Hydrochloride  Emulsion  (Aromatic).  225;  Neo-Synephrin 
Hydrochloride  Jelly.  225;  Solution  Neo-Synephrin  Hydrochloride,  0.25 
Per   Cent;    1    Per   Cent,   225. 

Sterisol  Ampoule  Corp.,  The,  37-02  Northern  Blvd.,  Long  Island 
City,  N.  Y. — Sterisol  Ampoule  Dextrose,  5%,  in  Physiological  Solu- 
tion of  Sodium  Chloride,  159;  Sterisol  Ampoule  Physiological  Solu- 
tion   of    Sodium    Chloride,    342. 

Stevenson  Mineral  Oil  Co.,  Coshocton,  Ohio. — Stevenson's  Heavy  Rus- 
sian Mineral  Oil   (Mint  Flavored),  485. 

Supplee-Wills-Jones  Milk  Co..  1523  N.  26th  St.,  Philadelphia,  Penna.— 
Supplee  B.  Acidophilus   Milk,   278. 

Tailby-Nason  Company,  Boston,  Mass. — Nason's  Palatable  Cod  Liver 
Oil,  460. 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  555 

Takamine  Laboratory,  Inc.,  Clifton,  N.  J. — Hirathiol,  434. 

Terrell's  Laboratories,  Medical  Arts  Bldg.,  Fort  Worth,  Texas. — 
Rabies  Vaccine   (Phenolized),   389. 

UcoLiNE  Products  Co.,  509  S.  Franklin  St.,  Chicago,  111. — Ucoline  Cal- 
cium Phosphate  Cocoa  Wafers,  151;  Ucoline  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concen- 
trate, 466;  Ucoline  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Tablets,  467;  Ucoline 
Standardized   Cod  Liver  Oil,  462. 

Ulmer  Laboratories,  416  S.  Sixth  St.,  Minneapolis,  Minn. — Ampoules 
Biliposol  Solution,   2  cc,   129;   Biliposol,   129. 

Ulmer  Pharmacal  Co.,  412  S.  Sixth  St.,  Minneapolis,  Minn. — Sodium 
Morrhuate  5%  Solution  with  Benzyl  Alcohol  (Ulmer),  5  cc;  20 
cc.   Vials,  432. 

Upsher  Smith  Company,  529  S.  Seventh  St.,  Minneapolis,  Minn. — 
Pyrethrum   Ointment,    347. 

U.  S.  Standard  Products  Co.,  Woodworth,  Wis. — Ampoule  Solution 
Quinine  and  Urea  Hydrochloride,  0.5  Gm.,  1  cc,  485;  Ampule  Com- 
pound Solution  of  Calcium  Gluconate  10%,  10  cc,  U.  S.  S.  P.  Co., 
150;  Ampuls  Solution  Caffeine  Sodio-Benzoate,  2  cc,  153;  Ampul 
Solution  Sodium  Cacodylate,  0.2  Gm.  (3  grains);  0.34  Gm.  (5 
grains);  0.45  Gm.  (7  grains),  5  cc,  95;  Ampules  Solution  Sodium 
Cacodylate,  0.2  Gm,  (3  grains);  0.32  Gm.  (5  grains);  0.45  Gm.  (7 
grains),  1  cc,  95;  Antimeningococcic  Serum  Polyvalent,  381;  Bismuth 
Salicylate  in  Oil-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.,  134;  Dextrose  Solution,  25  Gm.. 
50  cc;  50  Gm.,  100  cc,  160;  Diphtheria  Antitoxin  Refined  and  Con- 
centrated, 485;  Diphtheria  Toxin-Antitoxin  Mixture,  0.1  L-f-  Non- 
Sensitizing  (Sheep),  391;  Diphtheria  Toxin  for  Schick  Test  and 
Control,  420;  Diphtheria  Toxoid-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co..  401;  Diphtheria 
Toxoid,  Alum  Precipitated,  Refined,  405;  Epinephrin  Hydrochloride 
Solution  1:1,000  (U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.),  224;  Epinephrin  Powder- 
Wilson,  224;  Erysipelas  Streptococcus  Antitoxin  (Refined  and  Con- 
centrated), 375;  Magnesium  Sulfate  25%  in  5  cc.  Ampuls,  485; 
Normal  Horse  Serum,  366;  Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride,  50  cc.  Bottle,  342;  Physiological  Solution  of  Sodium 
Chloride,  100  cc  Bottle,  342;  Pollen  Extracts-U.  S.  S.  P.  Co.,  46; 
Polyanaerobic  Antitoxin  (Tetanus-Gas-Gangrene)  Refined  and  Con- 
centrated, 371;  Rabies  Vaccine  (Killed  Virus)  Semple  (U.  _S.  S.  P. 
Co.),  389;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  the  Dick  Test, 
421;  Scarlet  Fever  Streptococcus  Toxin  for  Immunization,  397; 
Smallpox  Vaccine  (Vaccine  Virus),  485;  Tetanus  Antitoxin,  485; 
Typhoid  Paratyphoid  Vaccine  Combined,  416;  Typhoid  Vaccine,  413. 

V-A.LENTINE  Company,  Inc.,  Richmond,  Va. — Solution  Liver  Extract- 
Valentine,   312. 

Wagner's  Sons  Co.,  The  W.  T.,  1920-1926  Race  St..  Cincinnati,  Ohio.— 
Wagner's  Artificial  Vichy,  485;  Wagner's  Artificial  Vichy  Citrated, 
485. 

Wall  Chemicals,  Inc.,  1059-1065  W.  Grand  Blvd.,  Detroit,  Mich.— 
Walco   Ethylene    for   Anesthesia,    51. 

Wallace  &  Tiernan  Products,  Inc.,  Belleville,  N.  J. — Azochloramid, 
243;  Azochloramid  Buffered  Saline  Mixture  (vials  containing  azo- 
chloramid 0.3;  1.14;  0.6;  2.25  Gm.),  244;  Azochloramid  Solution  in 
Triacetin,    1:  125,   244. 


556  INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS 

Werner  Drug  &  Chemical  Co.,  914  Race  St.,  Cincinnati,  Ohio. — Phena- 
caine-Werner,    65. 

West   Disinfecting   Co.,   Long  Island   City,   N.    Y. — Phenoco,    174. 

White  Laboratories,  Inc.,  Newark,  N.  J. — White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Con- 
centrate Capsules,  3  minims,  466;  White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate 
(Liquid),  465;  White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate,  Liquid,  Vials, 
5  cc,  467;  White's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate,  Liquid,  Vials,  50  cc, 
466;   White's  Cod  Liver   Oil  Concentrate,   Tablets,  467. 

Wilder  Co.,  Inc.,  The,  P.  O.  Box  132,  Richmond,  Va. — Tablets  Digitalis- 
Wilber,    1 14    grains,    180;    Tincture   Digitalis-Wilber,    186. 

Wilson  Laboratories,  4221-4225  S.  Western  Ave.,  Chicago,  Illinois. — 
Epinephrin  Hydrochloride  Solution-Wilson,  224;  Epinephrin-Wilson, 
224;   Pituitary  Solution   U.    S.   P.    (Wilson),   336. 

WiNTHROP  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.,  170  Varick  St.,  New  York,  N.  Y. — 
Adalin,  147;  Adalin  Tablets,  5  grains  (0.3  Gm.),  147;  Agurin,  477; 
Alumnol,  48;  Alypin,  53;  Ampules  Chaulmestrol,  1  cc;  3  cc,  163; 
Ampules  Ephedrine-Novocain  Solution,  1  cc;  2  cc,  69;  Ampules 
Luminal-Sodium  (Powder),  2  grains;  5  grains,  116;  Ampules 
Luminal  Sodium  Solution  in  Ethylene  Glycol,  2  cc,  116; 
Ampules  Novocain  Solution,  1  per  cent,  2  cc,  68;  Ampules  Novo- 
cain Solution,  10  per  cent,  2  cc.  (For  Spinal  Anesthesia),  68; 
Ampules  Novocain  Solution,  1  per  cent,  with  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:  50,000;  1  cc,  2  cc,  3  cc,  6  cc,  68:  Ampules  Novocain 
Solution  2  per  cent  with  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  1:20,000, 
1  cc,  3  cc,  6  cc,  69-69;  Ampules  Salyrgan  Solution,  1  cc,  2  cc, 
298-299;  Ampules  Solution  Novocain,  2  per  cent,  3  cc,  68;  Ampules 
Sterile  Crystals  Novocain  for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  50  mg. ;  100  mg. ; 
120  mg. ;  150  mg.  and  200  mg.,  68;  Ampules  Sterile  Solution 
Novocain,  20  per  cent,  1.5  cc. ;  20  per  cent,  5  cc,  68;  Ampules 
Sterile  Solution  Novocain  20  per  cent  with  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  1:9,000,  1.5  cc;  5  cc,  68;  Ampules  Suprarenin  Powder, 
0.05  Gm.,  223;  Ampules  Suprarenin  Solution,  223;  Ampules 
Triphal,  0.025  Gm.;  0.1  Gm.,  240;  Anaesthesine,  IZ;  Aristol,  249; 
Benzosol,  172;  Capsules  Luminal-Sodium,  5  grains,  116;  Chaul- 
mesterol,  163;  Creosotal-Winthrop,  171;  Diodrast,  261;  Diodrast 
Sterile  Solution  (35  per  cent  weight/volume),  10  cc;  20  cc.  size, 
262;  Duotal,  172;  Duotal  Tablets,  5  grains,  172;  Elixir  of 
Luminal,  115;  Elixir  of  Pyramidon,  346;  Emulson  Mesurol, 
20  per  cent,  136;  Granules  Protargol  Compound,  426;  Holo- 
caine,  65;  Holocaine  Solution,  1  per  cent,  65;  lothion,  252; 
lothion  Oil,  252;  Luminal,  115;  Luminal  Capsules,  IJ^  grains,  116; 
Luminal  Sodium,  115;  Luminal-Sodium  Tablets,  ^;  ^;  IJ^  grains, 
116;  Melubrin,  345;  Mesotan,  357;  Mesurol,  136;  Neosalvarsan,  87; 
Neosalvarsan,  0.15  Gm.;  0.3  Gm.;  0.45  Gm.;  0.6  Gm.;  0.75  Gm.; 
0.9  Gm.;  1.5  Gm. ;  1.8  Gm. ;  3.0  Gm ;  4.5  Gm.,  87;  Novaspirin,  356; 
Novaspirin  Tablets,  5  grains,  357;  Novasurol,  294;  Novasurol 
Ampules,  294;  Novocain,  68;  Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets,  0.2 
Gm.,  69;  Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets.  0.05  Gm.,  69;  Novocain 
(0.125  Gm.)  and  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.125  mg.),  69; 
Novocain  Hypodermic  Tablets,  0.02  Gm..  with  1-Suprarenin  Syn- 
thetic Bitartrate,  0.02  mg.,  69;  Novocain  (0.1  Gm.)  and  1-Suprarenin 
Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.25  mg.)  Hypodermic  Tablets,  69;  Novocain 
0.02  Gm.)  and  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.05  mg.)  Hypo- 
dermic Tablets,  69;  Novocain  (0.05  Gm.)  and  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic 
Bitartrate  (0.083  mg.)  Hypodermic  Tablets,  69;  Novocain  (0.06 
Gm.)  and  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate  (0.06  mg.)  Hypodermic 
Tablets,  69;  Novocain  (0.08  Gm.)  and  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitar- 
trate (0.06  mg.)  Hypodermic  Tablets,  69;  Novocain  Solution,  1  Per 
Cent  Ampules,  69;  Orthoform,  74;  Phanodorn,  113;  Phanodorn 
Tablets,    3   grains,    114;    Protargol,   426;    Pyramidon,    346;   Pyramidon 


INDEX     TO     DISTRIBUTORS  557 

Winthrop  Chemical  Co.   (Continued) 

Tablets,  Ij/^  grains;  5  grains,  346;  Sabromin,  147;  Sabromin  Tab- 
lets, 8  grains,  148;  Sajodin,  260;  Sajodin  Tablets,  1;  8  grains,  260; 
Salophen,  341;  Salvarsan,  82;  Salvarsan,  0.1  Gm.;  0.2  Gm. ;  0.3 
Gm.;  0.4  Gm.;  0.5  Gm.;  0.6  Gm.;  1  Gm.;  1.2  Gm. ;  2  Gm.;  3  Gm., 
Tubes,  82;  Salyrgan,  298;  Skiodan,  266;  Silver-Salvarsan,  89;  Silver- 
Salvarsan,  0.1  Gm.;  0.15  Gm.;  0.2  Gm.;  0.25  Gm. ;  0.3  Gm.;  0.6 
Gm.  Ampules,  89;  Spirosal,  359;  Sterile  Ampules  Novocain  Crystals 
for  Spinal  Anesthesia,  '3U0  mg. ;  500  mg.,  69;  Sterile  Solution 
Skiodan  (40  per  cent  by  volume),  267;  Sulfarsphenamine-Winthrop, 
91;  Sulfarsphenamine-Winthrop.  0.1  Gm.;  0.15  Gm.;  0.3  Gm. ;  0.45 
Gm.;  0.6  Gm.;  0.75  Gm.;  0.9  Gm.;  3.0  Gm.  Ampules,  91;  Supra- 
renin,  223;  Suprarenin  Solution,  1:1,000,  223;  Tablets  Alypin,  Ys 
grain,  54;  Tablets  Novocain,  1  grain,  69;  Tablets  Novocain,  0.01 
Gm.  with  1-Suprarenin  Synthetic  Bitartrate,  0.2  mg.,  69;  Tablets 
Skiodan,  1  Gm.,  267;  Tablets  Suprarenin,  223;  Tablets  Theocin,  ly^ 
grains,  480;  Tablets  Theocin  Soluble,  2;.4  grains,  480;  Tablets 
Tutocain,  0.03  Gm.;  0.1  Gm.;  0.05  Gm.,  71;  Tablets  Tutocain,  0.03 
Gm.  with  Suprarenin,  0.15  mg.;  0.06  mg.,  71;  Tablets  Tutocain, 
0.05  Gm.  with  Suprarenin.  0.125  mg.,  71;  Tannigen,  440;  Theocin, 
480;  Theocin  Soluble,  480;  Triphal  240;  Tutocain,  71;  Veronal, 
103;  Veronal-Sodium,  120;  Veronal-Sodium  Tablets,  5  grains,  120; 
Veronal  Tablets,  5  grains,  103;  Winthrop  Tablets  of  Salophen,  5 
grains,    341;   Winthrop   Viosterol  in  Oil,  474. 

Wyeth  &  Brother,  Inc.,  John,  1118  Washington  Ave.,  Philadelphia, 
Penna. — Ampoule  Solution  Dextrose,  25  Gm.  in  50  cc. ;  50  Gm.  in 
100  cc,   160;   Wyeth's  Capsules  Digitalis  Leaf,   Defatted,    180. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL     INDEX     TO     PROPRIE- 
TARY    AND     UNOFFICIAL     ARTICLES 
NOT     INCLUDED     IN     N.N.R. 

The  references  given  below  include :  first,  the  date  of  original 
publication  of  the  article  in  The  Journal  A.  M.  A.,  if  it  appeared 
there ;  and,  second,  for  the  benefit  of  those  that  do  not  have 
access  to  files  of  The  Journal,  the  place  where  the  description 
may  be  found  in  other  publications :  "Reports  of  the  Council 
on  Pharmacy  and  Chemistry,"  "Propaganda  for  Reform," 
volumes  1  and  2,  and  "Reports  of  the  A.  M.  A.  Chemical 
Laboratory."  Some  reports  have  appeared  in  The  Journal 
but  not  in  the  reports  and  vice  versa.  Council  reports  include 
reports  on  articles  that  have  been  considered  by  the  Council, 
either  at  the  request  of  the  manufacturers  or  on  the  Council's 
own  initiative.  The  names  of  the  manufacturers  (or  their 
agents)  follow  the  names  of  the  preparations,  except  in  those 
instances  in  which  a  drug  is  discussed  in  general,  without 
reference  to  the  product  of  any  particular  manufacturer. 

Abican  (Rio  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  13,  1915,  p.  606;  Reports 

Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1914,   p.    99;    Propaganda,    vol.    1,   p.   43. 
Abscess  Sero  (California  Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal, July   5,    1924,  p.   58. 
Acetonyl   (Upjohn  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  20,   1933,  p.   1597;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933,   p.   29. 
Acet-Phenetidin     Compound,     P.-M.     Co.,    Tablets     (Pitman-Moore     Co.), 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1918,  p.  7Z. 
Acetylsalicylic  Acid,  L.  &   F.  (Lehn  &  Fink),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1923,  p.  9. 
Acidophilus    Bacillus   Blocks-Mulford    (Sharp   &    Dohme),   The   Journal, 

Dec.  22,  1934,  p.  1947;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  7. 
Acidophilus   Bacillus    Liquid-Mulford    (Sharp    &   Dohme),    The  Journal, 

Dec.  22,  1934,  p.  1947;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  7. 
Acriviolet     (National    Aniline     &    Chemical    Co.,    Inc.),    The    Journal, 

Feb.  6,   1932,  p.  480;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  7. 
Acterol   (Mead  Johnson  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   Oct.   5,    1929,  p.   1067. 
Activin  (Ernst  Bischoff,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  May  11,  1929,  p.  1783. 
Adalin-Luminal     Tablets     (Wintlirop     Chemical     Co.),     Re,ports     Council 

Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1922,   p.    7. 
Adex  Tablets,  Squibb  (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  March  19, 

1932,    p.    983;    Reports    Council   on   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1932,    p.    69; 

1934,  p.   122. 
Adrenal   Comp.   Vaginal    Suppositories    (H.   K.   Mulford   &   Co.),   Reports 

Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1923,   p.   10. 
Adrenalinated     Tricalcine     (Laboratoire    des     "Produits     Scientia")     The 

Journal,  March  14,  1925,  p.  836;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1925,  p.  80. 
Adropsedema   (Van  Seaton  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.   10,  1925, 

p.   1152. 
Aerosan  Tablets  (Aerosan  Co.  of  America),  The  Journal,  Sept.  8,  1928, 

p.   727;    Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem.,   1928,   p.  7. 
Afsal   (S.   Lewis  Summers),   The  Journal,  Oct.   7,   1922,  p.   1264. 
Agar  Agar   Wafers,  Mansfield,   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1935, 

p.   15. 
Agar-Gran   (Freeda  Pharmacy) ;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933, 

p.  7. 
Agar-lac    (E.   Fougera   &    Co.,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   Nov.   14,    1914,   p. 

1777;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem,,   1914,  p.   124;  Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.   10. 


ii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Agar-Mtdsion    (Physicians    &    Hospitals     Supply    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1928,   p.   8. 
Agarol  Compound  (Wm.  R.  Warner  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  May  30, 

1925,  p.    1682;  Reports  Chem.    Lab.,   1924-5,  p.  20. 
Agmel   (Maguey  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.   12,   1912,  p.  1392. 
Ago-Cholan   (E.  Bilhuber),  Thk  Journal,   Sept.   10,   1927,  p.  901. 
Agrilin   (Lehn    &   Fink,  Inc.),   The  Journal,   March   14,    1925,   p.   837; 

May  30,   1925,  p.   1682;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1924-5,  p.  20;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1925,   p.   7. 
Albargin  (H.  A.  Metz  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  25,  1923, 

p.  677;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem,   1923,  p.   10. 
Albasil    (Ford  Pharmacal  Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1931, 

p.  8. 
Albolene,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1935,  p.   16. 
Albolene,   Liquid   (McKesson  &   Robbins),   The  Journal,  July  26,  1913, 

p.  296;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem,,   1916,  p.  65;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   106. 
Alborum   (The  Whitehouse  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12, 

1914,  p.   2148;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1914,  p.   129. 
Albuminate  of  Iron,   Solution   of,  and  Elixir  Paraldehyd    (Robinson-Pettet 

Co.,  Inc.),   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1935,   p.   18. 
Albutesta   (Menley  &  James),  The  Journal,  Nov.   1,   1930,  p.  1347. 
Alcresta    Dental  Lotion-Lilly    (Eli   Lilly   &   Co.),  The  Journal,   Oct.  29, 

1921,  p.   1441. 
Alcresta  Ipecac  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  20,   1917,  p.  1373; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1917,  p.  62;   Propaganda,  vol.   2, 

p.   153. 
Aletrin,  The  Journal,  Nov.   13,   1909,  p.   1655;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1909,    p.   135. 
Aletris  Compound,  Elixir   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1912,  p.  46. 
Aletris   Compound,   Elixir    (Ray  Chemical   Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.   46. 
Aletris    Cordial    (Rio   Chemical    Co.),   The   Journal,    Oct.    17,    1914,    p. 

1411;   Feb.  13,  1915,  p.  606;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914. 

p.  99;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  43. 
"Aleuronat"    (Glogau   &   Co.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,   1931, 

p.  9. 
Alfatone    (Norwich    Pharmacal    Company),    The  Journal,   Aug.    7,    1915, 

p.   548;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.  62;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   28. 
Alimentary    Elixir    of    Beef,    Hart's    (E.    J.    Harts    &    Co.,    Ltd.),    The 

Journal,  April  7,  1928,  p.  1117;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1928,  p.    33. 
Alkalithia    (Keasbey  and  Mattison  Company),   Reports  Council  Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1919,  p.  65;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  242. 
Alkalol    (Alkalol    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    6,    1915,    p.    1665;    Reports 

Chem.   Lab.,   1915,  p.   110. 
Alka    Water     (Carl    H.    Schultz    Co.),    The    Journal,    Oct.    31,    1931, 

p.   1301;    Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem.,   1931,  p.   10. 
Alleotone  (B.  F.  Copeland),  The  Journal,  Feb.   1,  1908,  p.  379;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,   p.   264. 
AUonal-Roche     (Hoffmann-LaRoche     Chemical     Works),     The    Journal, 

March  29,    1924,    p.    1066;    June    12,    1926,    p.    1853;    May  25,    1929, 

p,   1783;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1926,  p.  7. 
Alpha-Dinitrophenol,   The  Journal,  Feb,   17,   1934,  pp,  542,  562. 
Alpha-Lobelin   (Ernst  Bischoff  Co,,  Inc.),   The  Journal,  June   17,  1933, 

p.   1933;  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  9. 
Alpha-Naphco     (Carel     Laboratories),     The    Journal,    June     30,     1934, 

p.  2184;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1934,  p.   12. 
Alpha-Naphco  Camphor  Nasal  Unguent   (Carel  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal,   June    30,    1934,    p.    2184;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1934,  p,   12, 
Alpha-Naphco  Cones   (Carel  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  June  30,  1934, 

p,   2184;   Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem,,    1934,    p,    12, 
Alpha-Naphco  Menthol  Suppositories   (Carel  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 

June    30,    1934,    p.    2184;    Reports    Council    Pharm,    &    Chem.,    1934. 

p.  12. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  iii 

Alpha-Naphco   Rectal    Suppositories    (Carel    Laboratories),    The  Journal, 

June    30,    1934,    p.    2184;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chera.,    1934, 

p.    12. 

Alpha-Naphco    Zinc    Stearate    Camphor    Ointment    (Carel    Laboratories), 

The  Journal,  June   30,    1934,   p.   2184;    Reports  Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1934,  p.   12. 
Alpha-Naphco  Zinc  Stearate  Powder  (Carel  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 
June    30,    1934,    p.    2184;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1934, 

p.    12. 
Alpha    Naphthol    Camphor    Oil     (Carel)      (Carel    Laboratories),    Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1934,   p.   16. 
Alphozone  (Frederick  Stearns  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1916,  p.  SO;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  99. 
Alqua  Water  (Shasta  Water  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  31,  1931,  p.  1301; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1931,  p.   10. 
Alucol  (The  Wander  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  9,  1928,  p.  1871;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1928,   p.  9. 
Amazine  (Southwest  Medical  Supply  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  20,  1930, 

p.   1933. 
Ambrine,  The  Journal,  April  7,  1917,  p.   1057;  May  19,  1917,   p.   1497; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1917,  p.  20;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.    330. 
American    Ichthyol     (Sulfo-Ichthyolate    of    Ammonium)     (American    Ich- 

thyol  Syndicate),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  74. 
Amertan  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  7. 
Amidopyrine    and    Barbital,    Combinations    of,    The    Journal,    Aug.    31, 

1929,  p.  713. 
Amidopyrine    and    the    Barbituric   Acid    Derivatives,    The    Relation   of,    to 

Granulocytopenia,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1935,    p.    101. 
Aminoacetic   Acid,   Reports  Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1935,   p.    18. 
Amiodoxyl  Benzoate-Abbott   (Abbott  Laboratories),  The  Journal,   March 

19,   1932,  p.  983;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  56. 
Ammonium    Hypophosphite,    Reports    Council    Pharm.     &    Chem.,     1916, 

p.   51;   Propaganda,    vol.   2,  p.   98. 
Ammonium     Ichthyolate-Dayton     (Dayton     Chem.     Co.),     The    Journal, 

March    31,    1928,    p.    1039;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1928 

p.    10. 
Ammonium     Ichthyolate-Meadows     ("Ichty-Amon")      (Meadows     Chemical 

Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1928,  p.   12. 
Ammonol    (Ammonol    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    3,    1905,    p. 

1791;  Feb.  2,  1918,  p.  337;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8, 

p.    7;    Propaganda,   ed.   9,    p.   9;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.    393. 
Amniotin  (E.  R.  Squibb  &   Sons),  The  Journal,  August  31,  1935,  p.  667. 
Amniotin   Capsules    (E.   R.   Squibb   &   Sons),  The  Journal,  August  31, 

1935,   p.   667. 
Amniotin   in    Oil    (E.    R,    Squibb    &    Sons),    The   Journal,   August   31, 

1935,  p.  667. 
Amniotin  Pessaries    (E.   R.   Squibb   &   Sons),  The  Journal,   August  31, 

1935,  p.  667. 
Amolin  Deodorant   Powder   (Amolin  Chemical    Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb. 

22,   1908,  p.  626;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  63. 
Ampoule     Calcium     Chloride     10%     (Lakeside     Lab's.),     The     Journal, 

March  21,    1936,   p.    1008;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1936, 

p.  9. 
Ampoule  No.   61    Sodium   Salicylate   ISJ^    grains    (Lakeside   Laboratories, 

Inc.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  4,  1930,  p.  31;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,    1929,   p.   8. 
Ampoule    No.    59    Sodium    Iodide    15^     grains     (Lakeside    Laboratories, 

Inc.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  4,  1930,  p.  31;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,   1930,  p.  8. 
Ampoule   No.    66X    Sodium    Salicylate,    Sodium   Iodide    155^    grains    each 

(Lakeside    Laboratories,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   Jan.    4,    1930,   p.    31; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,  p.  8. 
Ampoule  No.  66  Sodium  Salicylate,   Sodium  Iodide  and  Colchicine   (Lake- 
side Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  4,  1930,  p.   31;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1929,  p.  8. 
Ampoule  No.   50  Iron  and  Arsenic    (Iron  Cacodylate)    1   grain    (Lakeside 

Laboratories,    Inc.),    The   Journal,    Jan.    4,    1930,    p.    31;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1929,  p.  8. 


iv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Ampoules  Sodium   Cacodylate  for  Intravenous  Use-P.   D.    &   Co.    (Parke. 

Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  7,  1932,  p.  1654;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  7. 
Ampule  Preparations,  Report  on   Sterility  of,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1935,  p.   111. 
Ampules    Sodium   Cacodj'late   75^    grains    (0.5   Gm.),    5   cc,    (For   Intra- 
venous Use);   15J^  grains  (1.0  Gm.).     For  Intravenous  Use  (Cheplin 

Biological   Lab's),    The  Journal,   Dec.   23,    1933,   p.    2050;    Reports 

Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1933,  p.    13. 
Amyl  Valerate,  The  Journal,   Oct.   13,   1924,  p.    1941;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1924,   p.    76. 
Amylzyme  (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  17,  1925,  p.  220; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1921,  p.  72;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1925,   p.    19. 
Anadol    (Wheeler    Chemical   Works),    The  Journal,    May   21,    1919,    p. 

1704;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  245. 
Analutos    and    Analutos    Tablets    (Royal    Pharmaceutical    Works,    Meppel, 

Holland),    The   Journal,    Feb.    20,    1915,   p.    684;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1915,  p.    135;    Reports   Chem.   Lab.,    1915,  p.    131. 
Anasarcin    (Anasarcin    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    May   4,    1907,    p. 

1535;    Dec.    8,    1917,    p.    1992;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1905-8,  p.  54;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  11;  Propaganda,  vol.   2,  pp.  383, 

407. 
Anayodin  (Ernst  Bischoff  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  5,  1929,  p.  1065; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,   p.  9. 
Anderson    System   for    Treatment   of   Alcoholism    (The   Anderson    Labora- 
tories), Reports    Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  51. 
Androfort    (Richter),  The  Journal,   August  31,   1935,  p.   667. 
Androl    (Henning),  The  Journal,  August  31,   1935,  p.   667. 
Androstine-Ciba     (Ciba    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    20,    1936,    p.    2150; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1936.  p.  10. 
Anedemin    (Anedemin    Chemical    Co.),    The  Journal,    May   4,    1907,   p. 

1535;    Dec.    8,    1917,    p.    1992;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1905-8,  p.  54;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.   11;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  383. 
Angler's    Emulsion     (Angler    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    Sept.    12, 

1914,  p.  962;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  48;  Reports 

Chem.   Lab.,   1914,   p.   55;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   169. 
Animasa  (Organotherapeutic  Corporation),   The  Journal,  July  10,  1926, 

p.  116;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  14. 
Anistamina     (M.    Olivetti),     Reports    Council     Pharm.     &     Chem.,     1915, 

p.    162. 
Anterior  Lobe  Sex  Hormone  Solution  (Rovin)    (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab.),  The 

Journal,   Feb.   25,   1933,  p.   574;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1933,  p.  166. 
Anterior    Pituitary    Desiccated-Lederle    (Lederle   Laboratories,   Inc.),   The 

Journal,  July    19,   1930,  p.  201;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1930,   p.  26. 
Anterior     Pituitary     Desiccated-P.-M.     Co.     (Pitman-Moore     Co.),     The 

Journal,  June  19,   1930,  p.  201;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,   p.    26. 
Anterior  Pituitary  Extract  Squibb  (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal, 

August  31,  1935,  p.  667. 
Antero-Pituitary    Co,    (Harrower   Laboratory,    Inc.),   The  Journal,    Oct. 

16,   1926,  p.   1322. 
"Anti-Cept"    (Anti-Cept    Co.),    The   Journal,    May    21,    1932,    p.    1808; 

Reports  Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  9. 
Antidiabeticum,     Bauer     (Sanin-Gesellschaft),     The    Journal,     July     30, 

1910,   p.   418;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.   267. 
Antidysenteric   Serum    (Farbwerke-Hoechst  Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,   p.   146. 
Antikamnia    (Antikamnia    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,   June    3,    1905, 

p.    1791;    Feb.    8,    1908,   p.    467;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1905-8,    p.    7;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,    to    1909,    p.    60;    Propaganda, 

vol.    1,  pp.   9,   268,   307. 
Antikamnia    and    Quinin    (Antikamnia    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal, 

July  1,   1905,  p.    55. 
Anti-Malta  Fever  Serum   (H.   K.  Mulford  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1917,  p.  136. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  v 

Antimeristem-Schmidt     (Laboratorium     W.     Schmidt),      The     Journal, 

March  8,   1913,  p.   766;   Dec.  6,   1919,  p.   1787;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.   408. 
Antiopin    (Dr.    K.    Yamada's   Chemical    Laboratory,   Kobe,   Japan,   Walter 

Grautoff,    New    York,    distributor),    The    Journal,    June    11,    1932, 

p.  2062;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  9. 
Antiphlogistine    (Denver    Chemical    Mfg.    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    1, 

1907,  p.  1875;   Feb.  2Z,   1918,  p.  557;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  409. 
Anti-Pneumococcic  Oil   (Eimer  and  Amend),  The  Journal,  Jan.   3,  1920, 

p.   46;    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1915,   p.   52;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  257. 
Antipneumococcic    Serum   Types    I    and    II    Containing    Heterophile    Anti- 
bodies-Lilly,  The  Journal,   Aug.   15,   1936,   p.  499;   Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1936,  p.   17. 
Antipneumococcic    Serum,    Types    I,    II    and    III,    and    Polyvalent,    The 

Journal,  April  5,  1924,  p.   1138;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1924,   p.   7. 
Antipneumococcic  Serum,  Combined,  Types  I,  II  and  III    (The  Gilliland 

Laboratories),  The  Journal,  April  5,  1924,  p.  1138;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  7. 
Antipneumococcic    Serum,   Polyvalent    (H.   K.    Mulford   Co.),   The  Jour- 
nal, April  5,  1924,  p.  1138;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924, 

p.   7. 
Antipneumococcus     Serum     (Farbwerke-Hoechst     Co.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1917,  p.   146. 
Antipneumococcus   Serum,   Polyvalent,  Types  I,  II  and  III   (The  Lederle 

Antitoxin    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    April    5,    1924,    p.    1138; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1924,   p.   7. 
Antiseptic    Powder,    Maignen    (Maignen    Institute),    The   Journal,    Nov. 

14,    1914,   p.    1778;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914,   p.    57; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.  19. 
Antiseptic  Powder,  Tyree's   (J.  S.  Tyree),  The  Journal,  Oct.  20,   1906, 

p.    1316;   Aug.   24,    1912,   p.   666;    March   30,    1918,   p.   949;   May   17, 

1919,    p.     1482;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1905-8,    p.    22; 

Propaganda,  vol.   1,  pp.  21,  404;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  462. 
Antiseptic   Tablets,    Clover    (Sharp    &    Dohme),    The  Journal,   Aug.   26, 

1911,  p.  755. 
Antistaphvlococcus    Serum    (Burroughs   Wellcome   &   Co.),   Reports   Coun- 
cil  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1917,  p.   137. 
Antistreptococcus    Serum,    Aronson's    (Schering    &    Glatz,    Inc.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Antistreptococcic    Serum    (Cutter    Laboratory),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1925,  p.   8. 
Antistreptococcic  Serum    (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  Feb.  15, 

1930,  p.  484;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  8. 
Antistreptococcic  Serum  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  IS,  1930. 

p.  484;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  8. 
Antistreptococcic    Serum     (Gilliland    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The    Journal 

Feb.  15,  1930,  p.  484;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  8. 
Antistreptococcic    Serum    (National    Drug   Co.),    The    Journal,    Feb.    15, 

1930,   p.   484;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1930,   p.   8. 
Antistreptococcic  Serum    (Parke,   Davis   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Feb.    15, 

1930,    p.   484;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  8. 
Antistreptococcic  Serum  Polyvalent   (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  The  Journal, 

Feb.   15,  1930,  p.  484;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  8. 
Antistreptococcic    Serum    Polyvalent    (Lederle    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,    Feb.   15,  1930,  p.  484;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1930,   p.   8. 
Antistreptococcic    Serum    Purified    and    Concentrated    (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.), 

The  Juornal,   Feb.    15,    1930,   p.   484;    Reports   Council    Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1930,  p.  8. 
Antistreptococcus    Serum    "Hoechst"     (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1917,  p.   146. 
Anti-Syphilitic  Compound   Sweeny   (National  Laboratories  of  Pittsburgh), 

The   Journal,   April    3,    1920,    p.   965;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,    1920,   p.   12;    Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.    268,  330. 
Antithermoline    (G.    W.    Carnrick    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    1,    1913, 

p.   1649. 


vi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Antithyroid  Preparations,   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1918,  p.  50; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   202. 
Antithyroidin-Moebius   (Merck  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1918,  p.   SO;    Propaganda,   vol.  2,   p.  202. 

Antitoxoid    in    Tuberculosis     (California    Endocrine    Foundation    Labora- 
tories), The  Journal,  July   5,   1924,  p.   58. 
Anti-Tuberculous    Lymph    Compound,    Sweeny    (National    Laboratories    of 

Pittsburgh),   The  Journal,  April   3,   1920,  p.  965;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1920,  p.   12;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  266. 
Antityphoid     Bile    Vaccine     (Besredka),    The    Joural,     Oct.     21,     1922, 

p.   1446. 
Antiustio  (Frederick  Laboratory),  The  Journal,  Nov.  16,  1929,  p.  1559; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  11. 
Antophysin    (Winthrop    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    Aug.    31,    1935, 

p.   667. 
Antuitrin-G     (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    Aug.     31,    1935, 

p.   667. 
Antuitrin-S     (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    Aug.    31,    1935, 

p.   667. 
Anusol   Suppositories    (Schering   &   Glatz,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   Oct.   2, 

1909,  p.  1112;   Oct.  11,  1913,  p.  1392;   Jan.  31,   1914,  p.  395;  March 

9,    1918,    p.    719;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.    to    1909,    p.    32;    Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  pp.  227,  280,  281;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  182. 
Aloan   (H.  A.  Metz  Laboratories).  The  Journal,  Nov.  8,  1924,  p.  1526; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924  p.  8. 
Apergols   (H.  K.   Wampole  Co.,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  Dec.    12,   1914,  p. 

2149;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1914,   p.    64;    Propaganda, 

vol.    1,  p.   26. 
Aphlegmatol    (G.    Giambalvo   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Aug.    21,    1920,   p. 

556;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1920,    p.    23;    Propaganda. 

vol.   2,  p.  273. 
Apiol,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1923,    p.    12. 
A.  P.  L.   (Ayerst,  McKenna  &  Harrison),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,    1935. 

p.   667. 
Apocactin  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  2,  1927,  p.  650. 
Aprotein    (John    Norton    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    18,    1922,   p.    1786; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1922,   p.    9. 
Aprotine    (John    Norton    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    18,    1922,    p.    1786; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1922,   p.   9. 
Aquazone     (Oxvgen     Water)      (Aquazone     Laboratories,     Inc.),     Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  50;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  290. 
Arbor  Vitae,   Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   38. 
ARC  Epilepsy   Remedy    (American  Remedy   Co.),  The  Journal,   Oct.   1. 

1927,  p.  944. 
Argyrol    (A.    C.    Barnes    Co.),   The  Journal,    March    17,    1928,    p.    849; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1928,  p.   13. 
Arhovin   (Schering  &  Glatz.  Inc.),  Reports  of   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1919,  p.    66;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    243. 

Aritine   (Southwest  Medical   Supply  Co.),   The  Journal,   Dec.  20,   1930, 

p.    1933. 
Armervenol   (Hille  Laboratories),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919, 

p.  82;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   249. 
Arrhenal    (E.    Fougera   &   Co.),    The  Journal,   Feb.   26,    1921,    p.   595; 

Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   492. 
Arro-Lin    (Arro-Lin   Chemical  Industries,   Inc.);   Reports   Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem.,   1933,  p.  20. 
Arsamine  (S.  Lewis  Summers),  The  Journal,  Sept.   1,   1928,  p.  664. 
Arsenauro   (Parmele   Chemical  Company),   The  Journal,   Oct.  21,   1922, 

p.   1446. 
Arsenic  and   Mercury,   Solution  of    (New  York  Intravenous  Laboratory), 

The    Journal,    Aug.    2,    1919,    p.    353;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1919,   p.  26;    Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.    231. 
Arseno-Meth.    Hyd.      See  Arsenic  and    Mercury,    Solution   of 
Arsenoven,    S.   S.    (S.    S.    Products   Co.)     The  Journal,   Aug.   2,    1919, 

p.  353;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  26;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  231. 
Arsphenoids  (Swan-Meyers  Co.),   The  Journal,  March  15,  1924,  p.  888. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  vii 

Arteriosclerotic    Serum     (Herradora)    for    Intramuscular    Use    (Scientific 

Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    April    28,    1923,    p.    1259;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1923,   p.   34. 
Arthritine   (Horovitz  Biochemical  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Dec.  21, 

1929,  p.    1974. 
Aseptikons    (Chinosol    Co.),    The    Journal,    Nov.    14,    1914,    p.    1778; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.   124;  Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  26. 
Aseptinol    (Aseptinol  Mfg  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  30,  1918,  p.  949; 

Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   401. 
Aseptones  (Scent-Ets  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  14,  1928,  p.  117;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1927,  p.   10. 
Asmoganglina    (Neother    Products    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    21,    1924, 

p.  2068;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   11. 
Aspatol    (Standard    Chemical    Co.,    Des    Moines,    Iowa),    The    Journal, 

Feb.  14.   1925,  p.  533;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  9; 

Reports   Chem.  Lab.,   1924-5,  p.   113. 
Aspirin    (The   Bayer    Co.,    Inc.),    The  Journal,   Jan.    20,    1917,   p.    213; 

April    13,    1918,    p.    1097;    June    12,    1920,    p.    1664;    May    14,    1921, 

p.    1356;   June    11,    1921,   p.    1697;    March   23,    1935,   p.    1005;    1009; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1916,  p.   43;    1935,  p.  29;    Propa- 

ganda,  vol.  2,  pp.  116,  347,  480. 
Aspiro-Lithine    (McKesson    &    Robbins),    The   Journal,    May    2S,    1910. 

p.   1803;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  281. 
Aspirophen   (Cellarius  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  21,  1911,  p.  210;  Reports 

Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1911,  p.   7;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  85. 
Asthma  Sero  (California  Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal, July  5,  1924,  p.  58. 
Asthmazine  (Horovitz  Biochemical  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Dec.  21, 

1929,  p.    1974. 
Asthmol   (Sagone  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  11,  1931,  p.  103;   Reports 

Council  Pharm.    &   Chem..    1931,   p.    12. 
Asthmol-phedrine  (Sagone  &   Co.),  The  Journal,  July  11,  1931,  p.   103; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1931,   p.    12. 
Asthmolvsin   (Agency  Dr.  Kade),  The  Journal,  Oct.   17,   1925,  p.   1234; 

March    12,    1927,    p.    858;    June   30,    1934,   p.    2184;    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  24. 
Atomidine    (Schiefflin    &    Co.),   The   Journal,    May    18,    1929,    p.    1679; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,  1929,  p.  12. 
Atophan   (Schering  &  Glatz.  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  9,   1919,  p.  427. 

Sept.  6,  1919,  p.  756;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  8; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.  313.  373,  419. 
Atoquinol-Ciba,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1935,   p.   34, 
Atussin   (Neother  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  21,    1924,  p.  2068 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,   1924,   p.   11. 
Atychol     (Oralee    Company),    The    Journal,    Aue.    24,     1929,    p.    611 

Reports  Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1929,  p.   15. 
Auto-Hemic  Serum  (L.  D.  Rogers),  The  Journal,  Feb.  14,  1920,  p.  477 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  409. 
Autolysin   (Autolysin  Laboratory),   The  Journal,  July  24,  1915,  p.  336 

Nov.    6,    1915,    pp.    1647,    1662;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,    p.    413. 
Autolyzed   Liver   Preparations,    Reports   Council    Pharm..    &    Chem.,    1935, 

p.  35. 
Avertin  (E  107),  The  Journal,  Sept.  8,  1928,  p.  745. 
Avertin  (Winthrop  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  11,  1933,  p.  443; 

June  24,  1933,  p.  2038. 
Avesan   (H)    (Avesan  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal.   Jan.  3,  1931,  p.  39. 
Azophene    (Mallophene)    (Mallinckrodt   Chemical  Works),   The   Journal, 

Dec.  30,  1933,  p.  2121;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933,  p.  21. 

Bacillus   Acidophilus    Culture    (B.    A.    Culture),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  p.  37. 
Bacillus    Acidophilus    Culture-Hollister-Stier,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  p.  44. 
Bard-Parker    Formaldehyde    Germicide     (Parker,    White    &    Heyl,    Inc.), 

The  Journal,  April  28,   1934,  p.   1138;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1934,  p.  26. 


viii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

B.  Iodine  (B.  Iodine  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  1,  1919,  p.  365; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1918,  p.  44;  Reports  Chem,  Lab., 

1918,  p.  19;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   198. 
B-Lac   (Battle  Creek  Food  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931, 

p.  23. 
B.  Oleum  Iodine   (B.  Iodine  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  1,  1919, 

p.    365;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918,    p.    44;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,   1918,  p.    19;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  198. 
Baby    Taeniafuge-Grape    (Grape    Capsule    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1915.   p.    174. 
Bacillicide     (Prophytol    Products    Co.),    The    Journal,     Nov.    14,    1914, 

p.   1778;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1914,  p.   125. 
Bacilli     Emulsion,     Bovine     (Farbwerke-Hoechst     Co.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,  p.  146. 
Bacilli     Emulsion,     Koch's     (Farbwerke-Hoechst     Co.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  146. 
Bacillus    Acidophilus    Cultures,    The   Journal,    Dec.    20,    1919,   p.    1895; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1919,  p.  51. 
Bacillus    Acidophilus    Couture    (Hollister-Stier),   Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1935,   p.   44. 
Bacillus     Acidophilus     Milk-Hermes     (Hermes-Groves    Dairy     Co.),     The 

Journal,  May  14,  1932,  p.  1744;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1932,  p.   11. 
Bacillus   Bulgaricus-Squibb,  The  Journal,  July   1,   1933,  p.  34;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1933,   p.  21. 
Bacillus   Vaccine,   Friedlander.      See  Friedlander  Bacillus  Vaccine. 
Bakurol   (Sharp  &  Dohme),   The  Journal,  July  10,   1915,  p.  175. 
Barbituric    Acid    Derivatives,    The    Relation    of    Amidopyrine   and   the,    to 

Granulocytopenia,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1935,    p.    101. 
Baume    Analgesique    Bengue     (Thos.    Leeming    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Dec.    14,   1912,   p.  2173;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   267. 
Baneberry,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1912,  p.    38. 
Bannerman's  Intravenous  Solution   (William  Bannerman),  The  Journal, 

May  31,   1913,  p.   1724;  Jan.  2,   1915,  p.  70;  July   17,   1926,  p.    191; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  131;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.   105. 
Baptisin,  The  Journal,  Nov.  13,  1909,  p.  1655;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1909,  p.   135. 
B.     Coli-Combincd-Bacterin     (The    Abbott    Laboratories),    The    Journal, 

June    22.    1918,    p.    1967;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1918, 

p.  11;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  185. 
Bar-che-co    (Barksdale    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    Dec.    18,    1926, 

p.  2114. 
Barbital   Compound<;     Intravenous  Use  of.   The  Journal,  July   15,   1933, 

p.  208;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &    Chem.,   1933,  p.   107. 
Bayer-205,  The  Journal,  May  23.  1925,  p.  1591;  May  13,  1933,  p.  1558. 
B.  B.  Culture  (B.  B.  Culture  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  July   1,  1933, 

p.   34;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  21. 
BCG  Vaccine,  The  Journal,  July  11,   1936,  p.   132. 
Bee,  Honey,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &   Chem..   1912,  p.  38. 
Bee  Venom,  The  Journal,  May  2,  1936,  p.   1588. 
Beef,  Extract,  Concentrated  Fluid   (Armour  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan. 

23,   1909,  p.  311;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  471. 
Beef  Extract,  Fluid   (Cibilis  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  23,  1909,  p.  311; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.    472. 
Beef    Extract.    (Toin   Special    (G.    H.    Hammond    &   Co.),  The  Journal, 

Jan.  23,   1909,  p.  311;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  472. 
Beef,    Extract    of.    Premier    (Libby,    McNeil    &    Libby),    The    Journal, 

Jan.   23,  1909,  p.   311;    Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  471. 
Beef    Extract,    Fluid,    "Rex"     (Cudahy    Packing    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Jan.  23,   1909,  p.   311;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  471. 
Beef    Extract    (Swift    &    Co.).    The   Journal,   Jan.    23,    1909,    p.    311; 

Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.   471. 
Beef   Juice,    Wyeth's    (John    Wyeth    &    Bro.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    20, 

1909,    p.    1754;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1909,    p.    137; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.    123. 
Befsal   (Synthetic  Organic  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  21,   1925, 

p.  611;  Report*  Chem.  Lab.,  1924-5,  p.  118. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  Ix 

Bell-ans  (Bell  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  24,  1909,  p.  569;  May  9, 
1914,  p.  1492;  Nov.  24,  1917,  p.  1815;  Feb.  23,  1918,  p.  557;  Reports 
Council  Pharra.  &  Chem.,  1909,  p.  108;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  pp. 
151,  282;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  pp.   380,   418. 

Benetol  (Bcnetol  Products  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923, 
p.    13. 

Benzyl   Alcohol-Van   Dyk    (Van   Dyk   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   April    17, 

1926,  p.   1233;  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1926,    p.   21. 
Benzyl   Benzoate   for   Therapeutic    Use-Van   Dyk   &   Co.    (Synthetic   Drug 

Corporation),  The  Journal,  April  17,  1926,  p.   1233;  Reports  Coun- 
cil   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1926,   p.   21. 
Benzyl   Benzoate-Abbott,   The  Journal,  March  4,   1933,  p.  661;   Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  22. 
Benzyl     Benzoate-Fritzsche,    The    Journal,    March    4,     1933,    p.     661; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1933,  p.  22. 
Benzyl-Benzoate-H.    W.    &    D.,    The   Journal,    March   4,    1933,    p.    661; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933,    p.    22. 
Benzyl  Benzoate-L.  A.  Van  Dyk,  20  per  cent,  Aromatic  (L.  A.  Van  Dyk), 

The  Journal,   March   19,    1927,  p.  944;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,    1927,  p.    11. 
Benzyl    Benzoate-L.   A.    Van   Dyk,   20   per  cent    (L.   A.   Van   Dyk),   The 

Journal,  March  19,  1927,  p.  944;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1927,  p.   11. 

Benzyl    Benzoate-Mallinckrodt,    The    Journal,    March    4,    1933,    p.    661; 

Reports  Council   Pharra,    &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  22. 
Benzyl    Benzoate-Merck,   The  Journal,   March  4,    1933,   p.   661;   Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  22. 
Benzyl   Benzoate-Seydel    (Seydel  Chemical   Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1931,   p.   27. 
Benzyl    Compounds,    The    Journal,    March    4,    1933,    p.    661;    Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &    Chem.,   1933,  p.   22. 
Benzyl   Fumarate- Abbott,  The  Journal,  March  4,   1933,  p.  661;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1933.   p.  22. 
Benzyl    Succinate-H.    W.    &    D.,    Tablets    of.    The   Journal,    March    4, 

1933,  p.  661;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  22. 
Benzyl   Succinate-Merck,   The  Journal,  March  4,   1933,  p.   661;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,   p.   22. 
Benzyl   Succinate-Seydel    (Seydel   Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem.,   1931,   p.   27. 
Benzylol    (Van    Dyk    &    Co.),   The  Journal,  .  April    17,    1926,    p.    1233; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1926,   p.   21. 
Benzyl-Viburnum  Compound  (Benzyl- Viburnum  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal,   Aug.    23,    1925,    p.    628;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1925,   p.   9. 
Berberin  Hydrochlorid,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1922,  p.   14. 
Betul-ol  (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12,  1914,  p.  2148; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.  62;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1914,  p.   74;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  27. 
Bichloridol    (H.    A.    Metz    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    Sept.    5, 

1925,  p.  764;  Dec.  21,   1929,  p.   1971;  Feb.  22,  1930,  p.  563;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  10. 
Bile    Salts,    Succinate    of    Soda    and    Phenolphthalein,    Capsules    of.    Fair- 
child    (Fairchild   Bros.   &  Foster),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1918,  p.    59;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   208. 
Biniodol   (Charles  C.  Yarbrough),  The  Journal,  Feb.  24,   1917,  p.  650; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1917,  p.   10;   Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1916,  p.   108;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.    121. 
Biosol     (Vito    Chemical    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    March    8,    1913, 

p.    767;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.   284. 
Biosterin     Ampules     (Adsole     Company     of    America),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1927,  p.   48. 
Bi-Oxo-Dyn    ("Bi-Oxo-Dyn"),    The    Journal,    Nov.    25,    1922,    p.    1867; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,   1922,   p.    15. 
Bismogenol    (E.   Tosse   &  Co.,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   March   19,   1927,  p. 

944;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1927,   p.   16. 
Bismoid  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  26,  1934,  p.  1761;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1934,  p.  28. 
Bismon    (Kalle    Color    and    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1921,  p.  12. 


X  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Bismuthal    (Langley   &  Michaels   Corp.),   The  Journal,  April   17,  1926, 

p.  1233;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  22. 
Bismuth  lodo-Resorcin  Sulphonate,  The  Journal,  Feb.  11,  1911,  p.  441; 

Reports   Chem.   Lab.,    1911,  p.    14. 
Bismuth  and  Iron   Citrate   Soluble    (Wellcome   Brand)    (Burroughs  Well- 
come &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1920,  p.  51. 
Bismuth    and    Lithium    Citrate    Soluble    (Wellcome    Brand)     (Burroughs 

Wellcome  &  Co.),  Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  51. 
Bismuthoidal     (E.     Fougera    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    20,    1931, 

p.   2104;    Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1931,   p.   34. 
Bismuth,   Opium  and    Phenol   Tablets,   The  Journal,  July  25,    1908,   p. 

330;  Dec.   17,   1910,  p.  2169;   May  6,  1911,  p.   1344;   Reports  Chem. 

Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  28;   1910,  p.  85;   1911,  p.  22. 
Bismuth,    Opium    and    Phenol    Tablets    (Hance    Bros.    &    White),    The 

Journal,   July   25,    1908,   p.   330;    Dec.    17,    1910,   p.   2169;   May   6, 

1911,   p.    1344;    Reports   Chem.   Lab.,   to    1909,   p.    28;    1910,   p.   85; 

1911.  p.  22. 
Bismuth,    Opium   and    Phenol   Tablets    (Wm.    S.    Merrell   Chemical   Co.), 

The  Journal,  July  25,  1908,  p.  330;  Dec.  17,   1910,  p.  2169;  May  6, 

1911,   p.    1344;    Reports   Chem.   Lab.,   to    1909,    p.   28;    1910,   p.   85; 

1911,  p.   22. 
Bismuth,   Opium  and  Phenol  Tablets    (Sharp   &   Dohme),  The  Journal, 

July  25,  1908,  p.  330;  Dec.  17,  1910,  p.  2169;  May  6,  1911,  p.  1344; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  28;   1910,  p.  85;  1911,  p.  22. 
Bismuth,  Opium  and  Phenol  Tablets  (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  The  Journal, 

July  25,  1908,  p.  330;  Dec.  17,  1910,  p.  2169;  May   6,  1911,  p.  1344; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  28;   1910,  p.  85;   1911,  p.  22. 
Bismuth,  Opium  and  Phenol  Tablets  (Truax,  Greene  &  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, July  25,  1908,  p.  330;  Dec.  17,  1910,  p.  2169;  May  6,  1911,  p. 

1344;   Reports  Chem.   Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  28;   1910,  p.  85;   1911,  p.22. 
Bismuth,  Opium  and  Phenol  Tablets  (H.  K.  Wampole  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The 

Journal,   July   25,    1908,    p.    330;    Dec.    17,    1910,   p.   2169;    May   6, 

1911,   p.    1344;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,   to    1909,   p.   28;    1910,   p.   85; 

1911,  p.   22. 
Bismuth,    Opium   and    Phenol   Tablets    (Wm.    R.    Warner    &   Co.),    The 

Journal,   July   25,    1908,    p.   330;    Dec.    17,    1910,   p.   2169;   May   6, 

1911,   p.    1344;    Reports   Chem.   Lab.,   to   1909,   p.   28;    1910,   p.   85; 

1911,  p.   22. 
Bismuth  Resorcinol  Compound,  Capsules   (Gross  Drug  Co.,  Inc.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.    139;   Propaganda,   vol.  2,  p.   157. 
BiSoDol  (BiSoDol  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  10,  1928,  p.  793;  Oct.  29, 

1932,  p.   1511;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,   p.   12. 
Bi-Taride    Tablets     (Germicidal    Products    Corporation),    The    Journal, 

Sept.  16,  1916,  p.  895;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  21. 
Bitter  Bark,  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  39. 
Bladder  Wrack,   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1912,  p.  39. 
Blandine    Laxative,    Mulford     (H.    K.    Mulford    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1914,  p.    136. 
Blaud  Capsules,   Frosst's   (C.  E.   Frosst   &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1915,  p.  164;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  56. 
Blaud,    Arsenic  and  Strychnine  Capsules,  Frosst's   (C.  E.  Frosst  &  Co.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.   164;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  56. 
Blaud's    Pills,    The  Journal,   April    17,    1915,    p.    1344;    Reports   Chem. 

Lab.,   1915,  p.  7. 
Blaudles  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1922. 

p.  17. 
Blue   Cohosh,    The   Journal,    Sept.    11,    1915,   p.    972;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  40. 
Blue    Label    Mineral    Water    (Carl    F.    Lauber,    Inc.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem,   1933,  p.  24. 
Borcherdt's    Malt,   Cod  Liver  Oil  and  Iron  Iodide   (Borcherdt  Malt  Ext. 

Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  25. 
Borcherdt's    Malt    Extract    with    Creosote     (Borcherdt    Malt    Ext.    Co.), 

Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933,    p.    25. 
Borcherdt's    Malt    Extract    with    Cascara    Sagrada    (Borcherdt    Malt   Ext. 

Co.),  Report  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  25. 
Borocaine    (Sharp    &    Dohme),    The   Journal,   Oct.    26,    1929,   p.    1309; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1929,   p.    16. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xi 

Borolyptol   (Palisade  Mfg.  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.   15,   1913,  p.   1812. 
Borosodine  (A.  Lumiere  Laboratories),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1924.   p.   IS. 
Borotetramine    (Takamine   Laboratories),   The   Journal,    Feb.    19,    1921, 

p.   538;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1921,  p.   13. 
Bovinine    (The   Bovinine    Co.),   The   Journal,    Nov.    20,    1909,   p.    1754; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1909,  p.  137;  1914,  p.  105;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  1,  p.  123;  The  Journal,  March  14,  1931,  p.  860;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1931,   p.   36. 
Brewers    Yeast-Harris    (The    Harris    Laboratories),    The   Journal,    Nov. 

3,   1934,  p.   1378;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1934,  p.  129. 
Brobor. — See  Episan. 
Bromhosal    (Abbott   Laboratories),  The  Journal,  July  22,   1933,  p.   280; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1933,  p.   100. 
Bromide     and     Acetanilide     Compound-Mulford,     Granular     Effervescent 

(H.  K.   Mulford  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  58. 
Bromides  with   Cypripedium  Compound    (Truax,   Greene   &   Co.),   Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   43. 
Bromides,    Peacock's    (Peacock    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    April    3, 

1915,   p.    1177;    March   2,    1918,    p.    643;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1915,  p.   24;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   28;    Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.   400. 
Bromidia   (Battle  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May   16,    1914,  p.   1573,  March 

2,    1918,    p.    642;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914,    p.    15; 

Propaganda,   vol.    1,    p.    31;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    399. 
Bromin-Iodin    Compound    (Bromin-Iodin    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal, 

June    4,    1910,    p.    1884;    Dec.    2Z,    1916,    p.    1956;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1916,   p.   40;   Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.    285;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.   2,  p.   97. 
Bromionyl  (Upjohn  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  20,  1933,  p.  1597;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1933,    p.   31. 
Bromionyl   with   Acetylsalicylic  Acid    (Upjohn   Co.),    The  Journal,   May 

20,    1933,   p.    1597;    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933,   p.    31. 
Bromionyl    with    Barbital    (Upjohn    Co.),    The   Journal,    May    20,    1933, 

p.   1597;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   31. 
Brom-I-Phos    (The    National    Drug    Co.),    The   Journal,   June    30,    1917, 

p.    2001;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1917,    p.    12;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,  1917,  p.  43;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   136. 
Bromo-Mangan    (Reinschild    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1915,  p.   165. 
Broom  Corn,   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,  p.   39. 
Bruschettini   Curative    Vaccine;    see    Curative   Vaccine    Bruschettini. 
Buchu,    Juniper    and    Acetate     Potassium,     Elixir     (Pitman-Moore    Co.), 

Reports    Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   167. 
Buchu    and    Hyoscyamus    Compound,    Elixir    of,    Tyree's    (J.    S.    Tyree), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.   167;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.   57. 
Bulgara    Tablets-H.    W.    &    D.     (Hynson,    Westcott    &    Dunning),    The 

Journal,  June  4,  1927,  p.   1831;  Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1927,    p.  20. 
Burnham's     Iodine     Ointment     (Burnham     Soluble     Iodine     Co.),     The 

Journal,   July    1,    1933,    p.    33;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1933,  p.  26. 
Burnham's  Soluble  Iodine   (Burnham  Soluble  Iodine  Co.),  The  Journal, 

July   1,   1933,  p.   33;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1933,  p.  26. 

Cactin,  now  Cactoid  (The  Abbott  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Sept.  21, 
1907,  p.  1021;  March  21,  1908,  p.  956;  April  4,  1908,  p.  1140; 
March  12,  1910,  p.  888;  Aug.  6,  1910,  p.  455;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1910,   p.   41;   Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.   37. 

Cactina  (Sultan  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  21,  1907,  p.  1021; 
March  21,  1908,  p.  956;  April  4,  1908,  p.  1140;  March  12,  1910, 
p.  888;  Aug.  6,  1910,  p.  455;  Jan.  19,  1918,  p.  185;  July  9,  1927. 
p.  138;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1910,  p.  41;  Propaganda, 
vol.   1,  p.  37. 

Cactus  Compound  Pills  (Heart  Tonic),  The  Journal,  April  29,  1916, 
p.  1387. 


xii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Cactus  Grandiflorus,  The  Journal,   Sept.  21,  1907,  p.   1021;   March  12, 

1910,  p.  888;  Jan.  7,  1911,  p.  26;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1910,  p.  40;   Propaganda,  vol  1,   p.   36. 
Calcidin  Abbott  (The  Abbott  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Sept.  7,  1907, 

p.  865;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  7. 
Calcidin    Tablets    (The    Abbott    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    Sept.    25, 

1920,  p.   892;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  465. 
Calcium  Cacodylate,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1925,  p.   12. 
Calcium     Chloride,     10%,     Ampoule     (Lakeside     Lab's),     The     Journal, 

March  21,   p.    1008;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1936,  p.   9. 
Calcium  Glycerophosphate,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  52. 
Calcium    Peroxide-R.    &    H,,    The    Journal,    April    22,    1933,   p.    1237; 

Reports   Council   Pharm,    &   Chem.,    1933,   p.  29. 
Calcium  Phenolsulfonate,   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  24. 
Calcylates  Compound,   Elixir,    The  Journal,  April  22,   1916,  p.   1307. 
Calcylates   Compounds,   Pulvoids    (The   Drug   Products    Co.),   The  Jour- 
nal, June  14,  1919,  p.  1784;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919, 

p.  19;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   226. 
Callaway's  Creosote,  De-Monohydrated    (Creo  Chemical   Distributing  Co.), 

The  Journal,   May   28,   1932,   p.   1884;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1932,  p.  14. 
Calmine   (The  Abbott  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Jan.  14,  1911,  p.  137; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.  286. 
Calomelol  and  Calomelol  Ointment  (Heyden  Chem,  Corp.),  The  Journal, 

Feb.  16,  1935,  p.  922;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem,,  1935,  p,  45. 
Calso   Water    (The   Calso   Co.),   The  Journal,   Oct.   31,    1931,   p.    1301; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem..  1931,  p.   10. 
Calumba-Agar   (Reinschild  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  11,   1933, 

p.    1561;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p,   7. 
Campetrodin    and    Campetrodin    No,    2    (A,    H.    Robbins    Company),    The 

Journal,  Sept,  21,  1918,  p.  993;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1918,  p.   27;   Reports   Chem.   Lab.,    1918,   p.   39;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.   193. 

Camphenol   (Johnson  &  Johnson),  The  Journal,  Nov,  5,   1910,  p.   1662; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1910,  p,  112;  Propaganda,  vol,  1,  p.  287. 
Campho-Phenique     (Campho-Phenique    Co.),    The     Journal,     April    20, 

1907,    p.    1365;    Feb.    9,    1918,    p.    408;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1905-8,  p.  51;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  40;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  418. 
Campho-Phenique  Powder    (Campho-Phenique   Co.),   The  Journal,  April 

20,   1907,  p.   1365;   Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem,,   1905-8,  p.  51; 

Propaganda,  vol,    1,   p.  40. 
Cancer  Remedy,   Koch's   (Wm.  F.  Koch),  The  Journal,  Feb.   12,   1921, 

p,  466;   Feb.   19,   1921,  p.   537;  June  21,    1924,  p.  2054;   Propaganda, 

vol,  2,  p.  437. 
Cancer    Serum,    Glover's    (T,   J.    Glover),    The   Journal,   Jan.    1,    1921, 

p.  52;  Feb.  5,  1921,  p,  396;  June  21,  1924,  p.  2054;  Propaganda,  vol. 

2,   p.   425. 
Cannabis  Compound,  Syrup   (Pitman-Moore  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1915,  p.   168. 
Capell's   Uroluetic   Test    (Capell's  Laboratory),   The  Journal,   Aug.   23, 

1919,  p,   626. 

Caplets   (Bio-Chemic  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Feb.  25,   1922,  p.  603. 
Caprokol    (Sharp    &    Dohme),    The   Journal,    May    25,    1935,   p.    1909; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1935,  p,  76. 
Caps.    Adreno-Spermin    Comp.     (Henry    R,    Harrower),    The    Journal, 

Jan,  18,  1919,  p.  213;  Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem,,  1918,  p.  42. 
Caps.     Antero-Pituitary    Comp.    (Henry    R.    Harrower),    The    Journal, 

Jan,  18,   1919,  p,  213;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  42. 
Caps.   Hepato-Splenic  Comp.    (Henry  R.   Harrower),  The  Journal,  Jan, 

18,   1919,   p.  213;   Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem,,   1918,  p.  42. 
Caps.    Pancreas    Comp.    (Henry    R,    Harrower),    The   Journal,   Jan.    18, 

1919,   p.   213;    Reports   Council   Pharm   &   Chem.,   1918,   p.   42. 
Caps,    Placento-Mammary    Comp,    (Henry    R,    Harrower),    The   Journal, 

Jan,  18,  1919,  p.  213;  Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem,,  1918,  p.  42, 
Caps.    Thyroid    Comp.    (Henry    R.    Harrower),    The    Journal,    Jan.    18, 

1919,  p,  213;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1918,  p,  42, 
Caps,    Tyro-Ovarian    Comp,    (Henry    R,    Harrower),    The  Journal,   Jan. 

18,   1919,  p.  213;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1918,   p.   42, 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xiii 

Captol    (Muhlens    &    KropflF),   The   Journal,    Sept.    10,    1910,    p.    959; 

Reports  Chem.   Lab.,   1910,    p.   70. 
Cargel  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  4,  1928,  p.  321;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.  21. 
Carminzyra    (Fairchild   Bros.    &   Foster),   The  Journal,    Sept.   28,    1918, 

p.  1081;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  28;  Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   194. 
Carnine    (E.    Fougera    &   Co.,    Inc.),   The   Journal,   Nov.    20,    1909,   p. 

1754;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1909,  p.   137;   Propaganda, 

vol.   1,  p.   123. 
Caroid   (American  Ferment  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  4,  1922,  p.   1629; 

Dec.    16,    1922,    p.    2104;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914, 

p.  109. 
Carpanutrine    (John   Wyeth    &   Bro.),   The  Journal,   May   11,   1907,   p. 

1612;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1905-8,  opp.  p.  64;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.  1,  p.  133. 
Carsinol   (Carsinol  Research  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Jan.  17,  1925, 

p.    221;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1924,    p.    15;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,   1924-5,  p.    101. 
Carvitin   (Carvitin   Products  Laboratories,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  28, 

1931,   p.   1626;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  40. 
Casca-Aletris    (Pullen-Richardson   Chemical  Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1912,  p.  46. 
Cascara-Agar    (Reinschild   Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   Oct.   26,   1929, 

p.   1309;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  17. 
Cascarans,    Bell    (Bell    &   Co.),    The  Journal,   Aug.    14,    1909,   p.    569; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1909,  p.   Ill;  Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.   154. 
Castaflora   (The  Wm.  S.  Merrell  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  27, 

1917,  p.  303;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  45;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.   118. 
Castrox   (Purdue  Newberry  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  23,  1916,  p.  1956; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1916,  p.   41. 
Catarrhal    Immunogen    (P.   D.    &    Co.),   The   Journal,    Sept.   22,    1934, 

p.   939. 
Catarrhal   Vaccine   No.   40    (G.    H.    Sherman),    The   Journal,   Oct.    11, 

1924,  p.   1184;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,  p.    58. 
Catarrhal    Vaccine    Combined-Lilly    (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

June    22,    1918,    p.    1967;    Reports    Council    Pharm    &    Chem.,    1918, 

p.   11;    Propaganda,  vol.  2,   p.   187. 
Causticks    (Tappan    Zee    Surgical    Co.),    The    Journal,    May    19,    1934, 

p.   1681;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  68. 
Causyth,  The  Journal,  Aug.  11,  1928,  p.  418. 
Causyth  (Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works,  Ltd.,  of  Canada),  The  Journal, 

March  1,   1930,  p.  656. 
Caviblen   (A.   Grimme),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   176. 
Ceanothyn   (Flint,  Eaton  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   March  20,  1926,  p.  890; 

Feb.  8,  1930,  p.  410;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  23; 

1930,  p.   16. 
Ccdron  Seed,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Celerina  (Rio  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  17,  1914,  p.  1411;  Feb. 

13,    1915,    p.    606;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1912,    p.    40; 

1914,  p.  99;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  43. 
Celery,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1912,  p.  40. 
Celery    and    Guarana,    Elixir    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  40. 
Celery    and    Guarana    Compound,    Elixir    (Ray    Chemical    Co.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Celery  Compound,  Elixir  (Nelson,  Baker  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Celery    Compound,    Elixir    (F.    Stearns    &   Co.),   Reports    Council   Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Celery  Compound,   Elixir   (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.    &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  40. 
Celery,    Elixir    Guarana    and    (Hance    Bros.    &    White),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   40. 
Cellasin    (The  Cellasin  Co.),   The  Journal,  July    5,   1924,  p.   58. 
Cephaelin,   Reports   Council   Phaim.    &   Cbem.,   1918,   p.   52;   Propaganda, 

vol.   2,  p.  203. 


xiv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Cerelene   (Holliday  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Feb.   15,  1919,  p.   513; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chera.,  1918,  p.  48;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1919,  p.  30;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.  219,  337,  362. 
Cerelose    ("Dyno")    (Corn   Products   Refining  Co.),   The  Journal,    July 

13,  1935,  p.   119. 
Chapoteaut's  Wine;  see  Wine  Chapoteaut's. 
Chiodrastis    (H.   K.   Wampole   &   Co.,   Inc.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.    & 

Chem.,    1912,   p.   42. 
Chionacea    (Nelson,    Baker    &    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1912,  p.  42;  The  Journal,  June  14,   1919,  p.  1787. 
Chionanthus    Compound,    Elixir     (Ray    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1912,  p.  42. 
Chionanthus    (Special),    Elixir    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  42. 
Chionia   (Peacock  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  3,  1915,  p.   1177; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p,  42;   1915,   p.  24;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  28. 
Chlorax    (Chlorine  Products  Company,  Inc.).  Reports  Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1919,   p.   70;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1919,  p.  57;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  244. 
Chlorlyptus    (Weeks    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    27,    1920,    p. 

1512;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1920,  p.   75;   Reports    Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1920,   p.   28;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1920,  p.   75;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  277. 
Chloron     (Chlorine    Products    Company,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1919,  p.  70;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1919,  p.  57;    Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  245. 
Chologen    (Leonard   A.    Seltzer),   The   Journal,    Feb.    1,    1913,    p.   383; 

Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  288. 
Chologestin   (F.   H.   Strong  Co.).  The  Journal,  Dec.  11,   1915,  p.   2108. 
Chondroitin     (Wilson    Lab's),    The    Journal,    Jan.    25,     1936,    p.    292; 

Reports  (Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1935,  p.  46. 
Chromiac    Tablets    (Maltbie    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1912,  p.  44. 
Cinchophen  B.   P.  C.    (Benzol  Products  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1933,  p.  31. 
Cinchophen    Water-Morganstern    (Morganstern    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1931,   p.   37. 
Cineraria    Maritima,    The    Journal,    Nov.    11,    1911,    p.    1630;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1911,  p.  48;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  49. 
Cin-U-Form  Lozenges    (McKesson  and   Robbins),   The  Journal,    Oct.   4, 

1919,  p.  1077;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  35;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   2,  p.   237. 
Citarin    (The   Bayer   Company,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   Feb.   20,    1915,   p. 

685;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.    135. 
Citrin  (Table  Rock  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  April  5,  1930,  p.  1067; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   19. 
Citrocarbonate    (Upjohn    Co.),    The   Journal,    May   20,    1933,    p.    1597; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  31. 
Citrocoll    (Cellarius  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  21,   1911,  p.  210;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1911,  p.  7;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  85. 
Citrophan   (Gotham  Corporation),  The  Journal,  March  1,  1924,  p.  734; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,    1924-5,  p.   52. 
Clauden  (Eastbrook,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  7,  1928,  p.  1116;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.  22. 
Clavipurin    (Gane    &    Ingram),   The   Journal,   Oct.    14,    1933,    p.    1228; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  38. 
Clover   Compound,    Syrup   Red    (Nelson,    Baker    &   Co.),   Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   40. 
Coagulen-Ciba     (Society     of     Chemical     Industry,     Basle,     Switzerland), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1920,  p.   53;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.   290. 
Cod-Liver,    Extract    of,    Wampole's    Perfected    Tasteless    Preparation    of 

(H.    K.    Wampole    &    Co.,    Inc.),    The  Journal,    April   5,    1913,   p. 

1093;    April    10,    1915,   p.    1262;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1915,  p.   140;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  52. 
Cod  Liver  Oil,  Scott's  Emulsion  of   (Now  Scott's  Emulsion),   The  Jour- 
nal,   June   22,    p.    2256;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1935, 

p.   103. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xv 

Cod   Liver   Oil   and    Phosphorus,   The  Journal,   July    14,    1928,   p.   97; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1928,  p.  23. 
Cod    Liver    Oil,    Budwell's    Emulsion    of    Nos.    1    and    2    (Budwell    Phar- 
macal   Co.),   The  Journal,   Feb.   20,    1915,   p.   684;    Reports   Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  135;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  22. 
Cod    Liver    Oil    Compound,    Hagee's    Cordial   of    the    Extract   of    (Kathar- 
mon  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct  13,  1906,  p.  1208;  April    10, 
1915,    p.    1262;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915,    p.    138; 
Propaganda,  ed.  9,  pp.   51,  289;    Propaganda,  vol.  2.  429. 
Cod-Liver    Oil    Compound,    Waterbury's    Metabolized    (Waterbury    Chemi- 
cal   Co.),    The   Journal,    Oct.    9,    1909,    p.    1201;    Reports    Council 
Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1909,   p.    115;    Propaganda,   vol.    1.   p.   291.      See 
also  Compound,  Waterbury's. 
Cod   Liver   Oil,    Super   D    (Upjohn   Co.),    The  Journal,    May   20,    1933, 

p.   1597;  Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1933,  p.   31. 
Cod  Liver  Oil,  Viking  Palatable  (See  Viking  Palatable  Cod  Liver  Oil). 
Colalin    (SchieflFelin   &   Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1918,  p. 

52;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  203. 
Colchi-Methyl   Capsules    (H.    K.   Wampole   &   Co.,   Inc.),    Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1915,  p.   169. 
Colchi-Sal    (E.    Fougera   &    Co.,   Inc.),   The   Journal,    March   20,    1915, 
p.    1016;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915,    p.    136;    Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  58. 
Collene    (Collene    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The   Journal,    Dec.    23,    1922,    p. 

2181;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  26. 
Collodaurum   (Ideal  Skin-Suture  Material   Co.),  The  Journal,   Sept.  26, 

1925,  p.  997. 
"Colloidal  Gold"    (Kahlenberg-Klaus   Co.).   The   Journal,  Jan.   31,   1925, 

p.  387;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.   13. 
Colloid    Solution    Material    for    Intravenous    Transfusion,    Hogan's    (E.   R. 

Squibb  &  Sons),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  147. 
Colloidine    (Boracol    Chemical    Co.),    The  Journal,    March    11,    1916,    p. 
831;    Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1916,   p.   7;    Reports   Chem- 
Lab.,  1915,  p.  127. 
Collosol  Calcium    (British   Colloids,   Ltd.),    The  Journal,   Aug.    4,    1923, 

p.  409. 
Collosol   Calcium    (Crookes  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  March  22, 

1930,  p.   920;    Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   20. 
Collosol  Iodine   (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,  Inc.).  The  Journal,   Sept.   8,   1917, 
p.  841;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  49;  Propaganda, 
vol.  2,  pp.   144,  223. 
Collosol    Cocain    (Anglo-French    Drug    Co.,    Ltd.),    The    Journal,    April 
12,    1919,    p.    1094;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1919,    p.    8; 
Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.  221,  223. 
Collosol    Kaolin    (Crookes    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    May    3,    1930, 

p.  1406;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  23. 
Collosol  Preparations  (Collosol  Argentum,  Collosol  Arsenicum,  Collosol 
Cuprum,  Collosol  Ferrum,  Collosol  Hydrargyrum,  Collosol  lodin, 
Collosol  Manganese,  Collosol  Quinn,  and  Collosol  Sulfur)  (Anglo- 
French  Drug  Co.,  Ltd.),  The  Journal,  June  7,  1919,  p.  1694; 
March  4,  1922.  p.  674;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919, 
p.  14;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1919,  p.  109;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  223. 
Collyrium,  Wyeth    (John  Wyeth   &  Bro.),  The  Journal,   May   17,   1913, 

p.   1557;   Propaganda,   Vol.   1,  p.  292. 
Colobromidine    (Colloidal    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    Jan.    10,    1925. 

p.   135;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   17. 
Colodine    (Colloidal  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Jan.    10,   1925,  p.   135; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  17. 
Colon    Bacillus   Combined  Vaccine    (Modified   Van   Cott),   No.    35    (G.   H. 
Sherman),    The  Journal,    Oct,   11,   1924,   p.    1184;   Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  57. 
Colon   Bacillus   Vaccine,   The  Journal,   Jan.    17,    1925,   p.   220;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   20. 
C-O-M    (H.  E.   Frees  Company).  The  Journal,  Aug.   11,   1923;   p.  493; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  18. 
Compound    Elixir   of   Phosphates   and   Calisaya. — See   Tissue   Phosphates, 
Wheeler's. 


xvi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Compressible  Capsules  Mercury  Salicylate-S.  D.  C.  1  grain,  IJ^  srrains, 
2  grains,  for  Intramuscular  Injection  (Synthetic  Drug  Co.),  Reports 
Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   42. 

Concentrated  Orchitic  Solution  (Orchitic  Substance-Cousineau)  (Cali- 
fornia Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories).  The  Journal,  Oct.  8, 
1927,  p.    1267;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  21. 

Condurango,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1911,  p.  54. 

Cooperation  of  the  Pharmaceutical  Houses,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 
Chem.,   1920,  p.  56. 

Copper  Phenolsulphonate  (The  Abbott  Laboratories),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1916,  p.   54. 

Corlutin  (Reed  &  Carnrick),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,  1935,  p.  667. 

Corn  Plasters,  Medicated,  The  Journal,  June  18,  1932,  p.  2209;  Reports 
Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1932,  p.  58. 

Corpora  Lutea  Desiccated-P.  D.  &  Co.  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Thb 
Journal,  June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1930,  p.  25. 

Corpora  Lutea  Soluble  Extract-P.  D.  &  Co.  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The 
Journal,  Jan.  30,   1932,  p.  402;  Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1932,  p.   55. 

Corpora  Lutea  Soluble  Extract-Wilson  (Wilson  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal, Jan.  30,  1932,  p.  402;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932, 
p.  55. 

Corpus  Luteum  (G.  W.  Carnick  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1925,  p.  19. 

Corpus  Luteum,  Desiccated-Armour  (Armour  &  Co.),  The  Journal, 
June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 
p.  25. 

Corpus  Luteum,  Desiccated-Wilson  (Wilson  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 
June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 
p.   25. 

Corpus  Luteum  Extract-Lederle  (Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Jan.  30,  1932,  p.  402;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932, 
p.    55. 

Corpus  Luteum-Lederle  (Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal, 
June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem.,  1930, 
p.  25. 

Corpus  Luteum-P.  M.  Co.  (Pitman-Moore  Co.),  The  Journal.  June  1, 
1930,  p.   1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  25. 

Corpus  Luteum  Solution  (Rovin)  (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab's,  Inc.),  The 
Journal,   Feb.   25,   1933,  p.   574;    Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1933,  p.   166. 

Coryfin    (Winthrop    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm,    &    Chem., 

1923,  p.  19. 
Cotarnin   Salts,  The  Journal,  Nov.  22,    1919.  p.   1625;   Propaganda,  vol. 

2,   p.   240;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1919,  p.   48. 
Coto.   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,  1913,  p.   39. 
Cotoin,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1913,  p.  39. 
Cotton  Process  Ether.     See  Ether.  Anesthesia,  Cotton  Process. 
Cream  of  Mustard    (The  Cream  of  Mustard  Co.,  South  Norwalk,  Conn.). 

Reports   Council    Pharm,   &  Chem,,   1918,   p,   79;    Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.   218. 
Cream    of    Sulphur,    O'Grady's    Medicated    Mineral    (John    H.    O'Grady, 

Minneapolis).  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  81. 
Creo   Ferrum    (The    Gross   Drug    Co.,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1921,  p.  16. 
Creofos     (Delson    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    7,    1917,    p.    58; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1917,  p.   34;   Propaganda,  vol.   2, 

p.    137. 
Creosote-Delson    (Delson    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    7,    1917, 

p.    58;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1917,   p.   34;    Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   137. 
Creosote,   De-Monohydrated.  Calloway's   (Creo-Chemical   Distributing  Co.), 

The   Journal,    May   28,    1932,   p.    1884;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1932,  p.    14. 
Creosotonic    (Scott)    (Dawson    Pharmacal    Co.),    The  Journal,    Aug.    24, 

1918,  p.  680;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  25;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.   192. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xvii 

Cresog  (Cresog  Laboratories  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  29,  1926,  p.  1713; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1926,  p.  25. 

Crouitils,  Simple  No.  1  (Oaten  Bread)  (LaPorte  &  Gauthier),  Reporti 
Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1921,  p.   17. 

Croustils,  No.  2  (Dechloridised  and  Lactoscd)  (LaPorte  &  Gauthier), 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  17. 

Croustils,  No.  3  (Glutinized)  (LaPorte  &  Gauthier),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  17. 

Cu-Co-Ba  Tarrant  (The  Tarrant  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  25,  1920, 
p.  891. 

Culture-Lac  (Special  Pharmacal  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  13, 
1923,  p.   127;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  27. 

Culture  of  Bacillus  Bulgaricus-Fairchild  (Fairchild  Bros.  &  Foster),  The 
Journal,  June  4,  1927,  p.  1831;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1927,  p.  20. 

Culture  of  the  Bacillus  Bulgaricus-Lederle  (Lederle  Antitoxin  Labora- 
tories), The  Journal,  June  4,  1927,  p.  1831;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&   Chem.,   1927,  p.  20. 

Cuprase  (Anglo-French  Drug  Co.,  Ltd.),  The  Journal,  April  12,  1919. 
p.  1095;  July  5,  1924,  p.  58;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919, 
p.   10;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1919,  p.  32;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  222. 

Curare,  The  Journal,  Jan.  15,  1910,  p.  219;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,  1910,  p.  7. 

Curarin,  The  Journal,  Jan.  15,  1910,  p.  219;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,  1910,  p.  7.  . 

Curative  Vaccine,  Bruschettini  (A.  Bruschettini),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  176;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  58. 

Cyclopropane  for  Anesthesia  (Ohio  Chem.  &  Mfg.  Co.),  The  Journal, 
Jan.  25,   1936,  p.  292:  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1935,  p.  48. 

Cypress  Oil  (Fritzsche  Bros.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  7,  1934,  p. 
1154;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  34. 

Cypridol  Capsules  (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  19, 
1914,  p.  2247;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  77;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  59. 

Cystogen  (Cystogen  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12,  1914,  p. 
2148;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  66;  Propaganda, 
vol.  1,  p.  60. 

Cystogen  Aperient  (Cystogen  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12, 
1914,  p.  2148;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  66;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  60. 

Cystogen  Lithia  (Cystogen  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12,  1914, 
p.  2148;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  (Them.,  1914,  p.  66;  Propaganda, 
vol.  1,  p.  60. 

Cysto-Sedative  (Strong.  Cobb  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12,  1914, 
p.  2148;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  130;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  61. 

Damiana,    Allen's    Compound    Extract    of    (Allen-Pfeiffer    Chemical    Co.), 

The  Journal,  July   19,    1913,   p.   211. 
Darpin    (Rio    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    Feb.    13,    1915,    p.    606; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1914,  p.  99;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.   43. 
Daytol    (Dayton   Chem.    Co.),   The  Journal,   March   31,   1928,   p.   1039; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.  10. 
D.   C.   P.    340    (Parke,   Davis   &   Co.),   The  Journal,  June   3,   1933,    p. 

1767;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  43. 
De-Germ    (Century    Pharmacal    Products    Co.),    The   Journal,    May   21, 

1932,  p.   1808;  Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  41. 
Dental     Solution,    Lilly's     (Lilly    Dental    Products    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.    634. 
Den-To-Xon    (The    Zymethol    Lab.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1933,  p.   44. 

Desiccated    Corpus    Luteum-Armour    (Armour     &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  25, 
Desiccated  Corpus   Luteum-Wilson   (Wilson   &   Co.),   The  Journal,  June 

24,  1930,  p.   1997;  Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  25. 
Desiccated    Parathyroid    Gland    Preparations,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1927,  p.  24. 
Desiccated    Parathyroid   Gland- Armour    (Armour   &   Co.),   The  Journal, 

Jan.  14,  1927,  p.  117;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  23. 


xviii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Desiccated   Parathyroid  Substance-Wilson   (Wilson  Laboratories),   Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1927,  p.  24. 
Desiccated    Pituitary    Body- Armour     (Armour    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 
.July  19,  1930,  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  26. 
Desiccated      Pituitary      Substance      (Anterior     Lobe) -Armour      (Armour 

&  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1930,  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1930,  p.  26. 
Desiccated  Pituitary  Substance  (Posterior  Lobe) -Armour  (Armour  &  Co.), 

The  Journal,   July    19,    1930,   p.   201;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1930,  p.  26. 
Desitin    (Desitin   Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   Feb.   26,   1927,  p.   666; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1927,  p.  24. 
Diabesan  (Solosan  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  28,  1925,  p.  1747;  July  29, 

1933,  p.   389;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1925,  p.  16. 
Diabetic   Biscuit    (Jireh   Diabetic   Food    Co.),   The  Journal,   March  22, 

1913,  p.  922. 
Diabetic  Flour,  Jireh    (Jireh  Diabetic  Food  Co.),  The  Journal,  March 

22,   1913,  p.  922. 
Diabetic  Food,  Jireh   (Jireh  Diabetic  Food  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  14, 

1912,  p.  2174. 
Diamel   (Maltbie  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  22,  1927,  p.  267. 
Diampysal,  Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  45. 
Dianol    I,    Dianol    II,    and    Dianol    III    (Kalle    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm,    &   Chem.,    1913,   p.   34;    Reports  Chem.   Lab.,    1913,  p.   75. 
Diastos,    Liquor    (H.    K.    Mulford    Co.),    The   Journal,    Feb.    9,    1907, 

p.  533. 
Diatussin   (E.  Bischoff  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  17,  1913;  p.   1557; 

Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  293. 
Diazyrae  Essence   (Fairchild  Bros.   &  Foster),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1927,  p.  27. 
Diazyme   Glycerol    (Fairchild   Bros.    &   Foster),   The  Journal,  June   14, 

1930,  p.   1919;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  28. 
Di-Citurin    (Chemico-Biologic    Laboratories),    Reports    Council   on    Pharm. 

&    Chem.,    1930,    p.    27;    The    Journal,    March    21,    1931;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  41. 
Di-Crotalin    (Swan-Myers   Co.),    The   Journal,   Aug.    17,    1918,   p.   592; 

Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  465. 
Digestive    Tablets,    Aromatic    (Fraser    Tablet    Co.),   The   Journal,   Aug. 

20,  1910,  p.  710;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1910,  p.  67;  Propaganda,  vol. 

1,  p.  232. 
Digestive     Tablets,     Aromatic     (Wm.     S.     Merrell     Chemical    Co.),    The 

Journal,   Aug.   20,   1910,  p.   710;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1910,  p.  66; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.  231. 
Digestive  Tablets,  Aromatic   (H.   K.  Mulford    Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug. 

20,  1910,  p.  710;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1910,  p.  65;  Propaganda,  vol. 

1,  p.  230. 
Digestive  Tablets,  Aromatic   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug. 

20,  1910,  p.  710;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1910,  p.  66;  Propaganda,  vol. 

1,  p.   231. 
Digestive  Tablets,  Aromatic   (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal,  Aug.  20, 

1910,  p.  710;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1910,  p.  66;   Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.   231. 
Digestive    Tonic     (Truax,    Greene    &    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1912,  p.   44. 
Digifortis    (Parke,    Davis     &    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1925,  p.  75. 
Digisine,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  134. 
Digitalin,    True,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  52, 
Digitalis    Tablets,    Westerfield's     (Westerfield     Pharmacal    Co.),    Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1918,   p.    75;    Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  215. 
Digitalone  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  12,    1909,  p.  1938; 

Dec.  7,   1912,  p.  2074;  Jan.  11,  1913,  p.  143. 
Digitalysatum  (E.  Bischoflf  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  15,  1913,  p.  499; 

Jan.  8,  1916,  p.  135;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  93: 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  63. 
Digitex    (Drug  Products  Co.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1928, 

p.  27. 
Di-Hydranol   (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal,  May  12,   1934,  p.  1564; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  37. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xix 

Dimenformon    (Organon  Laboratories),    The  Journal,  August  31,   1935, 

p.  667. 
Dimol    (Anglo-French  Drug  Co.),   The  Journal,  Oct.   6,  1923,  p.   1224. 
Dinitrophenol,  The  Journal,  April   7,   1934,  p.    1156;  Jan.   19,   1935,  p. 

237;    June  29,    1935,   p.   2385;   July   6,    1935,  p.   31;   July   13,   1935. 

p.   124. 
Dionol  (Dionol  Company),  The  Journal,  Jan.  26,  1918,  p.  257;  Feb.  7, 

1920,  p.  410;    Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  422. 
Dioradin   (Dioradin  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  26,  1912,  p.   1556;  Reports 

Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1912,    p.    23;    1913,    p.    i7\    Propaganda 

vol.  1,  p.  7i. 
Dioscorea    Compound,    Elixir     (H.    K.     Mulford    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  46. 
Dioscorea    Compound,    Elixir    (Parke,     Davis    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  46. 
Dioscorea  (Compound,  Elixir  (Ray  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,   p.  46. 
Dioscorea  Compound,  Elixir  (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  46. 
Dioviburnia   (Dios  Chemical   Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,  1912,  p.  735; 

Jan.  9,  1915,  p.  166;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  46; 

1914,  p.  86;  Propaganda,  vol.    1,  pp.   139,  410. 

Diphtheria   Antitoxin    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council   Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Diphtheria    Antitoxin,     Concentrated     (National    Vaccine    and    Antitoxin 

Institute),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  23. 
Diphtheria    Antitoxin    Serum     (Burroughs,    Wellcome    &    Co.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1922,  p.   30. 
Diphtheria    Bacillus    Vaccine,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918, 

p.   54. 
Disodium    Salt    of    Tetraiodo-Ortho-Sulphobenzoic   Acid,    (H.    W.    &    D.). 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1935,  p.   60. 
Disulphamin   (American  Bio-Cheraical  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Nov. 

29,   1930,   p.  29. 
Diuretin  (Knoll  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  4,  1914,  p.  1108;  Reports 

Chem.   Lab.,    1914,  p.   7;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   251. 
Diurol    (H.    K.    Mulford   Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1912. 

p.   45. 
Dixon's  Suspension  of  Dead  Tubercle  Bacilli,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1917,  p.   140;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   158. 
Dixon's  Tubercle  Bacilli  Extract,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917, 

p.    140;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.    158. 
Dogwood,  Flowering,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  41 
Duodenin,    Armour    (Armour    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    Aug.    14,    1915, 

p.    639;    Jan.    15,    1916,    pp.    178,    208;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1915,  pp.  96,  99,  151;   1916,  p.  72;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  76. 
Duotonol    Tablets    (Schering    &    Glatz,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    Sept.    30, 

1916,  p.  1033;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  34;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  94. 
"Dyno,"  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1935,  p.    60. 
Dysentery     Bacterin-Mulford     (H.     K.     Mulford     Co.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   141. 
Dyspepsia     Compound,    Elixir     (H.    K.    Mulford    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  44. 
Dyspepsia,    Elixir   Atonic,    Phenolated    (Wm.    S.    Merrell    Chemical    Co.) 

The  Journal,  Feb.  9,  1907,  p.  533. 

Echinacea,    The    Journal,    Nov.    27,     1909,    p.    1836;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1909,  p.   144;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  79. 
Echitone    (Strong,    Cobb    &    Co.),    The   Journal,   Jan.    2,    1915,    p.    71; 

July   17,    1920,   p.    193;   Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1914,   p. 

80;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.    81. 
Echthol   (Battle  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   March  13,  1909,  p.  904;  Jan.  2, 

1915,  p.   71;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1909,  p.   144;   1912. 
p.  38;    1914,  p.  80;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  81. 

Echtisia  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  2,  1915, 
p.  71;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  80;  Propaganda, 
vol.   1,  p.  81. 


XX  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Eclo  Tablets  (Pitman  Moore  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  18,  1928,  p.  515. 
Edema  Tablets  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1912,  p.  41. 
Edema    Tablet    (Smith,    Kline    &    French    Co.),    Reports   Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,    1912,  p.  41. 
Edema  Improved,  Tablet   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem.,   1912,  p.   41. 
Edwenil    (Spicer    &    Company),    The    Journal,    Oct.   7,    1933,   p.    1154; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  62;  The  Journal,  Jan. 

11,  1936,  p.  126. 
EfeDron    Nasal   Jelly    (Hart   Drug   Co.),    The   Journal,   Feb.    8,    1930, 

p.  430. 
Efedron    (Hart),    (Hart    Drug    Corp.),    The    Journal,    May    19,    1934, 

p.   1701. 
Efemist    (Hart),    (Hart    Drug    Corp.),    The    Journal,    May,    19,    1934, 

p.   1701. 
Eka    Salt    (Sharp    &    Dohme),    The   Journal,   June    7,    1930,    p.    1859; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1934,  p.  46. 
Elarson    (Winthrop    Chemical    Company,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm, 

&  Chem.,  1919,  p.   75;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  248. 
Elder,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  41. 
Elder  Flower  Eye  Lotion   (George  B.  Evans  Laboratories,  Inc.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1930,  p.   29. 
Electrargol  (E.  Fougera  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920, 

p.  58. 
Electr-Hg   (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1924,  p.  21. 
Elixir    Arsylen     Compositum-Roche     ("Tonikum"-Roche)     (Hoffmann    La 

Roche,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  Jan.   9,   1932,  p.   143;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1932,   p.   90. 
Elixir  Aurine,  Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem.,   1935,  p.   62. 
Elixir  Digitalin  Compound    (American  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal, 

May  1,  1926,  p.  1383;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  55. 
Elixir  of  Bitter  Wine,  Triner's  American   (Jos.  Triner),  The  Journal, 

July    14,    1917,    p.    139;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    p.    36; 

Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   139. 
Elixir    of    Enzymes    (Armour    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    14,    1930, 

p.   1919;  Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  28. 
Elixir  Glycerophosphates,   Nux  Vomica  and   Damiana   (Sharp  &   Dohme), 

The  Journal,   Sept.   30,   1916,   p.   1034;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1916,  p.  35;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  95. 
Elixir   Kacyan   McNeil,   The  Journal,   June    1,    1929,   p.    1838;   Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,  p.   58. 
Elixir     Novo-Hexamine     (Upsher     Smith),     Reports     Council    Pharm.     & 

Chem.,   1917,  p.   142;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1917,  p.    70. 
Emmenin    (Ayerst,    McKenna    &    Harrison),   The  Journal,   August   31, 

1935,  p.   667. 
Empyroform   (Scherling  &  Glatz,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1918,  p.  55. 
Emulsio   Minerolein    (T.    R.    D.   Barse   Co.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1915,  p.  169. 
Emulsio   Phen-Oleum    (T.   R.   D.   Barse  Co.),  Reports   Council  Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1915,  p.  169. 
Endotin    (Morganstern  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1914, 

p.  136. 
Endo-Ovarina  Tablets    (Neother  Products  Co.),   The  Journal,  June  21, 

1924,  p.  2068;   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1924,   p.   11. 
Enemose    (Fairchild  Bros,   &  Foster),  Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem., 

1922,  p.  48. 
Energen    Food    Products     (Energen    Bismeal,    Energen    Cocoa,     Energen 

Digestive    Biscuits,     Energen     Endobran     Biscuits,     Energen     Gluten 

Semolina,     Energen     Gluten    Tapioca,     Energen     Macaroni,     Energen 

Pastry  Flour,   Energen  Protein  Food,  Energen  Starch-Reduced  Bread 

[Batons],     Energen     Starch-Reduced     Bread    with     Casein     [Batons], 

Energen    Starch-Reduced    Rolls,    Energen    Starch-Reduced    Wheatmeal 

Bread    [Batons],    Energen    Starch-Reduced    Rusks)     (Energen    Foods 

Co.,    Inc.),   The   Journal,    Aug.   3,    1929,   p.   381;   Reports   Council 

Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1929,  p.  59. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxi 

Enesol    (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  26,  1913,  p.  293. 
"Ensol,"  The  Journal,  October  5,  1935,  p.   1122. 
Ensol   (Dr.  H.  C.  Connel),  The  Journal,  May  9,  1936,  p.  1654. 
Enterocap  Oralsulin   (Lafayette  Pharmacal   Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  4, 

1926,  p.    1935. 
Enteronol    (Enteronol    Co.),    The    Journal,    March    21,    1908,    p.    977; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1909,  p.  64;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  294. 
Ephedra,    Pharmaceutic   Preparations   of,    The  Journal,   June   22,    1929, 

p.  2101;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,   p.  Z7. 
Ephedritone-Inhalant-Massey's    (^Nlassev  Lab's,  Inc."),  The  Journal,  Feb. 

22,  1936,  p.  617;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1936,  p.  26. 
Ephedrol    with    Ethylraorphine    Hydrochloric     (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The 

Journal,  March  1,  1930,  p.  634;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,   p.   30. 
Epinephrin-G.    W.    C.    Co.    (G.    W.    Carnrick    Company),    The   Journal, 

Jan.  17,  1925,  p.  220;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  19. 
Episan    (Gaynor-Bagstad    Co.),    The   Journal,    Sept.    25,    1915,    p.    1130; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem..   1915.  p.    164. 
Ergoapiol  (Martin  H.  Smith  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12,  1914,  p.  2149; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1914,  p.   64;    Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.   82. 
Ergofortis    (Borroughs   Bros.    Mfg.   Co.),   The  Journal,    Dec.    31,    1932, 

p.  2265;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  42. 
Ergone    (Parke,   Davis    &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Oct.   7,    1911,    p.    1211; 

Oct.   14,    1911,  p.    1302. 
Ergot,  Extract  of,  Purified   (See  Extract  of  Ergot  Purified). 
Ergot,  Liquor-Mulford   (See  Liquor  Ergot-Mulford). 
Ergot   Preparations   Omitted:      An    Explanation,    The   Journal,    Sept.    7, 

1929,  p.  769;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  27. 
Ergotin-Merck    (Merck    &   Co.),    The   Journal,    May    4,    1929,    p.    1521; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1929,  p.  26. 
Ergotinine  Citrate,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1928,  p.  28. 
Ergotole   (Sharp   &   Dohme),  The  Journal,   Oct.   7,   1911,  p.    1211;   Oct. 

14,  1911,  p.  1302;  May  4,  1929;  p.  1521;    Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,   1929,  p.  26. 
Ergonovine,    The   Journal,    March    21,    1936,    p.    1008;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1936,  p.  44. 
Erpiol,   Dr.    Schrader    (Wm.    S.    Merrell   Chemical   Co.),    The   Journal, 

June   3,    1911,   p.    1670;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1911,   p. 

18;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,   p.   83. 
Erysipelas  Vaccine  No.  1   (G.  H.  Shei-man),  The  Journal,  Oct.  11,  1924, 

p.  1184;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,   p.   57. 
Erysipelas   Vaccine    (National    Drug   Co.),   The   Journal,   June   5,    1929, 

p.   55;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1928,  p.  43. 
Eskosan    (Esko  Products  Co.),   Reports   Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1923, 

p.  20. 
Eskosan   Cum   Methyl   Saliclylate    (Esko    Products   Co.),   Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1923,  p.   20;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1923,  p.  99. 
Essence  of  Pepsine-Fairchild    (Fairchild  Bros.   &  Foster),  The  Journal, 

June    14,    1930,    p.    1919;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1930, 

p.  28. 
Esterol    (Frederick   Stearns    &    Co.),    The   Journal.   Dec.    16,    1922,    pp. 

2090,  2102;  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  30;  Reports 

Chem.   Lab.,   1921,  p.   71. 
Estivin    (Schieffelin    and    Company),    The    Journal,    Nov.    12,    1921,    p. 

1595;  Jan.  23,  1932,  p.  340;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  466, 
Ethanesal,  The  Journal,    Sept.  22,   1923,  p.   1040. 
Ether,    Anesthesia    (Cotton    Process)     (Du    Pont    Chemical    Works),    The 

Journal,  Feb.   21,   1920,   p.    544;    May  22,    1920,  p.    1474;    Sept.  22. 

1923,  p.   1040;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  41. 
Ethyl  Bromide,  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1927,  p.   35. 
Ethyl  Bromide-Merck    (Merck    &   Co.,   Inc.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1927,  p.  35. 
Eto-So-Trc   (T.  M.   Berry),  The  Journal,  Aug.   5,   1922,  p.  492. 
Eubetin  (Aesculap  Pharmaceutical  &   Chemical  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal, 

May  21,  1932,  p.  1808;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  44. 
Euca-Mul    (The    Edward    G.    Binz    Co.),    The  Journal,    Oct.    29,    1921, 

p.   1438. 


xxii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Eucodin    (Riedel  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Phartii.   &  Chem,,   1922,  p.  32. 
Eu-Med  (The  Oralee  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  11,  1928,  p.  397;  Reports 

Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1928,   p.    30. 
Eumictine   (Geo.  J.  Wallau,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  21,  1920,  p.  542; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1920,   p.   7;    Propaganda,   vol.  2, 

p.  262. 
Eunatrol  (C.  Bischoflf  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  22,  1908,  p.  627. 
Eupeptic  Hypophosphites  (Nelson,  Baker   &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  2, 

1916,  p.   761;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  15;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  83. 
Euphydigtal    (Adolph  Hurst,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  8,   1933,  p.   124; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1933,  p.  89. 
Euscopol   (Riedel  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  32. 
Eusoma  (Eusoma  Pharmaceutical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem, 

1912,   p.   38. 
Exicol   (Brooklyn   Scientific  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  16,  1932. 

p.  224;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  45. 
Expurgo  Anti-Diabetes  (Expurgo  Mfg.  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  24,  1914; 

p.  312;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1914,  p.  27;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  299. 
Expurgo    Lapis     (Expurgo    Mfg.    Co.),    The    Journal,    Nov.    8,    1913, 

p.  1733. 
Extract  of  Ergot  Purified,  The  Journal,  May  4,  1929,  p.  1521;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1929,  p.  26. 

Falls  Dietetic  Flour   (J.  G.  Falls  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1931,  p.  42. 

False  Unicom,  The  Journal,  Nov.  27,  1909,  p.  1836;  Reports  Council 
Pharm,  &  Chem.,  1909,  p.  146;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  84. 

Farastan  (Farastan  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  IS,  1930,  p.  484;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1930,  p.  33. 

Febrisol   (The  Tilden  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  29,   1912,  p.  2043. 

Febri-Tone  (Arthur   Peter  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  1,  1908,  p.  379. 

Fellows'  Syrup  of  Hypophosphites  (Fellows  Medical  Mfg.  Co.),  The 
Journal,  Sept.  2,  1916,  p.  760;  Feb.  16,  1918,  p.  478;  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1916,    p.    13;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   82. 

Felsol  (American  Felsol  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  28,  1927,  p.  1750; 
Feb.   24,    1934,   p.    640. 

Fermenlactyl  (Anglo-American  Pharmacal  Co.,  Ltd.),  The  Journal, 
Jan.  30,   1909,  pp.  372,  397. 

Fermogen  (Diabesan),  (Solosan  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  29,  1933,  p. 
389. 

Ferrassin  (Robert  Wolheim),  The  Journal,  May  24,  1924,  p.  1712; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924.  p.  23. 

Ferric  Arsenite.   Soluble,    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1912,  p.   30. 

Ferric  Cacodylate,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  62;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  292. 

Ferritonic-Woods  (William  A.  Webster  Company),  The  Journal,  Oct. 
18,   1919,  p.  1231. 

Ferrivine  (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  8,  1917,  p.  841; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  49;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.    144. 

Ferro-Copral    Tablets    (Brewer    &    Co.,    Inc.),    The   Journal,    March    5, 

1932,  p.  816;  Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  46. 
Ferro-Mangan-Dieterich      (Reinschild     Chemical     Co.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  23. 
Ferro-Nux    Comp,     (American    Drug    Company,     Inc.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  23. 
Ferro-Sajodin,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  65. 
Figwort,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  42. 
Filudine  (Geo.  J.  Wallau,  Inc.),  The  Journal,   Sept.  18,  1915,  p.   1045; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem,,   1915,  p.  156;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  41. 
Firma-Chloro  (Chloro  Chemical  Corporation),  The  Journal,  Jan.  5,  1924, 

p.    53;    Oct.    16,    1926,    p.    1321;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1926,  p.   28. 
Firolyptol  Plain  (The  Tilden  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.   17,  1917,  p.  564; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1917,  p.  8;   Propaganda,   vol.   2, 

p.  120. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxiii 

Firolyptol  with  Kreosote  (The  Tilden  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  17,  1917. 

p.  564;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,   p.  49;  Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   120. 
Firwein  (The  Tilden  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  17,    1917,  p.  564;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &    Chem.,    1917,   p.    7;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    119. 
Fissan    Lotion    (Walter    Lehn),    The   Journal,    July    16,    1932,    p.    223; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,   1932,  p.   47. 
Fissan  Oil  (Walter  Lehn),  The  Journal,  July  16,  1932,  p.  223;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1932,  p.  47. 
Fissan   Ointment   (Walter   Lehn),  The  Journal,  July    16,    1932,   p.  223; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  47. 
Fissan  Ointment-R  (Walter  Lehn),  The  Journal,  July  16,  1932,  p.  223; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  47. 
Fissan   Powder    (Walter   Lehn),    The  Journal,   July    16,    1932,   p.   223; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  47. 
Fissan    Soap    (Walter    Lehn),    The    Journal,    July    16,    1932,    p.    223; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  47. 
Fissan    Sulfur    Powder    (Walter    Lehn),    The   Journal,    July    16,    1932, 

p.  223;   Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.   47. 
Fissan  Sweat  Absorbing  Powder   (Walter  Lehn),  The  Journal,  July  16, 

1932,  p.  223;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  47. 
Fleischmann's   Yeast    (The    Fleischmann    Company),   The  Journal,   May 

12,    1923,   p.    1398;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1923,   p.   23. 
Fluorated   Tricalcine    (Laboratories   des   "Produits   Scientia"),  The  Jour- 
nal,   March    14,    1925,    p.    836;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1925,  p.  80. 
Folliculin   Menformon    (Organon   Laboratories),   The  Journal,   Aug.   31, 

1935,  p.  667. 
Follutein  (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,  1935,  p.  667. 
Foral    (Foral    Products    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918, 

p.   55;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  204. 
For-Dyne    (First    Texas    Chemical    Mfg.    Co.),    The    Journal,    Aug.    3, 

1935,  p.  387. 
Formaldehyde   Lozenges,   The   Journal,    Oct.    4,    1919,   p.    1077;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1919,  p.  32;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  238. 
Formamint    (A.   Wulfing  &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Jan.   27,    1912,  p.   295; 

Feb.    24,    1912,    p.    572;    Aug.    28,    1915,    p.    816;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1915,    p.    64;    Propaganda,    ed.    9,    p.    303;    Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,   p.  33. 
Formic  Acid,   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1921,   p.   25. 
Formicin  (Kalle  Color  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.. 

1919,  p.  76. 
Formidin   (Parke,    Davis   &  Co.),  The  Journal,   Sept.   5,   1908,  p.   818; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  pp.   164,   192;   1912,  p.  48. 
Formitol  Tablets  (E.  L.  Patch  Co.),  The  Journal.  Oct.  4,  1919,  p.  1077; 

June    19,    1920,    p.    1730;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1919, 

p.   34;    1920.   p.   20;    Reports   Chem.   Lab.,    1920,   p.  40;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,   pp.   236,    271. 
Formosol,    Sunshine's    (The    Formosol    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   145;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   158. 
Formothalates,  Tablets  (Tailby  Nasan  Company),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1919,  p.  92;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  256. 
Formurol   (Cellarius  Co.),  The  Journal,   Jan.   21,   1911,  p.   210;   Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1911,  p.  7;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  85. 
Fortossan    (A.    Klipstein    &  Co.),   The  Journal,  Jan.    30,    1915,   p.   456; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   131;  Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.   178. 
Fosfoplasmina    (Neother   Products   Co.),   The   Journal,   June   21,    1924, 

p.  2068;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   11. 
Frenly   Enema    Cream    (Frenly    Products   Co.),    The   Journal,   Sept.    19, 

1931,  p.  852;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  44. 
Friedlander   Bacillus   Vaccine,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1919, 

p.   78. 
Friedlander  Vaccine   No.    36    (G.   H.    Sherman),   The  Journal,   Oct.    11, 

1924,  p.   1184;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  57. 
Fringe  Tree,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  42. 
Frutosen    (The   Frutosen    Drug  Co.).   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem., 

1921,  p.  26. 


xxiv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Gadoment    (E.   L.    Patch    Co.),    The   Jourxal,    Oct.    24,    1936,    p.    1384; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1936,  p.  34. 
G.    G.    Phenoleum    Disinfectant     (G.     G.    Phenoleum    Co.,    Inc.),    Thb 

Journal,  Jan.   30,   1915,  p.   456;    Reports   Council   Pharm,    &  Chem., 

1915,  p.  131. 
Galactagogue  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912, 

p.   43. 
Galactenzyme  Tablets   (Fairchild  Bros.  &  Foster),  The  Journal,  June  4, 

1927,  p.  1831;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  20. 
Galyl    (Geo.    G.    Wallau,    Inc.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    11,    1922,   p.    1706; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  34;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1922,  p.  40. 
Gambir-Agar    (Reinschild   Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   Nov.    12,    1932, 

p.  1690;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1932,  p.  57. 
"Gan-Aiden"    (Fantazn   Laboratories),    The  Journal,    Nov.    26,    1932,    p. 

1863;   Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,   p.   51. 
Gastrogen    Tablets    (Bristol-Myers    Co.),    The    Journal,    Dec.    12,    1914, 

p.    2149;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914,    p.    131;    Propa- 
ganda,  vol.    1,  p.   87. 
Gastron     (Fairchild    Bros.    &    Foster),    The    Journal,    June    14,    1930, 

p.    1919;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930.   p.   28. 
Gelobarin    (Powers-Weightmann-Rosengarten    Co.),    The    Journal,    Sept. 

17,  1927,  p.  984;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  36. 
Gelsemine  Hydrochlorid,   Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1911,  p.   57. 
Gelseminine,   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1911,  p.   57. 
Genitone    (Wm.    S.    Merrcll    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1912,  p.  44. 
Genoform   (C.  Bischoff  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  26,   1916,  p.   676. 
Germanin,   See  Bayer-205, 
Germanium  Dioxide,   See   Geroxide. 
Germaseptic  Lubricant  "Bing"   (Chas.  M.  Griswold,  St.  Petersburg,  Fla.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1918,   p.   79. 
Gcrmiletum    (Dios    Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   Jan.    9,    1915,   p.   165; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  86;   Reports  Chem.   Lab., 

1910,  p.    11;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   139. 
Geroxide    (Germanium     Products    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    6,    1925, 

p.    1856;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.   24. 
Ginseng,  The  Journal,  Oct.  24,  1914,  p.   1486;   Reports  Council  Pharm, 

&  Chem.,    1912,   p.  42. 
Ginseng  Compound,  Elixir  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912.   p.   42. 
Glandular  Comp.   (Male),   Special  Formula  No.   1   (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.), 

The   Journal,    Feb.^  28,    1925,    p.    695;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,    1925,   p.   85. 
Glandular  Comp.   (Female)  Special  Formula  No.  2  (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.), 

The   Journal,    Feb.    28,    1925,   p.   695;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,    1925,  p.  85. 
Glidine  (Menley  &  James),  The  Journal,  June  28,  1913,  p.  2037. 
Globeol    (Geo.   J.   Wallau,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.   18,   1915,  p.  1046; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915,  p.  157. 
Gluco-Dextrin    No.    1    (West   Mfg.    Co.),    The   Journal,   July    13,    1929, 

p.  117;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  28. 
Gluco-Dextrin    No.    2    (West   Mfg.    Co.),   The  Journal,   July    13,    1929, 

p.   117;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.   28. 
Gluco-Dextrin    No.    3    (West   Mfg.    Co.),    The  Journal,   July    13,    1929, 

p.    117;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1929,   p.  28. 
"Glucosin"    (Dr.  A.   Casagrande),   The  Journal,  May  21,   1932,  p.   1833. 
Glutamic  Acid,   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1935,   p.    65. 
Gluten  Biscuit,  Pure   (Kellogg  Food  Company),  Reports  (Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1916,  pp.  56,  57;    Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   100. 
Gluten   Biscuit,   40   per  cent    (Kellogg   Food   Company),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  pp.   56,  58;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.    100. 
Gluten   Biscuit,    40   per  cent    (Kellogg   Food   Company),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  pp.   56,    59;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.   100. 
Gluten  Flour,  F.  &  R.'s  Genuine,  40  per  cent   (Farwell  &  Rhines),  The 

Journal,  Feb.   14,   1923,   p.   533;   Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1925,  p.  22. 
Gluten    Meal,    Pure    (Kellogg  Food    Company),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1916,  pp.  56,  60;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   100. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxv 

Gluten    Meal,    40    per    cent    (Kellogg    Food    Company),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1916,  pp.   56,   60;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  100. 
Gluten    Meal,    40    per    cent    (Kellogg    Food    Company),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  pp.  56,  59;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  100. 
Glutol-Schleich     (Schering    &    Glatz,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,    1915,   p.    170. 
Glycerinated  Vaccine  Virus    (National  Vaccine  and  Antitoxin  Institute), 

Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  23. 
Glycerine  Tonic,  Gray's   (Purdue  Frederick  Co.).  The  Journal,  July  10, 

1915,  p.   189;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915,  p.  56;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  pp.   24,   249. 

Glycero-Lecithin,     Pill     (Westerfield     Pharmacal     Co.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915.  p.   170. 
Glycerole    of    Lecithin     (Fairchild    Bros.     &    Foster),     Reports    Council 

Pharm.    &  Chem..    1915,   p.    122;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.    S3. 
Glycerophosphates,     The    Journal,     Sept.     30.     1916,    p.     1033;     Reports 

Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1916,   p.   32;   Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    520. 
Glycerophosphate  Comp.  No.    1,  Mulford,  Ampuls    (H.  K.   Mulford  Co.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916.  p.   49. 
Glycerophosphate   Comp.   Ampuls,    1    cc.   Squibb   (E.   R.   Squibb  &  Sons), 

The  Journal,  Feb.  3,  1917;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916, 

p.  48. 
Glycerosal    (Rohm    &    Haas),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918, 

p.    57. 
Glyco-Heroin,   Smith    (Martin   H.   Smith  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   June  6, 

1914,  p.  1826;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  29;  Propa- 
ganda, ed.  9,  p.   88. 
Glyco-Pepto   Milk   (Glyco-Pepto  Manufacturing  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal, 

April   21,    1923,   p.    1165;   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,   1923, 

p.  27. 
Glyco-Thymoline   (Kress  &  Owen   Co.),  The  Journal,   March   14,   1914, 

p.    868;    Oct.    10,    1914,    p.    1312;    Sept.    16,    1916.    p.    895;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914.  p.  54;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  92. 
Glycozone    (Drevet    Mfg.    Co.).    The   Jour?^al,    June    5.    1909,    p.    1851; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1909,  p.   103;  Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  95. 
Glyeuthymol   (Nixon,   Stuart   &   Barker),  The  Journal,   Nov.    15.   1924, 

p.  1606;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  24. 
Gly-So-Dental    (National    Medical   Research   Laboratories),   The  Journal, 

Dec.  22,  1923,  p.  2123;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923.  p.  29. 
Gly-So-Iodonate    (National    Medical    Research    Laboratories),    The    Jour- 
nal, Dec.   22,   1923,  pp.  2118.  2132;  June  7,   1924,  p.    1881;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1923,   p.    29;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,    1923, 

p.  87. 
Goat's    Rue,    The    Journal,    May    26,    1917,    p.    1570;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1912,    p.    42;    1917,    p.    24;    Propaganda,    voL    2, 

p.  131. 
Goiter    Serum.    Mark    White    (Mark    White    Serum    Laboratories),    The 

Journal,  Sept.  23,   1916,  p.  967;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1916,  p.  23;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  87. 

Gomenol    (Charles    R.    Bard),    The    Journal,    April    4.    1914,    p.    1110; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.  304. 
Gonad-Ovarian    Compound    (Harrower    Laboratory,    Inc.),   The  Journal, 

Oct.  16,  1926,  p.  1322. 
Gonococcic     (Neisser)    Vaccine     (National    Drug    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.   43. 
Gonococcic  Vaccine   (National  Vaccine  and  Antitoxin  Institute),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921.  p.  53. 
Gonococcide   (Cox  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  24,  1907,   p.   708. 
Gonococcus    Antigen    No.    35     (Persson    Laboratories),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1922,  p.   62. 
Gonococcus  Immunogen    (Parke,   Davis  &   Co.),  The  Journal.   Sept.   17, 

1927,  p.  984;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1927,  p.  37. 
Gonococcus  Immunogen  Combined    (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal, 

Sept.   17,  1927,  p.  984;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  37. 
Gonococcus  Serum,  The  Journal.  Jan.  17,  1925,  p.  220;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   20. 
Gonococcus    Vaccines,    The    Journal,    Jan.    17,    1925,    p.    220;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  20. 


xxvi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

GonoHn     (Horovitz    Biochemic    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    April    4, 

1925,   p.    1070;   Dec.    21,   1929,  p.   1974. 
Gonosan    (Riedel   &    Co.,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   Oct.    13,   1917,   p.    1287; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.   57;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  150. 
Gossypin,  The  Journal,  June  3,  1911,  p.   1670;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1911,  p.   19;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  84. 
Granular   Effervescent    Salicylos    (H.   K.    Mulford   Co.),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1926,  p.  29. 
Granular    Effervescent    Sodium    Phosphate    Compound    (Squibb)     (E.    R. 

Squibb  &  Sons),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  63. 
Griffith's  Compound   Mixture,  The  Journal,  Jan.  21,   1922,  p.  236. 
Guiaialin   (Organic  Chemical  Mfg.  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  5,  1908,  p. 

818;  May  8,  1909,  p.  1511;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8, 

p.   166;   1909,  p.  76. 
Guaiodine    (Intravenous    Products    Co.),    The   Journal,    April    6,    1918, 

p.    1026;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918,    p.    9;    Reports 

Chem,  Lab.,   1918,  p.  24;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   183. 
Guaisodide    (George  A.   Breon  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  27,  1924,  p. 

1021. 
Guphen    (Gane's    Chemical    Works,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1933,  p.  95. 
Gynantrin  (G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   Aug.  31,  1935,  p.  667. 

H-M-C. :     See  Hyoscin-Morphin-Cactin. 

Haelepron  Tablets  (Haelepron  Sales  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  22,  1922, 
p.   319;   Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  38. 

Hair  Cap  Moss,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  43. 

Haley's  M-0  Magnesia  Oil  (Haley  M-0  Co.,  Inc.).  The  Journal, 
April  5,  1930,  p.  1067;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  34. 

Havens'  Wonderful  Discovery  (E.  C.  Havens),  The  Journal,  March 
22,  1919,  p.  883;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  7. 

Hay  Fever  Fall  Pollen  Extract-Mulford  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  Reports 
Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1921,  p.   45. 

Hay  Fever  Spring  Pollen  Extract-Mulford  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  Re- 
ports Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1921,  p.  45. 

Hayner's  Normaline  (Norman  C.  Hayner  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept. 
26,  1931,  p.  931;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931,  p.  45. 

Healthola  Diabetic  Flour  (Healthola  Diabetic  Flour  Co.),  The  Journal, 
July  11,   1931,  p.  103;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931,  p.  46. 

Hectine  (Geo.  J.  Wallau.  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  8,  1914,  p.  502; 
Sept.  20,   1924,  p.  942;   Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.  308. 

Helenin  and  Globules  of  "Helenin  De  Korab"  (De  Korab  Bojemski), 
Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1919,   p.    78. 

Helmitol  (Winthrop  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal.  Jan.  22,  1921,  p.  260; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  49;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p._  295. 

Helonias  Compound,  Cordial  Elixir  (Ray  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  41. 

Helonias  Compound,  Elixir  (Hance  Bros.  &  White),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,^  p.  41. 

Helonias  Compound,  Elixir  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  41. 

Helonias  Compound,  Elixir  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   41. 

Helonias  Compound,  Elixir  (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.).  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   41. 

Helonias  Compound,  Fluidextract  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.).  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem..   1912,  p.   41. 

Hemaboloids  (Palisade  Manufacturing  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 
Chem..  1919,  p.  80. 

Hemaboloids  Arseniated  with  Strychnia  (The  Palisade  Mfg.  Co.),  The 
Journal,   Dec.  27,   1913,  p.  2306. 

Hemo  (Thompson's  Malted  Food  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  24,  1914,  p. 
1494;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   319. 

Hemo-Therapin  (Hemo-Therapin  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Jan.  S, 
1918,  p.  48;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  116;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  168. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxvii 

Hepatex,  P.  A.  F.  (Thomas  A.  Hedley),  The  Journal,  Nov.  13,  1932, 
p.   1690;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1932,  p.   53. 

Hepatico  Tablets  (David  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  20, 
1917,  p.   1734;    Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,   p.   64. 

Hernia,  Injection   Treatment  of,   The  Journal,   Sept.   26,   1936,   p.    1053. 

Hernial  (Vincent  Ruiz  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  1,  1930,  p.  339;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1929,  p.   31. 

Herradora's  Arsenic  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use,  Nos.  1  to  6  (Scien- 
tific Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports 
Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1923,    p.    34. 

Herradora's  Arsenic  and  Hypophosphites  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scientific 
Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1923,  p.  34. 

Herradora's  Arsenic  and  Iron  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scien- 
tific Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports 
Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1923,  p.   34. 

Herradora's  Calcium  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scientific  Chem- 
ical Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.    &   Chem..    1923.    p.    34. 

Herradora's  Calcium-Sodium  Glycerophosphate  Compound  for  Intravenous 
Use  (Scientific  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923  p.  1259; 
Reports   Council   Pharm.    6:   (Them.,    1923,    p.    34. 

Herradora's  Chlorids  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scientific  Chem- 
ical Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1923,  p.   34. 

Herradora's  Chlorids  with  Iron  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scien- 
tific Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1923,   p.   34. 

Herradora's  Creosote  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use,  Nos.  1  and  2 
(Scientific  Chemical  Co.).  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259: 
Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1923,  p.   34. 

Herradora's  Digitalin  Compound  (Scientific  (jhemical  Co.),  The  Journal 
April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923 
p.  34. 

Herradora's  Glycerophosphate-Iron  and  Nickel  Compound  for  Intravenous 
Use  (Scientific  Chemical  Co.).  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1923,  p.   34. 

Herradora's  Guaiacol  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scientific  Chem; 
ical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem..  1923.  p.  34. 

Herradora's  lodids  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  (Scientific  Chemical 
Co.).  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,    1923.   p.   34. 

Herradora's  Hexamethylenamine  and  Guaiacol  Compound  for  Intravenous 
Use  (Scientific  Chemical  Co.).  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p. 
1259;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1923,  p.   34. 

Herradora's  Iron  Manganese  and  Nickel  Compov:nd  for  Intravenous  Use 
(Scientific  Chemical  Co.).  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259; 
Reports  Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1923,  p.  34. 

Herradora's    Mercury    Compound    for    Intravenous    Use    (Scientific   Chem- 
ical  Co.),  The  Journal,   April  28,    1923,  p.   1259;   Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1923,  p.   34. 
Herradora's  Quinine  Compound  for  Intravenous  Use  Nos.    1   and  2   (Sci- 
entific Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1923,  p.  1259;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1923,  p.  34. 
Herradora's  Sodium  lodid  for  Intravenous  Use   (Scientific  Chemical  Co.). 
The  Journal,   April   28,    1923,  p.   1259;   Reports  Council  Pharm.    & 
Chem.,  1923,  p.  34. 
Herradora's    Sodium   lodid-Salicylate-Guaiacol  Compound   for   Intravenous 
Use    (Scientific    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    April    28,    1923,    p. 
1259;  Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  34. 
Heterophile    Antibody    in    the    Treatment    of    Pneumonia,    The    Journal, 

Aug.   15,    1936.  p.   499. 
Hexa-Co-Sal-In    (Hexa-Co-Sal-In    Co.),    The   Journal,    Oct.    2,    1915,    p. 
1203;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915,    p.    159;    Reports 
Chem.  Lab.,  1915,  p.   107. 
Hexalet   (Riedel  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1921,  p.  27. 
Hex-a-Iith    (Smith-Dorsey   Co.),  The  Journal,   Feb.    14,   1914,  p.   555. 


xxviii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Hex-Iodin   (Daggett  and  Miller  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Oct.   4,   1919, 

p.  1077;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  ZZ',  Propaganda, 

vol.   2,   p.    236. 
Hexol    (Sanitary    Supply    Co.),    The   Journal,    Aug.    27,    1927,    p.    711; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1927,  p.  38. 
Hexylresorcinol    Solution    (Sharp    &    Dohme),    The    Journal,    May    25, 

1935,  p.    1906;   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1935,   p.  67. 
Hogan's    Colloid    Solution    Materials    for    Intravenous    Transfusion. — See 

Colloid  Solution  Materials  for  Intrayenous  Transfusion,  Hogan's. 
Holadin     (Fairchild    Bros.    &    Foster),    The    Journal,    June    14,    1930, 

p.    1919;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   28. 
Holadin    and    Bile    Salts,    Fairchild    (Fairchild    Bros.    &   Foster),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  59;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  207. 
Holadin,    Bile    Salts    and   Phenolphthalein,    Capsules    of,    Fairchild    (Fair- 
child    Bros.    &    Foster),    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918,    p 

59;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    208. 
Holadin,  Succinate  of  Soda  and  Bile  Salts,  Capsules  of,  Fairchild   (Fair- 
child   Bros.    &   Foster),   Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chera.,    1918,   p 

59;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  208. 
Homobreol     (Organon    Laboratories),     The    Journal,    Aug.     31,     1935 

p.    1667. 
Ho-Mo-Sol     (Sanizone)     (Sanox    Co.),    The    Journal,    Aug.    24,     1935 

p.   599;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1935,  p.   77. 
Hormotone   (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.).  The  Journal,  Aug.   16,   1919,  p.  549; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1919,   p.   30;   Propaganda,   vol.   2 

p.   234;    Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1925,   p.  20. 
Hormotone  Without  Postpituitary    (G.  W.   Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal 

Aug.    16,    1919,   p.    549;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1919,   p. 

30;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  235. 
Horse  Dung  Allergen-Squibb  (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  Nov 

7,  1925,  p.   1504;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  27. 
Horse  Nettle.   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   43. 
Horsford's  Acid   Phosphate    (Rumford    Chemical    Works),   The  Journal 

Oct.  7.  1933,  p.  1153;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933,  p.  99, 
Hosal     (Abbott    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    July    22,    1933,    p.    280; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   100. 
Hosept  (Homer  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  5,   1933,  p.  447; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933,   p.    102. 
House    Dust    Allergen-Squibb    (E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons)^    The    Journal 

Nov.  7.  1925.  p.  1504;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  27 
Hoyt's   Gluten    Flakes    (Pure    Gluten    Food    Co.),   The   Journal,   Jan.    3 

1925,  p.  53;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  29, 
Hoyt's  Protein  Cereal    (Pure  Gluten   Food  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  20 

1926,  p.    1760;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Ch£m.,   1926,  p.  30. 
Hydragogin    (C.   Bischoff  &  Co.),   The  Journal,   Jan.   27,    1906,   p.   288 

Sept.    4,    1915,    p.    894;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1915,   p. 

154;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,  p.   41. 
Hydrangea  and   Lithia,   Elixir   (Hance  Bros.   &  White),   Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  45. 
Hydrangea,  Lithiated   (Lambert  Pharmacal  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,    1912,  p.  42. 
Hydras   (John  Wyeth   and  Bro.),   The  Journal,   Oct.   7,   1916,   p.    1107; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  Z6',  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1916,  p.  29;  Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  96. 
Hydrastis  and  Cramp  Bark  Compound,  Elixir  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The 

Journal,  Aug.   31,   1912,  p.   735;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1912,  p.  44;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  410. 
Hydrastis  and  Viburnum  Compound,   Elixir  of   (Smith,  Kline  &  French 

Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,   1912,  p.   735;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p. 

410. 
Hydrocyanate  of  Iron,  Tilden  (The  Tilden  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  19, 

1909,  p.  2008;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1909,  p.  27;  Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  235. 
Hydroleine     (Charles    N.    Crittenton     Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1915,  p.    171;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   58. 
Hydron    (Wm.    S.    Merrell    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,    1912,   p.    44. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxix 

Hydronaphthol    (Seabury   &   Johnson),   The  Journal,    Sept.    3,    1910,   p. 

878;  Reports  Chem.   Lab.,   1910,  p.   108;  Propaganda,  vol,    1,  p.  308. 
Hydropsin  (E.  Bischoff  &  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  8,  1916,  p.  135; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1915,  p.   94;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  61. 
Hydrozone    (Charles   Marchand),  The  Journal,   Sept.   23,    1905,   p.   936; 

Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   309. 
Hymosa  (Walker  Pharmacal  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  11,  1910,  p.  1955; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1910,  p.  51;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1912,   p.    44;    Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.   238. 
Hyoscin-Morphin-Cactin,  now  Hyoscin-Morphin-Cactoid   (The  Abbott  Lab- 
oratories), The  Journal,   Dec.   21,    1907,  p.   2103. 
Hyperol  (Purdue  Frederick  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  18,  1914,  p.  1271; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.    12;   Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  100. 
Hyperthermine   (Pasteur  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  19,  1917,  p. 

1497;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,  p.   331. 
Hypodermic   Solution    No.    13,   Iron   Arsenic   and   Phosphorus   Compound 

(Burdick-Abel   Laboratory),   The  Journal,   Nov.    13,    1920,   p.    1358; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1920,  p.  27;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

P-   275. 
Hypophosphites,   The  Journal,   Sept.   2,    1916,   p.   760;    Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &    Chem.,    1916,   p.    11. 
Hypophosphites,    Robinson's    (Robinson-Pettet    Company),    The   Journal, 

Sept.   2,    1916,   p.    761;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &   Chem,,    1916,   p. 

15;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  .83. 
Hypoquinidol    (R.    VV.    Gardner),   The   Journal,   Jan.    10,    1914,    p.    148; 

Propaganda,   vol.    1,    p.   310. 

Ichthalbin  (E.  Bilhuber,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  16,  1924;  p.  565; 
Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,   p.   30. 

Ichthyol  (Merck  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  16,  1924,  p.  565;  Reports 
Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,   p.   30. 

Ichthyol-Isapogen  (H.  Seufert),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928, 
p.   34. 

Ichty-Amon  (Meadows  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1928,  p.  12. 

Ichthynate  (Mallinckrodt  Chemical  Works),  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1912, 
p.   110. 

Ichthytar  (Szel  Import  &  Export  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  10,  1917, 
p.   796;   Repotrs   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,   p.   18. 

Idozan  (Duomares  Corporation),  The  Journal,  April  17,  1926,  p.  1233; 
Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1926,  p.   31. 

Igol  Oral  and  Igol  G.  U.  (Surgident  Ltd.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  29,  1936, 
p.   658;   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1936,   p.   39. 

Imbak  (Ernst  W.  Abicht),  The  Journal,  Aug.  3,  1935;  p.  286;  Reports 
Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1935,  p.   79. 

Immune  Globulin  (Human)  :  Placimmurjin-Squibb,  Reports  Council 
Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1935,   p.   81. 

Immune  Globulin  (Human) -Lederle,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1935,    p.   81. 

Immunogens  (P.  D.  &  Co.) :  See  Catarrhal  Immunogen,  Gono- 
coccus  Immunogen,  Gonococcus  Immunogen  Combined,  Streptococcus 
Immunogen,  Streptococcus  Immunogen  Combined,  Pertussis  Immuno- 
gen, Pertussis  Immunogen  Combined,  Pneumococcus  Immunogen  and 
Pneumococcus    Immunogen    Combined. 

Incitamin  (Lehn  &  Fink,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  12,  1925,  p.  1907; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  28. 

Influenza  Mixed  Vaccine-Lilly  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  June 
22,  1918,  p.  1967;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  11; 
Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    187. 

Influenza  Prophylactic-Lederle  (Lederle  Antitoxin  Laboratories),  Reports 
Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1919,  p.   81. 

Influenza  Serobacterin  Mixed-Mulford  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, June  22,  1918,  p.  1967;  Jan.  26,  1929,  p.  316;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  1967;  Jan.  26,  1929,  p.  316;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  11;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   187. 


XXX  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Influenza    Vaccine    No.    38    (G.    H,    Sherman),    The   Journal,    Oct.    11, 

1924,  p.    1184;   Jan.   26,    1929,   p.    316;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1924,  p.  57. 
Ingluvin    (Wm.    R.    Warner    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    11,    1908,    p. 

142;    Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  p.    116;   Propaganda, 

vol.   1,  p.    101. 
Injectable    Ovarian    Preparations,    The   Journal,   Jan.    30,    1932,    p.   402; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  55. 
Insoloid   (Insurol  Co.  of  America),  The  Journal,  Jan.  31,   1931,  p.  377. 
Insulols    (Drug  Products   Co.),  The  Journal,   July  26,    1924,   p.  289. 
Intarvin    (The    Intarvin    Co.),    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1932, 

p.  55. 
Interferin,  The  Journal,  Oct.  12,   1935,  p.  1210. 

Interol    (Van  Horn  &  Sawtell),  The  Journal,  July  10,   1915,  p.   175. 
Intestinal    Antiseptic    W-A     (The    Abbott    Laboratories),    The    Journal, 

Dec.    19,    1914,   p.   2247;    Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1914,  p. 

78;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   103. 
Intramine    (E.    Fougera   &   Co.,    Inc.),    The  Journal,   Sept.   8,    1917,   p. 

841;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1917,    p.    49;    Propaganda, 

vol.   2,  p.    144. 
Intramuscular    Iron   Arsenic    Comp.    (No.    201)    (Sci-Medico,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,   Dec.   7,    1929,  p.   1809;    Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1929,  p.  33. 
Intravenin   P-H    (Intravenin   Products   Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1915,  p.   120. 
Intravenous  Compound   (Loffler)    (Charles  Lyman  Loffler),  The  Journal, 

No.    12,   1921,  p.    1591;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  430. 
(Intravenous)   Iron,  Cacod.  and  Glycerophosphate   (No.  202)    (Sci-Medico, 

Inc.),  The  Journal.  Dec.   7,   1929,  p.   1809;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1929,  p.  33. 
Inyecciones    Proliferantes    Obturadoras    Del    Dr.    E.    Pina    Mestre    (See 

Hernial), 
lodagol   (David   B.   Levy,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   Nov.   17,   1917,   p.   1725; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1917,   pp.    65-116;   Reports  Chem. 

Lab.,    1917,  p.  80;   Propaganda,  vol.    2,  p.    154. 
lodalia    (Geo.   J.   Wallau,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   Dec.   12,    1914,  p.  2149; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.  69;    Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1914,  p.    75;    Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.    106. 

lodeol    (David   B.    Levy,   Inc.),    The  Journal,   Nov.    17,    1917,   p.    1725; 

Reports    Council    Pharm,    &    Chem.,    1917,    pp.    65-116;    1924,    p.    41; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1917,  p.  80;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.    154. 
lodex   (Menley  &  James),   The  Journal,  Nov.   30,   1912,   p.    1992;  June 

19,   1915,   p.   2085;    May   3,    1919,   p.    1315;   April   30,    1927,   p.    1438; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  144;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1915,  p.   89;    1919,  p.   104;   Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.    107;    Propaganda, 
vol.  2,  pp.  365,  436. 

lodex,    Liquid    (Menley    &   James),    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,    1919,    p.    104; 

Propaganda,    vol.    2,   p.    365. 
lodia    (Battle   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Nov.   21,    1914,    p.   1871;   Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1914,    p.    60;    Reports   Chem.    Lab.,    1914, 

p.   58;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   108. 
lodin,  Burnham's   Soluble    (Burnham   Soluble  lodin   Co.),  The  Journal, 

March   28,    1908,    p.    1055;    May   15,    1915,   p.    1673;    Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   50;   Reports  Chem.   Lab.,  to   1909,  p.  30; 

Propaganda,  vol.  1,  pp.   110,  233. 
lodin  Petrogen    (John   Wyeth  &  Bro.),  The  Journal,   Nov.   30,   1912,  p. 

1992. 
lodin    Tablets,    Burnham's    Soluble    (Burnham    Soluble    lodin    Co.),    The 

Journal,    March    28,    1908,   p.    1055;    Reports   Chem.    Lab.,   to    1909, 

p.  32;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  233. 
Iodine  Boric  Acid  Dusting  Powder  (Sulzberger)    (George  P.  Pilling  Co.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  63. 
Iodine     Ointment,     Burnham's     (Burnham     Soluble     Iodine     Co.),     The 

Journal,    July    1,    1933,    p.    33;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1933,  p.   26. 
lodinized    Emulsion    (Scott)     (Dawson    Pharmacal    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Aug.    24,    1918,   p.    680;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1918,  p. 

25;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.    192. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxxi 

lodinized  Oil,   Mark  White   (Mark  White   Laboratories),   The  Journal, 

Sept.    23,    1916,    p.    967;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1916, 

p.  23;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  87. 
lodinol    (Toledo  Pharmacal   Co.),   The  Journal,   Aug.   20,    1921,  p.  637; 

Reports   Chem.   Lab.,    1921,   p.   31. 
lodiphos   (Charles  L.   Heffner),   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1919, 

p.  81;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  249. 
lodipin    10   Per    Cent    (Merck   &   Co.,   Inc.),    Reports   Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1930,  p.  40. 
lodipin   40   Per   Cent    (Merck   &    Co.,    Inc.),    Reports   Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1930,  p.  40. 
lodival   (Knoll  &  Co.).  The  Journal,  March  4,  1911,  p.  685. 
lod-Izd-Oil   (Miller's)    (lodum-Miller   Co.),  The  Journal,   Oct.   2,   1915, 

p.    1202;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915,    p.    76;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,  1915,  p.  106;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  49. 
lodochlorol  (G.  D.  Searle  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  26,  1934,  p.   1761; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1934,  p.   65. 
lodochlorol    Emulsion    (G.    D.    Searle    &    Co.),    The   Journal,    May   26, 

1934,  p.   1761;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1934,  p.  65. 
lodobor    (lodobor   Co.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1930,   p.   41; 

1934,  p.  63. 
lodo-Bromide   of  Calcium   Comp.,    "Without   Mercury"   and    "With   Mer- 
cury,"   Elixir    (The    Tilden    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    6,    1915,    p. 

1662;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   160. 
lodo-Mangan     (Reinschild    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1916,  p.  64;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   106. 
lodomin     (American    Bio-Chemical     Laboratories,     Inc.),    The    Journal, 

May    27,    1933,    p.    1687;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem..    1933. 

p.   113. 
Idomuth    (Organic   Chemical    Mfg.    Co.),    The   Journal,    Sept.    5,    1908, 

p.    818;    May   8,    1909,    p.    1511;    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1905-8,  p.  166;  1909,  p.  75. 
lodonucleoid    (Dinet   &    Delfosse    Pharm.    Co.),    The   Journal,    July   22, 

1911,  p.   309;   Reports  Chem.    Lab.,   1911,  p.  92;   Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.   310. 
lodotone    (Eimer    &   Amend),    The   Journal,    Dec.    12,    1914,    p.    2149; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1914,  p.   72;   Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  113. 
lodovasogen  (Lehn  &  Fink),  The  Journal,  Feb.  13,  1909,  p.  575;  Propa- 
ganda, ed.  9,  p.  408. 
lodoxybenzoates.  The  Journal,  March  19,  1932,  p.  983;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  56. 
lodyl    (The   Vel    Co.),   The  Journal,   May    14,    1932,    p.    1744;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1932,   p.    57. 
lodum-Miller    (lodum-Miller  Co.).  The  Journal,   Oct.  2,    1915,  p.   1202; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915,  p.  76;   Reports  Chem.   Lab., 

1915,  p.  102;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  49. 
lomer-Mensal    (National    Medical    Research   Laboratories),   The  Journal, 

Dec.  22,  1923,  p.  2123;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  29. 
losaline    (losaline    Co.,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    March    15,    1913,    p.    849, 

July  21,  1928,  p.  173;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1913,  p'.  13, 

1928,  p.   32;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.    113. 
Ipecacuanha-Agar   (Reinschild  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1934,  p.  66. 
Iridinol   (P.   H.   Potter   &  Sons,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Nov.   24,   1923,  p. 

1807;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  46. 
Iron  Arsenic  Comp.    (No.  201),  Intramuscular   (See  Intramuscular  Iron 

Arsenic  Comp.    No.   201). 
Iron,  Cacod.  and  Glycerophosphate    (No.  202)    (Intravenous)    (See  Intra- 
venous   Iron,    Cacod.   and   Glycerophosphate). 
Iron    Solution    for    Intravenous    Therapy-Perkins    and    Ross    (Perkins    & 

Ross),    The    Journal,    Nov.     14,     1914,    p.    1778;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  125. 
Iron   Tropon    (Tropon   Works),   The  Journal,   April   23,    1910,   p.    1389; 

Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.    313. 
Isapogen    (H.    Seufert),   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1928,    p.    34 


xxxii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Isopral  (The  Bayer  Company,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  8,  1908,  p.  487; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  p.    119. 
Isopropyl  Alcohol,  The  Journal,   Feb.   15,   1936,  p.   562. 
Ittiolo    (Guiseppi    W.    Guidi),    Renorts    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1920, 

p.    64. 
I-X   Barium   Meal    (Dick  X-Ray   Co.),   The   Journal,    March    24,    1934, 

p.  930;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1934,  p.  67. 
I-X  Barium  Meal  (Unflavored)    (Dick  X-Ray  Co.),  The  Journal,  March 

24,  1934,  p.   930;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1934,  p.  67. 

Jaroma    (Jaroma    Co.),    The    Journal,    Sept.    2,    1911,    p.    835;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,   1911,  p.  103. 
Jelcolon    (Colonic  Jelly,   Inc.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1930, 

p.   42. 
Jubol    (Geo.   J.    Wallau,   Inc.),   The   Journal,    Aug.    14,    1915,    p.    639; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.  152;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  31. 
Juglandin,    The    Journal,    Nov.    13,    1909,    p.    1655;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1909,  p.  135. 
Junicosan  (Hans  P.  Wesemann),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923, 

p.  48. 

Kalak    Water     (Kalak    Water    Co.,     Inc.),     Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1917,  p.  148;  1922,  p.  39;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  160;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.  37. 
Kal    Pheno    Tcoth    Paste    (Kal    Pheno    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1921,   p.   41. 
Kal   Pheno  Tooth   Powder    (Kal    Pheno    Chemical    Co.),   Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1921.   p.   41. 
Kalzan    (Wulfing   Co.),   The   Journal,    April    7,    1928,    p.    1117;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1928,  p.   38. 
Katharmon    (Katharmon    Chemical    Co.).    The   Journal,    Aug.    10,    1918, 

p.  487;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  23;  Reports  Chem. 

Lab.,   1918,  p.  35;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   191. 
Kefilac   (Kefilac  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  30,   1909,  pp.   372,  397. 
Kefir  Fungi,  The  Journal,  July  1,  1933,  p.  34;   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1933,  p.  21. 
Kelpidine — See   Minson's  Soluble   lodin. 
Keraphen   (Picker  X-Ray  Corp.),  The  Journal,  June  26,   1929,  p.  2171; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1929,  p.  34. 
Kerasol    (Picker  X-Ray   Corp.),   The  Journal,  June   26,   1929,  p.   2171; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  34. 
Keratin,   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1911,   p.    58. 
Kerolysin   f Upjohn  Co.),  The  Journal,    May  20,   1933,  p.   1597;   Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933,  p.   31. 
Kidney  Solution    (Rovin)    (A.   M.  Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal,   Feb.  25, 

1933,  p.  574;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   166. 
Kinazyme    (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),    The  Journal,   Nov.    1,   1913,   p.    1649. 
Ki-Uma   (E.  Fougera),  The  Journal,  June  10,   1933,  p.   1885. 
Kola  Compound,    Elixir    (H.    K.   Mulford    Co.),   Reports   Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,   p.  40. 
Kola  Compound,   Elixir   (Ray   Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,    1912,   p.  40. 
Kolynos   (Kolynos  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  15,  1913,  p.  1812. 
Kondremul   (Plain)    (E.   L.  Patch  Co.),   The  Journal,  Aug.  5,   1933,  p. 

447;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,    p.    118. 
Kondremul  with  Phenolphthalein   (E.  L.  Patch  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug. 

5,   1933,  p.  447;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1933,  p.   118. 
Konsyl   (Burton,   Parsons   &   Co.),  The  Journal,   Dec.  5,  1936,   p.    1891; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1936,    p.    42. 
Kora-Konia    (Gerhard    Mennen   Chemical    Co.),    The  Journal,    Sept.    30, 

1916,  p.  1034;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  31;  Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,  1916,  p.  26;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  92. 
Koyol  (The  Koyol  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.   172. 
Kutnow's  Powder  (Kutnow  Bros.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  9,  1907,  p.  1619; 

Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.    314. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxxiii 

Labordine    (Labordine  Pharmacal   Co.),   The  Journal,   March   30,   1907, 

p.    1121;    Reports  Council    Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,   p.  45;    1912,  p. 

40;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   115. 
Lactampoule    (Fairchild   Bros.   &   Foster),   The  Journal,   June  4,   1927, 

p.    1831;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1927,  p.  20. 
Lacteol   (Dr.  Boucar,  Paris),   The  Journal,  Dec.  21,   1916,  p.   1959. 
Lactic  Bacillary  Tablets-Fairchild   (Fairchild  Bros.  &  Foster),  The  Jour- 
nal, June  4,   1927,  p.   1831;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927, 

p.   20. 
Lactobacilline  (The  Franco- American  Ferment  Co.),  The  Journal,  April 

17,   1915,  p.   1346;   Sept.   18,   1915,  p.   1049;   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem,,   1915,  p.    143;    Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.    120. 
Lactobacillus    Acidophilus    Milk    (Towt)     (Towt-Nolan    Laboratory),    The 

Journal,  April  4,  1936,  p.  1165;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1936,  p.  42, 
Lacto-Kelpol  (Kelpol  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Oct.  10,  1931,  p.  1077; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  61. 
Lactone  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  30,  1909,  pp.  372,  397. 
Lactopeptine    (New    York   Pharmacal  Association),   The  Journal,   March 

16,    1907,    p.    959;    Aug.    2,    1913,    p.    358;    Oct.    23,    1915,    pp.    1466, 

1467,   1477;    Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,   p.   43;    1913, 

p.  21;   1915,  p.  79;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   121;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  43. 
Lactopeptine,  Elixir   (New  York  Pharmacal  Association),  The  Journal, 

Feb.   9,    1907,  p.    533;    Oct.   23,    1915,   pp.    1466,    1467,    1477;   Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1915,  p.   79;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  43. 
Lactucarium,    Aubergier's    Syrup    of    (E.    Fougera    &    Co.,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,  Nov.  9,  1912,  p.   1732;  Feb.   15,  1913,  p.  538;  Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.  399, 
La  Mercy  Mineral  Water    (McKesson   &  Robbins,   Inc.),  The  Journal, 

June  22,   1933,  p.  280;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1933,  p. 

119. 
La   Mond's   Prescription    (H.    M.   Fletcher),    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem,.  1930,  p.  42. 
Larostidin-Roche    (Hoffraann-LaRoche),    The    Journal,    April    25,    1936, 

p,   1473. 
Lavoris   (Lavoris    Chemical   Company).   The  Journal,   Nov.    1,    1919,   p. 

1380;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  35;  Reports  Chem. 

Lab.,  1919,  p.  53;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  237. 
Laxaphen   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  30,  1910,  p.  1458; 

Propaganda,    vol.    1,   p.    344. 
Laxine    (Columbus    Pharmacal    Co.),   The   Journal,   April    30,    1910,    p. 

1458;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  344. 
Laxothalen  Tablets   (Pitman-Moore  Co.),   The  Journal,  April  30,   1910, 

p,    1458;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,   p,  344. 
Lecibrin    (Fairchild   Bros.   &  Foster),   Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1915,   p.   122;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   53. 
Lecithin,   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  C^hem.,   1915,  p.   122;   Propaganda, 

vol,   2,   p.    53. 
Lecithine,    (jare's    Granular     (Gare    Pharmacal    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1916,  p.    56. 
Lecithin    Solution    (Fairchild   Bros.   &  Foster),    Reports   Council   Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1915,   p.    122;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  53. 
Lecithol    (Armour   &   Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1915,   p. 

122;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  53. 
Lens  Antigen,  The  Journal,  April  14,  1928,  p.  1239. 
Lens  Extract    (H.   K.   Mulford).   The  Journal,  June  9,   1928,  p.    1879; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,  p.  40. 
Le  Page's  Glue  Allergen-Squibb   (E.  R.   Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal, 

Nov.  7,  1925,  p.  1504;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  27. 
Lesol    (Southwest   Medical    Supply   Co.),    The  Journal,    Dec.   20,    1930, 

p,  1933, 
Lettuce   Calmative    (Nelson,    Baker   &   Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1912,  p.  43. 
Lettuce,  Wild,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  43. 
Leucotropin    (Morgenstern   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Jan.   3,    1925,   p.    56. 
Leucocytic    Extract,    Archibald's    (The    Western    Laboratories),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  65. 


xxxiv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Leukocyte  Extract   (E.   R.   Squibb  &  Sons),   Reports   Council   Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1922,  p.  43. 
Leukocyte  Extract,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  43, 
Leventis'  Humanized  Serum,  The  Journal.  Sept.  29,  1928,  p.  980. 
Libradol    (Lloyd   Bros.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1920,  p.    65; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  293. 
Lignasin    (du  Pont  de   Nemours   Co.),   The  Journal,   June   3,    1933,  p. 

1795. 
Lilly's   Solution,  Dental:     See  Dental   Solution,   Lilly's. 
Lipoidal   Substances    (Horovitz)    (Horovitz   Biochemic  Laboratories   Co.), 

The   Journal,    Feb.    25,    1922,    p.    600;    Reports    Council    Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1922,  p.  44;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  320. 
Liposan     (HoflFman    &    Hicks),    The    Journal,    May    3,     1924,    p.    1462; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.  30. 
Liquid  Peptone  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal^  May  11,  1907,  p.   1612; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1905-8,   opp.   p.    64;    Propaganda, 

vol.   1,  p.   133. 
Liquid  Peptone   (Stevenson  &  Jester  Co.),  The  Journal,  May   11,   1907, 

p.  1612;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8,  opp.  p.  64;  Propa- 
ganda, ed.  9,  p.   133. 
Liquid   Peptones   with    Creosote    (Eli   Lilly   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   May 

11,    1907;    p.    1612;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1905-8,   opp. 

p.  64;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   133. 
Liquid   Peptonoids    (Arlington  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1922,  p.  48. 
Liquor  Ergot-Mulford  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  4,  1929, 

p.    1521;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  26. 
Liquor   Santaiva,    S.    &    D.    (Sharp   &    Dohme),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1918,  p.  66;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  211. 
Listerine    (Lambert  Pharmacal   Co.),  The  Journal,  July  4,   1925,  p.   55; 

April  18,   1931,  pp.   1303,  1308. 
Lithia    and    Hydrangea,    Elixir    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  45. 
Lithia    and     Hydrangea,     Elixir     (Ray    Chemical    Co.,     Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  45. 
Lithia    and    Hydrangea,    Elixir    (Smith,    Kline    &    French    Co.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912.   p.   45. 
Lithiated   Hydrangea    (Lambert   Pharmacal   Co.),   The  Journal,   July   4, 

1925,  p.  55. 
Lithiated     Sorghum     Compound     (Sharp     &     Dohme),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   39. 
Lithium  Salts.  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1935,  p.  89. 
Lithontriptic,  The  Journal,  Feb.  28,  1925,  p.  699. 
Liver  Leaf,   Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   43. 
Liver   Solution    (Rovin)    (A.    M.    Rovin   Lab's),   The  Journal,   Feb.   25, 

1933,  p.  574;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   166. 
L.   O.  Compound  No.   1  and  No.  2    (Medical  Supply  Co.),  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  156;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  163. 
Loeflund's  Food  Maltose   (Britt,  Loeffler  &  Weil),  The  Journal,  Jan.  17, 

1925,  p.   220;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  45. 
Loeflund's  Malt  Extract  with  Calcium    (Britt,   Loeffler  &  Weil),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1929,  p.  35. 
Loeflund's    Malt    Extract    with    Cod    Liver    Oil    (Britt,    Loeffler   &   Weil), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  45. 
Loeser's    Intravenous    Solution    of    Calcium    Chloride    (New    York    Intra- 
venous  Laboratory,    Inc.),    The   Journal.    March    21,    1925,   p.    914; 

Jan.    16,   1926,   p.   217;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1925,   pp. 

31,  22. 
Loeser's   Intravenous   Solution   of  Hexamethylenamin    (New   York  Intra- 
venous  Laboratory,    Inc.),   The   Journal,   April    16,    1921,    p.    1120; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1921,   p.   43;   Propaganda,  vol.   2, 

p.  299. 
Loeser's  Intravenous  Solution  of  Hexamethylenamin  and   Sodium  Iodide 
(New  York  Intravenous  Laboratory,   Inc.).  The  Journal,  April   16, 

1921,  p.   1120;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  43;  Prop^ 

ganda,  vol.  2,  p.  299. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxxv 

Loeser's  Intravenous  Solution  of  Mercury  Bichloride  (New  York  Intra- 
venous Laboratory,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  16,  1921,  p.  1120; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  43;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.  299. 

Loeser's  Intravenous  Solution  of  Salicylate  and  Iodide  (New  York 
Intravenous  Laboratory,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  16,  1921,  p. 
1120;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  43;  Propaganda, 
vol.   2,   p.   299. 

Loeser's  Intravenous  Solution  of  Sodium  Iodide  (New  York  Intravenous 
Laboratory,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  16,  1921,  p.  1120;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1921,  p.  43;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  299. 

Loeser's  Intravenous  Solution  of  Sodium  Salicylate  (New  York  Intra- 
venous Laboratory,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  16,  1921,  p.  1120; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  43;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.  299. 

Loeser's  Intravenous  Solution  of  Sodium  Thiosulfate  (New  York  Intra- 
venous Laboratory  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  28,  1925,  p.  1289; 
Jan.  16,  1926,  p.  217;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  pp. 
32,  33. 

Lucas  Laboratories'  Products  (Lucas  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal, 
Sept.   20,    1919,   p.   927;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   440. 

Luesol  (Horovitz  Biochemical  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Dec.  21, 
1929,  p.   1974. 

Luetin,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  Chem.,  1922,  p.   49. 

Luetin  (H.  K.  Mulford  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1922, 
p.  49. 

Lukosine  (National  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  19,  1927,  p.  588; 
Aug.  13,  1927,  p.  542;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p. 
40-41. 

Lumodrin  (Winthrop  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  15,  1933,  p. 
1172;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   121. 

Lupulin-Agar  (Reinschild  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  12,  1932, 
p.   1690;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1932,  p.   57. 

Lutein  (Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning),  The  Journal,  June  24,  1930, 
p.  1997;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  25. 

Lutein,  Sterile  Solution  of  (Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning),  The  Jour- 
nal, Jan.  30,  1932,  p.  402;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932, 
p.  55. 

Luvein'  Arsans  (Plain)  (Lucas  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept. 
20,   1919,  p.   927;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   440. 

Luvein'  Arsans,  Nos.  1,  2  and  3  (Lucas  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Sept.  20,   1919,  p.  927;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  441. 

Luvein'  Creosophite  (Lucas  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  20, 
1919,  p.  927;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  441. 

Luvein'  Hexacol  (Lucas  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  20, 
1919,   p.   927;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   441. 

Lycetol  (The  Bayer  Co.,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918, 
p.   70;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,  p.   214. 

Lydin  (Harrower  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1930, 
p.  201;   Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,   p.  45. 

Lymph  Compound,  R-H  (New  Animal  Therapy  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec. 
14,   1912,  p.  2176;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.    317. 

Lymphatic  Solution  (Rovin)  (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal,  Feb. 
25,    1933,    p.    574;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,   p.    166. 

Lysoform  (Lysoform  Gesellschaft),  The  Journal,  Nov.  21,  1914,  p. 
1870;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  126. 

Lysoform,  Crude  (Lysoform  Gesellschaft),  The  Journal,  Nov.  21,  1914, 
p.    1870;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.   126. 

Lysol  (Lehn  &  Fink),  The  Journal,  Dec.  14,  1912,  p.  2173,  March  21, 
1928,  p.  1064;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  53;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.   318. 

Magnesia-Mineral  Oil   (25)-Haley  (Haley  M-0  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal, 

April  5,  1930,  p.  1067;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  34. 
Maizavena    (Wm.   S.    Merrell   Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council   Pharm.  & 

Chem.,   1912.   p.  44. 
Maizo-Lithium   (Henry  Pharmacal   Co.),  The  Journal,   Feb.   6,   1915,  p. 

528;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1915,  p.   9;   Reports   Chem. 

Lab.,  1914,  p.  65;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.   198. 


xxxvi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Mallophene    (Mallinckrodt    Chemical    Works),    The    Journal,    Dec.    28, 

1929,  p.  2044. 
Malnutrition   Sero   (California   Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories),  The 

Journal,  July  5,   1924,  p.  58. 
Malt  Extract  with  Alteratives,  Borcherdt's  (Borcherdt  Malt  Extract  Co.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1918,  p.   51. 
Malt    Extract    with    Calcium,    Loeflund's    (See    Loeflund's    Malt    Extract 

with    Calcium). 
Malt    Extract   with    Pepsin    and    Pancreatin    (Wm.    S.    Merrell    Chemical 

Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9,  1907,  p.  533. 
Malt    Extract   with    Yerba    Santa,    Borcherdt's    (Borcherdt    Malt    Extract 

Co.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1917,  p.    138. 
Malto-Yerbine    (Maltine    Co.),   Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1931, 

p.  62. 
Maltine   with   Cascara   Sagrada    (Maltine   Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1931,  p.  62. 
Maltine  with  Creosote   (Maltine  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1931,  p.  62. 
Maltine  Ferrated  (Maltine  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931, 

p.  62. 
Malt    Nutrine    (Anheuser   Busch,    Inc.),   The    Journal,    Dec.    25,    1926, 

p.  2177;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1926,  p.  34. 
Malt  Peptonates  with  Arsenic,  Borcherdt's  (Borcherdt  Malt  Extract  Co.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   138. 
Maltzyme  (Maltzyme  Company),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918, 

p.  67;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  211. 
Maltzyme    Ferrated    (Maltzyme    Company),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1918,  p.  67;   Propaganda,  vol.  2.  211. 
Maltzyme  with   Cascara  Sagrada    (Maltzyme   Company),   Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1918,    p.    67;    Propaganda,    vol.    2,    p.   211. 
Maltzyme    with    Cod    Liver    Oil    (Maltzyme    Company),    Reports    Council 

Phram.  &  Chem.,   1918,   p.    67;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   211. 
Maltzyme    with    Yerba    Santa     (Maltzyme    Company),     Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  67;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  211. 
Mammagen    (G.    W.    Carnrick    Co.),    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1925,  p.  20. 
Mammary  Gland,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1921,  p.  44. 
Mammary   Solution    (Rovin)    (A.   M.   Rovin   Lab's),  The  Journal,   Feb. 

25,    1933,   p.    574;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,   p.    166. 
Mammary     Substance    Desiccated     (The    Wilson    Laboratories),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1923,  p.  52. 
Manaca,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  (Them.,   1912,  p.  43. 
Manaca    and    Salicylates     Compound,    Elixir     (Hance    Bros.    &    White), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   44. 
Manaca   and    Salicylates    Compound,    Elixir    (Sharp    &    Dohme),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  44. 
Manaca  and  Salicylates,  Elixir   (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Chemical  Co.),  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   44. 
Manaca   and   Salicylates,    Elixir    (H.   K.   Mulford   Co.),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  44. 
Manaca  with  Salicylates,  Elixir  (Nelson,  Baker  &  Co.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  44. 
Manaca   and    Salicylates,    Elixir    (Parke,   Davis   &   Co.),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  44. 
Manaca    and    Salicylates,    Elixir    (Ray    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  44. 
Manaca   and    Salicylates,    Elixir    (Smith,    Kline    &    French    Co.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  44. 
Manaca    and    Salicylates,    Elixir    (F.    Stearns    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912.  p.  44. 
Manaca  and  Salicylates,   Elixir   (Truax,  Greene  &  Co.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  44. 
Manacaline    (Pullen-Richardson   Chemical    Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1912,   p.   44. 
Manola    (Manola   Co.),   The   Journal,    April   2,    1910,   p.    1154;   Reports 

Chem.   Lab.,    1910,  p.    105;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   323. 
Marienbad  Tablets   (J.  Sicke),  The  Journal,  July  18,   1908,  p.  237. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxxvii 

McKesson's  Copper-Iron   Compound    (McKesson    &   Robbins,   Inc.),   The 
Journal,  Dec.  26,  1931,  p.  1967;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1931,  p.  63. 

McKesson's    Vitamin    Concentrate    of     Cod     Liver     Oil     (McKesson     & 

Robbins,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    April    27,    1935,    p.    1503;    Reports 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1935,  p.  90. 
Meat  Extract,  "Rex"  Brand   (Cudahy  Packing  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan. 

23.  1909,  p.  311;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  472. 
Meat   Juice,    Valentine's    (Valentine's    Meat   Juice    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Nov.    20,    1909,    p.    1754;    May    2,    1914,    p.    1419;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1909,  p.  137;   1914,  p.    14;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  pp. 

123,  129,  472. 
Medeol    Suppositories    (Medeol    Company,    Inc.),   The    Journal,    March 

9,  1918,  p.  719;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  7;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   2,  p.   181. 
Medicago  Abrus  Compound  (M.  L.  Howe),  The  Journal,  Feb.  19,  1927, 

p.  588. 
Medicago  Sativa  (M.  L.  Howe),  The  Journal,  Feb.  19,  1927,  p.  588. 
Medicated  Corn  Plasters,  The  Journal,  June  18,  1932,  p.  2209;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  58. 
Medinal  (Schering  and  Glatz),  The  Journal,  Sept.  6.  1919,  p.  755;  Nov. 

15,    1919,   p.    1543;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1919,    p.   46; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.  239,  371. 
Med-0-Lin    (Waverly   Oil   Works  Co.),  The  Journal,  July   10,   1915,  p. 

175;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1915,   p.    172. 
Meningo-Bacterin-Mulford   (H.  K.   Mulford  Co.),  Report  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1927,  p.  42. 
Meningococcus     Serum     "Hoechst"     (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),     Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Meningococcus  Vaccine,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  42. 
Meningococcus     Vaccine     (Lederle)      (Lederle     Antitoxin     Laboratories), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1927,  p.  42. 
Merc-Absorbs    (Bio-Chemic   Laboratories),  The  Journal,   Feb.   25,    1922, 

p.  603. 
Mercodel   (Seydel  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  23,  1925,  p.  1373; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.  35. 
Mercol,   Howell's   (H.   B.   Howell  &  Co.,    Ltd.),  The  Journal,  Jan.   16, 

1909,  p.  225;  May  15,  1909,  p.  1595;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  Z26. 
Mercurostik  (J.  Headly  Laboratories),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1932,  p.  59. 

Mercurosticks  (Tappan  Zee  Surgical  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  19,   1934, 

p.    1681;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933,    p.    123;    1934, 

p.  74. 
Mercury  Salicylate-S.  D.  C,  Compressible  Capsules,  1   grain,   IJ^   grains, 

2  grains,  for  Intramuscular  Injection   (Synthetic  Drug  C)o.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  42. 
Mercury    Sozoiodolate,    The   Journal,    Feb.    13,    1909,    p.    573;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,   1909,  p.   19. 
Mercury    Sozoiodolate    Solution,    The   Journal,    Feb.    13,    1909,    p.    573; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1909,  p.   19. 
Mergel    (Riedel   &   Co.,   Inc.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1930, 

p.  48. 
Mervenol    (Hille  Laboratories),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1919, 

p.    82;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.   249. 
Metamel    (The   Newton   Laboratories),   The  Journal,   April    5,    1924,   p. 

1139. 
Metapollen    (Metapollen   Lab's),    The  Journal,    Feb.    18,    1933,   p.   498; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   124. 
Metatone    (Parke,    Davis  &  Co.),   The  Journal,    May   3,    1930,  p.    1405; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  48. 
Methaform   (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918, 

p.  68;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  212. 
Methylarsenated   Tricalcine    (Laboratoire    des   "Produits    Scientia"),   The 

Journal,  March  14,   1925,  p.  836;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1295,  p.  80. 
Methylene  Blue,  The  Journal,  May  6,  1933,  p.  1402. 
Methylene  Blue,  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,  1935,  p.  721. 


xxxviii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Methyl-Phenol    Serum    (Cano)    (H.    K.    Mulford    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  85;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  251. 
Methyl-Santal    (H.   K.   Mulford   Co.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1915,  p.    173. 
Micajah's  Suppositories    (Micajah  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  29,    1919, 

p.   1715;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1919,  p.  49;  Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   241. 
Micajah's    Wafers    (Micajah    &    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    29,    1919,   p. 

1715;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1919.  p.  49;  Reports  Chem. 

Lab.,    1919,   p.    55;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.    241. 
Micrococcus    Catarrhalis-Combined-Bacterin,     (The    Abbott    Laboratories), 

The  Journal,  June  22,    1918,   p.    1967;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1918,  p.   11;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   184. 
Micrococcus    Neoformans    Vaccine,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1917,  p.   152. 
Migrainin    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    5,    1909,    p. 

1851;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1909,   p.   105;    Propaganda, 

vol.   1.  p.   135. 
Mineral  Water,  La  Mercy,  The  Journal,  June  22,  1933,  p.  280;  Reports 

•Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.    119. 
"Mineralogen"   (Von  Bremen-Asche-de  Bruyn).   The  Journal,   Sept.   19, 

1931,  p.  852;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  69. 
Mineral    "Ox"    (Mineral   Oxide   Co.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1934,  p.  69. 
Minson's    Soluble    lodin    "Kelpidine"     (J.    J.    Minson),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1917,   p.    152;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.    161. 
Mist.    Helonin    Comp.    (Schlotterbeck   &   Foss),   The   Journal,    Dec.    18, 

1915,  p.  2186. 
Mistura    Creosote    Comp.    (Killgore's)     (Chas.    Killgore),    The   Journal, 

March  8,  1924,  p.  812;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  46. 
Mitchella  Compound  (Dr.  J.  H.  Dye  Medical  Institute),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  46. 
Mitysol    (Lehn   &   Fink,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   March   21,    1925,   p.    914; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.  64. 
Mixed    Staphylococcus   Acne    Vaccine,    The   Journal,   Jan.    23,    1926,   p. 

294;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  70. 
Mixed  Vaccines. — See  Vaccines,  Mixed. 
Mixed  Vaccine  No.  40,  Sherman's  (G.  H.  Sherman),  The  Journal,  June 

22,    1918.    p.    1967;    Reports    Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1918,   p.    11; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  188. 
Modilac   (Wm.   S.  Merrell  Co.),   The  Journal,   March  8,    1930.  p.  716; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1930,  p.  51. 
Mon-Arsone    (The    Harmer    Laboratories    Co.),    The    Journal,    Feb.    26, 

1921,  p.  595;  June   18,   1921.  p.    1781;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1920,  p. 

67;    Reports    (Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1921,    p.    47;    Propaganda, 

vol.   2,   pp.   302,   492. 
Mono-iodo-cinchophen    (see    Farastan),     (Farastan    Co.),    The    Journal, 

April  18,  1936,  p.   1473. 
Morphine  Meconate,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1919,  p.  84. 
Mother's    Cordial    (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The   Journal,    Aug.    31,    1912,    p. 

735;    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1912,    p.    46;    Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.  410. 
Mother's  Cordial  (Ray  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1912,   p.   46. 
Motherwort,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   44. 
Mucol  Powder  (Mucol  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  15,  1913,  p.  1812; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1913,    p.   43;   Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  329. 
Mulene    (Mulene   Co.),   The  Journal,    May    19,    1917,    p.    1497;    Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.   332. 
Murasenide    (Miller    Biological    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    July    31, 

1926,  p.  343;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.^  1926,  p.  35. 
Muthol   (Demuth's  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  July  10,    1915,  p.  175. 
Mylin   (Mifflin  Chemical  Corp.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 

p.  52;  The  Journal,  Jan.   10,   1931,  p.  64. 
Myodine    (I-O-Dine   Laboratories),  The  Journal,   Feb.  20,   1932,  p.   639; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.   60. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xxxix 

Naftalan   (Ft.  Dearborn  Drug  &  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  14, 

1926,  p.  509;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  36. 
Naiodine    (E.    Fougera   &   Co.),   The  Journal,  June   24,    1933,   p.   2008; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   127. 
Naphey's  Medicated  Uterine  Wafers,   Reports  Council   Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1916,  p.   66. 
Narcosan  (Horovitz)   (Biochemical  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Dec.  18, 

1926,  p.  2097;   Jan.  21,   1929,  p.   151. 
Narkine  (The  Tilden  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  24,  1908,  p.  1439;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,   p.    329. 
National   Iodine   Solution    (National   Drug   Co.),   The  Journal,  June   4, 

1921,    p.     1592;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1921,    p.    50; 

Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.   300. 
National  Radium  Emanator   (National  Radium  Products  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, April  6,  1929,  p.  1181;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929, 

p.  36. 
Natrium  Compound,  Pulvoids. — See  Pulvoids  Natrium  Compound. 
Nauseatin    I     (Krause    Medico    Gesellschaft).    The    Journal,     Oct.    31, 

1931,  p.  1300;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  64. 
Nauseatin    II     (Krause    Medico    Gesellschaft),    The    Journal,     Oct.    31, 

1931,  p.  1300;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  64. 
Nazol    (Nazol  Antiseptic   Co.),   Reports  Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1918, 

p.  81. 
Neisser   (Gonococcic)   Vaccine   (National  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,   Jan. 

5,    1929,   p.    55;    Reports  Council   Pharm,   &  Chem.,    1928,  p.  43. 
Neisser  Serobacterin  Mixed  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1916,   p.   67. 
Neisser-San-Kahn     (York    Laboratories    Company,    Inc.),    The    Journal, 

Jan.  20,  1923,  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  53. 
Nelson    Elixir    Ovarans    (American    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The    Journal, 

May  1,  1926,  p.  1383;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  55. 
Neobovinine  20    (Bovinine    Co.).   The  Journal,    March   7,   1931,   p.   860; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  36. 
Neocaine  (Anglo-French  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  21,  1933,  p.  210. 
Neocinchophen-B.  P.  C.    (Benzol  Products  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1933,   p.   31. 
Neo-Merphenol  (Lynch  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.   31,  1935,  p.  738. 
Neo-Reargon    (C.   P.    Chemical    and    Drug   Co.),    The  Journal,   Oct.   23, 

1926,  p.   140;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  p.  38. 
Neo-Riodine   (P.  Astier  Laboratories),  Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1924,   p.    47. 
Neotrepol  (Anglo-French  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  9,   1925,  p.  136; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1925,   p.    75. 
Nephritin  (Reed  &  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  5,   1907,  p.  1198; 

April   21,    1923,   p.    1167;    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1905-8, 

p.   79. 
Nephro  Sero  (California  Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal, July  5,  1924,  p.  58. 
Nephroson    (Wm.   S.    Merrell   Chemical   Co.),  Reports  Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1912,  p.  39. 
Nerve    Vitalizer,    Wheeler's    (J.    W.    Brant    Co.,    Ltd.),    The   Journal, 

April  11.  1908,  p.  1206;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to   1909,  p.  66;  Propa- 
ganda,  vol.    1,  p.   411. 
Neubone,  The  Journal,  Feb.  9,   1924,  p.  489. 
Neurilla   (Dad  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  27,   1915,  p.   1093; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   20;   Propaganda,  vol.    1, 

p.  136. 
Neurocaine   (Schieffelin  &  Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915, 

p.  173. 
Neuro-Lecithin-Abbott      (The     Abbott     Laboratories),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1915,  p.    122;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.    53. 
Neuro  Phosphates,  Eskay's   (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.).  The  Journal, 

Sept.    29,    1917,    p.    1102;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1917, 

p.   52;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   146. 
Neurosine    (Dios    Chemical    Co.),   The   Journal,   Jan.    9.    1915,    p.    165; 

April    27,    1918,    p.    1251;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914, 

p.   86;   Propaganda,   ed.   9,  p.   139;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   404;   The 

Journal,  Oct.  10,  1925,  p.  1155. 


xl  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Neutrogen    St.    Pellegrino    Antacid    Lozenges     (Societa    Anonimo    delle 

Terme   di    San    Pellegrino),    The   Journal,    Nov.    21,    1931,    p.    66; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1931,  p.   66. 
Niazo    (Schering    Corporation),    The   Journal,    June   3,    1933,    p.    1767; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933,   p.    129. 
Nicomors  (Nicomors  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1924,  p.  212; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1924,   p.   48. 
Ninhydrin,  The  Journal,   March  2,   1929,  p.  724. 
Nitroscleran    (E.   Tosse   &  Co.,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   March   5,   1927,   p. 

474. 
Nitronine   (American  Pharmacal  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1922.  p.   50. 
Noitol   (Wheeler  Chemical  Works),  The  Journal.  May  21,  1910,  p.  1704; 

Reports  Chem.    Lab.,   1910,  p.  45;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  245. 
Non-Tox    (Bradford    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1926,   p.  41. 
N6rmal    Horse    Serum,    Sterile     (National    Vaccine    and    Antitoxin    Insti- 
tute),   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem..    1921,    p.    53. 
Normaline,   Hayner's:     See  Hayner's  Normaline. 
Normal    Phenol    Serum    (Cano)    (H.    K.    Mulford   Co.'),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1919,  p.  85;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  251. 
Norniet    Solution:     See   Solution    Normet. 
Noron    (The  Heron   Company),   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1921, 

p.  53. 
Nose-Ions    (Nose-Ions   Company),   The  Journal,   Dec.   4,    1915,   p.   2026; 

Reports   Chem.    Lab.,    1915,    p.    123. 
Nourry   Wine    (E.    Fougera   &   Co.,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   Dec.    12,    1914, 

p.    2150;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914,    p,    74;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,   1921,  p.  31;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   115.     . 
Nuclein,   Reports    Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1921,   p.    54. 
Nucleinic  Acid,   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1921,   p.    54. 
Nuforal    (The  Nuforal   Laboratories,   Inc.),   The  Journal,  Jan.   7,   1922, 

p.    59. 
Nujol   (Standard  Oil  Co.  of  New  Jersey),  The  Journal,  July  10,   1915, 

p.    175;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  68;   Propaganda, 

vol.    2,   p.    108. 
Number     "3"     (Chlorine     Products     Company,     Inc.),     Reports     Council 

Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1919,    p.    70;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,    1919,    p.    57; 

Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.   244. 
NuTone    (NuTone    Company),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1917, 

p.    154;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.    162. 
Nutrient   Wine  of   Beef   Peptone    (Armour  &  Co.),   The  Journal,   May 

11,    1907,    p.    1612;    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1905-8,   opp. 

p.   64;    Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.    133. 
Nutritive  Liquid   Peptone    (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May   11, 

1907,  p.   1612;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  opp.  p.  64; 

Propaganda,   ed.    9,    p.    133. 
Nutrolactis  (The  Nutrolactis  Co.),  The  Journal.  May  26,  1917,  p.  1570; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   24;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.    131. 
Nuxated   Iron   (Dae  Health  Laboratories),  The  Journal,   Oct.  21,   1916, 

p.    1244;    Oct.    28,    1916,    p.    1309;    Nov.   4.    1916,    p.    1376;    Feb.    24, 

1917,  p.    642;   Reports  Chem.   Lab.,    1916,  p.  29. 

Oats,  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1912,   p.   44. 

Octozone   (Octozone  Corporation  of  America),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1933,  p.   131;  The  Journal.  Feb.  24,  1934,  p.  605. 
Oestroform    (British    Drug    Houses),    The   Journal,    August    31,    1935, 

p.  667. 
Oil  of  Cypress-Schimmel   (Fritzsche  Bros.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  7, 

1934,   p.    1154;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem..    1934,   p.   34. 
Ointment  (Targentos  and  Ichthyol  (H.  K.  Mulford  &  Co.),  Reports  Coun- 
cil  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1923.   p.    10. 
Ointment  Scabicide   (Upjohn  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  20,  1933,  p.  1597; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  31. 
Olajen    (Olajen,   Inc.).    The   Journal,    Sept.   26,    1931,   p.    930;    Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1931.   p.    71. 
Oleosolution   (Nizza  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Dec.  4,  1926,  p.  1933; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  44. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xli 

Oleothesin    (Oleothesin    Co.),   The   Journal,    March   31,    1934,   p.    1003; 

Reports  Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1934,   p.   72. 
Olio-Phlogosis  (Mystic  Chemical  Company),  The  Journal,  Aug.  19,  1916, 

p.   631;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1916,  p.   10;  Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  79. 
Omnadin  (H.  A.  Metz  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  April  15,  1933, 

p.    1172;    Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1933,   p.    133. 
Onolin    (Southwest  Medical   Supply   Co.),   The  Journal,  Dec.   20,   1930, 

p.   1933. 
Ophthalmol-Lindermann    (Innis,    Speiden  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  6, 

1918,   p.   59;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1918,  p.  21;    Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2.  p.   189. 
Optochin  Base    (Merck  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933, 

p.    136. 
Optolactin    (Fairchild    Bros.    &    Foster),    The   Journal,    Jan.    13,    1923, 

p.   127;   Reports   Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  27. 
Orargol  (Anglo-French  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  17,  1925,  p.  1241; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.  &  (^hem.,   1925,   p.    58. 
Orchic   Extract    (Rovin)    (A.    M.   Rovin   Lab's),   The  Journal,   Feb.  25, 

1933,   p.    574;    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,   p.    166. 
Orchic   Solution    (Rovin)    (A.   M.   Rovin  Lab's),'  The  Journal,   Feb.  25, 

1933,   p.    574;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,   p.    166. 
Orchitic    Fluid    Tablets     (New    Animal    Therapy    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Dec.    14,    1912,   p.   2176;   Propaganda,   vol.    1,   p.    317. 
Orchitic   Substance-Cousineau    (See    Concentrated    Orchitic    Solution). 
Organic    Luetin    (Abbott    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    Sept.    16,    1933, 

p.   929;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   137. 
Organ-0-Tones    No.    19    (Cole    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    Dec.    25, 

1926,  p.  2178. 
Orsudan    (Burroughs  Wellcome  &   Co.),   The  Journal,   April   16,   1910, 

p.   1323. 
Oro    Brand    Kelp    Salt    (Oakland    Food    Products    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Feb.  20,  1932,  p.  640;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  96. 
Osmium    Tetroxide,   Reports   (ilouncil   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1921,   p.    55. 
Osmogen    (Lipoidal    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    Oct.    13,    1928, 

p.   1129;   Dec.  21,   1929,  p.   1974. 
Otosclerol  Tablets    (Muenchner  Pharmazeutische   Fabrik),   The  Journal, 

Sept.   14,   1929,  p.  867. 
Ovacoids   (Reed  &  Carnrick),  The  Journal,  Feb.   5,    1927,   p.   422. 
Ovarian   Preparations,    Injectable,   The  Journal,   Jan.    30,    1932,   p.   402; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,   p.    55. 
Ovarian    Residue    Desiccated-P.    D.    &    Co.    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    The 

Journal,  June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  25. 
Ovarian    Residue-H.    W.    &    D.    (Hynson,    Westcott    &    Dunning),    The 

Journal,  June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;     Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  25. 
Ovarian    Residuc-Lederle     (Lederle    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The    Journal, 

June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  25. 
Ovarian   Residue-P.-M.   Co.,   Desiccated   (Pitman-Moore  Co.),   The  Jour- 
nal, June  24,  1930,  p.  1997. 
Ovarian  Residue  Solution    (Rovin)    (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal, 

Feb.    25,    1933,    p.    574;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933, 

p.  166. 
Ovarian  Solution  (Rovin)   (A.  M.   Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal,  Feb.  25, 

1933,   p.   574;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933,   p.    166. 
Ovarian   Residue-Wilson    (Wilson  Laboratories),  The  Journal,   June  24, 

1930,  p.    1997;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1930,   p.  25. 
Ovarian    Substance-Armour    (Armour    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    24, 

1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  25. 
Ovarian    Substance    (G.    W.    Carnrick    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1922,  p.   52. 
Ovarian    Substance    Desiccated     (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  25. 
Ovarian   Substance   Soluble   Extract-P.   D.   &   Co.    (Parke,    Davis   &  Co.), 

The    Journal,    Jan.    30,    1932,    p.    402;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1932,  p.   55. 


xlii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Ovarian     Substance-P.-M.     Co.,     Desiccated     (Pitman-Moore    Co.),     The 

Journal,  June  24,  1930,  p.   1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  25. 
Ovarian    Substance-Wilson    (Wilson    Laboratories),    The   Journal,    June 

24,    1930,   p.    1997;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1930,    p.   25. 
Ovary,  Whole-H.  W.    &  D.    (Hynson,   Westcott  &  Dunning).  The  Jour- 
nal, June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 

p.  25. 
Ovary,    Whole-Lederle   (Lederle   Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  June 

24,    1930,    p.    1997;    Reports    Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1930,   p.   25. 
Ovestrumon    (Vitalait    Laboratory    of    California,    Ltd.),    The    Journal, 

Oct.    24,    1931,    p.    1226;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1931, 

p.  73. 
Ovoferrin    (A.    C.    Barnes   Co.),    The   Journal,    May    4,    1929,    p.    156; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,  p.  2>7 . 
Oxoate    (Smith,    Kline    &    French    Co.),    The    Journal,    June    30,    1928, 

p.  2103;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,   p.  40. 
Oxoate  "B"  (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  30,  1928, 

p.   2103;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1928,  p.   40. 
Oxone    (R.    &    H.),    The    Journal,    April    22,    1933,    p.    1237;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933.   p.   29. 
Oxycatalyst,  Armstrong's  (Radium  Research  Foundation),  The  Journal, 

May  19,    1928,  p.   1647. 
Oxychlorine    (Oxychlorine    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    6,    1907,    p.    54; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1905-1908,  p.   68;   Reports  Chem. 

Lab.,  1921,  p.  52;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   147. 
Oxydendron    Compound,    Fluidextract    (Nelson,    Baker    &    Co.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  43. 
Oxylin   (Evons   Laboratories),  The  Journal.  Sept.  23,  1933,  p.   1020. 
Oxyl-Iodide    (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    2,    1921,    p.    57; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1921,  p.    56;   Propaganda,  vol.   2, 

p.  304. 
Oxyntin    (Fairchild   Bros.   &   Foster),    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1915,  p.  174. 

P.   &   S.    Bowel    Evacuant    (N.    C.    Goodwin   Laboratory,    Inc.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  42. 
Pabst  Extract  (Pabst  Corporation),  The  Journal,  Nov.  20,  1926;  p.  1760; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1926,  p.  46. 
Painodynes  (Wm.  A.  Webster  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  17,  1924,  p.  1632; 

Nov.  22,   1924,  p.   1705. 
Palmetto  Compound  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Chem.  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem..    1912,   p.  44. 
Palpebrine    (Dios   (Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,   Jan.   9,    1915,    p.    167; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  (Ihem.,    1914,  p.   86;   Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.   139. 
Pal's  Gum  Balsam  No.  2   (Bushwick  Pharmacy),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1930,  p.   53. 
Pam-ala    (Pam-Ala    Co.),   The  Journal,   Feb.   28,    1914,   p.    715;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  149. 
Panase  (Frederick  Stearns  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  14,  1930,  p.  1919; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem..    1930,   p.    28. 
Pancreas  Co.   (Harrower  Laboratory,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Oct.   16,  1926, 

p.   1322. 
Pancreols   (Drug  Products),  The  Journal,  July  16.   1927,  p.  229. 
Pancreopepsin,  Liquid   (Wm.   R.  Warner  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 

1907,  p.  533. 
Pancrepatine    (Anglo-French    Drug   Co.),   The  Journal,    March   3,    1928, 

p.  714. 
Pancresal   Tablets    (Pancresal   Sales  Co.),   The  Journal,   May  27,    1933, 

p.    1686;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem..    1933,   p.    140. 
Panopepton  (Fairchild  Bros.  &  Foster),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1922,  p.  48. 
Pan-peptic  Elixir  (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9,   1907,  p.  533. 
Pan-secretin  (The  Harrower  Laboratory),  The  Journal,  March  10,  1923, 

p.   717;   Oct.   16,   1926,  p.    1322. 
Pantopon-Roche   (Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  3,  1931, 

p.   1001;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.   75. 
Papain,  The  Journal,  Feb.  9,   1907,  p.   522. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xliii 

Pa-pay-ans,  Bell   (Bell  &   Co.),   (See  Bell-ans). 

Papine  (Battle  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  29,  1911,  p.  1278;  Reports 
Chem.  Lab.,  1911,  p.  82;  Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.  330. 

Para  Coto,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1913,  p.   39. 

Paracotoin,    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1913,   p.    39. 

Paraffin   for  Films,   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,   p.   142. 

Paraganglina  Vassale  (Neother  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  21, 
1924,  p.  2068;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.   11. 

Parathesin  (H.  A.  Metz  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  13, 
1920,  p.  1358;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  27;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,    p.   276. 

Parathyroid  Gland  Desiccated-P.  D.  &  Co.  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports 
Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1927,   p.  24. 

Pariogen  Tablets  (American  Drug  &  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal, 
Feb.  7,   1931,  p.  458. 

Pasadyne  (John  B.  Daniel),  The  Journal,  March  8,  1913,  p.  766;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.    1,  p.   332. 

Pas-Avena  (Pas-Avena  Chemical  Company),  The  Journal,  March  7, 
1908.  p.  783;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  69;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 
p.   333. 

Pascarnata  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  15,  1928,  p.  1914. 

Pasconia  (William  S.  Merrell  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  16,  1927,  p.  229. 

Pasiflora,  The  Journal,  March  19,  1910,  p.  983;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  38;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.    156. 

Pasiflora  Incarnata,  Daniel's  Concentrated  Tincture  of  (John  B.  Daniel), 
The  Journal,  March  19,  1910,  p.  983;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 
Chem.,   1910,   p.  44;    1912,  p.   38;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   156. 

Pautauberge's  Solution  (Geo.  J.  Wallau,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  March  7, 
1910,  p.   1560. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin  Compound,  Elixir  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Feb.  6,  1907,  p.  533. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin  Compound,  Tablets  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports 
Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,   p.   40. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 
1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 
1907,  p.  533. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Feb.  9,  1907,  p.  533. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 
1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Wra.  R.  Warner  &  Co.),  The  Journal, 
Feb.  9.   1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin  and  Pancreatin  with  Caffein,  Elixir  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The 
Journal,  Feb.  9,    1907,   p.   533. 

Pepsin,  Bismuth  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal, 
Feb.  9,  1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin,  Bismuth  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.), 
The  Journal,  Feb.  9,   1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin,  Bismuth  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Feb.  9,  1907,  p.  533. 

Pepsin,  Elixir  Lactated  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 
1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin,  Elixir  Lactated  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 
1907,  p.  533. 

Pepsin,  Elixir  Lactinated  (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9, 
1907,   p.    533. 

Pepsin,  Pancreatin  and  Bismuth,  Elixir  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal, 
Feb.  9,    1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin,  Pancreatin,  Bismuth  and  Strychnin,  Elixir  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.), 
The  Journal,  Feb.  9,   1907,  p.   533. 

Pepsin,  Strychnin,  Bismuth  and  Pancreatin,  Elixir  (Sharp  &  Dohme), 
The  Journal,  Feb.  9,   1907,  p.   533. 

Peptenzyme,  Elixir  (Reed  &  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9,  1907, 
p.  533;  Oct.  5,  1907,  p.  1198;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1905-8,  p.   79. 

Peptenzyme  Powder  (Reed  &  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  5, 
1907,    p.    1198;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1905-8,    p.    79. 


xliv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Peptic  Digestant  (Columbus  Pharmacal  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  9,  1907, 

p.  533. 
Peptic   Essence   Comp.,   Peters'    (Arthur   Peters   &   Co.),   The  Journal, 

Feb.  9,  1907,  p.  533. 
Pepto-Mangan    (M.   J.   Breitenbach  Co.).   The  Journal,   Sept.   23,   1905, 

p.    934:    April    6,    1907,    p.    1197;    Dec.    29,    1917,    p.    2202;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.   121;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  159; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  387. 
Peptone,  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1913,  p.  41. 
Peptone  Solution  for  Hypodermatic  Use  (Armour)   (Armour  &  Co.),  The 

Journal,  Nov.  29,  1924,  p.  1786;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1924,  p.  50. 
Peptonic  Elixir  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  11, 

1907,  p.  1612;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8,  opp.  p.  64; 

Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   133. 
Peptoprotcasi    (Neother  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  21,   1924,  p. 

2068;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   11. 
Pepto-Salicylas  Compound    (Curtis  Pharmacal    Co.),   The  Journal,   May 

28,    1932,    p.    1884;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1932,   p.   65. 
Peralga    (Schering   &    Glatz),    The   Journal,    March    31,    1923,    p.    942; 

Oct.  23,   1926,  p.    1412;    Reports  Chem.    Lab.,    1923,   p.    58. 
Perfection   Liquid   Food    (Perfection   Liquid    Food   Co.),   Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1913,  p.  44;   Reports  Chem.  Lab.,    1913,   p.  80. 
Pernocton  (Riedel-de  Haen),  The  Journal,  Oct.  3,  1931,  p.   1001;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  77. 
Pernoston   (formerly  Pernocton)    (Riedel-de  Haen,  Inc.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  74. 
Perogen   Bath    (Morgenstern  &  Co.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1931,  p.  37. 
Pertussin    (Lehn   &  Fink),  The  Journal,   March  8,    1913,   p.    766;   The 

Journal,  March  27,  1920,  p.  905;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  334;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  467. 
Pertussin   (Seeck  and  Kade),  The  Journal,  Feb.  20,  1926,  p.  573. 
Pertussis  Bacterin  Mixed  (H.  K.  Mulford  (^o.).  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1923,  p.  56. 
Pertussis  Bacillus  Vaccine   (Gilliland  Laboratories,   Inc.),  The  Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis  Bacillus  Vaccine   (Hollister-Stier  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis  Bacterin    (H.   K.   Mulford  Co.),  The  Journal,   Feb.  21,   1931, 

p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis    Bacterin    Prophylactic    (Swan-Myers    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis-Combined-Bacterin    (The    Abbott    Laboratories),    The   Journal, 

June    22,    1918,    p.    1967;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1918, 

p.   11;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   185. 
Pertussis   Glycerol-Vaccine    (Lederle   Laboratories,   Inc.),   The   Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis  Immunogen  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  21,  1931, 

p.   613;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,   p.   54. 
Pertussis   Immunogen    Combined    (Parke,    Davis   &   Co.),    The  Journal, 

Sept.  17,  1927,  p.  984;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  37. 
Pertussis    Serobacterin    Mixed    (H.    K.    Mulford    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1923^  p.  56. 
Pertussis    Vaccine    Curative     (E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons),    The    Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis    Vaccine    for    Prophylaxis    (Lederle    Laboratories,    Inc.).    The 

Journal,  Feb.  21,   1931,  p.   613;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis  Vaccine  for  Treatment  (Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 

p.  54. 
Pertussis    Vaccine     (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    Feb.    21,    1931, 

p.    613;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1930,   p.    54. 
Pertussis   Vaccine   Immunizing    (E.   R.   Squibb  &   Sons),   The  Journal, 

Feb.  21,  1931,  p.   613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis   Vaccine    (National   Drug   Co.),   The   Journal,   Feb.'  21,    1931, 

p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  54. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xlv 

Pertussis   Vaccine   (Parke,   Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  21,   1931, 

p.  613:  Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  54. 
Pertussis  Vaccine,  Immunizing   (Sauer)    (U.  D.  &  Co),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem..  1935,  p.  92. 
Petrolagar     (Alkaline)     (Deshell    Laboratories,    Inc.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem..   1927,  p.  43. 
Phagoid-Bacillus  Colon   (The  Phagoid  Lab's,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  March 

14,  1936,  p.  922;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1936,  p.  ^^3. 
Phagoid-Staphylococcus      (The     Phagoid     Lab's,     Inc.),     The     Journal, 

March    14,    1936,    p.    922;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1936, 

p.  63. 
Phagoid-Streptococcus     Hemolyticus     (The     Phagoid     Lab's,     Inc.),    The 

Journal,  March  14,  1936,  p.  922;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1936,   D.    63. 
Phecolates '(F.  Waldo  Whitney),   The  Journal,  Nov.  21,  1914,  p.  1870; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  127;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.  174. 
Phecolax    (F.  Waldo  Whitney),  The  Journal,   Nov.  21,   1914,  p.   1870; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  127;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.   174. 
Phecotones  (F.  Waldo  Whitney),  The  Journal,  Nov.  21,  1914,  p.  1870; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.   127;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.  174. 
Phecozymes  (F.  Waldo  Whitney),  The  Journal,  Nov.  21,  1914,  p.  1870; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914;  p.  127;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.   174. 
Phenalein   (Pax  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April   30,   1910,  p.   1458; 

Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.   344. 
Phenalgin    (Etna  Chemical   Co.),  The  Journal,  June   3,   1905,  p.   1791; 

Jan.  27,  1912,  p.  293;  Feb.  8,  1918,  p.  337;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1905-8,  p.  8;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  pp.  10,  335;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  393. 
Pheno-Bromate     (Pheno-Bromate    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    14,    1906, 

p.   125;  April   18,   1908,  p.   1282;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   343. 
Pheno-Isolin  (Scientific  Mfg.  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  30,  1931,  p.  1978. 
Phenolax  Wafers  (Upjohn  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  30,  1910,  p.  1458; 

Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  344. 
Phenoseptine  Cones  (Mertes  Remedy  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  31,  1926, 

p.   343;   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1926,   p.  47. 
Phenoseptine    Powder    (Mertes    Remedy    Co.),    The    Journal,    July    31, 

1926,  p.  343;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  47. 
Phenol   Sodique    (Hance   Bros.   &  White),   The  Journal,   Nov.   9,   1907, 

p.    1617;    Reports   Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1905-8,   p.   99;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.  1,  p.   175. 
Phenolphthalein    Laxative    (El    Zernac    Co.),    The    Journal,    April    30, 

1910,  p.    1458;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  344. 
Phos-Hepatic    Extract,     Matthew's     (Livermeal     Corp.),     The    Journal, 

March  24,   1928,  p.  997. 
Phos-Phane  (Lambert  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  2,  1932,  p.  55. 
Phosphobion    (Carl    F.    Lauber),    The   Journal,    Sept.    3,    1927,   p.   809; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1927,  p.  43. 
Phosphoglycerate    of    Lime    (Chapoteaut)     (E.    Fougera    and    Co.,    Inc.). 

The  Journal,   Sept.   30,   1916,   p.   1034;   Reports   Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem..   1916,  p.  35;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   95. 
Phospho-Muriate  of  Quinine  Comp.-Phillips    (Charles  H.    Phillips   Chem- 
ical  Co.),    The  Journal,    Oct.    19,    1918,   p.    1335;    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1918,  p.  32;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   197. 
Phosphorcin    Compound     (Organic    Products    Company),    The    Journal, 

Sept.    30,    1916,   p.    1033;   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,   1916, 

p.   34;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  94. 
Phosphorus,  Amorphous,  The  Journal,    March   7,   1914,  p.   793;   March 

28,  1914,  p.   1033;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  478. 
Phosphorus,  Amorphosus,  Pill,  S.  &  D.  (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal, 

March  7,  1914,  p.  793;  March  28,  1914,  p.  1033;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.  478. 
Phosphorus  Tonic  Compound,  Dowd's   (The  Richardson    Company),  The 

Journal,  Dec.  20,  1913,  p.  2258;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  476. 


xlvi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Phospho-Vanadiol  (Vanadium  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  18, 
1913,  p.  225;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1913,  p.  7;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,   p.   209. 

Phylacogens  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  1,  1913,  p.  384; 
Feb.  22,  1913,  pp.  602,  615;  March  IS,  1913,  p.  849;  Aug.  29.  1914, 
p.  785;  Nov.  15,  1919,  p.  1542;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  346;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  441. 

Phyllicin  (Bilhuber-Knoll  Corp.).  The  Journal,  March  25,  1933,  p.  886; 
Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933,  p.    143. 

Phyllosan   (Merck  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923,  p.  57. 

Phyone    (Wilson    Laboratories),    The   Journal,    Aug.    31,    1935,    p.    667. 

Phytin  (A.  Klipstein  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  30,  1915,  p.  456; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  131;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 
p.   178. 

Phytoline  (Walker  Pharmacal  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  20,  1924,  p.  2040. 

Picrotoxin,  The  Journal,  Aug.  1,  1936,  p.  354;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,   1936,  p.  88. 

Pil,   Cascara  Comp.-Robins   (A.   H.   Robins  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  27, 

1917,  p.  303;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  47;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  117. 

Pil.  Mixed  Treatment  (Chichester)  (Hillside  Chemical  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal,   Oct.    22.    1921,    p.    1355;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1921.  p.  60;   Reports  Chem.   Lab.,   1921,  p.   40;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.  310. 

pineal  Comp.   (Male),  Special  Formula  No.  3  (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  The 

Journal,   Feb.  28,   1925,  p.   695;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1925,  p.  85. 
Pineal   Comp.    (Female),   Special  Formula  No.  4   (G.   W.   Carnrick  Co.), 

The   Journal,    Feb.    28,    1925,    p.    695;    Reports    Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1925,  p.  85. 
Pineal  Gland,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  69. 
Pineal     Gland-Armour,    Desiccated     (Armour    &    Co.),     Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  69;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  213. 
Pinnecksin    (International    Food   Products,    Inc.),   The  Journal,   Feb.    1, 

1930,  p.  339;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1929,  p.  37. 
Pinoleum    (The    Pinoleum    Company).    The   Journal,    Nov.    1,    1919,    p. 

1380;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,   p.    442. 
Pinus   Canadensis,    Kennedy's,   Dark. — See   Darpin. 
Pinus  Canadensis.   Kennedy's  Light. — See  Abican. 
Pinuseptol   (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  28,  1922,  p.  299. 
Piperazine    (The    Bayer    Co.,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1918,  p.   70;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  214. 

Piperazine  Water   (Lehn  &  Fink),  The  Journal,   Feb.  29,   1908,  p.   704. 
Pituglandol-Roche    (Hoffmann-LaRoche,    Inc.),    The   Journal,    Aug.    17. 

1929,   p.   524;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,   p.   39. 
Pituitrin  "S"   (Surgical)    (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.   17, 

1929,  p.  524;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929.  p.  39. 
Pituitary    Anterior    Desiccated    (G.    W.    Carnrick    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  52. 
Pituitary,     Anterior     Desiccated-Lederle      (Lederle     Laboratories,     Inc.), 

The   Journal,    Tune    19,    1930,   p.    201;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1930,  p.  26. 
Pituitary,     Anterior,     Desiccated-P.-M.     Co.     (Pitman-Moore     Co.),    The 

Journal,  July   19,   1930,  p.   201;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem., 

1930,  p.  26. 

Pituitary  Body,  Anterior  Lobe  Desiccated-Mulford  (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.). 

The   Journal,   July    19,    1930,    p.    201;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem..    1930.  p.   26. 
Pituitary  Body   (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1922,  p.  52. 

Pituitary    Body.     Desiccated-Armour     (Armour    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

July  19,  1930.  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  26. 
Pituitary  Extract-Lederle  20  Units  (Lederle  Antitoxin  Laboratories),  The 

Journal,   Aug.   17,    1929,  p.   524;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

"1929,  p.  39. 
Pituitary    Extract-Lilly     (Surgical)     (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

Aug.  17,  1929.  p.  524;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..  1929,  p.  39. 
Pituitary  Extract  Surgical-Merrell    (Wm,  H.  Merrell  Co.),  The  Journal, 

Aug.  17,  1929,  p.  524;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  30. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xlvii 

Pituitary    Extract    Surgical-Mulford,     Solution     (See    Solution    Pituitary 

Extract-Mulford). 
Pituitary    Liquid    (Surgical)-Arraour    (Armour    &    Co.).    The    Journal, 

Aug.  17,  1929,  p.  524;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  39. 
Pituitary    Posterior    Desiccated    (G.    W.    Carnrick    Co.),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  52. 
Pituitary,    Posterior,    Desiccated-P.-M.    Co.)     (Pitman-Moore    Co.),    The 

Journal,  July   19,    1930,   p.    201;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  26. 
Pituitary  Solution  Surgical-Wilson   (Wilson  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 

Aug.  17,  1929,  p.  524;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  39. 
Pituitary    Solution-Squibb    1    cc.    5    Units    (E.    R.    Squibb    &    Sons).    The 

Journal,   Jan.    1,    1930,    p.    105;    Reports    Council   Pharm.   &   Chem., 

1929,  p.   40. 
Pituitary   Solution-Squibb   1   cc.    20   Units    (E.   R.    Squibb  &   Sons),   The 

Journal,   Jan.    1,    1930,   p.    105;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem.. 

1929,  p.   40. 

Pituitary    Substance,    Desiccated     (Anterior    Lobe) -Armour     (Armour    & 

Co.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1930,  p.  201;   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1930,  p.  26. 
Pituitary   Substance,   Posterior   Desiccated-Lederle    (Lederle   Laboratories, 

Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1930,  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1930,   p.   26. 
Pituitary    Substance,    Desiccated    (Posterior    Lobe) -Armour    (Armour    & 

Co.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1930,  p.  201;   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,    1930,   p.    26. 
Pituitary,      Whole,      Desiccated-Lederle      (Lederle      Laboratories,      Inc.), 

The   Journal,    July    19,    1930,    p.    201;    Reports    Council    Pharm.   & 

Chem..  1930.  p.  26. 
Pixalbol    (E.    Bilhuber,    Inc.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    22,    1924,    p.    1704; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  51. 
Pix    Cresol    (Pix    Cresol    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    June    10,    1911, 

p.  1738;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1911,  p.  Z7 ;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  247. 
Pixsul    (The  Pixsul  Co.).  The  Journal,   May  2,    1931,   p.    1643. 
Plasmon   (Plasmon  Milk  Products  Co.),  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1914,  p.  88. 
Piatt's   Chlorides    (Henry    B.   Piatt),   The  Journ.^l,    March   27,    1920,   p. 

903;  July  22,  1922,  p.  319;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1920,  p.  28;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1920,  p.  8. 
Plurasav,  Young's  (The  Plurasav  Co.,  Columbus,   Ohio),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1918,  p.   82. 
Pluto    Spring    Water,    Concentrated    (French    Lick    Springs    Hotel    Co.), 

The  Journal,   March  29,    1913,   p.    1013. 
Ply    »1,    Ply   if2,    Ply   #3    (Milburn  Co.),    The   Journal,    Oct.    12,    1935, 

p.  1191;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  93. 
Pneumococcus  Antibody  Solution  Types  I,   II  and  III  Combined   (H.  K. 

Mulford  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   55. 
Pneumococcus    Antigen     (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    March    8, 

1930,  p.   716;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   35. 
Pneumococcus  Immunogen  Combined   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Sept.  17,  1927,  p.  984;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927. 
p.   Z7. 

Pneumococcus  Immunogen    (Parke,   Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   March 

8,   1930,  p.   716;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  55. 
Pneumococcus   Serum-Lederle,    Refined   and   Concentrated    (Lederle    Lab- 
oratories,   Inc.),    The    Journal,    Sept.    27,    1930,    p.    935;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  55. 
Pneumococcus  Vaccine   (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  8,  1930, 

p.    716;    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1930,   p.    55. 
Pneumococcus  Vaccine   (E.  R.   Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  March  8, 

1930,  p.  716;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  55. 
Pneumococcus    Vaccine     (Four    Types)     (Parke,     Davis     &    Co.),    The 

Journal,   March  8,   1930,  p.  716;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  55. 
Pneumococcus   Vaccine    Immunizing    (Gilliland   Laboratories,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,  March  8,   1930,  p.   716;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1930,  p.  55. 
Pneumococcus    Vaccine     (Lederle     Laboratories,     Inc.),     The    Journal, 

March  8,  1930,  p.  716;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  55. 


xlviii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Pneumococcus   Vaccine    (National   Drug   Co.),    The  Journal,   March   8, 

1930,  p.  716;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  55. 
Pneumo.  Mixed  Vaccine  No.  6  (G.  H.  Sherman).  The  Journal,  Oct.  11, 

1924,   p.    1184;    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   57. 
Pneumonia    Sero    (California    Endocrine   Foundation    Laboratories),    The 

Journal,  July  5,   1924,  p.  58. 
Pneumo-Strep-Serum   (H.  K.  Mulford  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  31,  1920, 

p.  342;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.   254. 
P-0-4    (Lehn    &    Fink,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    Sept.    13,    1924,    p.    861; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924.  p.  52. 
Poliomyelitis  Vaccine,  The  Journal,  Sept.  29,   1936,  p.   716. 
Pollantin   Liquid   (Fritzsche  Bros.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  8,  1924,  p.  1526; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1924,  p.    53. 
Pollantin     Ointment     (Fritzsche     Bros.),    The    Journal,    Nov.    8,     1924, 

p.    1526;    Reports  Council   Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1924,   p.   53. 
Pollantin  Powder  (Fritzsche  Bros.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  8,  1924,  p.  1526; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924.  p.   53. 
Pollen  Antigen   (Lederle  Antitoxin  Laboratories),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1918,  p.  65. 
Pollen    Antigen-Lederle    (Fall    Tvpe)     (Lederle    Antitoxin    Laboratories), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1921,  p.  45. 
Pollen    Antigen    Spring    Type-Lederle    (Lederle    Antitoxin    Laboratories), 

Reports   Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1926,  p.   48. 
Pollen    Extract    Ambrosiaceae    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1925,    p.    60. 
Pollen  Extract  Artemisias  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1925,   p.   60. 
Pollen    Extract   Chenopodiaceae    (Parke,   Davis   &   Co.),   Reports   Council 

Pharm   &    Chem.,    1925,   p.    60. 
Pollen  Extract  Gramineae   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1925,  p.  60. 
Pompeian    Olive    Oil     (Pompeian    Corporation),    The    Journal,    July    5, 

1930,  p.   35;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   56. 
Ponca    Compound    (Mellier    Drug    Co.),    The   Journal,    July    17,    1915, 

p.   269;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  46;   1915,  p.  58; 

Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  28. 
Ponndorf    Cutaneous    Vaccine   B,    The   Journal,    Oct.    8,    1932,    p.    1283. 
Poslam   (Emergency  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  May  22,  1909,  p.  1678; 

Reports   Chem.    Lab.,    1909,    p.    25. 
Posterior     Pituitary     Desiccated-P.-M.     Co,     (Pitman-Moore     Co.),     The 

Journal,  July   19,    1930,   p.  201;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1930.  p.    55. 
Posterior    Pituitary    Substance    Desiccated-Lederle    (Lederle   Laboratories, 

Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  19,  1930,  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,    1930,   p.   55. 
Potassium  lodo-Resorcin  Sulphonate,  The  Journal,  Feb.  11,  1911,  p.  441; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab..  1911.  p.  21. 
Power  Candy  Mineralized   (Granger  Farms),  The  Journal,  Oct.  27,  1928, 

p.   1289;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,   p.  49. 
Prehyiin-Chappcl    (Chappel   Bros.,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   Aug.   31,    1935, 

p.  667. 
Presoiod.  The  Journal,  Nov.   10,  1923,  p.   1628. 
Probilin   Pills    (Schering  &   Glatz,   Inc.),   The  Journal,  Aug.   24,    1907, 

p.    702;    Nov.   2     1907,    p.    1541;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem., 

1905-8,   P.   70;    Propaganda,   ed.   9,  p.   344. 
Progynon    (Shering  Corporation),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,   1935,  p.   667. 
Progynon-B     (Shering     Corporation),     The    Journal,    Aug.     31,     1935, 

p.  667. 
Progynon-B    and    the    Ovarian     Follicular    Hormone,     Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem..   1935.  p.   95. 
Prolution    (Shering  Corporation),  The  Journal,  Aug.   31,   1935,  p.   667. 
Promonta    (Acme    Pharmaceutical    Co.),    The   Journal,    May   24,    1924, 

p.    1712;    Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   54. 
Propeptans  (American  Bio-Chemical  Lab's,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,    1933,   p.    144. 
Prostate   Gland   Solution    (Rovin)    (A.   M.   Rovin   Lab's),   The  Journal, 

Feb.   25,   1933,  p.    574;   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1933,  p. 

166. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  xlix 

Proteals    (Henry   Smith   Williams),   The  Journal,  July   6,    1918,   p.    58. 
Protein   Substances  No.   10   (Horovitz  Biochemic  Laboratories  Co.),  Thb 

Journal,  Jan.  6,  1923,  p.  54. 
Pro-Tek   (DeVillbiss  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  20,   1934,  p.  211;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933,  p.    147. 
Protonuclein    (Reed    &    Carnrick   Co.),   The   Journal,    Oct.    5,    1907,   p. 

1198;   Oct.  24,   1908,   p.   1388;  Jan.   1,   1916,   p.  48;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1905-8,  p.    79;    Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1915,  p.   90;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,    p.   348;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   59. 
Protonuclein   Beta    (Reed   &  Carnrick  Co.),   The  Journal,  Jan,    1,    1916, 

p.  48;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  90;  Propaganda, 
vol.  2,  p.  59. 

Prunoids  (Sultan  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  30,  1910,  p.  1458; 
Jan.  2,  1915,  p.  71;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  133; 
Reports  Chem.   Lab.,    1914,  p.   63;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,   pp.   178,  344. 

Pruritus  Vaccine  Treatment-Lederle  (Montague  Method)  (Lederle  Anti- 
toxin   Laboratories),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1924,  p.   55. 

Psora    (Pix  Cresol  Co.),   Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  39. 

Pulsatilla,    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   44. 

Pulvane  (Pulvane  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  March  11,  1922, 
p.  750. 

Pulvoids,  Calcylates   (Drug  Products  Company),  The  Journal,  Sept.  9, 

1916,  p.  827;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  18;  Propa- 
ganda,  vol.  2.  p.  85. 

Pulvoids    Calcylates    Compound    (The    Drug    Products    Co.,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,  June  14,   1919,  p.  1784;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1919,    p.    19;    Propaganda,   vol.    2,    p.    226. 
Pulvoids   Natrium    Compound    (Drug    Products   Company,   Inc.),  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &  Chem..    1916,   p.   69;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,   p.    108. 
Pulv-Ora   Throat   Lozenges   (Thiemann,   Boettcher   &   Co.,   Inc.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1930.  p.   58. 
Pulv-Ora    Powder    (Thiemann,    Boettcher   &   Co.,    Inc.),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1930,  p.   58. 
Pulvules    Amytal    Compound    (Lilly),    The    Journal,    March    17,    1934, 

p.  842;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1934.  p.  88. 
Purgen    (Lehn   &   Fink),   The  Journal,   Jan.   S,   1907,    p.   64;    Sept.   14, 

1907,  p.   954;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.   349. 

Pyo-atoxin    (H.    O.    Hurley),    The    Journal,    Feb.    14,    1914,    p.    552; 

Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1914,  p.   32;  Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   350. 
Pyocyaneus    Bacillus    Vaccine,    The    Journal,    May    18,    1918,    p.    1486; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.   11. 
Pyor-Chloride    (Lindsey   Laboratories,   Inc.),    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1930,  p.   59. 
Pyridium   (Merck  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.  30,  1933,  p.  2118;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,   p.    148. 
Pyxol   (Barrett   Mfg.  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  23,   1918,  p.  599;  Oct.  6, 

1923,  p.  1224. 

Quartonol  Tablets  (Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  30, 
1916,  p.  1033;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  34;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  94. 

Quassia  Compound  Tablets  (Flint,  Eaton  and  Company),  The  Journal, 
July  9,  1921,  p.  141;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1921,  p.  64; 
Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.   306. 

Queen   of  the    Meadow,    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1912,  p.  45. 

Quicamphol  (Cheraisch-Pharmaceutische  A.-G.,  Bad  Homburg),  The 
Journal,  Nov.  9,  1929,  p.  1471;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1929,  p.  40. 

Quina    LaRoche    (E.    Fougera   &   Co.,    Inc.),   The   Journal,    March    21, 

1908.  p.  978. 

Quinin  Arsenate.  The  Journal,  July  16,  1910,  p.  325;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1910,   p.   7Z. 
Quinin  Glycerophosphate,  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1912,  p.   107. 

Radelium    and    Radelium    Generator     (Radio-Active    Water    Company), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1915,   p.    128. 
Radioactive  Waters,  The  Journal,  Sept.  7,  1929.  p.  771. 
Radio-Rem   (Radium  Ore  Revigator  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  31,  1928, 

p.   1039;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,  p.  51. 


1  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Radio-Rem  Outfit  No.  2  (Schieffelin  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  19, 
1916,  p.  631;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  9;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  79. 

Radio-Rem   Outfit  No.    3    (Schieffelin    &   Co.),   The   Journal,   Aug.    19, 

1916,  p.  631;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1916,  p.  9;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.   2,   p.    79. 

Radio-Rem  Outfit  C   (Schieffelin  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   Aug.   19,   1916, 

p.   631;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1916,  p.   9;   Propaganda, 

vol.    2,    p.    79. 
Radium   Chloride    (United   States  Radium   Corporation),   Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,  p.   51. 
Radium    Emanation    Activator,    Saubermann    (See    Saubermann    Radium 

Emanation  Activator). 
Radium  Emanator,    National    (See   National  Radium  Emanator). 
Radium,  The  Rental  of.  The  Journal,  May  18,  1929,  p.   1678;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1929,  p.   51. 
Radium   Solution  for  Intravenous  Use  Standard   (Radium  Chemical  Co.). 

The  Journal,   June   26,   1915,   p.   2156;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1915,  p.   147. 
Radolatum-Squibb,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem..    1935,   p.    97. 
Radolatum  Liquid-Squibb,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  97. 
Rad-X-Solution    A    (Robert    McKnight),    The    Journal,    Sept.    4,    1926, 

p.   775;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1926,  p.  49. 
Rad-X-Solution    B    (Robert    McKnight),    The    Journal,    Sept.    4,    1926, 

p.   775;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1926,  p.  49. 
Rattlesnake-Venom,   The  Journal,   March   15,   1913,   p.   850;    March   29, 

1913,  p.   1001;  June  7.   1913,  p.  1811. 
Raylos    (Raylos    Laboratories,    Inc.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1934,  p.   100. 
Rayminol    (Doyle)     (Phairmount    Laboratories),    The   Journal,    Oct.    17, 

1925,  p.   1241;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925.  p.  62. 
Y^    Doctor's  Prescription    Powder    (Dermic  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 

July   15,    1933,    p.   209;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1933,   p. 

158. 
Recresal    (Chemische    Werke    vorm.    H.    &    E.    Albert),    The    Journal, 

May  3,  1930,  p.  1406;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  60. 
Red  Bone-Marrow,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1918,  p.  69. 
Red  Bone-Marrow-Armour,  Extract  of   (Armour  &  Co.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1918,  p.  69;   Propaganda,  vol.  2.  p.  213. 
Redintol   (Johnson  &  Johnson),  The  Journal,  July  28,   1917,  p.  306. 
Refistine    (James    A.    Moore),    The    Journal,    June    27,    1931,    p.    2196 

Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1931,  p.   79. 
Resinol    (Resinol   Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,    Nov.   6,   1909,   p.    1578; 

Propaganda,  vol.  1.  p.  352. 
Resor-Bisnol    (Resor-Bisnol   Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   June    1,    1912 

p.  1706;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1912,  p.  85;  Propaganda,  vol.  1.  p.  353 
Respirazone    (The   Tilden   Company),    The   Journal,   June    14,    1913,   p 

1899. 
Restor  Vin    (Robinson-Pettet   Co.),   The  Journal.   Jan.    3,    1925,   p.    54; 

Reports    Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.   56. 
Rex-Orcin    (Amp   Research   Laboratories),    The  Journal,   July  22,    1933 

p.  281;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   163. 
Rheum-Agar    (Reinschild    Chemical   Co.),    The    Journal,    Nov.    11,    1933 

p.  29;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  29. 
Rheumalgine   (Eli  Lilly   &  Co.).  The  Journal,  June   26,   1915,  p.  2156; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   148;  Propaganda,  vol.  2. 

p.  23. 
Rheumatic   Antigen    No.    38    (Persson)    (Persson    Laboratories),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  62. 
Rheumatic  Bacterin   (Mixed),   (No.  47),  Swans'   (Swan-Myers  Co.),  The 

Journal,   Nov.   6,   1915,  p.    1662;    Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1915,  p.  160, 
Rheumatism   Sero    (California   Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories),  The 

Journal,  July  5.  1924,  p.  58. 
Rheumeez    ((Tasco    Laboratories),    The   Journal,    July    11,    1925,   p.    132; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.   63. 
Rheume    Olum    (Rheumeolum    Chemical   Co.),    The  Journal,    March    17, 

1917,  p.  865;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1917.  p.   19. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  H 

Rhodanate     (Sodium    Thiocyanate),    The    Journal,    August    24,     1935, 

Ricinol-Grape  Tape-Worm  Remedy   (Grape  Capsule  Co.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  174. 
Riken    Vitamin    A    Capsules     (Adsole    Company    of    America),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1927,  p.  48. 
Robes'    Antirheumatic    Injections     (Robes'    Intravenous    Products    Co.), 

The    Journal,    Sept.    12.    1925,    p.    845;    May    29,    1926,    p.    1713; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  52. 
Robinol   (John  Wyeth  &  Bro.),  The  Journal,  July  6.  1914,  p.  49;  Sept. 

30,    1916,   p.    1034;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1916,   p.    34; 

Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.  353;  Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  95. 
Robinson's  Lime  Juice  and   Pepsin    (Robinson-Pettet  Co.,   Inc.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930.  p.  62. 
Rossium  (Medico  Chem.  Corp.  of  America),  The  Journal,  September  7, 

1935.  p.   799;    Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1935,  p.   98. 
Russell    Emulsion    (The    Standard    Emulsion    Co.),    The    Journal,    June 

23,   1917,  p.   1931;   Feb.  9,   1924,  p.  489;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem.,  1917,  p.  29;  Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.   134. 
Russell    Prepared     Green     Bone     (The     Standard     Emulsion    Co.),    The 

Journal,    June    23,    1917,    p.    1931;    Feb.    9,    1924,    p.    489;    Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1917,   p.    29;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.    134. 

Sal-Codeia,   Bell    (Bell    &   Co^),   The  Journal,    Nov.    4,    1905,   p.    1422; 

Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.  357. 
Sal    Hepatica    (Bristol-Meyers    Co.),    The   Journal,    March    26,    1910,    p. 

1071;   Feb.   7,   1914.  p.   427;   April   12,   1919,  p.    1078;   Oct.  29,   1921, 

p.    1438;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1914,    p.    7;    Reports 

Chem.    Lab.,    1921,    p.   41;    Propaganda,   ed.    9,    p.    179;    Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.    451. 
Sal    Hyl    (New    York    Salesthyl    Corporation),    The   Journal,    Feb.    20, 

1915,  p.  684;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1915,  p.   134. 
Salacetin    (Bell   &  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  3,    1905,   p.    1791;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1905-8,   p.  8;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   152. 
Salesthyl    (New    York    Salesthyl    Corporation),    The    Journal,    Feb.    20, 

1915,  p.  684;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  134. 
Salicidol   (H.  A.  Metz  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.   5,    1925, 

p.    764;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.   10. 
Salicionyl   (Upjohn  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  20,   1933,  p.    1597;   Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1933,   p.    31. 
Salicylic  Acid,  "Natural,"  The  Journal,  Sept.  20,  1913,  p.  979;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1913,  p.  23. 
Salicyl-IsajDOgen    (H.   Seufert),   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1928, 

p.   34. 
Saligenin,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  53. 
Saline-Merammo    (National    Medical    Research    Laboratories),    The  Jour- 
nal, Dec.  22,  1923,  p.  2123;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1923, 

p.  29. 
Saliodin,   (Saliodin  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  26,  1907,  p.  1453; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  p.   95;  Propaganda,  ed.  9, 

p.  249. 
Salit    (Hej'den   Chemical  Works),   The  Journal,  June  5,   1909,  p.   1852; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1909,  p.  106. 
Saloform   (Robinson-Pettet  Company),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1916,  p.    71;   Reports   Chem.  Lab.,   1916,   p.   36;    Propaganda,  vol.   2, 
p.    110. 

Salv-Absorbs    (Bio-Chemic   Laboratories),   The  Journal,    Feb.    25,    1922, 

p.   603;    March   15,    1924,   p.   888. 
Salvarols    (Drug  Products  Co.),   The  Journal,  July  26,    1924,  p.   289. 
Sanajel   (Evons  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Sept.  23,  1933,  p.  1020. 
Sanarthrit     (Eastbrook.    Inc.),    The    Journal,    Feb.    11,     1928,    p.    463; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,  p.  54. 
Sanatogen  (Bauer  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  20,  1912,  p.  1216; 

Dec.    6,    1913,    p.    2085;    March    28,    1914,    p.    1035;    Sept.    26,    1914, 

p.    1127;    Reports  Chem.   Lab.,   1912,    p.   71;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  pp. 

358,  378,  385. 
Sanguiodin  (I-O-Dine  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Feb.  20,  1932,  p.  639; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  60. 


Hi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Sanizone    (Ho-Mo-Sol)    (Sanox   Co.),   The  Journal,   August   24,    1935, 

p.   599. 
Sanmetto    (The  Old  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  8,   1905,  p.  116; 
March    13,    1915,    p.    926;    Reports    Council   Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915, 
p.   17;   Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.   182. 
Sanocrysin,  The  Journal,  Dec.   13,  1924,  p.  1928;  Feb.  13,  1926,  p.  487. 
Sanol   (Expurgo   Mfg.   Co.) — See  Expurgo  Anti-Diabetes. 
Santa]  Midy  Capsules  (E.  Fougera  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  9,  1920, 

p.   1016. 
Santoperonin,  The  Journal,  Dec.  15,  1923,  p.  2055. 
Saphanol    Aromatic    (Saphanol   Products   Co.),    Reports   Council   Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1921,  p.  66. 
Saphanol  Concentrate   (Saphanol  Products  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1921,  p.  66. 
Sauberman  Radium  Emanation  Activator  (Radium  Limited),  The  Jour- 
nal, April  6,  1929,  p.  1181;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929, 
p.  36. 
Scopolamin-Morphin  Mixtures,  The  Journal,  Feb.  5,  1910,  p.  446;  Feb. 
12,  1910,  p.  516;  June  7,  1913,  p.  1814;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,  1910,  p.  11. 

Scott's  Cod  Liver  Oil  Concentrate  Tablets  (Scott  &  Bowne),  The  Jour- 
nal, June  22,   1935,  p.  2256. 

Scott's  Emulsion  (formerly  Scott's  Emulsion  of  Cod  Liver  Oil)  (Scott 
&  Bowne),  The  Journal,  June  22,  1935,  p.  2256;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1935,  p.   103. 

Scott's  Emulsion  of  Cod  Liver  Oil  (Scott's  Emulsion)  (Scott  &  Bowne), 
The  Journal,  June  22,  1935,  p.  2256. 

Secacornin  (Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  May  4,  1929,  p. 
1521;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  26. 

Secretin-Beveridge  (James  Wallace  Beveridge),  The  Journal,  Jan.  12, 
1918,  p.  116;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  120;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  170. 

Secretogen  Elixir  (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  1,  1913, 
p.  1649;  May  1,  1915,  p.  1518;  Sept.  9,  1916.  p.  828;  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  46;  1916,  p.  72;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 
p.   185;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.   75,   110. 

Secretogen  Tablets  (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  1,  1913, 
p.  1649;  May  1,  1915,  p.  1518;  Jan.  15,  1916,  pp.  178,  208;  Sept.  9, 
1916,  p.  828;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  pp.  46,  96, 
99;   1916.  p.  72;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.   185. 

Sedobrol  "Roche"  (Hoffmann-LaRoche  Chemical  Works),  The  Journal, 
Jan.  2,  1915,  p.  71;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.   134. 

Sedormid  (Hoffmann-LaRoche,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  March  26,  1932, 
p.   1104. 

Seleni-Bascca  (Cosmopolitan  Cancer  Research  Society),  The  Journal, 
Nov.  19,  1921,  p.  1672;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1921,  p.  55;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  416. 

Semprolin    (W.   Browning  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  10,   1915,  p.    175. 

Seng  (Sultan  Drug  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  42; 
1915,  p.  129;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  55. 

Sepsis  Bacterin  No.  40  (Persson)  (Persson  Laboratories),  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1922,  p.  62. 

Serenium   (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  May  31,  1930,  p.   1783. 

Serosaline   (Davis-Johnson  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  31,   1928,  p.  1064. 

Serum  Vaccine,  Bruschettini  (R.  G.  Berlingieri),  The  Journal,  Nov. 
21,   1914,   p.   1870;   Reports  Council    Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1914,   p.    127. 

Servex  (Burnham  Snow  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  4,  1933,  p. 
360. 

Sextonol  Tablets  (Schering  &  Glatz,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  30,  1916, 
p.  1033;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  34;  Propaganda, 
vol.  2.  p.  94. 

Seven-Bark,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  45. 

Sevetol  (John  Wyeth  &  Bro.),  The  Journal,  July  6,  1914,  p.  49;  Propa- 
ganda, ed.  9,  p.  353. 

Shadocol  (Davies,  Rose  &  Co.,  Ltd.),  The  Journal,  March  16,  1935, 
p.  922;  Nov.  2,  1933,  p.  1430;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1935,  p.  104;  p.  106. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  liii 

Sherman's  Mixed   Vaccine   No.    40. — See   Mixed  Vaccine   No.   40,   Sher- 
man's. 
Shotgun    Vitamin    Therapy,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1935, 

p.    106. 
Simaruba-Agar  (Reinschlld  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  12,  1932, 

p.   1690;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  57. 
Sinkina    (Metropolitan    Pharmacal    Co.),    The   Journal,    Sept.    27,    1913, 

p.  1056;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1913,  p.  24;  Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.  188. 
Sirolin   (Sirolin   Co.),  The  Journal,  June  21,   1913,  p.   1974. 
Snake   Venom   Solution    Moccasin    (Lederle),   Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,    1935,   p.   112. 
Soamin  Tabloid    (Burroughs  Wellcome  &   Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1919,  p.  89;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  253. 
Sodiphene    (Sodiphene   Company),   The  Journal,   Aug.   3,    1929,  p.   381; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1929,   p.   47. 
Sodium  Arsphenamine,  The  Journal,  July  6,  1935,  p.  33;  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem..  1935,  p.  116. 
Sodium    Cacodylate,    Ampules    7j^    grains    (0.5    Gm.),    ISJ^    grains    (1.0 

Gm.)   for  Intravenous  Use  (Cheplin  Biological  Lab's),  The  Journal, 

Dec.    23,    1933,    p.    2050;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933, 

p.   13. 
Sodium  Cacodylate  for  Intravenous  Use,  Ampoules-P.   D.  &  Co.    (Parke, 

Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  7,  1932,  p.  1654;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.   7. 
Sodium    Carbonate    and    Sodium    Chloride    Mixture    for    making    Fisher's 

Hypertonic  Alkaline  Solution  (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  147. 
Sodium    Diarsenol    (Diarsenol    Co.,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    July    6,    1935, 

p.  33;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1935,  p.   116. 
Sodium  Dioxide  Dental-R.  &  H.,  The  Journal,  April  22,  1933,  p.  1237; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933,  p.  29. 
Sodium  Glycerophosphate,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  52; 

Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  99. 
Sodium   Methylarsenate   Ampules-De   Marsico    (De    Marsico   Laboratories, 

Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.   54. 
Sodium  Morrhuate,  The  Journal,  March  8,  1924,  p.  813;  Sept.  27,  1924, 

p.   1022. 
Sodium  Nitroprusside,  The  Journal,  May  5,   1934,   p.  1517. 
Sodium    Peroxide-R.    &    H.,    The    Journal,    April    22,    1933,    p.     1237; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.   29. 
Sodium    Salicylate,    "Natural,"    The   Journal,    Sept.    20,    1913,    p.    979; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1913,   p.  23. 
Sodium    Thiocyanate    (Rhodanate),    The  Journal,   July   2,    1932,   p.    58; 

July  28,   1933,  p.    1237. 
Sodium  Thiocyanate  (Rhodanate),  The  Journal,  August  24,  1935,  p.  618. 
Soluble  Iodine,  Burnham's  (Burnham  Soluble  Iodine  Co.),  The  Journal, 

July  1,   1933,  p.  33;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  26. 
Solution  Hypophosphites  of  Lime  and   Soda,  Schlotterbeck's    (Liq.  Hypo- 

phosphitum,    Schlotterbeck's),     (Schlotterbeck    and    Foss    Co.),    The 

Journal,   Sept.   2,    1916,   p.    761;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1916,  p.  14;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  83. 
Solution   Normet   "Medical"   and   "Surgical"    (High   Chemical   Co.),   The 

Journal,   Oct.    17,    1931,   p.    1149;   Jan.    30,    1932,   p.   401;   July   22, 

1933,   p.   281;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1931,  p.  86;    1932, 

p.  66;   1933,  p.   164. 
Solution  of  Post  Pituitary  (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1925,  p.  19. 
Solution  Pituitary  Extract   Surgical-Mulford    (H.   K.    Mulford  Co.),  The 

Journal,  Aug.    17,   1929,   p.   524;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1929,  p.  39. 
Solvo-Aspirin    (Ess  &  Arch   Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.   21,    1928,  p.  205; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1927,  p.   50. 
Solvochin    (Spicer  &  Co.),  The  Journal,   May  2,   1931,  p.   1577;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1931,   p.   88. 
Somnacetin    (Reidar   G.    Seel),   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1923, 

p.  63. 


liv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Somnacetin  Soluble  (Reidar  G.  Seel),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1923,  p.  63. 
Somnoform    (Stratford-Cookson   Co.).   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem., 

1919,  p.  90;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  255. 
Somnos    (H.   K.   Mulford   Co.),   The  Journal,   Sept.    15,    1906,   pp.   863, 

872;    Sept.    29,    1906,    p.    1033;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1905-8,  p.   12;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   193. 
Sourwood,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  45. 
Sourwood   Compound,  Elixir    (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,   p.  45. 
Spasmolysin    (H.    H.    Beisner),    The   Journal,    June   30,    1934,   p.    2184; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.   &  Chem..    1934,   p.   24. 
Special   Pertussis   Vaccine    (Cutter   Laboratory),   The  Journal,   Feb.   21, 

1931,  p.  613;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   54. 
Spermin,  Poehl   (Prof.  Dr.  v.  Poehl  &  Soehne),  The  Journal,  April  15, 

1911,  p.   1132;  Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.  395. 
Spin-L-Ron    (Ford   Pharmacal   Co.),   The   Journal,   March    14,    1931,    p. 

860;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1931,  p.   85. 
Spirocide    (The   Spirocide   Corp.),    The  Journal,   Jan.   22,    1921,   p.   259; 

July    30,    1921,    p.    394;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,    1920,    p.    58;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1920,  p.  46;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  296. 
Spleen   Solution    (Rovin)    (A.   M.   Rovin   Lab's),  The  Journal,   Feb.  25, 

1933,  p.  574;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933,  p.  166. 
Spleen   Solution,    500%    (Rovin),    (A.    M.    Rovin   Lab's),    The   Journal, 

Feb.    25,    1933,    p.    574;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933, 

p.  166. 
Squaw-Vine,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  45. 
Squaw-Vine  and  Black-Haw  Compound,  Elixir   (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1912,   p.   46. 
Squibb  Adex  Tablets   (E.  R.   Squibb  &   Sons),  The  Journal,  March   19, 

1932,  p.  983;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1932,  p.    69;    1934, 
p.    122. 

Stannoxyl    (E.   Fougera   &   Co.),   The  Journal,   March   6,   1920,   p.   692; 

Propaganda,   vol.   2,   p.   469. 
Stanolind    Liquid    Paraffin     (Standard    Oil    Company    of    Ind.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1918.  p.  72;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  214. 
Staph-Acne    Vaccine    (Cutter    Laboratory),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,    1925,  p.   8. 
Steere's   Elixir   Aspirin    Compound    (American    Laboratories,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,   May   1,    1926,   p.    1713;    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1926,  p.   55. 
Steere's  Elixir  Ammonium  Salicylate  (American  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The 

Journal,   May   1,    1926,   p.    1/'13;   Reports   Council    Pharm.   &   Chem., 

1926,  p.   55. 
Ster-Alco    (Dawson    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1926.  p.  57. 
Sterile    Solution    Iron    Citrate    (Green)     (Intra    Products    Co.),    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1922,  p.   53. 
Sterile  Solution  Mercury  Bichlorid    (Intra  Products   Co.),   Reports  Coun- 
cil  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1922.    p.    53. 
Sterile  Solution  of  Lutein-H.  W.  &  D.    (Hynson,   Westcott  &  Dunning), 

The   Journal,    Jan.    30,    1932,    p.    402;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1932,  p.   55. 
Sterility  of  Ampule  Preparations,  Report  on,  Reports  of  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,    1935,  p.   111. 
Ster-Tabs   (J.  Sklar  Mfg.   Co.).  The  Journal,  Dec.  21,   1929,  p.  1993. 
Stillingia    Compound,    Elixir    (Hance    Bros.    &    White),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,   p.   47. 
Stillingia  Compound,  Elixir  (Ray  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem..   1912,   p.   47. 
Stillingia  Compound.  Elixir  (Smith,  Kline  &  French  Co.),  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  47. 
Stillingia  Compound,   Fluidextract    (H.   K.  Mulford  Co.),   Reports    Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1912.  p.  42. 
Stone  Root.  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912.  p.  46. 
Stovaine    (George    J.    Wallau,    Inc.),    Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1928,  p.  57. 
Street  Dust  Allergen-Squibb  (E.  R.  Squibb  &  Sons),  The  Journal,  Nov. 

7,   1925,  p.  1504;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  27. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  Iv 

Streptococcus  Immunogen  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept  17, 

1927,  p.  984;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  37. 
Streptococcus   Immunogen   Combined    (Parke,   Davis   &   Co.).   The  Jour- 
nal, Sept.  17,  1927,  p.  984;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927, 

p.  37. 
Streptococcus-Rheumaticus-Combined-Bacterin   (The  Abbott  Laboratories), 

The  Journal,   June   22.    1918,   p.    1967;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,  1918,  p.  11;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   186. 
Streptococcus    Vaccine,    The   Journal,    Jan.    23,    1926,    p.    294;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  70. 
Streptococcus-Viridans-Combined-Bacterin      (The     Abbott     Laboratories), 

The  Journal,   June   22,    1918.   p.    1967;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1918,  p.    11;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   186. 
Streptocoll    (The   Soshokee  Co.),   The  Journal,   Sept.   19,   1931,   p.  853; 

Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1931,    p.    89. 
Strepto.  Staph.  Vaccine  No.  10  (G.  H.  Sherman),  The  Journal,  Oct.  11, 

1924,  p.    1184;    Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1924,  p.   57. 
Stronger  Thorium    Sodium    Citrate   Solution,    Reports   Council   Pharm.   & 

Chem.,   1927.  p.   96. 
Strychnin    Arsenate,    The    Journal,    Sept.    24,    1910,    p.    1128;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1910,   p.   74. 
Stypticin,  The  Journal,  Nov.  22,  1919,  p.  1628;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1919,   p.  48;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   240. 
Styptol    (E.   Bilhuber),   The  Journ.\l,   Nov.   22,    1919,   p.    1628;   Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1919,   p.    48;    Propaganda,   vol.   2,  p.   240. 
Stypsticks     (Tappan    Zee    Surgical    (To.),    The   Journal,    May    19,    1934, 

p.    1681;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1934,   p.   68. 
Styptysate  (Ernst  Bischoff  Co.,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  11,  1922,  p.  450. 
Subenon    (Seydel    Chem.    Co.),    The   Journal,    Sept.    12,    1936,    p.    878; 

Sept.   26,   1936,  p.    1056. 
Subidin    (I-O-Dine   Laboratories),  The  Journal,   Feb.   20,   1932,   p.   639; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem,,   1932,  p.   60. 
Succinolac    (Succinolac    Company),    Reports    Council    Pharm,    &    Chem., 

1916,  p.  79. 
Succus   Alterans    (Eli    Lilly   &   Co.),   The   Journal,   June   26,    1909,    p. 

2115;   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1909,  p.    107;    Propaganda, 

vol.   1,  p,   195. 
Succus  Cineraria   Maritima- Walker    (Walker   Pharmacal   Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Nov.  11,   1911,  p.  1630;  March  17.  1917,  p.  864;  Dec.  20,  1924, 

p.  2040;  Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem.,  1911,  p.  48;  Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.  50;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  455. 
Sukro-Serum    (Anglo-French   Drug  Co.),    The  Journal,  Aug.   21,   1920, 

p.   556;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1920,  p.  23;  Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.  273. 
Sulfuryl   Monal    (Geo.  J.   Wallau,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   Sept.    16,    1916, 

p.    895;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1916,    p.    22;    Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,  1916,  p.  23;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  86. 
Sulcitacium    (Davis-Johnson   Co.),   The  Journal,   July   10,    1926,    p.    116; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  58. 
Sulfobetin    (Alex    Friedman    &    Co.),    The   Journal,    June    13,    p.    2036; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1931,   p.   90. 
Sulphocol    (American    Chemical    Laboratories),    The    Journal,    Aug.    23, 

1930,   p.   594;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1930,  p.   72. 
Sulphocol  Sol  (American  Chemical  Laboratories),  The  Journal,  Aug.  16, 

1930,  p.  935;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.   72. 
Sulpho-Ichthyolate      of     Ammonium      (American      Ichthyol)      (American 

Ichthyol  Syndicate),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  74. 
Slupho-Lythin    (Laine    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    Dec.    8,    1906,    p. 

1930;  Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  p.   34;  Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.   196. 
Sulpho-Selene   (C.  H.  Walker),  The  Journal,   April   17,   1915,  p.   1283; 

Dec.    16,   1915,   p.    1864;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p. 

28;    1916,  p.  80;   Reports  Chem.  Lab..   1921,  p.   56. 
Super  D  Cod  Liver  Oil    (Upjohn  Co.).  The  Journal,   May  20,    1933,  p. 

1597;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1933,  p.  31. 
Suprarenal  Cortex  Solution  (Rovin)    (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal, 

Feb.   25,    1933,    p.    574;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem,,    1933,   p. 
166, 


Ivi  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Suprarenal  Gland  Solution  (Rovin)   (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal, 

Feb.    25,    1933,    p.    574;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1933, 

p.   166. 
Supsalvs    (Anglo-French    Drug    Co.),    The   Journal,    Oct,    30,    1920,    p. 

1219;    March    15,    1924,    p.    888;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &    Chem., 

1920,  p.   25;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  274. 
Surgodine    (Sharpe   &    Dohme),    The   Journal,    Jan.    26,    1918,   p.    257; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  134;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1917,  p.  59;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  180. 

Synephrin   Tartrate    (Frederick  Stearns  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1934,  p.   124. 
Synthalin,  The  Journal,  Jan.  21,   1928,  p.  209;  March  4,  1933,  p.  687. 
Syphilodol    (French    Medicinal   Company,   Inc.),  The  Journal,   May   18, 

1918,  p.  1485;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.  359,  470. 

Syrup  of  Ammonium  Hypophosphite,  Gardner's  (R.  W.  Gardner), 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  55;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.   100. 

Syrup  Cocillana  Compound  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  March 
18,  1911,  p.  834;  Feb.  15,  1913,  p.  537;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 
Chem.,   1912,  p.  43;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  396. 

Syrup  Emetic-Lilly  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1918,  p.   52;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  203. 

Syrup  of  Hydriodic  Acid,  (Gardner's  (R.  W.  Gardner),  The  Journal, 
Nov.  14,  1908,  p.  1712;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8, 
p.   200;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,   p.   97. 

Syrup  of  the  Hypophosphites  Comp.  (Lime  and  Soda),  McArthur's 
(McArthur  Hypophosphite  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  2,  1916,  p.  761; 
Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  16;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p,  84, 

Syrup  Leptinol  (Balsamea  Co,),  The  Journal,  June  5,  1920,  p,  1591; 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1920,  p.  15;  Propaganda,  vol.  2, 
p.  268. 

Syrup  of  Malt  Williams'  (American  Malt  Extract  Co.),  The  Journal, 
Sept.  4,  1915,  p,  895;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  155. 

Syrupus  Roborans  (Syrup  Hypophosphites  Comp.  with  Quinin,  Strych- 
nin and  Manganese)  (Arthur  Peter  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  2, 
1916,  p.  760;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1916,  p.  14;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.  2,  p.  82. 

Tabellae  Dukes  Heroin  (Western)  (Western  Chemical  Co.,  Inc.), 
Reports  Council    Pharm,   &  Chem,,    1925,   p.    71, 

Tabellae  Dukes  Terpin  Hydrate  with  Heroin  (Western)  (Western  Chem- 
ical Co,),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  71. 

Tabes  Sero  (California  Endocrine  Foundation  Laboratories),  The  Jour- 
nal, July  5,  1924,  p.  58. 

Tablets  Cakreose  with  Iodine  (Maltbie  Chemical  CoO,  The  Journal, 
Jan.  31,   1925,  p,  288;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  71, 

Tablets  Cascara  Comp,  (Killgore's)  (Chas.  Killgore),  The  Journal, 
March  8,  1924,  p.  812;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  46. 

Tablets  Formothalates  (Tailby-Nason  Company),  Reports  Council  Pharm, 
&  Chem,,  1919,  p.  92;  Propaganda,  vol,  2,  p,  256. 

Tablets  Kacyan  McNeil,  The  Journal,  June  L  1929,  p,  1838;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1929,   p.   58. 

Tablets  of  Benzyl  Succinate-H,  W,  &  D.,  The  Journal,  March  4,  1933, 
p,   661;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  22, 

Tablets  Parathyroids  with  Calcium  (Armour  &  Co.),  Reports  Council 
Pharm,  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.   60. 

Tablogestin   (F,  H.  Strong  Co,),  The  Journal,   Dec.   11,   1915,  p.  2108, 

"Tabknoll"  (H.  G,  Knoll  &  Co,),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1930,  p.  79. 

Taka-Diastase  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  11,  1908,  p. 
140;  July  6,  1912,  p.  50;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8, 
p.   110;   1912,  p.   14;  Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.  62, 

Taka-Diastase,  Liquid  (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  11, 
1908,  p.  140;  July  6,  1912,  p.  50;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem,, 
1905-8,  p.   110;   1912,  p.   14;  Propaganda,  vol,   1,  p,  62. 

Tamerci  Salts  (Banfi  Products  Corp,),  The  Journal,  July  27,  1929,  p. 
283;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem,,   1929,  p.    48. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  Ivii 

Tannin  Agar  (Reinschild  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  12,  1932, 
p.  1690;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932,  p.  57. 

Tannyl   (Charles  Goslar),  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1912,  p.   108. 

Tar-Me-Cine  (Tar-Me-Cine  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  2, 
1932,  p.  34;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1932,  p.  77. 

Tartarlithine  (Tartarlithine  Co.,  McKesson  &  Robbins),  The  Journal, 
April   13,   1907,  p.    1284;   Propaganda,  vol.   1.  p.  401. 

Taurocol    Tablets    (Paul    Plessner    Company),    The    Journal,    April    24, 

1915,  p.  1441;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  143;  Prop- 
aganda, ed.  9,  p.   198. 

Taurocol    Compound    Tablets    (Paul    Plessner    Company),    The    Journal, 

April    24,    1915,    p.    1441;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915, 

p.    143;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.   198. 
Tekarkin    (National    Bio-Chemical    Laboratory),    The   Journal,    May   28, 

1921,   p.    1514;    Nov.    19,    1921.   p.    1675;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  458. 
Telatuten  (Eastbrook,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  11,  1928,  p.  464;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,  p.  54. 
Terpezone  (Knox  Terpezone  Co.).  The  Journal,  April  14,  1928,  p.  1197; 

Reports   Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1928,   p.    59. 
Terpin    Hydrate   with   Codein   Sulphate,   Elixir,   The  Journal,   April   15, 

1916,  p.   1199. 

Terraline  with  Agar  Agar   (Hillside  Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   May 

30.    1925,  p.   1682. 
Tersul  Hiller   (Robert  Wolheim).   The  Journal,  May  24,  1924,  p.  1712; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1924,  p.   62. 
Testacoids   (Reed  and  Carnrick),  The  Journal.  Feb.   5,  1927.  p.  422. 
Tetradol    (National  Aniline  &  Chemical  Co.)^  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 

Chem..   1926,  p.  60. 
Tetraiodophthalein     Sodium-"Nationar'     (National     Aniline     &     Chemical 

Co.),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1926,   p.   60. 
Thalosen    (The    Abbott   Laboratories),   The  Journal,   April   30,    1910,   p. 

1458;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  344. 
Thermozine    (Pasteur    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    May    19,    1917,    p. 

1497;   Propaganda,   vol.   2,  pp.   332,   334. 
Thialion    (Vass    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    3.    1906,    p.    1500; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1905-8,  p.  26;  Propaganda,  vol.   1, 

p.  205;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  470. 
Thio-Albin    (Thiophene  Laboratories,   Inc.).  The  Journal,   May  6,   1933, 

p.    1404;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1933.  p.   170. 
Thioform   (Otto  Hann   &  Bro.).  Reports  Chem.,  Lab.,  to   1909,  p.   79. 
Thioglycerol   Solution  1:50    (Abbott),   Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.. 

1935,  p.   119. 
Thiosinamine,  Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.    173. 
Thorium    Sodium    Citrate    Solution,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1927,  p.  96. 
Thorium    Solution    for    Cystography-H.    W.    &    D.    (Hynson,    Westcott   & 

Dunning),   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1927,  p.   96. 
Thorium    Solutic^    for    Pyelography-H.    W.    &    D.    (Hynson,    Westcott    & 

Dunning),    Reports   Council    Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1927,   p.   42. 
Thoxos    (John  Wyeth   &   Bro.),  The  Journal,   March   21,    1914,   p.   949; 

Reports  Chem.   Lab.,   1914,  p.   41;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.  402. 
Three    Bromides    Eflfervescent    "Knoll    Brand"     (H.    G.    Knoll    &    Co.), 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1930,   p.   79. 
Three   Chlorides   (Henry),    (Henry   Pharmacal   Co.),   The  Journal,   Feb. 

6,    1915,    p.    528;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915,    p.    9; 

Reports   Chem.  Lab.,   1914,  p.   65;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   198. 
Thromboplastin-Lederle     (for    Hypodermic    Injection)     (Lederle    Labora- 
tories,  Inc.),   The  Journal,   Jan.   9,   1932,   p.    143;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &   Chem..   1932,   p.   89. 
Thromboplastin   Hypodermic-Squibb    (E.   R.    Squibb   &   Sons),   The  Jour- 
nal, Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931, 

p.   94. 
Thromboplastin    Solution-Armour    (Armour   &   Co.),    The  Journal,    May 

18.   1935.  p.  1824. 
Thromboplastic  Substances,  The  Journal,  May  18,  1935,  p.  1824;  Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &   Chem..    1935,   p.    120. 
Tbyangol  Pastilles  (Sterling  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  20,  1928, 

p.  1193;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.  641. 


Iviii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Thymo-Borine    (Thymo-Borine    Laboratory),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1926,  p.  67. 
Thymophysin     Temesvary      (American      Biochemical     Laboratory),     The 

Journal,  Jan.  31,  pp.   352,  359;  March  14,  p.  860;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931,  p.  95. 
Thymus  Gland,   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1918,  p.   69. 
Thymus-Gland-Armour,    Desiccated     (Armour    &    Co.),     Reports    Council 

Pharm,    &  Chem.,   1918,  p.  69;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  213. 
Thymus  Solution   (Rovin)    (A.  M.  Rovin  Lab's),  The  Journal,  Feb.  25, 

1933,  p.  574;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1933,  p.   166. 
Thyroid  Solution   (Rovin)    (A.  M.  Rovin   Lab's),  The  Journal,  Feb.  25. 

1933,  p.   574;    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1933,  p.    166. 
Thyroidectin    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),   Reports   Council    Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1918,   p.   50;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  202. 
"Thysul"   (Thysul  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  174. 
Tissue    Phosphates,    Wheeler's    (T.    B.    Wheeler,    M.D.,    Company),    The 

Journal,    May    5,    1917,    p.    1336;    Sept.    22,    1917,    p.    1010;    Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  21;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1917,  p. 

13;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  pp.   129,  463. 
Tolysin    (Calco   Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   April  26,    1924,   p.    1381; 

April    9,    1932,    p.    1322;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1924, 

p.  73. 
Tonga,  The  Journal,  May   10,   1913,   p.   1477;    Reports   Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  46. 
Tonga  Compound,    Elixir    (Hance   Bros.    &   White),   The    Journal,   May 

10,    1913,  p.    1478;   Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,   p.  47. 
Tonga    Compound,    Elixir    (Eli    Lilly    &    Co.),    The    Journal,    May    10, 

1913,   p.    1478;    Reports   Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912.   p.  47. 
Tonga     Compound,     Elixir     (Wm.     S.     Merrell    Chemical     Co.),     Reports 

Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   46. 
Tonga  Compound,  Elixir  (Nelson,  Baker  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May  10, 

1913,  p.    1478;    Reports  Council  Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1912,  p.  46. 
Tonga  Compound,  Elixir   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May   10, 

1913,  p.  1478. 
Tonga  Compound   (Special),  Elixir   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  47. 
Tonga    Compound,   Elixir    (Ray    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    May    10, 

1913,  p.    1478;   Reports  Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,   p.   47. 
Tonga   Compound,    Elixir    (F.    Stearns    &    Co.),    The  Journal,    May    10, 

1913,   p.    1478;    Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   47. 
Tonga  Compound,  Elixir  (Wm.  R.  Warner   &  Co.),  The  Journal,  May 

10,   1913,  p.   1478. 
Tonga-Salicyl  (H.  K.  Wampole  &  Co.).  The  Journal,  May  10,  1913,  p. 

1478;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  47. 
Tonga  Salicylates,  Elixir   (Wm,  S.  Merrell  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal, 

May   10,    1913,  p.   1478, 
Tonga  and  Salicylates,  Elixir  (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal,  May  10, 

1913,  p,  1478;   Reports  Council  Pharm,  &  Chem,,  1912,   p.  47. 
Tongaline    (Mellier   Drug   Co.),   The  Journal,   May    10,    1913,   p.   1477; 

July    17,    1915,    p.    269;    March    2.    1918,    p.    643;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  47;  1915,  p.  58;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  27. 
Tongaline  and  Quinine  Tablets   (Mellier   Drug  Co.),  The  Journal,  July 

17,   1915.  p.   269. 
Tonic  Beef,  S.  &  D.  (Sharp  &  Dohme),  The  Journal,  May  11,   1907,  p. 

1612;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1905-8,  opp.   p.   64;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.  1,  p.  133. 
"Tonikum"-Roche      (Elixir     Arsylen     Compositum-Roche)      (Hoffmann-La 

Roche,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  Jan.   9,    1932,  p.   143;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  90. 
Tonols    (Schering's    Glycerophosphates),    (Schering    &    Glatz,    Inc.),    The 

Journal,  Sept.  30,  1916,  p.  1033;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1916,  p.    34;    Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.  94, 
Tophrin    Tablets    (Bram    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    Jan.    28,    1928, 

p.  293;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1927,  p  97 
Toxicide    (Toxicide  Laboratories),   The   Journal,  Oct.  8,   1921,  p.   1197; 

Reports   Council  Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1921,  p.   68;   Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.  307. 
Toxinol    (Hughes  Chemical    Co.),  The  Journal,  Dec.   2,   1916,  p.   1687; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  39;   1916,  p.  38. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  lix 

Toxivi    (Cutter    Laboratory),    The    Journal,    Oct.    16,    1926,    p.    1321; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,  1926,  p.  68. 
Toxogon   (Von  Winkler  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  2,  1929, 

p.   1393;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1929,  p.  S3. 
Toxok    (Cutter    Laboratory),    The    Journal,    Oct.     16,    1926,    p.    1321; 

Reports  Council  Pharm,   &  Chem.,  1926,  p.  68. 
Transpulmin    (See  Quicamphol). 

Transkutan    (Transkutan,    Inc.),   The   Journal,   June   9,    1928,    p.    1889. 
Treparsol,  The  Journal,  Dec.   7,   1929,   p.   1830. 
Trepol    (Anglo-French    Drug   Co.),   The  Journal,  Jan.   9,    1926,   p.    136; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  C)hera.,   1925,  p.  75;   Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1924-5,  p.  36. 
Tri-Arsenole    (Medical    Supply    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1917,  p.  156;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   163. 
Tricalcine    (Laboratorie  des   "Produits    Scientia"),   The  Journal,  March 

14,   1925,  p.    836;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  78. 
Trichlorethylene,    The   Journal,    Feb.    8,    1936,   p.    485;    Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1936,  p.  99. 
Trifolium   Compound,    Extract    (Wm.    S.    Merrell   Chemical   Co.),   Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  39. 
Trifolium  Compound,  Fluidextract  (Parke,  Davis   &  Co.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Trifolium    Compound,    Syrup    (Hance   Bros.    &    White),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  39. 
Trifolium  Compound,   Syrup    (Eli   Lilly   &  Co.),  Reports   Council  Pharm. 

&   Chem.,    1912,   p.   39. 
Trifolium    Compound,     Syrup     (H.   K.     Mulford    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1912,  p.  39. 
Trifolium    Compound,    Syrup    (Parke,    Davis    &    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,    1912,  p.  39. 
Trifolium  Compound,  Syrup  (Ray  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Trifolium  Compound,  Syrup  (F.  Stearns  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  40. 
Trifolium  Compound  with  Cascara  Syrup   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  40. 
Tri-Iodides    (Henry)     (Henry    Pharmacal    Co.).    The    Journal,    Feb.    6, 

1915,  p.   528;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &   Chem.,   1915,  p.  9;  Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,  1914,  p.  65;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.   198. 
Trilene  Tablets,   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912,    p.   39. 
Trimethol  (Thos.  Leeming  &  Co.).  The  Journal,  Aug.  11,  1917,  p.  485; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1917,   p.  43;    Propaganda,  vol.  2, 

p.   140;  The  Journal,  Oct.  6,  1923,  p.   1224. 
Triophos   (Lehn  &  Fink,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,   1926, 

p.  69;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1924-5,  p.   164. 
Triotonol    Tablets,    The   Journal,    Oct.    6,    1923,    p.    1224,    (Schering    & 

Glatz,  Inc),  The  Journal,  Sept.  30,  1916,  p.   1033;  Reports  Council 
.    Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1916,  p.  34;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  94. 
Triple    Arsenates    with    Nuclein    (Abbott    Laboratories),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1919,  p.   92;    Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   256. 
Tripp's  Liquor  Rheumatica,  The  Journal,  Jan.  31,  1925,  p.  390;  Reports 

Chem.  Lab.,   1924-5,  p.   147. 
Trophonine    (Reed    &    Carnrick   Co.),    The   Journal,    Oct.    5,    1907,    p. 

1198;   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1905-8,  p.  79. 
Trypsogen    (G.  W.  Carnrick  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  1,   1913,  p.  1649; 

July  31,    1926,   p.   345;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  p.   403;   Reports   Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.  21. 
Tryptoferm    (S.   Kirsch  Import   Co.),   Reports  Council  Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1932,  p.  97. 
Tubercle    Bacilli    Emulsion    Polygeneous     (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Re- 
ports Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,   p.   146. 
Tubercle    Bacilli    Triturated    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tubercle   Germs,   Dried   Dead    (Farbwerke-Hoechst   Co.),  Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tubercle  Vaccine,  Sherman's  Non- Virulent   (G.  H.  Sherman),  The  Jour- 
nal, Nov.  21,  1914,  p.  1870;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914, 

p.  128. 


Ix  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Tuberculin,    Bovine    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin,    Bovine,    T.    R.    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin,    "Koch"    New     (T.    R.)     (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports 

Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin    "Koch"     (Old)      (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin  Old,  Bovine  (Farbwerke-Hoechst  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin    Residue    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,  p.    146. 
Tuberculin-Rosenbach    (Kalle    Color    &    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,   p.  161. 
Tuberculin  Test  Plate,  Keller's   (A.  H.  Keller),  The  Journal,  Dec.   19, 

1914,  p.  2250. 

Tuberculin   T.   O.  A.    (Farbwerke-Hoechst   Co.),   Reports   Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin,    Vacuum    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council   Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculin,    Vacuum    Bovine    (Farbwerke-Hoechst    Co.),    Reports    Council 

Pharm,  &  Chem.,  1917,  p^.  146. 
Tuberculoids    (Columbus   Pharmacal   Co.),  The  Journal,   Feb.   22,   1908, 

p.  704. 
Tuberculosis-Diagnostic     "Hoechst"      (Farbwerke-Hoechst     Co.),     Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,    p.   146. 
Tuberculosis-Diagnostic     "Hoechst"     Dry     in    Tubes     (Farbwerke-Hoechst 

Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculosis-Diagnostic    "Hoechst"    (0.1    per    cent)    Solution    (Farbwerke- 
Hoechst  Co.),  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1917,  p.   146. 
Tuberculosis      Serum      Vaccine      "Hoechst"      (Farbwerke-Hoechst      Co.), 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1917,   p.    161. 
Tuberculosis     Treatment     (Spahlinger),     The    Journal,     Oct.     7,     1922, 

p.  1263. 
Tubo-Arg    (Tubo    Pharmacal    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1915,  p.   175. 

Turpedine   (R.   G.  Dunwody  &  Sons),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1931,  p.   92. 
Turkey  Corn,  Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  47. 
Tusi  (Brewer  &  Co.,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1928,  p.  65. 
Tyramine  Hydrochloride,   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1935,  p.  126. 
Tyramine-Roche     (Hoffmann    LaRoche,    Inc.),    The    Journal,    June    24, 

1933,  p.   2009;   Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1933,  p.  175. 

Ulax  Salt   (F.  H.  Strong  Co.),  Reports   Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915, 

p.  175. 
Unctol    (R.  R.   Rogers  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1917,   p.  162;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  166. 
Unguentine    (Norwich   Pharmacal   Co.),   The  Journal,   March  27,    1909, 

p.    1047;   July    17,    1915,   p.   272;   Reports   Chem.   Lab.,    1909,   p.  21; 

Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  254. 
Unguentum  Carbonis  Comp.    (Hilf)    (Hilf  Products  Co.),  The  Journal, 

Nov.  23,  1929,  p.   1646;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  p.  55. 
Unguentum  Selenio  Vanadic   (v.  Roemer)    (A.  von  Roemer),  The  Jour- 
nal, Nov.  21,  1914,  p.  1870;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1014, 

p.    129;    Propaganda,  vol.    1,   207. 
Unicorn    Root,    The    Journal,    Jan.    22,    1910,    p.    304;    Reports    Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1910,  p.   10;   Propaganda,  ed.  9,  p.  208. 
Uranoblen   (A.  Grimme),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p.  176. 
Urasal   (Frank  W.   Horner,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  July  28,  1928,  p.  247; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,    1928,  p.   67. 
Urasol    (Organic    Chemical   Mfg.    Co.),   The  Journal,    Sept.    5,    1908.   p. 

818;   May  8,  1909,  p.  1511;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8, 

p.   166;    1909,  p.  64;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1924-5,  p.   119. 
Uricedin    (Fischer    Chemical    Importing    Co.),    The    Journal,    Nov.    2i, 

1907,  p.  1788;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1909,  p.  20;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.  256. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  Ixi 

Uricsol   (Uricsol  Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   Aug.    14,   1915,  p.  638; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  191S,  p.  149;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1915,  p.  96;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  30. 
Uriseptin  (Gardner-Barada  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  29,  1908, 

p.    77Z;    Reports    Chem.    Lab.,    to    1909,    p.   40;    Propaganda,    vol.    1, 

p.  256. 
Urodonal   (Geo.  J.  Wallau,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.   14,  1915,   p.  639; 

June   17,   1933,  p.    1955;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p. 

153;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  32. 
Uron    (Uron    Chemical    Co.),    The    Journal,    Nov.    3,'   1906,    p.    1500; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8,  p.  26. 
Urotex,   The  Journal,  Feb.   17,   1934,  p.  561. 
Uterine  Sedative,  Elixir  (Eli  Lilly  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug.  31,  1912, 

p.  7il;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,  p.  44;   Propaganda, 

vol.  1,  p.  410. 
Uterine    Tonic,    Buckley     (The    Abbott    Laboratories),    Reports    Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  41. 
Uterine   Tonic,    Girard    (Girard   Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1912,  p.  41. 
Uterine  Tonic   (Parke,  Davis  &  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1912,  p.    46. 
Uterine   Tonic,    Elixir    (F.    Stearns    &    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1912,  p.   46. 
Uterine  Tonic  (Tablet)    (Maltbie  Chemical   Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,  1912,  p.  41. 
Uterine    Wafers,    Naphey's    Medicated,    see    Naphey's    Medicated    Uterine 

Wafers. 
Uterine  Wafers,   Micajah's   (Micajah  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  March  26, 

1910,   p.    1070;    Sept.   25,    1915,   p.    1128;   Reports   Council  Pharm.    & 

Chem.,  1916,   p.  66;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1910,  p.   18;   1915,  p.  100; 

Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  240. 
Utero  Tonic   (Nelson,   Baker   &  Co.),  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1912,  p.   46. 
Utros    (H.   K.    Mulford   Co.),   Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1912, 

p.  46. 

Vaccine,  Friedmann's  (Standard  Distributing  Co.),  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1914,  p.   136. 

Vaccine,  Non-Virulent  Tubercle  Bacillus  (G.  H.  Sherman). — See  Tubercle 
Vaccine,  Sherman's  Non-Virulent. 

Vaccine,  von  Ruck  (Dr.  Karl  von  Ruck),  The  Journal,  Dec.  7,  1935, 
p.  1935. 

Vaccines,  Mixed,  The  Journal,  June  22,  1918,  p.  1967;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1918,  p.  11;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  184.  See  also 
B.  Coli  Combined  Vaccine  (Abbott  Laboratories) ;  Catarrhal  Vaccine 
Combined-Lilly:  Catarrhal  Vaccine  No.  6  (G.  H.  Sherman);  Colon 
Bacillus  Combined  Vaccine  (Modified  Van  Cott)  No.  35  (G.  H. 
Sherman) ;  Erysipelas  Vaccine  No.  1  (G.  H.  Sherman) ;  Friedlander 
Vaccine  No.  36  (G.  H.  Sherman);  Influenza  Mixed  Vaccine-Lilly; 
Influenza  Vaccine  No.  38  (G.  H.  Sherman) ;  Influenza  Serobacterin 
Mixed-Mulford;  Micrococcus  Catarrhalis  Combined  Vaccine  (Abbott 
Laboratories);  Mixed  Staphylococcus  Acne  Vaccine;  Mixed  Vaccine 
No.  40,  Sherman's;  Pertussis  Bacterin  Mixed  (H.  K.  Mulford); 
Pertussis  Combined-Bacterin  (Abbott  Laboratories) ;  Pertussis 
Serobacterin  Mixed-Mulford;  Pneumo.  Mixed  Vaccine  No.  6  (G.  H. 
Sherman);  Staph- Acne  Vaccine  (Cutter  Laboratory);  Streptococ- 
cus-Rheumaticus-Combined  Bacterin  (Abbott  Laboratories) ;  Strep- 
tococcus-Viridans-Combined-Bacterin  (Abbott  Laboratories) ;  Strepto- 
Staph  Vaccine  No,  10  (G.  H.  Sherman);  Whooping  Cough  Mixed 
Vaccine  (G.  H.  Sherman). 

Vaccino  Antigonococcico  Bruschettini  (Pagano  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal, 
April  4,  1931,  p.  1145;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931.  p.  97. 

Vaccino  Antipiogeno  Bruschettini  (Pagano  Drug  Co.),  The  Journal, 
April  4,  1931,  p.  1145;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1931,  p.  97. 

Vacher-Balm  (E.  W.  Vacher,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1922,  p.   61. 

Valamin  (American  Kreuger  and  Toll  Corporation),  The  Journal,  Dec. 
13,  1924,  p.  1941;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924,  p.  75. 

Vanadic  Acid,  The  Journal,  May  9,  1908,  p.  1548;  July  24,  1909,  p.  309. 


Ixii  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Vanadiol  (Vanadium  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  18,  1913,  p.  225; 

Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1913,   p.    7;   Propaganda,  vol.    1, 

p.  209. 
Vanadioseptol    (Vanadium  Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,  Jan.    18,   1913, 

p.    225;    Reports   Council   Pharm.    &   Chem.,    1913,   p.   7;    Propaganda, 

vol.  1,   p.  209. 
Vanadium,  The  Journal,  June  3,   1911,  p.   1648. 
Vanadium    Solution    for    Intravenous    and    Hypodermic    Use    (Vanadium 

Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  18,  1913,  p.  225;  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1913,  p.   7;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  209. 
Vanadoforms    (Vanadium  Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,  Jan.    18,   1913, 

p.   225;   Reports   Council   Pharm.   &   Chem.,   1913,  p.   7;   Propaganda, 

vol.   1,  p.  209. 
Vapo-Cresolene    (Vapo-Cresolene   Co.),   The  Journal,   April   4,    1908,   p. 

1135;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  65;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  408. 
Vasogen   (Lehn   &   Fink),  The  Journal,  Feb.   13,   1909,  p.   575;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.    1,  p.   408. 
Vege  Mucene  (BioVegetin  Products,  Inc.),  The  Journal.  Jan.  25,  1935, 

p.  316;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  125. 
Vege-Sea   (Oakland  Food  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  20,  p.   640; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1932,  p.  96. 
V-E-M  with  Boric  Acid  (Schoonmaker  Laboratories,  Inc.),  Reports  Coun- 
cil Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  163;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.  167. 
V-E-M  with  Camphor  (Schoonmaker  Laboratories,  Inc.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,  p.    163;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   167. 
V-E-M  with  Ichthyol    (Schoonmaker  Laboratories,  Inc.),  Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1917,  p.   163;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.   167. 
V-E-M  with  Stearate  of  Zinc   (Schoonmaker  Laboratories,  Inc.),  Reports 

Council  Pharm.    &  Chem.,    1917,  p.    163;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  p.    1_67. 
V-E-M    Unguentum    Eucalyptol    Compound     (Schoonmaker    Laboratories, 

Inc.),   Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1917,  p.    163;   Propaganda, 

vol.  2,  p.   167. 
Venarsen    (Intravenous  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,   May  22,   1915,   p. 

1780;    March    25,    1916,    p.    978;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &   Chem., 

1915,    p.    52;    Reports   Chem.    Lab.,    1915,   p.    82;    Propaganda,   ed.   9, 

p.  212;   Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   471. 
Vencalxodine   (Intravenous  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.   16,  1918, 

p.  481. 
Venodine   (Intravenous  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  June  26,  1915,  p. 

2155;    March   25,    1916,   p.   278;    Reports   Council   Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1915,  p.   145;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  214. 
Venomer    (Intravenous    Products   Co.),    The   Journal,    March   25,    1916, 

p.  978. 
Venosal   (Intravenous  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  5,   1918,  p.  48; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  118;  Reports  Chem.  Lab., 

1917,  p.   57;   Propaganda,  vol.   2,  pp.    169,  435. 
Veracolate  (Marcy  Co.),  The  Journal,  April  30,  1910,  p.  1458;  Aug.  1, 

1914,    p.    420;    April   24,    1915,   p.    1440;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    & 

Chem.,   1915,  p.    141;   Propaganda,  vol.    1,  pp.  216,  344. 
Veracolate  with   Iron,  Quinine  and  Strychnine    (Marcy  Co.),  The  Jour* 

NAL,  April  24,  1915,  p.  1440;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915, 

p.   141. 
Veracolate    with    Pepsin    and    Pancreatin     (Marcy    Co.),    The    Journal, 

April    24,    1915,    p.    1440;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1915, 

p.   141. 
Veroform  Germicide   (Veroform  Hygienic  Co.),   The  Journal,  Nov.  22, 

1913,  p.  1920;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem..   1913;  p.  29. 
Viburn-Ovaro    (Ray    Chemical    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1912,   p.  46. 
Viburnum  Compound,  Hayden's   (New  York  Pharmacal  Co.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Aug.   31,   1912,  p.   735;   Jan.  23,    1915,  p.   359;   Reports  Council 

Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,   p.  95;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  pp.  218,  409. 
Viburnum  Compound,  Elixir  (Nelson.  Baker  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Aug. 

31,  1912,  p.  735;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  410. 
Viburnum   Compound    (Tablets)    (Parke,   Davis   &  Co.),    Reports   Council 

Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1912,   p.    41. 
Viburnum   Compound    (Tablet)    (Uterine  Tonic),    (Parke,    Davis   &  Co.), 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1912,  p.  46. 


BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX  Ixiii 

Viburnum  Compound    (Tablet),    (Smith,   Kline  &   French   Co.),   Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,   p.  46. 
Viburnum    Sedative    (Fraser    Tablet    Co.),    Reports    Council    Pharm,    & 

Chem.,   1912,  p.  46. 
Viburnumal     (Louisville    Pharmacal    Works),    The    Journal,    Aug.    31, 

1912,  p.  735;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1912,  p.  44;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  p.  410. 
Vibutero    (F.    Stearns    &   Co.),   The   Journal,    Aug.    31,    1912,    p.    735; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1912,  p.   46;   Propaganda,  vol.    1, 

p.  410. 
Vi-Cris    (Vi-Cris,   Inc.),   The  Journal,  June  24,    1933,  p.  2009;   Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1933,  p.    176. 
Vigantol  (Winthrop  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  5,  1929,  p.  1067; 

Feb.  8,  1930,  p.  410;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930,  p.  85. 
Vigoral    (Armour  &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Jan.  23,    1909,  p.    311;   Propa- 
ganda, vol.   1,  472. 
Viking    Palatable    Cod    Liver    Oil    (Viking    Health    Products    Co.),    The 

Journal,  May  4,   1929,  p.    1561;   Reports   Council   Pharm.  &  Chem., 

1929,  p.  57. 
Vin    Mariani    (Mariani    &   Co.),   The  Journal,   Nov.    24,    1906,   p.    1751; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1905-8,  p.  29;  Propaganda,  vol.  1, 

p.  221. 
Viriligen    (G.   W.   Carnrick  Co.),   The  Journal,   Feb.   28,   1925,  p.   695; 

Reports  Council   Pharm.  &   Chem.,    1925,   p.  84. 
Virol  (Etna  Chemical  Co.),  The  Journal,  Feb.  20,  1915,  p.  683;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,   1915,  p.    132;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  225. 
"Vita-Cell"    Preparations    (Godissart    &    Pyles),    The   Journal,    Oct.    27, 

1934,  p.  1309;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1934,  p.  127. 
Vitalait    (Vitalait    Laboratory.    Newton     Centre,    Mass.),    The    Journal, 

Dec.  19,   1925,  p.    1985;  Reports  Council  Pharm.,   1925,  p.  81. 

Vitalait  Culture  Bacillus  Bulgaricus  (Vitalait  Laboratory  of  California), 
The  Journal,  June  4,  1927,  p.  1831;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  & 
Chem.,   1927,  p.  20. 

Vitalait  Starter  (Vitalait  Laboratory.  Newton  Centre,  Mass.),  The  Jour- 
nal, Jan.  23,  1926,  p.  294;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925, 
p.  82. 

Vitalipon  (C.  G.  Crosby),  The  Journal,  July  7,  1928,  p.  29;  Reports 
Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1928,  p.  69. 

Vitamin    A    and    Urinary    Lithiasis,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem., 

1935,  p.   127. 

Vitamin    Therapy,    Shotgun,    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1935, 

p.    106. 
Vitanol    (Daub    Chemical    Co.),    The   Journal,    Nov.    7,    1925,    p.    1504; 

Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.  83. 
Vitaphos   (The  Grain  Chemical  Company,  Inc.),  Reports  Council  Pharm. 

&  Chem.,   1921,  p.  74. 
Vitova    (S.  Kirsch  Import  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1932, 

p.   97. 
Von  Ruck  Vaccine   (Dr.   Karl  von  Ruck),  The  Journal,   Dec.   7,   1935, 

p.  1935. 

Wagner's  Carbonated  Phosphate,    (W.  T.  Wagner's  Sons),  The  Journal, 

May    23,    1925,    p.    1589;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1925, 

p.  67. 
Wagner's  "Em's"  Kraenchen  Water  (W.  T.  Wagner's  Sons),  The  Jour- 
nal, May  23,  1925,  p.  1589;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925, 

p.  66. 
Wagner's  Piperazine  Water  (W.  T.  Wagner's  Sons),  The  Journal,  May 

23,  1925,  p.   1589;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1925,  p.  67. 
Wagner's  Special   "C"    (W.  T.  Wagner's  Sons),  The  Journal,   May  23, 

1925.   p.   1589;  Reports  Council   Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1925,  p.  67. 
Warninks  Advocaat   (Julius  Wile,  Sons  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Nov.  12, 

1927,  p.  1711;  Reports  Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,  1927,  p.  99. 
Water,  Buffalo  Lithia   Springs   (Buffalo  Lithia  Springs  Water  Co.),  The 

Journal,  Sept.  12,  1908,  p.  931. 
Waterbury's     Compound     (Waterbury     Chemical     Co.),     The     Journal, 

March  20,  1915,  p.  1016;   Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1915,  p. 

138;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  57. 


Ixiv  BIBLIOGRAPHICAL    INDEX 

Water,  Eryngo,  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1912,   p.  47. 

Whiteruss  (Lubric  Oil  Co.),  The  Journal,  July  10,  1915,  p.  175. 

White  Sulphur  Salts  (White  Sulphur  Springs,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  Nov. 
21,  1914,  p.  1870;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.   128. 

Whole  Ovary-H.  W.  &  D.  (Hynson,  Westcott  &  Dunning),  The  Jour- 
nal, June  24,  1930,  p.  1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 
p.  54. 

Whole  Ovary-Lederle  (Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The  Journal,  June 
24,  1930,  p.   1997;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1930,  p.  54. 

Whole  Pituitary  Desiccated-Lederle  (Lederle  Laboratories,  Inc.),  The 
Journal,  July  19,  1930,  p.  201;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1930,  p.   54. 

Whooping  Cough  Bacterin  No.  44  (Persson)  (Persson  Laboratories), 
Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1922,  p.  22. 

Whooping  Cough  Mixed  Vaccine  No.  43  (G.  H.  Sherman),  The  Jour- 
nal, Oct.  11,  1924,  p.  1184;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1924, 
p.  58. 

Whooping  Cough  Vaccine  X  Plain  (Cook  Laboratories,  Inc.).  The  Jour- 
nal, Feb.  21,  1931,  p.  613;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1930, 
p.  54. 

Wild  Indigo,  The  Journal,  Jan.  22,  1910,  p.  304;  Reports  Council 
Pharm.  &  Chem.,  p.   19;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  208. 

Wild  Yam,  The  Journal,  Jan.  22,  1910,  p.  304;  Reports  Council  Pharm. 
&  Chem.,   1910,  p.   10;   Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  208. 

Wine,  Chapoteaut's   (E.   Fougera   &   Co.,   Inc.),   The  Journal,   Dec.   19, 

1914,  p.  2247;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1914,  p.  77;  Propa- 
ganda, vol.    1,   p.    60. 

Wine,    Stearns'    (F.   Stearns  &  Co.),  Reports  Council   Pharm.   &  Chem., 

1915,  p.  177. 

Worlds  Wonder  Remedy  (W.  W.  Remedy  Co.,  Superior,  Wis.),  Reports 
Council  Pharm.   &  Chem.,    1918,   p.    82. 

Xanol  (Wm.  S.  Merrell  Chemical  Co.),  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem., 
1911,  p.  64. 

Yadil   (E.  Fougera  &  Co.,   Inc.),  The  Journal,  Aug.   16,   1924,  p.   550; 

Feb.   14,   1925,  p.   520. 
Yeastone  (Merck  &  Co.),  The  Journal,  Sept.  25,  1926,  p.  1055. 
Yeast  Vitamin-Harris  Tablets   (The   Harris  Laboratories),  The  Journal, 

Nov.    2,    1934,    p.    1378;    Reports    Council    Pharm.    &    Chem.,    1934, 

p.   129. 
Yellow    Bone    Marrow    Concentrate     (Armour    &    Co.),    The    Journal, 

August  31,   1935,  p.  667. 
Yogurt   (Yogurt  Co.),  The  Journal,  Jan.  30,  1909,  pp.  372,  379. 
Yohimbin    Spiegel     (Lehn    &    Fink),    The    Journal,    March    30,    1907, 

p.  1127. 

Zemacol    (Norwich    Pharmacal    Co.),    The   Journal,    May    14,    1910,    p. 

1626;  Report  Chem.  Lab.,   1910,  p.  42;  Propaganda,  vol.   1,  p.  259. 
Zinc-Borocyl   (Al-Sano  Chemical  Products  Co.),  The  Journal,   May  24, 

1924,  p.  1712;  Reports  Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,   1924,  p.  77. 
Ziratol  (Bristol-Myers  Co.),  The  Journal,  Oct.  6,  1917,  p.  1191;  Reports 

Council  Pharm.  &  Chem.,  1917,  p.  55;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,   1917,  p. 

51;  Propaganda,  vol.  2,  p.   148. 
Zonite    (Zonite    Products    Co.),    The   Journal,   April    7,    1923,    p.    1024; 

Dec.   7,    1929,  p.    1830. 
Zyme-oid    (Oxychlorin    Chemical   Co.),   The  Journal,   May   23,    1908,   p. 

1706;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  to  1909,  p.  34;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  261; 

Reports  Chem.   Lab.,   1921,  p.  52. 
Zymotoid,    Arnold's    (Zymotoid    Co.),    The    Journal,    April    6,    1912,    p. 

1030;  Reports  Chem.  Lab.,  1912,  p.  68;  Propaganda,  vol.  1,  p.  412.